The URL can be used to link to this page

REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT NO 1 - PLANT EXPANSION - 09-0018-UT LL >_ Clearwater ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT CONSTRUCTION DIVISION OFFICE COMM UNICATION ... _ —..tv —_.. E'I 0J I' OM E I ION � ��Pcec3. 121 I$I '.Iis T1s l i�aa C 17/201-3) I IES C I� R vers Osmosis osis�Plant No. 1 -Concentrate rata Backv ash Pipelines _.-- . .� . "(��tiT1rt."�CTTDI . S.L. NVilli aaaas C 0111 altim Corp..... _.. Attn: Carole l.. Wllllam 242 1-laitton Bush Lille -Wellillgltata l°".I 333414 h _ 561-792-6300 � IN�SI FI CTO®.� r� ...__.. __ .� .�.�.—as�- �..w_-. . � . �m 1 — �. COMMENTS: ... a _ —� _e i _. .. .p..... �.�.__. (TE RTIFIC41V OF PARTIAL SIS'FANTLU, COMPL-FIVION' Projeck —Rcycry Osposis Phing So, Gingnitradd :1nd BaxWonjagh PlUlling Cinimcl Nundw: 09401&4 '1 1AMM: —SS-'l-,k 12 f-0 t and NE, -'oachnian) Da I C or Substand a! C!"np lei ion: 12-1'7 13 Con Ira d Date: 8-23-13 (�nsvu&on Manager: AjoKirn S: QjjyjqK D The murk perAnned untler this Contract has been inspected by WhOrized representatives of dh.,, Owner, Contractor. ami Construc(ion Mourager, sun d die PrJect (or speci Cied part or the Projcct, as Wdiew-ed above) is hereby (h,,clared to be SUL)St3ntir,dly cc tnplend on the Mxwe date. DETINUMN OF SUBS'TAN"HAL 1:',0NIP1,F]TION, Substantial conrpl�,"iiori is delAtted as We swgc in coristmcdon "tM, a pRtem can be tailbal 111- the PLUPOSe Jot- Wj'jjCIj it t\'LJS ifflencled. At subgamhl cOMPROOM to iteins that may he seasonally restricted rwed not be complet"L but die items that anict operational integity and flinction of the WHO must he capable of conbrwous tw, A tentative list of items to be conjActed or corrected is all hercto. This list may no( be exhaustive, mid the Wilure to Oclude art iteni oil it does not alter the responxibility of die OwitractOFS to complete all the work, in accoalance with the Contract Documents. Y: Construction Manager Audwrized Representadve Date lie ('ontractor accepts the C C,erti fica3c of Substantial Conriponon and agwcs to compote a Correct (lie items on the terimtkv by WIN the tune Miami, 13y: Contractor AudwKed Representative Date l Owner accepts the Mytect as Substamially COMPOW and "III aSSUMC f,111 l�C)SSCSiojj ()(_ the spOned aiva of the PnAcct on 12-LT13 , The responsibilitytar utilities, Securit, -""- - - yj and insuranc e tulder "I'lc Contr"'),Ct I,X)kmH,.cnt-, shall be as set J'or(h in the Cornrac[ [)(:)c(.111-1 ents- f3y: (Ty of(lear"awt AuthAzed Reprc."entative QP.. � �'�, 3r v .,1.... Professional Engineers Certifica.tion £ar Gina C. Cashon, P.E. Page l of 3 � ISSUED FOR BID TEC�INICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IV and SECTION Na FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOS�S PLAN'I' No. 1- PLANI' EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-LTT OC°TOBER ZQ12 � The following Issued For Bid Technical Specitiications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1- Plant Expansion pxoject dated Octaber 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. SECTION N — TECFINICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 1 Section 2.1 SecLion 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 5ection 7 Section 8 Section 9 Ser.tion 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Section i4 Section IS Section 17 Section 18 Section i9 Section 21 Sectaon 22 Seciion 25 Section 30 Section 31 Sectlon 36 Scope of Work Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Coutractor Definition of Terms Order and Location of the Work Egcavstion for Underground Work Concrete Egcavation and Forms for Concrete Work Reinforcement Obstructio�s Restoration or Replacement of Driveways, Curbs, Sidews�ks and Street Pavement Work in Easements or Parkways Dewatering Samtary Manholes Back6ll Street Crossings, Etc. Unsuitable Material Removal Underdrains Storm Sewers Drainage Roadway B�se and Subgrade General Planting Specificafions Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways Sodding Street Signs Gina C. Cashon, P.E. `� Date Florida Professional Engineer No. 43$91 CDM Smith Inc. 1715 N Westshare.Blvd � Tampa, Florida 33fin7 T�lephone: (813} 28I 2900 FL COA No. EB-000(1020� Professional Engineers Certification for Gina C. Cashon, P.E. Page 2 of 3 ISSUED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECTFrCATI�NS SECTION IV and SECTION IVa FOR TI� CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLAN'T No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PR�JECT #: 09-0018-iJT OCTOBER 2012 The fallowing Issued For Bid Technical Specif'ications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepazed un.der my direcrion and supervision. Section 37 5ection 38 Section 41 Section 44 Section 55 Sec�on 56 Section 58 Section 62 Section 64 Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas Erosion �nd Siltation Control Pot�ble Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appw�enances Work Zone Traffic Control M�ling Operations Clearing and Grnbb�g Treatment Plant Safety Tree Protection Overhe�d Electric Line Clearance SECTION IVa — SUPPLEMENTAL TEC�INICAL SPECIFICATIONS Division Ol - Diviision 42 — Section 02050 Section 82140 Section 0?.2i}0 Section 02213 Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 022?3 Section 02270 Section 0?311 Section 02576 Sectaon 02bUS Section 02616 Demoliaon �nd Modifications Dewatering and Drainage Earthwork Roctc and Boulder Ezc�vation Struclur�i F.gcavation, Beckt"ill 8z Com�action (a4 appticabte to Groumt Storage Tanks aod Concentrate PS) � 1�enching, Bedding, and B�ckfill for Pipe Ezcavation Below Normal Grade and Bedding Rock Refill 5edimentatiou aud Er�ion Control E�cavation Snpport and Protection Pavement Repair and Restoration Precast and Concrete Manholes and Boxes (Civ� only) Duct�e Iron Piping and �ittings Gina C. Cashon, P.E. � " " Florida Professional Engineer No. 43891 CDM Smith Inc. 1715 N Westshore Blvd Tampa, Flarida 33607 Telephone: (813) 28�-290Q FL COA No. EB-0000{}20 Date � � . Professional F.�aginee�rs Certif'ication for Gina C. Cashon, P.E. Page 3 of 3 � LSSUED FOR BID TEC�INICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTIOAT IV and SECTION Na FOR 'TI� C1TY OF CLEARWATER, FLC}RIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-UT OC'TOBER 2012 The followirfg Issued For Bid Technical Spe�ifications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. f— Plant Expansion project dated �ctaber 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. Section 0262A Double �Vall Chemical Pipe Spstem Section 02622 Polpvinyl Cliloride (PYC� Pepe Section 02640 Valves and Apgwrtenances Section 42901 Miscellaneous Worg and Cleanup Section 02932 Sodding Division 11- Secl�on 11215 Vertical Turbine Concentrate Pumps Section 11216 Hor�zantal End Suction Centrif�gal Pump(s) Blend Water Pumps Divisioa 13 - � Section 13205 Wire Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Tanks (�v;l/Mecnanica� onty) Division 15 — Section 15062 Ductile ItoII Pipe and Ffttirlgs (as applicable to Gronnd Storage Tanks and Conc�ntrate PS) Section 15064 Plastic Pipe and Fittings (as applicabfe to Concentrafe PS onty) Se�Hon 15100 Valves and Apput te�t�tnce (as applicable to AW, ARV, SR and Coucentrate PS on�v) Gina C. Cashon, P.E: ` Date Florida Professional Engineer No. 43891 CDM Smith Inc. 1715 N Westshore Blvd � Tampa, Florida 33607 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 Professional Engineers Certification for Craig C. Montgomery, P.E. Page 1 of 2 ISSUED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IV and SECTION Na FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMQSIS PLANT No. 1- PLANT EXPANSTON PROJECT #: (}9-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The following Issued For Bid Technical Speci�cations for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1- Plant Expansion project dated October 2d12 were prepazed under my direction and supervision. SECTION IVa - SUPPLEMENTAL TECHMCAL SPECIFICATION� Division 02 — Section 02140 Dewatering and Drs�inage {as applicable to all Slabs on Grade) Section 02220 Structural Excav�tion, Backfill & Compaction (as �pplicable to all Slabs on Grade) Division 11- Section 11204 Adsorption �lter System Section 11212 HSC Membrane Feed Pump(s) Section 11213 Horizontal End Suction Centrifngal Pump(s) C.I.P. Pumps Section 11214 Horizontal End Suct�on Centrifugal Pump(s} Backwash Recycle Pumps Raw Water Booster Section 11240 Cartridge �lters Section 11247 Liquid Pdymer System Section 11277 Membrane Elements and Manufacturer's Services Section 11278 Membrane System Performance Warranty Section 11315 Progressive Cavity Pump Section 11342 Steel Storage Tanlzs Division 13 - Section 13025 Membrane System Equipment Section 13123 Pre-Engineered Weather Canopy (Mechan;cal outy) Section 13521 I+;�t��i,��lacement e��g�� o��o.� ✓/�,, �`�9o.'l.t�'�AI`i1t'��`f'�"i sa� � Q t'� d �.� .a ,i��i � ', �,� ! � , �:::�;�3 � � "" ' ' � ... . � /D-�-?1��2 : �. _ , Craig C. Moritgo �'��.F�{"'� �-��' ; � � Date Florida Profession :� ��',�,� g4 � '�� a�� --�•. ��- �. CDM Smith Inc• �'��0�/,/��11��``�`a 1715 N Westshore BIvd Tampa, Florida. 33607 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 • • � Professional Engineers Certi�cation for Craig C. Montgomery, P.E. Page 2 of 2 • ISSUED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION N and SECTION Na FOR TI� CTTY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSTS PLANT No. 1- PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The following Issued For Bid Technical Specifcations for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1- Ptant Expansion project dated October 20I2 were prepared under my direction and supervision. Division 15 — Section 15062 Duct�e Iron Pipe and F�ttings (excluding Ground Storage'rank and Concenttate PS) Section 15064 Plastic Pipe and Fit�ngs (excluding conceutrate PS) Section 15066 Stainless Steel Pipe and �ttings Section 15094 Pipe Hangers and Supports Section 15100 Valves and Appurtenances (exc�ading Aw, �xv, SR, and Concentrate PS) L J �00��`�� _��.��// s `�� ; v�c��F`. ;,,�,�s, � �i �, IC . �s��/�J� ,n �'• .� ` � �• � t ,F1� � i � ,� � � D•--�� Crai . Montgo �•�. � ,: � o Date Florida Profession� ��'4� ° ♦ CDM Smith Inc. ��`s/1�� `�`�i • 17]5 N Westshore Blvd Tampa, Florida 33607 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 �� Professional Engineers Certification for ponna Friis, P.E. Page 1 of 1 1SSUED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: Q9-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The following Issued For Bid Technical Specifications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. SECTION IVa — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 02605 Section 03100 Section 03200 Section 03250 Section 03300 Section 03350 Section 03600 Section 03740 Section 05500 Section 13123 Precast Concrete Manholes and Boxes (Structural Only) Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcement Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories Cast-In-Place Concrete Concrete Finishes Grout Modifications and Repair to Concrete Miscellaneous Metals Pre-Engineered Weather Canopy (Structural Only) 3ecti,,��i�� t��,�, Wire Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Tanks (Structural Only) �,.� ON.....,. R ��. ,� �•' �,1 C E�y'• ��,,¢ �ii : #,•' No s s'�t` ;�i �� N ; �as4 : � 7D2 * :* � � '�a_-�'...SrArF n(,/ : n. � uoru�►�ac�.tr.��j f2 liate Florida �r��s�i�onal Engineer No. 57454 Florida Building Code 2010 — Existing Building - Chapters l, 2, 6 Florida Building Code 2010 —Building - Chapters 16, 17,18,19 CDM Smith Inc. ] 715 N Westshore Blvd, Suite 875 Tampa, Fiorida 3360'7 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 u • • • • Licensed Architects Gertification for Michael Todd Alford, AIA Page 1 of 1 ISSUEU FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION Na FOR "I'I-iE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLAN"I' No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 "I'he following Issued For Bid Technical Specifications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. l— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. SECTION IVa - SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 06100 Section 06200 Section 07201 Section 07900 Section 08l ld Section 08120 Section 08512 Section 08522 Section 08710 Section 08800 Section 09200 Section 09250 Section 09300 Section 09901 Section 09902 Section 10200 Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Batt Insulation Joint Sealers Steel Doors and Frames Aluminum Doors and Frames Aluminum Storefront System Fixed Aluminum Windows Finish Hardware Glazing Cement Plaster (Stucco) Gypsum Wallboard Systems Tiling Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting Finish Paint Aluminum Louvers Michael T. A.lfor�l,, �I�i No. AR92Q55 FL Coip Archite,ctute License No. AA-0002781 2301 Maitland Center Parkway, Suite 300 Maitland, Florida 32751 CDM Smith Inc. • 1715 N Westshore Blvd, Suite 875 Tampa, Ftorida 33607 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 Date Professional Engineers Certification for Willia�n S. WhiEmore, P.E. Page 1 of 1 ISSt1ED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa FOR THE CITY OF CLEARI�`ATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROIECT #: 09-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The following Issued For Bid Technical Specifcations for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepared under �ny direction and supervision. SECTION [Va — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 13300 Instru�nentation and Controts General Provisions Section 13302 Section 13303 Section 13305 Section 1330b Section 13311 Section 13321 Section 13330 Testing TraininK Control Descriptions Application En�ineering Services Digital Hardware and Equipment Fiber Optic Data Nigh�vay Nehvork Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment Section 13340 Instrum ��t��tt►[tilt�� "`�� . W h/�T �ii�� :�.,�P.•��c��s�' • �c��'� �i�; /i�� "�'i .,., ., 5' ' '�'m � � William S. V1Thitmore, �v,E� ', STATE OF t�� , \ Florida Professional En No. 821 . ��p ' ��i��' ,..��` /`fi/�/�s�i��7,v�, �+��ll�\\`�`� #1.1 . CDM Smith Inc. 1715 N Westshore Blvd, Suite 875 Tampa, Florida 33607 Telephone: (813} 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-000002Q Date __ u • • • Professional Engineers Certification for Paul A. PouIiot, P.E. Page 1 of 1 ISSUED FOR BID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. l— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The following Issued For Bid Technical Specifications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. I— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. SECTION IVa — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 15500 HVAC Section 15860 Fans Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ,��ti111it{itllillt/�� .�,�°'�,��, �'" � � �/�� '�',r,,.^. �Aww.� . • ,�� . •�tG�.N,�,�' °Q�..�� `�s : ; ' �e; a / [S s � ` . �J�iJ`�Ci ° .�`- •. i� � � �� i •°• •`4 t{�,��: J ,� a �} y�'yQ� • +' ��, a' �'glr�li� ' ♦ � e �� \ � � � �%" ��''�; `'~��f iAle�'�G w�'� .r�,l�� iftf#!Il1�''��lL Paul A. Pouliot, P.E. Date Florida Professional Engineer No. 55318 2010 Florida Building Code - Chapter 28 and 29 2010 Florida Mechanical Code — Chapters 1 to 15 2010 Florida Energy Conservation Code — Chapters 1 to 6 2010 Florida Plumbing Code — Chapters 1 to 13 2010 Florida Fuel Gas Code — Chapters 1 to 7 CDM Smith Inc. • 1715 N Westshore Btvd, Suite 875 Tampa, Florida 33607 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL COA No. EB-0000020 ProFessional En�ineers Certification for Spencer J. Perry 3r., P.E. Page 1 of 1 1SSUED FOR B1D TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SEC1'ION 1Va FOR THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. I— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-UT OCTOBER 2012 The follawing Issued For Bid Technical Specifications for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1— Plant Expansion project dated October 2012 were prepared under my direction and supervision. SECTION IVa — SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 16000 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16150 Section 16191 Section 16370 Section 16470 Section 16481 Section 16502 Section 16600 Section 16660 General Electrical Requirements Race�vays, Boxes, Fittings and Supports Low Voltage Wire Motors Miscellaneous Electricat Equipment Variable Frequency Drives Yanelboards Motor Control Center Modifications Lightning Protection System Underground Systems Grounding System ��\1t��lrt//�J�� /i \�� G��t J. PF� �i'i ,, ,.....,, �� .�Q�(i: ' �,�GENSF'+.��-��,' . •� � � Cij • • •• _ ' rvo. . - . �: * . = '. srA-r� oF �� = .- . .. , ; � ��Q� � �. e P�,•�� . � �/�� 3S�O1rlAL �.�,�'�? Spencer J. Perry Jr., P.E. ""'"� Florida Professional Engineer No. 62587 2010 Florida Building Code - Chapter 28 and 29 2010 Florida Energy Conservation Code — Chapters 1 to 6 CDM Smith Inc. 1715 N Westsl�ore Blvd, Suite 875 Tainpa, Florida 33b07 Telephone: (813) 281-2900 FL C.OA No. EB-0000020 • • • � REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT NO. 1— PLANT EXPANSION (09-0018-UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & � � 0 � � � � SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for Issued To Bid October 2012 • • � City of Clearwater, Florida REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT NO. 1— PLANT EXPANSION (09-0018-UT) SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IV SECTION IVa SECTION V SECTION VI APPENDIX A APPENDIX B APPENDIX C Cover.doc TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS GEOTECHNICAL REPORT AVAILABLE DOCUMENTS PERMITS Prepared in the Office of the Ciry Engineer Page II 9/2012 • SECTION 1 ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS i • u � • SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT NO. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #09-0018-UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com/citYproiects, ON FRIDAY, OCTOBER 12, 2012, until no later than Iclose of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and �Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of: Expansion of the City of Clearwater RO Plant No. 1 to increase treatment capacity from 3.0 mgd to 4.5 mgd per the project drawings and specifications. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on MONDAY, OCTOBER 29, 2012 at 10:00 A.M. at MSB CONFERENCE ROOM 130, S. MYRTLE AVE., CLEARWATER, FL. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. 'Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services B1dg.,100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3`d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on TUESDAY, NOVEMBER 13, 2012, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT NO. 1- PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #09- 0018-UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $8,000,000. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. �A l0% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. �The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4633 Sectionl_2012-gcc.docx Page 1 of 1 7/23/2012 • SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • • • • • SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ..................................................................................1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 BIDSECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 CONTRACTTIME .......................................................................................................... 3 LIQUIDATEDDAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 SUBCONTRACTORS...................................................................................................... 3 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 SUBMISSIONOF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 REJECTIONOF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 19 AWARDOF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 BIDPROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENTMEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 SectionII 2012.doc � 4/3/2012 � • u Section I1 — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS l.l Comptete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www.myclearwater.com/citvprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is availab}e only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a"Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. l3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); l00 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) ar by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre-Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www.mvclearwater.com/ o� v/depts/pwa/engin/Construction/prequal.as�. Contractars wanting to pre-qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.l It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a} examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and tocal laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein ar for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical Sectionll 2012.doc Page 1 of 9 4/3/2012 Section II — lnstructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) � which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to diftering conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former • condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the Ciry's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre-bid meeting prior to the date for opening of • Sectionll_2012.doc Page 2 of 9 4/3/2012 . C� 5 Section ll — lnstructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND S.l Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent ( I 0%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furr►ish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 . s 6.l % �. � 8 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. CONTRACT TIME The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and eyuipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 lf requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer • an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Sectionll_2012.doc Page 3 of 9 4/3/2012 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed • fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposai Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perfortn the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each • section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the wark, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. I 0.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS ll.l Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xl l" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall • be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and SectionIl_2012.doc Page 4 of 9 4/3/2012 � • • Section 11 — instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 16 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionIl 2012.doc Page 5 of 9 4/3/2012 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume alt liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. l 6.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible far reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section N— Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE l 7.] In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (l), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. Sectionll_2012.doc Page 6 of 9 4/3/2012 � u • Section 11 — Instructions to Bidders • (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. 1 certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. ] 8.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the • best interest ofthe City. 18.4 Award of contract will be based on the lowest total base bid amount. Once the successful bidders are selected, the City, at his sole discretion may add any of the additive alternate bid items to the Base Bid. The total project cost will be revised accordingly should additive alternate bid items be selected by the City. Unless otherwise specified, all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/reyuest document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of • five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders SectionIl 2012.doc Page 7 of 9 4/3/2012 0 Section ll — Instructions to Bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite • specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request far exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (l0) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the • protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager ar the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% ofthe fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 2l .l The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater • Sectionll_2012.doc Page 8 of 9 4/3/2012 Section 11— lnstructions to Bidders • management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. • • A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at Cit,y of Clearwater En�ineerin� Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EPA website Sectionll 2012.doc Page 9 of 9 4/3/2012 � � J • � SECTION ill GENERAL CONDITIONS • Table of Contents: 1 2 SECTION I11 GENERAL CONDITIONS DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................. 1 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 2.l DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THEPROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................... 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6 3 C�NTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7 3.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCEPOINTS .................................................................................................... 8 4.l AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 8 • 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROLJND FACILITIES ..................................... 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 9 • 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9 6 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND..., 5.2 IN SURANC E ....................................................................................... 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ................................ 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE... 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY ........................... 53 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ........................................................................ � ....... 9 ....... 9 ..... 10 ..... 10 ..... 11 ..... 12 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES .....................................................................12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... l3 63 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS ......:....................................................... 14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... l5 6.5.1 STAGINGAREAS ....................................................................................................15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ................................................................................ 1 S 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... l 6 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS .......................................................................................................................16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................18 6.I1 DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................18 SectionlIl 2012.doc �n �izo�2 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMIT7'AL REVIEW ........................ 18 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :....................................................................................................23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION .......................................... 24 7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24 7.2 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 25 8 9 10 11 fi►a 13 14 9.1 9.2 93 9.4 9.5 9.6 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ....................................................................••-•-.. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ................................................ REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................ SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .......................... DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ................................................................................ LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES..... ... 25 ... 26 ... 26 ... 26 ... 26 ... 27 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 28 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28 l l.l CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28 1 1.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 30 l l.3 UN1T PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 30 13.1 l 3.2 l 3.3 13.4 l 3.5 13.6 l 3.7 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 l 4.5 14.6 l 4.7 14.8 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 31 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OFDEFECTIVE WORK .............................................................................................. 31 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ......................................... 33 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 34 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF T1TLE ............................................................... 35 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 36 FINALINSPECTION ................................................................................................... 37 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 37 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 38 SectionIll 2012.doc ii 7/ 11 /2012 u • u • 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38 I5.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38 l 5.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................. 40 17 l 7.l l 7.2 173 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 MISCELLANEOUS....................................................................................................... 40 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40 GIVINGNOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40 NOTICEOF CLAIM .....................................................................................................41 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 41 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 4l RENEWALOPTION .................................................................................................... 41 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41 19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 42 21 22 22. l • 22.2 23 CJ 23.] 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 23.8 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 42 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 42 EXAMPLE..................................................................................................................... 42 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43 SCOPEAND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ...........:..................................... 43 FIXEDSIGN ................................................................................................................. 44 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 44 SIGNCOLORING ......................................................................................................... 44 SIGNPLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44 SIGNMAINTENANCE ................................................................................................44 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 45 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM ...................................................................... 46 Sectionlll 2012.doc ,s� vi�i2o�2 Section 111 — General Conditions • 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consuttant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Applicatton for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment ar methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. � Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. Ciry The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction • contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 1 of49 7/11/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the • Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work • in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent • SectionlIl_2012.doc Page 2 of 49 7/11/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions • professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifrcations The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. • Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time wi1} commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. • SectionIll_2012.doc Page 3 of 49 7/11/2012 Section II1 — General Conditions Partial Utilization � Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom sha11 be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor • A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereo� which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or eyuipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. • SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 4 of 49 7/11/2012 \ J � L_J �J Section IlI — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable SectionIII 2012.doc Page 5 of49 7/11/2012 Section 111— General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or • discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractar. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events • including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings wil) be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. • Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 6 of 49 7/l l/20}2 Section lll — General Conditions ` 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Cantract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the C'ontract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereo� to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such wards or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technica) society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws ar Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's • Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enfarced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. • 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor sha11 not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. SectionIIl 2012.doc Page 7 of 49 7/I1/2012 Section III — General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL • CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptiy notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer • and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following wili be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. • Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 8 of 49 7/1 I/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions • 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsibie for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or retocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destrayed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after • the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts • any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Sectionlll 2012.doc Page 9 of 49 7/11l20 ] 2 Section lll — General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than • Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner ar any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additionat insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in • accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (l) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability incIuding Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: • SectionllI 2012.doc Page ] 0 of 49 7/l 1/2012 . . Section 111— General Conditions Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $],000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insuranee, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Aet: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be reyuired to • secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll 2012.doc Page ] 1 of 49 7/11/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss ar damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partia) utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. A1} communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. i � Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed • Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 12 of49 7/11/2012 Section I11 — General Conditions � fi�om the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result c�f� overtime wark in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an uvertime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours • and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. • Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accardance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorparated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 13 of 49 7/i 1/2012 Section 1ll — General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS • Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or eyuipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" wili be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Reyuest for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND • OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct ar indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractars, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. • SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 14 of49 7/ll/2012 Section lll — General Conditions • Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier ar other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant • against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of aIl impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. . Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (IS) consecutive calendar days. • Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. SectionIll 2012.doc Page 15 of49 7/11/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions • Sod must be restored within fourteen (l4) consecutive calendar days of a successful • pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other pro�ect specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. � Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance ofthe work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly reyuired by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements ofExecutive Order l 1-02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E-Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for • all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 16 of 49 7/1 ]/2p12 Section lll — General Conditions • obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Ctearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and • replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, eyuipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property . caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly emp}oyed by any of them to perform or furnish Sectionlll 2012.doc Page 17 of49 7l11/2012 Section ltl —General Conditions any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by • Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work �s completed and Engmeer has �ssued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons ar the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with ar without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Wark Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, • Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shal) respond to each submittal within twenty-one (2l) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (Z 1) consecutive • Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 18of49 7/ll/2012 Section lll — General Conditions • calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds far a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. � Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor reyuests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, confgurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. • SectionlII 2012.doc Page 19 of 49 7/1 ]/2012 Section l l l— General Conditions The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter SJ-17.052, Flarida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. SJ-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated.• also knonw as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described SectionIll_2012.doc Page 20 of 49 7/� �/Zp�2 i • • Section I ll — General Conditions • above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than l00 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include al) changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the bluetine prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Verticai Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of ineasurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter SJ-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that • pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part ofthis contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 La er Namin Definitions: • GAS gas lines and appurtenances Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 21 of 49 7/11/2012 Section III — General Conditions ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as reyuired, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. Al) text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. SectionllI_2012.doc Page 22 of 49 7/11/2012 • • • Section I li — General Conditions • 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. "Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony�cr�myClearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution • or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractar's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any • disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. SectionllI_2012.doc Page 23 of49 7/11/2012 Section lll — General Conditions 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against a}I claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itsel�, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractar or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and a11 claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or far Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to al} utility owners for these purposes. SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 24 of 49 7/11/2012 • • • Section 111 — General Conditions • The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will b� identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The • Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible far, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, ar for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written • consent of Owner and Engineer. Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 25 of49 7/13/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS � Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFl responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations wi11 be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price ar the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop • Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptabiliry of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Clairos under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initialZy to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's • SectionllI_2012.doc Page 26 of 49 7/11 /2012 Section lll — General Conditions • written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and (."ontractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a tormal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBtLITIES � Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontraetor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. • The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. Sectionlll 2012.doc Page 27 of 49 7/11/2012 Section lll — General Conditions 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions wilt be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptiy proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties, changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 28 of49 7/I1/2012 CJ r� U • Section 1I1 — General Conditions � after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the wark involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual • payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. Renta) or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed far equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five • percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (] 0%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. SectionIll_2012.doc Page 29 of49 7/11/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions C. No markup shall be added to the costs of ltems 3 and 4. � The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times • the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense ar the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adeyuate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the ariginal Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. u Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 30 of 49 7/11/2012 Section lll — General Conditions • 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain mare accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims far adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are ofthe essence ofthe Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such detay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the • article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Wark. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing labaratory to perform • all inspections, tests, or approvals reyuired by the Contract Documents. The costs for these Sectionlll 2012.doc Page31 of49 7/ll/2012 Section II1 — General Conditions inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in • the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereo� specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shal} be at Contractar's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable prompfiess in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and • replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected ar tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article far Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shali be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish ar perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such arder has been • Sectiontll_2012.doc Page 32 of 49 7/11/2012 Section lll — General Conditions • eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to an� dutv on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of • others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period far that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness_ If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating • the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree Sectionlll 2012.doc Page 33 of 49 �/I1/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK as provided in article for Owner Representative's paid by Contractor to the If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 2]8.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an App(ication for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and SectionIll_2012.doc Page 34 of49 7/ll/2012 CJ • � �J Section 111 — General Conditions � acce�tance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be corstrued to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work 1or which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector wilt verify that the on-site mai i<ed up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen ( I 5) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner � harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. ln paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application reyuires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the • reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 35 of 49 7/ll/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. � The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION • Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and reyuest Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shal) make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and accessthereto. • SectionIIl 2012.doc Page 36 of49 7/ll/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions • 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon � ritten notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contr�cto►- and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for finat payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation calted for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) • consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final App}ication for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the • surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and SectionIll 2012.doc Page 37 of 49 7/11/2012 Section Ill — General Conditions accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final • payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. • 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles far Change of Contract Price and Chan�e of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this • SectionlII_2012.doc Page 38 of 49 7/I1/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions • Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any}, seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractar but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. • Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. r� U Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompteted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. Sectionlll 2012.doc Page 39 of 49 7/11/2012 Section 111— General Conditions 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE • If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for . resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents reyuires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. • SectionlIl_2012.doc Page 40 of 49 7/11/2012 Section lll — General Conditions � 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions • and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. • 17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers and/ar dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: Michael.Pryor(a�myClearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. SectionlII 2012.doc Page41 of49 7/II/2012 Section 111— General Conditions 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATtONS � The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. ln a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE l.l - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, • unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-'/4 by l 1 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL • Sec[ionlll_2012.doc Page 42 of49 7/ll/2012 • C� Section I11— General Conditions _ _. Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property �owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures andlor materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) �Construction is anticipated to begin on: We will be more than happy to assist you. Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs wili be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined • after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. SectionlIl 2012.doc Page 43 of 49 7/11 /2012 Section Ill — General Conditions 23.3 FIXED SIGN • Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT • Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs wil) be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediatety replaced if defaced. �1 �J Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 44 of 49 7/11/2012 . �� • Section lit — Generai Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN , _ PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT � CONTRACTOR. ---- ---- - __ _ _ . _ . - COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:_____ _i _ _ �� °�,rwater �-� U 1_ __ _ _1_ -- -, ---�- 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. lt is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE l.l - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. lf the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform wark on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the SectionIIl_2012.doc Page 45 of49 7/11/2012 Section 111— General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars • ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each lnspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposai or response, in accordance with section 287.135, F}orida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. • Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July l, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List ar the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): l. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 201 l . 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. • SectionIll_2012.doc Page 46 of49 7/I1l2012 Section Ill — General Conditions � 4. The company or entity has adopted, has public'rzed and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. • • B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law forthe false submission ofthe attached certification form. SectionllI 2012.doc Page 47 of 49 7/I I/2012 Seciion Ill — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND � SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: l. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the lran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, rea} property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendar, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, • no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity/Corporation • Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 48 of 49 7(� �/zp�2 Section ]Il — General Conditions • STATE OF �� COUNTY OF The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 201_, by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOT�IRYSEAL ABOVE SectionlII 2012.doc Page 49 of 49 7!I 1l2012 � SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • �, LJ • • • SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTIONIV .................................................................................................................................. i TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................... i 1 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 1 l .l SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. l 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 2 2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 3 2.l LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 3 2.1.1 GRADES, LINESANDLEVELS ............................................................................. 3 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ....................................................................................................... 4 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 4 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 4 3.l REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 4 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 4 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 6 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 6 6 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................................7 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 7 ?.l EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................7 7.2 FORMS ........................................................................................................................... 7 8 9 10 I1 12 13 REINFORCEMENT......................................................................................................... 7 8.l BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 8 OBSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................. 8 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS ANDSTREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 8 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 9 DEWATERING................................................................................................................. 9 12.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................9 122 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 10 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 10 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITEACTIVITY ........................... 10 SANITARYMANHOLES ..............................................................................................12 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 12 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... l 3 SectionlV 2012.doc i 5/15/2012 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 13 • 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... l3 I 3.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 13 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 13 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 14 14 BACKFILL ......................................................................................................................14 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC . .......................................................................................14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 14 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 14 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................15 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 15 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. I S 18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 15 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... l5 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16 19 STORM SEWERS ..........................................................................................................16 ] 9.l AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 16 19.2 TESTING ......................................................................................................................16 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..................••............................................................................. • l7 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 17 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ l 7 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 17 20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... l7 20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ....... ...................................................................................... 18 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... l8 20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... l 8 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 18 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 19 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19 20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 19 20. S. 2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19 DRAINAGE.....................................................................................................................19 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ..........................................................................19 22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 19 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 21 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ........ ....................... 21 22.2 SUBGRADE .................................................................................................................21 22.2.1 BASISOFMEASUREMENT ................................................................................21 22.2.2 BASISOFPAYMENT ..................................................................................•-----....22 21 22 SectionlV_2012.doc ii 5/15/2012 • • 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 22 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 22 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................22 23.1.2 BITUMINOUSMATERIALS .................................................................................22 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITYASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 22 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 23 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 23 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 24 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 24 23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................24 23.6.2 POTHOLES ...........................................................................................................24 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 25 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 25 23.9 SUPERPAVEASPHALTIC CONCRETE ....................................................................26 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 26 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 26 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 27 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 27 2 5 .1 I RRI G AT I ON . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION ....... • 25.1.2 PRODUCTS............ 25.1.3 EXECUTION........... 25.2 LANDSCAPE ................ 25. 2.1 GENERAL ............... 25.2.2 PRODUCTS............ 25.2.3 EXECUTION.......... 26 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 26.8 26.9 ............................................. ............................................ ............................................. ............................................ ............................................ ............................................. ................ ................ .................. 27 ................. 27 .................. 29 .................. 33 .................. 36 .................. 36 .................. 41 .................. 44 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 51 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 51 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ S l MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 51 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 52 TELEVISIONINSPECTION ....................................................................................... 52 LINERINSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 53 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 53 TIMEOF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 53 PAYMENT.................................................................................................................... 53 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 53 27. l 27.2 28 29 • 29.1 29.2 BASISOF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54 BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 54 CONCRETECURBS ..................................................................................................... 54 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54 BASISOF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54 SectionIV 2012.doc � 5/15/2012 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 54 • 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... 54 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 55 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 55 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 55 31 32 33 34 35 36 3 SODDING........................................................................................................................ 55 SEEDING......................................................................................................................... 56 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURE S ................................................................................................................ 56 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 56 33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 57 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 57 MATERIALUSED ......................................................................................................... 57 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 57 STREETSIGNS .............................................................................................................. 57 7 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 57 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................ 57 372 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 57 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 58 37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 58 • 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 58 37.6 RECORDED 1NFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 58 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 58 37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 59 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 59 37.]0 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 59 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 59 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 59 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 59 38.1 STABILIZATIbN OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59 382 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 60 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 60 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 60 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 60 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 6l 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 61 389 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 61 38.10 COMPLIANCE.........--•• ................................................................................................61 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 64 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCAEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 64 • SectionIV_2012.doc iv 5/I S/2012 • • � 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES....................................................................................................... 64 42 !�Cj 41. ] SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 64 41.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 65 =11.2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................65 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALSAND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 65 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 67 41.2.4 V.9LVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 67 41.2.5 HYDRANTS ...........................................................................................................68 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 69 41.2. 7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 69 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 69 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 70 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 70 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................70 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 70 41. 3.2 PIPE LAYING ......................... .............................................................................. 70 41. 3. 3 SETTING OF VAL VES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS .... .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . ... . . . .. .. ... . . .. ..... 72 41. 3. 4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ................................ ............................... 72 41.4 TESTS ...........................................................................................................................73 41.4.1 HYDROST.4TIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 73 41.4.2 NOTICEOFTEST .............•---................._.................................._...-�----.................73 4I.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 73 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 73 41. 5.2 FL USHING SYSTEM .......................................................... .................................. 73 41.5.3 STERILIZATIONPROCEDURE ..........................................................................73 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 74 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 74 41.6 MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 74 41.6.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................74 41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL W,4TER MAINS ........................................................... 75 41.6.3 FURNISHAND INST�ILL FI7'7'INGS ...................:............................................... 75 41. 6. 4 FURNISH AND INST.4LL GATE YAL VES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS. . . . . . . .. . . . . ..... ... ... ... . ... . . . .... . . ....... . . . .. . . ... . .. .. . . . . . ... . .. . . . .. . . . . . .... .... . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . 75 41.6.5 FURNISHAND INST.4LL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 75 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 76 TENNISCOURTS .......................................................................................................... 76 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ..... 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS........ 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ................ 43.1.3 PRIME COAT .................. 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE....... 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE........ 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ................. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ....... 43.2.1 GENERAL ........................ 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION....... SectionlV 2012.doc ........................................................ 76 ........................................................ 76 ............................................. ............................................. ............................................. ............................................. .._.......-• ................................. v ............................. 76 ............................. 76 ............................. 76 ............................. 76 ............................. 77 ............................. 78 ............................. 78 ............................. 79 5/I Sl2012 43.2.3 43.2.4 43.2.5 43.2.6 43.2. 7 43.2.8 43.2.9 43.2.10 43.2.11 �3.2.12 43.2.13 43.2.14 43.2.15 43.2.16 43.2.17 SLOPE................................................................... BASE CONSTR UCTION ............. .......................... PERIMETER CURBING ....................................... SURF,4CE COURSE ............................................. ROOTBARRIER ................................................... FENCING............................................................. WINDSCREENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COURT EQUIPMENT .......................................... SHADE STR UCT URE .......................................... WATER SOURCE (Potable) ................................. CONCRETE......................................................... EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING WATERCOOLER ................................................ DEMONSTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . WARRANTY. . . . .. . .. . . ... . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . ... . .. . ..... .. . .. . . . ... . . . . ... 79 ... 80 ... 80 ... 80 .... 80 .... 81 .... 81 .... 81 .... 83 .... 83 .... 83 .... 83 .... 84 .... 84 .... 84 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 85 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 85 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 85 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 85 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 86 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 86 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 86 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ......................................................... 86 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 86 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 86 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 87 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 87 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 87 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 87 45.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 87 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 88 453 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 88 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 88 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 89 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 89 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 89 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 89 45.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................89 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 90 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 90 46.1.1 PIPEAND FITTINGS .................................................................................•-�-�---.. 90 46.1.2 QUALITYCONTROL ........................................................................................... 90 46.1.3 SAMPLES ......................................................................�--•�---................................90 46.1.4 REJECTION ..................................................................��-•-•--�•---...........................90 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 90 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 91 SectionIV 2012.doc vi 5/15/2012 • • • • • u ;16. 3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ...................................................................... �16.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ............................................... 46. 3. 3 PIPE JOINING ................................................................................ 46. 3. =� HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ........................................................ 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE .................................................................. 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ................................ 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ..................................................... �16. 4. 3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .................................... 46.4. 4 INSERTION OF THE LINER .......................................................... 46. 4. S CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ................................................ 46. 4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED .......................... 46. 4. 7 BACKFILLING ............................................................................... 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR ............................................................................... 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ............................................................. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE ....................... 47.2 MATERIALS ............. 473 PIPE ........................... 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ... 47.5 FITTINGS .................. 48 ............................................. . � ...................................................... ......................................... ............................... � ......... 91 ......... 91 ......... 91 ......... 91 ........ 91 .......... 91 .......... 91 .......... 92 .......... 92 .......... 92 .......... 92 .......... 93 .......... 93 .......... 93 , ..................... 93 ...................... 93 ......................... 93 ......................... 93 ......................... 94 ......................... 94 GUNITESPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 94 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT .............................................................. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 483 COMPOSITION ......................................................................................... 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 48.5 MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 48.6 WATER ....................................................................................................... 48.7 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................... 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ..................................................................... 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ....................................................................... 48.10 PROPORTIONING ..................................................................................... 48.11 MIXING ...................................................................................................... 48.12 APPLICATION ........................................................................................... 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................... 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................... 48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................... 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................... 48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................. 48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. .................. 94 ................. 94 .................. 94 .................. 95 .................. 95 .................. 95 .................. 95 .................. 95 .................. 96 .................. 96 .................. 96 .................. 96 .................. 97 .................. 97 .................. 97 .................. 97 .................. 98 .................. 98 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ........................... 99 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................................................................................. 99 49.2 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................99 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ...............................................•-........................... 99 49.3.1 MATERIALS ..........................................................................................................99 49. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 100 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 100 SectionN 2012.doc vii 5/15/2012 49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................101 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ...................................................................................... ] O l 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 1 O 1 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ l O1 49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... ] 02 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 102 49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 102 49.1 l INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 102 49.11.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................102 49.11.2 MIXING ...............................................................................................................103 49.11. 3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 103 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 103 49.11.5 CURING ..............................................................................................................103 49.11. 6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... I O�l 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 104 49.12.1 SCOPE ................................... .......... ........... ...... ................ ............................ ...... 104 49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................104 49.12. 3 INSTALLATION AND EXEC UTION . . . ... . . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 106 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... 108 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................108 �� 53 51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 108 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... 109 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................109 51.2.2 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................109 51.2.3 COURTPATCHBINDERMIX ...........................................................................109 513 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... l09 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... l] 0 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... 11 Q 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... l 10 51.7 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................110 51.8 LIMITATIONS ----------------------_- _ _ l 10 ....................................... RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................111 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................111 53.1 MATERIAL .................................................................................................................11 l 53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ...................................................111 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL : ...............................................113 53.1. 3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................................................114 53.1.4 GEOTE.Y77LE FABRIC ........................................................................................114 53.2 PERFORMANCE .......................................................................................................114 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................115 54.1 SCOPE ...................................................................................•-................................... 115 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................ 1 I S 54.3 WORK METHODS .................................................................................................... 116 54.3.1 MAINTENANCESCHEDULING ........................................................................116 54.3.2 DUTIESPER SERVICE VISIT ..................................�-----�--�-�-•-•-�--......................116 SectionIV_2012.doc viii 5/I S/2012 � • • • 54.4 LITTER .......................................................................................................................116 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... 116 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... I 16 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... l 16 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. ll6 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 117 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 1] 7 54.1 I PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 117 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... ] l7 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 117 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 117 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... l l 7 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 1] 7 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 118 54.] 8 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 118 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 118 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 118 54.2] SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 118 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................119 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... l 19 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... l l9 55.3 SALUAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. l20 • 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 120 55.5 ADJUSTMENTAND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. l20 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ I20 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 120 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 12] 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... l21 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 121 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... l2l 56.2 BAS1S OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 12l 57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 121 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... l22 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................122 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. l22 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING .....:........... ...................... 122 ......................... 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 122 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... l 23 60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 123 • 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... l23 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................123 SectionlV 2012.doc ix 5/IS/2012 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123 • 62 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 124 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 124 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... l 24 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 125 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 126 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 126 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... l26 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... l26 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 127 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ............................................................................................ 127 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... ] 27 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 127 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ...................................................... 127 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 127 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES ............................................ 127 u • SectionlV_2012.doc x 5/15/2012 . 1 SCOPE OF WORK • • Section IV —Technical Specifications 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION Number: 09-0018-UT Scope of Work: Expansion of the City of Clearwater RO Plant No. l to increase capacity from 3.0 mgd to 4.5 mgd. Major components of the expansion include the following with all associated piping, electrical and instrumentation components required: One (1) new raw water boost pump; Two (2) new arsenic adsorption units; One (1) new spent backwash water recovery system; One (1) new cartridge filter housing; Three (3) new membrane feed pumping units (two installed and one spare);.420 new high surface area reverse osmosis membrane elements for installation in the existing reverse osmosis skids; One (l) new concentrate pump station; Three (3) modified and one (1) new blended water transfer pump; Two (2) new 3.0 mg ground storage tanks. The following are owner direct purchase (ODP) items for the Base Bid: Raw Water Boost Pump and Motor, Raw Water Boost Pump VFD, Adsorption Treatment System Equipment, Backwash Recycle Pumps, Backwash Residual Pumps, Decant Tanks, Residuals Holding Tank, Polymer System, New Control Panel (CP) 120, Cartridge Filter Vessel, Membrane Feed Pumps, Membrane Feed Pump VFDs, RO Membranes, Concentrate Pumps, Pump Control Panel and VFDs (LCP 120), Main CP-1 ] 0 New Control Panel; Blend Water Pump Rebuild The following are owner direct purchase (ODP) items for Additive Alternates Membrane Cleaning Cartridge Filter Vessel, Cleaning System Horiz End Suction Centrifugal Pump, Membrane Cleaning VFD, As System Media Exchange, Dual Media Filter Replacement, Blend Water Pumps The Contractor shall provide fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. CONTRACT PERIOD: 300 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS FOR INTERMEDIATE MILESTONE l: FINAL COMLETION OF ALL WORK EXCEPT THE NORTH GROUND STORAGE TANK AND APPURTENANCES 380 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS FOR MILESTONE 2: TOTAL PROJECT FINAL COMLETION SectionlV 2012.doc Page 1 of 128 5/l5/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST • Project Name: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION Project Number: 09-0018-UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 � Sco e Of Work 2.1 � Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Cit 3 � Definition Of Terms 4 � Order And Location Of The Work 5 � Excavation For Under round Work 6 � Concrete 7 � Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 � Reinforcement 9 � Obstructions l 0 � Restoration Or Re lacement Of Drivewa s, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement l 1 � Work In Easements Or Parkwa s l2 � Dewaterin l3 � Sanita Manholes 14 � Backfill 15 � Street Crossin s, Etc. l 6 ❑ Raisin Or Lowerin Of Sanita Sewer, Storm Draina e Structures • 17 � Unsuitabie Material Removal l8 � Underdrains 19 � Storm Sewers 20 � Sanitar Sewers And Force Mains 21 � Draina e 22 � Roadwa Base And Sub rade 23 ❑ As haltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Ad'ustment To The Unit Bid Price ForAs halt 25 � General Plantin S ecifications 26 ❑ Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pi e Linin 27 ❑ Plant Mix Drivewa s 28 ❑ Re ortin Of Tonna e Of Rec cled Materials 29 ❑ Concrete Curbs 30 � Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s 3l � Soddin 32 ❑ Seedin 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 ❑ Conflict Between Plans And S ecifications 36 � Street Si ns 37 � AudioNideo Recordin Of Work Areas 38 � Erosion And Siltation Control • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 2 of 128 5/IS/2012 • • 3 °� __ _. _. 40 --___ 41 4'' _ 43 _ 4=1 __ 45 ----. _. 46 47 48 - 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 2 Section IV — Technical Specifications Utility Tie In Location Marking Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and A Gas System Specifications Tennis Courts Work Zone Traffic Control Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe Gunite Specifications Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration Project Information Signs In-Line Skating Surfacing System Resident Notification of Start of Construction Gabions and Mattresses Lawn Maintenance Specifications Milling Operations Clearin� and Grubbin� Treatment Plant Safety Traf�ic Signal Equipment and Materials Signing And Marking Roadway Lighting Tree Protection Project Web Pages Overhead Electric Line Clearance FIELD ENGINEERING ances 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels reyuired for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (Generai Conditions), Article 6.1 l 2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (far alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and • shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or SectionlV 2012.doc Page 3 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $] 00.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $]00.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technica) Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION Ill, ARTICLE l- DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall annlv_ For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA AAMA AASHTO Aluminum Association, Inc. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 4 of 128 5/15/2012 • � • � • • ANS1 APA ASAE ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWG AWMA AWS AW WA CFR CISPI CRSI CS DEP DOT EPA FAC FBC FFPC FGC FMC FPC FedSpec HI IBBM IEEE IPS MIL NAAMM NBFU NEC NEMA NFPA NPT NWMA PCA PCI SBC SBCCI SDI SFPC SGC SJI SMACCNA SectionlV 2012.doc Section IV — Technical Specifications American National Standards Institute American Plywood Association American Society ofAgricultural Engineers American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineering American Society for Testing and Materials American Wire Gauge Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association American Welding Society American Water Works Association Code of Federal Regulations Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) Department of Transportation (Florida) Environmental Protection Agency Florida Administrative Code Florida Building Code Flarida Fire Prevention Code Florida Gas Code Florida Mechanical Code Florida Plumbing Code Federal Specifications Standards of Hydraulic Institute Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Iron Pipe Size Military Specification National Association ofArchitectural Metal Manufacturers National Board of Fire Underwriters National Electrical Code National Electrica] Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association Nationat Pipe Thread National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Standard Building Code (SBCCI) Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. Steel Door Institute Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Page 5 of 128 5/I Sl2012 Section IV — Technical Specitications Association • SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractar is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety reyuirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as • OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the reyuirement of a"Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient yuantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration wark necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed wark unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance • specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than SectionlV_2012.doc Page 6 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications • the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hoilowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. ln case a trench is excavated at any place, exceptin� at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shal] conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM G33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, • for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be tharoughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry" 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving ar springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT • When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel SectionIV_2012.doc Page 7 of 128 5/15/2032 Section N — Technical Specifications A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the � requirements ofAASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions sha11 not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or henchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS. • CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or syuare yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per syuare foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 8 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications . ;�,�cretc: walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/]0 ��:;�;��i �vire mesh (also seeArticles 8 and 30). ", i�,.. Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all �f:�;��e�,v�ay, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. '�'! WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 1Z�:stoeation is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the c��nstruction progress. l">e ('ontractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time fi>Ilowing primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction ac:tivity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shal) be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery ►�,moved or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. i i;� contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on uny and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Rei�se water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater t: � F.it�nent plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- � construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requ irements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL linless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shalt be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 9 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmenta) staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. • STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION � GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table l do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table l. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 10 of 128 5/15/2012 • Section IV —Technical Specificaiions Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/I PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631 E 0.012 µg/l 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 93 µg/I 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/I 50.0 µg/1 Benzene I.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µgll If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. • (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: l. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address ofthe facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and diseharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information reyuired by paragraph (3)(a) ofthis permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 • units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of SectionIV_2012.doc Page 11 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technicai Specifications this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units � for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coasta) waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration eyual to or greater than I 500 mg/l. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(])(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests reyuired by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district of�ice within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during • discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use ofthis Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 12 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specitications • The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City f;ngineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhote as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered befare being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of . Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets l and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A] or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS • The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as SectionIV 2012.doc Page 13 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1 V— Technical Specifications manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. lnterior of built up manholes which � have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a l5 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214-351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP-R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughty compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed l2" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom ofpavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a • minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T I 80 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. � SectionlV_2012.doc Page 14 of 128 5lIS/2012 • C� • Section 1V — Technicat Specifications 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A#57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shail be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 15 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is c(ear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT iNFORMATiON The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertighmess of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed l 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 16 of 128 5lIS/2012 � � U • Section IV — Technical Specifications • 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline • easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR l 8 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 4l of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and • compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be SectionlV 2012.doc Page 17 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted � haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching materiat and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfil) is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class 1 material (l/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shal! be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from � the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 18 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications • The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of l50 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE • Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 4l of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1"Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be l2" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. • Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs SectionN_2012.doc Page 19 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shali be done • to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a rrtinimum of 185. LBR and gradation • tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless reyuested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing freyuency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 20 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV—Technical Specifications • 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200-7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-1 ] and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. . 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, p}acement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of l2" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 9l 1 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (}atest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal} of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT • The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth SectionN_2012.doc Page 21 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technicai Specifications shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values � shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shatl be inciuded in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS • All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 9l6 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. T'he Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stabi}ity and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the followin� • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 22 of 128 5/IS/2012 • • � Section IV —Technical Specifications 1. f)ensity per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. F'inal surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-]3 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core barings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of '/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notifv the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP} material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S—I Type S—I with Type S—I11 FC-3 Type S—III Type S—I Type 5-111 with FC-3 with FC-3 Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer ] st 2nd l st 2"d 1 st 2nd 1 st 2"d l st 2nd 1 st 2nd l 1 1 1'/2 1'/z 2 1'/4 3�4 * 1 ] 2'/2 1'/4 l'/4 1'/2 1 l%2 l 3 l%2 l'h 2 1 2 l * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S—III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). SectionIV_2012.doc Page 23 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 � of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project pians for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S—III per Section 33l of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by • the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 24 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specitications • 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. • All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. lt is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending wark and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS l. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or • mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the SectionIV 2012.doc Page 25 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day • before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index l Ol . 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE l. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to • Sections 90l and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of ineasurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 26 of 128 5lIS/2012 • C� • Section IV — Technical Specifications 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than l 0% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. lt is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation wark shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SectionN_2012.doc Page 27 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all • " applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (] 0) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: l. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and • maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The lrrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with a11 other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and eyuipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (l) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City • Section]V_2012.doc Page 28 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications • of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or • trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: I. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem • SectionlV 2012.doc Page 29 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications 5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing • Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AW WA-G509 2. 200 lb. O. W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A] 26 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handie B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES • A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.l pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shatl be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shal( be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 30 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specificaiions • C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (l/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and confor►n to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an in}et pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be • available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shal 1 be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall uti(ize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over l 50 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed • stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 31 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shatl have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manuai start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn offafter one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of LTNIK Control Modules. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 32 of 128 5/IS/2012 • C J • Section IV —Technica4 Specifications � D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. • D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. • E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. N. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 33 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than %2 in. G Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of inechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materiais shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shali be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. ]. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments reyuired due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the origina} Drawings, and without additional cost. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 34 of 128 5/15l2012 • • • Section 1V — Technical Specifications • E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shal{ be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) • A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. l. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: • 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 35 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section N—Technical Specifications 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing • pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. ]nstall where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials far proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when reyuired. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federat, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged far by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK • A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 36 of 128 5/I S/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications • incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and wi11 comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the • Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Hea}th Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at l-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all . specified work. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 37 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifcations, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natura}, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C. T.: C. W.: SPR.: ST. TR. : MIN.: GAL.: O. C.: DIA.: L vs : Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. Straight trunk. Minimum. Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diameter. Leaves. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 38 of 128 5/15/2012 • • • . • u Section IV — Technical Specifications D.B.K: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1 /2 feet above grade. CAL.: B&B: PPP: FG: STD.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Owner: Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person ar enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every l inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B& B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 39 0£ 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root . pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E_ Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. • A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect far adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 40 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/ar to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor sha11 suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS � 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a"Y" shape or parallet branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 ar better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at • the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 41 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specitications E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by • governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shatl be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materiats shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B& B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa • provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. lnstall mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. �� _J SectionlV_2012.doc Page 42 of 128 5/]5/20}2 Section 1V —Technical Specifications • 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shatl bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tabtets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1 } pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) syuare feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS • A. Far trees, approved piastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two -'/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of piants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of l/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over l". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractar shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, • roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SectionlV_2012.doc Page 43 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily • organic soil, such as muck or peat shal) be used as fi11 dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4-'/z feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. lnstall as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS • A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with • Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectionlV_2012.doc Page 44 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over ]-'/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material offthe site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING • A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic tayer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A compiete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (l) pound of nitrogen per ] 000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soiL • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 45 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. lnstall berms at ]ocation and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after setttement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about l inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-] 0-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: SectionIV_2012.doc Page 46 of 128 5/15/2012 • • r � �� • 1 �allon 3 gallon 5 gallon 7 gallon Trees Palms Section IV — Tech��ical Specifications 1 - 21 gram tablet 2 - 21 gram tablet 3 - 21 gram tablet 4 - 2l gram tablet 3 tablets each'/2" (12 millimeters) caliper 7- 2l gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant • a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. • 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 47 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other • approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformat�on of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:l and as reyuired, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Flarida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optiona] 3 stakes per tree at l20 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. Far single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be • used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x ] 6 inch wood connected with two '/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractar shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed Iine edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of l00% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch ciearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched • clearance from the outside edge of annuals. SectionN_2012.doc Page 48 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to • landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in yuality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural • practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under SectionlV 2012.doc Page 49 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the • University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within ] 5 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within l5 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractar's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. l. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved eyuivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. • 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 50 of 128 5/IS/2012 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a perrod of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Materia) which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 26.1 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to l2" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. lt shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Pro e ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi SectionIV 2012.doc Page Sl of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV—Technical Specifications HDPE �mpact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-]b/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed far defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, ar deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. C� Lining manufacturer shall suhmit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. • 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 52 of 128 5/l5/20t2 Section IV —Technical Specifications � 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION L.iner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shalt immediately notifv the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shalt maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be per►nitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be reyuested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local • system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restaration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified • for the street paving. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 53 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shail be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed l00 fe.et, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed l0 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is reyuired for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not SectionlV_2012.doc Page 54 of 128 5/15/2012 . • • Section 1V —Technica) Specifications • more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be pour�d only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inche� in thickness with 6/6 x 10/l0 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price • shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where reyuired, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. ln sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, roiling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, • equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the SectionN 2012.doc Page 55 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the • Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 601b. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans • and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 56 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications � 33.2 PRECAST TYPE • n �_J The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROffiBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accardance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractar shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (Z1) days prior to construction in any area. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 57 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS • The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The totat audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventiona) wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION • The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 58 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section 1V—Technical Specifications • 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping sha11 be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE • Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. � 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion ofthe site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 59 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES • Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS • Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (l) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 60 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications • Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall • and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE • Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a"Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 61 of 128 5lIS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Ci of Clearwater - Erosion Control • tY This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the properiy with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: I st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee 4th occurrence - Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to • support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 62 of 128 5/IS/2012 • ! • Section IV—Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7— EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warn ing $32.00 Re-inspection Fee $80.00 Re-inspection Fee Stop Work Order DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Inspector's Signature: CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 C� ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750 Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with tindings of the inspector.) IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionIV 2012.doc Page 63 of 128 �/IS/2012 Section N—Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING • The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shal} be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE • The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 64 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 41.2 MATERIALS • • 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and en�ineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI51/A21.S1 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and warking pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure (In.) (PSI) 4" 51 026 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 15 l/A21.S l 8l or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 104/A2l .4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SectionlV_2012.doc Page 65 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length (OD/Thick.) (PSI) (Ft) 4 �g 150 20 6 1g 150 20 g 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D I 869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. u All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece of tape. lt is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and • elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through l6-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements ofANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C] 1 l!A 2l .} 1. When reference is made to ANSI/AW WA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 66 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications • Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soi}, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which wi11 allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shatl be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to l6-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with • ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-S15 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. • Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover sha11 be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet l of 2& Sheet 2 of Z for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 67 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. � American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AW WA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: l. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard G502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a#7 (1-l/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. ] l. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with O- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanicai Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. I5. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. l 6. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1 /2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1 /2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accardance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 68 of 128 5/15/2012 � • • Section IV — Technical Specifications • 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the ]atest AW WA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS l. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the • tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains alf backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed • are: SectionlV 2012.doc Page 69 of 128 5/15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, • approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Redaced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 4l2 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING l. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against • pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures far the removal, relocation, ar reconstruction of the obstructions. � SectionIV_2012.doc Page 70 of 128 5/15/2012 � Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the 1ine. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place • without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. � As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of l0 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where Iong radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 8l or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion ofthe Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 71 of 128 5/I S/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet l of 2& Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located l 0-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is reyuired, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 72 of 128 5/15/2012 . • • Section [V —Technical Specifications • W here connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shal) be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance • notice ofthe time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AW WA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Priar to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shalt be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never • more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 73 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS � After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. lf tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If inethods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal � Shoring and/or dewatering � Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as reyuired for a complete and operable system. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 74 of 128 5/15/2012 � U • Section 1V—Technical Specifications • 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA Cl l0/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all ptant, labor, • materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price far each size sha11 be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, • material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV_2012.doc Page 75 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the • hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shal} be treated with DSMA l 84 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer`s Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. • 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-Ill Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 33 ] of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. lf a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of ]" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 33l of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in l0 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 76 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications • be approved. If a deficiency of mare than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a • deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation doub(e's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines • shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 77 of 128 5/15/2012 Section iV —Technical Specitications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be • conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work • contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of s�milar sub-surface �rrigation clay tenn�s court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 78 of 128 5/IS/2012 � � • Section IV —Technical Specitications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 79 of 128 5/]5/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E l 54, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-yuarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT St,1RFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (l ) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (l/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (l8) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 80 of 128 5/15/2012 • • • Section I V— Technical Specifications • 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-l/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. lnclude a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. • Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-offtype, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-l/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a • reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV 2012.doc Page 81 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. � 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installec! on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1 /4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. • 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: l. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-l/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (l each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-l/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six-foot length aluminum. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 82 of 128 5/15l2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications . 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., ]-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrica) service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all • necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament pIay. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES 8� FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (l4) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric }umination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. • Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionlV_2012.doc Page 83 of 128 5/IS/2012 Pole Tl Pole T2 Pole T3 Pole T4 Pole TS Pole T6 Pole T7 Pole T8 Pole T9 Section IV — Technical Specifications existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole TS existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS existing l2 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole TS existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating ofthe new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materiats and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 84 of 128 5/15/2012 . CJ • . • Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 44.1 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). � Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". • 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SectionIV 2012.doc Page 85 of I28 b�fF�L►��Iya Section N — Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-51 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department ofTransportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traf�ic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submitta) to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, l00 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 86 of 128 5/15/2012 . C� • Section 1V —Technical Specifications • All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or • sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisar shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traf�ic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or fai}ure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin • impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionlV 2012.doc Page 87 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 3,000 psi ASTM D790 4,500 psi ASTM D790 300,000 psi ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than l4 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 88 of 128 5/15/2012 � • • Section IV —Technical Specifications • 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractar shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be . reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for • storm systems. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 89 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved eyual. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be ofthe same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samptes and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 90 of 128 5/15/2012 L� � • Section 1V —Technica] Specifications • 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLiNG OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manuiacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE • Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. l6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into l 8-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 2l-inch existing sewer. 2l'/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to • inserting the liner. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 91 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section iV — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS A1) excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by • the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 l/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width wi11 depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours • shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the l2-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS !F REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 92 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specitications • Pipe cc�nnections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene basket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It wil) be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractar will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. • 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be • factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 93 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + l inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not • more than I S% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of l.5 (one and one hal� cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1(one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, • vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durabie concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. u SectionlV_2012.doc Page 94 of 128 5/15/2012 C� • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type 1. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designatjon C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No. 4 Sieve Passing No. 8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 30 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No. ] 00 Sieve 48.6 WATER l00% 95% to 100% 80% to 100% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% l 0% to 30% 2% to 10% Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 833 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 95 of 128 5l15/2012 Section N — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION • Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (l) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air/water blast to remove all particIes from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. tn no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide al1 equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of • all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned tharoughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Seyuence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. • Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionlV_2012.doc Page 96 of 128 5!I S/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: l. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. Z. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shal} be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restare the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of inesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and • adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. � 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 97 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V—Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual � inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material sha11 fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately l50 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using I50 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press. (cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi) 365 l 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 gp 750 2 l/2 2 l/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary far the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor eyuipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionIV_2012.doc Page 98 of 128 5/15/2012 • • Section 1V — Technical Specifications • 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufaeturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new carbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/ar dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. • 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS • 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 99 of 128 5/}5/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wa11 of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole tiner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visib{e leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 l/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfWly completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS Z product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum l/2" thickness using a machine specialty designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: l. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 100 of 128 5/IS/2012 � • • Section 1V — Technicai Specifications � 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. U • 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: l. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-] 09) I S min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM G596) 28 days, I50 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement 5. Density, when applied 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Sulfate resistant 105 +/- 5 pcf Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-1 09) - 600 psi, l hr.; ] 000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, l hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a l day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum reyuirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C l09) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 S I pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. SectionIV 2012.doc Page 101 of 128 5/15l2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shal( be used according • to the manufacturer's recommendations in appiications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-5 ] pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 l08 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. • 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 102 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications • concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running • water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be l5 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge ofthe invert being no less than ]/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been • completed. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 103 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: ]. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A yuick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shatl have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C l09 t-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3, l 25 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SectionlV_2012.doc Page 104 of 128 5/IS/2012 � �� U �� U • • • Section IV —Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shail pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: l. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength Elongation Bonding Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 400% ASTM D 3574-86 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density Tensile Strength Elongation Shrinkage Toxicity 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 I 50 psi ASTM D- 4l2 250% ASTM D-3574 Less than 4% ASTM D-] 042 Non Toxic A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: SIanUShear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C l90 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1 x10 llcm/sec to 7.6x10 cm/sec at l 00% RH at 50% RH A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (befare adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionlV_2012.doc Page 105 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90%Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 AsUn C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorp[ion Test 4- 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSl after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It wi11 have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be l00% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume Color (other colors available on request) Pot Life, hrs Tensile Strength, psi, min Tensile Elongation, % Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE l:l Light Gray 1 2,000 l 0 —20 5 ],800 Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Wark shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 106 of 128 5/ I S/2012 • • � • . � � Section IV —Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystal I ization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wa11 using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liyuid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 107 of 128 5/I S/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING l . Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove a11 debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION II1, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. T'he materials specified in the SectionlV_2012.doc Page 108 of 128 5/15/2012 • C� � �J . Section tV — Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • ] Coat ofAcrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 1014. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE • Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60-80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20-40 gallons 600-900 pounds 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .45 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. • 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces mast be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionIV_2012.doc Page 109 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base Plexichrome Water 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 30 gallons 20 gallons 20 gallons l. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6} parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide unifortn application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.QS gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL l. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 110 of 128 5/IS/2012 � U • • i • • Section 1V —Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark stightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 ] 0. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. ] l. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 53.1 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of O.l 063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shal] be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4'/z inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0. ] 338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge l 0), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of O.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 '/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionIV 2012.doc Page I11 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class l, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. ] . Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to l.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at l 00% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC 1(hydrochloric acid l2 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-1 17 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionlV_2012.doc Page I 12 of 128 5/15/2�12 CJ • • Section N — Technical Specifications • 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at ] OS degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the follo�ving properties: l. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. • 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Fiex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 23 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM l OT096), maximum loss 45% • • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% SectionlV_2012.doc Page ll3 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest • dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shal! exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the saroe specifications as gabions except as follows: The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table ]. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding l5 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard • Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shal) be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of inesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assemb}ed by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled • line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 114 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specitications • Te ac}�ieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Co��nertinb wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to o}�pc�sitc faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces • at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: i • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; � Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. Al) work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionIV 2012.doc Page I 15 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposai of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the foltowing specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in arder to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL � U C � All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. • SectionIV_2012.doc Page 116 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1 V— Technica) Specifications • 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular tra�c areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. • 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. • 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sutfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionlV 2012.doc Page 117 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION • The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by l 1:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coardinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK • Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS I. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adeyuate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 118 of 128 5/15/2012 1 � �J • • Section IV —Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shali be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS l. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SectionIV_2012.doc Page ll9 of 128 5/IS/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed • that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shal} be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their • owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing harizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 120 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to l 00 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard • Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off=site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. • 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of ineasurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 121 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT • The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of • these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 122 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of exast;n� trafFic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast �1rm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shali also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard • Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traf�7c stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shal} be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 7I5 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work • per the plans. SectionIV_2012.doc Page 123 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: l. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. • C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor • utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor sha11 be required to have an International Society ofArboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by • SectionlV_2012.doc Page 124 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V — Technical Specifications • construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or t�> the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an lnternational Society ofArboriculture (1SA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". • H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards • Institute (ANSI) 200I, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 125 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV —Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts • (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar} and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. • Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.or�/TR/1999/WA]-WEBCONTENT 19990505/ http://www.section508.�ov/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It shou(d be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public • Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 126 of 128 5/15/2012 Section 1V —Technical Specifications • 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE • 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: C� Option 1- Having the power lines de-energized and visibly grounded. Option 2- Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3- Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet) Up to 50 ] 0 Over 50 to 200 I S Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 SectionIV_2012.doc Page 127 of 128 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionlV_2012.doc Page 128 of 128 5/IS/2012 • • � L_J � SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • • / 1 LJ • • Section 1Va — Supplemental Technical Specifications SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: Division 1 Section 01005 General Requirements Section O1010 Summary of Work Section 01012 Time Critical for the Completion of the Project Submittals Section OI Ol4 Construction Constraints and Sequence of Work Section O1025 Section 01040 Section O1045 Section 01050 Section O1065 Section OI095 Section Ol l00 Section O 1 l t 0 Section 01170 Section 01200 Section 01300 Section 01310 Section O1370 Section O1380 Section O1390 Section 01400 Section 01410 Section 01445 Section O1505 Section O1570 Section 01590 Section 01610 Section O1665 Section OI700 Section 01710 6349-79520/10/09/2012 Measurement and Payment Project Coordination Cutting and Patching Field Engineering Permits and Fees References Special Project Procedures Environmental Protection Procedures Additional Project Provisions Project Meetings Shop Drawings, Submittals and Samptes Progress Schedules Schedule of Values Audio Video Taping Construction Photographs Contractor Quality Control Testing and Testing Laboratory Services Pipeline Testing and Cleaning Mobilization and Demobitization Traf�ic Regulation Field Offices Material and Equipment Startup Contract Closeout Cleaning Page 1 of 4 TPA S:\CLWATER�RO 7 Plant �pa�sion ProjectNssued to Bid Specs\Sec6onlVa.doc Section 01730 Section 01740 Division 2 Section 02050 Section 02140 Section 02200 Section 02213 Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 02223 Section 02270 Section 023ll Section 02576 Section 02605 Section 02616 Section 02620 Section 02622 Section 02640 Section 02901 Section 02932 Division 3 Section 03 ] 00 Section 03200 Section 03250 Section 03300 Section 03350 Section 03600 Section 03740 Division 5 Section 05500 Division 6 Section 06100 Section 06200 Section IVa — Supplemental Technical Specifications Operation and Maintenance Data Warranties and Bonds Demolition and Modifications Dewatering and Drainage Earthwork Rock and Boulder Excavation Structural Excavation, Backfill & Compaction Trenching, Bedding, and Backfill for Pipe Excavation Below Normal Grade and Bedding Rock Refill Sedimentation and Erosion Control Excavation Support and Protection Pavement Repair and Restoration Precast and Concrete Manholes and Boxes Ductile lron Piping and Fittings Double Wall Chemical Pipe System Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Valves and Appurtenances Miscellaneous Work and Cleanup Sodding 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcement Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories Cast-In-Place Concrete Concrete Finishes Grout Modifications and Repair to Concrete Miscellaneous Metal Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Page 2 of 4 TPA S:\CLWATERUtO 1 Plant Expa�ion RojectUSSUed to Bid Specs\S¢ctionlVa.doc r� �_J • • � . u Division 7 SecU�n 07201 Section 07900 Division 8 Section 08110 Section 08 ] 20 Section 08512 Section 08522 Section 08710 Section 08800 Division 9 Section 09200 Section 09250 Section 09300 Section 09901 Section 09902 Division 10 Section ] 0200 Division 11 Section I 1204 Section 11212 Section 11213 Section 11214 Section l 1215 Section 11216 Section 11240 Section 11247 Section l 1277 Section l 1278 Section 11315 Section l 1342 Division 13 Section 13025 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 Section IVa—Supplemental Technical Specifications Batt lnsulation Joint Sealers Steel Doors and Frames Aluminum Doors and Frames Aluminum Storefront System Fixed Aluminum Windows Finish Hardware Glazing Cement Plaster (Stucco) Gypsum Wallboard Systems Tiling Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting Finish Painting Aluminum Louvers Adsorption Filter System HSC Membrane Feed Pump(s) Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pump(s) C.I.P. Pumps Harizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pump(s) Backwash Recycle Pumps Raw Water Booster Vertical Turbine Concentrate Pumps Horizontal End Suction Centrifugal Pump(s) Blend Water Pumps Cartridge Filters Liquid Polymer System Membrane Elements and Manufacturer's Services Membrane System Performance Warranty Progressive Cavity Pump Steel Storage Tanks Membrane System Equipment Page 3 of 4 TPA S:\CLWATERIRO 1 Plafrt Expanaion RojectVSSUed to Bitl Specs\SectionlVa.doc Section 13123 Section 13205 Section 13300 Section 13302 Section 13303 Section 13305 Section 13306 Section 13311 Section 13321 Section 13330 Section 13340 Section ] 3521 Division 15 Section 15062 Section 15064 Section 15066 Section 15094 Section 15100 Section 15500 Section 15860 Section 15990 Division 16 Section 16000 Section 16110 Section 16120 Section } 6150 Section 16191 Section 16370 Section 16470 Section 16481 Section 16502 Section 16600 Section 16660 Section Na — Supplemental Technical Specifications Pre-Engineered Weather Canopy Wire Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Tanks lnstrumentation and Controls - General Provisions Testing Instrumentation and Controls - Training Control Descriptions Applications Engineering Services Digital Hardware and Equipment Fiber Optic Cabling and Equipment Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment Instruments Filter Media Replacement Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Plastic Pipe and Fittings Stainless Stee1 Pipe and Fittings Pipe Hangers and Supports Valves and Appurtenances HVAC Fans Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Electrical - General Provisions Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports Wires and Cables Motors Misceltaneous Equipment Variable Freyuency Drives Panelboards 480 Volt Motor Control Center Modifications Lighfiing Protection System Underground System Grounding System 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 Page 4 of 4 TPA S:\CLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Ezpansion Prqec1115sueO W Bid SpecsW^ectionlVa.tloc . • r � U � OO 2012 CDM Smith Ail (r��l�t� Reserved SECTION 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PARTl-GENERAL l .O1 SCOPE AND INTENT A. Description 1. The work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment, and the performance of all work included in this Contract. The summary of the work is presented in Section 01010. B. Work Included 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, superintendence, quality control, materials, power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and other means of construction necessary or proper for perfornung and completing the work. He shall obtain and pay far all required permits. He shall perform and complete the work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the OWNER, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall clean up the work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the work � at his own cost, risk, and as approved by the ENGINEER. 2. The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, at the direction of the ENGINEER, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the wark required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the ENGINEER notwithstanding. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall remove, demolish and dispose of all equipment, piping, asphalt, rock and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and required to complete the work. No additional payment will be made for additional demolition or disposal work, not specifically specified on the plans as required, to complete the work. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in accordance with applicable locaI, state, and federal codes and regulations. C. Public Utility lnstallations and Structures 1. Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the OWNER, other governmental bodies or privately owned, used to provide gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work shall be deemed included hereunder. 2. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public or private utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their • completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make his own 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 OOS-1 TPA UTpasvAilsac\CLWATERWO 7 Planl Ezpensian ProjecPlsaued to Bid Specs101005.doe O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition and extent of all such i installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all public or private utility installations and structures from damage during the work. Access across any buried installation or structure shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the Utility Owner. The CONTRACTOR shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. All existing utilities damaged by the CONTRACTOR which are shown on the Plans or have been located in the field by the utility shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR, at his expense, as directed by the Utility Owner. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 4. Public utility installations or structures owned ar controlled by the OWNER ar other governmental body which are shown on the Plans to be removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the CONTRACTOR shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefor. 5. Where public utiiity installations or structures owned or controlled by the OWNER or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications or have been located in the field by the utility, and when, at the direction of the ENGINEER, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be approved, in writing by the ENGINEER, for the CONTRACTOR to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously and the CONTRACTOR shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement or • rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the CONTRACTOR, it will be in accordance with the General Conditions. Damage to any utilities, whether shown on the Drawings or not, which, in the opinion of the OWNER, is caused by carelessness on the part of the CONTRACTOR shall be repaired at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Any delays ensuing from this damage will be considered inexcusable. 6. All OWNER and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities which may be affected by the wark will be informed in writing by the CONTRACTOR within two weeks after the execution of the Contract or Contracts covering the work. Such notice will set out, in general, and direct attention to the responsibilities of the OWNER and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities for such installations and structures as may be affected by the work and will be accompanied by one set of Plans and Specifications covering the wark under such Contract or Contracts. 7. In addition to the general notice given, the CONTRACTOR shall give written notice to OWNER and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of his proposed construction operations, at least one (1) week in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work. This can be accomplished by making the appropriate contact with the "Underground Utility Notification Center for Excavators (Call Sunshine)." 8. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accompIished by the CONTRACTOR as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Utility Owner at no additional cost. 1.02 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Plans • 1. The Plans referred to in the Contract Documents bear the general project name and number as shown in the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement). 6349-79520/10/9/ 12 � 1 ��J—ZTPA\lTpasvAllseclCLWATER1R01 Plant Ezpansion PrqectllssueC to Bid SpefsW1005.doc OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2. When obtaining data and information from the Plans, fgures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to small scale drawings. B. Copies Fumished to CONTRACTOR I. After the Contract has been executed, the CONTRACTOR will be furnished with one set of contract documents. Additional copies of the Plans and Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the CONTRACTOR at cost of production. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish each of the subcontractors, manufacturers, and material suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. C. Supplementary Drawings 1. When, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifcations pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the ENGINEER and five paper prints thereof will be given to the CONTRACTOR. D. CONTRACTOR to Check Plans and Data 1. CONTRACTOR shalt verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Plans, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data received from the ENGINEER, and shall notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein as soon as found and in a timely manner. CONTRACTOR shall get his own geotechnical information if he/she deems it necessary. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility for • unsatisfactory work, faulty construction or improper operation resulting therefrom nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the ENGINEER, should such errors or omissions be discovered. All schedules are given for the convenience of the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR and are not guaranteed to be complete or final. The CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers 1. No manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of the ENGINEER, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance. 2. All communications with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the CONTRACTOR, uriless the CONTRACTOR shall request, in writing to the ENGINEER, that the MANUFACTURER or subcontractor deal directly with the ENGINEER. Any such communications shall not in any way release the CONTRACTOR from his full responsibility under this Contract. 3. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. B. Delivery, Storage and Handling 1. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most speedy and • uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work within the allotted time. The CONTRACTOR shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any other contractor, subcontractor or the OWNER. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 OOS-3TPA \\Tpasvr0l\sec�CLWATERV20 1 Plant Ezpansion Prqecnlssuetl ro Bi0 Specs\07005.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver materials and equipment in MANUFACTURER'S original • unopened and undamaged containers with legible labeling. Materials and equipment shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent damage from environment and construction operations. Handling shall be in accordance with MANUFACTURER's requirements. C. Tools and Accessories 1. CONTRACTOR shall have the MANUFACTURER, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Special tools are defined as any tools specifically manufactured for use with the MANUFACTURER's equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR when specified in individual specification sections. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the MANUFACTURER's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. D. Installation of Equipment 1. The CONTRACTOR shall have on hand proper equipment and machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in work of this character. 2. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Plans, unless approved otherwise by the ENGINEER during installation. All equipment shall be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for • satisfactory operation and shall be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily between the various units. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as approved by the ENGINEER and made of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation shall be furnished. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, and shall properly bed in non-shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces coming in contact with concrete or grout shall be coated as specified in Division 9. E. Service of MANUFACTURER's Engineer 1. The Contract prices for materials and equipment furnished under this Contract shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced Engineer or Superintendent (as required by equipment specifications sections) who shall represent the MANUFACTURER and shall assist the CONTRACTOR, when required, to install, adjust, test and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. The OWNER shall be responsible for costs for services by MANUFACTURER's representatives for equipment pre-purchased by OWNER. Prior to placing the equipment in operation, such Engineer or Superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required and specified by the ENGINEER to prove that such equipment is properly installed and in satisfactory operating condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the OWNER in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O I OOS-YTPA HTpawr011sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Ficpansion Prqectlissuetl to Bid Spers1010D5.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General I. lnspection and testing of materials will be performed by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise specified. 2. For tests specified to be made by the CONTRACTOR, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Six (6) copies of the reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the ENGINEER as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 3. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the ENGINEER that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the CONTRACTOR will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equip- ment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the OWNER. 4. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be eonducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, ar the IEEE, or as stated herein. The most stringent test will be used in case of any discrepancy. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the OWNER formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs • 1. The costs of inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price. 3. Materials and equipment submitted by the CONTRACTOR as the eyuivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the ENGINEER for compliance. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the expenditures incurred in making such tests on materials and equipment which are rejected for non-compliance. • C. Preliminary Field Tests of Equipment l. As soon as conditions pernut, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the reyuirements of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments and replacements required. The furnishing CONTRACTOR shall assist in the preliminary field tests as applicable. D. Final Field Tests 1. Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to aeceptance tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for aIl acceptance tests, at no additional cost to the OWNER. The Furnishing Supplier shall assist in the final field tests as applicable. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 � 1 ��S—STPA \\TpasvNt\sec\CLWATERlRO 1 Plant Ezpansion Projecl�lssued to Bid Specs\01005_doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Responsibility for Temporary Structures 1. In accepting the Contract, the CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for the sufficiency and safety of all temporary structures or work and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance or operation and will indemnify and save harmless the OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Sub-consultants from all claims, suits or actions and damages or costs of every description arising by reason of failure to comply with the above provisions. B. Temporary Fences 1. If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence or part thereof, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, if so approved by the ENGINEER, provide a suitable temporary fence which shall be maintained until the permanent fence is replaced at the CONTRACTOR'S cost and risk. The ENGINEER shall approve the material to replace the permanent fence. 1.06 SAFETY � A. Accident Prevention 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the condition of the project site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the Work in accordance with the General Conditions, Construction Agreement, General Terms and Conditions Exhibit H. Precautions shall be exercised at all times for the protection of person and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the U.S. Department of Labor Safety and • Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (PL 91-596), and under Section 107 of the contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL-54), except where state and local safety standards exceed the federal requirements and except where state safety standards have been approved by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, shall be complied with. B. First Aid l. The CONTRACTOR shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access thereto at all times when people are employed on the work. 1.07 LINES AND GRADES A. Grade 1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Plans, or as approved by the ENGINEER. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the CONTRACTOR. B. Safeguarding Marks 1. The CONTRACTOR shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of reestablishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes and marks. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments • and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, shall bear the cost of reestablishing them if disturbed or destroyed: 6349-79520/ l 0/9/ 12 01005-6TPA \\TpasvAllseclCLWATERV20 1 Planl Fxpansion PrqecNlssued to Bid Spe�x\01005.doc u • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Datum Plane ]. All elevations indicated or specified refer to the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING A. Responsibility 1. The CONTRACTOR shaIl also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the progress of the work, except as specifically described in the Plans and Specifications. The cost of protection, replacement in their original locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not shown on the Plans, and the removal, relocation and reconstruction of such items called for on the Plans or specified shall be included in the various Contract Items and no separate payments will be made therefor. Where such public and private property, structures of any kind and appurte- nances thereto are not shown on the Plans and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the work, payment therefor will be made as provided for in the General Conditions. 2. CONTRACTOR is expressly advised that the protection of buildings, structures, tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent and in the vicinity of his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be performed by and be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 3. CONTRACTOR shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and record by notes, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of the OWNER and/or ENGINEER. This does not preclude the CONTRACTOR of conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for information. 4. Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the CONTRACTOR shall advise the ENGINEER of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work or which performance of the project work will affect. B. Protection of Trees 1. All trees and shrubs within the limits of clearing which are to be preserved (as shown on the Drawings) shall be adequately protected by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with City of Clearwater regulations. No excavated materials shall be placed within the dripline of any tree or shrub, so as to injure such trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed by negligence of the CONTRACTOR or his employees shall be replaced in accordance with City of Clearwater reguIations by him with new stock of similar size and age, at proper season and at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR, and maintained until established. C. Restoration of Fences 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of the work shall be replaced or repaired by the CONTRACTOR and shall be left in as good a condition as before the starting of the work. The manner in which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work shall be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. The cost of all labor, materials, equipment, and work for the replacement or repair of any fence shall be deemed included in the appropriate Contract Item or items, or if no specific Item is provided therefore, as part of the overhead cost of the work, and no additional payment will be made therefore. Private fences removed from within the Right-of-Way shall be replaced as described above at the Right-of-Way line. 6349-79520/10/9/12 �71 Q�S— / TPA l\Tpasvr011sec\CLWATERlRO 1 Plant Ezpansan Prqecttlssued lo Bitl Spers\O1�S.doc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC A. Barriers and Lights 1. During the prosecution of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall put up and maintain at all times such barriers and lights as will effectually prevent accidents. The CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable barricades, lights, "danger" or "caution" signs at all places where the work causes obstructions or constitutes in any way a hazard to the plant personnel in accordance with state and local requirements. B. Smoke Prevention 1. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the production and emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be permitted. C. Noise 1. The CONTRACTOR shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the e�chaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with mufflers. The CONTRACTOR shall strictly observe all local regulations and ordinances covering noise control. 2. Except in the event of an emergency, work shall be done within the regular working hours specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. If the proper and efficient prosecution of the wark requires operations during the night, the written permission of the OWNER shall be obtained before starting such items of the work. • D. Access to Public Services 1. Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire hydrants, valves or manholes, or access • required by emergency vehicles and/or personnel. E. Dust Prevention 1. The CONTRACTOR shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic by keeping the roads and/or construction areas sprinkled with water at all times. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. The work must be done by competent workmen skilled in the trade required by the restoration. 1.11 CLEANING A. During Construction 1. During construction of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, keep the site of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and temporary structures when no further need therefor develops. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible and liable for all spillage and incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related to repair and maintenance resulting from damages thereo£ • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 � 1 �OS—OTPA \\TpawrOt�seciCLWATERU20 7 Plent Ezpansion Prqedllswed to Bid Specs\Ot005.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All 1?��rE,« Keserved • F3. Final Cleaning 1. At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the CONTRACTOR shall be promptly taken away, and he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall tharoughly clean all equipment and materials installed by him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean, polished and new operating condition. 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS A_ Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion 1. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water courses and drainage ditches. 2. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits and correct any erosion problems as determined by the ENGINEER which results from his construction operations. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall vacuum clean all new and existing drainage facilities and discharge points affected by construction prior to final acceptance or OWNER occupancy. B. Protection of Waters 1. The CONTRACTOR shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of in waters as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection, South Florida Water Management District, Environmental Protection • Commission, or United States Army Corps of Engineers. C. Existing Facilities 1. This work is being conducted on an operational water treatment plant and shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as described in these Specifications. Plant shutdowns will only be permitted on a limited basis as further described in specification section 01014. D. Use of Chemicals 1. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of EPA, NSF or USDA. E. Cooperation with Other Contractors and Forces 1. During progress of work under this Contract, it may be necessary for other contractors and persons employed by the OWNER to work in or about the site. The OWNER reserves the right to put such other contractors to work and to afford such access to the site of the work to be performed hereunder at such times as the OWNER deems proper. The CONTRACTOR shall not impede or interfere with the work of such other contractors engaged in or about the work and shall so arrange and conduct his work that such other contractors may complete their work at the earliest date possible. CONTRACTOR shall allow access through the project site by other contractors employed by OWNER. F. Temporary Utilities 1. Water: The CONTRACTOR may use OWNER's existing fire hydrants as a source of water • for construction at the CONTRACTOR'S cost for water use during normal construction activities such as dust control, demolition, concrete mix, general and yard piping cleaning, etc. For process equipment and disinfection activities, such as process piping disinfection, 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 1 Z O I OOS�9TPA HTpasvr0l�sec\CLWATERU20 1 PIan1 Eepansion Prqadllssued to Bid Specs\Ot005.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ground storage tank filling and functional testing, the CITY will provide the water at no • charge to the CONTRACTOR.CONTRACTOR shall be required to make a deposit to the OWNER for temporary meter. Deposit shall be refundable upon return of ineter. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for securing water service for field office. 2. Light and Power: Provide without additional cost to the OWNER temporary lighting and power facilities required for the proper construction and inspection of the Work. If, in the ENGINEER's opinion, these facilities are inadequate, do NOT proceed with any portion of the Work affected thereby. Maintain temporary lighting and power until the Work is accepted. 3. Heat: Provide temporary heat, whenever required, for work being performed during cold weather to prevent freezing of concrete, water pipes, and other damage to the Work or existing facilities. 4. Sanitary Facilities: Provide sufficient sanitary facilities for construction personnel. Prohibit and prevent nuisances on the site of the Work or on adjoining property. Discharge any employee who violates this rule. Abide by all environmental regulations or laws applicable to the W ork. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 OOS—I OTPA \\TpasvNi�sec\CLWATERViO 1 Plant Ezpansbn Prqecfllssued to Bid Spacs101005.doc � • . �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��hts Reserved SECTION O1010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART]-GENERAL 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. All of the Work of this Contract is located in easements, rights-of-way, or on property owned by the City of Clearwater. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, shop drawings and incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the work complete, in place, and ready for continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, cleanup, replacements and restoration required as a result of damages caused during this construction. C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools and tabor which is reasonably and properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the wark in a substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed b:y the CONTRACTOR without additional compensation, whether specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not. D. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all municipal, county, state, federal, and other codes which are applicable to the proposed construction work. 1.03 SLIMMARY OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, eyuipment and incidentals required and construct the Reverse Osmosis Plant No. ] Expansion Project in its entirety as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: l. Expansion of the City of Clearwater RO Plant No. 1 to increase capacity from 3.0 mgd to 4.5 mgd. Major components of the expansion include the following with a11 associated piping, electrical and instrumentation components required: a. One (1) new raw water boost pump b. Two (2) new arsenic adsorption units c. One (1) new spent backwash water recovery system d. One (1) new cartridge filter housing e. Three (3) new membrane feed pumping units (two installed and one spare) f. 420 new high surface area reverse osmosis membrane elements for installation in the existin�, reverse osmosis skids g. One (1) new concentrate pump station h. Three (3) modified and one ( l) new biended water transfer pump i. Two (2) new 3.0 mg ground storage tanks. 2. The expansion and bid alternates will also include structural, architectural and HVAC modifications, as indicated in the contract documents. 6349-79520/10/9/12 � 1 0 I �-1 TPA\\TpasvNilsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Ezparaim ProjectNssuetl to eitl SpecsW1010.d�c �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. All work to be done under this Contract shall be done with minimum inconvenience to the public and the existing electrical, telephone, stormwater, potable water, reclaimed water, and sewerage systems. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his work with the OWNER's and ENGINEER such that the existing or future facilities are maintained to the maximum extent possible. B. Construct work in stages to accommodate the OWNER's use of the premises during the construction period; coordinate the construction schedule and operations with the ENGINEER. C. See the requirements of Section Ol Ol4 regarding work sequence. 1.OS SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. The work, or any separable parts thereof, identified herein shall be deemed substantially completed at such time that all incidental requirements necessary to enable the OWNER to continuously and successfully utilize the work or separable part thereof, far the purposes of which it is intended are completed. B. The contract times of substantial completion for the work shall be as identified in the Agreement. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION AREAS A. Work areas shall be limited on the property limits and easements shown on the Drawings. C J B. CONTRACTOR shall limit his use of the construction areas for Work and for storage, to allow for: • l. Work by other contractors. 2. OWNER use. 3. Access by other property owners' to their facilities. C. Coordinate use of work site with ENGINEER. D. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of Products under this Contract, stored on the site. Assume full responsibility for adequacy of plant and equipment. E Move any stored Products, under CONTRACTOR's control which interfere with operations of the OWNER or separate CONTRACTORS. F. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. G. CONTRACTOR shall at all times conduct his operations as to insure the least inconvenience to the general public. H. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work of all subcontractors. 1.07 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Specifications The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements which govern the work. Products and Execution modify and • supplement these by detailed requirements of the work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 �� l �—G TPA\lTpasvr011sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ Exparuion Prqec111ssued to Bid Specs\OtOtO.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • • • B. Intent All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Plans in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Plans or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as though it were specifically delineated or described. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. The inclusion of the General Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in the General part of the Specifications is only for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related Specification Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/l 2 Q l �� '3 TPA\\Tpasvr011sec1CLWATER�RO 1 Plan[ Expa�ion PrqeIXllssueG ro Bi0 SpecsV01010 Aoc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ l 2 0� 01 �—Y TPA�1TDasvAt�sec\CLWATEF21R0 1 Plani Ezparsian ProjecNSSUed [o Bid Specs\OtOtO.doc • • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECT[ON 01012 TIME CRITICAL FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT SUBMITTALS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS 1NCLUDED A. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a complete listing of all submittals required for the project noting the number of each submittal and the date each submittai is to be submitted in accordance with Section Ol 300. CONTRACTOR shall identify submittals that are time critical to completion of the project. The listinQ shall be submitted within five (5) days following the Award of Contract and shall be a prerequisite to the first partial payment. The submittals identified as time critical to completion of the project shall be submitted to the ENGINEER within 30 days of Project Award date in accordance with Section 01200. The submittal of Time Critical submittals are a prerequisite to an�pa�ment or partial payment for mobilization. 1. Consult with ENGINEER for preparation of submittat register. B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in other sections of these Specifications. C. The requirements for all submittals shall be as specified in Section O1300. 1.02 TIME CRITICAL SUMBITTALS iNCLUDED A. At a minimum, the following Time Critical for the completion of the project submittals shall be provided to the ENGINEER within 30 days of Project Award date plus any additional time critical submittals identified by the CONTRACTOR: 1. Ground Storage Tanks and any associated piping, valves, tie-ins to existing systems and appurtenances. 2. Variable Frequency Drives 3. Membranes 4. Adsorption Filters 5. Decant Basins 6. Raw Water Booster Pump 7. Disinfection Plan 8. Metal Building Analysis 9. Other as identified by CONTRACTOR B. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the construction scheduie and timely completion of the project and identifying and submitting all Time Critical submittal regardless of the list provided in paragraph A above. PART 2 PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION - (NOT USED) 6349-79520/10/09/12 END OF SECTION � 1 0� 2— 1 TPA �\Tpasvr0llseclCLWATERU20 1 Plant Eq�ansbn Projeclllssue0 to Bitl Specsb1012.tloc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) . • 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/12 � 1 � 12�2 TPA �\Tpas�rOtlsec�CLWATER1R01 PIaM E�ansbn ProjecTlssued lo Bitl Specs�A1012 tlx 0 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�;hts Reserved • SECTION OI014 CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS AND SEQUENCE OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The RO Plant No. 1 is an operational Water Treatment Plant and water production must be continuous during the construction period with minimal Piant shutdowns as specified herein. B. In general, no work which affects or could affect plant operations or plant performance shall be performed without a specific detailed plan by the CONTRACTOR approved in advance by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. All requests for plant system diversions, shutdowns, modifications, etc. shall be in writing to the OWNER's on-site representative with a copy to the ENGINEER. C. The construction progress schedule required under Section 01310 shall reflect the conditions presented in this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS A. Plant Operational Constraints: The constraints to performance of the work required, because water production must be maintained with minimal plant shutdowns, are identified in this • section. Cumulative plant operational constraints which substantially delay the CONTRACTOR beyond the constraints identified in this section shall be evaluated in accordance with Section III, General Conditions. These constraints shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's progress schedule. B. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The constraints to performance of the work required because of special sequencing with other parts of the work, calendar time constraints and special testing, commissioning and work procedures are identified in this Section. These constraints are in addition to the standard procedural constraints such as shop drawings, testing, commissioning, training, etc. and the above plant operational constraints. These constraints shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's progress schedule. C. Special Conditions: Certain special conditions, if any, related to performance of the work are identified in this section. If they affect the scheduling of the work, they shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S progress schedule. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01310, shop drawings showing details of all temporary services, bypasses and tie-ins to existing systems. B. Submit a Disinfection Plan, in accordance with AWWA 653 and AWWA 651, showing the details of disinfection, testing, sampling and reporting. 1.04 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENT • A. Give a minimum of 7 days advance notice to the ENGINEER of each component proposed for shutdown or disruption, all of which shall be subject to OWNER approval and limitations_ No 6349-79520/ l 0/9/ I Z 01 O l 4-1 TPA S:\CLWATERV20 1 Plan[ Expansion Projedllssued to Bid Specs10101�.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved major process changes will be approved by the OWNER that begin on Friday, Saturday or � Sunday. l .OS T1E-IN PREPARATIONS A. Where new systems are to be tied-into existing systems, which are required to be shutdown to make the tie-in, the new system shall be fully prepared in anticipation of the tie-in to minimize downtime of the existing system. The new materials and equipment shall be fully tested and disinfected to the maximum extent possible prior to the tie-in. Measurements shall be taken to ensure that the new materials and equipment are of the correct size, length and alignment to complete the tie-in. CONTRACTOR shall supply a list of all materials and equipment needed to accomplish the tie-in and shall review the proposed tie-in with the ENGINEER and OWNER. l. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a Disinfection Plan for the new system and the tie-ins into existing systems in accordance with AWWA 653 and AWWA 651. 2. Once initiated, work shall continue until the tie-in is completed. Ensure that all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work are available at the site of the tie-in prior to the initiation of work. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site access for construction under this contract must be coordinated with City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department. Construction activities will be occurring at the Sid Lickton Park ball fields at the same time as construction activities for this project. It is anticipated that demolition activities and tree removal associated with the ball field renovation project will have been completed at the start of this project. B. The existing site does not have space to accommodate Contractor staging areas. The Contractor • will be responsible for identifying and securing additional staging areas. No staging or storage areas are permitted on the Sid Lickton Park property without prior written consent from the City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department. C. All staging areas not within the fenced confines of RO Plant No. 1 are to be protected and secured using 6 foot temporary chain link fencing. D. The Phase I construction within the Sid Lickton Park as shown on the Drawings is anticipated to be ongoing during the construction of this project and the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his construction activities with the construction of the ballfield modifications by others. The Phase II construction within the Sid Lickton Park as shown on the Drawings is anticipated to provide a cleared open area for use by the CONTRACTOR for ingress/egress to the RO Plant No. 1 until October l, 2013. The CONTRACTOR shall limit all ingress and egress to Sid Lickton Park from N. Saturn Ave. The Phase Il area as shown on the Drawings must be restored to grade by October 1, 2013. After October l, 2013, all ingress and egress to the RO Plant No.l site shall be via Palmetto Street. All work areas and equipment within Sid Lickton Park shall be secured using 6 foot temporary chain link fencing. E. If CONTRACTOR is required to coordinate his/her activities in the interface or common areas with other contractors and the utilities, CONTRACTOR must submit to the ENGINEER a description and schedule as to how the common areas will be utilized, recognizing the required coordination with other contractors and the facility operators. F. When access through construction areas must be disrupted, provide alternate acceptable access • for the plant operators or other contractors. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 � 1 � 14-2 TPA S:ICLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion RojecNissued fo Bid Specs101014.doc • • u � �'ti i ^ CDM Smith : i' . .? i : � , � � Reserved c;. Water use and water purchase by the CONTRACTOR is discussed in Section 01005. F� During Start-Up Testing, CONTRACTOR shall make available the manpower, equipment and manufacturer's representatives required to make any necessary testing, adjustments and training of OWNER'S personnel. 1.07 GENERAL SEQUENCE OF WORK AND RO PLANT TEMPORARY SHUTDOWNS A. Several areas of construction under this contract must be coordinated with the Plant Operating Personnel and accomplished in a logical order to maintain the process flow through the plant and to allow construction to be completed within the time allowed by Contract Documents. Coordinate the activities with the other contractors, if any, to allow orderly and timely completion of all the work. B. Various interconnections within the plant wil) depend on the closure of various valves. Valves may not seal properly. Coordinate with the Plant Chief Operator for the closure of any valve and provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to the Plant Chief Operator. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any corrective measure of temporary facilities necessary to attain the shut-off needed to perform the work at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Various interconnections within the p(ant may require temporary partial or temporary full plant shutdowns. Make every effort necessary to minimize the shutdown time and coordinate with the Plant Chief Operator and utility authorities prior to attempting any such shutdown. l. A full plant shutdown for no more than two (2) calendar days for the demolition and relocation of yard piping associated with the construction of the South Ground Starage Tank. 2. A full plant shutdown for no more than ten (] 0) calendar days for the completion of the following during the ]0 day period: a. Installation of the isolation valve at the Blended Water Pump No 4 discharge. b. Surge Relief Valve relocation and piping modifications at the Raw Water Booster Pump Station discharge header including Decant line tie-in at the Raw Water Booster discharge header. c. Adsorption System tie-ins to the buried raw water piping and backwash piping.. d. Adsorption System tie-in upstream of the blend water valve. e. Installation of Breaker in Switchboard for the Concentrate Pump Station 3. A partial plant shutdown for no more than one hundred (100) calendar days of the RO Membrane process for the completion of the following during the 100 day period. The plant will continue to produce water at lower rates through the existing Dual Media Filters with the RO membrane process offline. a. Demolition of existing pipeline and equipment as shown on the Drawings b. Construction of atl equipment and piping within the RO Building as shown on the Drawings. c. Installation of VFDs and all conduit and wiring for Membrane Feed Pumps d. MCC connection of new starters (Backwash recycle pumps, CIP Transfer Pump, exhaust fans) e. Connections to Yard Piping f. Modifications to membrane skids and installation of new membrane elements. g. All associated changes to electrical instrumentation and control systems. 1.08 PLANT OPERATIONAL CONSTRAINTS, CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING CONSTRAINTS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/ 12 01014-3 TPA S:\CLWATERlR01 Plant Ezpansion Project�lssuetl to Bid Specs\01014.doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Stormwater Facilities • 1. Plant Operational Constraint: None. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The co,nstruction of the stormwater facilities must take place prior to the addition of any impervious areas or changes in grading to the site. 3. Special Conditions: Tie-in to existing control structures at north end of site. B. South Ground Storage Tank Plant Operational Constraint: The existing yard piping demolition and modifications will require temporary full plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.06 and ].07. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The construction of the South Ground Storate Tank must be completed and fully operational before the existing ground storage tank and any associated piping to allow the existing ground storage tank to remain in service may be demolished. Special Conditions: Settlement Monitoring is specified in Section 13205. C. North Ground Storage Tank Plant Operational Constraint: None. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The demoiition of the existing ground storage tank and relocation of adjacent chemical pipelines must be completed prior to construction. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with 72-hours notice that the site is clear and provide access for the OWNER'S geotechnical professional to conduct geotechnical borings. Special Conditions: Demolition should proceed from west to east to allow access far the • OWNER's geotechnical professional to begin the field investigation while the clearing is being completed. Construction of the North Tank floor may not begin until2 weeks of the date that notice was provided to the OWNER that the site was clear. Settlement Monitoring is specified in Section 13205. D. Backwash Holding Basin 1. Plant Operational Constraint: The time the basin may be offline shall be limited to 2-days to avoid a full plant shutdown. CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours notice to the OWNER for the coordination of filter backwash sequence. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Connections to the tank must be complete before the startup of the Decant System, RO Membranes/Skid Modifications, and Adsorption System. 3. Special Conditions: None. E. Raw Water Booster Station 1. Plant Operational Constraint: The existing surge relief valve relocation will reyuire temporary full plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.07. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Construction of modifications must be completed prior to startup of new RO Membranes. 3. Special Conditions: None. F. Adsorption System 1. Plant Operational Constraint: Adsorption System tie-in to the buried raw water piping and Adsorption System tie-in to the blend water valve will require temporary full plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.07. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 01014-4 TPA S]GLWATER�RO 1 Plan[ 6cpansian ProjeclllssueC to Bid Specs101014.tloc � 2012 CDM Smith � All Rights Reserved 2. Construct�on Schedulmg Constra�nts: Construct�on of mod�ficat�ons must be completed prior to startup of new RO Membranes. Decant System must be completed prior to startup of Adsorption System to accept spent backwash_ 3. Special Conditions: Short Term and Long Term Performance Test in accordance with 11204. G. Decant System and Polymer System 1. Plant Operational Constraint: Decant line tie-in at the Raw Water Booster Pump Station discharge header. Will require temporary full plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.07. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Construction of modifications must be completed prior to startup of new Adsorption System 3. Specia] Conditions: None H. Blend Water Pump 1. Plant Operational Constraint: Installation of the isolation valve at the Blended Water Pump will require temporary full plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.07. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The OWNER's spare pump shall be modified as specified in Section 11216, installed, tested and disinfected prior to the removal of the existing Blend Water Pumps. The removal and modification ofthe Blend Water Pumps shall be schedule to take place one at a time so that there are always three (3) pumps in service (2 operating 1 standby). All four pumps must be completed and fully operationai prior to operation of the RO Membrane modifications to produce 4.5 mgd. All Blend Water Pump modifications shall be fully completed and priar to the demolition of the existing • Ground Storage Tank. 3. Special Conditions: None Concentrate Pump Station Plant Operational Constraint: None. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Construction of modifications must be completed prior to startup of new RO Membranes. Special Conditions: The Concentrate Pipeline discharging from the Concentrate Pump Station may not be able to accept concentrate flow and testing of the pumps may be necessary by recirculation of flow back into the wetwell. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary connections and appurtenances to perform the testing for the pumps as specified in Section 11215. RO Building Equipment 1. Plant Operational Constraint: RO Membrane Process will require temporary partial plant shutdown as specified in paragraph 1.07. The plant can operate at reduced production rates by isolating the RO process from the flow path. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Construction of all modifications must be completed prior to startup of new RO Membranes. The RO Membranes shall be the last process equipment installed. 3. Special Conditions: Manufacturers Performance Warranty in accordance with 11278. Existing membranes become the property ofthe OWNER. K. Dual Media Pressure Filters Media Replacement l. Plant Operational Constraint: Only One pressure filter may be taken out of service at one • time to avoid full plant shutdown. CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48-hours notice of the filter media exchange for each filter. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: None 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 �� Q� Y—S TPA SiGLWATER�R01 Plant Fxpansion RojecNSSUed ro Bid SpecslOtON.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3. Special Conditions: None L. Sanitary Sewer Manhole Modifications 1. Plant Operational Constraint: RO Building sanitary sewer, Concentrate, CIP and filter backwash are currently conveyed to the City's sanitary sewer system via the existing manhole in Sid Lickton Park just east of the Plant. Connection to the Sanitary Sewer System shall be maintained all times through the construction duration. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: Sanitary sewer pipe modifications and tie-in must be complete prior to modifications to manhole in Sid Lickton Park. 3. Special Conditions: The existing sampling equipment within the existing manhole in Sid Lickton Park shall be relocated as shown on the Drawings and made fully functional within 7-days of removal. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 48-hours notification to the OWNER and coardinate construction activities with other contractors on the Sid Lickton Park. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 01 O l 4-6 TPA S:ICLWATERIRO 1 Poan[ Exparrsion PrqecNSSUed [o Bid Spec5101014.doc � • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • • i (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 �� 14� / TPA S1CLWATER�R01 PIaM Ezpansion ProjectUSwed to Bid SpecsW1014.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved SECTION O1025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL l .01 SCOPE A. This section includes measurement and payment criteria applicable to portions ofthe Work performed under unit price, lump sum, ar allowance payment methods. 1.02 IJNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work and verified by the ENGINEER shall determine payment. B. If the actual Work requires more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide the required quantities at the unit sum/prices contracted. 1.03 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement Devices: 1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified for use in the State of Florida by the applicable • state Weights and Measures department within the past year. 2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State of Florida Weights and Measures department within the past year. u B. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. C. Measurement of quantities expressed as volume shall be based upon a neat plan line projection to the work limits as determined by survey record drawings for each item with no additional allowances for shrinkage, swelling or creep. 1. In computing volumes of excavation and fill, the average end area method or other methods, acceptable to the ENGINEER, will be used. D. Measurement of quantities expressed as area shall be based upon a horizontal, planimetric projection to the work limits as determined by survey record drawings for each item with no additional allowances for slopes. E. Measurement of linear items such as piping will be for quantities actually field installed to the specified work limits, based upon surveyed stations recorded along the straight or curved centerline of each respective item. F. Stipulated Sum/Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 6349-79520/10/9/2012 �IOZJ—1 TPAUTpasvNtbec\CLWATEfMOtPIaMEapansionPrqecNssuedtoBidSpecs10f025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for each lump sum and unit price stated in the itemized bid schedule shall constitute full compensation for a11 required labor, products, tools, equipment, material, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work required to complete all work specified under that particular item inctuding cleanup, and all costs for doing related work as set forth in these Specifications and /or the on the Contract Drawings or implied in carrying out their intent. 1. The price bid for each lump sum and unit price stated in the itemized bid schedule shall be deemed to include overhead and profit and taxes. CONTRACTOR'S Insurance is not a separate pay item and shall be included in the price for each lump sum and unit price stated in the itemized bid schedule. 2. Relevant specification section references are provided to facilitate pricing. However, Contractor shall, using his own judgment, determine which sections are relevant to each pay item prior to submitting a comprehensive price that covers all Work identified in the Contract Documents. B. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis ofthe actual measurements and quantities accepted by the ENGINEER multiplied by the unit sum/price for Wark which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. C. Requests for payment shall be in accordance with City of Clearwater Technical Specifications Section IV. • D. Payment will be made to the limits as specified in the Contract Dacuments. If the constructed • limits are less than the specified limit, payment will be made to the actual limits of construction as shown on the As Bui1t Drawings. Payment for quantities that exceed the specified contract limits will only be made with the approval of the ENGINEER. The payment for quantities that exceed the contract quantities can only be obtained through an approved Change Order before contract quantities are exceeded. E. No partia] payments shall be made for the installation of items that have not been tested and approved. F. No partial payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR for material delivered to the site. G. Upon installation, satisfactory testing and final restoration, payment will be made for the quantiry of materials actually installed in the work. OWNER will not pay for material in excess of what is actually installed in the work. N. Payment for unit price items (all items except Lump Sum items) will be made monthly until completion of each unit price item based on quantity estimated by CONTRACTOR and verified by ENGINEER. Final payment will be based on quantity calculated from As-Built Drawings. l.OS VARIATIONS IN ESTIMATED QUANTITIES A. The quantities given in the Contract Documents are approximate only, and are given as a basis for the uniform comparison of bids, and City does not expressly ar by implication agree that the actual amount of work will correspond therewith. B. The CONTRACTOR must provide, for Unit Price Work, a proposed contract price determined on • the basis of estimated quantities required for each item. The estimated quantities of items are not 6349-79520/10/09/ 12 � l 025-2 TPA V1TpawNt\sec\CLWATER\RO 1 Plani Fxpa�ion ProjeclVssued to Bi0 Specs\01025.doc �O 201 ? CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing bids. Each such unit price will be deemed to include an amount for overhead, profit and indirect costs for each separately defined item. C. An increase or decrease in the quantity for any unit price item shall not be regarded as sufficient grounds for an increase or decrease in the price of the items. 1.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace defective Work, or portions of defective Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the ENGINEER will direct a remedy in accordance with the requirements of the Agreement. 1.07 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A. Payment wil) not be made for any of the following: I. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected Products. 7. Submittal and approval of Schedule Update. . 1.08 SCHEDULE OF VALUES � A. Approval of Schedule: Submit for approval a preliminary schedule of values, in duplicate, for all of the Work. Prepare preliminary schedule in accordance with the specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.O1 MOBILIZATION (Item 1.00) A. Payment of the lump sum amount bid for Mobilization shall be full compensation for mobilization, demobilization, and General Conditions of the Agreement including but not limited to: indemnification, performance and payment bond premiums and permits as specified. Payment, in the stipulated amount, shall be full compensation for considerations for indemnification to OWNER in accordance with the Agreement. Payment for Bond Premiums will be based on actual invoice amount to substantiate the actual bond premiums. The documented cost of bond premiums of the Base Bid will be paid with the first payment request following satisfactory evidence of mobilization of sufficient labor, equipment and material to adeyuately progress the work and in accordance with the requirements as specified. Payment for permits will be based on actual invoice amount to substantiate the actual permit fee. The lump sum price bid for Mobilization shall not exceed three and one-half percent (3.5%) of the Base Bid. Partial payments will be made therefore in accordance with the following: 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/ 12 � 1 �GJ—J TPA \1TDasvNtluc\CIWATERV20 7 Plant 5cpansion ProjeclUSSUed ro Bitl Specs101025.0oc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Percent of Original Allowable Percent Contract Amount of Lump Sum Price Earned far the Item 5 25 ]0 50 25 75 100 l00 3.02 SITEWORK (Item 2.00) A. Payment 1. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary for all sitework including Demolition of Existing 5 MG Pre-stressed Tank, Demo Yard Piping, Dewatering Earthwork and Site Grading, Stormwater Pond, Temporary Stabilized Access Road, Sanitary Sewer and Manhole, Concentrate Discharge Yard Piping ,Concentrate Influent Yard Piping, Ductile Iron Yard Piping ,Underdrain Piping, Gate valves, Butterfly valves, Drainage and Control Structures, Asphalt Pavement, Fencing, and Site Lighting. Landscaping, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work as outlined in the Contract Documents but excluding those items for which measurements and payments are separately specified. 2. Payment under this Pay Item shall also include compensation for all materials, ]abor equipment and supplies not specified for payment under other Pay Items, but necessary for the complete proper execution of the Work. 3.03 3.0 MG GROUND STORAGE TANKS (ltem 3.00) A. Payment 1. Payment at the lump sum price bid for 3.0 MG Ground Storage Tanks shall be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and incidentals, specified in Section IV and IVa, and shown on the Drawings, including preparation of subgrade, level indicators, lightning and grounding, disinfection testing, settlement monitoring and miscellaneous work for a complete installation, but excluding those items for which measurements and payments are separately specified 3.04 RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMPS (Item 4.00) ]. Payment shall be made on a Iump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a New Raw Water Booster Pump and Motor including piping and fittings, valves, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 2. Payment shall also include the relocated existing surge relief valve and all associated appurtenances and controls. 3.05 FURNISH RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMP AND MOTOR (ODP) (Item 4.01) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for fumishing the Raw Water Booster Pump and Motor as described in Section l 1213 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 6349-79520/IO/09/12 ��25—Y TPA\\TpasvNllseclCLWATER\RO1PYafrtF�Da�xionProjectllssuedtoeiASpe¢10f025.0oc • CJ • � � • � ` ��i 1 ' CDM Smith :: ':��i�i��r� Reserved �;.-�� [ �_1RN1SH RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMP VFD (ODP) (Item 4.02) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Raw Water Booster Pump VFD as described in Section 16734 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each VFD with appurtenances provided. 3.U� ADSORPTION SYSTEM (Item 5.00) 1. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a New Adsorption System inctuding concrete pad, piping and fittings, valves, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, long term performance bond, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.08 FURNISH ADSORPTION SYSTEM (ODP) (Item 5.01) 1. Payment shall be made at the lump sum price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Adsorption System as described in Section I 1204 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 3.09 BACKWASH DECANT AND POLYMER SYSTEM (Item 6.00) l. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a Backwash Decant and Polymer System including concrete pad, truck loading station, tanks, piping and fittings, valves, polymer system, pumps, eye wash, hose wash, canopy, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.10 FURNISH BACKWASH RECYCLE PUMPS (ODP) (Item 6.O1) l. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Backwash Recycle Pumps as described in Section 11214 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 3.l 1 FURNISH BACKWASH RESIDUAL PUMPS (ODP) (Item 6.02) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Backwash Residual Pumps as described in Section 11315 ofthe Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 3.12 FURNISH DECANT TANKS (ODP) (Item 6.03) � 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Decant Tanks as described in Section 11342 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each Decant Tank with appurtenances provided. 3.13 FURNISH RESIDUALS HOLDING TANK (ODP) (Item 6.04) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Residuals Holding Tank as described in Section 1 l 342 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each Residuals Holding Tank with appurtenances provided. 3.14 FURNISH POLYMER SYSTEM (ODP) (Item 6.05) l. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the 6349-79520/ I 0/09/ l 2 OIOZS—S TPA\\TpasvrOt�sec\CIWATERUtOtPIaMExpeiaionAojectUssuedtoBidSpece101025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Polymer System as described in Section l 1247 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications • and shown on the Drawings. Measurement and Payment shall be far each Polymer System with appurtenances provided. 3.14 FURNISH NEW CONTROL PANEL (CP) l20 (ODP) (Item 6.06) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the New Control Panel CP 120 as described in Section 13330 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shail be for each Control Panel with appurtenances provided. 3.15 CARTRIDGE FILTRATION (Item 7.00) 1. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a Cartridge Filtration system including piping and fittings, valves, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.16 FURNISH CARTRIDGE FILTRATION VESSEL (ODP) (ltem 7.01) l. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Cartridge Filtration Vessel as described in Section 11240 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each Cartridge Filtration Vessel with appurtenances provided. 3.17 MEMBRANE FEED PUMPING (Item 8.00) l. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a Membrane Feed Pumping system including concrete pads, pumps, • RO Building piping and fittings, valves, piping support system electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 2. Payment shall also includeremoval of existing equipment and concrete pads. 3.18 FURNISH MEMBRANE FEED PUMPS (ODP) (Item 8.O1) I. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Membrane Feed Pumps as described in Section 1] 2l2 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 3.19 FURNISH MEMBRANE FEED PUMP VFD (ODP) (Item 8.02) l. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal far furnishing the Membrane Feed Pump VFD as described in Section 16730 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each VFD with appurtenances provided. 3.20 REVERSE OSMOSIS SKIDS (Item 9.00) I. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct modifications to the Reverse Osmosis Skids system including demolition, reverse osmosis membranes, skid reconfiguration, piping, valves, piping support system electrical„ instrumentation and controls, manufacturer's performance warranty, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work_ • 6349-79520/10/09/l2 �1025'6 TPAOTpasvNt\sec1CLWATER1R01PIaMFicpansionPrqeclUssuedtoBidSpecs101025.tloc i • r� L J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.21 FURNISH RO MEMBRANES (ODP) (ltem 9.01) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the RO Membranes as described in Section 11277 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each RO Membranes with appurtenances provided. 3.22 CONCENTRATE PUMP STATION (Item 10.00) l. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a Concentrate Pump Station including concrete pads, pumps, wetwell, manhole, piping and fittings, valves, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.23 CONCENTRATE PUMPS (ODP) (ltem 10.01) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Concentrate Pumps as described in Section 11215 ofthe Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each Concentrate Pump with appurtenances provided. 324 FURNISH NEW CONTROL PANEL AND VFDS (LCP) 120 (ODP) (Item 10.02) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the New Control Panel LCP l20 as described in Section 1] 2l 5 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each New Control Panel LCP ] 20 with appurtenances provided. 3.25 TRANSFER BLENDED WATER PUMPING (ltem I 1.00) 1. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct Transfer Blended Water Pumps and Motor as described in Section 11216 including rebuild existing in service pumps and OWNER's spare pump, replace impellers, replace existing check valves, piping and fittings, valves, electrical, instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and misceilaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 2. Payment shall also include the rebuilding the Owner's spare pump and installing the spare pump and all associated appurtenances and controls. Rebuild of in-service pumps and motors and Owner's spare pump is measured as one unit item. 326 FURNISH TRANSFER BLENDED WATER PUMPS REBUILD (ODP} (Item 1 I.OI) 1. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the rebuild of pump and motors as described in Section l 1216 of the Supplemental Technica] Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 3.27 RO AND ADMIN BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS (Item 12.00) l. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, eyuipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct RO and Admin Building Improvements as including exhaust fans, control panels, HVAC, doors, louvers, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 6349-79520/10/09/12 �� 025— / TPA \tTpasvr0l�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion ProjecMssued to &d Specs\01025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith A]1 Rights Reserved 3.28 FURNISH NEW CONTROL PANEL AND VFDS (CP) l 10 (ODP) (Item 12.01) • l. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the New Control Panel CP 110 as described in Section 13330 ofthe Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2. Measurement and Payment shall be for each New Control Panel CP 110 with appurtenances provided. 3.29 BACKWASH HOLDING TANK (Item 13.00) l. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct modification s to the Backwash Holding Tank, including demolition, valve pads, piping, fittings and valves„ startup and testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 330 MATERIALS TESTING ALLOWANCE (Item 14.00) A. Payment under this bid item shall be in accordance with Payment of General Conditions. Payment of materials testing fees will be based on the actual invoiced amount from the independent testing laboratory to substantiate the actual fees. Payment shall be made to compensate the CONTRACTOR for employing and paying the services of the independent testing laboratory as specified in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications Section 0I4l0and to perform all testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the Technical Specifications. 33l EXCAVATION BELOW NORMAL GRADE AND BEDDING ROCK REFILL (Item 15.00) A. Measurement • l. This is a contingency bid item that may or may not be used on the project. Measurement of excavation below normal grade and refill for open cut trench excavation will extend only downward from the elevation 6-in. below the pipe invert to a depth as a) shown on the Drawings, or if not shown on the Drawings b) determined by the ENGINEER and for a width as defined or approved by the ENGINEER. 2. If the trench bottom is below grade through error by the CONTRACTOR, or if improper drainage softens the subgrade and additional excavation in the trenches is required before laying the pipe, such removal and replacement of material will not be measured far payment. 3. No material which may run or flow into the excavation from outside the payment limits shall be measured for payment. 4. Measurement by truck count will not be permitted. 5. Bedding rock placed outside the above limits will not be measured for payment. B. Payment l. Payment for excavation below normal grade and bedding rock refill will be made for the yuantity as above determined at the price per cubic yard established in the Bid Form, which price and payment shall be full compensation for sheeting, dewatering, excavation, rock and boulder removal, and disposal of ali materials betow normal grade, furnishing and placing bedding rock refill and all work incidental thereto, for which separate payment is not provided under other items in the Bid Form. 3.32 METAL BUILDING ANALYSIS ALLOWANCE (Item 16.00) A. Payment under this bid item shall be in accordance with Payment of General Conditions. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/] 2 � 1 025-0 TPA UTpasvr011sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plan[ Expansion ProjeclUssued to Bid Specs101025.doc u u • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Payment of professional design services and fees wili be based on the actual invoiced amount from the professional design services provider to substantiate the actual fees. Payment shall be made to compensate the CONTRACTOR for employing and paying the professional design services as required on Sheet S-3 and the Supplemental Technical Specifications to analyze and design the primary and secondary roof framing members that are supporting the new pipe supports, including certifications, drawings, and calculations. Invoice(s) shall include a detailed breakdown of the date, hours and rates charged by the design professiona(. 3.33 ROCK AND BOULDER EXCAVATION A. Measurement and Payment 1. No separate measurement and payment shall be made for rock and boulder excavation. Rock is to be excavated as specified in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications Section 02213. 334 TEST PITS A. Measurement and Payment 1. Payment for location of existing utilities and locating unknown utitities is included in the bid form as part of each applicable item. The full cost of the work required to verify and supplement the information provided on the drawings, which is based on the best available information, shall be included in the applicable item. 335 OWNER'S CONTINGENCY (Item ] 7.00) A. Payment under this bid item shall be in accordance with General Conditions. This is a contingency bid item that may or may not be used for this project. This bid item is solely for the OWNER's use in the payment for changes in the Wark where such changes have been approved per the Contract Documents. 3.36 RO & HSP BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. ](Item A1.00) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct RO and HSP Building Improvements as shown on the Drawings and specified herein including demolition, exhaust fans, HVAC, doors, louvers, architectural, startup, testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.37 MEMBRANE CLEANING ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2(Item A2.00) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct Membrane Cleaning system including cartridge filter vessel, VFD, pump, demolition, startup, testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.38 CARTRIDGE FILTER VESSEL ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2(ODP) (Item A2.Ol ) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to construct a Cartridge Filter Vessel as described in Section 11240 including piping and fittings, valves, electrical„ instrumentation and controls, disinfection, startup and testing and miscellaneous wark necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ l 2 0 1 �25-7 TPA l\TpasvrOi�sec\CLWATERU20 1 Plant Ezpansion ProjecNlssued to Bid Spec¢\01025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.39 FURNISH CLEANING SYSTEM HOR1Z END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 (ODP) (Item A2.02) A : Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the pump and motor as described in Section 11213of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. 3.40 FURNISH VFDs ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2(ODP) (Item A2.03) A. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the VFDs as described in Section 16�30 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. B. Measurement and Payment shall be for each VFD with appurtenances provided. 3.41 AS SYSTEM MEDIA EXCHANGE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3(Item A3.00) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing a11 labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct AS Media Exchange as described in Section 11204 including removal, disposal, and replacement of existing AS media with new media and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.42 AS SYSTEM MEDIA EXCHANGE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3(ODP) (Item A3.Ot) A I: Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the AS System Media Exchange as described in Section ] 1204 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Measurement and Payment shall be for each AS System Media Exchange with appurtenances provided. 3.43 DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACEMENTADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4(ltem A4.00) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct Dual Media Filter Replacement as described in Section 13521 including removal, disposal, and replacement of existing Dual Media with new media and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 3.44 DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACEMENTADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4(ODP)(Item A4.01) I1 : Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the Dual Media Filter Replacement as described in Section ] 3521 of the Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Measurement and Payment shall be for each Dual Media Filter Replacement with appurtenances provided. Replacement of inedia in all existing Dua) Media Filters is measured as one unit item. 3.45 BLEND WATER PUMPS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5(Item A5.00) A. Payment shall be made on a lump sum basis for furnishing all labor, eyuipment and materials necessary to furnish and construct Blend Water Pumps system including pump, demolition, startup, testing and miscellaneous work necessary for a complete proper execution of the Work. 6349-79520l10/09/l2 Q��25—�� TPA\\Tpasvr0145ec1CLWATERV201PIamExparrsionProjechlswedtoBiASpecs101025.doc � • • c0 2012 CDM Smith . All Rights Reserved . • 3.46 FURNISH BLEND WATER PUMPS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.S (ODP) (Item AS.OI) A. Payment shall be made at the unit price established in the Bidders Proposal for furnishing the pump and motor as described in Section 11216 ofthe Supplemental Technical Specifications and shown on the Drawings. B. Measurement and Payment shall be for each pump and motor with appurtenances provided. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/12 01025-] 1 TPA\VTpasvr011sec\GLWATERV201PIamE�cpansionProjeaNSSUeAtoBidSpeas101025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 6349-79520/ 10/09/l 2 0� �25— � 2 TPA \\TpasvNllsec\CLWATERV20 1 PIaM Ezpansion ProjeclNwued to &d Spew\01025.doc • C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK PROGRESS A. The CONTRACTOR sha11 furnish personne] and equipment which will be efficient, appropriate and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress which will insure the completion of the work within the time stipulated in the Agreement Section of these Specifications. If at any time such personnel appears to the ENGINEER to be inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work required or for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may request the CONTRACTOR to increase the efficiency, change the character or increase the personnel and equipment, and the CONTRACTOR shall conform to such request. Failure of the ENGINEER to give such request shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress to finish the Contract on time as shown in the Contract Completion Date at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.02 PRIVATE LAND A. The CONTRACTOR shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, except by • notarized permission of the land owner. B. When necessary to notify the property owner or tenant of any impact of construction activity, entry onto the land shall only be made by a Foreman, or more senior person, of the CONTRACTOR. All Foremen, and those ranking above Foreman, shall carry laminated, photo identification cards bearing their name, position, CONTRACTOR name, and local day time and after hours phone number of the CONTRACTOR. This identification shall be produced, whether or not requested, anytime a Foreman, or more senior person enters private land to communicate with the property owner or tenant. 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS A. Structures and pipelines shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the ENGINEER reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the CONTRACTOR's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items where required. 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS A. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, the maximum length of open trench shall be no more than 100 feet in roadways and 300 feet elsewhere unless written approval otherwise is obtained from the ENGINEER. B. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and damage to property. The • CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by the public and workmen. No excavations shall remain open overnight without approval of the ENGINEER. 6349-79520/10/9/12 �1�'FD-1 TPA\1TpasvrOilseciClWA7ER�R01PlantExDansionRojec111ssuedto6ASpea\OtO40.AOc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.05 TEST PITS A. Test pits for the purpose of locating all known and unknown underground pipeline or structures in advance of the construction shall be excavated and backfilled by the CONTRACTOR so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. B. Test pitting shall be performed sufficiently in advance of construction to allow resolution of any conflicts discovered without delay to the project. l .06 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS A. The work is located in developed areas requiring the access for fire, police and other departments to be provided far and at least one free lane be available for a(1 traffic. CONTRACTORs are to arrange operations in these areas to meet these requirements and secure approval or operating procedures from the OWNER. 1.07 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC A. Open pits, trenches, unpaved streets, debris, or other obstructions due to construction that will prevent the normal flow of traffic during an extended construction stoppage, for any reason, shall be minimized. ln the event an extended construction stoppage is found to be necessary, CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, provide normal traffic flow during extended construction stoppage. • B. A11 excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic may be maintained • at all times. If the CONTRACTOR's operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide temparary roadways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for safety satisfactory to the ENGINEER. C. Detours around construction areas will be subject to the approva) of the ENGINEER. Where detours are permitted the CONTRACTOR shaii provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured the CONTRACTOR shall expedite construction operations. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT A. Ali newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury in any way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads on it sha1J be allowed and all portions injured shall be reconstructed by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. B. All structures shall be protected in an acceptable manner. Should any of the floors or other parts of the structures become heaved, cracked or otherwise damaged, al I such damaged portions of the work shall be completely repaired and made good by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Special attention is directed to substructure bracing requirements, described in Section 02220. If, in the final inspection ofthe work, any defects, faults or omissions are found, the CONTRACTOR shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by proper materials and workmanship without extra compensation for the materials and labor required. Further, the CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the • satisfactory maintenance and repair of the construction and other work undertaken herein, for at least the guarantee period described in the contract. 6349-79520/10/9/12 � 1 Q'+�-2 7PAHTpasvNl�sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Expansion Project�ISSUeAto Bitl Spe�aW1040.doc � • u �O 2012 CDM Smith A;= Ri�hts Reserved C. "fhe CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any structure due to water pressure during and after construction and until such structure is accepted and taken over by the OWNER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the work during construction and until the project is accepted. This maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day, with adequate equipment and forces to the end that the road or structures are kept in satisfactory condition at all times. In the case of a Contract for the placing of a course or subgrade previously constructed, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain the previous course or subgrade during all construction operations. All cost of maintenance work during construction or in the Warranty Period and/or before the project is accepted shall be included in the unit prices bid on the various pay items and the CONTRACTOR will not be paid an additional amount for such work. 2.02 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Assume full responsibility for the protection of all buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, sewers, drains and electric and telephone cables or any other installation encountered, whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. Carefully support and protect all such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. lmmediately repair any damage resulting from the construction operations. B. Assistance will be given the CONTRACTOR in determining the location of existing services. The CONTRACTOR, however, shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain lines and sewers). Maintain services to buildings and pay costs or charges resulting from damage thereto. C. ]f, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, permanent relocation of a publicly owned utility is required, the ENGiNEER may direct the CONTRACTOR, in writing, to perfor►n the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the Contract unit prices, if applicable, or as extra work under the General Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is reyuired, the CONTRACTOR will notify the ENGINEER immediately, and the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. Cooperate with the Utility. No claim for delay will be allowed due to such relocation. D. CONTRACTOR is responsible to coordinate any activity in any area with utility companies, or others. Furthermore, the CONTRACTOR must contact "Call Before You Dig" with ample time so utility companies may mark the area properly. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to maintain these markings inside the Project area at no additional cost to the OWNER. E. Coordinate the removal and replacement of traffic loops and signals, if required for the performance of the work, at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 END OF SECTION 01040-3 TPA1\TpasvAllseclCLWATEl7�R0 1 Plant Exparrsion ProjeclUssued to Bid SpecsW/040.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � (TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) C� �� _J 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/ 12 0 I 040-4 7PA 11TpasvNllsec\CLWATEPoRO 1 Plant Esparrsian ProjecNSSUeA to Bitl Specs\01040.doc • • u �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL l .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the work or to: I. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective wark. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. i AZ RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section O1010. B. Sitework is included in Sections IV and IVa (02100). C. Asphalt Cutting and Repair is included in Sections IV and IVa (02576). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01300, a written request well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of the OWNER or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. Identification of the project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect on work of OWNER or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integity of project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 � 1 �'-FS— I TPA \1TpasvN115ec\CLWATEfMO 1 Plant Expareion ProjectUSSUetl ro BiA SpecsW7015.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G Submit written notice to the ENGINEER designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of work. C. Report unsatisfactory or yuestionable conditions to the ENGINEER in writing; do not proceed with work until the ENGINEER has provided further instructions. 3A2 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. C. Provide protection from elernents far that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other wark and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: l. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished instattation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/12 O� O4S�ZTPA 1\ipesvAllsedCLWATERtR01 Poan[ Expa�im ProjedNSSUed to eid Specs101045.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. • • END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/ I 2 O l 045-3 7PA 11TpasvrOtlsee\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Ezpansion ProjecNlssued to Bid Specs101015.doc O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE tNTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520! l 0/9/ l 2 01045-47PA 1\7paaAl�seclCLWATERU201 Plant Expa�ion PrqeclUssued to Bid Spers\01045.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01050 F1ELD ENGINEERING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for project. l. Survey work required in execution of project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified, or required to execute CONTRACTOR's construction methods. B. Retain the services of a professional land surveyor and mapper licensed in the State of Florida: 1. ldentify existing control points and property line corner stakes indicated on the Drawings, as reyuired. 2. Verify alI existing above ground utility and equipment locations. 3. Maintain an accurate location of all buried piping 4-in in diameter and larger. 4. Maintain all survey control for line and grade. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section O]O10 B. Applications for Payment are included in Section Ill. C. Project Record Documents are included in Section Ill. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01300, name and address of professional land surveyor and mapper or professional engineer. B. On request of the ENGINEER, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. As a minimum the ENGINEER will review the as-builts on a monthly basis. C. Submit certificate signed by professional engineer or surveyor and mapper certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conforrnance, or non-conformance, with Contract Documents. D. At Contract Substantial Completion, submit five (5) sets of certified drawings with the Surveyors title block (signed and sealed by the professional surveyor and mapper) ofthe items listed below. All surveys shal] be tied to State Plane Coordinate System. Vertical control shall be based on NAVD 1988. These drawings shall be included with, and made a part of, the project record documents. 1. Certified pump station and pipeline survey indicating the structure corners and elevations, and pipeline locations and crown elevations at 100-foot intervals and at ali changes in alignment. 2. Certified survey shall be at the same scale as the ENGINEER's drawings (C Sheets). 3. CONTRACTOR shall also submit record drawing files in AutoCAD (latest version) format on CDs. All entries shall be placed on layers named to describe the entity being mapped. All 6349-79520/10/9/12 � 1 OS�-1 TPA \\TpasvNllsec\CLWATEiMO 1 Plant Exparrsion Projeclllssued to Bid Specs\OtO50.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith Al( Rights Reserved elevation information in the AutoCAD file shall be in an appropriate three dimensional • format. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER A. Registered professional engineer or surveyor and mapper of the discipline required for the specific service on the project, currently licensed in the State of Florida. 1.05 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on Drawings. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and preserve al] permanent reference points during construction. 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the ENGINEER. 2. Report to the ENGINEER when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require surveyor to correctly replace project contro) points which may be lost ar destroyed. a. Establish replacements based on original survey control. b. Reset control points relocated due to project routing. 1.06 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points. • l. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. C. Verify layouts by same methods monthly and submit to the ENGINEER. 1.07 RECORDS A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. B. Update the project record drawings on a monthly basis based on the work performed during the month ending at the pay reyuest as a condition far approval of monthly progress payment requests. C. Maintain an accurate record of all changes, revisions, and modifications. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 OSO�2TPA \1TpawA7lseclCLWATERIRO 1 Rant Expansion ProjectUssued W Bid Speca�OtO50.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) • u PART 3 - EXECUT]ON (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 63 49-79520/ l 0/9/ l 2 O I OS O—J TPA \1TpasvAilaee\CLWA7EfM0 7 Plant EYpareion ProjecRlssued to Bid Specs\01050.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • u 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 OSO—`tTPA \1TpasvAtlsecVCIWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion ProjectVSSUed to &d Specs101050.doc n 2012 CDM Smith �;11 Ri��!ats Reserved � SECTION 01065 PERMITS AND FEES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for any and all permits and licenses required to complete the project except for those permits obtained by OWNER as listed below. B. Schedule all inspections and obtain all written approvals of the agencies required by the permits and licenses. C. Comply with all construction related conditions specified in each ofthe permits and licenses. 1.02 PERMITS BY OWNER A. The OWNER has obtained or will obtain the permits listed below: I. City of Clearwater - Standard Development (FLS) permit 2. FDEP — PWS Construction Permit 3. SWFWMD—Environmenta) ResourcePermit • B. CONTRACTOR shal) be responsible far preparation of a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and shall obtain an FDEP permit far stormwater discharge from construction activities. • C. If dewatering discharges to waters of the State are proposed, the CONTRACTOR may be required to obtain an FDEP Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from any Non-Contaminated Site Activity. 1.03 PERMITS BY CONTRACTOR A. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining the following permits: I. City of Clearwater — Building Permit 2. City of Clearwater — Trench Permit PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/9/]2 �I�VJ'I TPA11Tpasvr011sec\CLWA7ER1ROiRan[FxpansionProjedVSSUedtoBidSpecsW1065.AOc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (TH[S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/ I 2 � 1 �65-2 TPA NTpasvrO7�sec1CLWATER1R01 Poant Expansion ProjectUssued to Bid Specs\01065.doc • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved SECTION 01095 REFERENCES PART 1 — GENERAL l.Ol SECTION INCLUDES A. REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS B. ABBREVIATIONS C. REFERENCE STANDARDS D. DEFINITIONS l .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Information provided in this section is used where applicable in individual Specification Sections, Divisions ] through 16. 1.03 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS A. Reference to a technical society, trade association or standards setting organization, may be made in the Specifications by abbreviations in accordance with the following ]ist: AABC AAMA AASHTO AATCC ACI A DC AFBMA AGA AGMA AHA AISC AISI AMCA ANSI APA ARI ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWI AWPA AWS AWWA BHMA 6349-79520/10/9/l 2 Associated Air Balance Council Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists American Concrete Institute Air Diffusion Council Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Association American Gas Association American Gear Manufacturers Association Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. American National Standards Institute American Plywood Association American Refrigeration Institute American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood Preservers Association American Welding Society American Water Works Association Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association 01 �75-1 TPA \\TpasvNtlsec\CLWATERViO 1 Plairt Exparmion RojectUssued ro Bid SpecsW1095.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved BIA CABO CAGI CISPI CMAA CRD CRSI CTl DH 1 DOH DOT Fed. Spec. FGMA FM HMI HPMA HPVA ICEA IEEE 1F1 MIL MSS NAAMM NACM NBS NEBB NEC NEMA NETA NFPA NFPA NFPA NIST NLMA NSF OSHA PCI PDI SAE SCPRF SMACNA SPI SSPC Brick Institute of American Council of American Building Officials Compressed Air and Gas lnstitute Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Crane Manufacturers Association of America U.S. Corps of Engineers Specifications Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Cooling Tower Institute Door and Hardware Institute Department of Health Department of Transportation Federal Specifications Flat Glass Marketing Association Factory Mutual Hoist Manufacturing Institute See HPVA Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association lnsulated Cable Engineers Association Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Industrial Fasteners Institute Military Specifications Manufacturer's Standardization Society National Association of Architectural Meta] Manufacturers National Association of Chain Manufacturers National Bureau of Standards, See NIST National Environmenta] Balancing Bureau National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical Testing Association National Fire Protection Association National Forest Products Association National Fluid Power Association National Institute of Standards and Technology National Lumber Manufacturers Association National Sanitation Foundation Occupational Safety and Health Act Prestressed Concrete Institute Plumbing and Drainage Institute Society of Automotive Engineers Structural Clay Products Research Foundation Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Society of the Piastics Industry Steel Structures Painting Council STI Steel Tank Institute TCA Tile Council of American TIMA Thermal lnsulation Manufacturers' Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USBR U. S. Bureau of Reclamation USBS U. S. Bureau of Standards, See NIST 6349-79520/ 10/9/ l 2 �� 95—ZTPA \\TpasvNllsedGLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ 5cpension RojecNssueA to &d Specs101095.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. Abbreviations which may be used in individual Specification Sections Divisions I through 16 are as follows: alternating current ....................................... ac American wire gauge ............................. AWG ampere(s) ................................................... amp ampere-hour(s) .......................�--................ AH annual......................................................... ann Ampere Interrupting Capacity....-•---• ................................�----�-- AIC atmosphere(s) ............................................. atm average.................................................•-•--- a�g biochemical oxygen demand ....................BOD Board Foot .............................................. FBM brake horsepower .......................................bhp Brinell Hardness ........................................ BH British thermal unit(s) ................................ Btu calorie(s) .................................................... ca] carbonaceous biochemicat . oxygen demand .................................. CBOD Celsius (centigrade) ..................................... C Center to Center .................................... C to C centimeter(s) .............................................. cm chemical oxygen demand .........................COD coefficient, valve flow ................................ C� condensate return ........................................CR cubic............................................................ cu cubic centimeter(s) ....................................... cc cubic feet per day ........................................ cfd cubic feet per hour ...................................... cfh cubic feet per minute ..................................cfm cubic feet per minute, standard conditions ................................. scfm cubic feet per second ................................... cfs cubic foot (feet) .........................................cu ft cubic inch(es) ...................•-•---........._........ cu in cubic yard(s) ............................................ cu yd • decibels....................................................... dB decibels (A scale) .......................................dBa degree(s) ..................................................... deg dewpoint temperature ..................................dpt diameter...................................................... dia direct current ................................................ dc dissolved oxygen ........................................ DO dissolved solids ...........................................DS dry-bulb temperature ................................... dbt efficiencY..................................................... eff elevation....................................................... el engineer of record ........................EOR entering water temperature .........................ewt entering air temperature ...............................eat equivalent direct radiation .......................... edr facearea ........................................................ fa faceto face ................................................f to f Fahrenheit...............................................•--... F feetper day ................................................. fpd feet per hour ................................................ fph feet per minute ...........................................fpm feet per second ............................................ fps foot (feet) ....................................................... ft foot-candle .................................................... fc foot-pound ................................................ ft-lb foot-pounds per minute ...................... ft-]b/min foot-pounds per second ....................... ft-lb/sec for►nazin turbidity unit(s) ..........................FTU frequency...................................................freq fueloil ......................................................... FO fuel oil suppiy ........................................... FOS fuel oil return ............................................FOR gallon(s) ...................................................... gal gallons per day ........................................... gpd gallons per day per cubic foot ......................................... gpd/cu ft gallons per day per square foot ....................................... gpd/sq ft gallons per hour ........................................ gph gallons per minute .................................... gpm gallons per second ......................................gps gas chromatography and mass spectrometry .............................GC-MS gauge............................................................ ga grain(s)..........-� .........................................•-•-- gr gram(s) ........................................................... g grams per cubic centimeter .....................gm/cc Heat Transfer Coefficient ............................. U height.......................................................... hgt Hertz.......•••••••••••••••• ..................•••••••........... Hz horsepower ................................�--....--•---..... hp horsepower-hour ......................................hp-hr hour(s) .......................................................... hr 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 O9S �3TPA \1TpasvAl�sedCLWATERV20 1 Plant Expansion Projecdlssued to Bid SpewW f 095.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved humidity, relative ......................................... rh hydrogen ion concentration ......................... pH inch(es) .......................................................... in inches per second ........................................ ips inside diameter .............................................ID Jackson turbidity unit(s) ............................ JTU kelvin........................................................... K kiloamperes ................................................. kA kilogram(s) ................................................... kg kilometer(s) ................................................. km kilovar (kilovolt-amperes reactive) ................................................... kvar kilovolt(s) .................................................... kV kilovolt-ampere(s) .................................... kVA kilowatt(s) .................................................. kW kilowatt-hour(s) ........................................ kWh linear foot (feet) ....................................... lin ft 1 iter( s) .............................................................L megavoit-ampere(s) ................................MVA meter(s) ......................................................... m micrograms per liter ............................... ug/L miles per hour ...........................................mph milliampere(s) ........................................... mA milligram(s) ................................................ mg milligrams per liter ................................. mgJL milliliter(s) ................................................ mL millimeter(s) .............................................. mm million gallons .......................................... MG million gallons per day ............................. mgd millisecond(s) ............................................. ms millivolt(s) ................................................ mV minute(s) ................................................... min mixed liquor suspended solids....................................................MLSS nephelometric turbidity unit.-----�---• ..............................................NTU net positive suction head ........................NPSH noise criteria.••••••• ......................................... nc noise reduction coefficient .......................NRC number......................................................... no ounce(s) ........................................................ oz outsideair ..................................................... oa outside diameter ......................................... OD parts per billion ......................................... ppb parts per million ....................................... ppm percent........................................................ pct 6349-79520/ l 0/9/ l 2 phase (electrical) ..................................... . . ph pound(s) ................................................ ....... I b pounds per cubic foot ................................ pcf pounds per cubic foot perhour ................................................. pcf/hr pounds per day ......................................lbs/day pounds per day per cubic foot ................................... Ibs/day/cu ft pounds per day per square foot ..................................lbs/day/sq ft pounds per square foot ............................... psf pounds per square foot per hour ................................................. psf/hr pounds per square inch ............................... psi pounds per square inch absolute .................................................... psia pounds per square inch gauge........................................................psig power factor .................................................PF pressure drop or difference ................................................... dp pressure, dynamic (velocity) .................................................... vp pressure, vapor ....................................... vap pr quart(s) .......................................................... qt Rankine......................................................... R relative humidity ........................................... rh resistance .................................................... res return air ....................................................... ra revolution(s) ............................................... rev revolutions per minute ...............................rpm revolutions per second ............................... rps Right of Way .............................ROW root mean squared ..................................... rms safety factor ................................................. sf second(s) .................................................... sec shading coefficient ..................................... SC sludge density index ................................. SDI Sound Transmission Coefficient ............................................. STC specific gravity ....................................... sP gi' specific volume .................................... Sp Vol sp ht at constant pressure ............................ Cp � • syuare........................................................... sq square centimeter(s) ................................ sq cm syuare foot (feet) ....................................... sq ft • square inch (es) .............•-----......................sq in square meter(s) ........................................ sq m O 1 O7S�TPA \lTpasvNtlsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ Expansian ProjecFllssued to Bid Spe�x101095.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • square yard(s) .......................................... sq yd total suspended solids .............................. TSS standard ...................................................... std tota] volatile solids---._.............................. TVS static pressure ............................................ st pr supplyair .................................................. . . sa suspended solids .......................................... SS temperature ............................................. temp temperature difference ............................... TD temperature entering .................................. TE temperature leaving .................................... TL thousand Btu per hour ............................. Mbh thousand circular mils ............................ kcmil thousand cubic feet .................................. Mcf threshold limit value ............................... TLV tons of refrigeration ................................... tons torque...................................................... TRQ total dissolved solids ............................... TDS total dynamic head .................................. TDH total kjeldahl nitrogen ............................. TKN total oxygen demand ............................... TOD totai pressure .............................................. TP total solids .................................................. TS 1.05 REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS vacuum....................................................... vac viscosity..............................•�-�--�--............. visc volatile organic chemical ........................ VOC volatile solids .............................................. VS volatile suspended solids ......................... VSS volt(s) ........................................................... V volts-ampere(s) .......................................... VA volume....................................................... vol watt(s) ......................................................... W watthour(s) ................................................. Wh watt-hour demand ................................... WHD watt-hour demand meter ..................... WHDM week(s) ....................................................... wk weight......................................................... wt wet-bulb .................................................... WB wet bulb temperature ............................. WBT yard(s)......-� .................................................. yd year(s) ........................................................... yr • The following publications are incorporated into this manual and are made a part of this Manual as is set out verbatim in this Manual. Violations of any provision of every such publication, latest revision, shall be a violation of City Ordinance. A. Water Environment Federation, Manual of Practice No. 8, Wastewater Treatment Plant Design, W.E.F., 601 Wythe Street, Alexandria, VA, 22314-1994. B. Water Environment Federation, Manual of Practice No. 9, Design and Construction of Sanitary and Storm Sewers, W.E.F., 60l Wythe Street, Alexandria, VA, 22314-1994. C. Great Lakes/Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers. Recommended Standards for Sewage Works, Health Education Service, Inc., P.O. Box 7283, Albany, New York, 12224. D. Great Lakes/Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers. Recommended Standards for Water Works, Health Education Service, Inc., P.O. Box 7283, Albany, New York, 12224. E. Florida Department of Environmental Protection for Water, Wastewater, and Reclaimed Water Systems, latest revisions of F.A.G Chapters 62-550, 62-555, 62-600, 62-604, 62-610, 64E-6, and 64E-8, 3900 Commonwealth Boulevard M.S. 49, Tallahassee, Florida, 32399. F. American Water Works Association, lnc., Water Treatment Plant Design, 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, Colorado, 80235. • G. American Water Works Association, Inc., Water Treatment Plant Design, AWWA Standards and Applicable Manuals, 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, Colorado, 80235. 6349-79520/ l 0/9/ l 2 O 1 O9S—S TPA \\7pasvNllseelCLWATEfi�RO f Plant Expansion Projec111ssued m Bid Specs101095.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved H. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association, Handbook, Ductile Iron Pipe/Cast Iron Pipe, Ductile • Iron Pipe Research Association, 245 Riverchase Parkway East, Birmingham, Alabama, 35244. 1. Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association, Handbook of PVC Pipe, Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association, 2655 Viila Creek Drive, Suite ] 64, Dallas, Texas, 75234. J. American National Standards Institute, latest revisions of applicable standards, 18l 9 L Street NW, Suite 600, Washington, D.C., 20036. K. American Society for Testing and Materials,latest revisions of applicable standards, ASTM International, ] 00 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, l 9428-2959. L. National Water Research Institute, Treatment Technologies for Removal of MTBE. NWRI, 10500 Ellis Ave., P.O. Box 20865, Fountain Valley, CA, 92728. M. National Water Research Institute, Valuing Ground Water: Economic Concepts/Approaches. NWRI, ] 0500 Ellis Ave., P.O. Box 20865, Fountain Va11ey, CA, 92728.7.3.14. N. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Design Criteria for Mechanical, Electric, and Fluid System and Component Reliability, Supplement to the Federal Guidelines for Design, Operation, and Maintenance of Wastewater Treatment Facilities, Technical Bulletin EPA-430- 99-74-001, U.S. EPA, Office of Water Program Operations. O. Florida Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Maps & Publications Sales, Mail Station 12, 605 Suwannee Street, Tallahassee, • Florida 32399-0450. P. Plastics Pipe Institute, Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe, 1825 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 680, Washington, DC 20009. Q. National Fire Protection Association, 1995 Edition of NFPA 24 — Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169. R. City of Clearwater Utilities Standards and Specifications Manual. S. National Electrical Code, latest revisions of applicable requirements. T. Metcalf and Eddy, Wastewater Engineering Treatment and Reuse, 4`h Edition, McGraw-Hil1, 2002. U. Water Environment Federation, Manual of Practice No. 1 l, Operation of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants, 60l Wythe Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1994. V. American Petroleum Institute, 1801 K Street NW, Washington, DC 20006. W. American Welding Society, 2501 NW 7"' St, Miami, FL 33125. X. Factory Mutual Research, l l5l Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062 Y. National Association of Corrosion Engineers, P.O. Box 218340, Houston, TX 77218. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O l O7S' V TPA 1\Tpasvi0l�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Erpansion PrqecBlssueA W Bid Specs101095.tloc . L � u �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Z. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, 155 East 44`h St., NY, NY 10017. AA. Occupational Safety and Health Act, U.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 299E. Broward Bivd. — Rm 302, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33301. BB. Society of Automotive Engineers, 2 Pennsylvania Plaza, NY, NY 10001. CC. Stee] Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Ave., Pittsburgh, PA l 52l 3. DD. Standard Specification for Public Works, Construction Building News, Inc., 3055 Overland Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90034. EE. Uniform Building Code, published by ICBO. FF. Underwriters Labaratories, lnc., 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 6061 l. 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Latest Edition: Construe references to furnishing materials or testing, which conform to the standards of a particular technica] society, organization, or body, to mean the latest standard, code, or specification of that body, adopted and published as of the date of bidding this Contract. Standards referred to herein are made a part of these Specifications to the extent that is indicated or intended. B. Precedence: The duties and responsibilities of the CITY, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of their consultants, agents or employees are set forth in the Contract Documents, and are not changed or altered by any provision of any referenced standard specifications, manuals or code, whether such standard manual or code is or is not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents. Any duty or authority to supervise or direct the fumishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority, to undertake responsibility contrary to the powers of the ENGINEER as set forth in the Contract Documents cannot be assigned to the ENGINEER or any of the ENGINEER's consultants, agents or employees. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. In these Contract Documents the words furnish, instali, and provide are defined as follows: 1. Furnish (Materials): to supply and deliver to the project ready for installation and in operable condition. 2. Install (services or labor): to place in final position, complete, anchored, connected in operable condition. 3. Provide: to furnish and install complete. Includes the supply of specified services. When neither furnish, install, or provide is stated, provided is implied. 4. CITY or City: City Council, Clearwater, Florida , or authorized staff or representatives. 5. ENGINEER: The terms Design Professional, Design Engineer, Engineer, and Engineer of Record are interchangeably used throughout the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 6349-79520/10/9/l 2 END OF SECTION Q 1 �75— / TPA \\TpaarrOtkec\CLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Ezpa�ion RojectVssued ro Bid Specs101095.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 63 49-79520/ l 0/9/ I 2 �� 75—OTPA \\TpasvAl�sec\CLWATEPoRO f Plant Exparmion ProjecHlssued to Bid Spew\01095.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith �111 Rights Reserved • SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL I.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN A. Bid prices for equipment furnished under Sections IV and IVa shall include the cost of a competent field service technician of the MANUFACTURERS of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment and to instruct the OWNER's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved MANUFACTURER's operation and maintenance data as specified in Section O1730 shall be delivered to the ENGINEER prior to scheduling instruction for the OWNER's personnel. This supervision may be divided into two or more time periods as required by the installation program ar as directed by the ENGINEER. B. After installation ofthe equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the MANUFACTURER's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable. 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts) 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required 3. Correctness of setting, alignment and relative arrangement of various parts • C. Upon completion of this work, the MANUFACTURER's field service technician shall submit, in triplicate, to the ENGINEER a complete, signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. • D. A certificate from the MANUFACTURER stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the unit shall be submitted prior to the startup and performance demonstration hereinafter specified. The certificate shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on the certification sheet, see Section O1730. E. See the detailed Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of the MANUFACTURER's field service technician. 1.02 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and maintenance data covering all equipment furnished under Section IV and Vla shall be delivered directly to the ENGINEER. Data shall be prepared and submitted in full conformance with Section Ol 730. After approval by the OWNER and ENGINEER, final approved copies of operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the OWNER and ENGINEER prior to scheduling the instruction period with the OWNER. 6349-79520/ 10/9/I 2 Q 1� OQ' 1 TPA UTpasvNl�sec\CLWATER�RO t Plant Expansion ProjeciVssued to 6d Spe¢Wt t00.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ] .03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of a11 equipment with particular reference to mechanical equipment such as pumps, VFD's and electric drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor boits shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by the MANUFACTURER, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations and after confirmation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping, and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. All parts intended to be plumb or leve] must be proven exactly so. Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be done at the expense of the CONTRACTOR and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ].04 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. Provide all openings, channels, chases, etc and install anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by subcontractors and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the following Paragraph. B. Coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc of the proper size and material for the execution of the work. Be responsible for any corrective cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc. In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the written approval of the ENGINEER. 1.05 WELDS A. All welding shall be in accordance with the pertinent code provisions of the American Welding Society (AWS). The following additional provisions shall apply: l. Prior to initiating any welding procedure, the CONTRACTOR shall submit documentation confirming that welders, welding operators and tackers possess the appropriate qualifications and current certifications to perform the specific welding task in accordance with the appropriate code governing the work. 2. Unless otherwise specifically authorized by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall use radiographic inspection to test the integrity of all welds. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall perform examinations, testing and inspections of all welding and shall correct any defects or deficiencies until subsequent testing and inspections shall demonstrate that all welds are structuraily sufficient. 1.06 RELOCATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the OWNER. 6349-79520/l 0/9/ 12 �� 1 �0-2 TPA 1tTpasvAl�SecICLWATER�RO 1 Plant Fapansion ProjecNwued M&d Spew101100.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 1.07 O[3STRUCTIONS A. The attention of the CONTRACTOR is drawn to the fact that during excavation at the Project site, the possibility exists of the CONTRACTOR encountering various water, chemical, electrical, or other lines not shown on the Drawings. Exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag these lines so as to avoid damage to the existing lines. Should damage occur to an existing line, repair the line at no cost to the OWNER. B. lt is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to ensure that all utility or other poles, the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, are temporarily stayed in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and that the utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice of any such excavation by the CONTRACTOR. 1.08 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION A. Sufficient precautions in accordance with Sections 011 I O and 02270 shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the State. Control measures must be adequate to assure compliance with federal, state, and local regulations and permit conditions. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations which promote erosion. B. Erosion and sedimentation control shall conform to all applicable requirements of the City of Clearwater and the State of Florida. � C. Submit background readings to the ENGINEER prior to start of activity in any area. l.09 PROVISIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF DUST A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the amount of dust created. Wetting down the site may be required or as directed by the ENGINEER to prevent dust as a result of vehicular traffic. 1.10 ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS A. Maintain coordination among all Sections (windows, window walls, louvers, doors and frames, etc) requiring PVC and PVF coatings. All coatings shall match to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER with regard to color and texture. Items rejected by the ENGINEER shall promptly be removed from the job site. 1.1 ] ON SITE STORAGE A. Attention is invited to special storage requirements and possible charges for noncompliance of on site storage requirements for materials and equipment as specified in Section 01610. 1.12 VALVE INDICES A. Furnish and install tags for all valves required on the work. Tags on above ground valves shall be noncorrosive metal, 2-in in diameter, 19 gauge thick. Buried valve tags shall be secured to a concrete base as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the ENGINEER for review, two samples of • each type of tag proposed and the MANUFACTURER's standard color chart and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped or engraved on them the information shown on the Drawings and the data described herein. Submit to the ENGINEER for approval no less than ] 20 days before 6349-79520/ 10/9! ] 2 � 1 1 0��3 TPA\\TpasvAllseclCLWATEPoRO 1 Plant Expansion PrqectllssueA to BiA SpecsW1100.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved start-up, a valve schedule containing all valves required for his/her work. The schedule shall • contain a list of abbreviations used for each valve, the location, type, a number, words or abbreviations to identify the valve's function and the normal operating position. The information contained in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the ENG]NEER. Above ground valve tags shall be furnished with noncorrosive metal wire for attachment thereof. The tag shall not be attached to handwheel or crank operators or any part of the valve which would inhibit operation of the valve. 1.13 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare for connections to the terminus of the existing systems all as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the ENGINEER. The cost for this work and for the actual connection of the existing mains sha11 be included in the bid for the project and sha11 not result in any additional cost to the OWNER. 1.14 UTILITY CROSSINGS A. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, chemical, electrical or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in the opinion of the OWNER or ENGINEER this procedure is not feasible he/she may direct the use of fittings for a utility crossing as detailed on the Drawings. 1.15 EXISTING UTILITY PROTECTION A. Existing utilities are shown in their approximate locations. Locate and protect all utilities • whether shown on Drawings or not. B. Contact utility companies at least seven (7) days before starting construction so maintenance personnel can locate and protect facilities, if required by the utility company. 1.16 WARRANTIES A. All equipment supplied under this Contract shall be warranted by the CONTRACTOR and the equipment MANUFACTURERS in accordance with the General Conditions for a period of 12 months, unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the OWNER. C. Obtain equipment warranties in accordance with Section OI 740 from each of the respective suppliers or MANUFACTURERS for all the equipment specified under Divisions 02 through 16. The form of warranty is included at the end of this Section. D. The MANUFACTURER's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. • 6349-'79520/] 0/9/l 2 O 1 1 �0�4 TPA\\TpasvrOtlsedCLWATER�RO 7 PIaM Expareion ProjectUssuedto Bid Specs\01100.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 1.17 FINAL GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed by the CONTRACTOR for a period of 1 year from and after the date of Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection with guaranteed work, which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, is rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment ar workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terrns of the Contract, promptly upon receipt of notice from the OWNER and without expense to the OWNER, do the following. l. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed work and correct all defects therein. 2. Make good all damage to the building or site, or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, is the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the contract. 3. Make good any work or material, or the equipment and contents of building, structure of site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. C. If the CONTRACTOR, after notice, fails within l0 days to proceed to comply with the terms of this guarantee, the OWNER may have the defects corrected, and the CONTRACTOR and his/her surety shall be liable for all expense incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the OWNER, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without notice being given to the CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost thereof. • D. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work as may be stipulated in the Contract Documents or other papers forming a part of this Contract shall be subject to the terms of this paragraph during the first year of life of each such guarantee. All special guarantees and MANUFACTURERS' warranties shall be assembled by the CONTRACTOR and delivered to the ENGINEER, along with a summary list thereof, before the acceptance ofthe Work. \ J ].l8 ARCHEOLOGICAL FINDS A. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, in the event any archeological artifacts within the project are discovered during the course of the work, the OWNER shall have and retain all right, title, and interest to such artifacts and shall have the further right, during the course of the Contract, to examine or cause to have examined, the site of the work for any such artifacts and to perform or have performed archeologica) excavations and all other related work to explore for, discover, recover and remove such artifacts from the site of the work. In the event the work or archeological examination and related work delays the CONTRACTOR's work, he/she shall be entitled to an extension of time to complete the work equal to the number of days he/she is thus delayed. Such delay shall be considered an excusable delay as defined in the general conditions. ].19 DAMAGE ON ACCOUNT OF H1GH WATER A. CONTRACTOR will hold himself responsible for all damage done to his/her wark by heavy rains or floods and he/she shall take all reasonable precautions to provide against damages by building such temporary dikes, channels, or shoring to carry off storm water as the nature of the work may requi re. 6349-79520/10/9/ l 2 � 1 1 0�-5 TPA \\TpasvNllsec\CLWATER�RO 7 Plant Evpa�rsion Projecillssuetl m Bi0 SpecsW7100.doc �O 20] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ] .20 TOOLS A. MANUFACTURERS of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their use. Preserve and deliver to the OWNER these tools and instructions in good order no later than l0 days prior to startup. ] .21 HOURS OF OPERATION A. Operation of construction equipment is only permitted Monday through Saturday, 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM. Obtain written consent from the City of Clearwater Engineering Department or designee for operation of construction eyuipment during any other period. B. Do not carry out non-emergency work, including equipment moves, on Sundays without prior written authorization by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department or designee. 1.22 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS � A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit daily reports of construction activities, including non-working days. The report shall include: 1. Manpower, number of inen by craft; 2. Equipment on the project and whether in use or idle; 3. Major deliveries; 4. Activities wark with reference to the CPM schedule activity numbers; 5. New problems; 6. Weather Conditions- temperature, rainfall, cloud cover, etc.; and • 7. Other pertinent information B. A similar report shall be submitted for/by each Subcontractor. C. The reports shall be submitted to the ENGINEER' S Office within two days of the respective report date. Each report shall be signed by the Contractor's Superintendent or Project Manager. D. Information provided on the daily report shall not constitute notice of delay or any other notice required by the Contract Documents. Notice shall be as required therein. E. See requirements for the Quality Control Daily Report and the form in Section O1400. ] .23 EMERGENCIES A. Emergency phone numbers (fire, medical, police) shall be posted at the CONTRACTOR's phone and its location known to all, as well as at project sites where work is in progress. B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the ENGINEER by messenger or phone. C. All accidents shall be documented and a fully detailed written report submitted to the ENGINEER after each accident. D. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times after regular working hours, including weekend and holidays, maintain a telephone where he or his representative can be reached on an emergency basis. The CONTRACTOR or his representative shall be prepared to act to correct conditions on • the site deemed to constitute an emergency by the OWNER, ENGINEER or local authorities and is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss without special instructions from 6349-79520! ] 0/9/ 12 01 l 00-6 TPARTpasvNilseclCLWATEPoRO 1 Plant Fxpansion ProjedVssued to Bid Specs\OHOO.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt written notice of all significant changes in the work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. If a condition on the site requires attention after hours, either the OWNER, ENGINEER or local Authority shall ca11 the CONTRACTOR or his representative at the emergency telephone number, identify himself and describe the emergency condition. The CONTRACTOR is expected to dispatch personnel and equipment to adequately institute corrective measures within two (2) hours. If for some reason the CONTRACTOR or his agent cannot be reached at the emergency number after a reasonable time (1 /2-hour), the OWNER shall have the right to immediately initiate corrective measures, and the cost shall be borne on the CONTRACTOR. E. In the event that the CONTRACTOR fails to maintain safe job conditions and traffic conditions, including but not limited to, trench settlement and hazardous storage of backfill ar construction materials, the ENGINEER, after failure of the CONTRACTOR to commence substantial steps at the job site to rectify the situation within two (2) hours of the time the CONTRACTOR has been notified of the unsafe condition, may hire guards, take such precautions, make such repairs and take any other steps which the OWNER or ENGINEER in its discretion, considers necessary to protect the property, persons, or the OWNER. The cost of any of these precautions, guards, or steps shall be deducted from the payments due the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR will be billed for these services, work and material at prevailing rates. ].24 CLAIMS FOR PROPERTY DAMAGES AND CITIZEN'S CONCERNS/INQUIRIES A. In the event of any indirect or direct damage to public or private property caused in whole or in part by an act, omission or negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any • Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the CONTRACTOR shall at his own expense and cost promptly remedy and restore such property to a condition equal to or better than that existing before such damage was done. The CONTRACTOR sha11 perform such restoration by underpinning, repairing, rebuilding, replanting, or otherwise restoring as may be required by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or shall make good such damage in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. In case of failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to promptly restore such property or make good such damage, the ENGINEER may, upon five (5) calendar days written notice, proceed to repair, rebuild or otherwise restore such property as may be necessary and the cost thereof, or a sum sufficient in the judgement of the ENGINEER to reimburse the OWNERS of the property so damaged, will be deducted from any monies due to become due the CONTRACTOR under this Contract. B. CONTRACTOR shall designate responsible member of his organization as a public information coordinator for the project. The coordinator shall attend and actively participate in periodic public information meetings schedaled by the ENGINEER, if requested. The coordinator shall not be the CONTRACTOR's project manager ar superintendent. All costs associated with the coordinator shall be included in the work, no separate payment shall be made. C. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of his organization as an on-site complaint resolution coordinator for this project, which can be the same person in l.24, B. The complaint resolution coordinator shall be responsible for prevention an resolution of citizen concerns/inquiries and the protection of material, equipment, and private property. The coordinator shall not be the CONTRACTOR's project manager or superintendent. All costs associated with the coordinator shall be included in the work, no separate payment shall be made. • l.25 STERILIZATION AND BACTERIAL TESTS 6349-79520/10/9/12 0110��/ TPAllTpasvNt�sedCLWATER�RO1PIaMEzpa�aionProjecTJssuedtoBidSpecsW1100.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Before the system is put into operation, all raw, process and potable water mains and • appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. B. After the system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, the CONTRACTOR shall take samples of water in suitable sterilized containers. The CONTRACTOR shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C65 ]. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shali be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. • � 6349-79520/ ] 0/9! 12 �� Q—O TPA NTpasvrOtlgec\CLWATERlRO 1 PIaM Expansion Projeclllss�xd to Bid SpeaW7 t00.dx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) • • PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 6349-79520/10/9/l2 01100-9 TPAV\TpasvrOt�seclCLWA7ER�ROtWantExparisionPmjeclUssuedtoBidSpeo\01100.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PROJECT T1TLE: OWNER: WARRANTY FOR EQUIPMENT ITEM PROJECT NUMBER: EQUIPMENT ITEM: SECTION NO. / ITEM NO.: SUPPLIER: SUPPLIER'S ADDRESS: SUPPLIER'S REFERENCE NO.: The undersigned guarantees that the above equipment is of good merchantable quality, free from defects in material or workmanship, fu11y meets the type, quality, design and performance requirements defined in the Contract Documents of the above project, and that the equipment will in actual operation satisfactorily perform the functions for which installed. The undersigned agrees to repair, replace, or otherwise make good, any defect in workmanship or materials in the above described equipment which may develop within a period of 12 months from the date of final acceptance by the OWNER of the above named project. l 2 months from the date of Substantial Completion: COM PANY COMPANY ADDRESS PHONE NO. BY TITLE SIGNED DATE 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 (Insert Date of Substantial Completion) FAX NO.: END OF SECTION 01 1 �Q-1 � TPA\\Tpasvr0l�seclCLWATER�RO 1 Plant Exparsion Rojeclllssued to Bid Speca\01100.doc S • • • • • n 2012 CI�M Smith 1 i 1 i� �>>: i: : Reserved SECTION O1 I l0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES PART±-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment and perform all work required for compliance with federal, state, and local environmental protection laws and regulations, during and as the result of construction operations under this Contract. B. Schedule and conduct all work in a manner that will minimize the erosion of soils in the area of the work. Provide erosion control measures such as diversion channels, sedimentation ar filtration systems, berms, staked hay ba]es, seeding, mulching or other special surface treatments as are required to prevent siiting and muddying of streams, rivers, impoundments, lakes, etc. All erosion control measures shall be in place in an area prior to any construction activity in that area. Specific requirements for erosion and sedimentation controls are specified in Section 02270. 1 AZ APPLICABLE REGULATIONS A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement. 1.03 NOTIFICATIONS A. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of any non-compliance with the foregoing provisions or of any environmentally objectional acts and corrective action to be taken. State or locai agencies responsible for verification of certain aspects of the environmental protection requirements shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, through the ENGINEER, of any non-compliance with State or local requirements. After receipt of such notice from the ENGINEER or from the regulatory agency through the ENGINEER, immediately take corrective action. Such notice, when delivered to the CONTRACTOR or his authorized representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose. If the CONTRACTOR fails or refuses to comply promptly, the ENGINEER may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such stop arders shall be made the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the CONTRACTOR unless it is later determined that the CONTRACTOR was in compliance. 1.04 IMPLEMENTATION A. Prior to commencement of the work, meet with the ENGINEER to develop mutual understandings relative to compliance with these provisions and administration ofthe environmental pollution control program. B. Remove temporary environmental control features, when approved by the ENGINEER and incorporate permanent control features into the project at the earliest practicable time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 6349-79520/10/9/l 2 01 I 1 �-1 TPA \\Tpasvr011gedCLWATER�RO 1 Plant F�cpareion PrqecNSSUed to Bid Spe�s\Ot 710.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Provide positive means of erosion control such as shallow ditches around construction to carry off surface water. Erosion controt measures, sueh as siltation basins, hay check dams, mulching, jute netting and other equivalent techniques, shall be used as appropriate. Flow of surface water into excavated areas shall be prevented. Ditches around construction area shall also be used to carry away water resulting from dewatering of excavated areas. At the completion of the work, ditches shall be backfilled and the ground surface restored to original condition. 3.02 PROTECTION OF SURFACE WATERS A. Take al1 precautions to prevent, or reduce to a minimum, any damage to any surface water from pollution by debris, sediment or other material, or from the manipulation of equipment and/ar materials. Water that has been used for washing or processing, or that contains oils or sediments that will reduce the quality of the surface water, shall not be directly returned to the surface water. Divert such waters through a settling basin or filter before being directed into surface waters. B. Do not discharge water from dewatering operations directly into any channel, wetlands, surface water or any storm sewer. Water from dewatering operations shall be treated by filtration, settling basins, or other approved method to reduce the amount of sediment contained in the water to allowable levels. • C. Take all preventative measures to avoid spillage of petroleum products and other pollutants. In the event of any spillage, prompt remedial action shall be taken in accordance with a contingency • action plan approved by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Submit two copies of approved contingency plans to the ENGINEER. 3.03 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. Restore land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent wark to a condition, after completion of construction, which wi11 appear to be natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. Confine all construction activities to areas shown on the Drawings. B. Outside of areas requiring earthwork for the construction of the new facilities, do not deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs, nar remove or cut them without prior approval. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to ar attached to any existing nearby trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the ENGINEER. Where such special emergency use is permitted, first wrap the trunk with a sufficient thickness of burlap or rags over which softwood cleats shall be tied before any rope, cable, or wire is placed. The CONTRACTOR shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use. C. Before beginning operations near them, protect trees that may possibly be defaced, bruised, injured, or otherwise damaged by the construction equipment, dumping or other operations, by placing boards, planks, or poles around them. Monuments and markers shall be protected similarly. D. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the CONTRACTOR's eyuipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to their origina) condition. The ENGINEER will decide the method of restoration to be used and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed • or removed and disposed of. 6349-79520/] 0/9/12 �� 1 1 �-2 TPA\\TpasvNtlsec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Expansion Prqec0lssued W&d Spers\O7HO.doe � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved l. All scars made on trees by equipment, construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1-in in diameter shall be coated as soon as possible with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced workmen with saws or pruning shears. Tree trimming with axes will not be permitted. 2. Climbing ropes shall be used where necessary for safety. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are subsequently damaged by the CONTRACTOR and are beyond saving in the opinion of the ENGINEER, shall be immediately removed and replaced. E. The locations of the CONTRACTOR's storage and other construction buildings, required temporarily in the performance of the work, shall be cleared portions of the job site or areas to be cleared as shown on the Drawings and approved by the ENGINEER and shall not be within wetlands or floodplains. The preservation of the landscape shall be an imperative consideration in the selection of all sites and in the construction of buildings. Drawings showing storage facilities shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER. F. If the CONTRACTOR proposes to construct embankments and excavations for work areas, he shall submit the following for approval at least ten days prior to scheduled start of such temporary work. 1. A layout of all excavations, embankments and drainage to be constructed within the work area. G. Remove all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess of waste materials, or any other vestiges • of construction as directed by the ENGINEER. It is anticipated that excavation, filling and plowing ofroadways will be required to restare the area to near natural conditions which will permit the growth of vegetation thereon. The disturbed areas shall be prepared and sodded as described in Section 02932, or as approved by the ENGINEER. • H. All debris and excess material will be disposed of outside wetland or floodplain areas in an environmentally sound manner. 3.04 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY A. Burning - The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be allowed. B. Dust Control - Maintain all excavations, embankment, stockpiles, waste areas, borrow areas, and al) other work areas within or without the project boundaries free from dust which could cause the standards for air pollution to be exceeded and which would cause a hazard or nuisance to others. C. An approved method of stabilization consisting of sprinkling ar other similar methods will be permitted to control dust. The use of petroleum products is prohibited. The use of chlorides will not be permitted. D. Sprinkling, to be approved, must be repeated at such intervals as to keep a}l parts of the disturbed area at least damp at all times, and the CONTRACTOR shall have sufficient competent equipment on the job to accomplish this. Dust control shall be performed as the work proceeds and whenever a dust nuisance or hazard occurs, as determined hy the ENGINEER. 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 01110-3 TPA\\Tpaav101lsec\CLWATER�RO t PIaM 6pereion Prqec111ssued to Bid Specs1011 t0.doc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.05 NOISE CONTROL A. Make every effort to minimize noises caused by the construction operations. Equipment shall be equipped with silencers or mufflers designed to operate with the least possible noise in compliance with Federal, State and local codes and regulations. 3.06 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Maintain all facilities constructed for pollution control as long as the operations creating the particular pollutant are being carried out or until the material concerned has become stabilized to the extent that pollution is no longer being created. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/ l 2 0�� 0-4 TPA \1TpasvNl�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plan� 6cpansion ProjecNssued to BiU Specs\01110.tloc • C� • CJ . �O 201 Z CDM Smith Ali Rights Reserved SECTION 01 l70 ADDITIONAL PROJECT PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR A. General obligations of the CONTRACTOR shall be as set forth in the Contract Documents. Unless special payment is specifically provided in Section 111, all incidental work and expense in connection with the completion of work under the Contract will be considered a subsidiary obligation of the CONTRACTOR and all such costs shall be included in the appropriate items in the Bid Form in connection with which the costs are incurred. 1 A2 SITE INVESTIGATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall satisfy himself as to the conditions existing within the project area, the type of equipment required to perform the work, the character, quality and quantity of the subsurface materials to be encountered insofar from an inspection of the site, as well as from information presented by the Drawings and related Sections. CONTRACTOR shall get his own geotechnical information if he/she deems it necessary. Any failure of the CONTRACTOR to acquaint himself with the available information will not relieve him from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The OWNER assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretation made by the CONTRACTOR on the basis of the information made available by the OWNER. 1.03 COORD]NATION WITH LOCAL AGENCIES A. Supply OWNER with the following information. 1. Immediate notification of any drain, gas, sewer, force main, reclaimed water, or potable water main breaks. B. Reimburse the OWNER for the actual cost of the services of personnel required during other than regular working hours. The emergency contact number for the ENGINEER during non-business hours will be provided at the pre-construction conference and will be updated as necessary. 1.04 PUBLIC UTILITIES A. Provide the Utility Companies with a schedule of the activities in areas where the utilities exist. B. Notify utility companies of any damage to their utilities resulting from construction operations. C. Notify Sunshine at 1-800-432-4770 at least seven (7) days before digging, trenching, demolishing, backfilling, grading, landscaping or other earth moving operations in any public ways, rights of way and easements. 1.05 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • A. Submit a progress schedule before starting any work, in accordance with Section 01310. 6349-79520/10/9/12 Q 1�! �� I TPA \\Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER1R01 Plam Evpareion AojecNssueA to Bid SpeceWt 170.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Review the progress schedule with the ENGINEER on a monthly basis or more frequently as . required by the ENGINEER. The progress schedule shall be adjusted as required in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.06 PERMITS A. Obtain all necessary permits required for proper execution of the project (except permits to be provided by OWNER as specified in Section 01065). Fill out all forms and furnish all drawings required to obtain the permits. A copy of each permit shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. All fees associated with these permits shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR as part of the work. Work shall not commence on any phase of the work requiring a permit until the permit is obtained. B. Obtain required street opening permits for excavations within streets or sidewalk areas. PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520/l0/9/l2 �1�7��2 TPA\1TpasvAl�sedCLWA7ER\RO1PIantExpansionRojedUssuedtoBidSpecs\OH70.doc C� �� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION Ol Z00 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL l.Ol REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The ENGINEER shall schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the work including: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 15 working days after each meeting. a. To participants in the meeting. b. To parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. B. Representatives of CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. Attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. lnstructions to Bidders are included in Section Il. B. Construction Schedules are included in Section 01310. C. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples are included in Section O1300. D. Project Record Documents are included in Section tll. E. Operating and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. 1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Following the contract execution, a preconstruction meeting will be scheduled. The Notice to Proceed may be negotiated during or after the preconstruction meeting. B. Location. City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room l30 Clearwater, FL 33756 C. Attendance l. OWNER's Representative. 2. ENGINEER and his/her professional consultants. 3. Resident Project Representative. 4. CONTRACTOR's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. 6. Majar suppliers. 7. Utilities 8. Others as appropriate. 6349-79520/] 0/9/12 � 1 2��-1 TPA 11TpasvNi�seclCLWATERIRO 7 Rant Expe�ion RojecNssued tn Bid Specs101200.tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Suggested Agenda l. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected Construction Schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Submittals. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment including Schedule of Values. f. Payment procedures. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas. b. OWNER's requirements. 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. I 1. Housekeeping procedures. 12. Emergency contacts. E. Time Critical to the Completion of the Project Submittals l. The submittals identified as time critical to completion of the project shall be submitted to the ENGINEER by the CONTRACTOR within 30 days of Project Award date. See requirements of Section 01012. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings. The progress meetings will be held monthly with the first meeting 30 days after the pre-construction meeting. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress ofthe work. C. Location of the meetings: City of Clearwater Utilities Department 1650 N Arcturas Ave Clearwater, FL 33765 D. Attendance l . OWNER 2. ENGINEER and his/her professional consultants as needed. 3. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 4. Supp}iers as appropriate to the agenda. 5. Others as appropriate. E. Suggested Agenda 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, probtems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule_ 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1200—ZTPA NTpasvNl�sec\CLWA7ERlR0 1 Plan[ ExDarision ProjectUssued to Bid SpecsW1200.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � • 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. l0. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the project. l4. Complaints. I 5. Other business. 16. Construction schedule. l7. Critical/long lead items. F. Attend progress meetings and is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and equipment, progress of the work, etc. G. Provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with Section 01300. H. CONTRACTOR to provide a 2 or 4 week look ahead detail schedule to outline work planned until next meeting. • PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) CJ PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 O 1 GOO-3TPA NTpasvN115ec\CLWA7ER1R0 1 Plant Expa�ion AojedUssued to Bid Spew101200.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • �� L � 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/ 12 O I ZOO�TPA \1TpasvAllsec\CLWATERiRO 1 Plarrt Expansion Rojectllssued to Bid Specs101200.doc � • • � 201 Z CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O] 300 SHOP DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review such working drawings, shop drawings, test reports and data on materials (hereinafter in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples far materials specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the Contract Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a complete listing of all submittals required for the project noting the number of each submitta] and the date each submittal is to be submitted. CONTRACTOR shall identify submittals that are time critical to completion of the project. The listin�; shall be submitted within five (5) days following the Award of Contract and shall be a nrerequisite to the first partial pavment. The submittals identified as time critical to completion of the �roiect shall be submitted to the ENGINEER bv the CONTRACTOR at the Pre-Construction meetin� and are a prerequisite to an�pavment or artial payment for mobilization. See requirements of Section 01012. 1. Consult with ENGINEER for preparation of submittal register. C. The CONTRACTOR shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in other sections of these Specifications. D. The CONTRACTOR is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and wi11 bring this log to each scheduled progress meeting with the OWNER and the ENGINEER. This log shall be organized using the ten (10) character numbering system in subparagraph 1.06 F below. This log should include the following items: 1. Submittal-Description and File Number assigned. 2. Date to ENGINEER. 3. Date returned to CONTRACTOR (from ENGINEER). 4. Status of Submittal a. Approved b. Approved As Noted c. Approved As Noted/Confirm d. Approved As Noted/Resubmit e. Not Approved f. Comments Attached g. Receipt Acknowledged 5. Date of Resubmittal and Return (as applicable). 6. Date material released (for fabrication). 7. Projected date of fabrication. 8. Projected date of delivery to site. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be considered to mean CONTRACTOR's plans for material and equipment that become an integral part of the Project. 6349-79520/ I 0/09/ 12 ��.J�� 1 TPA NTpaswOtlsec\CLWATERlRO 1 Plant E�ansion ProjeMksued to Bitl Specs101300.COc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved These drawings shall be complete and detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, • erection and setting drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of material, and inspection and test reports and certifications as applicable to the Work. B. All details on shop drawings submitted for approval shall show clearly the elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure and/or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the shop drawings before being submitted for approval. C. See Shop Drawing Schedule requirements in subparagraph 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY below. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing-in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare-parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work. 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be considered to mean • the CONTRACTOR's plans for temporary structures such as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, ground water control systems, forming and falsewark; for underpinning; and for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become an integral part ofthe Project. B. Working drawings sha11 be signed and sealed by a registered Professional ENGINEER, currently licensed to practice in the state and shall convey, or be accompanied by, calculations or other suffi- cient information to completely explain the structure, machine, or system described and its in- tended manner of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been reviewed without specific exceptions by the ENGINEER. Such review will be for general conformance and will not relieve the CONTRACTOR in any way from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error are assumed by the CONTRACTOR; the OWNER and ENGINEER shall have no responsibility therefor. 1.05 SAMPLES A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, for the approval of the ENGINEER, samples required by the Contract Documents or requested by the ENGINEER. Samples shall be delivered to the ENGINEER as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted unless otherwise specified. The CONTRACTOR shall pre-pay all shipping charges on samples. Materials for which samples are required shall not be used in work until approved by the ENGINEER. B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, physical • examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range 6349-79520/ 10/09/ ] 2 Q 1 JOQ-2 TPA PTpasvr011sedCLWATERVi01 PIaM Expansbn Prqecfllssuetl W Bid SpecsW1300.doc • C� • � 2012 CDM Smith A I i f� i ghts Reserved sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work to be used by the ENGINEER or OWNER for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work. C. The CONTRACTOR shal) prepare a transmittal letter in triplicate for each shipment of samples. The CONTRACTOR shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment and send a copy of this letter to the ENGINEER. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract requirements. D. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the ENGINEER or stored at the site of the work. Approved samples ofthe hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in work shall match the approved samples. Samples that fail testing or are not approved will be returned to the CONTRACTOR at his expense, if so requested at time of submission. 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as shown on the Shop Drawing Submittal Schedule so as to cause no delay in the Contract Work or in the Work of the OWNER or any separate CONTRACTOR, all shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit seven (7) copies of descriptive or product data submittals to complement shop drawings for the ENGINEER plus up to four (4) copies which the CONTRACTOR will require returned. The ENGINEER will retain three (3) sets of all submittals. The ENGINEER wiil review the submittal and return to the CONTRACTOR the set of marked-up reproducibles with appropriate review comments. If in the opinion of the ENGINEER a submittal is nonreproducible, the CONTRACTOR shall submit four (4) additional sets of blueline shop drawings. Once submittals are approved and require no additional submittal, two (2) copies of each submittal will be forwarded to the OWNER. C. All submittals shall be made directly to the Office of the ENGINEER, CDM Smith Mc. D. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be furnished with the following information: 1. Number and title of the drawing. 2. Date of drawing or revision. 3. Name of project building or facility. 4. Name of CONTRACTOR, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting drawing. 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings. 6. CONTRACTOR Certification Statement. 7. Submittal Identification Number. 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference. E. In accordance with subparagraph 1.07 A below, each shop drawing, working drawing, sample, and catalog data submitted by the CONTRACTOR shail have affixed to it the following Certification Statement, signed by the CONTRACTOR: "Certification Statement: By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers, and similar data and I have checked and coardinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all contract requirements." 6349-79520/10/09/12 01300-3 TPANTpasvr0l�sec\C�WATER1fi01 Plant E�ansion Rqect1155uetlto Bitl Specs�Ot300Ax c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a 10-character submittal identification numbering system in the • following manner: 1. The first character shall be a D, S, P, M, or R, which represents Shop/Working Drawing and other Product Data (D), Sample (S), Preliminary Submittal (P), Operating/ Maintenance Manual (M), or Request for Information (R). 2. The next five digits shall be the applicable Specification Section Number. 3. The next three digits shall be the numbers 001-999 to sequentially number each initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section Number. 4. The last character shall be a letter, A-Z, indicating the submission, or resubmission of the same drawing, i.e., ❑A=1st submission, B=2nd submission, C=3d submission, �c. A typical submittal number would be as follows: D-03300-008-B D = Shop Drawing 03300 = Specification Section for Concrete 008 = The eighth initial submittal under this specification section B = The second submission (first resubmission) ofthat particular shop drawing G. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of each submittal transmittal sheet (for shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples) to the Resident Project Representative simultaneously with the CONTRACTOR's submission of said drawings, data, samples or manual packages to the ENGINEER. H. A1} items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's standard product. � Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the CONTRACTOR shall describe such variations in his letter of transmitta] and on the shop drawings along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If the CONTRACTOR fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the CONTRACTOR will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the ENGINEER. I. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and eyuipment lists giving, for each item thereon, the name and ]ocation of the supplier or manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish, and all other pertinent data. J. For all material furnished, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a list including the material name, and address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. K. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products under Divisions l l through 16 shall submit an installation list to the ENGINEER along with the required shop drawings. The installation list shall include all installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least one (1) year. L. The CONTRACTOR shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the Submittals. Only the • ENGINEER will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 01300-4 TPA RTpasvr011sedCLWATERU20 1 Plant Eapansbn Prqechlssued lo &d Spece101300 doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • M. Before final payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to ENGINEER one (1) set of record shop drawings as described in Section 01720. These record shop drawings shall be in conformance with the approved documents and should show any field conditions that may affect their accuracy. ].07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. It is the duty of the CONTRACTOR to check, and coordinate with the wark of all trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him before submitting them to the ENGINEER for review. Each and every copy of any drawing or data sheet larger than l 1°x 17" shall bear CONTRACTOR's stamp showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data sheets 1 1"x 17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the CONTRACTOR's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the package. Shop drawings submitted to the ENGINEER without the CONTRACTOR's stamp will be returned to the CONTRACTOR, without review at the ENGINEER's option, for conformance with this requirement. B. The CONTRACTOR shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to submission to determine and verify the following: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data. • 4. Conformance with Specifications. C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. At a time decided upon at the preconstruction meeting the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER a Shop Drawing schedule fixing the respective dates for the initial submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. This schedule shall be provided as a separate entity and indicate those submittals that are critical to the progress schedule. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the CONTRACTOR's failure to transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. E. The CONTRACTOR shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned not approved. Before starting this work all revisions must be corrected by the CONTRACTOR. After resubmittal they will be reviewed and returned to him by the ENGINEER. If approved or approved as noted, then the CONTRACTOR may begin this work. Any corrections made to the shop drawings are to be followed without exception. F. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER all shop drawings and data sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less than twenty-one (21) calendar days for � review from the time the ENGINEER receives them. No less than thirty (30) calendar days will be reyuired for major eyuipment or shop drawings that require review by more than one (1) engineering disciptine. 6349-79520/10/09/12 073��-5 TPA\\TpasvrOtkec\CLWATER1R01PIantE�arebnWqechlssuetlroBi7Spe¢10130000c � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and bear all cost of damages that may result from the • ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to the review and approvai by ENGINEER of the necessary shop drawings. H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by SUBCONTRACTORS for approval shall be sent directly to the CONTRACTOR for checking. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for their submission according to the approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials and project completion. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall check ali SUBCONTRACTOR's shop drawings, product data, warking drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of inembers, materials, and details to satisfy himself that they are in conformance to the Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall be returned to the SUBCONTRACTORS for correction before submission to the ENGINEER. Requests for Information (RFI) shall be submitted on a standard form provided by the ENGINEER. RFIs shall indicate their importance to the timely completion of the project. RFIs will be processed as a shop drawing unless there is an urgent need for immediate response. 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. The ENGINEER's review is for general conformance with the design concept and contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR from • compliance with the contract plans and specifications or from departures therefrom. The CONTRACTOR remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner. B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. They shall not be construed: 1. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 2. as relieving the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials; 3. as approving departures from details furnished by the ENGINEER, except as otherwise provided herein. C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations per Subparagraph l.06H above, and show a departure from the Contract requirements which ENGINEER finds to be in the interest of the OWNER and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the ENGINEER may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D. Submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR under one of the following codes. Code 1- "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the CONTRACTOR may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture. Code 2- "APPROVED AS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary prior to release for • manufacturing. 6349-79520/10/09/12 O1300-6 7PA�\TpasvrO7�sec�CLWA7ERU201PIantE�ansionProjectNssuetlto&dSpecsW1300.doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved • Code 3- "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM." This combination of codes is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments is required by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR may release the equipment or materia) for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This confir►nation is to address the omissions and/or nonconforming items that were noted. Only the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted. Code 4- "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT." This combination of codes is assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittals ofthe package. This code generally means that the equipment or material cannot be released for manufacture unless the CONTRACTOR takes fu11 responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract Documents. The resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal is to be received by the ENGINEER within 15 calendar days of the date of the ENGINEER's transmitta) requiring the resubmittals. Code 5- "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract Documents. Code 6- "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached to the returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the CONTRACTOR. • Code 7- "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED" — This code is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the ENGINEER's review and approval, and is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledging receipt of ineans and methods of construction work plans, field conformance test reports, and health and safety plans. Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing there has been an attachment of additional data. Code 7 is used as may be necessary. E. Resubmittals wiil be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention, in writing on the letter oftransmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the ENGINEER on previous submissions. Any such revisions which are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the ENGINEER. F. If the CONTRACTOR considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall give written notice thereof to the ENGINEER at least seven (7) working days prior to release for manufacture. G. The ENGINEER will review a submittal/resubmittal a maximum of two (2) times after which cost of review will be borne by the CONTRACTOR. The cost of engineering shall be equal to the ENGINEER's charges to the OWNER under the terms of the ENGINEER's agreement with the OWNER. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 � I JO�� / TPA NTpasvr011sec�CLWATER\RO 1 PIaM F�ansbn PrqeclUssued to Bid SpecsW1300 dx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, the . CONTRACTOR shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the ENGINEER. l. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The ENGINEER will be the only judge as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to the CONTRACTOR, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The ENGINEER may at his option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the CONTRACTOR to the areas that are incomplete. 1.09 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (P.E.) CERTIFICATION FORM A. If specifically required in other Sections of these Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a P.E. Certification for each item required, in the form attached to this Section, completely filled in and stamped. PART 2 PRODUCTS - (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION - (NOT USED} END OF SECTION • � �J 6349-79520/l0/09/12 ��J��—O TPA11TpasvrOtlsec\CLWATERV701PIantE�arebnProjecNSSUedWBidSpewW1300.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ftight� Reserved • P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a Professional ENGINEER registered in the State of Florida and that he/she has been employed by (Name of CONTRACTOR) to design in accordance with Spccification Section for the City of Clearwater, Reverse Osmosis Plant No. ] Expansion Project, City Project Number: 09-0018-UT. The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the , that said design is in conformance with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, and that his/her signature and P.E. seal have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the design. The undersigned hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to the OWNER or OWNER's representative with seven (7) days following written request therefor by the OWNER. P.E. Name Florida P.E. License No. • Address CONTRACTOR's Name Signature Title Address • Signature 6349-79520/10/09/12 O1300-9 TPA\\Tpasvr0llsec\CLWATERV201PIantF�anspnPrqecl�ISSUedtoBidSpecs10t3000oc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/ 12 � 1 3��— � � TPA PTpasvr0llsedCLWATER�R01 Plant Expansbn Projecfllssued M Bid SpecsW1300 doc � �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Ri<_�i�ts Reserved SECTION 013 } 0 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 "The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit Progress Schedules and schedules for submittals in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.02 Construction under this contract must be coordinated with the OWNER's personnel and accomplished in a logical order to maintain the integrity and operation of existing facilities and to ailow construction to be completed within the time allowed by Contract Documents. I.03 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for developing his/her own schedule logic with specified durations, manpower and cost data, with all target, completion and milestone dates generated, which must be acceptable to the OWNER. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS A. No work shall be done between 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M. nor on Sundays or lega) holidays without the written permission of the OWNER. However, emergency work may be done without prior permission. • B. Night wark may be established by the CONTRACTOR as regular procedure with the written permission ofthe OWNER. Such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by the OWNER if the CONTRACTOR fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at night. • C. The existing facilities must be maintained in operation unless written permission has been obtained from the OWNER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible far providing all temporary piping, plumbing, electrical hook-ups, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, lighting, temporary structure, or whatever is required to maintain the existing operations. All details of temporary piping and temporary construction are not necessarily shown on the Drawings or covered in the Specifications. However, this does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility to insure that construction will not interrupt proper, collection and pumping. E. The CONTRACTOR shall have the capability of preparing and utilizing the specified CPM scheduling technique. The submittal shall include the name of the individual on the CONTRACTOR's staff who will be responsible far the CPM schedule and for providing the required updating inforrnation. 6349-79520/10/09/12 QIJID-1 TPA\\TpasurO7lseclCLWATER1ROtPIantE�ar�sionWojecRlssuetltoBidSpecs�A�310tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith A)1 Rights Reserved 1.05 PROGRESS OF THE WORK The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the Contract. PART 2- PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a critical path schedule as described herein. B. The critical path schedule requirement will consist of a single baseline schedule and monthly progress schedule updates, monthly progress status reports (Monthly Status Reports). The planning, scheduling, management, and execution of the work is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The progress schedule requirement is established to allow ENGINEER to review CONTRACTOR's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to assist ENGINEER in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to atlow other CONTRACTORS to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of the CONTRACTOR to analyze delay claims; and to provide OWNER with information about "construction schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule". � C. ENGINEER's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in • writing called ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of submission and ENG]NEER has given written concurrence to the specific deviations, nor shall any concurrence by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals. Concurrence of the CPM Activity Network by the ENGINEER is advisory only and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for accomplishing the work within the Contract completion date(s). D. The concurred baseline schedule, shall have legal status as long as it is used by CONTRACTOR for planning, organizing, directing, managing, and executing the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Legal status will further imply that CONTRACTOR will use the schedule to report progress and, further, that CONTRACTOR and OWNER will use the schedule for determining delay(s) in achieving the contract date(s) stipulated in the Agreement subject to the requirements of this section of the General Requirements. E. ENGINEER will, upon receipt and review of each schedule submittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of concurrence and present the submittal to OWNER, or return the submittal to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend concurrence. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR will be required to make the necessary corrections and resubmit. If CONTRACTOR fails to provide submittals as required, he/she will be deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which may constitute reasons for refusing to recommend progress payments. F. ENGINEER's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs • incident thereto. ENGINEER's review of the schedule submittals will be predicated on a CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval signed off by CONTRACTOR and those subcontractors and 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 �� 3 1 ��2 7PA 1\Tpasvr011seclCLWATER1R01 Plant E�arebn Roject�ISSUeC to Bitl SpecsW1310.doc • • • 0 2012 CDM Smith A l l R i�ht� Reserved suppliers performing work under an appropriate agreement with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval on any schedule submittal shall constitute a representation to OWNER and ENGINEER that CONTRACTOR has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors and suppliers, have reviewed and coordinated the sequences shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract Documents. 2.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart diagram. The diagram shall be time-scaled and sequenced by work areas. Horizontal time scale shall identify the first work day of each week. B. Activities shall be at least as detailed as the Bid Schedule and Schedule of Values. Activity durations shall be in whole working days. In addition, activity man-days shall be shown for each activity or alternatively, tabulated in an accompanying report. C. Diagrams shall be neat and legible and submitted on sheets at least 1 1 inches by 17 inches suitable for reproduction. Scale and spacing shall allow space for notations and future revisions. D. The program disk, the diagrams and reports shall be prepared by using Primavera Project P]anner 5.1 or latest version. A copy of the Primavera project files using the Primavera Project Planner "back-up" menu selection shall be prepared. Furnish the information on a compact disk with each individual submittal. 2.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Each monthly schedule shail be based on data as of the last day of the current pay period. B. Description for each activity shall be brief but convey the scope of wark described. C. Activities shall identify ail items of work that must be accomplished to achieve substantial completion, such as items pertaining to CONTRACTOR's installation and testing activities; items pertaining to the approval of regulatory agencies; CONTRACTOR's time required for submittals, fabrication and deliveries; the time required by ENGINEER to review a11 submittals as set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of OWNER to support pre-operational, startup and final testing; time required for the relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with the work of other CONTRACTORS performing work under separate contracts with OWNER. I. Where work is to be performed under this contract concurrently with and/or contingent upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the CONTRACTORS schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contacts for the preparation and updating of his schedule and shall make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules. D. Schedules shall show the complete sequence of construction by activities. Date for beginning and completion of each activiry shall be indicated as well as projected percentage of completion for each activity as of the first day of each month. 1. On sewer, water, storm, or paving projects where construction on two or more streets, roads or easements in contemplated, the CONTRACTOR shall also indicate the starting and completion date of all items of work required on each street, road or easement. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 013 ] 0-3 TPA 1\Tpasw011seclCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM F�parebn Projec111ssuetl to Bitl Specs�D1370 Coc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Submittals schedule for shop drawing review, product data, and samples shall show the date of • CONTRACTOR submittal and the date approved submittals will be required by the ENGINEER, consistent with the time frames established in the Specifications. F. For Contract Change orders granting time extensions, the impact on the Contract date(s) shall equal the calendar-day total time extension specified for the applicable work in the Contract change order. G. For actual delays, add activities prior to each delayed activity on the appropriate critical path(s). Data on the added activities of this type shall portray all steps leading to the delay, and shall further include the following: separate activity identification, activity description indicating cause of the delay, activity duration consistent with whichever set of dates below applies, the actual start and finish dates of the delay or, if the delay is not finished, the actual start date and estimated completion date. H. For potential delays, add an activity prior to each potentially delayed activity orr the appropriate critical path(s). Data for added activities of this type shall include alternatives available to mitigate the delay including acceleration alternatives, and further show the following: separate activity identification, activity description indicating cause of the potential delay, and activity duration equal to zero work days. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the event the CONTRACTOR requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the ENGINEER may deem necessary for a deterrnination as to whether the CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the • provision of this contract. ENGINEER will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the CONTRACTOR in writing thereof. If the ENGINEER finds that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provision of this contract, the ENGINEER's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently concurred schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedWe. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in the activities which, according to the schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the schedule and do not have any effect on the contract completion date ar dates, and therefore, will not be the basis for a change therein. From time to time, it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be adjusted by the ENGiNEER to reflect the effects of job condition, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, excusable delays on the part of the OWNER or his representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall reschedule the work and/or contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions, and the CONTRACTOR shall revise his schedule accordingly. No additional compensation shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for such schedule changes except for excusable overall contract time extension beyond the actual completion of all unaffected work in the contract, in which case the CONTRACTOR shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the OWNER. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available float time in the schedule may be used by the OWNER as defined by the ENGINEER, as well as by the CONTRACTOR. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the early start date, and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the schedule. • 6349-79520/10/09/12 01310-4 TPAR7pasvrOt�sec\CLWATER\R01PIaME�arisbnProjechlssuetltoBitlSpecsW1310aoc � • �� _� OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved K. The OWNER controls the float time in the concurred schedule, and, therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the schedule, the OWNER may initiate changes to the contract work that absorb float time onty. OWNER-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the approved schedule shall be the sole grounds for extending (or contracting) said completion dates. CONTRACTOR-initiated changes that encroach on the float time identified in the concurred schedule may be accomplished with the OWNER's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to OWNER-initiated changes competing for the same float time. 2.04 SUPPORTING NARRATIVE A. Status and Scheduling reports identified below shall contain a narrative (progress report) to document the project status, to explain the basis of CONTRACTOR's determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints incorporated into the schedule, and provide an analysis pertaining to potential problems and practical steps to mitigate them. B. The narrative shall specifically include: 1. Actual completion dates for activities completed during the report period, and actual start dates for activities commenced during the report period. 2. Anticipated start dates for activities scheduled to commence during the fo(lowing report period. 3. Changes in the duration of any activity and minor logic changes. 4. The progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead or behind the Contract Date. 5. If the Monthly Status Report indicates an avoidable delay to the Contract Completion date or interim completion dates as specified in the Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall identify the problem, cause and the activities affected and provide an explanation of the proposed corrective action to meet the milestone dates involved or to mitigate further delays. 6. If the delay is thought to be unavoidable, the CONTRACTOR shall identify the problem, cause, duration, specific activities affected and logic restraints of each activity. 7. The narrative shall, in addition, also discuss all change order activities whether included or not in the revised/current schedule of legal status. Newly introduced change order work activities, and the CPM path(s) that they affect, must be specifically identified. All Change Order work activities added to the schedule shall conform with the sequencing and Contract Time requirements of the applicable Change Order. 8. Original Contract date(s) shall not be changed except by Contract Change Order. A revision, as specified in Article 2.09 below, need not be submitted when the foregoing situations arise unless required by ENGINEER. Review of a report containing added activities will not be construed to be concurrence with the duration or restraints for such added activities; instead the corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into the appticable Contract Change Order shall govern. 9. Should ENGINEER reyuire additional data, this information shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR within l 0 calendar days. C. Progress under the concurred CPM schedule shall be evaluated monthly by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER. Once each month, at a time mutually agreed upon, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER shall hold a Construction Progress Meeting at a location designated by the ENGINEER. This meeting shall be attended by the CONTRACTOR's highest ranking field manager and scheduler, if requested by the ENGINEER, the designated home office project managers or officers. Similar representatives of the CONTRACTOR's mechanical and electrical subcontractors as well as any other subcontractors or suppliers designated by the ENGINEER, shall also attend the meetings. At the meetings all matters relating to job progress witl be discussed, and commitments made will be considered as binding. Not less than seven calendar 6349-79520/l0/09/12 � 1 J 1 0—S TPA\\TpasvrO7lseclCLWATER\RO 1 Plant E�ryansion ProjeM�ksued to Bitl Specs�Ot310.tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved days prior to each monthly construction progress meeting, the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER � shall meet at the job site and jointly evaluate the status of each activity on which work has started or is due to start based on the preceding monthly CPM schedule. 2.05 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Base and Status Progress Schedules, monthly status reports, a start-up schedule, and an as-built schedule report all as specified herein. B. No payments for mobilization will be processed thru the OWNER until the Base Schedule for the project has been concurred with by the ENGINEER. C. All schedules, including base and preliminary status, shall be in conformance with Articles 2.O1, 2.02 and 2.03 above. The lack or failure to submit a properly concurred base or status update schedule to the OWNER will be sufficient reason by the ENGINEER to decline recommendation of any progress payments, including percentages for mobilization payments. D. The finalized progress schedule discussed in the General Conditions shall be the first monthly status report and as such shall be in conformance with all applicable specifications contained herein. E. Monthly Status Report submittals shall include five color copies of a time-scaled (days after notice to proceed) diagram showing all contract activities; five copies of network logic tabular reports by activity, early and late start, total float, successor/predecessor and supporting narrative. The detailed base schedule shall use the notice to proceed as the data date. The schedule, if concurred • with by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 2.01(E), shall be the work plan to be used by the CONTRACTOR for planning, scheduling, managing, and executing the work. F. The schedule diagram shall be formatted in accardance with Article 2.02 above. The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities included in the preliminary and base schedule submittals, (2) calendar days prior to substantial completion, (3) summary activities for the remaining 60 days. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim dates, if applicable. G. CONTRACTOR shall submit monthly progress schedules with each month's application far payment. ENGINEER will review schedules and return review copy within 20 days after receipt. If required, CONTRACTOR shall resubmit within 7 days after return of review copy. H. CONTRACTOR shall submit the number of monthly status reports which the CONTRACTOR requires, plus five copies which will be retained by the ENGINEER. 2.06 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit five copies of detailed schedule status reports on a monthly basis with the Application for Payment. The first such status report shall be submitted with the first Application for Payment and include data as of the last day of the pay period. The Monthly Report shall include a revised copy of the latest detailed schedule of legal status, tabular reports and a supporting narrative including updated information as described in paragraph 2.04. The Monthly Report will be reviewed by ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR at a monthly schedule meeting, and CONTRACTOR will address ENGINEER's comments on the subsequent monthly report. � Monthly status reports shall be the basis for evaluating CONTRACTOR's progress. 6349-?9520/10/09/12 01310-6 TPA\\7pasvrOl�seclCLWA7ERlRO1PIantFxpansbnProjedUssuedtoBidSpecsW1310doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. The revised diagram shall show, far the latest detailed schedule of legal status, percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the latest detailed schedule of legal status shall be added, except that contractual dates will not be changed except by change order. Review of a revised diagram by ENGINEER will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate Change Order shall govern. 2.07 STARTUP SCHEDULE A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of substantial completion, CONTRACTOR shall submit a time-scaled (days after notice to proceed) diagram detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to substantial completion and substantial completion, together with a supporting narrative. ENGINEER shall have 20 calendar days after receipt of the submittal to respond_ Upon receipt of ENGINEER's comments, CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary revisions and submit the revised schedule within ] 0 calendar days. The resubmittal, if concurred with by OWNER, shall be the Work Plan to be used by CONTRACTOR for planning, managing, scheduling and executing the remaining work leading to substantial completion. B. The time-scaled diagram shall use the latest schedule of legal status for those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to substantial completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60-day period within the time frames outlined in the latest schedule of legal status. C. CONTRACTOR will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as outlined in • Article 2.05 above. In preparing this report, CONTRACTOR must assure that the schedule is consistent with the progress noted in the startup schedule. 2.08 AS-BUILT SCHEDULE A. After substantial corrtpletion but prior to final payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit an as-built schedule report and time-scaled as-built diagram. The documents shall reflect all as-built critical paths. The diagram shall be prepared in accordance with Articles 2.02 and 2.03, in addition to the following: 1. All Contract activities, including all added activities, shall be shown. 2. Activity durations shall be the actual number of separate work days during which work was performed on the activity. 3. Contract milestone completions shall be plotted on the date of the Substantial Completion Reports. 2.09 REVISIONS A. All revised Schedule Submittals shall be made in the same form and detail as the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by ENGINEER and concurrence by OWNER. The revision shatl incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as-built conditions. Minor changes to the approved submittal may be approved at monthly meetings; a minor change is not considered a revision in the context of this paragraph. B. A revised schedule submittal shall be submitted for review, when required by ENGINEER, far one • ofthe following reasons: 1. OWNER or ENGINEER directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path. 6349-79520/10/09/12 01310-7 TPA\\TpasvrOl�edCLWATERV201PIaME�aruionPrqeclllssuetlWBidSpecs101310doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. CONTRACTOR elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a critical path of the • current schedule documents. C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract time, ENGINEER requires revisions to the schedule in order to evaluate planned progress, CONTRACTOR shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with change effect(s) incorporated as directed. lnterim revisions to the documents which are recommended to the OWNER for concurrence will be incorporated in the next Monthly Status Report. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/ 12 � 1 J� Q-O TPA PTpasvi0lluc\CLWATER\RO 1 Plan[ E�ansbn Project�issuetl to Bitl SpecsW1310.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith A I1 P i�hts Reserved • SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART l - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work, within 21 days after the effective date of the Agreement. Table 01370-] shall be used as a minimum basis for Contractor's Scheduel of Values. B. Upon request of the Engineer, support the values with data which wi(1 substantiate their correcfiess. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractar's Applications for Payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section III. • B. Application for Payment is included in Section III. 1.03 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on an 8-1/2-in by 11-in or 8-1/2-in by 14-in white paper furnished by the Owner; Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by the Engineer upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: ]. Title of Project and location. 2. Engineer and Project number. 3. Name and Address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. C. ldentify each line item with the number and title of the respective Section. D. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item. E. For the various portions of the wark: • l. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 013/0-1 TPA��T{esvrOl�ceclCLWATERU201P1aniE�ensionRojecNssuedioBitlSpecs101370.dacx �O 20}2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down • the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices are required for materials upon request by the Engineer. b. The total installed value. F. The sum of all values Iisted in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 1.04 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES A. Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for: 1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products. B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: l. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Copies of invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in which the material first appears. 3. Paid invoices shall be provided with the second payment request in which the material • appears or no payment shall be allowed and/or may be deleted from the request. E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 01370-2 TPA\1Tposr0l�sec�CLWATERV201PIamEnpansionRjx�Ussu«I�oBidSpecs101370.docx ! • • 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedu/e of Va/ues Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price MOBILIZATION Is Mobilization Is Demobilization �S Performance and Payment Bonds Is Submittals Is Progress Schedules Is Field Trailer �S Permits IS Miscellaneous Is SITEWORK Demo Ex. 5 MG Prestressed Tank ea Demo Yard Piping If Clear & Grub and Tree Removal ac Site Dewatering Is Stabilized Access Road 12" sf Restore To Grade Stabilized Access Road sf Site Grading Is Stormwater Pond Excavation cy Sod sf 4" PVC DR 18 C900 Sanitary Sewer If 6" PVC DR 18 C900 Sanitary Sewer If 12" PVC DR 78 C900Sanitary Sewer If 15" PVC DR 35 Sanitary Sewer If Dog House Manhole ea 4' Dia. Sanitary Manhole ea 6349-79520 ]0/09/2012 01370-3 TPA\�T�as�t�li\.cc�lll4'.4T�K\Rl�ll�lanil?vry�n�u.nl�r��iui��%�nalinBidSpecs101J70.docr Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount 8" PVC Concentrate Line If 3" Sludge Piping �f 2" PVC Polymer Line �f 6" DIP Backwash Disposal �f 6" Gate Valve ea 8" DIP Concentrate Line �f 8" DIP Concentrate Disposal Line ea 6" DIP Off Spec Line �f 10" DIP Blend Line �f 10" DIP Backwash Line If 10" DIP Spent Backwash Line If 10" DIP Decant Line �f 16" DIP Raw Water Line If 16" Gate Valve ea 20" Gate Valve ea 16" DIP Tank Fill Line �f 16" Butterfly Valve ea 24" DIP Finished Water �ine If 24" Butterfly Valve ea Sodium hypochorite lines If 12" X 18" ERCP CI III Lf 18" RCP CI III Lf 12" X 18" Mitered End Section ea Control Structure ea Type B Drop Bottom Inlets ea 6349-79520 10/09/2012 01370-4 TPA��'fpax�iol�scc�Cl.w'AfIiR�NOII'lontl'.e�uinsinnProjuclU�cucdinBldSpecs\01370.docv • • • • ! • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 47 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 3.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Connect to Existing Structure ea 6" Underdrain If 6" Underdrain Cleanout ea 12" Stabilized Subgrade sy 8" Crushed Aggregate Base sy 2" PC-3 Asphalt Surface sy 8'-0" Black Picket Aluminum Fencing and Gates If Site Lighting E-3 ea Root Pruning and Tree Barricades Is New Crape Myrtle Trees ea New Viburnum Bush ea Maintenance of Stormwater Flow Is Disinfection, Testing, Startup and Miscellaneous Work Is S u btota I 3.0 MG GROUND STORAGE TANKS Excavation and Preparation of Subgrade Prestressed Tank Aluminum Handrail If Prestressed Tank Baffle Walls sf 3.00 MG Ground Storage Tank slab ea 3.00 MG Ground Storage Tank walis/baffles ea 3.00 MG Ground Storage Tank dome ea Ultrasonic Level Instrument w/Transmitter LE/LIT ea Prestressed Tank Piping 8" DIP Drain w/Encasement If Prestressed Tank Inlet Piping 16" w/Encasement If Lightning 8� Grounding ea 6349-79520 10/09/2012 O l 370-5 TPA ��a.�.��.��, w.� �, k�k�, � ��,;.,,,�,,,,�, ��,�,;��,,,«� �„ Bid SOecs\01370.docx Total Amount 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9 4,00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4.01 1 2 4.02 1 2 5.00 1 2 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 9 Expansion Schedu/e of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amou nt Disinfection, Testing, Startup, Settlement Monitoring and Miscellaneous Work Is Subtotal RAW WATER BOOST PUMPS Instrumentation and Controls Is 16" Booster Pump Below Grade Piping If 6" Surge Relief Valve on Discharge Manifold - Relocated ea Replace Existing Check Valves on Discharge Lines ea 8" & 10" Booster Pump Above Grade Piping If Raw Water Booster Piping, Fittings and Valves Added if Electrical Is Equipment Installation of ODP items Is Disinfection, Startup and Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Su btota I RAW WATER BOOST PUMP (ODP) Raw Water Booster Pump #4 (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal RAW WATER BOOST PUMPS VFD (ODP) Raw Water Booster Pump #4 VFD (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal ADSORPTION SYSTEM Concrete Fill for Bottom of As Removal Vessels cy Adsorption System Pad cy 6349-7952010/09/2012 01370-6 TPA,�T�a��,��w.��.:x�k��'laml±sNnoionl'rnjcnUxsucdioBidSpecs�01370.docx � • . • • ! � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3 4 5 6 7 5.01 1 2 6.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedu/e of Va/ues Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Instrumentation and Controls and Flow Meters Transmitters Is Electrical Is Equipment Installation or OOP items Is Disinfection, Startup and Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Long Term Performance Bond for As System Su btotal ADSORPTION TREATMENT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT (ODP) AS Removal System Equipment Including Piping (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal BACKWASH DECANT SYSTEM Backwash Decant System Pad cy Aluminum Canopy Cover Polymer System sf Decant System Instrumentation and Controls, Flow Meter ea Polymer System Instrumentation and Controls ea 4" DIP - Backwash Tank No. 1 to Decant Pumps If 4" DIP - Backwash Tank No. 2 to Decant Pumps If 4" DIP - Tank No. 1 to Residuals Pump Manifold if 4" DIP - Tank No. 2 to Residuals Pump Manifold if 4" DIP - Manifold Piping From Tanks to Backwash Residuals Pumps If 4" DIP - Influent Line to Bkwsh Pump No.1 If 4" DIP - Influent Line to Bkwsh Pump No.2 If 6" DIP - Bkwsh Residuals Pump No.1 to Effluent Header If 6" DIP - Bkwsh Residuals Pump No.2 to Effluent Header If 6" DIP - Bkwsh Residuals Header to Holding Tank If 6349-79520 10/09/2012 O l 3 70-7 TPA ��as�.��,«��, w�„ k�k�� :,�� .r�:,�,�,,,, ��,�,,��.,,,�,� �„ gid Specs\U1370.tlocx Total Amount 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 6.01 1 2 6.02 1 2 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount 2" PVC Gravity Drain To VWUPS If 4" PVC Gravity Drain To WWPS If 2" PVC to Truck Loading Station �f 3" PVC to Truck Loading Station If 4" 8� 6" Backwash Pump Above Grade Piping �f 12" Motorized Butterfly Valve Spent Backwash Decant Tank ea Polymer System Piping Swing Check Valves 1" ea Polymer System Piping Ball Valves 1" Qa Ductile Iron Piping 12" and 10" Spent Backwash Decant Tank If Ductile Iron Piping 6" and 4" Decant Recycle Pumps If Polymer System Piping If Polymer System Hose Wash Station ea Polymer System Emergency Eye Wash Station ea Decant System Electrical Is Polymer System Elect�ical �g Equipment Installation of ODP items Is Startup and Testing and Miscellaneous Work Subtotal BACKWASH RECYCLE PUMPS (ODP) Baskwash Recycle Pumps (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal BACKWASH RESIDUAL PUMPS (ODP) Backwash Residual Pumps (ODP) ea Sales Tax �S 6349-79520 10/09/2012 Q 1 3/ 0—O TPA ��Tpasmnl�scc�Cl,w".A"I'ISR�RO I Pluni lixpanQi�m 1hqi��is.ncJ in Bid Specs\01370.docu • • s • • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6.03 1 2 6.04 1 2 6.05 1 2 6.06 1 2 7.00 1 2 3 4 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Subtotal DECANT TANKS (ODP) Decant Tanks (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal RESIDUALS HOLDING TANK ODP Residuals Holding Tank (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btota I POLYMER SYSTEM ODP Polymer System (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btota I CP 120 NEW CONTROL PANEL ODP CP 120 New Control Panel (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btotal CARTRIDGE FILTRATION Cartridge Filtration Instrumentation and Controls Is Cartridge Filtration Electrical Is Equipment Installation of ODP items Is Equipment Installation, Disinfection, Startup and Testing and Miscenlaneous Work Is S u btota I 6349-7952010/09/2012 01370-9 TPA,��Faa,.��a��.w.��,.:K�k�,�,��.�,,,�,,,.��,,,;«��„�,��{�„BidSPecs�01370.docx Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7.01 1 2 8.00 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount CARTRIDGE FILTER VESSEL (ODP) Cartridge Filter Vessel (ODP ea Sales Tax �S Subtotal MEMBRANE FEED PUMPING Concrete Pump Pads �Y Instrumentation and Controls, Flow Meter �S RO Bldg Remove Pump Pads sf 2" Air Vacuum Valve APCO 1500 ea 2" Air Release Valve ea RO Bldg Valves & Fittings ea Blow Off Valve ea RO Bldg Pipe Demolition �f RO Bldg 12" Stainless Stee1316L Piping If RO Bidg 8" Stainless Steel 316L Piping RO Feed �f RO Bidg 6" Stainless Steel 316� Piping Permeate If RO Bldg 8" PVC Concentrate Pipe �f RO Bldg 3" PVC Permeate Piping �f ButterFly Valve 6" Motor Operated ea Butterfly Valve 8" Motor Operated ea Butterfly Valve 4" Motor Operated ea 6" Permeate SST Flush Line If 12" FW SST If 8" RO Feed SST If 8" FW SST �f 6349-79520 10/09/2012 01370-10 TPA\�Ipne�rUnscc�Cl,W.4T1?R�RUIPIaniitspan.ionProjecNs.�md�oBidSpecs\OU70.tlocx • • • • • • 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 8.01 1 2 8.02 1 2 9.00 1 2 3 4 5 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price SS Piping at Membrane Feed Pumps If 8" Piping To Cartridge Filters If 3" Permeate CIP Piping If 6" Concentrate Line PVC If 4" Concentrate Line PVC If Pipe Support System Is Membrane Feed Pump Electrical Is Equipment Instailation of ODP items Is Disinfection, Startup and Testing and Miscenlaneous Work Is Su btotal MEMBRANE FEED PUMPS (ODP) Membrane Feed Pumps (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal MEMBRANE FEED PUMPS VFDs (ODP) Membrane Feed Pumps VFDs (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btota I REVERSE OSMOSIS SKIDS Demolition �s RO Membrane Installation Is RO Skid Piping, Valves and Support Modifications Is Disinfection, Testing, startup and Miscellaneous Work Is Instrumentation and Controls, Flow Meters Is 6349-7952010/09/2012 O1370-11 TPA��as�,�,��«�w�.w�r�=a�x�,��:.,.��,��<<„��..�,��{��,BltlSpecs\01370.docx Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6 9.01 1 2 10.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 70 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount Electrical Is Su btota I RO MEMBRANES (ODP) RO Membranes (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btota I CONCENTRATE PUMP STATION Dewater, Excavate Backfill Concentrate Wet Well cy Concentrate Manhole vlf Concentrate Valve Slab ay Concentrate Wet Well Top Slab cy Concentrate Wet Well Slab Bottom and Walls cy Coating on WetwelllTop Slab sf Instrumentation and Controls Is Concentrate Wetwell ButterFly Valves ea Concentrate Wetwell Check Valves ea Concentrate Wetwell Surge Relief ea Concentrate Wetwell Combination Air Vacuum & Air Release Valves ea Concentrate Manhole Pipe and Fittings If Concentrate Wetwell Piping If Electrical Is Instrumentation and Controls Is Equipment installation of ODP items, Disinfection, Testing and Startup and Miscellaneous Is Work Disinfection, Testing and Startup and Miscellaneous Work Is 6349-79520 10/09/2012 01370-12 TPA\�Tpas�.Ol�scc�C1�L'API?K�ROIPIaniF:shnsionPr�,�ecnls.ucJioBidSpecs\01370.docx • • � � • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 10.01 1 2 10.02 1 � 11.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 11.01 1 2 3 12.00 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Su btotal CONCENTRATE PUMPS (ODP) Concentrate Pumps (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal CONCENTRATE PUMP CONTROL PANEL 120 AND VFDS (ODP) Concentrate Pump Control Panel 120 and VFDs (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal TRANSFER (BLENDED WATER) PUMPING Pump Pad cy Instrumentation and Controls ea Replace Existing Check Valves on Discharge Lines ea Blended Water Piping and Gate Valve Is Electrical If Equipment Removal and Installation of ODP items, Disinfection, Testing and Startup and Is Miscellaneous Work S u btotal TRANSFER (BLENDED WATER) PUMPING (ODP) Rebuild in Service Pump Motors 8� New Pump Impellers (ODP) ea Rebuild City Spare Pump 8� Replace Impeller (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal RO and ADMIN BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS 6349-79520 10/09/2012 0] 370-13 raa ��r�a4�,ont,��c�,w.�ri.:k�ao i ri�� ;<��s��.� r«,i�n�.,�� Bid Specs\01J70.docx Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 78 79 20 21 22 23 24 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amou nt Exhaust Fan-3-4 E-6 ea Panel P-3 E-5 ea Panel L-3 E-5 ea Transformer TR-3 E-5 ea Switchboard New Breaker 100Amps E-5 ea Exhaust Fan-3� Conduits and Wire E-6 If Switchboard to Panel P-3 Conduits and Wire E-5 If Existing CP-110 Control Conduit and Wire To CP-720 If Existing CP-100 Control Conduit and Wire To Absorption System CP-130 if Existing CP-100 Control Conduit and Wire To Booster Pump VFD If Existing CP-100 Control Conduit and Wire To CP-110 If Exhaust Fan -3-4 Connection E-6 ea AHU-1-2-3 & ACC-1-2-3 Connection E-10 ea RO Bldg HVAC Demolition ea RO Bldg HVAC Exhaust Fans 3-4 ea RO Bldg HVAC AHU 1, 2& 3 ea RO Bldg HVAC ACCU 1, 2 8� 3 ea RO Bldg Wall Louver Replacement Impact Rated w/Rain Wind Screen ea Extend South Wall of Administration Area to Underside of Roof Deck sf RO Bldg Hollow Metal Door Frame, Door, Door Stoops and Hardware and appurtenances Is Testing, Startup and Miscellaneous Work Is HSP Bldg Door Stoops sf RO Bldg Door Stoop at Entry sf Installation of ODP items Is S u btota I 6349-7952010/09/2012 O1370-14 TPA��..,�,��«��u��:k�K��«,�,,,.�,��,,;r��.,,��{�„BidSpecs\01370.docx • • • • • • 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 12.01 1 2 13.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedu/e of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price MAIN CP 110 NEW CONTROL PANEL (ODP) MAIN CP 110 New Control Panel (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Su btotal BACKWASH HOLDING TANK Backwash Holding Tank Pipe Demolition If Valve Pads Backwash Holding Tank cy Backwash Holding Tank 10" Pipe Support cy Backwash Holding Tank 6" Valves ea Backwash Holding Tank 10" Valves ea Backwash Holding Tank 6" Piping and Fittings If Backwash Holding Tank 10" Piping and Fittings If Disinfection, Testing, Startup and Miscellaneous Work Is S u btota I MATERIALS TESTING ALLOWANCE �S Su btota I EXCAVATION BELOW NORMAL GRADE AND BEDDING ROCK REFILL �S Subtotal METAL BUILDING ANALYSIS ALLOWANCE �S Subtotal SUBTOTAL BID ITEMS 1.00 -16.00 OWNER'S CONTINGENCY 5% �S 6349-7952010/09/2012 01370-15 TPn��r�a4�.ni��aw.�rr.a�rn�ii�i:,�n:.�,�.�„�r,�,i�,��i..��«{i„s�asae�s�o�a�o.ao�. Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A.1.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 70 11 72 13 74 15 16 77 78 19 20 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amount Subtotal TOTAL BASE BID GRAND TOTAL BID ITEMS 1.00-17.00 : ADDITIVE ALTERNATES RO & HSP BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO 1 RO Bldg Remove Ceiling To Paint Structural Steel Is Administration Bldg Selective Demolition Is RO Building Stucco and Substrate Removal sf RO Bldg Remove Doors, Windows Is HSP Bidg Remove Existing Windows �S HSP Bidg Door Entrances ea RO Bidg Window Siils Solid Surface If Acid Resistant Sink ea RO Admin Bldg Acid Resistant Counter Top sf Joint Sealants Allowance �S Aluminum Doors ea RO Bldg New Storefront Entry Door, Glazing ea RO Bldg Patch and Repair Around Window Installation sf Aluminum Windows ea RO Admin Bldg Restroom Paint Ceiling and Wall sf RO Bldg Sureboard Substrate sf RO Bldg Stucco Exterior SY RO Bldg Stucco Exterior Paint sf RO Bldg Metal Exterior Panel Paint sf RO Bldg Paint Walls Disturbed by Window Door Installation sf 6349-7952010/09/2012 01370-16 Tanar��s�.nn�„��c�.wnrnk�xoiri��inr�:,�=��,r�„i��iv,.��ai��s�nsae=s�o�a�o.ao�Y • • • • • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 A.2.00 1 2 3 4 A.2.01 1 2 A.2.02 1 Tab/e 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price RO Admin Bldg Tile sf RO Bldg Replace Ceiling Tile After Paint Structural Steel sf RO Bldg Paint Beams and Columns sf HSP Bldg Wall Louver Replacement Impact Rated w/Rain Wind Screen ea HSP Remove Fans Is HSP Bldg HVAC Exhaust Fan -5 ea Faucet For Acid Resistant Sink ea Cleaning and repainting primary steel beams and end columns per 09902 (less than 100- If feet Cleaning and repainting primary steel beams and end columns per 09902 (more than than If 100-feet Miscellaneous Work Is Subtotal MEMBRANE CLEANING SYSTEM ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO 2 Installation of ODP items Electrical If Instrumentation and Controls If Startup, Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Subtotal CARTRIDGE FILTER VESSEL (ODP) Cartridge Filter Vessel (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is Subtotal CLEANING SYSTEM HORIZ END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (ODP) Cartridge Filter Vessel (ODP) ea 6349-79520 10/09/2012 01370-17 TPA��Fa.�,��,�� w��„k�k�, � �� :.,,,�.�,,,, �,,,;��,,,,«, �„ Bid Specs\01170.docr Total Amount � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2 A.2.03 1 2 A.3.00 1 2 A.3.01 1 2 A.4.00 1 2 A.4.01 1 2 A.5.00 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Desc�iption Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Amou nt Sales Tax �S Subtotal VFD (ODP) VFD (ODP) ea Sales Tax �s Subtotal AS SYSTEM MEDIA EXCHANGE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO 3 Installation of ODP items Is Disposal, Startup, Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Subtotal AS SYSTEM MEDIA EXCHANGE (ODP) AS System Media Exchange (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btotal DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACEMENT ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 Installation of ODP items Is Disposal, Startup, Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Su btotal DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACEMENT (ODP) DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACMENT (ODP) ea Sales Tax �S Subtotal BLEND WATER PUMPS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 6349-79520 ] 0/09/2012 0 1.J / �� 1 O TPA \�fpasmU I\.ec\CI.WnTNR�RO I Plani Is�:m.ion Prqjcd\ix.ned w Bid Specs\01370.docx • • • • • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7 2 3 4 A.5.01 7 Table 01370-1 Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion Schedule of Values Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Installation of ODP items Is Electrical Is Instrumentation and Controls Is Startup, Testing and Miscellaneous Work Is Subtotal BLEND WATER PUMPS (ODP) Blend Water Pumps (ODP) ea Sales Tax Is S u btota I 6349-79520 10/09/2012 �� 3/ �� 1 7 TPA ��'Lpaa.ol�scc�Cl w"K�F:R�NU 1 I'lonl I!vrymann Pro�c.iUs<ncJ io Bid Specs\01370.docY Total Amount �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) . • 6349-79520 ]0/09/2012 �IJ7�-2� TPA\\TpesvNl�SecICLWATERU201PIentE<pensionPrqmtVssuedmBitlSpecsW1�70.doc[ . • \J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01380 AUD10 VIDEO TAPING PART 1 - GENERAL I.O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment and furnish color audio video taping of the project site as specified herein. B. Furnish to the Owner an original and one copy of a continuous color audio video tape recording along the entire boundary of the proposed project. The recording shall be taken prior to any construction activity. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the audio video taping because of poor quality, unintelligible audio or uncontrolled pan or zoom. Any taping rejected by the Owner shall be retaped at no cost to the Owner. Under no circumstances shall construction begin until the Owner has received and accepted the audio video tape(s). D. The taping shall be performed by a qualified, established audio video taping firm knowledgeable in construction practices and experienced in the implementation of established inspection procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COLOR AUDIO VIDEO SURVEY A. Furnish a continuous color audio tape recording along the entire boundary of the proposed project. B. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to, all existing roadways, sidewalks, curbs, driveways, buildings and structures, above ground utilities, landscaping, trees, signage and other physical features located within the zone of influence of the construction. The coverage may be expanded if directed by Engineer. C. All taping will be done during daylight hours. No taping shall be performed if weather is not acceptable, such as rain, fog, etc. D. Audio video recording to be performed at each major stage of activity or as deemed fit by Engineer during construction of project works. 3.02 AUDIO AND VIDEO A. Audio/video shall be professional grade, standard DVD format. B. Each disk shall begin with the Owner's name, Contract name and number, Contractor's name, date and location information such as street name, direction of travel, viewing side, etc. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 OI30Q�I TPA\\Tpas�rt0l�sec\CIWATER�RO1Plant6¢ransanProjecfllssuetlWBitlSpecs�D1360.tloc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Information appearing on the disk must be continuous and run simultaneously by computer . generated transparent digital information. No editing or overlaying of information at a later date wiil be acceptable. D. Digital information will be as follows: I . Upper left corner a. Name of Contractor b. Day, Date and Time c. Name of Project Lower left corner a. Route of travel b. Viewing side c. Direction of travel d. Stationing E. Time must be accurate to within 1/10 of a second and continuously generated. F. Engineering station numbers must be continuous, be accurate and correspond to project stationing. The symbols should be the standard engineering symbols (i.e. 16+64). G. Written documentation must coincide with the information on the tape so as to make easy retrieval of locations sought for at a later date. H. The video system shall have the capability to transfer individual frames of video electronically into hard copy prints or photographic negatives. • I. Audio shall be recorded at the same time as the video recording and shall have the same information as on the viewing screen. Special commentary will be given for unusual conditions of buildings, sidewalks and curbing, foundations, trees and shrubbery, etc. All disks and boxes shall bare labels with the following information: 1. Disk Number 2. Owner's Name 3. Date of Taping 4. Project Name and Number 5. Location and Standing Limit of Tape END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 O�.) 00�2 TPA \\TpasvrOl�sedCIWATER�R01 Plant E�arsbn PwjecNSSUed to Bitl SpewW7380 tloc CJ �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All t�i��hts Reserved SECTION 01390 CONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Emptoy competent photographer to take construction record photographs periodically during course of the Work. 1.02 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED A. Provide photographs taken on cutoff date for each scheduled Application for Payment. B. For each project location, provide monthly photographs at each major stage of activity prior to any construction in addition to the preconstruction video of the entire project. C. Views and quantities required: 1. At each specified time, photograph project from a minimum of three (3) different views all Work and at least one (1) view every 100 feet for all pipeline Work, as approved by the ENGINEER. 2. Provide four (4) prints of each view. 3. Provide four (4) CD ROM disks containing digital photographs of each view far the monthly � submittal. D. Negatives: 1. The photographer sha11 maintain file copies for a period of two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of entire project and then shall convey all files to the OWNER. 2. Photographer shall agree to furnish additional prints to OWNER and the ENGINEER at commercial rates applicable at time of purchase. Photographer shall also agree to participate as required in any litigation requiring the photographer as an expert witness. 1.03 COSTS OF PHOTOGRAPHY A. The Contractor shall pay costs for specified photography and prints. 1. Parties requiring additional photography or prints will pay photographer directly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRINTS A. Color: 1. Paper: Single weight, color print paper. 2. Finish: Smooth surface, glossy. 3. Size: 8-inch x 10-inch. B. Identify each print on back, listing: l. Name of Project. • 2. Orientation of View. 3. Date and time of exposure. 4. Name and address of photographer. 6349-79520/7130/12 01390-1 TPA\lTpasvrOl�sec�CLWATER�RO1PIantEayansionProject\ISweAtoBiGSpcvs10�390doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. Photographer's numbered identification of exposure. 6. Identify each digital file of the scanned photograph by date and photograph number. PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUE A. Factual presentation. B. Correct exposure and focus. 1. High resolution and sharpness. 2_ Maximum depth-of-field. 3. Minimum distortion. 3.02 VIEWS REQUIRED A. Photograph from locations to adequately illustrate condition of construction and state of progress. 1. At successive periods of photography, take at least one photograph from the same overall view as previously. 2. Consult with the ENGINEER at each period of photography for instructions concerning views required. 3.03 ASSEMBLY OF PRINTS A. Each print shall be inserted in a separate, archival type, nonglare, photo protector. B. Provide one suitable size binder for each set of prints. Binders shall be provided in sufficient quantity to hold all photographs taken for the duration of the contract. Each binder shall be labeled by engraving on the front and spine with the project name. 3.04 DELIVERY OF PRINTS A. Deliver prints to the ENGINEER to accompany each Application for Payment. B. Distribution of prints as soon as processed is anticipated to be as follows: 1. OWNER (one (1) set of prints and one (1) CD ROM with scanned photographs). 2. ENGINEER (two (2) sets of prints for the construction file and two (2) CD ROMs of scanned photographs). 3. Project Record File (one (1) set to be stored by Contractor on-site). C. No construction shall start until pre-construction photographs are completed and submitted to the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/7/30/12 01390-2 TPA\\TpasvrOl�seclCLWATER1R01PIanlF�ansionProjec[�ISSUetl[oBitlSpecs101390tloc � • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01400 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.O1 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. General: Furnish for approval by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR Quality Control (CQC) Plan within l0 calendar days after award of contract. The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, instructions, records and forms to be used. The ENGINEER may refuse to allow construction to start until such time as an acceptable final plan is submitted. B. The Contractor Quality Control Plan: This plan shall include as a minimum, the following: l. A description of the quality control organization, including chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff shall report to the Project Manager or someone higher in the CONTRACTOR's organization_ 2. The name, qualifications, duties, responsibilities and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function. 3. A copy of a statement signed by an authorized official of the CONTRACTOR's firm, which describes the responsibilities and delegates the authorities of the CQC System Manager. 4. Procedures for scheduling and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents. 5. Control testing procedures for each specific test. (Testing laboratories must be approved by the OWNER.) 6. Reporting procedures including proposed reporting formats. 7. Hazard Communication Program reyuired under OSHA requirements. C. Acceptance of Plan: Acceptance of the plan by the OWNER and ENGINEER is reyuired prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditionai and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. D. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, notify the OWNER in writing of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the OWNER. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION A. CQC System Manager: CQC System Manager shall be responsible for overall management of the CQC and have the authority to act in all CQC matters for the CONTRACTOR. This person shal} demonstrate his/her ability to perform conectly the duties required of him/her to the satisfaction of the OWNER and shall be physically at the project site whenever work is in progress and will be in charge of the CONTRACTOR's Quality Control program for this project. All the CONTRACTOR's submittals for approval shall be reviewed and modified or corrected as needed by him/her or his/her authorized assistants and approved correct prior to forwarding of such submittals to the OWNER. B. Personnel: The personnel of the CQC staff shall be fully qualified by experience and technical training to perform their assigned responsibilities and shall be directly hired by and work for the CONTRACTOR. 6349-79520/ l 0/09/ 12 � 1400-1 TPA 1{TpasvNlkecICLWATER�RO 1 Plan[ Expansian FojecNssued to Bid Specs101400.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Rights Reserved 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. The CQC Organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals are in compliance with the contract requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL • A. Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the CONTRACTOR assures himself that his/her construction complies with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Sections. The controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations, including both onsite and offsite operations and will be keyed to the proposed construction sequence. The contro}s shall include at least three phases of inspection for all definitive features of work as follows: 1. Preparatory Inspection: This shall be performed prior to beginning any definable feature of work. It shall include a review of contract requirements; a check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted and approved; a check to assure that provisions have been made to provide required control testing; examination of the work area to ascertain that all preliminary work has been completed and a physical examination of materials, equipment and sample work to assure that they conform to approved shop drawings or submittal data and that all materials and/or equipment are on hand. 2. Initial Inspection: This shall be performed as soon as a representative portion of the particular feature of work has been accomplished and shall include examination of the quality of workmanship and a review of control testing far compliance with contract requirements, • use of defective or damaged materials, omissions, and dimensional requirements. 3. Follow-up Inspection: These shall be performed daily to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular feature of work. Such inspection shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation as required below. Final follow-up inspections shall be conducted and deficiencies corrected prior to the addition of new features of work. 3.02 TESTS A. Test Procedures: Perform tests specified or required to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements. CONTRACTOR shall procure the services of an industry recognized testing laboratory per Section O1445. A list of tests which the CONTRACTOR understands he/she is to perform shall be furnished as a part of the CQC plan to the OWNER. The list shall give the test name, specification paragraph containing the test requirements and the personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test. Perform the following activities and record and provide the following data: 1. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements. 2. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards. 3. Verify that test instrument calibration data are checked against certified standards. 4. Verify that recording forms, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 �� 400-2 TPA \\TpasvA71sec1CLWATER�R01 Plan[ F�cpareion Projectllssued to Bid Specs101400.dx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 3.03 COMPLETION INSPECTION A. At the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the paragraph entitled "Commencement, Prosecution and Completion of Work" or stated elsewhere in the Contract Sections, the CQC System Manager shall conduct a completion inspection of the work and develop a"punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved Drawings and Sections. Such a list shall be included in the CQC documentation and shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. The CQC System Manager or his/her staff shall make a second completion inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the OWNER. The completion inspection and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph will be accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates. 3.04 DOCUMENTATION A. Maintain current records of quality control operations, activities and tests performed including the work of suppliers and subcontractors. These records shall be on an acceptable form (form attached) and indicate a description of trades working on the project, the numbers of personnel working, the weather conditions encountered, any delays encountered and acknowledgment of deficiencies noted along with the corrective actions taken on current and previous deficiencies. In addition, these records shall include factual evidence that required activities or tests have been performed, including but not limited to the following: ]. Type and number of control activities and tests involved. • 2. Results of control activities or tests. 3. Nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc. 4. Proposed remedial action. 5. Corrective actions taken. • B. These records shall cover both conforming and defective ar deficient features and shall include a statement that supplies and materials incorporated in the work comply with the requirements of the contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to the OWNER daily. 3.05 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE A. The OWNER or ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR of any noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. After receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action. Such notice, when delivered to the CONTRACTOR or his/her representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the CONTRACTOR fails or refuses to comply promptly, the OWNER may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs ar damages by the CONTRACTOR. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 01400-3 TPAUTpasvNllseclCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Ezpa�ion ProjedUssued to Bid Spew101400.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved QUALITY CONTROL DAILY REPORT � (CONTRACTOR) REPORT NO. CONTRACT NO. DATE LOCATION OF WORK: DESCRIPTION: WEATHER , RAINFALL INCHES, TEMP: MIN MAX l. Work Performed Today by Prime Contractor (Include Plant and Labor Breakdown): 2. Work Performed Today by Subcontractors (Include Plant and Labor Breakdown): 3. List Specific Inspection Performed and Results of these Inspections. (Include Corrective Actions): 4. List Type and Location of Tests Performed and Results of these Tests: 5. Verbal Instructions Received from OWNER or ENGINEER on Construction Deficiencies or . Re-testing Required: 6. Remarks: 7. CERTIFICATION: I certify that the above report is complete and correct and that I, or my authorized representative, have inspected the work performed this day by the CONTRACTOR and each subcontractar and have determined that all materials, equipment and workmanship are in strict compliance with the plans and specifications except as may be noted above. Contractor's Designated Quality Control END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ I 0/09/12 O l 400-4 TPA l\TpaavNilsec\CLWATERIRO 7 Plent Expansion RojeclUssued to &d Specs\07400.doc OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved i PART1-GENERAL SECTION 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.01 REQUIREMENTS 1NCLUDED A. CONTRACTOR will employ and pay for the services of an lndependent Testing Laboratory to perform all testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the Specifications. OWNER or ENGINEER may also elect to have additional testing performed at OWNER's expense. When OWNER or ENGINEER elect to perforrn additional testing, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER's or ENGINEER's personnel. B. Correction of any deficiencies revealed by testing performed by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or ENGINEER shall be performed by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. ] .02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. All testing laboratories must be Florida Department of Environmentai Protection (FDEP) or National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation • Conference (NELAC) certified or approved by the OWNER. C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the CONTRACTOR, and no extra charge to the OWNER shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) • PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/9/12 01410-] TPAUTpaSVr01l5eC1CLWATER\RO1PlantE�anSanProject�lswetl�oBitlSpecs101470tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) C � \ J 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 0�� O—� TPA NTpasvr0l�aec\CLWATERUiO 7 PIaM E�¢atrsion Rojecl\ISSUed to BW Specs101410.UOc • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O1445 PIPELINE TESTING AND CLEANING PART]-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and test and clean all new pipelines instatled under this Contract as specified herein. lA2 RELATED WORK A. Buried pipelines are included in Sections 1V and IVa and Division 2. B. Above grade and exposed pipelines are included in Sections IV and Na and Division 15. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3A1 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor for cleaning, disinfecting, and bacteriological testing � of all piping. The procedures and methods shall be approved by the ENGINEER and per AWWA standards. • B. Make any taps and furnish ali necessary caps, piugs, etc, as required in conjunction with testing pipelines. Furnish a test pump, gauges and any other eyuipment required in conjunction with carrying out the hydrostatic tests. 3.02 CLEANING PIPELINES A. As pipe laying progresses and at the conclusion of the work thoroughly clean all new pipelines by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period. If, after this cleaning, obstructions remain, they shall be removed. 3.03 TESTING GRAVITY PIPELINES A. All gravity pipelines shall be tested as specified in the respective pipe material specification section. 3.04 TESTING PRESSURE PIPELINES A. All pressure pipelines shall be pressure and ]eakage tested according to procedures specified in the respective pipe material specification section. 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 O� YYS— I TPA \\TpasvAtlsec\CLWATERU20 7 PIaM Expansion RojecNssued to Bid SpecsWl HS.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Test pressures shall be as follows: • l. Membrane feed piping downstream of inembrane feed pumps — 250 psi. 2. Raw water and filtered water piping upstream of inembrane feed pumps and upstream of existing blend water control valve — I50 psi. 3. All other piping —]00 psi. END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 O 1 Y�tS�GTPA 1\Tpasvr0luec\CLWATERVtO 1 PIaM Eupension Aqeclllsaued to Bid SpecsW 1H5.tloc • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O1505 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION PART1-GENERAL l.Ol DEFINITION AND SCOPE A. As required for the proper performance and completion of the Work, mobilization sha11 include, but not be limited to, the following principal items. ]. Move onto the site all CONTRACTOR'S equipment reyuired for the first month's operation. 2. Install silt fences around perimeter of project site and at locations where surface drainage discharges to existing stormwater inlets. 3. Install temporary construction power, wiring and lighting facilities. 4. Establish a fire protection plan and safety program. 5. Secure construction water supply. 6. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 7. Arrange for and erect CONTRACTOR'S work and storage yard and employee's parking facilities. 8. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 9. Obtain all required permits. ] 0. Post all OSHA, FDEP, Department of Labor, and all other required notices. l l. Have CONTRACTOR'S project manager and/or superintendent at the job site full time. • ] 2. Submit a detailed progress schedule acceptable to the ENGINEER and OWNER. 13. Submit cash flow in tabular and graphic form to the ENGINEER and OWNER_ 14. Submit a finalized Schedule of Values of the Work in the OWNER'S approved format. l5. Submit a hurricane preparedness plan acceptable to the ENGINEER and the OWNER. l6. Submit standardized traffic maintenance and control plans to OWNER. 17. Erect all reyuired Project signs. ] 8. Submit Time Critical for Completion of Project Submittals in accardance with Section Ol O12. • 1.02 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION A. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is directed to the condition that no payment for mobilization, or any part thereof, will be approved for payment under the Agreement until all mobilization items listed above have been completed as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/]0/09/l2 01505-1 TPA\1Tpasvr0llsec\CLWATER�ROtPIaMF�tpansionProjecNssuedtoBiASpecsW1505.dce c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C � (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) � • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 Q��5-2 TPA 1\7pasvNllsedCLWATER\RO 1 Plant Evpansion Projectllssued to Bid Specs\01505.doc �O 2012 CT�M Smith All Ri�ht> Reserved • SECT]ON 015�0 TRAFFIC REGULATION PART 1 - GENERAL l .O1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible far providing safe and expeditious movement of traffic through ingress/egress zone in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. A construction zone is defined as the immediate areas of actual construction and all abutting areas which are used by the CONTRACTOR and which interfere with the driving, biking or walking public. B. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required, restore grounds to original, or to specified conditions. C. Perform all work within CITY rights-of-way and easements in strict accordance with the CITY's Maintenance of Traffic Policy and other applicable statutory requirements to protect the public safety. 1.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. The necessary precautions shall include, but not be limited to, such items as proper construction warning signs, signals, lighting devices, markings, barricades, cones, sign boards, channelization, • flagman, hand signaling devices, and any additional traffic control devices as needed or required by the CONTRACTOR's MOT plan(s). The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for installation and maintenance of all devices and requirements for the duration of the construction period. B. No roadway closures will be permitted for this project. C. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for notifying Police, Fire and Ambulance Departments, and County School Board whenever roads are impassable. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removal, relocation, or replacement of any traffic control device in the construction area which exists as part of the normal pre-construction traffic control scheme. Any such actions shall be perforrned by the CONTRACTOR under the supervision, and in accordance with the Specifications, of the OWNER, unless otherwise specified. E. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER of any vehicular of pedestrian safety or efficiency problems incurred as a result of the construction of the project. 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC A. All excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the CONTRACTOR's operations cause traffic hazards, he sha}I repair the road surface, provide temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures satisfactory to the OWNER. • B. Standardized detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the OWNER. Where detours are permitted the CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While traffic is detoured the CONTRACTOR shall expedite 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 O 1 S/ O— I TPA \\TpasvNi�sedCLWATER�RO 1 PIaM Expension ProjeqHssued to Bid Specs\01570.doc c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved construction operations and periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the . OWNER. C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not police protection has been provided. D. Notify the Fire Department, Police Department, EMS Department, Public Works Department, and School Board before closing any street or portion thereof. No closing shall be made without the approval of the CITY or Pinellas County as applicable. Notify said departments when the streets are again passable for emergency vehicles. Daily notification to these departments shall be made by the CONTRACTOR via fax identifying specifically new closures, continued closures and new openings. Do not block off emergency vehicle access to consecutive arterial crossings or dead-end streets, in excess of 300 linear feet, without special written permission from the Fire Department. Conduct operations with the least interference to fire equipment access, and at no time prevent such access. E. The CONTRACTOR shall leave his night emergency telephone number or numbers with the police department, so that contact may be made easily at all times in case of barricade and flare trouble or other emergencies. F. Maintain postal service facilities in accordance with the requirements of the U.S. Postal Service. Move mailboxes to temporary locations designated by the U.S. Postal Service or provide and maintain portable temporary mailbox clusters. CONTRACTOR shall notify affected residents if • mailboxes are to be relocated and to where. At the completion of the work in each area, replace mailboxes in their original location and in a condition satisfactory to the U.S. Postal Service and property owner and other service vehicles can identify each street or roadway so as not to delay their service. If temporary signs or markers are used, they shall meet the requirements of the OWNER and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. Any signs or markers removed or relocated in the course of construction shall be rep}aced in the location and in equal or better condition that existed prior to construction. G. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining, relocation, or replacing, as necessary, all street or roadway identification signs or markers such that fire, police, emergency and other service vehicles can identify each street or roadway so as not to delay their service. If temporary signs or markers are used, they shall meet the reyuirements of the OWNER and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Controi Devices. Any signs or markers removed or relocated in the course of construction shall be replaced in the location and in equal or better condition than existed prior to construction. l .04 FAILURE TO COMPLY A. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with above or failure of the CONTRACTOR to make revisions, adjustments, or improvements directed by the OWNER will constitute viotation of the Agreement. lmmediate shut down and restoration of the site to allow traffic access to area may result. The CONTRACTOR shall hold the OWNER and the ENGINEER harmless from damages, loss of time, or expenses incurred, resulting from such shut down. �� 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/20l 2 O� S/ O—ZTPA UTpasvf0l�sec\CLWATEF21R0 7 Plant Expansion ProjectUssued W Bid Specs101570.doe �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1.05 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEETINGS • � A. The OWNER and/or ENGINEER shall schedule and conduct meetings as required with the CONTRACTOR to attend to matters of traffic control and associated public convenience and safety during the course of the Work. B. The ENGINEER shall preside at the meetings and provide for keeping the minutes and distribution of minutes to the OWNER, the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR, and others. The purpose of the meetings will be for the CONTRACTOR presentation of traffic control plans and any revisions reyuired during performance of the Work and to discuss related matters. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 BARRIERS AND LIGHTS A. Barricades, flashers, lights, and "Danger", "Caution", "Street Closed", etc. signs shall meet the requirements of the Florida Department of Transportation and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. B. Perform all Work with the requirements set forth by the Occupational Safety Health Administration. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 O I S/ O-3TPA t\TpasvAtlsec\ClWA7ER�R01 Rant Ezpansion ProjeclNSSUed to 8id Specs\07570.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) � � 6349-79520/ 10/9/ZO l 2 O 1 S/ O—YTPA PTpasvrOiluc\CLWATERV201 Plam Expansion ProjeUllssued to Bid Specs101570.doc • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01590 FIELD OFFICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and maintain two (2) temporary field offices for the CONTRACTOR's and Project Representative's (PR) use during the entire construction period; and shall furnish, install and maintain storage and work sheds needed for construction. At completion of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall remove field offices, sheds and contents. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the Pre-construction Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a sketch of the temporary field offices and related facilities for consideration and approval of location. ].03 REQUIREMENTS FOR FACILITIES A. Construction shall: • 1. Be structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above ground. 2. Have temperature transmission resistance: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. 3. At CONTRACTOR's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. a Mobile trailers or buildings, when used, shall be modified for office use. b. Mobile trailers or buildings shall not be used for living quarters. 4. Be installed in accordance with local codes including permitting and ADA, if applicable. B. CONTRACTOR's Office and Facilities: 1. Size: As required for general use. 2. Lighting: 50 foot candles at desktop height. 3. Automatic heating and mechanical cooling (air conditioning) equipment sufficient to maintain comfort conditions. 4. Bathroom with toilet, sink and mirror. 5. Communications: a. One direct line for facsimile b. Cellular phones c. Wireless high speed internet connection 6. Racks and files for Project Recard Documents. 7. One 10-inch outdoors type thermometer. 8. One outdoors rain gauge. 9. Xerographic machine with reduction, enlargement, facsimile and ten sets capabilities. C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all provisions and pay ali installations and other costs, inc}uding maintenance and supplies and monthly fees far the CONTRACTOR's and PR field offices in • order to provide telephone, power service, exterior lights, xerographic machine/facsimile machine water/wastewater facilities at the project site. 6349-79520/10l09/12 �157�—� TPAPTpasv�Ot�seclCLWATER\RO1Plan[E�arsionProjectUSSUetlro&dSpecs�01590.tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. The CONTRACTOR shall rovide a full o erational temporary office for the ENGINEER's • P Y P Project Representative (PR) within 30 days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed_ Requirements for PR's Office: 1. Office Size: 10 foot by 16-foot minimum divided into an office and bathroom. 2. Ceiling height shall be 8-feet. 3. Two (2) exterior entry doors to have a keyed locksets keyed alike. 4. Lighting: 50-foot candles at desktop height. 5. Automatic heating and mechanical cooling (air conditioning) equipment sufficient to maintain comfort conditions. 6. One 5 foot by 2-1/2 foot desk with chair. 7. One 6 foot by 2-1l2 foot folding table with 2 chairs. 8. One 6 foot high by 3-foot wide metal storage cabinet with key. 9. Two 4 foot high by 3-foot wide bookcase. ] 0. One 4-drawer file cabinet. I l. Wireless high speed internet connection. 12. Bathroom with flush toilet, sink and mirror. Bathroom door shall be equipped with a lock. l3. Office shall have at least one window. 14. Each room shall be provided with two (2) duplex convenience electrical outlets. 15. Two wastebaskets. 16. One wall mounted first aid kit. 17. Two smoke detectors with batteries. 18. One dry erase board 36"x60", markers and eraser. 19. Cross-cut shredder with basket. 20. Fire extinguisher, UL rated, Class A complying with local codes. 21. Two 8-outlet surge protectors with 1800 joule energy rating. 22. Extension power cords for connection of equipment herein. 1.04 PARKING A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a shell stabilized temporary parking area at the field office. The parking area shall have positive drainage to provide adequate surface drainage. B. Upon removal of field offices, the area designated for field offices and staging storage shall be paved to the limits indicated on the Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS A. Materials, equipment and furnishings may be new or used, but must be in good condition, serviceable, adequate for the required purpose, and must comply with all applicable LAWS AND REGULATIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION • A. The CONTRACTOR shall fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide adequate surface drainage. • 6349-79520/ l 0/09/ 12 �� S 70-2 TPA 11TpasvrOt�seclCLWATER\RO 1 Plant Exparisbn Project�lssuetl to Bid Spea�A1590.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall construct temporary field offices on proper foundations; provide connections for utility services; secure portable or mobile buildings when used; provide steps and landings at entrance doors; provide roofs over landings and entrance doars, and provide hurricane or high wind tie-downs embedded in subsurface concrete pilasters, thereby meeting or exceeding applicable LAWS AND REGULATIONS. B. The CONTRACTOR shall mount a thermometer and rain gauge at convenient outside locations, not in direct sunlight. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide periodic maintenance and cleaning for temporary structures, furnishings, equipment and services at not less than one (1) week intervals. 3.04 REMOVAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary field offices, contents and services at a time when no longer needed and as approved by the OWNER. B. The CONTRACTOR shall remove foundations and debris and grade site to required elevations • and clean the areas. 3.05 LOCATION OF FIELD OFFICES � �� A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a layout of all temporary field offices to the OWNER for consideration and approval prior to the Pre-construction Conference. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/12 01590-3 TPAUTpasvr01�5ec1CLWATERU701PIantE�ansbnAOjec0lssueCroBiGSpecs�A7590tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ l 0/09/ 12 01590-4 TPA \\Tpasvr011uc�CLWATERIRO 1 PIaM E�ansbn Projec111ssued M&tl Specsl01590 doc • • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O1610 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Conform to applicabte specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the ENGINEER. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same MANUFACTURER. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown ar specified sha11 be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Summary of Work is included in Section Ol0]0. 3. Special Project Procedures are included in Section 01100. 4. Submittals are included in Section 01300. 5. Cleaning is included in Section Ol7] 0. 6. Operating and Maintenance Data is included in Section O1730. 7. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01740. l .03 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the wark. All materials and equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR shall be subject to the inspection and approvai of the ENGINEER. No material shall be delivered to the work without prior approval of the ENGINEER. B. Within I S days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, data relating to materials and equipment he/she proposes to furnish for the work. Such data shall be in sufficient detail to enable the ENGINEER to identify the particular product and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the specifications. The data shall comply with Section 01300. C. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. If the ENGINEER requires, either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of materials for such special tests 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 � 1 61 �-1 TPA 1\TpasvAllsec\CLWATEft1R0 1 Plant Ezpansiar FojecMissued to Bid Specs1016f0.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved as may be necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the OWNER will make arrangements for and pay for the tests. D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and approval before materials are necessary for incorporation in the work. Any delay of approval resulting from the CONTRACTOR's failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the OWNER or the ENGINEER. E. In order to demonstrate the proficiency of workmen or to facilitate the choice among several textures, types, finishes and surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall provide such samples of workmanship or finish as may be required. F. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the approved samples or other data. G. See paragraph 1.11 substitutions. l.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with MANUFACTURER's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including 6 copies to the ENGINEER. 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. l. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with MANUFACTURER's instructions, consult with ENGINEER for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with wark without clear instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. I.OS TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. l. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in MANUFACTURER's original containers or packaging, with identifying ]abels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that Products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling ar damage to Products or packaging. 6349-79520/ l 0/09/20 ] 2 �� 61 �-2 TPA \\TpasvNl�sec�CLWATEPoRO 1 PIaM Fxparsion ProjecNssued to Bid Specs\07610.doc • • • �O 20]2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 1.06 S7'ORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, vaives, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and MANLTFACTURER including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a copy of the MANUFACTURER's instructions for storage to the ENGINEER prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged ar deteriorated eyuipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. B. Store Products in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by MANUFACTURER's instructions. 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. • C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored by the CONTRACTOR before, during and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking and spalling to a minimum. E. All materials which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work and the CONTRACTOR shall receive no compensation far the damaged material or its removal. F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection After lnstallation l. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. • H. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and delivered to the OWNER under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the OWNER. In the event any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, 6349-79520/10/09/2012 � 1 V� ��3 TPA IlTpasvrOt�sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Exparaion ProjeelUssued to &d SpecsW1610.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall replace same without additional cost to the OWNER. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do so has been given, the OWNER retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the CONTRACTOR's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures far labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS A. MANUFACTURERS of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their use. Preserve and deliver to the OWNER these tools and instructions in good order no later than ] 0 days prior to startup. l.08 STORAGE AND HANDL}NG OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE A_ Special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed. l. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the ENGINEER. The intent of this requirement is to reduce on-site storage time prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than 3 months prior to installation without written authorization from the ENGINEER. Operation and maintenance data as described in Section 01730 shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review priar to shipment of equipment. 2. All equipment having moving parts such as gears, electric motors, etc and/or instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled building approved by the ENGINEER, until such time as the equipment is to be installed. 3. Ali equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc, unless otherwise instructed by the MANUFACTURER. 4. A copy of the MANUFACTURER's storage instructions shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and shall be carefully studied by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed with the ENGINEER by him. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the CONTRACTOR. 5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to insure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to insure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stared for longer than 30 days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the OWNER. 7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall have the MANUFACTURER inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the MANUFACTURER shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the MANUFACTURER to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the MANUFACTURER will guazantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. lt shall be removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 6349-79520/] 0/09/2012 01610-4 TPA\\TpasvrOtlSec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ Ezparsion ProjedlissueA [o Bid Specs\01610.tloc • • • . . � �� O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.09 WARRANTY A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment MANUFACTURER as specified in each applicable specification and Section 01740. ].10 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts for certain equipment provided under Division 2 through ] 6 have been specified in the pertinent sections of the Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall collect and stare all spare parts as required by the MANUFACTURER in accordance with paragraph 1.06 and l.08 of this Section. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The CONTRACTOR shal! deliver the spare parts to the OWNER not later than l 0 days prior to pump station startup. B. Spare parts shall be packed in cartons, properly labeled with indelible markings with complete descriptive information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for which the part is to be used, and shall be properly treated for 5 years of storage. C. If spare parts are delivered with the major equipment earlier in the project, coordinate with the OWNER and ENGINEER to execute the "Spare Parts Check off LisY' and turn over to the OWNER. 1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: l. Refer to Section III, Subsection 6.3 for additional information regarding substitutions and "or equal" items. Make any CONTRACTOR's requests for changes in equipment and materials from those required by the Contract Documents in writing, for approval by the CITY. Such requests are considered requests for substitutions and are subject to CONTRACTOR's representations and review provisions of the Contract Documents when one of the following conditions are satisfied: a. Where request is directly related to an "or City approval equal" clause or other language of same effect in Specifications. b. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not as result of CONTRACTOR's failure to pursue Work promptly or to coordinate various activities properly. c. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided in manner compatible with other materials of Work, or cannot be property coordinated therewith. d. Where contractor proposes a change in material or eyuipment resulting in a credit to the OWNER. 2. CONTRACTOR's Options: a. Where more than one choice is available as options for CONTRACTOR's selection of equipment or material, select option compatible with other equipment and materials already selected (which may have been from among options for other equipment and materials). b. Where compliance with specified standard, code or regulation is required, select from among products that comply with requirements of those standards, codes, and regulations. c. Or City Approved Equal: For equipment or materials specified by naming one or more equipment manufacturer(s) and "or City approved equal", submit request for substitution for any equipment or manufacturer not specificatly named. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 01610-5 TPA\\Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Ezpa�sion ProjeUVssued to Bid Specs\01610.doc c0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Conditions Which are Not Substitution: • 1. Requirements for substitutions do not apply to CONTRACTOR options on materials and equipment provided for in the Specifications. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by the CITYor ENGINEER, are "changes" not "substitutions". 3. CONTRACTOR's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute substitutions and do not constitute basis for a Change Order, except as provided for in Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECT[ON CJ • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 O1610-6 TPA11TpasvrOtlsec\CLWATER1ROtPIantFxpansianRojeclllssuedloBidSpecsWi670.tloc • C> 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�;hts Reserved SECTION O1665 STARTUP PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, startup will be completed as specified herein. B. All equipment shall be tested and approved in the presence of the OWNER and ENGINEER prior to placing the pump station into operation. C. All lubricants, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and tests shalt be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. D. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of competent manufacturing representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these Specifications. Such representative shall assist the OWNER's personnel in startup by instructing the operating personnel of the OWNER in the maintenance and operation of the equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial operation of the completed pump station and be over and above any services necessary during erection or to correct defective materials or • workmanship during the guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and qualified for installation, adjustment, startup, and testing work and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation, including subsistence and travel, shall be included in the bid under this contract. � PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS A. General Requirements: 1. Successfully execute the step-by-step procedure of startup and performance demonstration specified hereinafter. 2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to substantial completion and acceptance by the OWNER. 3. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER. At least 30 calendar days prior to scheduled testing, CONTRACTOR shall submit details of all test procedures to the ENGINEER for review. 4. AlI performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least 10 working days in advance or as otherwise specified with the OWNER and ENGINEER. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to eyuipment prior to the time when the OWNER takes over the operation thereof. 6349-79520/ 10/09/ l 2 O 166S—I TPA NTpaavr0llsedCLWATERIRO 1 Plant F�parwion Projectllssued W Bid Speasl07fi65.dot �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Preparation for Startup: • l. Upon completion of the project, a11 process systems and pipe lines shall be filled and flushed with water and hydraulically checked for leaks, cracks, and defects. All sumps, tanks, basins and chambers, which under normal operating conditions will contain water or process liquids shall also be hydraulically checked using water for leaks, cracks, and defects. 2. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that it is in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary run-ins of the various pumps, and other remaining equipment shall be made. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, and pipe lines which are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. 3. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full range. Any other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all other tasks needed for preparing and conditioning the treatment facility for proper operation. 5. No testing or equipment operation shall take place until it has been verified by the ENGINEER that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in good working order. 6. No testing or equipment operation shall take place until it has been verified by the ENGINEER that all lubricants, tools, maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved equipment operation and maintenance data manuals have been furnished as specified. C. Submit startup plans to the ENGtNEER l0 days prior to the startup date. 3.02 FIELD TESTS A. Field tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the CONTRACT and to establish • compliance with the technical provision. The test shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as herein specified. All piping, and equipment shall be tested in the field in the presence of the ENGINEER or his autharized assistant, in the manner prescribed in the Sections of these Specifications pertaining to such installation. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to coordinate with other contractors in the testing and acceptance of pipelines that cross contract boundaries. B. Hydrostatic and Leakage Tests l. Pressure and leakage test shall be performed in accordance with the applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for Installation of Cast Iron/Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C-600 and American Water Works Association Standard for Steel Pipes 6- inch and larger, AWWA C200, except as herein modified or as specified in Sections 02616 and 02622. 2. Afrer completion of all work ar any portion thereof and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and leakage test shall be conducted. Water used in tests will be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Where applicable, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipe line work in order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are existing valves to be operated without the presence of a duly yualified representative of the OWNER. 3. Hydrostatic tests of the completed pipelines shall be performed in accordance with the applicahle piping specifications. 4. The test pump, pipe connection, taps into the pipelines, and all necessary apparatus shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the calibrated test gauge. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ l 2 O 1 V 6S—ZTPA 1\TpawAt�sec\CIWATER�RO 7 Plant Ezpansion RojecNSaued to Bid Specs\01665.dae � • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��>hts Reserved � 7. All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, and joints will be carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR may backfill the trench before he tests the line if he so desires, but he shall open up the trench at his own expense to repair the leaks. A leakage test shall be conducted after the pressure test has been satisfactorily completed. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the calibrated gauge for this leakage test. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage as shown by the test. All lines which fail to meet these tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test requirements are complied with. The duration of each leakage test shall be two hours. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is less than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula below: L= SD(Pi0.5 133,200 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. 9. All tests shall be made in the presence of the ENGINEER and a representative of the OWNER. No additionai compensation will be paid to the CONTRACTOR for making the above tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants, fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes shall be included in the unit price or prices bid or the various items of work. l0. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic and leakage tests. C. Vibration and Noise Level Testing 1. The CONTRACTOR shall field test pumps, motors, generators, air compressors, and other operating equipment for vibration and noise levels. 3.03 INITIAL OPERATION TESTS A. Upon completion of all structural, installation and adjustment of equipment, and pipe work, in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in compliance with the completion dates. The CONTRACTOR shall designate a way for initial testing of the facilities. Prior to such completion date, the CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER ] 0 days notice thereof in writing and the OWNER will then appoint the personnel who will assist in the testing, and on the test day designated, the CONTRACTOR shall make the initial test to determine performance using the personnel designated by the OWNER and such other personne] of his own as is specified or as he deems necessary to complete the tests. The field tests required will be as described in the applicable Sections of these Specifications. B. The initial tests shall be limited to a period of 24 hours duration, ar shorter if approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER, and during this time the performance of all equipment shall be tested and demonstrated by the CONTRACTOR. If the demonstration and tests indicate satisfactory performance in the operation of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR will then be given a ten day notice by the ENGINEER to make a final guarantee test of the equipment under normal operation. During initial tests and the ten day period between the initial tests and the final test, the CONTRACTOR's personnel shall supervise the operation of the equipment and assist and train the OWNER's operating personnel in their duties. Experts on equipment installation and operation as specified or necessary as well as complete, written detailed erection, operation and 6349-79520/10/09/12 �� 665—.7TPA \1Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Planl Expa�reion AojeclUssued M Bid Spe�101665.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved maintenance instructions shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR to insure proper training and � instruction of the OWNER's personnel. C. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shal) neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the OWNER takes over the operation thereof. E. The final guarantee tests shall be conducted in accordance with procedures and shall be a prerequisite of substantial completion and acceptance, and shall be made at the conclusion of the ten day period of operation and training. These tests shall be made under normal operating conditions under the supervision of the CONTRACTOR's personnel. This test is for the purpose of demonstrating that performance and efficiency guarantees of the equipment and other requirements in compliance with these Specifications have been met, that the operation of all equipment is coordinated, and that all controls operate satisfactorily in accordance with the equipment installed. F. In the event the initial or final guarantee testing and demonstration of equipment and controls does not meet the guarantee conditions or is not demonstrated to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, make such changes and adjustments in the equipment which is deemed necessary and shall conduct further tests until full satisfaction is received thereof. G. Startup with water and the final guarantee testing and demonstration shall not begin until all • facilities and equipment have been tested as specified and ready for operation. The OWNER must receive spare parts, safety eyuipment, tools and maintenance equipment, lubricants, approved operation and maintenance data, and the specified operation and maintenance instruction prior to the startup. All valve tagging as specified in Section l 5100 shall also be completed prior to startup. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/09/ l 2 O I 66S-4TPA HTpasvrOl�aec�CLWATERU20 1 Plant Ezpansion Projec0lssued tv Bid Specs101665.doc . c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL l .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with requirements stated in the Agreement, General Conditions, and Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the Wark substantially complete, CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. C. Should the ENGiNEER determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, giving the reasons • therefor. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the ENGINEER. 3. The ENGINEER will reinspect the Work. • D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Prepare and deliver to the OWNER a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2. After consideration of any objections made by the OWNER as provided in Conditions of the Contract, and when the ENGINEER considers the Wark substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. Z. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the OWNER's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. The ENGINEER will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 6349-79520/10/09/12 OI /OO—ITPA\\TpasvNl�sec\CLWATERW01PIan[6cparaionRqectllssuedroBitlSpew\01700.AOc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Should the ENGINEER consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: � 1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification to the ENGINEER that the Work is complete. 3. The ENGINEER will reinspect the Work and the CONTRACTOR will be responsibte for a11 costs associated with the reinspection. D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the CONTRACTOR to make closeout submittals. 1.04 REINSPECTION FEES A. Should the ENGINEER perform reinspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the CONTRACTOR: 1. The OWNER will compensate the ENGINEER for such additional services. 2. The OWNER will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the CONTRACTOR. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. B. Project Record Documents: Requirements of Section III. C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to the OWNER's Personnel: Requirements of Section • 01730. D. Warranties and Bonds: Requirements of General Conditions and Section 01740. E. Keys and Keying Schedule. F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: Requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions. H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: Requirements of General Conditions. 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the ENGINEER. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contractor Sum: l. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Unit Prices. c. Deductions for uncorrected Work. d. Penalties and Bonuses. • e. Deductions for liquidated damages. f. Deductions for reinspection payments. 6349-79520/ 10/09/l 2 � 1/ �Q-2TPA 1\TpasvNllseclCLWATER�RO 1 Plant Expansion RojecNssued to Bid Spe�s101700.doc C� 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • g. Other adjustments. h. Inspection overtime. i. Excessive shop drawing review cost. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. ENGINEER will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. I.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 3.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary tools and labor required to allow the ENGINEER and OWNER to verify the status of compietion. The tools shall include, but not be limited to the following: • l . Vault Entry Equipment. 2. Shovel. 3. Lamps & Mirror(s). 4. Probe Rod. 5. Valve Key. 6. Manhole Hook. 7. All necessary labor to help on the test for completion. • END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ l 0/09/ 12 O 1/ OO-3TPA \l7pasvAllsedCLWATER�RO 7 Plant Evpa�sion PrqectUSSUed to Bid SpecsW1700.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/ 12 O I 700-4TPA \1Tpasvr011uc\CLWA7ER1R0 1 Plam Expmision Projectllssued to BiA Specs101T00.�c � O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O1710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall execute cleaning, during progress of the Wark, and at completion of the Work. 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ardinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0] DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations • of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. All waste materials including containers, food debris and other miscellaneous materials must be disposed of daily in onsite containers. r � �J C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 3A2 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. B. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. C. Prior to final completion, or OWNER occupancy, CONTRACTOR shall conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and all wark areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 O 1/ l O� 1 TPA \\Tpasvr011sedCLWATERV20 1 Poam Espareion ProjeclUssued to Bid Specs�07710.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved CJ (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK) • u 6349-79520/ 10/09/ l 2 ��/ 1 �—ZTPA 11TpasvNt�sec\CIWATERVi01 Plant Expansion ProjectUssued to 8id SpecsW1710.doc • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION O1730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes procedural requirements for compiling and submitting operation and maintenance data required to complete the project. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Submittals are included in Section 01300. B. Warranties and Bonds are covered in Section 01740. 1.03 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVE A. Equipment furnished under Section IV and 1Va shall include the cost of a competent representative of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. This supervision may be divided into two or more time periods as required by the installation program or as directed by the ENGINEER. . B. See the detailed specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of manufacturer's representatives. . C. Furnish ENGINEER with three copies of the following in the form as Table 01730-IA (attached). When training is specified, furnish the copies at least 48 hours prior to training. 1. "Certificate of Installation, Inspection and Start-Up Services" by manufacturers' representatives for each piece of equipment and each system specified, certifying: (a) That equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop drawings, and the Contract Documents. (b) That nothing in the installation voids any warranty. (c) That equipment has been operated in the presence of the manufacturer's representative. (d) That equipment, as instatled, is ready to be operated by others. 2. Detailed report by manufacturer's representatives, for review by ENGINEER of the installation, inspection and start-up services performed, including: (a) Description of calibration and adjustments if made; if not in Operation and Maintenance Manuals, attach copy. (b) Description of any parts replaced and why replaced. 3. Furnish ENGINEER with three copies of the "Certificate of Post Start Up Services" in the form as Table 01730-1B (attached): (a) Type, brand name, and quantity of lubrication used, if any. (b) General condition of equipment. (c) Description of problems encountered and corrective action taken. (d) Any special instructions left with CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 01730-1 TPA11Tpa5vr01Kec\CLWATERUi0lPlantF�ansionPrqectllssuetlWBltlSpecs`Ot730tlac 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. For equipment furnished under other Divisions, furnish the services of accredited representatives • of the manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes such services necessary in the opinion of the ENGINEER. 1.04 OPERATING MANUALS A. Six complete final hard copy sets of operation and maintenance instructions and four electronic copies covering all equipment furnished under Sections IV and ]Va shali be delivered at least 30 days prior to scheduled start-up directly to the ENGINEER. One set of originals must be part of the six sets of operation and maintenance instructions required. Manuals covering components manufactured by others shall be included. 1. The manual for each piece of equipment shall be a separate document with the following specific requirements: a. Contents: 3) Table of contents and index. 2) Brief description of each system and components. 3) Equipment Attribute Sheets (for submittai of name plate data). 4) Starting and stopping procedures. 5) Valve schedule giving valve number and locations. 6) Routine and special operating instructions. 7) Routine and special maintenance procedures including guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, testing, and balancing instructions. 8) Original manufacturer's parts list, assembly drawings, and diagrams. 9) Control and wiring diagrams. • 10) One copy of each approved shop drawing. 11) List of spare parts, manufacturer's price, and recommended quantity. 12) Name, address and telephone numbers of local service representatives. I 3) Certificate of Installation, Testing, and Instruction. 14) Warranties and Bonds as specified in Section O1740. b. Material 1) Loose leaf on 20 Ib minimum, white punched paper 2) Page size, 8-1/2-in by 11-in 3) Drawings and Diagrams a) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b) Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than l 1 inches x 17 inches or provide a suitable packet with drawing identification. 4) Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. a) Provide typed description of product, and majar component parts of equipment. b) Provide indexed tabs. 5) Cover: ldentify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: a) Title of project. b) Identity of separate structure or location as applicable. c) Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6} Binders: a) Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. b) Maximum post width: 2 inches c) When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 01730-2 TPA \1TpasvrOl�ec1CLWATERU701 P�ant E�ansbn Projecfllssuedto Bid Spea101730doe • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved c. Submittals to the ENGINEER 1) Five preliminary copies of manuals shall be submitted to the ENGINEER no later than 30 days following approval of the shop drawings for each piece of equipment. Provide six final copies of complete manuals prior to testing. d. Electronic Manuals 1) Electronic Format - The Vendor provided equipment, sub-system, or system manuals shall be in PDF format, compliant with the Adobe PDF Specification. The manual shall be Searchable Image (formerly Image+Text). The Optical Character Recognition (OCR) of the image shall be at a 95% confidence level, using Adobe Acrobat� Capture� 3.x or an equivalent product. The manuals sha11 be organized and delivered as follows: a) Filed Division - One individual multi-page (where applicable) PDF file shall be provided for each equipment submittal as described item 1.04A.1.a. b) Table of Contents - A table of contents will be developed for each of the vendor manual PDF files. The table of contents will be hierarchical in accordance with the contents specified in item 1.04A.1.a. c) Bookmarks — Bookmarks will be programmed and organized to match the table of contents. Each bookmark will link to the start of the corresponding subject in the body of the PDF file. No bookmark links will reference files external to the pdf file containing the bookmark links. 2) Drawings - All drawings shall be in PDF forrnat as specified in item 1.04A.1.d.l . In addition, all drawings shall be provided in native format (i.e. AutoCAD). 3) All scanned materials shall be cleaned to remove all smudges, fingerprints, artifacts, and other extraneous marks. All notes, version stamps, etc., shall be preserved. 4) Scanning shall be done in PDF format as indicated above. Scanning accuracy shall be as follows: a) Textual content shall be not less than 300 dots per inch (DPI) and not more than necessary to comply with the OCR specification in item l.04A.1.d.l . b) Color images and diagrams shall be scanned in not less than number of colors of the document or 256 colors whichever is greater. Resolution shall be not less than 300 dots per inch (DPI}. c) Co1or photographs shall be saved in the full range of colors. Resolution shall be not less than 300 dots per inch (DPI). d) Black and white (non-text/table) shall be not less than 256 gray scale levels. Resolution shall be not less than 300 dots per inch (DPl). 5) Electronic copies shall be provided on CDROM. 6) All media transmittals shall be accompanied by a detailed paper printout of the files on each media. This printout shall consist of the file name, file size, date of creation, submittal number, and a brief but accurate description of the files. 7) All files must be organized in an intuitive manner that directly corresponds to the order of the Table of Contents and nomenclature of the submittal log. e. Equipment Attribute Sheets I) Equipment Attribute Sheets as presented in Table 01730-3 shall be provided for all equipment as follows: a} An Equipment Attribute Sheet that includes nameplate data, manufacturer and supplier information, and information pertinent to the type of equipment shall be provided for each piece of equipment supplied under this contract. Where more than one of the same type of equipment is provided, an Equipment Attribute Sheet must be completed for each piece. b) Hard copies of Equipment Attribute Sheets far each piece of equipment shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 01730-3 TPA \\Tpam07kedCLWATERVEO 1 PWnt F�parrsion AojectUssued to Bid Specs�01730 doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved c) Electronic copies of each Equipment Attribute Sheet forms specific to the • eyuipment provided will be provided by the ENGINEER in Excel format to be completed and submitted by the equipment vendor. The Excel file should be filled out in Arial ] 0 pt font. The completed forms shall be provided with the final O&M submittal. B. PLC programs shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in both paper and electronic format. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Building Products, Applied Materials and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.\ C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing, applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specifications. 1.06 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems, at agreed upon times. The CONTRACTOR shall video tape instructions while they are being given to Owner's personnel. B. Use Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.07 ENGINEER'S O&M REVIEW CHECKLIST The Engineer will review Operation and Maintenance manuals on operating equipment for conformance with the requirement of this Section. The review will generally be based on the check list presented in Table O1 �30-2. PART Z - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED} 6349-79520/10/09/20I2 01730-4 TPANTpasvr0lkec�CLWATERUi07PIantF�pansbnProject�5suedtoBidSpecsW1730AOc • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • TABLE 01730-1A CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION, INSPECTION AND START-UP SERVICES Project F.quipment Specification Section Contract 1 hereby certify thai the named equipment has been inspected, adjusted and operated by the Manufacturer's Representative and further certify: 1. That the equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop drawings, and the Contract Documents. 2. That nothing in the instaliation voids any warranty. 3. That equipment has been operated in the presence of the manufacturer's representative. 4. That equipment, as installed, is ready to be operated by others. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE • Signature Name (print)_ Title Representing_ CONTRACTOR • Date Signature Date Name Titl Attach the detailed report called for by Specification Section 01730. Complete and submit three copies of this form with the detailed report to ENGINEER as specified. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 01730-5 TPA\\Tpasvr011sec�CLWATERY201PIantF�ansbnProject�ISSUetltoBiOSpecs�At730doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Project Equipment Specification Section Contract TABLE Ol 730-1 B CERTIFICATE OF POST START-UP SERVICES '� I hereby certify the Manufacturer's Representative has inspected this equipment, made adjustments and calibrations, and that it is operating in conformance with the design, specifications, and manufacturer's requirements. Detailed notation of improper operation with corresponding recommendations, if any, are made and attached to this form. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE Signature Date Name (print) Title CONTRACTOR Signature Date Name (print) Title Complete and submit three copies of this form to the City of Clearwater Engineering Department or designee upon completion of 11 months reinspection as required by Specification Section 01730. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 01730-6 TPA �\Tpasvr0llseclCLWATERViO 7 Plant Fxpansbn P�ojectNS,wed to Bid Specs�A1730.dx C� C� • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith A11 Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT SUBMITTED MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION SECTION TABLE 01730-2 O & M REVIEW CHECKLIST DATE OF SUBMITTAL DEGREE OF APPROVAL DRAWING NUMBER Is submittal correct for model/series/configuration originally submitted with shop drawings. Is binding correct with assigned color/printing etc.? (Pertains to final three volumes) Is submittal properly indexed? Does submittal pertain only to equipment being furnished? Is submittal easily understood and instructively arranged? Does submittal include start-up, shutdown and trouble shooting procedures? Are sufficient drawings and schematics included to supplement written descriptions? Is listing of nameplate data for each piece of equipment supplied provided and attached? Are all drawings provided printed on paper which is 1] inches high and folded to 8'/2 inches wide? ls proper and complete instructions for servicing included? Is there a suggested operating log sheet for equipment? Is schedule for lubrication provided? Is there a recommended preventive maintenance schedule? Are necessary safety precautions clearly indicated where they relate to the equipment? Is area representative information provided, i.e., Name, Address, Telephone Number? 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 � 1 / 3�— ! TPA 1\TpasvrOtlsec�CLWATERW01 Planl E�yansbn ProjectllssueC to Bid Specs�017300oc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Are specified spare parts indicated and listed? Are Equipment Attribute Sheets provided as specified? The following are points of rejection necessitating resubmittal by CONTRACTOR: END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/2012 01730-8 TPANTpasvrOl�sedCLWATERV201PIantF�ansionPrqectllssuedW&dSpecsW1730.doc � • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved TABLE 01730-3 EQUIPMENT ATTRIBUTE SHEETS EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: PUMP DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Capacity, gpm: Horsepower: 6349-79520/10/09/2012 01730-9 TPAPTpasvr011sec�CLWATFR\RO1PIantF�ryansionROjecflLSwetltoBitlSpecs101730tloc OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C � EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: PUMP MOTOR DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Amps: Frame: Horsepower: Phase: RPM: Hertz: Volts: Service Factor: • 6349-79520/]0/09/2012 OI l..7O—�OTPA11TpasvrOl�ec1CLWATER1R01PIantE�ansionPrqec1115suetltoBiGSpecsW1730.tloc u • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: VALVE DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Size: 6349-79520/ I 0/09/2012 O 1 /.JO� 1 1 TPA \\Tpasvr0llseclCLWATERUt01 PIaM Expansion ProjecP�ssuetl to Bid SpecsW1730 doe c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved L� EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: emaiL VFD DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Am ps: Hertz: Horsepower: Phase: Voits: Size: Input Frequency, Hz: Output Frequency, Hz: • 6349-79520/ l 0/09/2012 O I 7.JO—� 2TPA \lTpasvr011seclCLWATERU20 7 PIaM Expansion ProjeclUSSUetl W Bitl Specs�01730.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All IZights Reserved � � � EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: TRANSFORMER DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: ModeL Type: Serial No.: Input Voltage: Output Voltage: Amp Rating: 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 01730-13 TPA NTpasvrOl�sec�CIWATER�RO 7 PIaM F�pansion PrqecMlswed to Bid Specs�A1730.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: MINI POWER ZONE DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Amps: Hertz: Phase: Volts: Wire: � 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 01730-14TPA l\TpasvrOt�sec\CLWATERU20 1 PIaM E�anson AojectUssued to &tl SpecsW1730 tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith AI! l:i��ht� Reserved • � • \ J EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: CONTROL PANEL DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Dimensions: Am ps: Hertz: Phase: Volts: 6349-79520/10/09/2012 O� / J�—� STPA\1Tpasvr01kec1CLWATERIRO t Plant Expansbn PrqectllSSUeA�n Bid Specs101730.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: VALVE ACTUATOR DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Frame: Hertz: Horsepower: Phase: RPM: Service Factor: Volts: 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 0173 0-16TPA \\Tpasrt0llseclCLWATERU201 Plant E�yanspn ProjecMlssued to Btl Specs�01730 tloc � • . C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: FLOW METER DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Size: Range: Output (i.e., 4-20mA, 0.5 vDC): 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 0 1 / J�— �/ TPA 1\Tpasvr0llsec\CLWATERUtO t Plant Fzpansion ProjecHksuetl to Bitl Specs�D1730 doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: TRANSMITTER DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Size: Range: Output (i.e., 4-20mA, 0.5 vDC): • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 OI /3O-1OTPA11Tpasw0l�sec\CLWATERVt07PlantF�anspnProjectNSSUetlMBidSpecsl01730tloc � • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: UPS DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: KVA: 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 0173 0-19TPA 1\7pasvAtluc\CLWATERV201 PIaM E�ansion ProjeclVssuetl to &d Specs10�730.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: RTU Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Size: • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 Q 1/ 30—Z�TPA \\7pasvr0l�sedCLWATERU30 7 PIaM F�¢ansbn PrqeclNssued to BM SpecsWtt30.doc CJ C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: PLC DATA Pro rammable Lo ic Controller Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: 6349-79520/ 10/09l2012 01730-21 7PA 11Tpam0lkec\CLWATERUtO 1 Plan[ Eupansion Rojeclllssuetl to &tl SpecsW1730.tloc OO 2012 CDM Smith Atl Rights Reserved � EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: TRANSDUCER DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Output: • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 Q� /J�-22TPA1\TpasvrOtlsedCLWATER\ROtPlantF�pansionWojechlssuetlMBitlSpecsW1730.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � C� • EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA SHEET EQUIPMENT NAME LOCATION SUPPLIER DATA MANUFACTURER VENDOR Name: Name: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Fax: Fax: Website: Sales Rep. Phone: Fax: email: SENSOR DATA Equipment ID: Tag No.: Model: Type: Serial No.: Output: END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 01730-23 TPA HTpaswOtkec\CLWATERU20 1 PIaM F�ansbn ProjecTlssuetl ro Bitl Spea�01730 Coc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 0173 0-24TPA 11Tpasvr0lkec�CLWATERUtO 1 Plant E�ansion ProjecAlssuetl lo Bitl Specs101730 doc • �O 2012 CDM Smith Ali Ki<�ii?s Reserved SECTION O1740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the General Conditions, including MANUFACTLJIZER's standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: ]. Refer to General Conditions for the general requirements relating to warranties and bonds. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section O] 700 Project Closeout. 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Division 02 through 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the ENGINEER for review and transmittal to the OWNER prior to • the date fixed for Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the OWNER. B. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the OWNER, by separate agreement with the CONTRACTOR during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the OWNER within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and a subcontractor, supplier or MANUFACTURER, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the OWNER for approval prior to final execution. D. Refer to individuai Sections of Sections III, IV and IVa for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. ].04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the origina) warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. iC. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/12 O 1/ 4O— i TPA OT�ws�Nl�sec\CLWATER1R01 Plant Expansion ProjecNssued to Bid SpecsW1740.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Documents. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective • Work regardless of whether the OWNER has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. OWNER's Recourse: Written warranties made to the OWNER are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the OWNER can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The OWNER reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. F. The OWNER reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the project where a specia) warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. G. Disclaimers and Limitations: MANUFACTURER's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, MANUFACTURERS, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the CONTRACTOR. 1.05 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size 8-1/2 inches x I 1 inches, punch sheets for standard three post binder. a. Form of wananty is included at end of Section O] 100. b. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: ]dentify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS." List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. 3. Electronic format as defined in Section O1300. C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-post binder, with durable and cleanable plastic covers and ma�cimum post width of two inches. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual MANUFACTURERS for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the MANUFACTURER to the OWNER. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the OWNER. 6349-79520/10/09/l2 �1 /4�—ZTPA11Tpas�Ailsec\CLWATER1R01%ant6pansionRojectUssuedtoBidSpewW1740.doc • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�`�lits Reserved • PARI' 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) • • PAR"T ; - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/12 OI /YO'JTPA\1TpasvNllseclCLWATERIRO1P1antExpansionPwjecrilssuedroBidSpecs101740.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE 1NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 6349-79520/ l 0/09/ l 2 O 1/ 4O-4TPA UTpawAt�sec\CLWA7ERUi01 Plant Fxpansion Poojec4Vssued to Bid Specs101710.doc • C � • • � • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and demotish, modify, remove and dispose of work shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. ]ncluded, but not ]imited to, are demolition, modifications and removal of existing materials, equipment or work necessary to install the new work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein and to connect with existing wark in approved manner. C. Demolition, modifications and removals which may be specified under other Sections shall conform to requirements of this Section. Reference Section 01014 for additional requirements and constraints. D. Blasting and the use of explosives will not be permitted for any demolition work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section Oi O10. B. Submittals are included in Section 01300. C. Construction Schedule is induded in Section 01310. D. Construction Sequence is included in Section 01014. E. Earthwork is included in Section 02200. F. Sedimentation and Erosion Control is included in Section 02270. G. Sodding is included in Section 02932. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, the proposed methods and operations of demolition of the structures and modifications prior to the start of work. Include in the schedule the coordination of shutoff, capping and continuation of utility service as required. B. Furnish a detailed sequence of demolition, removal, and modifications which demonstrates compliance with the limited facility shutdown periods allowed under this contract (identified elsewhere in these specifications). C. Actual work shall not begin until the ENGINEER has inspected and approved the modifications and authorized commencement of the demolition work in writing. 6349-79520/10/09/12 �2�5 �� 1 7PA \\7pasK0lkedCLWA7ER�R0 1 Plant F�ansion RojecMlssued to Bid Specs�02050.ax 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection 1. Execute the demolition and removal work to prevent damage or injury to structures, occupants thereof and adjacent features which might result from falling debris or other causes, and so as not to interfere with the use, and free and safe passage to and from adjacent structures. 2. Closing or obstructing of roadways, sidewalks and passageways adjacent to the work by the placement or storage of materials will not be permitted and all operations shall be conducted with a minimum interference to traffic on these ways. 3. Erect and maintain barriers, lights, sidewalk sheds and other required protective devices. B. Scheduling 1. Carry out operations so as to avoid interference with continuing water treatment operations, except to the extent allowed under the Contract Documents. C. Notification 1. Unless specified or shown on the Drawings otherwise, at least 48 hours prior to commencement of a demolition or removal, notify the ENGINEER in writing of proposed schedule therefor. Owner shall inspect the existing equipment and identify and mark those items which are to remain the property of the Owner. No removals shall be started without the permission of the ENGINEER. • D. Conditions of Structures 1. The Owner and the ENGINEER assume no responsibility for the actual condition of the structures to be demolished or modified. • 2. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within a structure may occur prior to the start of demolition work. E. Repairs to Damage 1. Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operation when directed by ENGINEER and at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs shall be made to a condition at least equal to that which existed prior to construction. F. Traffic Access 1. Conduct demolition and modification operations and the removal of equipment and debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks both onsite and offsite and to ensure minimum interference with occupied or used facilities. 2. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to the existing facilities by plant personnel and plant associated vehicles. 3. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied ar used facilities without permission from the ENGINEER. Furnish alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic in access ways. 1.OS RULES AND REGULATIONS A. The Building Code of the State of Florida and City of Clearwater shall controt the demolition, modification etc. C� 6349-79520/10/09/12 �2�50-2 TPANTpasvrOt�sec\CLWATERU20tPIantE�arisionRqecHlswetltoBbSpecs�D2050AOc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1.06 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver the following items to the OWNER at the RO Plant No. 1 after removal: 1. Existing membrane elements 2. All existing instrumentation 2. Existing Blend Pumps, if the pumps are replaced with new pumps by Additive Altemate B. All other material, structures, etc. not listed in paragraph 1.06, A, 1 shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR, hauled and disposed of in accordance with City of Clearwater and State of Florida regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment removed from existing work shall become the proper[y of the CONTRACTOR. B. Dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris and all other items off the site and in conformance with all existing applicable laws and regulations. • C. Pollution Controls l. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as flooding and pollution. b. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing prior to the start of the work. • 3.02 CLEAN-UP A. Remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the work, all materials, equipment, waste and debris of every sort shall be removed and premises shall be left, clean, neat and orderly. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/12 02�50-3 TPA1\Tpasvr0lkec\CLWATERV201PIantExparisbnProjecfllssuedtoBidSpea�02050dac �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) U � � • 6349-79520/10/09/12 �2�50-4 TPA\lTpasvrOtlecICLWATER1R01PIant6ryansanProjec„ISSUedtoBidSpecsV02050tloc � c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02140 DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Design, furnish, install, operate, monitor, maintain and remove a temporary dewatering system as required to lower and control water levels at least 1-ft below pipe trench bottom and 2-ft below subgrades of structural excavations, control piezometric pressures, and to permit construction to proceed in-the-dry. For excavation in rock, dewatering may not be feasible. Deviations to reyuirements specified within this document must be approved by the ENGINEER. B. Furnish, maintain and remove temporary surface water control measures adequate to drain and remove surface water entering excavations. C. Retain the services of a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida to prepare dewatering and drainage system designs and submittals described herein. D. Work shall include the design, equipment, materials, installation, protection, and monitoring of geotechnical instrumentation required to monitor the performance of the dewatering and drainage system as required herein. • E. Collect and properly dispose of all discharge water from the dewatering and drainage systems in accordance with the provisions of Section O 1 l 70. Under no circumstances shall water from dewatering systems be discharged into the existing or new sanitary sewer systems. F. Obtain and pay for all permits required for dewatering and drainage systems, including permits from the SWFWMD far installation and abandonment of deep wells, observation wells, and piezometers. G. Repair damage caused by dewatering and drainage system operations. ] .02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the proper design and implementation of inethods for controlling surface water and groundwater. B. The primary purpose of the groundwater control system is to preserve the natural undisturbed condition of the subgrade soils in the areas of the proposed excavations. Prior to excavation, the CONTRACTOR shall lower the groundwater to at least 1-ft below pipe trench bottom and 2-ft below the lowest excavation structural subgrade elevation. Additional groundwater lowering may be necessary beyond the requirements above, depending on construction methods and equipment used and the prevailing groundwater and soil conditions. Dewatering shall be sufficient to control piezometric pressures to avoid any heave or destabilization of the excavation bottoms. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for lowering the groundwater as necessary to complete construction in accordance with the plans and specifications at no additional cost to the OWNER. • C. Design deep wells, well points and sumps, and all other groundwater control system components to prevent loss of fines from surrounding soils. Sand filters shall be used with all dewatering 6364-79520/10/09/2012 Q2�4V-1 TPA\\TpaSVrOt�Sec�CLWATER\R01PIantF�ansbnRqectUwuedtoBitlSpecs�02140.Cx c0 2012 CDM Smith Al1 Rights Reserved installations unless screens are properly sized by the Contractor's design engineer to prevent passage of fines from surrounding soils. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damage to properties, buildings or structures, sewers and other utility installations, pavements and work that may result from dewatering or surface water control operations. E. Design review and field monitoring activities by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER shali not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his/her responsibilities for the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Dewatering and drainage system design plans shall be prepared and stamped by an experienced licensed professional engineer registered in the state of Florida and retained by the CONTRACTOR. At least two weeks prior to the commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit an original and three copies of the licensed professional engineer's certification on the PE form specified in Section 01300. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit qualifications as required herein. B. At least two weeks prior to the commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a dewatering and drainage system design plan. The plan shall include a description of the proposed dewatering system and include the proposed installation methods to be used for dewatering and drainage system elements and for observation wells. The plan shall include equipment, drilling methods, holes sizes, filter sand placement techniques, sealing materials, development techniques, the number and location of dewatering points, observations wells and piezometers, etc. Include the dewatering system design calculations in the plan. C. The plan shall identify the anticipated area influenced by the dewatering system and address impacts to adjacent existing and proposed structures. The report shall also include detailed plans for pre-construction surveys of existing structures in the vicinity of the dewatering system, settlement monitoring of existing structures during construction, and provisions to address settlement of existing structures resulting from dewatering activities. D. The dewatering and drainage system design plan shall include controlling piezometric pressures, from the underlying aquifer. E. Coordinate dewatering and drainage submittals with the excavation and support of excavation submittais. The submittal shall show the areas and depths of excavation to be dewatered. F. Do not proceed with any excavation or dewatering activities until the dewatering submittals have been reviewed by the ENGiNEER for conformance with the Contract Documents and for general compatibility with the work and with accepted engineering practices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Perform all work in accordance with current applicable regulations and codes of all Federal, State and local agencies. B. 1fie CONTRACTOR shall have at least 5 years of experience with work compatible to the Work shown and specified, employing labor and supervisory personnel who are similarly experienced in this Type of Work. 6364-79520/ l 0/09/2012 Q� 1�Q—� TPA PTpasvr0llsec�CLWATERU20 1 PIaM Expansion Prajectllswe0 to Bi0 Spec5102140 Aoc • • • � n 2012 CDM Smith Ali I�;�;��ts Reserved C. "I'he Contractor's design engineer shall be registered in the State of Florida and have a minimum of 5 years of professional experience in the design and construction of dewatering and drainage systems and shall have completed not less than 5 successful dewatering and drainage projects of equal type, size, and complexity to that require for the work. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Where the phrase "in-the-dry" is used in this Section, it shall be defined as an excavation subgrade where the groundwater level has been lowered to at least l-ft below trench bottom for pipelines and 2-ft below the lowest level of the excavation for structures, is stable with no ponded water, mud, or muck, is able to support construction equipment without rutting or disturbance and is suitable for the placement and compaction of fill material, pipe or concrete foundations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Observation wells and piezometers shall consist of minimum 2-in I.D, Schedule 40 PVC pipe and machine slotted PVC wellpoints, maximum slot size 0.010-in. and shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings. B. Piping, pumping equipment and all other materials required to provide contro] of surface water and groundwater shall be suitable for the intended purpose. • C. Standby pumping systems and a source of standby power shall be maintained at all sites. • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Control surface water and groundwater such that excavation to final grade is made in-the-dry, the natural undisturbed condition of the subgrade soils are maintained, and softening and/or instability or disturbance due to the presence or seepage of water does not occur. All construction and backfilling shall proceed in-the-dry and flotation of completed portions of work shall be prohibited. B. Methods of groundwater control may include but are not limited to perimeter trenches and sump pumping, perimeter groundwater cutoff, well points, ejectors, deep wells and combinations thereof. C. Where groundwater levels are above the proposed bottom of excavation level, a pumped dewatering system will be required for predraina�e of the soils prior to excavation, and for maintaining the lowered groundwater level and controlling piezometric pressures, until construction has been completed to such an extent that the structure, pipeline or fill will not be floated or otherwise damaged. D. It is expected that the type of system, spacing of dewatering units and other details of the work will have to be varied depending on soil/water conditions at a particular location. 6364-79520/10/09/2012 02140-3 TPAPTpasvrOt�sec�CLWATER�R01P1antE�ansbnRqeclllssuetltoBidSpecsW2140doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. All work included in this Section shall be done in a manner which will protect adjacent structures and utilities and shall not cause loss of ground or disturbance. F. Install, monitor and report data from observation wells. 1. Evaluate the collected data relative to groundwater control system performance and modify systems as necessary to dewater the site in accardance with the Contract requirements. 2. At least one observation well shal] be installed for each structure or slab on grade. G. Locate groundwater control system components where they will not interfere with construction activities adjacent to the work area or interfere with the installation and monitoring of geotechnical instrumentation including observation wells. Excavations for sumps or drainage ditches shall not be made within or below 1 H: l V slopes extending downward and out from the edges of existing or proposed foundation elements or from the downward vertical footprint of the pipe. 3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Construct surface water control measures, including dikes, ditches, sumps and other methods to prevent, as necessary, flow of surface water into excavations and to allow construction to proceed without delay. 3.03 EXCAVATION DEWATERING A. At all times during construction, provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering excavations. Excavations shall be maintained in-the-dry. Groundwater levels shall be kept at least Z-ft below the lowest excavation level and piezometric pressures shall be controlled to avoid any heave or destabilization of the excavation bottoms. B. Excavation dewatering shall maintain the subgade in a natural undisturbed condition and until the fill, structure or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural elevations. C. Pipe, masonry, and concrete shall not be placed in water or be submerged within 24 hours after being installed. Water shall not flow over new masonry or concrete within four days after placement. D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. Prevent flotation of the pipe by promptly placing backfill. E. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the natural undisturbed condition of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom of excavation. F. If the subgrade of the trench or excavation bottom becomes disturbed due to inadequate dewatering or drainage, excavate below normal grade as directed by the ENGINEER and refill with structural fill, screened gravel or other material as approved by the ENGINEER at the CONTRACTOR's expense. G. It is expected that the initial dewatering plan may have to be modified to suit the variable soil/water conditions to be encountered during construction. Dewater and excavate, at all times, in a manner which does not cause loss of ground or disturbance to the bearing soil or soil which supports overlying or adjacent structures or instability of the excavation. 6364-79520/ 10/09/2012 02140-4 TPA OTpas�r0lkedC�WATERIRO 1 PIaM Expansion RojeclUswetl to Bitl Spew102140.doc • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�!��s Reserved • H. li�the method of dewatering does not properly dewater the excavation as specified, install additional groundwater observation wells as directed by the ENGtNEER and do not place any pipe or structure until the readings obtained from the observation wells indicate that the groundwater has been lowered a as specified within the excavation limits. I. Dewatering units used in the work shall be surrounded by suitable filter sand and no fines shall be removed by pumping. Pumping from the dewatering system shall be continuous until pipe or structure is adequately backfilled. Stand-by pumps shall be provided. J. Water entering the excavation from precipitation or surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to a sump and pumped from the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. K. Drainage shall be disposed of in an approved area as specified in Section 01170. Existing or new sanitary sewers shall not be used to dispose of drainage. 3.04 WELL POINT SYSTEMS A. Where necessary, install a vacuum wellpoint system or deep wells around the excavation to dewater the excavation. Each wellpoint and/ar well and riser pipe shall be surrounded by a sand or gravel filter. Sand shall be of such a gradation that, after initial development of the wellpoints or wells, the quantity and size of soil particles discharged shall be negligible. • B. Wellpoint systems shall be capable of operating continuously under the highest possible vacuum. C. Installation of wellpoint systems or wells shall be in accordance with the approved submittal in the presence of the ENGINEER. • 3.05 REMOVAL OF SYSTEMS A. At the compietion of the excavation and backfilling work, and when approved by the ENGINEER, wellpoints, pumps, generators, other equipment and accessories used for the groundwater and surface water control systems shall be removed from the site. All materials and eyuipment shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR. All areas disturbed by the installation and removal of groundwater control systems and observation wells shall be restored to their original condition. B. All deep wells, observation wells, and piezometers shall be properly installed and abandoned per SWFWMD requirements. END OF SECTION 6364-79520/ 10/09/2012 �2 1 4�—S TPA \\Tpasvr0llsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant E�ansion Rojeclllssued ro Bid Specs�02140 tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � U (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • r � �J 6364-79520/]0/09/2012 02140-6 TPA11Tpasvr011Sec�CLWATER1R01PIantExpansbnPrqectllssuetltoBitlSpeaW2140tloc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL I .01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform all excavation, backfill, fill and grading required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to excavation and backfill for concentrate pump station, manholes, vaults, slabs on grade, electrical manholes, handholes, conduits, cables, raceways and ducts; embankment and grading; disposal of waste and surplus materials; and all related work such as sheeting, bracing, and dewatering. B. All excavation, trenching and related sheeting, bracing, etc, shall conform to the requirements of the "Florida Trench Safety Act° (CS/SB 2626) which incorporates, by reference, OSHA's excavation safety standards, 29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P. C. Excavation, backfill, and compaction for structures and piping are included in other sections as listed below. ] .02 RELATED WORK A. Dewatering and Drainage is included in Section 02140. B. Rock and Boulder Excavation is included in Section 02213. C. Structural Excavation, Backfill and Compaction is included in Section 02220. D. Trenching, Bedding and Backfill for Pipe is included in Section 02221. E. Excavation Support and Protection is included in Section 0231 l. ].03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM D1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,00 ft-]bf/ft (2,700kN-m/m) 3. ASTM D1682 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics. 4. ASTM D2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Apparent Opening Size of a Geotexti 1 e. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Provide excavation support systems as required per Section 02311. B. Provide dewatering and drainage as required per Section 02140. 63 64-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 OZZOO� 1 TPA llTpawrOl�sedCLWATERV20 1 Plant Fxpe�reion ProjectUwued to Bid Specs102200.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.05 SOIL TESTING A. Previous to the general placement of the fill and during such placement, the ENGINEER may select areas within the limits of the fill for testing the degree of compaction obtained, refer to the requirements of Section 02221. B. Payment for testing will be made by the CONTRACTOR. If test results are unsatisfactory, all costs involved in correcting deficiencies in compacted materials to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, will be borne by the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Select Common Soil and Structural Fill shall be as specified in Sections 02220 and 02221. B. Common soil shall be as specified in Sections 02220 and 02221. C. Gushed Stone shall be as specified in Section 02220. D. Bedding Rock shall be as specified in Section 02221. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 BACKFILLING - COMMON FILL A. Common Fill may be used as trench backfill and fill against exterior walls of structures as indicated on the Drawings; as embankment fill; or in other areas as designated by the ENGINEER. Material conforming to the requirements of common fil) shall be placed in layers having a maximum thickness of Z-ft measured before compaction. B. Common Fill shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D. C. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings making due allowance for settlement of the material and for the placing of loam thereon. D. The surfaces of filled areas shall be graded to smooth true lines, strictly conforming to gades indicated on the grading plan and no soft spots or uncompacted areas will be allowed in the work. E. No compacting shall be done when the material is above 2% moisture content per ASTM D1557 either from rain or from excess application of water. At such times, work shall be suspended until the previously placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to permit proper compaction. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL A. No excavated materials shall be removed from the site ofthe work or disposed of, except as specified by the ENGINEER. Materiais shall be neatly piled so as to inconvenience as little as possible the public and adjoining property OWNERS until used or otherwise disposed of as specified below. 6364-79520/10/9/ZOl 2 �ZG��'ZTPA11TpasvNt�sec\CLWATER1R01 Poant Ezpansion PrqectVssued W Bid Speas\02200.doc • • r � L_J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. Suitable excavated material shall be used for fill embankments or backfill on the different parts of the work as required. C. Surplus fill shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed and disposed off site. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK A. Remove and dispose of all pieces of ledge and boulders which are not suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to spoil areas is to be replaced by approved surplus excavation obtained elsewhere on the work, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill material shall be made up with acceptable material approved by the ENGINEER. B. Fragments of ledge and boulders smaller than 50 1b weight may be used in backfilling trenches unless in the opinion of the ENGINEER the quantity is excessive, in which case he/she may order the removal and disposal of some of this rock. The small pieces of rock used as backfill shall not be placed in trenches until the pipe has at least 2-ft of earth over it. Place these pieces of stone in thin layers alternating them with earth to be sure that all voids between the stones are completely filled with earth to prevent the occurrence of voids and settlement which will result therefrom. C. Rock may be used in embankment fill only with the approval of the ENGINEER. 3.04 GRADING • A. Grading in preparation for placing of loam, planting areas, paved walks and drives and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are indicated on the Drawings, to the lines, grades and elevations shown and otherwise as directed by the ENGINEER and shall be performed in such a manner that the requirements for formation of embankments can be followed. All material encountered, of whatever nature, within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as directed. During the process of grading, the subgrade shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the prosecution or condition of the work. • B. If at the time of grading it is not possible to place any material in its final location, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas for later use. No extra payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated material. C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or grades if found necessary as the work progresses, in order to obtain satisfactory construction. D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4-in in their greatest dimensions will not be permitted in the top 6-in of the finished subgrade of all fills. END OF SECTION 6364-79520/ 10/9/2012 OZZOO-3 TPA llTpasvAllaedCLWATER1R01 PIaM Fxpareion ProjectUssued to Bid Spea\02200.doe �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � J (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • C� 6364-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 OLZOO�4TPA \\TpasvrOlkxcICLWATERU20 1 Plant Expension Projecttlssued to Bid Spew102200.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 02213 ROCK AND BOULDER EXCAVATION PART l - GENERAL I.OI SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform excavation and disposal of rock and boulders in open cut trench excavation. at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Rock and boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock in open cut trench excavation which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, requires for its removal, wedging, sledging, cutting, or barring. Rock and boulder excavation shall be made in accordance with the "Typical Trench" detail for pipes and as shown on the Drawings, or determined by the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Blasting will not be permitted. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: l. Earthwork is included in Section 02200. . 2. Structural Excavation Backfill & Compaction is included in Section 02220. 3. Trenching Bedding and Backfill for Pipe is included in Section 02221. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gravel fill shall meet the specifications and gradation requirements as specified in FDOT No. 89 coarse aggregate. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.0] DISPOSAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ROCK A. Excavated rock and boulder material exceeding 6-inches in diameter shall not be used for backfilling unless otherwise approved. Rock of 3-1/2 - 6-inches in diameter can be used in the fill material except for the following exceptions; maximum of 1-1/2-inches within 12-inches of a pipeline and a ma�cimum of 2-inches within 12-inches of a road subgrade or a structure. Rock and boulder material disposed by wasting shall be replaced by suitable excavation. Approved borrow to supply any deficiency of backfill shall be provided at no additional cost. B. Excavated rock that meets the criteria for FDOT No. 89 stone may be processed and used for pipeline or structure bedding material, subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/9/ 12 02213-1 TPA \1TpasvNtluc\CLWATEPoRO 7 Plant Expansion ProjecNssued to Bid Specs\02213.doc c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • r � � 6349-79520/ I 0/9/ 12 �2213-2TPA \\7pasvNl�seclCLWATERUi01 PIaM Expansion Projec111ssued to Bid SpecslOYlt 3.dac • • u C� 2ii l 2 CDM Smith �^'�� ;ti�lits Reserved SECTION 02220 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION, BACKFILL & COMPACTION PA� I' 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes, except as elsewhere provided, excavation (unclassified), filling and grading under and around cast-in-place or precast concrete structures to the subgrades and grades indicated on the Drawings. B. Supplemental Foundation and Site Preparation Notes may be indicated on the Structural Drawings. C. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to obtain a Trench Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Department prior to initiating excavation activities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: 1. Trenching Bedding and Backfll for Pipe is included in Section 02221. 2. Dewatering and Drainage is included in Section 02140. 1.03 QUALTTY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements ofgoverning authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: l. The CONTRACTOR shall engage soil testing and inspection service for quality assurance testing during earthwork operations. C. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, bracing etc. shall conform to the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (CS/SB 2626) which incorporates by reference, OSHA's excavation safety standards, (29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P), to the requirements of Section 0231 l and to the Trench Permit issued by the City of Clearwater. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shali examine the site and review the available test borings or undertake his own soil borings prior to submitting his bid, taking into consideration all conditions that may affect his work. The OWNER and ENGINEER will not assume responsibility for variations in subsurface conditions at locations other than investigation locations shown and at the time the investigation was made. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 6349-79520/ 10l9/2012 OZGZO—I TPA \\TpasvrOtlsec\CIWATERV20 1 Plant Enpansion Projecl\Issued ro Bid Specs102220.doe �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult ENGINEER and Owner of such piping or utility immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged uti)ities to satisfaction of utility OWNER. 2. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated on the Drawings to be removed. C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1.05 PROTECTION A. Sheeting and Bracing in Excavations: 1. Sheeting and Bracing in Excavations shall be in accordance with Section 02311. B. Dewatering, Drainage and Flotation: 1. Conduct dewatering and drainage in accordance with Section 02I40. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals required under Sections 02140 and 0231 l. B. Furnish the ENGINEER, for approval, a representative sample of fill material obtained from onsite sources weighing approximately 100 pounds, at least (7) calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material. C. For each material obtained from other than onsite sources, notify the ENGINEER of the source of the material and furnish the ENGINEER, for approval, a representative sample weighing approximately l00 pounds, at least (7) calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such materi al . PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.0] MATERIALS A. Common Soil: Common Soil materials shall be soils having a group classification of SP, SP-SM, or SP-SC, , GM, or GC in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification per ASTM D2487. SM and SC may be used if they are effectively blended on-site with the cleaner sands to reduce the fines contents to 12% or less. Perform lab testing to verify fines content of blended soils. Particles larger than 3-1 /2-inch in diameter shall not be allowed in these materials. � • B. Select Common Soii and Structural Fill: Select common fill and structural fili materials shall be soils having a group classification of SP, SP-SM, SP-SC, GM, or GC with a maximum of l2" fines (portion passing the #200 US Standard Sieve). Particles larger than I-1/2-inch in diameter shall not be allowed in these materials. These materials should be free of marl, hardpan, broken concrete, masonry, rubble or other similar materials. The organic content of these materials shall • not exceed 2.5 percent by weight. 6349-79520/ 10/9l2012 �222�—ZTPA \\TpasvNl�sec�CLWATERIRO 1 RaM Expansion RqepNasued to Bid Specs102220.dx �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Kizhts Reserved • C. Ground Storage Tank Fill: Fill or backfill placed to establish design grade should consist of clean, cohesionless fill comprising the SP to SP-SM Unified Soil Classification or the AASHTO A-3 Classification. D. Unsuitable Materials: Unsuitable materials are soil, soil-aggregate and rock having a classification of MH, ML, CH, CL or PT, atong with materials having an organic content exceeding 5.0 percent by weight. E. Crushed Stone: Crush stone shall be crushed limestone, granite, or concrete and conforming to the gradation requirements for FDOT No. 57 coarse aggregate. F. Geotextile Fabric: Mirafi 140N, ar equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading are to be performed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EXCA VATION A. Excavations for structures shall be suitably wide for construction of the structures, including excavation supports, dewatering and drainage systems and working clearances. Each Structure • area and for a distance of at least 10 feet beyond the outside perimeter, should be stripped of all surface vegetation, pavements, near surface organic soils, root concentrations, and other objectionable material. B. Excavation shall be performed in-the-dry and shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Drainage and dewatering systems shall be in place and operational prior to beginning excavation work. Groundwater levels should be controlled to at least two feet below maximum excavation depth. In no case shall the earth be plowed, scraped or excavated by any means that would disturb the finished subgrade. C. Additional Excavation: l. When excavation has reached the required subgrade elevation, notify the ENGINEER who will make an inspection of conditions. 2. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated material with crushed stone and geotextile underlayment as approved by the ENGINEER. 3. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement below the required subgrade eievations, as directed by the ENGINEER, will be paid at the unit price bid item for Excavation Below Normal Grade and Crushed Stone Refill (See Sections 01025 and 02223). 4. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick", or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of inadeyuate excavation, dewatering, or other construction methods shall be removed and replaced with crushed stone with geotextile underlayment subject to prior approval by the ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER. • D. Ground Storage Tank Subgrade Preparation l. Subgrade preparation shall consist of undercutting the entire tank area plus a margin of not less than 5 feet to a minimum depth 3 feet or to expose the native subgrade soils, 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 OZGGO—JTPA 1\TpasvNt�sec\CLWATERV201 PIaM Expension Projed\Issued to eitl Specs102220.dx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved whichever occurs at the greatest depth. Careful inspection shall be performed at that time • to ensure removal of any unsuitable fill or underlying materials. E. Stability of Excavations: 1. Slope sides of excavations shall comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction or as shown on the Drawings. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or instability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. F. Shoring and Bracing: 1. Provide excavation support and protection in accordance with Section 0231 l. G. Dewatering: 1. Provide dewatering and drainage in accordance with Section 02140. H. Material Storage: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where approved, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. 1. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each material classification listed below. Structural fill shall be used below spread footing foundations, slabs, and other structures and as backfill within 3 feet horizontally of the below grade portion of structures. l 2" of crushed stone shall be used as backfill in overexcavated areas per paragraph 3.02.C, under and around manhole bases and at other locations indicated on the Drawings or approved by the ENGINEER. Ground Storage Tank fill shall be used underneath the ground storage tank foundation and as backfill within 5 feet horizontally of the foundation per 3.02 D. Common soil shall be used at all other locations. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as wark permits, but not until completion ofthe following: 1. Acceptance by ENGINEER of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utiIities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. • C. Ground Surface Preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsuitable materials, obstructions and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill materials will bond with existing surface. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/20 l 2 OZZZO-4TPA 11Tpasvr0llsec\GLWATER1Ft0 7 Plant Ezpansion PrqeU�ssuetl [o Bid Spew102220.doc • � � U �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Subgrades shall be proof rolled with at least 4 passess with the equipment described herein, unless approved by the Engineer. The ENGINEER will waive this requirement, if, in his opinion, the subgrade will be rendered unstable by such compaction. D. Ground Storage Tank Preparation 1. The subgrade shall be uniformly compacted utilizing a heavy vibratory roller having a minimum static drum weight of 5 tons. E. Fill Placement: 2. 3 4. � Material placed in fill areas under and around structures shall be deposited within the lines and to the grades shown on the Drawings or as approved by the ENGINEER, making due allowance for settlement ofthe material. Backfill shall be carried up evenly on all walls of an individual structure simultaneously with no more than one-foot elevation variation allowed. Fill shall be placed only on properly prepared surfaces which have been inspected and approved by the ENGINEER. Fill material can be obtained from cut areas (spoil only) within the construction project site. lf sufficient common soil or select common soil material is not available from excavation on site, the CONTRACTOR shall provide fill material as required from off-site sources at no additional cost to the OWNER. Fill shall be brought up in substantially level ]ifts, starting in the deepest portion of the fill. The entire surface of the work shall be maintained free from ruts, and in such condition that construction equipment can readily travel over any section. Fill shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or against concrete structures until they have attained sufficient strength. During the process of placing and spreading fill, all roots, debris and stones greater in size than specified under "Materials", shall be removed from the fill areas, and the CONTRACTOR shall assign a sufficient number of inen to this work to ensure satisfactory compliance with these requirements. If the compacted surface of any layer of material is determined to be too smooth to bond properly with the succeeding layer, it shall be toosened by harrowing or by an other approved method before the succeeding layer is placed. All fill materials shall be placed and compacted "in-the-dry." The CONTRACTOR shal} dewater excavated areas as required to perform the work and in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed state of the natural soils. 3.04 COMPACTION A. General: 2. 3. Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified herein or on the Drawings for each material classification. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to notify the ENGINEER in writing when density tests are to be performed. Written notice from the CONTRACTOR shall precede completion of compaction operations by at least two working days. Density test frequency for concrete slabs shall be ] per 1,000 square feet at the surface of compaction and for each lift. Density test frequency under spread footings shall be 1 per 25 lineal feet of footing for each lift. Compaction tests for the ground storage tank shall be conducted on a frequency of not less than one (I) test for each 2,500 SF and for each 50 foot of foundation perimeter. 6349-'79520/ 10/9/2012 0222�—JTPA 1\7pasvr0llsec\CLWATERWO 7 PIaM Expansion RojedUss�d to Bid SpecsW2220.doe �O 2012 CDM Smith A11 Rights Reserved B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: • I. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM DI557. a. Underneath structures including slabs on grade and 3 feet around perimeter of foundation, compact each layer of structural backfill materia] to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density. b. Under slabs and footing, compact each layer of structural backfill material to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density. c. ln lawn and unpaved areas, compact each layer of backfill or fill material to not less than 92 percent maximum dry density. d. In walkways, compact each layer of backfill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density. e. In rigid pavement and steps, compact each layer of backfill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry density. f. Under the ground storage tank and 5 feet around the perimeter of the tank foundation, Compaction shall consist of no less than ten (l 0) complete coverage in a criss-cross pattern throughout the entire tank area plus a margin of 5 feet. Compaction should continue so as to develop a uniform density of not less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557. The foundation perimeter for the tank structure should be densified at the bottom of footing elevation or 3 foot undercut depth, whichever occurs at the lowest elevation. 2. Moisture content of soil shall be within minus 2 percentage points to plus 2 percentage points of the optimum. C. Moisture Control: 1. Where subgrade or layer of fill material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply clean water to surface of subgrade, or layer of fill material. Prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, fill material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 3. Fill material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction but is otherwise satisfactory may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. D. Structural fill shall be placed in layers not more than 9 inches loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment. Compaction shall be accomplished with appropriate vibratory or impact type equipment to achieve a minimum compaction of at least 95 percent of maximum dry density uniformly throughout each fill lift. Incidental compaction due to traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward the required minimum coverages. E. Common soil shall be placed and compacted in a manner similar to that described above for structural fill, with the following exceptions: l. Layer thickness prior to compaction may be increased to I 2 inches in open areas. 2. Each layer shall be compacted to at least 92 percent of maximum dry density. F. Ground Storage Tank: Each lift should not exceed 12 inches with each lift uniformly compacted to no less than the 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density. � H. Large compaction equipment shall not be used within 5 feet of walls. Compaction equipment is • subject to approval by the ENGINEER. 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 �222�-6TPA ATpasvf011sx\CLWATERVtO 1 Plant Ezpansion PmjecNlssued ro�d Specs\02220.doc � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Place fill material in layers not more than 6 inches loose depth for material compacted by hand- operated tampers. Use manually operated sled-type vibratory compactors next to structures and in confined areas not accessible to heary mechanical compaction equipment. J. If the ENGINEER shall determine that added moisture is required, water shall be applied by sprinkler tanks or other sprinkler systems, which will ensure uniform distribution of the water over the area to be treated, and give complete and accurate control of the amount of water to be used. lf too much water is added, the area shall be permitted to dry before compaction is continued. Compaction by puddling and water jetting is not allowed. K. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all hose, piping, valves, sprinklers, pumps, sprinkler tanks, hauling equipment and all other materials and equipment necessary to place the water in the fill in the manner specified. 3.05 GRADING A. General: 1. Uniformly grade fill areas within limits of project including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. No soft spots or uncompacted areas will be allowed in the work. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: • 1. Grade areas adjacent to building lines, as shown on the Drawings, to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: a. Finish lawn or unpaved areas to within not more than 0.10 feet above or below the required elevation. b. Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.] 5 feet above the required subgrade and not below surrounding grade to avoid ponding water from runoff. C. Grading Surface of Fili Under Building Slabs or Slabs on grade: l. Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2-inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. D. Stones or rock fragments larger than l-1/2 inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in the top 12- inches of subgrade line of all fills or embankments. E. All cut and fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section and alignment shown on the Drawings, or as approved in writing by the ENGINEER to prevent ponding water on driveways, walkways or against structures. F. During grading, protect all buried valve extensions and covers, sprinklers and any other mechanical or structural object protruding from below grade. 3.06 EARTH EMBANKMENTS • A. All organic materials, including peat and topsoil, shall be removed from areas beneath new embankments. If the subgrade slopes are excessive, the subgrade shall be stepped to produce a 6349-79520/10/9/2012 OGZZO—/TPANTpasvrOtluc�CLWATER1R01 PIaMExpansionPrqechiwuedtoBitlSpes�02220.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved stable surface for the placement of the embankments. The naturai subgrade shall then be • compacted with at least 4 passes by suitable mechanical compaction equipment. The ENGINEER wili waive this requirement, if, in his opinion, the subgrade will be rendered unstable by such compaction. The prepared subgrade shall be inspected and approved by the ENGINEER prior to the placement of structural fill. B. Common soil shall be placed in layers 12-inches thick measured before compaction. Each layer shall be compacted to at least 92 percent of the maximum dry density. C. Existing slopes shall be reconstructed as shown on the Drawings. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Assurance Testing During Construction: l. Allow the ENGINEER to observe compacted subgrades and fill layers and review density test results before further construction work is performed. B. If in the opinion of the ENGINEER, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense to the OWNER. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. • 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: l. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIAL A. All surplus and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed of in the following way. l. Transport from the OWNER's property and legally dispose of. Any permit required for the hauling and disposing of this material beyond the OWNER's property shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR prior to commencing hauling operations. B. Excavated material may be used for fill if it meets the specifications for common soil or select common soil material and is approved by the ENGiNEER. Excavated materia) so approved may be neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. C. Excavated rock may be used in open fill areas only with the approval ofthe ENGINEER. END OF SECTION U 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 OZZZO-OTPA 11TD��b115ec1CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expa�sion Projed\Issued to BiA Specs107120.doc • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BEDDING, AND BACKFILL FOR PIPE PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR sha11 furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform al] excavation (unclassified), backfill, fill, grading and slope protection required to complete the piping work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The work shall also include related incidental work such as sheeting, bracing, and dewatering. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to obtain a Trench Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Department prior to initiating excavation activities. l .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited tq the following related requirements: l. Certificate of Compliance with the Florida Trench Safety Act. 2. Earthwork is included in Section 02200. 3. Structural Excavation Backfill & Compaction is included in Section 02220. 4. Excavation Below Normal Grade and Crushed Stone is included in Section 02223. • 5. Dewatering and Drainage is included in Section 02140. 6. Excavation Support and Protection is included in Section 0231 ]. 1.03 TRENCH PROTECTION A. Provide dewatering and drainage in accordance with Section 02140. B. Provide excavation support and protection in accordance with Section 02311. C. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, bracing etc. shall conform to the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (CS/SB 2626) which incorporates by reference, OSHA's excavation safety standards, (29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P), to the requirements of Section 0231 l and to the Trench Permit issued by the City of Clearwater. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall examine the site and review the available test borings or undertake his own soil borings prior to submitting his bid, taking into consideration all conditions that may affect his work. The OWNER and ENGINEER will not assume responsibility for variations of sub-soi] quality or conditions at locations other than places shown and at the time the investigation was made. Boring log data and soil samples are available for examination at the office of ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall get his own geotechnical information if he/she deems it necessary. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. • I. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the ENGINEER and the owner of such piping or utility immediately for directions. 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/2012 O222I —� TPA 51Tpasv�011sec1CLWATEPoRO 1 Plant Ezparrsion RojecNlssued to Bid Specsl02221.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Cooperate with owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in � operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated on the Drawings to be removed. C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. ]. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwark operations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the ENGINEER, for approval, a representative sample of fill material obtained from onsite sources weighing approximately 50 pounds, at least 7 calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material. B. For each material obtained from other than onsite sources, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of the source of the material and shalt furnish the ENGINEER, for approval, a representative sample weighing approximately 50 pounds, at least 7 calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such material. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 MATERIALS A. Common Soil: Common Soil materials shall be soils having a group classification of SP, SP-SM, or SP-SC, GM, or GC in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification per ASTM D2487. SM and SC may be used if they are effectively blended on-site with the cleaner sands to reduce the fines contents to 12% or less. Perform lab testing to verify fines content of blended soils. Particles larger than 3-l/2-inch in diameter shall not be allowed in these materials. B. Select Common Soil and Structural Fill: Select common fill and structural fill materials shall be soils having a group classification of SP, SP-SM, SP-SC, GM, ar GC with a maximum of l2" fines (portion passing the #200 US Standard Sieve). Particles larger than 1-l/2-inch in diameter shall not be allowed in these materials. These materials should be free of marl, hardpan, broken concrete, masonry, rubble or other similar materials. The organic content of these materials shall not exceed 2.5 percent by weight. C. Unsuitable Materials: Unsuitable materials are soil, soil-aggregate and rock having a classification of MH, ML, CH, CL or PT, along with materials having an organic content exceeding 5.0 percent by weight. D. Bedding Rock: Bedding rock shall be washed and graded crushed limestone or shell and conform to the gradation requirements of FDOT No. 89 coarse aggregate. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.O1 GENERAL • A. All excavation, backfill and grading necessary to complete the work shall be made by the • CONTRACTOR and the cost thereof shall be included in the contract price. 6349-79520/l 0/09/2012 OZZG 1—ZTPA 1�Tpaar011Sec\CLWATERU20 1 Plan[ Expareion Prajectllssued to Bid Specs�02221.doc � �� O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. The CONTRACTOR shall take all the necessary precautions to maintain the work area in a safe and workable condition. C. The CONTRACTOR shall protect his work at all times by flagging, marking, lighting and barricading. It shall also be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to preserve and protect all above and underground structures, pipe lines, conduits, cables, drains or utilities which are existing at the time he encounters them. Failure of the Drawings to show the existence of these obstructions shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from this responsibility. The cost of repair of any damage which occurs to these obstructions during or as a result of construction shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR without additional cost to the OWNER. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavation for all trenches required far the installation of pipes and electrical ducts shall be made to the depths indicated on the Drawings. Excavate trench to provide a minimum of 36-inch clear cover over the pipe bell unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Excavate in such manner and to such widths as will give suitable room for laying the pipe or installing the ducts within the trenches, for bracing and supporting and for pumping and drainage facilities. The trench width at the top of the pipe shall not exceed the allowable as determined by the depth of cut and indicated on the Drawings. B. The bottom of the excavations shall be firm and dry and in all respects acceptable to the ENGINEER. Excavate unsuitable soil material from the bottom of the trench to a depth • determined by the ENGINEER and replace with rock bedding. C. Where pipe or ducts are to be laid in bedding rock or the trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below, the designated subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed. D. Where the pipes or ducts are to be laid directly on the trench bottom the lower part of the trenches shall not be excavated to the trench bottom by machinery. The last of the material being excavated shall be done manually in such a manner that will give a flat bottom true to grade so that pipe or duct can be evenly and uniformly supported along its entire length. Bell holes shali be made as required manually so that there is no bearing surface on the bells and pipes are supported along the barrel only. 3.03 PIPE INTERFERENCES AND ENCASEMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by the following schedule of criteria concerning interferences with other utilities. In no case shall there be less than 0.3 feet between any two pipe lines or between pipe lines and structures. Concrete encasement must be approved by the ENGINEER and shall be provided in accordance with the typical detail as shown on the Drawings. 3.04 BEDDING A. All gravity sewer pipe shall be bedded using select common soils by the following procedure_ 1. Gravity sewer pipe shall have select common soils to 6-inches over top of pipe, and 4 to 6- inches below the invert depending on diameter as shown on the Drawings. 2. Select common soils shall be placed in maximum lift thicknesses of 4 to 6-inches with each • lift compacted to 98 percent maximum density per ASTM D1557; optimum moisture content 2%+/-. 6349-79520/ I 0/09/ZO ] 2 OGZG I—JTPA NTpasvNllaeclCLWATER�RO 1 Plant Expareion Projecdlssued to Bid Specsl02221.doc �O 20i2 CDM Smith AI} Rights Reserved 3. Bedding rock may be used under certain circumstances as a drain far groundwater control, � subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions necessary to maintain the bedding rock in a compacted state and to prevent washing, erosion or loosening of this bed. B. Pressure pipes sha11 be bedded using select common soils by the following procedures: l. Beginning at the bottom of the trench, shall be placed and compacted to the springline of the pipe, from the centerline of the pipe to the trench wall. Lift thickness sha11 not exceed 6 inches. Each lift shall be compacted using to 98 percent maximum density per ASTM D1557 optimum moisture content 2%+/-. 2. For pipe sizes 24-inch and larger, bedding rock shall be wrapped in filter fabric (Mirafi 140N or equal) which shall be placed in trench prior to placement of the first lift of bedding rock. 3. Above Stage 1, select common soil shall be placed and compacted to a point l2-inches above the top of the pipe for the fu11 width of the trench. Lift thickness shall not exceed 6-inches. Compaction requirements for Stage 2 shall be a minimum of 95 percent ofthe maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. 4. Above Stage 2, fill shall be placed and compacted in accordance with Backfilling described below. C. Density tests shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR above Stage 1 within each lift of bedding materials at ] 00-foot intervals in open areas not in right-of-way and ] 00-foot intervals in right-of-way and under pavement or as determined by the ENGINEER. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfilling over pipes shall begin as soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, jointed, and • inspected and the trench filled with suitable bedding material. B. Backfilling over ducts shall begin not less than three days after placing concrete encasement. C. All backfilling shall be prosecuted expeditiously and as detailed on the Drawings. D. Where pipes are not located within paved areas or right-of-way, the remainder of the trench above the Stage 2 bedding as described above, shall be filled and thoroughly compacted with common soil using mechanical equipment. Compact common soil in maximum 12-inch layers to 95 percent maximum density per ASTM D1557. Moisture content ofthe soil shall be within minus 2 percent to plus 2 percent of the optimum. E. Where pipes are located within right-of-way, the remainder of the trench above the Stage 2 bedding, as described above, shall be filled and thoroughly compacted with select common soil. Select common soil shall be placed and compacted in layers not to exceed -inches to 98 percent maximum density per ASTM D1557. Moisture content of the soil shal] be within minus 2 percent to plus 2 percent of the optimum. F. In locations where pipes pass through building walls, the CONTRACTOR shall take the following precautions to consolidate the refill up to an elevation of at least 1 foot above the bottom of the pipes: l. Place structural fill in such areas for a distance of not less than 3 feet either side of the center line of the pipe in level layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth. 2. Wet each layer to the extent required and thoroughly compact each layer with a power tamper. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 0222 I-4TPA \\Tpasvr07\sec\CLWATERIRO 7 Plarrt Ezpansion Projeclllssued to Bid Specs\02?21.doc • � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. Density tests shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR on every lift of trench backfill at 50-foot intervals or as determined by the ENGINEER. 3.06 GRADING A. Grading shail be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as approved by the ENGINEER and shall be made in such a manner that the requirements far formation of embankments can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, of whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of as required. During the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. Temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water which may affect the prosecution or condition of the work. B. If at the time of excavation it is not possible to place any material in its proper section of the permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas for later use. No extras will be considered for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated material. C. The right is reserved to make minute adjustments or revisions in lines or grades if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings or in order to obtain satisfactory construction. D. Stones or rock fragments larger than l-l/2 inches in their greatest dimensions will not be permitted in the top 12-inches of the subgrade line of all dikes, fills or embankments. E. No grading is to be done in areas where there are existing pipe lines that may be uncovered or damaged until such lines which must be maintained are relocated, or where lines are to be abandoned, all required valves are closed and drains plugged at manholes. F. The CONTRACTOR shall replace al] pavement cut or otherwise damaged during the progress of the work as specified elsewhere herein. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL A. Transport from OWNER's property and legally dispose of all surplus and/or unsuitable excavated material. Any permit required for the hauling and disposing of this material beyond OWNER's property shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR priar to commencing hauling operations. 3.08 TRACING WIRE A. All PVC pipes shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2- inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the ENGINEER. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows and taped to top center of pipe, with taping at spacing no greater than fifty (50) feet along the center of pipe. The locator wires shall be brought up into all vaive boxes with enough slack provided to extend ] 0 to 12 inches out of each box See paragaph 3.07 for testing requirements. B. At the time of pressure testing, the tracer wire shall be tested by the CONTRACTOR. If this test fails; the CONTRACTOR is responsible for repairing the tracer wire. The pressure test shall be rescheduled when the wire passes. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02221'STPA \lTpasrNtlsec\CLWATER�RO 1 Want Expansion ProjeclUssued to Bid Spew102221.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. CONTRACTOR shali erform a 12-volt DC electrical continui test on each of the tracer wires. No • P h' more than one volt of loss per 100Q feet of mainline pipe will be acceptable. The locator wire system shall pass the 12-volt DC electrical continuity test for at least one wire prior to final acceptance of the pipeline. Any cuts or breaks in the wire shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The locator wire shall be tested by the CONTRACTOR at the time of pressure testing. lf this test fails, the CONTRACTOR is responsible for repairing the locator wire and the pressure test will be reschedule when the wire will pass. 3.09 RESTORING TRENCH SURFACE A. Where the trench occurs adjacent to paved street, in shoulders or sidewalks, the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly consolidate the backfill and shall maintain the surface as the work progresses. If settlement takes place, he shall immediately deposit additional fill to restore the level of the ground. B. The surface of any driveway or any other area which is disturbed hy the trench excavation and which are not a part of the paved highway shall be restored by the CONTRACTOR to a condition at least equal to that existing before work began. C. In Sections where the pipelines pass through grassed areas, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, remove and replace the soil, or shall loam and sod the surface to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. The depth of loam replaced shall be at least equal to that removed by the CONTRACTOR in his trenching operations, but in no event shall it be placed less than 4-inches in depth. Sod disturbed in front of existing developed lots shall be replaced to match the existing sod. • END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ l 0/09/20l 2 �2221-6TPAHTpasrtOtluc\CLWATEPoRO 1 Plant Exparcion Projectllssued �o &d SpecsW2221.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 02223 EXCAVATION BELOW NORMAL GRADE AND BEDDING ROCK REFILL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. If in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the material at or below the normal grade of the bottom of a trench or excavation (as shown on the drawings is unsuitable for pipe or structure foundation, it shall be removed to the depth determined by the ENGINEER and replaced by bedding rock as applicable. B. Bedding rock used for pipe bedding is not included in the scope of work under this Section (See Section 02221). ] .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: 1. Section 02221: Trenching, Bedding and Backfill for Pipe. 2. Section 02220: Structural Excavation, Backfill and Compaction. PART 2 — PRODUCTS • 2.01 MATERIALS � A. Bedding rock shall be as specified in Section 02220 and 02221. PART 3 — MATERIALS 3.01 EXCAVATION AND DRAINAGE A. Whatever the nature of unstable material encountered or the groundwater conditions, trench dewatering shall be complete and effective. B. If the CONTRACTOR excavates below grade through error or for his own convenience, or through failure to properly dewater the trench, or disturbs the subgrade before dewatering is sufficiently complete, he may be required to excavate below grade as set forth in the preceding paragraph, in which case the work of excavating below grade and furnishing and placing the refill material shall be performed at the CONTRACTOR's own expense. 3.02 REFILL If the material at the level of trench bottom consists of fine sand, sand and silt ar soft earth, the subgrade material shall be removed to the extent determined by the ENGINEER and the excavation refilled with crushed stone. END OF SECTION 6364-79520/10/09/20l 2 OZZZJ—� TPA \1TpasurOt�sec\CLWATEPoRO 1 Poant Expansion PrqeclUssued to Bid Specs\02223.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • � �J 63 64-79520/ 10/09/ZO l 2 �ZZZJ—ZTPA 11TpasrNlkec�CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Ezpansion Project�lasued b Bid Speca\02223.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . SECTION 02270 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL PART l - GENERAL ] .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform all installation, maintenance, removal, and area cleanup related to sedimentation and erosion control work as reyuired to prevent the transport of silt or sediment outside the limits of construction and as required with permit conditions and applicable laws and regulations. The work shail include, but not necessarily be limited to, installation of temporary access ways and staging areas, silt fences, temporary seeding, turbidity barriers, sediment removal and disposal, device maintenance, removal of temporary devices, temporary mulching, and fina] cleanup. B. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Sedimentation and Erosion Control Plan to the ENGINEER in accordance with Section 011 10. 1.02 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS) A. The Contract Documents shall include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements. l. Environmental Protection is included in Section O11 l0. � 2. Permits are included in Section O1065. 3. Sodding is included in Section 02932. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after award of Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for approval, technical product literature for all commercial products to be used for sedimentation and erosion control. l .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the timely installation and maintenance of all sedimentation control devices necessary to prevent the movement of sediment from the construction site to off-site areas or into the stream or wetland system or preservation/ conservation areas via surface runoff or underground drainage systems or surface waters. Measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings necessary to prevent the movement of sediment outside the limits of construction shall be installed, maintained, removed, and cleaned up at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. No additional charges to the OWNER will be considered. B. Sedimentation and erosion control measures shall conform to the Best Management Practices outlined in the Drawings and in the Florida Development Manual. 6349-79520/ l 0/9/2012 02270-1 TPA \\TpasvNl�sedCLWATERIRO 1 Poant Expansion PrqettUSSUetl to &d Specs\0Y270.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Silt Fence 1. Steel posts shall be a 3 feet or more in length, 2--in by 4-/2in or 2" minimum diameter wood; steel; 1.33 ibs.ft Min) 2. Filter fabric in accordance with Sec. 985 FDOT specs. 3. Prefabricated commercial silt fence may be substituted for built-in-field fence. Pre-fabricated silt fence shall be "Envirofence" as manufactured by Mirafi Inc., Charlotte, NC or equal. B. Turbidity Barriers l. Turbidity barriers meeting FDOT Type 1 and Type tl requirements shall be provided. Turbidity barrier may be floating or staked, based on the conditions at the location for installation. Turbidity barrier shall be capable of functioning properly for flow conditions up to a 5 year/24 hour storm event. Turbidity barriers shall be constructed of PVC or polypropylene material, all portions which will be exposed to direct sunlight shall be ultraviolet resistant. All metal components shall be corrosion resistant. Woven materials may be acceptable for installations where high flow conditions may exist during storm events. Turbidity barriers shall be "Mark 1", "Mark ll", or "PGZ" as manufactured by American Boom & Barrier Corporation, Cape Canaveral, FL or equal. • C. Straw mulch shall be utilized on all newly graded areas to protect areas against washouts and erosion. Straw mulch shall be comprised of threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, rye, or hay that is free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable material. The straw mulch shall contain at least 50 percent by weight of material to be l0-in or longer. Straw shall be in an air-dry • condition and suitable far placement with blower equipment. D. Latex acrylic copolymer, such as Soil Sealant with coalescing agent as manufactured by Soil Stabilization Co., Merced, CA or approved equivalent shall be used as straw mulch tackifier. E. An asphalt tackifier may be used in place of a latex acrylic copolymer with prior written approval from the ENGINEER. F. Temporary Sod: This work shall consist of furnishing and placing sod in accordance with Section 02932 within areas designated by the ENGINEER, in order to temporarily control erosion. If the sod is determined to be of a temporary nature, at the discretion of the ENGINEER the requirements for fertilizer and lime may be eliminated. The sod shall be kept in a moist condition in order to insure growth. G. Temporary Grassing: The ENGINEER may determine that permanent type grass seed be omitted from Grassing and the specified rate of spread for fertilizer used in conjunction with grassing operations be reduced when such work is designated as a temporary erosion control feature. H. Erosion control matting shal) be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved. Erosion control matting shall be North American Green P300 or equal. I. Excelsior matting shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved. Excetsior matting shall be North American Green SC 150 or equal. • 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/20l 2 O22 / O—ZTPA UTpasvNllsedCLWATERV20 1 Plant Fxpa�ion ProjectNSSUed to Bid Speas\07270.AOc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri<�ht� Reserved • J. 1=abric formed concrete erosion protection shall be Armorform as manufactured by Nicolon, or equal. Material shall correspond to the 4-inch thick Uniform Section Mat (USM), or equal. PAR7 3 - EXECUTION 3.O1 LOCATION OF SEDIMENT/EROSION CONTROL AND TURBIDITY BARRIERS A. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed at all locations shown on the plans, and at other locations as needed to comply with the requirements of this section. B. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed along the property perimeter and around all drainage structures. C. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed along atl limits of construction. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide additiona] sediment/erosion control and turbidity barriers as needed to control the transport of silt and sediments outside of the limits of construction. E. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed around the base of all soil stockpile areas. All non- working faces of soil stockpiles, which will be in place longer than three months shall be seeded. F. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed along the perimeter of all staging areas. G. All disturbed areas, greater than ]0,000 square feet, in which construction activities have been • stopped and are not anticipated to resume for a period of 21 days, but not longer than three months shali be temporarily mulched, within five days of stoppage of construction in accordance with Paragraph 3.04. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Silt Fence Instaliation l. Silt fences shall be positioned as specified indicated on the Drawings and as necessary to prevent movement of sediment produced by construction activities outside ofthe limits of construction. 2. Dig trench approximately 6-in wide and 6-in deep along proposed fence lines. 3. Drive metal-stakes, 6 feet on center (maximum) at back edge of trenches. Stakes shall be driven I feet (minimum) into ground. 4. Hang filter fabric on wire carrying to bottom of trench with about 4-in of fabric laid across bottom of trench. Stretch fabric fairly taut along fence length and secure with tie wires 12-in O.C. both ways. 5 Backfill trench with excavated material and tamp. 6 Install pre-fabricated silt fence according to MANUFACTURER's instructions. B. Turbidity Barriers 1. Turbidity barriers should extend the entire depth of the water. 2. Turbidity barriers should not be placed perpendicular to flow. Barriers shoutd be installed at an angle to the flow. Angle should be determined on the amount of flow in the waterway and the MANUFACTURER's recommendation. 3. Turbidity barrier should be ] 0 to 20 percent longer than the straight line measurement. 4. Joints between panels should be kept to a minimum. � 5. Barrier should extend to the top of bank. All ends should be secured firmly to the shoreline. 6. Where significant flow is anticipated, a heavy woven pervious filter fabric may be substituted. 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 O22 ! O-3TPA \1TpasvNi�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expa�sion PmjeqUSSUed to Bitl Specs\02270.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Inlet Protection • 1. Inlet protection shall be installed for all catch basins, drop inlets, drop structures, inlets to drainage pipes, or other structures as indicated on plans. 2. A 5-foot strip of sod shall be laid surrounding the perimeter each structure. 3. A silt fence shall be installed arouna the perimeter of the sodded area. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS A. Inspections 1. CONTRACTOR shall make a visual inspection of all sedimentation and erosion control devices (including turbidity barriers) daily and promptly after every rainstorm. If such inspection reveals that additional measures are needed to prevent movement of sediment to areas outside the limits of construction, CONTRACTOR shall promptly install additional devices as needed. Sediment controls in need of maintenance shall be repaired promptly. 2. CONTRACTOR shall keep a log of all inspections indicating the following: - Date and time of inspection - Inspectar - Amount of rainfall - Erosion and sediment control devices inspected - Condition of sediment and erosion controi devices - Repairs needed - Date repair is completed B. Device Maintenance l. Silt Fences • a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of the fabric. b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-ft minimum overlap. c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the fence is filtering all runoff directed to the fence. Inlet Protection a. Remove accumulated sediment once it bui Ids up to one-half of the height of the barrier. b. Remove all sediment accumulated within the barrier and replaced damaged sod. c. Make other repair as necessary to ensure that the inlet protection device is operating properly. Turbidity Barriers a. Turbidity barriers shall be inspected on a daily basis. b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2 foot minimum overlap. c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure barriers are effectively maintaining turbidity levels outside of the barrier within limits specified in Section 01110 and 01065. • 6349-79520/ ] 0/9/20l 2 O22 / O�4TPANTpasvrOilsedCLWATER�RO 1 Plant Fxparision Projectllssued [o Bid Specs\OY170.doc O 2012 CDM Smith A I I Rights Reserved , 3.04 "fEMPORARY MULCHING • � A. Apply temporary mulch to areas where rough grading has been completed but final grading is not anticipated to begin within 21 days of the completion of rough grading. if construction activities are not planned to resume for three months or longer, the temporary seeding requirements sha11 be fol lowed. B. Straw mulch shall be applied at rate of 2,000 lbs/acre and tackified with latex acrylic copolymer at a rate of 1 gal/] 000 ft2 diluted in a ratio of 30 parts water to l part latex acrylic copolymer mix. C. After temporary mulching, traffic should be kept to a minimum, except for designated temporary access roads. 3.05 REMOVAL AND FINAL CLEANUP A. Once the site has been fully stabilized against erosion, remove sediment control devices and all accumulated silt. Dispose of silt and waste materials in proper manner. Regrade all areas disturbed during this process and stabilize against erosion with surfacing materials as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 O22 / O—S TPA 11TpasvNilsedCLWATER�RO 1 Plant Fxpa�uion Projectllssued to Bid Spew\02270.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) � � 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �ZG / �-6TPA UTpaaAikec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Erpa�im PtojectUSSUeC M Bid Specs102270.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Rights Reserved SECTION 0231 l EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work specified in this Section includes reyuirements for excavation and support of temporary excavations, and trenches. The CONTRACTOR shall design, furnish, install, and maintain a system of steel sheeting supports, including all bracing and associated items, to retain excavations in a safe manner and to control ground movements. Upon completion of the required construction the system of support shall be removed or cut and left in place as noted herein and the excavation and staging area sites restored as discussed herein. B. The work shall include site grading; fencing and signing; construction staging areas; design and construction of excavation support systems; design and construction of thrust blocks; disposal of excavated material, surface water, and ground water; backfilling; and site restaration. Work shall include all labor, materials, and equipment required to complete excavation support. C. Retain the services of a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida to prepare excavation support and protection system designs and submittals described herein. D. Work shall include the design, equipment, materials, installation, protection, and monitoring of • geotechnical instrumentation required to monitor the performance of the excavation support system as required herein. E. All excavations and steel sheeting support system shall conform to applicable OSHA excavation, trenching, and shoring standards which are contained in the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations 29 (C.F.R.) 1926.650-1926.653, other federal, state or locai requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall also obtain, and comply with, a Trench Permit from the City of Clearwater Building Department. In the event of a conflict, comply with the more restrictive applicable requirements. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The design of the temporary steel sheeting excavation support system is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The design calculations and drawings shall be prepared, stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida, who is experienced in designing similar excavation support systems. B. Design the temporary steel sheeting excavation support system in accordance with requirements of this Section. These criteria are the minimum acceptable standards. C. All underground utility lines shalt be identified, located, and protected from damage or displacement. Utility companies and other responsible authorities shall be contacted to locate and mark the locations and, if they so desire, direct or assist with protecting the underground instal lation. D. Design excavation support systems in accardance with a11 OSHA requirements and other local and • agency requirements. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 02311-1 TPA \\Tpasvr0l�seclCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM E�ansion Projecllissued W Bid SpecsW2311.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Design the support system to minimize horizontal and vertical movements and to protect adjacent • structures and utilities from damage. F. Excavations below the level of the base of any adjacent foundation or retaining wall shall not be permitted unless the design of the excavation and bracing includes an analysis of the stability of the structure supported by the foundation and as necessary, incorporates required bracing/underpinning of the foundation. G. For support systems in which bracing is installed between opposite sides of the excavation, design the excavation support of both sides to be nearly the same as feasible. H. Where necessary to resist point loads, pipe piles used as soldier piles shall be filled with concrete with a compressive strength not less than 3,000 psi. The strength of the concrete shall not be considered in design of the pipe pile for bending stress. I. Design, install, operate, and maintain ground water control system to control ground water inflows, prevent piping or loss of ground, and maintain stability of the excavation. Refer to the requirements of Section 02140. J. Design review and field monitoring activities by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his/her responsibilities for the work. K. If sheet piles are used near any existing structures, vibration levels shall be monitored by the CONTRACTOR with seismographs. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER in accordance with Section Section IIl-6.11, Shop Drawings and design calculations for the CONTRACTOR-designed steel sheeting excavation support system stamped by a Professional Engineer in the State of Florida. Submittals shall indicate the following, as a minimum: B. Shop Drawings shall include: 1. Provide overall plan layout of the system, as shown on contract drawings, indicating clearances, dimensions, material properties, member sizes, locations, spacing and penetrations depth of all members, locations of various types of lateral supports. Indicate existing and proposed utilities, structures or other obstruction, location and type of instrumentation and monitoring points within the area of influence of the excavation. 2. Provide wall elevations and locations of all bracing. 3. Show the overall sequence of installation and removal of bracing, indicating levels to which the work will be carried out before bracing is installed or removed. 4. Method of preloading bracing (if required) and the preload for each member, and the method of locking-off the preload. Include detailed drawings of the connections, jacking supports and method of shimming. 5. Details, layout, arrangement, eyuipment requirements, and method of construction of the proposed steel sheeting excavation support system. 6. Procedures for resolving difficulties arising from misalignment of inembers exposed during excavation, and criteria for implementing those procedures. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �2.J � 1�2 TPA \1Tpa5vrOlkeC�CLWATER\RO 1 Plant F�tpansbn Rojec111ssuetl b&tl Specs�02311.tloc • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � C. Design calculations shall include: 1. Loads on the excavation support system for all stages of excavation, bracing removal, and concrete placement, including material and equipment loads on adjacent ground during construction. 2. Design of wall and all bracing members including all details for all stages of construction. Design shall account for water pressures associated with flood conditions. D. Submit quality control measures as required to ensure that the performance of the excavation support system is consistent with the requirements herein. E. Submit welder qualifications and weld procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1. F. Submit CONTRACTOR's and Design Engineer's qualifications as described herein. G. At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the job site during excavation that includes a plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to be used in the protective system, and the identity of the registered engineer who approved the design. H. Do not proceed with any support of excavation or protection activities until the submittal has been reviewed by the ENGINEER for compliance with the Contract Documents and for general compatibility with the wark and with accepted engineering practices. 1. CONTRACTOR's Design Engineer's documentation shall include: l. Periodic on-site inspections of excavation support system as the systems are constructed. . 2. Review of quality control measures and performance data. 3. Certification that the excavation support system is constructed per the applicable design following completion of each support system and following any modifications by CONTRACTOR during construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Perform all work in accordance with current applicable regulations and codes of all Federal, State and local agencies. B. The CONTRACTOR shall have at least 5 years of experience with work compatible to the Work shown and specified, employing labor and supervisory personnel who are similarly experienced in this type of Work. C. The CONTRACTOR's Design Engineer shall be a Registered Professional Engineer in the State in which the work is located with at least 5 years professional experience in the design and construction of support of excavation systems and shall have completed not less than 5 successful excavation support projects of equal type, size, and complexity to that require for the work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Soldier piles and structural steel members shall conform to ASTM A572 or ASTM A242 unless approved otherwise. All steel conforming to ASTM A 572 shall be Grade 36 or better. No • members with permanent deformations are to be provided. Members shall not be spliced unless approved by the ENGINEER. 6349-79520/]0/9/2012 02311-3 TPA\\Tpasvr011sedCLWATER\R01PIantE�arisanAOjecttlswetltoBitlSpecs�02311.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Pipe piles used as soldier piles shall conform to ASTM A252, Grade 36, or better. � C. Steel sheet piling shall conform to ASTM A328 or ASTM A572 or ASTM A690. All steel sheet piling conforming to ASTM A 572 shall be Grade 36 or better. D. Concrete shall conform to Section 03300 or ASTM C33 and ASTM C150. E. A(1 timber shall be structural grade with a minimum allowable flexural strength of 1100 psi. Timber lagging shall be at least 3 inches thick and free of large or loose knots. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Commence installation of support system and excavations only after shop drawings have been reviewed by the ENGINEER for conformance with the contract documents and for general compatibility with the work and with accepted engineering practices. B. Methods of construction for excavations shall be such as to ensure the safety of the Work, CONTRACTOR's employees, ENGINEER, and OWNER's employees and inspectors, the public and adjacent property and improvements, whether public or private. C. Before beginning construction at any location of this project, adequately protect existing structures, utilities, trees, shrubs, and other existing facilities. The repair of or compensation for damage to existing facilities shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. • D. As a minimum, place fencing, gates, lights, and signs as necessary around the excavations and staging areas to provide for public safety. E. Install excavation support systems in accordance with the approved shop drawings and applicable permits. F. All voids between excavation support system and earth shall be filled with materials acceptable to the ENGINEER. G. If unstable material is encountered during excavation, all necessary measures shall be taken immediately to contain it in place and prevent ground displacement. H. If settlement or deflections of supports indicate that support system requires modification to prevent excessive movements, redesign and resubmit revised shop drawings and calculations to the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. Sufficient quantity of material shall be maintained on site far protection of work and for use in case of accident or emergency. J. All welding sha11 conform to the applicable provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1. • 6349-79520/10/9/2012 02311-4 TPA\\7pam011seciCLWA7ERUiO t PIanI Fxpansion ProjecBLSSUetl�o Bi0 SpecsW2311 doc C� • • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved 3.02 PORTABLE TRENCH BOXES A. Portabie trench boxes or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of workers only. B. Additional excavation, backfilling, and surface restoration required as the result of trench box use shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Trench boxes or shields shall be designed, constructed, and maintained to meet acceptable engineering and industry standards. D. Shie]ds shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other hazardous movement of the shield in the event of the application of sudden lateral loads. E. A copy of the trench box manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and limitations sha11 be in written form and maintained at the job site during all excavation work. 3.03 STEEL SHEET PILING A. Install steel sheet piling with the minimum embedment depths as shown on the shop drawings. B. Drive sheeting in plumb position with each sheet pile interlocked with adjoining piles for its entire length so as to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length of each run of wall, bearing tightly against original ground. Exercise care in driving so that interlocking members can be extracted without damaging adjacent structures or utilities. The methods of driving, cutting, and splicing shalt conform to the shop drawings. C. Use templates or other temporary alignment facilities to maintain piling line. D. Prior to installation, the sheet piles shall be tharoughly cleaned and inspected for defects and far proper interlock dimensions. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a tool for checking the interlock dimensions. E. Each sheet pile shall have sufficient clearance in the interlocks to slide, under its own weight, into the interlock of the sheet pile previously placed. F. Excavation shall not be carried in advance of steel sheet piling installation. G. Where obstructions are anticipated, pre-excavation or pre-drilling along the sheet pile wall alignment shall be conducted at no additional cost to the OWNER. Pre-excavation and pre-drilling shall not extend below the lowest excavation level or into bearing soils for existing or future structures. H. Obstructions encountered before the specified embedment far piles shall be removed. Where obstructions cannot be removed, the sheet pile system shall be re-evaluated by the CONTRACTOR's Design Engineer for the resulted reduced embedment and additional tce stability measure implemented, as required or for realignment of the sheet pile wall. A submittal of the proposed measures shall be provided. I. Damaged piling or piling with faulty alignment shall be withdrawn and new piling driven properly in its place. The cost of such additional work shall be considered as part of the pile driving and shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 6349-79520/] 0/9/2012 �23 1��5 TPA llTpasvr07lsedCLWATER\RO 7 Plant Expansbn Projectllssued W Bid SpetsW2311.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.06 INTERNAL BRACING A. Provide internal bracing to carry maximum design load without distortion or buckling. B. ]nclude web stiffeners, plates, or angles as needed to prevent rotation, crippling, or buckling of connections and points of bearing between structural steel members. Allow for eccentricities caused by field fabrication and assembly. C. Install and maintain all bracing support members in tight contact with each other and with the surface being supported. Wood shims shall not be used. D. Coordinate excavation work with installation of bracing. Excavation shall extend no more than 2 feet below any brace level prior to installation of the bracing. E. Use procedures that produce uniform loading of bracing member without eccentricities or overstressing and distortion of inembers of system. 3.07 REMOVAL OF EXCAVATION SUPPORT A. Removal of excavation support system shall begin at, and progress from, the bottom of the excavation. Members shall be released slowly as to note any indication of possible failure of the remaining members or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation. B. Backfilling shall progress together with the removal of support systems from excavations. • C. Do not remove vertical support members that were installed within the zone of influence of new ar • existing structures or pipelines. The zone of influence is defined as a zone extending down and away from the outer edge of the structure at 1 horizontal to I vertical or from the centerline of the pipe. Support members installed within this zone shall be cut off at a minimum of 5 ft below finished grade and abandoned in place. D. No untreated wood shal l remain as part of the abandoned portion of the work. E. Remove material of the excavation support system from the site immediately. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/9/20 ] 2 0231 I-6 TPA \�7pasvr0lkec�CIWATER�RO 1 Plant E�ansion Projectlissuetl to Bitl SpeceW2311 Coc U . • �O 2012. CDM Smith All Rieht, Reserved SECTION 02576 PAVEMENT REPAIR AND RESTORATION PART l - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and remove and replace pavements over trenches excavated for installation of pipe lines and/or structures as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. B. This Section does not inctude the construction of new roadway and driveway surfaces or the complete restoration of existing pavements. D. The CONTRACTOR shall resurface the entire roadway after the pipeline has been installed, tested and approved by the ENGINEER. Roadway resurfacing details shall be as shown in the Drawings. E. Limits of resurfacing shall be as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 01390 relative to photographs required priar to construction. B. All damage, as a result of work under this Project, done to existing structures, pavement, driveways, paved areas, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, shrubbery, grass, trees, utility poles, utility pipe lines, conduits, drains, catch basins, swales, ditches, signs, flagstones, or stabilized areas or driveways and including all obstructions not specifically named herein, shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Bid prices shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for the cutting, repair, and restoration of the damaged areas unless pay items for specific types of repair are included in the Bid Form. C. All materials and workmanship shall be first class and nothing herein shall be construed as to relieve the CONTRACTOR from this responsibility. The OWNER reserves the right to require soil bearing or loading tests or materials tests, should the adequacy of the foundation or the quality of materials used be questionable. Costs of these tests shall be borne by the OWNER, if found acceptable; the costs of all failed tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. D. All street and road repair shall be made in accordance with the details indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable requirements of these Specifications and meeting the approval of the OWNER. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable provisions of the Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction", latest edition, and Supplemental Specifications hereunder govern the work under this Section. The Florida Department of Transportation will hereafter be referred to as FDOT. 6349-79520/] 0/9/20] 2 O25 / 6-1 TPA HTpasvNllseclCLWATERV20 / Plant F�pansion Projedllssued [o Bid SpecsW2576.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials utilized in flexible base pavement and base course shall be as specified in the Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," latest edition and applicable provisions in Section 02500 of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING PAVEMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall cut and remove pavement as necessary for installing the new pipelines and appurtenances and for making connections to existing pipelines. B. Before removing pavement, the pavement shall be marked for cuts nearly paralleling pipe lines and existing street lines. Asphalt pavement shall be cut along the markings with a rotary saw. C. No pavement shall be machine pulled until completely broken and separated along the marked cuts. 3.02 GENERAL RESTORATION • A. All existing street paving, driveways, bike paths, etc., shall be restored by the CONTRACTOR and shall be replaced or rebuilt using approved construction materials. The CONTRACTOR • shall be responsible for restoring all such work, including subgrade and base courses where present. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for at his own expense such local or other governmental permits as may be necessary for the closing of streets and shall satisfy himself as to any requirements other than those herein set forth which may affect the type, quality and manner of carrying on the restoration of surfaces by reason of jurisdiction of such governmental bodies. B. All pipeline and pavement restoration work shall be completed, tested and ready for operation within the road closure periods permitted by the OWNER. C. In all cases, the CONTRACTOR will be reyuired to maintain, without additiona] compensation, all permanent replacement of street paving, done by him under this Contract until accepted by the OWNER, including the removal and replacement of such work wherever surface depressions or underlying cavities result from settlement of trench backfill. D. The CONTRACTOR shall do all the final resurfacing ar repaving of streets or roads, over the excavations that he has made and he shall be responsible for relaying paving surfaces of roadbed that have failed or been damaged, at any time prior to acceptance by the OWNER on account of work done by him and he shall resurface or repave over any tunnel jacking, or boring excavation that shall settle or break the surface, to the satisfaction of the OWNER and at the CONTRACTOR's sole expense. Backfilling of trenches and the preparation of sub-gades shall conform to the app}icable requirements of Sections 02220 and 02221. E. All repaving or resurfacing shall be done in accordance with Florida Department of Transportation Specifications and City of Clearwater Standards. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 OZS / 6—LTPA 1\TpesvAltsedCLWATERUtO 7 Plant Evpansion Projectllssued w Bid Specs1�2576.doc �O 241? CDM Smith AI! !Zithts Reserved • 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS RESTORATION A. Sidewalks cut or damaged by construction shall be restored in full sections or blocks to a minimum thickness of four inches. Concrete curb or curb gutter shall be restored to the existing height and cross section in full sections or lengths between joints. Concrete shall be as specified on the Drawings. Grassed yards, shoulders and parkways shall be restored to match the existing sections with sod of a type matching the existing grass. B. Concrete driveways shall be repaired with nonstructural concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi according to the applicable portions of the FDOT Standard Specifications, Sections 345 through 350. The minimum thickness shall be 6-inches with 6x6xI0x10 welded wire fabric reinforcement embedded within the concrete. Expansion materia] shall be placed in the joint between old and new concrete. Saw joints shall be placed as approved by the ENGINEER. Minimum driveway restoration shall extend from roadway edge of pavement to the next expansion joint in the driveway. C. Asphaltic Concrete Drive: Asphalt drives shall be repaired with asphattic base concrete with Type SP-9-5. Asphaltic concrete repair shall consist of minimum of 6-inches or the thickness of the existing base material, whichever is greater. The repair shall extend a minimum of 2-feet wider than the top of the trench and to the depth of the existing driveway. The CONTRACTOR shal) match the thickness of the existing driveway. When the existing driveway had a seal coat to form boards, the CONTRACTOR shall match the existing construction. • D. Other Driveways: In chip and seal, oil-mat epoxy sealed and gravel pavements decorative driveways, wearing surfaces shall be repiaced with the same or better kind of quality material as that removed or damaged. The repair shall extend a minimum of 2-feet wider than the top of the trench and to the depth of the existing driveway. The repair shall be to the satisfaction of the OWNER. � E. Any driveway affected by construction shall be repaired in sections, rather than patched, in a manner consistent with the original construction of the driveway. The original driveway shall be cut back to a straight vertical transverse joint or to an existing joint as approved by the ENGINEER. New driveways will be placed to the edge of the road and as shown on the Drawings. 3.04 CLEANUP A. After all repair and restoration or paving has been completed, all excess asphalt, dirt, and other debris shalt be removed from the roadways. A11 existing storm sewers anc! inlets shall be checked and cleaned of any construction debris. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 OZS / 6-3TPA 11TpasvA115ec1CLWATER1R01 Plant Expansion Projecttlssued N Bid Spe�102576.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 OZS / 6—YTPA OTpasvAtlsec\CLWATERU201 Plam Expereion Project\Issued to Bid Spea�02576.doc �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . SECTION 02605 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required and install precast concrete manholes, precast concrete boxes, access hatches, concrete coatings and damp-proofing and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork is included in Section 02200. B. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. C. Nonshrink grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings, product data, materials of construction, and details of installation. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Base sections, riser sections, flat slab tops, including notarized certificate indicating compliance with ASTM C858 (vaults) or ASTM C478 (manholes). 2. Signed and sealed drawings and calculations showing compliance with ACI 350. 3. Pipe connections to precast concrete elements. 4. Method of repair for minor damage to precast concrete sections. 5. Certification of Applicator by Damp-proofing Manufacturer. 6. Concrete Damp-proofing and Coating Warranties a. 5 year warranty b. Shall include material and labor to repair 7. Certification of Applicator by Coating Manufacturer. 8. Concrete Damp-proofing and Coatings B. Samples • 1. Provide samples as requested by Engineer. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 1 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Design Data 1. Sectional plan(s) and elevations showing dimensions and reinforcing steel placement. 2. Structural calculations including assumptions. 3. Concrete mix design. D. Test Reports 1. Concrete test cylinder reports from an approved testing laboratory certifying conformance with this Section. 2. Results of leakage tests. 3. Results of Spark test(s). 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM C32 - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or • Shale). 3. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM CI50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 5. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets 6. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 7. ASTM C990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealant. 8. ASTM C858 - Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures 9. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials. 10. ASTM D4263 — Standard Test Method for indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 2 � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. ACI 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges D. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All material shall be new and unused. B. Materials' quality, manufacturing process and finished sections are subject to inspection and approval by Engineer or other Owner representative. Inspection may be made at place of manufacture, at work site following delivery, or both. C. Materials will be examined for compliance with ASTM standards, this Section and approved manufacturer's drawings. Additional inspection criteria shall include: appearance, dimensions(s), blisters, cracks and soundness. • D. Materials shall be rejected for failure to meet any requirements specified herein. Rejection may occur at place of manufacture, at work site, or following installation. Mark for identification rejected materials and remove from work site immediately. Rejected materials shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. E. Repair minor damage to precast concrete sections by approved method, if repair is authorized by Engineer. F. Submittals shall include drawings and calculations signed and sealed by a Florida registered Professional engineer for the loads listed in the specification section. G. Coating Applicator must be an approved and certified by coating manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Reference to a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. • C. Provide lifting lugs or holes in each precast section for proper handling. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 3 �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Rights Reserved D. Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type II cement or equal. E. Precast concrete sections shall be properly cured prior to shipping. Precast concrete sections shaIl not be shipped before concrete has attained 3,000 psi compressive strength. F. Mark date of manufacture, name and trademark of manufacturer on the inside of each precast section. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Precast reinforced concrete boxes shall be manufactured by Oldcastle Precast or approved equal. Refer to Drawings for required inside dimensions and minimum thickness of concrete. B. Manufacturer shall notify Engineer at least 5 working days prior to placing concrete during manufacturing process. Engineer may inspect reinforcing steel placement prior to placing concrete. C. Structural design calculations and fabrication drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. D. Precast concrete base sections, riser sections, flat slab tops and grade rings shall conform to ACI 350 and ASTM C478 and shall meet the following requirements: E. Design Criteria 1. Precast concrete a. Minimum compressive strength shall be 5000 psi at 28 days. b. Maximum water-to-cement ratio shall be 0.42 by weight. c_ Minimum cement content shall be 5641bs of cement per cubic yard of concrete. 2. Manufactured products a. Conform to ACI 350 for liquid-containing structures. b. Analyze walls and slabs using accepted engineering principals. Design walls for internal fluid pressures and external soil pressures independently. c. At liquid-containing structures the environmental durability (Sd) factor must be included in the calculations. d_ Design walls of the precast structure for the governing case from the following load conditions: 1) an external lateral pressure based on an equivalent fluid with a unit weight of 90 pounds per cubic foot (pc fl. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 4 u • • . L� �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 2) an external lateral pressure based on an equivalent fluid with a unit weight of 62.4 pcf. Include a live load surcharge pressure equal to 2 feet of earth above the finished ground surface or top of pavement surface, as applicable. 3) an internal lateral pressure based on a fluid with a unit weight of 62.4 pcf. Assume internal fluid to the bottom surface of the top slab, unless otherwise noted or shown. Design of walls shall account for effects of tension due to internal fluid pressure. e. Design shall prevent flotation, with ground water level at finished ground surface, by dead weight of structure and of soil directly above structure. Do not consider skin friction, soil friction, weight of equipment in structure, nor top slab. A factor of safety of 1.1 shall be used for total dead load (do not include equipment nor top slab) divided by the total buoyant force. f. Locate access openings, wall sleeves and pipe penetrations as shown on Drawings. g. Locate horizontal wall joints 8-in minimum from edge of wall openings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. h. Consider discontinuities in structure produced by openings and joints. Provide additional reinforcing around openings. Frame openings to carry full design loads to support walls. Design structure with a minimum number of joints. Maximum number of structure sections, including top slab, shall be six. Wall sleeves shall be provided by the precast concrete manufacturer. 3. Design precast flat slab top for their own weight and an AASHTO H-20 live load applied at finished grade. 4. Risers and top sections shall have tongue and groove joints. 5. Top section shall be a flat slab. 6. Provide integrally cast knock-out panels in precast concrete manhole sections at locations, and with sizes shown on Drawings. Knock-out panels shall have no steel reinforcing. 7. Minimum wall and top slab thickness shail be 8 inches. JOINTING PRECAST SECTIONS A. Seal tongue and groove joints of precast sections with either rubber O-ring gasket or preformed flexible joint sealant. O-ring rubber gaskets shall conform to ASTM C443. Preformed flexible joint sealant shall conform to ASTM C990 and shall be Kent Seal No. 2 by Hamilton-Kent; Ram-Nek by K.T. Snyder Company or equal. • B. Completed joint shall withstand 15 psi internal water pressure without leakage or displacement of gasket or sealant. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 02605- 5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.04 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Connect pipe to manholes and precast boxes using one of the following methods: Grout in place - Precast element shall have a formed, tapered circular opening larger than the pipe outside diameter. Grout shall be non-shrink, waterproof grout conforming to Section 03600. Plastic pipe shall have a waterstop gasket secured to pipe with a stainless steel clamp. 2. Flexible sleeve - Integrally cast sleeve in precast element or install sleeve in a formed or cored opening. Pipe shall be fastened in sleeve with stainless steel clamp(s). Coat stainless steel clamp(s) with bituminous material to protect from corrosion. Flexible sleeve shall be Lock Joint Flexible Manhole Sleeve; Kor-N-Seal connector; PSX Press-Seal Gasket or equal. Compression gasket - Integrally cast compression gasket in precast element. Compression gasket shall be A-Lok or equal. 2.05 DAMPPROOFING FOR ALL PRECAST STRUCTURES A. Exterior Damp proofing shall be Tnema-tar High Build Epoxy, Series 46H-413 by Tnemec or approved equal to all exterior surfaces. Dry Film Thickness shall be 16-20 mils. 2.06 CONCRETE COATING AND PREPARATION FOR MANHOLES A. Allow the new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28days. Test for moisture by plastic flm tape down test (ASTM D4263). B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting materials from the surface by high pressure water blasting (min 3500 PSI) followed by Abrasive Blast per SSPC-13 (Surface Preparation of Concrete). Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. C. Thoroughly wash the roughened concrete surfaces and keep the surfaces saturated for at least 6 hours before placing new concrete. All free water shall be removed prior to placing the concrete. An epoxy bonding compound as specified may be used in lieu of saturating surface for 6 hours. Achieve concrete surface profile required by coating manufacturer. D. Concrete Resurfacing 1. Apply Tnemec Series 218 to all prepared surfaces at an average of 1/16" dry film thickness. 2. Allow Series 218 to cure for at least 15 hours at 75 degrees F before applying coating system. E. Coating System • � 1. Apply two (Z) coats of Tnemec Series 22 at 14.0-16.0 mils dry film thickness. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 6 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Kigl�ts Reserved 2. A permanent identification and date of work performed shall be affixed to the structure in a readily visible location. F. Spark testing shall be completed on all manholes and in the presence of an assigned Owner's Inspector. All holidays shall be marked and repaired. All tests will be documented and signed by test engineer and the Inspector. These include original spark tests and spark tests after repair. 1. All tests will be conducted in accordance with the instructions on the test equipment used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Manhole and Precast Box Installation. Manholes and precast boxes shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Protect all work against flooding and flotation. 2. Place base on plug slab as shown on the Drawings. Set base grade so that a maximum grade adjustment of 8-in is required to bring the structure to final grade. • 3. Set precast concrete sections plumb with a 1/4-in maximum out of plumb tolerance allowed. Seal joints of precast sections with either a rubber O-ring set in a recess or preformed flexible joint sealant in sufficient quantity to fill 75 percent of the joint cavity. Fill the outside and inside joint with non-shrink mortar and finish flush with the adjoining surfaces. Caulk the inside of any leaking joints with lead wool or non-shrink grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer. • 4. Plug holes in the concrete sections required for handling with a non-shrink grout or non- shrink grout in combination with concrete plugs. Finish flush on the inside. 5. Cut holes in precast sections to accommodate pipes prior to setting precast sections in place to prevent jarring that may loosen the mortar joints. 6. Backfill carefully and evenly around precast boxes. B. Pipe Connections Construct pipe connections, including pipe stubs, as specified above. Close or seal pipe stubs for future connections with a gasketed watertight plug. 3A2 LEAKAGE TESTS A. Test each liquid-containing manhole for leakage. Engineer shall observe each test. Perform exfiltration test as described below: 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 7 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Assemble manhole in lace• fill and oint all liftin holes and exterior joints within 6-ft of the • P , P g ground surface with an approved non-shrinking mortar. Test prior to placing the shelf and invert and before filling and pointing the horizontal joints below 6-ft of depth. Lower ground water table below bottom of the manhole for the duration of the test. Plug all pipes and other openings into the manhole and brace to prevent blow out. C. Fill manhole with water to the top of the cone section. If the excavation has not been backfilled and no water is observed moving down the surface of the manhole, the manhole is satisfactorily water-tight. If the test, as described above is unsatisfactory as determined by the Engineer, or if the manhole excavation has been backfilled, continue the test. A period of time may be permitted to allow for absorption. Following this period, refill manhole to the top of the cone, if necessary and allow at least 8 hours to pass. At the end of the test period, refill the manhole to the top of the cone again, measuring the volume of water added. Extrapolate the refill amount to a 24-hour leakage rate. The leakage for each manhole shall not exceed one gallon per vertical foot for a 24-hour period. If the manhole fails this requirement, but the leakage does not exceed three gallons per vertical foot per day, repairs by approved methods may be made as directed by the Engineer. If leakage due to a defective section of joint exceeds three gallons per vertical foot per day, the manhole shall be rejected. Uncover the rejected manhole as necessary and to disassemble, reconstruct or replace it as directed by the Engineer. Retest the manhole and, if satisfactory, fill and point the interior joints. D. No adjustment in the leakage allowance will be made for unknown causes such as leaking plugs, absorptions, etc. It will be assumed that all loss of water during the test is a result of leaks through the joints or through the concrete. • E. An infiltration test may be substituted for an exfiltration test if the ground water table �s above the highest joint in the manhole. If there is no leakage into the manhole as determined by the Engineer, the manhole will be considered water-tight. If the Engineer is not satisfied, testing shall be performed as previously described. 3.03 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean all new manholes and precast boxes of all silt, debris and foreign matter of any kind, prior to final inspections. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 02605- 8 � • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Iti�;{�ts Reserved SECTION 02616 DUCTILE 1RON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, install, and test ductile iron yard pipe and fittings for as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Yard piping shall include all buried piping and fittings extending outward, upward and downward into the ground from the outside face of all buildings, structures, or above-grade piping assemblies. Unless otherwise noted, nonburied pipe shall be specified in Division 15. Yard piping shall begin at the first buried joint located outside of the building, structure, or above-grade piping assembly unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Piping shall be located substantially as shown on the Drawings. The ENGINEER reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference between pipes, conduits, utilities or for other reasons. Pipe fitting notation is for the CONTRACTOR's convenience and does not relieve him/her from installing and jointing different or additional items where required to achieve a complete piping system. D. Where the word "pipe" is used it shall refer to pipe, fittings, or appurtenances unless otherwise noted. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Trenching, Bedding and Backfilling for Pipe is included in Section 02221. B. Buried valves and appurtenances are included in Section 02640. C. Above-ground ductile iron pipe is specified in Section 15062. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accardance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data for review. B. Submit copies of design calculations in accordance with Paragraph 2.02 below. C. Submit a tabulated laying schedule which references stations and invert elevations as shown on the Drawings as we}i as all fittings, bends, outlets, restrained joints, tees, special deflection bells, adapters, solid sleeves and specials, along with the MANUFACTURER's drawings and specifications indicating complete details of all items. The laying schedule shall show pipe class, class coding, station limits and transition stations far various pipe classes. The above shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval before manufacture and shipment. The location of all pipes shall conform to the locations indicated on the Drawings. Pipe shall not be supplied from inventory. D. Submit anticipated production and delivery schedule. 6349-79520/ 10/09l2012 02616- l TPA S:�CLWATERIRO 7 Plant Expaisian Projectllasuedto Bid Specs102616.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Prior to shipment of pipe, submit a certified affidavit of compliance from the MANUFACTURER stating that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coatings for this project have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA and ASTM standards and requirements specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 2. ASTM A 194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High-Temperature Service. 3. ASTM CI50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-In Through 48-In for Water and Other Liquids. AWWA C1 l 1- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. AWWA C150 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. AWWA CI51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids. AWWA C153 - Ductile- Iron Compact Fittings, 3-In Through 16-In for Water and Other Liquids. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. AWWA C651 — Disinfecting Water Mains C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each length of ductile iron pipe supplied for the project shall be hydrostatically tested at the point of manufacture to 500 psi for a duration of ] 0 seconds per A W WA C I S l. Testing may be performed prior to machining bell and spigot. Failure of ductile iron pipe shall be defined as any rupture of the pipe wall. Certified test results shall be furnished in duplicate to the ENGINEER prior to time of shipment. B. All ductile-iron pipe and fittings to be instalted under this project shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. Furnish in duplicate to the ENGINEER sworn certificates of such tests and their results prior to the shipment of the pipe. C. All pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant for compliance with this Section by an independent testing laboratory selected by the OWNER at the OWNER's expense. C J • D. Inspection of the pipe and fittings will also be made by the ENGINEER or representative of the OWNER after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the requirements specified herein, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for • identification and shall be removed from the job. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02616-2 TPA S:ICLWATERlR01 Plant Fxpansion Projedllssued to Bid Specs102616.doc • • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. All pipe and fittings shall be permanently marked with the following information: 1. MANUFACTURER, date. 2. Size, type, class, or wall thickness. 3. Standard produced to (AWWA, ASTM, etc). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLtNG A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe. Under no circumstances shall the pipe be dropped or skidded against each other. Slings, hooks, or pipe tongs shall be used in pipe handling. B. Materials, if stored, shall be kept safe from damage. The interior of all pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept free from dirt or foreign matter at all times. C. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its MANUFACTURER. The bottom tier shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, or concrete. Stacking shall conform to MANUFACTURER's recommendations. D. Gaskets for mechanical and push-on joints to be stored shall be placed in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Gaskets shall not come in contact with petroleum products. Gaskets shall be used on a first-in, first-out basis. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe l. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 and ANSI A21.51. Pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths as much as possible. 2. Pipe shall be minimum Class 250. 3. Ductile iron pipe shall be by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc.; American Cast Iron Pipe Company or equal. B. Joints I. Ductile iron pipe shall have rubber-gasket push-on joint, rubber-gasket mechanical joint, ball joints or flanged joints as shown on the Drawings. Rubber-gasket push-on and mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Ball Joint pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 and C 11 Q. Gasket shall conform to A W WA C 111 and shall be EPDM as approved by the Engineer. 2. Restrained joints shall be suitabte for the specified pipe test pressure. All piping shall be provided with restrained joints. a. Joint restraint devices for ductile iron mechanical joint pipe and ductile iron mechanical joint fittings shall be EBAA Iron Sales Series 1 l00 Megalug �, or equal by Star Products Inc. b. Restrained push-on joint pipe and fittings shall be US Pipe and Foundry TR Flex, McWane Inc. Super-Lock, or American Cast Iron Pipe Company Flex Ring_ c. Ball joint pipe shall be American Flex-Lok Boltless Ball Joint Pipe, USIFIex by US Pipe, or equal. 3. Flanged joints shall be as specified in Section 15062. 4. Bolts and nuts shall be ASTM A242 Cort-Ten. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02616-3 TPA S:1ClWATER1R01 Plan[ Expansion RojeWSSUetl to Bitl Specs�02616.tloc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Fittings 1. Pipe fittings shall be ductile iron with pressure rating of 350 psi for 24-in and smaller piping and 250 psi for 30-in and larger piping. Fittings shall meet the requirements of A W WA C110. Fittings shall have the same pressure rating, as a minirr►um, of the connecting pipe. 2. Closures shall be made with mechanica} joint ductile iron solid sleeves and shall be located in straight runs of pipe. Location of closures shall be subject to approval of the ENGINEER. D. Interior Lining 1. Interior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement- mortar lining and asphaltic seal coat applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSl/AW WA C 104. 2. Fittings shall be furnished with a factory-applied fusion-bonded epoxy lining in accordance with AWWA C116. Epoxy lining must have NSF Standard 61 approval. 3. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If the lining is damaged or found faulty at the delivery site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portion shall be repaired in the field in accordance the ANSI/AWWA C]04. E. 2.02 Exterior Coating 1. Buried pipe shall be coated on the exterior with a 1.0 mils thick bituminous coat in accordance with ANSI A21-51 DUCTILE IRON PIPE DESIGN A. Ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with a minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi. Design shall be done for external and internal pressures separately using the Iarger of the two for the net design thickness. Additional allowances shall be made for service allowance and casting tolerance per AWWA C150. The pipe classes determined for various sizes and conditions shall provide the total calculated thickness at a minimum or conform to minimum pipe class specified in Paragraph 2.O1A2 above, whichever is greater. B. Design for the net thickness for external loading shall be taken as the greater of the following conditions: 1. 2-1/2-ft of cover with AASHTO H-20 wheel loads, with an impact factor of }.5. 2. Depth from existing ground level of future proposed grade (whichever is greater) to top of pipe as shown on the Drawings, with truck load. 3. Soil Density: 1201bs/cu ft. 4. Laying Conditions; AWWA C150, Type 2. C. Design for the net thickness shall be based upon the following design internal pressure conditions: 1. Total internal Pressure design: 500 psi (includes 100 psi surge allowance and 2.0 safety factor) 2. Soil Modulus E.: 300 psi D. Copies of design calculations showing that the pipe meets all requirements specified herein shall be furnished to the ENGINEER far approval during shop drawing review in accordance with Section 0] 300. A yield strength of 42,000 psi shall be used during design calculations. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02616-4 TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 Plant F�pansion ProjecNssued to Bid Specs102646.doc • • C J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � A. Care shal] be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe and fittings shall be examined before laying and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired per MANUFACTURER's recommendations. B. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. All buried ductile iron pipe shall be color-coded with a fieid-applied continuous painted stripe (minimum 2-inch wide) running along the crown of the pipe. B. Color shall be as follows: 1. Raw, partially-treated, or recycle - Olive Green 2. Finished or potable water — Dark Blue 3. Spent backwash — Light Brown 4. Sanitary Sewer — Dark Grey 3.03 1NSTALLING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AWWA C600, . except as otherwise specified herein. A firm, even bearing throughout the length of the pipe shall be provided by digging bell holes at each joint and by tamping backfiil materials at the side of the pipe to the springline per details shown on the Drawings. Blocking will not be permitted. B. All pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When laying is not in progress, open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other approved means. Sufficient backfill shall be placed to prevent flotation. The deflection at joints shall not exceed 75 percent of allowable deflection recommended by MANUFACTURER. C. All ductile iron pipe laid underground shall have a minimum of 3-ft of cover unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or as specified herein. Pipe shall be laid such that the invert elevations shown on the Drawings are not exceeded. D. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings shall be provided, where required, in crossing utilities which may be encountered upon opening the trench. Solid sleeve closures shall be installed at locations approved by the ENGINEER. E. The pipe interior shall be maintained dry and broom clean throughout the construction period. F. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be used with a bell shall be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be undamaged. Field cut ends shall be sealed with approved epoxy in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions. Cutting of • restrained joint pipe will not be allowed, unless approved at specific joints in conjunction with the use of restrainer glands by EBAA Iron or field adaptable restrained joints. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 �2 V 1 6—J TPA S:ICLWATERU201 Plant Expansion Rojecttlssued W 2id Specs�02616.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. Jointing Ductile-Iron Pipe • 1. Push-on joints shall be made in strict accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions and AWWA C600. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe. The joint surfaces shall be cleaned and lubricated and the plain end of the pipe shall be aligned with the bell of the pipe to which it is to be joined and pushed home. 2. Mechanical joints shall be assembled in strict accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions and AWWA C600. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. To assemble the joints in the field, thoroughly clean and lubricate the joint surfaces and rubber gasket. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified torques. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench be used to secure greater leverage. 3. Bolts in mechanical or restrained joints shall be tightened alternately and evenly. 4. Restrained joints shall be installed according to pipe MANUFACTURER's instructions. H. All blow-offs, outlets, valves, fittings, and other appurtenances required shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions. 3.04 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURES A. Wall pipes shall have a thrust collar located at mid-depth of wall. B. Piping underneath structures shall be concrete encased. 3.05 TESTING A. After installation, the pipe shall be tested for compliance as specified herein. Furnish all • necessary equipment and labor for the pressure test and leakage test on the pipelines. B. Submit detailed test procedures and method for ENGINEER's review. In general, testing shall be conducted in accordance with AWWA C600. C. Ductile iron piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure as indicated in Section 01445.i. This test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of 2 hours. The leakage rate shall not exceed those indicated in AWWA C600. Provide suitable restrained bulkheads as reyuired to complete the hydrostatic testing specified. D. All valves and valve boxes shall be properly located and installed and operable prior to testing. Bulkheads shall be provided with a sufficient number of outlets for filling and draining the line and for venting air. E. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests shall conform with Section 4 of A W WA C600. Furnish gauges, meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to fill the line slowly and perform the required hydrostatic pressure leakage tests. F. The line shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a pump furnished by the CONTRACTOR. Provide accurate means for measuring the quantity of water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage. G. Submit plan for testing to the ENGINEER for review at least 10 days before starting the test. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02616-6 TPA S:\CLWATER1R01 PIaM Exparrsion ProjecNlssued ro&d Specs�02616.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 3.06 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION • � A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, or other material which may have entered during the construction period. All debris shall be removed from the pipeline. The lowest segment outlet shall be flushed last to assure debris removal. B. Disinfection and Flushing: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for flushing all piping and process equipment prior to startup in accordance with AWWA G651. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any temporary systems required to complete the disinfection and flushing procedures and shall be responsible for the disposal of all produced streams. Disposal of al1 produced streams shall be in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. The ultimate disposal location shall be approved by both the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Testing, sampling, and analytical requirements shall be as mandated by the applicable regulatory agencies and permit requirements. All costs of testing, sampling, and analysis shall be the Contractor's responsibility. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 �26 I 6— / TPA S�CLWA7ER�R01 PIaM Evpansion AojeclUssued to Bid Specs\02616.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) r� L_J � 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 026 l 6-8 TPA S:ICLWATEPoR01 Plant Expansion ProjectUSSUeO [o Bid SpecsW2616.doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � PART 1 — GENERAL 1:O1 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 02620 DOUBLE WALL CHEMICAL PIPE SYSTEM A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install buried, double walled PVC plastic piping and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork and fill materials are included in Division 2. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data including the following: 1. Shop drawings including piping layouts and schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include dimensioning, fittings, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. 2. Shop drawing submittals for piping under this Section shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems. All dimensions shall be based on the actual • equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layout for each piping submittal. • 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds 2. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120 3. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 4. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for PVC Plastic Piping Systems 5. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings B. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1. PPI Technical Report TR31 - Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All double walled plastic pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is experienced in the manufacture of the items to be furnished; however, it shall not be a requirement that the pipe and fittings be manufactured by the same manufacturer, provided that the pipe and fittings are compatible in both compounding and size. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall be suitable for the intended service. 6349-79520/ I 0/9/2012 �G VG�� 1 TPA \1Tpa5vr01lSec\CLWA7ER\RO 1 PIaM Expansion PfojeCl�lssued [o Btl SpeCb�D%20.COc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Double walled piping systems shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings. B. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of plastic pipe and fittings for use in conveying chemicals. C. Double walled piping systems shall be designed far the following chemical system: System: Carrier Pipe and Fittings Material: Containment Pipe and Fittings Material Fluid: Pressure: Flow Velocity: Temperature: Special Conditions: PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PRIMARY CARRIER PIPE AND FITTINGS Chemical Feed Schedule 80 PVC Schedule 80 PVC Sodium Hypochlorite Atmosphere to ] 00 psig 0.5 to 7 fps 26 to ] 00 degrees F Hydraulically actuated diaphragm pumps A. Pipe and Fittings — PVC 1. Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B in accordance with ASTM D1785, PVC l 120. The pipe shall have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2,000 psi at 73 degrees F and shall be suitable for field cutting and solvent welding. Pipe shall be of the sizes as shown on the Drawings and shall be Schedule 80 PVC with solvent welded joints, unless otherwise shown. Paint or shield pipe exposed to solar heating to protect from UV exposure. 2. Fittings shall be the socket type for solvent welded joints conforming to ASTM D2467. Fittings shall be manufactured from PVC compound meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. Solvent cement shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. 3. Proper assembly of PVC pipe for use with hypochlorite requires the use of cement that is specially formulated for this service. For PVC piping, the cement should be specified as Oatey Industrial Grade Low VOC Heavy Duty Gray, by Oatey Corp., Cleveland OH. 4. Pipe, fittings and solvent for use with potable water shall be certified by NSF in accordance with NSF Standard No. 14 and the seal shall be included on the pipe. 2.02 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATING A. All PVC piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be shop painted as specified in Section 09902. Surface preparation and shop priming are a part of the work of this Section. Field finish painting is also included in Section 09902. Assist as required in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else reyuired for proper finish painting and marking of pipe. 6349-7952Q/ l 0/9/2012 02620-2 TPA �1TpasvrOrisec�CLWATERV201 PIaM F�pansion Projeclllswetl to Bitl Specs102620 tloc u • • �O ZO12 CDM Smith A I� R i�;�t� Reserved • 2.0 ti SECONDARY CONTAINMENT PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Containment pipe size shall be based on the size of the primary carrier pipe as follows: Carrier Pipe Containment Pipe Diameter Diameter 0.5-in 2-in B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Secondary Containment Pipe l. Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. The pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1785, PVC 1120. The pipe shall have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2000 psi at 73 degrees F and shall be suitable for field cutting and solvent welding. Pipe shall be of the sizes indicated above and shali be Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown. Solvent cement shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. 2. PVC containment pipe shall be used to encase buried carrier piping for chemical systems as defined in Paragraph 1.06 above and as shown on the Drawings. C. PVC Secondary Containment Fittings 1. Containment pipe fittings for all buried chemical piping systems shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. PART 3 — EXECUTION • 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE WALLED CHEMICAL PIPE SYSTEM A. Double walled PVC chemical pipe systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's technical data, printed instructions and field instruction. B. Pipe spacers shall be attached to the carrier pipe every 3-ft prior to the installation on the containment piping. The spacers shali be designed to permit the carrier and containment pipes to expand and contract without stress or wear on the pipes as well as provide for drainage and free air circulation. Lay out the system, cut and dry fit the carrier piping, then place the containment pipe over the carrier pipe before joining. The containment pipe must be installed over the carrier pipe as the system is being assembled. Prior to solvent welding of the containment pipe and installation of the fittings, the carrier pipe system shall be hydrostatically tested as detailed in Paragraph 3.02 below. C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. D. Bedding and backfill of pipe shall be in accordance with Section 02221. Generally the compaction shall be done evenly on each side of the pipe and compaction equipment shall not be operated directly over the pipe until sufficient backfill has been placed to ensure that such compaction equipment will not have a damaging effect on the pipe. Equipment used for the backfill compaction shall be approved by the pipe manufacturer's representative prior to use. • E. All pipe shall be sound and clean before installation. When installation is not in progress, including lunchtime, the open ends of the double walled chemical pipe systems shall be closed by watertight plug or other approved means. Good alignment shall be preserved during installation. 6349-79520/ l 0/9/2012 02620-3 TPA N7pasvr011seciCLWATERY20 1 Plant E�parwbn Prqeclllssued to Bid Specs102620 doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided, if required, in crossing . utilities which may be encountered upon opening the trench. F. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. G. Joints for PVC pipe shall be solvent welded. In making solvent welded connections, clean dirt and moisture from the pipe, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth to remove any shoulder or burrs created by the cutting of the pipe. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM. Primer shall be used whenever recommended by the pipe manufacturer and in all cases for joints on the pipe systems 4-in in diameter or larger. H. Precautions shall be taken to prevent flotation ofthe pipe in the trench. 1. Where plastic pipe passes through wall sleeves, the space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a mechanical sealing. J. Buried chemical piping shall slope from their high point to one or more terminal points to allow any chemical leak to be detected. The terminal ends of the pipe shall be equipped with end seals consisting of a bulkhead plate of the same material as the pipes, solvent welded to the containment and carrier pipes. As a means of checking for and draining chemical leaks in the pipes, end seals shall be equipped with drain and vent openings with ball valves located diametrically opposite on the vertical centerline of the plate. 3.02 FIELD TESTING • A. All pipelines shall remain undisturbed for the minimum curing or cooling time specified for each type of pipe material but no less than 8 hours to develop full curing and complete strength at al1 joints. All pipe systems shall be flushed clean and then subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 12 hours at a test pressure and temperature specified below. Should the temperature not be attainable under hydrostatic conditions, then the test may be performed under hydradynamic conditions, if accurate measurements for loss of the test fluid can be made, or the pressure shall be proportionally increased to simulate the stresses of the higher temperature in relation to the lowest system temperature expected during the duration of the test. The proportionally higher test pressures shall be determined in accordance with the accepted temperature versus strength properties as published by the pipe manufacturer, PPI or other pipe material standards organization. B. The test pressures and temperatures for the various pipelines shalt be as follows: 1. Chemical feed piping: 150 psi at ] 00 degrees F. 2. Drain piping: I S psi at ambient temperature 3. Vent piping: 1 S psi at ambient temperature C. The test shall be performed by slowly filling the piping system, expelling entrapped air from all high points. The fill rate shall be controlled so that the fluid velocity within the pipe system is less than 2 fps. Upon completion of the filling process, the system shall be brought up to the specified test temperature as applicable, holding the system pressure to less than ] 0 percent of the test pressure. Once the system has been stabilized at the specified test temperature, the pipe should be slowly brought up to the test pressure in such a manner so as to not create shock, surge or water hammer in the pipe system. The test duration time limit shall not begin until the full pressure • specified above has been reached and the system has been stabilized to within 5 percent of the test temperature. The system pressure and temperature shall be maintained to within 1/2 percent but 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 0262O�4TPA UTpaSVNilteCICLWATER�RO 1 Plant Ekp2nsion ProjecAUSSUed M Bid SpecS102620 Eoe CO 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��hts Reserved � no more than 5 percent of the specified value for the temperature and within 5 psi of the specified value far the pressure. These tolerances shall be held for the entire duration of the test. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shali be slowly removed by opening a valve or other pressure relieving device at a location remote to the location of the pressure/temperature monitoring equipment. D. The pressure test shall be monitored by a recording type pressure gauge for tests not requiring temperature control ar a dua) pen pressure/temperature recording gauge when temperature control is required. The entire test process shall be recorded, including the initial temperature stabilization and pressurization of the piping system. The record shall be continuous through the system test and shall show the fina] de-pressurization of the pipe system. E. All leaks detected during the pressure test shall be repaired and the pressure/ temperature test rerun. A successful test shall be a test in which no leaks are detected and the pipe system pressure can be maintained within 1/2 percent. F. Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during the tests. G. After testing of the carrier pipe, the containment fittings shall be installed and the containment system shall be tested pneumatically at 5 psig far a duration of two hours prior to backfilling. All containment piping joints shall be checked for leaks by applying a soapy solution to the joints. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor to perform the air test, including air compressor, gauges, conduit caps, temporary pipe and connections, etc, and complete the test to the satisfaction . of the Engineer. • H. After backfilling is completed, a 5 psig air test of the containment pipe shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.03 PAINTING A. All PVC pipe and fittings exposed to the direct sunlight shall be field painted to provide additional UV protection. This painting shall be required whether marking is required or not and shall be in accordance with Section 09902. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 OG6GO—S TPA �1Tpasvr0l�sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant 6cpansbn Prqectllssuetl to Bitl Specs�02620.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) C� • 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 OZ6GO�6 TPA \\Tpasvr0l�seclCLWATER\RO 1 Plan[ E�ansbn PrqecRksueA to Bitl Specs�02620.doc • C � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02622 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE PART]-GENERAL l .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) yard piping, concentrate pipeline and sanitary sewer complete, tested, and ready for use, as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Yard piping shall begin at the first buried joint outside of buildings, structures, or above-gound piping assemblies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents will include, but not be limited to, the following related requirements: l. Above-ground plastic pipe and fittings are included in Section 15064. 2. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings are specified in Section 02616. 3. Trenching, Bedding and Backfill for Pipe are included in Section 02221. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, within twenty (20) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, a list of materials to be furnished, and the names of the suppliers and the date of delivery of materials to the site. B. Submit shop drawings to the ENGiNEER for review in accordance with Section O] 300, showing the complete laying plan of all pipe, including all fittings, adapters, valves, and specials along with the MANUFACTURER's drawings and specifications indicating complete details of all items. The pipe details shall include a pipe class laying schedule which specifies pipe class, class coding, joints, station limits, and transition stations, and a list of abbreviated terms with their full meaning. The CONTRACTOR shall provide details of fittings to be furnished. The above shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval before fabrication and shipment of these items. The ]ocations of all pipes shall conform to the locations indicated on the Drawings. In most cases, a certain amount of flexibility in the positioning of pipes will be allowed. Horizontal and vertical deflections may require beveled, special deflection; or short pipes. The deflections at joints shall not exceed 75 percent of that recommended by the MANLJFACTURER. C. Furnish in duplicate to the ENGINEER, prior to each shipment of pipe, submit MANLJFACTURERs certification and certified test reports that the pipe and linings and coating for this contract was manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM and ANSI/AWWA Standards specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride} (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �2622-1 TPA \lTpasvNllsec\CLWATER�RO 1 PIaM Fapansion ProjecNssued to Bid Spece\02622.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Q 7. 8. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, • Schedules 40, 80, and 120. ASTM D244? - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Socket - Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D2657 - Standard Practice for Heat-Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent - Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. 10. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket - Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ] l. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 12. ASTM F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. l3. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 14. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. 15. ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. • B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA Cl 10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-in through 48-in for Water and Other Liquids. 2. AWWA C] 1]- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-lron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. 4. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 5. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-in through 12-in for Water. 6. AWA C905 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, nominal diameter l4-in through 36-in. C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shalt apply. ] .OS QUALIFICATIONS A. All polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall be furnished by MANLJFACTURERs who are fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the material to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shalt comply with these Specifications. • 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �2622-2 TPA \lTpasvAtlsec�C�WATERV20/ Plant Ezpension ProjeUUSSUed to Bid Spe�b2622.doc • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ali PVC pipe shall be from a single MANUFACTURER. All PVC pipe to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the factory for compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory provided by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall require the MANL7FACTURER's cooperation in these inspections. The cost of factory inspection of a]I pipe approved for this contract, will be borne by the OWNER. B. Inspection of the pipe will also be made by the ENGINEER or other representatives of the OWNER after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even though pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall immediately be removed from the job. ].07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Care shall be taken in shipping, handling and laying to avoid damaging the pipe and fittings_ Extra care will be necessary during cold weather construction. Any pipe damaged in shipment shall be replaced as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Any pipe or fitting showing a crack ar which has received a blow that may have caused an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen, shall be marked as rejected and removed at once from the work. • C. While stared, pipe shall be adequately supported from below at not more than 3-ft intervals to prevent deformation. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than 6-ft. Pipe and fittings shall be stored in a manner which will keep them at ambient outdoor temperatures. Temporary shading as required to meet this requirement shall be provided. Simple covering of the pipe and fittings which allows temperature buildup when exposed to direct sunlight will not be permitted. Pipe covering shall be in conformance with the MANUFACTURER's recommendations. D. Pipe and fittings shall be stored in a manner which will keep them at ambient outdoor temperatures and out of the sunlight or delivered to the site so that no pipe is exposed to sunlight for more than 60 days. 1.08 TOOLS A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 1.09 CONNECTION TO EXISTING LINES A. Lines installed under other Contracts, to which piping of this Contract must connect, the following work shall be performed: I. Removing the temporary or permanent plug provided in the pipe installed under another Contract (if any). 2. Furnishing and installing piping and accessories and making proper connections. • B. For connections to the existing lines to which the piping of this Contract must connect, the following wark shall be perforrned: 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 02622-3 TPA \1Tpasvr01G5ec1CLWATER1R01 Poam Expansion Projectllssued [o &d Spe¢102622.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith Ali Rights Reserved 1. Exposed buried lines to confirm or determine end connection, pipe material, and diameter. . 2. Furnish and install appropriate piping and make proper connections. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 MATERIALS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Class-Rated): 1. PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4"-l2") in diameter, where shown on the Drawings or as specified, shall meet the requirements of AWWA Specification C-900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe" and AWWA C-905 for PVC pipe from fourteen to twenry-four inches (l4"-24") in diameter. Pipe shall be Class I50, meeting reyuirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 and shall be designed with cast iron outside diameters and far a test pressure as specified in Section O1445. Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the MANUFACTURER in accordance with AWWA C 900 and C 905. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Labaratories. Provisions shall be made far expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. PVC Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specification LJNl-B-3-76, and as recommended by the MANUFACTURER. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Pipe and accessories shall bear the NSF inark indicating pipe size, MANUFACTURER's name, AWWA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure, and production code. Pipe shall be made from Class 12454-A or Class ] 2454-B virgin compound, as designed in ASTM D 1784. PVC pipe three inches (3") in diameter or less shall be Schedule 40. • B. Joints: l. The PVC line joints for below ground piping three to twenty-four inches (3"-24") in diameter shall be of the push-on type approved by the ENGINEER so that the pipe and fittings may be connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special equipment. The push-on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe and the forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal expansion or contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75°F in each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which shall meet requirements of ASTM D] 869. The thickened bell section shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth of bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or pipe material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water and shall be approved by the MANUFACTURER. 2. PVC joints for pipe three inches (3") in diameter or less, shall be threaded or solvent welded joints where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Teflon thread tape or liyuid teflon thread lubricant shall be used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant. Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is hand tight a strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1-2) additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings. • 6349-79520/10/9/2012 02622-4 TPA\\TpasvNt�seclCLWATERUiOtPlarrtExpansionPmjedVSSUedroBidSpecs\U2622.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Fittings: 1. All fittings for pressure mains for below ground piping of four to twenty-four inches (4"-24") in diameter shall be ductile iron with mechanical joints and shall conform to AWWA/ANSI specifications CI 10/A21.10 for ductile iron fittings and Section 02616, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or approved by the ENGINEER. 2. Fittings for PVC pipe three inches (3") in diameter or less, shalt be threaded or solvent weld and be PVC as shown on the Drawings, ar as approved by the ENGINEER. Threaded PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM Specification D 2464. 3. The MANLJFACTURER of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride accessories as well as any adaptars and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Standard double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe wil] slip completely through the coupling. D. Restrained Joints: All pressure pipe shall be restrained. Restraint for PVC water mains shall be EBAA Iron, Inc., Megalug Retainer Glands, Series 1600 and 2000 PV (4-inch through 12-inch sizes) and Series 2800 and 2000 PV (]4-inch through 24-inch sizes) or equal. After installation, apply a heavy bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts and accessories. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the name of the MANUFACTURER, size, and class. All gaskets shall be marked with the name of the MANUFACTURER, size, and proper insertion directions. A co}or sample of the PVC pipe and fittings shall be submitted to the � ENGINEER for approval prior to fabrication of any pipe and accessories. B. All buried PVC pipe shall be colar-coded with a field-applied continuous painted stripe (minimum 2-inch wide) running along the crown of the pipe. C. Colar shall be as follows: l. Raw, partially-treated, or recycle — Olive Green 2. Finished or potable water — Dark Blue 3. Spent backwash — Light Brown 4. Sanitary sewer — Dark Grey D. Tracer wire shall be furnished and installed with all buried PVC piping. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All PVC pipe shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the pipe MANUFACTURER and as specified herein. B. Care shall be taken in the handling, storage, and installation of pipe and fittings to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. All pipe and fittings shall be examined before installing, and no pipe shall be installed which is found to be defective. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. All damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired according to the MANUFACTURER's recommendations. • C. All pipe and fittings shall be kept clean and shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �2622-5 TPA \ITpasvr0flsedCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Ezpansion Projedlhsued to Bid Specs102622.doe �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with bedding and backfill as • shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 02221. Blocking under the pipe will not be permitted. E. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and when laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with reyuirements of AWWA Standard Specification C600. lf any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner by CONTRACTOR, at his own expense. F. When installation is not in progress, including lunchtime, or the potential exists for dirt of debris to enter the pipe, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed with watertight plugs or other approved means. G. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench. H. All plugs, caps, bends and other locations where unbalanced farces exist shall be anchored by restrained joints. I. In all cases where PVC pipe is installed, a detectable tracer wire shall be installed with the pipe in accordance with Section 02221. J. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be jointed with a bell shall be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. • K. Maintain a minimum finish grade cover of 36-inches, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER or shown on the Drawings. 3.02 PUSH-ON JOINTS A. Push-on joints shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The plain end of the pipe to be laid shall then be aligned and inserted in the bell of the pipe to which it is to be joined, and pushed home with a jack or by other means. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the rubber gasket is correctly located. 3.03 MECHANICAL JOINTS A. Mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA Cl l 1 and the MANUFACTURER's instructions. Thoroughly clean and lubricate the joint surfaces and rubber gasket with soapy water before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified toryues using a calibrated torque wrench. Under no conditions shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench be used to secure greater leverage. u 6349-79520/10/9/2012 02622-6 TPA1lTpasvNl\sec\CLWATER\RO7RaMEnpansionRojedUSSUedtoBidSpec5102671.tloc • � • c0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith Al! Ri�hts Reserved 3.04 1� LANGED JOINTS A. Flanged joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. Extreme care shall be exercised to insure that there is no restraint on opposite ends of pipe or fitting which will prevent uniform gasket compression, cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to flanges or flanged fittings. Adjoining push-on joints shall not be assembled until flanged joints have been tightened. Bolts shall be tightened alternately and evenly. After installation apply a bitumastic coating to bolts and nuts. � 3.05 RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Restrained joints shall be installed for all pressure pipelines The joint assemblies shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's recommendations. After installation, apply a heavy bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts and accessories.,. 3.06 TESTING FOR PRESSURE MAINS A. Ali pressure mains shall be field tested. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests shall conform with Section 4 ofAWWA C600 Specification with the exception that the CONTRACTOR shall furnish at} gauges, meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to test the line. B. The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be as specified in Section O1445 unless otherwise noted. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Fill line slowly with water. Maintain flow velocity of less than 2A feet per second. Corporation cocks at least 2-inches in diameter, pipe riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line. Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours. The cost of these items shall be included as a part of testing. C. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with AWWA C600 Standards for all pressure. No pipe installation shall be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: L = SD P '�Z 133,200 In which L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested, in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. D. The CONTRACTOR must submit his plan for testing to the ENGINEER for review at least ten (] 0) days before starting the test. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Any damage to the pipe coating shatl be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance. 3.07 TESTING FOR GRAVITY PIPE A. All PVC gravity pipe shall be field tested for leakage in accordance with Technical Specification, Section IV, paragraph 20.4.1. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �G VZG— / TPA \1TpesvNl�sec\CLWATER1R01 PYeM Eupaireion ProjectVssued to Bid Specs\02622.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.08 CLEANING AND D1SiNFECTION A. At the conclusion of the work the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all of the new pipelines by pigging to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, ar other material which may have entered during the construction period. Debris cleaned from the lines shall be removed from the job site. ]f, after this cleaning, any obstructions remain, they shall be removed. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, etc., as required to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. B. Disinfection and Flushing: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for flushing a}I piping and process equipment prior to startup in accordance with AWWA C-651. The CONTRACTOR shall provide any temporary systems required to complete the disinfection and flushing procedures and shall be responsible for the disposal of all produced streams. Disposal of all produced streams shall be in accardance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. The ultimate disposa] location shall be approved by both the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Testing, sampling, and analytical requirements shall be as mandated by the applicable regulatory agencies and permit requirements. All costs of testing, sampling, and analysis shall be the Contractor's responsibility. C. After the pipelines are cleaned and if the goundwater level is above the pipe, or following a heavy rain, the ENGINEER will examine the pipe for leaks. If defective pipes or joints are discovered at this time, they shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/9/2012 �2622-0 TPANTpasvNt�sec\CLWATERU201PIantExpansianProjectUssuedtoBidSpecs\02622.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rigl��ts Reserved • SECTION 02640 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and provide all buried valves and appurtenances complete with actuators and all accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Valves specifically excluded from this Section are as follows: 1. All above-ground valves and valves exposed in vaults. 2. All valves for plumbing work. 3. Ail valves for heating and ventilation work. 4. All valves for fuel oil piping. 5. All chlorine gas valves. 6. All valves specifically included with equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavation, backfitl, fill and grading are included in Section 02220. • B. Interior and above-ground process valves and appurtenances are in included in Section 15100. C. Electric valve actuators are included in Division 15. D. Electrical work is included in Division l6. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, materials required to establish compliance with this Section for shop drawings. Submittals shall include the following: l. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including: a. Dimensions. b. Size. c. Materials of construction. d. Weight. e. Protection coating. f. Actuator weight. g. Calculations for actuator toryue where applicable. h. Wiring diagram including: l ) Ladder diagrams. 2) Point-to-point wiring. B. Test Reports 1. Four copies of all certified shop test results specified herein. • C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals l. Submit complete operation and maintenance manuals including copies of all approved Shop Drawings. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-1 TPA S:ICLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion Projec111ssued to &d Specs\02640.tlocx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Certificates . 1. Certificates of compliance where required by referenced standards: For each valve specified to be manufactured and/or installed in accordance with AWWA and other standards, submit an affidavit of compliance with the appropriate standards, including certified results of required tests and certification of proper installation. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) l. AWWA Cl I 1- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 3. AWWA C502 - Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants. 4. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 5. A W WA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 6. AWWA C515 - Reduced Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 7. AWWA C517 — Resilient-Seated Cast Iron Eccentric Plug Valves 8. AWWA C800 — Underground Service Lines and Fittings C. American National Standards lnstitute (ANSI) l. ANSI B16.1 — Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. ASTM International 1. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray lron Castings. • 2. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings 3. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. E. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)\ 1. SSPC SP-6 - Joint Surface Standard Commercial Blast Cleaning F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Valves and appurtenances provided under this Section shall be the standard product in regular production by manufacturers whose products have proven reliable in similar service for at least 10 years. If required, the manufacturer shall furnish evidence of installation in satisfactory operation. 2. All units of the same type shalt be the product of one manufacturer. B. Design Criteria 1. All valves and appurtenances shall be new and in perfect working condition. Valves shall be designed for continuous use with a minimum of maintenance and service required and shall perform the required function without exceeding the safe limits for stress, strain or vibration. • In no case will used or damaged valves be acceptable. The selection of equipment to meet the specified design conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor. Both workmanship and 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-2 TPA S:ICLWATEFi1R01 Plant F�cpansion Prqectllssued lo Bid Speca102640.docz i • • Oc 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved material shall be of the very best quality and shall be entirely suitable for the service conditions specified. C. Source Quality Control I. Valves shali be shop tested in accordance with the following: a. Meta1-seated gate valves: AWWA C500. b. Rubber-seated butterfly valves: AWWA C504. c. Resilient-seated gate valves: AWWA C509. d. Reduced-wall, resilient-seated gate valves: AWWA C515. 2. Obtain each type of valve from no more than one manufacturer. 3. Plug valves shall be hydrostatically tested for 30 minutes at two times the maximum working pressure, with no evidence of distress, (eakage or weeping. Plug valves shall be capable of providing drop-tight shut-off up to the full pressure rating. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Protect threads and seats from corrosion and damage. Rising stems and exposed stem valves shall be coated with a protective oil film which shall be maintained until time of use. C. Furnish covers for all openings. 1. All valves 3-in and larger shall be shipped and stored on site until time of use with wood or plywood covers on each valve end. 2. All valves smaller than 3-in shall be shipped and stored as above except that heavy card board covers may be furnished instead of wood. D. Store equipment to permit easy access for inspection and identification_ Any corrosion in evidence at the time of Owner acceptance shall be removed, or the valve shall be removed from the job. E. Store all equipment in covered storage off the ground. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate with the work which is related to this Section including buried piping installation, site utilities, piping insulation, heating, ventilating and air conditioning, plumbing and chemical feed facilities. B. Coordinate the location and placement of concrete thrust blocks when reqaired. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All buried valves shall open counter-clockwise. B. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. C. Valves shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible equipment of the same type shall be identical and from one manufacturer. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-3 TPA S:IGLWA7ERV201 Plan[ F�pansion Projeclllssuetl ro eitl Specs102640.tlocx � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Valves shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure • for which they are designed and standard to which they are manufactured cast in raised letters on some appropriate part of the body. E. Unless otherwise noted, valves shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or be of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher, and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. F. Valves shall be of the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings they are connected to. Except as otherwise noted, joints shall be mechanical joints, with joint restraint where the adjacent piping is required to be restrained. G. Valves shall be especialiy constructed for buried service. H. Valve actuators shall be as specified in Section 15100. 2.02 VALVE BOXES A. All gate, butterfly and plug valves shall be provided with extension shafts, operating nuts and valve boxes as follows: 1. Extension shafts shall be carbon steel and the operating nut shall be 2-in square. Shafts shall be designed to provide a factor of safety of not less than four. Operating nuts shall be pinned to the shafts. 2. Top of the operating nut shall be located 2-in below the rim of the valve box. 3. Valve boxes shall be as manufactured by Clow, Mueller, Tyler or equal and shall be a heavy-pattern cast iron, three-piece, telescoping type box with dome base suitable for • installation on the buried valves. Inside diameter shall be at least 4-1/2-in. Barrel length shall be adapted to the depth of cover, with a lap of at least 6-inwhen in the most extended position. Covers shall be cast iron with integrally-cast direction-to- open arrow, and the word "WATER" shall also be integrally cast. Aluminum or plastic are not acceptable. A means of lateral support for the valve extension shafts shall be provided in the top portion of the valve box. 4. The upper section of each box shall have a top flange of sufficient bearing area to prevent settling. The bottom of the lower section shall enclose the stuffing box and operating nut of the valve and shall be oval. 5. All fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.03 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES A. Valves 3-in through 36-in sha11 be non-rising stem type and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C509 and as specified herein. Valves shall be manufactured by American, M&H, Kennedy, or McWane No others shall be accepted. B. Valve body shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron with fusion bonded epoxy coating. C. Valves shall be provided with a minimum oftwo O-ring stem seals. D. Bonnet and gland bolts and nuts shall be either ASTM A 126, Class B. All ferrous surface inside and out shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. The hot-dip process in accardance with ASTM A153 is not acceptable. Allen-wrench type bonnet and gland fastening shall not be acceptable and will be rejected. • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 02640-4 TPASICLWATERIRO1RanIF�cpansionPrqectllssuedto8i0Specs\OZ6l0.AOCY �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • E. Wedges shall be constructed of ASTM A536 ductile iron and totally encapsulated in vulcanized EPDM. F. The word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating direction to open shall be cast on each valve body or operator. G. Operating nut for all gate valves shall be 2-in square. H. Extension stems shall be fabricated from solid steel. Stems sha11 not be smaller in diameter than the valve stem. Equip stem with wrench nut. Ensure all stem connections are pinned. I. Thrust collars and stems shall be integrally cast (not pinned on) and shall feature copper alloy valve stems. J. Buried valves shall have mechanica) joint ends compliant with A W WA C 1 11 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. K. Gearing shall be required for gate valves 14-in diameter and larger, and shall be in accardance with AWWA C509 Part 4.4.9. 2.04 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES A. Tapping sleeves shal} be of ductile iron, designated for working pressure not less than 200 psi. Armored end gaskets sha11 be provided for the full area of the sleeve flanges. Sleeves shall be as • manufactured by Kennedy, M&H, or Clow. Nuts and bolts shall be ASTM A 126, Class B. All ferrous surface inside and out shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. B. Tapping valves shall conform to the requirements specified above for gate valves except that one end shall be flanged and one mechanical. Tapping valves shall be provided with an oversized opening to permit the use of full size cutters. 2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Valves shall be manufactured in strict accordance with AW WA C504. Valves shall be bubble tight at rated pressures. Valve discs shall rotate 90 degrees from full closed to open. Buried gear actuators shall be assembled to the valve by the valve manufacturer. The valve/operator shall be tested as a complete assembly by the valve manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have produced AW WA butterfly valves for a minimum of 5 years. B. Valve bodies shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B and have a fusion bonded epoxy coating. Buried valves shall be mechanical joint end conforming to ANSI C111, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Valve discs for 12-inch and smaller valves shall be Type 316 stainless steei. D. Rubber valve seats shall be EPDM and mounted to the valve body. For 20-inch and smaller valves, the EPDM seat shall fully line the interior of the valve. E. Valve shafts shall be Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A276 and shall be of a diameter not less than those listed in AWWA C504, Class ISOB. . F. Shaft seals shall be furnished where the shaft projects thru the valve body. Shaft seals shall be standard split-v type packing or of an O-ring design. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-5 TPA S1ClWATER�R01 Poant Expansbn ProjectUswed [o BiA Specs102640.doac c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. Valves shall be fitted with sleeve e bearin s contained in the trunions ofthe valve bod . • tYP g Y Bearing material shall be nylon for valves thru 20-in and fiberglass with teflon lining for valves 24-in and larger. H. Valve manufacturer shall furnish and mount operator suitable for buried service. Operators shall be self-locking and suitable for submergence to 20-ft. A 2-in square operating nut shall be furnished. Operator stops shall be capable of withstanding an input of 450 ft-ibs. I. All valves shall be hydrostatically and leak tested. J. Valve class shall be A W WA Class 150B with operators sized for bi-directional flow. K. Butterfly valves for buried applications shall be manufactured by Pratt or DeZurik. No others shall be accepted. 2.06 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT A. Flexible expansion joints shall be Flex Tend Double Ball mode1416F20 by EBAA iron.. No substitutions will be permitted. 2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. The interior ferrous metal surfaces, except finished or bearing surfaces, shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP- ] 0 and painted with two coats of an approved two-component epoxy • coating specifically formulated for potable water use. The coating shall be NSF certified to Standard 61. B. Exterior ferrous metal surfaces of all buried valves and hydrants shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-6 and given two shop coats of an approved two-component coal tar epoxy paint. C. Exterior ferrous metal surfaces of all non-buried valves shall be shop painted with one coat of primer in accordance with the requirements of Section 15100. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. During installation of all valves and appurtenances, verify that all items are clean, free of defects in material and workmanship and function properly. B. All valves shall be closed and kept closed until otherwise directed by the Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BURIED VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Buried valves shall be cleaned and manually operated before installation. Buried valves and valve boxes shall be set with the stem vertically aligned in the center of the valve box. Valves shal} be set on a firm foundation and supported by tamping pipe bedding material under the sides of the valve. The valve box shall be supported during backfilling and maintained in vertical • alignment with the top flush with finish grade. The valve box shall be set so as not to transmit traffic loads to the valve. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-6 TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 Plant Ezpansion ProjectUSSUed to Bid Specs\02640.tlocx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . B. Before backfilling, all exposed portions of any boits shall be coated with two coats of bituminous paint. C. Install valve floor stand operators with stainless steel bolts. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. The proper authority shall be contacted and their permission granted prior to tapping a"live" line. The required procedures and time table shall be followed exactly. B. Installation shall be made under pressure and flow shall be maintained. The diameters of the tap shall be not less than 1/4-in less than the inside diameter of the branch line. C. The entire operation shall be conducted by workers experienced in the installation of tapping sleeves and valves. The tapping machine shall be furnished by the Contractor. D. Determine the location of the line to be tapped to confirm that the proposed location will be satisfactory and that no interference will be encountered such as joints or fittings. No tap or sleeve will be made closer than three feet from a pipe joint. E. Tapping sleeve and valve with boxes shall be set squarely centered on the line to be tapped. Adequate support sha11 be provided under the sleeve and valve during the tapping operation. Thrust blocks or other permanent restraint acceptable to the Engineer shall be provided behind all • tapping sleeves. Proper tamping of supporting pipe bedding material around and under the valve and sleeve is mandatory for buried installations. F. After completing the tap, the valve shall be flushed to ensure that the valve seat is clean. All proper regulatory procedures (including disinfection) sha11 be followed exactly. 3.04 FIELD TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS q. Conduct a functional field test of each valve, including actuators and valve control equipment, in presence of Engineer to demonstrate that each part and all components together function correctly. All testing equipment required shall be furnished by the Contractor. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the tapping equipment manufacturer to provide on-site instruction during wet tapping of the existing water mains indicated on the Drawings. B. Following installation of the butterfly valves, furnish the services of a qualified, factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the respective valves, to check the installations before they are placed in operation, supervise initial operations and testing in the presence of the Engineer, instruct the plant personnel in care and maintenance of the equipment, and make all necessary field adjustments. A minimum of [8]-hour days, which may not necessarily be consecutive, shall be provided for these services. In the event of trouble with the equipment, the representative of the respective manufacturer shall revisit the site as often as necessary until all troubles are corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory. • END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 02640-7 TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 Plant Fxpansion Projeeflissued lo Bid Specs\02640.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved u (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 02640-8 TPA S1ClWATER1R01 Plan[ Expansion �rqeclUSSUed to Bid Specs�02640.tlodt . O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02901 MISCELLANEOUS WORK AND CLEANUP PART 1 — GENERAL l .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform the miscellaneous work not specified in other sections but obviousty necessary for the proper completion of the work as shown on the Drawings. B. When applicable, perform the work in accordance with other related Sections. When no applicable specification exists, perform the work in accordance with the best modern practice and/or as directed by the ENGINEER. C. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: I. Crossing and relocating existing utilities. 2. Restoring driveways and sidewalks. 3. Cleaning up. 4. Incidental work. 5. Job photographs and audio video recordings. 6. Restoring easement and right-of-ways. • ]0. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. D. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with the General Conditions, a breakdown of the lump sum for miscellaneous work and cleanup including the above items as a minimum. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 MATERtALS A. Materials required for this Section shall be the same quality of materials that are to be restored. Where possible, re-use existing materials that are removed. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.0] CROSSING AND RELOCATING EXISTING UTILITIES A. Perform any extra work required in crossing culverts, water courses, including brooks and drainage ditches, storm drains, gas mains, water mains, electric, telephone, gas and water services and other utilities. This work shall include: bracing, hand excavation, backfill (except screened gravel) and any other work reyuired for crossing the utility or obstruction not included for payment in other items in the Bid Form. The work shall be coordinated with the utility companies. B. In locations where existing utilities cannot be crossed without interfering with the construction of the work as shown on the Drawings, remove and relocate the utility as directed by the ENGINEER or cooperate with the Utility Companies concerned if they relocate their own utility. • C. At pipe crossings and where designated by the ENGINEER, furnish and place screened gravel bedding so that the existing utility or pipe is firmly supported for its entire exposed length. The 6349-79520/ 10/9/20l 2 02901—I TPA PTDasvAl�Sec\CLWATER1R01 Ptant Expansion Projectllwued to &d SpecsW2901.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved bedding shal) extend to the mid-diameter ofthe pipe crossed. Payment for screened gravel at • pipe crossings will be included as part of the Bid Item. 3.02 RESTORING DRIVEWAYS AND SIDEWALKS A. Existing public and private driveways disturbed by the construction shall be replaced. Paved drives shall be repaved to the limits and thickness existing prior to construction. Gravel drives shall be replaced and regraded in kind. B. Existing public and private sidewalks disturbed by the construction shall be replaced with sidewalks of equal quality and dimension. 3.03 CLEANING UP A. Remove al1 construction material, excess excavation, buildings, equipment and other debris remaining on the job as a result of construction operations and restore the site of the work to a neat and orderly condition. 3.04 INCIDENTAL WORK A. Do all incidental wark not otherwise specified, but obviously necessary to the proper completion of the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 3.05 PHOTOGRAPHS, AUDIONIDEO RECORDINGS OF PROJECT A. Prior to the excavation, document existing conditions using construction photographs and • audio/video recordings as detailed in Section 01300. B. The photographs shall be retained in a secure location throughout the duration of the project and shall then be turned over to the OWNER. 3.06 RESTORING EASEMENTS AND RIGHT-OF-WAYS A. Be responsible for all damage to private and public property due to the operations. Protect from injury all walls, fences, cultivated shrubbery and vegetables, fruit trees, pavement, underground facilities, such as water pipe, or other utilities which may be encountered along the route. If removal and replacement are required, it shall be done in a workmanlike manner so that replacement is equivalent to that which existed prior to construction. B. Existing lawn and sod surfaces damaged by construction shall be replaced. Cut and replace the lawn and sod, or restore the areas with an eyuivalent depth and quality of loam, seed and fertilizer as necessary to produce a stand of grass at least equal to that existing prior to construction. These areas shall be maintained and reseeded, if necessary, until all work under this Contract has been completed and accepted. Any additional work reyuired to restore property to the ariginal condition shall be performed. C. Existing trees, shrubs, plants and bushes outside of easements shall be fully protected. The work shall also include removing and replacing those trees, shrubs and bushes as indicated on the Drawings. It shall include the careful excavation of the root ball which shall be wrapped with burlap while out of the ground. Replant them after backfilling the trench, stake them in an • upright position and shall periodically water replanted trees, bushes and shrubs. Be fully responsible for ensuring that any and all trees, bushes and shrubs removed and replanted "take" 6349-79520/ I 0/9/2012 0270 1—ZTPA l\TpasvA7l4ec\CLWATER1R01 PIeM Ezpa1rsion ProjecCtlssued to &d Specs\02901.00c �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • and return to a viable state. Any replanted item that fails to "take" or that is so damaged as to be unsuitable for replanting shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the OWNER, with a tree, bush or shrub equal to the one removed. D. The ENGINEER will inspect all work for provisional acceptance upon the written request received at least 10 days before the anticipated date of inspection. 1. After all necessary corrective work has been completed, the ENGINEER will certify in writing the provisional acceptance of the planting. E. All plants shall be guaranteed for not less than 1 full year from the time of provisional acceptance. l. At the end of this period, any plant that is missing, dead, or not in satisfactory growth, as determined by the ENGINEER, shall be replaced. 2. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size. They shall be furnished and planted as specified herein. The cost of replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR except where it can be definitely shown that loss resulted from vandalism or the OWNER's failure to maintain planting as instructed. 3. At the end of the guarantee period, inspection will be made by the ENGINEER upon written request submitted by the landscape CONTRACTOR at least l0 days before the anticipated date. 4. After all necessary corrective work has been completed and tree staking has been removed, the ENGINEER will certify in writing the fina) acceptance of the planting. 3.07 TEMPORARY FACILITIES • A. Furnish, install, maintain and remove all temporary facilities required for construction or called for in this Section. \ J END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/9/2012 0270 I-3TPA �\TpawA7lsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion Prqectllssued ro Bid SpecsW2901.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520/10/9/2012 02901-4TPA 1\TpasvrOt�aec\CLWATER�RO 1 PIaM Exparrsion RqectNSSUed to Bid Spece102901.doc • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 02932 SODDING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and prepare lawn bed and install sodding as specified. B. Limits of Sodding shall be as shown on the Drawings. l A2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide technical data as provided in Section 01300 for shop drawings on all materials or installation procedures required under this Section. B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program. C. Submit certifications for all sodding supplied. • PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 SOD A. Sod shall be Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth and good root development as approved. B. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board specifications, absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind. C. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed three times with the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform dimensions. 2.02 SOIL CONDITIONERS A. Fertilizer 1. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State and Federal fertilizer laws. 2. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph l.02B and approved by the Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6 percent nitrogen, 6 percent phosphorus and 6 percent potash by weight. At least 50 percent of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3 percent water-insoluble nitrogen. 3. Fertilizer shaIl be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear the • manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. 6349-79520 10/9/2012 02932-1 TPA\Upasvr011sec\CLWATER1ROiPIentEcpansionProjectllssuedtoBidSpecsW2932.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Su er hos hate shall be com osed of finel round hos hate rock as commonl used for • P P P P Yg P P Y agricultural purposes containing not less than 20 percent available phosphoric acid. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.O1 LAWN BED PREPARATION A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris, and the ground brought to an even grade as approved. B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8-in depth. C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1000 square foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of l6 pounds per 1000 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross-disced in to a depth of 4 to 6-in. D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or other foreign matter over l-in in diameter or dimension. The surface shall conform to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water-retaining depressions, the soil friable and of uniformly firm texture. 3.02 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION A. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the sod panels shall at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or • excessive heat and moisture. B. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be laid tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and other slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the slope. Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a lawn roller customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered. C. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand may be required at no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall produce a dense, well established lawn. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and resodding of all eroded or bare spots until project acceptance. Repair sodding shall be accomptished as in the original work except that fertilizing may be omitted. B. Sufficient watering shall be done by the Contractor to maintain adequate moisture for optimum development of the lawn areas untii Final Completion. Sodded areas shall receive no less than 1.5-in of water per week. 3.04 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. All sodded areas shall be guaranteed by the CONTRACTOR for not less than one full year from • the time of provisional acceptance. 6349-79520 10/9/2012 02932-2 TPA \\Tpasvt97lsec\CLWATER�RO t Plant Expansion PrqecNSSUeA m Bitl Spets102932.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � B. At the end of the guarantee period, inspection will be made by the ENGINEER upon written request submitted by the CONTRACTOR at least ten days before the anticipated date. Sod areas not demonstrating satisfactory stands as outlined above, as determined by the ENGINEER, shall be renovated, repianted and maintained meeting all requirements as specified herein. • • C. After all necessary corrective work has been completed, the ENGINEER shall certify in writing the final acceptance of the sod areas. 3.04 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and lawn areas outside the designated areas damaged by Contractor's operations shall be repaired at once by proper sod bed preparation, fertilizing and re- sodding, in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 10/9/2012 02932-3 TPA\\TpasvNt{sec\CLWATER�RO7PIaniFxpansionPwjeclUssuedfiBitlSpecs\02932.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520 10/9/20l 2 02932-4 TPA\\TpasvNl�sedCLWATER�RO 1 Poen[ Expansion Rojectllssued �o Bid SpecsW2932.doc • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and design, install and remove formwork for cast-in-place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Secure to forms or set for embedment all miscellaneous metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts, waterstops, and other items furnished under other Sections and required to be cast into concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete reinforcement is included in Section 03200. B. Concrete joints and joint accessories are included in Section 03250. C. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. • D. Concrete finishes are included in Section 03350. • E. Grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Form release agent 2. Form ties 3. Formwork and shoring design calculations; fabrication and erection documents for formwork; and shoring, stripping criteria and reshoring procedures. These items shall be signed and sealed by the CONTRACTOR's Delegate Professional Engineer for review and approval. Delegate Engineer shall be licensed in the State of Florida. B. Review will be for appearance, performance and strength of the completed structure only. Approval by the ENGINEER will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for the strength, safety or correctness of inethods used, the adequacy of eyuipment, or from carrying out the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03100- 1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Certificates Submit completed PE Certification Form for design of formwork in accardance with Section 01300. The PE Certification Form shall be completed and stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. 2. Certify form release agent is made for use in contact with potable water (non-toxic and free of taste and odor after 30 days). Certify that form release agent complies with Federal, State and local VOC limitations. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 347 — Guide to Formwork for Concrete B. APA — The Engineered Wood Association (APA) Material grades and designations as specifed • C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. • 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural design responsibility: CONTRACTOR shall provide all forms and shoring designed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. Design and erect formwork in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301, ACI 318 and ACI 347. Comply with all applicable regulations and codes. Consider any special requirements due to the use of plasticized and/or retarded set concrete. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The usage of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general confgurations desired. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Forms, General Make forms for cast-in-place concrete of wood, steel or other approved materials, except as specified in Paragraphs 2.02B. Construct wood forms of sound lumber or plywood free from knotholes and loose knots. Construct steel forms to produce surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to those produced by new plywood panels. Design and construct all forms to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring no grinding, • repairs, or finishing except as specified in Section 03350. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03100- 2 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved • B. Forms for Exposed Concrete Make forms for all exposed and non-submerged exterior and interior concrete of new and unused Plyforrn exterior grade plywood panels manufactured in compliance with the APA and bearing the APA trademark. Provide B grade or better veneer with High Density Overlay on all faces to be in contact with concrete. Design and construct all forms to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring no grinding, repairs, or finishing except as specified in Section 03350. 2. Provide rigid forms that will not deflect, move, or leak. Design forms to withstand the high hydraulic pressures resulting from rapid filling of the forms and heavy high frequency vibration of the concrete. Limit deflection to 1/400 of each component span. Lay out form joints in a uniform pattern. Dress and match boards. Sand plywood smooth and fit adjacent panels with tight joints. Tape, gasket, plug, and/or caulk all joints and gaps in forms to provide watertight joints that will withstand placing pressures without exceeding specified deflection limit or creating surface patterns. 4. Provide 3/4-inch chamfer on all corners unless otherwise indicated. C. Form Release Agent. Coat all form surfaces in contact with concrete with an effective, non-staining, non-residual, water based, bond-breaking form coating unless otherwise indicated or specifed. Use form release agent made for use in contact with potable water, non- • toxic and free of taste and odor after 30 days. D. Form T�es � Coil and Wire Ties: Provide ties manufactured so that, after removal of the projecting part, no metal remains within 1-1l2-in of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be removed shall be at least 1/2-in diameter or be provided with a plastic or wooden cone at least 1/2-in diameter and 1-1/2-in long. Provide cone washer type form ties in concrete exposed to view. 2. Flat Bar Ties for Panel Forms: Provide ties that have plastic or rubber inserts with a minimum depth of 1-1/2-in and manufactured to permit patching of the tie hole. 3. Provide ties for liquid retaining structures that have a steel waterstop tightly attached to each strut or that have a neoprene rubber washer on each strut. 4. Do not use common wire for form ties. 5. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through-bolts at least 1-in in diameter at smallest end or through-bolts that utilize a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size may be used. lnstall in forms so that large end is, where applicable, on the liquid or backfilled side of the wall. Clean, fill and seal form tie hole with non-shrink cement gout to provide watertight form tie holes and make all repairs needed to make watertight. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03100- 3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 EXECUTION 3.O1 GENERAL A. Provide forms for all cast-in-place concrete including sides of footings. Construct and place forms to provide concrete of the shape, lines, dimensions and appearance indicated. B. Provide removable panels at the bottom of forms for walls and columns to allow cleaning, inspection and joint surface preparation. Provide closable intermediate inspection ports in forms for walls. Provide tremies and hoppers for placing concrete and to allow concrete sampling, prevent segregation and prevent the accumulation of hardened concrete on the forms and reinforcement above the fresh concrete. C. Place molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips to produce blockouts, rustications, or chamfers as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein. Provide chamfer strips at horizontal and vertical projecting corners to produce a 3/4-in chamfer. Provide rectangular moldings at locations requiring sealants where shown on the Drawings or specified herein. D. Provide rigid forms to withstand construction loads and vibration and meeting specifed deflection limits and tolerances. Construct forms so that the concrete will not be damaged by form removal. • E. Accessories which remain embedded in the concrete after formwork removal will be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. Permanent embedments shall have sufficient concrete cover or be of suitable materials for the exposure condition as approved by the ENGINEER. Remove unsatisfactory embedded items at no additional cost to the OWNER. • 3.02 FORM TOLERANCES A. Design, construct and surface forms in accordance with ACI 347 and meet the following additional requirements for the specifed finishes. B. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete flush within 1/8-in and forms for plane surfaces plane within I/8-in in 4-ft. Maximum deviation of tt�e finished surface at any point not to exceed 1/4-in from the intended surface indicated. Arrange form panels symmetrically and orderly to minimize the number of seams. Provide tight forms to prevent the passage of mortar, water, and grout. C. Formed Surface Not Exposed to View or Buried: Class "C" Surface per ACI 347. D. Formed Surface Including Pipe Encasement, Electrical Raceway Encasement and Other Similar lnstallations: No minimum requirements for surface irregularities and surface alignment. The overall dimensions of the concrete shall be plus or minus 1-in from the intended surface indicated. 3.03 FORM PREPARATION A. Clean, repair, remove projecting nails and fill holes, and smooth protrusions on all form surfaces to be in contact with concrete before reuse. Do not reuse forms for expvsed concrete unless a"like new" condition of the form is maintained that will produce surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to those produced by new plywood panels. • 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03100- 4 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. Coat wood forms in contact with concrete using form release agent prior to form installation. • \ J C. Clean steel forms by sandblasting or other method to remove mill scale and other ferrous deposits from the contact surface of all forrns_ Coat steel forms in contact with concrete using form release agent prior to form installation. 3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of forms and make repairs at no additional cost to the OWNER. Leave in place forms and shoring for horizontal structural members in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. Conform to the requirements for form removal specified in Section 03300. 3.05 INSPECTION A. Notify the ENGINEER when the forms are complete and ready far inspection, at least six working hours prior to the proposed concrete placement. The ENGINEER will inspect the forms to ensure overall conformance with the contract documents. B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified, or to produce concrete complying with requirements specified shall be grounds for rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Repair or replace rejected work as directed by the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. Such repair or replacement shall be subject to the requirements of these Specifications and approval of the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03100- 5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • THIS PAGE 1NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • � 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03I00- 6 � • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. B. Concrete joints and joint accessories are included in Section 03250. C. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. D. Grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: Reinforcing steel. Drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 315 for placement drawings and as specified herein. a. Placement drawings. For walls, show elevations from the outside, looking towards the structure, at a minimum scale of 1/4-in to one foot. For slabs, show top and bottom reinforcement on separate plan views, as needed for clarity. For beams and columns, show schedules with sections and/or elevations and stirrup/tie spacing. Show additional reinforcement around openings, at corners and at other locations indicated, diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies, all as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. Reference bars to the same identification marks shown on the bar bending details. Identify bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength. b. Bar bending details. Reference bars to the same identification marks shown on the placement drawings. ldentify bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength. 2. Fiber reinforcement. Submit manufacturer's data for synthetic reinforcing fibers. ldentify all placements that are to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The fiber length and amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each placement shall be noted. Submit two samples of synthetic reinforcing fibers. • B. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, Test Reports of each of the following items. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03200-1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Certified copy of mill test on each heat of each steel proposed for use showing the � physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM} 1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184 — Standard Specification for WeIded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A704 — Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. � 8. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. American Concrete institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 315 — Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements far Structural Concrete. 4. SP-66 (ACI 315) ACI Detailing Manual. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1. Manual of Standard Practice D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel E_ Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03200-2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • l .OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fiber Reinforcement. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years experience in the use of the synthetic reinforcing fibers far a preconstruction meeting and assistance during the first placement of the material. 1.06 DELNERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Provide reinforcement free from mill scale, rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, or other foreign matter. B. Ship and store reinforcement with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on the submitted placement drawings. Tags for ASTM A706 reinforcing and for ASTM A615 reinforcing meeting the reyuirements of Paragraph 2.01 C.1 shall indicate that the reinforcing is weldable. C. Store reinforcement off the ground, protect from moisture and keep free from rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, or other injurious contaminants. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A. Provide new materials of domestic manufacture complying with the following material specifications. B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars. C. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Field Bent or Welded: ASTM A706. 1. ASTM A615, Grade 60 may be substituted for ASTM A706 subject to the following: a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests does not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi. Retests not to exceed this value by more than an additiona13,000 psi. b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength of the reinforcement is not less than 1.25. c. T1�e carbon equivalency (CE) is 0.55 percent or less. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets. E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. F. Reinforcing Steel Accessories 1. Plastic Protected Wire Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Class 1- Maximum Protection. • 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03200-3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Stainless Steel Protected Wire Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Class 2- Moderate • Protection with legs made wholly from stainless steel wire. 3. Precast Concrete Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Precast Concrete Bar Supports. Precast concrete blocks that have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete. G. Tie Wire Tie Wires far Reinforcement: 16-gauge or heavier black annealed wire. H. Mechanical Reinforcing Steel Coupling System Use only where indicated. Mechanical reinforcing steel coupling system shaIl be positive connecting taper threaded type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. Coupling system shall meet all AC1318 requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread engagement. Provide with cap on female end to exclude dirt, debris and wet concrete. Couplers shall be tarqued to manufacturer's recommended value. 2. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical reinforcing steel coupling system shali produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not less than 125 percent of the ASTM specifed minimum yield strength of the reinforcing bar. Base yield strength on Grade 60 reinforcing unless otherwise indicated or specified. I. Fiber Reinforcement 1. Synthetic reinforcing fibers for concrete grout shall be l00 percent polypropylene collated, fibrillated fibers, Fibermesh 300 as manufactured by Propex Concrete Systems Corp, Chattanooga, TN, or equal. Fiber length and quantity for the concrete grout mix shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the ENGINEER. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Bend bars cold. Do not straighten or rebend bars. C. Bend bars around a revolving collar having a diameter not less than that recommended by the CRSI or ACI 318. D. Saw cut bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in metal, or threaded. Terminate saw cut ends in flat surfaces within 1-1/2 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bar. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03200-4 CJ • • • � c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Ri��hts Reserved PAR"t 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for surface condition, bending, spacing and tolerances of placement for reinforcement. Provide the amount of reinforcing indicated at the spacing and clearances indicated on the Drawings. B. Determine clear concrete cover based on exposure to the environment. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the following minimum clear concrete cover over reinforcement: Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3-in 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: a. L:7 Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls: 2-in Columns (ties): 2-in 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells and folded plate members: 1-in b. Columns (ties): 1-1/2-in C. Coat uncoated reinforcement which will be exposed for more than 60 days after placement with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry. D. Do not weld reinforcing steel bars either during fabrication or erection unless indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein, or unless prior written approval has been obtained from the ENGINEER. Remove immediately all bars that have been welded, including tack welds, without such approval. Comply with AWS D1.4 when welding of reinforcement is shown on the Drawings, specified, or approved. E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, piping, conduits or embedded items may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar diameter, whichever is greater. Obtain the approval of the ENGINEER if greater displacement of bars to avoid interference is needed. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings or other items without the prior approval of the ENGINEER. F. Secure, support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete. G. Do not field bend reinforcing unless indicated or specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER. Cold-bend bars indicated or authorized to be field bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. Replace, repair by cutting out damaged bars and splicing new bars using coupling sleeves flled with ferrous material, or otherwise repair damaged reinforcing bars as directed by the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete unless indicated on the Drawings. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 032Q0-5 �O 2012 CDM Smith Ali Rights Reserved 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS A. Provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening equivalent to one half of the cross-sectional area of the reinforcing steel interrupted by the opening unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Extend each end of each bar beyond the edge of the opening or penetration by the tension development length for that bar size. 3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Provide splices as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Splices lndicated as Compression Splices: Provide lap splice of 30 bar diameters, but not less than 12-in unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Base the lap splice length for column vertical bars on the bar size in the column above. C. All Other Splices: Provide tension lap splices in compliance with ACI 318. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where possible. Provide Class B tension lap splices at all locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Lap splices in welded wire fabric in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 but not less than 12-in. Tie the spliced fabrics together with wire ties spaced not more than 24-in on center and lace with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices. r� U E. Mechanical reinforcing steel coupling system shall be used only where shown on the Drawings. Offset splices in adjacent bars by at least 30 bar diameters. Mechanical reinforcing • steel coupling system is only to be used for special splice and dowel conditions approved by the ENGINEER. 3.04 ACCESSORIES A. Deternvne, provide and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars and the like to support the reinforcement providing the spacing and clearances indicated on the Drawings and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the placement of concrete. B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil. C. Use plastic protected bar supports or steel supports with plastic tips where the reinforcing steel is to be supported on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing areas). D. Provide #5 minimum size support bars. Do not reposition upper bars in a bar mat for use as support bars. E. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom and top mats, may be used if approved by the ENGINEER. � �� 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03200-6 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 3.05 1NSPECTION • • A. Notify the ENGINEER when the reinforcing is complete and ready for inspection, at least six working hours prior to the proposed concrete placement. Do not cover reinforcing steel with concrete until the installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing and position of the reinforcement has been inspected by the ENGINEER and the ENGINEER's release to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. Keep forms open until the ENGINEER has compteted inspection of the reinforcement. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03200-7 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK r� �J • 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03200-8 . O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install accessories for concrete joints complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.�2 RELATED WORK A_ Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. B. Concrete reinforcement is included in Section 03200. C. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. D. Concrete finishes are included in Section 03350. E. Grout is included in Section 03600. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data for: • 1. Plastic Waterstops: Product data including sample, catalogue cut, dimensions, technical data, storage requirements, splicing methods, conformity to CRD standards, detailed drawings and samples of factory fabrications. 2. Premolded joint fillers: Product data including location of use, sample, catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Preformed expansion joint material: Product data including location of use, catalogue cut, dimensions, technical data, storage requirements, installation instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Bond breaker: Product data including location of use, catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, and application instructions. 5. Sealant: Product data including location of use, catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, mixing and application instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. B. Certifications 1. Certify that all materials used within the joint system are compatible with each other. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03250-1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Certify that sealant is made for use in continuous immersion in contact with potable water • 30 days after installation (non-toxic and free of taste and odor). 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM} 1. ASTM A36 — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM C309 — Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM C920 — Standard Specifcation for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM D1752 — Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD). CRD C572 - Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops. C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid • opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of a manufacturer's field representative of the sealant who has performed at least five projects of similar size and complexity within the last 5 years. The feld representative shall be present at the work site prior to any mixing of components to instruct on mixing, application and inspection procedures and to inspect the finish of the prepared surfaces prior to application of the sealant. B. The manufacturer's field representative shall make at least one additional visit to the site as the work progresses and shall report on each visit to the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, advising as to whether the application is being performed in accordance with this Section and the manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, unopened containers displaying the manufacturer's label showing manufacturer name, product identification and batch number. B. Store products as recommended by the manufacturer. • 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03250-2 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials used together in a given joint shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate selection of suppliers and products to provide compatibility. Do not use asphaltic bond breakers or asphaltic joint fillers in joints receiving sealant. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Plastic Waterstops Waterstops for non-expansion joints and other locations shown on the Drawings: 6-in by 3/8-in ribbed type waterstops confornung to CRD C572 and made by extruding elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinylchloride as the basic resins. The compound shall contain no reprocessed materials. Minimum tensile strength of waterstop 1750 psi. Waterstops shall incorporate an integral fastening system, or be provided with grommets or prepunched holes between the outermost ribs at a spacing of l 2 inches on center. Waterstops shall be style FR-6380 by Paul Murphy Plastics Co., Roseville, MI; style 679 by Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO; style R6-38 by Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN, or equal. 2. Factory fabrications: provide factory fabrications for all waterstop changes of direction, transitions, and intersections (vertical ells, flat ells, vertical tees, flat tees, vertical crosses, • flat crosses, and special unusual or complicated intersections including intersections of waterstops of different sizes or configurations, and intersections due to joint offsets). Factory fabrications shall be made and inspected by the waterstop manufacturer. Provide stub ends of sufficient length to leave only straight butt joints for splicing in the field. B. Premolded Joint Filler Premolded Joint Filler — Structures: Self-expanding cork premolded joint filler confornvng to ASTM D1752, Type III. Provide 1-in thickness unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Bond Breaker Bond Breaker Tape: Adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will adhere to the premolded joint filler ar concrete surface. Provide tape the same width as the joint. 2. Bond breaker for concrete other than where tape is indicated on the Drawings or specified: Either bond breaker tape or a non-staining type bond prevention coating such as Crete-Lease Bond Breaker for Tilt-Up by Cresset Chemical Co.; Sure-Lift J-6 WB by Dayton Superior; Silcoseal Select by Nox-Crete, or equal. D. Sealant l. Provide sealant for joints in harizontal surfaces confornung to ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25. Provide sealant for joints in sloping and vertical surfaces • confornung to ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25. Provide Use T sealant in pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas and Use NT in non-traffic areas. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03250-3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Provide sealants made for use in continuous immersion in contact with potable water • (non-toxic and free of taste and odor. Provide gray colored sealants unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, specified, or approved. E. Neoprene Bearing Pads: 50 durometer conforming to AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.0] INSTALLATION A. Waterstops - General 1. Lnstall waterstops for all joints as shown on the Drawings. Provide waterstops continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. 2. Provide a minimum number of connections or splices. Replace connections or splices that do not meet the specified requirements at no additional cost to the OWNER. Secure waterstops in joints before concrete is placed. 4. Install plastic waterstops so that half of the width will be embedded on each side of the joint_ lnstall waterstops with a center bulb in expansion joints so that the center bulb is within the joint width. Provide waterstops completely embedded in void-free concrete. 5. Terminate waterstops 2-in below the exposed top of walls. 6. Protect waterstops from damage in the internals between placing waterstops and subsequent placing of concrete. Replace damaged or punctured waterstops at no additional cost to the OWNER. 7. Protect plastic waterstops from sunlight when they will be exposed more than 30 days between concrete placements. 8. Provide waterstops free from form release agent, bond breaker, dirt, concrete splatter, ice, mortar, paint, or any other material which could reduce or destroy bond between the waterstop and the concrete to be placed around it. B. Plastic Waterstops • Only straight butt joints are allowed for field splices. Make splices on a bench. Use a power saw and guide to cut straight ends to be spliced. Heat fuse weld splices using a Teflon coated thermostatically controlled waterstop splicing iron following the manufacturer's recommendations. The finished splices shall provide a cross-section that is dense and free of porosity. ENGINEER may conduct destructive tests of splices by cutting along one half of the splice length and by cutting perpendicular to the splice at several locations on the remaining half of the splice length. T'he right of the ENGINEER to make such tests shall not be construed as creating any obligation to make such tests, and not exercising this right to do so shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from meeting the requirements of these Specifications. Completed splices shall exhibit a continuous and uniform bead of excess melted material. The welded material shalI not look • noticeably different from the parent material. Splices shall not show misalignment of 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03250-4 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • center bulbs or ribs greater than I/16-in, lack of fusion, porosity, pinholes, cracks, charred or burnt material, bubbles, or separation of cooled splice when bent by hand. If a splice displays any of these defects, reject the splice, recut back at least 1-in from rejected splice on each side, and reweld. 2. Secure waterstops in wall joints before concrete is placed. If waterstop does not incorporate an integral fastening system, grommets or prepunched holes, drill holes in waterstops between the outermost ribs at each edge. Center the waterstop in the joint. Tie both edges of the waterstop to reinforcing steel with tie wire as specified for tying reinforcing steel. Secure the waterstop centered on and perpendicular to the joint and to maintain this position during concrete placement. 3. Space waterstop ties to match the spacing of the adjacent reinforcing, but ties need not be spaced closer than 12-in on center. 4. Clamp horizontal waterstops in slabs in position with the form bulkhead (unless previously set in concrete). Lift the edge of the waterstop while placing concrete below the waterstop. Manually force the waterstop against and into the placed concrete and cover with fresh concrete, to provide complete encasement of the waterstop in concrete. C. Construction Joints 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as approved by the ENGINEER. Any additional or relocation of construction joints proposed by the • CONTRACTOR must be submitted to the ENGINEER for written approval. Do not eliminate construction joints. 2. Locate additiona( or relocated joints where they least impair strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and girders. However, if a beam intersects a girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the underside of floors, slabs, beams or girders and at tops of footings or floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, provide joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinfarcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Provide waterstops in wall and slab construction joints in liyuid retaining structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints indicated on the Drawings to be "roughened", uniformly roughen the surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points and side to side) of 1/4-in with chipping tools to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. At least two hours before and again shortly before the new concrete is deposited, saturate the joints with water. After glistening water disappears, coat joints with neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of very heary paste. The surfaces shall receive a coating at least 1/8-in thick, scrubbed-in • by means of stiff bristle brushes. Deposit new concrete before the neat cement dries. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03250-5 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6. Do not use keyways in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or • approved by the ENGINEER. D. Partial Contraction Joints Make partial contraction joints at locations shown on the Drawings. Do not eliminate or relocate partial contraction joints. 2. Provide waterstops, sealant grooves, and sealants in wall and slab partial contraction joints in liquid retaining structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. Extend every other bar of reinforcing steel through partial contraction joints or as indicated on the Drawings. Coat the concrete surface with a bond breaker prior to placing new concrete against it as shown on the Drawings. Do not coat reinforcement or waterstops with bond breaker. Mask waterstops and reinforcing passing through the joint to prevent bond breaker form running or dripping on to them. Remove masking prior to concrete placement. E. Sealant 1. Install sealants in clean dry recesses free of frost, oil, grease, form release agent, loose material, laitance, dirt, dust and other materials which will impair bond at the locations shown on the Drawings. Apply sealant conforming to the manufacturer's recommendations including concrete cure, temperature, moisture, mixing, primer, primer cure time, joint and recess preparation, tooling, and curing. Apply masking tape to each side of the joint prior to the installation of the sealant and remove afterwards along with • any spillage to leave a sealant installation with neat straight edges. F. Preformed Expansion Joint Material Install preformed expansion joint material in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations; including surface preparation, adhesive installation, heat welding and set time. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03250-6 �O 2012 CDM Smitb All Ri�hts Reserved • SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL ].O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all tabor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install cast-in-place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish, as required to establish concrete mixes, all sampling and laboratory testing of products and materials performed by an independent testing laboratory engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Provide field sampling, testing, inspection and related laboratory tests. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. B. Concrete reinforcement is included in Section 03200. C. Concrete joints and joint accessories are included in Section 03250. • D. Concrete finishes are included in Section 03350. E. Grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, product data for: 1. Sources of cement, fly ash, aggregates, and batched concrete. 2. Air-entraining admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Water reducing admixture. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations and confornvty to ASTM standards. 4. Sheet curing material. Product data including catalogue cut, technical data and conformity to ASTM standard. 5. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 6. High-range water-reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature • considerations, retarding effect, slump range and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7. Li uid membrane formin curin com ound. Product data including catalogue cut, � 9 g g P technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate and conformity to ASTM standards. ldentify proposed locations of use. B. Samples 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested for examination by the ENGINEER. C. Test Reports 1. Aggregates: Conformance to ASTM standards, including sieve analysis, mechanical properties, deleterious substance content, and mortar bar expansion test results. 2. Cement and fly ash: Conformance to ASTM standards, including chemical analysis and physical tests. 3. Concrete mixes: For each formulation of concrete proposed for use, submit constituent quantities per cubic yard, water cementitious ratio, air content, concrete slump, type and manufacturer of cement and type and manufacturer of fly ash. Provide either Paragraph a. or b., below, for each mix proposed. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records. Provide the following for each strength data point used in the calculation of the standard deviation for determination of the minimum required average strength: . i. Date of sampling and name of testing laboratory. ii. Name of concrete batch plant. iii. Water cementitious ratio. iv. Slump of batch. iv. Air content of batch. v. Compressive strengths of all cylinders tested at that age in that batch. vii. If available, temperature and unit weight of batch. Provide data from projects not more strictly controlled than outlined in these specifications. Provide summary sheet showing all pertinent data and the computation of the standard deviation. b. Water cementitious ratio curve for concrete mixes based on laboratory tests. Provide average cylinder strength test results at 7, 14, and 28 days for laboratory concrete mix designs. D. Certifications 1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and the aggregates. 2. Certify admixtures are made for use in concrete in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 2 � . • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�ht: Reserved 3. Certify that the CONTRACTOR is not associated with the independent testing laboratory proposed for use by the CONTRACTOR nor does the CONTRACTOR or officers of the CONTRACTOR's organization have a beneficial interest in the laboratory. 4. Certificate of conformance for concrete production facilities from the NRMCA. 5. Certify curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non-toxic and free of taste or odor). E. Qualifications 1. lndependent Testing Laboratory a. Name and address b. Names and positions of principal officers and the name, position, and qualifications of the responsible registered professional engineer in charge. c. Listing of technical services to be provided. lndicate external technical services to be provided by other organizations. d. Names and qualifications of the supervising laboratory technicians. e. Statement of conformance provided by evaluation authority defined in ASTM C1077. Provide report prepared by evaluation authority when requested by the ENGINEER. f. Submit as required above for other organizations that will provide external technical services. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C138 — Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 7. ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 0 C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 156 — Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound for Concrete 10. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification far Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 11. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 12. ASTM C 192 — Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 13. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 14. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 15. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 16. ASTM C311 — Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for use in Portland Cement Concrete. 17. ASTM C494 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 18. ASTM C618 — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 19. ASTM C1017 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 20. ASTM C 1077 — Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 21. ASTM C 1260 — Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method). 22. ASTM E329 — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. AC1211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 232.2R — Use of Fly Ash in Concrete. 3. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 304.2R - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 4 • • • u . • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rit7hts Reserved I.OS 5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 8. ACI 350 — Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. C. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) 0 E Quality Control Manual, Section 3- Certification of Ready Mixed Conerete Production Facilities. Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau (TMMB) TMMB 100 - Truck Mixer, Agitator and Front Discharge Conerete Carrier Standards. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 350 and other stated specifications, codes and standards. Apply the most stringent requirements of other stated specifications, codes, standards, and this Section when conflicts exist. B. Use only one source of cement and aggregates for the project. Provide concrete uniform in color and appearance. C. At least ten working days before the frsi concrete placement hold a preconstruction meeting to review the requirements for concrete placement, waterstop placement, jointing, conerete curing, hot weather concreting, cold weather concreting and fnishing. Review, with the attendance of the plasticizer manufacturer, the properties and techniques of batching and placing concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture. Notify all parties involved, including the ENGINEER, of the meeting at least ten working days prior to its scheduled date. Prepare an agenda for the meeting. Take meeting minutes and distribute to all attendees. D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the specifed workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the ENGINEER may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the specified properties. Make all changes so ordered at no additional cost to the OWNER. E. If, during the progress of the wark, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in characteristics, make, at no additional cost to the OWNER, new acceptance tests of materials and establish new concrete mixes with the assistance of an independent testing laboratory. F. All field testing and inspection services and related laboratory tests required will be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The cost of such work will be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. Methods of testing will comply with the latest applicable ASTM methods. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300- 5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. lndependent testing laboratory shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM C 1077 • and be acceptable to the Engineer. Laboratories affiliated with the Contractor or in which the Contractor or officers of the Contractor's organization have a beneficial interest are not acceptable. H. Provide all field testing and inspection services and related laboratory tests. Methods of testing shall comply with the latest applicable ASTM methods. The following items shall be tested to verify conformity with this Section. 1. Concrete placement — compressive strength (cylinders), compressive strength (cores), temperature, slump, and air content. 2. Other materials that may require field testing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to prevent warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to prevent segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding three feet in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to prevent contamination. Allow sand to drain to a uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen sand. • D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Provide agitating equipment to uniformly disperse ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics. E. Fly Ash: Store in weathertight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination. F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under cover. G. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 6 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. Cement: Domestic portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. Cement shall be low alkali cement. Do not use air entraining cements. Cement brand must be approved by the ENGINEER and one brand shall be used throughout the work. Provide the following type(s) of cement: l. Class A, E1, E2, and E3 Concrete - Type Il with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A being below 8 percent of total cementitious content. C. Aggregates: Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. Coarse Aggregate: Well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to ASTM C33. Grading requirements as listed in ASTM C33, Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number listed in Table 1 herein. Limits of deleterious substances and physical property requirements as listed in ASTM C33, Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Do not use coarse aggregates known to be deleteriously reactive with alkalis in cement. 3. The fine and coarse aggregates used shall not cause expansion of mortar bars greater than 0.] percent in 16 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 and using the cement proposed for the project. If aggregates proposed for use do not meet this requirement, then satisfy a_ below. . a. Total equivalent alkali content of the cement used shall not exceed 0.60 percent as provided in the Optional Chemical Reyuirements of ASTM C I 50. D. Water: Potable water free of oil, acid, alkali, salts, chlorides (except those attributable to drinking water), organic matter, or other deleterious substances. E. Admixtures: Use admixtures free of chlorides and alkalis (except far those attributable to drinking water). The admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer when it is required to use more than one admixture in the same concrete mix. Use admixtures compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures and made for use in concrete in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 1. Air Entraining Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C260. Proportion and mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A. Proportion and mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixtures (Plasticizer): Conforming to ASTM C494, Type F or ASTM C 1017, Type I resulting in non-segegating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low water/cementitious ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportion and mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Do not use admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete without written • approval from the ENGINEER. Use retarding or accelerating water reducing admixtures 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 7 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved when so approved. F. Fly Ash: Class F fly ash complying with ASTM C618, including the requirements of Table 1 but with the Loss of lgnition (LOI) limited to 3 percent maximum and the optional physical requirements of Table 3. Test in compliance with ASTM C311 with a minimum of one sample weighing four pounds taken from each 200 tons of fly ash supplied for the project. G. Sheet Curing Materials: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting, all conforming to ASTM C 171. H. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound. Compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1-D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and containing no wax, paraffin, or oil. Curing compounds shall be non-yellowing and have a unit moisture loss no greater than 0.039 gm/cm2 at 72 hours as measured by ASTM C 156. Curing compound shall comply with Federal, State and local VOC limits. 2.03 MIXES A. An independent testing laboratory engaged by and at the expense of the CONTRACTOR shall establish concrete mixes and perform all sampling and laboratory testing of products and materials. • B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce placeable, durable concrete conforming to these specifications. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or • allowing free water to collect on the surface. C. Base concrete mixes on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if not available, develop concrete mixes by laboratory tests using the materials proposed for the work. For concrete mixes based on standard deviation data of prior mixes, submit standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350 and based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318 and ACI 350. 2. For concrete mixes developed by laboratory testing, base cementitious content of the concrete on curves showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7, 14 and 28 day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. Deternune curves by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test specimens and one water-cementitious ratio at each age. Provide curves with a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the compressive strengths specified, without extrapolation. The cementitious content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to the required average compressive strength in Table 5.3.2.2 of ACI 318. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content specified in Table 1. D. Test the fly ash and concrete mixture to provide test data confirming that the fly ash in combination with the cement to be used meets all strength requirements and is compatible • with the other concrete adclitives. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 8 . � L_J • �O 20] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E F G Test aggregates for potentiat alkali reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260. If initial testing indicates aggregates are not potentially reactive repeat test at 3 month intervals. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mixes to demonstrate compliance with the compression strength requirements in conformity with the provisions of ACI 318. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table l. 1. If the air entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal specified under Paragraph 1.03. H. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C 143, shall be as shown in Table I. If a high- range water-reducing admixture (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 7 to 10-in. I. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of the other admixture(s). TABLE 1 Design Fine Coarse Class Strength Cement Aggregate Aggregate A E1 E2 E3 2500 4500 4500 4500 Type II Type II Type II Type II Sand Sand Sand Sand 57 467 57 67 Cementitious Content 440 560 580 610 W/C AE Class Ratio Fly Ash Range WR HRWR Slump Range 5 6 7 8 9 Inches A 0.62 max. Yes E 1 0.42 max. Yes E2 0.42 max. Yes E3 0.42 max. Yes NOTES: 3.5 to 5 Yes No 1-4 3.5 to 5 Yes No 3-5 3.5 to 5 Yes No 3-5 3.5 to 5 Yes No 3-5 1. Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days 2. ASTM designation in ASTM C I 50 3. Size Number in ASTM C33 4.Minimum cementitious content in lbs per cubic yard (where fly ash is used cementitious content is defined as cement content plus fly ash content) 5. W/C is Maximum Water Cementitious ratio by weight 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300- 9 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6.FIy ash content in the range of 20-25 percent of the total cement content plus fly ash content, • by weight 7. AE is percent air entrainment 8. WR is water reducing admixture 9. HRWR is high-range water-reducing admixture PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS A. Provide concrete composed of portland cement, fly ash, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and admixtures as specified and produced by a plant complying with ACI 318 and ASTM C94. Batch all constituents, including admixtures, at the plant. High-range water reducing admixtures may be added in the field. B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Use scales last certified by the local Sealer of Weights and Measures within one year of use. C. Weigh cement and fly ash in individual weigh batchers that are separate and distinct from the weigh batchers used for other materials. When cement and fly ash are weighed in a cumulative weigh batcher, the cement shall be weighed first. D. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.5 percent with a moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as-batched on printed batch tickets. • E. Dispense admixtures either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks, or by means of an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. 2. lnject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Provide ready-mixed concrete produced by equipment complying with ACI 318 and ASTM C94 and produced by a plant certified by the NRMCA. Do not hand-mix. All truck mixers shall carry a rating plate conforming to TMMB 100. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit-mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. B. Transport ready-mix concrete to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate. C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of water must be directed by the ENGINEER. Incorporate water directed to be added by additional mixing of at least 50 revolutions at mixing speed after the addition of all water. Meter all added water and show the amount of water added on each delivery ticket. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 10 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • D. Comply with AC1318 and ASTM C94 for all central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods. E. Select equipment of size and design to provide continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Use metal or metal-lined non-aluminum discharge chutes with slopes not exceeding one vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Chutes more than 20-ft long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. F. Do not retemper (mix with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) concrete or mortar which has partially hardened. G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement providing concrete of specified quality in the placement area and not exceeding the maximum time interval specifed in Paragraph 3.02 I.4. Dispatch trucks from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required to avoid excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms. Remix for a minimum of 5 minutes prior to discharge or testing. H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready mixed concrete to the ENGINEER as each truck arrives. Provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually on each ticket. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Indicate for each batch the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement, fly ash, and water, moisture content of fine and coarse aggregate at time of batching, and • types, brand and quantity of each admixture, the quantity of concrete delivered, the time any water is added and the amount, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. lndicate the number of revolutions of transit mix truck. • I. Temperature and Mixing Time Control 1. in cold weather (see Paragraph 3.07D) maintain the as-mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms as indicated in Table 3. 2. lf water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90 degrees F. 3. in hot weather (see Paragraph 3.07E), cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 degrees F_ Well-crushed ice may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water. 4. The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to the batch and the final placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- I1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.03 3.04 TABLE 2 AIR OR CONCRETE TEMPERATURE (WHICHEVER IS HIGHER) (27 Degree C) 80 Degree F to 90 Degree F(32 Degree C) (21 Degree C) 70 Degree F to 79 Degree F(26 Degree C) (5 Degree C) 40 Degree F to 69 Degree F(20 Degree C) MAXIMUM TIME 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes lf an approved high-range water-reducing admixture (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes. INSPECTION AND COORDINATION A. Batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the ENGINEER at all times. Advise the ENGINEER of readiness to proceed at least six working hours prior to each concrete placement. The ENGINEER will inspect the preparations for concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing and the alignment, cleanliness and tighmess of formwork. Do not place concrete without the inspection and acceptance of the ENGINEER. EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required, aIl miscellaneous metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, anchors, inserts and other items furnished under other Sections and required to be embedded into concrete. Set and secure such items in the locations and alignments needed so they are not displaced by concrete placement. B. Clean embedded items free of rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, or other contaminants which would reduce or prevent bonding with concrete. C. Coat or isolate all aluminum embedments to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. D. Pipes and conduits embedded within a slab or wall (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the following, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved: 1. Maximum outside dimension of pipe or conduit shall not be greater than one third the overall thickness of the slab or wall. 2. Spacing of pipes or conduits shall be greater than or equal to three diameters or widths on center. 3. Fabricate piping and conduit such that the cutting, bending, or relocation of reinforcing steel is not required. E. Close open ends of piping, conduits, and sleeves embedded in concrete with caps or plugs prior to placing concrete. F. Ensure all specified tests and inspections on embedded piping are completed and satisfactory before starting concrete placement. Ensure all mechanical or electrical tests and inspections 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 12 • u r � �� • � �O 2012 CDM Smitb ACj lci��hts Reserved 3.05 3.06 are completed and satisfactory prior to starting concrete placement. Do not place concrete until unsatisfactory items and conditions have been corrected. G. Position embedded anchor bolts using templates. H. Check location, alignment, and support of anchor bolts, piping, electrical conduits, and other items which will be fully or partially embedded in concrete before depositing concrete. Correct mislocated and misaligned items and secure items which have become loose before depositing concrete. 1. Correct all embedded items not installed in the location or alignment needed or displaced by concrete placement at no additional cost to the OWNER. CONCRETE APPEARANCE A. Remix concrete showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste. Reject remixed concrete showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste. Make, at no additional cost to the OWNER, changes in the concrete mix design for future deliveries only by adjusting one or more of the following if the slump is within the allowable limit, but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed: The gradation of aggegate. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. The percentage of entrained air, within the allowable limits. B. Provide concrete having a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the specified strength, durability and appearance. Provide mixtures and workmanship such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing except as specified in Section 03350. PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Placing Verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced prior to concrete placement. Remove ice, standing water, dirt, debris, and other foreign materials from forms and exposed joint surfaces. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a worker at the location of the placement who can check that reinforcement and embedded items remain in designated locations and alignments while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi-porous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade, snow, or ice. 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to prevent segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate that allows the concrete previously placed to be integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300- 13 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes chosen for pumping and submit for approval. Do not use pipelines made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. When concrete is pumped, slump will be determined at point of truck discharge and air content will be determined at point of placement. 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer needed. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized steel or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained. 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the supporting element has attained design strength. 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of surface voids. 7. Slabs a. After bulkheads, screeds and jointing materials have been positioned, place concrete continuously between joints beginning at a bulkhead, edgeform, or corner. Place each batch into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. b. Avoid delays in placement. If there is a delay in placement, spade and consolidate the concrete placed after the delay at the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid cold joints. Bring concrete to correct level and strike off with a straightedge. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow one hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist to prevent cold joints. 8. Formed Concrete a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes taking care to prevent segregation_ Maintain bottom of tremie tubes in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4-ft. Place concrete for walls in 12-in to 24-in lifts, keeping the surface horizontat. If a high-range water-reducing admixture is used do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 15-ft; maximum lift thickness not to exceed 7-ft. B. Compacting 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration and puddling, spading, rodding or forking so that concrete is completely worked around reinforcement, embedded items and openings and into corners of forms. Continuously perform puddling, spading, rodding and forking along with vibration of tt�e placement to eliminate air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300-14 u • • • � • �O 20] 2 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved 2. Compact all concrete with mechanica] vibrators. Do not arder concrete until vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. Use mechanical vibrators having a minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18-in to 30-in apart. Vibrate sufficiently at each insertion to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep standby vibrators on the site during concrete placing operations. 4. Concrete Slabs: Vibration for concrete slabs less than 8-in thick shall be by vibrating screeds. Vibration for concrete slabs 8-in and thicker shall be by internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Place vibrators into concrete vertically. Do not lay vibrators horizontally or lay over. 5. Walls and Columns: Use internal vibrators (rather than form vibratars) unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. In general, for each vibrator needed to melt down (level) the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize and perfect the surface. Insert vibrators vertically at regular intervals, through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. Amount of Vibration: Use vibrators to consolidate properly placed concrete. Do not use vibrators to move or transport concrete in the forms. Continue vibration until: b. c. d. Frequency of vibrator returns to normal. Surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening. Trapped air ceases to rise. Coarse aggregate has blended into surface, but has not disappeared. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations. B. Curing Methods 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain a temperature of at least 50 Degrees F at the concrete surface for a minimum of seven days after placement. Use the following curing methods as specifed: a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling or covered with saturated burlap. Begin water curing as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain water curing 24 hours a day. Do not permit the surface of the concrete to dry out at any time during the curing period. Temperature of curing water shall be within 20 Degrees F of the concrete temperature. b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300- 15 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved c. Li uid Membrane Curin : A 1 over the entire concrete surface exce t as follows. • 9 g PP Y p Curing compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete or grout is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Apply curing compound as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Apply in comptiance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Specified applications of curing methods: a. Slabs for Liquid Retaining Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to retain liquids): Water curing or sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing. c. Structural Slabs (other than Liquid Retaining Structures): Water curing or liquid membrane curing. d. Horizontal Surfaces which will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout or Other Material that Requires Bond to the substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place seven days. Water curing if absorbent forms are used. Water curing if forms are removed prior to seven days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured • for seven days or until next placement of concrete is made. f. Surfaces of Concrete Joints: Water curing or sheet material curing. g. Wetwell shall be water cured only. C. Protect finished surfaces and slabs from the direct rays of the sun to prevent checking and crazing. D. Cold Weather Concreting 1. For this Specification, "cold weather" is defined as a period when for more than three successive days, the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 degrees F. Calculate average daily temperature as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. 2. Batch, deliver, place, cure and protect concrete during cold weather in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 306R and the additional requirements of this Section. 3. Review the cold weather concreting plan at the preconstruction meeting. Include the methods and procedures for use during cold weather including the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing and temperature monitoring of the concrete and the procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 16 • • � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement and during the protection period shall be as indicated in Table 3. The temperature of the concrete in place and during the protection period shall not exceed these values by more than 20 degrees F. Prevent overheating and non-uniform heating of the concrete. TABLE 3 Concrete Temperatures Minimum Dimension of Section < l2-in 12 to 36-in Min. conc temp: 55 Degree F 50 Degree F 5. Protect concrete during periods of cold weather to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required by weather conditions) for a total of at least 350 degree-days of curing. a. Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 7 days at an average 50 degrees F= 350 degree-days). b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50 degrees F as 0 degrees F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day. 6. Do not use salt, manure or other chemicals for protection. 7. At the end of the protection period, allow the concrete to cool gradually to the ambient temperature. lf water curing has been used, do not expose concrete to temperatures below those shown in Table 3 until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated and air dry concrete for at least 3 days prior to first exposure to freezing temperatures. During periods not defined as cold weather, but when freezing temperatures are expected or occur, protect concrete surfaces from freezing for the first 24 hours after placing. E. Hot Weather Concreting For this Specification, "hot weather" is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation as estimated in ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour (lb/sq ft/hr). 2. Batch, deliver, place, cure and protect concrete during hot weather in compliance with the recommendations of ACl 305R and the additional requirements of this Section. a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall not cause loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03300- 17 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved b. Promptly deliver concrete to the site and promptly place the concrete upon its arrival • at the site, not exceeding the maximum time interval specified in Paragraph 3.021.4. Provide vibration immediately after placement. The ENGINEER may direct the CONTRACTOR to immediately cover concrete with sheet curing material. 3. Review the hot weather concreting plan at the preconstruction meeting. Include the methods and procedures for use during hot weather including production, placement, and curing. 3.08 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Do not remove forms before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 70 percent of its specified design strength for beams and slabs and at least 30 percent of its specified design strength for walls and vertical surfaces, nor before reaching the following number of degree- days of curing (whichever is the longer): TABLE 4 Forms for De re�vs Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100 (See definition of degree-days in Paragraph 3.07D). B. Do not remove shores until the concrete has attained at least 70 percent of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and the construction live loads upon it. C. In cold weather, when temperature of concrete exceeds ambient air temperature by 20 Degrees F at the end of the protection period, loosen forms and leave in place for at least 24 hours to allow concrete to cool gradually to ambient air temperature. 3.09 FIELD AND LABORATORY TESTS A. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken by the CONTRACTOR during the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 100 cu yds of concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls_ Specimens shall be formed in 6-in diameter by 12-in long non-absorbent cylindrical molds. A"set" of test cylinders shall consist of five cylinders: one to be tested at seven days, one to be tested at 14 days, and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fifth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if 28 day test results are low. • 2. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the required compressive strength or below proportional minimum seven-day or 14-day • strengths (where proper relation between seven, 14 and 28 day strengths have been 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 18 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . established by tests), change proportions, cementitious content, or temperature conditions to achieve the required strengths at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Provide four firmly braced, insulated, heated, closed wooden curing boxes, each sized to hold ten specimens, complete with cold weather temperature and hot weather temperature control thermostat for initial curing and storage from time of fabrication until shipment to CONTRACTOR's the testing lab. Protect the specimens against injury or loss through construction operations. Furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. C. Slump tests will be made in the field by the CONTRACTOR immediately prior to placing the concrete. Such tests will be made in accordance with ASTM C143. Test shall be made in accordance with ASTM C143. When concrete is pumped, slump will be determined at point of truck discharge. If the slump is outside the specified range, the concrete will be rejected. D. Test for air content will be made by the CONTRACTOR on a fresh concrete sample. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be made in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used. When concrete is pumped, air content will be determined at point of placement. 3.10 FIELD CONTROL • A. The ENGINEER may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete wark such as construction joints and other locations as required for deternunation of concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for acceptance, rejection or determining the continuation of concrete work. The right of the ENGINEER to take such cores shall not be construed as creating any obligation to take such cores, and not exercising this right to do so shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from meeting the requirements of these Specifications. B. Cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding and such incidental equipment as may be required. Repair all core holes with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03600. The work of cutting, testing and repairing the cores will be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR if defective work is uncovered. If no defective work is found, such cost will be at the expense of the OWNER. 3.11 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the ENGINEER may require changes in proportions or materials, or both, to apply to the remainder of the work in accordance with Paragraph 1.OSE. Furthermore, the ENGINEER may require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which fall below the values given in Table 1. The cost of such additional curing shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. ln the event that such additional curing does not give the strength required, as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the ENGINEER may require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. Coring and testing and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be at no additional cost to • the OWNER. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements the CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 19 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The • "purchaser" referred to in C94 is the CONTRACTOR. B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the required strength, the ENGINEER will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. ln cases where tests of cores fall below the values given in Table 1, the ENGINEER, in addition to other recourses, may require load tests on any one of the slabs, walls, beams, and columns in which such concrete was used. Test need not be made until concrete has aged 60 days. The ENGINEER may require strengthening or replacement of those portions of the structure which fail to develop the required strength. All coring and testing and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below that specified, shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60 percent of the required minimum 28 day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.12 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. lt is the intent of these Specifications to require quality work including forming, mixture and placement of concrete and curing so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching or repairs. B. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed: remove fins and other projections; fill recesses left by the removal of form ties; and repair surface defects • which do not impair structural strength. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete. C. Immediately after removal of forms remove tie cones and metal portions of ties as specified in Section 03100. Fill holes promptly upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16-in brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of "balling"). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spider web. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing. D. When filling tie cone holes and patching or repairing exposed surfaces use the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent concrete. Adjust color to match by addition of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine carborundum stone at an age of one to five days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Do not damage or stain the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter. E. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas: Chip down square and at least 1-in deep to sound concrete with hand chisels or pneumatic chipping hammers. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded in the parent concrete. If honeycomb exists around reinforcement, chip to provide a clear space at least 3/8- in wide all around the steel. For areas less than 1-1/2-in deep, the patch may be made in the same manner as described above for filling form tie holes, care being exercised to use adequately dry (non-trowelable) mixtures and to avoid sagging. Thicker repairs will require build-up in successive 1-1/2-in layers on successive days, each layer being applied (with • slurry, etc.) as described above_ 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 20 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. For very heavy (generally formed) patches, the ENGINEER may order the addition of pea gravel to the mixture and the proportions modified as follows: Material Volumes Wei�hts Cement 1.0 1.0 Sand 1.0 1 A Pea Grave11.5 1.5 G. The CONTRACTOR may use a pre-packaged patching compound, such as: Poly-Patch by Euclid Chemical Company; Emaco R310 by BASF Chemical Company; Sikatop 122 Plus by Sika Chemical Corporation or equal only if approved by the ENGINEER for use and for color match. 3.13 SCHEDULE A. The following (Table 5) are the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths: • Class �psi) A 2,500 E 1 4,500 E2 4,500 • E3 4,500 TABLE 5 Design Strength Description Concrete fill and grout Structural concrete 16-inch and greater in thickness. Except as noted above for Class Elconcrete: Concrete greater than 10-inch in thickness. Concrete 10-inch or less in thickness. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 21 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved u TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • • 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03300- 22 �O 2012 CDM Smith All �i<<�hts Reserved • SECTION 03350 CONCRETE FINISHES PAR'I' 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and finish cast-in-place concrete surfaces as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. B. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. C. Grout is included in Section 03600. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society far Testing and Materials (ASTM) • 1. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CHANGING FINISHES A. The surface finishes specified for concrete to receive coatings or other finish materials are those required for the proper application of the products specified under other Sections. Where products different from those specified are approved for use determine if changes in finishes are required and provide the proper finishes to receive these products. B. Perform changes in finishes made to accommodate products different from those specifed at no additional cost to the OWNER. Submit the proposed new finishes to the ENGINEER for approval. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cementitious and component materials required for finishing concrete surfaces: As specified in Section 03300. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMED SURFACES • A. Form removal: Conform to Sections 03100 and 03300. 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03350-1 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Do not damage edges or obliterate the lines of chamfers, rustications or corners when � removing the forms or doing any other work adjacent thereto. C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of conerete. D. Off-Form Finish Remove fins and other projections and fill tie cones and defects as specified in Section 03300. E. Rubbed Finish Immediately upon stripping forms and before concrete changes color, carefully remove all fins with a hammer. While the surface is still damp apply a thin coat of inedium consistency neat cement slurry using bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat within all pits, air holes or blemishes in the parent concrete. Do not coat large areas of the surface with this slurry. 2. Before the slurry dries ar changes color, apply a dry (almost crumbly) grout consisting of one volume cement to 1-1/2 volumes of clean masonry sand having a fineness modulus of approximately 2.25 and complying with the gradation requirements of ASTM C 144. Apply grout uniformly using damp (neither dripping wet nor dry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6-in square used as a float. Scrub grout into the pits and air holes to provide a dense mortar in the imperfections to be patched. Allow the mortar to partially harden for one or two hours depending upon the weather. If • the air is hot and dry, keep the surface damp during this period using a fine, fog spray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the surface with the perpendicular edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout in the small pits or holes, cut off all grout that can be removed with a trowel. Grout allowed to remain on the surface too long will get too hard and will be difficult to remove. 4. Allow the surface to dry and rub it vigorously with clean dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout should remain after this rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started. Do not leave grout on surfaces overnight. Allow grout to dry after it has been cut off with the trowel so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap. 5. On the day following the repair of pits, air holes and blemishes, the surfaces again shall be wiped off clean with dry, used pieces of burlap containing old hardened mortar which will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, there shall be no built-up flm remaining on the parent surface. lf, however, a built-up film remains, use a fne abrasive stone to remove all such material without breaking through the surface film of the original concrete. Scrub lightly to remove excess material without working up a lather or mortar or changing the texture of the concrete. 6. Follow the final bagging or stoning operation with a thorough wash-down with stiff bristle brushes to remove extraneous materials from the surface. Spray the surface with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application of the repair grout. � 6349-79520/10/4/2012 03350-2 � • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ribhts Reserved 7. The Rubbed Finish application may be deleted by the ENGINEER if the unfinished concrete surface is of superior quality and without surface voids. 3.02 FLOORS AND SLABS A. Consider the potential for longer setting time in concrete containing fly ash. B. Compact with internal vibrators as specified in Section 03300 and screed to the established grades. Provide floors and slabs level with a tolerance of 1/8-in when checked with a 12-ft straightedge, except where drains occur, in which case pitch floors to drains as indicated. Failure to meet either of above shall be cause for removal, grinding, or other conection as directed by the ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Following screeding as specified above, float the slabs as approved by the ENGINEER. Continue floating operation until sufficient mortar is brought to the surface to fill all voids. Test the surfaces with a straightedge to detect high and low spots which shall be eliminated. Do not overwark the concrete as evidenced by excess water and fne material on the surface. D. Do not use "jitterbugs" or other special tools designed for the purpose of forcing the coarse aggregate away from the surface and allowing a layer of mortar to accumulate on any slab finish. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials. Round off all edges of slabs and tops of walls with a steel edging tool. Use steel edging tool with radius of 1/4-in for all slabs subject to wheeled traffic. E. Measure floor flatness the day after a concrete floor is finished and before the shoring is removed, in order to eliminate any effects of shrinkage, curling and deflection. A 12-ft long straightedge shall be supported at each end with steel gauge blocks whose thickness are equal to tolerance specifted. Floor surface shall not have crowns so high as to prevent 12-ft straightedge from resting on the two end blocks, nor low spots so low that a third block of twice the tolerance in thickness can pass under the supported straightedge. Compliance with the designated limits in four of five consecutive measurements will confirm compliance, unless obvious faults are observed. A check for adequate slope and drainage will also be made to confirm compliance. F. Descriptions Steel Trowel Finish. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring the surfaces to the elevations indicated. While the concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a person's weight without deep imprint, the surface shall be wood floated to a true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Appiy sufficient pressure on the wood floats to bring moisture to the surface. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand steel trowel to produce a smooth, impervious surface, free from trowel marks. Trowel the surface again for the purpose of burnishing. The final troweling shall produce a ringing sound from the trowel. Do not use dry cement or additional water in troweling. 2. Broomed Finish. Steel trowei finish the concrete, as specified above but omit the final troweling. While the concrete is still soft enough, finish the surface with a stiff coarse fiber broom to produce the pattern and depth of scoring as approved by the ENGINEER. 6349-79520/ 10/4l2012 03350-3 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.03 3.04 APPROVAL OF FINISHES A. All concrete surfaces, when finished, will be inspected by the ENGINEER. B. Refinish or rework unsatisfactory finishes until approved by the ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Hardened unsatisfactory finishes will require removal, grinding, or other appropriate correction approved by the ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER. SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. Finish concrete in the various specified manners either to remain as natural concrete or to receive an additional applied finish or material under another Section. B. Finishes to the base concrete for the following conditions shall be as scheduled below and as further specified herein: 1. Exposed exterior concrete excluding slabs and walking surfaces - Rubbed finish. (Rub open tank walls above and to 1-ft below normal water line). 2. Concrete for exterior on stairs and other horizontal areas - Broomed finish, non-slip. 3. Walls of open topped tanks — Rubbed finish above and to 1-ft below normal water line. Off-form finish from 1-ft below normal water line to base of wall. 4. Concrete stairs, landings and platforms below normal water level in liquid retaining structures — Broomed finish, non-slip. 5. Tops of curbs and pads - Steel trowel finish. 6. Concrete on which liquids flow or are contained — Steel troweled finish. 7. Concrete not exposed in the finished work and not scheduled to receive an additional applied finish or material - Off-form finish at vertical surfaces, consolidate and screed to grade at horizontal surfaces. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/4/2012 03350-4 • • • • C� • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 03600 GROUT PART1 GENERAL 1.O1 1.02 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materiais, eyuipment and incidentals required and install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. B. Concrete reinforcement is included in Section 03200. C. Concrete joints and joint accessories are included in Section 03250. D. Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03300. SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of surface preparation, mixing and installation for: 1. Commercially manufactured non-shrink cementitious. lnclude catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to the specified ASTM standards, and Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Concrete grout. lnclude data as required for concrete as delineated in Section 03300 and for fiber reinfarcement as delineated in Section 03200. B. Samples 1. Submit samples of commercially manufactured grout products when requested by the ENGINEER. 2. Submit samples of aggregates proposed for use in grout mixes when requested by the ENGINEER. C. Laboratory Test Reports 1. For concrete grout, submit laboratory test data as required for concrete as delineated in Section 03300. D. Certifications 1. Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and admixtures for concrete grout are made for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation (non-toxic and free of taste and odor). 6349-79520/10/4/12 03600-1 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Qualifications 1. Submit documentation that grout manufacturers have a minimum of at least 10 years experience in the production and use of the grouts proposed. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) • 1. ASTM C33 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2. ASTM C 150 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement 3. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 4. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures 5. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation 6. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 7. ASTM E329 - Standard specification for agencies engaged in the testing and/or • inspection of materials used in construction B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifcations 1. Grout manufacturers shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production and use of the type of grout proposed. B. Field Testing 1. All field testing and inspection services will be provided by the OWNER. Assist in the sampling of materials, and cooperate by allowing free access to the work and pernvtting the use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be required. Methods of testing will comply with the applicable ASTM Standards. 2. Field testing of concrete grout will be as specified for concrete in Section 03300. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and printed instructions. • 6349-79520/10/4/12 03600-2 � i • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Limit total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation to six months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less. C. Remove immediately from the site material which becomes damp, contains lumps, or is hardened and replace with acceptable material at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. Deliver non-shrink cementitious grout as a pre-portioned blend in prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Non-shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state and bonds to a clean base plate. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.�2 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of yuality desired. B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to provide standardization of appearance. MATERIALS A. Non-shrink Cementitious Grout Non-shrink cementitious grouts: Conform to ASTM C1 ]07. Grouts shall be portland cement based, contain a pre-proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and require only the addition of water. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall e�chibit no shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. a. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Conform to the standards stated above. SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by BASF Building Systems; NS Grout by The Euclid Chemical Co.; Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, lnc., or equal. b. Flowable (Precision) non-shrink cementitious grout: Conform to the standards stated above. Masterflow 928 by BASF Building Systems; Hi-Flow Grout by The Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, lnc., or equal. B. Concrete Grout Conform to the requirements of Section 03300 except as specified herein. Proportion with Type II cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducing admixture and air entraining agent to produce a mix having an average strength of 3500 psi at 28 days (2500 psi nominal strength). Coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8-inch maximum. Slump 6349-79520/10/4/12 03600-3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved shall not exceed 5-in. Minimum cement content shall be 540 lbs per cubic yard and � maximum water to cement ratio shall be 0.45. 2. Add synthetic reinforcing fibers as specified in Section 03200 to the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5 lbs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Add fibers from the manufacturer's pre-measured bags and according to the manufacturer's recommendations to ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete grout. C. Water 1. Potable water free of oil, acid, alkali, salts, chlorides (except those attributable to drinking water), organic matter, or other deleterious substances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Place grout where indicated or specified over cured concrete which has attained its specified design strength unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. B. Concrete surfaces to receive gout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, dirt, dust, grease, oil, form release agent, laitance and paints and free of all loose material or foreign matter which may affect the bond or performance of the grout. C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other dry mechanical means to bond • the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete. Irregular voids ar projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete. D. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oilless type or equipped with an oil trap in the airline to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface. E. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances which may affect the bond or performance of the grout from metal embedments or bottom of baseplates prior to the installation of the grout. F. Wash concrete surfaces clean and then keep moist for at least 24 hours prior to the placement of non-shrink cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, or flooding the surface. Upon completion of the 24 hour period, remove visible water from the surface prior to grouting. G. Provide forms for grout. Line or coat forms with release agents recommended by the gout manufacturer. Provide forms anchored in place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 1. Forms for all grout other than concrete grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the structural requirements or the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, as applicable. • 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 03600-4 � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 1. Support equipment during alignment and installation of grout by shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Grout voids created by the removal of shims, wedges and blocks. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. B. Provide staffing and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand. C. Maintain temperatures of the base plate, supporting concrete, and grout between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours after placement, until grout compressive strength reaches 1000 psi or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Do not allow differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing period. D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 40 to 90 degrees F range. E. Install gout to preserve the isolation between the elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or partial contraction joint. • F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints through the grout. 3.03 INSTALLATION - NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the ENGINEER. • B. Do not mix by hand. Mix in a mortar mixer with moving blades. Pre-wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add pre-measured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. C. Placements greater than 3-in in depth shall include the addition of clean, washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added. D. Provide forms as specifed in Paragraph 3.OIG. Ptace grout into the designated areas and prevent segregation and entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. Fill all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes and vent holes as necessary. E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place grout in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening. 6349-79520/10/4/12 03600-5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 45 degree • angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise ordered and approved by the ENGINEER. Finish this surface with a wood float or brush finish. G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placement, until grout compressive strength reaches 1000 psi or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. Saturate the grout surface by use of saturated burlap bags, soaker hoses or ponding. Provide sunshades. lf drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3.04 INSTALLATION — NON-SHRINK EPDXY GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mix full batches only, to maintain proper proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Do not entrain air bubbles by mixing too quickly. B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90 degrees F. C. Place gout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Place grout in lifts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide forms as specified in Paragraph 3AlG. Place grout into the designated areas and prevent entrapment of air. Fill all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and • adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes and vent holes as necessary. E. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). ln no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness. F. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 1NSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT A. Inspect slabs finished under Section 03350 and scheduled to receive concrete grout. Scarify existing surfaces to receive concrete grout. Protect and keep the surface clean until placement of concrete gout. B. Remove debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all dirt and other foreign materials. Pressure wash the surface. Do not flush debris into tank drain lines. C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the concrete grout by use of saturated burlap bags, soaker hoses or ponding. Remove excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout_ Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-in thick cement paste. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. The following list indicates where the particular types of gout are to be used: • 6349-79520/10/4/ 12 03600-6 • • • �'0':2 CDM Smith At! R i4;h�; Reserved 1. General purpose non-shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where non-shrink grout is indicated on the Drawings, except for base plates greater in area than 3-ft wide by 3-ft long. 2. Flowable (precision) non-shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area than 3-ft wide by 3-ft long. Use at all locations indicated on the Drawings to receive flowable non-shrink grout. 3. Flowable (precision), non-shrink, cementitious grout may be substituted for general purpose non-shrink cementitious grout. 4. Cement grout: Use where indicated on the Drawings. 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/ 12 03600-7 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL I.OI SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete. B. Work under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete. C. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, ar otherwise altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. D. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel and to prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown or specified, line drilling or coring will be required in cutting existing concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete formwork is included in Section 03100. 1.03 B. Concrete reinforcement is included in Section 03200. C. Concrete joints and joint accessories are included in Section 03250. D. Cast in place concrete is included in Section 03300. SUBMITTALS A. Submit a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location. B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions. C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. • 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS 6349-79520/10/4/12 03740-1 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. Z. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. � � J 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown ar specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically supporting the Contractor's personnel. D. Contractor Qualifications: Contractors shall complete a program of instruction in the application of the approved manufacturer's material specified in this Section and provide certification from the manufacturer attesting to their training and status as an approved applicator. E. Furnish a notarized certificate stating that the materials specified meet the requirements and have the manufacturer's current printed literature on the specified product. 1.06 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING • 6349-79520/10/4/12 03740-2 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers. B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations. B. Epoxy Bonding Agent 1. General a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two-component, solvent-free, asbestos-free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional requirements specified herein. 2. Material • a. Properties of the cured material: 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at 28 days. 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 days. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent maximum at 14 days. 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 8) Color: Gray. 3. Approved manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liyuid (LPL) or equal. C. Non-Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Cement Grout, Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout and • Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600. 6349-79520/10/4/12 03740-3 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Adhesive Anchor System shall confirm to ACI 318- Appendix D. E. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 1. General a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two-component, solvent-free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitabte for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being injected. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum at 14 days (injection). 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent maximum at 7 days. . 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000 psi at 14 days dry • plus 12 days moist. 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1380 or equal. b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi-Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1468 or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings. B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. • 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 03740-4 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either side of the joint. D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified priar to drilling using non destructive "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference. 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by chipping or jack-hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings, or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer. B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting/core drilling and no new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4-in. C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of concrete • removal shall be a 1-in deep saw cut on each exposed surface of the existing concrete. D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. • E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the CONTRACTOR to make additional repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such other methods as may be appropriate. 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer. B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. - sandblasting, grinding, etc, as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2-in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2-in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. 6349-79520/10/4/12 03740-5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be incorporated in new . concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided with 1-in minimum cover all around. E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the Engineer. 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been roughened and cleaned, thoroughly saturate and maintain saturation for a period of at least 12 hours. Brush on a 1/16-in layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4-in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing epoxy adhesive. Epoxy adhesive and anchar bolt design shall conform to ACI 318, Appendix D. 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C. 3.04 GROUTING A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600. 3.05 CRACK REPAIR A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16-in in thickness they shali be pressure injected. B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/12 03740-6 • • � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUSMETAL PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Cast in place concrete is included in Section 03300. B. Equipment anchor bolts are included in the respective Sections of Divisions 11 and 15. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • 1.04 A. Submit, in accordance with Section OI300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Shop drawings, showing sizes of inembers, method of assembly, anchorage and connection to other members. 2. Submittals for the new frames attaching to the existing RO Membrane Skid shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. Submittals for the frames shall include the following: a. Shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and erection drawings showing member locations, dimensions, and details of all connections. b. Calculations showing all assumptions, loads, dead and live load deflections. B. Samples 1. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during the course of construction. C. Test Reports i. Certified copy of mill test reports on each steel, stainless steel, and atuminum proposed for use showing the physical properties and chemical analysis. D. Certificates 1. Certify that welders have been qualified under AWS, within the previous 12 months, to perform the welds required under this Section. REFERENCE STANDARDS 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-1 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. AA M31 C22A41 a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin b. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Qualiry. 4. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Plate, Sheet, and Strip Pressure Vessels. 7. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 8. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi Tensile Strength. 9. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 10. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification far Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 11. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 12. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. 13. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strengtl� Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 14. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 15. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 05500-2 • • u c0 :'O 1 � CDM Smith nl! F� z'�;;�: Reserved . 16. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 17. ASTM B695 — Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 18. ASTM F 1554 -Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel E. Federal Specifications • 1. FS-FF-B-575C - Bolts, Hexagonal and Square 2. MIL-P-15145 — Paint, Zinc-Dust for Fresh Water F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) G. Florida Building Code (FBC) H. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 1. 8-02 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified. B. Furnish to the pertinent trades a11 items included under this Section that are to be built into the work of other Sections. C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable AWS • welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1 and welding of aluminum shail 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-3 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved conform to AWS D1.2 and welding of stainless steel shall conform to AWS D1.6. Testing to be conducted and witnessed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Contractor. 1.06 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in suff cient time to be checked priar to installation. B. Repair items that have become damage or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIlZEMENTS A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items. 1.08 DESIGN CWTERIA FOR NEW RO MEMBRANE SKID FRAMES A. Conform to ASCE 8-02. B. Design a minimum of three (3) stainless steel frames. Each frame shall consists of two vertical stainless steel tube columns and a stainless steel beam spanning between them. The frames shall be designed to support the following loads: 1. Self weight. 2 3 Concentrated dead loads (weight of equipment and other permanent construction supported by the stainless steel frame). Uniformly distributed dead loads (weight of equipment and other permanent construction supported by the stainless steel frame) 4. Provide a minimum of three (3) frames with supports approx 4'-0" from each end, and another in the middle. Coordinate with vessel manufacturer for deflection and bending capacity of fiberglass vessels in service conditions. 5. A concentrated load of 2001bf at any point and any direction on each column. This load need not be applied to the beams but shall be applied simultaneously on the two columns. 6. Columns to be welded to the existing 6"x4" tubes at the base. Coordinate frame locations with piping to remain in place, and new piping. 7. Deflection must be limited to L/360 (live load only). 8. The capacity of the existing members which the new frames connect to shall be analyzed. The existing members must have sufficient capacity for the additional load. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-4 • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards: 1. Structural Steel ASTM A36 2. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B 3. Steel Sheets ASTM A 1008 4. Aluminum Extruded Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6 5. Aluminum Extruded Shapes ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6 6. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6 7. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes • a. Exterior, Submerged or Industrial Use ASTM A240, Type 316 (Type 316L for welded) b. Interiar and Architectural Use ASTM A240, Type 304 (Type 304L for welded) 8. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers ASTM A276, Type 316 9. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A(hot dip galvanized nuts and washers where noted) 10. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and washers ASTM A325 (mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50, where noted) a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type I b. General Application Type I or Type II I 1. Galvanizing ASTM A123, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni 12. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni • 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 05500-5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 2.04 2.05 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND FASTENING DEVICES A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM F1554 unless otherwise noted. B. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel machine bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts. C. Adhesive anchor system, for fastening to solid concrete substrate, shall be a system manufactured for the installation of post installed studs including anchoring hardware and chemical dispenser. Injection adhesive shall be a two-component epoxy system including a hardener and a resin, furnished in pre-measured side-by-side cartridges which keep the two components separate. Side-by-side cartridges shall be designed to accept a static mixing nozzle which thoroughly blends the two components and allows injection directly into the drilled hoie. Provide zinc plated carbon steel or Type 316 stainless steel stud assemblies as indicated on the Drawings consisting of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive anchor system shall be Hilti HIT-RE 500-SD; Simpson Strong Tie SET-XP; or equal. Unless otherwise noted, anchorage designs shown on the Drawings are based on Hilti HIT-RE 500-SD, a different product may require a change in anchor location, embedment, or number of anchors. D. All post installed anchors into concrete shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318- Appendix D. ACCESS HATCHES A. Access hatches shall have double leaf doors as indicated by the Drawings. The doors shall be 1/4-in aluminum diamond pattern plate with welded stiffeners, as necessary, to withstand a live load of 300 lbs/sq ft with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span Hatches shall have an aluminum channel frame with a perimeter anchor flange for concrete attachment around the perimeter. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, use pivot torsion bars for counterbalance or spring operators for easy operation along with automatic door hold open. Hardware shall be durable and corrosion resistant with Type 316 stainless steel hardware used throughout. Provide removable lock handle and safety chains. Hatches shall be furnished with a fall protection grating system. For double leaf hatches, safety chains and fall protection grating panels shall be provided. Grating panels shall be constructed of fiberglass, molded in one piece and have load bearing bars in both directions to allow for use without continuous side support. Panel shall be designed to support a 300 PSF live load. The fall protection grating shall be high visibility safety yellow in color. Torsion rod lift assistance shall be provided for ease of operation and a hold open arm shall be included to automatically lock the panel in the fully open 90 degree position. A release handle shall be provided to close the grating paneI and there shall be a provision to lock the panel to prevent unauthorized access.Finish shalt be the factory mill finish for aluminum doors and frames with bituminous coating on surfaces exposed to wastewater. Hatches shall be watertight. Access hatches shall be Type AHD By U.S.F. Fabrication Or Equal. MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-6 • • u OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified ar shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Welding shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration of the aluminum exposed surface. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous aluminum items shall include: beams, angles, hatches and any other miscellaneous aluminum called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supptementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown ar specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and . strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous steel items shall include: beams, angles, support brackets, base plates for other than structural steel or equipment, holddown straps and lugs, door frames, splice plates, and any other miscellaneous steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. D. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments and other functions shall be Schedule 40 pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe, shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length. E. AlI steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter and shall be given one shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Paint shall be omitted within 3-in of proposed field welds. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces. F. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz/sq ft of surface. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL • A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 05500-7 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and • without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to comptete each item thougl� such pieces are not defnitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shal] be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous stainless steel items shall include: RO skid frames, beams, angles, bar racks and any other miscellaneous stainless steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. 2.08 CASTINGS A. Casting shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even-grained, smooth, free from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes and defects of any kind which render them unfit far the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field by the Engineer. All matching surfaces shall be machined to a true plane surface to allow contact surfaces to seat at all points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns so that the thickness specified shall not be reduced in obtaining finished surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less than 95 percent of the theoretical weight computed from dimensions. The Contractor shall provide facilities for weighing castings in the presence of the Engineer. • B. Frames, covers, cast grates and trench drains for structures shall be gray iron castings except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Covers shall have letters "WATER," "SANITARY SEWER," or DRAIN," as applicable, embossed on top. C. Frames and covers for installation in slabs shall be heavy duty, R-6013-R-6099 Series as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. D. Electrical and telephone manhole and handhole frames and covers for structures shall be ductile iron castings. The covers shall be watertight. Covers shall have the word "ELECTRIC," "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," as applicable, embossed on or cast into the top in letters 2-in high. The clear opening shall be 36-in unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete which shall be installed under Division 3. Items to be attached to concrete after such work is completed shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. B. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding. . 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-8 O 20] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shali be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shatl be painted with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL-P-15145. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight. • r� � D. Specialty products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive a 1/4- in thick neoprene isolator pad, 85 plus or minus 5 Share A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support. F. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, insert a 1/4-in thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support. G. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, insert a 1/4-in thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-9 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • • 6349-79520/10/4/12 05500-10 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 06I00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals reyuired and install all items of rough carpentry work complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Install aluminum doors, frames and finish hardware furnished under other Sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Doors and Frames are furnished under Division 8. B. Finish hardware is furnished under Division 8. C. Casework Countertop is included in Section 06200. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) • 1. AWPA P-5 - Standards for Water Borne Preservatives B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C209 — Standard Methods of Testing Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative. • 2. ASTM C518 — Standard Test Method for Heat Flux Measurements and Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 3. ASTM D1621 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 4. ASTM D2126 — Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 5. ASTM E84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 6. ASTM E96 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 6349-79520 06100-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PARTZ PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All lumber shall be of sound stock, delivered dry and shall be fulty protected at all times from injury and dampness. Split, broken, or otherwise damaged pieces will not be allowed in the work. B. Wood for blocking and nailers shall be seasoned, 19 percent maximum moisture content, Construction Grade quality and of Douglas Fir; Southern Pine or Ponderosa Pine species. 1. All wood members shall be vacuum-pressure treated with 100 percent oxide pure alkaline copper quat (ACQ) meeting AWPA Standard P-5. Minimum net retention of solid preservative shall be as follows: a. Above Ground: 0.25 lb per cu. ft. b. Below Ground or Fresh Water Contact/Immersion: 0.40 lb per cu ft. c. Wood Foundation or Structural Poles: 0.60 lb per cu. ft. d. Salt Water Contact/Immersion: 2.SO lb per cu. ft. . 2. All treatment shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Specifications of the American Wood Preservers Association for treating wood. Apply a • heavy coat of the same preservative used in treating to all surfaces cut after treatment. Products containing arsenic in any form shall not be permitted. C. Nails, spikes, bolts, nuts and washers where sizes are not indicated or specified, shall be of suitable size and number as approved to securely fasten and hold members in place. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication except where stainless steel is shown. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All rough carpentry shall be accurately cut, fitted and installed as detailed. B. Anchors shall be installed, where indicated or required, to anchor carpentry securely to masonry or concrete. Secure baffles to stainless steel framing where and as shown. C. Forms for structural concrete work shall be as specified under Division 3. Provide all other miscellaneous wood formwork as may be required for the completion of the work. D. Temporary wood doors and cloth or transparent plastic covered frames shall be provided for exterior wall openings during winter construction. E. Installation of Door Frames in Finished Openings • 6349-79520 06100-2 October 2012 • • �` '<'(?1? CDM Smith i?i t2i«Iits Reserved 1. Install door frame units and accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings, Manufacturer's data and as specified herein. 2. Provide anchorage devices for securing metal frames in finished opening construction. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer's instructions. Leave drilled holes rough, not reamed and free from dust and debris. 3. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 4. Place frames at fire-rated openings in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 5. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. F. Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware: Doors and finish hardware will be furnished under Division 8 and shall be installed under the work of this Section, except where specifically designated otherwise herein. 2. As soon as the hardware is delivered to the job site, receive, verify and check each set and report to the Engineer any defect or shortage. Give notice to the hardware supplier for all such items, which may be defective or missing. Provide a receipt to the hardware supplier for all such items as are found to be correct. Finish hardware, after checking, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor until it is installed and the project is accepted in its entirety by the Owner. 4. Install aluminum and doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and with referenced wood door standards for wood doors, all as shown. 5. Fit aluminum doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances: a. Jambs and Head - 3/32 inch. b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors - 1/8 inch. c. Bottom (where no undercut) - 3/8 inch, where no threshold. d. Bottom (where no undercut) - 1/8 inch, at threshold. e_ Provide undercuts as scheduled. 6. Hardware shall be attached and placed by skilled mechanics in accordance with approved hardware templates provided with the hardware, and shall be accurately ftted and adjusted. Lever handles shall be kept covered with heavy cloth and other hardware shall be protected from damage until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. 7. Set each edge and joint of threshold in a seal strip of polyurethane sealant. Grout • remainder of threshold in mortar. 6349-79520 06100-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 8. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units, which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 10. All doors shall be in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 11. Immediateiy after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat on steel and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION u • 6349-79520 06100-4 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all items of finish carpentry work complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: l. Countertops and Backsplashes 2. Laboratory Faucet 3. Window Sills 1.02 RELATED WORK 1. Rough Carpentry is included in Section 06100. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01300, complete shop drawings showing details of fabrication and erection of all finish carpentry items and material furnished under this Section. B. Submit three fully finished samples of each of the following items. Samples will be reviewed for appearance and fnish only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Submit a representative sample of finished cabinetry to include door and drawer assembly, and to include hardware (hinges, track magnetic catches, etc). Cabinetry should demonstrate not only substrate material used but veneer as well. 2. Counter construction - Solid molded polymer surfacing material with required edge condition and support construction - 3/4-in thick x 12-in x 12-in. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) l. AWPA P-5 - Standards for Water Borne Preservatives B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid • opening shall apply. 6349-79520 06200-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.OS 1.06 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For finish carpentry items, comply with the specified provisions of the "Architectural Woodwork Qua}ity Standards' Illustrated" of the AWI Custom Grade Standards. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in undamaged condition, stored in fully covered, well ventilated areas, and protected from extreme changes in humidity and temperature. B. In event of damage immediately furnish necessary repairs or replacements. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and maximum relative humidity of 25 percent to 55 percent. At least seven days before installation, maintain temperature of 70 degrees F. and relative humidity of 50 percent to 55 percent. Acclimate materials to the installation temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours prior to installation. Maintain conditions until Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 SINKS � A. Sinks used with Kemresin countertop surfaces shall be a molded of modified epoxy resin, carefully compounded with selected materials to provide maximum physical and chemical • properties. Sinks shall be non glaring, black in color, with all inside corners coved and the bottom pitched to the drain outlet. Sinks shall be provided with sink outlet, crossbars and threaded tailpiece. Sinks shall possess a high resistance to mechanical and thermal shock in excess of that required for scientific laboratory use. l. Physical Properties: Flexural Strength (ASTM Method D790) 15,000 lbs/sq in Compressive Strength (ASTM Method D695) 30,000 lbs/sq in Hardness, Rockwell M(ASTM Method D785) 100 Water Absorption (ASTM Method D570) Percent by weight, 24 hours 004 Percent by weight, 7 days 0.05 Percent by weight, 2 hour boil - 0.04Speciiic Gravity - 1.97 Tensile Strength — 8,500 psi MIXING GOOSENECK FAUCET A. Deck mounted hot and cold water mixing gooseneck faucet shall be chrome plated brass. It shall have an 8-in spread rigid gooseneck equipped with a removable straight serrated hose connector. Flanged inlets on 3-in centers, with 3/8-in I.P.S. nipples, locknuts and washers. Model number W-0340-OV as manufactured by Kewaunee Scientific Corporation, or equal. 2.03 COUNTERTOPS 6349-79520 06200-2 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • A. Countertops, curbs, backsplashes, and working surfaces shall be epoxy resin as specified above for sinks and cup drains. B. Epoxy Resin tops shall consist of modified epoxy resin that has been especially compounded and cured to provide the optimum physical and chemical resistance properties required of a heavy-duty laboratory table top. Tops and curbs shall be a uniform mixture throughout their full thickness, and shall not depend upon a surface coating that is readily removed by chemical and-or physical abuse. Tops and curbs shall be non-glaring. Tops and curbs shall be 1-in thick, exposed edges beveied top and bottom, and drip grooves provided on the underside at all exposed edges. Curbs shall be 4-in high at standing height countertops and 2-in high at sitting height countertops. Curbs at the backs and ends of tops shall be 1-in thick and bonded to the deck to form a square watertight joint. Sink cutouts shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks with the top edge beveled. The bottom edge of the sink opening shall be finished smooth with the edge broken to prevent sharpness. Corners of sink cutout shall by radiused not less than 3/4-in. Provide Kewaunee Silicone or equal black silicone sealer to seal sinks to underside of tops, for joints between pieces and to form a radius cove filler, vertical to horizontal planes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 A 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. • B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. I. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form feld joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a) Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written • recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 6349-79520 06200-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 8. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. • 9. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm) sag, how or other variation from a straight line. B. Coved backsplashes and sidesplashes: 1. Provide coved backsplashes and sidesplashes at all walls and adjacent millwork. 2. Fabricate radius cove at intersection of counters with backsplashes to dimensions shown on the drawings. 3. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color-matched Joint Adhesive. C. Integral sinks/vanities: 1. Provide solid surface materials bowls and/or lavatories sinks with overflows in locations shown on the drawings. 2. Secure sinks and lavatory bowls to tops using manufacturer's recommended sealant, adhesive and mounting hardware to maintain warranty. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. Remove debris, rubbish and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site. • 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 06200-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 07201 BATT INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install batt insulation as shown and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction, details, and manufacturer's recommendations for installation of all required products and systems. B. Samples 1. Submit two representative samples of proposed materials a minimum of 90 days prior to use of the materials at the site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of Work in this Section before installation of the materials specified under this Section. 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 2. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. I.06 PRODUCT HANDLiNG AND STORAGE A. Storage 1. Insulation packages shall be labeled to include the material product name and physical properties. 2. Insulation shall be stored with full protection against dampness. 3. It shall be kept under waterproof covering, inside closed-in buildings and shall be kept above the ground on blocking or similar arrangement that keeps the insulation off of • grade and that allows free air circulation around it. 6349-79520 07201-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART2 PRODUCTS 2.O1 MATERIALS A. Batt insulation shall be fiberglass, conforming to ASTM C665, and thicknesses as shown. 1. Thermallnsulation: � a. Type: Thermal batts, of inorganic glass fibers. b. Vapor Barrier: Aluminum foil adhered to fiberglass with flame-retardant adhesive and UL flame spread less than 25. Perm rating shall be 0.02 perms maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, desiccant method. c. Thickness/thermal rating as indicated on drawings. d. Width as appropriate for stud spacing. e. Batt length shall be 96-in, or complete length as required, with no horizontal splices. 2. Sound Attenuation Insulation � a. Type: Friction fit fiberglass batts. b. Thickness/thermal rating as indicated on drawings. c. Width as appropriate for stud spacing. • d. Batt length shall be 96-in, or complete length as required, with no horizontal splices e. STC 50 f. UL U465 one-hour fire rating. B. Manufacturers shall be the following or equal: 1. Thermal Batt Insulation Aluminum Foil Faced a. Certain Teed ("FSK-25") b. Owens-Corning ("FS-25") c. Manville ("FSK-25") PART 3 EXECUTION 3 A 1 INSTALLATION A. Install batt insulation where shown and as required to maintain its uncompressed density. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 07201-2 October 2012 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Riy�hts Reserved SECTION 07900 JO1NT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to perform all caulking, sealants, joint fillers, and related work necessary for the proper completion of the project as required by the Drawings and as specified herein. APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Caulk all exterior wall joints, between adjacent materials, joints between frames or louvers and adjacent materials, copings, masonry control joints, and all other joints shown on the Drawings or required for the completion of the work. Joints noted as "caulk," "caulking," or "sealant" shall be caulked as specifed herein. B. Caulk all interior joints between frames and masonry, at tops of masonry walls, between masonry and structural concrete, floor joints in tile, joints in rooms to be airtight, and all other joints shown on the Drawings or required for the completion of the work. C. Install compressible filler as shown on the drawings. RELATED WORK A. Doors and Frames are included in Division 8. B. Glazing is included in Division 8. C. Aluminum Louvers are included in Division 10. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300, shop drawings, working drawings, and product data including detailed product information and colors on materials proposed and material installation methods. B. Submit for review two sets of special-colored sealant samples in representative quantities. Resubmit until approved. C. Submit for review two sets of representative samples of any or all other proposed materials required for the work of this Section as requested by the Engineer. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): • 1. ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 6349-79520 07900-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 2. ASTM D395 - Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set 3. ASTM D412 - Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 4. ASTM D573 - Test Method for Rubber-Deterioration in an Air Oven 5. ASTM D695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 6. ASTM D790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 7. ASTM D1002 - Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal to Metal) 8. ASTM D1149 - Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Gacking in a Chamber (Flat Specimens) 9. ASTM D 1708 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics by Use of Microtensile Specimens 10. ASTM D2228 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Abrasion Resistance (Pico Abrader) 11. ASTM D2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness B. Federal Specifications . 1. FS-HH-F-341 - Fillers, Expansion Joint; Bituminous (Asphalt and Tar) and Nonbituminous (Preformed For Concrete) C. Sealants and Waterproofers Institute (SWI) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Caulking 1. Standards a. SWI b. ASTM C920 2. All colors for caulking above grade in the superstn►cture of the building shall be selected by the Engineer. 3. Exterior and interior sealant for joints on the horizontal plane shall be a two-part, pour grade polyurethane base, ASTM C920-87 Type M, Grade P, Class 25, THC-900 by • 6349-79520 07900-2 October 2012 • • • n 2012 C'DM Smith A[! Ri�l��ts Reserved Tremco; Sonolastic SL2 by Sonneborn; or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Exterior and interior sealant for joints on all other surfaces shall be a one-part, gun grade, polyurethane ASTM C920-87 Type S, Grade NS Class 25, Dymonic by Tremco; Sonolastic NP1 by Sonneborn; or equal. Primer shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Joint backing for joints in superstructure shall be approved closed cell polyethylene rods of diameters to suit joint conditions. Where joint depth will not allow for a rod and still provide 1/4-in. minimum depth of sealant, provide approved bond breaker tape at the bottom of the joint. B. Compressible filler shall be foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polybutylene waterproofing material. When compressed to 50 percent of its original volume, filler shall hold a head of 6 ft. of water, and a head of 10 ft. of water when compressed 60 percent. Filler shall maintain its resiliency to allow for installation in temperatures as slow as 40EF. Filler shall remain waterproof at 50 percent compression between temperatures of -40EF and 200EF. Elongation shall be at least 325 percent with a tensile strength of not less than 53 psi. The polybutylene compound shall not migrate in the polyurethane strip. Compressible filler shall be Polytite by Sandell Manufacturing Company; Combriband by Secoa Corporation, Division of Phoenix Building Products, Incorporated; or equal. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Caulking All joints to receive sealant shall be cleaned, primed, backfilled, and caulked in complete accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Sealant shall be applied generally to a square section configuration. Minimum depth of joint shall be 1/4-in. and maximum 1/2-in. For joints greater than 1/2-in. wide, provide sealant in a 2 to 1 width-to-depth ratio. 3. The surfaces of all materials adjoining caulked joints shall be cleaned free of all smears of sealant or other soiling due to caulking operations. B. Installation of Compressible Filler Install compressible filler according to the Manufacturer's written instructions for the situation where it is used. C. Indoor Air Quality: 6349-"79520 Temporary ventilation: Provide temporary ventilation during work of this Section. a. Coordinate interior application of joint sealants with interior finishes schedule. 07900-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • END OF SECTION �� • 6349-79520 07900-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and deliver the following as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Steel hollow-metal doors. 2. Pressed-metal door frames. 3. All fasteners, frame closure pieces, system reinfarcing and appurtenances required. 4. Doors and frames shall be galvanized steel. 1 A2 RELATED WORK A. Installation of frames in completed openings is included in Section 06100 but as specified herein. • B. Finish hardware is included in Section 08710. • C. Field painting is included in Division 9. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings of all metal doors, frames and appurtenances. Shop drawings shall show each door and frame type, schedule of doors and frames, door and frame elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints, connections and trim, and frame anchorage meeting Code requirements. 1. The Contractor shall provide to local authorities, if required, manufacturer's anchorage details meeting project design loads and specific Code requirements for this jurisdiction, for door frames submitted. B. Shop drawings shall show elevations and details of each frame type, schedule of doors and frames, frame elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thickness' and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints and connections and trim. C. Hardware templates shall be furnished to the door manufacturer by the Contractar for correct hardware alignment and reinforcing. D. Provide samples and certification as follows: 6349-79520 08110-1 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Frame corner with 6-in long legs showing construction with the galvanized material � specified, welding, touch-up and priming. 2. Door panel corner, 6-in square, showing door and insulating materials, construction and finishing as specified above. 3. Provide certification as approved that all materials, construction requirements and fire ratings herein specified will be met in the project. 4. If required by Engineer, provide independent laboratory testing, conforming to ASTM E376, of galvanized coating on samples of the door and frame submitted for approval to confirm thicknesses of zinc on base metal. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A153 - Specification for Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zino-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A526 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip Process, Commercial Quality. 4. ASTM E376 - Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic- Field or Eddy- • Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A 115 - Specification for Preparation of Steel Doors and Frames for Hardware. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide custom hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. Hollow metal work shall conform to Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) standards for commercial hollow metal doors and frames except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Doors and panels shall be individually wrapped in corrugated cardboard with wood strips on vertical edges and banded with metal straps. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction operations. Handle in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. • 6349-79520 08110-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized steel sheets - Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, comp3ying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. B. Zinc-rich touch-up primer - 95 percent metallic zinc dust primer in a vehicle compatible with the specified painting system. C. Supports and anchors - Fabricate of not less than 16 gauge sheet metal. Galvanize after fabrication units complying with ASTM A153, Class B. D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners - Hot-dip galvanize, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. E. Rust inhibitive primer - Air drying or baking type as approved compatible with epoxy finish paints. Provide non-standard primer if required to obtain approval for compatibility. 2A2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Fit and assemble units in the Manufacturer's plant including units which are approved to be partially disassembled and field . spliced. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, dress and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects is not acceptable. Clearly identify work that cannot, where approved, be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. B. Exposed fasteners - Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. Prepare metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A I 15 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. D. Reinforce metal units to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. E. Shop Painting - Clean, treat and paint exposed galvanized surfaces of fabricated metal units. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease and other foreign materials and apply approved zinc-rich primer to galvanized surfaces damaged in fabrication. 2. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution or hot phosphate solution. 3. Apply one full shop coat of rust inhibitive primer within time limits recommended by • pretreatment manufacturer. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 6349-79520 08110-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith Alt Rights Reserved . 2.03 DOORS A. General Provide flush design doors, 1-3/4-in thick, seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For single-acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8-in in 2-in. 3. Provide filler of mineral-wool or other approved insulating material solidly packed full door height to fill voids between inner core reinforcing members. No asbestos products will be allowed. B. Galvanized Steel Doors Fabricate doors of two outer, galvanized, stretcher-leveled steel sheets not less than 16 gauge. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges. Provide weep hole openings in the bottom of doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 2. Reinforce inside of doors with vertical galvanized sheet steel sections not less than 22 gauge. Space vertical reinforcing 6-in o.c. and extend full door height. Spot-weld at not more than 5-in o.c. to both face sheets. 3. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with 16 gauge horizontal steel channels welded • continuously to outer sheets. Close top and bottom edges to provide seal, as integral part of door construction while providing recesses for required hardware and appurtenances. C. Finish hardware reinforcement — Reinforce doors using galvanized steel for required finish hardware, as follows: l. Hinges — Steel plate 3/16-in thick by 1-1/2-in wide by 6-in longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot-welds. 2. Mortise locksets and dead bolts — 14 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot-welds. 3. Cylinder locks — 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot-welds. 4. Surface-applied closers — 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than six spot-welds. 5. Other required comparable reinforcements as submitted and approved. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide pressed metal frames for doors, side-lights, borrowed lights and for other openings where shown, of size and profile as indicated. B. Fabricate frames of full-welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously welded full depth and width of frame. No field spliced frames will be allowed. • 6349-79520 08110-4 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Form frames of 14 gauge galvanized steel sheets. D. Finish hardware reinforcement - Reinforce frames using galvanized steel for required finish hardware, as follows: Hinges - Steel plate 3/16-in thick by 1-1/2-in wide by 6-in longer than hinge, secured by not less than six spot-welds. � 2. Strike plate clips - Steel plate 3/16-in thick by 1-1/2-in wide by 3-in long. Surface-applied closers - 12 gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than six spot-welds. 4. Other required comparable reinforcements as submitted and approved. E. Jamb anchors - Furnish jamb anchors as required to secure frames to adjacent construction, formed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel. F. Floor anchors - Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion which extends to floor, formed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet, as follows: 1. Monolithic concrete slabs - Clip type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. • G. Head reinforcing - For frames over 4-ft-0-in wide in masonry wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, not less than 12 gauge for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. H. Spreader bars - Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 2.05 DOOR AND FRAME STOPS A. Provide stops in frames to receive glass and doors, where indicated and as shown. B. Form fixed stops integral with frame unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide removable stops where indicated or required, on secured room side of opening, formed of not less than 18 gauge steel sheets. Secure with oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12-in o.c. Form corners with butted hairline joints. D. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass and type of installation indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings, • Manufacturer's data and as specified herein. 6349-79520 08110-5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. The Contractor shall install the components of this Section to comply with the requirements of • I.OS.B of this Section. C. Placing Frames - Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND TOUCH-UP A. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520 08110-6 October 2012 • �O 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART] GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install flush and tubular aluminum doors, aluminum frames and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, as scheduled and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Installation of frames in finished openings is included in Division 6. B. Installation of doors is included in Division 6. F. Finish hardware is furnished under Section 08710 except as specified herein. G. Glazing is included in Section 08800. SUBMITTALS • A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings of all metal doors, frames and appurtenances. Shop drawings shall show each door and frame type, schedule of doors and frames, door and frame elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints, connections and trim, and frame anchorage meeting Code requirements. The Contractor shall provide to local authorities, if required, manufacturer's anchorage details meeting project design loads and specific Code requirements for this jurisdiction, for door frames submitted. B. Hardware templates shall be furnished to the door manufacturer by the Contractor for correct hardware alignment and reinforcing. C. Submit to the hardware supplier the requirements of any hardware for exterior doors that is necessary to be a component of the door system in order to conform to the Florida Building Code. D. Submit to the glazing supplier the requirements of any glazing for exterior doors that is necessary to be a component of the door system in order to conform to the Fiorida Building Code. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage and installation of doors and frames. • F. Operation and Maintenance Data 6349-79520 08120-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved l. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for care and cleaning of doors and frames. • G. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.OS.A Quality Assurance shall be included with the initial submittal for the products. H. Provide copy of current, valid statewide product approval for product, material or system as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section, in accordance with Rule 9N-3. Product approval shall be for the specific manufacturer, product type, model or style, and the State Approval Number. The successful Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible to file the appropriate Product Approval information with the local authority having jurisdiction. Provide samples and certification as follows: 1. Frame corner with 6-in long legs showing construction with the galvanized material specified, welding, touch-up and priming. 2. Door panel corner, 6-in square, showing door and insulating materials, construction and finishing as specified above. 3. Provide certification as approved that all materials, construction requirements and fire ratings herein specified will be met in the project. 4. If required by Engineer, provide independent laboratory testing, conforming to ASTM E376, of galvanized coating on samples of the door and frame submitted for approval to confirm thicknesses of zinc on base metal. • A. Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA) 1. AA 5005-H 14 - Sheet Architectural 2. AA 6061-T6 - Heavy Duty Structures 3. AA 6063-TS - Extrusions, Pipe, Architectural B. Federal Specifications FS HH-1-529B - Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Aggregate) C. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA} AAMA 609 - Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodized Aluminum 2. AAMA 610 - Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Painted Aluminum Extrusions and Curtain Wall Panels 3. AAMA 701 - Specification for Pile Weatherstrip D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) • 6349-79520 08120-2 October 2012 • � • C` 20 i?_ CDM Smith Ail i:��Jl,ts Reserved 1.06 1.07 ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation 2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products specified in this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer specializing in the fabrication of aluminum doors and frames with not less than five years of successful experience in the fabrication of aluminum doors and frames of the type required far this project. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this Section shall comply with project specific calculated design pressures and the Florida Building Code (Code), including wind-borne debris region requirements, and shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to meet these requirements. Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specified in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Florida Building Commission, Product Approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All exterior doors and components shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to withstand wind pressures, both positive and negative and salient corner conditions as calculated in accordance with the BuiIding Code to withstand the wind load required by the Building Code. B. At no additional cost to the Owner, provide additionat, non-standard door bracing, reinforcements or heavier gauge materials required in order to conform to wind load and the requirements of 1.06 and 2.01.A herein. C. Aluminum Door and Frame System shall be Alutech Corporation Series 2001 Outswinging Insulated Commercial Door and Frame. 6349-79520 08120-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.02 DOORS A. AIuminum flush doors shall be 1-3/4-in thick, completely flush in design, constructed with extruded aluminum alloy 6063-TS tubular jamb rails (0.125-in lock side, 0.190-in hinge side) and minimum 0.090-in thick smooth aluminum alloy 5005-H34 face sheets. B. Internal grid system shall consist of a 4-1/2-in, 0.080-in extruded aluminum tubular sections. Top and bottoms of doors shall be reinforced with (5-1/2-in) and tied to jamb rails with 3/8-in plated steel rods, nuts and washers. Jamb rails shall be 4-7/16-in hinge rail and 4-9/16-in lock rails so that no portion of the locksets, exit devices or other hardware project into the core area of the door. The perimeter of all cut outs shall be reinforced with same section. All internal members shall be anodized (Aluminum Association AA-C22A31). C. All voids in doors between grid sections shall be filled with a rigid, high density, waterproof, noncombustible mineral insulation conforming to FS HH-1-529b, polyisocyanurate FS HH-I- 530, or other self extinguishing, insulating stiffening material; ASTM E84 flamespread 25. D. The face panels shall be bonded to the perimeter, grid sections and core with a thermosetting two component epoxy adhesive. Doors shall be completely reinforced for and shop fabricated to receive all specified hardware. Reinforcement shall be 6061-T6 alloy, 0.250-in thick, minimum. Doors shall be Series 2901 Flush Aluminum Door by AluTech Corporation or approved equal. . E. Provide transom panels where shown of same construction and thickness as doors. Provide continuous, 1/8-in min. thick aluminum angles and 300 Series stainless steel, oval head screws • to secure transom panels to frame stops, three sides interior, all as approved. 2.03 FRAMES, VISION PANELS AND MISCELLANEOUS A. Frames shall be 0.125-in minimum wall thickness, extruded tubular 6063-TS aluminum alloy with pile weather-stripped doorstops_ B. Frame joints and components shall be factory milled and fitted to hairline cracks. Corners shall be mechanically joined with interlocking 3/16-in wall, aluminum channel clips and flat head stainless steel screws. Frames shall be completely fabricated and reinforced for all hardware as specified in Section 08710. C. Vision panels shall have extruded aluminum snap-in glazing bead on interior sides of door. Provide extruded aluminum theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads to receive glass thickness (as required by Specification Section 08800) with compound glazing. Glazing beads shall have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Provide non-standard glazing beads and additional reinforcement as required to comply with 1.04.A. herein. 2.04 FINISH A. Finish shall be clear anodized conforming to AA C22A41. 2.05 PACKING A. Doors shall be individually wrapped in corrugated cardboard with wood strips on vertical edges and banded with metal straps. • 6349-79520 08120-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . • � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENT AND TOUCH-UP A. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable_ END OF SECTION 6349-79520 08120-5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � U THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK u • 6349-79520 08120-6 October 2012 i . • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 08512 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install aluminum storefront system, including associated door(s) and hardware, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Glazing is included in Section 08800. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section OI 300, shop drawings of all aluminum storefront systems showing details of materials, construction and erection of storefront system and appurtenances. Shop drawings shall show door and window frame elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints, connections and trim, and frame anchorage meeting Code requirements. The Contractor shall provide to local authorities, if required, manufacturer's anchorage details meeting project design loads and specific Code requirements for this jurisdiction, for door frames submitted. 2. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.OS.A, Quality Assurance, shall be included with the initial submittal for the products specified. B. Submit two full size samples of fxed window corners showing materials, construction and fnish as applicable. Resubmit as required until approved. C. Provide copy of current, valid statewide product approval for product, material or system as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section, in accordance with Rule 9N-3. Product approval shall be for the specific manufacturer, product type, model or style, and the State Approval Number. The successful Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible to file the appropriate Product Approval information with the local authority having jurisdiction. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 2. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 6349-79520 08512-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith A11 Rights Reserved B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid � opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this section shall comply with project wind loads and the Florida Building Code (Code). Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall supply a two (2) year written warranty from the Manufacturer to cover defects in materials and/or workmanship. B. The warranty specified in this section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this Section shall comply with project specific calculated design pressures and the Florida Building Code (Code), including wind-borne debris region requirements, and shall be • designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to meet these requirements. Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specifcation and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specified in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Florida Building Commission, Product Approval. 1.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 CFM/SF when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a test pressure of 6.24 PSF (50 MPH). B. There shall be no uncontrolled water entry when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a static test pressure of 624 PSF. C. Structural performance shall be based on a maximum allowable deflection of L/175 of the span. D. Exterior Storefront systems shall meet Project wind loading requirements. Interior Storefront systems shall meet applicable code requirements for lateral loads. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING • 6349-79520 08512-2 October 2012 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. All materials for the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM A. Provide aluminum storefront system as shown for 1-5/16-in Low-e Impact Resistant glazing meeting performance criteria specified above. System shall be Kawneer Series IR-501 Aluminum Storefront or approved equal. Provide means as approved for preventing glass from walking out of setting under maximum wind loading. B. Extrusions shall be of aluminum alloy 6063-TS extruded within commercial tolerance and free from defects impairing strength and/or durability. Main framing sections to be of 0.093-in minimum thickness and glazing stop moldings of 0.062-in thickness. C. Screws, bolts and all other accessories shall be Type 304 stainless steel. D. Glazing gaskets shall be extruded EPDM, exterior and interior of glass and mated to grooves in the frame members, all as approved. E. Storefront System Door(s) and Associated Hardware 1. Doors for storefront system shall be Kawneer 350 IR entrance door system, or approved equal. 2. Door(s) shall be Medium Stile type with 3-1/2" stiles, 3-1/2" top rail and 6-1/2" bottom rail. Wall of the stiles and rails shall be 3/16". Wall thickness of the frame jamb and headers shall be 3/16". Depth of door rails and stiles shall be 2". 3. The frame jamb and headers shall be 2" x 4-1/2" flush glaze sections. 4. Square aluminum horizontal and beveled vertical snap-in glass stops, with a lock-in elastomeric gasket, shall be provided to accommodate 1" giass thickness. 5. Standard hardware shall be: Heavy duty push/pull bars with 4-in x 12-in pull handle and 4—in x 12-in push plate, mounted on a 2-in x 3/4-in bar. Push/pulls shall have a smooth comfortable grip and concealed mechanical fastening. Operating hardware shall be three equally spaced 4-1/2-in x 5-in heavy duty ball bearing brass butt hinges with non- removable pin. 6. Panic device shall be Dur-o-matic 1690 concealed vertical rod panic device, Sargent, or approved equal. Device shall be provided and installed by the door manufacturer. 7 Cylinder/Thumbtum shall be of the same manufacture, and keyed similar to the locking cylinders used on other exterior doors as approved by the Owner and Engineer. • 8. Threshold shall be bump threshold aluminum mill finish. Closer shall be overhead concealed. 6349-79520 08512-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 9. Extruded aluminum for interior storefront system doors shall be AA-6063-TS alloy. l0. Provide sound seals/weatherstripping as specified in Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 11. All glazing materials shall be elastomeric glazing gaskets. Refer to Section 08800 Glazing for additiona! requirements. 2.02 FINISH A. Finish shall be clear anodized conforming to AA C22A41. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installation shall be performed by workmen experienced in the erection of these types of components. B. Install glass units in conformance with the methods and materials utilized in testing the windows for approval for Code Compliance. Caulk metal-to-metal joints as windows are installed and provide pressure sensitive vinyl film on aluminum surfaces to be in contact with dissimilar metals. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect aluminum work and finish against harmful substances and construction activities. • B. Remove any protective coatings and clean aluminum surfaces with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials shall be repaired or materiais replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.03 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Repair or replace damaged work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 08512-4 October 2012 • L � • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 08522 FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.0] 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install fixed aluminum windows, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Glazing is included in Section 08800. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings of all fixed aluminum windows, frames and appurtenances. Shop drawings shall show each window and frame type, schedule of windows and frames, window and frame elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, location and installation requirements for hardware, thickness of materials, joints, connections and trim, and frame anchorage meeting Code requirements. The Contractor shall provide to local authorities, if required, manufacturer's anchorage details meeting project design loads and specific Code requirements for this jurisdiction, for door frames submitted. B. Submit two full size samples of fixed window corners showing materials, construction and finish as applicable. Resubmit as required until approved. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage and installation of windows and frames. D. Operation and Maintenance Data Submit Manufacturer's instructions for care and cleaning of windows and frames. E. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.05 Quality Assurance shall be included with the initial submittal for the products_ F. Provide copy of current, valid statewide product approval for product, material or system as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section, in accordance with Rule 9N-3. Product approval shall be for the specific manufacturer, product type, model or style, and the State Approval Number. The successful Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible to file the appropriate Product Approval information with the local authority having jurisdiction. G. Submit to the glazing supplier the requirements of any glazing for exterior windows that is necessary to be a component of the window system in order to comply with the Florida Building Code. 6349-79520 08522-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. ASTM E330 - ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products specified in this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer specializing in the fabrication of aluminum window systems with not less than five years of successful experience in the fabrication of aluminum window systems of the type required for this proj ect. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this • Section shall comply with project specific calculated design pressures and the Florida Building Code (Code), including wind-borne debris region requirements, and shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to meet these requirements. Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shail apply. B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specified in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Flarida Building Commission, Product Approval. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a test pressure of 6.24 psf (50 mph). B. There shall be no water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure of 16.5 psf. C. When uniform design load is tested in accordance with ASTM E330, permanent deformation , shall not exceed 0.549-in. • 6349-79520 08522-2 October 2012 C � • � J �� 2�1 i 2 CDM Smith �1�� i'i��l��s Reserved U E ' .�K When uniform structural load is tested in accordance with ASTM E330, permanent deformation shall not exceed 0.192-in. System shall meet Project wind loading requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials for the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 GENERAL A. All exteriar components shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to withstand wind pressures, both positive and negative and salient corner conditions as calculated in accordance with the Building Code to withstand the wind load required by the Building Code. B. At no additional cost to the Owner, provide additional, non-standard bracing, reinforcements or heavier gauge materials required in order to conform to wind load and the requirements of 1.O5.A and 2.Ol.A herein. EXTERIOR FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOW SYSTEM A. Provide exterior storefront system as shown for low-e impact resistant glazing meeting the performance criteria specified above and in Specification 08800. System shall be Kawneer Series AA900, or approved equal. Provide means as approved for preventing glass from walking out of setting under maximum wind loading. B. Aluminum sections shall be extruded aluminum AA-6063-TS alloy within commercial tolerance and free from defects impairing strength and/or durability. C. Mullions shall have a 2-3/4-in face dimension by 2-5/8-in depth, and be a custom fn-type tube with glass stop. At head and jamb locations, members shall have a two-piece construction; a basic member with a snap-on glass stop to facilitate glazing. Horizontal and vertical mullions shall be three piece construction; a basic member with two snap-on glass stop to facilitate glazing. � L Screws, bolts, and other accessories shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Giazing materials shall be Norton V2100 Series Tape, Dow-Corning 795 silicone and elastomeric glazing gaskets. F. Provide all exterior applications with 8 gauge aluminum sill extensions. Finish to match frames. 2.03 FINISH A. Finish shall be clear anodized conforming to AA C22A41. 6349-79520 08522-3 October 2012 OO 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installation shall be performed by warkmen experienced in the erection of these types of components. B. Install windows in conformance with the methods and materials utilized in testing the windows for approval for Code Compliance. Caulk metal-to-metal joints as windows are installed and provide pressure sensitive vinyl film on aluminum surfaces to be in contact with dissimilar metals. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect aluminum work and finish against harmful substances and construction activities. B. Remove any protective coatings and clean aluminum surfaces with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials shall be repaired or materials replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.03 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Repair or replace damaged work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. • END OF SECTION � �J 6349-79520 08522-4 October 2012 . • u O 2012 CDM Smith All I�i�l:ts Reserved SECTION 087 ] 0 FINISH HARDWARE PARTi GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and deliver to the project site all finish hardware for hinged doors as hereinafter specified and scheduled. Provide padlocks as specified and in quantity scheduled. B. Hardware for exterior doors may be a component of a door system required to conform to the Florida Building Code (Code). Coordinate the hardware schedule for those doors with the appropriate supplier to ensure compliance with the Code. C. Furnish all templates and schedules reyuired by the manufacturers of the metal doors and frames to enable the Manufacturer's to make proper provision in their work to receive the finish hardware. All locks, lock strikes and flush bolts shall be made to ANSI standard dimensions. D. Coordinate key cylinders with the County's master key system. RELATED WORK A. InstalIation of hardware is included under Division 6. B. Doors are included in other Sections of Division 8. SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. If required by the Engineer, a sample of each item of hardware proposed for use shall be submitted for approval. B. Hardware Schedules 1. Submit to the Engineer a complete hardware schedule as provided in Section 01300 for shop drawings. Provide catalogue cuts for each item of hardware. 2. No templates shall be distributed until the hardware schedule and any required samples have been approved by the Engineer. 3. Provide approved physical hardware items to door manufacturers as required for fabrication onto doors. C. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.OS.B, Regulatory Requirements, shall be included with the initial submittal for the products specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6349-79520 08710-1 October 20I2 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. The hardware supplier shall have in his/her employ one or more members of the American • Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for the preparation and execution of the work of this Section. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT A. Hardware for exterior doors may be a component of a door system required to conform to the Code. Coordinate the hardware schedule for those doors with the appropriate supplier to ensure compliance with the project specific calculated design pressures, including wind-borne debris region requirements, Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specified in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Florida Building Commission, Product Approval. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts and fastenings necessary for proper installation, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. Each package shall be legibly labeled, indicating that portion of the work for which it is intended. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.05 MATERIALS A. All hardware shall be best grade, entirely free from imperfections in manufacture and finish. Qualities, weights and sizes specified herein are the minimum that will be accepted. All UL labeled doors shall have UL approved hardware, except that hinges which are not UL approved shall have a melting point of greater than 2000 degrees F. B. Hardware Items Hinges - Stainless steel, Stanley FBB191, three 4-1/2-in by 4-1/2-in. Equals - Hager, McKinney. 2. Door Closers - Sargent 281 Series (cast iron bodies). Covers shall be primed compatible with finished paint specified except with plastic covers, no priming required. Provide with cushion stop arm where no separate stop is provided and with other arm functions as scheduled. Equals - LCN4000 Series. 3. Kick Plates - Stainless Steel, 6-in high by 0.050-in thick by 2-in less width of door (LWOD), 1-in LWOD, at double doors. L� 4. Stops - Ives 436 or 438 as required by floor condition. Other stops as scheduled. Equals - Baldwin, Quality. • 6349-79520 08710-2 October 2012 • i • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rigllts Reserved 5. Flush Bolts — Glynn-Johnson FB6W forged brass, U2 inch diameter flattened bolt tip and standard 12 inch rod. 6. Sound/Weather Seals - Zero 153A sill protection x Zero ] 88N Surface type neoprene head and jambs. 7 3 0 Meeting stile - Zero 328 each leaf on inside. All clear aluminum except provide in bronze anodized finish at bronze anodized/bronze colored doors. Equals - Pemko, Reese. Silencers - Glynn-Johnson GJ 64. Equals - Baldwin, Quality. Thresholds - Zero 655 5-in thresholds in aluminum (unless otherwise noted). Zero 65A 5- in threshold in aluminum for latch track hardware applications. Equals - Pemko, Reese. 10. Exit Devices — Concealed vertical rod devices, provide Sargent mode18700 function as indicated in Hardware Schedule, Dor-O-Matic model 1690 or equaL Trim design shall be ETP. Stainless steel assemblies, covers, internal parts, pins, springs and pivots. Provide full coverage, stainless steel back plates at full vision light doors. Equal - Von Duprin. C. Closers shall be sized as recommended by Manufacturer and as approved for size and location of door served. D. On exterior doars, provide hinges with pins not removable when door is closed. Provide 1/2 pair hinges for each 2-ft-6-in or part thereof of door height. E. Provide type of threshold required by the Door Schedule for particular doors and provide weather seals at exterior doors. F. Provide three silencers in lock side jamb of single doors and four silencers in head of double doors. No silencers are required at doors with sound/weather seals. 2.06 FINISHES A. Stainless steel finish shall be US32D. B. Chrome plated, bronze of brass finish shall be US26D. 2.07 KEYING A. All cylinder locks including padlocks shall be masterkeyed into the existing set at the site as approved. All cylinders shall be construction keyed for Contractor's use during construction period. Install permanent cylinders when directed. B. Furnish: 1. Three masterkeys. 2. Two change keys with each lock_ 3. Three construction day keys. 6349-79520 08710-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of any hardware, examine all doors, frames, walls and related items for conditions that would prevent proper installation of finish hardware. Correct all defects prior to proceeding with installation. 3A2 1NSTALLATION A. Coordination Prior to installation of hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of instructing installers on proper installation and adjustment of fnish hardware. Representatives of locks, exit devices, closers, automatic operators, and electrified hardware shall conduct training; provide at least 10 days notice to representatives. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Engineer. CJ Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of coordinating finish hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. A representative of the supplier of finish hardware, and doors and frames, the electrical subcontractor, and the Owner's security contractor shall meet with the Owner, Engineer and the General Contractor prior to ordering fnish hardware. After meeting a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, • shall be sent to the Engineer. B. Hardware will be installed by qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. For technical assistance if necessary, installers may contact the manufacturer's rep for the item in question, as listed in the hardware schedule. C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer. E. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. G. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. H. Existing Doors and/or Frames: Remove existing hardware being replaced, tag, and store according to contract documents. Field modify and prepare existing door and/or frame for new hardware being installed. Pravide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners for mounting new hardware and to cover existing door/frame preps. • 6349-79520 08710-4 October 2012 • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.03 3.04 Wire (including low voltage), conduit, junction boxes, and pulling of wire is by Division 16, Electrical. Electrical Contractor shall connect wire to door position switches and run wire to central room or area as directed by the Engineer. Wires shall be tested and labeled with the opening number. Connections to/from power supplies to electrified hardware and any connection to fire/smoke alarm system, and/or smoke evacuation system where specified is by Division 16 Electrical. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation ar function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. D. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of locks, exit devices, closer, and any electrified hardware, shall perform the following work: B. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. C. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. D. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. E. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware. F. At completion of project, a qualified factory representative for the manufacturers of locksets, closer, exit devices, and access control products shall arrange and hold a training session to instruct the Owner's personnel on the proper maintenance, adjustment, and/or operation of their respective products. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Engineer. 3.05 PROTECTION 6349-79520 08710-5 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Provide for the proper protection of complete items of hardware until the Owner accepts the • project as complete. Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or repaired by the responsible party. 3.06 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE SETS A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Finish Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. B. The following general hardware sets represent hardware for one opening (single or pair of doors). Refer to Materials paragraphs above for additional items required under specified conditions. The quantities of each set are the responsibility of each bidder. Refer to Door Schedule for locations. The actual content of each set shall be determined by approved hardware sets. HW 1 Hinges 1 Exit Device - 8713ET 1 Closer 1 Kickplate Silencers Bottom Seal HW 2— pair of doors Hinges 1 Exit Device - 8713ET 1 Flush Bolts (inactive leafl 2 Closers - Stop/Holder Arms 2 Kickplates Silencers Bottom Seal 3.07 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install the components of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with 1.05 of this Section. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 08710-6 October 2012 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 08800 GLAZING PARTI GENERAL ] .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install all glass and glazing as shown and as specified herein. B. Exterior glazing may be a component of a door, window and/or storefront system required to conform to the Florida Building Code. Coordinate the glazing materials and installation for those applications with the appropriate supplier to ensure compliance with the Code. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Aluminum Doors and Frames are included in Section 08120. B. Fixed Aluminum Windows are included in Section 08522. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As provided in Section 01300, submit full size shop drawings showing step-by-step glass � setting and sealing procedures. Evidence of compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.04, Quality Assurance, shall be included with the initial submittal for the products specified. Submit certification that wired glass is UL tested and approved. B. Submit to the Engineer two representative samples of each type glazing material specified below. Provide samples of glass in 12-in square minimum size. Resubmit any or all as required until approved. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT A. Glazing for exterior systems may be a component of a door or window system required to conform to the Code. Coordinate the glazing requirements for those doors or windows with the appropriate supplier to ensure compliance with the project specific calculated design pressures, incIuding wind-borne debris region requirements. Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B_ It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specified in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Florida Building Commission, Product Approval. • 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS 6349-79520 08800-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials far the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. All glazing shall be delivered and stored in its original container, plainly marked with identification of material and maker. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage shall not be used and shall be removed from the site. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Each piece of glazing shall bear the Manufacturer's label showing the strength, grade, thickness, type and quality of the material and all labels shall remain in place until the glass has been set and inspected by the Engineer except that safety and insulating glass shall have permanently etched labels. When material is not cut to size by the Manufacturer and is furnished from local stock, the glass and glazing subcontractor shall submit an affidavit stating the strength, grade, thickness, type, qualiry, and Manufacturer of the material furnished. B. All exterior glazed openings shall be impact resistant glass. C. Solar Control Low-E Glass with Impact Resistant Glazing (Laminated Glass) All exterior glazed openings shall be Solar Control Low-E Glass with Impact Resistant Glazing 2. Solar Control Low-E Insulating Glass with Impact Resistant Glazing (Laminated Glass) for exterior windows shall be Solorban 60 by PPG and shall be Insulating Glass Certification Council certified and shall meet ASTM E774, Class CBA. Equal units by Viracon, Guardian Industries, or equal carrying the Manufacturer's ten-year guarantee. The units shall have the fotlowing minimum performance characteristics: a. U-Value — 0.29 (Winter), 0.27 (Summer) b. Shading Coefficient - 0.31 c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient — 0.27 d. Visible Light Transmittance — 54% e. Ultraviolet Light Transmittance — 4% The units shall be 1 5/l 6" units with a'/a"-in Solarban 60(2) lite, 'h-in air space, and 9/16"-in laminated lite. The two lites of glass shall be permanently and hermetically 6349-79520 08800-Z October 2012 • • • • C � C' �' i ; ? CDM Smith ��.� ±ti;-;l�ts Reserved sealed together at edges with continuous spacers and dual sealant to maintain a factory dehydrated air space. a. Interior lite shall be clear b. Exterior lite shall be as selected to match existing color with Solarban 60 magnetically sputtered on 2nd Surface 4. Provide dual perimeter seal, inner (primary) seal of polyisobutylene butyl and outer (secondary) seal of structural silicone. 5. Provide aluminum spacer between lights with folded and permanently joined corners as approved to provide continuity around perimeter of each unit. Primary seal shall completely cover sides and corners of spacers between spacers and glass, both sides. Provide dual perimeter seal, inner (primary) seal of polyisobutylene butyl and outer (secondary) seal of structural silicone. 2. Provide aluminum spacer between lights with folded and permanently joined corners as approved to provide continuity around perimeter of each unit. Primary seal shall completely cover sides and corners of spacers between spacers and glass, both sides. C. Glazing compound (unless otherwise noted) shall be 999-A Glazing Silicone by Dow, equal by General Electric or equal. D. Glazing tape (unless otherwise noted) for use with the glazing compound shall be Tremco No. 440; Pecora Extru-Seal Butyl Rubber Tape or Dap Inc. Butyl Rubber Sealing Tape or equal. Tape shall be compatible with the glazing compound. E. Setting blocks, 85 plus or minus 5 durometer and spacer blocks, 50 durometer, shall be closed cell neoprene. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General Glazing work for exterior components shall conform to the methods and materials utilized in testing the door, window and storefront systems for approval for Code Compliance. 2. All glazing work shall be performed in accordance with the standards of the Flat Glass Marketing Association's Glazing Manual, latest revision, unless otherwise noted or specified and shall also conform to the approved shop drawings and the Manufacturer's glazing instructions. 3. All frame elements shall have been painted where required and shall be thoroughty cleaned before glazing commences. • B. Exterior Glazing - Non-gasket system. 6349-79520 08800-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Set tape 1/8-in down from top of fixed bead. 2. Run a bead of approved gun-grade sealant from base of tape to bottom of glazing pocket leaving weep holes, where provided, free of sealant. 3. Place setting blocks, insert glass and press against tape and sealant until continuous perimeter contact is made. 4. Run a heel bead of approved sealant along exposed edge of glass. 5. Apply glazing bead. 6. Install spacer blocks between glazing bead and glass. 7. Run a continuous finish bead of sealant to fill voids above spacers on interior side and to fill void above tape on exterior side. C. Exterior Glazing - Gasket System 1. Glaze per approved shop drawings using gaskets and appurtenances furnished with the system. Provide setting blocks as required. D. Interior poors and Glazing - Non-Labeled Openings 1. Install continuous glazing strip against rabbet. 2. Set glass in place on setting blocks and install another continuous glazing strip around perimeter of glass. 3. Install glazing beads, setting against glazing strips, firmly, in order to place a small amount of pressure against the strips. E. Labeled Opening Glazing 1. Bed glazing rabbet in the approved hard-setting compound. 2. Set glass using setting blocks. 3. Face glass in the same compound and set beads. 4. Tool compound flush and full between glass and metal surrounds, adding compound as required. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING . • A. Clean and remove all labels from all glazing when directed and clean glazing compound from frames around glazing installed under this Section upon completion of the work. All defective or broken glazing and glazing broken because of faulty setting shall be replaced under this Section. • 6349-79520 08800-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ki�;hts Reserved • B. All glazing shall be protected under this Section from accidental damage with tapes or streamers attached to the sash or frame. No tape or streamer shall contact the glazing. u • C. The Contractor shall install exterior components of this Section to comply with 1.04.A of this Section. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 08800-5 October 2012 . • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 09200 CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install exterior cement plaster (stucco) system, exterior lath and plaster soffits (including access doors) and related work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Coordinate the work of this Section with other Sections requiring work within above, or penetrations through, plasterwork. RELATED WORK A. Prefabricated Metal Roofing Components are included in Division 7. B. Joint Sealers are in Division 7. C. Field Painting is included in Division 9. REFERENCESTANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A641 - Specification for Zino-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C206 - Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. 4. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 5. ASTM C1063 - Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring of Portland Cement Based Plaster. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revisions in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Job Mock-up 1. Prior to installation of stucco, erect sample wall panel mock-up using materials and joint details required for final work. Provide special features as directed. Build mock-up at the site, where directed, of full thickness by 12'-0" length by 12'-0" width indicating the proposed color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. 2. Provide two 4' x 4' minimum areas of existing substrate with pressure wash cleaning, required substrate patching and color coating, one for each specified color coat. 6349-79520 09200-I October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up before start of work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-ups until work is completed. B. Curing Surfaces shall be protected to prevent rapid drying where heavy wind or hot sun exists. 2. Plaster surfaces should not be allowed to dry out, moisture cure as needed after the application of the scratch coat and the brown coat. C. Control Joints, Rustication Joints, and Expansion Joints D. Expansion joints are required at building expansions, where substrates change and where significant structural movement may occur as shown on the Drawings. 1. � Joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings, or as specified. Area of panels shall not be more than 144-sq. ft. with no span exceeding 12 feet or two times the panel width, whichever is less. E. Additives � C� No additional air-entraining agents will be used in the base coat mix, including air- entrained lime, that are not otherwise specified. 2. Thoro products Acryl-60 liyuid bonding admixture shall be used in all stucco mixing liquid. Portland Cement Plastering System Standards - ASTM C1063 and C926. Allowable Tolerances for plaster — 1/8-in in 8-ft for ptumb, level, warp, and bow. H. Single Sources - Obtain all products from a single Manufacturer as approved. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01300 shop drawings showing layout, location of reinforcements for attached items, design detaits, construction methods, fastener type and spacing for hanging and attaching lath, materials, mixes and specifications covering all systems and components required. Coordinate requirements for attachment and loading with other sections. Submit evidence to substantiate that hangars and fasteners proposed will support horizontal plaster systems. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original unopened and sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with Manufactwer's name, brand, type and grade; store in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the deck levels; handle in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 6349-79520 09200-2 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General - comply with requirements of referenced application standards and recommendations of Manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application. B. Warm Weather Requirements - Protect against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry-out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required and approved. C. Protect surrounding work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects which may result from operations under this section. 1.08 WARR�INTY A. Contractar shall supply a ten (10) year written warranty from the Manufacturer for above grade bond and weather resistance to cover stucco system materials. B. Contractor shall supply five (5) year written warranty from the applicator, concurrent with the above mentioned Manufacturer's warranty to cover labor. C. The warranty specified in this section shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner • may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lath, Fasteners, Straps and Ties 1. Lath - Expanded diamond mesh, flat at soffit, 3.4 Ibs/sq yd, galvanized, factory backed with moisture resistant paper or polyethylene to prevent bond to substrate or overspray into void spaces. 2. Fasteners - Galvanized steel with type, size and heads compatible with substrate, hangers, lath and the standard referenced above. Provide masonry anchors and hollow core type anchors of corrosion resistant materials or coatings, all as approved. 3. Furring - Cold rolled 03161b/ft, 3/4-in by 7/16-in furring channels with 0.5081b/ft, 1-1/2-in by 7/16-in runner channels, all G60 galvanized steel. 4. Straps for hangers 1-in by 3/16-in, G60 galvanized mild steel. 5. Wire for ties - ASTM A64i, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-in diameter for furring ties and 0.0475-in diameter for lath ties. • B. Shzcco Accessories 6349-79520 09200-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. Stucco accessories shall be produced from weatherproof 100% virgin PVC, Vinyl Tech Accessories by Plastic Components, Inc. or equal. a. Corner Beads - No. lA. Provide radiused/notched corner beads at arches. b. Casing Beads - No. 10-75. c. Slip Joint Reveal (at exp. joints) - No. 500-75. d. Control Joint - No. 2075 e. Drip Screed - No 540 f. Rustication Joints - Channel Reveal - No. 708-75 g. Vent Strips/Soffit Vents - No. 3549-75 h. Foundation Weep Screed - No. 632-75 2. 6" wide reinforcing striplath shail be galvanized diamond metal striplath as manufactured by Amico, or approved equal. C. Surface Applied Bonding Agent 1. Thorobond liquid surface applied bonding agent by Chem-Rex, or approved equal. • D. Plaster Materials - Job Mix 1. Portland cement shall conform with ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 2. Additive for Portland cement: Thoro products Acryl 60 as manufactured by Chem-Rex or approved equal. 3. Lime shall be special finishing hydrated lime conforming to ASTM C206, Type S. 4. Sand for base coats shall comply with ASTM C897. 5. Fiber for base coats shall be alkaline-resistant glass fiber or polypropylene fiber, 'h"-in long free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 6. Water shall be clean, fresh, potable water. E. Finish Coat 1. Thoroseal Plaster Mix waterproof coating with Acryl 60 acrylic bonding agent by Chem- Rex or approved equal. F. Proportions and Mixing • 6349-79520 09200-4 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. Mixes shall conform to Manufacturer's written instructions, as approved. Ingredients shall be accurately measured, including water, using measuring devices of known volume. Shovels or water buckets shall not be used as measuring devices. Successive batches shall be proportioned alike, and containers cleaned out between mixes. 2. Materials shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer for a minimum of two minutes or until all ingredients present a uniform color in the mixer. Use the minimum amount of water required to produce plaster of a workable consistency. Scratch and brown coat mixes shall be within the following limits: 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts sand (scratch), 4 parts sand (brown). Scratch and brown coats shall conform to ASTM C-926 and ACI Standards. 4. Add 1 part Thoro products Acryl-60, as manufactured by Chem-Rex, to 2 parts water for Portland cement based mixes, including scratch and brown job mixed layers. 5. Add fiber for base coats into the mix as recommended by the Manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Pre-installation Conference - Meet at the Project Site with the installers of related work and • review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by lath and plaster has been accomplished and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. • B. Examine the substrates and the spaces to receive the various systems, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 REINFORCING FOR APPLIED ITEMS A. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing with required plates and steel shapes, where work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, door frames and similar work requiring attachment and support. 3.03 THREE COAT WALL PLASTERING - EXTERIOR A. Portland cement plaster shall be three-coat cement plaster (stucco) system constructed of scratch and brown coats on CMU walls and concrete columns and beams as shown on the Drawings with a thickness of 3/4-in including finish coat, as specified herein. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling a review meeting with the supplier's technical representative and the Engineer to determine the specific product and application techniques most appropriate for both the masonry walls and concrete columns and beams prior to the beginning of the stucco work. 6349-79520 09200-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Where stucco is shown or otherwise required at concrete substrates, provide surface applied • bonding agent in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction, and ensure a secure bond of the stucco system to the concrete. C. 6" wide reinforcing striplath shall be applied at all opening corners and shall be provided to bridge concrete and masonry substrates to reduce cracking. D. Plaster Application Apply scratch coat in a 3/8-in minimum thickness with sufficient pressure to form a good bond on masonry, and then scratch to roughen surface. 2. Apply brown coat over scratch coat in a'/4-in minimum thickness with sufficient pressure to form a good bond, rodded level, and left rough. 3. Apply finish coat over brown coat in a 1/8-in minimum thickness. Float finish to a true, even swface and as required to produce a fine texture. Provide sand texture to match mock-up unit as approved. E. Moisture Retention and Curing Dampen previous plaster coats which have dried out prior to time for applications of next coat. Dampen with water as required for uniform suction. (Conform to ASTM C-926 and ACI-524R). 3.04 Determine the most effective procedure for curing and the time lapse between application of • coats based on climatic and job conditions in accordance with ASTM C-926 and ACI-524R. Plaster which is cracked or crazed due to improper timing and curing will not be accepted. Remove and replace defective plaster including plaster base materials, if damaged during removal of defective plaster. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point-up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dryouts, efflorescence, sweat-outs, and similar defects, including areas of the work which do not comply with specified tolerances, and where bond to the substrate has failed. B. Finish as required to match adjacent work, eliminating trowel marks and ridges. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair decks, walls, and other surfaces which have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment, and clean decks of plaster debris. • 6349-79520 09200-6 October 2012 C? 2012 CDM Smith f111 Rigl�t.s Reserved � B. Provide approved procedures for protection of plaster from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction period. • � END OF SECTION 6349-79520 09200-7 October 2012 e0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • THIS PAGE INTENIONALLY LEFT BLANK C J � 6349-79520 09200-8 October 2012 • • • n 2012 CDM Smith Ali I�_i�l�ts Reserved SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install gypsum systems and related work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Coordinate the work of this Section with other Sections requiring work within, above, or penetrations through, the systems. B. The work under this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: l. Metal studs and ceiling framing. 2. Zees and board insulation for all walls requiring such. 3. Gypsum wall board, tapes, compounds and accessories. 4. Cementitions glass fiber board (CGFB) for interior wall applications requiring ceramic tile application. RELATED WORK A. Wood framing and blocking is included in Divisions 6. B. Doors and frames are included in Division 8. C. Painting of drywall surfaces is included in Section 09902. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, detailed information on materials proposed and installation methods. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 6349-79520 09250-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, • Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process_ ASTM C36 - Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. ASTM C475 - Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand. 4. ASTM C645 - Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 5. ASTM C754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board or Water-Resistant Backing Board. 6. ASTM C840 - Specification for Fully Processed Cold-Rolled Lamination Steel. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of this Section shall conform to the following: Applicable portions of "Recommended Specifications for the application and finishing of Gypsum Board, GA-216, by Gypsum Association. 2. Work shall not begin until the building has been dried-in and adjoining building materials • have dried-out. B. Allowable Tolerances - 1/16-in maximum offsets between planes ofboard faces and 1/8-in in 8-ft for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. Obtain gypsum board, trim accessories, adhesives and joint treatment products, from a single Manufacturer, or from Manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum board as approved. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in sealed containers and bundles, fully identified with Manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade; store in dry, well ventilated space, protected from the weather, under cover and off the deck levels; and where applicable, protected from freezing; handle in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 1 _07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Examine the substrates and the spaces to receive the various systems, and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Notify the Engineer, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 1. Environmental conditions. Comply with standards referenced above for the various systems. • 6349-79520 09250-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2. Protect other work from soiling, spattering, deterioration and other harmful effects that may result from finishing operations. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All components shall be Gold Bond products as manufactured by National Gypsum Company; U.S. Gypsum; Flintkote or equal. B. All gypsum wallboard shall be manufactured domestically within the United States. 1. Gypsum wallboard (GWB) - Provide 1/2" gypsum wallboard with rounded and tapered edges. Sheet size shall be the maximum length and width available to minimize joints. 2. Fire-Rated Gypsum wallboard- Provide 5/8" type "X" Fire Shield Wallboard, at fire rated gypsum board partitions, with rounded and tapered edges. Sheet size shall be the maximum length and width available to minimize joints. 3. Cementitious glass fiber board (CGFB) - Proprietary backing and underlayment panels composed of a concrete core with glass fiber mesh reinforcing on both faces covered with portland cement treatment; average weight, 3.4 lbs per sf; thickness 5/8-in. � a. Fasteners for CGFB shall be corrosion resistance coated steel screws designed to drill through CGFB and drill and tap into steel studs or zees while fastener head ribs on underside countersink the CGFB to seat flush with board surface. 4. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board (Gold Bond MR Board) — 1/2-inch thick gypsum core wall panel with tapered edges; surfaced with water repellant paper on front, back, and long edges; and complying with ASTM C630. Sheet size shall be the maximum length and width available to minimize joints. 5. Hi-Abuse Gypsum Wallboard — Provide 5/8-inch Gold Bond Hi-Abuse wallboard with gypsum core encased in heavy smooth white abrasion resistant finish paper on the face side and heavy liner paper on the back side. 6. Fire-Rated Hi-Abuse Gypsum Wallboard — Provide 5/8-inch Gold Bond Hi-Abuse wa}lboard with gypsum core encased in heavy smooth white abrasion resistant fnish paper on the face side and heavy liner paper on the back side C. Furring Channels - ASTM C645, 25 gauge, 1-in web and flanges -"Z" shaped furring channels along furred CMU walls. 1" hat channels may be used for furred walls/columns not receiving insulation board. D. Studs - ASTM C645, 20 gauge "C" shape, 3 5/8-in depth or in size or gauge as otherwise shown or required. E. Runners - Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and head support of • studs, and for vertical abutment of gypsum wallboard at other work. Provide slip type detail at connections to structural heads. 6349-79520 09250-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • F. Stud System Accessories - Provide stud manufacturer's standard clips, shoes, ties, reinforcements, fasteners and other accessories as required for a complete stud system. G. Galvanize all steel components to ASTM A525, G60 Standards. H. Gypsum board, trim accessories, studs and joint treatment shall be the products of single Manufacturer, or from Manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of the gypsum board products. Jointing tape and compounds shall conform to ASTM C475 and be compatible with the wallboards used and completely asbestos-free. 1. Tape - Paper reinforcing tape approved for use with the wallboards. 2. Compounds - Two types, chemically hardening type for bedding and filling and ready mixed vinyl type or vinyl-powder type for topping and sanding. Accessories and appurtenances. General - Except as otherwise indicated, provide Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel beaded units with flanges for concealment in jointing compound, including corner beads, casing beads and control joints. Insulation for furred masonry walls shall be "TUFF-R" rigid, foil faced, polyisocyanurate • with an R-Value of 7(min) by Celotex, or approved equal. Provide with Manufacturer's compatible foil tape. 3. Gypsum Board Fasteners - Corrosion resistant complying with standards specified, Type S for metal studs, all in lengths required for various conditions. 4. Provide approved fasteners and accessories required to secure gypsum systems to substrates and insulation to gypsum systems. 5. Concealed Sealant - Mastic type; non-shrinking, non-drying, non-migrating and non-staining, as approved. 6: Reinforcing for applied items - For light duty where approved - 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet attachment plate for toggle bolt applications. ASTM A36 galvanized steel in approved thicknesses and shapes with required fasteners for all other applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Building and areas receiving drywall work shall be completely dried-in before starting or continuing drywall installation. All windows, doors, roofing and other water proofing and weather proofing components shall be complete. Drywall shall not be exposed to moisture, excessive and continuous humidity or water at any time_ • 6349-79520 0925Q-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. All installation shall be performed by workman experienced in drywall installation in strict accordance with the details shown on the Drawings, the shop drawings and the Manufacturer's recommendations. C. The work of the Section shall be carefully coordinated with the work of all other related trades including materials to be built into or applied on wallboard and items requiring additional supports within partitions. D. Maintain a minimum room temperature of 55 degrees F, during application of wallboard and joint treatment and until completely dry or occupied. Provide adequate ventilation as approved. 3.02 INSTALLATION - METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Align runner tracks to the partition layout at both floors and ceilings. Secure tacks to floor and ceiling construction not over 16-in on center. Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner tracks. B. Use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possibte. If necessary, splice studs by nesting with a minimum lap of 8-in and fasten laps with two screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and intersections and adjacent to openings, using 3/8-in self-drilling screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges and studs. Space studs at 16 or 24-in OC as and where shown. • C. Provide additional studs to support corners at partition intersections and corners and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints. Provide any additional bracing and reinforcing members as recommended by the system manufacturer to assume complete rigidity at partitions. D. Carry framing of all partitions up to structure overhead. E. Provide expansion type slip joint connection at all head connections to structure. F. At openings and doorframes, install two full height studs at all jambs. Fasten the frst stud at each jamb with two self-drilling screws to all frame joint anchors. Place second stud in tandem with and against first stud. G. Above openings and heads of frames, a cut-to-length section of track shall be installed. Flanges to overlap jamb studs and shall be securely attached to jamb studs. H. Between frames and ceiling, install cut-to-length jack studs, extending from doorframe header track to ceiling track. Where control joint is called for at jamb line above frame, install jack stud approximately 1-in from first jamb stud. At all other locations keep jack studs at least 6-in from jambs to avoid wallboard joints at jamb line. I. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing at openings and terminations in the work and at locations required to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and simitar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on • gypsum board alone. Attention is directed to electrical equipment and toilet room accessories 6349-79520 09250-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved requiring additional support. Coordinate these requirements with the respective trade sections • for exact locations. J. Metal screw stud track for supporting the shower and drying area ceilings shall be installed around the perimeter of the areas and shall be attached to the CMU construction with approved expansion anchors spaced no more than 12-in on center. Intermediate screw studs shall be spaced no more than l2-in on center within track. 3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Meet at the site with the installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by work of this Section has been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provisions have been completed. 3.04 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM BOARD AND ACCESSORIES A. At furred masonry walls, install rigid insulation board between furring strips, friction fit, butt joints tight with foil facing CMU. Seal all joints prior to installation of gypsum board. B. Install gypsum board vertically to eliminate end-butt joints. 1. Install Wallboard - Boards shall be of such length so as to eliminate end joints and installed with vertical joints only. Boards shall be brought into contact with each other but shall not be forced into place. Joints on opposite sides of a partition shall not occur on • the same stud. Boards shall be applied using screws as specifed. Provide expansion joints as shown, as recommended and as directed. Single layer construction. Wallboard shall be held in firm contact with framing member while fastenings are being driven. Fastening shall proceed from center portion of the wallboard toward the edges and ends. Fasteners shall be set with heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard in the dimple formed by the power screwdriver. Care shall be taken to avoid the breaking of the face paper of the wallboard. Improperly driven screws shall be removed. 3. Screws shall be spaced not to exceed 12-in on center except at vertical butting edges of the fire-rated partitions where they shall be 8-in on center. 4. Corner beads shall be nailed with gypsum wallboard nails spaced no greater than 9-in apart on each flange of the bead with the nails opposite. In lieu of nailing, corner bead may be crimp applied 6-in on center with a special tool. Provide similar nailing for all board trim. 5. Where wallboard abuts other materials, such as masonry walls and structural frame and decking, the wallboard shall be held back so as to form a joint, which shall be sealed with an approved synthetic rubber base perimeter sealant. C. Isolate edges of gypsum board from abutment with structure except at floors. Provide space as detailed for trim and sealant. • 6349-79520 09250-6 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with applicable reference standards and Manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. E. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. F. Install metal corner beads at external corners. Attach with clinch-on corner bead tool. G. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flanges for embedment in jointing compound to provide the details shown and detailed on approved shop drawings. H. Installation shall conform to ASTM C840 and to the details shown and approved shop drawings. Screw apply reinforced cementitious board to studs in similar approved manner using the specific screws specified. Leave 1/8-in open joints between pieces. 3.05 FINISHING A. Finish gypsum work in accordance with the referenced standard and to Level 4 of Gypsum Association GA-214. Conform to the approved shop drawings and to the following: l. Joint compound shall be mixed in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. A • uniform layer of compound shall be applied over the joint approximately 4-in wide and filling the groove. The tape shall be centered over the joint and embedded into the compound leaving sufficient compound under tape to provide proper bond. • 3.06 2. A second and third coat of joint compound or joint finishing compound shall be applied after each preceding coat has been allowed to thoroughly dry. Coats shall be spread over tape and the tapered portion of edge and feathered out at the edge. 3. All inside corners shall be coated with at least one coat of joint compound over perforated tape with the edges feathered out. 4. All screw head dimples shall receive at least three coats of compound. 5. Flanges of corner and casing beads shall be concealed by at least two coats of compound feathered out approximately 9-in on one or both sides of the exposed metal as applicable. 6. Allow each application of compound to joints and fastener heads to dry, then sand as required. B. Caution shall be used to avoid roughing of the wallboard paper. All wallboard and treated areas shall be left smooth and ready for painting. FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Remove and replace all defective work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6349-79520 END OF SECTION 09250-7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS PAGE INTENIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6349-79520 09250-8 October 2012 u • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 09300 TILING PART1 GENERAL 1.O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install ceramic tile as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Refer to Drawings and Finish Schedule on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Caulking is included in Division 7. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all materials required, except bulk materials. Include certifications and other data as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. B. Submit two sample panels of each tile type mounted on not less than 16-in square plywood or hardboard backing and grouted as required. Engineer's review will be for color, pattern and • texture only. Resubmit as required until approval is obtained. Compliance with all other requirements shall be the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. C. Submit as provided in Section 01300, detailed shop drawings showing all details of ceramic tile on ceiling, walls and floor. D. Furnish Master Grade Certificate for tile signed by the Manufacturer and installer. Certificate shall be in the form approved by Simplified Practice Recommendation R-61 and shall be furnished priar to beginning any tile work. The certificate shall show that the tile mortar and grout complies with the requirements of the Tile Council of America. Adequate information shall be included on the certificate for identifying corresponding shipping packages. 1.04 REFERNCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Tile Council of North America Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation B. American National Standard Specification for the installation of ceramic tile A 108/A 118/A 136.1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grouting materials shall be manufactured under Tile Council of America (TCA) license. Provide identification and formula number on each container. B. Provide materials obtained from only one source for each type tile and for setting and grouting • to minimize variations in appearance and quality. 6349-79520 09300-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Installation Specifications: Conform with ANSI A108.1 or A108.5 as noted for tile and � A 108. ] 0 for grouting. Conform with additional requirements of Part 2104.10 of the 1997 Standard Building Code. l .06 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance with ANSI Standards and Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and store on the site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use and handle all in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. 1.08 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS A. Furnish and deliver to the project site, 1 sq ft of each ceramic tile type and color and representative trim for ceramic tile, all properly packed in cartons and clearly marked on the outside. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ceramic tile shall be certified Standard Grade conforming to ANSI A137.1. Tile shall be as • manufactured by American Olean Tile Co.; Florida Tile Co.; U.S. Ceramic Tile Co. (unless otherwise noted) or equal. Colors shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Wall tile for toilet and locker rooms (including shower areas) where shown/scheduled on the Drawings shall be American Olean Matte Glazed Wall Tile, 4 U4-in square, 5/16- in thick, cushion edge, matte glaze. Provide with all required shapes such as cove base, bullnose, angle and other trim matching tile as approved. Refer to drawings, for wall pattern. C. Ceramic mosaic floor tile for toilet and locker rooms where shown/scheduled on the Drawings shall be American Olean Unglazed Porcelain Ceramic Mosais, 2-in square, 1/4-in thick, square or cushion edge as approved, unglazed vitreous tile. D. Quarry Tile where shown/scheduled on the Drawings shall be American Olean 6-in by 6-in unglazed square edge tile or equal. E. Dry-set mortar shatl conform to ANSI 118.1 and have the TCA hallmark. F. Latex-portland cement mortar (floors) shall conform to ANSI A 118.4 and shall have the TCA hallmark. G. Water shall be fresh, clean, potable and free from organic matter, acids and alkalis. H. Grout for interior walls shall be dry-set grout similar to Mapei waterproof grout, equal by Kaiser, or equal. Color of grout shall be Malta as approved. • 6349-79520 09300-2 October 2012 �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • I. Grout for floors shall be latex-portland cement-grout conforming to ANSI A118.6 and be provided in a color similar to the approved wall grout, all as approved. Grout Sealer - Penetrating Grout Sealer by American Olean or equal. K. Chemical-Resistant Sealants for laboratory floors shall be chemical-resistant elastomeric sealant of type recommended and produced by chemical-resistant mortar and grout manufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibility with tile and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/grout. L. Edge Strip — provide granite or marble tapered edge strip (threshold) as separation between different material, i.e. carpet. M. Uncoupling Membrane shall be Schluter Ditra or equal and shall be 1/8 inch thick, high- density polyethylene membrane with a grid structure of 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch square cavities, each cut back in a dovetail configuration, and a polypropylene ancharing fleece laminated to its underside. Membrane shall conform to the definition for uncoupling membranes in the Tile Council of North America Handbook for Ceramic. N. Shower Waterproofing System Waterproofng membrane shall be Schluter Kerdi or equal and shall be 0.008 inch thick polyethylene membrane with polypropylene fleece laminated on both sides. . 2. Shower Tray shall be Schluter Kerdi Shower ST or equal and shall be trapezoid imprinted, prefabricated, sloped shower tray base, made of 2.75 lb/ft3 density, self- extinguishing expanded polystyrene, with 12-5/16 inch diameter removable recessed section with 1/8 inch wide ribs on top and channels on the underside. 3. Shower Ramp base shall be Schulter Kerdi Shower SR or equal and shall be mode of 2.75 Ib/ft3 density, self-extinguishing expanded polystyrene. Ramp slope shall be from maximum thickness of 1-1/2 inch to minimum thickness of'/4 inch. 4. Waterproof sealing and bonding compound shall be Schluter Kerdi Faac or equal and shall be a silane-modifed polymer base. Compound shall be free of solvents and odorless. O. COLOR SCHEDULE 1. R.O. Treatment Building Toilet Room a. Floor Color: American Olean A41 Mushroom Speckled b. Wall Field Color : American Olean 0041 Matt Mushroom c. Wall Accent Color: American Olean 0060 Matt Ocean Tide d. Grout Color: Mapei 16 Malta 2. Tile and Grout colors are preliminary and shall be reviewed and approved by the owner • during shop submittal review. 6349-79520 09300-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 3.03 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Coordinate work with the work of other trades affected by tile work. Grounds, door bucks, electrical boxes, connections for plumbing and heating fixtures and all fittings shall be in place and pipe chases and other openings shall be properly closed before any tile is installed. B. Inspect all surfaces to receive tile be assured that they are in proper condition for the work to be performed under this Section. Concrete to receive tile shall cured 28 days, minimum, before receiving tile. Notify the Engineer in writing of any condition requiring correction before any tile wark is installed. Failure to make such a report shall be construed as acceptance of the conditions. TILE INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. All tile shall have cushion edges and matching trim and coved bases. Bull nose trim shall be provided at all external corners. B. Lay out tile so fields center on areas and no tile will be cut to less than 1/2 size if possible. Cut and drill without marring tile surfaces. Grind and joint carefully against all built-in fixtures and fit closely and uniformly around such fixtures. No tile shall be split. C. Align all joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb and level. Align floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines parallel with walls. D. Make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within sheets, so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in fnished work. E. Cut edges clean before installing tile. Fit tile carefully against trim and accessories, and also around pipes, electric boxes and other built-in fixtures so that escutcheons, plates and collars will completely overlap cut edges. F. No tile work shall be done unless temperature within the working space is maintained at 50 degrees F or higher without interruption during the work and for at least three days thereafter. G. Marble Thresholds - Provide honed finish with roughened bottom, white marble of size and shape shown complying with Marble Industry of America, Group A requirements for soundness and with minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C241. H. Coordinate the work of this Section and that of the Section 07005 to ensure that the required joints are caulked before grouting is performed. CONTROL JOINTS A. Paver tile and control joint pattern shall be as approved. In no case shall paver tile panels be greater than 400 SF without control joints. Provide generally square panels as approved. B. Install control joints in paver tile work at field locations as approved, and in ceramic and paver bases tile at the intersection with walls and vertical obstructions, at other places where 6349-79520 09300-4 October 2012 CJ • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • construction joints occur in concrete subfloor, at corners - full height and as recommended in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installations." 3.04 UNCOUPLING MEMBRANE A. Install Uncoupling Membrane in all areas to receive floor tile. Uncoupling membrane shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures. 3.05 SHOWER WATERPROOFING SYSTEM A. Install Shower Waterproofing System in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures installation. B. Coordinate with other trades as required for the installation of the shower waterproofing system. 3.06 WALL AND FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. All tile work shall be installed in accordance with ANSI A108.5 by experienced workmen skilled in the tile trade. Set paver tile conforming to TCA Method F113. Set ceramic tile and thresholds conforming to TCA Method F113 at floors and base, shower/drying area floors — B414, C31 l at ceilings on CGFB base, W223 at gypsum walls and W202 at other walls. Provide control joints free of mortar at internal corners and elsewhere as required and approved. Fill joints between CGFB units with dry set mortar and cover joints and perimeter • with 2-in wide glass fiber tape set in mortar skim coat per TCA W244. B. Ceramic mosaic tile shall be set in grid pattern as approved. Set paver tile in grid pattern as approved. Set wall field tile in half bond pattern and wall accent tile in grid pattern, all as approved. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise specified or shown. At areas to be occupied by entrance mats, laboratory furniture and locker bases, fill these areas with setting bed mortar, compact and screed to level, smooth surface and required grade to receive these items. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Extend wall tile one full tile minimum above suspended ceiling. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Concrete and masonry surfaces and CGFB shall be clean, sound and dimensionally stable, free of coatings, oil and wax. Wire brush masonry surfaces to eliminate all attached excess surface materials. F. Maximum variation in substrate surfaces shall be 1/8-in in 8 feet from the required plane. G. Dry-set mortar shall be in accordance with ANSI 118.1 and prepared under Tile Council • Formula T63 for Wall Tile. 6349-79520 09300-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.07 3.08 H. Set tile in minimum notched bed of 3/32-in thickness troweled to a level plane. The thickness of tile and setting bed shall not exceed 1!2-in for ceramic tile and 9/16-in for paver tile. I. Should some "flash-patching" be necessary to alleviate minor unit to unit variance in substrate, the addition of fine screened sand in recommended proportion will be allowed. No other modification of the manufacturer's formulation will be permitted. GROUTING A. Grout joints full to the bottom of the rounded edge of the bevel. Grout shall be forced into joints according to manufacturer's instructions. Joints shall be sponged and tooled. Fog spray grouting with water as required for proper curing. B. Provide open joints for sealant where required. CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION OF TILE A. All tile work shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion in accordance with procedures recommended by the Tile Council of America, Inc. and protected from damage until the Project is completed and accepted by the Engineer. : C Under no circumstances shall any tile be cleaned with an acid solution or an abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, apply the penetrating grout sealer to floors and bases in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and as approved. D. Exercise every reasonable precaution to avoid damage to the work of other trades and repair, at no expense to Owner, any damage so caused. All damaged work shall be removed and replaced. E. Protect the work at all times and arrange for the closing off of traffic and other work when this is necessary to avoid damage to finished surfaces before they are set up. F. Remove all of the refuse and waste materials as they accumulate. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 09300-6 October 2012 • • � � �O 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 09901 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop primers on the specified materials, as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Surface preparation and priming in field may be done only with the approval of the Engineer. C. This Section does not apply to factory finished items, unless noted otherwise. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Finish Painting is included in Section 09902. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications, and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface • preparation, application procedures, and dry mil thickness. B. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, representative physical samples of the proposed primers. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects B. The Society far Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC SP 1- Surface Preparation Specification No. 1, Solvent Cleaning 2. SSPC SP 2- Surface Preparation Specification No. 2, Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SSPC SP 3- Surface Preparation Specification No. 3, Power Toot Cleaning 4. SSPC SP 6- Surface Preparation Specification No. 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 5. SSPC SP 7- Surface Preparation Specification No. 7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning 6. SSPC SP 10 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 10, Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning • 7. SSPC SP 13 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 13, Preparation on Concrete Surfaces 6349-79520 09901-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 3-days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work and a minimum of 7-days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. All such work shall be performed only in the presence of the Engineer, unless the Engineer has granted prior approval to perform such work in his absence. C. Inspection by the Engineer, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these specifications. D. Painting subcontractor shall provide 5 references, which show that the painting subcontractor has previous successful experience with the specified or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the painting subcontractor provided the protective coating. E F Compatibility of Coating Systems: Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and finish coats specified in Section 09902 for use in the field and which are recommended by the manufacturer for use together. Primers containing lead will not be allowed. G. VOC Content: Determine VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of solvent borne and waterhorne paints and related coatings in accordance with EPA Method 24 or ASTM D3960. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All priming materials shall be by the Tnemec Company, Inc.; equals by Ameron (VyGuard); Carboline and or ICl/Devoe. The priming schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec products (unless otherwise noted) and Tnemec recommendations for application. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the primer(s) named is submitted to the Engineer in writing for approval within 30 days after the Signing of the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 2.02 PRIMER SCHEDULE 6349-79520 09901-2 October 2012 • • • � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�(Zts Reserved A. The following types of primers by Tnemec Co have been used as a basis for the primer schedule: 1. Series 90E-92: Tneme - Zinc - high heat ethyl silicate (to 750 degrees F). 2. Series N69-1255: Hi-build Epoxoline II - polyamidoamine gray epoxy primer. 3. Series 90-97: Tneme-Zinc — aromatic urethane, zinc rich primer. 4. Series N 140-1255: Potapox Plus Primer (tank white color) — polyamidoamine epoxy primer. B. The following surfaces shall have the types of primers scheduled below applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat noted: 1. Ferrous Metais a. Submerged or subject to splashing (potable) - NSF STD 6l 1 coat Series N140-1255 (3.5 - 4.5 miIsDFT) b. Nonsubmerged and not subject to splashing (exterior) • 1 coat Series 90-97 (2.5 - 3.0 miIsDFT) c. Nonsubmerged and not subject to splashing (interior) 1 coat Series 69-1255 (3.5 - 4.5 mils DFT) u d. Surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250 degrees F: See Section 09902 2 coats 90E-92 (2.0 — 3.5 mils DFT per coat) 2. Non-Ferrous Metals and Galvanized Steel a. Submerged or subject to splashing (potable) - NSF STD 61 1 coat Series N140-1255 (3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT ) b. Nonsubmerged and not subject to splashing (exterior) - includes repair of cut edges and damage to galvanized steel 1 coat Series 90-97 (2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT ) c. Nonsubmerged and not subject to splashing (interior) - includes repair of cut edges and damage to galvanized steel 1 coat Series 90-97 (2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT ) 6349-79520 09901-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar materials shall be painted according to the schedule for aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials in Section 09902. 4. Non-primed Surfaces: a. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces that are not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. 5. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): See Section 09902. 6. Plastic pipe: See Section 09902. 7. Insulated pipe (and cellular glass insulation): See Section 09902. 8. Exposed Bituminous Coated Pipe a. A test patch must be run initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. b. Before successive coats are applied per the schedule, any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar or asphalt-compound shall be painted with: 2 coats Series N140-1255 (3.0 - 4.0 DFT per coat). PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation and Priming 1. General a. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign material before priming. b. Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's written recommendations. c. Surface preparation for field painting unprimed surfaces or for touch up shall be the same. d. Surface temperature and all other application conditions shall be in accordance with approved primer manufacturer's recommendations. Enclosures and auxiliary heat shall be utilized as necessary to achieve compliance. 2. Ferrous Metals a. Nonsubmerged and not subject to splashing 6349-79520 09901-4 October 2012 • u • • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ]) Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 6 immediately prior to priming. 2) Fill all pits and dents and correct all imperfections to provide a smooth surface far painting. 3) Prime as scheduled. b. Submerged or subject to splashing 1) Blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 10 immediately prior to priming. 2) Grind and sand smooth all metal welds, blisters, and imperfections according to SSPC SP 10. 3) Fill all pits and dents and correct all imperfections to provide a smooth surface for painting. 4) Prime as scheduled. 3. Non-Ferrous Metals a. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 4. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) a. Concrete masonry units surfaces shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence, chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar, and other foreign matter, conforming to ASTM D4258. 5. Plastic, PVC, and Other Plastic Matrix Surfaces scheduled to be painted in Section 09902 a. Lightly sanded and cleaned of residue before painting. 6. Primed, Galvanized, and Previously Painted Surfaces 6349-79520 a. All coated surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. b. Test galvanized steel for manufacturer-recommended treatment or any passivation or pretreatment required. c. Cut edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads and cut ends of galvanized piping, electrical conduit, and metal pipe sleeves, which are not to be fnish painted, shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and primed as specified. d. Failing existing coatings, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed and the surface shall be prepared as listed for the specific material to be painted. e. Galvanized and, when ordered, the other metal surfaces specified above shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 2 to provide a uniform 1-mil surface profile. f. Shop-Finished Surfaces: 09901-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1) All shop-coated surfaces shall be protected from damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 2 and then touched up with the same materials as the shop coat. 2) All shop-coated surfaces that are faded, discolored, or which require more than minor touch-up in the opinion of the Engineer shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. 3) All final cleaning shall be done in accordance with SSPC SP 1 provided the solvent is compatible with the shop finish coat. 7. Exposed Bituminous Coated Pipe a. Bituminous-coated pipe shall not be used in exposed locations. Pipe to be exposed in the finished work shall be primed in accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous-coated pipe that is inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 6(exposed, non-submerged and not subject to splashing), or SSPC SP 10 (submerged or subject to splashing) before priming and painting. After installation, all exterior exposed flanged joints shall have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains. b. Primed as scheduled. 8. Concrete a. Submerged or subject to splashing, outdoor chemical containment areas, and exposed concrete in enclosed tanks or wet wells scheduled to be painted or coated: 1) Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP 13 2) Remove all laitance and solid containments. 3) Open up pinholes, air pockets, and other subsurface irregularities. 4) Do not expose underlying aggregate. 5) Strip, clean, and etch and provide a uniform surface profle similar to #100 grit sandpaper. 6) Damp cure shall be used unless otherwise approved in writing. 7) Moisture content at time of coating shall be less than 8 percent. • • 8) Primer manufacturer shall review the quality of the concrete and recommend in writing any patching or special surface preparation. Patching shall involve filling voids over 1-inch width by 1/2-inch depth with a non-shrink grout similar to Five Star Structural Concrete by U.S. Grout Corporation, or approved • equal. 6349-79520 09901-6 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • b. Non-submerged and not subject to splashing: 1) Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP l3. 2) Open all bug holes and air entrained holes with minimum aggregate exposure (unless otherwise noted). 3) Provide a uniform surface profile similar to #100 grit sandpaper 4) Confirm, in writing from the primer manufacturer, the proper cleaning of concrete with any releases or curing compounds before these items are used. See Division 3 for information on releases and curing compounds. 9. Wood Surfaces: a. Wood surfaces shall be dry and sanded smooth. 10. Stainless Steel, Aluminum, and Non-Ferrous Metals (scheduled to be painted or not) a. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 3.02 FABRICATED AND MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT • A. All items to be shop primed shall be blast cleaned as specified for applicable service prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating that has been improperly applied or if material contrary to this Section has been used, that coating shall be removed by SSPC SP 10 and reprimed in accordance with this Section. B. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance with this Section. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with this Section by SSPC SP 10 and apply the specified prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots prepared as approved and retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint coats in the field. D. Shop finish coats, if proposed and allowed, shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat system does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint as directed by the Engineer to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit to the Engineer substantial evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the specified finish coat. E. Properly protect the shop prime and fnish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. F. Wherever equipment is required to be blast cleaned, the Contractor shall protect all motors, drives, bearings, gears, nameplates, and any other parts not required to be primed or painted, • from blasting and from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit shall be promptly disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembted as ordered and approved. 6349-79520 09901-7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • END OF SECTION • � 6349-79520 09901-8 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 09902 FINISH PAINTING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety. B. It is the intent of this Section to paint all exposed structural and miscellaneous steel and appurtenances, steel doors and frames, steel frames for glazed openings, doar closers, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, mechanical and electrical equipment, roof fans, chemical tanks and systems, electrical conduit and appurtenances, sluice gates, operators and posts, interior gypsum work, interior CMU walls (where scheduled), exposed ductwork; all as specified herein, as indicated on the Drawings, and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of the specifications as stated herein. C. Paint items so noted in paragraph 1.OlB and in accordance with the Painting Schedule and Color Coding Schedule herein. Provide letters and numbers for markings as specified. Items noted in Painting Schedule and Color Coding Schedule herein as having factory finish and • other obviously factory finished items shall not be field painted. The Contractor is responsible far having damaged factory fnish painted items repaired or, if so ordered, for replacing items. The various Sections are responsible, as stated in each, for preparation and field touch-up of abrasions, welds, and damaged primed areas of primed or galvanized components after erection. D. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted under this Section: 1. Portions of inetal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or masonry surfaces, which shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated to prevent electrolysis. 2. Non-ferrous metals (except copper) and stainless steels, unless specified or noted otherwise. 3. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. 4. PVC Chemical lines not exposed to direct sun. 5. Tile. 6. Exterior concrete, unless specified or noted otherwise. 7. Door hardware, except door closers that are not finished. • 8. Manhole frames and covers. 6349-79520 09902-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.02 1.03 9. Fiberglass other than piping. 10. Packing glands and other adjustable parts, and nameplates and data plates of inechanical equipment. i l . Plumbing fixtures. l2. Maintenance equipment. 13. Factory prefinished architectural components. 14. Mechanical and electrical equipment that has been factory finished as specified in Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16. RELATED WORK A. Valve Identification is included in Division 1. B. Project signs are included in Division 1. C. Metals are included in Division 5. D. Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting is included in Section 09901. E. Building Signage is included in Division 10. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings, working drawings, and product data including manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface preparation, application procedures, and dry film thickness (DFT). Certify that the systems submitted meet all applicable volatile organic carbon regulations. Equivalent systems are to be submitted at no additional costs to meet any new regulations. B. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections. C. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, three sets of 8-in by 8-in color samples on 1/4-in hardboard, of all colors required for all types of paint_ Include special or custom colors as required. Resubmit until approved. D. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, a complete Schedule of Painting Operations within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed. This Schedule is imperative so that the various fabricators may be notified of the proper shop prime coat to apply. Properly notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting operations with these specifications. This Schedule shall incIude for each surface to be painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the coverage, and the number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to achieve the specified DFT, and color charts. When the Schedule has been approved, apply all material in strict accordance with the approved Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gauges shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while work is in progress. 6349-79520 09902-2 October 2012 \J C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • E. Documentation of the compatibility between prime coats and finish coats shall be submitted along with the date and ambient conditions for all prime coat installation with an established recoat window allowed for each prime system. Corrective surface preparation techniques shall be submitted for ali systems in the event that Ehe recoat window is missed. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 3. ASTM D4259 — Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete for Coating B. NSF International (NSF) I. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects C. National Association of Pipe Fabricators 1. NAPF 500-03 Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed • Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings D. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 1. Air Pollution Control Rules 2. Color Coding E. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPGSP 1- Solvent Cleaning 2. SSPC-SP 2- Hand Tool Cleaning 3. SSPC-SP 3- Power Tool Cleaning 4. SSPC-SP 6- Commercial Blast Cleaning 5. SSPGSP 7- Brush-offBlast Cleaning 6. SSPGSP 10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning 7. SSPS-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete 8. SSPC-PA 2- Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages • 9. SSPC VIS-1-89T - Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard 6349-79520 09902-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � � J F. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) RP0188-88 - Standard Recommended Practice for Discontinuing (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Representative The Contractor shall require the paint manufacturer to furnish a manufacturer's qualified technical representative to visit the project site for technical support as required and ordered and as may be necessary to resolve field questions or problems attributable to or associated with the manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract or the application thereof. B. Pre-Painting Conference Well in advance of commencement of painting operations, but after major equipment has been delivered, a pre-painting conference shall be held. All parties with an interest in the painting work shall attend, including the Contractor, the manufacturer, the Owner, the Engineer, and the painting subcontractor. The Contractor shall contact each party and arrange the meeting. • 2. The conference shall include an inspection of the areas to be painted by all parties and a discussion of the conformance of each area with the specifications. Important issues such as environmental conditions, climate control systems, original primer, DFT, and monitoring the number of coats that have been field applied shall be discussed and problems shall be resolved. 3. A written record of the meeting shall be submitted to the Engineer. C. Cold Weather Construction All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting shall be done when the temperature is below 50 degrees F, in dust-laden air, when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. Lower temperatures will only be allowed with written instructions from the paint manufacturer. D. Inspection and Testing All materials and work shall be accessible and subject to inspection by the Engineer. 2. The completed work shall be inspected visually by the Engineer for skips, holidays, hiding, uniform color and appearance, and other imperfections. All defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor. • 6349-79520 09902-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith AI! Ri�hts Reserved • 3. Coating thickness on steel shall be determined in accordance with SSPC PA 2. The number of readings will be a minimum of that stated in SSPC PA Z. 4. Coating integrity for coatings in immersion areas or subjected to splash and spillage shall be determined in accordance with NACE RP0188-88 using the low voltage wet sponge test method. All holidays will be clearly marked for repair. 5. The Contractor shall furnish to the job site and use for coating inspection and make available to the Engineer, the following test equipment: a. Wet film thickness gauge. b. Dry film thickness gauge (with certified thickness calibrator) equal to Mikrotest III; Elcometer Inspector III; or Positest. c. Surface Temperature Gauge. d. Holiday Detector, low voltage type such as Tinker & Rasor Model M-1, Series 9533. e. SSPC VIS-1-89T "Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard." f. Keane-Tator Surface Comparator Number 372, or equal. • g. NBS Certified Coating Thickness Standards. h. Sling Psychrometer. Surface moisture metering device equal to Delmhars Model DB. E. Warranty Inspection A warranty inspection shall be conducted during the l lth month following completion of all coating and painting work. The Contractor, painting subcontractor, and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection with the Engineer and representative of the Owner. 2. All defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the 1-year correction period or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. If a warranty inspection is not held, the Contractor is not relieved of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents_ 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacture, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface before using. • B. Painting materials shail be delivered to the job site in the original unopened containers, bearing the manufacturer's label. A Product Data Sheet and Material Safety Data Sheet for all 6349-79520 09902-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved painting, activators, thinners, accelerators, and other materials shall be obtained from the manufacturer for each shipment of materials to the job site. Painting materials shall be stored in a dry, well-ventilated area, not in direct contact with the ground, where the temperature is maintained between 40 and 120 degrees F. Damaged materials and/or materials exceeding the shelf life shall not be used. C. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added to any paint. Air shall not be used directly for agitation. Pigmented material shall be strained after mixing. Where application equipment has strainers, they should be sized so as to allow pigment to pass but not foreign material. Multiple (2 or more) component catalyzed materials may not be used beyond the recommended pot life. D. Work areas will be designated by the Owner for storage and mixing of all painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing fixture shall be used for this purpose. E. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the heatth and safety of workmen shall be followed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A. All painting materials shall be supplied by one manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by • the Engineer. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec Company Inc. products and application recommendations, unless otherwise noted in the schedule. Equal products by Sherwin Williams. All materials shall meet NSF Standard 61 and be equivalent to the Tnemec products listed in the following schedule. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval. B. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used. Refer to Section 09901 for special primers. C. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 2.02 PAINT TYPES A. The following types of paints by Tnemec Co. have been used as a basis for the paint schedule: Series 6 30 36 39-1261 Series Name Tneme-Cryl Spra-Saf EN Undercoater Silicone Aluminum Generic Description Finish 100% acrylic latex emulsion eggshell Hydrophobic Acrylic Wood Primer high heat Silicone Aluminum 46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar Coal-Tar Epoxy 6349-79520 09902-6 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ri<�l�ts Reserved • �. 54-562: Masonry Filler Modified Epoxy Block Filler 61 Tneme-Liner Amine Epoxy 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline Polyamide Epoxy N69 Hi-build Epoxoline II Polyamidoamine Epoxy 73 Endura-Shield Semi-Gloss Acrylic Urethane 90-97 Tneme-Zinc Organic Zinc-Rich Urethane 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat Water Based Epoxy 115 Uni-Bond DF Cross Linking Acrylic 135 Chembuild Surface Tolerant Epoxy N140 Pota-Pox Plus Polyamidoamine Epoxy (NSF 61) 156 Enviro-Crete Elastomeric Acrylate 201 Epoxoprime Clear 100% Solids Epoxy . 211-212/213 Glass Beads Non-skid Additive for Series 291 218 Mortarclad Epoxy Modified Concrete 222 Deco-Tread Colored Quartz Filled Epoxy 275 Stranlok Fiber Reinforced Novolac Epoxy 280 Tneme-Glaze 100% Epoxy 282 Tneme-Glaze 100% Novolac Epoxy 284 Deco-Clear 100% Solids Clear Epoxy 287 Enviro-Tread Water Based Epoxy 291 CRU Aliphatic Polyester Polyurethane Gloss 2.03 PA1NT SCHEDULE A. The following surfaces shall have the types of paints scheduled below applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat noted: B. Ferrous Metals • 1. Submerged or subject to sptashing (potable water) 6349-79520 09902-7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Surface Preparation: SSPGSPIO Stripe Coat: Series N140 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) applied by brush over weld seams IS' Coat: Series N140 (5.0 - 7.0 mils DFT) 2°a Coat: Series N140 (5.0 - 7.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats: 12/0 mils Nonsubmerged (exterior) Surface Preparation: Stripe Coat: Primer: Int. Coat: Topcoat: Min total DFT for 3 Coats: 2. Nonsubmerged (interior) Surface Preparation: Strip Coat: ls` Coat: 2nd C08i: Min total DFT for 2 Coats: SSPC-SP6 Series 90-97 (2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT) applied by brush over weld seams Series 90-97 (2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT) Series N69 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Series 73 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 9.5 mils SSPGSP6 Series N69 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) applied by brush over weld seams Series N69 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Series N69 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT} 9.0 mils 3. Surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250°F Surface Preparation: SSPCV-SP10 with anchor pattern of 1.0-1.5 mils 15t Coat: Series 39-1261 (0.7 - 1.5 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series 39-1261 (0.7 - 1.5 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 Coats: 2.0 mils C. Non-Ferrous Metals and Galvanized Steel 1. Submerged or subject splashing (potable water) Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SSPGSP7 IS` Coat: Series N140 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) 2°a Coat: Series N140 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 Coats: 10.0 mils 2. Nonsubmerged (exterior) Surface Preparation: Primer: Topcoat: Min total DFT for 2 Coats: 3. Nonsubmerged (interior) Surface Preparation: 6349-79520 SSPC-SP1 and scarify Series N69 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Series 73 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 6.5 mils SSPGSPI and scarify 09902-8 October 2012 � • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1S` Coat: Series N69 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) 2"d Coat: Series N69 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT far 2 Coats: 6.0 mils L � • 4. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals (nonsubmerged) Surface Preparation: I S` Coat: �nd �08t: Min total DFT for 2 Coats: SSPGSPI and scarify Series N69 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) Series N69 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) 6.0 mils D. Concrete Masonry Units (Block) 1. Interior (conditioned office space) Surface Preparation: Clean and dry Block Filler: Series 54-562 @ 60 - 80 SF/gal 1 S` Coat: Series 6(2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 2"d Coat: Series 6(2A - 3.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats (excluding block filler): 5.0 mils E. Stucco 1. Exterior Surface Preparation: 1 S` Coat: 2nd C08i: Min total DFT for 2 coats: 2. Exterior Soffits Surface Preparation: Primer 1 S` Coat: 2nd C08t: Min total DFT for 2 coats: F. Pipe insulation 1. Surface Preparation: 1 s` Coat: 2°d Coat: Min total DFT for 2 coats G. Plastic piping nonsubmerged 1. Interior Surface Preparation: 15t Coat: 2nd C011: 6349-79520 Clean and dry Series 156 (4A - 6.0) Series 156 (4.0 - 6.0) 10.0 mils Clean and dry Series 898 (250 - 400 SF/gal) Series 719 (1.5 - 4.0 mils DFT) Series 719 (1.5 - 4.0 mils DFT) 4.0 mils Clean and dry Series 6(2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) Series 6(2.0 - 3.0 mits DFT) 5.0 mils SSPC-SP1 and scarify Series N69 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) Series N69 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 09902-9 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Min total DFT for 2 coats: 5.0 mils • 2. Exterior Surface Preparation: SSPGSPI and scarify I S` Coat: Series N69 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series ?3 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats: 5.0 mils H. Interior gypsum board (drywall) 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry 1 S` Coat: Series 6(2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series 6(2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats: 5.0 mils I. Ductile iron pipe 1. Immersion (potable water) Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 15` Coat: Series N140 (6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series N140 (6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats: 14.0 mils 2. Interior non-immersion • Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 1 S` Coat: Series N69 (6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series N69 (6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 2 coats: 12.0 mils 3. Exterior Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 1S` Coat: Series N69 (6.0 - 8.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series 66 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) 3rd Coat: Series 73 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) Min total DFT for 3 coats: 12.0 mils J. Mill coated pipe 1. Below grade and interior non-immersion Surface Preparation: SSPGSPI and scarify ls` Coat: Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) 2"a Coat: Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT} Min total DFT for 2 coats: 10.0 mils 2. Exterior Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and scarify • 6349-79520 09902-10 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 15` Coat: 2nd C08t: 3`d Coat: Min total DFT for 3 coats: Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) Series 73 (2.0 - 3A mils DFT) 12.0 mils K. Previously painted steel surfaces with solvent based coatings 1. Immersion (potable water) Surface Preparation: Pressure clean (3500 PSI) spot SSPC-SP10 (near white metal and SSPC-SP7 (brush blast) Spot Primer: Series N140 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) 1S` Coat: Series N140 (4A - 6.0 mils DFT) 2"d Coat: Series N 140 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) 2. Interior non-immersion Surface Preparation: Pressure clean (3500 PSI) or solvent clean (SSPGSPI) and spot power tool clean (SSPGSP3) Spot Primer: Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Barrier Coat: Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Top Coat: Series N69 (4.0 - 6.0 mils DFT) 3. Exterior: Surface Preparation: Pressure clean (3500 PSI) or solvent clean (SSPC-SP1) and spot power tool clean (SSPGSP3) Spot Primer: Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Barrier Coat: Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Top Coat: Series 73 (2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT) L. Overhead ceilings including (metal decking, rafters, ductwork, conduit, etc.) 1. Interior dry environments Surface Preparation Coating: 2. Interior wet environments Surface Preparation Spot Primer: 1 S' Coat: Znd COat: 3. Exterior 6349-79520 Pressure clean (3500 PSI) Series 115 (2.0 - 4. mils 0 DFT) Pressure clean (3500 PSI) and brush blast (SSPC-SP7) Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) Surface Preparation: Pressure clean (3500 PSI) and spot power tool clean (SSPGSP3) Spot Primer: Series 135 (3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT) ls` Coat: Series 30 (2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT) 09902-11 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2nd Coat: Series 30 (2.0 — 4.0 mils DFT) S. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically excepted shall be prepared, primed, and painted in the manner and with materials consistent with these specifications. The Engineer shall select which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be made for this painting. 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liyuids. Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be located more than 5-li-ft apart, and shall also appear directly adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer cleanout, and all pieces of equipment. B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title locations shall be determined by the Engineer but in general they shall be placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves. • G Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines where possible or at the upper most broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered consecutively as indicated on the mechanical drawings or as directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, • etc. Titles shall be composed and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1 D. Application of titles The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil applied. 2. Text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. Letter sizes Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Size of Legend Letters (in) (in) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 More than 10 3-1/2 Equipment titles are to be 2-in high. 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2"a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow head shall be an equilateral triangle • with sides equal to "a." Maximum "a" dimension shall be 6-in. 6349-79520 09902-12 October 2012 u • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.05 2.06 2.07 2.08 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed directional flow. TITLES FOR EQUIPMENT A. Titles shall be provided in vinyl film on all equipment using 2-in high Optima Bold upper case, Grid 2 spacing, white or black in color as approved depending on substrate. Titles shall be mounted at eye level on machines where possible or at the upper most broad verticat surface of low equipment. Where more than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be numbered consecutively as indicated on the mechanical drawings or as directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles shall be composed in more than one line if required and justified on the left-hand side as approved. METAL TAGS A. For pipelines smaller than 3/4-in in diameter, securely fasten metal tags, 2-1/2-in by I/2-in, of Birmingham or Stubs 17-gauge brass with lettering etched and filled with enamel. Tags shall be approved by the Engineer_ VALVE MARKERS A. Furnish and install stainless steel tags with engraved lettering as approved by Engineer on all above ground chemical system and process piping valves. FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and shop or field finished. B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these specifications shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white metal and reprimed in accordance with these specifications. C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance with these specifications. Remove any prime coats not in accordance with these specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint coats in the field. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat does not give the appearance and protection yuality of other work of similar nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint as directed by the Engineer to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit to the Engineer substantial evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the specified finish coat. 6349-79520 09902-13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. No outside spray painting shall be allowed if wind speed exceeds 5 miles per hour or the temperature/humidity is beyond the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs due to overspray. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified in Section 09901 and as specified herein and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given to thoroughly clean interior concrete and CMU surfaces of all marks before application of finish. B. Concrete surfaces shall have been finished as specified in Division 3 and Section 09901. The Contractor sha11 report unsatisfactory surfaces to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter, and shalI conform to ASTM D4258. C. Refer to Section 09901 for additional requirements. D. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar materials must be painted according to the schedule for aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. General Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confrm with the paint manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee specified for remainder of work. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates and all machined parts not receiving a paint fnish. Dripped or spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted. • • On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One-gallon of paint as originally furnished hy the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Defciencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry, application rates will vary according to • surface texture, however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be 6349-79520 09902-14 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 4. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All paints shaIl be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added to any paint. 5. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be employed where required. 6. Smoking shall not be permitted while preparing surface or applying coatings. B. Field Priming Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment, and other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting schedule. 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked-on enamel finish or with a standard factory finish shall not normally be field painted unless the prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the finish has been damaged in transit • or during installation. Surfaces that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish. 3. Exposed Bituminous Coated Pipe: See Section 09901. Equipment shipped with a protective shop painting coat or coats shall be touched up to the satisfaction of the Engineer with primers as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish paint. C. Field Painting 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting. 2. All painting at the site shall be under the strict inspection of the Engineer. Only skilled painters and, where dictated by special conditions or systems and so ordered, specialist painters shall be used for the work. 3. All paint shall be a room temperature before applying, and no painting shall be done when the temperature is below 60 degrees F, in dust-laden air, when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. 4. All surfaces to be painted as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be done shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if necessary, until each coat of paint has • hardened. Any defective paint shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's directions. 6349-79520 09902-15 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily distinguishable � from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the approximate shade of the finished coat to ensure no show through as approved. 6. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with the type of sandpaper appropriate to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all exterior trim shall be back-primed before installation. 7. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as quickly as possible. 8. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection. 9. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by overspray or drifting. 10. All painting shall be performed by approved methods with number of coats modified as required to obtain the total dry film thickness specified. Spray painting shall be performed specifically by methods submitted and as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by overspray or drifting. On • concrete or masonry, back-rolling after spraying shall be undertaken immediately following each coat to assure that all voids and holes are wet out and fully coated. Back- rolling may be deleted from the final coat if the test panel indicates that the prior coats followed by back-rolling is sufficient to provide a continuous coating without pinholes. 11. Coating integrity shall be determined in accordance with NACE RP-0188-88 using the low voltage wet sponge test method. All holidays wili be clearly marked for repair. 12. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer. Completed work shall be free from runs, drips, sags, holidays, voids, and other imperfections. Finish coats shall provide complete hiding and uniform color. All defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor or applicator at no cost to the Owner. 13. Damaged coatings, pinholes, and hotidays shall be feather-edged and repaired in accordance with recommendations of the paint manufacturer. 14. Number of coats in the specification are a minimum required. Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, difference in manufacturer's products and atmospheric conditions. 3.04 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, trough items, and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquid, and semi-liquids including all • accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, 6349-79520 09902-16 October 2012 • � O� 2012 CDM Smith Ali Ri�hts Reserved 3.05 connectors, and all operating accessories which are integral to the whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in the Color Coding Schedules at the end of this Section. B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to but not including the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the Color Coding Schedule as selected and approved by Engineer. C. All systems that are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to but not including, the fixed flanges ar connections on the equipment. D. The color code establishes, defines, and assigns a definite color for each category of pipe. Pipelines, equipment, ar other items that are not listed in the Color Coding Schedule shall be assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. E. Banding for pipes shall be as specified in the Color Coding Schedule. Bands shall be 2-in wide and spaced 5-ft on center, located on each end of the pipe title, at 2-ft from the title bands, and at wall penetrations. F. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards shall be Safety Orange #CA26. G. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. H. All inline equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to but not including the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is fiberglass and levels are monitored through the tank. I. All conduit shall be painted to match its background surface. Control panels shall be factory finished. K. All colors will be confirmed by the Engineer from color charts submitted by the Contractor, based on the color coding schedule herein. A C COLOR IDENTIFICATION All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors of specifed equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the Engineer. Building surface colors shall be painted as scheduled in the Color Coding Schedule or as selected by the Engineer. C. The following Tnemec colors shall be used as a basis for the Color Coding Schedule: • 6349-79520 09902-17 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Colors White Ivory Tan Safety Orange International Orange Bright Yellow Safety Yellow Safety Green Dark Green Light Brown Dark Brown Safety Red Light Gray Medium Gray Dark Gray Blue Gray Safety Blue Light Blue Medium Blue Dark Blue Aqua Blue Green Dark Bronze Magenta 3.06 COLOR CODING SCHEDULE Tnemec Name White Bone Longhorn Tangerine Orange International Orange Bright Yellow Lemon Yellow Spearmint Green Hunter Green Twine Terra Cotta Candy Apple Red Slate Gray Gray Sinker Midnight Gray True Blue Fountainbleu Mediterranean Blue Academy Blue Mermaid Merlin Dark Bronze Cinder Cone Tnemec # 11 WH 08BR 13BR 04SF OS SF 03SF 02SF 09SF 08SF 68BR 07RD 06SF 32GR 33GR 46GR 14GR 11SF 25BL 34BL 35BL 13GN 06GN 86BR 07GR A. Color selection for the following items are to be selected by the Engineer and reviewed by the Owner at the time of shop drawing review. The Contractor shall submit color charts for color selections. B. The following list of piping is intended to identify all potential piping and establish a color selection for each based on industry standards. This project may not necessarily incorporate all piping listed, and the Owner may require a different color schedule. The final color schedule will be determined by the Engineer and confirmed by the Owner at the time of shop drawing review. The Contractor shall submit standard color charts for color selections. Pi��ing and Legend Color Bands Compressed Air Light Green Red Instrument Air Light Green Dark Green Drains Dark Grey -- Plant Influent [waterJ Dark Green -- Filter Effluent Light Blue -- Raw Water [water] Tan -- Filtered Water [water] Dark Blue Dark Green Cleaning Solution Waste Dark Grey -- Cleaning Solution Supply Light Blue -- Washwater Waste Dark Grey Dark Green 6349-79520 09902-18 October 2012 • • r � � • C� . �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ili�hts Reserved 3.07 Settled Water Overflow Water Plant Water Potable Cold Water Potable Hot Water Softened Water I�eating Water Cooling Water Fuel Oil Gas Process Sample Steam Equipment and Building Stucco CLEANUP Dark Green Dark Blue Blue Light B1ue Light Blue Blue Medium Blue Medium Blue Red Red Light Grey International Orange Color TBD Yellow Light Grey Light Grey Red White Red Yellow White Red Red A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about the buildings, and leave wark "broom clean" unless more exactly specified. B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., leaving the work ready far inspection. 6349-79520 END OF SECTION 09902-19 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • • 6349-79520 09902-2Q October 2012 • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 10200 ALUMINUM LOUVERS PART1 GENERAL 1.O1 1.02 1.03 1.04 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install aluminum louvers as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Caulking is included in Division 7. B. Dampers and ductwork are included in Division 15. C. Grilles and registers are included in Division 15. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings of all louvers, frames and appurtenances. Shop drawings shall show each louver type, schedule of louvers, louver elevations and details, conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials, joints, connections and trim, and frame anchorage meeting Code requirements. 1. The Contractor shall provide to local authorities, if required, manufacturer's anchorage details meeting project design loads and specific Code requirements for this jurisdiction, for louvers submitted. B. Submit performance data in accordance with AMCA Standards 500, 500-L and 511. C. Submit acoustical performance data for acoustical louvers on a 4-ft by 4-ft (1.22 m x 1.22 m) unit derived by an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90-90 demonstrating that the louver conforms to the free field noise reduction requirements specified herein. D. Louvers shall bear Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Certified Ratings Seals for air performance and water penetration ratings. Manufacturer shall submit AMCA Licensed data demonstrating the each louver meets the criteria specified herein. E. Provide copy of current, valid statewide product approval for product, material or system as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section, in accordance with Rule 9N-3. Product approval shall be for the specific manufacturer, product type, model or style, and the State Approval Number. The successful Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible to file the appropriate Product Approval information with the local authority having jurisdiction. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 6349-79520 10200-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters 2. AMCA 500-L — Wind Driven RainTest AMCA S ll- Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLiNG A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. Store materials in unopened packages in a manner to prevent damage from the environment and construction operations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products specified in this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer specializing in the fabrication of aluminum louvers with not less than five years of successful experience in the fabrication of aluminum doors and frames of the type required for this project. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS • A. The products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage, proposed for the work of this Section shall comply with project specific calculated design pressures and the Florida • Building Code (Code), including wind-borne debris region requirements, and shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to meet these requirements. Refer to project design pressures in the components and cladding table on the structural drawings. Where a conflict occurs between the requirements of this Specification and the Code, the more stringent requirement shall apply. B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide evidence of code compliance for the products, materials and assemblies, including anchorage specifed in this section. Evidence of code compliance shall be demonstrated by compliance with the Florida Building Code, using one of the methods outlined in Chapter 9N-3 of the Florida Administrative Code, Department of Community Affairs, Florida Building Commission, Product Approval. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All exterior louvers and components shall be designed by the Manufacturer and installed by the Contractor to withstand wind pressures, both positive and negative and salient corner conditions as calculated in accordance with the Code to withstand the wind load required by the Code. B. At no additional cost to the Owner, provide additional non-standard bracing, reinforcements or heavier gauge materials in order to conform to wind load and the requirements of 1.06 and 2.O1.A herein. 6349-79520 • 10200-2 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2.02 LOUVERS A. Stormproof Louvers Louvers shall be extruded aluminum, stationary type, Arrow United, Model No. EAV-66 similar by Industrial Louver, Airline or equal, 6-in frame depth units. Louvers shall be licensed in accordance with AMCA 511. Louvers shall be certified by AMCA 500-L. 2. Louvers shall be 6063T6 extruded aluminum 0.081-in thick stormproof blades and 6063T6 extruded aluminum with 0.125-in thick nominal wall thickness frames. Frames shall be joined at each corner with a full length GMAW fillet weld with a minimum 0.125-in throat. 3. Stormproof louvers shall meet the criteria as specified in the table below: EAV-66 Blade An le N/A Free Area 4-ft x 4-ft unit 7.85 s ft Percent free area 49.1 ercent 4. Wind-Driven water penetration performance: Wind Rain Fall Core Airtlow cfm Free Area Effectiveness Discharge Loss � Velocity Rate In./hr Velocity (m/min) Velocity Ratio Class Class Intake M h k h mm/hr m m/s m m/sec 29 46.4 3 76 980 5 10,544 295 2170 11.0 100% A 1 50 80.5) 8 203) 982 (5 10,578 (300) 2176 (11.0) 99.1% A 1 • B. Provide with integral sills, heads, and jambs. Provide aluminum caulking stops at perimeter of exterior side. Provide continuous, 0.081-in thick perimeter angles of same material as louvers, for attachment on inside to adjacent construction. Provide curve formed frames where shown with smooth faces and webs of frames, formed to the required radii. At louvers over 6-ft wide, provide center vertical aluminum angle support and approved aluminum blade braces, each blade. Secure top and bottom and to each brace and blade. C. Each exterior louver shall be provided with 1/2-in mesh, 0.063-in aluminum wire bird screen secured within rewireable extruded aluminum frame as approved. Attach to interior face of louver. Bird screen shall be installed such that it is removable to allow for frequent maintenance and cleaning. D. Insulated Blank-Off Panel Insulated blank-off panels where required to seal off louver area not connected to ductwork or to cover areas not required for free air. Panels shall consist of 1-1/2-in glass fiber board insulation encapsulated and sealed completely in 0.032-in aluminum skins, all securely fastened to louvers and ductwork. G. Blank-Off Panel 6349-79520 10200-3 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Blank-off panel to seal off decorative louvers shall consist of 0.125-in aluminum panel � continuously welded to back of louver. 2.03 SILL EXTENSIONS A. Sill extensions where used, shall be provided as 8-gauge aluminum finished the same as louver. 2.04 FINISH A. Finish shall be clear anodized conforming to AA C22A41. 2.05 FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel. B. Masonry anchors shall be as specified in Division 5. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Louvers shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's approved shop drawings and as shown. Provide all necessary fastenings and anchors required for a complete installation, all to be secure, plumb and true to line. • B. Upon completion of the louver installation, all louvers shall be cleaned of all dirt and other foreign materials. C. Louvers shall be protected from damage from subsequent construction operations. D. The Contractor shall install exterior components of this Section to comply with 1.06 of this Section. END OF SECTION . 6349-79520 14200-4 October 2012 • �� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 11204 ADSORPTION FILTER SYSTEM PART l - GENERAL l .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A_ Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation an arsenic removal adsorption system equal to that shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not purport to cover all of the details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment furnished. It is, however intended to cover the fabrication, shop testing, delivery and complete installation and field testing, of all materials, equipment and appurtenances for a complete arsenic removal adsorption system whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not. C. The Basis of Design for the arsenic removal adsorption system is the Severn Trent Water Purification system. The CONTRACTOR may provide an alternate system by Siemens Inc., however any modifications to piping, valving, equipment layout, concrete support slab, instrumentation and controls, and electrical system necessary to accommodate this alternate system shall be included in CONTRACTOR's base bid. No other suppliers shall be considered. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Field painting is included in Section 09902. C. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 13. D. Piping, valves and appurtenances not specified herein are included in Division I5. E. Electrical work, not specified herein, is included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, copies of all materials necessary to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include the following: l. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all the important details of construction, dimensions and anchar bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/ar catalogs of the equipment, in sufficient detail, including parts list and materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with this Section. 3. Complete details of tank interior arrangement and construction. 4. Complete description of a11 accessory equipment, piping, etc. 5. The total weight of each component of the equipment, both shipping weight and operating weight. 6. A complete total bill of materials far all components furnished. 7. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts. 8. Complete detailed layouts of all control panels. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11204-1 TPA tVTpasrr011sec1CLWATERU20 1%aM Expansion Projecfllssued to Bid Spew\11204.dpx O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9. A statement indicating the design pressure rating of the adsorber vessels and conformance • with the specified ASME pressure vessel code. B. Operation and Maintenance Data l. As provided in Section 01170, complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section. The maintenance instructions shall include trouble shooting data, preventive maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 2. Qualified supervisory services specifically including manufacturer's engineering representatives shall be provided during start-up and later to instruct the operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all eyuipment. This work may be done in conjunction with the requirements in PART 3. 3. These services shall be provided for a total equivalent of at least eight man-days, of 8 hours per day on site. 4. This time shall be broken down as follows and shall include at least three separate visits to the treatment plant. a. Approximately 3 days of this time shall be devoted to inspection and start-up of the system. b. Approximately 3 days ofthis time shall be devoted to instruction ofthe operating personnel after all treatment system components are fully functioning in the normal mode. c. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the OVJNER. d. At least 1 day of this time shall be devoted to a follow-up visit during the first year of operation, at a time requested by the ENGINEER or OWNER, to inspect the equipment and assist with any necessary adjustments to operation. • 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International 1. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting. 2. ASTM A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. 3. ASTM B6l - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. B. ASME Section VIII, Division I— American Society of Mechanical Engineers Boilers and Pressure Vessel Code. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ANSI B 16.5 — Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) G. National Electrical Code (NEC) H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of the bid • opening shall apply. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11204-2 TPAt\Tpasvr011sedCLWATEPoRO1PIantEzpansionProjeqllssuedtoBiASpecs\iiZM.dacx �O 2012 CDM Smith All R��,ht� Reserved � 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The arsenic removal adsorption system and its components, shall be furnished as a packaged system by a manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the system components to be furnished. The system components shall be designed, constructed and delivered in accordance with the best practices and methods. B. Any reference to a specific manufacturer or model number is for the purpose of establishing a quality or parameter for specification writing and is not to be considered proprietary. In all cases, any comparable source or device is acceptable upon approval by the ENGINEER. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The arsenic removal adsorption system sha11 consist of two (2) 14'-0" diameter pressure vessels, filtration media, piping, valves, and field instruments complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The manufacturer of the arsenic removal adsorption system shall supply the entire system as shown on Drawings. Al) pipe, fittings, and valves shall conform to the provisions of Division l 5. C. The arsenic removal adsorption system shall be capable of treating a raw well water to a level that is potable, free of suspended matter and containing no objectionable or harmful substance as a result of the treatment. The finished water from the arsenic removal adsorption system shall have a total arsenic content no greater than 10 parts per billion (ppb) as Arsenic V as reyuired by • the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency standards for potable water. Average raw water values are as follows: pH 6 to 8 Arsenic V 40 ppb D. The arsenic removal adsorption system shall consist of two (2) l4-ft diameter arsenic removal adsorption systems each with a nominal adsorber surface area of 154 sq ft and designed for a loading rate of at least 6.8 gpm/sq ft, giving a normal service flow of 1042 gpm per unit. The system shall be designed for a normal working pressure of 75 psi at 125 °F, and test pressure of 200 psi. The tanks shall also be designed to withstand full vacuum. The maYimum pressure loss across a clean adsorber shall be 4 to 6 psi (at normal service flow) and a maximum pressure loss across a dirty adsorber shall be 20 psi (at normal service flow). The backwash rate per adsorption units shall be 1770 gpm (l l.5 gpm/ftZ). The anticipated backwash volume per adsorber is estimated to be approximately 23,000 gallons. E. In the backwash mode, the inlet valve shall be manually closed and the waste valve shall be manually opened allowing backwash water to flow upward from the bottom of the adsorber unit and out the top of the adsorber unit to the spent backwash water line. After a backwash cycle is complete, the waste and outlet valves shall be manually closed. The length of backwashing shall be controlled by the operator. Water supply for the backwash cycle shal} be provided by the existing modified backwash water supply system. F. The control panel shall be supplied and mounted as shown on the Drawings by the adsorption system manufacturer. Field wiring connections to the panel shall be part of the work of Division • l 6. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11204-3 TPA11Tpasvr011sec1CLWATER1ROiP1aMExpareionProjecNlssuedWBidSpecs117204.Mcx O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. The system supplier shall also have a media replacement program available that the OWNER can � utilize under a contract with the system supplier for future media replacement. H. The system supplier shall also provide a$835,000.00 (eight hundred and thirty five thousand dollar) performance bond, independent of the CONTRACTOR's bonds, payable to the OWNER for failure to perform to the arsenic removal requirements as specified herein. The "Long Term" performance of the equipment shall be based upon arsenic removal below l0 PPB for a one year performance period in accordance with paragraph 3.02. The performance, in addition to the removal rate, shall also be based upon a treated water volume of 265,000,000 gallons, before media replacement is required, if the system is operated in a parallel flow mode, and a treated water volume of 380,000,000 gallons, before media replacement is required, if the system is operated in a series flow mode. l. The system backwash frequency shal] be based upon a combination of absorber run time and effluent arsenic levels. Backwashing shall be initiated manually by the OWNER's operations staff. ].07 MAINTENANCE A. One set of all special tools required to properly service the equipment specified herein shall be supplied. B. All spare parts recommended by the manufacturer for normal operation and maintenance shall be furnished, in accordance with Section Ol 170, and shall include at least the following: I . Two butterfly valves. 2. One air release/vacuum valve. • 3. One set of gaskets and seals for the system. l.08 MEDIA REPLACEMENT (Additive Alternate No. 3) A. The system supplier shall be responsible for one complete media replacement for each absorption vessel during the warranty period and in accordance with Section 01025. This media replacement shall include the media material and the labor to remove and dispose of the existing media and to install new media. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.0] MATERIALS AND EQU[PMENT A. General l. All of the equipment specified herein shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength and stiffness and shall be especially adapted to the particular function specified. Equipment design shall facilitate inspection, repair and adjustment. All equipment shali be suitable for continuous operation. 2. The arsenic removal adsorption system shall be furnished as a package system and shall be hy Severn Trent Water Purification, Inc. (STWP), Siemens IncNo. other suppliers shall be considered. B. Arsenic Adsorber Vessels l. VESSELS: The arsenic adsorber vessels shall be of modular design, ready for field installation on a foundation furnished by the CONTRACTOR. The vessel shall be in • accordance with these specifications: a. Design Working Pressure 75 PSIG @ l25 ° F, Test Pressure of 200 psi. 6349-79520/l0/09/2412 11204-4 TPA\\TpasvNl�sec�CLWATERU201PIantFxpansionPwjectllssued[oBidSpewN1204.docz �O 2012 CnM Smith Ali ki��l�±c Reserved • b. Vessel shall be designed per ASME Section Vlll, Division l, and stamped. c. Material sha11 be carbon steel SA516 Grade 70. d. Diameter shall be l4'-0" with 5'-3" straight side. e. Heads shall be 2:l Semi-elliptical dished. f. Support legs shall be structural steel designed per UBC Seismic Zone 0 unless otherwise specified. g. Each vessel shall have one 14" x l 8" elliptical, top manway, and one 24" diameter side manway with davit. h. One (1) aluminum access ladder with safety rail to access manway. 2. NOZZLES: Each vessel shall have following nozzles: a. 10" inlet and outlet b. 1" for Air/Vacuum release c. One 3/4" nozzle for sampling tap d. 3" rupture disc e. 2" vent 3. UNDERDRAIN: The vessel shall be equipped with a lateral collector/distribution system mounted on top of non-shrink grout fill installed in the bottom head of the adsorber. The lateral collector/distribution system shall be installed in the field by the CONTRACTOR, under the direction of the system supplier's field service person. The CONTRACTOR shall also supply and install the non-shrink grout fili. 4. INLET DIFFUSER: The adsorber shall be equipped with a 304 stainless steel inlet diffuser. 5. SAMPLE SCREENS: Sample screen shall be 304 stainless steel wedge wire with slot openings of 0.007". 6. 1NTERIOR LINING: The vessel interior shall be lined with ANSI / NSF Standard 61 listed • epoxy material, meeting the reyuirements of the U.S. Federal Register, Food and Drug Regulations Title 2I,175-300. Application of lining shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. EXTERIOR PAINTING: The exterior surface of the adsorber shall be painted to a dry film thickness of 8-] 0 mils with epoxy based paint material. Paint color to match existing DMF units. 8. SURFACE PREPARATION: All surfaces shall be degreased prior to sandblasting. The adsorber internal surface to be lined shall be blasted to a near white metal surface in accordance with SSPGSP] 0. The exterior of the adsorber shall be blast cleaned to the degree specified by SSPGSP6. 2A2 PROCESS AND UTILITY PIPING A. GENERAL: The system shall include influent, effluent, backwash, vent and relief piping as shown on the Drawings. B. PIPING MATERIAL: Piping material shall be 304 stainless steel as specified in Section 15066. C. EXPANSION JOINTS: Process piping connections to the vessels shall have expansion joints with control rods. 2.03 SYSTEM VALVES A. Butterfly valves shall be as specified in Section I S 100. Valves shall have geared handwheel actuators. Valve size shall be ] 0-inch. • B. Ball valves shall be threaded connection, bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and seals, and lever handles. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 I l 204-5 TPA UTpasvrOt�seclCLWATER1R01 PlantExpensim Prqec[1lssued W&tl Spefs\N20t.doac � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Air Release/vacuum valves: Each arsenic removal adsorption system vessel shall be equipped • with air release/vacuum valves. Valve selection shait be the responsibility ofthe arsenic removal adsorption system supplier. D. Pressure Gauges ]. Each adsorber shall be furnished with two pressure gauges, one to indicate inlet pressure and one to indicate treated water outlet pressure. The gauges shal( be 2-l/2-in dial, U.S. Gauge Figure 1962, with range of 0 to 100 psi. 2. Pressure gauges shall be connected to the taps in the inlet and outiet tees for the adsorber and shall be bracket mounted on the adsorber face piping such that both gauges are mounted at the same elevation. E. Sample Valves l. Each adsorber shall be eyuipped with sample valves located on the three sample taps on the adsorber vessel plus the two sample taps located on the inlet and treated water tees. Sample valves shall be as specified in Division l 5. On the same tap, provide a tee and shut-off valve to allow connection of a pressure gauge. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION A. PRESSURE RELIEF: A 3" rupture disc constructed of Teflon-lined stainless steel shall be provided off each adsorber relief line to protect system against over temperature expansion and extreme system pressure excursion. B. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER: One indicating differential pressure transmitter shall be provided far each adsorber. Differentia} pressure transmitters shall be as specified in • Section 13340. Transmitter shall be shipped loose for field mounting by the installation CONTRACTOR. C. FLOW METER: One iniine magnetic flow meter and transmitter shall be provided for each adsorber for mounting in feld in each adsorber's influent pipe. Magnetic flowmeters shall be flange body with stainless steel grounding rings. Transmitters shall be remote mounted. Mounting brackets shall be by the installation CONTRACTOR. Meters and transmitters shall be as specified in Section ] 3340. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS A. FLUSH CONNECTIONS: One quick disconnect adapter with dust cover to match with water/air hose fitting shall be provided on the 2" vent pipe end connection. It shall be of corrosion resistant materials as manufactured by Dover Corporation Kamlock Connector, or equal. 2.06 ARSENIC REMOVAL MEDIA A. GENERAL: Product shall be Bayoxide� E33 by STWP, Inc. or a similar media by Siemens, Inc. If a media other than the Bayoxide � E33 is proposed, column testing shall be performed at no additional cost to the OWNER to demonstrate media performance. The media shall be certified as compliant with ANSl / NSF Std. 6l for Drinking Water. B. ARSENIC MEDIA SPECIFCIATION l. Fe203 Content, min [%]: 60 2. Screen Size, US Series: 10 x 50 • 3. Water Content, max [%]: 20 4. Bulk Density, max [g/cm3]: 0.6 6349-79520/10/09/2012 112�Y�6 TPA\\TpasvNllsec\CLWATER1R01PIaMExpa�ionProjec�IssuedloBidSpecs1N204.docM �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 5. BET Surface Area, min [m2/g]: 120 C. ARSENIC MEDIA INVENTORY: Supplier shall maintain a minimum inventory of 40 tons within North America at all times. D. ARSENIC MED1A SUPPLIER EXPERIENCE: Media shall be supplied by one supplier with a minimum of 5 years experience in the supply of arsenic adsorption systems including equipment and media. ln addition, supplier shall have a permitted, operating arsenic removal system with proposed media in a minimum of fifteen (] 5) US States with each system flow exceeding 200 gpm. Supplier shall have the system permitted to operate in the state of Florida. 2.07 CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel shall be a NEMA 4X enclosure, as specified in Division 16, for wall or handrail mounting. All wiring to field devices shall be terminated at a numbered terminal strip mounted directly in the panel. B. Refer to specification sections ] 6191, 2.02 and 13325 for addition requirements. C. Electrical service to the control panel shall be 120 V, 1-Phase. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. Installation shall be in strict accardance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required lubricants for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchar bolts shal) be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Refer also to Section O1 } 70 concerning testing and start-up of the equipment. B. The CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer to furnish the services of a factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise test runs of the equipment. These services may be combined with those provided under Paragraph l.03B above. C. Upon completion of installation and in the presence ofthe ENGINEER and a manufacturer's representative, perform a preliminary test of the system to ensure the functioning of all component parts to the satisfaction of the £NGINEER. This shall include a hydrostatic test. Approval of the preliminary test by the ENGINEER shall not constitute final acceptance of the equipment furnished. D. After the adsorption system and upstream and downstream piping connections are fully constructed and ready for operation, a full Short Term Performance Test shall be performed, ( in addition to the Long Term Performance Test described in paragraph ].06) for a continuous one week period in the presence of the ENGINEER and a qualified manufacturer's representative. • Throughout the test, system shall treat well water (with chemical adjustment) through one complete adsorption and backwash cycle at the design loading rate. Additional tests at design loading rate shall be conducted, as directed by the ENGINEER, if the results of the first test are 6349-79520/10/09/2012 �12�4�/ TPA\\TpasvNllsec\CLWATERV201PIantFxpansionRojecHlssuedWBidSpecs\11204.doa c0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved not satisfactory. The manufacturer's representative shall assist in the adjustment of chemical feed rates to obtain proper adsorber performance, and shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment reyuired for such tests and shall correct any deficiencies noted by repairing or replacing the defective component and retesting as required until the equipment meets the specified requirements. 1. Short Term Performance Test: The system shall operate in accordance with the guaranteed performance requirements as specified herein and in Paragraph 1.06 above under all normal operating conditions throughout the Short Term Performance Test. For the duration of the Short Term Performance Test period the OWNER shall maintain a sampling protocol to demonstrate the raw water and treated raw water conditions. The following testing protocol will be conducted: a. The OWNER will take a daily samples (if parallel operation is used then a composite sample) of the raw and treated water each. The daily samples will be evaluated with a field and a laboratory test as described herein. The continuous performance test shall be for a one week (7 days) test period and test will be performed for Arsenic V. b. The collected daily raw and treated water samples shall be analyzed with a HACH field test on a daily basis; c. The daily raw water and treated water samples (if parallel operating then composite sample) shall also be submitted for an analytical lab test, compliant with Standard Methods and the EPA test requirements, by a certified testing lab. d. The results of these tests will be compared to the performance requirements specified herein. 2. Long Term Performance Test: The system shall operate in accordance with the guaranteed performance requirements as specified herein and in Paragraph 1.06 above under all normal operating conditions throughout the Long Term Performance Test. For the duration of Long Term Performance Test period, the OWNER shall maintain a sampling protocoi to demonstrate the raw water and treated raw water conditions. The following testing protocol will be conducted: a. The OWNER will take daily samples (if parallel operation is used, a composite sample) of the raw water. The daily samples will be evaluated with a fietd and a laboratory test as specified herein. The continuous performance test shall be for a one year test period after the begin date and the test will be performed for Arsenic V. b. The collected daily raw water sample sha11 be analyzed with a HACH field test on a daily basis; c. Once per week during the test period, the daily raw water sample (if parallel operation is used then a composite sample) shal} be submitted for an analytical lab test. Treated water samples shall be taken by the OWNER as needed to demonstrate performance and shall be submitted for an analytical lab test. The tests will be compliant with Standard Methods and the EPA test reyuirements, by a certified testing lab. d. The results of these tests will be compared to the performance requirements specified herein. 2. 3. Replacement or repairs of defective equipment shal} be made within 30 days with equipment which satisfactorily meets the specified requirerrtents. If, after the 30 day period, the equipment does not meet the specified requirements, the OWNER may order the removal of the equipment from the premises at no additional cost to the OWNER within 60 days after rejection. At the OWNER acceptance of the Short Term Performance Test, the eyuipment will be Substantially Complete and the Long Term Performance Test period shall begin. The Long Term Performance Test will be deemed complete one year after the begin date. 3.03 CHLORINATION 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 12�4-0 TPA l\TpasvNt\sec\CIWATERUtO 1 PIaM Expansion ProjecNssued to Bid Spece\71204.docx • • • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • A. Upon completion of the installation of the system and before testing, the complete system shall be chlorinated with a solution of chlorine which, when mixed with water equal in volume to that contained within the system, will maintain a l00 mg/1 concentration. The solution shall be left undisturbed for 6 hours before being drained to waste. • r� � J B. The strength of solution and manner of introduction shall be further discussed with the ENGINEER and his/her approval obtained prior to performance to ensure compliance with Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) requirements. The ENGINEER may wish to adjust the pH. Because of this, the chlorination procedure shall be scheduled so that the ENGINEER can be present before the chlorine solution is introduced into the system. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sampling and additional disinfecting until State approval for use of the facility, as related to his/her work, is approved. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 l 204-9 TPA\1Tpasvi07�sec1CLWATERU20 7 Plant Ewpansion Projectllssued to &d Specs11120t d�ac c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION I 1212 HORIZONTAL SPL1T-CASE PUMPS MEMBRANE FEED PUMPS PART1-GENERAL 1.O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation and field test two horizontally mounted, horizontal split-case centrifugal pumps and motors and variable speed drives as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Additionally, one pump and motor shall be supplied and properly stored at the OWNER's facility. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. The CONTRACTOR and Pump Supplier shall require the motor manufacturer to coordinate his/her design with the supplier of the variable frequency drives, as specified in Section ] 6370. l A2 RELATED WORK • A. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchor bolts for these units as recommended by the pump manufacturer shal I be furnished by the CONTRACTOR under this Section. B. Field painting is included in Division 9. C. lnstrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division l3. Instrumentation and controls provided in this section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division 13. D. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers and supports are included in Division I5. E. Electrical work except as hereinafter specified is included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include the following: l. Certified dimensional drawings of each item of equipment and auxiliary apparatus to be furnished. 2. Certified foundation, pump support and anchor bolt plans and details. 3. Schematic electrical wiring diagram and other data as required for complete pump installation. 4. Literature and drawings describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including parts list and • materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the detail specifications. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 1� 2 1 G— 1 TPA IlTpasvr011sec\CLWATERIRO 7 Plant Ezparision Projec111ssuetl to BiA Specs111i!72.docn �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. Total weight of pumping unit. 6. A statement of guarantee that the critical speed analyses as required in Paragraph l.OSE below have been completed and that the specified limitations will be met. B. Design Data ]. Manufacturer's certified rating curves, to satisfy the specified design conditions, showing pump characteristics of discharge, head, brake horsepower, efficiency and guaranteed net positive suction head required (NPSHR). Variable speed curves shall be provided showing at least five speeds plotted equally from maximum rpm to minimum rpm. Minimum rpm shall be no less than that required to obtain minimum flow. Curves shall show the full recommended range of performance and include shut-off head. This information shall be prepared specificaily for the pump proposed. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. C. Test Reports l. Certified motor test data as described in Section 16150. 2. Tabulated data for the drive motors including rated Hp, full load rpm, power factor and efficiency curves at 1/2, 3/4 and full load, service factor and kW input, including when the pump is at its design point. Submit a certified statement from the motor manufacturer that the motors are capable of continuous operation on the power supply from the variable frequency drives to be furnished without affecting their design life for bearings or windings. 3. A schedule of the date of shop testing and delivery of the equipment to the job site. 4. Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 5. A statement that the pump will function properly as installed with respect to the suction piping layout as shown on the Drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment included under this Section as provided in Section 01730. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacture and assembly of elements of the equipment specified herein shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, published standards of the following, as applicable: ]. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 7. American Welding Society (AWS) 8. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 9. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Electrical Code (NEC) 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) l4. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) l5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6349-79520 l 0/09/2012 1 I 2 l 2— 2 TPA 11TpaarNl�Sec1CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Fxpa�ion Projectilssued ro Bid Spea\71212.docx • • • �O ?(112 CDM Smith � A I's i2 if,'�ts Reserved . B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. l .OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure unity of responsibility, the motors, variable speed drives, base plates shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR and manufacturer shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping system including pumps, motors, variable speed drives, base plates and controls as specified. B. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment similar to the applications stated in Paragaphs 1.01 and 1.06. Units specified herein shal) be furnished by a single manufacturer. The eyuipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. C. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards, except where otherwise specified herein. D. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components, of the assembled pumping unit mounted on a fabricated steel base plate, to ensure that neither harmfW nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specifed operating range. • E. The pump manufacturer shall perform both lateral and torsional critical speed analyses to identify and ensure that (a) the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed and that (b) no tarsional natural freyuencies occur within a range extending from 25 percent below to 25 percent above the specified operating speed range and that (c) any blade excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the natural frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. Prior to manufacture, a statement shall be forwarded to the ENGINEER indicating that the required analyses have been made and that the specified limitations will be met. • F. Vibration, when measured, using Hydraulic Institute Standards Vibration Measurement (latest version), in the direction of maximum amplitude on the pump and motor bearing housings, shall not exceed a maximum peak velocity level of 0.22-in per second at any speed within the specified operating speed range. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The pumps shall be horizontal split-case centrifugal pumps with 3l6 stainless steel double suction enclosed type impeller with stabte constantly rising curve to shut-off head, renewable casing/impeller rings, flexible coupiing and extended rigid structural steel base plate under each pump and driving motor. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11212-3 TPA\\TpasvrOl�seclCLWATER1R01PIantExDe�sionProjectllssued�oBidSpecs111i'12.docx O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is compieted and the unit and eyuipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corros�on. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the ENGINEER in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of instaliation and start-up, by the application of Exxon, Rust-Ban No. 392 or equat treatment. 1.08 PROIECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER's storage site (1) spare pump and motor. Pump and motor shall be delivered to site with materials and instructions on proper long term storage requirements. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required or the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section 01170. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. 1. Complete set of wearing rings. 2. One set of inechanical seals. 3. Complete set of gaskets and O-rings. 4. One set of bearings. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 I I Z� 2— 4 TPA \\TpasvN7lsec\CLWATEPoRO t Plant Expansian Projecfllssued to Bid Spew\t 1212.docx • C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved • 1.10 WARRANTY A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion as defined under the General Conditions, to be free from defects in workmanship, design or material. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), it shall be replaced in the machine and the unit(s) restored to service at no additionat cost to the OWNER. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.O1 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. The pumps, motors, and drives shall be designed and built far 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the required range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation and without excessive vibration or strain. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially constructed to meet the specified requirement. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs, and adjustment. C. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and shall be Type 316 stainless steel. • D. Each major piece of equipment shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. As a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data. As a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles and power and service factors. E. Combined pump and motor noise shall not exceed 85 dB at 3m. F. The pumps shall be Model SMN ] 52-500 by Suizer, Model l 822C by Fairbanks Morse ar equal. The pumps within each service type shall be identical in every respect with all parts interchangeable. 2.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pumps shall operate as in-line booster pumps pumping filtered well water to a reverse osmosis treatment system. B. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service shown in Table I 12l 2-] . C. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limits specified in Paragraph I.OS.F above. D. Flow separation at the inlet of impeller shall not be permitted when it could result in damage to the impeller. Obvious, excessive hydraulic noise that is characteristic of flow separation shall be deemed as evidence that flow separation is occurring at the level that will cause damage. • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 1 12 12— S TPA \\Tpasvr011seclCLWATER�RO 1 Plant 5cpairsion ProjeclUssued to Bid Spew\i 1212.docx c0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Casings sha}1 be of ductile iron of sufficient thickness and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure. The suction and discharge nozzle shall be cast integally and shall be oriented as shown in the drawings. Flange and casings shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Suction and discharge connections shall be 250 Ibs ANSI Standard flat-face flanges positioned as indicated on the Drawings. Pump interior shall be coated with a two part epoxy. B. Impellers shall 316 Stainless Steel. Impellers sha11 be cast in one piece and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotation of the impeller shall correspond to the pump discharge orientation as indicated on the Drawings. The impeiler shall be keyed to the shaft and firmly held in place. The arrangement shall be such that the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse rotation. C. Wearing Rings 1. The pumps shall be provided with removable hardened stainless steel wearing rings for both the casing and impeller with the wearing surfaces parallel to the axis of rotation. 2. Wearing rings shall be securely fastened to prevent any relative motion and designed for easy replacement. � D. Each pump shall be equipped with John Crane, Type 1; A.W. Chesterton, Type 880 or equal, self-aligning single inside mounted mechanical seal furnished with sic stationary and sic rotating seal faces elastomers shall be EPDM. The stuffing boxes shall be cast integrally with the casing and be readily accessible. • E. A tag with the following wording must be installed on each seal water drain valve: "The valve on the seal water drain line must be closed when the pump is operating." l. The water seal connections on the finished and backwash water pump(s) shall be connected to the pump discharge volute. The seal water pipes shall be sized to provide sufficient, but not excessive, seal water rate. 2. Adjacent to the pump stuffing box, a 2-in diameter black case gauge 0 to 250 psi, a water control needle valve, bronze propeller type sight flow indicator, a pressure reducing valve, a "Y" type strainer and isolating valve, alI as shown on the Drawings, shall be installed in the waterline connecting the pump stuffing box to the protected waterline. Furnish and field install the seal water piping and accessories. F. The pump bearings shall be of the heavy duty double row anti-friction type arranged for oil lubrication complete with constant-level oiler designed in accordance with ABMA Standards for a minimum B-101ife of 100,000 hours, without the addition of external cooling. The inboard and outboard bearings shall be interchangeable. Removable bearing housings shall be bolted and doweled to bearing brackets that are cast integral with the pump lower half casing. G. Pump shaft(s) shall be of stainless steel, rigid-shaft type and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor, accurately machined over the entire length and free from harmful and damaging vibrations. The shaft(s) shall be protected from wear in the stuffing box areas by renewable hardened 400 series chrome steel shaft sleeves with a minimum 300 to 350 Brinell hardness. The sleeves shall be sealed to prevent leakage between the sleeve and the shaft. Shrink fit shaft sleeves will not be acceptabte. • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11212- 6 7PA 11TpasvrOlWec1CLWATER�R01 Rant Expa'sion PmjedVssued [o Bid Specs11tt12.doac • u • �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Rights Reserved H. The pump(s) shall be capable of temporary operation at and near shut off head during the 1 minute, maximum, opening and closing of the pump discharge control valve as the pump starts and stops. l. The pump and its driving equipment shal) be designed and constructed to successfully withstand a maximum turbining speed of the unit resulting from backflow through the pump of l 80% percent of the design operating speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head of 250-ft, whichever is higher. 2.04 PUMP DRIVE SYSTEM A. Each pump shall be driven by a horizontal variable speed solid shaft squirrel cage induction electric motor with a maximum horsepower and speed as specified in Paragraph 2.02B above and with total enclosed fan-cooled enclosure, winding temperature detectors and shall meet all the requirements of Section 16150. B. The pump motors shall be suitable for driving the pumps continuously over the entire pumping range. The pump motors shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The motors shall be constructed and guaranteed to withstand runaway reverse speed equal to 180 percent of synchronous speed or the runaway speed that would occur at an applied head of 250-ft, whichever is higher. C. Each pump shall be directly connected to its driver by means of a Falk's; Fast's or equal ail metal flexible coupling, suitably sized to transmit the required driving torque and to accommodate unavoidable shaft misalignment. 2.05 BASE PLATES A. The pump and driving motor shall be mounted on an extended fabricated steel base plate, with provision to collect leakage and shall be of sufficient size and rigidity to support the unit and prevent harmful or damaging vibration. A 3/4-in drain tap and stainless steel pipe nipple shall be provided. The steel base shall be anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad with suitably sized Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. 2.06 SHOP TESTING A. The ENGINEER shall have the right to wimess the factory test and inspect any equipment to be furnished under this Section, prior to shipment from point of manufacture. l. A complete test report for each pump, including certified characteristic curves of the pump, consisting of at least al} information required in Paragraphs ].03 and l.OS above, except for NPSH testing and certified copies of the hydrostatic test report, shall be submitted to and approved by the ENGINEER before the pumps are shipped. B. Each pump being furnished in this Section shall be factory tested in accordance with the latest edition ofthe Hydraulic Institute Standards. Certified copies ofthe Hydrostatic Test Report shall be supplied prior to conducting a pump performance test. Notification of such test and a list of test equipment and procedures shall be furnished to the ENGINEER at least 10 working days before the schedule test date. All the testing required to determine acceptance of individual pumps will be witnessed by a representative of the ENGINEER. 1. Each pump shatl be tested and data recorded at its operating conditions of service as listed in Paragraph 2.02 above. Pumps shall be tested and data recorded at shut-off head. Sufficient 6349-79520 l 0/09/20l 2 1 I Z 12— / TPA \1TpasvNt�Sec1CLWATERIRO 1 Planl Fxparwion Projectllswed to Bid Specs\11212.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved test point readings shall be made to establish complete head flow capacity, efficiency and • brake horsepower curves for each pump. 2. In addition, one pump shall be tested at three additional equally spaced speeds between minimum and maximum speeds. 3. All gauges and other test instruments shall be calibrated within 30 days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. All Venturi flow meters shall be calibrated within 2 years of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided. C. Pump motor tests as specified in Section O1 ] 71 shall be submitted for approval by ENGINEER prior to shipping. 2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIMING A. Each combined pedestal mounted pumping unit, including pump, motor and base plate shall be prepared and shop-primed as specified in Section 09901. The shop primer shall be compatible with the finish paint. Field painting is included in Section 09902. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0] PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. • 3.02 INSTALLATION A. lnstallation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the ]ocations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturers' engineering representatives, shall be provided for a minimum of 2 man-days to ensure that the work is done in a manner fully approved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer's representatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with the driver, the grouting, the alignment of the connecting piping. If there are difficulties in the start-up or operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. Services of the manufacturer's representatives and training shall be provided when the first pump is started, with follow-up visits upon start-up of each subsequent pump. C. Connection of piping to pumps shalt be done in presence of the ENGINEER. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. D. A certifcate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, Iubrication and care of each unit. • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 1�212— O TPAUTpasrNllsec�CLWATER1R01PIant6cpa�ionProjectllssuedtoBidSpew111212.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. In the presence of the ENGINEER, such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps, motors and variable speed drives conform to the capacities specified shall be performed. A 30-day operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified. All test procedures shall be in accordance with factory test procedures specified above, and certified results of tests shall be submitted. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, calibrate and install alI temporary gauges and meters, shall make necessary tapped holes in the pipes, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the field acceptance tests. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 30 days prior to testing. B. After installation and as soon as conditions permit full speed operation, the CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of a qualified independent mechanical testing firm to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of the unit(s), including both "Bump Tests" and X-Y vibration profiles, to (a) prove compliance with the specified vibration limitations and (b) prove there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or the connecting piping and its supports, when operating at any speed within the specified operating range. A written report shall be submitted including a sketch of the units indicating thereon where and in which direction the vibration readings were taken and recorded showing (a) peak to peak displacement, in mils, (b) frequency, (c) peak velocity level, in inches per second. The report shall contain a complete analysis of their findings, describing any problem encountered, if any, probable cause and specific recommendations for any required corrective action. • C. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. � 6349-79520 10/09/2012 112�2— 7 TPANTpasv�0l�sedCLWATER�R01%anlF�cpareionProjectUSSUedtoBidSpecs\i1::t2.dacz c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved TABLE l 1212-1 PUMPING UNIT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Item Description Number of Pumps (operating/spare) Maximum Motor Full Load Speed (rpm) Maximum Allowed Motor (HP) Motor Design Voltage/Phase to be Supplied Maximum Anticipated Pumping Temperature (degrees F.) Minimum Pump Discharge Size (inches) Suction Size (inches) Minimum Pump Shut-Off Head at Design Speed (feet) Secondary TDH (feet) Minimum Capacity at Secondary TDH (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Secondary TDH (%) Intermediate (Design) Capacity (gpm) Minimum TDH at Intermediate (Design} Capacity (feet) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (%) M�imum TH at Run out (feet) Minimum Capacity at Run out (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Primary Capacity (%) Ma�cimum NPSHR at Primary TH (feet) END OF SECTION Design Conditions 3 (2/l ) 3,600 200 460/3 90 6 8 440 425 800 60 1,328 386 74 290 2,000 72 35 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11212— 1� TPA\1Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER�RO1PIaMExpansionProjeclVssuedN&dSpecsV1212.doac • • u • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION l 1213 HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP - C.I.P. SYSTEM PUMP PARTI-GENERAL 1.0] SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation one horizontal end suction variable speed centrifugal pump (Additive Alternate No. 2) complete with VFD, mounting arrangement and controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. The CONTRACTOR and Pump Supplier shall require the motor manufacturer to coordinate design with the supplier of the variable frequency drives as specified in Section 16370. • 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Electrical motors are included in Division 16. B. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchar bolts for these units shall be furnished under this Section. C. Field painting is included in Section 09902. D. Instrumentation and control wark, except as specified herein, is included in Division l3. Instrumentation and controls provided in this section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division ] 3. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers, supports and thermal insulation are included in Division 15. F. Electrical work, except as hereinafter specified, is included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Ful1 listing of parts and materials. List spare parts to be supplied. Submit general arrangement drawings. B. Test Reports 1. Each pump shall be Hydrostatically Tested with certified copies of the test results submitted to the ENGINEER. • 2. Performance curves shall be submitted based on tests conducted in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 1 1 G 13-1 TPA\\TpasvrOilsec\CLWATEMRO 1 Poant Evpansion PrqecNssued to Bid Specs\71213.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Submit O&M manual meeting requirements of Section 01730. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. Units specified herein shal} be furnished by a single manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactarily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components of the assembled mounted pumping unit and to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. C. Vibration, when measured using Hydraulic Institute Standards Vibration Measurements (latest version), in the direction of maximum amplitude on either the pump and motor bearing housings or at the top motor bearing housing, shall not exceed the specified displacement and velocity limit at any speed between 50% and 100% of full speed. D. To ensure unit responsibility, Pump Supplier shall supply pump, motor and VFD. 1.OS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING � A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and • equipment are ready far operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the ENGINEER in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of installation and start-up, by the application of Exxon, Rust-Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. • 6349-79520 l 0/09/2012 1� 2� J-2 TPA\\TpasvrOtl5eclCLWATER1R01 PIaM Exparsion Rqec[llssued to Bitl Specs\71213.docY � . u �O 2_012 CDM Smith A I I R i�I��ts Reserved 1.0E� MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required or the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section Ol 170. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump. l. One wear plate for open impeller design. 2. Set of inechanical seals. 3. Two anti-friction radial thrust bearing assemblies. 4. Two anti-friction radial and axia) thrust bearing assemblies. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of l year from date of substantial completion as defined under the General Conditions to be free from defects in workmanship, design or material. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), it shall be replaced in the machine and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The pumping unit shall a11 be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, steel mounting arrangement, controls and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR per MANUFACTURER's recommendations and shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. The C.I.P. pump sha11 be Model 3K 6x4 16RV M3ST by Flowserve, Mode13196 4x6-17 by Goulds, Model FM 6x8-16 by Summit. No substitutions will be permitted. 2.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pump shall be designed for the conditions of service as tabulated in 11213-1. 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. The impeller shall be stainless steel. Pump shalJ be cast 3l6 stainless steel suitable for pumping high and low pH cleaning solutions ranging from pH 2 to 11. B. The shaft shall be protected from the solution by a plastic or FRP shaft sleeve. C. Double mechanical seal shall prevent external leakage of the solution. D. All metal parts shall be at minimum 316 stainless steel; all other materials shall be compatible with cleaning solution. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11213-3 TPA 1\TpasvNtlsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion RojecMssued to Bid Specs\77213.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Manufacture shall supply and ship pump and motor mounted on 3l6 stainless steel or FRP base. F. Pump shall be flexibly connected to totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), premium efficient, severe duty, motor with a 1.15 service factor and shall meet the requirements of Section 16150. The motors shall not operate in the service factor under design operating conditions. 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES A. The pumps shall be provided with glycerin-filled discharge pressure gauges with a 1/4-in NPT inlet and 2.5-irr dials. The discharge gauges shall be graduated from 0 to l00 psi. The gauges shall be connected to the pump nozzles with l/4-in SS pipe complete with "T"-handle cocks. All fittings and cocks shall be SS. The pressure gauges shall be equal to Figure 1980 Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 150000-4 Series, by Amtek, U.S. Gauge Division. 2.05 SHOP TESTING A. Certified copies of both hydrostatic and performance tests are required for each pump and in accordance with both the referenced ANSI and Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2.06 SHOP PAINTtNG A. All surfaces, other than 3l6 stainless steel finish, shall be prepared and shop primed, as part of the work under this Section, as specified in Section 09901. Field painting is included in Section 09902. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.O1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. B. Set base mounted pumps on the steel or cast iron base and check for alignment in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic tnstitute and then grout base. Unless inertia block is specified on the Drawings, base mounted pumps shall be installed and grouted on a pad. In line and suspended pumps shall be properly supported by the suspension clips as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent any strain on the connecting piping. C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the ENGINEER. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. 6349-79520 l 0/09/2012 ] 12 l 3-4 TPA \\TpasvNt�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Exparwion RojecHiesued to &d SpecsNt213.docx � C� • � 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved • U. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. • • 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. In the presence of the ENGINEER, such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and conform to the capacities and heads specified without excessive vibration or noise shall be performed. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified. OWNER shall supply water for testing. CONTRACTOR shal] suppiy temporary piping, gauge power as necessary for initial testing. Acceptance testing shall be performed with the system fully constructed per the plans and specifications. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 30 days prior to testing. B. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full comp}iance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 6349-7952010/09/2012 11213-5 TPA\1TpasvAllsec\CIWATER�RO7P1aMFxperreionProjecNlssuedtoBidSpece\it213.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved TABLE 11213-1 C.I.P. PUMPING UNIT DESIGN REQUiREMENTS Item Description Number of Pumps (operating/spare) Maximum Motor Full Load Speed (rpm) Maximum Allowed Motor (HP) Motor Design Voltage/Phase to be Supplied Maximum Anticipated Pumping Temperature (degrees F.) Minimum Pump Discharge Size (inches) Suction Size (inches) Minimum Pump Shut-Off Head at Design Speed (feet) Secondary TDH (feet) Minimum Capacity at Secondary TDH (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Secondary TDH (%) Intermediate (Design) Capacity (gpm) Minimum TDH at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (feet) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (%) Maximum TH at Run out (feet) Minimum Capacity at Run out (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Primary Capacity (%) Maximum NPSHR at Primary TH (feet) END OF SECTION Desig,n Conditions 1 (1 /0) l ,800 l00 460/3 90 4 6 200 l85 800 65 1,320 l62 73 ]25 1,600 65 33 6349-79520 10/09/2012 l 1213-6 TPA 1lTpaar011sec1CLWATER�RO 7 PIeM Exparsion PrqecNssued to Bid Specs111213.dow� C� � � c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 11214 HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS BACKWASH RECYCLE AND RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL I.OI SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals reyuired and completely install, put in operation and field test two constant-speed backwash recycle pumps and one variable-speed raw water booster pump. Pumps shall be horizontal end suction, centrifugal pumps complete with drivers, mounting arrangement and controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. The CONTRACTOR and Pump Supplier shall require the motor manufacturer to coordinate design with the supplier of the variable frequency drive (raw water booster pump) as specified in • Section 16370. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Electrical motors and variable frequency drives are included in Division 16. B. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchor bolts far these units shall be furnished under this Section. C. Field painting is included in Section 09902. D. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 13. Instrumentation and controls provided in this section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division 13. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers, supports and thermal insulation are included in Division l5. F. Electrical work, except as hereinafter specified, is included in Division l6. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Full listing of schedule of parts and materials. List all spare parts to be supplied. Submit general arrangement showing all dimensions of pump, motor and base plate. � B. Test Reports ]. Each pump shall be Hydrostatically Tested with certified copies of the test results submitted to the ENGINEER. 6349-7952010/09/2012 1I214-1 TPA1\TpasvAtlsec\CLWATER1R01PIaMExpansionRojectUssuedto&dSpeis\tf214.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Performance curves shall be submitted based on tests conducted in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. C. Submit O&M manual meeting requirements of Section 01730. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. Units specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of ali connected rotating components of the assembled mounted pumping unit and to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. C. Vibration, when measured using Hydraulic Institute Standards Vibration Measurements (latest version), in the direction of maximum amplitude on either the pump and motor bearing housings or at the top motor bearing housing, shall not exceed the specified displacement and velocity limit at any speed within 70% - 100% of full speed. D. To ensure unit responsibility, Pump Supplier shall supply pumps, motors and VFD (raw water booster pump). ].OS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. No shipment shall be made until approved by the ENGINEER in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and installation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of 6349-79520 10/09/2012 I 12 l 4-2 TPA \\TpasvNt�sec\CLWATER�RO t Plant Ezpa�ion RqectlissueE [o Bitl SpecsU 1214.AOC7[ • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � storage, while waiting completion of installation and start-up, by the application of Exxon, Rust-Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. ].06 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish al] special tools and test equipment required or the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section 01170. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. l. One wear plate for open impeller design. 2. Set of inechanical seals. 3. Two anti-friction radial thrust bearing assemblies. 4. Two anti-friction radial and axial thrust bearing assemblies. ].07 WARRANTY A. The equipment shall be warranted for a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion as defined under the Genera] Conditions to be free from defects in workmanship, design or material. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), it shall be replaced in the machine and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost to the OWNER. . PART2-PRODUCTS \ J 2.01 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete inctuding pumps, motors, steel mounting arrangement, controls and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR per MANUFACTURER's recommendations shall be Type 3l6 stainless steel. C. The backwash recycle pumps shall be Model ] 621 B by Fairbanks Morse, Model MEN 65 by Flowserve or Mode13196 2x3-8 by Goulds. No substitutions will be permitted. The raw water booster pump shall be Mode1 MEN150 by Flowserve, Model 1552 by Fairbanks Morse, or Model 3185 4x6-12 by Goulds. No substitutions will be permitted. 2.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The pumps shall be designed for the conditions of service as tabulated in Table I 1214-1 and Table ] 12 ] 4-2. 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. The impeller shall be 316 stainless steel. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11214-3 TPA\\TpasvA7l5ec1CLWATEPoRO 1 PIaM Expansion ProjecNSSUed to Bid Specs11121{.docn c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Interior casing shall be coated with Epoxy meeting NSF6l . Casing shall be of ASTM A48 Class • 30 close-grained cast iron. Suction and discharge flanges shall meet ANSI 16.1.B Class 125 standard. C. Motors shall be flexible coupled, TEFC, premium efficiency and shall meet the requirements of Section 16150. D. Manufacture shall supply and ship pump and motor mounted on steel base. E. Provide a control panel for the system which contains a main breaker, starter, overloads, controls for heater, etc. 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES A. The pumps shall be provided with glycerin-filled discharge pressure gauges with a]/4-in NPT inlet and 2.5-in dials. The discharge gauges shall be graduated from 0 to l00 psi. The gauges shall be connected to the pump nozzles with l/4-in SS pipe complete with "T"-handle cocks. All fittings and cocks shall be SS. The pressure gauges shall be equal to Figure 1980 Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 150000-4 Series, by Amtek, U.S. Gauge Division. 2.05 SHOP TESTING A. Certified copies of both hydrostatic and performance tests are reyuired for each pump and in accordance with both the referenced ANSI and Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed, as part of the work under this Section, as specified in Section 09901. Field painting is included in Section 09902. PART 3 - EXECUTTON 3 A 1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans_ C J B. Set base mounted pumps on the steel or cast iron base and check for alignment in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and then grout base. Unless inertia block is specified on the Drawings, base mounted pumps shall be installed and grouted on a pad. In line and suspended pumps shall be properly supported by the suspension clips as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent any strain on the connecting piping. • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 l 1214-4 TPA \1Tpasvr011sec\GLWATER1R01 Plant Ecpm�sion Proje�.lVssuetl to Bid Specs111214.tlocz �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the ENGINEER. All i in PP g connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. • • D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. In the presence of the ENGINEER, such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and conform to the capacities and heads specified without excessive vibration or noise shal] be performed. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified. OWNER shall supply water for testing. CONTRACTOR shalt supply temporary piping, gauge power as necessary for initia) testing. Acceptance testing shall be performed with the system fully constructed per the plans and specifications. CONTRACTOR to supply cleaning solution for acceptance testing. Written test procedures shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 30 days prior to testing. B. lf required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 l l 2 1`F—J TPA\1TpasvNllsedCLWATERIRO 1 Plant E+�pansion PrqectUSSi�etl ro 8itl SpeaU tt14 doar �O 2012 CDM Smith Al] Rights Reserved TABLE 11214-1 BACKWASH RECYCLE PUMPING UNIT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Item Description Design Conditions Number of Pumps (operating/spare) 2( l/l ) M�imum Motor Full Load Speed (rpm) 3,500 Ma�cimum Allowed Motor (HP) 15 Motar Design Voltage/Phase to be Supplied 460/3 Maximum Anticipated Pumping Temperature (degrees F.) 90 Minimum Pump Discharge Size (inches) 3 Suction Size (inches) Minimum Pump Shut-Off Head at Design Speed (feet) Secondary TDH (feet) Minimum Capacity at Secondary TDH (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Secondary TDH (%) Intermediate (Design) Capacity (gpm) Minimum TDH at Interrnediate (Design) Capacity (feet) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (%) M�imum TH at Run out (feet) Minimum Capacity at Run out (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Primary Capacity (%) M�imum NPSHR at Primary TH (feet) 6349-79520 l 0/09/2012 4 180 175 l00 50 175 l62 67 120 225 55 30 1 l 214-6 TPA NTpasvr0llseciCLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ 6cpansion Projectllssuetl to Bitl Spe�s\71214.docx • • • � J C� • O 2012 CDM Smith Al? Rights Reserved TABLE l 1214-2 RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMPING UNIT DESIGN REOUIREMENTS Item Description Desi�n Conditions Number of Pumps (operating/spare) 2( l/1) Maximum Motor Full Load Speed (rpm) 3,500 Maximum Allowed Motor (HP) 60 Motor Design Voltage/Phase to be Supplied Maximum Anticipated Pumping Temperature (degrees F.) Minimum Pump Discharge Size (inches) Suction Size (inches) Minimum Pump Shut-Off Head at Design Speed (feet) Secondary TDH (feet) Minimum Capacity at Secondary TDH (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Secondary TDH (%) Intermediate (Design) Capacity (gpm) Minimum TDH at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (feet) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Intermediate (Design) Capacity (%) Maximum TH at Run out (feet) Minimum Capacity at Run out (gpm) Minimum Overall Efficiency at Primary Capacity (%) Maximum NPSHR at Primary TH (feet) END OF SECTION 6349-79520 10/09/2012 460/3 90 3 4 140 135 800 75 1,300 ll8 82 �LI�' 1,550 72 40 I 1 2 1 Y— / TPA \\TpasvNl�seclCLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expatsion ProjeciVssued lo Bid Specs\71211.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . (THIS PAGE ]NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 112 I 4-8 TPA NTpasvrOt�sec\CLWATER�RO 1 PIaM Expairsion ProjecNSSUed ro Bid Specsll tt14.docn • � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION l 1215 VERTICAL TURBINE CONCENTRATE PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, eyuipment and incidentals required and install, place in operation, and field test Three (3) vertical turbine Low Pressure Reverse Osmosis (LPRO) membrane concentrate pumps (concentrate pumps), motors and pump control panel variable frequency drives. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment application. lt is, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation and field testing, of all materials, equipment and all appurtenances for the complete pumping units as herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. C. All wetted surfaces shall be suitable for contact with potable water systems. meet requirements of AWWA and NSF 61 Certification as appropriate. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS • A. Approved Materials are included in Section 01015. B. Submittals are included in Section 01300. C. Operation and Maintenance Data are included in Section 01730. D. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01740. E. Concrete work, including the installation of anchor bolts, is included in Section 03300. F. Painting is included in Division 9: Section 09901 for Shop Preparation and Painting; Section 09902 for Field Painting. G. Piping, valves, fittings, and related work is included in Divisions 2 and 15. H. Motor control systems are included in Division l6. I. Disinfecting is per the Florida Department of Environmental Protection Standards. J. Electrical work is specified in Division 16. K. Instrumentation is included in Division 13 and Instrumentation Drawings. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS • A. Under normal conditions, one (1) or two (2) vertical turbine type concentrate pumps will pamp LPRO membrane concentrate water to the RO Plant No. 2 via the 8-inch concentrate pipeline. T'he 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 �� 2 1 5-1 TPA S:�CLWATER�RO 1 Rant Expansion Projectllssued to Bid SpecsU 1215.tlocx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved : l .04 um s will take suction from the concentrate wetwell and will be o erated to match the membrane • P P P concentrate flow by maintaining a relatively constant level The pumping systems shall be controlled by the Plant Instrumentation System as depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings and as specified in Division 13. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the equipment herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. Where reference is made to a standard of one of these or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1. American Gear Manufacturing Association (AGMA) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 7. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 8. American Welding Society (AWS) 9. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 10. Hydraulic Institute Standards I 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 14. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) l5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) l6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. To assure unity of responsibility, the pumps, motors, and variable frequency drives shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump Manufacturer (Manufacturer). The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping systems including pumps, motors, variable frequency drives and controls as specified. B. The equipment covered by these Specifications shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization having long experience in the production of such eyuipment. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. Pumps shall be manufactured in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards, except as otherwise specified herein. C. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of Manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. D. The Manufacturer shall be fully responsible far the design, arrangement, and operation of all connected rotating components of the assembled pumping unit to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. Design shall include all supporting sole plates and fabricated steel base plate for mounting the units. • E. For all variable speed units, the Manufacturer shall perform both lateral and torsional critical speed • analyses to identify and ensure that (a) the first lateral critical speed shall be at least 25 percent 6349-79520/ 10/09/20 I 2 1 12 I J-2 TPA SiCLWATERIRO 7 RaM Fxpansion Projectllssued to Bid Specs\11215.doac C J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved above the maximum pump speed, (b) the first torsional critical speed shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum pump speed, and that, (c) any blade excited resonant frequency shall be no closer than plus or minus 25 percent of the naturai frequency of any part of the installed assembled pumping unit. Pump design shall consider the fact that the pump discharge heads are mounted on the pump pads. Priar to manufacture, a statement must be forwarded to the Engineer indicating that the required analyses have been made and that the specified limitations wi11 be met. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Division 1. The submittal format shall be in the form of a booklet; suitably tabbed and divided to cover at least the areas noted below and in Section 01300 for each major equipment item. The submittal booklet shall include adequate detail and sufficient information for the Engineer to determine that all of the equipment proposed meets the detailed requirements of the Specifications. Incomplete or partial submittals will not be reviewed. Submittals shall include at least the following: ]. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump shall be submitted. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of similar units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, NPSHR, and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets, at as large a standard • scale as is practical. Curves shall be plotted from no flow at shut off head to pump capacity at minimum specified total head. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable. 4. Complete master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics, including coordination with other electrical control devices such as the pump control system and suitable outline drawings shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture. Provide suitable outline drawings showing such details as are necessary to locate conduit stub-ups and field wiring. Due to the complexity of the system, it is imperative the above drawings be clear and carefully prepared to facilitate interconnections with other eyuipment. Standard pre-printed sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this Contract will not be acceptable. Refer to the Electrica] and Instrumentation Drawings for the control wiring diagrams for the pump motors and variable frequency drives. 5. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment (may be furnished with Operation and Maintenance manuals specified under paragraph 1.06). 6. A list of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied in addition to those specified in paragraph l_07, with the Manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing Manufacturer's catalog numbers only. 7. Complete motor and variable frequency drive data. 8. A torsional mass elastic system analysis for each variable speed pumping system, provided with a statement to the effect that the system analysis indicates full compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 1.04E. 9. A statement of compliance with the turbine reverse run-away speed requirements listed in paragraph 2.O1 F. B. Test Reports to be Submitted: • 1. Description of pump factory test procedures and equipment. 2. Copies of all test results, as specified in Parts 2 and 3 of this Section. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20 I 2 11215-3 TPA S:ICLWATER�R01 Plant Exparreion ProjedVssued to Bid Specs\71215.docx 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved in and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for al} e ui ment included • C. Complete operat g q p under these specifications as provided in Paragraph 1.06 hereinafter and Section O1730. The maintenance instructions shall include troubleshooting data and full preventative maintenance schedules, and complete spare parts lists with ordering information. D. Submit the Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation, Testing and Instruction as specified in Section 01730. E. ln the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of the specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all non-conforming aspects. 1.07 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The number and special requirements shall be as specified in Section O1730. B. A trained instructor, with complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance for all major components, shall be provided for two days to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper operation and maintenance. This work may not be conducted in conjunction with the inspection of the installation and test run as provided under PART 3. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the Manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. ] .08 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS • A. One (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with }ock and duplicate keys. B. The Manufacturer shall furnish the spare parts for each component of the pumping systems listed in the respective paragraphs of PART 2 PRODUCTS and Sections 16150 and 16370. ln addition, the Manufacturer shall furnish a complete list of recommended spare parts necessary for the first five (5) years of operation of the pumping system. C. Spare Parts shall be properly bound and labeled for easy identification without opening the packaging and suitably protected for long term storage. ] .09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All eyuipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. C. Pump assembly (head, bowl assembly, column, etc.) shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 I 21 S—`F TPA S:ICLWATERVtO 1 Plant Fxpansion ProjectUssued fo Bid Spece111215.docz • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden blanks, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage and handling. G. Bearing shall be properly processed for protection during shipment and installation. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the motor or bearing Manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings that are not pre-lubricated sha}1 be properly treated in accardance with the motor Manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage while waiting completion of installation and start-up. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this section shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year from substantial completion by the Contractor and the equipment Manufacturer. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If • any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. C. The Manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. D. Refer to Section 01740 for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard pumping units of proven ability as manufactured by reputable concerns having long experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. All equipment shall be designed and built for 24-hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, and without excessive vibration or strain. C. The pumping units required under this section shall be complete including proper alignment and balancing of the individual units. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs and adjustment shall be provided. • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 I121J—S TPASiCLWATERU201PIarrtEzpansionRqecNasuedMBidSpecs\11215.docx � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. The um s shall be ri idl and accuratel anchored into osition. All necessa anchor bolts, nuts • P P g Y Y P rY and washers shall be furnished by the Contractor. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Nuts and washers shall be Monel or passivated Type 304 stainless steel. E. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the Manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump, motor, variable frequency drive and control panel. F. Each pumping unit and its driving equipment shall be designed and constructed to withstand the maximum turbine run-away speed of the unit due to back flow through the pump with the maximum TDH specified available at the pump discharge flange. The maximum reverse run-away speed shall not exceed 180 percent of the design pump maximum operating speed. A statement of compliance with this requirement must be furnished with the Shop Drawing submittal. G. All working parts of the pumps, motors, and variable frequency drives, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, sleeves, etc., shall be standard climensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates, such that parts will be interchangeable between like units and such that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts for those furnished in the original machines. All parts shall be properly stamped for identification and location in the machines as shown on the assembly drawings in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals furnished. H. The nameplate ratings of the motors shall not be exceeded, nor shall the design service factor be reduced when the pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve at maximum speed. All rotating parts of the specified equipment shall be mechanically and hydraulically balanced so as to operate throughout the required range without excessive end thrust, vibration, and noise. The • maximum allowable vibration measured at the bottom motor bearing for vertical pumps shall not exceed the maximum values as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute Standards, latest edition. Failure to meet this criteria sha11 be sufficient cause to reject the eyuipment. I. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors shall be supplied and installed in accardance with applicable OSHA regulations. Type 3l6 stainless steel guards shall be installed on all rotating assemblies. All lubrication fittings shall be brought to the outside of all equipment so that they are readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. Fittings shall be buttonhead type. Lubrication fittings shall be mounted together wherever possible. Pressure grease-lubricated fittings shall be the "Zerk Hydraulic" type or the "Alemite" type. Housings of grease-lubricated bearings shall be automatically exhausted to the atmosphere to prevent excessive greasing. 2.02 CONDITIONS OF OPERATION A. Each pump shall be designed for the conditions of service tabulated in Tables 11215-1 and operate within the system head curves as appended. All pumps shall have a rising head capacity curve for stable pump operation from the minimum head operating point to the shut-off head. B. Where anticipated Total Head (TH) is referred to, in conjunction with the specified discharge reyuirements, it shall be understood to be as defined in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. The efficiency of the pump shall be understood to be based upon the bowl efficiency. C. The pumps shall operate throughout the entire operating range, within the vibration limitations • specified in Paragraph 1.05 E and 2.01 H. 6349-7952Q/]0/09/2012 11215-6 TPAS:IGLWATER{RO1PIantExD�&��oR�uuetltoBiASpecs\11215.00Cx . 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. General . The pumps shall be of the vertical turbine multistage type designed to pump concentrate water. Vertical turbine line-shaft pumps shall be self-lubricated, completely equipped with motor support of one piece construction. 2. The pumps shall be as manufactured Model lOELM by Flowserve, model9LA by Peerless, Model AF-GSV 4x6 by Afton or Model VIT FFFM 1 I RALC by ITT Goulds meeting the detailed hydraulic, efficiency, and mechanical requirements specified herein. No substitutions will be permitted. . No carbon steel or cast iron parts or fasteners shall be used on the pumps. B. Performance Requirements: 1. When operating at the maximum output speed of the motor, each pump shall have a characteristic performance curve which meets all the minimum conditions listed in Table 1 1215-1. The pumps, drive motors and variable frequency drives shall be capable of operating satisfactority under the full range of conditions as defined by Table 11215-1. The Intermediate pump capacity, head and efficiency defined in Table 11215-1 shall be the "design point." 2. Each pump shall be capable of continuous adjustable speed operation over the speed range from 30 percent to 100 percent of pump design speed. There shall be no significant change in vibration and noise level over the entire listed range of speed and flow of the pumping system. 3. Maximum motor speeds shall not exceed those listed in Table 11215-1 to satisfy the specified • hydraulic duty requirements. The pump "design speeds" shall be the maximum output speed of the motor furnished, when operating at the pump "Intermediate" capacity and head at 60 Hertz on utility power (fWl motor speed). All pumps within each group shall have identical impeller sizes. 4. With the pumping units operating at full motor speed, the maximum brake horsepower required by the pumps shall not exceed the maximum horsepower listed in Table 11215-1. If the pumping units require more than the maximum horsepower listed in Table 11215-1 at the motor output shaft at any full motor speed operation point between Primary and Secondary discharge head, they will be rejected. C. Pump Discharge Head 1. The discharge head shall be a one piece fabrication of stainless steel Type 316L ASTM A312, 3/8-inch minimum thickness with raised face ANSI B16.5 flange connections. The discharge head shall be thermally stress relieved after fabrication, and it should be pickled and passivated after all welding is complete. The head shall be grit blasted to an even matte finish to remove all tool marks. All cut edges will be ground smooth. The discharge head shall then be electropolished. 2. The discharge head shall include a stainless steel Type 316L seal box and have extra large openings for pump adjustment and seal maintenance. It shall also include a suitable sized drain connection. A continuous bypass to maintain low seal box pressure, and to assure a positive seal box bushing lubrication. Seal flush tubing and fittings shall be a11316 stainless steel and shall provide for recirculation from the seal chamber back to pump suction. A 3/8-inch tap shall be provided for the suction and discharge pressure gages, each with 316SS pipe nipples and isolation valve and bolts and nuts. 3. Provide a Chesterton 155, Crane 8B 1 or equal self- aligning single inside mounted cartridge mechanical seal equipped with carbon stationary and tungsten carbide rotating seal faces. All metal parts, including gland, sleeve, drive collar, and • springs shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. All elastomers are to be Aflas and to be isolated from the process. T'he seals shall be pressure capable of 25"Hg — 600PSI. The gland is to have adjustable bolting tabs and the flush port shall be capable of rotating 360° for piping. 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/2012 11215-7 TPA S:\CLWATERV201 Plant 6pansion Prqec�VVasued b Bid SpecsU 7215.docx � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. The base of the dischar e head shall be 316 SS and shall be machined to match the drilling of • g the base flange as selected by the pump Manufacturer. 5. The top of the discharge head shall have a registered fit for mounting driving motor. 6. The opening for the coupling shall be covered with a 3l6 stainless steel expanded metal mesh guard and fastened with 316 stainless steel screws. D. Pump Shafting: 1. Shaft diameter shall be determined by the AWWA Standard for Vertical Turbine Pumps - Line Shaft and Submersible Types, ANSI/AWWA EIOI-(latest), Section A4.1.5, but in no case be less than the diameter shown in Table 1]215-1. 2. Impeller shafts and couplings shall be Type 416 or Type 316 stainless steel. Circular keys to carry thrust load and longitudinal key to transmit tarque shall be provided. 3. Pump shafts shall be Type 416 or Type 316 stainless steel one piece construction and shall be field replaceable. Bolting shall be 316 stainless steel. 4. The pump shall be equipped with a four (4) piece rigid adjustable spacer coupling between motor shaft and pump shaft to allow mechanical seal to be replaced without disturbing the motor, with a top shaft impeller adjustment nut, including locking screw. The pump and motor shaft sections shall be joined with a shaft coupling located above the seal box and positioned to be easily removable through the discharge head openings. 5. Line shaft bearings, if any, shall be removable self-flushing Vesconite, or babbited carbon (AC 40), or rubber type, mounted in fabricated stainless steel Type 3l6 steel bearing spiders located at discharge column flanges on 5-ft centers. E. Pump bowls, including suction bell, shall be Type 316 stainless steel ASTM A743, Grade CF8M, flanged and bolted construction with babbited carbon bearings. Bowl wearing rings will be • babbited carbon. All bow} hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. F. Each impeller shall be manufactured of stainless steel ASTM A743, Grade CF8M, of the enclosed impeller type; statically and dynamically balanced and complete with stainless steel ASTM A276 316L condition A wear rings, with circular keys and longitudinal keys. G. Each pump shall be equipped with a suction and discharge pressure gauge. Pressure gauges shall be bronze bourdon tube SOLFRLJNT Duraguage Series 1980 Black Phenol Turret type with 316 stainless steel rack and pinion movement, or equal. The gauges shall be glycerin filled. Suction side gauges shall be calibrated from 0 to 100 psi and 0 to I50 psig for discharge service. Gauges shall be 2-1/2-inch diameter furnished with 1/2-inch inlet. All fittings and cocks shall be stainless steel Type 316. Pressure gauges shall be furnished with isolating pulsation dampeners. H. The natural frequency of the assembled pump and its supporting structure, shall be at least 25 percent higher than the maximum pump speed. After manufacture and welding of all fabricated components, including the pump discharge head passivate all stainless surfaces in accordance with ASTM A380 by using the following procedure: 1. Wire brush all outside weld areas to remove weld splatter. Brushes shall be of stainless steel and used only on stainless steel. 2. Remove all carbon deposits, greases, and oils by pickling and neutralization to aid the regeneration of a uniform corrosion resistant, chromium oxide film. 3. Completely immerse all stainless steel assemblies and parts after welding and brushing in a pickling solution of 6% to 10% nitric acid and 3% and 4% hydrofluoric acid of 140 degrees F. for a minimum of l 5 minutes. Parts shall be free of iron particles or other foreign material • after this procedure. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 l 1 2 1 S—O 7PA 5:1CLWATER1F20 7 Plant 6pansion PrqeclNSSUed to BiA Specs111215.docz • c0 2012 CDM Smith A!! [;��I�ts Reserved 4. Neutralize all stainless steei assemblies and parts previously pickled by immersion in a tri- sodium phosphate rinse. 5. Allow to air dry. J. Spare Parts to be Furnished: 1. Two (2) complete mechanical seal assemblies for each pump service.. 2. One (1) complete sets of gaskets, O-rings, and lineshaft bearings for each pump service.. 2.04 PUMP DRIVE MOTORS A. Each pump shall be driven by means of a premium efficiency inverter duty squirrel cage induction motor. Motor horsepower shal] be as specified in Paragraph 2.03 B. The motor shall be furnished with thrust bearings having ample capacity to carry the full weight of all rotating parts and hydraulic forces developed by continuous pump operation. The pump motor shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. B. Motors shall be vertical, solid shaft with a TEFC enclosure with ball type centrifugal non reverse ratchets, and shall meet the requirements of Section 16150 and those hereafter listed. Motor shall have 1.15 service factor, Class F vacuum/ pressure impregnated insulation with Class B temperature rise, copper windings, and a 95.0 percent nominal full load efficiency. C. All motors shall be buiit in accordance with latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall conform to all requirements stipulated in PART 1- GENERAL of • this Section of the Specifications and with the specifications for motors included in Section 16150. D. Bearings shall be anti-friction, oil-lubricated with external reservoirs. Bearings shall have an ABMA L-lO life of 100,000 hours. Motors must be designed to accept a11 upthrust ]oads imposed by pump during starting and running. E. The motors shall be specifically designed for inverter duty on a PWM type power source. The motors shall be compatible with the pumps and variable frequency drives provided by the Manufacturer. F. Motor noise level shall not exceed 85 dBA measured 5 feet from the unit under free field conditions, when operating on utility power. G. Resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) shall be provided in the motor windings. H. Motor space heaters, rated for 120 volt operation, shall be provided. 2.05 PUMP CONTROL LOG}C A. The following provides a description of the concentrate pump station control logic: l. Pumps speed will be automatically adjusted to maintain the ]evel set point. The speed of ail pumps in service shall be matched. 2. Additional pumps shall be started when pumps in service operate at greater then 95% of full speed continuously for more than 60 seconds. 3. A pump shall be shutdown when pumps in service operate at less than 60% of ful) speed continuously for more than 30 seconds. � 4. A high pressure switch wined to the VFD shall shutdown the pumps automatically on high pressure. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1 l 2 1 S-9 TPA S:1ClWATER�RO 1 Poa'rt Expansion Projectllssued to Bid Specs\71215.tlocz �O 2012 CDM Smith A11 Rights Reserved 5. The concentrate pump station will be monitored by HMI for level, high level alarm, pressure high pressure alarm, and pump failure alarms. 2.05 PUMP CONTROL PANEL A. Provide a complete and fully functional control system to manually or automatically operate the pump control system as specified herein and in other applicable sections of these specifications. All Manufacturers recommended safety devices shall be furnished to protect operators. All control devices, unless specified otherwise, shall be mounted in the Pump Control Panel. B. Pump Control Panel shall be furnished by the pump supplier as specified in Section 1 1215. C. The pump control panel shall house all equipment necessary for operation of pump/motor sensar devices as specified in Section l 1215, as shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, and as specified in Division 13 and Section 16191.2.02 D. The pumping system shall be controlled by the Plant Instrumentation System as shown on the Instrumentation Drawings and as specified in Division 13. E. The variable frequency drives will operate motors as specified in Section 11215. The drives furnished herein under shall be totally compatible with the motors to be supplied. F. Pump Control Panel Construction 1. The pump control panel shall consist of a main circuit breaker, a motor circuit protector (MCP) and variable frequency drive for each motor and a 120-volt control power transformer (fused on primary and secondary). All control components shall be mounted in one common enclosure. Control switches shall provide means to operate each motor manually or automatical ly. 2. Unless specifically noted otherwise, the electrical control equipment shall be mounted within a NEMA 4X enclosure, constructed of not less than 14 gauge Type 316 stainless steel. Latches shall be quarter turn quick release type and all hardware shall be Type 3l 6 stainless steel. The enclosure shall be equipped with an exterior door, aluminum dead front, and shall incorporate a removable back panel on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to enclosure with coliar studs. Dead front door shall be interlocked with main circuit breaker and provided with pad-locking provision. Enclosures shall be provided with sun shields and provided with minimum 8-inch high legs. 3. All motor branch circuit breakers, motor starters and control relays shall be of highest industrial quality, securely fastened to the removable back panels with screws and lock washers. Back panels shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping screws shall not be used to mount any component. 4. A thermal-magnetic air circuit breaker, Type FH as manufactured by the Square D Company, or equal, shall be furnished for the main breaker. All circuit breakers shall be sealed by the manufacturer after calibration to prevent tampering. Each circuit breaker shall be adequately sized to meet the equipment operating conditions. Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip only, "Mag-Gard" as manufactured by the Square D or eyual. 5. Variable frequency drive (VFD) a. Three variable frequency drives shall be furnished in the pump control panel, one for each motor. The variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be rated at 480 VAC input with features and options as specified. b. The VFD shall be as manufactured by Yaskawa (no substitution is permitted}. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 � I 2 1 S-1 � TPA S:�CLWATER�RO t Plarrt Expareian ProjecHissued M Bid Specs\71215.docx r� �J • � � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � c. The variable frequency drives shall be rated for the HP, full load current and rpm of the motor. The variable frequency drives shall be designed to provide microprocessor-based continuous speed adjustment of three-phase motors. The variable frequency output voltage shall provide constant volts-per-Hertz excitation for the motor up to 60 Hertz. The variable frequency drives shall be optimized for an adjustable or selectable carrier frequency to reduce motar noise. The carrier frequency shall be field adjustable and adjusted by the manufacturer's fietd engineer during start up. d. The variable frequency drives shall be of the Pu1se Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. Variable frequency drives utilizing a third power section are not acceptable. Adjustable Voltage and Current Source variable frequency drives are not acceptable_ Transistors shall be used in the inverter section. GTOs and SCRs are not acceptable. e. The variable frequency drives shal] be current regulated. Variable frequency drives permitting instantaneous overcurrent trips other than an output short circuit are not acceptable. f. The variable frequency drives shall have an efficiency that exceeds 97% at 100% speed and load. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load. The variable frequency drives shall maintain the line side displacement power factor no less than 0.95 regardless of speed and load. Variable frequency drive efficiency shall be defined as drive output power at the motor output terminals divided by the input power at the line side of the main circuit breaker. g. Standard operation conditions shall be: l) Incoming power: Three phase, 480V (+I O% to -10%) and 60 hertz (+/- 2 hertz) • power to a fixed potential DC bus level. 2) Humidity: 0 to 95% (noncondensing). 3) Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet above sea level. 4) Ambient temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C. h. The variable frequency drives shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The variable frequency drives shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the variable frequency drives shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor in the preset method of starting. i. All variable frequency drive programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front door of the variable frequency drive. Parameters shall include: 1) Programmable maximum and minimum frequency. 2) Programmable acceleration and deceleration times. 3) Selectable carrier frequencies, V/Hz, and critical frequency avoidance lockout. 4) Adjustable electronic overload and torque limits. 5) Multiple attempt restart following utility outage or fault condition with adjustable time delay of 0 to 5 minutes. 6) Jog, thread, and preset speeds. 7) Keypad lockout and factory default overrides. 8) Adjustable slip compensation (+/- 5%). j. The variable frequency drives shall be additionally equipped with a digital operator station mounted on the enclosure front door. Control operator devices and indication lights shall include: 1) Human interface module with local digitat speed control. • 2) Hand-Off-Remote control selector switch. 3) Momentary start/stop push buttons utilized with the HOR in "Hand". 4) Red mushroom head emergency stop (maintained contact) push button. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 112 I 5-11 TPA S:�CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansian AojecFllssued ro Bid SpeuwU 1215.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5) Status lights for run, fault, alarm, up-to-speed, power on, and drive ready status. 6) Additional controls as required by Divisions 11 and 13 and as shown on the Drawings. Pump Failure will reyuire pump fail timer (as required). Provide for terminations of remote mounted operator control devices and field devices. k. The variable frequency drives shall have the following system interfaces: l) Inputs: a) Two (2) isolated process control speed reference interfaces to receive and isolate 0-]0 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc signals. b) Dedicated terminal blocks for interface with remote operator and field devices. c) 120 Vac control to allow variable frequency drives to interface with remote contacts and with two or three-wire control. d) Additional inputs as required by Divisions 11 or 13 and as shown on the Drawings. 2) Outputs: a) Four (4) analog output signals 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc for external metering. b) Run relay with an isolated set of form C contacts. c) Dry contact output (N.O.) to indicate protective function trip. d) Dry contact output (N.O.) to indicate common alarm. e) Additional outputs as required by Divisions I 1 ar 13 and as shown on the Drawings. Monitoring and Displays: 1) The variable frequency drives shall have a display indicating monitored functions as follows: a) Input current (3 phases) b) Input voltage (3 phases) c) Output current (3 phases) d) Output voltage (3 phases) e) Output frequency fl Kilowatts g) Drive temperature h) Time i) Date j) Motor rpm k) Ten (10) most recent trips/faults 2) The variable frequency drives shall have protective features as follows (with indication for a. through h.): a) Speed compensated electronic motar overload current. b) Undervoltage. c) Overfrequency. d) Overtemperature. e) Ground Fault. fl DC bus protection. g) Inrush current limit (adjustable 50 to 150%). h) Input and output phase loss_ i) Emergency stop pushbutton (Red mushroom head and maintained) as listed in paragraph ES j.4) above. j) Current limiting fuses shall be provided on the input side of the VFDs to protect against fault currents up to 200,000 A sym. k) Phase insensitive to input power. 1) Electrical isolation between the power, control and logic circuits. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11215-12 TPASiCIWATER�RO1RaMExpansionRojecllkwedtoBidSpeasU1275.docx � • � O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � m) Drive to be capable of withstanding output terminal line short or open circuits without component failure. m. The variable frequency drives shall be variable torque design. Provide variable torque design as required by Section 11215. n. Provide fused space heaters with thermostat to minimize condensation potential upon drive shutdown. o. Provide input line reactor to minimize harmonics sent back to utility. p. Provide dv/dt output filtering on the VFD to limit the voltage at the motor terminals to ] 000 volts, 2 microsecond rise time. q. The variable frequency drives will communicate via Ethernet TCP/IP communications and provide full functionality with Allen Bradley PLCs. 6. Auxiliary contacts (as required) shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by Divisions 13, 16 and as shown on the Drawings. 7. All operating control and instruments shall be securely mounted on the exterior door. All controls and instruments shall be clearly labeled to indicate function. All exterior mounted equipment shall be NEMA 4X. • 8. Mode selector switches shall be Hand-Off-Auto type to permit override of automatic control and manual actuation of shutdown. Switches shall be NEMA 4X (800H) as manufactured by Square D, Allen-Bradley, or equal, providing three (3) switch positions, each of which shall be clearly labeled according to function. 9. Indicator lamps shall be push-to test, LED, full voltage type and mounted in NEMA 4X (800H) modules, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley. Lamp modules shall be equipped to operate at 120 volt input. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the contro] compartment door without removing lamp module from its mounted position. Indicators shall be provided for individual motor run and an indicator for each failwe condition. 10. A six (6) digit, non-reset elapsed time meter shall be connected to each variable frequency drive to indicate the total running time of each motor in "hours" and "tenth of hours". The elapsed time meters shall be Series T50 as manufactured by the ENM Company or equal. 11. The control panel shall operate on a power supply of 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz unless otherwise noted. 12. The control diagrams, overload tables and distribution panel schedule shall be laminated to the inside of the door except where door space is limited the laminated documents shall be in the print storage pocket. 13. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. Pocket shall be of sufficient size as required to hold all prints necessary to service the equipment. A set of reduced drawings shall be provided for each panel, fixed to fit in the storage pocket. 14. A duplex GFCI uti}ity receptacle (circuit breaker protected) providing I20 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase current shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure. 15. All timing relays sha11 be solid state with pin (octal) and bases. Relays shall be T-series as manufactured by Diversified Electronics Inc. or equal. 16. A three phase monitor shall be provided for the pump control panel on the incoming line. The phase monitor shall prevent motors starting on the following conditions: overvoltage, • undervoltage, phase reversal, phase imbalance and loss of phase. The phase monitor shall have integral fault light and dry contact for alarm indication. The unit shall be Diversified, or approved equal. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11215-13 TPA SiCLWATER1R01 Plan[ Expairsian ProjeciVssued to Bid SpecsN 1215.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 17. 18. l 9. 20. 2l. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 3l. 32. All exterior mounted equipment shall be rated NEMA 4X. Hinged NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel viewing windows will be permitted where such equipment is not available with a NEMA 4X rating. The pump control panel shall be provided with an externally mounted transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS). Lead lengths sha11 not be longer than ] 2 inches from the main circuit breaker. TVSS shall be equipped with dry contact option to allow for remote status monitoring ofTVSS. Protection shall be as manufactured by LEA International, Model LSSl50-277/480- 3Y, rated 225KA per phase, 480 VAC, 3 phase. All control panel wiring shall be numbered at both ends with type written heat shrinkable wire markers. Wiring shall be stranded copper, minimum size #14 AWG (except for shielded instrumentation cable), with 600 volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. The pump contro] panel shall be provided with nameplates identifying each component, selector switches, pi(ot lights, etc. Nameplates shal) be permanently affixed using an epoxy process (inner door nameplates shall be fastened with stainless steel screws). Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, engraved white letters with a black background. The pump control panel shall be provided with a master nameplate located on the exterior doar. Where applicable provide a nameplate which reads as follows "CAUTION - THIS PANEL CONTAINS A VOLTAGE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE." Letters shall be black on a high visibility yellow background. Corrosion Inhibitor Emitter: Inclusion of an industrial corrosion inhibitor emitter that shall protect internal components of control panel from corrosion for up to one year. Two spare emitters shall be provided for the control panel. All control relays shall be have 10 amp rated contacts (minimum), 1] pin with mounting base , 3PDT (minimum), with LED indicators to show relay status, relays shall be manufactured by Potter Brumfield or equal. Terminal blocks shall be 600 volt heavy duty rated, tubular clamp type. Terminal strips shall be Allen Bradley catalog # 1492-CA-1 or equal. Each terminal shall be individually labeled. The completed pump control panel assembly shall be U.L. certified and shall meet the requirements of UL 508. The minimum overall short-circuit withstand rating of the control panel and devices shall be 65,000 Amperes RMS symmetrical at 480 volts. All electronic control equipment (i.e. controllers, isolators, signal boosters, transmitters, PLC's, etc) shall be as specified in Division 13. A copper ground bar with sufficient terminals for all field and panel ground connections shall be provided. All signal wiring entering and exiting the control panel shall be provided with surge protection. Surge protection shall be as specified in Division l3. An 8-inch (minimum) clear space within the enclosure shall be provided horizontally along the entire top and bottom of the control panel. A 4-inch (minimum} clear space within the enclosure shall be provided vertically along the entire sides of the control panel. No devices, terminals, etc. shall be installed within this space, the space shall be provided for field conduit and wiring access only. All wiring within the pump control panel shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. The following coding shall be used. For different system voltages, the color coding shall be as required by the Engineer. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 1 2 1 S— � 4 TPA S:�CLWATER�RO 1 Plant 6pansion ProjectUssued M Bid Spea\t 7215.docx u • • • � �� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 33 34. 35 G Svstem 480 Volts 3 Phase Control (Individual Conductors) W ire Ground Neutral (As Reyuired) Phase A Phase B Phase C AC DC Foreign Color Green Gray Brown Orange Yellow Red Blue Yellow The pump controi panel shall be provided with an air conditioner, sized for the physical dimensions and heat load of the particular panel. Submit heat load / air conditioner sizing calculations to the engineer for approval. Internal temperature of components shall not exceed their U.L. listing. The power supply for the air conditioner unit shall be from the distribution panel located within the pump control panel. Provide a fluorescent light, with switch and all associated hardware, in the pump control panel enclosure. Fluorescent light shall be 120VAC and shall mount inside the top of the enclosure. Fluorescent light shall be a standard product of the enclosure manufacturer. A dry-type, two-winding, 7.5 KVA (minimum), 480-120/240 volt transformer and secondary distribution panel shall be furnished within the pump control panel. The distribution section shall accommodate a minimum of five (5) one-inch, molded-case, 20 amp breakers with l 0 kA interrupting capacity mounted to the dead front of the enclosure. Provide dedicated breakers to serve air conditioner, fluorescent light, duplex receptacle, etc. A laminated, typewritten directory card identifying all circuits shall be affixed to the pump control panel front door. Spare Parts The following number of spare parts shall be furnished for the pump control panel. a. 1 Indicator light assembly b. 2 control relays for each type furnished c. 5 fuses for each type/size furnished d. 1 selector switch for each type furnished PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. B_ The Contractor shall submit a certificate from the Manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.02 SHOP PAINTING A. Before exposure to weather and prior to shop painting all motor surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, dry and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. 6349-79520/l0l09/2012 11215-15 TPASiCLWATERIROtPIantExpensionWojeMUSSUedtoBidSpece111215.docv c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. All exposed portions of the motors shall be shop primed and painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for this service. C. All nameplates shall be properly protected during painting. D. Gears, bearing surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. The Owner and Engineer shall have the right to inspect, test or wimess tests of all materials or equipment to be furnished under these specifications, prior to their shipment from the point of manufacture. 2. The Engineer shall be notified in writing prior to initial shipment, in ample time so that arrangements can be made for inspection by the Engineer. 3. Field tests shall not be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing. B. Factory Pump Tests: l. Non-witness factory testing in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute shall be required for the pump. Certified pump performance curves sha11 be submitted, including head, capacity, brake horsepower, and pump efficiency for the pump supplied. Test data and • performance curves shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer employed by the Manufacturer. Certified data shal] be provided to indicate the NPSH required by the pump at the primary operating point listed in Table ] 1215-1. Prior to conducting a pump test, notification of such test and a list of test equipment and test procedures sha11 be forwarded to the Engineer at least ten (10) working days before the scheduled test date.. All electronic transducers, meters, gauges, and other test instruments shall be calibrated within forty-five (45) days of the scheduled test and certified calibration data shall be provided to the Engineer at least ten days prior to the Factory Non-witness test. Differential pressure type flow meters, such as venturis shall have been calibrated within 5 years. Mechanical variation of the meter throat diameter will be accepted as verification of calibration validity. 2. The pump shal) be tested through the specified range of flow, and head/capacity/efficiency curves plotted at maximum output speed. During each test, the pump shall be run at each head condition for sufficient time to accurately determine discharge, head, power input, and efficiency. Unless the manufacturer can provide certified test data from similar pumps, the pump will be tested with a suction head (including vapor pressure, velocity head friction loss and static suction head) as required to demonstrate the NPSH required by the pump at the primary operating point listed in Tabie 11215-1. If the pump fails to meet any specification requirement it will be modified until it meets all specification requirements. 3. Certified pump performance curves shall be submitted, including head, capacity, brake horsepower, and pump efficiency for each pump supplied. Certified data shall be provided to verify the NPSH required by the pumps at the Primary operating point listed in Table 11215-1. 4. In lieu of testing with all job equipment, job pump bowls may be tested with a laboratory column pipe and discharge head similar in size to that furnished for final installation. The length of column pipe will be the same as will be required to set the bowl in the field. 5. All pumps shall be tested at full speed and complete staging through the specified range of • flow, and head/capacity/efficiency curves plotted at maximum output speed. During each test, 6349-79520/ l 0/09/2012 1 1 G 1 J- l 6 TPA 5:1CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Exparrsion ProjeclUSSUed to BiA Specs\11215.docx u �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved the pump shall be run at each head condition for sufficient time to accurately determine discharge, head, power input, and efficiency. 6. If any pump tested fails to meet any specification requirement it will be modified until it meets all specification requirements. If any pump tested fails to meet the efficiency requirements at any of the listed flow or head conditions listed in Table 11215-1 and all reasonable attempts to correct the inefficiency are unsuccessful, the pump(s) shall be replaced with unit(s) which meet the specified requirements. C. Field Inspection and Owner Instruction: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the Manufacturer's field service technician, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the equipment, for a period of not less than one (1) day to inspect the installed equipment and supervise the initial test run. These services may not be combined with those specified by Paragraph 1.06. D. Field Pump Tests: 1. After all the work has been completed on this item, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer that the installed equipment can perform satisfactory under actual field conditions. The pumps shall be field tested to verify mechanical integrity and soundness of construction, installation and operation. 2. After the equipment has been operated for a sufficient period to make all desirable corrections and adjustments, each pumping unit and all associated equipment shall be given a field test to determine that operation is satisfactory, free from excessive vibration, leaks and noise, and in compliance with these Specifications. • 3. Noise and vibration tests shall be conducted in conformance with the Hydraulics Institute Test Codes and OSHA Standards for Occupational Noise Exposure. Maximum allowable noise level, corrected for background sound, shall not exceed 80 dBA when measured at a horizontal distance of 5 feet from the equipment being tested, at a height of 5 feet above floor level. Maximum allowable vibration, as measured by an IRD Model 330 Vibration Analyzer or equal, shall not exceed the maximum recommended limits established by Paragraph 2.01 H. The actual natural frequency of the installed pumping units will be verified using industry accepted procedures. 4. If the pump performance, including vibration levels or natural frequency, does not meet the Specifications, corrective measures shall be taken or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps which satisfy the conditions specified. A 24-hour operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. 5. All pump operating settings, alarms, controls, and shutdown devices shall be calibrated and tested during the field tests. Refer to Division 13 for control requirements. 6. The Contractor shall fumish all power, water, facilities, labor, materials, supplies, and test instruments required to conduct field test. 7. Deliver to the Engineer, upon completion of satisfactory testing of the equipment, reports as specified in Division 1. E. Field Electric Control System Tests: L The variable frequency drive and electric control system shall be test operated for proper functioning prior to the pump mechanical test. The control system shall be checked out using simulated operating signals as per VFD Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The Contractor shall check all drives for correct clearances, alignment and lubrication, prior to start up, in accordance with the respective Manufacturer's instructions. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 11215-17 TPA S9CLWATERlR01 Rant Ezparrsion PrqecBlswed to Bid Specs\11215.docz � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. Field Motor Tests: 1. The Contractor shall megger each motor winding upon delivery, and before energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low, shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. 2. The Contractor shall check all motors for correct clearances and alignment and for correct lubrication in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections if necessary. 3. The Contractor shall meet all the testing requirements of Division 16. G. Field Alarm System Testing: 1. Check each alarm and detection device for proper operation. Refer to Division 13 for control requirements. TABLE 11215-1 CONCENTRATE PUMPS Item/Design Conditions Maximum motor full load speed (rpm) Motor to be supplied (hp/voitage) (max.) Pump design speed (rpm) (max.) Rated pumping temperature Column and Discharge Size (inches} Minimum Pump Shaft Diameter (inches) Minimum pump shut-off head at design speed (feet) Maximum allowed pump horsepower at design speed (bhp) Secondary capacity (gpm) Minimum TH at Secondary capacity (feet) Minimum pump efficiency at Secondary capacity (%) Minimum capacity at intermediate TH (gpm) (2) intermediate (design) TH (feet) (1) (2) Minimum pump efficiency at intermediate TH (%) Minimum capacity at Primary TH (gpm) (2) Primary TH (feet) Minimum pump efficiency at Primary TH (%a) Maximum NPSH required (feetj at Primary point Concentrate Pumps No. 1,2 and 3 1,800 40 Hp/480 V 1,780 80° F 6 1 307 30 225 287 71 350 231 71.8 450 155 62.5 20 Pump Model Used for Basis of Design Flowserve 10ELM (1) Full speed operation point required for minimum speed/flow operation. (2) Pump shall be fully capable of 350 gpm at 80 feet TH at reduced speed operation. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 1 2 1 S— 1 O TPA S:�CLWATER1R01 Plant Expansion Projec[UssueA to BiA Specs\71275.tlocx • • • • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Keserved SECTION 11216 HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP(S} BLEND WATER PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. As a Base Bid, furnish all labor, materials, eyuipment and incidentals required and completely remove existing pump, install, put in operation and field test three rehabilitated blend water pumps plus one rehabilitated OWNER spare pump with drivers, mounting arrangement and controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1. The existing pumps are 20 HP PACO Modei 10-50975-77XX15-2852. 2. The rehabilitation of the existing pumps located at the Blend Water Tank shall include K I 061-C Impeller Kit for 7" impeller, Mechanical Seal Kit with gaskets, motor bearing/20 HP, wear ring kit K 1213, Shaft sleeve SST 05016451 H303 and a new TEFC 20HP 1800 rpm 3 Phase motor for conditions of service at shown in Table 1 1216-1. 3. Rehabilitation to be performed by Custom Pump and Controls, tnc, 6034 Jetpoint Industrial Blvd, Tampa FL 33834, 813-886-6255. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours notice and coordinate with the OWNER to pick up the OWNER's spare pump located at City of Clearwater Utilities Department, 1650 N. Arcturas Ave, Clearwater FL 33765. 5 See Section 01014 for additional construction schedule reyuirements. B. lf authorized in the Agreement as Additive Alternate No. 5, furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and completely install, put in operation and field test four new blend water pumps, with drivers, mounting arrangement and controls as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein in lieu of rehabilitation specified in paragraph l.Ol A. C All necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in this Section or not shall be furnished and installed as required for an installation incorporating the highest standards for this type of service. Also included shall be supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Electrical motors are included in Division 16. B. Concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3; however, anchor bolts for these units shall be furnished under this Section. C. Field painting is included in Section 09902. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 l 216-1 TPA S:ICLWATERU201 PIaM Expa�ion ProjectUssued to Bid Specs\71216.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • D. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 13. Instrumentation and controls provided in this section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specifications Sections in Division 13. E. Valves, mechanical piping and appurtenances and pipe hangers, supports and thermal insulation are included in Division ] 5. F. Electrical work, except as hereinafter specified, is included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The documentation as stated under Appendix A ofthe ANSI Standards ASME B73.1M-1991 and/or ASME B73.2M-1991 shall be supplied to provide ciear communication between the pump user and pump manufacturer and to facilitate the safe design, installation and operation of the pump. B. Test Reports 1. Each new pump only shall be Hydrostatically Tested with certified copies of the test results submitted to the ENGINEER. 2. Performance curves shall be submitted based on tests conducted in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The eyuipment covered by this Section is intended to be standard pumping equipment of proven • ability as manufactured by concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. Units specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer_ The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed to operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. The pump manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement and operation of all connected rotating components of the assembled mounted pumping unit and to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. C. Vibration, when measured in the direction of maximum amplitude on either the pump and motor bearing housings or at the top motor bearing housing, shall not exceed the specified displacement and velocity limit at any speed within the operating speed range. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the unit and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. Store all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled far shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11216-2 TPA S:ICLWATER�R01 PIaM EYpaMion PrqectUssued to Bid Specs\H216.docn • • . �O 2012 CDM Smith All RiLl�ts Reserved D. The finished surfaces of all exposed flanges shall be protected by wooden or equivalent blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E F Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shail be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. No shipment shall be made until approved by the ENGINEER in writing. G. For protection of bearings during shipment and instaliation, the bearing shall be properly processed. Anti-friction bearings, if pre-lubricated, shall be protected in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendations against formation of rust during a long period of storage while awaiting completion of installation and start-up of the machine in which they are used. Anti-friction bearings which are not pre-lubricated shall be properly treated in accordance with the bearing manufacturer's recommendation against formation of rust during a long period of storage, while waiting completion of installation and start-up, by the application of Exxon, Rust-Ban No. 392 or equal treatment. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all special tools and test equipment required or the proper servicing of all equipment as specified in Section 01170. All such tools and test equipment shall be furnished in a suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers that are clearly identified with indelible markings as to contents. C. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump model. 1. One wear plate for open impeller design. 2. Set of inechanical seals. 3. Two anti-friction radial thrust bearing assembiies. 4. Two anti-friction radial and axial thrust bearing assemblies. ] .07 WARRANTY A. The new parts and equipment only shall be warranted for a period of l year from date of substantial completion as defined under the General Conditions to be free from defects in workmanship, design or material. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), it shall be replaced in the machine and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2 PRODUCTS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 only 2.O1 GENERAL A. The pumping units shall all be supplied by one manufacturer and shall be complete including pumps, motors, steel mounting arrangement, controls and appurtenances such as, but not limited to, couplings, guards and gauges. B. All necessary foundation bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished and installed by CONTRACTOR per MANUFACTURER's recommendations shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11216-3 TPA S:ICLWATERIRO 1 Plant Ezpansion PrqeaNSSUed to Bid Spew\i 1218.daa � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.02 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE A. The blend water pumps shall be Mode12500 5" by Fairbanks Morse; Model MEN 150-125- 250L by Flow Serve or Mode13180 6x8-12 by Goulds. No substitutions will be permitted. B. The pumps shall be designed far the conditions of service as tabulated in Table 11216-1. 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. The impeller shall be stainless steel. B. Motors shall be flexible coupled, TEFC, premium efficiency and shall meet the requirements of Section 16150. C. Manufacture shall supply and ship pump and motor mounted on steel base. D. Provide a control panel for the system which contains a main breaker, starter, overloads, controls for heater, etc. 2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES • A. The fourth pump shall be provided with a glycerin-filled discharge pressure gauge with a}/4-in NPT inlet and 2.5-in dials. The discharge gauge shall be graduated from 0 to 100 psi. The gauges shall be connected to the pump nozzles with 1/4-in SS pipe complete with "T"-handle cocks. All fittings and cocks shall be SS. The pressure gauge shall be equal to Figure 1980 • Solfrunt standard gauges, Model 150000-4 Series, by Amtek, U.S. Gauge Division. 2.05 SHOP TESTING A. Certified copies of both hydrostatic and performance tests are required for each pump and in accordance with both the referenced ANSI and Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed, as part of the work under this Section, as specified in Section 09901. Field painting is included in Section 09902. PART 3 EXECUT]ON 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible. B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all work and the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensions shall be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set in • accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and setting plans. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11216-4 TVAS:ICLWATERIR01%aMFxpansionProjec111swedtoBidSpecs\ii216.tlocx OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. Set base mounted pumps on the steel ar cast iron base and check for alignment in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and then grout base. Unless inertia block is specified on the Drawings, base mounted pumps shall be installed and grouted on a pad. In line and suspended pumps shall be properly supported by the suspension clips as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent any strain on the connecting piping. C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the ENGINEER. All piping connections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to mate with the pump flange connections. D. A certificate from each eyuipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit. 3.03 FIELD TESTS A. In the presence of the ENGINEER, such tests as necessary to indicate that the pumps and motors and conform to the capacities and heads specified without excessive vibration or noise shall be performed. If a pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shal) be taken or the pump shall be removed and replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified. OWNER shall supply water for testing. CONTRACTOR shall supply temporary piping, gauge power as necessary for initial testing. Acceptance testing shall be performed with the system fully constructed per the plans and specifications. CONTRACTOR • to supply cleaning solution for acceptance testing. Written test procedures sha11 be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval 30 days prior to testing. u B. If required, take corrective action and the units shall be retested to ensure full compliance with this Section. All costs associated with the field tests or any required corrective action shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11216-5 TPAS:�CLWATERV201RaMExpansimRojecftlssuedtoBitlSpecsU1216.tloc¢ �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • TABLE 11216-1 BLEND WATER PUMPS UN1T DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Item Description Desi�n Conditions Number of Pumps (operating/spare) 4 (3/l) Maximum Motor Full Load Speed (rpm) 1,200 Maximum Allowed Motor (HP) l5 Motor Design Voltage/Phase to be Supplied 460/3 Maximum Anticipated Pumping Temperature (degrees F.) 90 Minimum Pump Discharge Size (inches) 6 Suction Size (inches) 8 Minimum Pump Shut-Off Head at Design Speed (feet) 42 Secondary TDH (feet) 39 Minimum Capacity at Secondary TDH (gpm) 600 • Minimum Overall Efficiency at Secondary TDH (%) 68 Intermediate (Design) Capacity (gpm) 1,000 Minimum TDH at lntermediate (Design) Capacity (feet) 32 Minimum Overall Efficiency at Inter►nediate (Design) Capacity (%) 74 Maximum TH at Run out (feet) 26 Minimum Capacity at Run out (gpm) ],200 Minimum Overall Efficiency at Primary Capacity (%) 65 Maximum NPSHR at Primary TH (feet) 30 END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11216-6 TPAS:ICLWATER1R01PoantEVpansionProjecHlssueAroBidSpecs\N216.docx � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION l 1240 CARTRIDGE FILTERS PART 1 — GENERAL I.OI REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install, complete and make ready for service cartridge filters in the sizes, shapes and quantities specified herein. B. The membrane feedwater and cleaning system cartridge filter vessels shall be vertical, cylindrical in shape, constructed of 316 L stainless steel, and have wound polypropylene cartridge elements. All above concrete floor piping and valving shall be 316 L stainless steel. C. The one (1) cartridge filter vessel for the membrane feedwater shall be Modei 6LMP86-3-8FK2 as manufactured by the Process Filtration Division of Parker Hannifin Corporation, or Model AllCF3l 86-3 as manufactured by Aerex Industries lnc. The one (l ) cartridge filter vessel for the membrane cleaning system (Additive Alternate No. 2) shall be Model 6LMP103-3-8FK2 as manufactured by Process Filtration Division of Parker Hannifin Corporation, or Model AIICF33103-3 as manufactured by Aerex Industries Inc. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS � A. Section Ol 170: Additiona] Project Provisions B. Section 01730: Equipment Operation and Maintenance Instruction Requirements C. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds D. Division 15: Piping 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Pre-treated (prechlorinated, pressure filtered, dechlorinated, and dosed with antiscalant) Floridan Aquifer well water will be fed to three (3) membrane feed water cartridge filter vessels (two existing vessels and one new vessel provided under this contract) at a minimum flow of 890 gpm each and a maximum flow of 1,336 gpm each with one (1) filter vessel out of service. Membrane cleaning solution will be fed to one (1) new membrane cleaning system cartridge filter at a maximum flow of 1,320 gpm. Inlet pressure to all cartridge filters will be less than 150 psi. The cartridge fiiter vessels for the membrane feed water shall be fitted with 1-micron filter cartridges, which will remove suspended solids, dirt, sand, and other debris prior to entering the membrane treatment systems. The cartridge filter vessel for the cleaning system shall be fitted with 1-micron filter cartridges, which will remove suspended solids, dirt, sand, and other debris from the cleaning solution prior to entering the membrane system. The pressure drop across the clean cartridge filters for all the flow rates listed above shall be less than 3.Q psig. B_ The membrane feedwater and cleaning system cartridge filter vessels are to be floor mounted units, with the inlet on one side of the unit and the outlet on the opposite side. Each cartridge filter • vessel shall be equipped with a hydraulic cover lifting device. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 1 124�� 1 TPA \\Tpasvr011sec�CLWATER\RO 1 Plant Expamion Projectllssued to Bitl Specs\N240 doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. During normai operations, the membrane feedwater delivered to the cartridge filter vessels will • have a pH between 7.0 and 7.8. However, these filters shall be capable of operating with water which has pH levels between 4.0 and 11.0. During normal operations, the cleaning solutions delivered to the cartridge filter vessels will be acidic and caustic and have pH values between 2.0 and 12.0. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The equipment specified under this section shall be a standard product of a Manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the production of cartridge filter equipment for a minimum of three (3) years. The cartridge filter units shall be of proven ability and shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with best industry procedures and methods. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER for approval, as provided in Section 01300, shop drawings for the equipment to be furnished under this Section. The shop drawings shall include at least the fol lowing: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt pattern. 2. Descriptive literature and drawings, including parts list, bulletins and/or catalog cuts for the equipment, including all accessories, with the items to be furnished clearly marked in the submittal material. 3. A list of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, including gaskets and hardware. 4. A sample ] 0-inch filter element with clean pressure drop namographs and laboratory test • report. 1.06 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The one ( l) new membrane feedwater cartridge filter vessel shall have a capacity sufficient to hold the required number and size of cartridge elements to filter a minimum of 890 gpm based on a maximum flow of 3.45 gpm per ] 0 inches of cartridge length. B. The one (1) new cleaning system cartridge filter vessel shall have a capacity sufficient to hold the reyuired number and size of cartridge elements to filter a minimum of 1,320 gpm based on a maximum flow of 4.3 gpm per 10 inches of cartridge length. C. The cartridge filter vessels shall be designed, fabricated and stamped in accardance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIIl, Division I. Maximum design conditions shall be 150 psig at 100° F. • 6349-79520 10/09/20l 2 �� 24Q-2 TPA 1\Tpasvr0l�seclCLWATER1R01 Plant E�ansion Fojectllssued �o Bitl Specs\11240 tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved � 2.02 � VESSEL CONSTRUCTION A. The cartridge filter vessel and cover shall be fabricated of pickled and passivated Type 316 L stainiess steel. The internals and all wetted parts shall be fabricated of pickled and passivated Type 316L stainless steel. Legs and external attachments shall be 316L stainless steel. B. Each vessel shall have Type 316L stainless steel swing closure bolts. Swing bolts shall be 1-1/4 inch diameter, hex head cap screw design with a 316L stainless steel, LDX2101 or aluminum- bronze clevis pin. C. Each vessel shall have a cover with a Buna N O-ring with dovetail O-ring groove to prevent the O- ring from falling out when the cover is open. One spare O-ring shall be provided for each filter vessel. D. The inlet and outlet nozzles for the membrane feedwater cartridge filter vessel shall have a diameter of 8 inches and the inlet and outlet nozzles far the cleaning system cartridge filter shall have a diameter of 8 inches as shown on the Drawings. Flanges shall be RFSO 150 psi, Class D in accordance with AW WA C207. E. The vessels shall be provided with both clean and dirty water drain nozzles, as well as a I/2-inch air vent at the top. A 2-inch 3,000 lb NPT coupling will be used for clean and dirty drains for all vessels. F. A 4-inch, 150 lb flanged inspection port will be installed on clean side plenum at 90° from inlet • and outlet vertical centerline. Provide blind flange type 316L stainless A 193B8M bolts and nuts. G. Two ]/2-inch 3,000 lb couplings shall be installed on clean and dirty side for installation of • pressure gauges. H. Vessel shall have internal, removable alignment and support plate fabricated of I/4 inch thick 316LSS with a hole pattern matching the seat cup configuration. All edges of this plate shall be beveled to eliminate sharp edges that may damage spiral wound cartridge filters. The plate shall be circular and bolted to support brackets in the vessel. I. Vessel bottom seats shall accept either a dual open end or single open end filter cartridges with dual-222 size O-ring on the sealing end. Separator plate shall be one piece machined plate suitable for either double o-ring single open end cartridges or double open end cartridges with a knife edge seal and removable support posts. The separator plate shall be welded to the vessel shell on both the clean and dirty sides of the vessel. A separator plate with rolled in place seat cups is not acceptable. J. Each new cartridge filter shall be equipped with a suction and discharge pressure gauge. Pressure gauges shall be Model PG ] 0-100 by Automation Products Group, Inc. or equal. K. Each cartridge filter vessel shall be provided with all cartridge filter support rods, springs and plates, and all other internal components required for the installation of double open ended cartridge filters. Five additional pieces of each internal component shall be provided as spares. All internal components shall be 316L stainless steel. 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11240-3 TPA UTpasvr011sedCLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ E�cpansbn P�qec11155uetl W Bid Specs\11240.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 FILTER ELEMENTS A. The filter elements shall be cylindrical cartridges constructed from FDA grade polypropylene, having a one (1) micron rating for the membrane feedwater cartridge filter vessel and a one (1) micron rating for the cleaning system cartridge filter vessel. Filter elements for all vessels shall be double open end and shall be NSF certified for Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. The filter elements shall be Model HFT1M30A-DUN by Parker Process Filtration. No other filter elements shall be allowed. B. Cartridges shal) be self supporting with no reinforcing structures or resins. C. The cartridge length shall be 30 inches in one element, not stacked up elements of shorter length. The cartridge elements shall be 1 inch I.D. and 2 7/16 inch O.D. D. The winding media shall be FDA grade polypropylene and shall be continuously wound over the double open ended polypropylene core. E. A sufficient number of filter elements must be used in each filter vessel to ensure that the initial clean pressure drop is less than 3 psig, with the cartridge filter flowing at its rated capacity, as measured between the inlet and outlet nozzles. The maximum pressure drop at exhaustion ofthe elements (at maximum dirty element headloss condition) shall be less than ] 0 psig, with the cartridge filter flowing at its rated capacity, as measured between the inlet and outlet nozzles. u F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all cartridge filter elements required for flushing, startup, and testing purposes. � 2.04 AIR RELEASE VALVES A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a manual air-release valve on a valved tee for each filter vessel as specified in Section 15100. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and procedures. B. The equipment shall be installed in the membrane treatment system in strict conformance with the CONTRACTOR's design for the system. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 10/09/2012 11240-4 TPA\\Tpasvr01�5ec�CLWATERU201PIantE�ansionProjecl�ISwedLOBiOSpecs\11240.tloc • �O 2012 CDM Smith A(I C�.i��.hts Reserved SECTION ] 1247 LIQUID POLYMER SYSTEM PAR7' 1 — GENERAL I .01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all Iabor, material, equipment and appurtenances required to instail and make ready for operation one (1) skid mounted polymer dilution, mixing, and feed system as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein. B. The polymer system shall be the standard eyuipment of the supplier involved in the manufacture of similar type equipment and shall be as manufactured by ENPRO TECHNOLOGIES LTD., Series P; or equal. C. The polymer activation and feed system shall be capable of effectively activating and fully blending emulsion polymer with water a homogenous polymer solution ranging from 0.1 % to l% concentration to a batch solt�tion tank. Pumps shall be supplied to convey the polymer solution to process. Equipment included with the polymer system shall include: l . Multi-Stage Mixing Chamber 2. Dilution Water Assembly and Controls 3. Neat Polymer Metering Pump • 4. System Controls 5. Solution Tank 6. Polymer Solution Metering Pumps (2) 7. Equipment Skid 8. Drum Suction Wand for 55 gallon drum evacuation D. Electric motors and power correction capacitars shall be furnished as part of the work of this section and shall be as specified in Section 16150. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete bases for skids and installation of anchor bolts are included in Division 3. B. Type 316 stainless steel anchor Bolts are provided under this section. C. Surface preparation, priming, and painting are included under Section 09901 and Section 09902. D. Instrumentation and controls are included in Division 13. E. Electrical wark is included in Division l6. F. Mechanica) piping, valves, pipe hangers, supports and fittings are included in Division I5. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, copies of all materials necessary to establish • compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following: 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �� ZV /— I TPA 4\TpasrAl�sedCIWATER�RO 1 Phant Ezpareion Projecttlssued to Bid SpecsN 1247.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved l. Certified shop and installation drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, and anchor bolt location. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data On the characteristics and performance ofthe equipment. 4. Complete data on motors. Motors must comply with Section 16150. 5. Complete wiring diagrams, and elementary or control schematics. 6. Total weight of each skid. 7. Complete bill of material for the equipment. B. In the event that it is not possible to conform with certain details of this specification due to manufacturing techniques, provide complete description of the non-conforming aspects. 1.04 SPARE PARTS A. Include all spare parts normally expected to require replacement during the first year of operation at design load. At a minimum, spare pump tubing shall be provided for each pump. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only B. Include all special tools required for maintenance. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01740 and the Standard Terms and Conditions for Warranty requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 EQUIPMENT A. Multi-Stage Mixing Chamber 1. Polymer and water shall be mixed in a chamber designed to create sufficient mixing energy. a. The polymer mixing chamber shall have a confined inversion zone wherein the oil phase continuous emulsion is injected, stripping the oil from the polymer molecules, partially hydrating the solution. The solution then passes from the confined space without recirculation to the activation zone consisting of a minimum of three baffled zones creating a plug flow for the solution, exposing it to a rnild turbulence with low shear to complete the hydration process. b. The system shall have a minimum of two mixing zones designed to strip the oil from the emulsion and allow hydration of the polymer molecule without damaging the molecular structure, regardless of flow rate. c. The system mixing energy shall be variable in intensity. Mixing energy must be variable by VFD control to handle a wide range of polymers commercially available. The mixer motor shall be washdown duty, 0.5 hp, TEFC, 3450 rpm, 56C frame for polymer solution flows up to 40 gpm. Motor shalt be direct-coupled to impeller shaft_ 2. The mixing chamber shall have a maximum rated pressure of l25 psi. 3. Provide a neat polymer check valve specifically designed to isolate neat polymer from dilution water. The valve shall be designed with an open unobstructed path to the valve seat. The valve body shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel with viton seals. The plug and spring shall be stainless steel. The spring shall be located outside the mixing chamber for ease of adjustment. The valve shall be readily accessible for cleaning, shall be easily disassembled and reassembled. Conventional check valves, ball check, and/or valves installed inside the mixing chamber will not be accepted. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 �� 24 /�ZTPA 1\TpasvAt�sec\CIWATERIRO 1 Plant Espa�ion ProjectUSSUed to Bid Specs\11247.da.x • • • c0 2012 CDM Smith AI! Ri �I�ts Reserved • E3.\ Dilution Water Assembly and Controls i. A 0.5 inch FNPT 304 stainless steel dilution water inlet connection shall be provided to allow a maximum total flow of at least 2 gpm. 2. The dilution water flow rate shall be monitored by a rotameter type flow meter having a range of 12 to 120 gph. A union shail be provided on the rotameter to allow ease of removal for cleaning. 3. The dilution water supply shall include an etectric solenoid valve with NEMA 4 rated coil for on/off control of the dilution water flow. 4. Provide a 2-l/Z inch stainless steel liquid-filled pressure gauge to monitor dilution water inlet pressure C. Neat Polymer Metering Pump 1. Unit shall have one (1) neat polymer metering pump integrally mounted on the system skid. Power supply to the pump shall be l20 volt single phase. The metering pump shall have a range of 0.002 to 4.6 gph of neat polymer at 65 psi discharge pressure. Pump speed shall not exceed 125 rpm. The pump shall be a peristaltic type tubing pump with a brushless variable DC speed motor, non-spring loaded roller assembly located in the pump head and flexible tubing with attached connection fittings. Pump enclosure sha(I be rated NEMA 4X and shall have integral LCD display. Metering pump shall be ProMinent DULCO Flex DFAa series; Flex-Pro by Blue-White Industries, or equal. 2. The pump shall include a leak detection system with alarm output in the event of tube failure. 3. The pump tubing shall be constructed of tygothane for chemical resistance. 4. Provide a metering pump priming assembly including vacuum device and valve. 5. Provide a pump suction hose assembly for tote including YZ inch PVC true-union isolation • bal} valve, quick disconnect and eight (8) feet of braided clear PVC hose. 6. The pump shall be equipped with LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch. 7. In REMOTE mode, pump shall accept a digital start/stop input and 4-20 ma speed input. 8. Pump shall provide outputs for run status, local/remote control status, and speed. D. Solution Discharge Assembly l. Provide a 304 stainless steel solution discharge connection. 2. Provide a 2-l/2 inch stainless steel liquid-filled pressure gauge to monitor system discharge pressure. E. Control Panel l. A contro) panel integral to the system frame shall be provided. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4X rated, and constructed of FRP or stainless steel. 2. Control Devices: a. Fused system LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch. b. In REMOTE mode, the system shall receive digital and analog inputs from SCADA to start/stop polymer solution metering pumps and control pump speed. c. In LOCAL mode, the polymer solution metering pumps shall be controlled (start/stop and speed control) from the control panel. d. In both LOCAL and REMOTE modes, the neat polymer metering pumps, mixer, and dilution water controls shall be automatically controlled from the control panel based on the solution tank level. e. Adjustable flush timer shall be provided to allow dilution water flushing the mixing chamber and discharge piping after automatic shutdown. 3. Indicators a. Main Power On . b. LCD display of inetering pump autput (located on metering pump) c. Loss of water flow alarm 6349-79520/ l 0/9/2012 11247-3TPA \\Tpasvr0l�sedCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Expansion ProjectUSSUed to Bid Specs\N 247.dxz c0 2012 CDM Smith A13 Rights Reserved Alarms a. Thermal flow switch, rated at NEMA 4X. Metering pump goes to standby mode when loss of water flow occurs. The pump restarts when the alarm is acknowledged and the flow returns to an operating state. 5. Inputs from SCADA a. Start/Stop polymer solution metering pump. b. Speed setting for polymer solution metering pump 6. Outputs to SCADA a. Polymer solution pump status. b. Polymer solution pump speed. c. Solution tank level. d. Solution tank low-level alarm. e. Control panel LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch position. f. Solution pump failure 7. Voltage: ]20 VAC/l phase/60 Hz. F. Equipment Skid: The system frame shall be rugged construction of 304 stainiess steel. No mild steel shall be used. All piping shali be rigidly supported. All interconnecting piping and wiring shall be included within the skid limits. Approximate dimensions sha11 be 58 inches high X 62 inches deep X 37 inches wide. G. Calibration cylinders: A suitably sized calibration cylinder shall be supplied for each metering pump. Cylinder shall be mounted to frame with PVC isolation ball valves. Cylinder shall be calibrated in GPH and millimeters, and be constructed of clear PVC with slip on cap and '/2 inch NPT vent connection. H. Pressure reducing valve: A suitably sized pressure reducing valve shall be supplied for installation in the dilution water line. Pressure reducing valve shall be constructed of bronze with adjustable output pressure of 25-75 psig to reduce incoming line pressure variations. Pressure reducing valve shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator model US or USB. 1. Solution Tank: Provide a polyethylene tank for storing polymer solution with 30 gallon capacity, cylindrical, flat bottom, with lid. Conductivity level probes sha11 be provided to control tank fill cycle. Polymer Solution Metering Pumps 1. Two (2) polymer solution metering pumps shall be provided with a range of 0.004-10.1 gph at 65 psi discharge pressure, to deliver polymer solution to process. 2. Power supply to pump shall be l20 volt, single phase. Pump speed shall not exceed 125 rpm. The pumps shall be peristaltic tubing type with brushless variable speed DC motor, non- spring loaded roller assembly located in the pump head and flexible tubing with attached connection fittings. Pump enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4X and shall have integral LCD display. Metering pumps shall be ProMinent DULCO Flex DFAa series; Flex-Pro by Blue- White Industries, or eyual. 3. Pumps shall be eyuipped with LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch. In REMOTE mode, pump shall accept a digital start/stop input and a 4-20 ma speed input. 4. Pump shall provide outputs for run status, local/remote control status, and speed. 5. Pump shall include leak detection system with alarm output in the event of tube failure. 6. The pump tubing shall be constructed of tygothane for chemical resistance. 7. A 2-1/2 inch stainless steel liquid-filled pressure gauge with diaphragm seal shall be supplied to monitor pump discharge pressure. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 I I 24 /-4TPA \1Tpasvr0llxdCLWATERIR01 Plarrt Expansian Projecillaued [o Bid SpecsN 1247.00Cx • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 8. A pump priming assembly including bleed valve shall be supplied in the pump discharge piping. u • PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and as shown on the drawings. Polymer units shall be secured with 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. 3.02 tNSPECTION AND TESTING A. After the poiymer systems are completely installed, the manufacturer shall conduct, in the presence of the Engineer, such tests as are necessary to ensure that the polymer mixing and feed systems conform to the requirements of this Section. Checkout of finai installation, start-up, calibration, and instruction of operating personnel shal] be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer, to be performed during one (1) full day of services on site. The system shall be operated at least 24 hours prior to acceptance. END OF SECTION 6349-79520l10/9/20l 2 l 124 /—STPA 1\TpasvAi�sec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Exparision ProjecNssued to Bid SpecsU 12Q.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE 1NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) � • 1t A^1L • 6349-79520/ I 0/9/2012 l 1 Z�F /'V TPA \\TpaaNtlsec\CLWATER�RO 1 Plant Expa�ion PrqectUSSUed ro Bid Specs\t 1247.tlocx • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION l 1277 MEMBRANE ELEMENTS AND MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES PARTI GENERAL 1.0] THE REQUIREMENT A. The Membrane Element Manufacturer (hereinafter referred to as "MEM") shall furnish membrane elements, inter-element connectors, permeate adapters, related appurtenances, and other services described herein through the Membrane System Supplier (MSS) and the CONTRACTOR to produce the required volume and quality of permeate from the specified raw water quality in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The MEM shall supply ]ow pressure reverse osmosis (LPRO) membrane elements for two (2) existing ].0 mgd permeate production capacity LPRO membrane skids currently installed at the Facility. Upon the completion of the membrane reptacement, as well as other membrane unit modifications described in Section 13025 and shown on the Drawings, each membrane unit shall have a permeate production capacity of l.5 mgd, for a total permeate production capacity of 3.0 mgd. B. The primary services to be provided by the MEM under this contract includes providing all required submittals; factory test data; fabrication, delivery, and insurance of the membrane elements; services required by the Performance Test; Membrane System Performance Warranty as specified in Section l 1278; warranty services; and other services specified herein. • C. The existing LPRO membrane treatment system components consist of Codeline pressure vessels (Model 80A30-7), Osmonics membrane elements (Model AG8040F1622), support structures, piping, valves, instrument panels, train sample panels, automatic and manual valves, train power panels, train control panels, and other reyuired appurtenances. To the extent possible, existing system components shall be used in the modified membrane units. The modified LPRO membrane treatment system confguration is summarized in Table 11277-i. D. The MEM shall supply the required number of inembrane elements of the model numbers specified in 2.0 ].B of this Section. The MEM may identify one (1) proposed alternative LPRO membrane element model that will meet the Required Membrane Product Water Characteristics listed in Table 11277-2 at the time of Bid submittal. The MEM may also identify one (1) hybrid configuration that will meet the Required Membrane Product Water Characteristics listed in Table l 1277-2 at the time of Bid submittal. The OWNER, at their sole discretion, may select the proposed alternative membrane element model and/or hybrid configuration at no additional cost to the OWNER. The OWNER would only select the proposed alternative membrane element model and/or hybrid configuration if the MEM can demonstrate significantly greater membrane performance when compared to the specified membrane element model. Again, it is emphasized that the selection of an alternative membrane element model and/or hybrid configuration would be at the sole discretion of the OWNER. E. The MEM shall fill-in values for all items requested in Attachment A to this Specification Section and submit the completed form as part of CONTRACTOR's bid package. F. All membrane elements supplied under this contract shall be new and unused and shall be • supplied by one manufacturer. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1 12 //-1 TPA 1\TpasvNl\sedCLWATERViO i Plan[ Expansion RqectVssued to Bid Specs111277.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section ]] 278: Membrane System Performance Warranty. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. The MEM shall provide adequate proof that the offered membrane element model(s) has been in successful service in at least three (3) installations for a minimum period of 12 months since beneficial use, with each installation having an aggregate permeate production capacity using the offered membrane element models of at least 1.0 million gallons per day. B. The MEM shall provide adequate proof that the MEM has a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the manufacture and supply of inembrane elements for the treatment of raw water having water quality characteristics similar to that listed in Table 11277-2 of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. At the time of bid, submit with the Bid Form five (5) copies of the following: 1. Model, material of construction, net effective area, and performance specifications for the membrane etement under standard conditions. 2. Evidence of inembrane performance based on specific performance predictions using Membrane Element Manufacturer-specific computer software and the projected raw water specified herein. A clear indication of all given and assumed design considerations shall be provided. Two sets of projections shall be prepared for years 0, 3, and S, one set which utilizes the initial projected raw water quality and one set which utilizes the long-term projected raw water quality. Projections shall be performed using maximum and minimum raw water temperatures and all projections shall be performed using a raw water pH value of 7.4. Projections for all years other than year 0 shall include appropriate factors for membrane compaction, fouling, and/or degradation. The use of acid to reduce the feedwater pH shall not be allowed. The Langelier Saturation Index value of the concentrate stream shall not exceed 2.6. ]t is understood that each MEM calculates "fouling" in a different manner. The MEM shall provide a narrative explaining their method and rationale far accounting for "fouling" in their membrane performance projections software. Failure to meet all reyuired design criteria as indicated by each membrane performance software projection shall be sufficient cause to reject the proposed membrane elements. In addition, the projected membrane feed pressure shall include a total permeate backpressure of 10 psi, a first stage permeate backpressure which results in eyual flux values for the lead element in the first and second stages, and a 20 psi allowance to account for hydraulic losses through the membrane system piping, manifolds, and feed/interstage/concentrate ports. B. For the membrane element model to be furnished, five (5) copies of the following information shall be submitted by the MEM through the MSS and the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER during shop drawing review. The CONTRACTOR shall provide detailed written narrative explaining any changes from the information submitted by the CONTRACTOR in their Bid. Acceptance of any proposed changes shall be at the sole discretion of the OWNER. ]. Model, material of construction, and number of inembrane elements, in total and by stage. 2. Membrane area per membrane element. 3. Maximum and average product water flux rate in total and by stage. 4. Design feed pressure under (l) an initial (new) clean membrane condition and (2) at the end of five (5) years including a factor, if any, for membrane compaction. The design feed 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1� 2//-2 TPA \\TpasvNllsec\CLWATERIRO 1 PoaM Expension Projechlmued to Bid Spew\N277.doc • • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5 Q 7 8. 9. 10 11 12 l3 l4 pressure for each condition shall include a total permeate backpressure of ] 0 psi and the first stage permeate back pressure recommended in Item 5 below. The MEM shall take into account hydraulic losses through the membrane system piping, manifolds, and feed/interstage/concentrate ports. The MSS sha11 provide such hydraulic loss data to the MEM. Recommended first stage permeate backpressure such that the flux values for the lead element in the first and second stages are equal. Design interstage, concentrate, and product water quality parameter concentrations including, but not limited to alkaIinity, calcium hardness, total dissolved solids, sulfate, and chloride based on the projected raw water characteristics. Evidence of inembrane performance based on specific performance predictions using MEM-specific computer software and the projected raw water specified herein. A clear indication of all given and assumed design considerations shall be provided. Two sets of projections shall be prepared for years 0, 3, and 5, one set which utilizes the initial projected raw water quality and one set which utilizes the long-term projected raw water yuality. Projections shall be performed using maximum and minimum raw water temperatures and all projections shall be performed using a raw water pH value of 7.4. All projections shall include a total permeate backpressure of ] 0 psi, the first stage permeate back pressure recommended in Item 5 above, and the hydraulic losses through the membrane system piping, manifolds, and feed/interstage/concentrate ports. Projections for all years other than year 0 shall include appropriate factors for membrane compaction, fouling, and/or degradation. The use of acid to reduce the feedwater pH shail not be allowed. The Langelier Saturation lndex value of the concentrate stream shall not exceed 2.6. It is understood that each MEM calculates "fouling" in a different manner. The MEM shall provide a narrative explaining their method and rationale for accounting for "fouling" in their membrane performance projections software. Failure to meet all required design criteria as indicated by each membrane performance software projection shall be sufficient cause to reject the proposed membrane elements. Complete physical characteristics of all components to be furnished including but not limited to information on brine seals, O-rings, external wrap, net effective membrane area, connector pieces including inter-element as well as concentrate and permeate stream connectors to pressure vessel end caps, materials of construction, and all dimensions. Recommended guidelines, if any, on antiscalants or dispersants or coagulant use with the membranes. Note the antiscalant currently utilized by the Facility is AWC A-102 Plus, as offered by American Water Chemicals. Membrane characteristics for the furnished membrane model including product water flux rate, life expectancy, maximum allowable feed pressures, feed channel pressure loss, and other appropriate information including all assumptions and standard conditions. MEM's printed instructions for the handling, storage, installation, maintenance, pickling, and cleaning of the membrane elements. A list of recommended cleaning procedures and cleaning solutions for inorganic fouling, organic fouling, and bacterial fouling conditions, with detailed instructions for preparing the cleaning solutions and including a list of specific cieaning and disinfection compounds that should not be used. Provide storage and preservation procedures for short term and long term storage periods. MEM's standard conformance testing to ensure integrity of shipped membrane elements. Membrane element performance specification sheet which contains the following information: solute and water mass transfer coefficients, solute rejection, life expectancy, maximum allowable feed pressure, feed channel pressure loss, ma�cimum and minimum flow rates, and other related information. All assumptions and standard conditions shall be clearly indicated. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 I I 2//—J TPA \\Tpasvr0l\sec\CLWATER\RO 1 Plant Expansion Project\Issued to Bid Spea\i 1277.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 15. Membrane tolerance for both free chlorine and chloramines. Tolerance shall be presented 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. in terms of maximum ppm-hours aggregate exposure and in terms of a maximum instantaneous concentration. List of necessary and recommended spare parts and tools. lnclude manufacturers' part numbers and current pricing for each item. Other relevant information to the application of the membranes. Submit five (5} copies of a complete operating manual for the furnished membrane element model as specified further in 3.0] 1 of this Section. Submit five (5) copies of the membrane element Quality Control protocol and test results for each membrane element that is wet tested as specifed further in Section 2.02. Submit three (3) copies of the MEM's standard computer software for calculating and generating reports of normalized operating data for each membrane train. Submit three (3) copies of the MEM's computer software that was used to generate the membrane performance projections. Submit a list of all parameters required for the normalization of system performance for warranty purposes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, the MEM shall provide products or materials of a singular generic kind from a single source. The word "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for this project or taken from the MEM's stock of previously purchased products. The word "Materials," as used herein, is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, ar otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of work. Where more than one choice is available as options for the MEM's selection of a product, material, or equipment, the MEM shall select an option which is compatible with other products or materials already selected. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections. 1. B. For each individual membrane element to be supplied, the MEM shall perform the MEM's specific conformance test. For a portion of the elements as specified below, MEM shall use their standard wet bench testing protocol including testing conditions and feedwater solute concentration. The MEM shall test at least ten (10) percent of all membrane elements to be provided. The MEM sha11 prepare and submit a testing protocol for the wet bench testing as specified in 2.02.A of this Section. Subsequent to the testing and prior to membrane element delivery to the job site, the MEM shall submit a Certificate of Analysis for the wet tests and a Certificate of Conformance for the dry elements. I1 MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WARRANTY The MEM shall warranty the performance of the membranes per the provisions of the General Conditions (GC), the Supplemental General Conditions (SGC), and Section l 1278. B. The performance of the membranes shall meet all requirements specified herein as well as all requirements included in Section ] 1278. The MEM shall make all corrective actions promptly upon receipt of written order from the OWNER as specified in Section ] 1278, Paragraph l.09. If the MEM fails to make such corrective actions promptly, the OWNER reserves the right to perform the corrective actions and the MEM shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost of these corrective actions with that cost not to exceed the cost of the membranes. 6349-79520! 10/09/2012 1 12 //-4 TPA 1\TpasvNllseclGLWATER�R01 Plant Expansion ProjeclUSSUed to BiC Specs\712T7.doc . • • • • n 2(112 CDM Smith All F�i�J�ts Reserved i.U7 MODIFIED MEMBRANE SYSTEM DESIGN A. The LPRO membrane treatment system is designed to treat raw water from the OWNER's existing Floridan aquifer wellfield. The membrane treatment system shall meet the design criteria listed and described below both at the time of Bid submission as indicated by the required information to be submitted as specified in Section 1.04.A.and during membrane performance testing. Failure to meet all required design criteria as indicated by each membrane performance software projection submitted with the Bid shall be sufficient cause to reject the proposed membrane elements, declare the Bidder non-responsive, and reject the Bid. Failure to meet all required design criteria at the time of inembrane performance testing will allow the OWNER to take actions as specified further in this Section and the General Conditions. TABLE l 1277-1 MODIFIED MEMBRANE SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA Total Permeate Capacity (mgd) Number of Units Minimum Permeate Capacity per Llnit (mgd) Minimum Membrane Area per Unit (ftz) Process Design Permeate Water Recovery Rate per Unit' (%) Maximum Transmembrane Pressure Loss2 (psi) Total Permeate Backpressure (psi) Membrane Element Diameter - Nominal (inches) Element Length - Nominal (inches) Nominal Membrane Area per Membrane Element (ftZ)4 Ma�cimum Average Permeate Flux Rate per Unit (gfd) Ma�cimum Individual Membrane Element Permeate Water Flux (gfd) Number of Membrane Elements per Pressure Vessel Number of Stages per Unit Number of Pressure Vessels per Unit Number of First Stage Pressure Vessels per Unit Number of Second Stage Pressure Vessels per Unit 3.0 l .5 92,400 78 See Note 3 10 40 440 l 6.2 23.2 30 22 Note 1. Process Design Permeate Water Recovery Rate is defined as the normal operating permeate water recovery rate and the basis for determining compliance with the performance specifications of these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Note 2. Transmembrane Pressure Loss is defined as the difference in pressure between the membrane unit feed stream measured after the feedwater flow control / isolation valve and the combined permeate stream pressure measured upstream of the permeate discharge check valve, both measured at same elevation. Note 3. Transmembrane pressure shall be calculated based on the values provided by the MEM in Attachment A of this Specification. Note 4. Membrane area per element varies depending on the MEM and model. Areas are nominal and actual membrane element area for any specified element shall not be more than 2.0% greater than nor more than 2.0% Iesser than the stated nominal area. B. The antiscalant currently utilized by the Facility is AWC A-102 Plus, as offered by American • Water Chemicals, however, the OWNER may utilize different antiscalant products in the future. During the shop drawing review, the MEM shall provide the ENGINEER with a list of all 6349-79520/ l 0/09/20 l 2 1 I Z//—S TPA 1\Tpasvr011sec1CLWATER1R01 PIaM Evpansion Projec111ssued M Bitl Spea111277.EOc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved known antiscalant products that are compatible with the MEM's specific membrane elements to be used in this project or that are compatible with the described raw water supplies. During the shop drawing review, the MEM shall also provide the ENGINEER with a list of all known antiscalant products that are incompatible with the MEM's specific membrane elements to be used in this project or that are incompatible with the described raw water supplies. C. The pH ofthe feed water will be no less than 4 nor greater than 8 on an average continuous basis. D. The pH of cleaning solutions will be no less than 2 nor greater than 12. E. Raw water yuality will be as listed in Table 11277-2 of this Section. Raw water parameters for which there is no value shall be considered below current federal and state regulations for drinking water. TABLE 11277-2 LPRO MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING PROJECTED AND REQUIRED WATER CHARACTERtSTICS Parameter Units �nitial Projected Long-Term Projected Initial Required Long-Term Required Raw Water Quality Raw Water Quality Permeate Quality Permeate Quali Ammonia mg/L as N 0.52 0.93 N/A N/A Ammonium mg/L as NHa p,g0 1.20 N/A N/A Chloride m�� 173 285 � 5 < 15 Color color units 5 � 5 < 1 < 1 Fluoride m�� 0.21 0.42 N/A N/A Nitrate mg/L as N 0.02 0.05 N/A N/A Nitrite mg/L as N 0.02 0.08 N/A N/A Phosphorous mg/L as P 0.10 0.18 N/A N/A Sulfate m�� 13 Zl N/A N/A Total Alkalinity mg/L as CaCO3 183 300 < 15 < 40 Total Dissolved Solids n'�� 6p2 g96 < 30 < 85 Total Organic Carbon m�� Z,q 3,g < 1 < 1 mg/L as CaCO3 < 5 < 15 Total Hardness 270 420 Oissolved Organic mg/L 2 Z 3 3 < 1 < 1 Carbon Arsenic m�� 0.02 0.04 <0.005 <0.005 Barium m�� 0.022 0.035 N/A N/A Calcium mg/L 89 138 N/A N/A Iron m�� 03 0.5 N/A N/A Magnesium m�� il 18 N/A N/A Manganese m�� 0.01 0.02 N/A N/A Potassium mg/L 1 � 2 � N/A N/A Sodium m�� 77 120 N/A N/A Strontium m�� 0.22 033 N/A N/A Silicon m�� 13 Zq N/A N/A Heterotrophic Plate CFU/mL 1 3 0 0 Count 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 ] l 277-6 TPA \\TpawrOlVsedCLWATERIRO 7 Plant Evpansion Rqec[Ussued to Bid Spea\t 1277.doe • • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��hts Reserved TABLE 11277-2 (Continued) LPRO MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING PROJECTED AND REOUIRED WATER CHARACTERISTICS Hydrogen Sulfide mg/L N/A N/A Silt Density Index (15 ---- � 5 � 5 N/A N/A min @ 30 psi) pH units 7.0-7.8 7.0-7.8 N/A N/A Tem perature �� 23.9 — 25.0 23.9 — 25.0 N/A N/A Turbidity NTU N/A N/A Total Trihalomethane mg/L s < 0.040 < 0.040 Formation Potential' NK NK Haloacetic Acid mg/L < 0.030 < 0.030 Formation Potentials NK NK Note t. At unad�usted permeate pH us�ng teedwater pH of 7.4. Note 2. NA = Not Applicable Note 3. NK = Not Known Note 4. At formation conditions of pH 8.0, chlorine dose of 6.0 mg/1, water temperature of 30° C, and 120 minute contact time. Note 5. Total formation potentiai for the five haloacetic acids regulated under the Stage 1 Disinfectants/Disinfection By-Products Rule and at the conditions referenced for Total Trihalomethane Formation Potential. F. LPRO membrane permeate parameters listed above for which there is listed "NA" value shall • meet federal and state regulations for drinking water. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The furnished membrane elements shall be non-cellulosic, polyamide derivative, spiral-wound, thin film, composite membranes, 8 inches in diameter, a ma�cimum of 40 inches in length (nominal), and have an active surface area of 440 ft2 (nominal). B. The membrane elements shall be the latest generation of AK-440-LE by GE Osmonics, XLE- 440 by Dow/Filmtec, TMH2OA-440 by Toray, or ESPA4 MAX by Hydranautics. C. The membrane elements shall have filament wound fiberglass shelis and shall be supplied with brine seals, interconnectors, o-rings, and permeate adapters. Five spare seals, interconnectors, o-rings, and permeate adapters shall be provided for each of the two units (total quantity of l0 units for each item). D. Within thirty (30) days of the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the MEM shall deliver to the Facility seven (7) full-size (8-inch diameter) membrane elements of the same model to be furnished under this contract. These membrane elements are NOT included (and are in addition to) the specified quantity given in the Bid Proposal Form. These elements sha}1 be dimensionally identical to the elements to be furnished under this contract. These eIements will be loaded into one pressure vessel at the Facility and texted to confirm compatibility with the existing pressure vessels, permeate ports, permeate adapters, and end caps. In the event any of • these components are determined to be incompatible with the existing pressure vessels, the 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1 1 G//—/ TPA \lTpasvNtlsectCLWATER1R01 Poant Expansion ProjectYSSUed ro Bid SpecsU 1277.tloc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved MEM shall supply alternate components, at no charge to the OWNER, until compatibility is confirmed. 2.02 MEMBRANE ELEMENT TESTING PROTOCOL AND TEST REPORT A. Five (5) copies of a Quality Control Testing Protocol shall be submitted to the ENGINEER through the MSS and ultimately through the CONTRACTOR sixty (60) days prior to the Testing. The protocol shall clearly indicate the proposed testing conditions including feed water composition, recovery rate, and pressure for each membrane type. The proposed testing conditions shall meet the reyuirements of 1.OS.B of this Section. B. Five (5) copies of the recommended load schedule and test report shall be submitted to the ENGINEER through the MSS and ultimately thought the CONTRACTOR prior to membrane element loading. The recommended load schedule shall indicate the recommended position of each individual membrane element, identified by serial number, within each pressure vessel of each skid. The test report shall provide the following information for each membrane element tested: 1. Membrane element serial number. 2. Date of test. 3. Test conditions: temperature, pressure, feed water, composition, recovery. 4. Test results: salt rejection, membrane productivity in gpd. 5. Square feet of active membrane area per membrane element. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.O1 MEMBRANE ELEMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED SERVICES The MEM shall be responsible for the following: A. Performance of the membrane elements and their ability to meet the specified productivity and water quality goals. B. The MEM shall coordinate with and assist the MSS, the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER with process and design criteria relating to the membrane process. C. Providing coordination and inspection services. D. Providing transport, insurance, and delivery of the membrane elements to the site. The MEM shall also provide written instructions for the storage of the membrane elements. E. Providing a representative to inspect the delivery and unloading of the membrane elements as well as the installation of the membrane elements. Upon the completion of installation, the MEM shall provide a written statement which certifies that its membrane elements were properly installed. F. Services associated with the membrane element pre-installation meeting, startup, performance testing, and training. G. A representative of the MEM shall be present on-site during performance testing of the membrane system. Required services of the MEM representative are further described in 3.08 of this Section. 6349-79520/I 0/09/2012 1 1 2//—O TPAOTpasvrOtkxc\CLWATER�RO i Plant Ezpansion WojeclUssuedto Bid Spem\H277.doc • • • • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved H. Review and provide comments on the O&M manual submittals to verify conformance with the MEM's operating requirements. Time requirements for responses shall be as described in 3.0].0 of this Section. K 3.02 • A � Provide the OWNER with a complete operating manual including: element data sheets; performance projections; proper instructions for installing the membranes; proper instructions for cleaning the membrane elements; proper instructions for handling, storing, preserving and flushing preservatives from the membranes; taking and recording data, and calculating normalized system performance. Instructions shall be specific to the OWNER's Facility and equipment. Generic instructions shall not be acceptable. Normalize OWNER provided operating data and prepare and submit a monthly report on system performance for a period of three years after the successful completion of the performance test. In each monthly report, the MEM shall alert the OWNER to any operational problems that may impact the system warranty. The OWNER will provide the data directly to the MEM in the form of an electronic spreadsheet file or an electronic file created with the MEM's data normalization software. Keep the OWNER informed of any changes in the operation and maintenance manual that may develop during the term of the warranty. COORDINATION OF THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE MEMBRANE ELEMENT MANUFACTURER The MEM shall coordinate its services with the OWNER, ENGINEER, MSS, and CONTRACTOR. B. The MSS shall provide all required membrane elements and shall facilitate all required coordination between the CONTRACTOR and the MEM. The CONTRACTOR shall contact the MEM and the MSS to coordinate delivery of the membranes. To that end, the CONTRACTOR, MSS, and MEM shall each provide an authorized representative as a point of contact for the Project. These representatives will receive correspondence relating to the progress of the membrane supply contract. C. For the required, on-site services of the MEM, which include inspection of the new membrane elements at the delivery site at the time of unloading and storage, inspection and approval ofthe CONTRACTOR's membrane element storage facility and practices, inspection and approval of the membrane element installation in the membrane units prior to performance testing, witnessing the performance test, and providing operator training. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the MEM and the MSS 21 calendar days notice, via certified mail, prior to the need for on-site services. A copy of the request for on-site services letter shall be provided to the ENGINEER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall have complete responsibility for the scheduling, delivery, installation, and on-site performance testing of the membrane elements, however, it is the intent of this specification that the MSS and the MEM support the CONTRACTOR in these efforts. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of the existing membrane elements installed in the reverse osmosis skids. Representatives of the MSS shall direct and supervise the CONTRACTOR during the removal and installation of inembrane elements. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 � 12 ! 7-9 TPA \\TpasvNt�sec\CLWATER5R0 1 Plan[ Expansion Projeq�ssued to Bid Specs\t 1277.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.03 CONTRACTOR 'S RESPONSIBILITY PERTATNING TO THE MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The MSS shall have complete responsibility for the purchase of the necessary membrane elements. The MEM shall have complete responsibility for the delivery of the membrane elements to the project site. The CONTRACTOR shall have complete responsibility for necessary handling, starage, and installation of the MSS-supplied membrane elements. All membrane elements shall be installed by full-time employees of the CONTRACTOR, which will be directed and supervised by the MSS. B. The CONTRACTOR, per the shipping and handling instructions of the MEM and MSS, shall receive and unload at the site all of the new membrane elements. C. Storage facilities for the MSS-suppiied membrane elements shall be per the requirements of Section 01600, "Materials and Equipment" and the written storage instructions of the MEM and MSS. Membrane shall not be stored outdoors or in enclosed areas where the temperature is more than 2°F higher than ambient temperature. A thermometer indicating both maximum and minimum temperature shall be provided in the storage area. D. Following receipt of inembrane elements and until final acceptance of the completed work, CONTRACTOR shall protect and maintain the membrane elements to prevent damage in accordance with the MEM's and MSS's instructions, and as specified. E. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the delivery schedule with the MEM through the MSS, OWNER, and ENGINEER, such that the membrane elements shall be delivered no more than 30 days prior to the anticipated membrane installation date. 3.04 TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY OF THE MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The insured delivery of the new membrane elements by the MEM to the delivery site shall be as stated in the membrane supply agreement between the MSS and the MEM. The CONTRACTOR shall be prepared to accept delivery of the membrane elements on-site. B. The CONTRACTOR, the MSS, and the MEM shall jointly record the delivery of the membrane elements. Upon delivery of the membrane elements, the CONTRACTOR, the MSS, and the MEM shall jointly inspect for completeness and evidence of damage during shipment. C. After completion of joint inspection, the membrane elements shall be unloaded by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with MEM's and MSS's instructions for unloading, or as specified. Damaged membrane elements to be returned to MEM for replacement will not be unloaded, except as necessary to expedite return shipment. Damage to or loss of inembrane elements unloaded to expedite return shipment for replacement shall be replaced with new identical membrane elements. 3.05 INSPECTION OF MEMBRANE ELEMENTS PRIOR TO UNLOADING A. Prior to unloading of the membrane elements by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR, MSS, MEM, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall jointly inspect the condition of each product. l. The CONTRACTOR shall record in writing the products transferred to the CONTRACTOR's care. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1� 2!/— 1 � TPA NTpasvNi\sec1CLWA7ER1R01 Plant Expansion Rojeqllssued to Bid Specs\11277.tloc • � � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2. The CONTRACTOR shall not unload membrane elements to be returned to the MEM for replacement unless necessary to expedite return shipping. 3.06 MEMBRANE ELEMENT PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to the installation of new membrane elements, the CONTRACTOR shall hold a membrane element pre-installation meeting with the MSS and the MEM to review the procedure for storage, handling, and installation of the membrane elements into the membrane units. Representatives from the ENGINEER and the OWNER may also attend the meeting. The MEM, through the MSS, shall provide the CONTRACTOR with a membrane loading schedule for each unit based upon wet bench testing and other MEM guidelines. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. lnstailation of inembrane elements shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and sha11 conform to the MSS's and the MEM's recommended published procedures, instructions, and approved shop drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall work under the direction and supervision of the MSS and the MEM. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all labor, tools, equipment, and other incidental materials and services necessary to properly install the membrane elements. Upon completion, the MEM shall provide written certification that the membrane elements have been installed correctly. Dow/Corning 111 Valve Lubricant and Sealant shall be used to lubricate al1 seals, o-rings, and gaskets during membrane element installation. • B. Installation of the membrane elements shall be in accordance with the membrane loading schedule, as provided by the MEM. C. In order to prevent bacteriological contamination of the membrane elements, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that unpackaged membrane elements are not placed in direct contact with the ground, floor, standing water, or dirt. Furthermore, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain sanitary and clean conditions during the installation of inembrane elements. The CONTRACTOR's procedures for maintaining sanitary conditions sha11 be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval no less that 30 days prior to the anticipated installation date. D. Membrane elements shall not be installed until all pressure vessels and piping for each membrane unit have been properly disinfected and flushed (i.e. free of sand, dirt, biological growth, and other contaminants). The CONTRACTOR collect samples for bacteriological testing before and after membrane element installation to confirm the system is contaminant free. Samples shall be analyzed by a FDEP approved analytical laboratory. Two consecutive passing samples (i.e. two passing samples before membrane element installation and two passing samples after membrane element installation) shall indicate that the system is contaminant free. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs associated with sample collection and analysis. E. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that the SDI is in the acceptable range prior to placing each membrane unit in service. The acceptable range shall be as identified by the MSS and the MEM. F. The MEM, MSS, and the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate this work, as well as related work, • to minimize any disruption in operations and to minimize loss of production. 6349-79520/ l 0/09/20l 2 1 1 2//—� 1 TPA \\Tpasvr0l\sec\CLWATER\RO 1 Plant Expa�ion ProjectUwued M&d SpecsU 7277.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. It may be required to install the new membrane elements in one membrane unit at a time in • order to maintain a minimum finished water production capacity. 3.08 MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Performance testing of the membrane system shall be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR; however, the MSS and MEM shal) provide guidance and assistance throughout the testing period. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the performance testing with the MSS, MEM, OWNER, and ENGINEER. Final acceptance ofthe membrane system wil) be contingent upon successful completion of the performance testing. B. Each membrane train shall be tested individually for thirty (30) consecutive days, 24-hours per day, however, the simultaneous testing of both membrane units is allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for every aspect of the performance test. The MSS and the MEM shall each have a representative on site during the first five (5) consecutive days of the performance test. C. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the following during the performance test: 1. Be present on-site far the startup and initial operation of each membrane unit. Representatives from the MSS and MEM shall also be onsite. 2. Be present on-site whenever membrane elements are removed from or installed in the system. Representatives from the MSS shall be onsite during the removal of the existing membrane elements to direct and supervise the CONTRACTOR. Representatives from the MSS and the MEM shall be onsite during the installation of the new membrane elements to • direct and supervise the CONTRACTOR. 3. Perform the four (4) separate sampling episodes for each membrane unit to confirm samples are collected from the proper locations and were not contaminated during collection. Samples shall be anatyzed by a FDEP approved analytical laboratory. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible far all costs associated with sample collection and analysis. 4. The MEM and the MSS shall review and provide comments on procedures for correlating conductivity and TDS data for normalization of inembrane system performance data. 5. The MSS, with input from the MEM, shall monitor the performance of the membrane units, independently normalize system performance data, and advise the OWNER and ENGINEER of any potential membrane performance issues and/or membrane system operational issues which may impact membrane performance. 6. The MSS and MEM shall be available by telephone 24 hours/day during the performance test to respond to operational emergencies associated with the membranes. 7. Take corrective action as required. 8. The MSS shall prepare the membrane performance test report to be submitted through the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER and ENGINEER for review and approval. D. To the maximum extent possible, it is desired to test both membrane units concurrently and continuously. Depending on the OWNER's water supply needs, it may be necessary to shutdown and restart the membrane units during the performance test. E. Each membrane train shall be tested under the following conditions, which must be maintained throughout the entire performance test: • 6349-79520/ l 0/09/2012 1 I Z!/—I Z TPA 11TpasvAllsedCLWATER1R01 Plan[ F�cpansion ProjeclVssuetl to BiC Specs111277.0oc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � M�imum Transmembrane Pressure Loss stated in Table I 1277-1 Raw water quality will be as listed in the column titled "Initial Projected Raw Water Quality" of Table l 1277-2 Permeate quality shall be as listed in the column titled "Initial Required Permeate Quality" of Table ] 1277-2. Membrane train water recovery rate = 78 percent Minimum Permeate Flow per Membrane Train = 1.5 mgd F. The following data shall be collected and recorded hourly by the HMl computer during the performance test. All of these data shall be available for trend analysis on the HMI computer. Overall Membrane System: Feed water temperature Feed water conductivity Feed water pH Feed ORP Feed Turbidity Each Membrane Train: Feed water pressure • Feed pump VFD speed Interstage pressure Concentrate pressure Concentrate valve position First stage permeate flow Second stage permeate flow Concentrate flow First stage permeate pressure First stage permeate conductivity Second stage permeate pressure Total permeate conductivity Concentrate conductivity Interstage conductivity Total permeate pressure G. The following data shall be manually collected and recorded every shift (every 8 hours): Raw water SDI Feed water SDI Antiscalant consumption Permeate temperature Concentrate temperature Concentrate pH H. The following membrane performance parameters shall be plotted against total time of • operation in hours and provided to the ENGINEER on a weekly basis: 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 l 2//—� 3 TPA llTpasvNi\sedCLWATER\RO 1 Rant Expamion ProjectVssued to Bid Specs\11277.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Total Skid — flux, water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential (i.e. difference between feedwater pressure and the concentrate pressure, salt passage based on conductivity 2. First Stage — normalized flux, normalized water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential, normalized salt passage based on conductivity 3. Second Stage — normalized flux, normalized water mass transfer coefficient, net driving pressure, pressure differential, concentrate pressure, normalized salt passage based on conductivity Maintain an operations log of events, recording all unit outages and the reason for outage. Samples shall be collected approximately every 160 hours of operation during performance testing, beginning on the third day, for a total of four (4) sampling episodes. During a sampling event, the CONTRACTOR shall collect discrete water samples from each train's feed, permeate, and concentrate streams for all the parameters listed in "Performance Testing - Projected and Required Water Characteristics" (Table 1] 277-2) of this Section, including silt density index. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for laboratory analysis of these discrete water samples at a state certified laboratory approved by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. The analytical laboratory shall utilize analytical methodologies, approved by the USEPA or contained in Standard Methods (latest edition), that has a detection limit sufficiently sensitive to allow determination of compliance with the stated performance requirements. All analytical results shall be transmitted directly to the ENGINEER from the laboratory within seven (7) days after sample collection. All appropriate quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) control data shal) also be submitted. The ENGINEER and/or the OWNER may choose to split samples with the CONTRACTOR during the performance testing. Although the analysis of the split samples is not the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall cooperate and coordinate fully with the ENGINEER and/or the OWNER in providing the split samples. Prior to the start of performance testing, the CONTRACTOR shall take samples from the feed, permeate, and concentrate and have the samples analyzed for conductivity and TDS in order to develop correlations between these parameters. K. The MSS shall provide a Test Report on an individual train basis that provides a summary of the collected data and charts of water mass transfer coefficient, delta pressure, and salt passage by stage and in total. Required charts shall use MEM's normalization software as applicable. Report shall also include required water quality data. L. The ENGINEER shall use the results of the laboratory water analyses to determine whether the membrane system passes the performance testing requirements. If one of the train's discrete water samples for the membrane product water fails to meet the required value listed in the column titled "Initial Required Permeate Quality" of Table l 1277-2 and the operational criteria specified in this Section, the performance test shall be extended and will be repeated until four consecutive analyses are successfully completed. lf the failed analysis is deemed to be an error, it will be ignored. After the third failed performance test, the OWNER has the right to deem the membranes being tested as not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. In the event the membrane elements cannot meet the performance test requirements, the OWNER may, at its sole discretion, take the following actions: 1. Terminate the performance test and exercise its options under the terms of the Performance Bond 2. Allow the CONTRACTOR to repeat the performance test with revised operating conditions or new membrane elements or models at no additional cost to the OWNER 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11277- l 4 TPA \\TpasvrOi�sec\CLWATERV201 PIaM Expansion ProjeG\Issued to 8id Specs\11277.doc • • • • • � �O 2012 CDM Smith Ai! ;2i�his Reserved Accept the original performance test results Take other actions as negotiated with the CONTRACTOR , MSS, and/or MEM and allowed under the Contract Documents M. Acceptance of the perforrnance test for an individual membrane unit shall be based on the demonstrated ability of that membrane unit to meet all of the following criteria consistentty throughout the thirty (30) day test. l. Permeate water production of a minimum l.5 mgd from each membrane unit 2. Meeting the required permeate quality 3. Producing the required permeate water production at a transmembrane pressure at or below the maximum transmembrane pressure stated in Table I 1277-1 4. Meeting all testing condition functional operating parameters specified in this Section 3.09 MEMBRANE SYSTEM TRAINING A. The MSS shall provide a qualified technical representative for 2 hours per day, on two separate days to instruct the OWNER's personnel on the proper operation, installation, sampling, cleaning, and maintenance for the membrane system. The MSS shall coardinate the dates of the training with the OWNER and the ENGINEER not less than 14 calendar days in advance of the proposed training dates. B. The MSS shall provide the services of a qualified technical representative to be present on-site to assist with the first membrane train cleaning procedure for a minimum of two (2) eight hour days, which shall occur within the first one ( l) year of operation. The OWNER shall notify the MSS not less than 14 calendar days in advance of the proposed cleaning dates. 3.10 MEMBRANE SYSTEM OPERATIONS SOFTWARE A. The MEM shali supply the OWNER with its standard computer software for calculating and generating reports of normalized operating data for each membrane train. Final payment will not be made prior to submittal of the software. B. Software shall be capable of running on an 1BM PC or compatible computer with a Windows XP or VISTA operating system. C. The MEM shall provide the services of a qualified technical representative to be present on-site for a minimum of one (l ) eight hour day to instruct the OWNER's personnel in the proper operation and use of the membrane system operations software. D. The normalization software shall be installed onto the HMI computer and set up for use during the 30 day performance test. The normalization software shall be used to process all data during the test on a daily basis, and generate normalized performance curves for the test report. 3.11 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The MEM, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit the following items through the MSS to the CONTRACTOR for transmittal to the OWNER: l. Written guarantees and warranty, where required. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 1 I Z//-1 S TPA \1TpasvAilsec\CLWATERUt01 PIaM Fxpansion AojectUssued ta Bid Spece117277.doc c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project pursuant to • the provisions of law. (The remainder of this page left blank intentionally) • • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 �� 2/!—� 6 TPA \1TpawNllsec\CLWATERU20 1 Plent EYpe�ion Prqecfllesued W Bid SpecsN 1277.doc � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ATTACHMENT A REQUIRED LPRO MEMBRANE OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS - VALUES PARAMF,TER Feed Water Pressure - Initial (Initial Projected Raw Water Quality and Clean Membrane Condition) Feed Water Pressure — Long-Term (Long-Term Projected Raw Water Quality and 10% Fouling Factor and 5 Year Membrane Life First-Stage Permeate Backpressure (Initial/Long-Term) Total Permeate Backpressure • Number of First-Stage Pressure Vessels' Number of Second-Stage Pressure Vessels` . Feed Water pH - Maximum Feed Water pH — Minimum Notes: l. Seven (7) element pressure vessels END OF SECTION VALUE psi psi psi l0 psi 22 pressure vessels 8 pressure vessels units units 6349-79520/I 0/09/20l 2 1 I Z//-1 / TPA 1\Tpasvi011sec\CLWATERUtO f Plant Expansion RojectUseued to Bid Spe�sU1277.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • r � U 6349-79520/10/09/2412 I1G/ /—l0 7PA\\TpasvAtlsec\CLWATERU201PIaMEzpansionProjeclUSSUedtoBidSpewU1277.doc � 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 11278 MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE WARRANTY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WARRANTY A. Membrane System Performance. B. Technical Services. C. Membrane Element Replacement. D. Workmanship and Materials. E. Administration of Warranty. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 11277: Membrane Elements and Manufacturer's Services. 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 1 1277 — Part 1— 1.04. B. This warranty shall be submitted as part of the Bid Documents. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. PROCESS DESIGN. The process design referred to in this Section defines the feed water quality, permeate quality requirements, pressure, recovery, flux, array of elements, and age of the membrane process associated with the membranes supplied in this Contract. B. RECOVERY. The ratio of permeate flow produced divided by the amount of feed water used to produce permeate. C. PERMEATE. The purified water which passes through the membranes and exits from the membrane product tube. The combined permeate from a unit is the purified water from all vessels and alt stages of the membrane unit as it exits the unit through the permeate header. "Permeate" is distinguished from "product water" or "finished water" which may have been blended with raw water or received additional treatment. D. MEMBRANE ELEMENT. A standard 8-inch diameter, 40-inch length, spiral wound membrane unit containing a nominal membrane surface area of 440 square feet. E. FLUX. The average rate of permeate, in gallons permeated across one square foot of the installed membrane surface in one day, with units of GFD (gallons per square foot per day). Average flux shall be calculated as the total unit permeate flow divided by the total membrane area installed in • all stages of the unit. Average flux for a single stage shall be calculated as the total stage permeate flow divided by the total membrane area installed in that stage. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 1 2! O— I TPA S'1CLWATER1R01 Poant F�cpansion AojeMUssued to Bid SpeesiN276.doe c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. FEED PRESSURE. The pressure measured downstream of the feed inlet valve at the centerline elevation of the bottom-most pressure vessel. G. TRANSMEMBRANE PRESSURE. The pressure calculated as inlet pressure (measured downstream of the feedwater flow control/isolation valve) less the permeate back pressure (measured upstream of the permeate discharge check valve). Inlet and outlet pressure as measured at the centerline elevation of the bottom-most pressure vessel. H. TOTAL PERMEATE PRESSURE. The pressure of the permeate at the exit of the pressure vessels containing the membranes as measured upstream of the check valve or butterfly valve at the centerline elevation of the bottom-most pressure vessel. A function of the individual membrane plant piping arrangement. I. STAGE. A group of pressure vessels in parallel, also referred to as a bank. J. ARRAY. The arrangement of pressure vessels and membrane elements in a skid described by the number of vessels in the first stage and the number of vessels in the second stage (e.g. 4:2 means 4 vessels in the first stage and 2 vessels in the second stage) and the number of inembrane elements in each pressure vessel. K. MEMBRANE lJNIT, TRAIN, or SKID. An individual control block containing an array of membranes that can be started or stopped individually. L. CAPACITY. The total flow of permeate produced by any one of the membrane skids or units in a 24-hour period at the standard conditions specified in this Warranty. The capacity shall be normalized to the standard conditions according to the latest version of ASTM D4516 or similar method submitted by the MEM and approved by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. M. FEED TEMPERATURE. Temperature of feed water measured at the inlet manifold to the membranes. This temperature is to be used for normalization of capacity. N. FOULING ALLOWANCE. An allowance for flux decline and the associated increase in the transmembrane pressure which is required to maintain the specified capacity and to overcome the anticipated fouling of the membrane elements over and above the initial transmembrane pressure when the membrane elements are new and operating at design pressure, temperature, and recovery rate. O. TERM OF WARRANTY. The duration of the warranty for each membrane train and its instailed membrane elements begins after successful completion of testing for all the membrane trains. The term of this warranty applies to membrane performance. P. MEMBRANE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT. Refers to replacement of the installed membrane elements with new elements. Membrane replacement does not include the addition of inembranes to the system (i.e., membrane replacement does not increase the number of elements in a skid). Q. MEMBRANE ELEMENT MANUFACTURER (MEM). The MEM is one of the pre-approved membrane element manufacturers named in the Specifications that has been selected to supply the membrane elements under this contract, as stipulated in Section 11277. 1.05 MEMBRANE SYSTEM WARRANTIES A. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS 6349-79520 10/03/12 11278-2 TPA S:�c�wnTeR\RO 1 Plant Expansion Prqed\Issued to Bitl Specs\1t276.UOc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. The MEM warrants that the membrane elements supplied to the OWNER through the CONTRACTOR are free from defects in material and workmanship for a term of warranty of one (1) year. This warranty period shall commence upon the successful completion of the performance test. Membrane element(s) found to be defective during this warranty period shall be replaced at no cost to the OWNER. B. PERFORMANCE AND MEMBRANE ELEMENT REPLACEMENT 1. The Membrane Element Manufacturer (MEM) warrants for one (1) year from the date of successful performance test completion that each membrane train will be capable of producing water at the quantiry specified in Table 11277-1 at the initial required permeate qualiry specified in Table 1 1277-2. 2. The performance is based on the initial projected raw water quality provided in Table 11277-2 and operating conditions described in Table 11277-1, not withstanding the provisions of paragraph 1.07.F of this section. In the event that actual feedwater conditions differ from these values, the performance criteria specified in the section entitled MEMBRANE ELEMENT AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS of this Warranty shall be correspondingly determined using the latest version of the MEM's standard normalization software available as of the date of Award or similar normalization software submitted by the MEM and approved by the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Calculation procedures used in this software should be consistent with procedures used in the latest revision of ASTM D4516 "Standard Practice for Standardizing Reverse Osmosis Performance Data" and industry standards. 3_ The MEM agrees to the membrane element replacement conditions described herein in the event that the membrane elements fail to meet the performance requirements. In the event that • the membrane elements in any treatment train fail to meet the specified performance requirements during the first three (3) years of operation after the completion of the performance test for that train, and the performance cannot be restored by normal chemical cleaning, the MEM shall supply and install new membrane elements at a price which is prorated according to the length of service prior to failure according to the following calculations: a. The prorated membrane element replacement price is equal to the length of service (in months) multiplied by the membrane element replacement price given below, and this quantity divided by 36. The membrane element replacement price for the Membrane Units shall be the Unit Price shown in Bid Item No. l of the Bid Proposal plus 20 percent for instaliation. These membrane element replacement prices shall be valid for the term ofthe Warranty. 4. The above warranty is contingent upon the OWNER operating the plant in accordance with the provisions of the section entitled SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE of this Warranty- 1.06 RAW WATER A. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM are warranted to produce permeate which meets the initial required permeate quality requirements from initial raw water quality described in Specification Section 11277 Table 11277-2. 1.07 MEMBRANE ELEMENT AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce 1.50 million gallons • (MG) of permeate per 24-hour day of operation per skid at the specified permeate quality, feed pressure, transmembrane pressure, feed temperature, recovery, and with raw water of the specified quality, for the term of the warranty. The methodology for determining the normalized capacity of 6349-79520 10/03/12 11278-3 TPA S:�awnrEn\RO t Plant Expansion PrqectUssued ro Bid SpecsU1278.doc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved the membrane units shall be the MEM's standard normalization software as available of the date of Award or similar normalization software submitted by the MEM and approved by the OWNER and the ENGINEER. Calculation procedures used in this software shall be consistent with procedures used in the latest revision of ASTM 4516 and industry standards. B. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM sha11 be warranted to produce the specified capacity and water quality at a recovery rate of 78% for the term of the warranty. C. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce from raw water of the initial projected raw water quality specified in Table 11277-2 of Specification Section 11277, permeate water which meets the minimum initial permeate quality requirements specified in Table ] 1277-2 of Specification Section ll 277. In the event that actual feedwater conditions differ from these values, the performance criteria specified in the section entitled MEMBRANE ELEMENT AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS of this Warranty shall be correspondingly determined using the latest version of the MEM's standard normalization software available as of the date of Award or similar normalization software submitted by the MEM and approved by the OWNER and the ENGINEER. D. Membrane permeate water quality parameters listed in Specification Section 11277 Table 1 1277-2 for which there is no value, except pH, shall meet Federal and State regulations for drinking water. • E. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce the specified capacity of permeate with an average flux rate not to exceed the value stated in Table 11277-1 of Specification Section 11277. In addition, Table l 1277-I of Specification Section I 12771imits the maximum individual membrane element permeate flux rate. The maximum individual membrane element permeate flux rate sha11 be limited by the application of a backpressure to the first stage • permeate. F. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce the specified permeate quantity and quality at a transmembrane pressure not to exceed the value calculated from the initial information provided by the MEM in Section l 1277 Attachment A during the 30-day performance test. In addition, the membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce the specified permeate quantity and quality at a transmembrane pressure not to exceed the value calculated from the long-term information provided by the MEM in Section l 1277 Attachment A during the life of the warranty period. G. All membrane elements shall be warranted to perform as specified with a total permeate back pressure of up to 30 psi. Actual permeate back pressure may be less. H. The membrane elements furnished by the MEM shall be warranted to produce the specified capacity of permeate with the array described in Specification Section 11277 Table 11277-1. I. The performance requirements will not apply if excessive or abnormal fouling has occurred on the membrane elements. l.08 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE A. The OWNER agrees to operate the membrane system in accordance with the MEM's operating and maintenance instructions. The OWNER further agrees to provide a continuous supply of clean raw water to the system with water quality similar to that indicated in Table 11277-2 of Section 11277 and the following additional operating guidelines (to be filled in by the Bidder): 6349-79520 10/03/ 12 11278-4 TPA S:�c�wnrErtV201 Plarn Expansion ProjectUssued to Bid Specs\11278.doc • c0 2012 CDM Smith All RigVlts Reserved • Maximum cleaning solution temperature: °F Maximum feed water SDI: (based on 15 minutes) Maximum feed water pH: Minimum feed water pH: Maximum cleaning solution pH: Minimum cleaning solution pH: Maximum cleaning solution flow pressure drop across the pressure vessel: psi Maximum flow of cleaning solution per pressure vessel: gpm Maximum flow of first stage cleaning solution: gpm Maximum flow of second stage cleaning solution: gpm B. The OWNER agrees to clean the membranes in strict conformance with the MEM's instructions regarding methods, cleaning agents, and frequency. C. The OWNER agrees to provide the MEM with monthly performance and water quality analysis reports for the three (3) year warranty period. The water quality analysis shall be performed in accordance with the MEM's instructions and conducted by a state certified laboratory selected by the OWNER. The scope of analyses to be performed shall be jointly developed by the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and the MEM. D. The OWNER agrees to collect and maintain all data required for the normalization of system performance on a daily basis for the three (3) year warranty period. This data shall be maintained in the form of an electronic spreadsheet file or an electronic file created with the MEM's data normalization software. The OWNER will provide this data directly to the MEM on a monthly • basis_ The data normalization methodology must conform to generally accepted industry methods such as the ASTM method or the MEM's modification of the ASTM method. 1.09 ADMINISTRATION OF WARRANTY A. The OWNER agrees to notify the MEM in writing of a warranty claim for a performance or workmanship deficiency in accordance with the terms of this WARRANTY and section 11277. The deficiency will be described in detail and supported by operational and water analysis data wherever possible. B. The MEM agrees to acknowledge receipt of the warranty claim within seven (7) calendar days of receiving the claim, and describe what action the MEM is planning to take. C. The MEM agrees to repair or replace membrane elements to restore performance within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the warranty claim. D. The MEM shall have the right to request the OWNER to have the flow meters and pressure gauges associated with each membrane skid calibrated on a reasonable frequency. E. Special tests required to determine the performance deficiency will be done at the MEM's sole expense. F. All efforts, labar, lay expenses, etc., to prove that the membrane elements are fouled shall be borne by the MEM. G. Performance of the system will be normalized and calculated by the MEM in accordance with the • methodology submitted by the MEM as described above. 6349-79520 10/03/ 12 11278-5 TPA S:ICLWATERViO 1 PIeM ExP2f15iOf1 Pt0J2CNSSUed t0 Bld SPBC5�11278.40C c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved MEMBRANE ELEMENT MANUFACTURER: Signature Date Typed Name Title END OF SECTION 6349-79520 10/03/12 11278-6 TPA S:�c�wnreR�R01 Plant 6cpansion Projectvswea ro eitl Specs111278.tloc . • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Righ�s Reserved SECTION 11315 PROGRESSIVE CAVITY PUMP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install a progressive cavity pump as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1 A2. RELATED WORK 1. Training Requirements are included in Section O1665. 2. Operating and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. 3. Field painting is included in Section 09902. 4. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods are included in Division 15. 5. Motors are included in Section 16150. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. • 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of the pump. The data shall include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of like pumping units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2-in by 11-in sheets. 4. Complete data on motors and power factor correction capacitors in accordance with Division 26. • 5. Complete master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics, including coordination with other electrical control devices. 6. The total weight of the equipment, including the weights of the larger components. 7. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 8. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 9. Noise data as specified in Section 01100. l0. Complete description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. B. Operating and Maintenance Data 1. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the ENGINEER as provided for in Section 01730. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall inciude all cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc, that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the pump shall be provided to instruct representatives of the OWNER on proper operation and maintenance for one 8 hour day. Provide training agenda and training materials per Section 01730. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11315-1 TPA S9CLWATER1R01 Rant Expansion ProjectUssued to Bid SpecsN 1315.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standard lnstitute (ANSI) B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUAL[TY ASSURANCE A. Should equipment that differs from the specified requirements be offered and determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable only on the basis that any revisions in the layout and construction of the structures, piping, electrical, and appurtenant equipment, required to accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the OWNER B. Pump, drive unit and motor shal( be furnished by the pump manufacturer and be factory-mounted on a common base plate of cast iron or fabricated steel. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment designed for use in pumping ground water pretreatment filter spent backwash residuals with iron oxides and other particulates. The maximum expected solids concentration is one percent. B. Pump shall have a design capacity of 80 gpm at a ma�cimum pressure of 30 psig. Operating pressure will be as low as 7 psig. Maximum pump speed shall be 250 rpm. C. The pump drive shall consist of a constant speed motor which shall be connected to the pump shaft through a gearbox. D. The pump shall be controlled locally and remotely (SCADA) for start-stop. E. The pump motor shall be 5 Hp. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Tools and Spare Parts 1. One set of all special tools reyuired for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided. 2. The following spare parts shall be provided: a. One set of packing for each pump. b. One set of gaskets for each pump. c. One rotor and one stator. d. One set of shaft universal joints. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11315-2 TPA S:\CLWATER1R01 PIaM Expansion ProjedUssued M Bid Specs\71315.docz . � • C � C� � � 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved 3. Special tools and spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 }3 10. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1:1 2.02 Moyno 2000 CC, Model ] WA036CDQ3PA 1 AAAD, or equal by Netzch Inc or Seepex. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General l. The equipment specified herein is intended to be pumping equipment of proven ability as manufactured by a reputable firm having experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 2. All parts shall be so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the wark to be done. Ample room and facilities shall be provided for inspection, repairs and adjustment. 3. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer and shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. Minimum foundation bolt diameter shall be 3/4-in. 4. Brass or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed and any other pertinent data shall be attached to the pump. 5. The manufacturer shall supply motor, factory-mounted to a common base piate with the Q 7 8. pump. The nameplate rating of the motor shall not be exceeded, nor shall the motor design service factor be reduced when its pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve. Pump and pump base shall have suitable provisions to collect leakage and permit it to be drained away. The pump and drive shall conform to the noise limitations specified in Section 16150. B. Pump 1. Pump shall be heavy duty, positive displacement, single stage, progressive cavity type. The pump body shall be of thick-walled cast iron and shall incorparate two inspection ports 180 degrees apart. The pump shall be cradle mounted to permit the suction port to be rotated to any angle perpendicular to the centerline of the pump. Suction and discharge connections shall be 4-in and 6-in, respectively, and 125 Ib ANSI cast iron flanged. 2. The pump rotor shall be machined of high carbon tool steel, hardened to a Rockwell "C" value of 57 to 60 and covered with a heavy layer of hard chrome plate at least O.OI -in thick for abrasion resistance. 3. The rotor shall rotate relative to a one-piece, EPDM rubber stator of approximate 65 Durometer hardness (Shore A) chemically bonded to its steel tube housing. The stator shall be arranged to prevent the pumped material from contacting the bonding or the tube. 4. The rotor shall be joined to the drive shaft by a carbon steel connecting rod and crowned-gear type, grease-lubricated, sealed universal joints of chrome alloy tool steel of adequate design to transmit the required thrust and torque while allowing the rotar to move through is eccentric path. The gear joint seals shall be clamped at both outside and inside diameters and recessed within heavy walled steel tubing to prevent damage by rags or other objects. 5. To maximize universal joint and seal life, the connecting rod operating angle shall not exceed 1-1/4 degrees off center. To minimize the moment of the transmitted radial force on the bearings and to minimize overall pump length, the connecting rod shall telescope 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11315-3 TPAS:ICLWATERIROIPIantExpansionProjeetllssuedMBidSpecs\H315.doex � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved within a hollow drive shaft and shall be attached to the drive shaft in close proximity to the � bearings. This point of attachment sha11 not be more distant from the nearest bearing than the spacing between the two bearings. This method of drive shall minimize the shaft deflection in the stuffing box area. 6. The drive shaft shall be mounted in two ball or tapered roller bearings. The ABMA minimum B-] 0 life expectancy of the bearings shall be in excess of 100,000 hours at the maximum operating conditions specified herein. Fittings shall be provided for grease lubrication of the bearings. 7. The stuffing box shall be equipped with a ductile iron gland, split teflon lantern ring to permit repacking of the pump without removing the bearings or drive shaft components. Fittings shall be provided for grease lubrication of the packing. C. Motor and Drive 1. Motor shall be horizontal, totally enclosed, fan cooled, foot mounted, NEMA Design B, 1750 rpm, of horsepower as specified above and shall conform to Section 16150. 2. The drive shall be a gearbox employing a helical reduction gearing rated for AGMA Class ll service minimum. Gears sha11 be full filet, radius forged and carburized. Gearbox housings shall be single piece iron castings with internal reinforcements. All gear case interior surfaces must be shot blasted and primed prior to assembly. Gears and bearings shall be oil bath lubricated. Neavy duty thrust component bearings are required.. D. Base 1. The motor, drive and pump shall be mounted on a common base of welded steel or cast iron. Provide grout holes for grouting to the concrete base. 2.02 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING • A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed as part of the work under this Section. Surface preparation and shop priming shall be as specified in Section 09901. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. The pump assembly shall be installed under supervision of a representative of the manufacturer supplying the equipment. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be acceptable for use in food packaging plants or NSF 61 approved. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Furnish the services of a factory representative for a minimum of two days who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment. B. After the pump has been completely installed, the CONTRACTOR, under the direction of the manufacturer's factory representative, shall conduct in the presence of the ENGINEER, such tests as are necessary to ensure that pump operation and performance conforms to the • requirements specified. Supply all electric power necessary to complete the field tests. Pump shall be operated for at least 24 hours prior to test completion. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11315-4 TPA SICLWATERV20 1 Plan[ Fxpa�ion ProjectUSSUetl N Bid SpecsN 1315.tlocx � • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. If the pump performance does not meet the specified requirements, corrective measures shall be taken, or pump shall be removed and replaced with pump which satisfies the conditions specified at no additional cost to the OWNER . END OF SECTION 6349-79520l10/09/2012 11315-5 7PAS1CLWATER1R01RantF�cpansionProjeclVSSUedto&dSpecs\it315.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 6349-79520 10/03/ 12 11315 - 6 TPA S9CLWATERIRO t Plant Expareion PrqecNlssued to Bid SpecsN 1315.doca � � • • . • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 11342 STEEL STORAGE TANKS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers the design, fabrication, delivery to the site, handling, erecting, testing, and painting of three steel tanks including two decant tanks and one residuals holding tank. B. The tanks shall be of the vertical, cylindrical, welded steel, above ground type with conical bottoms and dished or flat roof. The tanks shall be complete, including column support and baseplates, manways, suction and fill connections, vents, and nozzles as shown on the Drawings. C. The two backwash decant tanks sha11 be 12,000 gallon capacity, l44 inch diameter, and 168 inch straight side height. D. The residuals holding tank shall be 5,000 gallon capacity, 96 inch diameter, and 156 inch straight side height. E. The tanks provided under this Section shall be suitable for use with spent backwash water from pretreatment filters at a domestic potable water treatment plant. The residuals holding tank will contain settled backwash solids treated with polymer coagulant. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete foundations and pad are included in Division 3 B. Wind Load Design Criteria is included in Division 3 C. Painting is included in Division 9. D. Mechanical piping is included in Division 15. ] .03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01330, shop drawings showing details of construction, erection, and coating information as follows: ]. Fabrication drawings with materials and dimensions of tanks, tank supports, fittings and attachments. 2. Wall thicknesses (shell, head and base). 3. Locations of fittings, attachments and welds. 4. lnstructions for handling, storage and installation of tanks. 5. Certification that fabrication is in accordance with these Specifications. 6. Weights and reaction loads of tank support columns. 7. Wind load calculations. These calculations shall be completed and sealed by a professional structural professional engineer registered in Florida. 8. Foundation or tank support mounting details. 9. Shop testing and inspection procedures. 10. Shop testing and inspection report. 11. Submit the following information: 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 11342-1 TPA\\Tpasvr0l�seclCLWATER�RO 1 Plant F�cpansion ProjecNssued to Bitl Specsl11342.UOat �O 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved a. Number of gallons per inch of depth. • b. Number of gallons per foot of depth. c. Total tank gallons. d. Usable gallons to the normal full level. e. Distance (in inches) between the center of tank outlet and bottom of overflow pipe. l .04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Nationat Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z49.1 - Safety in Welding and Cutting 2. ANSI B 16.1 — Cast Iron Pipe Flange and Flanged Fittings 3. ANSI B16.5 — Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Coating. 3. ASTM A283 — Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Strength Carbon Steel Plates. C. American Petroleum Institute (API): ]. API Standard 650 - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage. D. ASME Section VIII Division I— American Society of Mechanical Engineers Boilers and Pressure Vessel Code l .OS QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. The items specified under this Section shall be furnished by fabricators who are fully experienced, qualified, have API or ASME authority to fabricate and stamp (certify) the produci meeting the specific code, procedure and quality and regularly engaged in the fabrication (for a minimum of 5 years) of the items to be furnished which have been used as reyuired herein. All steel tanks of the same type shall be the product of one fabricator. B. The tank fabricator shall have a quality control procedure adequate to ensure that all fabrication complies with these Specifications. Quality control shall include a final inspection by the CONTRACTOR and a written record of this final inspection. The objective of fabricatar's quality control and inspection procedure is to have all tanks comply with these Contract Documents at the time of CONTRACTOR's first inspection, thus eliminating any need for rework by the fabricators. ].06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer to assume responsibility for packaging to prevent transit and handling damage to the tanks. B. Flange faces shall be protected from damage. All openings are to be covered with securely bolted wooden or plastic blank flanges to prevent the entrance of dirt, water and debris. C. Tanks shall be mounted on skids or protective framework so constn�cted as to provide for easy handling for fork truck or similar device and/or be provided with lifting lugs, cleats, etc. to permit handling by crane. Nozzles, manholes, or other fittings shall not be used for lifting. Lugs, cleats, • etc. shall be attached prior to heat treating. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 I l 342-2 TPA \VTpasvrOlGsedCLWATER\RO t Plant Expansion Projecflissued ro Bid Specs\11342.docx • . • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Izights Reserved D. Tanks shall be supported during shipment in a manner to prevent damaging the tank. E. lnstructions shall be provided for unloading and installation of tanks. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 TANKS A. Manufacturers: l. Tampa Tank, Inc., Tampa, FL. 2. General Industries, lnc., Goldsboro, NC, or equal. B. General l. Tanks shall be equipped as specified in the Scope of Work and with the following items: a. Nozzles and openings as described below and as shown on the Drawings. b. Column supports or legs as specified and bolts for anchoring tank to concrete slab-on- grade. c. All necessary hardware for installation of each tank and accessories. This hardware shall all be Type 316 stainless steel. d. Lifting lugs. e. Standard manufacturer's nameplate. f. Stainless steel data plate with the following information: 1) Number of gallons per inch of depth. 2) Total tank gallons 3) Usable gallons to the normal full level. 4) Distance (in inches) between the center of tank outlet and bottom of overflow pipe. 2. Tanks shall not have internal support members. 3. Tanks shall be fabricated such that all edges have a minimum corner radius of I/8-in. 4. Stress relieving of all tanks is required for service reasons. The stress relieving procedure, postweld heat treated (PWHT), shall be according to ASME VIII, Division 1. C. Appurtenances 1. The following appurtenances shall be furnished for the tanks, at locations shown on the Drawings, or as determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted, all pipe shall be Schedule 40, ASTM A-53, or approved equal, flanges 150 Ib, ANSI Standard. Manways shall comply with current regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). a. Backwash Decant Tanks i. One 4 inch vent, gooseneck type ii. One 24 inch manway iii. Four 4 inch nozzles for decant valves iv. One 12 inch nozzle for inlet v. One 4 inch nozzle for outlet at bottom of cone vi. One 4 inch nozzle for level sensor. b. Residuals Holding Tank i. One 4 inch vent, gooseneck type ii. One 24 inch manway iii. Three 2 inch nozzles for decant valves iv. One 6 inch nozzle for inlet v. One 2 inch nozzle for outlet at bottom of cone vi. One 4 inch nozzle for level sensor D. Construction Details 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 l 1342-3 TPA \\Tpasvr0lGsec\CLWATER\RO t Plant Expansion ProjedUSSUed to Bid Specs111342.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Shell rings sha11 be butt welded steel plate of thickness as required per APl standards. � 2. Bottom plates shall be lap welded. Bottom will be coned, at a slope of approximately one foot vertical to one foot horizontal. 3. The tanks shall have a dished or flat roof. 4. All bolts, nuts, and washers for erection or structural sha11 conform to the requirements of ASTM Specification A-325, High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Joints, including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers. 5. Shell nozzles shall be in accordance with Fig. 3-5 of APl 650. Gaskets on shell and roof nozzles shall be I/8 inch thick. Gaskets for shell manholes sha11 be the full width of nozzle flange. 6. All shop and field welds shall be made only by welders who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in ASME Code, Section IX to perform the type of work required, except that this provision need not apply to tack welds not to be incorporated into the finished welds carrying calculated stresses. 2.02 COATING OF CARBON STEEL TANKS A. Surfaces to receive protective coating are the exterior of the tank. B. All exterior surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned in the shop prior to shipment. Abrasive blast cleaning shall be to Commercial Blat Cleaning (SSPGSP6) in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council. C. The tank fabricator shall give each tank exterior a prime coat as specified under Section 09901. D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots prepared as • approved and retouched with specified primer before application of successive paint coats in the field. E. Finish painting shall be applied in the field as specified in Section 09902. 2.03 SHOP TESTING A. Tanks shall be tested at the factory for leaks prior to prime coating. API tanks shall be air tested in accordance with API Standard 650. The Engineer may request that this test be performed in her/his presence at the time of tank inspection. Otherwise, the manufacturer shall perform the test prior to the time of inspection. B. Inspection and testing procedures and reports (certified copies of test results) shall be made for each tank. These procedures and reports shall be sent to the Engineer for review and approval prior to shipment. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the steel tanks in accordance with the Drawings and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Make all piping, grounding, and conduit connections to tanks as shown on the Drawings. 3.02 FIELD TESTING • A. The tanks shall be tested under hydrostatic load in accordance with API Standard 650. 6349-79520/l 0/09/20l 2 11342-4 TPA\1TpasvrOl�sedCLWATERIRO 1 Plant E�ansion Projeclllssuetl to BiC Specst11342.docx • • • �O 201 � ('DM Smith A I 1 IZ i�hts Reserved B. Test pressure shall be 10 psig. C. Should any defects become evident during inspection, testing, or within the guarantee period, the CONTRACTOR shal) repair or replace the defective tank or fitting as approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/2012 l 1342-5 TPA l\Tpasvr0l�sec\CLWATERlRO 1 Plant Expansion Projec[Ussued to &d Specs\71342.tlocx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) C J • • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 11342-6 TPA \lTpasvr011sedCLWATER\RO 1 Plant Expansion Project�lssued to Bid Specs\71342.docx • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13025 MEMBRANE SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL l .Ol SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all designs, materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete the modification of the Owner's two existing l.0 mgd permeate production capacity reverse osmosis units. Upon the completion of the modifications described herein, and the replacement of the membrane elements as described in Section 11277, the two existing l.0 mgd permeate production capacity reverse osmosis units shall be capable of producing l.5 mgd of permeate per unit for a total permeate production capacity of 3.0 mgd with both units in service. Modifications included in this section generally include PVC and stainless steel piping modifications, valve modifications, supporting framework modifications, and instrumentation modifications. New gaskets, o-rings, seals, etc. shall be provided on all system components. This work shall include shop drawing preparation, procurement, installation, and testing. The design criteria for the existing and modified membrane units is summarized in Table 13025-1 Membrane System Design Configuration and shown on the Drawings. B. The membrane unit modifications shall be provided by a qualified Membrane System Supp}ier (MSS) who has extensive experience in the design, fabrication, and modification of inembrane units. The materials and equipment provided by the MSS shall be installed by full-time • employees of the Contractor under the direction and supervision of the MSS. The replacement membrane elements shall be purchased by the MSS and installed by full-time employees of the Contractor under the direction and supervision of the MSS and the Membrane Element Manufacturer (MEM), as described in Section l 1277. It is the intent of this specification that the modification of the two existing membrane units occur concurrently and that the installation of new membrane elements into each modified membrane unit shall immediately follow its modification so as to minimize downtime of the equipment. The Contractor and MSS shall coordinate the wark to minimize downtime of the equipment. The Contractor, under the direction and supervision of the MSS, shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of the existing membrane elements prior to the commencement of the modification work as well as the installation of MSS provided materials and equipment. The Contractor, under the direction and supervision of the MSS and the MEM, shall be responsible for the installation of the new membrane elements upon completion of the modification work. The MEM shall be responsible for the performance of the membranes. The MSS shall be responsible for monitoring the results of the Performance Test of each unit, and for rectifying any defects associated with the modification of the membrane units. C. The MSS provided equipment and services under this contract shall generally consist of the following: 1. Preparation of detailed shop drawings and detailed design of inembrane unit modifications. 2. Direction and supervision of the Contractors full-time employees during the removal of the existing membrane elements from the existing membrane units. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of the existing membrane elements. 3. Fabrication, delivery, and installation of piping modifications, including valves, on each unit as described herein. 4. Procurement, delivery, and installation of new and/or modified instrumentation on each unit, • as described herein. 5. Any modifications to the existing unit or supporting framework necessary to complete the piping, instrumentation, and valve modifications. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 13OZS— I TPA llTpmvrOtlsec\CLWATERiRO 1 Plam Expansion ProjedUssued to Bid Specs113025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6. 7. 8. 9. ]0 ll l2 Installation of pipe supports for the piping modifications. Pressure testing and flushing of the membrane units after the modifications have been completed as well as the cleaning and disinfection of the membrane unit prior to the installation ofthe new membrane elements. Procurement, delivery, and installation of new membrane elements in each modified membrane unit. Start-up and Performance Testing of each membrane unit. The above improvements shall be scheduled to occur concurrently for both existing membrane units. Correction of any defects associated with the membrane unit modification. Operation and maintenance training manuals for the modified membrane units. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The MSS shall be one of the following: a. Aerex lndustries Inc. b. Biwater/Advanced Environmental Water Technologies, Inc. c. Harn R/O Systems Inc. d. H2Olnnovations B. Allowable MSS's shall have a minimum of three municipal drinking water, reverse osmosis (RO) and/or nanofiltration (NF) membrane systems, with a permeate capacity of 3.0 mgd or greater that have been commissioned within the past (3) years and are currently in successful service. The current staff of the MSS shall have a minimum of (5) years of experience in the design, procurement, installation supervision and startup of RO and NF membrane systems. The lead process engineer for the MSS shall have a minimum of (10) years experience in the design, procurement, installation supervision and startup of RO and NF membrane systems. The MSS shall provide documentation that verifies the stainless steel pipe fabrication work for the above referenced RO and/or NF installation(s) included pickling and passivation by full immersion, full penetration welds and extruded outlets for the stainless steel piping manifolds in strict conformance to ASTM A312, ASTM A403(WPW), ASME B31.1, and ANSI B36.19. C. MEM — The MEM is the entity which shall manufacture and provide the replacement membrane elements through the MSS. D. Drawings and Sketches — The terms "Drawing" and "Sketches" are synonymous in this specification and refer to the contract Drawings bound into the volume immediately following the Technical Specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Instructions B. Section I 1277: Membrane Elements and Manufacturer's Services G Section 11278: Membrane System Performance Warranty D. Section ] 5064: Plastic Pipe and Fittings E. Section 15066: Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings F. Section 15094: Pipe Hangers and Supports 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I 3 OZS—LTPA \\TpasvAl�seclCLWATERIRO 1 PIaM Fxpansion Rojectllssued W Bid Specs\i 3025.doc • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . G. Section ] 5100: Valves and Appurtenances H. Contract Drawings 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. The Owner intends to have its two existing l.0 mgd permeate capacity membrane units modified, as described herein and as shown on the Drawings, such that the modified units will each produce l.5 mgd of permeate. This section summarizes the features of the existing membrane units and the projected performance after modification and after membrane replacement. The overall configuration for the existing and modified membrane system is summarized in Table 13025-] Membrane System Design Criteria. B. Pretreatment for the membrane system consists of prechlorination, dual media pressure filtration, dechlorination, antiscalant addition, and cartridge filtration. The pretreatment process does not include the addition of acid for pH adjustment, however, the modifications shall include provisions to allow the use of acid addition in the future. C. Membrane system design criteria are specified in Table 13025-1. Membrane unit configuration is specified in Paragraph 2.02 of this Section. D. Permeate water from the membrane units is directed to a blend tank for blending and post- treatment as shown and specified elsewhere. • E. Concentrate water from the membrane units will be directed into a new wetwell as part of the new concentrate pump station. F. The membrane units shall be directly connected to the cleaning system via isolation valves as shown on the attached sketches. The operation of the cleaning system will be manually initiated and locally operated by the Owner's operations personnel. No automatic operation is reyuired. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. All materials required to establish compliance with these specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300. It is important that the MSS read and understand the provisions of Section 01300, regarding shop drawing submittals. B. Submittals for the membrane system modifcations shall include at least the following: l. A hydraulic design of each unit which matches membrane feed pump discharge pressures, velocities and headlosses through the skid, necessary transmembrane pressures, concentrate backpressures. Membrane system modifications shall be designed such that the hydraulic losses through membrane system piping, manifolds, and feed/interstage/concentrate ports do not exceed 20 psi. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. A bill of materials for all equipment. 4. A list of spare parts recommended by the MSS. 5. Scaled Engineering Drawings showing the following items. a. Drawing of the membrane units, giving physical dimensions of the pressure vessels, piping arrangements, support structure (Plan and four elevations plus details of fabrication). • b. Instrumentation element installation schematic to facilitate the installation of additional electrical and control cable conduits. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 13025-3 TPA I1Tpasvr011sec1CLWATERIR01 PoaM Fspa�sim ProjecNssued to Bid Specs\13025.tloc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6. Resumes of the experienced membrane process and applications engineer employed by the MSS who will be in responsible charge of the detailed design and shop drawings and the MSS's representative that will provide direction and supervision of the Contractars personnel during the removal of existing membrane elements, the installation ofthe system modifications, and the installation of new membrane elements, as well as startup and performance testing services. 7. Corporate experience and resumes of key technica] personnel utilized by the MSS. Corporate experience information shall include a listing of a11 low pressure membrane projects completed by the MSS within the past five calendar years. 8. Shop drawings and specifications for a11 purchased equipment. 9. A detailed schedule and plan for the membrane unit modifications, including existing membrane element removal, new membrane element installation, supporting framework modifications, all piping, electrical, instrumentation, and control components. The schedule and plan shall include anticipated dates and durations for al) modifications; indicate which modifications require the shutdown of an individual membrane unit, both membrane units, or a complete facility shutdown; and the expected duration of the shutdown; labor, equipment, and materials required to complete each component of the modification. l0. Name and qualifications of stainless steel pipe supplier and fabricator with description of equipment and method for post fabrication pickling and passivation of stainless piping as described in section 15066. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING A. Complete operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals for the equipment provided under this contract in accordance with the requirements of Section 01730. B. A representative for the MSS, with complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the system, shall provide onsite training for general operation and maintenance of equipment supplied under this contract in accordance with the provisions of 01730 and Part 3 of this Section. l.07 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. All special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished by the MSS. B. A list of recommended spare parts with current prices shall be provided. 1.08 MEM's PROVIDED SERVICES AFFECTING THE WORK OF THE MSS A. The MEM shall be required to review and provide comments on the membrane unit shop drawing submittal ofthe MSS. B. The MEM shall be required to review and provide comment on the MSS's O&M manual submittals to verify conformance with the MEM's operating requirements. C. The MEM shall be responsible for the process design of the membrane units within the specified membrane system designed criteria. The MEM shall be responsible for the performance of the membrane elements and their ability to meet the stated water quality goals and performance criteria including, but not limited to, the maximum transmembrane pressure loss. 1.09 MEMBRANE SYSTEM WARRANTY 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 I 3025-4TPA 11TpasvNl{sec1CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Exparsion RojecNssued lo Bid Specs\73025.doc • � • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • A. The MSS shall provide a one year warranty on materials and workmanship for the equipment provided under the membrane systems modifications contract per the conditions of the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions. This warranty shall be limited to new system components provided by the MSS. B. The MEM shall warrant the membrane elements and their performance as described in Section 1 l 278. PART 2 EQllIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.O1 MEMBRANE SYSTEM GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA A. The MSS sha11 provide the services of an experienced membrane process and applications engineer(s) for the design, procurement, installation, startup and testing of the modified membrane system. The MSS's membrane process and applications engineer(s) shall have experience with similar size and type of inembrane plants and shall be approved by the ENGINEER. B. The membrane system equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to incorporate standard membranes and eyuipment designs with proven abilities as manufactured by reputable firms having long experience in the manufacture of inembrane system equipment. C. All equipment shall be designed for continuous service at maximum operating pressures. • D. Provisions shall be made for easy replacement of inembrane elements and all other parts. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. • E. All welding sha11 be in accordance with the latest applicable codes of the American Welding Society and ASME Boiler Code. No field welding of stainless steel process pipe or mild steel will be allowed. All welders shall be certified by AWS. All welds shall be full penetration welds. F. The membrane system shall be designed to treat pre-treated water from the existing Floridan Aquifer wells to potable quality, as described in Table 13025-2. Pretreatment for the membrane system consists of prechlorination, dual media pressure filtration, dechlorination, antiscalant addition, and cartridge filtration. The pretreatment process does not include the addition of acid for pH adjustment; however, the modifications shall include provisions to allow the use of acid addition in the future. The membrane system design criteria are summarized in Table 13025-1. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I.J OZS�STPA I1TpasvAtlsec\CLWATER�RO 7 PIaM Exparsion Prq¢cNesued to Bid Specs\77025.doe �O 2012 CDM Smith Ali Rights Reserved • Table 13025-1: Membrane System Design Criteria Parameter Existing Membrane Modified Units Membrane Units Total Permeate Capacity (mgd} 2.0 3.0 Number of Membrane Units Z 2 Permeate Capacity per Unit (mgd) 1.0 1.5 Design Recovery per Unit (�o) 78 78 Maximum Transmembrane Pressure Loss (psi) Not Applicable See Note 3 during 60-day Performance Test Membrane Element Diameter — Nominal (inches) 8 8 Element Length — Nominal (inches) 40 40 Area per Element (ft ) 400 440 Maximum Average Permeate Flux Rate per Unit (gfd) 11.9 16.2 Maximum Individual Membrane Element Permeate Water Flux (gfd) Not Known 23.2 Number of Membrane Elements per Pressure Vessel 7 7 Number of Stages per Unit 2 2 Number of Pressure Vessels per Unit 30 30 Number of First Stage Pressure Vessels per Unit 22 22 Number of Second Stage Pressure Vessels per Unit 8 8 Note 1: Design Recovery is defined as the normal operating permeate water recovery rate and is the basis for determining compliance with the performance specifications of these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Note 2: Transmembrane Pressure Loss is defined as the difference in pressure between the membrane unit • feed stream measured after the feedwater flow control/isolation valve and the combined permeate stream pressure measured upstream of the permeate discharge check valve, both measured at the same elevation. Note 3: Transmembrane Pressure Loss shall be calculated based on the values provided by the MEM in Attachment A of Specification Section 11277. Note 4: Membrane area per element varies depending on the MEM and model. Areas are nominal and actual membrane element area for any specified element shall not be more than 2.0% greater than nor more than 2.0% lesser than the stated minimum area. G. The antiscalant currently utilized by the Facility is AWC A-102 Plus, as offered by American Water Chemicals. H. The pH of the feed water will be no less than 4 nor greater than 8 on an average continuous basis. 1. The pH of cleaning solutions will be no less than 2 or greater than l2. 2.02 MEMBRANE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. The two (2) l.5 mgd membrane units shall operate at 78% recovery using two stages. B. Membrane Unit Configuration. The MSS shall base their bid on the membrane unit configuration as described in Table 13025-1 and the modifications shown on the Drawings. Alternate approaches to the membrane unit modifications will be considered provided the MSS submit sufficient documentation which clearly demonstrates the alternate approach meets or exceeds the reyuirements described herein. • 63 49-79520/ 10/09/2012 13025-6TPA 1\TpawrO7Vsec\CLWATERIRO 1 Poant Expa�ion ProjecMlssued to Bid Specs\t 3025.AOc �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Rights Reserved • C. Feed, permeate and concentrate piping shall be provided with vent valves at the highest points for clearing air during membrane unit startup. The vent line shall be routed to a floor drain or trench. The vent valve shall be located at 5 feet above finished floor elevation. D. Each membrane unit shall be modified as necessary to incorporate the following additional features. The following additional features shall be in addition to the features currently available on the membrane units. l. Motorized concentrate control valves 2. Stage 1 permeate backpressure indicating transmitter 3. Total permeate backpressure indicating transmitter 4. Stage l permeate conductivity indicating transmitter 5. Stage 2 permeate conductivity indicating transmitter 6. Interstage conductivity indicating transmitter 7. Concentrate conductivity indicating transmitter 8. Interstage backpressure indicating transmitter E. The MSS shall provide any and all necessary membrane unit modifications required to meet the performance standards as described in this Section, whether specified herein or not. 2.03 MEMBRANES A. The MEM shall provide insured delivery of the new membrane elements to the job site as specified in Section l l 277-3.04.A. The Contractor shall be provided written notice ] 5 calendar days prior to the shipment of the membrane elements and 48 hours prior to the delivery of the • membrane elements. Written notice shall be provided by both the MSS and the MEM. B. The MSS supplied membrane elements shall be spiral-wound, thin film composite membranes with a nomina] diameter of 8-inches, a nominal length of 40-inches, and a nominal membrane surface area of 440 square feet per membrane element, as specified in Section 11277. C. The Contractor, under the direction and supervision of the MSS and MEM, shall install the new membrane elements into the modified membrane units. All membrane elements shall be installed by full-time emp]oyees of the Contractar. Temporary, part-time, or contract laborers shall not be allowed to handle the membrane elements. 2.04 PRESSURE VESSELS A. Each existing membrane unit utilizes multi-ported Code Line pressure vessels, Model 80A30-7, with a mvcimum working pressure rating of 300 psi at a temperature of l 20 F. Each pressure vessel is designed to house seven (7) standard spiral wound membrane elements with a nominal diameter of 8-inches and a nominal length of 40-inches.Each pressure vessel is equipped with four (4) 2-inch diameter ports, two on each end of the vessel at the 6- and 12-o-clock positions (i.e. 180 degrees apart). It is the intent of this specification that the MSS design the membrane unit modifications to accommodate the continued use of the existing pressure vessels and end closures. B. The MSS shall ensure the brine seals, interconnectors, o-rings, and permeate adapters are suitable for use with the existing pressure vessels. 2.05 MEMBRANE UNIT SUPPORT STRUCTURE • A. The existing pressure vessels, skid piping, valves, instruments, and related appurtenances are supported on a stainless stee) frame. It is anticipated that modifications and/or additions to the 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1 JOZS-7TPA\1Tpasvr011sec1ClWATER1Ft0 1 PIaM Expa�ion ProjectUssued to BiE Spets113025.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved stainless steel frame will be required by the membrane unit modifications. All additions and • modifications to the support structure shall be designed by a registered professional structural Engineer, currently licensed in the State of Florida. B. The Contractar shall complete the reyuired support structure modifications without damaging existing equipment Costs associated with the repair and/or damage of any existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C. All new mounting hardware and bolting for membrane unit components shall be 3l6 stainless steel in accordance with Section 15066, Stainless Steel Piping. 2.06 STAINLESS STEEL PROCESS PIPING A. All stainless steel process piping spools and fabrications shall be pickled and passivated by immersion in acid after fabrication as specified in Section 15066. Alternate methods will not be accepted. All piping welds shall be full penetration welds done by AWS certified welders. B. All stainless steel piping shall be at least Schedule l0, Type 316L (ASTM A-312) stainless steel seamless pipe with stainless steel Victau}ic type joints as specified in Section 15066 connecting the pressure vessel and manifolds. C. All stainless steel piping modifications shall be pickled and passivated stainless steel conforming to the requirements of Section 15066. Stainless steel piping connections shall be welded or grooved except as reyuired for connection to valves and equipment or to avoid pipe spools no longer than 20 feet long, in which case the joints shall have flanged or Victaulic type couplings as specified in Section 15066. Threaded fittings are not allowed, except for 1/2-inch instrumentation • and sample fittings or as specifically specified herein. D. New feed, interstage, concentrate, and cleaning piping shall be provided as shown on the drawings. E. All stainless steei piping shall be hydrostatically tested at l 50 percent of the design operating , pressure. The test shall be conducted prior to preoperational testing in the Field and shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Piping and fittings that leak or show structural damage during or after the test shall be rejected. Provisions to facilitate the hydrostatic testing shall be incorporated into the design of the membrane unit modifications. 2.07 PVC PROCESS PIPING A. All PVC process piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC as specified in Section 15064. All PVC joints shall be of the solvent welded socket type. Unions, flanges, and grooved Victaulic type joints shall be incorporated into the design of the PVC process piping as necessary to facilitate assembly, maintenance, and connections to other piping sections, equipment, valves, or instruments. B. All PVC piping shall be hydrostatically tested at l 50 percent of the design operating pressure. The test shalI be conducted prior to preoperational testing in the Field and shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Piping and fittings that leak or show structural damage during or after the test sha11 be rejected. Provisions to facilitate the hydrostatic testing shall be incorporated into the design of the membrane unit modifications. C. All PVC piping shall be designed to accommodate straight runs of pipe as required for each flow • meter. A minimum of 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream and a minimum of 2 pipe 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I J OZS-OTPA \\TpaaAt�sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plan[ F�cpa(sion RojecNssued to Bid Specs\13025.doc Cc� 20l 2 CDM Smith AI! �2iLi�ts Reserved • diameters of straight pipe downstream of each inline magnetic flow meter is required. Alt flow meters shall be located so that they are readily accessible for maintenance. 2.08 VALVES A. The concentrate control valve and first stage permeate backpressure valve sizes shown on the Drawings shall be confirmed by the MSS to be properly sized and located for accessibility for maintenance. As necessary, the MSS shall select and install different sized valves to ensure proper operation and minimum noise at no additional cost to the Owner. The MSS shall select the operating speed of the concentrate control valve motor operator to be compatible with the modified membrane unit. The first stage permeate backpressure valve shall be manually operated. B. All valves of the same type shall be from one manufacturer. The name of the manufacturer, flow direction arrows, and working pressure for which they are designed shall be cast in raised letters upon the body of the valve. C. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are plainly visible when standing on the floor. D. Manually-Operated and Motor-Operated Ball Valves. Ball valves shall be as specified in Section 15100. E. Butterfly valves shall be used as isolation valves on piping four inches or more in diameter. • Valves shall be as specified in Section IS100. F. Check valves used on Stage l and Stage 2 permeate piping and on concentrate piping shall be slight globe check valves as specified in Section 15100. 2.09 INSTRUMENTATION A. lt is the intent of this specification that the MSS design the membrane unit modifications to accommodate the continued use of the existing instrumentation including the following: 1. Feedwater pressure gauge 2. Feedwater pressure indicating transmitter 3. Stage 1 permeate backpressure switch 4. Stage ] permeate backpressure gauge 5. Total permeate pressure gauge 6. Total permeate pressure switch 7. Total permeate temperature and conductivity indicating transmitter 8. Concentrate pressure gauge (upstream of concentrate control valve) 9. Concentrate pressure indicating transmitter (upstream of concentrate control valve} 10. Concentrate pressure switch (downstream of concentrate control valve) 11. Concentrate pressure gauge (downstream of concentrate control valve) B. ln addition to the existing instrumentation, the MSS shall design the membrane unit modifications to incorporate the following additional features. 1. Motorized concentrate control valve 2. Stage 1 permeate backpressure indicating transmitter 3. Total permeate backpressure indicating transmitter • 4. Stage 1 permeate conductivity indicating transmitter 5. Stage 2 permeate condu.ctivity indicating transmitter 6. Interstage conductivity indicating transmitter 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I 302J-9TPA \1TpawA7ludCLWA7ER1R0 1 Plant Expansion PrqectUssued to Bid Specs\73025.dx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7. Concentrate conductivity indicating transmitter 8. Interstage pressure indicating transmitter 9. Stage 1 permeate magnetic flow meter (6-inch) ] 0. Stage 2 permeate magnetic flow meter (4-inch) l 1. Concentrate magnetic flow meter (4-inch) C. New instrumentation shall be as specified in Section 13315. D. The existing local instrumentation panel shall be modified as necessary to incorporate the additional instrumentation described above. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.O1 COORDINATION OF THE CONTRACTOR WITH THE MSS A. The Contractor shall coordinate fully with the MSS with regards to the schedule of the work associated with the modification of the membrane units and the installation of the new membrane elements. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of the MSS supplied membranes. C. For the required on-site services of the MSS, including the services of the MEM provided through the MSS, the Contractar shall notify the MSS in writing a minimum of 2l calendar days prior to the Contractor's need of the services as specified in Section 11277-3.02.C. The Contractor shall also provide the same notice to the Engineer. 3.02 COORDINATION OF THE MSS WITH THE MEM A. The MSS shall coordinate fully with the MEM for the purpose of obtaining process and design criteria relating to the membrane process. B. The MSS shall coordinate with the MEM with regards to the delivery of the MSS supplied membranes. C. For the required on-site services of the MEM, the MSS shall notify the MEM in writing a minimum of 21 calendar days prior to the need of the services. The MSS shall also provide the same notice to the Engineer. 3.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY PERTAINING TO MSS SUPPLIED MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The Contractor shall have complete responsibility for delivery, storing, handling, and installing the MSS-supplied membrane elements. Ali membrane elements shall be installed by full-time employees of the Contractor under the direction and supervision of the MSS and the MEM. The MSS shall submit the purchase documents for the membrane elements to the Owner and Engineer that specifically state the Contractor's responsibility for shipment, delivery, unloading and storage. B. The Contractor, per the shipping and handling instructions of the MEM and the MSS, shall receive and unload at the site all of the new membrane elements: C� • C. Storage facilities for the MSS-supplied membrane elements shall be per the requirements of • Section 01600, "Materials and Equipment" and the written storage instructions of the MEM and 6349-79520/ 10/09/20 I 2 I,l O2S-1 VTPA 11TpasvA715ec�CLWATERIRO 1 Mant Expansion ProjecNSwed [o Bid Spe�113025.doc • u � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved the MSS. Membranes shall not be stored outdoors or in enclosed areas where the temperature is more than 2°F higher than ambient temperature. A thermometer indicating both maximum and minimum temperature shall be provided in the storage area. D. Following receipt of inembrane elements and until final acceptance of the completed work, Contractor shalt protect and maintain the membrane elements to prevent damage in accordance with the MEM's and MSS's instructions, and as specified. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the membrane elements associated with the handling of inembrane elements during the membrane ]oading process. Any damaged membrane elements shall be replaced with new identical membrane elements at the expense of the Contractor. 3.04 RECEIVING OF THE NEW MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The Contractor shall be prepared to accept delivery of the membrane elements on-site. B. The Contractor, MSS, and the MEM shall jointly record the delivery of the membrane elements. Upon delivery of the membrane elements, the Contractor, MSS, and the MEM shall jointly inspect for completeness and evidence of damage during shipment. C. After completion of joint inspection, the membrane elements shall be unloaded by the Contractor in accordance with the MEM's and the MSS's instructions for unloading, or as specified. Damaged membrane elements to be returned to MEM for replacement will not be unloaded, except as necessary to expedite return shipment. Damage to or loss of inembrane elements unloaded to expedite return shipment for replacement shall be reptaced with new identical membrane elements. 3.05 INSPECTION OF NEW MEMBRANE ELEMENTS PRIOR TO LINLOADING A. The Contractor, MSS, and MEM shall jointly inspect the condition of each product. l. The Contractor shall record in writing the products transferred to the Contractor's care. 2. The Contractor shall not unload membrane elements to be returned to the MEM for replacement unless necessary to expedite return shipping. 3.06 MEMBRANE UNIT PRE-MODIFICATION AND MEMBRANE ELEMENT PRE- INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Prior to the modification of the existing membrane units and the installation of new membrane elements, the Contractor shall hold a membrane unit pre-modification and membrane element pre-installation meetings with the MSS, MEM, Owner, and Engineer to review the plan for each component of the work. The Contractor shall notify all parties of the proposed meeting date in writing no less than ] 4 calendar days prior to the proposed meeting date. The Contractor shall submit a written plan to the Engineer and Owner to review a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to each meeting. The written plan shall include details related to the schedule, procedures, and durations of each component of the work. 3.07 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE ELEMENTS A. The Contractor, under the direction and supervision of the MSS and the MEM, shall provide al} labor, tools, construction equipment, incidental material, and necessary services required to remove the existing membrane elements from the existing membrane units and instaIl the MSS- 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 3 �ZJ-� � TPA IiTpasvr011udCLWATERIRO 1 Planl Expareion ProjeeNlssued to Bid Spece113025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved supplied membrane elements in the modified membrane units. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of the existing membrane elements. B. A representative of the MEM shall be on site during the membrane installation process to certify that the membrane elements have been installed correctly and that the installation work conforms to the MEM's recommended procedures, instructions, and approved shop drawings. A representative of the MSS shall be on site during the membrane installation process to direct and supervise the Contractor's labor forces. C. The MSS supplied membrane elements shall not be installed into the modified membrane units until all modifications are complete, the modified membrane unit passes the hydrostatic test, and the modified membrane unit has been disinfected, flushed, and passes the bacteriological tests. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for these activities and shall make provisions for the disposal of flushing and disinfecting water to acceptable areas, as determined by the Owner and Engineer. Temporary piping connections may be necessary. D. If the MEM requires that the membranes be loaded in a specific order, the MEM must provide this information to the MSS and must pack and organize the elements in a manner that is consistent with the loading schedule. The MEM's on-site representative shall assist the MSS and the Contractor with coordinating the loading schedule. E. In order to prevent bacteriological contamination of the membranes, the Contractor, the MSS, and the MEM shall ensure that unpackaged membrane elements are not placed in direct contact with the ground, floor, standing water, or dirt, and will instruct installers to maintain sanitary and clean conditions. F. It is the intention of this specification that all modifications of the e�sting membrane units, including performance testing described in Paragraph 3.10 and 3.11 be conducted concurrently. G. Dow/Corning l 11 Valve Lubricant and Sealant shall be used to lubricate all seals, o-rings, and gaskets during membrane element installation. 3.08 MEMBRANE SYSTEM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATtON A. The MSS shall provide the services of an experienced membrane unit Installation Supervisor on- site to supervise the installation of piping modifications and associated equipment. The MSS shatl submit the qualifications of the Installation Supervisor to the Engineer for approval. B. The duties of the Installation Supervisor shall include the following for each item of inembrane system equipment furnished. These are subject to all limitations and requirements directed by the Engineer or specified elsewhere. 1. Give all necessary instructions for proper unloading, installation, and testing of the piping modifications and associated eyuipment. 2. Be present at the work at all times necessary for proper supervision. 3. Coordinate with the MEM in the supervision of inembrane element loading. 3.09 MEMBRANE SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SURFACE PROTECTION A. All pre-painted purchased equipment such as electric motors, valves, etc. shall be coated with an intermediate and final gloss coat of epoxy paint to match the remainder of the unit. An appropriate seal coat cover over the factory finish shall be applied first if recommended by the paint manufacturer. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I 3O2S— I ZTPA \\Tpasv'01�sec�CLWATERIRO 1 Plant 6parwion Projec8lssued to Bid Speas\73025.doc � • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. The complete painting procedure for painting pre-painted equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for review along with a letter confirming that the individual coats of paint are compatible with each other. C. Samples of colors available for painted and plastic surfaces shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The unit shall then be furnished in the approved colors. D. Machined or polished ferrous surfaces such as pipe flanges shall be provided with a temporary protective coating of a nondrying oil-type rust preventative compound. E. Stainless steel and anodized aluminum shall not be painted. 3.l 0 STARTUP AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the startup and testing of the modified membrane system. The Contractor shall fully coordinate with the MSS, and the MEM through the MSS, throughout the startup and testing period. B. Prior to the initiation of the startup and testing activities, the Contractor shall hold a coordination meeting with the MSS, MEM, Owner, and Engineer. This meeting shall be held not ]ess than 30 days prior to the anticipated start of any membrane unit modifications. The Contractor shall notify all parties of the proposed meeting date in writing no less than 14 calendar days prior to the proposed meeting date. The Contractor shall submit a detailed startup and testing plan to ali parties no less than seven (7) calendar days prior to the meeting. It is the intent of this specification that the MSS, and the MEM through the MSS, assist the Contractor with the development of the detailed startup and testing plan. This detailed plan shall include all • anticipated flow rates; test durations; characteristics of the produced streams; methods of handling, managing, and disposing of the produced streams; sequence for flushing the preservative from the membrane elements, bacteriological clearance, startup, and performance testing; as well as the schedule, procedures, and durations of each activity. The Contractor shall supply and install any and all temporary piping, valves, temporary storage facilities, etc. required to perform the startup and testing activities. The Owner and the Engineer shall review and approve the plan prior to the commencement of the activities. C. Disinfection and Flushing: The Contractor shall be responsible for flushing all piping and process equipment prior to startup. Following the completion of all membrane unit modifications and the removal of the existing membrane elements, but prior to loading the new membranes, all feed and interstage piping and pressure vessels shall be disinfected by swabbing with clean rags soaked in a chlorinated solution. Following disinfection, the membrane system shall be flushed with dechlorinated feed water until all air pockets are removed and no chlorine can be detected. The Contractor shall provide any temporary systems required to complete the disinfection and flushing procedures. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all produced streams. Disposal of all produced streams shall be in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. The ultimate disposal location shall be approved by both the Owner and the Engineer. Flushing of the raw and feed water piping shall be performed with l-micron cartridge filter elements installed in the cartridge filter housings. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all cartridge filter elements during the flushing procedures. Each membrane unit shall pass the required bacteriological testing prior to the loading of the new membrane elements and the initiation of the performance test. Testing, sampling, and analytical requirements shall be as mandated by the applicable regulatory agencies and permit requirements. All costs of testing, sampling, and analysis shall be the Contractor's responsibility. • D. Hydrostatic Testing: Following the completion of atl membrane unit modifications and the removal of the existing membrane elements, but prior to loading the new membranes, the 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I 3OZS-1 3TPA \\7pasvNllsec\CLWATERUtO 1 PIaM 6cpainniwi PmjecBlssued ro eid SpecsH3025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved modified membrane units shall be hydrostatically tested by the Contractor and wimessed by the . Engineer. Hydrostatic testing shali not commence until all trapped air has been removed from the membrane units. All piping and pressure vessels shall be drained immediately after the hydrostatic test. E. Preoperational Tests. The Contractor, through the MSS, shall provide the services of an experienced membrane process and applications engineer who will work in conjunction with the Owner to place the modified membrane units into operation. The Contractor, in conjunction with the MSS, MEM, and Owner, shall star[ up and operate all support systems such as the chemical feed systems, cleaning systems, instrumentation, controls, and electric power. The tests conducted by the Contractor, with support from the MSS, MEM, and the Owner shall be conducted without the new membranes installed and shail demonstrate at least the following: 1. Check equipment and piping alignment and ensure there are no internal stresses. 2. Calibrate all instrumentation and controls. All field instruments, including both new and existing, must be re-calibrated in the field after installation by a factory representative of equipment. 3. Check hydraulic systems and control to ensure proper operation. 4. Check ail electrical systems and control to ensure proper operation. F. Startup Tests: Once the preoperational tests have been successfully completed, the membrane system equipment and controls shall be operated and adjustments made to demonstrate that equipment and controls will operate as a complete and functional system. Each membrane treatment unit shall be operated automatically for at least eight (8) hours with the units started and stopped at least six times under the Contractor's, MSS's, and Owner's supervision. 1. The start-up tests on the membrane units will be conducted without membranes loaded. Contractor shall install all necessary orifice plates in the membrane skids and associated • piping to simulate expected pressure loss from a"membrane-loaded" condition for the startup testing. 2. If the above tests successfully demonstrate that the membrane treatment system and controls operate as a complete and functional system to the satisfaction of the Engineer, then and only with the approval of the Engineer, will the MSS, in conjunction with the Contractor, be allowed to load membranes. After successful installation of the membrane elements, the Contractor in conjunction with the MSS and the MEM shall proceed with the thirty (30) consecutive day performance demonstration test. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all produced streams. Disposal of all produced streams shall be in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. The ultimate disposal location shall be approved by both the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary piping and valving for disposal of the water. G. It is the intent of the OWNER to utilize the permeate water during the performance testing periods to satisfy distribution system demand. H. The Contractar's attention is directed to the fact that the membrane preservative solution must be tharoughly flushed prior to placing the unit into service. Flushing shall be accomplished by flowing feed water through the pumps and feed piping through the pressure vessels, exiting through the concentrate and permeate lines. Temporary connections shall be provided to allow disposal of the permeate from the unit being flushed without combining this permeate with permeate from other units in operation. Permeate shall be flushed in accordance with the MEM's recommended guidelines. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1.J O2S-1 4TPA \1TpasvAtlseNCLWATERU201 WaM Fxparision Projecfllssued M Bid Specs\73025.doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3.11 MEMBRANE PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Test Duration 1. A thirty (30) day performance demonstration test shall be conducted by the Contractor, under the direction and supervision of the MSS's membrane process and application engineer, to monitor and demonstrate the performance of all membrane units, and to make minor adjustments to the equipment. Owner's operating staff shall be present at all times during the 30-day performance test and shall, at times, introduce permeate water into the distribution system to satisfy system demands. A representative of the MEM shall be present on-site as specified in Section 11277. The Contractor shall make available the ISS on an as-needed basis during the performance testing. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule this test with the MSS, the MEM, the Owner, and the Engineer. 2. Each membrane unit shall be tested individually, although testing of multiple units on a concurrent basis will be allowed. 3. If the plant is shut down for any reason, other than the following, the down time shall be added to the duration of the test. If the test is interrupted for the following reasons, the period elapsed while the plant is not operating shall be credited toward the contract period, but the 30-day test must be completed. a. Loss of feedwater delivered to the membrane plant for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor b. Loss of power to the membrane plant for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. c. Inability of the Owner to accept the water produced by the membrane plant, for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. • B. Water Quality For the Membrane Performance Testing, the projected membrane feedwater (after pretreatment and 1-micron cartridge filtration) and the required membrane product water characteristics are as given in Table 13025-2. C. Testing Conditions 1. Each membrane unit shall be tested under the following conditions, which must be maintained throughout the entire performance tests: Maximum Transmembrane Pressure as given in the membrane supply agreement between the MSS and the MEM. Membrane feed water quality shall be as listed in Table ] 3025-2. Membrane unit water recovery rate = 78 percent. Minimum Permeate Flow per Membrane Unit = 1.50 mgd. D. Continuous Data Collection and Reporting Requirements l. The following continuous data shall be collected and recorded by the control system computer for each membrane unit during the 30-day membrane performance test: Overall Membrane System: Feed water temperature Feed water pressure • Feed water conductivity Feed water pH Feed ORP 6349-79520/l 0/09/2012 1 JOZS� 1 STPAqTpesvrOt�sec\CLWATER1R01 Plant Expansion RojeclUssued to Bid Specs\730?5.AOc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Feed Turbidity Permeate pressure Permeate conductivity Permeate pH Concentrate pressure Concentrate conductivity Each Membrane Train: Feed water pressure Feed pump VFD speed First interstage pressure Concentrate pressure Concentrate valve position Total permeate flow First stage permeate flow Second stage permeate flow Concentrate flow First stage permeate pressure Second stage permeate pressure First stage permeate conductivity Second stage permeate conductivity Total Permeate conductivity Concentrate conductivity First Interstage conductivity The following data shall be manually collected and recorded every shift (every 8 hours): Raw water SDI Feed water SDI Antiscalant consumption Permeate temperature Concentrate temperature Concentrate pH All of the above automatically collected data shall be trended on the HMI, with data points collected and recorded every 5 minutes, and archived for 14 days. 2. The following performance parameters shall be plotted against total time of operation in hours and provided to the Engineer on a weekly basis. a. b. First Stage — normalized flux, normalized water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential (i.e. difference between feedwater pressure and the concentrate pressure), normalized salt passage based on conductivity Second Stage — normalized flux, normalized water mass transfer coefficient, net driving pressure, pressure differential, concentrate pressure, normalized salt passage based on conductivity E. Water Quality Sampling ]. Samples shall be collected approximately every 160 hours of operation during performance testing, beginning on the third day, for a total of four (4) sampling episodes. During a sampling event, the Contractor shall collect discrete water samples from each train's feed, permeate, and concentrate streams for all the parameters Iisted in "Perf'ormance Testing - Projected and Required Water Characteristics" (Table 13025-2) of this Section, including silt density index. The Contractor shall arrange for laboratory 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I 3 OZS— I V TPA \\TpasvrOtbecVCLWATERU20 1 PIaM Expar�sion RojectVSSUed to Bid Specs\13025.doc • • • � � . �O 2012 CDM Smith A(1 Rights Reserved analysis of these discrete water samples at a state certified laboratory approved by the Engineer and the Owner. The analytical laboratory shall utilize analytical methodologies, approved by the USEPA or contained in Standard Methods (latest edition), that has a detection limit sufficiently sensitive to allow determination of compliance with the stated performance requirements. All analytical results shall be transmitted directiy to the Engineer from the laboratory within seven (7) days after sample collection. All appropriate quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) control data shall also be submitted. The Engineer and/or the Owner may choose to split samples with the Contractor during the performance testing. Although the analysis of the split samples is not the responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate fWiy with the Engineer and/or the Owner in providing the split samples. Prior to the start of performance testing, the Contractor shall take samples from the feed, permeate, and concentrate and ha�e the samples analyzed for conductivity and TDS in order to develop correlations between these parameters. F. Test Report 1. At the end of the 30-day performance test for each membrane unit, the MSS shall prepare a test report which shall include daily operating and normalized performance data for each day of the test. The MSS shall submit the test report to the Engineer through the Contractor. Prior to the passage of the performance test and issuance of substantial completion, the Engineer must approve the submitted test reports. Test reports shall be submitted in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each test report shall indicate final positions of controls. 2. The test report shall include, as a minimum, the following data for each membrane unit: a. Daily Performance Data -Date -Feed pH -Antiscalant consumption -Feed flow, pressure, conductivity, temperature -First Stage Permeate Flow, pressure, conductivity -Second Stage Permeate Flow, pressure, conductivity -Second Stage Concentrate Flow, pressure, conductivity -Recovery Rate -Skid Flow Balance -Skid Chloride Balance b. Plot the following normalized performance parameters -Total Skid — flux, water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential (i.e. difference between feedwater pressure and the concentrate pressure, salt passage based on conductivity -First Stage — flux, water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential (i.e. difference between feedwater pressure and the concentrate pressure, salt passage based on conductivity -Second Stage — flux, water mass transfer coefficient, feedwater pressure, net driving pressure, pressure differential (i.e. difference between feedwater pressure and the concentrate pressure, salt passage based on conductivity c. Complete water quality analyses results presented as follows: - Permeate water quality parameters by sampling episode in conjunction with required permeate water quality parameter values or ranges. - Feed water quality parameters by sampling episode in conjunction with predicated feedwater quality parameter values or ranges. - Concentrate water quality parameters by sampling episode. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 13�25—j / TPA \\Tpasvr0lkecVCLWATERVtO 7 PIaM Expainion Projecfllssued to Bid Spew113025.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved - Percent reduction for each water quality parameters in the pern-►eate water and • by each sampling episode using an arithmetic average of feedwater and concentrate water quality parameter concentrations. Log of operational events including membrane unit downtime and causes, operational adjustments, and operator observations. G. Performance Test Acceptance Criteria ] . Acceptance Criteria Acceptance of the performance test for an individual membrane unit shall be based on the demonstrated ability of that membrane unit to meet all of the fo]lowing criteria consistently throughout the thirty (30) day test. a) Permeate water production of a minimum l.5 mgd from each membrane unit b) Meeting the required permeate yuality c) Producing the required permeate water production at a transmembrane pressure at or below the maximum transmembrane pressure stated in Table 1 1277-1 d) Meeting all testing condition functional operating parameters specified in this Section 2. Failed Performance Test Required Actions a. If the membrane system does not perform according to the Performance Test Acceptance Criteria and terms of the membrane warranty, then the Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments, design changes, and modifications reyuired to meet the performance requirements in accordance with the Specifications at his expense. After the completion of any changes, the 30-day test will be restarted. The Contractar may be required to perform the entire 30-day performance test on any individual membrane unit up to three (3) separate times. Failure of the 30-day performance test for any and all reasons other than the conditions given in Paragraph 3.l 1.A.3 of this • Section shall not be grounds for change in Contract Price or a change in Contract Time. After the third failed performance test for any individual membrane unit, the Owner has the right to deem the membrane unit and any portion thereof being tested as not meeting the requirement of the Contract Documents. Specified performance will be considered proper remedy. b. If Contractor fails to demonstrate proper startup/shutdown of the membrane unit, the Performance Test shall be considered to be failed and the specific system operation or operationa] criteria demonstration shall be repeated. The Contractor may be required to perform the required system operation ar operational criteria demonstration up to three (3) times. Failure to satisfactorily demonstrate the required system operation or operational criteria demonstration for any and all reasons other than the conditions given in Paragraph 3. ] l.A.3 of this Section shall not be grounds for a change in Contract price or a change in Contract Time. After the third failed test, the Owner has the right to deem the system being tested as not meeting the requirements of the Contract Document and may take such action as allowed by the Agreement. Specified performance will be considered a proper remedy. 3. Performance testing of the membrane system shall be scheduled by the Owner and Contractor. Substantial Completion for the membrane system will be contingent upon successful completion of the performance testing of all membrane units. Substantial Completion for the MSS will be contingent upon successful completion of the performance testing of all membrane units in terms of the functional operation of the equipment and repairs provided by the MSS and the correction of any membrane installation problems. The MSS will be allowed to submit an application for payment for Partial Utilization of each membrane unit upon successful completion of the first three days of operation of the membrane unit during the Performance Test for that unit. • 6��7-7952�� 1 0��9�2� l 2 1 3 �ZS� l OTPA \\TpasvrOt�sedCLWATERIRO 1 Plarrt Exparrsion Projec111ssued to Bid Specs\73025.00c �O ?O12 CDM Smith � All Ri��hts Reserved • 4. Services during the performance test. The MSS shall provide the following services with respect to the Performance Test of each unit: a. Supervision and direction of Contractor during the removal of the existing membrane elements. b. Supervision and direction of Contractor during the initial installation of the membrane elements. c. Have a representative present for the startup and initial three days of operation of each membrane unit. d. Repair all leaks and correct any defects with respect to work performed by the MSS. 3.12 MEMBRANE SYSTEM TRAtNING A. The MSS shall provide a qualified technical representative for 2 hours per day, on two separate days to instruct the Owner's personnel on the proper operation, installation, sampling, cleaning, and maintenance for the membrane system. The MSS shall coordinate the dates of the training with the Owner and the Engineer not less than 14 calendar days in advance of the proposed training dates. B. The MSS shall provide the services of a qualified technical representative to be present on-site to assist with the first membrane train cleaning procedure for a minimum of two (2) eight hour days, which shall occur within the first one (1) year ofoperation. The Owner shall notify the MSS not less than 14 calendar days in advance of the proposed cleaning dates. 3_l3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT . A. The MSS, prior to requesting final payment, sha11 obtain and submit the following items to the Contractor for transmittal to the Owner: 1. Written materials and workmanship warranty, where required. 2. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project pursuant to the provisions of law. u 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 13025-19TPA\\TpaaAl�sedCLWATER�RO 1 Poant Fxpansion ProjectUssued to Bid Specs173025.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved TABLE ] 3025-2 LPRO MEMBRANE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING PROJECTED AND REOUIRED WATER CHARACTERISTICS Initial Projected Long-Term Initial Required Long-Term Parameter Units Raw Water Projected Raw Permeate Required Quality Water Quality Quality Permeate Quality Ammonia mg/L as N 0.52 0.93 N/A N/A Ammonium mg/L as NHQ 0.80 1.20 N/A N/A Chloride mg�� 173 285 < 5 < 15 Color color units S 7.5 < 1 < 1 Fluoride mP�/� 0.21 0.42 N/A N/A Nitrate mg/L as N 0.02 0.05 N/A N/A Nitrite mg/L as N 0.02 0.08 N/A N/A Phosphorous mg/L as P 0.10 0.18 N/A N/A Sulfate mP�/� 13 21 N/A N/A Total Alkalinity mg/L as CaCO3 183 300 < 15 < 40 Total Dissolved Solids m�� 602 996 < 30 < 85 Total Organic Carbon m�� 2.4 3,g < 1 < 1 Total Hardness mg/L as CaCO3 270 420 < 5 < 15 Dissoived Organic mg/L 2 2 3 3 < 1 < 1 Carbon Arsenic mg�� 0.02 0.04 < 0.005 < 0.005 Barium m�� 0.022 0.035 N/A N/A Calcium mg/� g9 138 N/A N/A Iron m�� 0.3 0.5 N/A N/A Magnesium m�� 11 18 N/A N/A Manganese mP�/� 0.01 0.02 N/A N/A Potassium mg/� 1,7 2,7 N(A N/A Sodium mg/� 77 12p N/A N/A Strontium m�� 0.22 0.33 N/A N/A Silicon mg/� 13 Zq N/A N/A Heterotrophic Plate CFU/mL 1 3 0 0 Count Hydrogen Sulfide mg/L N/A N/A Silt Density Index (15 ---- � 5 � 5 N/A N/A min @ 30 psi) pH units 7.0 - 7.8 7.0 - 7.8 N/A N/A Temperature �� 23.9 - 25.0 23.9 - 25.0 N/A N/A Turbidity NTU N/A N/A Total Trihalomethane mg/L a < 0.040 < 0.040 Formation Potentiai' NK NK Haloacetic Acid mg/L < 0.030 < 0.030 Formation Potentials NK NK Note 1. At unadjusted permeate pH using feedwater pH of 7.4. Note 2. NA = Not Applicable 6349-79520/10/09/20l 2 I JOZS-ZOTPApTpasvAl�sedCLWA7EFZ�R01 PhantF�cpa�ion Projectllssuetl ro Bitl Specs113025.doc . CJ � � C% 201 � CDM Smith Ali Rights Reserved • • Note 3. NK = Not Known Note 4. At formation conditions of pH 8.0, chlorine dose of 6.0 mg/l, water temperature of 30° C, and 120 minute contact time. Note 5. Total formation potential for the five haloacetic acids regulated under the Stage 1 Disinfectants/Disinfection By-Products Rule and at the conditions referenced for Total Trihalomethane Formation Potential. LPRO membrane permeate parameters listed above for which there is listed "NA" value shall meet federal and state regulations for drinking water. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 1.J OZS�2 I TPA1\TpawNi�seclCLWATERVR01 Rant 6pansim Projeclilssued to Bitl Spe�113025.doc c0 ZOl2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1 3OZS—ZZTPA\\Tpasvr011sec�CLWATETR01 Plant Expa�ion Projec[USSUetl to Bid Speia113025.doc � � • . �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13123 PRE-ENGINEERED WEATHER C,4NOPY PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals reyuired to design, fabricate, deliver to site and install a pre-engineered extruded aluminum column supported weather canopy complete with all accessory items and hardware to provide a complete system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Cast-ln Place Concrete is included in Section 03300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication and installation. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings, and accessories. lnclude manufacturer's product data, component performance data, operating instructions, and maintenance data. • B. Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data. Provide setting drawings, templates, layouts of support systems, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. lnclude details of wall attachment and flashing. • C. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty that workmanship and material are without defect, and if found defective during the one year after acceptance by the Owner, the defect shall be promptly remedied at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Calculations, PE Letters and As Built Plans Letter signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida certifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet the design criteria set forth by the Engineer. 2. Two sets of design calculations sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida for the project records. Calculations shall include cast in place anchor bolts, including size, location and depth of embedment. One set of reproducible "as built" erection plans. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 6349-79520l10/4/12 13123 - 1 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. ASTM D822 — Standard Practice for Conducting Test on Paint and Related Coatings and • Materials Using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposure Apparatus. 2. ASTM D968 — Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. 3. ASTM D 1308 — Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 4. ASTM D2247 — Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 percent Relative Humidity. 5. ASTM D2794 — Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). 6. ASTM D3712 — Standard Test Method of Analysis of Oil-Soluble Petroleum Sulfonates by Liquid Chromatography. 7. ASTM D4214 — Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. B. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. AA 5005-H14 - Sheet Architectural 2. AA 6061-T6 — Heavy Duty Structures 3. AA 6063-TS — Extrusions, Pipe, Architectural 4. AA M 12C22A42: a. M12 — Mechanical finish, nonspecular b. C22 — Chemical finish, medium matte c. A41 — Anodic coating, clear (Class 1) d. A42 — Anodic coating, coating with integral color (Class 1) 5. AA C22A31: a. C22 — Chemical finish, medium matte b. A31 — Clear coating C. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC SP-3 — Power Tool Cleaning 6349-79520/10/4/12 13123 - 2 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • D, E. F. 1.05 u 1.06 American Welding Society (AWS) — Standards for Structural Aluminum Welding. Florida Building Code (2010). Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials, manufacturing procedures, and workmanship are subject to inspection and testing in the factory and field, conducted by the Owner. Such inspections and tests are not to relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and installation procedures in compliance with specified requirements. B. Remedial Action: Contractor shall promptly remove and replace materials, and workmanship found defective and provide new acceptable work in accordance with contract requirements. C. Complete canopy systems shall be provided by only one manufacturer. D. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have not less than three (3) years experience in installation of aluminum canopies of type, quality and installation methods indicated in this section. E. Field Measurements: Installer shall take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to insure proper ftting of work. F. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation. G. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections which interface with canopy system. DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Loads 1. Roof Live Load = 30 psf (No reductions allowed.) 2. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed Vult = per sheet S-l; Exposure C. 3. Collateral Loads: A uniform roof load of 5 psf shall be included, to account for miscellaneous suspended accessories. 4. Auxiliary Loads: Any single point along primary structural members supporting the roof shall be designed to carry a concentrated load of 1,000 lbs, in addition to the collateral load and roof live load. B. The canopy and support structure shall be designed to resist all loads and combinations of • loads required by the Florida Building Code. Material design standards shall be those 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 13123 - 3 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved referenced by the Code. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the entire system against defects in labor and materials for a period of one (]) year commencing on the date of substantial completion as established in Division One of these specifications. B. lntention of this warranty is the manufacturer will come onto the jobsite and do all necessary to effect corrections of any deficiencies. C. Prima Facie Evidence of defects in labor and material may include but is not limited to, one or more of the following: 1. Moisture leaks 2. Metal failure including excessive deflection 3. Fastener failure 4. Finish failure 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING • A. Deliver, store and handle canopy system components as recommended by manufacturer. • Handle and store in a manner to avoid deforrning members and to avoid excessive stresses. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Canopies shall be as shown on the drawings. B. Canopies shall be DITT-DECK as manufactured by Dittmer, Winter Springs, Florida, or approved eyual. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All aluminum extrusions shall be alloy 6063 heat treated to a T-6 temper. B. Fasteners: 1. Deck Screws (rivets not permitted): Type 18-8 non-magnetic stainless steel sealed with a neoprene "O" ring beneath 5/8" outside dimension, conical washer. 2. Fascia Rivets: Size 3/16" by'h" grip range aluminum rivets with aluminum mandrel. 3_ Bolts: All bolts, nuts and washers to be 18-8 non-magnetic stainless steel. r � U 6349-79520/10/4/12 13123 - 4 � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 4. Tek Screws shall not be permitted. C. Sealants 1. Tube sealant shall be General Electric Silicone No. SCS 1000 or equal. D. Finish 1. A 1.0 mil thick, epoxy prime and PVFz finish Kynar 500 system. Finish shall contain 70 to 75 percent minimum PVFZ resin. 2. Color shall be selected by Engineer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Comply with indicated profiles, dimensional requirements and structural requirements. B. Use sections true to details with clean, straight sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength and durability. C. All welding to be done by heli-arc process. D. Overhead support canopy system shall consist of shop weided one piece units. When size of bents do not permit shipment as a welded unit, concealed mechanical joints may be used. • E. Mechanical joints shall consist of stainless steel bolts with a minimum of two (2) bolts per fastening. Bolts and nuts shall be installed in a concealed manner utilizing'h" thick by 1'/2 " aluminum bolt bars welded to structural members. All such mechanical joints must be detailed on shop drawings showing all locations. F. Roof Deck: Extruded aluminum shapes, interlocking self-flashing sections. Shop fabricate to lengths and panel widths required for field assembly. Depth of sections to comply with structural requirements. Welded dams are to be used at non-draining ends of deck. G. Expansion joints, design structure for thermal expansion and contraction. Provide expansion joints as required. H. Exposed rivets used to fasten bottom of fascia to deck to have finish to match fascia. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine adjacent work for conditions that would prevent quality installation of system. B_ Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.02 FIELD DIMENSIONS • 6349-79520/10/4/12 13123 - 5 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Contractor shall field confirm locations, dimensions and elevations shown on shop drawings • prior to fabrication. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Erection: Set roof support frames at required elevations, align, plumb, and level. Follow manufacturer's instructions. B. Install roof deck sections, accessories and related flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide roof slope for rain drainage without ponding water. Align and anchor roof deck units to structural support frames. C. Assemble all components in a neat, workmanlike manner. 3.04 F1ELD PAINTING A. Prepare surfaces properly to receive primer and finish touch-up paint where abrasions, marks and other defects exist in the factory applied paint system. B. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Touch-up paint shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the factory applied paint. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damaged Units: Replace roof deck panels and other components of the work which have been • damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful minor repair. B. Cleaning: Remove protective coverings at time in project construction sequence which will afford greatest protection of work. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/4/ 12 13123 - 6 . . � O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13205 WIRE WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals required to design, construct, test, and disinfect a Two(2) 3.0 million gallon circular wire wrapped prestressed finished water storage concrete tanks with interior 62,500 gallon Chlorine Contact Chamber (CCC), complete, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Each 3.0 MG tank shall be 120 feet — 0 inches inside diameter with 35 feet — 6 inches Sidewall Depth. The interior 62,500 gallon CCC shall be l 7 feet — 6 inches inside diameter with 37 feet — 6 inches Sidewall Depth. The interiar CCC shall also have an overflow weir that flows into the storage area of the tank, as detailed on the drawings. B. Furnish and install all piping and fittings to the limits as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein and in other Sections. I.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavation, dewatering, and backfill are included in Division 2. B. Concrete is included in Division 3. C. Level transmitters and appurtenances are included in Division l3. D. Pipe, valves, and fittings are included in Division I5. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section O1300, shop drawings and product data, showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's information, specifications, and installation instructions for the tank appurtenances. This submittal will be reviewed for operational requirements only. Appurtenances shall include the following: a. Inlet, outlet, overflow and drain pipes b_ Ladders, hatches, and railings c. Roof ventilator(s) d. Perimeter concrete ventilator(s) e. Wall Manways f. Liquid Level Indicators 2. Shop Drawings: Detailed erection shop drawings and construction procedures stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida. Provide complete details for the foundation, floor slab, walls, roof construction, piping, and all other details and accessories necessary to build the tanks. The submittal will be reviewed for operational requirements only and will be used in the field by the Owner's representative during construction. 3. Submit the design calculations of the signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 1.J2�5'1 TPA\\Tpasvr0llsedCLWATERU201PIamEtpansionPrqec111ssuearoBiaSpecs1132054f.aoc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Certification 1. The tank manufacturer shall be responsible for the design and construction of the prestressed concrete tank(s). The tank manufacturer shall submit written certification prepared, sealed, and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida that the design, details, and construction conform to the requirements of AWWA D1 ] 0, this Section, and applicable city and state building codes. Submit certification on Form 13205-A included at the end of this Section. C. Statement of Qualification 1. Submit experience record in the design and construction of wire wrapped prestressed concrete tanks as specified herein. 2. Submit experience record in shotcrete work of each nozzleman and foreman to be employed on the project as specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) I. ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled. 2. ASTM A416 - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete. 3. ASTM A475- Standard Specification for Zino-Coated Steel Wire Strand. 4. ASTM A603- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope. 5. ASTM A722 — Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars for Prestressing Concrete. 6. ASTM A821 — Standard Specifications for Steel Wire, Hard Drawn for Prestressing Concrete Tanks. 7. ASTM C881 — Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 8. ASTM D 1056 — Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 9. ASTM D1752 — Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 10. ASTM D2000 — Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 1 I. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. 12. ASTM E1745 — Standard Specifications for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) l. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 350R - Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 3. ACI 506R - Guide to Shotcrete C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) l. AWWA C652 - Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities 2. AWWA Dl 10 - Wire- and Strand- Wound Circular-Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks. D. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Spec. CRD-0572 — Specification for PVC Waterstop. E. State of Florida Building Code, 2010 F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 6349-79520/10/09/2012 �.J2�5-2 TPA\\Tpasvr07�sec1CLWATER�RO7PIantE�yanSbnPrqectU5sue0toBitlSpecS\73205-0fCOc . • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved G. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) — Code of Standard Practice. H. Dynamic Pressure on Fluid Containers of Nuclear Reactors and Earthquakes — Publication TID-7024. 1. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. I.OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The tank(s) shal] be a wire wrapped prestressed concrete tank with a Type II wall as manufactured by Crom Corp. Gainesville, FL, Precon Corp. Newberry, FL or equal wire wrapped prestressed concrete tank with the specified core wall type. B. The tank design and construction shall be performed by an established manufacturer of recognized ability, having at least 10 years of experience in the design and construction of wire wrapped circular prestressed concrete tanks as specified herein. The design and construction of al1 aspects of the floor slab, walls, prestressing, shortcrete and roof of the wire wrapped circular prestressed concrete tank shall be performed by the tank manufacturer and shall not be subcontracted or otherwise assigned. C. All excavation, backfill, grading and concrete work sha(1 be under the supervision and responsibility of the tank manufacturer, including the base slab and foundation. The manufacturer shall have designed and constructed at least 5 wire wrapped prestressed concrete tanks with domed roofs conforming to AWWA Dll 0 with Type II core wall(s) that have been put into service within the last ] 0 years. The tanks shall have a diameter and capacity of not less than 75 percent nor more than l 50 percent of the diameter and capacity of the proposed tank. D. Foreman supervising the placing of the shotcrete shall have a minimum of 3 years experience as a nozzleman. Each shotcrete nozzleman shall have a minimum of 2 years experience on similar applications and sha11 be able to demonstrate by tests, if required, his/her ability to satisfactorily gun shotcrete of the required quality. 1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Tank Construction 1. Floor — Non-prestressed cast-in-place reinforced concrete a. The minimum thickness of the floor slab is 4-in. The floor system shall have a thickened edge for the exterior wall footing. Footings for interior walls shall be thickened areas in the slab. Floor slabs 6-in or less in thickness shall have a single layer of reinforcement in each direction. Slabs greater than 6-in shall have top and bottom reinforcement in each direction. The transition from the bottom of the footings and pipe encasements to the underside of the floor slab shall not be steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. The pipe encasements shall not be less than the OD of the pipe plus 24-in. The dearance in all directions shall not be less than 12-in. Pipe encasements shall be as shown on the on the Drawings. 2. Floor/Wall Joint - Translation and rotation allowed. 3. Wall - Type 11 Shotcrete core wall with metal diaphragm. 4. Horizontal prestressing shall be continuous. Discontinuous prestressing tendons ar strands will not be allowed. 5. Walt/Roof Joint — Fixed 6. Roof - Shotcrete dome 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/20 l 2 13205-3 TPA\\Tpasm0l\sec\CLWATER1R01PIan�F�tpansionProjectllssuetlW8itl5pec5113205tl1tloc 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved a. Roof shall be a shotcrete dome with a minimum thickness of 4-in. • 7. Baffle Curtains - The baffle curtains shall be a Geomebrane Fabric as detailed on the drawings with a thickened concrete slab beneath the footprint of the baffle curtain.. The geomembrane baffle curtain shall be designed and installed to provide a positive serpentine flow path from the CCC weir to the outlet pipe. B. Design Loads The tank manufacturer shall use the following minimum loading in the design of the tank(s) and tank appurtenances: l. Unit Weights: a. Concrete and Shotcrete - I 50 pcf b. Soil - 120 pcf c. Water — 62.4 pcf d. Steel — 490 pcf 2. Live Load: a. Floor - 62.4 psf times the height of water to overflow plus 6-in b. Roof - 20 psf - horizontal projection to tank roof Reduction per Building Code 3. Wind Load: a. Vertical projected area of tank wall - Per FBC and ASCE-7 b. Horizontal projected area of roof - Per FBC and ASCE-7 4. Earth Pressure: a. Equivalent fluid pressure - 90 pcf b. Live Load surcharge equivalent to 2-ft earth 5. Allowable Bearing Pressure: 2,300 psf 6. Ventilator(s) Capacity Requirements • a. NormalOperation: 1) Ma�cimum fill rate — 3,125 gpm 2) Maximum draw down rate — 5,550 gpm 7. lnner Wall loading Criteria: a. The inner wall shall be designed with the outer chamber full and the inner chamber empty. b. The inner wa11 shall be designed with the outer chamber empty and the inner chamber full. 8. Baffle Wall(s) loading Giteria: a. Differential water pressure of 24 inches. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage and handling of all items shall be specified in Division 1. 1.08 WARRANTY A. The tank manufacturer shail warranty the tank structure against any defective materials or workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of tank(s) acceptance. If any materials or workmanship prove to be defective within that period, they shall be replaced or repaired by the tank manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 13205-4 TPA 1\TpasvrOl�sec�CLWATERIRO 7 Plant E�ansbn Rojec111swetl M Bid Specs\t3205df tloc i � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials shall be new, be of domestic manufacture, and shall conform to the material specified in AWWA D110 and the following material standards. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete and reinforcing steel for the tank core wall [and roof dome] shall conform to the requirements of AWWA D110. Concrete and reinforcing steel for all other structural elements shall conform to the requirements of DlV 3. Admixtures causing accelerated or retarded set of the concrete shall not be used unless approved in writing by the Engineer. 1. Concrete Strength: Minimum concrete strength at 28 days. a. Pipe Encasement, f c= 3000 psi b. Footing and floors flc = 4500 psi c. Precast Wall Panels f c= 4500 psi d. Dome roof f c= 4500 psi e. Cast-in-place walls f c= 4500 psi B. Prestressed Wire 1. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, prestressed wire shall conform to ASTM A821, suitable for redrawing and having a minimum ultimate strength of 2l 0,000 psi. • C. Prestressed Strand l. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, prestressing strand shall be galvanized seven-wire stress-relived strand conforming to ASTM A416, Grade 250 prior to galvanizing and ASTM A603 after galvanizing. 2. Zinc coating shall meet the requirements of ASTM A475, Table 4, Class A. 3. The use of single wire prestressing strands will not be allowed. D. Vertical Tendons 1. Prestressed vertical tendons (rods) shall conform to ASTM A722, Type II having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 150,000 psi. The deformations shall form a screw-thread suitable for mechanical coupling. The bars and their deformations shall be hot rolled. 2. Anchor pockets for vertical prestressing tendons shal) consist of steel cans, hot-dipped galvanized after cutting and subsequently welded to the top bearing plate. They shall be adequately sealed from moisture and concrete intrusion by wooden lids and 2-in wide plastic adhesive tape. They shall have adequate provisions for flushing of ducts with water during concrete placement. 3. Duct enclosures for vertical prestressing steel shall be standard 1.25-in or 1375-in diameter PVC pipe Class ] 60 or Class 200, respectively, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. All ducts shall be provided with expandable valves to facilitate the injection of epoxy after prestressing. 4. lnjection grout of vertical tendons shall be a 2 component epoxy-resin grout conforming to ASTM C88 ], of the type, grade, and class recommended by the manufacturer. E. Shotcrete 1. Shotcrete shall be in accordance with AWWA Dl 10. • 2. Steel Diaphragm 6349-79520/10/09/2012 1JZQ5—S TPA\\TpasvrOtkec\CLWATERViO1PIarrtF�ansionProjeUllssuedtoBitlSpecsN3205df.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved a. Steel diaphragm shall conform to ASTM A366 steel, shall be a minimum of 26-gauge • thickness and shall be vertically ribbed with reentrant angles spaced not more than 3-in apart and with a depth of 3/8-in. F. Elastomeric Materials 1. W aterstops a. Waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinyl chloride as the basic resins. The waterstop shall meet the performance criteria in the corps of Engineers Specifications CRD-0572. 2. Elastomeric Bearing Pad a. Elastomeric Bearings Pads shall be a Neoprene or Natural Rubber Pad conforming to ASTM D2000, line call-outs 2BC415A14B14 and 4AA420AB respectively. G. Moisture Barrier 1. The moisture barrier shall be polyethylene Class A conforming to ASTM E 1745. The thickness shall not be less than 10 mit. H. Appurtenances 1. Ladders a. The aluminum ladders shall be at locations shown on the Drawings. Interior stainless steel ladders shall be Type 316. Ladders, ladder accessories and ladder clearances shall conform to the requirements of OSHA. b. Exterior ladders shall be provided with walk-through rail extension, and shall extend no less than 42-in above the landing. Rail extensions shall conform to the requirements of OSHA. Rail extensions shall provide not less than l 8-in of walk though space between • the rail and a fall prevention device. c. The ladders shall be fitted with a fall prevention device conforming to OSHA requirements. This device shall be a SAF-T-CLIMB fall prevention device. The interior ladder shall be fitted with a SAF-T-CLIMB Removable Extension by North Consumer Products or equal. Two climbing belts shali be provided to the Owner. Provide stainless steel hardware and fasteners, accessories, and all other materials required for the complete installation. d. Exterior ladders shall be provided with a corrosion resistant ladder shield of the same basic material as the ladder. Security panels shall extend on both sides perpendicular to the door face, to within two inches of the wall. The security door shall be furnished with continuous piano hinge and two heavy-duty forged stainless steel locking hasps. The hasps shall be spaced at four feet apart. 2. Roof hatch(es) a. Roof hatch (es) shall be an aluminum or fiberglass hatch. The hatch shall be designed for a l00 psf live load. The hatch shall have a 42-in square minimum opening. The door shatl be equipped with a hold open device that shall automatically lock when the door is in the fully opened position. Springs, where required, shall be of stainless steel. Hatch (es) shall be provided with spring latch and padlock hasp. Hatch(es) shall be furnished with stainless steel hardware throughout. A suitable stainless steel anchor system for attachment to concrete curb on roof shall be provided. Provide continuous 1/4-in thick, 60 durometer neoprene sheet gasket under hatch flange and fasten flange through gasket. Hatch(es) shall be watertight. 3. Handrail a. Handrail shall be of aluminum. Railing shall extend a minimum of six feet on either side of the exterior ladder. The handrail shall consist of vertical posts, kick plate, bottom rail, • mid rail and a top rail 42-inches in height. Two stainless steel safety chains with hooks shall be installed at the ladder. The chains shall be installed at the top and mid rail. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 13205-6 TPA\\TpasvrOt�sec\CLWATER�R01PIaMF�ansionProjec0lssuetltoBitlSpecs\73205-tlt0oc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 4. Ventilator(s) a. Roof ventilator(s) shall be of aluminum or fiberglass construction. The ventilators(s) shall be provided with a 20 mesh stainless steel fail safe pop out insect screen in case of blocked up screens. A suitable anchor system for attachment to roof dome shall be provided. Ventilators(s) shall be designed operational and rapid draw down events. The minimum vent size shall be a 36-in diameter opening. A suitable stainless steel anchor system for attachment to concrete curb on roof shall be provided. Provide continuous 1/4- in thick, 60 durometer neoprene sheet gasket under ventilator flange and fasten flange through gasket. b. The "eye lid" ventilator(s) shall be precast concrete located on the dome near the edge. The "eye lid ventilator(s) shall not be used as overflows. The ventilator(s) shall be provided with a[20] mesh stainless steel fail safe pop out insect screen in case of blocked up screens. 5. Wall Manway. The wall manway shall be a watertight elliptical shape made of Type 304 stainless steei construction. The manway shall have clear opening minimum dimension of 18- in vertical by 24-in horizontal. The manway cover plate with a stainless steel hinge shall be mounted on the inside. A gasket shall be provided between manway cover and the wall sleeve and attached to the manway cover. The manway shall be capable of being "dogged" tight from the exterior of the tank. The "dogs" shall have provisions for being padlocked. 6. Liquid Level Indicator. The liquid level indicator shall have a half travel gauge with an interior float. The glass shall be fiberglass with 4-in black numbers on a white board. The level indicator shall be a red fiberglass target_ The zero mark shall be set even with the top of the tank wall. The interior float shall be fiberglass or PVC and shall be guided vertically true. • PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Reinforcing Steel 1. Reinforcing steel shall be installed in accordance with the CRSI, Code of Standard Practice. B. Placing Concrete 1. General Placement a. Cast-in-place concrete floor, interior wall(s) and roofs shall be installed in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350R except as specified herein. b. No concrete shall be mixed or placed during freezing weather without explicit permission. When placing concrete when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, the water, sand and gravel shall be heated so that the temperature of the concrete will be at least 50 degrees F. This temperature shall be maintained for 72 hours after placing. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground. c. In hot weather, concrete, when deposited, shall have a placing temperature that will not cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or formation of cold joints. In no case shall the temperature of concrete being placed exceed 90 degrees F. 2. Floor Slab a. Prior to placement of the floor slab, a 10 mil polyethylene moisture barrier shall be p}aced over the subbase. Joints in the polyethylene shall be overlapped a minimum of 6-in. b. The floor slab including the thickened portion for the wall footing shall be placed in one continuous concrete placement. Construction joints between the floor slab and footings shall not be allowed. Where a construction joint is approved in writing by the Engineer, • the joint shall have 6-in wide, 3/8-in thick PVC waterstop conforming to the same requirements as the wall - base slab waterstop. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 1 32�5— / TPAPTpasvrOtlsec\CLWATER\RO t Plant E„pansion ProjectUSSUedto Bid SpecsN32C!i-dt.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved c. The tank floor shall be wood/bull float finished first. Subsequently the floor shall receive a � hard, durable fine finish by the steel trowel method or by use of power finishing machines. No water shall be added to the slab during finishing. Curing of the tank floor shall be accomplished by ponding the entire area within the waterstops with 2-in minimum of water within 24 hours after concrete placement. The floor shall be kept ponded for a minimum of 7 days. Roof Slab a. The roof shall be wood float finished and then receive a light broomed surface finish. No water shall be added during the finishing of the roof. Precast dome panels, if used, shall have a surface designed to receive a cementitious coating. C. Core Walls 1. Prestressed Core wall(s) a. Exterior wall, inner tank wall and exterior dome tension ring detaiis including the steel diaphragm, PVC waterstops, elastomeric bearing pads, sponge rubber fillers, prestressing steel, prestressing earthquake cables, and shotcrete shall conform to the requirements of AWWA D110. b. A PVC waterstop shall be installed in the wall to base joint as shown on the Drawings. Field splices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The waterstops shall be installed so as to form a continuous watertight dam. Adeyuate provisions shall be made to support and protect the waterstop during the progress of the work. Where the waterstop is placed in a concrete cove attached to the inner face of the wall, the cove shall attain 60 percent of its 28-day strength prior to the start of prestressing the wall. c. Circumferential Prestressing I) Stress readings on a calibrated stressometer, furnished by the tank manufacturer, shall • be made on every tenth prestressing wire, ar a minimum of one reading per vertical foot for each layer. A running log shall be maintained by the tank manufacturer of the stress readings and used to determine the final number of wires required. 2) In computing the final tension in the wires, an allowance for prestress loss due to creep, shrinkage, elastic deformation, and residual compression shall be provided for. The tank manufacturer shall submit an "as-built" revision to the design diagram showing the location and number of wires actually used for the project records only. d. Vertical Prestressing I) A continuously electronically monitored permanent force-elongation record from zero to full force at the final lockoff shall be furnished by the tank manufacturer. Force- elongation readings shall be made for all vertical tendons. 2) In computing the final tension in the tendons, an allowance for prestress loss due to creep, shrinkage, elastic deformation, and residual compression shall be provided for. e. Shotcreting 1) No prestressing wire shall remain exposed during inclement weather over a holiday or weekend, it shall be covered with shotcrete and subsequently wet cure. 2) Vertical shooting wires shall be installed to establish uniform and correct thickness of shotcrete. Shooting wires shall be at 2-ft on center around the circumference of the tank. The final coat shall be applied true to shooting wires so as to form a cylindrical surface. 3) At the end of the day's work, or similar stoppage period, the shotcrete shall be sloped off at an angle of approximately 45 degrees. Before placing adjacent sections, the sloped portions shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted by means of air and water blast. Shotcrete with a strength lower than specified due to cold weather shall be removed and replaced with sound material. • 4) The shotcrete shall be cured by keeping the shotcrete continuously wet for 7 days. Natural curing may be allowed if the relative humidity is at or above 85 percent. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 132�5-0 TPANTpasvr0llsedCLWATERU201PIantE�ansbnRojecl�Issued�oBidSpecs\73205-df.doc � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 5) Dry mix/wet mix shotcrete shail receive a gun finish free from ridges or other defects. Flash coating for finishing will not be permitted. D. Baffle Walls l. All vertical and horizontal joints are to be constructed to minimize leakage. 2. Joints between interior baffle walts and wire-wrapped exterior [and inner] wall(s) shall be constructed as to permit unrestrained circumferential expansion or contraction of the wire- wrapped walls while minimizing leakage. E. Ladders 1. Ladders, exterior and interior, shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. Ladders, ladder accessories and ladder clearances shall be installed to conform to the requirements of OSHA. 2. Ladder supports shall be installed by stainless steel expansion bolts or stainless steel bolts with cast-in-place threaded inserts. Prior to installing expansion bolts, the reinforcing bars shall be located with a"rebar locator" supplied by the tank manufacturer. The location of the reinforcing bars shall be marked on the concrete surface indicating the spacing and direction of the bars. 3. Where interference occurs, adjust anchor locations to clear reinforcing bars and alter supports at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Roof hatches 1. Roof hatch(es) shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. The hatches shall be installed on a concrete curb with a minimum height of 6-in and a minimum of 6-in wide. The • hatches shall be installed with a watertight gasket and stainless steel expansion bolts. G. Handrail 1. Handrail shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. The handrails shall be installed to conform to the requirements of OSHA. 2. Installation of the handrails shall be either by stainless steel expansion bolts or cast-in-place threaded inserts. Prior to installing expansion bolts, the reinforcing bars sha11 be located with a "rebar locatar" supplied by the tank manufacturer. The location of the reinforcing bars shall be marked on the concrete surface indicating the spacing and direction of the bars. 3. Where interference occurs, adjust anchor locations to clear reinforcing bars and alter supports at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Handrail attached to the precast or cast-in-place dome roof shall be installed with stainless steel bolts and thin slab ferrule inserts. Expansion bolts shall not be allowed. H. Ventilatar(s) l. Ventilator(s) shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. The ventilators shall be installed with a watertight gasket and stainless steel expansion bolts. 2. The "eye lid" ventilators shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. I. Wall Manway(s) 1. Manway(s) shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. 2. The invert of the manhole shall be 3-ft above the finished grade. 3. The wall manway shall have an interior ladder to the bottom of the tank and shall have a grab bar installed above the center line of the manway of the same material as the ladder. • J. Liquid Level Indicators 1. Liquid level indicators shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 13205-9 TPAqTpasvr015ec\CLWATERV201PIarrlExpansionProjectUssuedtoBidSpecs\132054f.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved K. Finish • 1. Exterior exposed surfaces shall receive a rubbed finish in accordance with Section 03350. Rubbed finish shall extend down the tank wall to at least 1-ft below finish grade. 3.02 TESTING A. A minimum of one test panel for each 20 cu yd of shotcrete shall be made as directed by the Engineer. Additional panels shall be made if deemed necessary by the Engineer. The test panels shall be made from the shotcrete as it is being placed and shall, as nearly as possible, represent the material being applied. The method of making the test samples shall be as follows: 1. A rectangular frame of 4-mesh wire fabric 1-ft square and 4-in depth shall be secured to a plywood panel and hung or placed in the location where shotcrete is being placed. This form shall be filled in layers simultaneously with the nearby application. After 24 hours, the fabric and plywood back up shall be removed and sample slab placed in a safe location at the site. The sample slabs shall be sent to a recognized testing laboratory and tested at the age of 7 days. Nine 3-in cubes or cores shall be cut from each sample slab and subjected to compression tests in accordance with current ASTM Standards. Three cubes or cores shall be tested at the age of 7 days, three shall be tested at the age of 28 days, and the remaining three held in reserve. 2. Shotcrete testing shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Testing the Completed Tank(s) ]. After the tank(s) have been completed, but before any backfill is placed, the tank(s) shall be filled slowly in the presence of the Engineer. Careful observation for leaks shall be made and any leaks that occur shall be immediately repaired. • 2. The tank(s) shall be kept fWl of water until the Engineer is satisfied that all defects have been discovered and repaired. There shall be no flowing water allowed through the walls or floor slab. Damp spots that glisten on the surface of the tank(s) and spots where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand will not be allowed. Damp spots on the top of footing projections that are not from flowing water shall not be considered to be leakage. 3. The ma�cimum allowable leakage for a 24-hour period, after a 48 hour period, in which the entire tank interior surface has been wetted, shall not exceed 0.05 percent of the tank volume. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, leakage shall be considered excessive and the tank shall be repaired and retested. 4. All water for the first test will be furnished by the Owner at no cost to the tank manufacturer. The Owner shall be reimbursed for water required for retesting at the normal water rate. The use of this water supply shall be such that it does not adversely affect the normal pressure and flow in the distribution system. 3.03 SETTLEMENT MONITORING A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 5 settlement elevation monitoring points throughout the tank structure and one settlement monitaring elevation monitoring point located on the tank dome. 1. The monitoring points shall be established prior to filling the tank. 2. A fixed benchmark shall be established using the City's existing well located on the northeast corner of the RO and Admin Building. 3. Specific elevation readings shall be obtained to an accuracy of 0.002+/- on a daily basis during filling of the tank and at least twice weekly thereafter until settlements have nearly ceased. After settlements have nearty ceased; the specific elevation readings shall be obtained on a bi-weekly basis until a period of 60-days following complete tank filling. • Adjustments in observation frequency may be made by the ENGINEER pending the 6349-79520/ ] 0/09l2012 �.J 2�5- � 0 TPA \\TpasvrOt�sec\CIWATER�RO 1 Plant E�ansion Project\ISSUetl to Bitl Specs\13205-0f.doc Cc� 2012 CDM Smith All �Zigh�s Reserved + results of early stages of observations and will be evaluated in accordance with Section I11, General Conditions. . • 3.04 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. The tank(s) shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C652, Chlorination Method 2 and as specified herein. B. The tank manufacturer shall provide all labor, material, and facilities required to chlorinate the tank(s). C. The chlorine solution shall be applied directly to all surfaces of the tank(s) including the underside of the roof by spray equipment. END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/2012 I.J205-1 l TPANTpasvr0llec\C�WA7ERU�01PIaMExpansbnProject\IssuedroBidSpecs113.b5dFdoc OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved FORM 13205-A P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida and that he/she has been employed by to design (Name of Contractor) Two 3.0 MG wire-wrapped, prestressed concrete Tanks in conformance with Section 13205 for the City of Clearwater RO WTP No. 1 Expansion. The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the City of Clearwater RO WTP No. 1 Expansion - Ground Storage Tank, that said design is in conformance with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, including the requirements AWWA D1 10 and that his/her signature and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the design. The undersigned hereby agrees to make all "as-built" design drawings and calculations available to the City of Clearwater or Owner's representative within seven days following written request therefor by the Owner. � • P.E. Name Signature Address Contractor's Name Signature Title Address • 6349-79520/10/09/2012 IJ2�5—IZ 7PA\\TpasrtOTSec1CLWA7ERY201PIamF�ansionProjecHissuedto&dSpecsN3205dtdoc • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri`�hts Reserved SECTION 13300 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL [� l .02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall procure the services of a Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to furnish and install all materials, equipment, labor and services, required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein, in the Specification Sections listed below, and in related drawings, except for those services and materials specifically noted. Section No. Title 13302 Testing 13303 Training 13305 Control Descriptions 13306 Application Engineering Services 1331 1 Digital Hardware and Equipment 13321 Fiber Optic Data Highway Netwark 13330 Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment 13340 Instruments B. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, signal isolators, software, and drivers to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by others under other Sections of these specifications, shall be included whether they are shown on the Drawings or not. C. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State and local codes. D. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme shown on the Drawings and specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate from or modify the numbering scheme without the Engineer's approval. RELATED WORK A. Instrumentation and Controls conduit systems are specified in Section 16110. B. Instrumentation signal cable and alarm and status wiring are specified in Section 16120. C. Relevant equipment sections in Division 11, 13, and 15. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 01300 for general submitta) requirements. • 6349-79520 13300- ] October 2012 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Shop drawings shall demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished � comply with the provisions of these specifications and shall provide a complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered. Submittals shall be complete and specific. Submittals consisting of only genera) sales literature shall not be acceptable. B. Project Plan, Deviation List, and Schedule Submittal l. The Project Plan shall be submitted and approved before further submittals shall be accepted. The Project Plan shall, at a minimum, contain the following: a. Overview of the proposed control system describing the understanding of the project work, a preliminary system architecture drawing, interfaces to other systems, schedule, startup, and coordination. A discussion of startup, replacement of existing equipment with new, switchover (Maintaining Plant Operations during system transition), approach to testing and training, and other tasks as required by these specifications shall be included as applicable. Preliminary list of major hardware and software components, including software version numbers, to determine basic compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to beginning development of system programming. Review and approval of software and hardware systems as part of this Project Plan stage shall not relieve the PCSS of ineeting all the functional and performance requirements of the system as specified herein. Substitution of manufacturer or model of these systems after ihe submittal is approved is not allowed without Engineer approval. • Preliminary list of all graphics intended to be created for this project, and al] PLC programs that will be created or modified for this project. d. Project personnel and organization including the PCSS project manager, project engineer, and lead project technicians. Include resumes of each these individuals and specify in writing their commitment to this project. e. Sample formats of the shop drawings to be submitted and in conformance with the requirements of the Specifications. At a minimum include samples of panel fabrication drawings, loop, and I/O wiring diagrams. 2. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings sha11 be clearly defined in a Deviation List. The Deviation List shall consist of a paragraph by paragraph review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature ofthe exception and the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the Engineer. If no exceptions are taken to the specifications or drawings the PCSS shall make a statement as such. Lack of comment on Specifications in whole or in part shall be construed as acceptance. Indicate controIs-related major project milestones including the following: a. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals. Include the time required for Contractor submittal preparation, Engineer's review time, and a minimum of two complete review cycles. • 6349-79520 13300-2 October 2012 C � • �O 2012 CDM Smith A i 1 R ights Reserved b. Proposed dates for all project coordination meetings. c. Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly (following approval of related submittals). d. Software purchasing and configuration (following approval of related submittals). e. Shipment of instrument and control system equipment. f. Installation of instrument and control system equipment. g. Schedule of all testing. h. Schedule for system cutover, startup, and/or going on-line for each major system. i. Schedule for all training including submittal and approval of O&M manuals, factory training, and site training. C. Input/Output (I/O) List Submittal Submit, within 60 days after Notice to Proceed, a complete system Input/Output (I/O) address list for equipment connected to the control systerr� under this Contract. 2. I/O list shall be based on the P&ID's, the Drawings, the design I/O list (if included), and requirements in the Specifications. 3. The 1/O list shall be submitted in both a Microsoft Excel readable electronic file format and an 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch hard copy. 4. The I/O list shall reflect all active and spare I/O points. Add points to accommodate spare 1/O as required in the specifications. 5. The I/O list shall be arranged such that each control panel has a dedicated worksheet. At a minimum, l/O worksheet shall include the following information: a. TAG NUMBER(S): As indicated on the drawings, the identifier assigned to a device that performs a function in the control system. As part of this information, the loop number of the tag shall be broken out to allow for sorting by loop. b. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device (text that includes signal source, controi function, etc.) Include the text "Spare Points" for all I/O module points that are not connected to equipment. c. PHYSICAL LOCATION: The Control Panel designation of where the I/O point is wired to. d. PHYSICAL POINT ADDRESS: Rack, Slot, and Point (or Channel) • assignment for each I/O point. 6349-79520 13300-3 October 20 I 2 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved e. LOGICAL POINT ADDRESS: 1/O address of each point. • f. I/O TYPE: use DO - Discrete Output, DI - Discrete Input, AO - Analog Output, AI - Analog lnput, PI - Pulse Input, or PO — Pulse Output. g. RANGE/STATE: The range in engineering units corresponding to an analog 4-20 mA signal, or, the state at which the value ofthe discrete points are "1." h. ENGINEERING LTNITS: The engineering units associated with the Analog I/O. i. ALARM LIMITS: Include a]arm limits based on the control descriptions and the Drawings. j. P&ID — the P&ID or drawing where the I/O point appears on. Mark as "NA" (Not Applicable) if the I/O point is derived from a speciftcation requirement and is not on the P&IDs. 6. The I/O list shall be sorted in order by: a. Physicallocation b. I/O Type c. Loop Number d. Device Tag 7. Once the 1/O list is approved, the PLC 1/O addresses shall not be modified without approval by the Engineer. D. Equipment Submittals 1. Refer to the following Specification Sections for submittal requirements: a. 13302 — Testing b. 13303 — Training c. 13306 — Application Engineering Services d. 13311 — Digital Hardware and Equipment e. 13321 — Fiber Optic Data Highway Network f. 13330 — Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment �� g. 13340 — Instruments 2. For each component specified in the sections above, submit a cover page that lists, at a minimum, date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is • ISA S20, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information. 6349-?9520 13300-4 October 2012 � • � �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E F Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Lists Submittal Submit a list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test equipment. 2. Submit a list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, and test equipment recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Submit unit and total costs for the additional spare items specified or recommended for each subsystem. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals Submit in accordance with Section 01730. 2. Furnish O&M manuals as specified herein and in Section 13306. 3. The operations and maintenance manuals shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: 6349-79520 a. Tabie of Contents A Table of Contents shall be provided for the entire manual with the specific contents of each volume clearly listed. The complete Table of Contents shall appear in each volume. Instrument and Equipment Lists The following lists shall be developed in Microsoft Excel format and provided not only as a hardcopy in O&M but also electronically on a CD. ii. An instrument list for all devices supplied including tag number, description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, range, span, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. iii. An equipment list for all non-instrument devices supplied listing description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. Equipment Operations and Maintenance Information ISA S20 data sheets shall be provided for all field instruments. For non- field instrumentation devices, provide a cover page for each device, piece of equipment, and OEM software that lists date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA 520, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information. I 3300-5 October 201:? 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ii. Vendor O&M documentation for each device, piece of equipment, or • OEM software shall be either new documentation written specifically for this project, or modified standard vendor documentation. All standard vendor documentation furnished shall have all portions that apply clearly indicated with arrows or circles. All portions that do not apply shall be neatly lined out or crossed out. Groups of pages that do not apply at all to the specific model supplied shall be removed. iii. Provide the system audit documentation and the completed calibration forms as specified in the 13302 Testing section. d. As-Built Drawings Complete as-built drawings, including all drawings and diagrams specifed in this section under the "Submittals" section. These drawings shall include all termination points on all equipment the system is connected to, including terminal points of equipment not supplied by the PCSS. ii. As built documentation shall include information from submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as-built system. Any corrections or modifications to the system resulting from testing shall be incorparated in this documentation. Original Licensed Software i. Submit original software diskettes or CD-ROMs of all software provided • under this Contract. Submit original paper based and electronic documentation for all software provided. Submit license agreement information including serial numbers, license agreements, User Registration Numbers and related information. All software provided under this Contract shall be licensed to the Owner at the time of purchase. Provide media in software sleeves within O&M manual. f. Electronic O&M Information In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic version of all equipment manuals and data sheets, along with any software back- up of configuration files, on CDROM or DVD. Electronic documents shall be supplied in Adobe Acrobat format. ii. Provide electronic files for all custom-developed manuals including training manuals. Text shall be supplied in both Microsoft Office format and Adobe Acrobat format. iii. Provide electronic files for al} drawings produced. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. Drawings shall be provided using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind external references, pen/line styles, fonts, and the drawing file into individual zip files. � 6349-79520 13300-6 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � iv. Provide copies of any videos of training sessions, or videos utilized in training courses, as per Section 13303. Videos shall be in a standard format, minimum of 800 by 600 pixels with sound. 4. The cover and edge of each volume shall contain the information as specified in O l 730. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Schedule mandatory coordination meetings as described herein. These meetings shall be in addition to regular onsite construction meetings. The meetings shali be held at the Owner's designated location and shali include attendance by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor, and the PCSS's Project Engineer. Other Division 13 specifications may require additional meetings. Prepare and distribute an agenda for this meeting a minimum of one week before the scheduled meeting date. Meeting shall be scheduled a minimum of one week before the requested meeting date. A project kickoff coordination meeting shall be held within two weeks after submitting the Project Plan. The purpose of the meeting shall be to discuss the PCSS's Project Plan, to summarize the PCSS's understanding of the project; discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives; schedule testing and delivery deadline dates; provide a forum to coordinate hardware and software related issues; and request any additional information required from the Owner. The meeting will last up to one business day. • 2. A submittal review coordination meeting shall be held after the Hardware, Panel Drawing, and Loop Drawing Submittal package has been reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the PCSS. The purpose of this meeting shall be to review comments made on the submittal package; to refine scheduled deadline dates; discuss the details of testing; and coordinate equipment installation activities. The meeting will last up to one business day. The meetings described in Section 13306 may be added to or combined with the foregoing meetings as required. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. B. International Society of Automation (ISA) 1. ISA S52 Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations ISA S53 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems. ISA S5.4, lnstrument Loop Diagrams. • 4. ISA S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. 6349-79520 13300-7 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ISA RP603, Human Engineering for Control Centers 6. 1SA RP60.6, Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers 7. ISA-99, Industrial Automation and Control Systems Security C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 79, Industrial Control Equipment. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 508 — Industrial Control Equipment 2. UL 508A — Industrial Control Panels 3. UL 1778 — Uninterruptible Power Systems 4. A nationally recognized testing laboratory, as approved by the Authority having jurisdiction, may substitute for UL listing on commercial off the shelf products. � 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be a"systems integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a"systems integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or manufacturers training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable plant startup experience. Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead field technician. 2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the PCSS. Potential references shall be for projects where the PCSS's contract was of similar size to this project. 3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Specification Section for a minimum of five years. • 6349-79520 13300-8 October 2012 • . � 2012 CDM Smith AU Rights Reserved B. The PCSS shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 200 miles of the project site with full time employees capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a minimum, the PCSS shall be capable of responding to on-site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on-site response within 4 hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled start-up to two months after start-up completion. C. PCSS shall hold a valid UL-508 certification for their panel fabrication facility. D. Actual insta}lation of the instrumentation system need not be performed by the PCSS's employees; however, the PCSS as a minimum shall be responsible for the technical supervision of the installation by providing on site supervision to the installers of the various components. E. The selected PCSS shall be one of the following: BCI Technologies 540 Corporate Park Circle, Suite #3 Fort Myers, FL 33966 (239)433-9600 2. Commerce Control Inc. 6025 Taylor Road, Unit B103 Punta Gorda, FL 33777 (248) 476-1442 Curry Controls 4245 South Pipkin Road Lakeland, FL 33811 (863) 646-5781 4. DCR Engineering 502 County Road 640 E Mulberry, FL 33860 (863)428-8080 L-3 / Scandia Technologies 12340 66th St Largo, FL 33773 (727) 531-2828 6. Rocha Controls 5025 W. Rio Vista Ave. Tampa, Florida 33634 (813) 628-5584 F. Being listed in this specification does not relieve any potential PCSS from meeting the qualifications specified in this Section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 01600. 6349-79520 13300-9 October 201:2 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Shipping Precautions After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval of all equipment, cabinets, panels and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty (5 mil) polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide protection from damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at the job site. 2. Manufacturer's special instructions for field handling, storage and installation required for protection, shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of eyuipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in re-sealable plastic bags or other means of protection. 3. None of the HMI contro] and monitoring equipment shall be shipped to the site until the control room areas comply with specified ambient temperature and humidity. Have qualified personnel accept the equipment on delivery and supervise unloading within the control room areas. 4. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the owner. � 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty per Section O1740, Warranties and Bonds, and as specified herein. • 1.09 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT A. A written proposal for a maintenance contract executed by the PCSS sha11 be provided to the Owner for on-site preventive maintenance services related to the lnstrumentation and Control system. The cost of this maintenance contract shali not be included in the Contract Price. B. This proposal shall be provided within 30 days after final acceptance for the purpose of entering a contract for annual maintenance subsequent to the first year of maintenance. Standard per diem rates for providing breakdown service shall be set forth in the contract. Such rates shall be fair and reasonable and reflect the lowest rates offered to most favored customers. The fee quoted shall be firm for a minimum of 90 days from date of issue. C. This maintenance contract shall include all labar, parts, and emergency calls providing on-site response within 24 hours, to provide complete system maintenance for a period of one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the system for all equipment and software provided as part of the PCSS scope of work. D. Provide software updates throughout the maintenance contract period. Provide latest official released version for all software provided under this Contract. Owner shall have the latest software releases at the end of the maintenance contract period. • 6349-79520 13300-10 October 2012 • • • c0 2012 CDM Smith A 1 I R ights Reserved E. The maintenance contract shall also include a minimum of 4 preventive maintenance visits by qualified service personnel of the Supplier who is familiar with the type of equipment provided for this project. Each preventive maintenance visit shall include routine adjustment, calibration, cleaning and lubrication of system equipment and verification of correct operation. F. Visits to the sites to correct deficiencies under warranty shall not be included in this preventive maintenance service contract. G. Emergency maintenance procedures or plant visits may coincide with a preventive maintenance visit, however, they shall not replace the work intended to be performed during a preventive maintenance visit. The Supplier shall have full responsibility for the system hardware preventive and corrective maintenance. H. During the one year maintenance period, observation of maintenance operations by plant personnel and the instruction of said personnel in the details of the maintenance work being performed, shall be provided. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Requirements. Refer to Section 16000 and Electrical Drawings for specific environmental and hazardous area classifications. B. Elevation: Equipment shall be designed to operate at the project ground elevation. C. Temperature: 1. Outdoor areas' equipment shall operate between -30 to 50 C degrees ambient. 2. Equipment located in indoor locations shall operate between 10 to 35 C degrees ambient minimum. 3. Storage temperatures shal) range from 0 to 50 C degrees ambient minimum. 4. Additionat cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment as specified herein. D. Relative Humidity. Air conditioned area equipment shall operate between 20 to 95 percent relative, non condensing humidity. All other equipment shall operate between 5 to ] 00 percent relative, condensing humidity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All instrumentation and electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightiy corrosive service conditions. 6349-79520 13300-11 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall • brackets, or instrument racks unless otherwise noted. Fasteners for securing control panels and enclosures to walls and floors shall be either hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication ar stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners only in corrosive areas rated NEMA 4X on the Drawings or as defined under Section 16000. Provide minimum size anchor of 3/8-inch. C. All indicators shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. All transmitters shall be provided with indicators in process units, accurate to two percent or better. D. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain similar products of a single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. E. All electronic/digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency interference protection. F. Electrical Equipment shall operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source at a nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. Regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be • suppl i ed. 2. With the exception for field device network connected devices, all electronic instrumentation shall utilize linear transmission signals of isolated 4 to 20 mA DC (milliampere direct current) capable of driving a load up to 750 ohms, unless specified otherwise. However, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 VDC (volts direct current). 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be alJowed. 4. All switches shall have double-pole, double-throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless noted otherwise. 5. Switches and/or signals indicating an alarm, failure or upset condition shall be wired in a fail-safe manner. A fail-safe condition is an open circuit when in an alarm state. 6. Materials and equipment shall be UL approved whenever such approved equipment and materials are available. 7. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption, the systems specified herein shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of inemory, and shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored, unless otherwise noted. • 6349-79520 13300-12 October 2012 � 2012 CDM Smith A(1 Rights Reserved • 2.02 ELECTRICAL SURGE PROTECTION A. General - Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines from lightning, utility, or the plant electrical system. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level. Protection shall be maintenance free and self-restoring. Devices shall have a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds and be capable of handling a discharge surge current (at an 8x20µs impulse waveform) of at least 8 kA. Ground wires for all instrumentation device surge protectors shall be connected to a low resistance ground in accordance with Section 16660. B. Provide protection of all anatog signal (4-20 mA) circuits where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. Circuits shall be protected at both the transmitter and the control system end of the circuit. Protection devices tocated near the transmitter shall be mounted in a separate NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure (plastic is not acceptable) or conduit mounted. C. Provide protection of all 120 VAC power feeds into control panels, instruments, and contro) room equipment. D. Non-Fiber Based Data Highway or Communications Circuits — Provide protection on all communication and data highway circuits that leave a building or are routed external to a building. Circuit protection shall be provided at both ends of the line. . E. Inductive Loads — Provide coil surge suppression devices, such as varistors or interposing relays, on all process controller outputs or switches rated 120 VA or less that drive solenoid, coil, or motor loads. � F. Manufacturer — Surge suppressors shall be by DEHN. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. 2.03 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag complete with dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's contact information (address and phone number), part name, part number, part ordering information, and equipment name and number(s) for which the part is to be used shall be supplied with the required spare parts. The spare parts shall be delivered and stored in a location directed by the Owner or Engineer. B. Furnish one of each type of surge protection device used. C. Other spare parts are specified in the Sections listed in paragraph I.O1.A. 6349-79520 13300-13 October 201:2 � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions. The indicated locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms and similar devices indicated are approximate only. Exact locations of al] devices shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field, all information relevant to the placing of process control equipment and in case of interference with other work, proceed as directed by the ENGINEER and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provide brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment. C. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shieid. • D. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, ship material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building. Provide on-site service to oversee the installation, the placing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer's approval. Certify that field wiring associated with the equipment is installed in accordance with best industry practice. coordinate work under this section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sections of Division 16. • E. Provide sunshades for equipment mounted outdoors in direct sunlight. Sunshades shall include standoffs to allow air circulation around the cabinet. Orient equipment outdoors to face to the North or as required to minimize the impact of glare and ultraviolet exposure on digital readouts. 3.02 TESTING A. Refer to Section 13302. 3.03 TRAINING A. Refer to Section 13303. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 13300-14 October 2012 • u • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13302 TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.OI SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the testing of alt devices and systems furnished and installed as detailed on the Drawings, and as specified herein. B. Refer to Section 13300 for other general requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Testing Submittals - Submit, in one submittal, the following testing related documents: 2. 6349-79520 Status signoff forms a. Develop and submit project specific I/O Status and Automatic Control Strategy signoff forms to be used during factory and field testing to organize and track each loop's inspection, adjustment, calibration, configuration, and testing status and sign off. Include sign-off forms for each testing phase showing all loops. Separate forms far factory and field testing can be used, or they can be combined, at the discretion of the PCSS. Submit testing forms prior to start of testing. Testing Procedures a. Submit detailed procedures proposed to be followed for each of the tests specifed herein. The test procedures shall serve as the basis for the execution of the required tests to demonstrate that the system meets and functions as specified. b. The documents shall be shall be structured in an orderly and easy to follow manner to facilitate an efficient and comprehensive test. c. The test procedures shall indicate alt pre-testing setup requirements, all required test equipment, and simulation techniques to be used. d. The test procedures shall be structured in a cause and effect manner where the inputs are indicated, and the outputs are recorded. e. The test procedures shall include the demonstration and validation under normal operating conditions and under various failure scenarios as specified in the contract documents. 13302-1 October 20 }:2 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved f. Testing may not start until all Testing Submittals have been approved. C. Test Documentation 1. Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off Testing Status forms. Testing shall not be considered complete until the signed-off forms have been submitted and approved. Submittal of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring diagrams with feld technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the formal test documentation. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.05 COST OF TRAVEL A. Scheduled tests will only be attended once by the Engineer/Owner. If the test is not successful, all subsequent tests will be performed at the Contractor's expense. Reimburse the Owner for all costs, including labor and expenses, invoiced by Engineer and incurred by the Owner for subsequent retests. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING - GENERAL A. Refer to Section 13300. B. The results of all testing shall be tracked on a project specific status sign off form or similar document. The PCSS shall be responsible for maintaining the sheet. C. The tests the PCSS is required to perform are as follows: 1. Factory Testing a. Unwitnessed Factory Test (UFT). b. Witnessed Factory Test (WFT). 2. Field Testing a. Operational Readiness Test (ORT). b. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT). c. Startup Acceptance Test (SAT). D. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide all special testing materials and equipment required for a suitable means of simulation. E. The PCSS shall coordinate all required testing with the Contractor, all affected Subcontractors, the Engineer, and the Owner. 6349-79520 13302-2 October 2012 C � • • • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. No equipment shall be shipped to jobsite until the Engineer and/or Owner has received all Factory Testing results and approved the system as ready for shipment. G. The Engineer reserves the right to test or re-test any functions. H. Correction of Deficiencies All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 FACTORY TESTING - UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. The purpose of the UFT is for the PCSS to check the system prior to the Engineer and/or Owner attending the Witnessed Factory Test (WFT). This type of testing should be part of any quality firm's internal QA/QC procedures. B. Temporary network connections will be required to confirm the network configuration. Temporary wiring of primary elements, final control elements, and field-mounted transmitters is not required. C. The hardware to be tested shall include all control system devices shown on the System Architecture drawings and provided by the PCSS. D. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following. Each of these tests shall be specifically addressed in the Test Procedure submittal. All panels and enclosures being provided shall undergo a thorough inspection to verify the integrity of the cabinet enclosures, frame structures, paint work and finish, etc. Review the panel drawings to ensure they accurately reflect the panel layout and wiring. 2. Perform a system audit to verify all components have been staged for the test and have been documented properly with correct model numbers, serial numbers, etc. The following documentation of the audit shall be provided at the factory test and submitted as part of the O&M Manual Documentation: 6349-79520 a. For each workstation and server, list of all software installed (including the operating system), with software revision number, software improvement modules or patches insta}led, license number and owner registration information, warranty period, vendor and local distributor names and contacts. b. For each microprocessor-based component connected to the control communication backbone in the system (PLCs, managed switches, protocol converters, communication cards on final field devices, radios, etc.), list the firmware revision, vendor and local distributor information, and system, warranty information, configuration parameters (e.g., communication settings, fail position settings, etc.) 13302-3 October 20112 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Panel wire pull tests shall be performed to ensure all wiring has been connected � with the appropriate torque to prevent wires from coming loose. 4. UPS shall be tested to verify the UPS switch power correctly while keeping all UPS powered loads online. Testing of the UPS to determine if they have been sized correctly to maintain the specified run time shall be performed during field testing. 5. A 100 percent I/O point checkout shall be performed to verify proper operation of the input/output points from the panel terminations to HMI and OIT nodes. At a minimum, the I/O checkout shall consist of four steps. a. Discrete input signals shall be jumpered at the field terminal blocks in the control panels to verify proper status in the HMI and OIT nodes. b. Analog input signals shall be connected to a signal generator at the field terminal blocks in the control panels to verify proper status in the HMI and OIT nodes and signals shall be verified at zero percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent of full scale. c. Discrete output signals shall be tested by switching the equipment to manual control at the HMI and OIT nodes and turning the output on or other means to turn the output on. Then verify the output is on by connecting a digital multimeter to measure the continuity at the terminations, thus verifying the command from the PLC has properly executed the contact closure. d. Analog output signals shall be tested by switching the equipment to manual • control at the HMI and OIT nodes and turning the output on or other means to turn the output on. Then verify the output by utilizing a digital multimeter to measure the current or voltage generated at the termination points. 6. All control strategies shall be verified using simulation or other means to verify the logic performs as expected. Verify faults and logical failure conditions for control strategies such instrument failures, equipment failures, loss of communication between the HMI Server and the PLC, loss of peer-to-peer communication, out of range testing (over and under scale) for analog inputs, and all other strategies specified in the control strategy document. 7. For each hardware enclosure, inspection shall include, but not be limited to, cabinet enclosures, frame structure, paint work and finish, dimensions, and hardware operability (i.e., fans, door hinges, keylocks, etc.). For each subpanel, inspection shall include, but not be limited to, I/O subsystem physical layout, power supply sizing and mounting, cable routing, wire runs across hinges properly installed, fans and blowers unobstructed and mounted to maximize air flow, power conditioning correctly installed, and overall layout and installation of components meets manufacturer's recommendations and standard industry accepted practices. 9. The following systems tests shall be performed, as applicable to the system and the new components being furnished under this Contract: � 6349-79520 13302-4 October 2012 ��'� 2012 CDM Smith 31! R ights Reserved • a. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers. b. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all designated report printers. c. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write designated files from servers and other workstations on the network. d. Demonstrate the operability of all back-up and mass storage equipment. e. Demonstrate communication failure and recovering self-healing ring testing. f. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. The UPS shall be removed for this test. g. Demonstrate the capabilities of the historical server. h. Demonstrate the failover capabilities of the redundant HMI servers. i. Demonstrate the failover capabilities of the redundant PLCs. j. Demonstrate Time of Day and Date clock synchronization between HMI Servers, Workstations, OITs, and PLCs. • E. Upon successful completion of the UFT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results as specified in Part 1. As part of this test results submittal, notify the Engineer and Owner in writing that the system is ready for the WFT. No other notice of Factory test will be accepted. The Engineer and/or Owner shall schedule a test date within 30 days of receipt of this submittal. � 3.03 FACTORY TESTING - WITNESSED FACTORY TEST (WFT) A. The purpose of the WFT is to allow the Engineer and/or Owner representatives to witness the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software system as a complete integrated system. The WFT shall be run by the PCSS and conducted at the PCSS's facility. B. Required Documents for Test 1. Clean set of approved panel drawings and wiring diagrams. 2. Set of contract documents - all drawings and specifications. 3. All design change related documentation. 4. Master copy of the PCSS developed factory testing signoff forms. 5. Testing procedures. 6349-79520 13302-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. The system must operate continuously throughout the WFT without failure, except • where initiated per the established test procedures. Any unanticipated failures may, at the Owner and/or Engineer's option, result in the overall WFT being deemed unsuccessful. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and re- tested prior to completing the WFT or shipment of panels to jobsite as determined by the Owner/Engineer. D. Tests to be performed during the WFT shall include, but not be limited to, the following: A repeat of all tests specifed in the UFT. E. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Morning meeting to review the day's test schedule. 2. Scheduled tests and sign-offs. 3. End of day meeting to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule. 4. Unstructured testing period by the witnesses. F. Upon successful completion of the WFT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results as specified in Part 1. 3.04 FIELD TESTING - OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. The purpose of the ORT is to check that the process equipment, instrument installation, instrument calibration, instrument configuration, field wiring, control panels, and all other related system components are ready to monitor and control the processes. This test will determine if the equipment is ready for operation. B. This test shall take place prior to FDT and startup. Prior to starting this test, relevant process equipment shall be installed and mechanically tested, instruments installed, control panels installed, and field wiring complete. C. Required Documents for Test 1. Master copy of the PCSS developed field testing signoff forms. 2. Testing procedures. 3. Calibration forms. D. These inspections, calibrations, and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer may review and spot-check the testing process periodically. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected by the PCSS prior to commencement of the Functional Demonstration Test. • E. The PCSS shall maintain the Sign-off forms and the Calibration forms at the job site and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time. • 6349-79520 13302-6 October 2012 � • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. The following tests shall be performed as part of the ORT: 1. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up. 2. Input/Output (I/O) Testing to the HMI and OITs. 3. Testing of control strategies. G. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up 1. Calibrate, configure, and set-up all components and instruments to perform the specified functions. 2. Calibration form 6349-79520 a. For any component or instrument requiring dip switch settings, calibration, or custom configuration, maintain a calibration form in the field documenting this information. These forms shall provide a summary of the actual settings used in the field to allow an Instrument technician to replace the device entirely and configure it to function as it did before. b. This information shall be added to the Instrument data sheet, shall be added to a copy of the manufacturer's standard "Configuration Sheet", or a separate form shall be created. i. If a separate form, the form shall list the Project Name, Loop Number, ISA Tag Number, I/O Module Address, Manufacturer, Model Number/Serial Number, Output Range and Calibrated Value. c. Some examples of required information are: i. For Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. ii. For Instruments: Any configuration or calibration settings entered into instrument iii. For Controllers: Mode settings (PID). iv. For I/O Modules: Dip switch settings, module configuration (if not documented in the native programming documentation). d. Maintain a copy of these forms in the field during testing, and make them available for inspection at any time. e. For any device that allows a software back-up of configuration fles to a laptop, make the configuration files available to the Engineer/Owner for inspection. Submit as part of the Final System Documentation as specified in Section 13300_ 13302-7 October 20i2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved H. I/O Testing • The purpose of the I/O testing is to check that the process equipment, instrument installation, calibration, configuration, field wiring, and the control panels are set- up correctly to monitor and control the processes. This test is commonly referred to as a"loop test" or an I/O checkout. 2. PCSS in conjunction with the contractor shall test signals under process conditions. The preferred test method will always be to execute the test wherever possible to the end elements. For example, the preferred test will prove valve open/close limit switches by operating the valve, not by installing a jumper on the limit switch contacts. However if the equipment or process is not available to test a signal over its entire calibrated range, the PCSS may test using a simulation methods and make a note on the sign-off form. 3. The following I/O tests shall be performed: a. Discrete Input — At the device or instrument, change signal condition from the inactive to active state. Observe results on all indicators within the loop such as the HMI screens, the OIT screens, pilot lights, horns, beacons etc. b. Analog Input — Test the analog signal over the entire engineering range at various intervals including 0, 50%, and 100% as well as on increasing and decreasing range. Observe results on all indicators within the loop such as the HMI screens, the OIT screens, recorders, digital indicators, etc. c. Discrete output signals shall be tested by switching the equipment to manual • control at the HMI and OIT nodes and turning the output on or using other means to turn the output on. Then verify the equipment responds accordingly. d. Analog output signals shall be tested by switching the equipment to manual control at the HMI and OIT nodes and turning the output on or other means to turn the output on. Then verify the equipment responds accordingly. Testing of Automatic Control Strategies All automatic control strategies shall be verified using actual process equipment and instruments, or other means, to verify the logic performs as expected. Verify faults and logical failure scenarios for control strategies such as instrument failures, equipment failures, loss of communication between the HMI Server and the PLC, loss of peer-to-peer communication, out of range testing for analog inputs, loss of power, and all other strategies specifed in the control strategy document. Repeat ail systems tests specified under factory testing. K. UPS shall be tested to verify the UPS switch power correctly while keeping all UPS powered loads online. Also, test the sizing of the UPS by switching off line power to the UPS and verify if they maintain the specified run time. L. For all panels with enclosures modified by this contract, internal control panel temperature shall be tested under full running conditions to ensure proper • cooling/ventilation is being provided. 6349-79520 13302-8 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • M. Upon successful completion of the ORT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results as specified in Part 1 and request the scheduIing of the FDT. 3.05 FIELD TESTING - FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. After the facility is started-up and running the treatment process in automatic control to the extent possible, a Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed. The purpose of the FDT is to allow the Engineer and/or Owner representatives to witness the actual functionality, performance, and stability of the system while connected to the process equipment. B. Required Documents for Test Set of panel drawings and wiring diagrams from ORT with corrections noted 2. Set of contract documents - all drawings and specifications. All design change related documentation. 4. Signed-off master copy of the PCSS developed field testing signoff forms. 5. Testing procedures. 6. Copy of completed calibration forms. • ?. One copy of all O&M Manuals for PCSS supplied equipment. C. A witnessed FDT shall be performed on each process area. To the extent possible, repeat the testing performed during the ORT. D. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the factory tests shalt also be followed during the FDT. E. Punchlist items and resolutions noted during the test shall be documented on the Punchlist/Resolution form. In the event of rejection of any part or function test procedure, the PCSS shall perform repairs, replacement, and/or retest within 10 days. F. Upon successful completion of the FDT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results as specified herein. 3.06 FIELD TESTING - SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of the FDT, and the system is started-up and running the treatment process in automatic control to the extent possible, the system shall undergo start-up testing. B. While this test is proceeding, the Engineer and Owner shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Plant operations shall remain the responsibility of Owner and the decision of plant operators regarding plant operations shall be final. . 6349-79520 13302-9 October 20112 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. During this test, PCSS personnel shall be present as required to address any potential • issues that would impact system operation. The PCSS is expected to provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. When PCSS personnel are not on-site, the PCSS shall provide cell phone/pager numbers that Owner personnel can use to ensure that support staff is available by phone and/or on-site within four hours of a request by operations staff. D. Any malfunction during the test shall be analyzed and corrections made by the PCSS. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSS shall perform repairs or replacement within 5 days. E. Throughout the duration of the SAT, no software or hardware modifications shall be made to the system without prior approval from the Owner or Engineer. 3.07 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION A. Following successful completion of the SAT test, the PCSS shall issue a Certification of Installation for the system as required in specification Section 01730. END OF SECTION �� • 6349-79520 13302-10 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 13303 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS — TRAINING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish training as specified herein. B. This section covers the training requirements for all devices and systems furnished and installed as detailed on the Drawings. C. Refer to Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300 for general submittal requirements. B. Training Plan Submittal • 1. The training plan shall include: a. Definitions, objectives, and target audience of each course. b. Schedule of training courses including proposed dates, duration and locations of each class. c. Complete copy of all proposed handouts and training materials. Training information shall be bound and logically arranged with all materials reduced to a maximum size of 11 inch by 17 inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by I 1 inch for inclusion into the binder. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 N/A PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 GENERAL A. The cost of the training programs shall be included in the Contract price. The training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the system. 6349-79520 13303-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the OWNER. Shift training may be required to correspond to the OWNER'S working schedule. C. All onsite instructors must be intimately familiar with the operation and control of the OWNER'S facilities. D. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. The manuals shall be provided in hardcopy for each student. Provide electronic copy of each training manual in PDF format for OWNER'S future use. E. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to OWNER. F. The OWNER reserves the right to videotape all custom training sessions. All training tapes shall become the sole property of the OWNER. G. Cost of Travel for off-site training 1. Cost of Travel for off-site training shall be paid directly by the entity employing the staff doing the traveling. 3.02 TRAINING SUMMARY A. The following training courses listed in the summary table shall, as a minimum, be provided: Minimum Maximum Number of Course Number of Times Duration Trainees Course to Intended Descri tion hours er Course be Given Audience Installed Control System 4 4 1 Maintenance, Operations, Administrator PLC Hardware/Software 4 4 1 Maintenance, Administrator B. Definitions of audience roles 1. Administrator - personnel responsible for maintaining the HMI / SCADA system. 2. Maintenance - personnel responsible for maintaining the field controller hardware and instrumentation system. 3. Operations - personnel responsible for daily plant operations. 3.03 TRAINING COURSES A. Installed Control System Training 1. Provide training for the OWNER'S personnel in the functionality, maintenance, and troubleshooting, of the additions and modifications to the control system. 6349-79520 13303-2 October 2012 • • • OO 2�12 CDM Smith Ali 12ights Reserved • 2. Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the system that will allow the OWNER'S personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: a. System overview. b. Detailed descriptions of process controls as added or modified. c. System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements. d. Periodic maintenance. e. Troubleshooting and diagnosis. f. Network configuration, communications, and operation. g. TCP/IP addressing procedures for all Ethernet devices. B. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Hardware and Software 1. Detailed training shall be provided on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract. Training shall cover all aspects of the PLC system that will allow the OWNER'S personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop • future additions/deletions to the PLC system. The training shall cover the following subjects, as a minimum: a. PLC system overview. • b. PLC system architecture. c. PLC system hardware components and specific equipment arrangements. d. PLC system startup, shut down, load, backup, and PLC failure recovery. e. Periodic maintenance. f. Troubleshooting and diagnosis down to the I/O card level. g. PLC configuration, communications, and operation. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 13303-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS SHEET INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK u • 6349-79520 13303-4 October 2012 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13305 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.0] SCOPE OF WORK A. This section is provided to clarify the control strategies to be used to program the system. B. All SCADA PLC controller programming and SCADA Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) or Human-Machine Interface (HMI) graphics and programming shall be performed as defined in Section 13300 and 13306. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. PART 2 DESCRIPTIONS 2.01 RAW WATER BOOSTER PUMPS A. Raw Water Booster Pump No. 4(Loop 102D� 1. One (1) new raw water boost pump (Pump No. 4) shall be added alongside the three (3) . existing units. The new pump will be integrated into the existing automatic controls along with the existing pumps to achieve a suction pressure setpoint. Integrator to re-tune PID loop to incorporate new pump and piping configuration. The new pump VFD will communicate with CP-100 via Ethernet. HMI controls, indicators and alarms shall be the same as for the existing pumps: run status, fault alarm, "at speed" indication, manual start/stop command, speed command and feedback, voltage output, current output and percent output, power output and percent output, and frequency output. 2.02 ADSORPTION SYSTEM A. Adsorption Svstem Units (Loop 250 thru 253� The two (2) new adsorption system units will be installed to treat the blend water. The adsorption system unit instruments and motor operated valves (not furnished by the Adsorption System supplier) will be connected to the plant SCADA. Programming will be added to the PLC and HMI for the new units. 2. The differential pressure and flow rate values across each unit shall be displayed at the HMI. The HMI shall indicate an alarm on high differential pressure. 3. The adsorption system shall have two modes of operation that sha}1 automatically control the motorized valves —"NORMAL" and `BACKWASH". In NORMAL mode, motorized valve 250-2 shall be open and motorized valves 250-� and 253 shall be closed. In BACKWASH mode, motorized valves 250-1 and 253 shall be opened and motorized valve 250-2 shall be closed. When changing modes, open valves shall close before closed valves shall open. Motorized valves may also be operated manually from SCADA. • 6349-79520 13305-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved If any valve does not reach the position required by NORMAL or BACKWASH mode • when called before a preset timer has expired, a sequence fail alarm shall be generated. 2.03 DECANT SYSTEM A. Decant S, sy tem Two new Spent Backwash Decant Tanks (DT-211, 212) will be provided and will receive spent backwash water from the pressure filters and from the proposed adsorption system. The decant tanks will be operated in batch mode. Each tank shall have an ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT-211, 212) that will provide level as well as high level alarm back to SCADA. Upon completion of any backwash, the associated Decant Recycle Pumps (P-121, 122) will drawdown the decant tanks after a programmed period for settling. The motorized decant valves connecting the decant tanks to the decant recycle pumps will open as the tank level falls in order of descending elevation as the tanks are drawn down. Motorized valves may also be operated manually from SCADA. If any valve does not reach the position required by normal operation when called before a preset timer has expired, a sequence fail alarm shall be generated. 3. The two Backwash Residuals Pumps (P-151, 152) will draw settled residuals from the bottom of the decant tanks into the Residuals Concentration Holding Tank (T-155). The residuals pumps will be manually started from SCADA, and programmed to shut off on level control. The motorized valves on the sludge drain lines from the decant tanks will be opened automatically when the residuals transfer pumps are called to run. • 4. After a programmable period for settling, the solenoid decant valves will be opened as the tank level falls in order of descending elevation as the tank is drawn down. The settled concentrated residuals will be periodically transferred to a tank truck for off-site disposal; the bottom solenoid shall be manually opened. As a back-up to the spent backwash water decanting tanks, spent backwash water can also be pumped from the existing spent backwash water tank to RO Plant No. 2 via the recycle pump station (P-121, 122). This pump station will be programmed for level control, using the existing level measurement from the existing spent backwash water holding tank, and will pump the contents of the tank to a deep injection well located at RO Plant No. 2. The manual valve connecting the spent backwash water holding tank to the pump station will be normally closed. 6. Detailed Backwash Decant System Control Sequence a. Prior to initiating backwash for dual media filters or adsorbers, decant tank inlet valves GV-211 and/or Z 12 shall be confrmed open. b. Decant Tanks DT-211, 212 level (LIT-211, 212): confirm sufficient volume available in tanks. c. Decant Tank outlet valves (BV-141-1, 2, 3, 4 and BV-143-1, 2, 3, 4) all closed. d. Recycle Pumps (P-121, 122) and Residuals Pumps (P-151, 152) confirmed off. • 6349-79520 13305-2 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith Ali Kights Reserved • e. During backwash cycle, spent backwash from dual media filters or adsorbers fill decant tanks. f. After backwash cycle completed, start settling cycle in decant tanks, programmable settling time from 60 to 300 minutes. g. Start decant cycle. Open highest decant valve on tank DT-211 that is below water surface per LIT-211. h. Open pump suction valve BV-109. i. Start lead backwash recycle pump (P-121 or 122). j. Open decant valves on DT-212, if tank is full. k. When tank level drops to leve} of open decant valve, open next lower decant valve. 1. Continue sequencing decant valves until tank low level set point is reached. Stop recycle pump. Close all decant valves. m. Start residuals transfer cycle. Open BV-142 for tank no. ] or BV-l44 for tank no. 2. n. Confirm polymer system ready; level in polymer solution tank indicates adequate solution. • o. Confirm level in residuals tank T-155; adequate volume available to receive residuals. p. Start lead residuals pump P-151 or 152. Start polymer solution metering pump. q. Stop residuals transfer at low level set point in decant tanks, or high level in residuals holding tank. r. When residuals holding tank reaches high level; start decant cycle. s. After a programmable settling period (approximately 60 minutes), open highest residuals valve SV-155A. t. As residuals tank level drops, open next residuals valve SV-155B. Continue sequencing residuals valves until low level set point is reached. u. Close all residuals valves. v. When grab sample TSS in residuals decant indicates high levels, manually draw down residuals to tank truck for hauling off site. 2.04 CARTRIDGE FILTERS A. Cartridge Filters (Loop 208� 1_ Two pressure transmitters will be added, one upstream and one downstream of the cartridge filters housings on the appropriate header pipes. A low pressure setpoint and • alarm on the downstream side shall be programmed that will shut down the membrane feed pumps. Loss of head will be calculated in the PLC. 6349-79520 13305-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved The individual and differential pressures shall be displayed in HMI. . 2.05 OFF-SPEC WATER DISCHARGE A. Off-Spec Water Dischar eg (Loop 204, 209, 210) The proposed "blow-off' line immediately upstream of the membrane feed pumps will be equipped with a turbidity analyzer and a motorized valve. Turbidity indication (AIT-209) and manual valve controls shall be provided in the HMI. 2. In automatic mode, when poor quality water is detected by a turbidity value or ORP value (AIT-204) that is above programmable setpoints for a programmable duration, the valve shall be opened and the water wasted into the spent backwash water holding tank and membrane feed pumps shall be automatically shutdown. 3. The ability to select between automatic and manual modes shall be provided at the HMI. In manual mode, the operator shall have the ability to open or close the valve from the HMI and the automatic functions described above shall be disabled. 2.06 MEMBRANE PROCESSES A. Membrane Processes Existing pressure indicating transmitters located at the feed water connection at the membrane skids (PIT-111-1 and 111-2) will provide a level ofprotection for the new Membrane Feed Pumps (P-11 I-1 and 111-2) as well as surrounding piping and process • equipment; a high pressure setpoint and alarm shall be programmed that shall shutdown the associated pump. The transmitter installed on the discharge side of the cartridge filters (Loop 208) will shut off the pumps on low suction pressures, while those installed on the discharge side of each pump (Loop 111) will shut down their associated pumps on high pressure. The low pressure and high pressure setpoints shall be adjustable from the HMI. The pressure values and alarms shall be provided in the HMI. Membrane feed pumps shall also automatically shutdown on out-of-range turbidity (AIT-209) and ORP (AIT-204) values. 2. The current control strategy for the membrane feed pumps will be maintained (flow paced based on permeate flow). The existing insertion-type feed water flow meters shall be replaced with inline magnetic flow meters for improved accuracy and reliability. The membrane units themselves will be upgraded with additional and modified controls. Motor operators will be installed on the concentrate control valves. Positioning of the motorized concentrate control valves wilt manual from the HMI. Additionally, on-line instrumentation will be added for better monitoring and tracking of system performance: pressure indicating transmitters to measure Stage 1 permeate back pressure, interstage back pressure, and total permeate back pressure, and conductivity analyzers to measure Stage 1 permeate conductivity, Stage 2 permeate conductivity, interstage conductivity, and concentrate conductivity. \ J 6349-79520 13305-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 4. The current control strategy for the sodium bisulfite metering pumps (not shown on the P&ID) will be revised. Currently, sodium bisulfite is flow paced by the sum of the LPRO feed water flow meters with manual adjustment of dosage. The proposed control is flow pacing by the sum of the LPRO feed water flow meters, with trim by the downstream ORP (AIT-204) measurements. 2.07 CIP SYSTEM (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3) A. Loop 110: CIP Cleanin� Svstem Pump The new pump VFD will communicate with CP-I 10 via Ethernet. HMI controls, indicators and alarms shall be: run status, fault alarm, "at speed" indication, manual start/stop command, speed command and feedback, voltage output, current output and percent output, power output and percent output, and frequency output. 2.08 CONCENTRATE PUMP STATION A. Loop 120: Concentrate Pump Station The new concentrate pump station, which includes a prefabricated control package, will be monitored by HMI for level, high level alarm, pressure, high pressure alarm, and pump failure alarms. 2.09 POST TREATMETN PRIMARY DISINFECTION • A. Post Treatment Primary Disinfection • 1. The current control strategy for the primary disinfection sodium hypochlorite metering pumps (not shown on P&ID) will be maintained. Currently, they are flow paced with manual adjustment of dosage. The existing chlorine analyzer located downstream of the blended water pumps will provide this measurement. 2.10 BLENDED WATER PUMPS A. Blended Water Pumps (Loop 105) One (1) new blend water pump (Pump No. 4) shall be added alongside the three (3) existing units. The new pump will be integrated into the existing automatic controls along with the existing pumps to achieve a level setpoint. HMI controls, indicators and alarms shall be the same as for the existing pumps: run status, fault alarm, manual start/stop command, automatic start and stop setpoints, and position in the pump sequence. 2. A pressure indicating transmitter (PIT-105) will be installed on the discharge header to provide protection, a high pressure setpoint and alarm shall be programmed that shall shit down the associated pumps. Pressure values and alarms shall be disp}ayed in HMI. 6349-79520 13305-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.11 SECONDARY DISINFECTION • A. Secondary Disinfection (Chloramination) The current control strategy for the secondary disinfection ammonium hydroxide metering pumps (not shown on P&ID) will be maintained. The current control strategy for the secondary disinfection sodium hypochlorite metering pumps will be maintained. Currently, they are flow paced with manual adjustment of dosage. The existing chlorine analyzer upstream of the high service pump station will provide this measurement. 2.12 FINISHED WATER STORATE AND HIGH SERVICE PUMPS A. Finished Water Storage and Hi�h Service Pum�s Level instruments will be provided to monitor the two (2) new 3.0 MG GSTs, and PLC controls will be modified as needed to accommodate the process and mechanical change. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The control descriptions are sorted by loop number for each area. The loop index has three columns associated with it; Loop Number, Loop Description, and Page. Each loop is associated with a specific PLC ar I/O cabinet location to which it shall communicate. B. The control descriptions are broken into a hierarchical layer concept. There may be one layer or • multiple layers per loop, depending upon that loop. An example of multiple layered loop is as follows. The lowest layer of control, local control, is at that piece of equipment or that piece of equipment's panel or drive. The second layer of control is at an intermediate control panel between the equipment and the SCADA I/O or vendor's PLC I/O. The third layer would be at the vendor's PLC or microprocessor touchscreen station. The highest layer of control is by the SCADA PLC System with its associated operator workstations in the main control room, remote office locations, and satellite locations operator interface terminals (OITs). The SCADA PLC refers to both the SCADA PLC, which does the actual monitoring and control logic for the process equipment and the SCADA operator workstation, which are computers that have graphical software that interface to the PLC software for monitoring and implementing all operator-required tasks to control that process equipment. Any functions done in the operator workstations also take place at all the SCADA OITs. 3.02 CONTROL FUNCTION DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL CWTERIA A. Any interlocks that are represented, before the local operational descriptions, or are stated as hardwired interlocks, shall interlock all the controls locally and at the SCADA PLC/HMI or at the vendor PLCs. The SCADA PLC shall be programmed to shutdown that equipment if that hardwired interlock is also wired to the SCADA PLC. B. Any interlocks that are represented in a particular layer of the operational descriptions, shall interlock all the controls in that layer and the layer after it. However the interlock shall not interlock the commands in the layer before it. • 6349-79520 13305-6 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � • C. The SCADA system shall stop a motar or drive in its program if it does not receive the auto or remote status or one of its software interlocks trip. If the drive or motor is in hand or remote it will continue to run but the SCADA start/stop output will be open. D. Any motor that is requested to start by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the run confirm status for that motor does not activate within two seconds. If a motor stops by an interlock or stops without any operator or SCADA intervention then that motor shall go into alarm. Any motors that are stopped by a program or the operator shall not go into an alarm. E. Any valve that is requested to open by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the open feedback status for that valve does not activate within ten seconds. Any valve that is requested to close by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the close feedback status for that valve does not activate within ten seconds. F. Terminology associated with interlocks is as follows: When a contact or status is true, the SCADA computer will receive power to its input channel. The SCADA computer registers this as a binary bit of one. 2. When a contact or status is false, the SCADA computer will receive no power (open circuit) to its input channel. The SCADA computer registers this as a binary bit of zero. G. When an analog signal goes outside the 4-20 mA range due to a failure at the instrument or PLC card, the following SCADA programming shall take place: • 1. Alarm the signal at any local OITs and in the HMI system. 2. If the analog signal is associated with a control loop or ratio control loop that loop shall go into manual. 3. If the analog signal is used in a calculation, that calculation shall use the last good analog signal. The computer shall place the control loop in manual if using the calculation. H. Disable all SCADA process limit alarms (low-low, low, high, high-high) on analog inputs that are not specifically called for in the drawings or specifications. I. All interlocks that shutdown (Stop a piece of equipment and prevent it from being restarted or moved) shall be shown on the faceplate pop-up graphic for that piece of equipment. The run confrms or on status of all motors and lamps shall be accumulated to calculate a run time status of the equipment on the HMI graphic. Each run time accumuiation shall come with a reset button on the HMI screen. K. All flow indications shall be totalized. Do not totalize if the analog signal is outside the 4-20 mA range. Each flow total shall include a reset button on the HMI screen accessible with administrator privileges. Do not totalize if the value of the flow input is less than 2% of the full range of the input. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 13305-7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS SHEET 1NTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK r � � • 6349-79520 13305-8 October 2012 • � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13306 APPLICATION ENGINEERING SERVICES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Provide all programming, configuration, and related services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein. All equipment shall be controlled in full conformity with the contract drawings, process control descriptions, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Coordinate the control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other Sections of these specifications and with related existing equipment. Provide configuration of PLCs for all equipment shown on the drawings, except for controls equipment shown being provided as part of a vendor package system. 2. Provide configuration of the HMI System Software, Operator Interface Terminals, and drivers provided for all equipment shown on the drawings, including equipment provided by vendor package systems. a. The HMI software will be Citect v.6.1 Service Pack A, or Owner's current version. Coordinate with the Owner to make use of Owner's software licenses for development. 3. Integrate all new HMI tags into the existing offsite historian database. Coordinate with Owner for details. 4. Provide for and test communications and functionality between all connected devices (such as PLCs) and the HMI software packages, including devices supplied by others, as depicted on the system architecture drawings in order to provide a comprehensive working system of data collection, storage and reporting. C. Existing Owner standards for all applications work shall be observed, except as noted in the Drawings or Specifications, or commented by the Owner or Engineer during the course of submittal review and testing. D. All work shall be coordinated with plant operating personnel to minimize impacts on daily operation. Delays caused for any reason shall be noted and formally submitted to the Engineer and the Owner in the form of a letter. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. The submittals listed below shall be provided as a minimum. 6349-79520 13306-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved System Standards and Conventions 2. Operator Interface 3. Controller Program 4. Operations and Maintenance Manuals B. System Standards and Conventions Submittal Following the standards and conventions workshop, submit the standards and conventions that will be used on this project. The submittal shall defne, at a minimum: a. Graphic display standards, including color conventions, equipment symbols, display format, equipment control pop-up displays, trend displays, and display navigation. Include samples of each proposed type of graphic display (i.e., overview, detail, diagnostic, tabular, etc.) b. System naming conventions, such as graphic displays naming, database naming, tag names, and computer naming. c. System configuration, including network addressing and PLC addressing. d. Alarm configuration standards, including priorities and logging � e. Security configuration standards, including user groups and privileges • f. PLC standard programming modules, including analog input scaling, flow totalization, equipment runtime, motor start/stop, valve open/close, and any other standard logic planned tobe used. 2. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, the submitted standards and conventions shall be used as the basis for programming and configuration of the system. System programming and configuration shall not begin prior to the System Standards and Conventions Submittal. C. Operator Interface Following the approval of the standards and conventions submittal, submit a draft of all proposed graphic displays, examples of each type of pop-up (faceplate) displays, and examples of trends. For those graphics which will be duplicated more than once for similar type of equipment, submit the graphics for the first equipment onIy. Following the draft graphics review meeting and prior to the factory test, submit a ready-for testing version of all graphic displays. These graphics should be completely finished other than the incorporation of comments and changes resulting from testing. 2. Submitted graphic displays and trends shall be no less than 8.5 inches by I 1 inches and in full color. • 6349-79520 13306-2 October 2012 u � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Controller Program Submittal For each controller, submit the following using the controller manufacturer's built in printing functions. Electronic submission of Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) files in lieu of paper submittals is acceptable. Review will be for general program organization, level of documentation, and overall programming standards (basic pump and valve control, for example). The review will not attempt to confirm the logic works correctly for every loop. a. PLC programs showing ladder logic, function block, high level language or other controller language used. Include individual rung, network, and/or command descriptions with full comments to clearly identify function and intent of each code segment. Each logic segment shall be clearly presented, the function of each timer described, the purpose of each subroutine call labeled and defined, etc. Program documentation shall be sufficiently clear to allow determination of compliance with the process control requirements included in the control descriptions and with the Drawings. The submittal shall demonstrate that all logic provided under this project follows the same structure and format and reflects a common programming approach. b. Submit a memory usage report for the controller. This report shall indicate total memory capacity and unused memory capacity. Submit cross reference index of I/O allocation and controller memory address. Every physical I/O point as well calculated or virtual I/O required for the implementation of the process scheme shall be included. 2. Submit details of control system communication. Submit a"memory map" or other means showing which signals are exchanged between PLCs. Also submit a HMI tag database showing all signals exchanged between the PLCs and HMI. Any specific communication block memory addresses shall be defined. E. O&M Manuals 6349-79520 Software Maintenance Manuals a. Include these manuals as part of 13300 "Final System Documentation". This required information is in addition to any requirements of Section 13300. b. Application Files and Documentation - Submit the same information required in the "Operator Interface" and "Controller Program" submittals herein, including both PDF format and all application project files in their native formats. Project files, data and documentation shall reflect all changes made during or after testing, start-up, and commissioning. Include a list of all ranges and scales, and alarm and control setpoints, used at the conclusion of startup. c. PID Loop Tuning Parameters - Submit final PID loop values and annotated trend screen captures showing tuned control loop response for each individual loop. For cascade loops, submit charts showing response of the secondary loop with secondary setpoint on manual and also response of the entire cascade control loop in automatic mode. Include a description of tuning methodology used. 13306-3 October 201.2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Operator Manuals Provide Operator's Manuals prior to final acceptance of the system. These manuals shall be separately bound and shall contain all information necessary for the operator to monitor and control the plant from the control system. The manuals shall be written in non-technical terms and shall be organized for quick access to each detailed description of the operator's procedure. Manuals shall contain, but not be limited to, the following information: i. A comprehensive table of contents of the manual. ii. A simple overview of the entire system indicating the function and purpose of each piece of equipment. iii. A detailed description of the operation of the HMI and OIT including all appropriate displays. Including a screenshot of each HMI and OIT display screen and annotating each function in text is an acceptable format for presenting this information. iv. Step-by-step procedures for starting up or shutting down an individual component of the control system and also of the entire system. v. Login / logout procedures. CJ vi. Complete, step-by-step procedures for printing reports and entering manual data. • vii. Complete, step-by-step procedures for performing system or selected file backup and restoration including archiving historical data. Include recommended archiving schedule for historical data. viii. Operational description for operating HMI computer equipment and peripherals including printers, CD-ROMs, removable bulk storage devices, UPS, etc. Description shall include procedures for typical maintenance and troubleshooting tasks. ix. A complete glossary of terms and definition of acronyms. x. List of personnel to be contacted for warranty and emergency services, including name, address, telephone number, pager or cell phone number, fax number, and email address. Include these manuats as part of 13300 "Final System Documentation". This required information is in addition to any requirements of Section ] 3300. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS AND WORKSHOPS A. Refer to Section 13300. The meetings below are in addition to the meetings specified in that section. Multiple meetings may be combined into a single session as appropriate. • 6349-79520 13306-4 October 2012 • � • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved B. Schedule and conduct a standards and conventions workshop. The purpose of this workshop shall be to review the standards, conventions, and methodologies that will be used to program and develop the programs (i.e., HMI and PLC databases, HMI graphics, and PLC programming, etc.) and will solicit Engineer and Owner's input. Submit an agenda with examples for items to be discussed at a client workshop. C. Schedule and conduct a draft graphics review meeting. The purpose of this meeting shall be to present draft graphics for the Owner's and Engineer's review and feedback prior to creating the full set of graphics for review. For repetitive graphics such as graphics for multiple process trains, include an example of the first graphic only for discussion. Include discussion of process and overview displays, examples of pop-ups, trends, and system navigation tools. Expect major comments and incorporate any changes resulting from those comments. D. Schedule and conduct a historical data management workshop. The purpose of this workshop shall be to discuss and solicit Engineer/Owner input for storage and management of historical data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The system specified herein shall perform the following general functions: 1. The system shall allow the operator to control equipment such as pumps and valves as shown on the Drawings and as defined in Section 13305 control descriptions. 2. Perform real-time process control, including proportional integral derivative control action, sequencing, process calculations, etc. 3. Collect, calculate, and store accurate, reliable operating information for present and future uses. 4. Assist remote site operating personnel by noting and communicating off normal operating conditions and equipment failures. 5. Accumulate and store equipment running times for use in preventative maintenance. 6. Provide color graphic displays and reports for use by the system operating and supervisory personnel. 7. Provide trending for all analog values. 8. Provide control system diagnostics. 6349-79520 13306-5 October 201.2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9. All process control functions including PID, calculations, sequencing, timing, etc., • shall be done in the process controller. The HMI software shall perform the real- time database, report generation, graphic screens, program development, set point modification, data archiving, etc. 10. The system shall allow the operator to manually control the status of pumps, valves, etc. (i.e., on off, open close, setpoint value, etc.) when viewing the appropriate graphic screen on the HMI. 3.02 CONTROLLER PROGRAMS A. All new and modified application programs shall be developed in a structured manner and shall follow an intuitive arrangement so that an instrumentation technician with basic programming knowledge will be able to understand. Programs shall utilize standard program templates or subroutines for repetitive logic such as equipment control, flow total calculations, equipment runtime calculations. Include thorough commenting in all application programs. 3.03 GRAPHIC DISPLAYS - GENERAL A. All displays shall contain and continuously update the displayed process variables, date and time of day. All process values shall be displayed in engineering units. All displays shall incorporate references to both instrumentation tag numbers and plant equipment numbers. All process variables shall be displayed on their associated display(s) with correct engineering units. Process variables shall display their associated data quality flags. • B. Process graphic displays, shall be based on the P&ID's, site plan drawings, mechanical drawings and electrical drawings included in these Contract Documents. The graphic displays shall depict process flow streams, process structures, and ali major items of process equipment and control devices in a schematic format. C. All main graphical screens shall include a title bar, main graphic area, navigational buttons, and alarm summary bar. Title bar shall be displayed on the top of each screen and include display name, description and time/date. The main graphical area shall contain primary screen data in graphical format. Navigational buttons shall include a minimum of main menu, trends, main alarm summary, and security log in. The alarm summary bar shall display the last three valid alarms on the bottom of each screen. D. Animation shall be provided to mimic level changes in tanks or vessels, and to mimic rotation of rotating equipment when running. Valve colors shall change when opened and closed. E. Unless specifically noted, all timers, setpoints, alarm actuation levels, etc., shall be adjustable from the operator interface. F. The system shall show feld conditions with text that can alternate (i.e., OPEN/CLOSE, START/STOP, HIGH/LOW) and change color correspondingly. Field devices that are tri state must be represented in three conditions. • 6349-79520 13306-6 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved G. Condrtions m the field des�gnated as alarm condrtions shall report to the operator workstation, actuate an audible alarm, and provide a visual blinking image on the associated graphic page. All alarms and events should be displayed on the screen and archived. • H. All interlocks that affect equipment operation shall be identified both by alarm and by HMI indication. I. All analog inputs shall be checked for out of range (via high and low limit checks) and alarmed. J. All process flow streams shall be labeled and color coded. All structures and equipment shall be identified by name and appropriate equipment and loop tags. K. Color coding for equipment status and alarms shall be as follows: 1. Green for equipment on or valve fully opened. 2. Red for equipment off or valve fully closed. 3. Active, unacknowledged faults are indicated by flashing yellow or amber. 4. Active, acknowledged faults are indicated solid yellow or amber. 5. Amber for valve in intermediate position. L. Automatically record all alarm and events should any of the following sequences or events occur: 1. Date/Time entry 2. Any change of any range/scale or setpoint 3. Alarms resulting from process conditions 4. Alarms resulting from equipment or communication failure 5. Operator login or logout activity M. Refer to Section 13305 for additional requirements that may impact the applications configuration. 3.04 SPECIFIC GRAPHIC SCREENS A. The following types of graphic screens that shall be modified may include any or all of the following: 1. Plant Run Data 2. Plant Totals • 3. Hardware Alarms 4. RO Process Overview 6349-79520 13306-7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. RO Skid and Pump controls 6. Chloramine Overview 7. Blend pumps and tanks and High Service pumps controls B. New screens that shall be created include: 1. RO1 Network status diagram: communications diagnostic screens, showing the details of network status, communications status of all major components including Operator Work Stations, peripheral devices and network components 2. Adsorption System control 3. Decant and Residuals control 4. Concentrate Pump Station: status only, may be depicted on an overall process screen 5. Ground Storage Tanks: status only, may be depicted on an overall process screen 6. Additional trends associated with all analog inputs added to the system 3.05 SECURITY • A. The system shall be configured and implemented with security to prevent unauthorized • access. The system shall allow authorized changes to system operation through defined user accounts and password verification. B. Coordinate with Owner user account information, including login name and password for each account. 3.06 ALARM/EQUIPMENT STATUS REPORTING A. All new alarms and events in this Contract shall be added to the existing graphic screens, alarm banner and summary page, and log files, as needed. B. Coordinate with Owner as required to determine individual alarm priorities or remote operator notification. 3.07 HISTORICAL DATA MANAGEMENT A. All new data points added (analog or digital, real or pseudo) in this Contract shall be added to the existing graphic screens, alarm banner and summary page, and log files, as needed. B. Coordinate with Owner as required to determine individual alarm priorities or remote operator notification. 3.08 TESTING A. Refer to Section 13302. • B. Supplement to Field Testing requirements 6349-79520 13306-8 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. Priar to leaving the site, use the Owner's computer to monitor all PLC processors online, make on-line changes, upload and download the processor to ensure programming software version compatibility. 2. Loop Tuning - All PID control loops (single or cascade) shall be tuned following device installation but prior to commencement of the Functional Demonstration Test. a. Optimal loop tuning shall be achieved either by auto-tuning, Ziegler-Nichols step-response method, or other documented process tuning method. b. Determine and configure optimal tuning parameters to assure stable, steady state operation of final control elements running under the control PID. Each control loop that includes anti-reset windup features shall be adjusted to provide optimum response following startup from an integral action saturation condition. c. Tune all PID control loops to eliminate excessive oscillating final control elements. Loop parameters shall be adjusted to achieve a decay ratio of 1/ 4 or better. In addition, loop steady state shall be achieved at least as fast as the loop response time associated with critical damping. d. Loop performance and stability shall be verified by step changes to setpoint in the field. • e. Submit loop tuning documentation as specified in Part 1 of these Specifications. • END OF SECTION 6349-79520 13306-9 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6349-79520 13306-10 October 2012 • • • � 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved • SECTION 133 ] 1 DIGITAL HARDWARE AND EQUIPMENT PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes Programmable logic controllers for control of process equipment, process oriented machinery, and process systems. 1 A2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D999-91: Vibration B. (CFR) Title 47, Part 18 (European EN 55011 (formerly CISPR I 1)) C. CSA Certification Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Hazardous or non-hazardous • locations D. IEC 60068-2.1 Environmental testing — Part 2-1: Tests - Test A: Cold, 2.2 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests. Tests B: Dry heat , 23, 2.6 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal) and 227 Environmental testing. Part 2: Tests. Test Ea and guidance: Shock E. IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Testing and measurement techniques 1. Part 4-2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test 2. Part 4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test 3. Part 4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test 4. Part 4-5: Surge immunity test 5. Part 4-6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields F. IEC 61131-3: Programmable controllers - Part 3: Programming languages G. IEC 801-3: RFI Immunity H. IEC 801-5: Ground Continuity • L IEC 801-2: Electrostatic Discharge 6349-79520 13311-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved J. IEEE 472-1974/ANSI C37.90/90A-1974 (Surge Withstand) IEEE Standard for Relays • and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus K. MIL STD 461B CS02: RFI/EMI Susceptibility L. NEMA Pub No ICS2-230.42: Showering Arc Test M. NSTA Project lA N. UL 508 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 142 (Isolation Voltages) 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall be capable of providing training, parts, and coordination of emergency maintenance and repairs. B. The programmable controller and all of the corresponding components within the family of controller products shall be manufactured by a company who regularly manufactures and services this type of equipment. C. The manufacturer shall comply with IS09001 standards for "Quality Systems- Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing". D. The manufacturer shall provide complete technical support for all of the products. This shall include factory or on-site training, regional application centers, local or factory technical assistance, and a 24/7/365 technical support phone service. • 1.05 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION DEFINITIONS A. AI: Analog Input B. AO: Analog Output C. Fixed I/O: A PLC style consisting of a fixed number of I/O, a processor, and a power supply all in one enclosure. Some fixed PLCs have limited expansion ability. D. CPU: Central Processing Unit E. DI: Discrete Input F. Distributed I/O: Hardware specially designed to function as Remote I/O. G. DO: Discrete Output H. HMI: Human-Machine Interface I. I/O Input and/or Output J. Modular: A PLC style consisting of cards that are assembled to comprise a complete unit. All I/O, CPU, and Power Supply are dedicated cards. Typically, these cards are inserted into a chassis. • 6349-79520 13311-2 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • K. Master/Slave: Communication between devices in which one device, the master, controls all communications. The other devices, the slaves, respond only when queried by the master. Typically used in a Remote I/O application. L. Peer to Peer: Communication between two or more devices, typically PLC's, in which each device can control the communication exchange. M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. N. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller O. Remote I/O: I/O that is located remotely from the processor. Remote I/O can communicate over a variety of communication protocols and can use standard rack based I/O, or special Remote I/O hardware referred to as Distributed I/O. P. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 1.06 SPARE I/O A. Each I/O drop and I/O location shall include at least 20 percent (minimum of four) points of each type (AI, AO, DI, and DO) for future use, regardless whether any of those point types are used in that particularr location. B. Spare output points that require the use of an external relay shall be supplied with the external relay. • C. Regardless of the spare requirement, all installed unused points on all I/O modules shall be wired to terminal blocks in the order that they occur on the I/O modules. Unwired spares shall not be acceptable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2A1 PLC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Programmable Logic Controller equipment with the required memory and functional capacity to perform the specified sequence of operation with the scheduled input and output points. B. Processor Systems shall include processor, power supply, input/output modules, communication modules, redundancy modules, and remote interface modules as required to meet system requirements. C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), CSA, or FM approval as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. D. All equipment and devices furnished hereunder shall be designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models that are currently in production. E. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption the systems shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of inemory, • and resume normal operation without manually resetting when power is restored. 6349-79520 13311-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. The PLCs shall communicate between the operator workstation and field-mounted transducers, switches, controllers, and process actuators. Communications protocol shall be completely transparent to process operators at the Human Machine Interface (HMI). G. The PLC shall be capab}e of stand-alone operation in the event of failure of the communication link to the HMI subsystem. H. Backup Processor Systems, if indicated on the drawings, shall consist of two chassis with power supplies, each containing a processor, redundancy module and communications module(s). Remote chassis shall be provided with communication modules to meet I/O and communication requirements. I. Remote InputlOutput Units shall include input/output modules, interface modules, communication modules, and power supply to meet system input and output requirements. Agency and environmental specifications: Electrical supply voltage to the PLC shall be 120 Vac, plus or minus I S percent, 48-63Hz. PLC system power supplies shall be fused for overload protection. 2. Vibration: 3.5 mm Peak-to-Peak, 5-9 Hz: 1.OG, 9-I50\Hz. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68-2-6 and JIS C 0911 standards for vibration. The system is to be operational during and after testing. Vibration rating of 2.OG maximum peak acceleration for 10 to SOOHz. in accordance with at least one of the following: a. Installed rating: DIN rail mounted PLC: 10-57 Hz, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 25-100 Hz, and b. Panel or plate mounted PLC: 2-25 Hz, amplitude 1.6mm, acceleration 25-200 Hz. c. In compliance with IEC 60068 and IEC 61131. 3. Shock: 15G, 11 msec. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68-2-27 and JIS C 0912 standards for shock. The system is to be operational during and after testing. 4. Temperature: All PLC hardware shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 to +55 degrees C(+32 to +140 degrees F), with a storage ambient temperature rating of -25 to +70 degrees C(-40 to +185 degrees F). 5. Relative Humidity: The Programmable Controller hardware shall function continuously in the relative humidity range of 30 percent to 95 percent non- condensing. 6. Noise Immunity: The Programmable Controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in the high electrical noise environment of an industrial plant as governed by the following regulations: IEEE 472, IEC 801, MILSTD 461B, IEC 255-4, NEMA ICS 2-230.40, and ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978. 6349-79520 13311-4 October 2012 CJ • • OO 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved 7. Altitude: a. Operation: 0-6,500 feet b. Storage: 0-9,800 feet 8. Degree of protection: NEMA 1(IP20) 9. All products shall have corrosion protection. K. All major assemblies and sub-assemblies, circuit boards, and devices shall be identified using permanent labels or markings indicating: a. Modules product type such as analog or digital b. Modules catalog number c. Modules major revision number d. Modules minor revision number e. Module manufacturer vendor f. Module serial number • L. All necessary cables shall be included. All cables and connectors shall be as specifed by the manufacturer. Cables shall be assembled and installed per the manufacturer recommendations. M. Manufacturers 1. Provide all PLCs from a single manufacturer. If the PLC manufacturer has authorized third party vendors to provide modules that are compatible with their platforms, then products manufactured by these authorized third party vendors will be acceptable. 2. Provide the following: a. Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1769 CompactLogix. b. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. 2.02 PLC CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU) A. General I. The CPU shall be, at a minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor that provides system timing and is responsible for scheduling I/O updates, with no user programming required to ensure discrete or analog update. It shall execute user relay ladder logic programs, communicate with intelligent I/O modules, and perform on-line diagnostics. The CPU shall consist of a single module, which solves application • logic, stores the application program, stores numerical values related to the application processes and logic, and interfaces to the I/O. 6349-79520 13311-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. The CPU shall sample all the discrete and analog inputs and outputs including . internal coils and registers, and service special function modules every scan. The CPU shall process the I/O with user program(s) stored in memory, then control the outputs based on the results of the logic operation. Supply the CPU with a battery-backed date/time. 4. The CPU family shall allow for user program transportability from one CPU model to another. B. Diagnostics The CPU shall perform on-line diagnostics that monitor the internal operation of the PLC. If a failure is detected, the CPU shall initiate system shutdown and fail- over. The following, at a minimum, shall be monitored: Memory failure, memory battery low, and general fault, communications port failure, scan time over run, I/O failure, and analog or special function I/O module failure. 2. All diagnostic information shall be accessible to the host communications interfaces and to the PLC program. 3. The PLC shall have indicators and on board status area to indicate the following conditions: a. CPU run b. CPU error or fault I/O failure or configuration fault. d. Battery good Communications indicator C. Memory 1. The user program and data shall be contained in non-volatile battery backed memory, of type CMOS RAM program memory. 2. Memory Backup System: provide lithium battery backup capable of retaining all memory for a minimum of three months and a Flash memory system capable of reloading program in the event of inemory loss. a. Backup Battery: The backup battery shall be capable of being replaced without disrupting memory integrity. Provide a visual indication of low battery voltage and a low battery alarm contact. Flash Memory Card: Memory card storage capacity shall be a minimum of processor memory capacity. Memory cards shail be installed in processors for factory testing. 6349-79520 13311-6 October 2012 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 3. The operating system shall be contained in non-volatile firmware. The memory containing the operating system shall be field updateable via a separate update tool. D. Programming Environment 1. Programming port: The PLC shall utilize a serial USB or Ethernet port for programming. 2. On-Line programming: Application programs may be modified or stored while the CPU is running, with minimal impact on the scan time. 3. Online programming including runtime editing 4. IEC 61131-3 programming languages supported: Ladder logic, function block, sequential function chart, and structure text. 5. Supply all hardware and software necessary to program the CPU in these languages. E. Remote I/O Communications The CPU shall be capable of communicating with Remote I/O (RIO) nodes via Ethemet protocol, over either copper ar fiber optic physical layer. The CPU shall automatically sample and update all local and remote I/O modules each scan cycle. • Diagnostic and equipment status information shall be available from each RIO. 2.03 PLC POWER SUPPLY A. The PLC shall have chassis mounted power supplies to power the chassis backplane, and provide power for the processor and applicable modules. B. Power suppiies shall have a clearly visible LED to indicate that the incoming power is acceptable and the output voltage is present. C. Power supplies shall feature over-current and over-voltage protection and should be designed to operate in most industrial environments without the need for isolation transformers. D. Power supplies shall be sized to accommodate the anticipated load plus 30%. E. DC power supplies shall be capable of handling ripple up to 2.4V peak to peak. F. AC Line Voltage rating of 85 to 265Vac, 47-63Hz G. The power supplies shall allow for brown outs of at least 1/2 of a cycle, a harmonic rate of 10%, and will sustain continuous operation through momentary interruptions of AC line voltage of lOms or less. H. Automatically shut down the Programmable Controller system whenever its output power is detected as exceeding 125% of its rated power • I. Provide surge protection, isolation, and outage carry-over up to 2 cycles of the AC line. 6349-79520 13311-7 October 20:12 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved J. Redundant power supplies will comply with all the requirements of non-redundant � power supplies in addition to the features stated below. 1. The redundant power supplies shall be designed to share the current required by the chassis. In the event of a failure of one redundant power supply, the remaining supply will accommodate the entire load of the chassis without disruption to the chassis activity. 2. Provide a failsafe fuse that is not normally accessible 3. Provide a solid state relay connection to allow for failure annunciation when wired to an input module 4. Diagnostic LED status indicators for power and redundancy 2.04 PLC DISCRETE INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES A. General 1. Digital input and output modules shall provide ON/OFF detection and actuation. 2. The I/O count and type shall be as required to implement the functions specified plus an allowance for active spares, as noted beIow. 3. Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied. • 4. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health and input / output devices. 5. Each module shall have the following status indicators. a. The On/Off state of the field device. b. The module's communication status. B. Module Specifications (120VAC Input Module) 1. Nominal Input Voltage of 120VACc 2. On-State Current of 15mA @132V AC, 47-63Hz maximum 3. Maximum Off-State Voltage of 20V 4. Maximum Off-State Current of 2.SmA 5. Number of Points per Card: [ 16] C. Module Specification (120VAC Solid State Output Module) 1. Each triac type discrete output shall have an associated interposing relay located in the same control panel. 120 VAC power for relay outputs shall be provided from • the associated motor starter control circuit (when used with motor starters) or other 120 VAC source (when I/O is not associated with a particular motor starter). 6349-79520 13311-8 October 2012 n 2012 CDM Smith All l�ibhts Reserved . 2. Output Voltage Range of 74-265V AC, 47-63Hz 3. Output Current Rating: a. Per Point — O.SA ma�cimum @ 30 degrees C; 025 A maximum @ 60 degrees C; Linear Derating b. Per Module - 4A maximum @ 30 degrees C; 2A maximum @ 60 degrees C; Linear Derating 4. Surge Current Per Point of SA for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60 degrees C 5. Minimum Load Current of I OmA per point 6. Maximum On-State Voltage Drop of 1.SV peak @2.OA and 6V peak @load less than SOmA 7. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 2.SmA per point 8. Number of Points per Card: [ 16] D. Module Specifications (Individually Isolated, Relay Contact Output Module) 1. Output Voltage Range of 10-265V AC„ 47-63Hz ,5-125 VDC • 2. Output Current Rating: a. Per Point — 2.SA maximum b. Per Module - 16A maximum 3. Power Rating (Steady State) of 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output 4. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 0 mA per point 5. Configurable States a. Fault Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF b. Program Mode Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF 6. Number of Points per Card: [ 16] 2.05 PLC ANALOG iNPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES A. General 1. Analog input modules shall convert an analog signal that is connected to the module's screw terminals into a digital value. The digital value representing the magnitude of the analog signal shall be transmitted on the backplane. Analog output modules shall convert a digital value that is delivered to the module via the • backplane into an analog signal on the module's screw terminals. 6349-79520 1331 I-9 October 20;12 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. 3 Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health and input / output devices. 4. Each analog module shall provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred. Each module shall have an LED fault indicator and the programming software shall display the fault information. 5. Analog modules shall be software confgurable through the I/O configuration portion of the programming software. 6. The following status shall be capable of being examined in ladder logic a. Module Fault Word — Provides fault summary reporting. b. Channel Fault Word — Provides under-range, over-range and communications fault reporting. c. Channel Status Words — Provides individual channel under-range and over- range fault reporting for process alarm, rate alarms and calibration faults. 7. The 24 VDC power for analog instrument loops shall be provided as a part of the system. The 24 VDC power supply shall be derived from the 120 VAC input power circuit to the PLC. The field side of the 24 VDC power sources(s) shall have individual or grouped (of logically associated circuits) fusing and be provided with a readily visible, labeled blown fuse indicator. B. Differential Analog Input Module 1. Input Range of 4-20 mA 2. Resolution of approximately 16 bits across range 3 4 5 Input Impedance of Greater than 249 Ohms Overvoltage Protection: 8V ac/dc with on-board current resistor Normal Mode Rejection of 60dB at 60Hz 6. Common Mode Noise Rejection of 120dB at 60Hz, 100dB at SOHz 7. Isolation Voltage a. Channel to Ground/Chassis - 100% tested at l 000V dc minimum for 1 s based on 250V ac. 8. Provide individual isolators, in addition to the surge suppression devices specified, in the control panels listed in Section 13330 for all signals that enter the panel from outside the building. Substitution of Isolated Analog cards to meet this requirement is acceptable. In addition, isolators shall be provided as shown on the drawings. 9. Number of Points per Card: [4][8] 6349-79520 13311-10 October 2012 _ • • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Isolated Analog Output Current Module 1. Output Cunent Range of 4 to 20 mA 2. Current Resolution of 12 bits across 20 mA 3. Open Circuit Detection — None 4. Output Overvoltage Protection - 24V ac/dc maximum 5. Output Short Circuit Protection — 20 mA or less (electronically limited) 6. Calibration Accuracy - Better than 0.1 % of range from 4mA to 20 mA 7. Calibration Interval - 12 months typical 8. Number of Points per Card: [4] [8] 2.06 PLC COMMUNICATION 1NTERFACES A. The PLC shall include native Ethernet communication. B. Provide additional PLC communication capabilities with additional modules as required per the Drawings and Specifications for a given location: • 1. Modbus (RTU and ASCII) for up to 247 slaves 2. Profibus DP for up to 126 slaves 3. Rockwell Automation legacy protocols 4. DeviceNet 5. Asynchronous serial link capable of communicating up to 192Kbps 2.07 PLC SOFTWARE A. PCSS to use "Citect V.6.1.SPA" or current version being used by the client, to provide PLC configuration and application development. PCSS shall obtain license from client for project use. B. The software package shall allow on-line/off-line program development, annotation, monitoring, debugging, uploading, and downloading of programs to the PLCs. C. All required hardware (including cables, cable adapters, etc.) for connection to PLCs shall be furnished. D. All software licenses required to achieve the functionality described in the Specifications shall be provided. E_ The software package shall include a software license agreement allowing the Owner • the right to use the software as required for any current or future modification, documentation, or development of the PLCs furnished for this project. 6349-79520 13311-11 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. The software provided shall be capable of the following IEC 61131-3 functions: • 1. Ladder logic. 2. Function biock. 3. Sequential function chart. 4. Structure text. G. In addition to the above editors, an add-on instruction editor shall work with any of the above-mentioned editors to create custom reusable function blocks. This software shall allow any of the derived function blocks to be modified on-line. H. The software shall be Microsoft Windows-based and run on the supplied computers. I. The software shall include a security feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from modifying and downloading the programs. J. Provide an I/O simulator, which allows the PLC application load program to be tested on a PC with simulated analog and digital inputs and outputs, allowing I/O testing and debugging to be performed in a safe, isolated environment without the need for running the PLC CPU and process I/O boards. 2.08 OPERATOR 1NTERFACE TERMINALS (OIT) � A. OITs shall be mounted on control panels and shall run interface software separate from • the HMI software used for the main plant system. B. Manufacturers 1. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. 2. Model shall be PanelView Plus or approved equal. C. Software 1. The Operator Interface Terminal shall be pre-packaged with all configuration and programming software necessary to perform functions as shown on drawings and within the specifications. 2. The integrated OIT software shall have the following features a. Trending b. Data Logging c. Alarms d. Graphic Symbols e. Animations 6349-79520 13311-12 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved D. I/O Ports and Dev�ces 1. The OIT shall have a minimum of one Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for connectivity or programming. 2. The OIT shall have a minimum of one Serial RS232 port. 3. Compact flash ports shall be Type 2. 4. The OIT shall have a minimum of two USB ports. E. Display 1. The OIT display size shall be nominally 10". 2. The rype of display for the OIT shall be Color Active Matrix TFT. 3. The display resolution shall be a minimum of 800x600. 4. Display shall support touch screen input. F. Environmental 1. Rating: OIT shall be rated to maintain the rating of the control panel it will be mounted in. • 2. Temperature: Operating temperature range of the OIT shall range 0-50 degrees C. 2.09 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES A. General 1. Provide managed Ethernet switch(es) for control network connections as shown in the Drawings and specified herein. B. Physical Features 1. Fiber uplinks: 2 x 100/1000 FX ports (ST/SC connectors) , minimum Z. Copper ports: 16 x 10/100 TX RJ45 ports, minimum 3. Operating temperature: 32 to 130 degrees f 4. Power: 24 VDC redundant power supply inputs 5. Enclosure: Metal case, DIN-rail mountable 6. Rating: UL Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, and D C. Network Features • 1. Fault tolerant for use in a ring topology if shown on drawings. The switch shall be able to detect a blocked port and redirect data flow in the opposite direction within 30ms. 6349-79520 13311-13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Full duplex on a}1 port • 3. Auto negotiation and manual configurable speed and duplex 4. Wire speed switching fabric 5. IEEE 802.1 w RSTP 6. IGMP snooping 7. IGMP filtering 8. Configuration password protected 9. Configuration backup capability required 10. SNMP V3 11. Lock port function for blocking unauthorized access based on MAC address. D. Additional Features 1. The converter shall come equipped with a dry contact rated for 120 VAC SA that shall be used for common trouble alarm. The alarm shall be programmable. If the contact cannot use 120 VAC SA, provide the necessary 24 VDC power from the PLC panel and provide interposing relays in the PLC panel. • E. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Phoenix Contact Z. Or equal. 2.10 ETHERNET MEDIA CONVERTERS A. General 1. Provide Ethernet media converter(s) as shown in the Drawings and specified herein. B. Physical Features 1. RJ45 ports: IO/100BaseTX to 100BaseTX 2. Fiber uplinks: I OOBaseTX to 100BaseFX (ST/SC connectors) 3. Fiber optics: Multi- or single-mode capability as shown in the Drawings 4. Operating temperature: 32 to 130 degrees f 5. Power: 24 VDC 6. Enclosure: DIN-rail mountable • 6349-79520 13311-14 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved C. Additional Features 1. The converter shall come equipped with a dry contact rated for 120 VAC SA that shall be used for common trouble alarm_ The alarm shall be programmable. If the contact cannot use 120 VAC SA, provide the necessary 24 VDC power from the PLC panel and provide interposing relays in the PLC panel. D. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Phoenix Contact 2. Or equal. 2.11 WIRES AND CONNECTORS A. Provide wire, cables and connectors as required. Refer to Section 16120 for communication cabling not provided by the PLC or device manufacturer. 2.12 SPARE PARTS A. General requirements for spare parts are specified in Section 13300. B. The following PLC spare parts shall be furnished: • 1. Processors: Provide spare processor unit(s) for each unique processor installed. 2. Memory Cards: Provide spares for each type of card �nstalled. 3. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two or 10 percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater. 4. Network interface, remote I/O, and communication modules: Provide one spare communication module for each unique communication module installed. 5. Specialty Modules: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of module identified. Provide an additional spare for every ten modules of a specific type installed. 6. PLC Power supplies: Provide spare power supplies for each unique power supply installed. 7. Chassis: Provide spare chassis for each unique chassis installed. 8. Miscellaneous components (including cables): Provide spares for each unique component installed. C. The following Network and Communications System spare parts shall be furnished: 1. One switch of each type provided. • 2. One media converter of each type provided 6349-79520 13311-15 October 20]l2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Manufacturer's cables - one of each type installed. 4. Five-1 Oft CAT 6 cables with connectors installed PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 GENERAL iNSTALLATION A. Maintain area free of dirt and dust during and after installation of programmable controller products. � C Anchor PLCs within enclosures as recommended by the PLC manufacturer. Ventilation slots shall not be blocked, or obstructed by any means. D. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive PLCs for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Unload, unpack and transport equipment to prevent damage or loss. G n Replace damaged components as directed by Engineer. PANEL LAYOUT Comply with dimensions and clearances indicated by the PLC manufacturer. B. Control panel designer shall provide independent line fuses or circuit breakers, per the PLC manufacturer recommendation, for each power supply, input module, output module, and other modules with separately derived power requirements. C. Control panel designer shall ensure that communication signals, 4-20mA signals (including those with embedded HART), are properly conditioned for the PLC and protected from all sources of radiated energy or harmonics. D. Each PLC (including all I/O) shall be powered by the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) in the panel. UPS shall be sized for 45 minutes runtime, under load. E. Where multiple sets of inechanical equipment are provided for process redundancy, arrange their field connections to I/O modules so that the failure of a single I/O module will not disable the redundant system. This applies to all I/O types. The acceptability of the I/O arrangement shall be at the discretion of the engineer. F. Provide all required cables, cords, and connective devices for interface with other control system components. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 13311-16 October 2Q12 . C� � • • � � J OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13321 FIBER OPTIC CABLING AND EQUIPMENT PARTI GENERAL l A1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes providing a fiber optic communications infrastructure including, but not limited to, fiber optic cable (FOC), patch panels, terminations, testing, and implementation. B 1.02 A 1.03 The Work includes testing individual fiber cables installed under this Contract, and testing a completed fiber optic communications network. RELATED WORK Delivery, Storage and Handling in Section 01610. B. Process Instrumentation and Control System in Section 13300. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Sections O1300 and 01730, the following: Catalog Data: Catalog data on fiber-optic cable, termination devices, patch panels, breakout enclosures, splice kits, pigtails, and fan-outs where applicable. Product data sheets shall include the manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, the manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and any power supply requirements. 2. Certification of compliance in writing stating the fiber optic cable, anticipated layout, and components are compatible, acceptable for use, and in compliance with these specifications. 3. Detailed bill of materials for fiber-optic cable, terminations, patch panels, breakout enclosures, splice kits, connectors, pigtails, and fan-outs. 4. Drawings indicating the locations of all patch panels, termination points, or breakout enclosures. 5. Catalog data on all testing devices proposed for use plus certifcations of accuracy, calibration, and traceability to standards of the National Institute for Standards and Testing. B. The Fiber Optic System Supplier shall provide a fiber optic power budget for each cable run in excess of 1000 feet. The budget shall include transmitter power, receiver sensitivity, connector losses, cable losses, and a 3db-aging margin. Fiber optic transmission line shall maintain a minimum of I Odb safety margin. C. Training plan and schedule for iiber optic cable termination training. 6349-79520 13321-1 October 20:12 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Test reports. E. O&M manuals. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The optical fiber cable shali conform to the latest issue of the following standards documents, which are incorporated by reference into this specifcation: 1. EIA-455: Standard Fiber Optic Test Procedures (FOTPs) Devices. 2. EIA-598-A: Standard Colors for Color ldentification and Coding. 3. MIL-202: Test Methods for Electronic and Electrical Component Parts. 4. MIL-454: Standard General Requirements for Electronic Equipment. 5. MIL-810: Environmental Test Methods and Engineering Guidelines. � 6. EIA-568-B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard: Optical Fiber Cabling Components. 7. ICEA 5-83-696: Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable (Indoor/Outdoor). 8. National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 770. 9. UL 1581 VW-1 - Vertical Tray Cable Flame Test. • 10. UL 1666 - UL Standard for Safety Test for Flame-Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed in Vertical Shafts. I 1. NFPA 262 — Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use IN Air-Handling Spaces. 12. IEEE Standard 383 - Flame Retardancy. 13. DOD-STD-1678. 14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 15. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. B. All fiber optical cables shall be constructed in accordance with EIA-455, and 100 percent of all optical fibers and jacketing shall meet or exceed the requirements contained in this specification. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The cable manufacturer shall be IS09001 certified and registered. B. The fiber optic cabling system materials furnished under this Section shall be provided • by Fiber Optic Suppliers who have been providing these types of materials for the past three years. 6349-79520 13321-2 October 2012 • . n 2012 CDM Smith ;`, i i R ights Reserved The Fiber Optic Suppliers shall provide personnel capable of providing technical assistance during installation. C. The installation of fiber optic cabling system materials furnished under this Section shall be performed by an installation contractor who has been installing these types of materials and systems for the past three years. D. Supplier must furnish five working installation references. E. The ENGINEER shall determine whether a product is an Equal based upon the information listed herein and the manufacturer's data sheets regarding the models specified. Alternate equipment must meet the criteria listed herein and any additional information in the manufacturer's data sheets in order to be accepted as an Equal. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The cable shall be packaged in cartons and/or wound on spools or reels. Each package shall contain only one continuous length of cable. The packaging shall be constructed so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. B. When the length of an order requires a large wooden reel, the cable will be covered with a three-layer laminated protective material. The outer end of the cable shall be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable shall project into a slot in the side of the reel or into housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner and with suffcient length to make it available for testing. C. Test tails shall be at least two meters long. The inner end shall be fastened so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose during shipping and installation. Reels shall be permanently marked with an identification number that can be used by the manufacturer to trace the manufacturing history of the cable and fiber. D. Wooden reels shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. E. All fiber optic cables shall be attenuated tested. The attenuation of each fiber shall be provided with each cable reel by the manufacturer. F. The attenuation shall be measured at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fibers and 850nm and 1300nm for multimode fiber cables after received on site. The manufacturer shall submit the test results prior to installation of the cable. G. Packaging The completed cable shall be packaged for shipment on non-returnable wooden reels. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to determine all required cable lengths. 2. Top and bottom ends of the cable shall be available for testing. • 3. Both ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture. 6349-79520 13321-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. Each reel shall have a weatherproof reel tag attached identifying the reel and cable. � The reel tag shall include the following information: a. Cable Number Gross Weight. b. Shipped Cable Length in Meters. c. Product Number. d. Date Cable was Tested. e. Cable Length Markings Item Number. H. Each cable shall be accompanied by a cable data sheet. 1.07 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT A. Spare Parts 1. Provide a minimum five percent spares of ST connectors and dust covers, but not less than 20 spare ST style connectors and 40 dust covers. 2. Provide a minimum five percent spare 36" spare multimode patch cables with connectors (both ends) terminated, but not less than ten 36" spare multimode patch cables with connectors (both ends) terminated. B. Test Equipment and Tools • 1. One complete fiber optic connector termination tool kit. The kit shall be the CTS version with VFL, Model TKT-LJNICAM-CTS by Corning Cable Systems, or equal. 2. Optical power source and test meter shall be a combination type unit in a single handheld device. a. Optical source shall provide stable transmission of plus or minus 0.1 dB at 23 degrees C for eight hours with accurate wavelengths. Sources shall be 850/1300nm multimode (LED) and 1310/1550nm (multimode) or combined quad wavelength source_ Provide with visual fault locator (VFL). b. Test meter utilizes InGaAs wide area detector calibrated for 850, 1300, 1550, and 1625nm wavelengths. Provide fiber identification by audible detection of 2 kHz tone. c. Provide data storage: Windows-based PC software and cabling for reports, printing, viewing, and export. d. Power source/meter shall include jumpers, sleeves, cleaning kit, and transit case and shall be Corning Cable Systems Express Series Model No. OTS- 3MDSD-KIT, or equal. 6349-79520 13321-4 October 2012 � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2A1 GENERAL MATERIALS A. Cabinets: cabinets shall be provided as indicated on the contract Drawings. B. Provide tight buffered cables that are not gel filled and are suitable for indoor/outdoor applications. These cables shall be flame retardant for indoor applications and water and fungus resistant for outdoor applications. C. Optical Fiber Characteristics l. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required specifications. 2. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric silica cladding. The fiber shall be matched clad design. 3. Multi-mode: Provide multimode, optical glass fiber compatible with LED or laser based transmission systems. 4. Provide a minimum of six (6) fbers per cable, or I50% of the number needed for the network communication shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, whichever is greater. D. Manufacturers • 1. Corning Cable Systems Corp. 2. CommScope. 3. Belden Cable. • 4. Or equal. 2.02 STANDARD 62.5/125 µM FIBER A. The multimode fiber shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-A-1997, "Detail Specification for 62.5-µm Core Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers." Core Diameter m 62.5 t 3.0 Core Non-Circularity 5 5 % Cladding Diameter (µm) 125.0 f 2.0 Cladding Non-Circularity < 1.0 % Core-to-Cladding Concentricity (µm) S 1.5 Coating Diameter (µm) 245 t 5 Colored Fiber Nominal Diameter (µm) 253 - 259 6349-79520 13321-5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved O tical Cabled Fiber Attenuation (dB/km) 850 nm < 3.5 1300 nm <_ 1 A Point Discontinuity (dB) 850 nm < 0.2 1300 nm < 0.2 Cabled Effective Modal Bandwidth'� (MHz•km) 850 nm > 220 IEEE 802.3 GbE Distance (m) IOOOBASE-SX Window (850 nm) up to 300 IOOOBASE-LX Window 1300 nm u to 550 OFL Bandwidth (MHz•km) 850 nm > 200 1300 nm > 500 Numerical Aperture 0.275 f 0.015 1) As predicted by RML BW, per TIA/EIA 455-204 and IEC 60793-1-41, for intermediate performance laser based sys�ems (up to ] Gb/s). 2.03 LOOSE TUBE FIBER OPTIC CABLE (INDOOR/OUTDOOR) • A. Cable shall be flame-retardant, UV stabilized, fully water blocked with dielectric central member for use in indoor/outdoor applications. The buffer tubes shall be gel- free. Each buffer tube shall contain a water-swellable yarn for water-blocking • protection. Cable manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years in manufacturing optical fiber cable in order to demonstrate reliable field performance. Cable and fiber manufacturer shall be the same company to ensure long-term reliability of the cabled fiber and to ensure the availability of fully integrated technical support. Cable shall be suitable for installation in duct, aerial, and riser environments. Cable shall meet UL OFNR specifications and not require transition splicing upon building entry in order to meet fire codes. B. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a buffer tube. C. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers. D. In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable across the specified storage and operating temperature range and not subject to fading or smearing onto each other or into the gel filling material. Colors shall not cause fibers to stick together. E_ Buffer tubes shall be kink-resistant within the specifed minimum bend radius. F. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed. G. The central anti-buckling member shall consist of a glass-reinforced plastic rod. The purpose of the central member is to prevent buckling of the cable. • 6349-79520 13321-6 October 2012 CJ • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.04 2.05 H. The cable core shall contain a water-blocking material. The water-blocking material shall be non-nutritive to fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogenous. It shall also be free from dirt and foreign matter and shall be readily removable with conventional non-toxic solvents. Cable shall contain water-blocking threads between tubes. I. The cable shall contain at least one ripcord under the sheath for easy sheath removal. Tensile strength shall be provided by a combination of high tensile strength dielectric yarns. K. The high tensile strength dielectric yarns shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core. L. All dielectric cables (with no armoring) shall be sheathed with medium density polyethylene (MDPE). The minimum normal jacket thickness shall be 1.4 mm. Jacketing material shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members and water-blocking material. The polyethylene shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The optical fiber color coding shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA-598, "Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables." The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. When fibers are grouped into individual units, each unit shall be numbered in the unit jacket for identification. The number shall be repeated at regular intervals. B. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length markings every two feet. The markings shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. CABLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Fiber cables shall be tested by the manufacturer in accordance with the following industry standard (EIA-455) tests: 2. � 4. FOTP-41, Compressive Loading Resistance Test. FOTP-104, Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test. FOTP-25, Repeated Impact Testing. FOTP-33, Fiber Optic Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test. 5. FOTP-85, Fiber Optic Cable Twist Test. 6. FOTP-181, Lightning Damage Susceptibility Test. • 7. FOTP-3, Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Cables, and other Passive Fiber Optic Components. 6349-79520 13321-7 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 8. FOTP-82, Fluid Penetration Test for Fluid-Blocked Fiber Optic Cable. � 9. FOTP-37, Low or High Temperature Bend Test for Fiber Optic Cable. 10. FOTP-98, External Freezing Test. l 1. FOTP-27, Fiber Diameter Measurements. 12. FOTP-28, Measurement of Dynamic Tensile Strength. 13. FOTP-34, Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test. 14. FOTP-89, Cable Jacket Elongation and Tensile Strength Test. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit laboratory test reports on representative samples of similar cable design to demonstrate compliance prior to cable installation. 2.06 FIBER CABLE TERMINATIONS, CONNECTORS, AND CABLE ASSEMBLIES A. Pigtail Splicing 1. For termination of fiber cables at a termination or connector panel (patch panel), with one end of a piece of cable preconnectorized and the other end unterminated for splicing to the cable that needs to be terminated. Splicing and connectors shall meet the requirements listed in this Section. 2. A splice/termination tray shall house the splices and serve to fully protect excess • lengths of loose tube fibers from exposure. Splice tray shall be compatible with the selected patch panel and installed for easy access to the spliced cable sections. 3. Pigtail assemblies shall match fiber cable type and model and shall be as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems or equal. B. Buffer Tube Fan-Out Kits Individual fibers within a loose tube cable with 250 µm coated fibers shall use a fan-out kit to maintain flexibility and ease of handling fibers within a termination cabinet. Fan-out kits shall be installed in the patch panel enclosures to transition the loose tube fibers to ruggedized tight-buffered fiber pigtail cables. Optical fusion splices shall connect the loose tube fibers to the tight-buffered pigtail cables. The optical splice loss shall comply with the specifications for optical splices. Splice protection sleeves shall be employed on all splices to protect the splices. 2. The tight-buffered pigtails shall be factory-preconnectorized with STTM connectors as specified_ • 6349-79520 13321-8 October 2012 • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Connectars (Cable Assemblies} The fiber optic communications system shall utilize stainless steel ST style connectors for all fiber optic connections. SC style connectors will be acceptable only if ST style connectors are not compatible with the equipment being provided. The connectors shall be designed for use with 50/62.5/125/250 micron cable. Each connector shall cause a maximum signal attenuation of 1.6 dB. Field-Installed Connectors: Type ST compatible, SC or LC design with ceramic or polymer ferrule and strain relief boot. The connector installation shall not require the use of epoxies, adhesives or ovens. The connector shall be installable upon 900 µm buffered fiber in one minute or less and upon 2.9 mm jacketed cable in three minutes or less total time. The connector shall contain a mechanical splice and have a tool kit available to aid in assembly. The installation tools used to terminate the connector shall be able to terminate other small-form-factor and single-fiber UniCam connector designs. The connector shall not require end-face polishing in the field. The connector shall have a factory polished optical fiber stub in the connector ferrule that is bonded in the ferrule micro hole. Ferrule material shall be available in ceramic or polymer. Connector specifications shall be as follows: a. Insertion loss (typical): 0.3 dB b. Durability (mating cycles): 500 (minimum) c. Repeatability: Less than 0.2 dB d. Operating Temperature: 0 to plus 60 degrees C 3. After termination with connectors, the fiber ends must be visually inspected at a magnifcation of not less than 100 power for multimode and 200x for single mode to check for cracks or pits in the endface of the fiber. 4. Connectors shall have a maximum allowable connection loss of 0.3 dB per mated pair, as measured per EIA-455-34. No index-matching gel is to be used; dry interfaces only. Each connector shall be of the industry standard ST type compatible; designed for single-mode and multimode tolerances; shall meet or exceed the applicable provisions of EIA-455-5, 455-2A, and 455-34; and shall be capable of 100 repeated ratings with a maximum loss increase of 0.1 dB. Connectors shall incorporate a key-way design and shall have a Zirconia ceramic ferrule. Connector bodies and couplings shall be made of corrosion-resistant and oxidation-resistant materials such as nickel-plated zinc, designed to operate in humid environments without degradation of surface finishes. Connectors shall be capable of operating in a range of -40 to 80 degrees C. 6. Manufacturers a. b. c. 6349-79520 Corning Cable Systems, Hickory, NC AMP, Inc., Harrisburg, PA 3M Telecom Systems Group, Austin, TX or equal. 13321-9 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Fiber Optic Patch Cables Fiber optic patch cable shall be two-fiber zipcord 50/62.5/125 core/clad micron multimode riser rated cable. 2. Installation of patch cables shall include all spares and observe the minimum fiber bend radius and strain relief. 2.07 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION PATCH PANELS A. General Patch panels shall be suitable for wall mounting, comprised of internal mounting plate, cable holders, slack cable take up/organizer blocks, patch block with connectors, and ground lugs as indicated. Panels shall be NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel construction for outdoors; and NEMA 12, 316 stainless steel or fiberglass for indoor use. Patch panels shall be suitable for multimode system operation at 800 and 1300 nanometers. Patch panels shall be suitable for ST or LC connectors. The patch panels shall be sized to handle the number of fibers as required. All fibers shall be terminated in the patch panel. • 2. Where shown on the plans or in the related specifcation Sections, the fiber optic cable shall terminate inside a communications cabinet on a termination patch panel. All fiber sub-cables within the exposed buffer tube shall be terminated with fan-out kits with preconnectorized pigtails. The patch panel shall have a fiber capacity equal to the total number of fibers (connected and spare) for all cables to • be connected. 3. Unused buffer tubes shall be uncut and looped within the patch panel for continuous routing of the fiber buffer tube within the cable assembly. 4. Patch panels shall be designed for either rack mounting on a standard equipment rack or housed in an enclosure for direct wall mounting. The patch panel shall contain "ST" type bayonet or LC couplings. All unused couplings shall have protective dust covers. All panels shall be furnished with locking doors. 5. Factory-terminated, tight-buffered, aramid-reinforced fiber optic jumper assemblies or interconnect cables, standard 3.0-mm O.D., shall connect the optical cable terminations to the patch panel couplings. 6. The termination patch panel shall be equipped with a suitable means for routing and securing of cables, and shall provide a suitable means of protection for the mounted fiber connectors to prevent damage to fibers and connectors during all regular operation and maintenance functions. All cables shall be provided with strain relief. Bend diameters on cable fbers and jumpers must be greater than four inches at all times to ensure optical and mechanical integrity of the optical fibers. 7. Termination panels shall be equipped with splice trays (where applicable) and holders for pigtail and through fiber splicing. 8. Termination panels shall be provided with all hardware, options, and accessories to provide for a complete installation of the fiber optic system. • 6349-79520 13321-10 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 9. Panels shall be as manufactured by Corning Cable Systems LANscape or equal. B. Rack Mount Fiber Distribution Center (FDC) Splice Housing 1. A rack-mountabte Fiber Distribution Center splice housing shall be provided for pigtail splicing and through fiber splicing equipment. 2. The splice housing shall be compatible with the FDC for interconnection of the splicing equipment with the fiber cable management, termination, and distribution rack equipment. 3. Splice trays shall be provided for pigtail splicing. 4. The splice housing shall be sized and equipped with sufficient capacity to terminate and feed through all reyuired fiber cable, plus an additional 20 percent. 5. Provide one spare splice tray. 6. Splice housing shall be Corning Cable Systems LANscape CSH series. C. Rack Mount Fiber Distribution Center (FDC) 1. The Fiber/Network equipment rack shall be supplied with two rack-mountable Fiber Distribution Centers (FDCs) capable of 48 ST fiber termination points each. The connector center shall be 19" rack-mountable and provide for internal fan-out, • splicing, and connection of the fiber optic cable to front panel ST connection patch panel. 2. The FDC shall provide backbone and intermediate connects and cable strain relief for a maximum of five fiber cable systems. The front shall be swing open construction with keyed latch mechanism. 3. The FDC shall be compatible for interconnection with the FDC Splice Housing and provide space and support the addition of fiber cable splice trays for future cable connection and termination. 4. The Fiber Connection Center shall be Corning Cabie Systems LANscape CCH series. D. Wall/Panel Mount Fiber Distribution Center (WDC) The field-mounted fiber termination enclosures shall be supplied with a Wall Mount Fiber Distribution Center (WDC) capable of 48 ST fiber termination points. The distribution center shall be panel-mounted and provide for internal fan-out, splicing, and connection of the fber optic cable to the patch panel assemblies. 2. Splice trays shall be provided for pigtail splicing. The WDC shall be provided with pass-thru splice trays for continuation of the fiber cable system to additional sites. • 3. Provide one spare splice tray. 6349-79520 13321-11 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. The WDC shall provide space and support the addition of future fiber cable splice . trays. 5. The Wall Mount Fiber Distribution Center shall be Corning Cable Systems LANscape (WCH) series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide all material, equipment, and labor to test and integrate the fiber optic system as indicated and as specifed. B. Installation shall comply with EIA/TIA Standards 568 and 569. C. Fiber optic cables shall be continuous from component to component. Intermediate fiber splices shall not be allowed. D. Provide delivery, storage, and handling of materials and equipment in accordance with Section 01600. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Label each termination point. B. Label each cable, buffer tube, and fiber with permanent waterproof typewritten • tags. 3.03 PHYSICAL CHECKOUT A. General Procedures 1. Conduct physical checkout of the fiber optic data highway network. 2. Physical checkout shall be performed prior to functional testing. B. Check Procedures l. Verify that fiber optic cable reels have been off-loaded from truck carefully and not damaged. 2. Submit to the ENGINEER all test data provided by the fiber manufacturer. 3. Verify that the optical fibers of the cable assembly are the type and quantity as specified and as recommended by the Instrumentation System Supplier. 4. Verify that cable construction is the type specified. 5. Verify that fiber optic patch panels have been installed plumb and level at locations indicated. 6. Verify that optical fiber connections or terminations within patch panels and splice • closures are in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations. 6349-79520 13321-12 October 2012 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.04 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall perform pre-installation and post-installation FOC tests. The Construction Manager shall be notified a minimum of 10 days in advance so that these tests are witnessed. All test equipment shall be traceable to NIST standards. B. Test equipment: The CONTRACTOR shall use the following to perform pre- installation and post-installation FOC tests: Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). The OTDR shall be laser precision, and be able to test single mode or multimode systems with a visual fault locator. The OTDR shall be as manufactured by Corning, Agilent Technologies, Fluke Networks, or equal. C. Pre-installation Tests The purpose of these tests is to perform acceptance tests on the cable prior to installation to verify that the cable conforms to the manufacturer's specifications; is free of defects, breaks, and damages by transportation and manufacturing processes; and to provide baseline readings in dB. 2. Prior to removal of each cable from the delivery reel, all optical fibers within the cables shall be tested by the CONTRACTOR using an OTDR. The OTDR tests shall consist of end-to-end length and fiber attenuation (dB/km) measurements to ensure proper performance of the fiber optic cable. The tests shall be performed from both ends of each fiber to ensure complete fiber continuity within the cable structure. 3. Pre-installation, "on-reel" test results shall be compared with the manufacturer's test report delivered with the cable. Gross dissimilarities shall be noted and remedied between the CONTRACTOR and manufacturer. In all cases, all fibers must meet the optical attenuation specifications prior to cable installation. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall perform tests on all reels of cable. The Construction Manager shall be notified a minimum of 15 days prior to any test. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall document each test and submit the report to the Construction Manager for review. Documentation shall consist of both hard copy and 3.5 inch electronic disk complete with all application software. 6. Cable shall not be installed until the Construction Manager has reviewed the test report. 7. Maximum allowable attenuation is 0.5 dB/km at 1310 and 1550 nm. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any cable in which any fiber does not meet this requirement. D. Post-installation tests: After FOC has been installed and connectorized, the foltowing tests shall be performed: • 1. Visually inspect terminal connectors for out-of-round condition and surface defects such as micro-chips and cracks using a 200X (minimum) inspection microscope. 6349-79520 13321-13 October 201'� 2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. A recording OTDR shall be used to test for end-to-end continuity and attenuation • of each optical fiber. The OTDR shall have an X-Y plotter to provide a hard copy record of each trace of each fiber. The OTDR shall be equipped with sufficient internal masking to allow the entire cable section to be tested. This may be achieved by using an optical fiber pigtail of 30 feet or more to display the required cable section. 3. The maximum permissible end-to-end loss shall be 0.5 dB/km. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any cable in which any fiber does not meet this requirement. 4. The OTDR shall be calibrated for the correct index of refraction to provide proper length measurement for the known length of reference fiber. 5. A transmission test shall be performed with the use of a 1310 and 1550 nm stabilized light sources and 1310 nm/1550 nm power meters for SMF. This test shall be conducted in both directions on each fiber of each cable. 6. Hard and electronic copies of test documentation shall be submitted to the Construction Manager. The documentation shall include: a. The trace plot. b. Index. c. dB/km loss. d. Cable length. e. Date and time of test. f. Wavelength. g. Pulse width. h. The test site. i. Cable ID. j. Fiber number and type. k. Operator's initials. The CONTRACTOR shall compare the pre-installation test results to the post-installation results. If a deviation of greater than one dB occurs, the Construction Manager shall be notified in writing by the CONTRACTOR, and the cable shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. r� L 7. Upon completion of the previous tests, all FOC coils shall be secured with ends capped to prevent intrusion of dirt and water. • 6349-79520 13321-14 October 2012 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Certification of completion of pre- and post-fiber installation testing including test results shall be provided to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR, and Ozone Control System Supplier. Test results shall be submitted on paper in a binder, including results indicated in tables or a spreadsheet. Test results that exceed specification limits shall be noted. The electronic copy shall be included in the binder. F. Required OTDR Trace Information All traces shall display the entire length of cable under test, highlighting any localized loss discontinuities (installation-induced losses and/or connector losses). The trace shall display fiber length (in kilofeet), fiber loss (dB), and average fiber attenuation (in dB/km), as measured between two markers placed as near to the opposite ends of the fiber under test as is possible while still allowing an accurate reading. Care shall be taken to ensure that the markers are placed in the linear region of the trace, away from the front-end response and far-end Fresnel reflection spike. Time averaging shall be used to improve the display signal to noise ratio. The pulse width of the OTDR shall be set to a sufficient width to provide adequate injected power to measure the entire length the fiber under test. 2. If connectors exist in the cable under test, then two traces shall be recorded. One trace shall record the fiber loss (dB) and average attenuation (dB/km) of the entire cable segment under test, including connectors. The second trace shall display a magnified view of the connector regions, revealing the connector losses (dB). All connector losses shall be measured using the five-point splice loss measurement technique. 3. The OTDR trace shall also include the following information: a. The date and time of the test. b. The cable ID number. c. The cable segment ID number. d. The fiber color or sub-cable number. e. Launch point connector number. f. The optical wavelength used for the test. g. The refractive index setting of the OTDR. h. The pulse width setting of the OTDR. i. The averaging interval of the test. 3.05 TRAININC A. Provide one half-day training on termination techniques and testing for up to three students prior to installation. • B. Provide training as soon as possible following submittal of proposed fiber optic cable. 6349-79520 13321-15 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.06 WARRANTY • A. Refer to Section 13300. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an unconditional warranty on all installed cable for a minimum period of 20 years, commencing at the time of final acceptance by the OWNER. C. This Section describes the material and installation requirement for the fber optic cabling system and associated equipment. END OF SECTION • • 6349-79520 13321-16 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13330 CONTROL PANELS AND PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Control panels shall be constructed and furnished by the PCSS, as defined in Section 13300. C. Furnish and install new control panels and panel mounted equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. D. Additions and modifications to existing panels shall conform to the standards and requirements of this Section wherever applicable. E. All new panels and panel components shall match existing equipment makes and models wherever possible, so that system additions can be most easily integrated with respect to operation and maintenance training, spare parts inventory, and service contracts. Even when exact matches are not possible, equipment furnished must be fully compatible with the existing system. Color, size, and material of new panels should conform to that of existing panels. F. The following new control panels shall be provided under this Section: CP-110. Located in Electrical Room. NEMA 12 construction, free-standing. M�imum size: 90"H x 36"W x 20"D. 2. CP-120 or Decant Control Panel. Located in decant tank area. NEMA 4X stainless steel construction, free-standing. Maximum size: 90"H x 72"W x 24"D. SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams Submittal 6349-79520 Where direct hardwired interfaces exist between the PCSS control panels and vendor provided control panels furnished under other Divisions, the Contractor shall provide to the PCSS the approved submittals in order for the PCSS to provide complete wiring diagrams showing all wiring connections in the I/O system. This includes but is not limited to terminal block numbering, relay contact information, instruments, equipment, and control panel names. These drawings shall be included in the Final O&M submittal. Leaving this information blank on the Final Documentation drawings is not acceptable_ 13330-1 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Pane} Layout Drawings: Drawings shall be furnished for all panels, consoles, and � equipment enclosures specified. Panel assembly and elevation drawings shall be drawn to scale and detail all equipment in or on the panel. Panel drawings shall be 11 "x 17" in size. At a minimum, the panel drawings shall include the following: a. lnterior and exterior panel elevation drawings to scale. b. Nameplate schedule. c. Conduit access locations. d. Panel construction details. e. Cabinet assembly and layout drawings to scale. The assembly drawing shall include a bill of material on the drawing with each panel component clearly defined. The bill of material shall be cross-referenced to the assembly drawing so that a non-technical person can readily identify any component of the assembly by manufacturer and model number. £ Fabrication and painting specifications including color (or color samples). g. Construction details, NEMA ratings, intrinsically safe barrier information, gas sealing recommendations, purging system details, etc. for panels located in hazardous locations or interfacing to equipment located in hazardous areas. h. For every control panel, heating and cooling calculations for each panel • supplied indicating conformance with cooling requirements of the supplied equipment and environmental conditions. Calculations shall include the recommended type of equipment required for both heating and cooling. i. Submit evidence that all control panels shall be constructed in conformance with UL 508 and bear the UL seal confrming the construction. Specify if UL compliance and seal application shall be accomplished at the fabrication location or by field inspection by UL inspectors. All costs associated with obtaining the UL seal and any inspections shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. Panel Wiring Diagrams: Panel wiring diagrams depicting wiring within and on the panel as well as connections to external devices. If ISA Loop Wiring Diagrams are specified below, equipment external to the control panel and related external connections do not need to be shown on the Panel Wiring Diagrams. Panel wiring diagrams shall include power and signal connections, UPS and normal power sources, all panel ancillary equipment, protective devices, wiring and wire numbers, and terminal blocks and numbering. Field device wiring shall include the device ISA-tag and a unique numeric identifier. The diagrams shall identify all device terminal points that the system connects to, including terminal points where I/O wiring lands on equipment not supplied by the PCSS. Wiring labeling used on the drawings shall match that shown on the Contract Documents or as developed by the PCSS and approved by the Engineer. I/O wiring shall be numbered with rack number, slot number, and point number. Two-wire and four-wire equipment shall be clearly identified and power sources noted. Submit final wire numbering scheme. Panel drawings shall be 11" x17" in size. 6349-79520 13330-2 October 2012 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 2.02 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 13300. CONTROL PANEL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The dimensions within this Section and on the Contract Drawings are for general reference only. Ensure that final enclosure sizing and panel arrangements accommodate all required equipment for a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in the Contract Documents. B. Each control panel and terminal cabinet shall bear the UL label. The UL label shall apply to the enclosure, the specific equipment supplied with the enclosure, and the installation and wiring of the equipment within and on the enclosure. If required for UL labeling, provide ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses and any other equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508 requirement. The Drawings do not detail all UL 508 requirements. C. All panel doors shall have a lock installed in the door handle, or a hasp and staple for padlocking. Locks for all panels provided under this Contract shall be keyed alike. D. The devices designated for rear-of-panel mounting shall be arranged within the panel according to respective panel drawings and in a manner to allow for ease of • maintenance and adjustment. Heat generating devices such as power supplies shall be located at or near the top of the panel. E. All components shall be mounted in a manner that shall permit servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component mounting shall be oriented in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved nametags mounted adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in accordance with the drawing, specifications, and ISS's data. F G All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel. Nameplates All panels and panel devices shall be supplied with suitable nameplates, which identify the panel and individual devices as required. Unless otherwise indicated, each device nameplate shall include up to three lines with the first line containing the device tag number as shown on the drawings, the second line containing a functional description (e.g., Recirculation Pump No. 1), and the third line containing a functional control description (e.g., Start). • 6349-79520 13330-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Unless escutcheon plates are specified or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, • nameplates shall be 3/32-inch thick, black and white, Lamicoid with engraved inscriptions. The letters shall be Black against a White background unless otherwise noted. Edges of the nameplates shall be beveled and smooth. Nameplates with chipped or rough edges will not be acceptable. 3. Nameplate fasteners and mounting shall be epoxy adhesive or stainless steel screws for cabinet mounted nameplates 4. For every panel, provide a panel nameplate with a minimum of 1" high letters. Provide legend plates or 1-in by 3-in engraved nameplates with 1/4-in lettering for identification of door mounted control devices, pilot lights, and meters. 5. Single lamicoid nameplates with multiple legends shall be used for grouping of devices such as selector switches and pilot lights that relate to one function. H. Mounting Elevations 1. ISA Recommended Practice RP603 shall be used as a guide in layout and arrangement of panels and panel mounted components. Dimensions shall account for all housekeeping pads that panels will sit on once they are installed. 2. Centerline of indicators and controllers shall be located no lower than 48-inches or higher than 66-inches above the floor on a panel face. 3. Centerline of lights, selector switches, and pnshbuttons shall be located no lower • than 32-inches or higher than 70-inches above the floor on a panel face. 4. Tops of annunciators shall be located no higher than 86-inches above the floor on a panel face. 5. Installation of panel components shall conform to component manufacturers' guidelines. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Structure and Enclosure All panels in indoor, dry, non-corrosive environments shall be NEMA 12 unless otherwise noted, and shall be of aluminum or stainless steel construction. All panels in outdoor, wet, or chemically corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4X and of stainless steel construction. All panels located in a hazardous location shall be rated for the type of hazard (e.g., NEMA 7 for Class 1, Division 1). 2. Provide angle stiffeners as required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied with a structural framework for instrument support purposes and panel bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation. 6349-79520 13330-4 October 2012 • • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith Al] Rights Reserved Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors. Doors shall be provided with a three-point stainless steel latch and heavy duty stainless steel locking handle. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length, continuous, piano type stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. Front access doors with mounted instruments or control devices shall be of sufficient width to permit door opening without interference from flush mounted instruments. Clamp- type door latches are not permitted. 4. The panels, including component parts, shall be free from sharp edges and welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection purposes. The panel shall be suitable for top and bottom conduit entry as required by the Electrical Drawings. For top mounted conduit entry, the panel top shall be provided with nominal one-foot square removable access plates, which may be drilled to accommodate conduit and cable penetrations. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be provided with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts, and other accessories as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of the conduit system. B. Freestanding and Floor-Mounted Vertical Panels. Freestanding and floor-mounted vertical panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the drawings ar specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of 12 gauge sheet steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Front panels or panels containing instruments shall be not less than 10 gauge stretcher leveled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion. C. Wall and Unistrut Mounted Panels. All wall and Unistrut mounted panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the drawings or specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of not less than USS 14 gauge steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All wall mounted panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. D. Finish Requirements All sections shall be descaled, degreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure when fabricated of steel shall be finished with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods. 2. The panels shall have edges ground smooth and shalt be sandblasted and then cleaned with a solvent. Surface voids shall be filled and ground smooth. 3. Immediately after cleaning, one coat of a rust-inhibiting primer shall be applied inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and top coat of a two-component type epoxy enamel. A final sanding shall be applied to the intermediate exterior coat before top coating. 4. Apply a minimum of two coats of flat white lacquer on the panel interior after priming. 6349-79520 13330-5 October 201:? OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. For indoor panels, finish exterior color shall be ANSI 61 gray. For outdoor panels, • finish exterior color shall be white. E. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. The storage pockets shall be stee}, welded on to the door, and finished to match the interior panel color. The storage pocket shall be sufficient to hold all of the prints required to service the equipment, and to accommodate 8.5 inch by 1 l inch documents without folding. 2.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. All panels shall be provided with louvers, sun shields, heat sinks, forced air ventilation, or air conditioning units as required to prevent temperature buildup inside of panel. The internal temperature of all panels shall be regulated to a range of 45 Deg F to 104 Deg F under all conditions. Under no circumstances shall the panel cooling or heating equipment compromise the NEMA rating of the panel. B. ISS shall submit heat dissipation calculations for every control panel. C. Except for panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be in the rear of the panels, top and bottom, and shall be stamped sheet metal construction. D. For panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be on the sides. E. Forced air ventilation fans, where used, shall provide a positive internal pressure within the panel, and shall be provided with washable or replaceable filters. Fan motors shall • operate on 120-volt, 60-Hz power. F. For panels with internal heat that cannot be adequately dissipated with natural convection and heat sinks, or forced air ventilation, an air conditioner shall be provided. Air conditioners shall be Rittal model 3303, 3304, 3305, or similar, with nano-coating. G. Provide custom fabricated sun shields for all outdoor panels in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Sun shields shall be fabricated from minimum 12 gauge Type 316 stainless steel. Units shall be designed, fabricated, installed, and supported to fully cover and shade the top, sides and back of the enclosure, and to partially shade the front panel of the enclosure, from direct exposure to sunlight from sunrise to sunset. 2. Depending on overall size, sun shields may be fabricated in single or multiple segments for attachment to the enclosure support framing or to separate free standing framing around the enclosure. 3. Sun shields shall not be attached directly to the enclosure by drilling holes through, or welding studs to, the enclosure surfaces, and shall be designed and mounted to provide a minimum 3-inch air gap all around the enclosure for air circulation and heat dissipation. 6349-79520 13330-6 October 2012 • C�'` ?012 CDM Smith ^ �l IZights Reserved • 4. The top section of all sun shields shall be sloped at a minimum angle of 5 degrees from horizontal. For wall mounted enclosures, the top section shall slope downward away from the wall and towards the front of the enclosure. For free standing, floor mounted and frame mounted enclosures the top section shall slope downward towards the back side of the enclosure. 5. The front edge of the top section of all sun shields shall incorporate a narrow and more steeply sloped drip shield segment which sheds water away from the front of the enclosure and prevents it from dripping or running directly onto the front panel of the enclosure. 6. All seam welds used in sun shield fabrication shall be continuous and shall be ground smooth. 7. All exposed corners, edges and projections shall be smooth rounded or chamfered to prevent injury. H. All outdoor enclosures and enclosures located in unheated areas indoors or in areas subject to humidity and moisture shall be provided with an integral heater, fan, and adjustable thermostat to reduce condensation and maintain the minimum internal panel temperature. Mount the unit near the bottom of the enclosure with discharge away from heat-sensitive equipment. Heater shall be Hoffinan DAH or equal. 2.05 CORROSION CONTROL • A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Technologies International Corporation, Model Zerust VC; Hoffman Model AHCI; or equal. 2.06 CONTROL PANEL - INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION A. Internal Electrical Wiring All interconnecting wiring shall be type THHN, and shall have 600 volt insulation and be rated for not less than 90 degrees Celsius. Wiring for systems operating at voltages in excess of 120 VAC shall be segregated from other panel wiring either in a separate section of a multi-section panel or behind a removable Plexiglas or similar dielectric barrier. Panel layout shall be developed such that technicians shall have complete access to 120 VAC and lower voltage wiring systems without direct exposure to higher voltages. 2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of fuses or breakers shall be 12 AWG minimum. Control wiring on the secondary side of fuses shall be 16 AWG minimum. Electronic analog circuits shall utilize 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair, cable insulated for not less than 600 volts. 3. Power and low voltage DC wiring systems shall be routed in separate wireways. Crossing of different system wires shall be at right angles. Different system wires routed parallel to each other shall be separated by at least 6-inches. Different wiring systems shall terminate on separate terminal blocks. Wiring troughs shall • not be filled to more than 60 percent visible fill. 6349-79520 13330-7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. Terminations 6349-79520 a. All wiring shall terminate onto single tier terminal blocks, where each terminal is uniyuely and sequentially numbered. Direct wiring between field equipment and panel components is not acceptable. b. Multi-level terminal blocks or strips are not acceptable. c. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into groups (power, AC control, DC signal). Each group of terminal blocks shall have a minimum of 25 percent spares. Terminal blocks shall be by Weidmuller. d. Terminal blocks shall be the compression type, fused, unfused, or switched as shown on the Contract Drawings or specified elsewhere in Division 13. e. Discrete inputs and outputs (DI and DO) shall have two terminals per point with adjacent terminal assignments. All active and spare PLC and controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks. All active and spare PLC DO points shall be wired to interposing relays as stated below. Analog inputs and outputs (AI and AO) shall have three terminals per shielded pair connection with adjacent terminal assignments for each point. The third terminal is for shielded ground connection for cable pairs. Ground the shielded signal cable at the PLC cabinet. All analog inputs and outputs shall also be wired to 24V surge suppressors, as specified in Section 13300. All active and spare PLC and controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks and surge suppressors. g. Wire and tube markers shall be the tube type with heat impressed letters and numbers. h. Only one side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6-inches of the side panel or adjacent terminal or within 8-inches of the bottom of free standing panels, or within 3-inches of stanchion mounted panels, or 3-inches of adjacent wireway. i. Circuit power from the SCADA cabinet out to feld devices (switches, dry contacts etc.) that are used as discrete inputs to the PLC input cards shall be isolated with an isolating switch terminal block with flip cover that is supplied with a dummy fuse. Isolation switch block shall be an Allen Bradley or Weidmuller. One isolating switch terminal block per loop numbered piece of equipment and one per spare UO point is acceptable. j. All PLC discrete inputs from the field shall be isolated with an isolating fuse switch terminal block with a flip cover and a neon blown fuse indicator. One fuse per eight (8) inputs is required. The single circuit fusible terminal block shall be an Allen Bradley or Weidmuller. k. All PLC discrete outputs to the field shall be isolated with an interposing relay, as specified in paragraph 2.12 of this Section. 13330-8 C� � • October 2012 • CJ �O ZO ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved All wiring to hand switches and other devices, which are live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection, shall be clearly identified as such. 6. All wiring shall be clearly tagged and color coded. All tag numbers and color coding shall correspond to the panel wiring diagrams and loop drawings. All power wiring, control wiring, grounding, and DC wiring shall utilize different color insulation for each wiring system used. The color coding scheme shall be in accordance with UL 508a. 7. Provide surge protectors on all incoming power supply lines at each panel per the requirements of Section 13300. 8. Mount all terminal blocks, fuse blocks, and other devices wherever feasible, on extended DIN rail, attached to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be wide width, plastic type, with snap-on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the panel with glue or adhesives. ] 0. Each panel shall have a single tube, fluarescent light fixture, 20 Watt in size, mounted internally to the ceiling of the panel. Light fixture shall be switched and shall be complete with the lamp. • 1 I. Each panel shall have a specification grade duplex convenience receptacle with ground fault interrupter, mounted internally within a stamped steel device box with appropriate cover. Convenience receptacle shall not be powered from a UPS and shall be protected by a dedicated fuse or circuit breaker. u 12. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 13. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 14. Each panel shall have control, signal, and communication line surge suppression in accordance with Section 13300. 15. All microprocessor-based electronic devices in the panel that are powered by 120VAC shall be powered by the UPS (refer to appropriate Section in Division 13). 16. Each panel shall be provided with a circuit breaker to interrupt incoming power. 17. Additional electrical components including transformers, motor starters, switches, circuit breakers, etc. shall be in compliance with the requirements of Division 16. B. Pneumatic Tubing 6349-79520 Refer to Section 13300. 13330-9 October 201.2 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Pneumatic tubing shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch O.D. 316 stainless steel with • compression fttings. All tubing shall be rigidly supported and run in horizontal or vertical planes. 3. All pneumatic equipment shall be provided with separate shut-off valves. Flexible polyethylene tubing shall be used on all devices mounted on hinged doors, etc. 4. A screened vent shall be provided on all enclosures using pneumatic instruments. 5. All pneumatic tubing shall be routed in separate bundles or wireways, and shall be separated from all electrical wiring by a minimum of 3-inches. C. Relays not provided under Division 16 and required for properly completing the control function specified in Division 13, Division 16, or shown on the Drawings shall be provided under this Section. D. The orientation of all devices including PLC and I/O when installed shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. No vertical orientation of PLC racks shall be allowed unless specifically indicated by the manufacturer as an acceptable mounting alternative and also approved by the ENGINEER. 2.07 INDICATOR, BAR GRAPH A. Type: Electronic bar graph; nominal 4 inch vertical scale and digital indicator. B. Operation: To accept 4-20 mA DC input signal and provide an indication of ineasured • variable on a vertical scale; microprocessor based with solid state circuitry; 101 segment bar graph and digital readout. C. Functional: 1. Input: 4-20 mA DC into 250 OHMS maximum. 2. Indication: 4 inch scale graduated in engineering units. D. Physical: 1. Case size: nominal 1 inch x 6 inch 2. Case type: dust and moisture resistant (NEMA 4X) 3. Mounting: flush panel suitable for high density mounting arrangements. E. Performance: Accuracy (bar graph) plus or minus 2.0 percent; (digital indicator) plus or minus 0.1 percent of span. F. Manufacturer(s): l. Ametek Dixson. 2. Foxboro. 6349-79520 13330-10 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3. Moore Products. 4. Equal. 2.08 DIGITAL PANEL METER A. Type: 1. Electronic, 3.5 digit, 0.56 inch high efficiency LED display. B. Operation: 1. To accept 4-20 mA DC input signal and provide indication in Engineering Units of measured variable. C. Functional: 1. Power supply: 115 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA. 2. Input: 4-20 mA DC into 100 ohms. 3. Indication: 0.56 inch LED display. D. Physical: • 1. Case size nominal 2.5 inch high by 5 inch wide by 6 inch deep. 2. Case type: watertight and dust-tight (NEMA 4X). 3. Mounting: flush panel suitable for high density mounting arrangements. E. Performance: Linear input accuracy plus or minus 0.05 percent of caiibrated span, plus or minus 1 count. F. Manufacturer(s): 1. Precision Digital. 2. Red Lion. 3. Equal. 2.09 PILOT TYPE INDICATING LIGHTS A. Type: Energy efficient Solid State LED Lamps. B. Functional: 1. Units shall be provided with low voltage LED lamps suitable for the voltage supplied. • 6349-79520 13330-11 October 2012 � ZOl2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Lights supplied with 120V AC power shall have integral reduced voltage • transformers. 3. Lamps shall be replaceable from the front of the unit. 4. Push-to-test type. C. Physical: 1. Lens color: a. Running, on, open — Red. b. Stopped, off, closed — Green. c. Alarm — Amber. d. White - Power on e. Blue - All other status indications not covered by the above f. Lens caps shall be approximately .46 inch diameter. Provide legend faceplates engraved to indicate the required function of each device; NEMA rating - 4X. D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Cutler-Hammer. • 2. Allen Bradley. 3. General Electric. 4. Square D. 5. Crouse Hinds (NEMA 7). 6. Equal. 2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS A. Type: 1. Control devices shall be heavy-duty oil tight type with stackable contact blocks. B. Functional: 1. Provide contact arrangement and switching action as required for the control system specified. 6349-79520 13330-12 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Physical: l. For 120 VAC service provide contacts rated 10 amps at 120 VAC, for 24 VDC service provide silver sliding contacts rated 5 amps at 125 VDC, for electronic (millivolU milliamp) switching provide contacts rated lamp at 28 VDC. 2. Pushbuttons shall have flush type operators. 3. Selector switches shall have knob or wing lever operators; NEMA rating - 4X; Provide legend plates denoting switch/pushbutton position/ function. D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. General Electric. 4. Square D. 5. Crouse Hinds (NEMA 7). 6. Equal. • 2.11 POTENTIOMETER A. Type: 1. Device shall be heavy-duty 30 mm oil tight type. B. Functional: 1. 270 degree dial 2. Rated for 1,000 ohms. C. Physical: 1. Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting 2. NEMA 4X rating; escutcheon plates scaled in engineering units. D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Allen Bradley Co. 2. Cutler-Hammer. 3. Square D. • 4. Equal. 6349-79520 13330-13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.12 GENERAL PURPOSE RELAYS AND TIME DELAYS A. Type: • I. General purpose plug-in type. B. Functional: 1. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the specified control function; Mechanical life expectancy shall be in excess of 10 million. 2. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation; Units shall be provided with integral indicating light to indicate if relay is energized. 3. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polariry protection (DC units) and transient protection. 4. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from .1 second to 4.5 hours. C. Physical: 1. For 120 VAC service provide contacts rated 10 amps at 120 VAC, for 24 VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 28 VDC, for electronic (milliamp/millivolt) switching applicator provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service; relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers. • D. Options/Accessories Required: 1. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks rated 300 volt and 10 amps. Z. Provide mounting rails/holders as required. E. Manufacturer(s): 1. IDEC. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. Potter & Brumfield. 4. Equal. 2.13 SIGNAL RELAY SWITCHES (CURRENT TRIPS) A. Type: 1. Solid state, ASIC technology, electronic type. 6349-79520 13330-14 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Rigl�ts Reserved B. Functional: 1. Input: 4-20 mA. 2. Output: Isolated contact output, double pole double throw, rated 5 amps at 120 VAC. 3. Accuracy: 0.1 percent. 4. Protection: Provide RFI protection. 5. Deadband: Adjustable between 01 and 5.0 percent of span. 6. Set point Adjustment: Single Point alarms shall be adjustable to trip on rising or falling input signal, dual point alarms shall be adjustable to trip on rising and falling input signals. 7. Repeatability: Trip point repeatability shall be at least 0.1 percent of span. C. Physical: 1. Mounting: DIN rail. D. Manufacturer(s): • 1. Action Instruments Slim Pak. 2. Acromag. 3. Equal. 2.14 SIGNAL ISOLATORSBOOSTERS/CONVERTERS A. Type: 1. Solid state, ASIC technology; electronic type. B. Functional: 1. Accuracy: 0.15 percent. 2. Inputs: Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance as required. 3. Outputs: Current or voltage as required. 4. Isolation_ There shall be complete isolation between input circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply_ 5. Adjustments: Zero and span adjustment shall be provided. 6. Protection: Provide RFI protection. • 6349-79520 13330-15 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Physical: � 1. Mounting: DIN Rail. D. Manufacturer(s): l. Action Instruments Slim Pak. 2. Acromag. 3. Equal. 215 SIGNAL SELECTORS, COMPUTATION, AND CONDITIONING RELAYS A. Type: 1. Solid state, ASIC technology, electronic type. B. Functional: l. Inputs: 4-20 mA. 2. Outputs: 4-20 mA. 3. Protection: Provide RFI protection. 4. Operation: The relay shall multiply, add, subtract, select, extract the square root, • or perform the specified conditioning/ computation function required. All inputs shall be able to be individually rescaled and biased as required. 5. Isolation: All inputs, outputs, and power supplies shall be completely isolated. 6. Accuracy: 0.35 percent of span. 7. Adjustments: Multi turn potentiometer for zero, span, scaling, and biasing. C. Physical: L Mounting: DIN rail. D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Action Instruments Slim Pak. 2. Acromag. 3. Equal. 6349-79520 13330-16 October 2012 • Cr` 2012 CDM Smith � A+I ilights Reserved 2.16 INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS A. Type: 1. Relays shall be of the solid state electronic type in which the energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to allow safe usage in hazardous areas. B. Options Required: 1. Relays shall match power supply provided. 2. Relays shall be located in non-hazardous areas. C. Manufacturer(s): 1. Consolidated Electric. 2. Gems Safe-Pak. 3. Warrick Controls. 4. R. Stahl, Inc. 5. Equal. • 2.17 EMERGENCY ALARM BEACON AND AUDIBLE HORN A. Beacon alarm light: 1. Type: a. Beacon alarm light. 2. Physical: a. Beacon alarm light for building exterior mounting shall be 120 VAC, flush mounted, weatherproof construction. b. A 750,000-candle power xenon strobe tube and red polycarbonate lens. 3. Manufacturer(s): a. Federal Signal. b. Equal. B. Alarm Horn: 1. Type: a. Alarm horn shall be vibrating type for 120 Volts, 60 Hz. • 6349-79520 13330-17 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Manufacturer(s): a. Federal Signal. b. Equal. 218 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS (FOR 2-WIRE TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS) A. Intrinsic safety barriers shall be passive devices requiring no external voltage supply and supplied with series resistors, series fuse and shunt zener diodes to limit the transfer of energy to levels required by intrinsically safe protection between safe and hazardous locations. B. Unit shall be Factory Mutual approved and certified for use in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 493). C. Manufacturer(s): 1. P&F. 2. Gems. 3. Unitech. � 4. Equal. 2.19 24 VDC POWER SUPPLIES . A. Provide one or more 24 VDC power supplies in the control panel to supply PLCs, field instruments, panel devices, etc., as required. Equip the power supply with a power on/off circuit breaker. B. The 24 VDC power supply shall meet the following requirements: 1. Input power: 1 I S VAC, plus or minus 10 percent, 60 Hz. 2. Output voltage: 24 VDC. 3. Output voltage adjustment: 5 percent. 4. Line regulation: 0.05 percent for 10 volt line change. 5. Load regulation: 0.15 percent no load to full load. 6. Ripple: 3 mV RMS. 7. Operating temperature: 32 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Size the 24 VDC power supply to accommodate the design load plus a minimum 25 percent spare capacity. 6349-79520 13330-18 October 2012 • � • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.20 2.21 D. Provide output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices with the power supply to protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. E. Mount the 24 VDC power supply such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other panel components. F. Manufacturer(s): Sola, or equal. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the power supplied to all microprocessor- based equipment, principally PLCs and networking equipment, within a control panel shall be protected by an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) mounted within the panel. The UPS shall prevent spikes, sags, surges, noise, and harmonics from adversely affecting digital equipment. B. UPS input and output shall be galvanically isolated from one another. Input and output power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. C. UPS shall contain internal backup batteries sufficient to allow all connected equipment to run continuously for at least 45 minutes at full load. Provide load calculations which show these requirements to be met. The battery pack shall be hot-swappable. Provide high-temperature sealed lead rype battery for mounting in outdoor panels. D. UPS shall include normally closed contact outputs for "On Battery" and "Low Battery/Fau1P' conditions, which shall be picked up by the PLC for operator notification. E. UPS units shall be UL508/1778 labeled and capable of being mounted within UL508 approved cabinets without derating. F. Provide a bypass circuit and switch that will permit the UPS to be de-energized and removed while continuing to feed 120VAC power to the panel components. Provide a contact to the PLC indicating "UPS Bypassed." G. UPS shall be Allen-Bradley 1609. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. SPARE PARTS A. General requirements for spare parts are specifed in Section 13300. B. The foltowing control panel spare parts shall be furnished: Relays and sockets - Two of each type installed. 2. Fuses and circuit breakers - 10% (minimum of 10 fuses and 2 circuit breakers) of each type and size installed. 3. Panel Mounted power supplies - one of each type installed. � 6349-79520 13330-19 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. Selector switches/pushbuttons - Two of each type installed including contact • blocks. 5. Provide touch-up paint, of each type and color used for all cabinets, panels, and consoles supplied. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The panels shall be installed at locations as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Refer to Section 13340. 3.02 TESTING A. Refer to Section 13302. END OF SECTION . 6349-79520 13330-20 October 2012 • �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 13340 INSTRUMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for instruments. B. Refer to Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300 for general submittal requirements. B. Submit complete documentation of all feld instruments using ISA-S20 data sheet formats. Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) or Index that lists all instrumentation equipment. The list shall be sorted by Loop Number. . • C. Submit a separate data sheet for each instrument that includes the following information: 1. Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the drawings 2. Product (item) name used herein and on the Drawings 3. Manufacturer's complete model number 4. Location of the device 5. Input - output characteristics 6. Range, size, and graduations in engineering units. 7. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and mounting details in sufficient detail to determine compliance with requirements. 8. Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts. 9. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable 10. Certified calibration data for all flow metering devices. 11. Two-wire or four-wire device type as applicable. • D. Submit catalog cuts for all instruments. Submit descriptive literature for each hardware component, which fully describes the units being provided. 6349-79520 13340-1 October 2012 OO 20�2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 1.05 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Test equipment: INSTRUMENT TAGS A. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as indicated in the Drawings, shall be provided on each piece of equipment supplied under this Section and related sections. Equipment shall be tagged before shipping to the site. B. Provide 1/8-in by 3/8-in, Type 316 stainless steel button head machine screws. C. All supplied instrument transmitters and instrument transmitter elements shall have a stainless steel identification tag attached to each transmitter and element prior to shipment. Tag shall be attached via stainless steel chain or stainless steel wire (24 gauge min) to a non-removable part of the device. The tag size shall be a minimum of 1.5 square inches. Tag shall include the ISA alphanumeric instrument number as indicated in the P&ID, loop, and detail drawings. The alphanumeric instrument number shall be stamped into the tag and shall have a minimum of 3l16-in high alphanumeric characters. APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER A. Flow Element Type: a. Pulsed DC type. 2. Function/Performance: a. Operating Temperahzre: Process liquid temperatures of 0 to 140 degrees F or greater, dependent upon liner; and an ambient of -30 to 150 degrees F. 6349-79520 13340-2 • � • October 2012 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � b. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) protection: RFI protection shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. c. Pressure rating: 500 psi. d. Additional: Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without damage to any component. 3. Physical: a. Metering Tube: 304 stainless steel or equivalent. b. Flanges: ANSI 1501b. or DIN PN 16 (or as required for process conditions) stainless steel flanges shall be used on all SS process pipes. c. Liner: Ceramic for sizes up to and including 6-inch or PTFE for sizes greater than 6-inch. d_ Electrodes: 316 conical stainless steel standard minimum requirements. All electrodes to be compatible with process fluid as indicated on the Drawings. For sludge, polymer, or any slurry application where the electrodes will be coated, a self cleaning or a removable electrode option must be provided with that meter. e. Housing: Meters below grade shall be suitable for submergence for up to 48 • hours to a depth of 30 ft (9m). Meters above grade shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be rated for that area. f. Finish: All external surfaces shall have a chemical and corrosion resistant finish. g. Hazardous Area Classification: FM, Class I, Division 2 Nonincendive. 4. Power Requirements: a. Meter shall be 24 VDC powered instrument, receiving its power from transmitter. 5. Accessories/Documentation Required: a. Factory calibration: All meters shall be factory calibrated. A copy of the report shall be included in the O&M manual. b. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Provide ground ring, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required. All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured and must be compatible with process fluid and with the process pipe. c. Signal cable for installation between the flowtube and the transmitter. Length shall be as required by installation indicated on the Drawings. • 6349-79520 13340-3 October 201.2 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Flow Converter/Transmitter 1. Type: a. Micro processor based, intelligent transmitter compatible with flowtube provided. b. Mounted remote from the flowtube, or integral, as shown on the Drawings. 2. Functional/Performance: a. Accuracy (including flowtube): Plus/minus 0.5 percent of flowrate. b. Operating Temperature: —20 to 140 degrees F. c. Power Requirements: 120 VAC. d. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA with HART protocol. Current output adjustable over the full range of the instrument. A dry contact rated for 120 VAC, 2A to indicate reverse flow. e. Diagnostics: Self diagnostics with on screen display of faults. f. Display: Digital indicatar displaying flow in engineering units indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. i g. Totalizer: A fully configurable totalizer integral to the transmitter. Totalized • flow shall be displayed. h. Empty Tube Zero: The transmitter shall include a feature that will lock the output at zero when no flow is detected. The empty tube zero feature shall be enabled automatically when the transmitter detects no flow or manually through a contact input. i. Provide electrode cleaning unit to match flow element requirements. j. Hazardous Area Classification: FM, Class I, Division 2 Nonincendive. 3. Physical: a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. b. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). 4. Accessories/ Required: a. Keypad where required for transmitter configuration. C. Manufacturer: 1. Endress+Hauser. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. 6349-79520 13340-4 • October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • D. Units to be Furnished by PCSS: 1. FE/FIT 113-1: Membrane No. 1 Feed Flow a. Line Size: 8 inch b. Flow Range: 0-2,000 gpm 2. FE/FIT 113-2: Membrane No. 2 Feed Flow a. Line Size: 8 inch b. Flow Range: 0-2,000 gpm 3. FE/FIT 213-1A: RO No. 1 Stage 1 Permeate Flow a. Line Size: 6 inch b. Flow Range: 0-1,000 gpm 4. FE/FIT 213-1B: RO No. 1 Stage 2 Permeate Flow a. Line Size: 4 inch b. Flow Range: 0-500 gpm • 5. FE/FIT 213-1C: RO No. 1 Concentrate Flow a. Line Size: 4 inch b. Flow Range: 0-500 gpm 6. FE/FIT 213-2A: RO No. 2 Stage 1 Permeate Flow a. Line Size: 6 inch b. Flow Range: 0-1,000 gpm 7. FE/FIT 213-2B: RO No. 2 Stage 2 Permeate Flow a. Line Size: 4 inch b. Flow Range: 0-500 gpm 8. FE/FIT 213-2C: RO No. 2 Concentrate Flow a. Line Size: 4 inch b. Flow Range: 0-500 gpm r � �� 6349-79520 13340-5 October 20:12 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.02 ULTRASONIC LEVEL/DIFFERENTIAL LEVEL METER A. Transducer l. Type a. Non-contact, ultrasonic level transducer. 2. Function/Performance a. Measuring Range: Transducer range shall be suitable for the installation indicated on the Drawings, up to 50 ft(15m). b. Temperature Range: —20 to 60 degrees C. c. Relative Humidity: Zero to 100 percent. d. Temperature Compensation: Transducers shall be provided with integral temperature sensors for temperature compensation at above temperature ranges. 3. Physical • a. Transducers shall be potted/encapsulated in a Kynar or other chemical and corrosion-resistant housing. Where indicated on the Drawings, transducers shall be approved for installation in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D • (Zone 0) environments. b. The surface of transducers shall be Teflon-coated where mounted on chemical tanks and exposed to vapors in the tanks that are not compatible with the transducer material. c. Transducers shall be capable of being completely submerged without damage. d. Transducers shall be suitable for surface, pipe, or flange mounting as indicated on the Drawings or Instrument Device Schedule. Appropriate mounting hardwired shall be provided. Flanges shall be six inch (150 mm) and resistant to attack by the medium being metered or, where required, shall be protected by corrosion- resistant coatings and facings. 4. Options/Accessories Required a. Transducers located in areas where freezing condensation may occur shall be provided with special heaters or other type of transducer protection designed to prevent sensor icing. b. Signal cable as recommended by the manufacturer, for installation between the transducer(s) and the transmitter. Length, up to 1000 feet (300 m), shall be as required by installation indicated on the Drawings. 6349-79520 13340-6 October 2012 • � 2012 CDM Smith A I1 R iglits Reserved • B. Transmitter/Converter l. Type a. Microprocessor based compatible with the transducer(s) provided. 2. Functional/Performance a. Resolution (including transducer): Plus or minus 0.1 percent of range or 0.08 inches (2 mm), whichever is greater. b. Accuracy (including transducer): Plus or minus 0.25 percent of range or 0.24 inches (6 mm). c. Range: As required by the installation indicated on the Drawings. d. Temperature Range: -20 to 50 degrees C. e. Power Requirements: 120VAC. f. Output: Minimum one isolated 4-20 mA output and minimum four alarm contacts (number of contacts above 4 required of each device to be determined by signals required as shown on the drawings adjustable to trip at any point in the instrument range. Output contacts shalI be rated 5 A at 230 VAC. • g. Temperature Compensation: Compensation over the temperature range of the sensor. h. Display: Digital indicator displaying level/differential level or volume in engineering units or percent as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. i. Diagnostics: On-screen instructions and display of self- diagnostics. j. Loss of Signal: Transmitter shall ignore momentary loss-of-echo signals and shall indicate loss of echo on the transmitter unit. k. Configuration Protection: Programmable parameters shall be protected using E2PROM. Battery backup protection alone is not acceptable. 3. Physical a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. b. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). c. Certified for hazardous areas as required. 4. Accessories Required • a. Hand-heId programmer where required for configuration and calibration of the instrument. 6349-79520 13340-7 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Manufacturer(s) . 1. Siemens Milltronics Hydroranger 200. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. D. Units to be Furnished by PCSS: 1. LE/LIT 155: Residuals Concentration Holding Tank Level a. Level Range (Elevation): 0-20 feet (90' — 70') 2. LE/LIT 211: Decant Tank No. 1 Level a. Level Range (Elevation): 0-25 feet (95' — 70') 3. LE/LIT 212: Decant Tank No. 2 Level a. Level Range (Elevation): 0-25 feet (95' — 70') 4. LE/LIT 403-1: Ground Storage Tank No. 1 Level a. Level Range (Elevation): 0-40 feet (110' — 70') 5. LE/LIT 403-2: Ground Storage Tank No. 2 Level a. Level Range (Elevation): 0-40 feet (110' — 70') 2.03 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER C � A. Type: 1. Microprocessor based, intelligent type. 2. Gauge or differential pressure type as required. B. Function/Performance: 1. Range: Range of the transmitter shall be the standard range of the manufacturer closest to the pressure range to be metered. 2. Accuracy: 0.075 percent of span. 3. Operating Temperature: -20 to 80 degrees C. 4. Temperature Effect: Combined temperature effects shall be less than 0.2 percent of maximum span per 28 degrees C temperature change. 5. Output: 4-20 mA DC linear with pressure or level, with HART protocol. Zero adjustable over the range of the instrument provided calibrated span is greater than the minimum calibrated span. 6. Stability: 0.10% for 2 years. • 6349-79520 13340-8 October 2012 . C� C 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7 8 Display: Digital indicator displaying pressure or level in the engineering units indicated in the Instrument Device Schedule. Diagnostics: a. b. c. Self-diagnostics with transmitter failure driving output to above or below out of range limits. Simulation capability for inputs and loop outputs. Test terminals available to ease connection far test equipment without opening the loop. d. Registers to record minimum and maximum pressure and temperatures transmitter has been exposed to shall be available. e. Run-time clock available to determine usage for warranty purposes. 5-year warranty on this clock reading is included. 9. Over Range Protection: Provide positive over range protection to 150 percent of the maximum pressure of the system being monitored by the instrument. 10. If required to meet the range or suppression/elevation requirements, a differential pressure transmitter shall be provided. C. Physical: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP66), explosion proof, approved for Class I, Division l, Groups C and D(EEx d IIC TS). 2. Process Wetted Parts: Isolating diaphragm and other wetted metal parts shall be 316L stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated in the device schedule. Gaskets and O-rings shall be Teflon. 3. Power Supply: 24 VDC loop power. 4. Sensor Fill Fluid: Silicone. D. Accessories Required: 1. Provide span and zero adjustment at each transmitter and through the handheld programming unit. Configuration of the transmitter may be accomplished using the local display and pushbuttons without the use of an external programming device. 2. For each transmitter provide a 316 stainless steel block & bleed shut off valve. Valves may be mounted directly to the instrument or separately mounted. Valves shall be by the instrument manufacturer or by D/A Manufacturing or Anderson Greenwood. E. Manufacturer(s): � 1. Rosemount 2051 series. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. 6349-79520 13340-9 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved F. Units to be Furnished by PCSS: l. PIT 105: Blended Water Pump Station Discharge Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-50 psig 2. PIT-120: Concentrate Pump Station Discharge Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-] 50 psig 3. PIT 208-1: Cartridge Filter Discharge Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-100 psig 4. PIT 208-2: Cartridge Filter Suction Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-100 psig 5. PIT 213-IA: RO No. 1 Interstage Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-200 psig 6. PIT 213-1B: RO No. 1 Stage 1 Permeate Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-100 psig 7. PIT 213-1C: RO No. 1 Combined Permeate Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-50 psig 8. PIT 213-2A: RO No. 2 Interstage Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-200 psig 9. PIT 213-2B: RO No. Z Stage 1 Permeate Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-100 psig 10. PIT 2l 3-2C: RO No. 2 Combined Permeate Pressure a. Pressure Range: 0-50 psig 2.04 TURBIDIMETER A. Type: Microprocessor-based continuous-reading instrument using scattered-light or four-beam ratiometric technologies to measure water turbidity. B. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: plus or minus 5 percent of reading or plus or minus 0.2 NTU, whichever is greater. • • 6349-79520 13340-10 October 2012 • • C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. Repeatability: plus or minus 1 percent or plus or minus 0.04 NTU, whichever is greater. 3. Resolution: 0.01 NTU. 4. Range: 0 to 1000 NTU, minimum. 5. Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 degrees C. 6. Output: Minimum of one 4-20 mA isolated output adjustable over the full instrument range, and 2 programmable SPDT alarm contacts rated for SA at 230 VAC. 7. Display: Digital indicator displaying turbidity in NTUs. C. Physical: 1. Suitable for surface mounting. 2. Power requirements: 120 VAC/60 Hz. 3. Turbidimeter control units shall have corrosion resistant enclosures certified NEMA 4X. Sample unit enclosures shall be NEMA 12. D. Accessories Required: 1. Bubble trap and head regulator to vent entrained air bubbles from the sample and maintain regulated sample flow. 2. Spare lamp for turbidimeter with incandescent light sources. 3. All cables and connectors required for a fully operational turbidimeter. 4. One year supply of consumables for calibration. 5. Standardization plates or optical cube for verification of calibration without use of consumables. E. Manufacturer(s): 1. Hach 1720e or Ultraturb, as required, with sc200 Controller. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. F. Units to be Furnished by PCSS: 1. AE/AIT 209: Membrane Feedwater Turbidity 6349-79520 a. Scale: 0-2 NTU 13340-11 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.05 CONDUCTNITY SENSOR A. Type: Taroidal electrodeless B. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: 0.01 % of reading, all ranges 2. Flow: Rate 3 m(10 ft.) per second, maximum 3. Range: 200 µS/cm - 2000000 mS/cm 4. Operating Temperature: -10 to 200 degrees C(Sensor limited by body material) C. Physical: 1. Sensor Body Material: Polypropylene 2. Wetted Materials: Polypropylene, PVDF, PEEK, or PFA Teflon D. Manufacturer(s): 1. Hach. No like, equivalent, or substitution is permitted. E. Units to be Furnished by PCSS: 1. AE/AIT 213-IA: RO No. 1 Interstage Conductivity 2. AE/AIT 213-1B: RO No. 1 Stage 2 Permeate Conductivity 3. AE/AIT 213-1C: RO No. 1 Stage 1 Permeate Conductivity 4. AE/AIT 213-1D: RO No. 1 Concentrate Conductivity 5. AE/AIT 213-2A: RO No. 2 Interstage Conductivity 6. AE/AIT 213-2B: RO No. 2 Stage 2 Permeate Conductivity 7. AE/AIT 213-2C: RO No. 2 Stage 1 Permeate Conductivity 8. AE/AIT 213-2D: RO No. 2 Concentrate Conductivity 2.06 FLOAT SWITCHES A. Type 1. Mercury free ball float switch. B. Function/Performance 1. Differential: Less than 8 inch. 6349-79520 13340-12 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved 2. Switch Ratmg: 1 amps at 120 VAC or 100 VA @ 120 VAC 3. Provide NO or NC type contact for fail-safe operation per section 13300-2.0 ].F or as shown on the drawings. C. Physical 1. Float: 3l 6 stainless steel, Teflon or non-stick coating, minimum 5 in diameter. 2. Totally encapsulated switch. 3. Cable shall be heavy-duty, PVC or equivalent jacketed integral to float. D. Options/Accessories Required 1. Provide stainless steel hardware. 2. Lead wire shall be a waterproof cable of sufficient length so that no splice or junction box is required in the vault. 3. Provide cast-aluminum weatherproof junction box outside the sump pit with terminals for all floats and tapped as required for conduit connections. E. Manufacturer(s): • ] . Mettler Toledo 2. Hach with sc200 Controller 3. Siemens Water Technologies Model 9G-EF 4. Anchor Scientific SST-NM • F. Units to be Furnished by ISS: 1. LSL-152: Manhole Level a. Elevation:67' 2.07 PRESSURE GAUGE A. Type: 1. Bourdon tube actuated dial face pressure gauge. B. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.0 percent of span or better. 6349-79520 13340-13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. Physical: 1. Case: Phenolic shock resistant or type 316 stainless steel for surface/stem mounting with a pressure relieving back. The case shall be vented for temperature/atmospheric compensation. Gauge shall be callable of being liquid filled in the field or at the factory. 2. Window: Clear acrylic or shatter proof glass. 3. Bourdon tube: Stainless steel. 4. Connection: 1/4 in. NPT. 5. Gauge size: 2.5-in. viewable. 6. Pointer travel: Not less than 200 degrees not more than 270-degree arc. 7. Range: As indicated in the instrument device schedule. Range may include inches of water vacuum. u D. Accessories/Options Required: 1. Shutoff valve: Each gauge shall have a process shutoff valve that can also be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. 2. Special scales: Engineer reserves the right to require special scales and/or • calibration if the manufacturer's standard is not suitable for the application. 3. Liquid fill: All gauges mounted outdoors or in areas of high vibration shall be filled with transparent inert fluid appropriate to the operating temperature. E. Manufacturer(s): 1. Ashcroft 2. Ametek/LTS Gauge 3. Or equal. F. Units to be Provided by PCSS: 1. PG-102D-A: Raw Water Booster Pump No. 4 Suction Pressure a. Range: 50 psig 2. PG-102D-B: Raw Water Booster Pump No. 4 Discharge Pressure a. Range: 100 psig 3. PG-104: Raw Water Booster Pump Station Discharge Pressure a_ Range: 50 psig 6349-79520 13340-14 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 4. PG-105: Blended Water Pump No. 4 Discharge Pressure a. Range: 100 psig 5. PG-111-1A and 2A: Membrane Feed Pump No. i& 2 Suction Pressure a. Range: 100 psig 6. PG-111-1B and 2B: Membrane Feed Pump No. 1& 2 Discharge Pressure a. Range: 300 psig 2.08 SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES A. General requirements for spare parts are specified in Section 13300. B. The following fieId Instrument related Spare Parts shall be furnished: 1. One spare pressure gauge of each range supplied. C. The following accessories shall be furnished: 1. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided. • 2. Provide instrument tags as detailed in this Section. 3. Provide sunshades as required by location, in accordance with Section 13300. • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 13300. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 13340-15 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK i • 6349-79520 13340-16 October2012 • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 13521 FILTER MEDIA REPLACEMENT PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to remove the existing filter media and replace with new anthracite, sand, and gravel filter media in the existing dual media pressure filter beds for Filters No. 1, 2, 3, and 4 at the City of Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1, as specified herein, and as directed. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the satisfactory operation of the existing filters during media replacement and for disinfection of the filters after media replacement. B. The work described in this section shall be bid as an Additive Alternate bid item as described in Section 0I025 and shall be performed only if the OWNER elects to include this work in the contract. C. The Supplier of the filter media shall be responsible for its proper installation and oversight of the media replacement. D. The filtration system at the City of Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 consists of four (4) • dual media pressure filters. Each of the four pressure filters provides approximately l l3 square feet of filter area in plan view. The anthracite depth in each filter shall be a total depth of 38 inches (existing is 18 inches). The sand depth in each filter shall be a total depth of l2 inches (existing is 32 inches). The gravel depth in each filter shall be a total depth of 34 inches (existing is 34 inches) with manufacturer recommended gravel gradations in increments as specified herein. • E. The replacement filter media shall be as manufactured by F.B. Leopold Co., Inc., Zelienople, Pennsylvania, Red Flint Sand and Gravel Company, Eau Claire, Wisconsin, Unifilt Corparation Wilkes Barre, Pennsylvania, Midwest Filter Rehab Specialists, Oshkosh, Wl, or equal. The installation shall be as shown on the Drawings and the Manufacturer shall be required to submit to the Engineer an installation drawing. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division l, General Requirements. B. Concrete wark is included in Division 3. C. Painting is included in Section 09902. D. Instrumentation, except as specified herein, is included in Division 13. E. Valves, piping, and appurtenances, except as specified herein, are included in Division 15. F. Electrical work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 16. 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/2012 13521-1 TPA OTpasvNl�sedCLWATEPoRO 1 Plant ExDansion ProjecNssued ro&d Specs\73521.doac �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. The filter media anthracite, sand and support gravel shall be capable of sustained operation at a filtration rate of up to 7.5 gpm per square foot of filter area, filtering chlorinated well water without excessive use of backwash water, undue rate of head loss buildup, or rapid turbidity breakthrough. B. The anthracite, sand and gravel filter media for Filters No. 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be removed and replaced with new filter media as described herein and as defined in AWWA B]00-09, Granular Filter Materiat. C. An acid wash shall be included in the bid and shall be performed using a 2% solution of inhibited hydrochloric acid and as defined in AWWA B100-09, Granular Filter Material. Disposal ofthe spent acid wash solution shall be included in the bid price. ].04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Filter Media Supplier 1. The Contractor shall furnish the filter media from a firm regularly engaged in supplying this type of material. The Contractor shall be prepared to document the filter media supplier's technicai competence and experience in providing the filter media specified herein. All media shall be obtained from a source acceptable to the Engineer and from the same supplier for each media type. B. Rejection of Fi}ter Media 1. Failure of the filter media to meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.0] for anthracite, Paragraph 2.02 for Sand, and Paragraph 2.03 for Gravel, shall be cause for rejection. Filter media which has been delivered to the site and which does not meet the specified requirements shall be removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at the Contractor's expense. Filter media upon delivery to the site, sha11 be tested for compliance to the requirements listed in Part 2. Filter media shall not be installed in each filter until this testing has occurred. C. Filter Media lnstallation ]. The filter media shall be installed by the filter media supplier's trained representative, or under his supervision, who is qualified and experienced in the installation requirements for filter media in a pressure filter. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Proper operation of the filters requires very careful selection of the relative sizes of the various media. Before shipment of the media, submit to the Engineer for review, certified analyses from an approved independent testing laboratory for the media. An affidavit of compliance with applicable provisions ofAWWA B100-09 shall be provided. B. The certified laboratory analyses shall be in accordance with AWWA B100-09 (Section 5.2.3) and include the following information for the submitted material. l. Average specific gravity (apparent). 2. Total percentage of material passing each sieve. 3. Total percentage of material retained on each sieve. 4. A plot on probability paper, showing the cumulative percent by weight of the material passing through the sieve size opening. 5. Effective size. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 IJJ2�-2 TPA\1TpasvAl�seclCLWATER1R01RaMExpansionProjecNSSUedloBitlSpecs113521.docx � • • . • • �O 2012 CDM Smith Ail Rights Reserved 6. Uniformity coefficient. 7. Acid solubility. 8. Anthracite Moh hardness. 9. Visual sphericity. C. No material shall be shipped to the site of the Work until such material is accepted by the Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to conduct independent tests to verify conformity of the media to these Specifications. D. After delivery to the site, but before placing the media, the Contractor, under the Engineer's supervision, shall take random test samples of the media to be tested by a laboratory approved by the Engineer in accardance with Specification Section 01410. Failure of the samples to meet the Specifications shall be cause of rejections in accordance with Paragaph 1.04B. No plus or minus tolerances shall be allowed on any uniformity coefficients. E. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0] ANTHRACITE FILTER MED1A A. All media shall comply with the standards of AWWA Specification B-100-09, Granular Filter Material. Filter media shall be as furnished by the F. B. Leopold Co., Inc. Zelienople, Pennsylvania, Red Flint Sand and Gravel Company, Eau Claire, Wisconsin, Unifilt Corporation Wilkes Barre, Pennsylvania, or equal B. Anthracite l. The top layer of the filter shall consist of specifically selected and graded anthracite media with a final depth, after backwashing and skimming, of 38 inches. 2. The Anthracite shall be crushed anthracite coal having an effective size of 0.60 mm to 0.80 mm, a maximum uniformity coefficient of l.65 and a specific gravity of not less than 1.4 nor greater than 1.65 and shall be clean and free from slate, dust, dirt, and foreign matter of any kind as it is placed on the filters. The average hardness shall be 2.7 to 4.0 on the Moh scale. 3. Anthracite meeting the above requirements shall be purchased from a supplier meeting the requirements of Paragraph 1.04A. 2.02 SAND A. Filter sand shall be composed of hard, durable grains, free of clay, loam, dirt, and organic matter. B. The acid solubility of the sand shall not exceed 5% by weight, using method specified under AWWA BI00-09. C. The filter sand shall have an effective size of not less than 0.45 millimeter and not more than 0.55 millimeter with a uniformity coefficient less than or equal to 1.5 and a specific gravity of not less than 2.5. D. The depth of filter sand in the filters after washing shall be not less than ] 2 inches. 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 13521-3 TPA\\Tpasvr011xc\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansian Rojecillssued to Bid Specs\13521.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.03 GRAVEL A. Gravel shail be obtained from an approved source and shall consist of hard, rounded stones with an average specified gravity of not less than 2.5. Not more than 0.5% by weight of the material sha11 have a specific gravity of 2.0. B. The gravel shall contain not more than 2% by weight of thin, flat, or elongated pieces (pieces in which the largest dimension exceeds five times the smallest dimension), determined by hand picking; and shall be free of shale, mica, clay, sand, loam, and organic impurities of any kind. C. The acid solubility of the gravel shall not exceed ] 0% by weight for sizes 3/8 inch or larger and not more than 5% by weight for the gravel smaller than 3/8 inch, using method specified under AWWA B100-09. D. The gravel shall be screened to proper sizes and placed in the filter in layers as specified herein and the gravel within each layer shall be uniformly graded. Gravel over'/4 inch in diameter may be screened through wire screens with square openings or plates with round openings. Wire screens shall be used for sizes smaller than '/4 inch. Not more than 8% of the weight of any layer shall be finer or coarser than the limits specified for that layer. E. Gravel Gradation Size Range (inches) 1/8 x No. ] 2 3 1/4 x 1/8 1/2 x 1/4 3/4 xl/2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0] GRAVEL INSTALLATION Depth (inches) 3 3 25 A. The pressure filter shall be thoroughly cleaned before any gravel is placed, and shall be kept clean throughout the operation. Gravel made dirty in any way shall be removed and replaced with clean gravel. The bottom layer shall be placed carefully by hand to avoid movement of the underdrain system and to assure a free passage of water from the orifices. Each layer shall be completed before the next layer above is started. For materials less than '/z inch in diameter, the workman shall not stand or walk directly upon the gravel, but upon boards which will sustain the weight of the workmen without displacing the gravel. Any gravel becoming mixed shall be removed and replaced as herein specified. B. The correct thickness of each layer shall be obtained as follows; Before the gravel is placed, the top of each layer shall be marked on the side of the filter. The filter material shall be within f.5 inches of the water surface, with the area of material above and below the surface within ] 0% of each other. 3.02 SAND INSTALLATION A. Sand shall be transported and placed carefully to prevent contamination of any sort, and sand made dirty before or after placing shall be replaced with clean sand. Sand shall be placed in the filter, preferably through water, so as not to disturb the top layer of gravel, and shall be finished off smooth to the proper elevation. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 13521-4 TPA\\Tpasvr0l�sec\CLWATERIRO 7 PMn[ Expansion PmjeclUssued W Bid Specs\735N.docY C� • • u • • �O 2012 CDM Smith A I I i� i�hts Reserved B. T'he final depth of sand shall be 12 inches (including up to 9/] 6 inch of sand removed by skimming or scrapping). The depth of sand shall be measured after the sand has been backwashed three times, at a rate to give 30% expansion of the sand, and then allowed to compact by closing the backwash valve slowly. Final closure of the valve from the opening that gives 10% expansion shall extend over not less than 30 seconds. Up to the top, 3/16-inch thick layer of any very fine material shall be scraped off after each washing and before final measurement. C. After the sand has been backwashed three (3) times and the fines scraped off, a 38-inch layer of crushed anthracite coal shall be placed on top of the sand, as described herein. 3.03 ANTHRACITE COAL INSTALLATION A. The media system shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's specific detailed instructions, and the Manufacturer shall provide supervision of the installation for the first filter to ensure proper compliance with installation specifications by the Contractor's forces on subsequent filter installations. Extreme care shall be exercised in the piacing of all filter media to avoid damage or displacement of the filter bottom or previously placed media. B. Installation of Anthracite: l. The anthracite media should be placed with the filter partially filled with water. The media shall be placed in a gentle manner so as to avoid any degradation of the media. Place the anthracite to approximately 1 Y2 inches above the mark and slowly fill the filter upward through the underdrain to remove air from the bed. The filter shall then be backwashed at a slow rate in 3 gpm/square feet increments for 3 to 5 minutes at each rate to remove entrapped air and up to 7.5 gpm/square foot until the water becomes clear. After draining of the filter, the top '/z—inch of the anthracite shall be skimmed with a shovel to remove fines and trash. Again, platforms shall be utilized for laborers. Additional anthracite shall be placed to bring the media up to the desired depth. 2. The filter should be slowly refilled, backwashed far at least 15 minutes and the fines skimmed again two more times. 3. The Contractor shall take an anthracite auger core boring sample from each filter bay and perform a sieve analysis for each filter bay sample to indicate compliance with the specified media characteristics. 4. At this point the filter media is complete and ready for disinfection and operation. 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The media Supplier shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced representative who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the equipment for a period of four (4) days in two separate visits to inspect the installed eyuipment, supervise the initial test run, and to provide instructions to the plant personnel. 3.05 DISINFECTION A. After placement of the anthracite media, but before the filters are placed in service, the entire depth of filter, media and underdrain system in each filter shall be disinfected according to the following procedure: 1. With all other filter valves closed, the filter shall be filled with water from the backwash system while simultaneously adding sufficient disinfectant (chlorine sotution or sodium hypochlorite) to the incoming water to maintain a level of 50 mg/1 of free chlorine in the filter box. 63 49-795 20/ 10/09/2012 1 3 SG 1—J TPA\\TDasvrOtlsec\CLWATER�RO 1 PFan[ Expansion PrqeclUSSUed ro Bid Specs113521.AOCx c0 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. The backwa.sh valve shall then be closed and the disinfectant allowed to remain in the fiiter. • The water level shall be maintained to the top ofthe filter for not less than twenty-four (24) hours. 3. Upon completion of disinfection, the filter contents sha11 be backwashed to waste until acceptable chlorine residual and bacteriological quality as determined by the Engineer are measured, af'ter which the filter shall be filled with pretreated water and put into normal service. The Contractor sha}1 provide representative samplers to the Engineer for testing in the laboratory at the water plant by the Owner. lf acceptable bacteriological quality is not obtained, the disinfection of the filter by the Contractor shall be repeated as directed by the Engineer until acceptable quality is obtained. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF MEDIA A. Media that is removed, wasted or spilled from or at the existing water plant and not intended for reuse shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an appropriate manner off-site. END OF SECTION � � 6349-79520/10/09l2012 13521-6 TPA\1Tpasvi0lkec\CLWATER1R01PoaMExpa�onProjecNsauedtoBidSpecs\13521.docx c0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON P1PE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL l A 1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, install, and test ductile iron pipe and fittings for mechanical piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Mechanical piping shall include all piping and fittings installed above grade or in structures and shall exclude yard (buried) piping. Buried piping shall be as specified in Section 02616. C. Mechanical piping shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Provide pipe supports, hangers and couplings as required to achieve a complete pipe system. D. Where the word "pipe" is used, it shall refer to pipe, fittings, or appurtenances unless otherwise noted. 1.02 RELATED WORK • A. Valves and Appurtenances are included in Section 15100. B. Field Painting is included in Section 09902. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section O1300, shop drawings and product data required to establish compliance with the Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Product data for all pipe materials and fittings proposed for use on the project. 2. Tabulated layout drawings showing actual pipe lengths, diameters, fittings and appurtenances. 3. Prior to shipment of pipe, submit a certified affidavit of compliance from the pipe MANUFACTURER stating that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coatings for this project have been manufactured and tested in accordance AWWA and ASTM standards and requirements specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A377 - Standard Index for Specification for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe 2. ASTM CI50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) I. ANSI B 1.I - Unified lnch Screw Threads (I1N and tJNR Thread Form). 2. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 3. ANSI B182 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series Including Hex Cap Screws and • Lag Screws. 6349-79520/10/09/12 �5062�1 TPANTpawNllsec\CLWATER�R01PIaMFxparrsionProjecNssuedto&dSpecs\15062.docx c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) • l. AWWA C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-lron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C1 ]0 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-In Through 48-In (75mm Through 1200mm) for Water and Other Liquids. 3. AWWA C1 I 1- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 4. AWWA C115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges. 5. AWWA CI50 - Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 6. AWWA Cl5] - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other Liquids. 7. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 8. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 9. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each length of ductile iron pipe supplied for the project shall be hydrostatically tested at the point of manufacture to 500 psi far a duration of l 0 seconds per A W WA C 151. Testing may be performed prior to machining bell and spigot. Failure of ductile iron pipe shall be defined as any rupture of the pipe wall. Certified test results shall be furnished in duplicate to the ENGINEER prior to time of shipment. B. All ductile-iron pipe and fittings to be installed under this project shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. • Furnish in duplicate to the ENGINEER sworn certificates of such tests and their results prior to the shipment of the pipe. C. All pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant for compliance with this Section by an independent testing laboratory selected by the OWNER, at the OWNER's expense. D. Inspection of the pipe and fittings will also be made by the ENGINEER or representative of the OWNER after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specified requirements, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job. E. All pipe and fittings shall be permanently marked with the following information: 1. MANUFACTURER, date. 2. Size, type, class, or wall thickness. 3. Standard produced to (AWWA, ASTM, etc}. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Division Ol for general requirements. B. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Under no circumstances shall the pipe be dropped or skidded against each other. Slings, hooks, or pipe tongs shall be padded and used in such a manner as to prevent damage to the • exterior surface or internal lining of the pipe. 6349-79520/10/09/12 15�62-2 TPAlttpasrAi�sec\CLWATER1R01PlantEzpa�ionProjectllssuedtoBidSpecs115062.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. Materials, if stored, shall be kept safe from damage. The interior of all pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept free from dirt or foreign matter at all times. D. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by its MANUFACTURER. The bottom tier shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, ar concrete. Stacking shall conform to MANUFACTURER's recommendations. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe l_ Ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA Cl IS and C110. Flanged pipe shall be Class 53 as per AWWA C150. Pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths as much as possible. 2. Ductile iron pipe shall be as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, ]nc.; American Cast Iron Pipe Company or equal. B. Joints 1. Ductile iron pipe shall have flanged or grooved joints. Flanges shall be flat face type, unless otherwise noted, with drilling to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125. 2. Flange gasket shall be full face type SBR per AWWA C11 l to provide positive sealing for the flanged ductile iron joints. Thickness shall be ]/8-in unless otherwise indicated. 3. Assembly bolts shall be square headed ASTM A242 Cort-Ten bolts with hexagon nuts per ANSI B18.2. Thread shall conform to ANSI B1.1. Bolt length shall be such that after joints . are assembled, the bolts shall protrude through the nuts, but not more than l/2-in. 4. Flanged coupling adaptors shall be per Specification Section 15100. • C. Fittings 1. Pipe fittings shall be flanged ductile iron. Fittings sha11 meet the reyuirements ofAWWA Cl 10 as applicable. Fittings shall have the same pressure rating, as a minimum, ofthe connecting pipe. D. Interior Lining 1. Ductile iron pipe shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104. The cement shall be per ASTM C 15. 2. Fittings shall be furnished with a factory-applied fusion-bonded epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C116. Epoxy shall have NSF Standard 6l approval. E. Exterior Coatings l. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed exterior ferrous surfaces shall be shop primed and field painted with an applicable paint system as specified under Division 9. Surface preparation and application thereof shall be in conformance with applicable provisions of Division 9. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports 1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be provided at suitable distance along the pipeline regardless whether they are shown or not shown on the Drawings. 2. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as specified in Section 15094. 6349-79520/10/09/12 I5062-3 TPA\\TpasvAt�sec\CLWATERIROtPlant6pansionProjeclUUUedMBidSpeca115062.dov �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General I. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported. Anchorage shall be provided where required. Any damage to linings shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER before the pipe is installed. Each length of pipe shall be cleaned out before installation. All of MANUFACTURER's recommendations shall be complied with. 2. The deflection at joints shall not exceed that recommended by the pipe MANiJFACTURER. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided, if required, in areas where conflict exists with the existing facilities. 3. When pipe cutting is acceptable to the ENGINEER, the cutting shall be done by abrasive saw, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Any damage to the lining shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Field cut ends shall be sealed with approved epoxy in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions. 4. Ductile iron and fittings shall be installed in accordance with requirements of AW WA C600 modified. • B. Jointing l. Flanged joints shall be made using gaskets, bolts, bolt studs with a nut on each end, or studs with nuts where the flange is tapped. The number and size of bolts shall conform to the same ANSI Standard as the flanges. 2. Bolts in flanged joints or mechanical joints shall be tightened alternately and evenly. 3. Sleeve type couplings and grooved joints using split ring couplings shall be installed in • accordance with the procedures recommended by their respective MANUFACTURERS. C. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When MANUFACTURERS have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, submit a certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. D. Sleeves of proper size shall be installed for all pipes passing through floors ar walls. Sleeves shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or required for liquid or gas-tighmess, the pipe shall be sealed with a mechanical seal similar to Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, or equal. E. Sleeves and wall pipes shall have thrust collar located at the mid-depth of wall. F. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed as recommended by the MANUFACTURER as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and their locations verified from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. 3.02 TESTING A. All piping shall be subject to acceptance tests. Provide all necessary utilities, labor and equipment for flushing and testing and dispose all waste after the test including water. B. All pipe and fittings shall be pressure tested in accordance with Section 01445 and 02616. • 6349-79520/10/09/12 15062—Y TPA1\Tpasvr011seclCLWATER1R01PoaMFsparsionProjecNSSUeAtoBidSpea115062.dop� c0 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved • C. Correct any leakage and repair any damage to the pipe and pipe appurtenances or to any structures resulting from, or caused by tests. All leaks shall be repaired and ]ines retested. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all of the pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, or other material which may have entered during the construction period. All debris shall be removed from the pipeline. The lowest segment outlet shall be flushed last to assure debris removal. 3.04 PIPE PAINTING MARKING A. All exposed ductile iron pipe shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09902. Paint colors shall be as follows: ]. Raw, partially-treated, or recycle — Olive Green 2. Finished or potable water — Dark Blue 3. Spent backwash — Light Brown 4. Sanitary sewer — Dark Grey B. All exposed piping, exterior and interior, shall be identified by legend markers, directional arrow markers and number markers as required. Pipe marking colors shall contrast with pipe color for ease of visibility. Pipe marking shall match the existing markings. Letters and markers l-]/8-in in width shall be installed on pipes under 3-in in diameter. Markers 2-l/2-in in width shall be installed on pipes 3-in in diameter and larger. Legend markers, directional arrow markers and • number markers shall be placed as directed by the ENGINEER. Markers shall be located where pipes pass through walls or floors, at piping intersections and maximum ] 5-ft spacing on piping runs. • END OF SECTION 6349-79520/10/09/12 15�62�5 TPA\\TpasvNllsec\CLWATER�RO1PIaMFxpaemianProjecMlssuedtoBidSpecn\15062.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C� (TH1S PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) • r � � 6349-79520/ 10/09/ 12 15062-6 TPA\1TpasvrOtlseelCLWATER�RO 7 Plant E�cpermion ProjecNssued to Bid Speca\150G2.docx • C� • �O 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 15064 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and instali 1/8-in to 6-in non-buried plastic piping and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Buried piping is included under Division 2. B. Concrete work is included in Division 3. C. Valves and Appurtenances are included in Section 15100. D. Pipe Hangers and Supports are included in Section ] 5094. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section O] 300, shop drawings and product data reyuired to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Shop drawings including piping layouts and schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall include dimensioning, fittings, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. 2. Shop drawing submittals for piping under this Section shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems. All dimensions shall be based on the actual equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layout for each piping submittal. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International. 1. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chlaride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2. ASTM DI785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3. ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter. 4. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chlaride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 5. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 6. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 7. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PWC) Plastic Piping Systems. 8. ASTM D2657 - Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings. 6349-79520/10/09/2012 � S O V`t-1 TPA \1TpasvNllaec\GLWATER1R01 Plant Expa�ion ProjecNssued to Bid S p e C S� 1 5 O 6 4. d � C X c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyi Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste • and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 10. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 11. ASTM D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Piastic Pipe and Tubing. 12. ASTM D331 1- Standard Specification for Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns. l3. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 14. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket - Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 15. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ] 6. ASTM F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 17. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 18. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. l9. ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. B. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1. PPI TR31 - Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping. C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plastic pipe and fittings of each type shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is experienced in the manufacture of the items to be furnished; however, it shall not be a requirement that the pipe and fittings be manufactured by the same manufacturer, provided that the pipe and fittings are compatible in both compounding and size. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall be suitable for the intended service. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings. B. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of plastic pipe and fittings for use in transporting wastewater, water, air and chemicals. • C� 6349-79520/10/09/2012 15064-2TPAl\Tpaswr011sec\CLWATER�RO i PlantF�cpansionProjecNssuetlm Bid S�ieCS � 15O 6'Y . dOCX � � � � � J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��,hts Reserved PART' 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings — PVC 1. Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B in accordance with ASTM D1785, PVC 1 120. The pipe shall have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2,000 psi at 73 degrees F and shall be suitable for field cutting and solvent welding. Pipe shall be of the sizes as shown on the Drawings and shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown. 2. Fittings shall be the socket type for solvent welded joints conforming to ASTM D2467 or ASTM D2466 where Schedule 40 pipe is shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be manufactured from PVC compound meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. Solvent cement shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. 3. Pipe, fittings and solvent for use with potable water shall be certified by NSF in accordance with NSF Standard No. 14 and the seal shall be included on the pipe. B. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste and Vent Service (DWV). 1. Pipe shall be manufactured from PVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B in accordance with ASTM D2665. The patterns, dimensions and laying lengths of fittings including adapters shall meet the requirements of ASTM D331 1. Solvent cement for joining DWA pipe and fittings shall be as specified in ASTM D2564. C. Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Pipe and fittings — CPVC 1. Pipe shall be manufactured from CPVC compounds meeting ASTM D1784, Class 23447 in accordance with ASTM F441, CPVC 4120. The pipe sha11 have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2000 psi at 73 degrees F and 500 psi at l 80 degrees F and shall be suitable for field cutting and solvent welding. Pipe shall be of the sizes as shown on the Drawings and shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown. 2. Fittings shall be socket type for solvent weld joints conforming to ASTM F439 or ASTM F438 where Schedule 40 pipe is shown on the Drawings. Fittings shal) be manufactured from CPVC compound meeting ASTM D1784, Class 23447. Solvent cement shall be as specified in ASTM F493. D. Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings — HDPE ]. Pipe shall be manufactured from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) base resin conforming to Grade P34 (PPI PE3406 or better) in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2447. The pipe shall have a minimum hydrostatic design stress of 630 psi at 73 degrees F and be suitable for field cutting and heat fusion joining. Pipe shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown. 2. Fittings shall be the butt type for heat fusion joints conforming to ASTM D3261, except that Schedule 80 fittings shall meet the sustained pressure test conditions as specified for Schedule 80 pipe in Table 3 of ASTM D2447. Fittings shall be manufactured from the same HDPE base resin, conforming to Grade P34, Class C(PPI PE3406 or better), as is used to produce the pipe to which the fittings are to be joined. Both pipe and fittings shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer to assure compatibility of the piping system components. E. Threaded joints shall be as specified under the applicab}e ASTM standard for the pipe and fittings being used. Thread sealer shall be thread tape which shall be standard industrial quality Teflon, Type l. 6349-79520/ 10/09/20l 2 l 5064-37PA \\Tpasvr0/lseciCLWA7ERlR0 1 Plant Evpermion ProjecRlssued to Bid S�Je C S� 1 5 O 6 4. do c x CO 2012 CDM Smith Al) Rights Reserved F. Flanged Joints � 1. Where flanged joints are shown on the Drawings, they shall be supplied with 1/8-in thick full-faced EPDM gaskets or equal. 2. Flange bolt spacing, number and dimensions shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B] 6.5. CPVC and PVC flanges shall be suitable for solvent cementing to the pipe and shall be suitable for a minimum pressure of l SO psi_ 3. Bolts, nuts and washers for flanged joints shall be for corrosive service conditions and shall be ASTM F593 and F594, Type 316 stainless steel. Anti-seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be of a molybdenum disulfide base such as Molycoat-G or equal. G. Fittings, specials, unions and flanges shall be of the same schedule number and manufactured of the same materials as the pipe. Whenever unions are called out on the Drawings, flanged connections may be substituted, provided that dimensional controls do not preclude use of flanges. H. Expansion joints for PVC and CPVC sizes l/2-in to 6-in shall be telescoping type as manufactured by Plastinetics, Inc.; ASAHI/America or equal. Expansion in pipes smaller than 1/2-in shall be accommodated with expansion loops. 2A2 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATING A. All PVC and CPVC piping and fittings exposed to sunlight shall have its surface prepared and be shop painted as specified in Section 09901. Field finish painting is included in Section 09902. B. Painting will not be required on HDPE pipe or for PVC or CPVC pipe located indoors. However, marking the pipe to indicate normal direction of flow and the fluid being transported in • accordance with the marking schedule included in Section 09902 shall be required. Marking systems consisting of mylar/aluminum sandwich sheets held in place by mastic or adhesive compounds which are compatible with the HDPE resin, PVC, or CPVC, used to manufacture the pipe shall be used to identify pipe contents and direction of flow. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.O1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of plastic pipe shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. B. Joints for PVC and CPVC pipe shall be solvent cemented unless flanged or threaded are otherwise shown on the Drawings or are specified as other types herein. In making solvent cemented connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth to remove any shoulder or burrs created by cutting of the pipe. Solvent cement joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D2855 except that solvent cement formulated especially for and as specified above shall be used for joining CPVC pipe and fittings. Primer shall be used whenever recommended by the pipe, fitting, or cement manufacturer and in all cases for joints on pipe systems 4-in in diameter or larger. Making solvent cement joints shall not be performed and the work shall stop when the temperature, measured in the shade, is 40 degrees F and falling. C. Joints between PVC drain, waste and vent pipe and cast-iron soil pipe sha11 be made with approved mechanical compression joints designed for such use. • 6349-79520/ 10/09/2012 I S 064-4TPA 1Upasvr011secVCLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expansion PrqeciJaued to Bid S rJ e C S� 1 5 O 6 4. d O C X • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Joints for HDPE pipe shall be butt heat fusion. Butt heat fusion joints shall be made in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2657. E. Installation of valves and fittings shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Particular care shall be taken not to overstress threaded connections. ln making solvent cement connections, the solvent cement or primer shall not be spilled on valves. Any cement allowed to run from joints shall be cleaned from the pipe and fittings immediately. F. All piping shall have a sufficient number of unions to allow convenient removal of piping and shall be as approved by the Engineer. PVC and CPVC pipe shal] be installed with at least one expansion joint or loop near the center of each straight run of pipe which is 50-ft or longer with the maximum spacing between expansion joints or loops being 150-ft. G. Where plastic pipe passes through wall sleeves, the space between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with a mechanical sealing element as specified in Section 01172. H. All plastic pipe to metal pipe connections shall be made using flanged connections. Metal piping shall not be threaded into plastic fittings, valves, or couplings nor shall plastic piping be threaded into metal valves, fittings or couplings. Only socket to thread adaptors shall be used for threaded plastic pipe connections to other threaded devices. I. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall be set in accardance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify these locations from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section ]S140. J. Due to its large coefficient of thermal expansion, HDPE pipe shall be installed at its m�imum operating temperature to prevent sagging between the hangers or supports. Supports at each end of the straight HDPE pipe runs shall be of sufficient strength to develop ancharing forces adequate to oppose the tensile forces developed in the pipe due to thermal contraction. The exception to this requirement shall be for flanged HDPE connections, because, if the flanged connection is made up at the maximum operating temperature, the thermal contraction of the flange thickness will reduce the required tensile force in the flange bolts. Flanged HDPE connections shall, therefore be made up at the lowest expected operating temperature and then the entire piping system shall be brought up to the maximum operating temperature for final installation. (Note: Packing the flanges in ice may be necessary to achieve the proper installation temperature). 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. All pipelines shall remain undisturbed for the minimum curing or cooling time specified for each type of pipe material but no less than 8 hours to develop full curing and complete strength at all joints. All pipe systems shall be flushed clean and then subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 12 hours at a test pressure and temperature specified below. Testing procedures shall be as specified below and in Section I5051. Shoutd the temperature not be attainable under hydrostatic conditions, then the test may be performed under hydro-dynamic conditions, provided that accurate measurements for loss of the test fluid can be made, or the pressure shall be proportionally increased to simulate the stresses of the higher temperature in relation to the lowest system temperature that is expected during the duration of the test. The proportionally higher test pressures shall be determined in accardance with the accepted temperature versus strength properties as published by the pipe manufacturer, PPl or other pipe material standards organization. Allowance for expansion of polyethylene pipe during the test shall be made in accordance with PPI Technical Report TR31. 6349-79520/10/09/20l 2 1 5 �6't-STPA \1TpasvAl�sec\CLWATEfi1R01 Planl Exparmion ProjedUssued to Bid S�i e C S� 1 5 � 6 Y. d 0 C X �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. The test pressures and temperatures for the various pipe lines shall be as specified in Section 01445. C. The test shall be performed by s(owly filling the piping system, expelling entrapped air from all high points. The fill rate shall be controlled so that the fluid velocity within the pipe system is less than 2 fps. Upon completion of the filling process, the system shall be brought up to the specified test temperature as applicable, holding the system pressure to less than l0 percent of the test pressure. Once the system has been stabilized at the specified test temperature, the pipe should be slowly brought up to the test pressure in such a manner so as to not create shock, surge or water hammer in the pipe system. The test duration time limit sha11 not begin until the full pressure specified above has been reached and the system has been stabilized to within 5 percent of the test temperature. The system pressure and temperature shall be maintained to within 1/2 percent but no more than 5 percent of the specified value for the temperature and within 5 psi of the specified value for the pressure. These tolerances shall be held for the entire duration of the test. Upon completion of the test, the pressure shall be slowly removed by opening a valve or other pressure relieving device at a location remote to the location of the pressure/temperature monitoring eyuipment. D. The pressure test shall be monitored by a recording type pressure gauge for tests not requiring temperature control or a dual pen pressure/temperature recording gauge when temperature control is required. The entire test process shall be recorded, inciuding the initial temperature stabilization and pressurization of the piping system. The record shall be continuous through the system test and shall show the final de-pressurization of the pipe system. E. All visible leaks detected during the pressure test shall be repaired and the pressure/ temperature test rerun. A successful test shall be a test in which no visible leaks are detected and the pipe system pressure can be maintained within 1/2 percent but no more than 5 psi of the specified value. F. Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to prevent movement during the tests. 3.03 PAINTING A. All CPVC and PVC pipe and fittings exposed to the direct sunlight shall be field painted to provide additional UV protection. This painting shall be required whether or not marking is required and shall be in accordance with Section 09901. END OF SECTION • • � J 6349-79520/ ] 0/09/2012 15064-6TPA117pasvrQi�seclCLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expe�ion ProjeMllssued to Bid S pe C S\ 1 S O 6 4. do cx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 15066 STAINLESS STEEL P}PE AND FITTINGS PART ] — GENERAL I.OI REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, test, complete and ready for operation all stainless steel pipe as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where the word "pipe" is used it shall refer to pipe, fittings, hangers, supports and appurtenances unless otherwise noted. C. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: l. Furnishing and installing stainless steel pipe, fittings and specials with butt welded, flanged, cut grooved (Victaulic) and plain ends. 2. Furnishing stainless steel pipe sleeves and stainless steel pipe wall castings for interior and exterior wall and foundation wall penetrations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Testing is included in Section l 5052, Division l5. • B. Concrete work is included in Division 3. C. Field painting is included in Section 09902. D. Instrumentation is included in Division 13. E. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section I5100. F. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 15094. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings including piping layouts, spool drawings, and schedules to the ENGINEER in accordance with Section O1300, including dimensioning, fittings, expansion joints, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, wall penetration details, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. Shop drawings shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems, including alloys, diameter, pipe wall thickness, flanges, and other joint preparations. All dimensions shall be based on the actual equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layouts for each pipe submittal. Not all dimensions will be checked by the ENGINEER, nor will detailed review be performed. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for accurate dimensioning of piping systems. B. Submit certifications that welders are qualified, in accordance with ANSI B3 ].], Paragraph 127.5 for shop welding of pipe work. • C. Submit methods for pickling and passivating the piping fabrication. 6349-79520/10/9/2012 15066-1 TPA\1TpasvNtkec\CLWATER1ROtPIantEYpareionProjecNssuedroBitlSpecsl150fi6.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A312 — Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. 2. ASTM A530 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A778 — Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Stee1 Tubular Products. 4. ASMT A774 — Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings 5. ASTM A 182 — Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service. 6. ASTM A240 — Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheets and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 7. ASTM A403 — Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): l. ANSI B] 6.1 — Cast lron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ANSI B l 6.9 — Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 3. ANSI B36.19 — Stainless Steel Pipe C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA Cl 1]— Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B3 ].l — Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.3 — Process Piping. E. American Welding Society (AWS) F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. l .OS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, qualified and regularly engaged for the last five years in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. Pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by Aerex Industries, Fort Pierce, Florida; Douglas Brothers, Savannah, Georgia; or Felker Brothers, Marshfield, Wisconsin. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Stainless steel piping will be used for process piping for pre-treated raw water, feedwater, permeate, and concentrate as shown on the drawings. • C� B. Stainless steel piping for the systems Iisted below shall be designed for the following conditions: System: Pre-Treated Raw Water to Cartridge Filter Inlets Material: Type 316L, Schedule lOS • Fluid: Pre-Treated Water 6349-79520/l0/9/2012 15066-2 TPA\lipasvr0l�sec\CLWATER1ROtPIantExpansionProjeMUssuedtoBidSpecal15066.doc � � J � U O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PressureNacuum: I50 psi minimum warking pressure Temperature: Ambient to 85 degrees F System: Feedwater from Cartridge Fiiter Outlets to In1et of Membrane Feed Pumps and to Off-Spec Discharge Isolation Valve Material: Type 316L, Schedule l OS Fluid: Feedwater Pressure: 150 psi minimum working pressure Temperature Ambient to 85 degrees F System: Feedwater from Discharge of Membrane Feed Pumps to Stage 1 Pressure Vessellnlets Material: Type 316L, Schedule l OS Fluid: Feedwater Pressure: 300 psi minimum working pressure Temperature Ambient to 85 degrees F System: Interstage/Concentrate from Stage 1 Pressure Vessel Inlets to Concentrate Control Valve Material: Type 3] 6L, Schedule l OS Fluid: ]nterstage/Concentrate Pressure: 300 psi minimum working pressure Temperature Ambient to 85 degrees F System: Permeate Material: Type 316L, Schedule lOS Fluid: Permeate Pressure: 50 psi minimum working pressure Temperature: Ambient to 85 degrees F C. Pipe manufacturer shall submit in accordance to ASME B31.1, for approval by the ENGINEER, all calculations demonstrating the minimum allowable wall thickness to be supplied that meets or exceeds the specified operating pressure for all pipe sizes. Calculations shall be submitted for each piping component, including fittings. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped. Pipe and fittings shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. B. In handling the pipe, wide cushioned slings shall be used or other devices and methods acceptable to the ENGINEER. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges or levers shall be used in handling the pipe, fittings and couplings_ C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe by the CONTRACTOR, at the CONTRACTOR's own expense. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean until they are put into service. . 1.08 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 6349-79520/I0/9/2012 15066-3 TPA11Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER1R01PlantExpansbnProjecNSSUetltoBidSpewU5086.doc O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A. A11 stainless steel pipe and fittings used shali be seamless or welded, austenitic stainless steel pipe Grade Type 316L, conforming to ASTM A312 and ANSI B36.19 and shall be suitable for permeate water, membrane feed water, concentrate water and pretreated raw water for membrane service. Type 304 stainless steel shall not be acceptable, unless otherwise indicated. ]. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A312, A403 and A403WPW Fittings to I.P.S. dimensions. 2. Pipe sha1) be fabricated by die forming ar rolling true to dimension and round within a tolerance of plus or minus l/l6-in. The two edges of sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Pipes shall be straight within maximum of 1/8-in deviation over 10-ft. All pieces shall be clearly marked with gage and type of stainless steel. 3. Fittings shall be fabricated of the same material as the pipe and of the wall thicknesses at least as heavy as the pipe. Fittings shall be fabricated and reinforced as a minimum, in accordance to ASME B3l .l, for maximum test and working pressures of the piping system. Calculations for fabricated outlets and fittings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review. Elbows shall be smooth flow, die formed type for all sizes up to 36" diameter and shall conform to ANSI B16.9. All Pull Tee outlets must be true and perpendicular to the center line axis of the manifolds. Alignment tolerances form centerline to centerline of all Pulled Tee outlets and also the centerline of the manifolds to the end of the outiets shall be +/-1/32" and shall not be cumulative. The Pulled Tee radius shall be in accordance to ASME B31.1. All Victaulic grooved ends must be suitable for the design pressure. 4. All welding of pipe, fittings and subassemblies shall be completed in the factory. Welding • shall be performed by qualified welders in accordance with ANSI/ASME B3l .l with standard procedures for the application, by the shielded arc, inert gas, MIG or TIG method. Filler wire shall be added to all welds to provide for a cross section and weld metal eyual to or greater than the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth, evenly distributed and have a crown of no more than 1/16-in on both sides ofthe weld. No cracks or crevices shall be allowed. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior and exterior of the joint. Excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter and projections shall be removed by grinding. After all fabrication is completed, all pipe spools shall be pickled and passivated by complete immersion in a solution containing 3% hydrofluoric and 6-10% nitric acid with the balance of water and then followed by a fresh water rinse bath. Ali pipe spools shall be free of surface iron and have a uniform 2D finish throughout upon completion of this process. All openings shall be capped after the pickling�passivating process to protect the inside of the spools from debris and dirt. 5. Joints for field assembly shall be flanged or sleeve type coupling. Pipe components may be shop welded into assemblies for field installation. Flange joints or flange adaptors shall be used at connections to equipment, fittings and valves. Sleeve type couplings and flange adaptor couplings shall be used as shown on the Drawings to allow for expansion, for disassembly of piping, for servicing and pipeline flexibility. AII other joints shall be welded and field welding will not be allowed. Additional flanged or sleeve type coupling joints sha11 be provided as required to join welded shop assemblies and allow for installation of shop assemblies into the structure. All additional flanged or sleeve coupling joints reyuired to install and assemble the piping system shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section. a. All flanged joints shall be made up with 316L slip-on type flanges with either class l 50 or class 300 flanges suitable for the internal design pressures. Flanges shall conform to ASTM A l 82 in accordance to ANSI B 16.5. The flange face shall be true and • perpendicutar to the axis of the pipe or fitting. Gaskets for raised face flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch aramid fibers gaskets with neoprene binder. Gaskets for raised face flanges 6349-79520/10/9/2012 I5066-4 7PAHTpawr0llsee\CLWATER�ROtPlamExpensionProjecNssuedNBidSpecs\75066.doc • C� • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 7. shall be Blue-Guard Style 3300 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal. Gaskets for flat face flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch synthetic fibers gaskets with rubber binder. Gaskets for flat face flanges sha11 be Multi-Swell Style 3760 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal. Flange bolts and studs shall be of number and size in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Bolts and nuts shall conform to ANSI B18.2. Bolt studs and studs shall be of the same quality as machine bolts. All bolting and nuts shail be of Type 316L stainless steel ASTM A l 93, grade 8M hexhead bolts and ASTM 194 grade 8M silicone Bronze hexhead nuts. b. Where plain end pipe is joined by sleeve couplings these shall be welded-on type 316L stainless steel attachments for joint restraint at all coupiings except where tie rods may run from adjacent flanges. Furnish at least two tie rods at all restrained joints. Sleeve-type couplings shall be as manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser ]ndustries; Smith-Blair, Inc.; R.H. Baker & Co., Inc. or equal. Couplings shall be of Type 316L stainless steel pipe sizes. All couplings shall be furnished with pipe stop removed. Gaskets for raised face flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch aramid fibers gaskets with neoprene binder. Gaskets for raised face flanges shall be Blue-Guard Style 3300 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal. Gaskets for flat face flanged joints shall be l/8-inch synthetic fibers gaskets with rubber binder. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall be Multi-Swell Style 3760 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal.. Couplings shall allow at least 2 degrees angular deflection and at least 3/8-in relative axial motion of adjoining pipe sections. Flange adaptors shall join plain end pipe to flanged with 1501b flange and shall be equal to Dresser Style l28 and of 316L stainless steel material. Joint restraint shall be provided at all flange adaptors. Flange adaptor couplings may be substituted for flanged joints if approved by the ENGINEER. c. Flexible grooved couplings (Victaulic type) shall be used where needed to prevent excessive stress on pipe and fittings when pipe is fabricated and installed to acceptable industry standards. The flexible grooved couplings may also be used in lieu of flanged joints. Victaulic Style 77S or 77DX shall be used on all above grade piping, including membrane skid piping and when shown on the drawings. Flexible grooved couplings shall be CF8M or CE8MN. Victaulic cut grooved ends shall be suitable for the designated design pressure and Schedule 40 Victaulic cut groove nipples, 3" long, shall be welded on each side of groove to Schedule 1 OS pipe to provide cut groove ends. Furnish tapped bosses (3000 psi half couplings) on the pipe in the locations shown on the Drawings and in other locations as may be required by the equipment manufacturer, for the purposes of connecting small tubing and instruments to the pipe. Tapped bosses shall be of the same material as the pipe, welded to the pipe wall and shall have NPT threaded connections. Furnish welded-on tabs or angle ring on pipe wherever vertical pipe is to be supported by a riser clamp, to support the weight of the pipe. B. Pipe and fittings for the sampling service shall be Schedule l OS, socket weld austenitic Type 316L stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A312 and ANSI B36.19. Pipe shall be fabricated true to dimension and round. Ends of pipe shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Pipe shall be straight within ma�cimum I/8-in deviation over l0-ft. All pieces shall be marked with schedule and type of stainless steel. Fittings to valves, specials and instrumentation shall be flanged type. Fittings shall be as manufactured by Swagelok or equal. Gaskets for raised face flanged joints shall be l/8-inch aramid fibers gaskets with neoprene binder. Gaskets for raised face flanges shall be Blue-Guard Style 3300 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal. Gaskets for flat face flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch synthetic fibers gaskets with rubber binder. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall be Multi-Swell Style 3760 as manufactured by Garlock Sealing Technologies or approved equal. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 15066-5 TPA 1\Tpasvr011sec\CLWATERIRO 1 Plant Expa�ion ProjecNswed W Bid Spefs115066.tloc �O 2012 CDM Smith A11 Rights Reserved PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All pipe and fittings shall be installed true to grade and alignment and pipe anchorage and/or restraint shall be provided where required. Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed. B. All pipe and fittings shall be protected from dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign matter during installation to prevent damage to pipe and to assure no foreign matter is left in the piping. C. To assemble the joints in the field, the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all joint surfaces and gaskets, if any, with soapy water before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened alternately, evenly to the manufacturer's specified torques. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or pipe-over-handle ratchet wrenches be used to secure geater leverage. All electrical bonding or insulation shall be installed as joints are made up. D. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided if required. Due consideration shall be given to thermal expansion/contraction over a temperature range of 200 degrees F. E. When cutting of pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine neatly, without damage to the pipe. Cut ends shall be smooth and at right angles to the axis of the pipe. F. After installation, stainless steel pipe lines shall be washed clean with steam or hot water to remove any foreign material picked up during transport. 3.02 JOINING MECHANICAL AND RESTRAINED JOiNTS A. Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with the "Notes on Methods of Installation" under AWWA Cl 11 and the instructions ofthe manufacturer. B. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shail be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and as acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.03 FIELD WELDING A. Welding in the field is not allowed. 3.04 FIELD PAINTING A. Do not paint stainless steel pipe. Only bands, labels and arrows rather than full pipe painting will be required. 3.05 DISINFECTION AND CLEANUP A. After installation, completed lines shall be cleaned with Oakite deoxidizer or similar deoxidizer as recommended by the manufacturer to remove all foreign matter, construction stains or shop markings. Cleaned lines shall be rinsed clear with steam or hot water. All cleaning chemicals shall be NSF 60 approved. � • B. Disinfection of the completed water bearing lines shall be in accordance with Section 0] 170. • 6349-79520/]0/9/2012 15066-6 TPANTpasvA7kedCLWATERIRO1PIaMExpamionPrqecNssuedtoBidSpecsN5066.doc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri��hts Reserved • 3.06 SHOP TESTING u • A. Fabricated headers for membrane units (feed, interstage, concentrate) designed for side entry vessels, shall be inspected in the shop by the ENGINEER prior to shipping. All headers shall be connected together in the vertical position with laterals of adjoining headers connected by Victaulic couplings. A visual inspection will be made to ensure alignment of laterals. The assembled headers shall be hydro tested to a minimum of 1.5 times the working pressure or as noted in the attached pipe schedule. 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 15066-7 TPA1\Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER1R01 Plarrt Expansion ProjecNssued to Bid Specs\75066.doc c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 15066 PIPE SCHEDULE Minimum Minimum Working Test Pi e Name Descri tion Material Diameter Location Pressure Pressure Pretreated Water from Floridan Aquifer to l2-inch, Pretreated Cartridge Filter 10-inch, Indoor, Water Inlets 3] 6L SS 8-inch Overhead l 50 si 225 si Feed Water from Cartridge Filter Outlets to Membrane Feed Pump Inlets and Indoor, to Off-Spec ] 2-inch, Overhead, Discharge l0-inch, Above Feed Water lsolation Valve 316L SS 8-inch Grade 150 psi 225 si Feed Water from Membrane Feed lndoor, Pump Outlets to 8-inch, Overhead, Stage l Pressure 6-inch, Above Feed Water Vessel Inlets 316L SS 2-inch Grade 300 si 450 psi Interstage/ Concentrate from Stage 1 Pressure 6-inch, Indoor, Vessel Inlets to 4-inch, Overhead, lnterstage/ Concentrate 3-inch, Above Concentrate Control Valve 316L SS 2-inch Grade 300 si 450 si l 2-inch, l0-inch, Indoor, 8-inch, Overhead, 6-inch, Above Permeate Permeate 316L SS 4-inch Grade 50 si l50 psi END OF SECTION 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 ] 5066-8 TPA\\Tpasv1011sec1CLWATER�RO 1 PIaM Etpe�ion Projectllssued to Bid SDecs115066.doc • • u � C � • �O 2012CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART l — GENERAL ] .O l SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install pipe hangers, supports, concrete inserts and anchor bolts including all metallic hanging and supporting devices for supporting non-buried piping as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, the following related requirements: I. Concrete is included in Division 3. 2. Misce)laneous metal is included in Section 05500. 3. Painting is included in Division 9. 4. Pipe and fittings are included in respective sections of Divisions 2 and ] 5. 5. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 15100. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the ENGINEER as provided in Section 01300, complete sets of shop drawings of all items to be furnished under this Section. Submittals shall include complete layouts, schedules, location plans and complete total bill of materials for all pipe support systems. B. Submittals shall include a representative catalog cut for each different type of pipe hanger or support indicating the materials of construction, important dimensions and range of pipe sizes for which that hanger is suitable. Where standard hangers and supports are not suitable, submit detailed drawings showing materials and details of construction for each type of special hanger and support. C. Submittals shall include complete piping drawings indicating type of hanger and support, location, magnitude of load transmitted to the structure and type of anchor, guide and other pipe supporting appurtenances. Submittals shall use detail numbers as shown on the Drawings to indicate type of support proposed wherever possible. D. Types and locations of pipe hangers and supports shall also be shown on the piping layouts far each piping submittal as specified in the respective Division l3 and I S pipe specifications. E. Submit complete design data for pipe support systems to show conformance with this Specification. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MANUFACTURER's Standardization Society (MSS) l. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials and Design. 2. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 6349-79520/ l 0/9/2012 15094- I TPA 11Tpasvr011sec\CLWATER1R01 Plam Eapansim RojectUssued N BiO Spe�s115094.doc �O 2012CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally and ]nternally Threaded Standard Fasteners. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) l. ANSI B31 - Power Piping. D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All hangers, supports and appurtenances shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI B31.1.0, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Specification. B. Ali hangers, supports and appurtenances shall be of approved standard design where possible and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for all supporting equipment, with the exception of springs, shall be five times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming ] 0-ft of waterfilled pipe being supported. C. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the eyuipment. When MANUFACTURERS have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, submit certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All supports and hangers shall be crated, delivered and uncrated so as to protect against any damage. B. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration shall occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed. B. Finished iron or steel surfaces not galvanized or painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.O1 GENERAL A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to support the various types of pipe and piping systems. The details shown on the Drawings are intended to indicate the generally desired methods of support under normal conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to develop fina] details and any details associated with special conditions not aiready covered to meet the system conditions specified in the respective Division 13 and 15 pipe specifications. B. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves, fittings and other pipe appurtenances and to support and secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 15094-2TPA \1TpasvrOt�sec�CLWATERV20 1 PIaM F�pansion Projec[Ussued to �d Specst15091.doc r� �� • • . • • �O 2012CDM Smith All Rights Reserved pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from excessive dislocation shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 05500 and shall be furnished and installed under this Section. C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1 except that the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed ] 0-ft unless otherwise specified herein. D. Where flexible couplings are required at equipment, tanks, etc the end opposite to the piece of equipment, tank, etc shall be rigidly supported. E. All pipe and appurtenances connected to the equipment shall be supported in a manner to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment or piping system. F. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets and components for interior pipe supports shall be furnished with galvanized finish, hot dipped or electro-galvanized coated, except where field welding is required. ]nterior clamps on plastic pipe shall be plastic coated. Supports far copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall have a 1/16-in plastic coating. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets and components for exterior pipe and pipe within outdoor structures shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. G. Supports shall be sufficiently close together such that the sag of the pipe is within limits that will permit drainage and avoid excessive bending stresses from concentrated loads between supports. H. All uninsulated non-metallic piping such as PVC, CPVC, etc shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection shall be provided by galvanized steel protection shields or other method as approved by the ENGINEER. Where pipes are bottom supported 180 degrees, are shields shall be furnished. Where 360 degree are support is reyuired, such as U bolts, protection shields shall be provided for the entire pipe circumference. Protection shields shalt have an 18 gauge minimum thickness, not be less than 12-in in length and be securely fastened to pipe with stainless steel or galvanized metal straps not less than l/2-in wide. I. All insulated pipe shall be furnished with a rigid foam insulating saddle at each pipe support location as specified under respective pipe insulation. Provide galvanized protection shields as specified in Paragraph 2.O1H above at each location. J. Where pipe hangers and supports come in contact with copper piping provide protection from galvanic corrosion by; wrapping pipe with l/l6-in thick neoprene sheet material and galvanized protection shield; isolators similar to Eicen figure number 228; or copper plated or PVC coated hangers and supports. K. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: ]. Cast iron and ductile iron piping shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of l0-ft with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 2. Steel and stainless steel piping 2-1/2-in or larger diameter shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10-ft with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 3. Support spacing for steel and stainless steel piping 2-in and smaller diameter and copper tubing shall not exceed 5-ft. 4. Supports for multiple PVC plastic piping shall be continuous wherever possible. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the MANUFACTURER except that support-spacing shall not exceed 3-ft. Multiple, suspended, 6349-79520/] 0/9/20l 2 15094-37PA 1\Tpasvr0l�sec�CLWATER1R01 Plam Expa�im Rojec[Vssued to Bid Spea\1509�.doc 0 2012CDM Smith All Rights Reserved horizontal plastic PVC pipe runs, where possible, shall be supported by ladder type cable • trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy; the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing sha11 be l2-in. Tray width shall be approximately 6-in for single runs and l2-in for double runs. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners equal to Globe Model M-CAC; Husky-Burndy Model SCR or eyual. Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9-ft. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the ]ength of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers and supports in contact with plastic PVC pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent Iongitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 5. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not more than l2-ft by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. 6. Pipe supports shall not induce point loadings but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. 7. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or as specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized by the ENGINEER. 8. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. 9. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. • L. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Co., Inc., Providence, RI; Carpenter & Patterson, Inc., Woburn, MA; F& S Central, Brooklyn NY; Elcen Metal Products Co., Franklin Park, IL and Unistrut Northeast, Cambridge, MA, or equal. Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific MANUFACTURER is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item comparable in type, style, quality, design and performance shall be considered as equal. M. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are not applicable shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural steel shapes, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein and shall be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. N. Anchar bolts shall be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, MI or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, CO. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1-in behind the steel reinforcement. 2A2 SINGLE PIPE HANGERS A. Single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by galvanized steel rods from structural steel members, concrete ceilings and beams, bottom of trapeze hangers and wall mounted steel angle brackets. 1 1 �� 6349-79520/ I 0!9/2012 1 5�74�7PA \lTpasvr01luc1CLWATER�R01 Plant Expansion ProjeclUssued to Bid SpecsU5094.doc �O 2012CDM Smith All Ki�hts Reserved . B. Hanger rods shall be hot rolled steel, machine threaded and galvanized after fabrication. The strength of the rod sha11 be based on its root diameter. C. Except as otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers shall be adjustable clevis type similar to Grinnell Figure Numbers 65,260 and 590 as required. Hangers shall be carbon steel with a galvanized finish for interior installations, hangers shall be 316 SS for exterior installations. D. Steam cleaning piping shall be supported by adjustable type pipe roller supports. Roller support shall have cast iron roll and sockets, steel roll rod and continuous threaded galvanized rods and hex nuts similar to Grinnell Figure Number 177. E. Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete structures using concrete inserts similar to F& S Figures 180, 57l or I 50. Inserts shall be 316 SS. Beam clamps, C clamps or welded beam attachments shall be used for attaching hanger rods to structural steel members. Where necessary and approved by the ENGINEER, double expansion shields shall be used for attaching to concrete structures. F. Where pipes are near walls, beams, columns, etc and located an excessive distance from ceilings or underside of beams, welded steel wall brackets similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure numbers 69-68, 84 or 139 shall be used for hanging pipe. Brackets shal( be galvanized. Where single pipes rest on top of bracket pipe supports, attachments shall meet requirements as specified under multiple pipe hangers. 2.03 MULTIPLE PIPE HANGERS • A. Suspended multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane, which are adjacent to each other shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall consist of galvanized structural steel channel supported from galvanized threaded rod or attached to concrete walls, columns or structural steel support members as required to meet the intent of this specification. Channel shall be similar to F& S Figure 710, rods, concrete inserts, "C" Clamps, beam clamps, welded beam attachments and expansion shields shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.02 Single Pipe Hangers above. B. Except as otherwise specified herein pipe anchors used for attaching pipe to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets shall be anchor or pipe chairs similar to F& S Figures 158, 419, 160A, 160B as required. Material of construction shall be galvanized steel. Chair "U" bolts shall be tightened to allow freedom of movement for normal expansion and contraction except where pipe must be anchored to control direction of movement or act as a thrust anchor. 2.04 SINGLE AND MULTIPLE PIPE SUPPORTS A. Single pipes located in a horizontal plane close to the floor shall be supported by one of the methods specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. B. Pipes 3-in in diameter and larger shall be supported by adjustable stanchions similar to F& S Figure 427, constructed of 3I6 SS. Stanchions shall provide at least 4-in adjustment and be flange mounted to floor. C. Pipes less than 3-in in diameter shall be held in position by supports fabricated from steel "C" • channel, welded post base similar to Unistrut Figure P2072A and pipe clamps similar to Unistrut Figures PI 109 thru P1126. Where required to assure adeyuate support, fabricate supports using two vertical members and post bases connected together by horizontal member of sufficient load 6349-79520/ l 0/9/2012 1 507Y—JTPA RTpasvA41sec1CLWATER�R01 Plant Expansion Projechlasued to �A Specs\15094.doc O ZOl2CDM Smith All Rights Reserved capacity to support pipe. Wherever possible supports shall be fastened to nearby walls or other • structural member to provide horizontal rigidity. More than one pipe may be supported from a common fabricated support. All supports unless specified elsewhere shall be gatvanized. D. Where shown on the Drawings, pipe shall be supported using concrete anchor posts. Pipe shall be securely fastened to concrete anchor posts using suitable metal straps as reyuired and approved by the ENGINEER. 2.05 WALL SUPPORTED PIPES A. Single or multiple pipes located adjacent to walls, columns or other structural members, whenever deemed necessary, shall be supported using welded steel wall brackets similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure numbers 69-78, 84, or 134; or "C" Channel with steel brackets similar to Unistrut pipe clamps. Al} members shall be securely fastened to wall, column, etc using double expansion shields or other method as approved by the ENGINEER. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required. B. Pipe shall be attached to supports using methods hereinbefore specified to meet the intent of this Specification. C. All supports shall be galvanized. 2.06 BASE ANCHOR SUPPORT A. Where pipes change direction from horizontal to vertical via a bend, a welded or cast base anchor • support shall be installed at the bend to carry the load. The bend anchor shall be fastened to the floor and double expansion shields ar other method as approved by the ENGINEER. B. Where shown on the Drawings, pipe bends shall be supported using concrete anchor posts. Pipes shall be securely fastened to concrete supports with suitable metal bands as required and approved by the ENGINEER. 2.07 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Where vertical pipes are not supported by a Unistrut system as specified in Paragraph 2.08, they shall be supported in one of the following methods. l. For pipes l/4-in to 2-in in diameter, an extension hanger ring shall be provided with an extension rod and hanger flange. The rod diameter shall be as recommended by the MANUFACTURER for the type of pipe to be supported. The hanger ring shall be galvanized steel or PVC clad depending on the supported pipe. The hanger ring shall be equal to Carpenter & Paterson Fig. No. 81 or 8l CT. The anchor flange shall be galvanized malleable iron similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure No. 85. 2. For pipes eyual to or greater than 1/2-in in diameter extended pipe clamps similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure No. 267 may be used. The hanger shall be attached to concrete structures using double expansion shields, or to steel support members using welding lugs similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure No_ 220. 3. Pipe riser clamps shall be used to support all vertical pipes extending through floor slabs. Riser clamps shall be galvanized steel similar to Carpenter and Patterson Figure No. 126. u 6349-?9520/ 10/9/2012 1 SO74-6TPA HTpasvr0t\sec\CLWATERV20 1 Rant Expansion RojectVssued to Bid Specs\t� 4.doc �O 2012CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • Copper clad or PVC coated clamps shall be used on copper pipes. ]nsutation shall be removed rom insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps. 4. Unless otherwise specified, shown, or specifically approved by the ENGINEER, vertical runs exceeding ]2-ft shall be supported by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests at all points required to insure a rigid installation. 2.08 SPECIAL SUPPORTS A. Pipe supports shall be provided for closely spaced vertical piping systems as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise required to provide a rigid installation. The support system shall consist of a framework suitably anchored to floors, ceilings and walls and be as manufactured by the Unistrut Corporation, Globe-Strut as manufactured by the Metal Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. B. Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be U shaped channels similar to Unistrut Series P1000. Vertical piping shal) be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1 100M and Series P2558. All components shall be of mild steel. G The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts and fittings required for a complete assembly including end caps for all members. D. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Shop drawings, as specified above shall be submitted and shall show all details of the installation, including dimensions and types of supports. ln all instances the completed frame • shall be adequately braced to provide a complete rigid structure when all the piping has been attached. E. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are not applicable shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural steel shapes in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 05500, have anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein, shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all reyuirements of this Section and all related Sections of this Specification. 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support system shall be provided for review by the ENGINEER in the submittals specified in Paragraph I.03. 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting structures in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is designed. 2.09 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop painted as part of the work of this Section. Surface preparation and shop painting shall be as specified in Section 09901. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, requiring rigid support shall be supported from the building • structure by approved methods. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall be supported from metal stairs, 6349-79520/ 10/9/2012 1 SO94— / TPA \\Tpasvr011sec1CLWATERViO 1 Plant Expansion Projec[Ussued lo Bid Spew17509�.doc �020]2CDM Smith All Rights Reserved ladders and walkways unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the ENGINEER. C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split type couplings and sleeve type couplings, and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. D. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is placed. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. E. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. 3.02 TESTING • A. All pipe support systems shall be tested for compliance with the Specifications. After installation, each pipe support system shall be tested in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests. If any part of the pipe support system proves to be defective ar inadequate, it shall be repaired or augmented under this Section to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. • END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ l 0/9/20l 2 l 5094-8FPA\\Tpesvr0l�sec\CLWATER�RO t Phant Expansion Projectllssuetl to Bitl Spefs115094.tloc � 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved SECTION I5100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 — GENERAL l .O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation and test all non-buried valves as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The equipment specified in this section includes the types of valves listed below and located above ground or exposed in vaults. 1. General Requirements 2. Valve Actuators — Manual 3. Valve Actuators — Powered 4. Butterfly Valves 5. Resilient Seated Gate Valves 6. Check Vaives 7. Ball Valves 8. Thermoplastic Valves 9. Solenoid Valves 10. Corporation Stops • I 1. Air Release Valves 12. Vacuum Relief-Air Inlet Air Release Valves 13. Combination AirNacuum and Air Release Valves 14. Surge Relief Valve 15. Flanged Adapter Couplings 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Buried valves and appurtenances are included in Division 2. B. Piping and disinfection for potable water systems is included in the respective Sections of Divisions 2 and 5. G Instrumentation, not specified herein, is included in Division 13. D. Valves on all HVAC and plumbing systems are included in their respective sections of Division I5. E. Electrical work is induded in Division 16. F. Certain items similar to those specified in this Section may be specified to be furnished and installed with individual equipment or systems. In case of a conflict, those individual equipment or system requirements shall govern. G. Electric valve operators of all types, rate of flow controllers (including modulating valves and • operators) and other types of valves which are part of the automated instrumentation (such as some solenoid va}ves) if not included herein are included in Division 13. Valve operators shall, 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 I 5 1 Q�-1 TPA 5:1CLWATEPoR01 Plan[ 6cpansion Projec111ssued to Bid Spec5115100.tlocx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved however, be mounted at the factory on the valves as specified herein, as part of the work of this . Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, materials required to establish compliance with this Section. The first submittal shall be the valve schedule described in Paragraph 1.09. Approvai of the valve schedule submittal is required prior to CONTRACTOR submitting any of the equipment in this specification. Subsequent Equipment Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Valve tag number. 2. The manufacturer and suppiier. 3. The address at which equipment will be fabricated or assembled. 4. Drawings showing assembly details, materials of construction and dimensions. 5. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 6. The total weight of each item. 7. A complete bill of materials. 8. Additional submittal data, where noted with individual pieces of equipment. 9. individual electrical control schematics and wiring diagrams for each valve operator with all external interfaces, identified exactly as detailed on the Electrical and tnstrumentation Drawings. Standard catalogue cut sheets that show typical wiring diagrams only are not acceptable. Valve actuators shall be coordinated with electrical requirements shown on the Drawings and valves as specified herein. B. Test Reports • 1. Provide certified hydrostatic test data, per manufacturer's standard procedure or MSS-SP-61 for all valves. C. Certificates ]. For each valve specified to be manufactured, tested and/or installed in accordance with AWWA and other standards, submit an affidavit of compliance with the appropriate standards, including certified results of required tests and certification of proper installation. D. Manufacturer's Installation and Application Data E. Operating and Maintenance Data 1. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the ENGINEER as provided in Section 01730. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, eyuipment lists, descriptions and other information required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such eyuipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM International 1. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. ASTM A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 3. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 4. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. ASTM A436 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. • 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 1 S 1 �Q—G TPA S:ICLWATERUt01 Plant Expansion ProjecNSSUed M Bid Specsl15100.docx 0 20 ] 2 CDM Smith . All Rights Reserved 6. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. ASTM B30 - Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloys in Ingot Form. 8. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) l. AW WA C I 1]- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves Supply Service 3. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 4. A W WA C507 - Ball Valves, 6-in through 48-in ( I SOmm through 1200mm) 5. AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in (SOmm through 24-in (600mm) NPS 6. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 7. AWWA C511 - Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly 8. A W WA C540 - Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates 9. AWWA C541 — Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane Type Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates l0. AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 1 l. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B 1.20.1 - Specifications, Dimensions, Gauging for Taper and Straight Pipe Threads (except dry seals). 2. ANSI Bl6.l - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 3. ANSI B 16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves • 4. ANSI B 16.104 - Butterfly Valves D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AIS]) • E. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1. MSS-SP-61 - Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 2. MSS-SP-67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS-SP-70 - Cast lron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS-SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanges and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS-SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Services. 6. MSS-SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. MSS-SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8. MSS-SP-82 - Valve Pressure Testing Methods 9. MSS-SP-98 - Protective Coatings for the Interior of Valves, Hydrants and Fittings. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) H. Factory Mutual (FM) I. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 6349-79520/ 10/03/20l 2 1 S� ��—J TPAS9CLWATEFM01 Plant Fxpension Rojetillssuetl to Bi0 Specs\15100.AOClt � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established firms who are fully experienced, minimum 10 years, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. 2. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with this Section as applicab}e. 3. All units of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 4. All 480 volt motor actuators shall be the product of one manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate this requirement with vendors who supply actuated valves as part of systems specified in Division 1 1 and I5. B. Certifications 1. The manufacturers shall furnish an affidavit of compliance with Standards referred to herein as specified in Paragraph 1_03C above. Refer to PART 3 for testing required for certain items in addition to that required by referenced standards. • C. Provide the services of a qualified and factory-trained service representative of the manufacturer to provide operational and maintenance instruction, for a l day, 8 hour period for each type of the following equipment: 1. Valve motor operators. 2. Pressure regulating valves. 3. Air release, air and vacuum valves. 4. Surge relief valves. • 5. Pinch valves. 6. Hydraulic cylinder actuators. D. Inspection of the units may also be made by the ENGINEER or other representative of the Owner after delivery. The equipment shall be subject to rejection at any time due to failure to meet any of the specified requirements, even though submittal data may have been accepted previously. Equipment rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job site at once. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of water, wastewater, sludge, air, and chemicals as noted on the Drawings. B. Valves, appurtenances and miscellaneous items shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and as specified, so as to form complete workable systems. C. Unless otherwise noted all powered valve operators shall have: 1. Valves larger than 3-in: electric operators 460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 2. Valves 3-inch and under: electric operators, ] 20 Volt, 1 Phase, 60Hz. 3. Solenoid valves: 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz, NEMA 4 enclosure, continuous duty Class F coils and manual operator. Solenoid valves far sea) water systems shall be "fail open" design; others shall be "fail closed" unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or in the Instrumentation specifications. • 6349-79520{ 10/03l2012 l J l ��-Y TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 Plan[ �pansion ProjectUSSUetl to Bitl Specs175100.tlocr 0 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference is made to Division O1 for additional information. B. Packing and Shipping I. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the valves, appurtenances, or coatings. Equipment shall not be dropped. All valves and appurtenances shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the coatings shall be repaired as acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Prior to shipping, the ends of all valves shall be acceptably covered to prevent entry of foreign material. Covers shall remain in place until after installation and connecting piping is completed. a. All valves 3-in and larger shall be shipped and stored on site until time of use with wood or plywood covers on each valve end. b. Valves smaller than 3-in sha11 be shipped and stored as above except that heavy cardboard covers may be used on the openings. c. Rising stems and exposed stem valves shall be coated with a protective oil film which shall be maintained until the valve is installed and put into use. d. Any corrosion in evidence at the time of acceptance by the Owner shall be removed, or the valve shal] be removed and replaced. C. Storage and Protection 1. Special care shall be taken to prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to the sun, or exposed to extremes in temperature, to prevent deformation. See the • individual piping sections and manufacturer's information for further requirements. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Special tools and the manufacturer`s standard spare parts, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied with the equipment in accordance with Section 01730 and where noted, as specified herein. Tools shall be packaged in a steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. B. Provide one Operations and Maintenance manual for each type of valve and operator supplied under this specification in accordance with Section 01730. C. Included within the Operations and Maintenance manuals, provide a list of all spare and replacement parts with individua) prices and location where they are available. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT — GENERAL A. Reference is made to Division 1 for additional requirements, including nameplates, provisions for temporary pressure gauges, protection against electrolysis and anchor bolts. B. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. • C. Valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted and as far as possible equipment of the same type shall be identical and from one manufacturer. 6349-79520/ l 0/03/2012 1 S 1 ��5 TPA S:\CLWATER1R01 PIaM F�cpansion ProjectVSSUed [o Bitl Specs\15700.tlxa 0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional • arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard referenced, cast in raised letters or via riveted stainless steel nameplate upon some appropriate part of the body. E. Unless otherwise noted, items shall have a minimum working pressure the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. F. Joints, size and material - unless otherwise noted or required by the Engineer: 1. Except where noted, all joints referred to herein shall be of the same rype, nominal diameter, material and with a minimum rating equal to the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 2. Valves and appurtenances shalJ be of the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings they are connected to. 3. All valves exposed to view, or in vaults: a. Plastic valves in chemical service - solvent cement, or flanged ends. b. 3-in and smaller - threaded ends- unless noted otherwise herein or on the Drawings. c. 4-in and larger - flanged ends. G. Provide all special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances and adjacent pipe. H. No alternative materials will be considered for approval unless complete documentation is provided regarding their satisfactory long-term use in similar conditions; in addition, the consideration of any substitution will be considered only if the superiority of the proposed materials is the intent of the substitution, and only if sufficient evidence is provided to document that superiarity. 2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS — MANUAL • A. All valve actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 and shall be furnished by the valve supplier. B. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve. Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body. C. Unless otherwise shown, all valves 8-inch diameter and larger shall be equipped with gear actuators. Actuators shall be fully enclosed. D. Gearing shall be machine-cut steel designed for smooth operation. Bearings shall be permanently lubricated with bronze bearing bushings provided to take all thrusts and seals to contain lubricants. Housings shall be sealed to exclude moisture and dirt, allow the reduction mechanisms to operate in lubricant, and be of the same material as the valve body. E. Actuators shall be self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. F. Manual actuators for above-grade valves shall be equipped with handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop-limiting locking devices to prevent over travel of the disc in the open and closed positions. Handwheels shall turn counterclockwise to open valves. Actuators shall be designed to produce the required torque with a maximum pull of 40 ft-]bs on the handwheel or chainwheel. • 6349-79520/l 0/03/2012 1 S� ��-6 TPAS:ICLWATERUt01 PIaM Expansion RqecNSSUeAto Bi0 Spec5115100.tlacx � � u � 201 ? CDM Smith All Ri:;hts Reserved G. Actuator components shal) withstand an input of 450 foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 foot pounds for larger than 30" at extreme actuator positions without damage. 2.03 VALVE ACTUATORS — POWERED A. General 1. Electric actuators shall be operated on 480 volt power. 2. The actuators shall conform to AWWA Standard C540, insofar as applicable and as herein specified. Actuators shall be O-ring sealed, watertight to standard NEMA 4X/6, submersion to 6 feet for 30 minutes. Actuators installed above grade are subject to submergence and shall be watertight to standard NEMA 6P/IP68, 15 ft for 72 hours minimum. 3. Motor operators for buried valves shall be furnished with floor stand and extension stem connection to buried service gear operator. 4. Valve service/operation shall be as indicated on the plans and as specified herein. 5. 480 Voit powered actuators shall be Limitorque MX; Rotork IQ/IQM; EIM TEK 2000; AUMA SA/SAR. Actuators shall be configured as required to provide for part turn or multi- turn and be coupled with gearboxes as required to obtain the speed and operating torque as required for the valve or gate it controls. B. 480 Volt Powered Actuators for Part Turn or Multi-Turn Valve Operation 1. Operation a. Capabilities shall be provided to position the valve (or gate) locally via the Local/Off/Remote selector switch and Open/Stop/Close push buttons. b. When in remote the actuator sha11 accept a 4-20mADC position control signal, and shall position the valve 0-90 degrees or gate 0- l00% of travel in proportion to the control signal. The actuator shall also output a 4-20mA DC position signal. The actuator shall also include a closed limit switch. c. Unless stated otherwise in the valve specifications, the actuator and gearing size shall be designed to operate the valve at a disc speed of 1 foot travel per minute of operation. For quarter turn valves, valves shall rotate from stop to stop in 30 seconds per foot of throat diameter. 2. Functional a. The motor operated valve controller shall include the motor, operator unit gearing, limit switch gearing, limit switches, control power transformer, position transmitter (when required), torque switches, bored and key-wayed drive sleeve for non-rising stem valves, declutch lever and auxiliary handwheel as a self-contained unit. Valve contacts shall be capable of handling the current equivalent of a NEMA 1 size starter. b. Reversing starters shall be integral with the actuator, and sha11 be solid-state starters for modulating service. Electro-mechanical reversing starters shall be acceptable for open- close service and shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked. c. Limit switches and gearing shall be an integral part of the valve control. The limit switch gearing shall be made of bronze or stainless steel and shall be fully lubricated, intermittent type and totally enclosed to prevent dirt and foreign matter from entering the gear train. Limit switches shall be of the adjustable type capable of being adjusted to trip at any point between fully opened valve and fully closed valve. Limit and torque switches shall be provided for stopping valve in both directions. Mid-travel switches shall be provided as required. Set position shall not be lost if over travel occurs in either manual or electric modes of operation. d. The valve position transmitter shall be a gear actuated, two-wire device, producing 4-20 mADC signal proportional to 0-90 degree valve position or to 0-] 00% of valve travel. The transmitter shall be provided with easily accessible zero and span adjustment potentiometers. The valve actuator shall be provided with a local digital or mechanical 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 1 S 1 ��— / TPA SiCLWATER1R01 PIaM Expansian RojecMssued N Bid Specs\15100.docx � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved indicator integral with the operator with a 0-100 percent scale. The DC power supply • shalt be provided integral with the operator and powered from the 1 10 volt AC internal transformer. The positioner board shall provide repeatable accuracy to 0.25% of span. There shall be separate trim pots on the positioner board for zero, span and dead band adjustment. e. The speed of the actuator shall be the responsibility of the system supplier with regards to hydraulic requirements and response compatibility with other components within the control loop. Each valve controller shall be provided with a minimum of two limit switch functions, one for opening and one for closing. Each limit switch will have two normally open and two normally closed contacts. Gear limit switches must be geared to driving mechanism and in step at all times whether in motor or manual operation. Provision shall be made for two extra sets of limit switches as described above, each to have two normally open and two normally closed contacts. Each valve controller shall be equipped with a double torque switch. The torque switch shall be adjustable and will be responsive to load encountered in either direction of travel. The limit and torque switch contacts shall be silver inlay type. f. Each actuator shall include monitor relays to remotely indicate fault signal for indication of power failure, phase failure, thermal switch tripped, torque switch tripped between travel stops and Local-Off-Remote selector switch position Physical a. The operator shall be equipped with open-stop-close push-buttons, a local-off-remote selector switch and indicating lights all mounted on the operator. Where operator will not be situated between 2-ft-0-in and 7-ft-0-in above the operator platform, and where shown on the Drawings provide a separate remote valve operating station. b. The motor shall operate on 460 volt, 60 hertz, 3 phase power and shall be sized by the • actuator manufacturer to provide the required output torque for the service intended. The motor shall have C1ass F insulation, with a duty rating of at least l5 minutes at 40 degrees C ambient temperature. The motor shall be specifically designed and built by the actuator manufacturer for electric actuator service. Commercially available motors shall not be acceptable. The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel regardless of the connection sequence of the power supply. c. Operators utilizing multiple reduction power gearing shall consist of spur, helical, or bevel gearing and worm of hardened alloy steel, and the worm gear shall be alloy bronze. Operators utilizing single-stage reduction shall be single-stage worm gear totally enclosed in a fully lubricated gearcase, with filling and drain plugs. Non-metallic, aluminum, or cast gearing shall not be allowed. The output shaft shall incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the actuator. d. An operating wheel shall be provided for manual and/or emergency operation, engaged when the motor is declutched by a lever or similar means, the drive being restored to power automatically by starting the motor. The operating wheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive, and any gearing shall be such as to permit emergency manual operation, using a 40 pound force in a reasonable time. Clockwise operation of the handwheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise stated. e. Each actuator shall be supplied with a start-up kit including installation instructions, wiring diagrams, and spare cover screws and seals to provide for losses during commissioning. f. Continuous mechanical dial indication of valve and position shall be provided. The mechanical dial position indicator shall be in step with the actuator at all times in both the hand wheel and motor operation. For modulating applications, the mechanical dial • position indicator shall include graduations of 0-100 percent scale. 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 � S 1 �0—O TPA S:ICLWATERU201 Plant Expansion Prqec015sued M Bitl Syecs115100.docx . . �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Wiring and Terminals a. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of 5 amp minimum rating for control circuits and of appropriate size for the motor 3 phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. b. The terminals shall be of the stud type embedded in a terminal block of high tracking- resistance compound. The 3-phase power terminals shall be shrouded from the control terminals by means of an insulating cover. c. The terminal compartment shall be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. The terminal compartment of the actuator shall be provided with three threaded cable entries. d. Each actuator shall be provided with a commissioning kit consisting of a wiring diagram and installation and operation manual. A separate wiring diagram shall be provided inside the terminal cover. No special tools, devices or parts shall be required for commissioning. e. Actuators shall have separately sealed motor and control compartments. All operators shall have space heaters in their limit switch, motor, and control compartments. Remote Control Panels a. Where shown on the Drawings, or specified in the equipment specifications, valve actuators shall be furnished with control stations suitable for mounting remotely from, but, in the vicinity of the actuator. The exact requirements for the control station components shall be as detailed on the Electrical drawings. In general the remote mount control station shall include a Loca] - Off - Remote selector switch, an Open - Ciose or Open - Stop - Close pushbuttons (as detailed) and Open - Close indicating lights. Control station operators shall be heavy duty devices mounted in a cast iron, cast aluminum, or stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure suitable for wa11 mounting. The Local - Off - Remote selector switch shall have auxiliary contacts for remote indication of switch position. The Local - Off - Remote selector switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the Off position. Performance Test Each actuator must be shop performance tested, and individual test certificates shall be supplied without additional charge to the Owner. Test certificates shall be submitted prior to shipment of valve actuators. The test equipment shall simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters shall be recorded: a. No load current b. Current at maximum torque setting c. Stall current d. Torque at maximum torque setting e. Stall torque f. Test voltage and frequency g. Flash test voltage h. Actuator output speed 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Butterfly valves for exposed locations shall be Series 3AH as manufactured by Bray International. No others shall be accepted. B. Valves shall be flanged. The face-to-face dimensions shall be in accordance with AWWA C504 for short-body valves. Adeyuate two-way thrust bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall • be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 Class 125. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of the through boss-type. Butterfly valves of the "wafer" or "spool" type will not be accepted. 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 15100-9 TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 Plant ExDe�s�� ol�%�� o Bid Spec5175700.tlocz c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . Valve seats shall be EPDM and mounted to the valve bod . For valves 20-inch and smaller the • C y , rubber seat shall fully line the interior of valve body. Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant material with stainless Nylock screws and be capable of a 1/8-inch adjustment. The mating edge of the valve disc shall be l 8-8 stainless stee}. D. For 12-inch and smaller valves, discs shall be 3] 6 SS. For valves larger than 12-inch, discs shall be constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48, Class 40 or ductile iron conforming ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with fusion-bonded epoxy coating. E. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of Type 3l6 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one piece unit extending full size through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. Shaft bearings shall be teflon or nylon, self-lubricated type. F. All butterfly valves shall be subjected to a factory certified hydrostatic shell test to 500 psi and to a bi-directional hydrostatic leak test to 250 psi. G. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified elsewhere within this specification. H. All actuators, extension stems, torque tubes/extension bonnets, couplings, stem guides, and motor operators as required shall be furnished by the valve supplier. • 2.05 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES A. Gate valves with 2"-12" diameters shall be resilient seated, manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C509 of latest revision and in accordance with the following specifications. Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve. B. The valves are to be non-rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged, or rolled bronze shown in AW WA C509. Two stem seals shall be provided and shall be of the O-ring type, one above and one below the thrust collar. C. The sealing mechanism shall consist of a cast iron gate having a vulcanized synthetic rubber coating, or natural rubber seat ring. The resilient sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the water working pressure when installed with the line flow in either direction. D. The valve body, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B. All ferrous surface inside and outside shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating. A handwheel or wrench nut shall be provided for operating the valve. All Valves are to be tested in strict accordance with AWWA C509. E. Valves shall be eyual to those as manufactured by American, M&H, Kennedy, or McWane. No other MANUFACTURERS shall be accepted. • 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 � S I �� TPA SICLWATER�R01 Rant �pansion ProjectUssuetl to Bid SpecsU5100.tlocx � 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved 2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Swing Check Valves 4-in to 30-in Diameter 1. Check valves shall be swing type and shall meet the requirements of AW WA C508. The valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, single disc, non-shock and hydrostatically tested at 300 psi. When there is no flow through the line, the disc shall hang lightly against its seat in practically a vertical position. When open, the disc shall swing clear of the waterway. Valves shall be so constructed that disc and body seat may easily be removed and replaced without removing the valve from the line. 2. Check valves shall have bronze seat and body rings, bronze or ductile clapper arm and bronze nuts on the bolts of bolted covers. Shaft assembly and key shall be A582 Type 416 stainless steel. Hinge shaft shall extend from the body of the valve, sealed with stuffing box, packing and gland. Shaft side plug bearing, stuffing box and gland shall be bronze, packing shall be reinforced Teflon, both side plug and stuffing box shall be provided with grease fittings. 3. Valves 6 inch and larger shall be fitted with an extended hinge arm with outside lever and weight. The position of the weight shall be adjustable. Various weights shall be provided and installation approved by the Engineer. Lever shall be installed to the horizontal in the closed position, for both horizontal and vertical pipeline installations. a. Swing check valves for the DAF sludge pump discharge shall be outside lever and weight with a 12 inch lever arm and 12 lbs weight to impart a 120 Ib-in closing moment on the check valve to prevent siphoning from the DAF sludge trough. 4. Where check valve position switches are required as shown on the Instrumentation Drawings, check valves shall be furnished complete with position switch mounting bracket and actuation ]ever mounted to the stem shaft. Where outside lever and weights are required, • stem shaft shall extend both sides of the valve body and position switch assembly shall be mounted on the opposite side of the lever and weight assembly. 5. Where position switches are to be supplied for existing check valves with external shaft and lever, supply mounting brackets and hardware required to mount position switches to the existing valves. CONTRACTOR shall use existing bolting where possible to mount brackets. If bolting is not available in required area, CONTRACTOR shall drill and tap valve body if required to mount the position switches. Drill location and depth shall be reviewed with, and approved by the Engineer. 6. Position switches shall be lever type, NEMA 7 enclosure, SPST, 120VAC, 6A, Square D Type 9007CR or approved equal. All hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Check valves shall be manufactured by American Flow Control; M&H/Clow/Kennedy; Golden Anderson; Mueller or approved equal. B. Swing Check Valves 3 inch and Smaller ]. Check valves 2-in and smaller for installation in copper and steel pipes shall be bronze, swing type, bronze disc, stainless steel pin, 1251b with solder or screwed ends. Solder or thread end check valves 3-in and smaller shall be similar to Hammond 1 B-940, or Jenkins Figure 996. Flanged end check valves 2 to 4-in in water service shall be Bronze fitted Hammond 1R-1 l24 or Jenkins Figure 587J. C. Silent Globe Check Valves l. Body and all metallic parts exposed to liquid shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Body shall have ANSI B 16.1 Class 1251b flanges. Plug and seat shall be replaceable, retained by type 316 stainless steel fasteners. O-ring shall be EPDM. Spring shall exert a 0.5 psi closing force, fully compressing at flow velocity of approximately 4 fps. • 2. SGCVs shall be GA Figure 280, Cla-Val Figure 581, APCO Series 600, or equal. 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 15100-1 l TPA SiCLWATER�R01 PIaM Fxpansion ProjecNSwed to &d SpecsU5100.docc �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Rubber Flapper Check Valves . 1. Body shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Disc shall be Nylon reinforced EPDM encapsulated steel. Valve body and open disc shall provide full flow at least equal to nominal pipe diameter. Seating surface shall be on a 45-degree angle. Top access port shall be full size, allowing disc removal without removing valve body from pipeline. Disc shall be one piece construction, precision molded with and integral o-ring dealing surface and contain steel and nylon reinforcements in both the flex and central disc areas. 2. Rubber flapper check valves shall be as manufactured by Crispin, APCO, Val-Matic or equal. 2.07 BALL VALVES A. General Service Ball Valves: 1. Valves shall be bronze, resilient seated, full port, threaded two piece bolted body type valves. Manual valves shal] have locking levers. The body and cap shall be of brass, ASTM B30, the ball and stem of Type 3l 6 stainless steel and the seats and seals of glass filled TFE. The balls shall be full floating, non-lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Z. Valves shall be Jamesbury Series 2000 Style 21 as manufactured by Metso Automation; or equaL B. Stainless Steel Ball Valves 1. Valves shall be unibody or two-piece stainless steel full port; solid ball construction with bottom loading stems, and adjustable packing with manual locking lever actuator. 2_ Body shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 or ASTM A351 GR CF8M stainless steel, FNPT ends or flanged, C}ass 150, ANSI B]6.5 as noted on drawings. Drilling shall be in accordance . with ANSI B 16.1 Class 125. Ball and stem shall be Type 3l6 stainless steel. Seats and seals shall be reinforced PTFE. 3. Valves shall be WKM Dynasea1310C, Jamesbury Series 9150 or equal. 2.08 THERMOPLASTIC VALVES A. General l. All valves shall be certified as completely compatible with the intended and specified service; compatibility shall apply to the material of the valve and internal components, including all seals, gaskets, O-rings and washers; solvents and primers used in valve joint make-up shall be specifically in conformance with the written instructions of the valve supplier. Service chemicals and service conditions are shown in the piping sections in Division l5. 2. Except as otherwise specified valve ends shall be socket-type designed for solvent welding. Solvent and primer shall be as specified in the piping specifications, except that valves installed in systems carrying strong oxidizing, high alkalinity, and strong acid solutions shall contain NO fumed silica, and shall be Weld-On 724 for CPVC pipe as manufactured by IPS Corp., Compton, CA and Oatey Industrial Grade Low VOC Heavy Duty Gray for PVC pipe as manufactured by Oatey Corp., Cleveland OH. 3. Valve body material shall be the same as the piping system in which the valve will be installed, unless explicitly stated otherwise on the Drawings or in the valve specification. a. PVC shall be Type 1, Grade I, per ASTM D1784 classification, made from unplasticized polymer, and generally suitable for service to 120 degrees F. b. CPVC shall be Type 4, Grade l, per ASTM D1784, classification generally suitable for service to 180 degrees F. c. Polypropylene (PP) shall conform to the material requirements of ASTM D4101 for copolymer polypropylene. • 6349-79520/10/03/2012 �S�W-12 TPAS:�GLWATER1R01PlantFxparrsionProjeclllssuedtoBi05pew\15100.doc�c • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. 5 � 7. 8. d. PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) shall be manufactured from high molecular weight polymers of vinylidene fluoride. e. The manufacturer of the valves shall retain material source quality documentation and shall furnish it to the ENGINEER upon request. Unless otherwise specified: a. Valve seats shall be Teflon, or Teflon encapsulated elastomer. Alternative materials shall not be substituted without complete documentation provided to the ENGINEER of service suitability. b. Flange Gaskets shall be low torque, full face ANSI B 16.5 with two concentric convex rings between ID and bolt hole diameter, constructed of EPDM, PTFE-bonded EPDM or PVDF-bonded EPDM as manufactured by Asahi of America or equal. Documentation shall be provided to show compatibility of the bonded surface material for the fluid service intended. c. Valve external hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. No internal metallic components shall be exposed to the service fluid. d. No factory or field coatings shall be applied to the valves. All valves, except butterfly valves shall have a non-shock service pressure rating of not less than 120 psig at 70 degrees F. All valves shall be given hydrostatic and pressure and leakage tests at the factory. Provide certified copy of test results. Valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America. No others shall be accepted. Valves specified as furnished with equipment or equipment systems shall comply with these requirements. • B. Ball Valves 1. Ball valves shall be the double-union type, unless otherwise specified, full-port, adjustable seats. 2. Provide quarter-turn manual valve operator unless mechanized actuators are specified on the Drawings. 3. Genera) Service. Shall be PVC body, furnished with socket ends, EPDM O-rings and stem seals, PTFE seats with O-ring backup. 4. Sodium Hypochlorite Service. Shall be PVC body, furnished with socket ends, Viton B O- rings and stem seals, PTFE seats with Viton B O-ring backup. Sodium hypochlorite service ball valves shall have the ball drilled to permit venting of pressure and gas from the confined balt cavity, when the valve is closed. The drilling shall vent to the vented portion of piping in which the valve is installed. The drilling shall be l/8-in opening, de-burred. C. Butterfly Valves 1. Valves shall be of the lined body design with PP disc with only the liner, seals and disc as wetted parts. The liner shall be molded and formed around the body, functioning as a gasket on each side of the valve. Double O-ring seals on top and bottom disc trunnions wilt fully isolate a Type 316 stainless steel straight-through stem. Body and disc shall be PVC, Liner (seat} shall be EPDM, O-rings shall be EPDM. 2. The valves shall be wafer style, and lug style for dead-end service as applicable. 3. Each valve shall be furnished with a lever actuator on sizes through 6-in; gear operator on sizes 8-in and larger. 4. Butterfly valves shall be Type 57 as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. D. Gate Valves • 1. Gate valves shall be non-rising stem, polypropylene plugs and viton seals. Where indicated on the drawings, valves shall be provided with stem extensions and handwheels, as manufactured by Asahi-America or equal. 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 15 l 00-13 TPA S:ICLWATER1R01 PIaM Fi�pansion Projectllssued to Bid Specs\15100.tloac O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • • u 6349-79520/ ] 0/03/2012 � S� �0— � 4 TPA S:IGLWATERVtO 1 Plan[ Ezpansim Projec111ssueA M Bitl Specs\15100.docx i • • c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. Ball Check Valves l. Ball check valves shall be double-union style with socket ends, solid and completely spherical ball, EPDM seals, PTFE seat, capable of either horizontal or vertical mounting. F. Diaphragm Check Valves 1. Diaphragm check valves shall be union PVC, CPVC or PVDF body, thread ar socket weld ends, EPDM or FKM diaphragms. Acid service valves shall be PVDF body with FKM diaphragm, and shall be furnished with PVDF flanges to connect to flanged piping. Valves shall be mountable in any position, and shall be Plast-O-Matic model CKM or equal. G. Swing Check Valves l. Swing check valves shall be flanged body; seats and seals shall be EPDM, FKM or PTFE as required by fluid service; disc serviceable from top entry without removing valve, o-ring sealed tap flange, ANSI flanged ends. Outside lever and weight and limit switch mounting shall be provided where shown on the drawings. 2.09 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be packless piston type direct acting for sizes less than I-in and internal pilot operated for sizes 1-in and larger, 2-way or 3-way, valves and shall be ASCO Valve; Red Hat by Automatic Switch Co., similar by Circle Seal Controls-Atkomatic Valve Co. or equal for air and water service. B. Valves shall be energized to open, except for valves on water seal lines to pumps which shall be energize to close. C. Valves shall have forged brass bodies, NPT end connections of the connected piping Type 304 stainless steel internal parts, and Buna-N or Ethylene Propylene valve seats. Valves shall have a minimum 150 psig safe working pressure and zero minimum operating pressure differential. Connections shall be threaded. D. Solenoid valves size 2-inch and larger shall be full bore bronze body, Type 430 stainless steel plunger, copper coil class A encapsulated, Type 302 stainless steel spring, wash-down safe, equal to type A as manufactured by Magnatrol Valve Corp., Hawthorne, NJ or equal. Solenoid valves shall have a manual override actuated by a handle levered plunger mounted on the bottom of the valve body. These valves must be mounted in a horizontal run of piping, with the solenoid up in the vertical position. E. Note that solenoid valves may be shown on Electrical and/or Mechanica) Drawings, or may only be specified, but if so specified or shown, shall be provided. Solenoid valves located in hazardous classified areas shall be provided with electrical enclosures which satisfy the electrical classification as specified or shown on the electrical drawings. 2.10 CORPORATION STOPS A. 3/4" through 2" Corporation Stops shall be ball valve type, meeting AWWA Standard C800-01, Sec. 42.3 (High Pressure), withstanding working pressures up to 300 psi. The body, ball, operating stem, T-head, and service ]ine connector shall be manufactured from red brass and conform to ASTM B62 and/or ASTM B584, L7NS No. C83600. The ball shall be fluorocarbon coated and shall float on two EPDM seats and be watertight in both directions. The operating stem and nut shall be one piece, held in place by a mating machined flange on the stem and in the 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 I J t ��- 1 5 TPA S:ICLWATER�R01 Plarrt Expansion Projec[11ssueA ro Bid Specs{15100.tlocx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.11 2.12 body. The operating stem shall have an EPDM O-ring to provide a watertight seal against the body. B. Inlet threads shall be A W WA Taper, except where used with service clamps, where threads shall be 1PS threads. All thread types and diameters shall conform to AWWA C800. The inlet threads will be integral to the body. The waterway diameter shall be approximately equivalent to the nominal size ofthe stop, and shall accommodate the maximum cutter size established by AWWA C800. The outlet shall be a compression connection meeting AWWA C800 Sec. 4.4.9. C. Corporation Stops shall be FB Style Ballcorp, as manufactured by The Ford Meter Box Company, Inc., Wabash, lndiana, or equal. Where corporation stops are used with plastic pipe, a brass companion flange shall be provided on the outlet of each corporation stop. AIR RELEASE VALVES (Valve identified as "ARV" on the Drawings) A. Air release valves shall be installed to release any small accumulations of air which may collect while pipe is in operation and under pressure. B. The small orifice assembly air release valve shall automatically release air accumulations from the pipe while under positive pressure. When the valve body fills with air, the float ball shall fall to open the smalt orifice and exhaust the air to atmosphere. When the air has been exhausted, the float ball shall be buoyed up and tightly close the small orifice. C. The small orifice assembly shall be furnished with cast iron body and cover (ASTM A 126-B) or ductile iron suitable for field test pressure as specified in Section 01445. The float ball shal) be constructed of stainless steel and attached to a stainless steel lever mechanism. A resilient, Buna- N seat shall be attached to the lever mechanism for drop-tight closure. D. Valves shall be provided with a vacuum check to prevent air from re-entering the line. Fittings shall be threaded unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Air release valve vents shall be covered with stainless steel screen. F. Separate air release valves shall be manufactured by APCO Model 200A, or equal. VACUUM RELIEF-AIR INLET/AIR RELEASE VALVES (Valve identified as "AVV" on the Drawings) A. Vacuum/Air Inlet and Air Release valves shall be normally closed and open only when the pressure in the pipeline falls below atmospheric pressure to allow large volume of air entry through large diameter inlet orifice. The one-way vacuum relief valve shall open quickly to admit the air to prevent vacuum formation below critical levels and the close upon restoration of positive pressure, trapping the air as the system returns to positive pressure. The small orifice air release valve shall remain open to release the trapped air slowly in a controlled manner. B. The large orifice assembly shall be furnished with cast iron or ductile iron body and cover suitable for test pressure as specified in Section 01445. The disc and seat ring shall be bronze (ASTM B62). The air inlet shall be protected by stainless steel screen and cover. Tight shut off shall be provided by a metal seat with a resilient seal. Internal spring shall be stainless steel or stainless steel lever mechanism. Opening vacuum pressure setting shall be field adjustable and the initial set point shall be such that the valve will open whenever the pressure falls below atmospheric. Valve sizes shall be as shown on the drawings_ 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 1 S 1 00— I 6 TPA 5:1CLWATER1R01 PIaM Expansion ProjectUssued W Bid Spees\15100.do« � � �J • • �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Ri��hts Reserved C. The smali air release valve shall be 2" size inlet opening with a l/16'h inch orifice outlet and shall be furnished with cast iron or ductile iron body and cover suitable for 150 psi field test pressure. `t'he float shall be constructed of stainless steel and attached to a stainless steel lever mechanism. A resilient, Buna-N seat shall be attached to the lever mechanism far drop-tight closure. D. Flushing attachments shall be provided. Stainless ball valve for manual blow off shall also be provided. E. Units shall be manufactured by APCO model 1500C, GA - Fig 992 (Fig 902 Air Release), or approved equal. 2.13 COMBINATION AIRNACUUM AND AIR RELEASE VALVES (identified as"Combination Air Vacuum Valve on the Drawings) A. The concentrate pump station shall have combination air/vacuum and air release valves installed as they are indicated on the Drawings. B. Combination air release valves shall be float operated and both the air/vacuum and air release functions shall be performed by a combination valve housed in a single body. Valve shall be equipped with a gauge or relief port. C. The air/vacuum valve shall automatically exhaust large quantities of air during the filling of the pipeline. The valve shall be capable of venting air up to sonic velocity without blowing shut; • closing only after all the air has been vented. The air release port shall automatically release small pockets of air from the pipeline while the pipeline is in operation and under pressure, to keep the system free of accumulated air. The valve shall automatically open to allow air to re-enter during draining or whenever a negative pressure occurs. D. Combination air valves shal) be of the size shown on the drawings and conform to the requirements of AWWA C512 and be of the "kinetic" design capable of exhausting air at up to sonic velocity without blowing shut. E. The combination air release valve shall be suitable for field test pressure as specified in Section 01445. F. Body, cover, and baffle shall be reinforced nylon body, floats of formed polypropylene or high density polyethylene. Screens shall be installed on the openings of all air release valves. G. Valves shall have a 2" standard male NPT and be provided with a 2" companion flange. H. Where shown on the Drawings, the valve shall be provided with a non slam discharge throttling attachment to control the discharge of air from the valve and allow full air intake. I. Combination air valves shall be ARI USA Model D040-PT02 Combination Air Valve with Non Slam discharge throttling attachment where shown on the Drawings, or ENGINEER approved equal. Valve tests shall be performed with and be part of tests on companion pipelines. 2.14 SURGE RELIEF VALVE • A. Surge relief valves shall be spring-type angle surge relief valves APCO Series 3000, GA lndustries Figure No. 624-HD, or equal. 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 1 S 1 ��— 1/ TPA S:�CLWATETRO 1 Plan[ Expansion PrqecNSSUetl ro Bitl Specs115100.tloc� �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � B. Relief pressure settings shall be adjustable and set to 1 10 psi. Valves must have a maximum warking pressure plus surge of as specified in Section 01445. 2.15 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS A. Flange adapter couplings shall be as specified below and in the piping materials sections of these specifications. I. Flanged coupling adaptors shall be Smith-Blair Type 913 with Type 907 Restraint Plates and Rods, Dresser Style 128-W with Style 441 Tie Plates and Rods, or equal conforming to AW WA Manual M1 l. Tie rods and nuts shall be in accordance with AWWA Manual M1 1. Anchor studs will not be permitted. 2. All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed. 3. Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within the pipe. 4. All couplings shall have a sufficient number of factory installed anchor studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project as specified in Section 01445. 2.16 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. Not withstanding any of these specified requirements, all coatings and lubricants in contact with potable water shall be certified as acceptable for use with that fluid. B. If not specified herein, coatings shall comply with the requirements of Section 09901 and 09902. In case of a conflict, the requirements of this Section govern. • C. If the manufacturer's requirement is not to require finished coating on any interior surfaces, then manufacturer shall so state and no interior finish coating will be required, if acceptable to the Engineer. D. The exterior surface of various parts of valves, operators, floor-stands and miscellaneous piping shall be tharoughly cleaned of all scale, dirt, grease or other foreign matter and thereafter one shop coat of an approved rust-inhibitive primer such as Inertol Primer No. 621 shall be applied in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer or other primer compatible with the finish coat provided. E. Unless otherwise noted, interior ferrous surfaces of all valves shall be given a shop finish of an asphalt varnish conforming to AWWA C509, (except mounting faces/surfaces) or epoxy conforming to AWWA C550 with a minimum thickness of 6 mil. F. Ferrous surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. Mounting surfaces shall be especially coated with a rust preventative. G. Special care shall be taken to protect uncoated items and plastic items, especially from environmental damage. 2.17 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Factory inspection, testing and correction of deficiencies shall be done in accordance with the referenced standards and as noted herein. • 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 1 S 1 �0� � O TPA 5�1CLWATER1R01 Plant Expension Projeclllssued to Bid Specs115100.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Iti�hts Reserved � B. See Division 1 for additional requirements. Also refer to PART 1, especially for required submission of test data to the Engineer. C. In addition to all tests required by the referenced standards, the following shall a}so be factory tested: 1. Pressure regulating valves shall be factory tested at the specified pressures and flows. 2. Butterfly valves shall be factory tested to demonstrate drop tight closure at the specified conditions. 3. All types of air and vacuum valves. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER before they are installed. B. Install all brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise required. Before setting these items, cheek all Drawings and figures which have a direct bearing on their location. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the proper location of valves and appurtenances during the construction of the work. • C. All materials shall be carefully inspected for defects in construction and materials. All debris and foreign material shall be cleaned out of openings, etc. All valve flange covers shall remain in place until connected piping is in place. All operating mechanisms shall be operated to check their proper functioning and all nuts and bolts checked for tightness. Valves and other equipment which do not operate easily, or are otherwise defective, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Where installation is covered by a referenced standard, installation shall be in accordance with that standard, except as herein modified, and the CONTRACTOR shall certify such. Also note additional requirements in other parts of this Section. E. Unless otherwise noted, joints for valves and appurtenances shall be made up utilizing the same procedures as specified under the applicable type connecting pipe joint and all valves and other items shall be installed in the proper position as recommended by the manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for verifying manufacturers' tarquing requirements for all valves. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF MANUAL OPERATIONAL DEVICES A. Unless otherwise noted, all operational devices shall be installed with the units of the factory, as shown on the Drawings or as acceptable to the ENGINEER to allow accessibility to operate and maintain the item and to prevent interference with other piping, valves and appurtenances. B. For manually operated valves 3-in in diameter and smaller, valve operators and indicators shall be rotated to display toward normal operation locations. • C. Floor boxes, valve boxes, extension stems and low floor stands shall be installed vertically eentered over the operating nut, with couplings as required and the elevation of the box top shall 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 15100-19 TPA S:�CLWATERV201 Plant Expansion ProjeciVssued ro Bid SyeuV5100.docx �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved be adjusted to conform to the elevation of the finished floor surface or grade at the completion of + the Contract. Boxes and stem guides shall be adequately supported during concrete placement to maintain vertical alignment. 3A3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. See also Division 1. Take care not to over pressure valves or appurtenances during pipe testing. If any unit proves to be defective, it shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Functional Test: Prior to plant startup, all items shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfactory performance. After installation, all manual valves shall be opened and closed in the presence of the ENGINEER to show the valve operates smoothly from full open to full close and without leakage. Valves equipped with electric, pneumatic or hydraulic actuators shall by cycled 5 times from full open to full closed in the presence of the ENGINEER without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating. Pressure control and pressure relief valves shall be operated in the presence of the ENGINEER to show they perform their specified function at some time priar to placing the piping system in operation and as agreed during construction coordination meetings. C. The various pipe lines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed are specified to be field tested. During these tests any defective valve or appurtenance shall be adjusted, removed and replaced, or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. D. Various regulating valves, strainers, or other appurtenances shall be tested to demonstrate their • conformance with the specified operational capabilities and any deficiencies shall be corrected or the device replaced ar otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. 3.04 CLEANING A. All items including valve interiors shall be inspected before line closure, for the presence of debris. At the option of the Engineer, internal inspection of valve and appurtenances may be required any time that the likelihood of debris is a possibility. All pipes and valves shall be cleaned prior to installation, testing disinfection and final acceptance. 3.05 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection of valves and appurtenances on all potable water lines and where otherwise noted, shall be as noted in Paragraph l.02B above. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520/ 10/03/2012 I S l 00-20 TPA S]CLWATERiRO 7 Plant Expansion Piqeclllssued to Bid Specs\15100.AOCx r � U • u �O 201 Z CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION ] 5500 HVAC PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. These Sections and Drawings cover(s) the requirements of the HVAC Work to be performed and shall not void any of the requirements specified under the General Conditions or General Requirements. i� C� [7 The areas where work is to be accomplished are specified and shown in the following: Specification Sections I5500 HVAC 15860 Fans 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 2. Drawing Number H-1 H-2 H-3 H-4 HD-1 HVAC Symbols and Abbreviations R.O. Treatment Building HVAC Demolition Plan R.O. Treatment Building HVAC Modification Plan High Service Pump Building HVAC Demolition and Modification Plans — Additive Alternate No. 1 HVAC Schedules and Details The requirements specified herein shall be modified only if specified otherwise for particular application in other Divisions. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained on the Drawings and in the Schedules on the drawings. E. Work included under the "Scope of Work" of this HVAC Section includes all labor, material, equipment, tools and services necessary to furnish, deliver, unload, install, test and place in satisfactory operation, the equipment, services and systems as called for under the HVAC Section(s) including any incidentat work not shown, or not specified but which can reasonably be inferred as belonging to the various systems and necessary in good practice to provide complete and fully operational systems. Cutting and patching is included in this Section and shall be done as described in Section 01045 unless otherwise indicated. F. Equipment shall consist of the following: 6349-79520 15500-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smitb All Rights Reserved 1. Fans 2. indoor mounted air handling units with filters 3. split system units, condensing units, air handling units, and flters 4. split system units, heat pumps, air handling units, and filters G. The following work descriptions are not intended to in any way limit the above broad statement, but are intended as a more specific mention of the most important items included therein. 1. R.O. Treatment Building: Base Bid — Remove existing fans and air conditioning systems, including all associated equipment, piping, ductwork, and controls. Coordinate salvage/disposal with the requirements of Section 02050 and the Owner. Provide exhaust systems including all associated fans, controls, ductwork, and air distribution devices. Provide split system admin area heat pump systems, including all associated equipment, controls, ductwork, air distribution devices, heating sections, and piping. Provide split system electrical room air conditioning systems, including all associated equipment, controls, ductwork, air distribution devices, and piping. b. Base Bid — Provide fuel tank hurricane restraints/tie downs for existing fuel tank. u c. Additive Alternate No. 1- Coordinate removal and installation of lab sink with case • work supplier. Reconnect existing water and sanitary piping. 2. High Service Pump Building: a. Base Bid - Provide flow alarms for existing emergency shower/eyewash units. b. Additive Alternate No. 1- Remove existing fan, including all associated equipment and controls. Coordinate salvage/disposal with the requirements of Section 02050 and the Owner. Provide exhaust system including all associated fans, controls, ductwork, and air distribution devices. 3. For all Areas: Contractor shall provide temporary air conditioning and/or ventilation systems as required. Refer to the drawings and the requirements in Division 1. b. All work done regarding refrigerant removal and replacement shall be in accordance with all Federal, State and Local laws and regulations. This includes, but is not limited to, evacuation, purging, and testing. All refrigerant shall be captured, and no refrigerant shall be released to the atmosphere. Contractor shall provide all necessary refrigerant as required to recharge the systems at the completion of the relocation, and after the equipment is returned to its original location. 6349-79520 15500- 2 October 2012 • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved H. Design Conditions: Outdoor Design Conditions Summer: Winter Approximate Heating Degree Days Approximate Cooling Degree Days Site Elevation (Approximate) 2. Indoor Design Conditions 94°F Dry-bulb, 79°F Wet-bulb 4l°F Dry-bulb 570 3778 71 ft. Above Sea Level Space designation Summer Space Outdoor Air Vent. Winter Space Outdoor Air Vent. Tem .°F Tem °F Electrical Rooms 80° f 5°F N/A Ambient N/A Administration 75° f 5°F Per ASHRAE 62 68 f 5°F Per ASHRAE 62 Bldg. and Florida and Florida Mechanical Code Mechanical Code Process Areas 104° f 5°F 6 AGHR Ambient 6 AC/HR Intermittent Intermittent I. This Section is incomplete without the information contained in the HVAC equipment • schedules on the Drawings. Provide equipment of the type, size, capacity and arrangement as shown on the Drawings and as scheduled. Equipment shall consist of the particular components listed in the schedules in addition to those components normally required for the type of unit. The order of component assembly will be as stated in the schedule. Particular attention must be paid to the remarks and notes in the schedules and on the Drawings. All ductwork, piping, and equipment shown on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale, but figured dimensions and detailed drawings of the actual equipment furnished shall be followed in every case. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of ductwork and piping are shown, but it is not the intent to show every offset or fitting, nor every hanger or support, or structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the intent and purpose of the drawings all necessary parts to make a complete working system ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all trades. K. Furnish and install all HVAC Systems in accordance with all requirements of the Florida Mechanical Code, the Florida Building Code, all other applicable codes and standards and the requirements of this specification. 1 A2 RELATED WORK A. Cutting and patching is included in Division 1, except for items specified herein. B. Temporary, cooling, heating, electric power and lighting is included in Division 1. C. Trenching, excavation and backfill is included in Division 2, except for items specified herein. • 6349-79520 15500- 3 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Concrete wark is included in Division 3, except for required HVAC anchor bolts, sleeves and templates which shall be furnished under this Section. E. Structural steel and miscellaneous metal is included in Division 5, except for supplementary steel required for HVAC hangers, equipment supports, anchors and guides, which shall be furnished under this Section. F. Flashing and counterflashing is included in Division 7, except for items specified herein. G. Painting is included in Division 9, except for factory finished HVAC equipment, HVAC shop painting and HVAC identification labeling. H. Exterior louvers are included in Division 10. I. Plumbing work is included under the Plumbing Section (Division) of this Division (Specification) except for water and drain closing in connections to HVAC equipment. Electrical field wiring is included in Division 16, except for field wiring for automatic temperature controls as specified herein or as shown on the HVAC Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data for the following: 1. Catalog cuts and data sheets for all equipment. 2. Design calculations for record purposes, signed and sealed by a professional engineer hired by the Contractor as specified in 1.08, Engineering Services. Engineering services shall be provided as required in Part 2. 3. Automatic control drawings with composite wiring diagrams, including bills of material and descriptions of operation for all systems. Panel layouts and name plate lists for all local and central panels. Data sheets for all control system components. 4. Complete damper schedules for damper submittals including the following for each type or model of damper to be furnished for the project: materials of construction for blades, frames, bearings, linkages and seals; flow and leakage characteristics; typical operating torque requirements or characteristics; options to be furnished; general installation and maintenance instructions. Damper schedules shall include damper type; unit served; damper service; damper size; duct size; drive linkage location; installation arrangement (flanged or in duct) and damper operator type. • C� 5. All fans, submit in accordance with sections 01300 and 15500, ali data on the fan schedules. In addition the submittal shall include catalog data, fan data sheets with a description of the proposed fan, fan size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, weight, motor horsepower, motor type, power supply, and frame size. Provide catalog data and selections for vibration isolators, include materials of construction. For belt drive equipment; provide drive data indicating the sheave sizes, belts size, number and 6349-79520 15500- 4 October 2012 • C � . �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 0 length. Each submittal shall include pertinent equipment dimensional data, fan performance (operating data) information, and a performance curve showing the fan operating point and range. Minimum curve size shall be 8-in by 6-in. Faxed copies of curves are not acceptable. A list of accessories to be furnished shall be included on each submittal. Copies of operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted. Significant dimensional differences between the specified equipment and the proposed equipment shall be noted on the equipment submittal. The contractor shall provide data to show the dimensionally different equipment will fit within the space and still provide suitable clearance. Where corrosion resistance is required, provide conformation of material suitability for the specified service. For all air handling units, submit, in accordance with Section 01300 and 15500, the following: a. Unit data sheets; to include catalog data, a description of the proposed unit, size, type, arrangement, and materials of construction. b. For belt drive equipment, provide drive data indicating sheave sizes, belt size, number and length. c. Each submittal shall include pertinent equipment dimensional data, heating and cooling coil operating data. Submit, in accordance with Sections 01300 and I5500, all data and the unit schedules. The submittal shall include fan data sheets with a description of the proposed fan, fan size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, weight, motor horsepower, motor type, power supply, and frame size. Provide catalog data and seIections for vibration isolators, include materials of construction. For belt drive equipment; provide drive data indicating the sheave sizes, belts size, number and length. Each submittal shall include pertinent equipment dimensional data, fan performance (operating data) information, and a performance curve showing the fan operating point and range. Minimum curve size shall be 8-in by 6-in. Faxed copies of curves are not acceptable. A list of accessories to be furnished shall be included on each submittal. Copies of operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted. Significant dimensional differences between the specified equipment and the proposed equipment shall be noted on the equipment submittal. The Contractor shall provide data to show the dimensionally different equipment will ft within the space and still provide suitable clearance. Where corrosion resistance is required, provide conformation of material suitability for the specified service. d. For heating sections, provide information on type of heating, air entering and leaving conditions, air pressure drop, heating media entering and leaving conditions and flow or consumption, and pressure drop. Provide size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, and operating weight. e. For cooling sections, provide information on type of cooling, air entering and leaving conditions, air pressure drop, cooling media entering and leaving conditions, flow, and pressure drop. Provide size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, and operating weight. • 6349-79520 15500- 5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved f. For condensing sections provide information on number and type of compressors, . type of refrigerant and refrigerant charge, and controls provided and operating weight. Provide electrical data for power and controls. For condensing coils, provide air entering and leaving conditions, air pressure drop, size, type, arrangement, and materials of construction. g. Pertinent data on standard filters: types and sizes, quantity of modules required for each filter type, efficiency ratings performance data and manufacturer catalog cutsheets. h. List of accessories to be furnished shall be included on each submittal. Provide a recommended list of spare parts to be provided. Detailed equipment, ductwork and piping layout drawings; minimum scale 1/4-in = 1-ft-0-in for interior systems and equipment, dimension clear service spaces for motors and drives, filter, coils and spacer section access doors, and ductwork access panels and doors. (Site layout drawings and roof plans showing HVAC equipment and systems may be prepared and submitted at scales smaller than 1/4-in = 1-ft-0-in, subject to Engineer's prior approval.) 8. Standard shop and field installation details for transitions, elbows, takeoffs, discharge nozzles, turning vanes, access panels and doors, and volume control dampers. 9. Piping and appurtenances, materials and joining methods. Pipe hanger materials and • methods. ] 0. Ductwork materials, joining methods, reinforcing and material gauges. Where options are allowed by SMACNA, the proposed option shall be clearly defined. Indicate proposed materials and methods for ductwork and equipment hangers_ I 1. Prepare dimensional comparisons between proposed equipment and scheduled equipment when the proposed equipment is dimensionally larger than that scheduled. Do not propose dimensionally larger equipment from an alternate manufacturer for installation in confined areas, or when the installation of alternate equipment will result in reduction of service access below that recommended by the manufacturer. 12. Prepare layouts showing size, arrangement, and routing of field fabricated refrigerant piping for split-systems and air handling units with remote condensers. Include a letter from the AC system manufacturer indicating their approval of the proposed sizing and routing. 13. For units that will be shipped exposed, provide a description of the protective packaging that will be used during transit. 14. When special hangers, supports, anchors, or hold downs are required that are not covered by standards provide signed and sealed calculations and details for record purposes. 6349-79520 15500- 6 October 2012 • n 2012 CDM Smith All Ri=�l��ts Reserved • 15. All submittals shall contain a statement that Section 15500 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub-contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. 16. Submit air system testing, adjusting and balancing reports for review and approval. 17. Operation and Maintenance Data a. Submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The following information shall be considered a minimum. Where applicable, provide information required for specific pieces of equipment. 1) Personnel familiar with the operation and maintenance of the specific information shall prepare manuals. 2) Equipment shall be identified with the Engineers Equipment Numbers and Identification as shown in the Schedules and on the Drawings. 3) Provide information in three ring binders. All sheets shall have reinforced punches. Tabbed dividers shall separate all sections. Drawings will be bound in the manual, or contained in envelopes bound into the manual. • b. Contents - Each volume shall contain the following minimum contents: 1) Installation including instructions for unpacking, instalIing, aligning, checking and testing. Foundation data, allowable piping loads, and electrical design shall be included. 2) Operating Instructions to provide pre-operational checks, start up and shut down, and description of all control modes. Include emergency procedures for all fault conditions and actions to be taken for all alarms. Procedures for long term storage shall be included. 3) Maintenance shall include preventive, and corrective. Schedules for test of other functions are to be included. Provide a list of tools required to service the equipment. Trouble shooting instructions to include a trouble-shooting guide shall be included. Spare Parts List d. Shop Drawing Data to include performance curves, data sheets, flow diagrams, wiring diagrams, and descriptive drawings. 18. Submit the following for each insulation by System: manufacturer's product data showing conformance with this Section for all required insulation, jackets, covers, coatings, adhesives, fasteners, supports and appurtenances; complete manufacturer's instructions for installation of all required items. • 6349-79520 I5500- 7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � • 19. All materials deliveries must have accompanying manufacturer s certifications attesting to satisfactory results of product testing showing conformance with this Section. 20. Provide a recommended list of spare parts to be provided 22. In general, corrections or comments or lack there of, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. These standards shall be considered as minimum requirements. This is a general list and not all standards listed are necessarily referenced elsewhere in this Section. Specifc requirements of this Section and/or Drawings shall have precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Engineer shall determine which is to be followed. B. Abbreviation and the title of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations which may be used are as follows: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) 2. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) 3. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 4. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 5. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 8. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Factory Mutual (FM) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) • 6349-79520 15500- 8 October 2012 • r0 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved • ] 3. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 14. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) 16. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 18. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) l 9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 20. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 21. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCO) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall comply with the following criteria: • 1. Has been regularly engaged in the installation of Mechanical (HVAC) systems. 2. Has performed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three (3) projects within the last five (5) years. Submit documentation demonstrating required experience. 3. Submit a minimum of two references for projects of similar or greater complexity. 4. Submit resumes of key personnel to be utilized on this project. B. Provide single source supplier/installer responsibility for the following systems or services: 1. ATC Equipment 2. ThermalInsulation 3. Testing and Balancing 4. Air Conditioning Equipment 5. Fans C. Provide single source supplier/instailer responsibility for systems where specified in other related Sections. . 6349-79520 15500- 9 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. Services of Manufacturer's Representative Provide services of a manufacturer's service engineer or test engineer, as required in Section 01170, specifically trained on type of equipment supplied or service provided. Submit qualifications of service engineer for approval. Man-day requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. a. Automatic Temperature Controls - Operation and maintenance instructions. 1 Man-day. b. Testing and Balancing - Spot check HVAC system flows and system inspection during the first year of operation at Owner's request exclusive of repair, malfunction, or other trouble-shooting service calls. 2 Man-days. E. The insulation materials to be furnished under this section shall be essentially the standard products of manufactures regularly engaged in the manufacture of insulation systems. F. Several manufacturers are indicated as acceptable for each type of insulation in these specifications. The insulation sub-contractor shall be responsible for determining that all insulation supplied for the project is suitable for installation in the spaces indicated. The insulation sub-contractor shall also insure that all materials used are compatible and in compliance with applicable codes and standards. � �� G. All equipment of a given type included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single • manufacturer or as specified on the schedules H. Inspection by the Engineer's representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. I. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. An authorized representative of the manufacturer shall perform the initial startup of the equipment. The Owner and Engineer shall witness startup. The use of local sales representatives to perform this work is not acceptable, unless the manufacturer provides documented evidence that the sales representative has been specifically trained for this work. K. All rotating parts of equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be inspected for size, quality and quantity against approved shop drawings upon delivery. 6349-79520 15500- 10 October 2012 • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • B. Delivery schedule of all equipment shall be coordinated with the Contractor. Equipment ready for shipment prior to the agreed on shipping date shall be stored without cost to the Owner by the manufacturer. C. All materials shall be suitably packed for shipment and long term storage. Each package shall be labeled to indicate the project and the contents of each package. Where applicable, equipment numbers shall be marked on the container. D. All equipment shipped that is exposed such as on a flat bed truck shall be protected during transit. The equipment shall be protected from moisture, road salt, dirt and stones or other materials thrown up from other vehicles. Electrical components shall be protected as above, but with special attention to moisture. The method of shipment protection shall be defined in the submittals. E. Instruction for the servicing and startup of equipment in long term or prolonged storage shall accompany each item. F. All materials shall be stored in a covered dry location off of the ground. When required to protect the materials they shall be stored in a temperature-controlled location. 1.07 COORDINATION A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the drawings or specifications are deemed necessary, details of such departures and the • reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for review. No such departures shall be made without the prior written concurrence of the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the location and placement of al] concrete inserts and welding attachments with the structural engineer. C. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination of the HVAC systems, including; scheduling, and verification that all structures, ducts, piping and the mounting of equipment are compatible. D. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. 1.08 ENGINEERING SERVICES A. When engineering services are specified to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall retain a licensed professional engineer to perform the services. The engineer shall be licensed at the time the work is done and in the State in which the project is located. If the State issues discipline specific licenses, the engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. In addition, the engineer shall be experienced in the type of work being provided. B. All work is to be done according to the applicable regulations for professional engineers, to include signing, sealing and dating documents. When submittals are required by a professional • 6349-79520 I5500- 11 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved engineer, in addition to state required signing and sealing, a copy of the current wallet card or • wall certificate indicating the date of expiration shall be included with the submittal. 1.09 UL LISTING A. All materials, equipment and system components of the HVAC system must be UL Listed. If factory UL listing of all system components is not available, the manufacturer must include in their scope of supply, ALL expenses associated with getting the complete installation UL feld labeled, by a UL representative. This includes all hourly or per diem costs and expenses of the UL representative, all costs to bring the system or specific components, within UL field labeling compliance, and all costs of the manufacturer's representative. 110 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and service ali equipment and systems until the particular equipment or the system has been accepted by the Owner. B. Maintenance shall include compliance with the manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions as well as periodic cleaning or replacement of air handling system filters. C. Compile records of all maintenance and lubrication work performed on Owner or Contractor furnished equipment. Maintain records at the construction or installation site and make available at all times for review by the Owner or Engineer. At the request of the Owner or Engineer submit copies of these records to the Owner for information and/or review. D. Provide all special tools required for normal maintenance. Tools shall be packaged in a steel • case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. E. Provide to the Owner a list of all spare and replacement parts with individual prices and location where they are available. Prices shall remain in effect for a period of not less than 1 year after start-up and final acceptance. 1.11 DEFINITIONS A. Particular terminology used under this Section is defined as follows: Traffic Level and Personnel Level - Areas, including process areas, eyuipment rooms, boiler rooms and other areas where insulation may be damaged by normal activity and local personnel traffic. Area extends to 8-ft above floor, walkways, platforms and stairs, and horizontally 3-ft beyond the edge of walkways, platforms, and stairs. 2. Exposed Piping and Ductwork - Piping and ductwork visible from the floor level and includes all piping and ductwork in equipment rooms, boiler rooms, etc. 3. Concealed Piping and Ductwork - Piping and ductwork not visible from the floor level and includes piping and ductwork above hung ceilings and in shaftways. 6349-79520 15500- 12 October 2012 • . C � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. Supply Air Ductwork - Ductwork carrying air from a fan or air handling unit to the space or spaces to which it will be introduced. This air may have been heated or cooled or in the case of ventilation system the air would be neither heated nor cooled. Supply air ductwork extends from the fan or air handling unit to the registers, grills or diffusers at the end of the ductwork. Return Air Ductwark - Ductwork carrying air from the space it was supplied to back to a fan or air handling unit. Return air ductwork extends from the registers or grills at the end of the ductwork to the air handling unit or connection with an outdoor air intake duct. 6. Exhaust Air Ductwork - Ductwork carrying air from a space to a fan and then to be discharged to the outdoors. Exhaust air ductwork extends from the registers of grills at the end of the ductwork to the fan. From the fan exhaust ductwork extends to the discharge point, exhaust air damper, or exhaust air plenum, whichever comes first. 7. Relief Air Ductwork - Ductwark carrying air from a space without a fan to be discharged to the outdoors. Relief air ductwork extends from the registers or grills at the end of the ductwork, to the discharge point, relief air damper, or relief air plenum, whichever comes first. 8. Outdoor Air Ductwork - Ductwork carrying untreated air from the outside to a fan or air handling unit. Outdoor air ductwork starts at the intake point, outdoor air damper, or outdoor air plenum, whichever comes last. The outdoor air ductwork extends to the fan, air handling unit, or connection with a return air duct, whichever comes first. 9. Mixed Air Ductwork - Ductwork that can carry either return air or outdoor air or a combination of both. Mixed air ductwork starts at the connection of the return air and outdoor air ducts and extends to the fan or air handling unit. 10. Outdoor Air Plenum - A plenum that extends from the opening in the skin of the structure to the outdoor air duct. If the outdoor air damper is directly at the intake or there is no outdoor air damper, the plenum will extend to the first size reduction. If the outdoor air damper is not at the intake, the plenum will extend to the outdoor air damper. 11. Exhaust Air Plenum - A plenum that extends from the opening in the skin of the structure to the exhaust air duct. If the exhaust air damper is directly at the discharge or there is no exhaust air damper, the plenum will extend from the last size reduction. If the exhaust air damper is not at the discharge, the plenum will extend to the exhaust air damper. 12. Relief Air Plenum - A plenum that extends from the opening in the skin of the structure to the relief air duct. If the relief air damper is directly at the discharge or there is no relief air damper, the plenum will extend from the last size reduction. If the relief air damper is not at the discharge, the plenum will extend to the relief air damper. 13. Ventilated Spaces - Areas supplied with outdoor air on a continuous or intermittent basis. The outdoor air may be heated and/or cooled or untreated. 14. Heated Spaces - Areas where heat is supplied to maintain a minimum temperature during the heating season. • 6349-79520 I5500- 13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • I 5. Unheated Spaces - Areas where heat is not applied and there is no minimum temperature during the heating season. 16. Conditioned Spaces - Areas that are provided with heating and mechanical cooling. 17. Non-Conditioned Spaces - Areas that are not provided with mechanical cooling. 18. Indoor Piping - Piping within a building that is not exposed to the weather. 19. Outdoor Piping - Piping that is not within a building and which is exposed to the weather. 20. Indoor Ductwork - Ductwork within a building that is not exposed to the weather. 21. Outdoor Ductwork - Ductwork that is not within a building and is exposed to the weather. 22. Hot Ductwork - Ductwork carrying air with a temperature above the surrounding space temperature. 23. Cold Ductwork - Ductwork carrying air with a temperature below the surrounding space temperature. 24. HoUCold Ductwork - Ductwork carrying air with a temperature that can be either above or below the surrounding space temperature. • 25. Thermal Conductivity - The rate of heat flow through unit area of a homogeneous substance under the influence of unit temperature gradient in the direction perpendicular to the area. Units-BTU per (hour)(sq ft)(degrees F temp. difference)(per inch thickness). 26. Flues/StacksBreeching - Ductwork carrying products of combustion to atmosphere. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Electric Motors 1. Electric motors in NEMA frame sizes shall conform to the requirements in Section 16150, unless otherwise specified herein. 2. The motor manufacturer shall confirm that motors used to power equipment are provided with bearings that will provide a bearing life equal to the driven equipment or better. Confirmation shall be included with shop drawing submittal. 3. Motors will be selected to be non-overloading over the entire operating range of the equipment. A safety factor of 25 percent will be added to all motors up to and including 50 horsepower. A safety factor of 15 percent will be added to all motors over 50 6349-79520 I5500- 14 October 2012 • u • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved horsepower. Motors indicated on the schedules are to be considered a minimum. This sizing is not to limit compliance with the above requirements B. Electrical Equipment Electrical equipment which is furnished under this Section shall meet the requirements specified in Division 16: a. Disconnect switches, motor starters and combination motor starters (starters with disconnecting means and short circuit protection) shall be as specified in Section 16191. b. Cord-connected controls for hazardous areas shall be provided with intrinsically safe relays, which shall be as specified in Section 16191. c. Raceways, boxes, fttings and supports shall be as specified in Section 16110. d. Wires and cables shall be as specified in Section 16120. C. Electrical enclosures and panels to include automatic temperature control panels and components shall be suitable for the environment and electrical classification for the space they are located in. The type of enclosure for the various spaces shall be as specified in Division 16. Refer to the electrical drawings for the space classifications. D. Where noted in the HVAC equipment schedules, ar when shown on the Drawings, provide fan speed control switches and integral unit thermostats. 2.02 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND MOUNTINGS A. General Unless otherwise specified in this Division all machinery or vibrating mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by vibration isolators with a minimum deflection as specified. Operating equipment that can transmit objectionable vibration and noise must be installed with special types of vibration isolators such as flexible connectors to ductwork, piping and wiring. In more critical areas and under particular conditions, additional vibration isolators shall be installed as specified in other related Sections in this Division, or in specific equipment schedules. 2. All equipment shall be provided with attachment points for floor or suspended mounting that will safety transmit all loads including seismic to the supports. The vibration isolator manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of vibration isolators suitable for the particular application. Selection of the vibration isolator shall include the following factors. a. b. • 6349-79520 Equipment Weight Equipment operating frequencies 15500- 15 October 2012 O 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved c. Type of building support structure d. Seismic forces as required by the applicable building codes to include shear, tension and compression due to the code specified loads. 4. All floor mounted vibration isolators shall be bolted to the floor or framing on which they rest. Bolts shall be arranged to prevent transmission of vibration through the bolts. 5. All isolation devices for a single piece of equipment shall be selected for a uniform static deflection according to distribution of weight in the equipment. 6. All pieces of equipment that have a variation in weight during operation or maintenance such as, but not limited to, cooling towers and hoppers, shall have built-in vertical limit restraints to limit motion to a maximum of 1/4-in. 7. Isolators exposed to the weather, in rooms classified on electrical drawings as damp, wet, or conosive or where called for on the Drawings shall be provided with corrosion protection. Steel parts other than springs shall be galvanized. Parts subject to wear, rubbing, shall be non-corrosive material such as rubber or stainless steel. Springs and hardware shall be cadmium plated or otherwise provided with an approved coating. 8. After installation of equipment, isolators shall be adjusted for proper loading and distribution of weight. B. Types - The following types of vibration isolators may be used. Isolation Types for Floor Mounting a. Single elastomer-in-shear isolators, molded mound shaped element designed for 1!4-in deflection under the imposed static load. Double elastomer-in-shear isolators shall be two such elements assembled in series or a molded element designed to provide 1/2-in deflection under the imposed static load. Elastomer-in-shear isolators shall be properly housed to prevent bulging and shall be provided with adequate facilities for bolting to equipment and floor slab. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable and shall be equipped with acoustical-friction pads, leveling bolts and bolt holes for anchoring to floor slab. Springs shall have a minimum ratio of outside diameter to operating spring height of 0.8 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the specified deflection. Where housed springs are specified or required, provide units with telescoping cast iron or steel housing, containing one or more springs, complete with resilient alignment insert and a minimum of I/4-in thick rubber or neoprene sound deadening pad bonded to the base of housing. Heavy load pads shall be 1-1/4-in thick and shall consist of a high load capacity elastomer pad and sandwiched between two 1/8-in thick steel load distribution plates capable of supporting loads up to 250 psi. For large pad area, steel plates of suitable thickness shall be provided to distribute the load. u • 6349-79520 15500- 16 October 2012 • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved d. Light load pads shall be neoprene corrugated single, laminated double or laminated with 1/2-in thick fine granular composition cork sandwiched between two 1/4-in layers of corrugated, oil resistant neoprene. Pads shall be capable of loading to 50 psi. 2. Isolation for Suspension a. Isolation hangers for suspension of equipment and piping shall have a single element of elastomer for 1/4-in deflection, a double or a single molded element of 1/2-in deflection, a single spring element with an elastomer grommet for up to 3/4-in deflection and a combination of an elastomer and spring elements in series for 1-in deflection and up contained within a structural rigid one piece steel hanger box. Springs shall have a minimum ratio of outside diameter to operating spring height of 0.8 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the specified deflection. b. The neoprene element shall have a bushing to prevent hanger rod contact with the housing box. The lower rod shall be free to swing in a 30 degree arc without touching the spring or the housing. Rubber in shear type shall be steel rails running the full length of the supported equipment and extending under any overhang to counteract cantilever effects. The rails shall incorporate single or double deflection elastomer-in-shear fastened in place and a continuous steel floor bearing plate running the full length of each rail. The rails shall be drilled and tapped to accept the supported equipment and shall serve as a template. d. Steel spring type shall be steel rails running the full length of the supported equipment and extending under any overhang to counteract cantilever effects. The rails shall consist of structural members supported by individual free standing springs. The rails shall be drilled to accept the supported equipment and shall serve as a template. Fans and their driving motors shall be mounted on structural steel channel members forming a rigid base. A common member parallel to the V-belt drive shall run the full length of the fan and motor and shall be of sufficient rigidity to resist the bending stress of belt pull. The structural steel base shall incorporate single or double deflection elastomer-in-shear elements or free standing springs located for proper weight distribution. The base shall be drilled and tapped to accept the fan and motor and shall serve as a template. Integral motor slide rails shall be provided and welded in place. 3. Unless specifically noted in other sections of the specification or on specific equipment schedules, all equipment will be provided with vibration isolation as defined by the following table: Type of Vibration Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Equipment Isolation Type Deflection for Deflection for Deflection for Deflection for Slab on Grade u to 20-ft 20-ft to 30-ft 30-ft to 40-ft • 6349-79520 I5500- 17 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Inches floor span Floor Span Floor Span inches Inches Inches Centrifugal Neoprene 0.25 -- -- -- Fans Condensing Neoprene 025 -- -- -- Units Air Handling Neoprene 0.25 -- -- -- Units C. Rigidly Mounted Equipment When equipment does not require vibration isolation, it shall be firmly attached to the building structure. Bolts and support structure shall include allowances for seismic loads as required by the applicable building codes to include shear and moment loads. 2.03 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS A. All materials, including adhesives, surface coatings, sealers, assemblies of several materials, insulation, jacketing, finish, etc, shall have flame spread ratings not over 25 (fre resistive), and smoke development ratings not over 50, as established by tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.. • B. These requirements apply to all circumstances whether the materials are field applied or • applied by a manufacturer in his/her shop, or elsewhere, prior to delivery to the project. 2.04 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives shall consist of the driver and driven sheaves and one or multiple matched V-belts. Select V-belt drives with belt horsepower ratings equal to or greater than 1.5 times the driving motor nameplate horsepower. Provide sheaves with steel, cast iron, or malleable iron split taper bushings and keyways on driven shafts of 3/4-in and larger diameter. 2.05 NOISE CRITERIA A. The selection of pumps, fans, air handling equipment, air conditioners, heating ventilating and air conditioning machinery and mechanical equipment and the installation of the system components such as duct work and piping shall be such as not to exceed to maximum permissible noise for non-equipment spaces as defined in Table 2, Design Guidelines for HVAC System Noise in Unoccupied Spaces contained in the 1995 edition of the ASHRAE Application Handbook. Under no conditions shall the noise created by equipment exceed the levels of permissible noise exposures of occupational areas as established by the OSHA and other Federal, State and local safety and health standards, codes and ordinances. B. The following sound criteria shall be met for all of the following listed equipment. Data shall be the sound pressure level (reference 20 micro pascals per octave band) and to include the dBA at 5 feet. 6349-79520 15500- 18 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved • Equipment 63 Identification EF-3, EF-4 83 EF-5 83 • 2.06 2.07 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dBA 82 87 82 75 73 68 66 72 85 88 87 84 79 71 66 77 I. The equipment supplier shall provide actual data for the equipment submitted. If the space does not meet the required criteria, and the noise level of the equipment is found to be the cause, the equipment supplier shall be responsible for the modifcations required to correct the condition. BEARINGS A. General - Furnish equipment bearings suitable for the intended equipment service. Furnish bearings designed to carry both thrust and radial loads for equipment designed for all angle operation. B. Provide extended lube lines with pressure relief equipped grease fittings for all bearings which are not readily accessible from outside the equipment. C. Bearings for a11 equipment in the schedule below shall have heavy-duty grease lubricated self aligning ball or roller bearings. Bearings shall have ample thrust provision to prevent end play during the normal life of the bearing. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all fans shall have bearings for both the equipment and motors with the following ABMA L-50 life. 1. Fans over 3000 cfm - 100,040 hours. 2. Fan impellers greater than 10-in diameter 3. Continuous duty fans with motors over 25 horse power 200,000 hours. 4. All fans with motors over 50 horse power 200,000 hours. D. Belt driven fans, including air handling unit fans shall be equipped with self aligning single row ball bearings, double row tapered or spherical roller bearings. E. For systems with bearings requiring L-50 lives of 200,000 hours or greater, the equipment supplier shall provide calculations for both the equipment bearings and the motor bearings to confirm the bearing selections. For belt drives, the calculations shall include the effect of the sheave size, number of belts, the sheave location on the shaft, and the location of the motor to the driven sheave. F. Provide seals for bearings installed in airstreams, exposed outdoors, and for applications in conosive or dusty atmosphere. G. Provide bearings suitable for high temperature service where heat fan construction is required. HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General • 6349-79520 15500- 19 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Furnish supports, hangers and other devices necessary to support and anchor firmly and • substantially the piping, equipment and ductwork described in this Section. Piping and duct support systems shall include restraints as required by the applicable building codes to withstand seismic and wind loading. Design shall be provided by a licensed professional engineer hired by the Contractor as specified in Part 1. Signed and sealed calculations shall be submitted for record purposes. 2. All equipment, ductwork, piping, and supports that are installed outdoors shall be designed and installed to meet wind loadings as required by the Florida Mechanical Code, the Florida Building Code, all other applicable codes, and the requirements of this specifcation. Design services shall be provided by a licensed professional engineer as specified in Part 1. All equipment shall be furnished with factory supports and/or tie downs to properly secure the equipment to applicable structure, equipment pad, etc. 3. For all outdoor equipment, each equipment manufacturer shall provide a signed and sealed letter certifying that their equipment's unit integrity and anchoring system meet the requirements of the Florida Mechanical Code and the Florida Building Code. 4. All equipment shall be provided with lugs or brackets to allow the equipment to be firmly fastened to the structure. The lugs and brackets shall be sized to withstand the expected seismic and wind loads for the area and type of application. Location of the attachments shall be based on the equipment being hung or base mounted as shown on the Drawings and the schedules. 5. Design of hangers, supports, anchors and hold downs shall include the effect of all loads • applied to the equipment, pipe or duct as well as the load of the component. These loads include, but are not limited to wind, seismic and internal dirt or liquid buildup. 6. For locations located within close proximity to the ocean based on the applicable codes, materials used for attachment and wind resistance shall be corrosion resistant as required by the code. 7. Provide Type 316 stainless steel hanger rods, hangers, supplementary steel, anchors and guides in areas classified as corrosive, wet, and in outdoor exposed applications. B. Hangers and Suspension 1. Furnish and install all miscellaneous metalwork in accordance with Division 5 requirements. 2. Where C-clamp type hangers are used, furnish with a retainer strap. 3. Hangers shall not be supported from roof decking or bulb tees. Where required, provide supplemental steel to span between the building structures. 4. All piping supported at a maximum of 10-ft-0-in intervals. Hangers or rings, sized to fit outside the insulation. 6349-79520 15500- 20 October 2012 • \ J • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 5. All piping 2-in diameter and smaller supported by pipe rings or bands with one 3/8-in adjustable steel rod hanger and one concrete insert. 6. Anchor piping mains where indicated or wherever necessary to limit pipe expansion and to prevent vibration. Furnish anchors constructed of steel securely bolted to masonry and welded to pipes. 7. Rectangular, Round and Flat-Oval Ductwork - Spacing and size of hangers shall be as called for in the SMACNA standards, except as detailed below: a. Rectangular ductwork 48-in wide and larger shall be supported by two adjustable threaded rods. b. Round ductwork 37-in and larger shall be supported by two adjustable threaded rods. The following methods of hanger attachment to the building structure are NOT allowed. The numbers and letters refer to hanger methods shown in Figure 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 of the 1985 edition of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible as published by SMACNA. 1) "T" wrap around straps of open web joist. 2) "W" bent over band on open web joist. 3) "14" Friction clamps 4) "17" Bent wire in metal deck. 8. All hanger and fastener material shall be of same finish as ductwork which they serve, e.g., galvanized, aluminum, black steel, etc. When a material other than the duct construction material must be used, the material used must be as corrosion resistant or greater than the duct material. 9. Perforated band iron or wire for supporting ducts shall not be permitted. 10. Support flexible duct by band hangers, 1-in wide minimum, attached so as not to crush the ductwork. The use of wire to hang flexible ductwork shall not be permitted. 11. Duct supports at flexible connections shall be adjustable. 2.08 PAINTING AND COATINGS A. Unless otherwise specified, all machinery and factory finished equipment such as pumps, fans, air handling units, air conditioning units, and other items of manufacture shall be hot dipped gaIvanized or will have a factory applied finish, color as standard with the manufacturer. Components fabricated from stainless steel do not require a coating finish unless otherwise specified. All tanks, supporting steel, hangers, rods and all other uncoated or non galvanized steel other than standard piping and fittings shall have a shop coat consisting of a suitable • 6349-79520 15500- 21 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved primer and finish coat. If not factory applied, the prime coat shall be as specified in Division 9. All items not factory ar shop primed prior to installation shall be suitably cleaned of rust and mill scale by wire brushing, sanding, or other means and prime painted, immediately after installation. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of all defects, blemishes, holidays and the like apparent in manufactures coatings and shall ensure that the materials used for such repair shall match and be compatible with the manufacturer's standard color, coatings and practices. Surfaces to be repaired or recoated are to be prepared as recommended by the paint or coating supplier. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. C. Furnish touch up paint for the various types of equipment furnished and deliver unopened paint to the Owner at completion of the project. The amount of touch-up paint supplied shall be sufficient to cover 15 percent of the applicable painted surfaces or one pint, whichever is greater. D. Where specified, or called for on the following schedule, special corrosion resistant/protective coatings shall be provided. Whenever a protective coating is specified, the equipment shall be coated both inside and out. Whenever necessary to provide full coverage of the equipment, the equipment shall be completely disassembled to allow proper preparation and coating application. Any component that would block the coating process shall be removed. Equipment provided with gaskets or liners shall be coated before the application of the gasketing or liner. The equipment Vendor shall test rotating equipment after coating to confirm dynamic balance. If work needs to be done to correct the equipment balance, the integrity of the coating must be corrected after such work. E. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable. F. All items to be provided with a protective coating shall have the following data on the coating included with the unit submittal. Submittal shall include vendor data sheets on the specific coating being used, corrosion resistance data sheets, detailed application data sheets to include surface preparation procedures. For baked coatings submit a letter from the coating manufacturer, that the company doing the actual coating operation is an approved coating company. When an equipment supplier provides the coating, the information shall be supplied by the coating manufacturers. G. Inspection and Preparation of Coil prior to Cleaning and Coating Coil shall be inspected for fin damage. Bent fins shall be straightened using the proper fitting fn comb. Tubes and tube "U" bends shall be inspected for dents, punctures or pinched areas. Where possible, and with equipment manufacturer's approval bent, punctured, pinched tube or "U" bend areas shall be repaired and leak tested by coating vendor's A/C technician prior to coating. Vendor shall securely seal all open tubes to prevent the infiltration of dirt , water, cleaning and coating solutions into the tube. The header tube shall be fitted with a Schrader valve and the coil placed under no less than 5 and no greater than 50 psi nitrogen blanket throughout the cleaning and coating process. r � �� u 6349-79520 15500- 22 October 2012 • • u OO 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved The charge shall be recorded and verified following coating to ensure the coil was not damaged allowing cleaning or coating solutions to infiltrate the tube side. H. Cleaning and Condirioning of the Coil Fin and Tube Surfaces Prior to Coating Following initial preparation of the coil, the coil shall be thoroughly cleaned using a non etching and non oxidizing detergent solution having less than 10- ppm chlorides, and formulated for use on ferrous and non ferrous metals to remove shop soils, dirt, grease and oils from the surface of the coil fins, tubes and casings. Following the detergent cleaning the coil shall be thoroughly rinsed using clean filtered water to flush off soils removed by the detergent. The surface to be water break free when rinsed ensuring a clean surface. A non oxidizing chemical solution sealer shall then be applied to enhance adhesion and provide secondary corrosion protection. The coil shall then be dried at temperatures up to 220 degrees F until thoroughly dry prior to applying the coating. Coatings shall be of the following types: l. MANUFACTURER STANDARD COATINGS 2. a. Coating material shalI be manufacturer's standard as specified in the schedule below. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed and coated as required be the coating supplier. Heat curing shall be provided where required by the coating supplier. AIR DRIED PHENOLIC (equipment) TYPE 3A and TYPE 3B a. Type 3A - Coating Material Heresite VR-507 air dried phenolic coating. The surface shall be prepared by degreasing with an appropriate solvent. Steel surfaces for non-immersion shall be sand blasted in accordance with NACE No. 3 or SSPC- SP6. Surface profile shall be 20 to 25 percent of dry film thickness. If blasting is not possible, the surface shall be primed with Heresite P-750 in accordance with the supplier's recommendations. Dry film thickness shall be 0.5 to 0.75 mills. Thinner where required shall be of the same manufacturer as the coating. Coating shall be applied by spraying in multiple passes. The piece shall be dried in accordance to the manufactures time schedule. The equipment shall be given a minimum of three coats resulting in a dry film thickness of 4 to 6mils. All equipment coated with VR-500 shall be given a topcoat of Heresite UC-5500. The UC-5500 series shall be applied by spraying and shall have a dry film thickness of 4 to 5 mils. b. Type 3B - Coating material Husky SPC or Husky Pat Coat and Lin Coat from Bronz-Glow. When spray coating interior or exterior metal surfaces for corrosion protection vendor shall prepare the coated or uncoated metal surface in accordance with coating manufacture's specification. Coating shall have passed 3,000 hours salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B-117.85 Coating shall be a synthetic resin elastomer having a minimum 300% flexibility, 200% elongation, and effectively provide protection throughout the entire a pH range of 1.0-14.0. The coating shall be applied to a dry thickness of 4-6 mils. Coating to be field repairable in the event of damage to the coating. Following coating application coating shall be fully cured in accordance with manufacture's specifications prior to being placed in service or packaged for shipment. � 6349-79520 15500- 23 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • c. Equivalent spray-on or rol]-on cabinet coating products will be considered upon Engineer's review and approval of product data, application data, and corrosion resistance data. 3. AIR DRY SPRAY ON COATING (Equipment, coils, fins, etc.) TYPE 4A and TYPE 4B a. Type 4A - Coating Material Adsil Micro Guard HVAC/R Coil and Fin Clear Protective Treatment AD35. Surface preparation, mixing and catalyzing, application, and clean-up shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All recommended cleaning agents (Micro Kleen products) shall be utilized and applied per the manufacturer's instructions. Drying times and curing times shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's time schedule. Type 4B- Coating Material Husky Coil Coat from Bronz-Glow. Prior to spray coat application the coil shall be cleaned and in accordance with the coating manufacture's specifications. Coil shall be allowed to dry thoroughly after cleaning prior to applying the coating. Coil shall receive corrosion protection treatment from a qualified coating vendor through application of vendor's in-house or field applied spray coating process. The coating material applied by this process shall have passed a minimum 3,000 hours salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B-117.85. Coating solution shall provide effective corrosion protection throughout the entire pH range of 1.0 to 14.0. Coating material shall consist of a synthetic polyelastomer material having properties of a minimum 5,000 psi tensile strength, 400% or greater flexibility, 250% or greater elasticity to prevent chipping, cracking or flaking, have � negligible (less than 1/2 of 1%) effect on heat transfer coefficients, coating shall contain a UV inhibitor rated at 10 year Florida sun protection. The unit to be disassembled to the point to where the face of the coil from both sides are exposed and can be coated. The vendor shall further ensure the "U" bend and header areas shall also be exposed to allow maximum coating coverage on both the inner and outer radius of the "U" bend and header surfaces. The protective coating shall be applied by spray application on both sides of the coil and using a method that ensures maximum coating penetration into the fin area. Following curing of the coating the dry mill thickness shall not greater than 1'h - 2 dry mills. Following coating the coil shall be cured in accordance with coating manufacture's specification prior to restoring power to the unit. It is not recommended a coil of more than two rows be spray coated. Cabinet coating shall be Type 3B as described above. c. Special care must be taken to follow coating manufacturer's instructions for coating coils to be sure that the entire surface of the fins and the tubes in the coil are coated. It is imperative that as much of the internal coil surfaces be coated as possible to prevent failure of the coil. d. Equivalent spray-on coil coating products by Heresite (PC-2000 with PC-2000-C cabinet coating), Blygold (PoluAl coil coating with Type 3A or equal cabinet coating), Thermoguard (Total Coat), or equal will be considered upon Engineer's review and approval of product data, application data, and corrosion resistance data. 6349-79520 15500- 24 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • Coatings shall be factory applied by the equipment manufacturer/supplier. If this is not possible, coating shall be applied by a specialty shop under contract to the equipment manufacturer/supplier. Corrosion protection shall be provided, by an authorized coating vendor for each applicable unit component as specified herein. A"Certificate of Coating Compliance" shall be issued by the coating vendor verifying use of the specified products and processes. Coating vendor shall supply owner a written "Owner's Coated Coil Cleaning Service and Maintenance Manual". The afore mentioned certificate and manual shall be submitted upon completion of the project with all other closing documents. 2. Prior to shipment or installation of a coil into a cabinet coil shall be pressure tested to 110% of operating pressure and held for 45 minutes to ensure no leaks have occurred. Coil shall then be evacuated and placed under nitrogen blanket or installed in the cabinet. When coil is being shipped as a single unit vendor shalt protect coil tubes from soil or moisture infiltration by shipping coil under a nitrogen blanket of not less than 5 psi on the fluid side. Coil shall be tagged advising coil is under nitrogen blanket and psi rating of the nitrogen blanket. 4. Following installation of coil into the cabinet coating vendor's a/c technician shall place coil under a 200-400 micron vacuum to ensure integrity of coil and absence of moisture within the coil. • 5. Coil shall be issued a registration number and number shall be affixed to the coil by means of a non-removable polymer seal. Coating vendor shall maintain a job warranty file for each coil coated for the period of the warranty. 6. After coating application is completed, the equipment manufacturer/supplier shall test the equipment and certify system operation prior to releasing the equipment to the job site. K. Any holidays, runs, sags, blisters, or inclusions in the coating are unacceptable and will be corrected. With the approval of the engineer, small areas no more than 4-in by 4-in may be corrected in the field. Larger faults shall be returned to the coater to be repaired. The faulty material shall be removed by sanding and in the case of blisters, the edges feathered. The material used for recoating shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the original coating and shall be suitable for field repairs. The touch up material shall have the same corrosion resistance as the original coating, and if the original coating required an ultraviolet protection, the same protection will be provided as part of the repair. The final mil thickness of the repaired coating shall be equal to the originally specified thickness. Where baked coatings have been damaged, the repair shall be made with heat applied to the repaired surface to cure the coating. After curing a solvent test as recommended by the manufacturer shall be used to confirm that the coating is cured. L. The coating manufacturer shall supply direct to the engineer, a set of coupons showing the final appearance of the cured coatings. Any coating that does not match the supplied coupons will be rejected. • 6349-79520 I5500- 25 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.09 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING • A. Furnish the services of an AABC or NEBB certified agency for the testing, adjusting and balancing of all HVAC air systems installed under this Section. B. The testing, adjusting and balancing agency shall be independent of all suppliers, installers and contractors on the project. C. Refer to Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for additional requirements. 2.10 INSULATION A. Provide insulation adhesives, coatings and vapor barrier materials, which are compatible and recommended, for use by the insulation manufacturer. Submit a certified statement from the insulation manufacturer attesting to their approval of the adhesives, coatings, and vapor barrier materials. The following adhesives and coatings, as manufactured by Foster Div.; H.B. Fuller Co. or Childers Products Co. are representative of approved products that meet the above requirements. (Other manufacturers who demonstrate to the Engineer that their products are equivalent are acceptable.) 1. Lagging adhesive: 30-36, CP50, AMV-1. 2. Vapor barrier coating: 30-35, CP30. 3. Vaporseal adhesive: 85-75, CP82. 4. Duct adhesive: 85-20, CP82. 5. Sealing compound adhesive: 30-45, CP70. 6. Weatherproofmastic: 35-01, CP10-1. B. Closed cell foam type insulation applications include, but are not limited to: 1. Refrigerant Piping — Suction Lines 2. Condensate Drain Piping — Air Conditioners a. Insulation Material - Preformed flexible closed cell foam pipe insulation, minimum density 5.5 lbs/cu ft, maximum "K" factor of 0.27 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. b. Provide a field applied 0.016-inch aluminum jacket secured with stainless steel straps for all piping. 3. Acceptable manufacturers shali be Armstrong Corp; Manville Corp.; or equal. C. Blanket type duct insulation shall include but not be limited to the following: • 6349-79520 15500- 26 October 2012 • � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.11 2.12 Concealed round and rectangular single wall ductwork. 2. Exposed round single wall ductwork. a. Insulation Material - Fibrous glass insulation, minimum density ] Ib/cu ft and a maximum "K" factor of 0.29 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. b. Facing - Factory applied vapor barrier 0.10 perm consisting of glass fiber scrim reinforced laminated facing of 2 mil aluminum foil and kraft paper. D. Fiberglass board type insulation shall include but not be limited to the following: Exposed rectangular single wall ductwork and plenums. a. Insulation Material - Fibrous glass insulation, minimum density 3 Ibs/cu ft and a maximum "K" factor of 0.24 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. b. Facing - Factory applied vapor barrier 0.02 perm, consisting of glass fiber scrim reinforced laminated facing of 2 mil aluminum foil and kraft paper. E. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Armstrong Corp; Certain-Teed; Owens Corning; Manville or equal. PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Condensate Drains Pipe - Copper tube ANSI H23.1 Type K or ANSI H23.6 Type DWV hard drawn. Fittings - Soldered cast brass or wrought copper drainage fittings ANSI B 16.29. 2. Solder - 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony per ASTM B32, Alloy 95TA. B. Refrigerant Piping Pipe - Type K soft drawn copper, precleaned, inert gas filled, and capped. Fittings - Soldered wrought copper. Solder - Hard silver solder with a minimum melting point of 1,300 degrees F. Fit up and solder joints while using an inert gas purge. AIR HANDLING UNITS A. In general, atl air handling units, package, thru the wall type and split systems shall be factory assembled with cabinet fan, heating and/or cooling section, filters, dampers, access sections with hinged access doors, motor, motor base, drive, drive guard and vibration isolators. Units shall be designed to provide an integrated assembly when all of the components are assembled. All transition sections and filler pieces required between sections are to be provided as part of the unit. • 6349-79520 15500- 27 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • Support brackets or rails are to be provided with the unit. Type of support is to be as required by the schedules and as shown on the Drawings, e.g. hung, floor mounted, etc. All air handling units shall be provided with lugs, brackets or field supplied devices to allow the unit to be firmly bolted to the structure or fastened to specified vibration isolators. The lugs, brackets or feld supplied devices shall be sized to withstand the expected seismic loads for the area and type of application. Location of the attachments shall be based on the equipment being hung or base mounted as shown on the Drawings and the schedules. 3. Heat pump units shall use a refrigerant system for both heating and cooling. Units shall include reversing valves and defrost controls. 4. Units not mounted on vibration isolators shall have all rotating components internally isolated from the main unit with vibration isolators. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable_ B. Casings Casings shall be galvanized sheet steel construction with structural framing members as • required. Pressure class rating shall be for the total fan static pressure. All sections of the unit shall be of the same pressure class. The housing shall be constructed of formed and reinforced metal panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed and continuous seam welded corners. Unit shall be double-wall construction with insulation sandwiched between the panels. Provide with structural framing as required. Interior of unit shall be flush with no internal standing seams or framing extending into the air stream. Seal all seams with high performance polyurethane sealant. Materials of construction shall be as called for in the schedules. The housing shall be coated internally and externally with a gray polyurethane enamel for corrosion resistance. Pressure class rating shall be for the total fan static pressure. All sections of the unit shall be of the same pressure class_ Where specified on the schedules, and in all units with heating and/or cooling sections, the unit shall be insulated. All sections including, but not limited to, return plenum, coils, filter, spacers, access sections, fan cabinet, mixing box and by-pass sections, shall be insulated. Insulation shall be 1-in mat faced or neoprene coated fiberglass liner, 1-1/2 pound minimum density, installed with stick clips and adhesives to prevent erosion of the insulation. 4. Provide gasketed access doors for servicing all components. Access doors shall have a positive-pressure locking latch to provide an airtight seal. Bolts, nuts and shafts for door latches, handles and hinges shall be stainless steel. 6349-79520 I5500- 28 October 2012 • O 2012 CDM Smith Ail 1Zight� Reserved � 5. Where suspended from structure, horizontal units shall be supported on channel supports or provided with brackets. 6. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate overhead rigging and forklift slots shall be provided to facilitate maneuvering. 7. Units for outdoor installation shall comply with the following: a. Materials of construction shall be corrosion resistant, or provided with a corrosion resistant coating system for weather protection. b. The casing shall enclose all components for weather protection, with gasketed access doors provided for all sections to facilitate maintenance. Doors shall have provision for key locking to prevent unauthorized tampering. Top of housing shall be constructed to prevent buckling and ponding of water. C. Fan Section 1. Fans shall be centrifugal cabinet fans with belt or direct drive as scheduled. Extended external lubrication fittings shall be provided. 2. On belt driven fans, mount motor on an adjustable slide base, equipped with jack screws. • 3. Where scheduled, backwardly curved wheels shall be air foil type. 4. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced before shipment. 5. Whenever possible, fans shall be AMCA certified for sound and air performance, per AMCA 210-85 and AMCA 330-86. 6. Where called for on the schedules, fans shall be of spark resistant construction. On spark resistant fans, bearings shall not be placed in the air stream. Construction shall conform to AMCA 99-0401-82 Classification. 7. Fan bearings shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in this Section. D. Cooling Section Cooling coil section shall be insulated, and provided with with drain pan, coil support slide rails and coil closure plate. Coil mounting shall minimize air by-pass around the coil. Provide insulated drain pan with a corrosion resistant lining and drain connections on both ends of the drain pan. 2. Refrigerant cooling coils shall be cartridge type with copper tubes, atuminum fins, galvanized steel frame, copper suction header and distribution tubes. Fins shall be mechanically attached to the tubes. Coils shall be pressure and leak tested at 300 psig with air under water. Coils shall be certified per ARI Standard 410. • 6349-?9520 15500- 29 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � E. Heating Sections Heating section shall be insulated. Where heating is provided by coils, coil support slide rails and closure plates shall be provided. 2. Location of heating sections, preheat and reheat, shall be as shown on the schedules or Drawings. 3. Electric Heating Coils a. Electric heating coils shall be open resistance heating type with coil and unit UL listed. Coils and coil controls shall meet NEC requirements. Coil frame shall be galvanized steel with vertical element supports. Elements shall be insulated from the supports with ceramic bushings. b. Factory wired controls shall be provided in the unit control panel. Panels shall include all safety controls and interlocks, step control relays and devices and terminal strip for remote wired devices. Step control sensors and step controller will be provided under the temperature control portion of the specification. Control voltage shall not exceed 120V. c. Electric heaters must comply with the latest NEC and UL requirements and shall include the following: 1) Primary overtemperature, thermal cut-out (automatic reset). • 2) Secondary thermal protection (manual reset). 3) Zero clearance construction. Maximum current of 48 Amps per circuit. 4) Interlock between fan and heater control circuit. 5) A disconnect switch at or within sight of magnetic contactors. 6) Factory dielectric test of electrical insulation. 7) Fusible links (heat limiters) for thermal protection will not be accepted. 8) All three phase duct heaters shall have balanced three phase circuits. Where duct heaters draw more than 48 Amps, each circuit must have fused or circuit breaker protection. 9) Pressure type minimum airflow switch. ] 0) The following built-in accessories and controls, in addition to the NEC and UL required safety controls, shall be housed in the terminal box, magnetic contactors for automatic temperature control, control circuit transformers and a 6349-79520 15500- 30 October 2012 • � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved fusible disconnect switch with visible break and external operating handle with direct linkage to disconnect switch. F. Filters 1. See makeup and air handling unit schedules for filter types by unit. 2. Filter Box shall have tracks for the specified filter types, except roll filters, to allow filter replacement from either side. Sealing material shall be provided at tracks and ends to prevent air by-passing the filters. 3. Disposable Filters shall be framed filters, 1-in or 2-in thickness (as scheduled). Filter pressure drop for clean filters at 300 fpm face velocity shall be 0.2-in wg for 1-in thick and 0.15-in wg for 2-in thick filters. Filter shall have 30 to 35 percent efficiency on ASHRAE test standard 52-76. Manufacturers and type shall be American Air Filter Co., Am Air 300X; Farr Co., 30/30 Disposable or equal. 4. A total of three complete sets of filter media shall be provided for each unit. G. Condensing Unit I. Condensing unit shall consist of casing, compressor(s), refrigerant piping system, condenser, condenser fans and drives and factory wired controls and panel. 2. All rotating components shall be internally isolated with vibration isolators from the main unit. 3. Condenser section for self contained package units shall be an integral part of the unit and shall be part of a complete factory assembled unit. 4. Condensing unit for split systems shall be designed and constructed for mounting remote from its associated air handler with field fabricated interconnecting refrigerant piping, including associated specialties. 5. Refrigerant compressors shall be of the type, number, and capacity specified on the schedules. Compressors shall be provided with unloading or hot gas by-pass as required by the schedule. Compressor shall include suction strainer, crank case oil sight glass, oil strainer and oil heater and forced feed lubrication. Compressor controls shall include three-phase manual reset overload protection, hi-low refrigerant pressure cutout, manual reset low oil pressure cutout, non-cycle pump down relay. In addition multiple compressor units shall have a compressor sequence switch. 6. Air cooled condenser shall have propeller or centrifugal fans as shown on the schedules. Exposed fans shall be provided with fan guards. Coils shall have copper tubes, aluminum fins, galvanized steel frame and copper headers. Fins shall be mechanically attached to the tubes. Coils shall be pressure and leak tested at 425 psig with air under water. H. Heat Pump Units • 6349-79520 15500- 31 October 2012 � 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Heat pump units shall include reversing valve and required controls to operate as a heat pump. Units shall incorporate an outdoor coil defrost system to prevent excessive frost accumulation during heating duty. Defrost shall be initiated on the basis of time and coil temperature. A 30/50/90-minute timer shall activate defrost cycle only if coii temperature is low enough to indicate a heavy frost condition. Defrost cycle shall terminate when defrost thermostat is satisfied and shall have a positive termination time of 10 minutes. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of cooling operation down to 25 degrees F ambient outdoor temperature. Compressor shall be capable of operation in heating duty down to minus 10 degrees F ambient outdoor-air temperature. Units shall be capable of simultaneous heating duty and defrost cycle operation when using electric heaters. I. A complete refrigerant piping system shall be factory fabricated and installed in the unit. Each compressor shall be provided with a complete and independent refrigerant piping system. Piping shall be Type K copper tubing with joints silver brazed. Brazing shall be done with an inert gas purge. Suction lines shall be insulated with closed cell foam insulation. Hot gas piping shall be insulated to protect personnel as required. Valves shall be bronze body brazed connection and shall include compressor and condenser relief valves, condenser liquid line service valve, refrigerant charging valve, compressor discharge, suction service valves, liquid line solenoid and thermal expansion valve. Complete refrigerant system shall be cleaned, leak tested and charged with refrigerant. 4. Size of field fabricated piping for split systems shall be determined by the equipment manufacturer. Unit Control Panel For self-contained package units, split systems and fuel burning units, factory wired control panel shall be furnished and mounted on the unit. Panels shall include all controls required in other sections and all safety controls and interlocks, heary duty fused visible break disconnect, control devices, motor starters and terminal strip for remote wired devices. Control type and sequence shall be as specified in other related Sections or on the Drawings. Control voltage shall not exceed 120 Volts. Control panel door shall be provided with a keyed lock. A complete wiring diagram shall be permanently attached to the inside of the panel door. Step control sensors and step controller will be provided under the temperature control portion of the specification unless specified with unit on the equipment schedule. 2. Furnish electric heater section controls as scheduled and in accordance with the controls specifed under Electric Duct Heaters, elsewhere in this Section. Where specific area classifications are called for or shown on the electrical drawings, all equipment and wiring shall be in conformance with the requirements for that classification. 6349-79520 15500- 32 October 2012 � • u OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 4. The type of enclosure shall be as specified in Division 16. K. Accessory Sections Accessory sections shall be as shown on the Drawings and Schedules, and as required for the unit type. 2. Furnish aluminum or steel dampers in accordance with requirements specified under ATC Equipment elsewhere in this Section. Mixing box dampers shall be parallel blade type and where dampers are used for outdoor air shutoff service, they shall be low leakage type. Manual dampers shall be provided with an external position indicating handle with a positive locking device. Dampers shall be opposed blade type with blades mounted on 1/2-in minimum steel rods. Dampers shall be provided with low friction bushings and edge gaskets to reduce air leakage. Blades shall be sectionalized to limit unsupported blade length and warping at full system fan static pressures. Maximum damper blade width shall not exceed 6-in. Manual dampers shall be provided with an external position indicating handle with a positive locking device. 4. Mixing boxes shall be of the configuration shown on the Drawings. Deflection plates shall be provided if required to maintain even air flow over coils and prevent stratification. • 5. The dampers for all units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be constructed of corrosion resistant materials and will not be coated. Materials and construction shall be as specified for control dampers in under this Section, and as required for the ductwork materials the unit is connected to. 6. Spacer and access sections will be provided where specified or required. Access sections shall have hinged doors on each end except for filters. 7. Inlet and discharge louvers for outdoor mounted units shall be weatherproof design. 8. Factory fabricated insulated curbs shall be provided where shown on the schedule and/or Drawings. Curbs shall be galvanized steel construction with corrosion resistant coating. Unless otherwise specified, curbs shall include provisions for supply and return air duct and piping connections to the area below. Where the roof is pitched the curb shall be constructed to match the pitch and provide a level surface at the top of the curb for the unit to mount on. 2.13 DUCTWORK A. Sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed of the materials specified using the gauges or thicknesses and reinforcing called for by SMACNA for the material specified. Unless otherwise specified, al} components of duct systems shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork. This is to include braces and turning vanes. • 6349-79520 15500- 33 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Galvanized steel ductwork shall be constructed of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, per ASTM, A525 and A527. 2. Aluminum ductwork shall be constructed of 3003H-14 alloy B&S Gauges. B. Ductwork shall be constructed of the following materials and to the following standards: Static Construction SMACNA Svstem Location Pressure Material Standard Supply, Return and Admin Bldg. Outside Air Supply & Return Electrical Rooms Exhaust Process Areas Abbreviations f2-in WG GS f2-in WG GS f2-in WG AL M&F M&F M&F M&F - SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 1 st Ed. - Metal & Flexible AL = Aluminum GS = Galvanized Steel C. Design of ductwork shall include all loads applied to the ductwork, in addition to the load of the duct. These loads include but are not limited to wind, snow and internal dirt or liquid buildup. D. Construction 1. All ductwork shall be substantially built with joints and seams smooth on the inside and given a neat appearance on the outside. Inside surfaces and joints shall be smooth and free from pockets, burrs and projections. All joints shall be substantially air tight with laps made in the direction of air flow and no flanges projecting into the air stream. All changes in direction and duct transitions shall be shaped to permit the easiest possible air flow. 2. Pressure Classes a. Pressure classes for determination of sheet metal gauge and reinforcing shall be as defined by the latest issue of the SMACNA standards for duct construction. b. For ductwork with a static pressure higher than 2-in water gauge, pressure class shall be as shown on the Drawings. For ductwork with a static pressure 2-in water gauge or less pressure class shall be equal to the maximum pressure indicated for the fans or air handling units on the Schedules and the pressure class shall be the same for the entire length, including branches, of the specific duct system. 3. Rectangular Ductwork 6349-79520 I5500- 34 October 2012 � • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rigllts Reserved � a. Ductwork shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings in accordance with the specified SMACNA Construction Standard, latest edition. b. Cross-breaking shall conform to SMACNA Standard. Cross-breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the cross-break shall be of the required height to assure rigidity for each panel. c. All square elbows for rectangular ductwork shall be provided with turning vanes unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Turning vanes shall be as detailed in the SMACNA Manual and or as shown on the Drawings. d. Alternate Construction (Rectangular Only) - Factory-fabricated joint systems may be offered as an alternate form of construction. The system offered shall meet all requirements of SMACNA. Alternate joint systems shall be "Ductmate System" as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc., installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The system shall be sealed for zero leakage and angle attachment to the main duct section shall be by tack welding. The use of screws is not allowed. 4. Round Ductwork a. Ductwork shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings in accordance with the • specified SMACNA Construction Standard latest edition. b. Round Ductwork 1) Round ductwork shall be either lock type, welded longitudinal seam construction or spiral ductwork. 2) Gauges of ductwork and fittings shall be as specified in SMACNA. Draw bands will not be permitted. Slip joint shall be used on ductwork up to 36-in in diameter and the "loose flange" or Vanstone joint shall be used on ducts over 36-in in diameter. 3) All seams and joints shall be continuously welded. 4) Round ductwork shall be manufactured by United Sheet Metal; SEMCO or equal. 5. Round Ductwork Fittings a. All 90 degree turns shall be made of five piece mitered welded construction made by the manufacturer of the conduit. Fittings less than 90 degrees in the riser shall be made of multiple pieced mitered welded construction. b. All fittings in the round duct system shall be of the male and female type and in assembling these together, there shall be applied an approved synthetic rubber • 6349-79520 15500- 35 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved sealing compound on the joint. Also, on the outside of the duct apply this synthetic • rubber sealing compound in order to further make these joints air tight. Mechanically fasten the conduits together using sheet metal screws not less than four per fitting 6-in on centers maximum and equally spaced around the circumference of fitting. c. Round duct fittings shall be manufactured by United Sheet Metal; SEMCO or equal. 6. Insulated Round Flexible Ducts a. Round flexible ducts shall comply with specified SMACNA Construction Standards and be constructed of corrugated ductile aluminum that can be bent and rebent by hand and is self-supporting. 1-in insulation shal] be applied around the outside and be finished with a vinyl cover. b. Thermal conductivity of the insulation shall not exceed 027 BTU/hr/sq fUl degree F at 75 degree mean temperature. Duct shall be Class I, per UL 181. c. Maximum length shall be 5-ft. The remainder shall be galvanized sheet metal. Duct run shall be as short and straight as possible to minimize static resistance. 7. Volume Dampers a. Dampers shall be standard opposed or parallel multi-blade type on 2-in channel frame, flanged connection with external damper position indicator, manual • adjustment, and position locking arrangement. Damper blades shall not exceed 6-in in width. Dampers shall be constructed of the same material as the ductwork, or of a material of equal corrosion resistance. Balancing and balancing/shutoff dampers shall be opposed blades and shutoff dampers shall be parallel blade. b. Locking quadrants shall have a positive method of holding the damper in its selected position such as a bolt through both the quadrant and the lever arm. Systems using springs or other devices that can vibrate loose are not acceptable. Where manual dampers are used for shut off service, dampers shall have a replaceable butyl rubber or bulb vinyl seals provided with the damper. Install seals along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and along each blade edge. 8. Access Doors Access doors shall be 24-in by 24-in minimum, except where the duct size is less than 26-in, where the largest door that will fit the duct will be used. Unhinged access panels are not acceptable, except where shown on the Drawings. Access doors shall be of the same material as the duct, pan type construction for metal ductwork, with smooth edges and itted seals, constructed and installed for air-tight fit with ease of opening and closing. Doors shall be substantially butt hinged, with heavy sash locks and substantial door pulls. Door openings and door frames shall be reinforced with bar stock or angle. Where ductwork is instalIed with duct liner or exterior duct insulation, the access door shall be of the insulated type. Access doors may be 6349-79520 15500- 36 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � • factory fabricated. Where ductwork is constructed of aluminum or stainless steel, access door hardware shall be of similar material. 9. Fasteners a. Sheet metal screws, drive cleats, cinch bands and other fasteners shall be fabricated from materials with an equal of greater corrosion resistance than the ductwork in which they are installed. Where a material other than the duct material is used, it shall be approved by the Engineer before installation. 2.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. General All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be of the shape, sizes, capacity and type as shown on the Drawings. 2. On all duct openings that do not have a specific diffuser, register, grill or mesh covers, provided a wire mesh cover. 3. Finish — Unless, otherwise specified, diffusers, registers and grilles shall have the following fnish. All diffusers, registers and grilles located in ceilings shall have a baked white enamel finish except where the ceiling system has an exposed aluminum support grid. Where the ceiling has an exposed aluminum support grid the diffusers, registers and • grilles shall have a baked aluminum enamet finish. All diffusers, registers and grilles not located in ceilings shall have baked aluminum enamel finish. 215 ATC EQUIPMENT A. Area Classification Where specific area classifications are called for or shown on the electrical drawings, all equipment and wiring shall be in conformance with the requirements for that classification as specified in Division 16. Special attention shall be given to hazardous areas specifically "Class I Div. 1 Group D" and "Class I Div. 2 Group D" to comply with code requirements for equipment selection and installation procedures. B. Room Thermostats Electric room thermostat shall be of the heavy duty all metal type, provided with concealed adjustment and exposed thermometer. 2. Temperature sensors shall be of the wire-wound resistive element type (RTD) using either nickel or platinum alloy as the resistive element. All temperature sensors shall have an end to end (element to readout display) accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degree F. 3. Room thermostat and temperature sensors mounted on exterior walls shall be provided with insulated mounting plates. • 6349-79520 15500- 37 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. All room thermostats and sensors shall be mounted 5-ft-6-in above finish floor except • where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. a. All room thermostats located in Administrative areas shall be mounted 4-ft-0-in above finish floor or as required by the ADAAG and the Florida Accessibility Code. 5. Electric thermostats in corrosive areas shall be installed in electric boxes with remote stainless steel bulbs. C. Static Pressure Sensors - Shall be adjustable, set point proportional type, with adjustable range in inches of water to meet the performance or function specified. D. Ionization Type Smoke Detectors (Four Wire Type) 1. Furnish and install ionization type smoke duct detectors in the supply air duct and return air duct or plenum of each air handling unit and in the exhaust air duct of systems which exhaust greater than 50 percent of the supply air. This applies to all air systems of 2000 cfm or greater or where shown on the Drawings. 2. The detector housing shall be listed per UL 268A specifically for use in air handling systems. The detector shall operate at air velocities of 500 to 4000 feet per minute. The detector housing shall be equipped with an integral mounting base capable of accommodating either photo electronic or ionization detector heads. It shall be capable of local testing via remote testing station. The duct detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in compliance with UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for • Duct Applications. The housing shall be capable of mounting to either rectangular or round ducts without brackets. An integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust and residue effects on detector and housing, thereby reducing maintenance and service. Detectors shall be provided with two sets of contacts to provide smoke alarm signals. One is to be used by the ATC systems, and the second is for use in Division 16 for interface to fire alarm system. 4. Remote test switch and alarm indicator stations shall be furnished for all duct smoke detectors as specified above. The installation and wiring of the remote stations will be provided under this Section. The remote test stations shall be wall mounted within the visible location of the smoke detector and easily accessible from the floor. Alarm indicator stations shall activate a visible and audible signal upon smoke detector activation. Alarm indicator stations shall also activate a visible or audible signal identified as AIR DUCT DETECTOR TROUBLE upon smoke detector trouble conditions. Alarm indicator stations shall be mounted in a location approved by the Authority having jurisdiction. 5. Provide all necessary relays, transformers and other devices as required. 6. Where multiple units serve the same space, the smoke detectors shall be wired such that any smoke detector will shut down all units serving the space. E. Dampers 6349-79520 15500- 38 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. Automatic dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade as specified under "Sequence of Operation." 2. All damper frames are to be constructed of the same material as the duct or a material with greater corrosion resistance sheet metal and shall have flanges for duct mounting. Damper blades shall not exceed 6-in in width. All blades are to be of corrugated type construction, fabricated from two sheets metal, spot welded together. Blades are to be suitable for high velocity performance. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 48-in. Additional stiffening or bracing shall be provided for sections exceeding 48-in in height. Multi-section dampers shall be provided with sufficient interconnecting hardware to provide unison operation of blades in the entire assembly. 3. All damper bearings shall be made of nylon. 4. Replaceable butyl rubber or bulb vinyl seals are to be provided with the damper. Seals are to be installed along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and along each blade edge. Seals shall provide a tight closing, low (1 percent) maximum leakage damper. 5. Dampers shall be selected for the velocity and pressure differential required without excessive deflections. 6. Modulating dampers shall be of opposed blade construction. Dampers for two position operation may be single direction multiple-leaf type. • 7. Dampers may be furnished for in duct mounting and with face linkages if the following conditions are met. a. Service is for supply or makeup air in either process or non-process areas or service is for return or exhaust of non-corrosive air. b. Space is available to install a 24 by 24 (minimum) access door in the duct on the linkage side of the damper. 8. Dampers shall be furnished for flange mounting with exposed jamb mounted blade linkages for any of the following applications: a. Where installation clearances do not allow the installation of full size access doors to allow inspection and adjustment of face linkages. b. For corrosive, dirty or particle laden air service. Where called out on the Drawings. F. Electronic Damper Actuators Electronic actuators, less than 600 in-Ib of rated torque, shall have ISO 9001 quality certification and be UL listed under standard 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24 and have CE certification. Electronic actuators used on dampers shall be designed to directly couple and • 6349-79520 15500- 39 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved mount to a stem, shaft or ISO style-mounting pad. Actuator mounting clamps shall be a V- bolt with a toothed V-clamp creating a cold weld, positive grip effect. Single point, bolt or single screw actuator type fastening techniques ar direct-coupled actuators requiring field assembly of the universal clamp is not acceptable. 2. Actuators shall be fully modulating/proportional, pulse width, floating/tri-state, or two position as required and be factory or field selectable. Actuators shall have visual position indicators and shall operate in sequence with other devices if required. Proportional actuators shall be capable of digital communication, as built. 4. 5 Two sets of DPDT switches with fully adjustable set points shall be provided to activate panel indicators and provide signals for equipment operation. Actuator shall have an operating range of minus 22 to 122 degrees F. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0-20 mA input signal and provide a 2 to 10 VDC or 4-20 mA (with a load resistor) operating range. 6. Actuators shall be capable of operating on 24, 120 or 230 VAC or 24 VDC and Class 2 wiring as directed by the application. Power consumption shall not exceed 10 VA for AC, including 120 VAC actuators and 8 watts per actuator for applications 7. NEMA 2 rated actuators shall be provided with a three foot (minimum), prewired, electrical cable. Actuators requiring removal of the actuator cover for access to wiring terminals, exposing electronics, printed circuit boards to damage, are unacceptable. 8. Actuators shall have electronic overload protection or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent actuator damage throughout the entire rotation. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation or magnetic clutches are not acceptable. 9. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Spring return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting orientation. Spring return models >60 in-]b will be capable of mounting on shafts up to 1.05-in diameter. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb of torque shall have a manual override metal crank. Upon loss of control signal, a proportional actuator shall fail open or closed based on the minimum control signal. Upon loss of power, a non-spring return actuator shall maintain the last position. 10. Actuators using "on-board" chemical storage systems, capacitors or other "on-board" non- mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are unacceptable. 11. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase torque if required. Dampers requiring greater torque or higher close off may be assembled with multiple low torque actuators. Dual mounted actuators using additional anti-rotation strap mechanical linkages or special factory wiring to function are not acceptable. Actuators in a tandem pair must be "off the shelf ' standard actuators ready for field wiring. i C� 6349-79520 I5500- 40 October 2012 • • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 12. Dampers actuators wilt not produce more than 62 dbA when furnished with a mechanical fail-safe spring. Non-spring return actuators shalt conform to a maximum noise rating of 45 dbA with power on or in the running or driving mode. 13. Proportional actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, position feedback and running time shall be factory or field programmable. Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel and mechanical load limit. The actuators shall also provide actuator service data, at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion. 14. Where special classifcations are shown on the electrical drawings damper actuators shall be provided with suitable enclosures. 15. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be Type 304 stainless steel and shall have a shaft seal and all electrical connections shall be suitable for the space classification. Enclosure shall be LTL listed. 16. Explosion-proof enclosure shall be suitable for Class I, II and III. A suitable shaft seal must be provided. Housing shall be cast copper fill aluminum with stainless steel fasteners and shall be UL listed. Housing shall be suitable for NEMA 4, 7 and 9. G. Miscellaneous Devices - Provide all the necessary relays, limit switches, positioners, clocks, transformers, etc, to make a complete and operable system. Locate these devices on local ATC panel unless specified otherwise. H. Name Tags - All sensing devices, transmitters, controllers, not mounted in a clearly labeled panel, or which are not an obvious part of a clearly labeled device, shall be provided with an engraved plastic plate containing the name, function and system or system number for the device. I. Set points on thermostats and temperature controllers, shown on the Drawings are indicative only and devices shall be adjustable above and below such set points. If a set point is not stated, the control range of devices shall be suitable for the intended service. Range of devices shall be approximately 50 percent greater in both directions than span of variable, with a minimum of 25 degrees and a maximum of 110 degrees F for air systems. Short Cycle Timers - Timers shall be electric operated with two sets of normally open, normally closed contacts with manual time adjustment from 1 to I S minutes. K. Field Wiring All field wiring, other than power wiring, between control cabinets (A.T.C. control), control devices, unitary control panels and control terminals in motor control centers shall be furnished under this Section and shall conform to the requirements of Division 16. 2. 120V line voltage wiring to suspended and cabinet unit heaters and their thermostats shall be considered power wiring. All interlocking wiring within MCC shall be installed under Division 16. 6349-79520 15500- 41 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 3. Refer to the electrical drawings for NEMA enclosure types, other than NEMA I, by room or location designation such as "Damp", "Wet", "Corrosive", "Class - Div. - Group -". Installation of all conduit, wire, sleeves, outlet boxes, insulating bushings, system cabinets, terminal boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, inserts, anchors, system devices, etc, shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of Division 16 and in accordance with the requirements of the current edition of the local codes for signal systems and electrical systems. 5. Run wiring in rigid steel conduit except in dry locations above ceilings and wood or metal stud framed partition walls, where EMT may be used. Conduit, boxes and fittings and their installation and testing shall be as specified in Section 16110. 6. Wire, with the exception of DDC cable and thermostat wire, shall be copper type THHN/THWN insulated for 600 Volts. Wire and its installation and testing shall be as specified in Section 16120. 7. In the event of any conflict among referenced codes, current editions of the applicable local codes shall take precedence for interpretation of "Signal System" installation requirements. 8. Installation of sensor wiring in finished areas shall be concealed whenever possible. Where concealed wiring is not possible, written approval for exposed work must be obtained from the Engineer prior to installation. • 9. A power supply 115V, single phase, 60 Hz, 20 Amp circuit for ATC, requirements will be available at each local control panel. Power shall not be taken from the control power transformers of the motor control center. 10. Coordination Issues a. Line voltage thermostats will be furnished under this Section and installed and wired under Division 16. b. Alarms from the HVAC systems that provide a signal to the central control system will be furnished and installed under this Section. The alarms shall be provided with two sets of contacts. One set will be wired by the electrical contractor for the instrumentation system. The second contact will be used to provide an HVAC signal which will be wired under the Section. c. Wiring from smoke detectors provided under this Section to the building fire alarm systems will be provided under Division 16. d. Refer to electrical drawings for details of wiring at motor control panels. Provide all interconnecting wiring to start and stop motors. L. Software licensing and user agreements shall be based on a one time fee. Agreements that remove all responsibility for the software and its performance are not acceptable. 6349-79520 15500- 42 October 2012 • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.16 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS A. General HVAC equipment will operate with the following sequences of operation. 2. The following will apply to all sequences. a. All sequences are reversible unless otherwise noted. b. Manual reset of control functions with manual reset will be at the local control panel unless otherwise noted. c. Where required to prevent nuisance shut downs of systems, provide time delay of sensors to allow system start up before the sensors are activated. This would include, but not be limited to low temperature freeze protection on 100 percent outdoor air units. d. For fan systems with shut off dampers and air flows greater than 2000 cfm and fan operating static pressure greater than 1-in water gauge, fans shall be stopped and started by damper end switches. When the sequence calls for the fan to run, the control system shall open the respective damper. When the damper is open as indicated by an end switch on the damper the fan shall start. e. Where control sequences refer to activation of an alarm indicator, it will be understood to mean activation of a labeled pilot light at the local ATC panel. A dedicated pilot light will be provided for each alarm unless a common alarm light is specified. B. Control Sequence for Exhaust Fans 1. Exhaust Fan with Hand-Off-Auto Switch and Thermostat. Exhaust Fans EF-3, EF-4, EF-5 a. b When the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the hand position, the fan shall run. When the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the offposition, the fan shall be off. c. When the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the auto position and the temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above set point (85°F), the fan shall run. d. When the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the auto position and the temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below set point (85°F), the fan shall be off. 2. Exhaust Fan with Motion Sensor Control Existing Exhaust Fan EF-1 6349-79520 a. When the motion sensor is not activated, the fan shall be off. 15500- 43 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � b. When the motion sensor is activated, the fan shall run. After a field adjusted run time, the fan shall stop, and the motion sensar shall return to inactive condition. Exhaust Fan with Manual Control (Wall Switch) Existing Exhaust Fan EF-2 a. When the manual selector switch is in the off position, the fan shall be off. b. When the manual selector switch is in the on position, the fan shall run. C. Control Sequences for Constant Volume Direct Expansion Units Electrical Room Air Conditioning Unit with Space Thermostat Control Units AHU/ACCU-2 (Secondary), AHU/ACCU-3 (Primary), a. When smoke is sensed by the smoke sensor, all other control functions shall be overridden and the supply fan shall be off, and an alarm light in the smoke sensor shall be activated. Smoke sensors shall be manually reset. When multiple air handling units serve the same space, any smoke detector shall shut all units down in that space. b. When the unit thermostat on/off switch is placed in the off position, the temperature controls shall be inactivated, the supply fan and condensing unit shall be off. c. When the unit thermostat is placed in the on position and the system fan on/auto • switch is in the on position, the temperature controls shall be activated, and the fan shall run continuously. 1) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the cooling set point, the condensing unit shall be on in cooling mode. 2) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the cooling set point, the condensing unit shall be off. d. When the unit thermostat is placed in the on position and the system fan on/auto switch is in the auto position, the temperature controls shall be activated. 1) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the cooling set point, the condensing unit shall be on in cooling mode, and the supply fan shall be on. 2) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the cooling set point, the condensing unit shall be off, and the supply fan shall be off. e. The space thermostat shall have an adjustable set point. The cooling set point for AHU-3 shall be 80°F. The cooling set point for AHU-2 shall be 85°F. Where two units are provided, Contractor shall instruct the Owner to alternate set points in order 6349-79520 15500- 44 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved to alternate primary (70% of time)/secondary (30% of time) unit operation. £ Dual (or two-speed) compressors shall have two stages of cooling. g. Provide a high temperature switch. Set point shall be 95°F. Switch shall send a high space temperature alarm signal to the instrumentation system. See Electrical and Instrumentation drawings for additional details. Coordinate interface with instrumentation system supplier. 2. Air Conditioning Unit with Space Thermostat Control with Nighttime Setback Units AHU/ACCU-1 When the unit thermostat on/off switch is placed in the off position, the temperature controls shall be inactivated, the supply fan and condensing unit shall be off. b. When the unit thermostat is placed in the on position and the system fan on/auto switch is in the on position, the temperature controls shall be activated, and the fan shall run continuously. 1) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the cooling set point (75°F), the condensing unit shall be on in cooling mode. 2) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the cooling set point (75°F), the condensing unit shall be off. 3) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the heating set point (70°F), the condensing unit shall be on in heating mode. At a continued drop in space temperature, the auxiliary electric heat shall be activated. 4) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the heating set point (70°F), the condensing unit shall be off. When the unit thermostat is placed in the on position and the system fan on/auto switch is in the auto position, the temperature controls shall be activated. 1) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the cooling set point (75°F), the condensing unit shall be on in cooling mode, and the supply fan shall be on. 2) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the cooling set point (75°F), the condensing unit shall be off, and the supply fan shall be off. 3) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is below the heating set point (70°F), the condensing unit shall be on in heating mode, and the supply fan shall be on. At a continued drop in space temperature, the auxiliary electric heat shall be activated. • 6349-79520 15500- 45 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4) When the space temperature sensed by the space thermostat is above the heating set point (70°F), the condensing unit shall be off, and the supply fan shall be off. d. Dual (or two-speed) compressors shall have two stages of cooling. e. The space thermostat shall be programmable with a dual position adjustable set point. Nighttime set back set point shall be 80°F cooling and 65°F heating. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 1NSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall start up each piece of equipment and system and shall make all adjustments so that the system is placed in proper operating condition. B. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. C. Equipment 1. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Provide piping and ductwork connections in accordance with the requirements as specified elsewhere in this Section. 2. When units are shipped disassembled, field connect all sections together as shown on the Drawings to form single air handling unit. Seal all joints with gaskets and/or sealants. 3. Do not operate equipment without filters. Do not run equipment with dirty flter pressure drop more than twice clean filter pressure drop. A total of three complete sets of filters shall be provided. The first set is to be installed for start-up, test and balancing. The second set shall be installed after final cleanup and acceptance by the Owner. The third set shall be turned over to the Owner as a spare. 4. The Contractor shall start up each piece of equipment and system and shall make all adjustments so that the system is placed in proper operating condition. D. Insulation - General Do not apply insulation prior to testing and acceptance of piping, ductwork and/or equipment. Insulation shall not be applied to damp or frosty surfaces. Clean dust, dirt, grease and moisture from surfaces of pipe and ducts before applying insulation or insulation adhesives. Install all insulation in a neat and workmanlike manner. Nameplates and equipment certification and data tags affixed to any piece of apparatus must remain exposed to view. Where two layers of insulation are used, stagger all joints both ways. Secure each layer independently. Continue insulation through walls, partitions, floors and pipe sleeves. 6349-79520 15500- 46 October 2012 � • • CJ • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rigl�ts Reserved 2. The recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers of products used in the work are hereby made part of this Section except as they may be superseded by other requirements of this Section. 3. Adhesives, coatings and vapor barrier materials shall be applied as specified by the manufacturer. Do not apply these materials when ambient temperature is above or below the maximum and minimum ambient temperature respectively, specified as limits by the manufacturer. In general, these limits are 90 degrees F and 40 degrees F, however, the limitations are to be checked for each product. 4. Atl penetrations through a vapor barrier for hangers, instruments, etc, shall be sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. The use of staples or other fasteners that penetrate the vapor barrier shall not be permitted. Insulation systems that require a vapor barrier shall be installed with an intact vapor barrier that covers the entire pipe, duct, or piece of equipment to be insulated. All edges of insulation that do not abut another piece of insulation shall have the vapor barrier extended, and sealed to the item being insulated. All penetrations through the insulation such as for thermowells, test ports, dampers, nameplates, or other items shall have the vapor barrier extend over the edges of the insulation and sealed to the item being insulated. Where items are mounted on ductwork a standoff shall be provided to protect the vapor barrier. The vapor barrier shall be sealed to the standoff. 6. For insulated items exceeding 100 square feet, or 20 feet in length, extend the vapor barrier to the item being insulated to reduce the area or length within a single enclosed area to the dimensions listed above. E. Piping Insulation Cold Piping Closed Cell Foam Apply insulation in thicknesses indicated. Joints shall be sealed using self-sealing seams or adhesive. 2. Fittings shall be covered with the same insulation, mitered to fit. Installation - Apply insulation in the thickness indicated. Attach insulation to sheet metal duct. Joints shall be made to have compression fit with the joints sealed with adhesive. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be followed. Adhesives and coatings shall be provided by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with the insulation. Insulation shall be provided with a protective finish for outdoor use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Service Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Refrigerant Piping Condensate Drain Piping — Air Conditioners F. Ductwork Insulation All sizes 1 — in. All sizes 1 — in. • 6349-79520 I5500-47 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved u 1. For purposes of insulation, flexible ductwork shall be treated as sheet metal ductwork. 2. Provide all cold ductwork with a vapor barrier. Where the method of attachment causes penetrations of the vapor barrier, seal such penetrations with vaporseal adhesive and vapor barrier tape. 3. Clips, pins, washers, staples, and other metal components shall be of the same material as the duct to be insutated. Where items of the same material are not available, a material of equal corrosion resistance may be used. If a different material of equal corrosion resistance is to be used, it must be approved by the Engineer. 4. All outside corners of ductwork in the traffic level shall be protected by sheet metal angles. Angles shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel with 2-in legs. When the duct is constructed of materials other than galvanized steel, the protective angle shall be fabricated of the same material as the duct, or of equal corrosion resistance. If a different material of equal corrosion resistance is to be used, it must be approved by the Engineer. Angles shall be attached to the outside of the vapor barrier with adhesive. The entire inside surface of the corner angle shall be coated with adhesive before being installed. 5. All joints in insulation shall be compressed 0.25-in. Corner insulation shall be lapped with the overlap extending over the full thickness of the insulation layers. Open spaces in joints are not acceptable. A minimum of two layers of insulation shall be used when the required insulation thickness is greater than 2-in. Joints in adjacent layers shall be staggered a minimum of 3-in. • 6. All ductwork, except as specifically noted below, shall be insulated. G. Ductwork Insulation - Blanket Type Concealed Round and Rectangular Single Wall Ductwork and Exposed Round Single Wall Ductwork Installation - Apply insulation in the thickness listed below. Adhere insulation to the duct surface with adhesive applied in strips 6-in wide on 12-in centers. Butt all joints and lap jacket 2-in over adjoining jacket. Seal all lap joints with vaporseal adhesive and staples. For ducts 30-in wide and over, additionally support insulation on bottom of duct with rows of welded or adhesive clips and washers on 18-in centers. Seal penetrations, staples and terminations of vapor barrier with vapor barrier coating. b. Insulation Thickness - Concealed Round and Rectangular Single Wall Ductwork and Exposed Round Single Wall Ductwork. 1) All ducts 2-in H. Ductwork Insulation - Fiberglass Board Type Exposed Rectangular Single Wall Ductwork and Plenums. 6349-79520 15500- 48 October 2012 • � • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Installation - Apply insulation in the thickness listed below. Fasten insulation to sheet metal duct with weld pins or approved adhered pins and clip washers. Place pins on 12-in centers located near edge of insulation and with a minimum of two rows per side. Impale insulation on pins. Attach clip washers so that they rest on the surface of the insulation without indent. Cut off pins flush with surface of washers. Seal penetrations with aluminum vapor barrier coating. Groove insulation to cover standing seams or stiffeners. Extend vapor barrier facing continuously over standing seams or stiffeners to provide continuous seal. Seal joints and edges with 4-in wide strip of factory furnished vapor barrier facing adhered with vapor barrier adhesive or approved vapor barrier duct sealing tape to provide a continuous vapor barrier. b. Insulation Thickness - Exposed Rectangular Single Wall Ductwork and Plenums. l ) All ducts Installation of Ductwork 2-in Fabricate and erect all ductwork where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein and in accordance with SMACNA reyuirements. Rigidly support and secure ductwork in an approved manner. Install hangers plumb and securely suspended from supplementary steel or inserts in concrete slabs. Sufficiently thread lower ends of hanger rods to allow for adequate vertical adjustment. Do not use building siding and metal decking to hang ductwork. 2. Wherever ducts are divided, maintain the cross-sectional area. All such changes must be approved and installed as directed by the Engineer or as approved on shop or erection drawings. 3. During installation, close the open ends of ducts to prevent debris and dirt from entering. Install work in accordance with the overall approved progress schedule and in cooperation with all other trades so there will be no delay to other trades. 4. Provide the unused portion of external louvers (where it is not used as a fresh air intake or exhaust) with a blank-off constructed of 0.0625-in aluminum. Provide blank-off panels with aluminum reinforcing angles to prevent buckling and secured to the exterior wall with aluminum angles and rustproof fasteners on not more than 12-in centers. Provide caulking completely around the outside edge of the angle and the aluminum. Install automatic dampers when supplied by other trades. 6. Cross-break sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA duct construction standard. Apply cross-breaking to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the cross-break shall be of the required height to assure each panel section being rigid. 7. Cross-break steamlined ducts on top only and adequately brace internally. 8. Beading as specified in SMACNA will be acceptable in lieu of cross-breaking. • 6349-79520 15500-49 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9. The Drawings of the air ducts and air risers show the general location for installation of • the ducts and risers. Should additional offsets or changes in direction be made, these changes must be considered in the original bid and shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. 10. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts for the structural conditions of the building. Ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. Wherever this is necessary, maintain the cross-sectional area. All of these changes, however, must be approved and ducts installed as directed by the Engineer or as approved on shop or erection drawings. 11. The taper of all transformations shall be not more than 15 degrees. 12. Secure casing to curbs according to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards_ 13. Provide baffle plates as required to prevent stratification and to provide proper operation of controls. 14. Where ducts are constructed of materials other than galvanized steel the reinforcing members shaIl be of the same material as the ductwork. 15. The use of button punching or snap locks on ductwork constructed of aluminum shall not be permitted. Hangers • 1. The use of wire to hang flexible ductwork shall not be permitted. 2. Ductwork shall not come in contact with any of the ceiling construction or any other equipment in the ceiling cavity. K. Sealing of Ductwork General — Unless, otherwise indicated, seal all ductwork joints and seams using sealant in accordance with the instructions of the sealant manufacturer and this Section. All transverse seams, joints and fitting connections, both shop and field assembled, shall be sealed in accordance with this Section. Not more than one longitudinal seam shall be unsealed in each section of duct. 2. Application of Sealant - Thoroughly clean all seams, joints, etc, of dirt, oil, grease, or other coatings which might interfere with the adhesion of the duct sealant before the sealant is applied. Uncured sealant may be forced into the slotted side of the seam or joint before shop or field assembly, and the joint or seam completed while the sealant is still uncured. Excess sealant shall be removed from both the inside and outside of the duct before it sets. 4. Duct Tape - Use of duct tape alone for sealing ductwork is prohibited. Duct tape may be used primarily for the purpose of retaining the uncured duct sealant in seams and joints 6349-79520 I5500- 50 October 2012 • • • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved until it has cured. Duct tape shall not be applied to the inside of any duct nor shall it be applied to standing type joints at any time. All duct tape used shall be compatible with the sealant. 5. Sealant shail be either in liquid form or a mastic with a maximum flame spread of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. 6. Sealing systems shall be suitable for the environment. The following schedule is to be used to select the sealant. a. Indoor, dry galvanized round and rectangular duct is to be sealed with Iron Grip 601 or equal. b. Indoor, dry, stainless steel, aluminum and PVC coated is to be sealed with FTA 20 adhesive and DT-Tape gypsum or equal. c. All other areas unless otherwise noted are to be sealed with FTA 50 adhesive and DT-Tape gypsum or equal. d. All sealers listed or manufactured by Hardcast Inc. and are to define the type of sealer. Other equal sealants are acceptable. L. Ductwork Fittings and Accessory Items Duct Elbows - Rectangular ductwork where full radius elbows cannot be installed, provide abrupt elbows equipped with shop-installed hollow, air foil turning vanes. 2. Flexible Connectors a. Install flexible connectors at all duct connections to fans, fan units or blowers, air handling units and air conditioning units. Make connections substantially air tight at all seams and joints. b. Where the construction of the flexible connection or vibration isolator results in a cross sectional area of the connection which is less than 90 percent of the adjacent ductwork, the size of the connection shall be increased to provide a cross sectional area equal to or greater than 90 percent of the adjacent duct. c. Provide flexible duct connections at both the intake and discharge connections for all fans and air handling units except as noted below: 1) Wall and roof fans that have integral motor/fan wheel isolation. 2) Air handling units where the fan is isolated from the intake and discharge connections by internal flexible connections or separations, and the unit is mounted without vibration isolators between the unit and the support structure. 3. Dampers 6349-79520 15500- 51 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved a. Install manual volume control dampers wherever it may be necessary to regulate air volume for system air balancing and where shown on the Drawings. b. Install splitter dampers, where shown on the Drawings, to regulate air volume for system air balancing. Splitter dampers shall be single blade, end pivoted type, manual adjustment and position locking arrangement. c. Factory-fabricated volume extractors shall be used at all supply air diffusers. d. An access door, of ample size to permit maintenance and resetting of damper blades, shall be installed at each opposed blade damper, splitter damper and volume extractor so located for easy access to the damper blades. 4. Access Doors a. Provide access doors at the following locations (minimum requirements): 1) Automatic dampers - linkage side. 2) Duct mounted temperature controllers. 3) Freeze-stats. 4) Fire dampers. 5) Smoke detectors. 6) Filter banks. b. Where access doors are required in ductwork located above ceilings, coordinate the location of the access doors to clear the ceiling support system and to be accessible through the ceiling grid. M. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers The location of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans. Where diffusers, registers and grilles are not located in the ceiling, there are no Reflected Ceiling Plans provided, the location shall be as shown on the ductwork drawings. The exact location of these devices shall be determined in the field in cooperation with the other trades. 2. Install all devices in an approved manner in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. N. Flexible Ductwork 1. Make connections, joints and terminations air tight as recommended by the manufacturer. Where joints are made to rigid sheet metal ductwork, apply 3M Company EC-800 sealer • C� 6349-79520 15500- 52 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � and the joint shall be drawn tight with a drawband. Collars shall be 2-in long minimum and sleeves shall be 4-in long minimum. 2. Install flexible ducts with one duct diameter-radius elbows and cut as short as possible. Duct shall not be compressed and the length shall be kept short so minimum hangers or supports are required, and static pressure losses are kept to a minimum. Sag in flexible duct shall not exceed 1/2-in/ft between duct supports. O. Filling in Space Around Ductwork 1. To prevent sound passing through the area between the duct and the framed or cut opening in the floors, walls or partitions, pack mineral wool to completely fill the space the full depth of the opening. Whenever a fire-rated wall or floor is penetrated, fill the space around the duct with a locally approved type of fireproof rope. 2. At firewalls, apply galvanized sheet metal escutcheon plates on both faces of the wall to close the gap between the structure and the sides of the insulated or bare duct. P. Ductwork at Masonry 1. Where ducts connect to, or terminate at masonry openings, or along the edges of floors where concrete curbs are not being provided, place a continuous 2-]/2-in by 2-1/2-in by 3/16-in galvanized angle of the same material as the duct around the ductwork. Then bolt the angle to the construction and make airtight to same by applying caulking compound • on the angle before it is drawn down tight to construction. 2. Fasten plenums to concrete curbs with 3-in by 3-in by 1/4-in thick continuous angle. Concrete curbs will be provided under another Division. This angle shall sit on a continuous bead of caulking compound and be anchored to the curb at 16-in centers. Terminate the sheet metal at the curb and bolt to the angle. Seal the sheet metal to the curb with a continuous bead of caulking compound. 3. When exposed ducts pass through finished floors, walls or ceilings, provide angle collars completely covering space around duct. Q. Quality of Ductwork Installation All ductwork shall be free from pulsation, chatter, vibration or objectionable noise. After system is in operation, should these defects appear, correct by removing, replacing or reinforcing the work. Sound levels shall not exceed the minimum requirement as specified in ASHRAE 1980 Systems Volume, page 35.16, Table 23. No discreet tones will be allowed. The maximum allowable leakage of low pressure system shall be 5 percent of air volume. R. Plenums 1. Seal fresh air inlet and exhaust air plenums at louvers or otherwise subject to weather entrainment watertight at all bottom joints and seams and up all vertical seams for a • 6349-79520 15500- 53 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith AIl Rights Reserved minimum of 12-in. After application, remove excess sealant before it sets hard. Where • possible, pitch fresh air inlet and exhaust air plenums down towards the louver. Where it is not possible to pitch the plenum, provide a 1-in capped drain connection at the low point of the plenum. S. Test Ports Where shown on the Drawings and where required for testing and balancing, provide instrument insertion ports. Size and location of ports shall be coordinated with the Contractor performing air balancing. Seal ports with plastic snap lock plugs. When the ductwork will be insulated, extend the port to the face of the insulation and seal the vapor barrier to the port. When the ductwork is lined, extend the port into the duct to the inner surface of the duct liner. 2. In round ductwork provide 2 ports 90 degrees on centers. In rectangular ductwork provide ports are required by AABC or NEBB for a full traverse measurement. 3. As a minimum, ports shall be provided in the following connections: a. All duct mains. b. All duct branches unless all connections are diffusers, registers, or grilles and the total can be calculated by summing the readings for all of the connections. All connections to tanks or hoods where there is no other access for taking a • measurement. 4. A main duct is defined as one of the following: A duct serving five or more outlets. b. A duct serving two or more branch ducts. A duct emanating from a fan or plenum. d. All remaining ducts are considered branch ducts. T. Piping 1. Pipe and Fittings Install piping in a neat manner with lines straight and parallel or at right angles to walls or column lines and with risers plumb. Run piping so as to avoid passing through ductwork or directly under electric light outlets and/or interference with other lines or extending beyond furring lines as determined by Architectural Drawings. Accomplish all work using the best methods and procedures of recognized pipe fabrication in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the latest revision of applicable ANSI Standards, ASME Codes and PFI Standards. 6349-79520 I5500- 54 October 2012 • � � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rigl�ts Reserved b. Cut pipe square, not upset, undersize or out of round. Carefully ream ends and clean before installing. c. Bending of pipe shall not be permitted. Use fittings for all changes in direction. d. Do not remove end caps on pre-cleaned pipe until immediately before assembly. Cap all open ends immediately after completion of installation. e. Thoroughly clean all piping interiors after installation and keep them clean by approved temporary closures on all openings until the system is put in service. Closures shall be suitable to withstand the hydrostatic test. 2. Soldering (Copper Tubing) a. After cutting, thoroughly clean all surfaces to be soldered to a metal-bright finish, free from dirt, grease or other material before fluxing and soldering. Perform this cleaning by using emery cloth, sandpaper or steel wool. Clean the outside end of the tubing for a length of 1/2-in greater than the depth of the fitting. Clean the inside of the fittings in a similar manner. Apply non-corrosive flux and assemble the joint. Acid solder or acid flux will not be accepted. b. Heat the surfaces to be joined slowly and uniformly to the melting point of the solder. Maintain the surface being soldered above the melting point of the solder for sufficient time to draw the solder completely into the joint. When the solder congeals to a plastic state, remove the excess metal with a cloth brush, leaving a fillet around the end of the fitting. Full penetration of the solder uniformly throughout the entire socket is required. Allow the soldered joints to cool in still air until only warm to the hand, after which the work may be quenched. c. Any type of crack, pinhole, area of incomplete penetration, or similar defect will not be accepted. Peening for closing up defects shall not be permitted. d. Use heating torches of suffcient size for heating of large fittings prior to soldering. Multiple tips or ring burners for use on combination torches may be used. e. Remove all external and internal loose solder and flux after joint cools. 3. Refrigerant Piping a. Before and during silver soldering refrigerant piping, purge the assembly of pipe and fittings with dry nitrogen, to avoid formation of oxidation scale on inside of pipe during soldering. b. Where specially prepared, Type R, cleaned or charged refrigerant piping is not available for equipment interconnection, with the Engineer's or Owner's Representative's approval, the following procedure must be completed. Clean the interior of field assembled refrigerant piping after joining in four steps as follows: 1) Draw a clean lintless cloth through the piping to remove coarse dirt and dust. • 6349-79520 15500- 55 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2) Draw clean lintless trichlorethylene saturated cloth through the piping until cloth is not discolored with dirt. 3) Draw a clean cloth saturated with compressor oil through the piping. 4) Complete cleaning by drawing a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the piping. c. Pressure test and charge immediately after cleaning. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Testing and Balancing General - Test, adjust and balance all HVAC systems. If required by the Engineer, tests shall be made during the progress of the work to demonstrate the strength, durability and fitness of the installation. Furnish all instruments, ladders, lubricants, test equipment and personnel required for the tests; including manufacturer's representatives for testing and start-up of all Contractor supplied equipment. Before testing and balancing, all systems shall be cleaned as specified. Submit four copies of records of all tests, measurements, settings of throttling devices and nameplate data to the Engineer. 2. Final Tests - Perform tests of all systems as required by the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the systems for the purpose of demonstrating satisfactory functional and operating efficiency as well as adjustment. During this period, check the setting of all • automatic controls and take sufficient measurements to ensure that conditions are correct and that capacities are adequate to meet the specified requirements. Systems will not be considered complete until all tests have been concluded to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all other parties having jurisdiction. In event of leakage ar defects, repeat tests until all faults are corrected. Perform the general operating tests under as near design conditions as possible. 3. Perform all testing, adjusting and balancing under the supervision of a qualified heating, ventilating and air conditioning engineer employed by the air balance and testing agency. Reporting forms for testing and balancing shall be as recommended by the AABC or NEBB. 4. Coordination of the test shall be the responsibility of the balancing sub-contractor. Access to the site, availability of service representatives, and tenant acquiescence will be considered in the determination of both the testing schedule and the witnessed recheck of the balancing. Refer to Section 15990 for additional requirements. B. Piping Pressure Testing 1. Pipe Testing Procedure 6349-79520 15500- 56 October 20I2 • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith Ali IZights Reserved 3.03 3.04 a. The equipment to which any piping system is attached shall not be subject to any line tests. Either remove or blank off items which may be damaged by the test pressure. The test pressures apply to the piping materials as specified, but shall not be assumed to apply to piping specialties, accessories, or equipment including safety heads, rupture discs, relief valves, expansion joints, instruments or filters. b. Prior to pressure testing, take the following precautions: 1) Do not apply insulation over piping prior to completion of testing. 2) Lines containing check valves shall have the source of test pressure located on the upstream side. Set the control valves in the open position for the duration of the test. 3) Block up all piping supported by springs temporarily to a degree sufficient to sustain the test liquid load. c. Test the piping system at the pressure indicated in the individual pipe material specification section or 1-1/2 times normal working pressure, whichever is greater for the respective systems. Leakage or loss of head will not be acceptable. 2. Condensate Drains Testing Test Press. 10 Feet Column 10 Inch Mercury Medium Duration Water 2 hrs Air 15 min. 3. Refrigerant Piping Testing Test Press. To suit Refrigerant used Medium Inert gas and refrigerant Allowable Loss None None Method Electronic leak detector 4. Following the completion of acceptable leak testing, evacuate and charge the completed refrigeration system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION A. Properly maintain and service all equipment and systems until the particular equipment or the system has been accepted by the Owner. BALANCING OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT A. All machines shall be balanced both statically and dynamically by the manufacturer within the limits of best commercial practices. The term machine, as used above, is to be considered as 6349-79520 I5500- 57 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved any piece of equipment, which contains rotating components. All machines furnished shall � have operating speed not exceeding 80 percent of the first critical speed. 3.05 PAINTING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of all defects, blemishes, holidays and the like apparent in manufacturer's coatings and shall ensure that materials used for such repair shall match or be compatible with the manufacturer's standard color, coatings and practices. Do not paint over nameplates. B. Paint black the louver side of all louver blank off panels and the interiors of unlined plenums and ductwork where connected to louvers. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM A. During the acceptance inspections, the manufacturer shall provide the required personnel to operate the system and show complete functionality. The manufacturer will also provide the required communication devices to allow simultaneous observations at multiple points. In general, each system will be run through its complete operating sequence. B. Systems that are found to be operating incorrectly will be bypassed and not corrected during the inspection. If multiple systems are found to not be operating, the inspection will be canceled and rescheduled at the manufacturer's expense. 3.07 CLEANING � A. Leave all piping, ductwork and equipment in a thoroughly cleaned condition. Thoroughly flush all piping to remove all foreign materials prior to any cleaning procedure. All flushing and cleaning shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Furnish, install and remove all temporary piping and equipment used in the cleaning and flushing operations. B. Maintain all ductwork, fans, coils, air flters, outlets and other parts of the ductwork systems in a clean condition during installation. C. Clean complete ductwork systems prior to testing and air balancing. Secure cheese cloth over all openings of the ductwork system for entrapment of dirt during the cleaning operation. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 15500- 58 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • \ J THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • 6349-79520 15500- 59 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 15860 FANS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all fans and fan accessories as shown on the Drawings, the schedules on the Drawings, and as specified herein. B. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained on the Drawings and in the Schedules on the Drawings. C. Refer to Section 15500 for additional requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Process blowers are included in Division I 1. B. HVAC is included in Section I5500. C. Ductwork and accessories are included in Section 15500. • D. Remote disconnects are included in Division 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with sections 01300 and 15500, all data and the fan schedules. The submittal shall include fan data sheets with a description of the proposed fan, fan size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, weight, motor horsepower, motor type, power supply, and frame size. Provide catalog data and selections for vibration isolators, include materials of construction. For belt drive equipment; provide drive data indicating the sheave sizes, belts size, number and length. Each submittal shall include pertinent equipment dimensional data, fan performance (operating data) information, and a performance curve showing the fan operating point and range. Minimum curve size shall be 8-in by 6-in. Faxed copies of curves are not acceptable. A list of accessories to be furnished shall be included on each submittal. Copies of operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted. Significant dimensional differences between the specified equipment and the proposed equipment shall be noted on the equipment submittal. The Contractor shall provide data to show the dimensionally different equipment will fit within the space and still provide suitable clearance. Where corrosion resistance is required, provide conformation of material suitability for the specified service. B. Where called for on the schedules, provide certified test data for the fan. C. For units that wilI be shipped exposed, provide a description of the protective packaging that will be used during transit. • 6349-79520 15860- 1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. All submittals shall contain a statement that Sections 15500, 15860 and 15990 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub-contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. E. Submit, in accordance with Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The following information shall be considered a minimum. Where applicable, provide information required for specific pieces of equipment. Personnel familiar with the operation and maintenance of the specific information shall prepare manuals. 2. Equipment shall be identified with the Engineers Equipment Numbers and Identification as shown in the Schedules and on the Drawings. 4. 5. Provide inforrnation in three ring binders. All sheets shall have reinforced punches. Tabbed dividers shall separate all sections. Drawings wili be bound in the manual, or contained in envelopes bound into the manual. Contents - Each volume shall contain the following minimum contents: a. Installation including instructions for unpacking, installing, aligning, checking and testing. Foundation data, allowable piping loads, and electrical design shall be included. b. Operating Instructions to provide pre-operational checks, start up and shut down, and description of all control modes. Include emergency procedures for all fault conditions and actions to be taken for all alarms. Procedures for long term storage shall be included. c. Maintenance shall include preventive, and corrective. Schedules for test of other functions are to be included. Provide a list of tools required to service the equipment. Trouble shooting instructions to include a trouble-shooting guide shall be included. Spare Parts List 6. Shop Drawing Data to include performance curves, data sheets, flow diagrams, wiring diagrams, and descriptive drawings. F. In general, corrections or comments or lack there of, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. G. Provide a recommended list of spare parts to be provided. 6349-79520 15860- 2 October 2012 . • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Right� Reserved � 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. These standards shall be considered as minimum requirements. This is a general list and not all standards listed are necessarily referenced elsewhere in this Section. Specific requirements of this Section and/or Drawings shall have precedence. The Engineer shall resolve conflicts between published requirements. B. Titles and abbreviation of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations, which may be used, are as follows: 1. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 2. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 3. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 5. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) • 8. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 14. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 15. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 17. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • 6349-79520 15860- 3 October 2012 O ZOl2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. AI} equipment of a given type included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single • manufacturer or as specified on the schedules B. Inspection by the Engineer's representative or failure to inspect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide materials and perform the work in accordance with the documents. C. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to sample and test any materials after delivery and to reject all components represented by a sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. D. An authorized representative of the manufacturer shall perform the initial stariup of the equipment. The Owner and Engineer shall witness startup. The use of local sales representatives to perform this work is not acceptable, unless the manufacturer provides documented evidence that the sales representative has been specifically trained for this work. E. All rotating parts of equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be inspected for size, quality and quantity against approved shop drawings upon delivery. B. Delivery schedule of all equipment shall be coordinated with the Contractor. Equipment • ready for shipment prior to the agreed on shipping date shall be stored without cost to the Owner by the manufacturer. C. All materials shall be suitably packed for shipment and long term storage. Each package shall labeled to indicate the project and the contents of each package. Where applicable, equipment numbers shall be marked on the container. D. All equipment shipped that is exposed such as on a flat bed truck shall be protected during transit. The equipment shall be protected from moisture, road salt, dirt and stones or other materials thrown up from other vehicles. Electrical components shall be protected as above, but with special attention to moisture. The method of shipment protection shall be defined in the submittals. E. Instruction for the servicing and startup of equipment in long term or prolonged storage shall accompany each item. F. All materials shall be stored in a covered dry location off of the ground. When required to protect the materials they shall be stored in a temperature-controlled location. 1.07 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts shall include all special items on the manufacturer's standard list of spare parts B. In addition to special items, the following spare parts shall be provided: 6349-79520 15860- 4 • October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 1. Furnish all special tools required for normal operation and proper servicing of the equipment. 2. Spare parts shall include all items on the manufacturer's standard list of spare parts and the following for each unit: a. One complete set of drive belts for each piece of belt driven equipment b. One complete set of gaskets for each unit. 3. Provide a minimum of 1 or 5 percent of the total units rounded to the next full unit whichever is greater for each size and rating of the following components. a. Thermostats b. Control relays c. Damper operators d. Control transmitters e. Control transformers 4. Provide a minimum of 4 or 10 percent of the total units rounded to the next full unit • whichever is greater for each size and rating of the following components. a. Panel light bulbs b. Fuses C. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for extended storage without deterioration of the parts. Containers shall be clearly labeled designating contents, pieces of equipment for which intended and equipment identification numbers. 1.08 SCHEDULES A. Fans shall be belt or direct drive, of the type, materials of construction, capacity and arrangement as described herein and on the schedules. Particular attention must be paid to the remarks and notes in these schedules. This Section is incomplete without the schedules on the Drawings. 1.09 WARRANTY PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model of catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard quality, grade, type, size, physical arrangement, performance • characteristics and availability. 6349-79520 15860- 5 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Fans shall be facto assembled com lete with fan wheel fan housin or cabinet bearin s • �' , P > g , g � drives, drive guard, motor, motor base, unit base and vibration isolators, dampers and bird screens unless otherwise specified. All fans shall be provided with lugs, brackets or field supplied devices to allow the fan to be frmly bolted to the structure or fastened to specified vibration isolators. The lugs, brackets or field supplied devices shall be sized to withstand the expected seismic loads for the area and type of application. Location of the attachments shall be based on the equipment being hung or base mounted as shown on the Drawings and the schedules. C. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced prior to shipment from factory. D. Where belt drives are used, motors shall be provided with adjustable slide bases. Adjustable sheaves and slide bases shall be selected so that the midpoint of the adjustable range matches the fan schedule data. Drives selected shall have a safery factor of 1.5 times motor horsepower. E. All fans shall be AMCA certified for air performance and sound ratings tested in accordance with AMCA 300. F. Motor shall be selected to be non overloading for the entire fan curve range and for the reasonable expected temperature and humidity. Schedule motor sizes are minimum. If a larger motor is required for the fan proposed, the larger motor shall be provided at no additional cost. G. All bearings for the fan and motor shall be as defined in Section 15500. • H. Fans shall be assembled with OSHA shaft and motor guards. Provide access for greasing bearings, tachometer readings of fan and motor speed without removing the cover. Cover shall be properly ventilated to prevent motor overheating. I. Ductwork connections to units that require corrosion resistant coatings shall be made with flanges. Flanges shall be factory drilled before coating. Resilient washers suitable for the environment shall be used to protect the coating from the bolts in the flange. The use of self tapping screws or other fastening methods that will damage the coating are not acceptable. J. The noise level of the equipment operating in the field shall not exceed 85 dBA overall sound pressure level (referenced to 20 micro pascals) at a distance of 3-ft from eyuipment surfaces. Provide octave band sound data if another noise level is specified in the schedule or if sound data submission is specified in the schedules. K. Additional requirements are contained in Paragraph 2.02 through 2.03 for specific fan types and in the schedules. L. Section I5500 contains general requirements for vibration isolators, bearings and motor drives. Adhere to those requirements and the specific requirements in this Section. M. When bearings are not accessible, extended supply and relief fittings shall be supplied. Both supply and relief fittings shall terminate in the same location. 6349-79520 15860- 6 October 2012 • • • • C�? 2012 CDM Smitb All Izi� I�ts Reserved 2.02 2.03 N. Provide inlet and outlet screens for fans that are not directly duct connected. INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Inline centrifugal fans shall have flanged inlet and discharge, wheel inspection door, and variable belt drives. Belt drive shall have a shroud over the belt in the air stream. Wheel shall be backward inclined airfoil type. Mounting brackets shall be provided per specific fan mounting orientation. Unless spark resistant construction or other materials are specifed on the schedule, fan shall be of steel construction with steel or aluminum wheel. Manufacturers shall be Greenheck Fan Co.; Loren Cook Co.; or equal. PROPELLER FANS A. Propeller fans shall be steel construction with cast aluminum, fabricated steel or aluminum propellers. Plastic fan propellers are not acceptable. Fans shall be provided with discharge safety screen if not directly connected to ductwork. Provide neoprene vibration isolation at metal contacts and permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. When spark resistant construction is specified in the schedule, all electrical components shall be explosion proof. Unless spark resistant construction or other materials of construction are specified on the schedules housing shall be steel or aluminum. Manufacturers shall be Greenheck Fan Co.; Loren Cook Co.; or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 A 1 INSTALLATION A. The fans shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall not install any equipment or materials until the Owner and Engineer have approved all submittals. If any equipment or materials are installed prior to approval of the submittals, it shall be at the Contractor's risk. C. Ensure that lubricating fluids and greases have been applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall be responsible for all start-up checks and adjustments and shall perform them unless they are done by the manufacturer's representative. D. Provide manufacturers representative to inspect fans and supervise start-up of all fans. E. Field Testing 6349-79520 Refer to Section 15990. END OF SECTION 15860- 7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK � • • 6349-79520 15860- 8 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith � All Ri�hts Reserved SECTION I5990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PARTI GENERAL 1A1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish the necessary labor, materials, instruments, transportation and devices required and test, adjust and balance the total heating-ventilating-cooling systems, both water and air systems. Each as specified and detailed herein, or as required to cause the systems to perform in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and this Section. Systems to be tested, adjusted and balanced include all systems installed by the HVAC Contractor. B. Testing, balancing and operation of the systems shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel, having formerly done similar work and whose qualifications and performance shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Test and balance air and water system and submit testing and balancing reports to the Engineer for review and approval. Re-balance when required by the Engineer, incorporating all changes and certify the systems have been tested and balanced to meet specified requirements. C. The tests shall demonstrate the specified capacities and operation of equipment and materials comprising the systems. Such tests other than as described herein, which are deemed . necessary by the Engineer to indicate the fulfillment of the Contract, shall be made. D. When the work includes modifications to existing systems, the entire system including existing portions shall be rebalanced. Where capacities of existing components are not shown as changed, the original capacities shall be used for balancing. E. Data required by this Section shall receive complete approval before final payment is made. F. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has not, will not, or cannot comply with the testing, balancing and adjusting requirements of this Section, he may advise the Owner to employ a qualified firm to perform such wark at Contractor's sole expense. G. Refer to Section 15500 and 15860 for additional requirements. H. Refer to the Drawings for additional requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 15500. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, the following: 1. Qualifications and experience information and data as detailed under Paragraph 1.04 • below. 6349-79520 15990- 1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Proposed testing schedules and procedures. 3. Preliminary draft "system" balancing reports as systems are completed and tested. 4. Final systems and Project balancing reports as final system adjustments are made as systems are accepted by the Owner. 5. All submittals shall contain a statement that Sections 15500, 15990 and all other referenced Sections have been read and complied with. The certification statement shall be made by all of the following that are applicable; the Contractor, sub-contractor and the vendor. The statement shall be an individual statement for each party involved, and shall be included with every submittal and resubmittal. B. In general, corrections or comments or lack there of, made relative to submittals during review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Submittals are for review of general conformance with the design concepts of the project and general compliance with the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for the final design conforming and correlating atl quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work of all trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Qualifications standards for this work - Affiliation with manufacturers, installing contractors • or engineering firms will not preclude acceptability. Submit qualifications within 60 days after Contract award. Membership in the AABC or NEBB for air and water testing is required. The testing balancing contractor shall not be affiliated with the on-site contractors. B. The balancing contractor shall be prepared to submit credentials and other evidence of qualifications, and work experience, following receipt of, but prior to award of filed subbids. C. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of two test-and-balance engineers certified by the AABC or NEBB. D. This certified test-and-balance engineer shall be responsible for supervision and certification for the total work specifed herein. E. The balancing agency shall submit records of experience in the field of air and hydronic system balancing or any other data as requested by the Engineer. The supervisory personnel for the firm shall have at least 5 years experience and all the employees used in this project shall be qualified technicians in this specific feld. F. The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the specifed services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession of the balancing agency may be required by the Engineer to determine the balancing agency's performance capability. 1.05 ENGINEERING SERVICES . 6349-79520 15990- 2 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved A. When engmeermg services are specified to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractar shall retain a licensed professional engineer to perform the services. The engineer shall be licensed at the time the work is done and in the State in which the project is located. If the State issues discipline specific licenses, the engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. In addition, the engineer shall be experienced in the type of work being provided. B. All work is to be done according to the applicable regulations for professional engineers, to include signing, sealing and dating documents. When submittals are required by a professional engineer, in addition to state required signing and sealing, a copy of the current wallet card or wall certificate indicating the date of expiration shall be included with the submittal. 1.06 SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. A complete schedule of balancing procedures for each of the buildings or systems shall be submitted in sufficient time in advance so that the Engineer might anange to observe these procedures as they progress. Before commencing with the balancing of the systems submit the methods and instruments proposed to be used to adjust and balance the air and water systems. B. Submit proposed testing programs at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled test to assure agreement as to personnel and instrumentation required and scope of each testing program. 1.07 DRAWING REVIEW A. The balancing organization shall thoroughly review the location of all fresh air dampers, • return dampers, spill dampers, quadrant dampers, splitter dampers, bypass dampers, face dampers, fire dampers, registers, grilles, diffusers, VAV boxes, troffers, etc. The purpose of the review is to finalize the optimum locations for dampers, test ports and balancing valves shown on the Drawings. � �J 1.08 EQUIPMENT CURVES A. Fan Characteristics Charts: The HVAC and General Contractors shall provide to the Balancing Organization any required characteristic curve charts for all fans to include air conditioning units and air handling units. Characteristic curve charts shall be not less than 8- 1/2-in by 11-in and shall show the static pressure, capacity horsepower and overall effciency for operating conditions from no load to 130 percent of specified load. The minimum size of the actual fan curve shall be no less than 6-in by 8-in. The use of faxed copies of curves is not acceptabie. 1.09 GUARANTEE A. The balancing work shail be guaranteed to be accurate and factual data, based on readings in the field. All typewritten data shall be submitted within 14 working days of the performance of the test. Test data shall not be held until final completion, but shall be submitted on an interim basis as soon as the test or appropriate groups of tests are finished. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 6349-79520 15990- 3 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Furnish gaskets, lubricants and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the • execution of this work. B. Fixed-pitched pulleys required for fan adjustments shall be furnished on an exchange basis by the party responsible for the fan installation. C. Where test results indicate that air quantities at any system fan are beiow or in excess of the specifed amount, the HVAC and General Contractors, at their own expense, shall change driving pulley ratio or shall make approved changes to obtain the specified or scheduled air quantities. D. Testing apparatus: Furnish plugs, caps, stops, valves, pumps, compressors, blowers and similar devices required to perform this work. Furnish anemometers, thermometers, gauges, voltmeters, ammeters, lachometers and similar instruments, not part of the permanent installation, but required to record the performance of the equipment and systems. 2. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor, but made available to the Engineer. 3. Instruments used for testing shall be certified accurate to within plus or minus 0.10 degrees F for temperature or plus or minus 0.10-in wc for pressure. Calibration of the instruments shall be done within 7 days of testing for this project and henceforth every 30 days thereafter for the duration of the testing period. Certification of calibration shall be • submitted to the engineer prior to starting the work. 2.02 TESTING REPORTS A. Forms: Furnish test report data on 8-1/2-in by 11-in bond AABC or NEBB form paper in accordance with Section 01300. Submit format for recording data and receive approval prior to use. B. Reports shall be excel spread sheets format and shall be submitted in both hard copy and as a data fle. C. The report shall contain the following general data in a format selected by the balancing agency: Project number 2. Contract number 3. Project title 4. Project location 5. Project architect 6. Project mechanical engineer 6349-79520 15990- 4 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 7. Test and balance agency 8. Test and balance engineer 9. General contractar 10. Mechanical subcontractor 11. Dates tests were performed 12. Certification D. At a minimum, the report shall include: Preface. A general discussion of the systems, any abnormalities and problems encountered. 2. Instrumentation tist. The list of instruments including type, model, manufacturer, serial number and calibration dates. 3. System Identification. In each report, the VAV boxes, zones, supply, return and exhaust openings and traverse points shall be numbered and/or lettered to correspond to the numbers and letters used on the report data sheets and on the report diagrams. • E. Prepare 11-in by 17-in single line diagrams or 12-in by 18-in half size drawings showing all duct systems indicating all terminal air outlets including diffusers, grilles and registers, perforated plates, nozzles and other types of air supply, exhaust or return outlets. The minimum scale for diagrams showing the measurement points shall be 1/8-in=l-ft-0-in in the final form as submitted. The use of faxed copies of diagrams is not acceptable. Location of test points shown on the diagrams shall be clear and easy to locate on the diagram. The identification mark of the test points shall be the same as is shown on the test report showing the test data. The identification for test points shall include indication of the units served, and shall not have a duplicate in the project. All supply outlets shall be adjusted so that there are no drafts. Grille and register readings may be made by a vane anemometer, but diffuser readings shall be made by a flow hood or a velometer, using the tip recommended by the diffuser manufacturer. Each test sheet shall include the following data: • Job name and address. 2. Name of HVAC Contractor. 3. Name of balancing organization. 4. Instruments used to perform the test. 5. Name of test technician or test engineer. 6. Fan system and/or zone number. 6349-79520 15990- 5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7. Room number or area name. 8. Size of outlet. 9. Type outlet. F. Manufacturer of outlet. G. The cfm at each outlet on system and corresponding cfm at each outlet as noted on the plans. H. Percent deviation of the measured flow versus the design flow. I. Indication of the branch and terminal that are the open/low that are the basis for balancing the remainder of the system PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 START OF BALANCING A. The General Contractor shall notify the Balancing Organization and Engineer when systems become operational and ready for preliminary and final testing, adjusting and balancing. B. Final balancing shall not begin until system has been installed complete and is capable of normal operation. Provide personnel to assist in rough balance and calibration. • C. All grilles, dampers, fans, coils, valves and linkages shall be verified to be installed and • operating. D. System shall be capable of operating under control as specified on Drawings and/or contained herein. E. Visually inspect all fire dampers on branch take-offs to each floor to ensure that they are fully open. F. Verify with straight edge that fan and motor shafts are parallel and that sheaves are in proper alignment. G. Verify that belts are properly tensioned when unit is operating with no excessive squeal at startup. If not conect, adjust sheaves or motor base accordingly. H. Start fans, verify that rotation is correct. If rotation is incorrect coordinate with electrical contractor to switch power leads such that the motor rotates correctly. I. Check nameplate voltage on motor, compare to scheduled voltage. Notify the Engineer immediately of any discrepancies. Measure and record actual voltage across all power leads. Notify the Engineer of discrepancies immediately. J. Check motor nameplates full load amps, measure and record amperage across all power leads. If there are marked discrepancies in amperage draws between legs, notify the Engineer immediately. • 6349-79520 15990- 6 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith • All Rights Reserved K. Measure and record fan and motor rpm. Check that motor rpm agrees with nameplate and scheduled rpm. L. If, upon commencing the work, the balancing contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the balancing agency shall request an inspection to be made by the Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaetion of the represented parties whether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Should the inspection reveal the notification to have been premature, all costs for the inspection and work previously accomplished by the balancing agency shall be paid for by the General Contractor. Furthermore, such items that are not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed and placed in operational readiness before testing and balancing services shall be recommenced. M. Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup, testing and balancing shall be repaired or replaced to like-new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs. 3.02 REQUIRED ACCURACY A. Systems shall be balanced to be within the following limits of the capacity shown on the Drawings. Limits shall be applied to both individual components and to the system totals. 1. General Systems (plus/minus 10 percent) • 3.03 TESTING u A. HVAC Air Systems Balance the supply return and exhaust air systems in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standards by the use of direct reading instruments such as an"anemotherm" or velometer which has been properly calibrated. 2. Temporarily add static pressure to the system, to simulate the effect of dirty filters, by blanking off portions of the filter section, covering filter section with cheesecloth or other suitable means. Confirm static has been added with new static pressure reading across fan. Remove cheesecloth, etc, after traverses are complete. 3. If so instructed by the Engineer, further balancing of temperature shall be made either by thermometer or by temperature recorder. 4. The sequence of air balancing shall be as follows: a. First, establish air flow quantity at supply fan by main duct traverse. b. Next, establish air flow quantities in main ducts and branches. c. Finally, establish air flow quantities at outlets, using proportional balancing among branch outlets. All multiple opening systems shall be left with at least one "open 6349-79520 15990- 7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved low" inlet or outlet, to which all other system openings shall be proportionally • balanced. The "open low(s)" on each system shall be indicated in the report. d. After all outlets are adjusted to within the tolerances specified elsewhere in this Section, remeasure all system outlets, and retraverse all branch and main ducts to establish final "as balanced" flows. e. All main air ducts shall be traversed, using a Pitot tube and manometer. The manometer shall be calibrated to read two significant figures in all velocity pressure ranges. The static pressure reading at the traverse point shall be recorded for each successive traverse. 1) A main duct is defned as either of the following: a) A duct serving five or more outlets. b) A duct serving two or more branch ducts. c) A duct emanating from a fan or plenum. 2) All other ducts are branch ducts. 3) The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse, the total air quantity handled by the fan and to verify the distribution of air to zones and to adjust system pressure to minimum level required to satisfy the farthest air outlet. � f. Adjust fan speeds if results of system capacity tests are not wrthin tolerances specified and repeat Paragraphs 3.03.A.4.c, d and e above, as required. g. Mark all final balancing damper positions with a permanent marker. h. For systems which modulate between different flow modes (e.g. minimum outside air to 100 percent outdoor air or 100 percent return air to 100 percent exhaust) measure and report system flow under both extremes of modulation and check for excessive system flow deviation above design, when system is modulating between its end points. 5. Furnish data in excel spread sheet format tabulating the following: a. Opening number, type, size and design flow rate. b. Quantity of air in cfm at each air outlet and inlet. c. Dry and wet bulb temperature in each room. d. Dry and wet bulb temperature of the supply air. e. Dry and wet bulb temperature of the return air. • 6349-79520 15990- 8 October 2012 C� 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�;hts Reserved � f. Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperature at the time the above tests are conducted. g. Total, sensible, and latent capacity in BTUH. 6. Adjust belts, sheaves and the alignment of air handling equipment. 7. Where various combinations of sheaves must be installed on fan systems to achieve the correct air delivery, change the sheaves and continue to take successive readings until the correct combinations are installed. 8. Furnish data in excel spread sheet format taken at each air moving device, to include fans, packaged units and air handling units, tabulating the following: a. Manufacturers, model number and serial number of units. b. All design and manufacturer's rated data. c. Total quantity of supply air in cfm. d. Total quantity of return air in cfm. e. Total quantity of exhaust or relief air in cfm. f. Total quantity of outside air in cfm. • g. Outlet velocity - fpm. h. The rpm of each fan or blower. i. Maximum tip speed - fpm. j. The rpm of each motor. k. Voltage and ampere input of each motor (one reading for each phase leg on 3 phase motors). 1. Pressure in inches w.g. at inlet of each fan or blower. m. Pressure in inches w.g. at discharge of each fan or blower. n. Pressure drops across system components such as louvers, filters, coils and mixing boxes. o. Submit the actual fan operating point on a copy of the fan shop drawing showing operating curve. p. List the following data from all fan motors installed. 1) Manufacturer model and size. i 6349-79520 15990- 9 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2) Motor horsepower, service factor and rpm. 3) Volts, phases, cycles and full load amps. 4) Equipment locations. 9. Systems with variable volume boxes and constant volume boxes furnish the following, with ATC contractor present for necessary coordination: a. At static pressure probe location measure static pressure with manometer and compare with reading registering at system panel or readout receptacle. The "most critical" volume box shall be determined by the Engineer from approved sheet metal shop drawing submittals. Observe damper linkage, at this box, instruct ATC contractor to vary static pressure setpoint as required so that with thermostat calling for full cooling, the most critical box damper is 75 percent open. (Score line on damper linkage and mark full open and closed positions of box damper. Using protractor mark 75 percent open position on volume box.) b. At each series fan powered variable volume box, confirm that thermostat and box controller are of the same type (i.e., direct acting or reverse acting). c. At each constant volume box, use magnehelic gauge to adjust setpoint of box controller to differential pressure corresponding to velocity (airflow) specified. Confirm diffuser totals agree with results. B. Heat Pump Units and Condensing Units 1. Furnish typewritten data, tabulating as follows: a. Manufacturer, model number, size and serial number of all units. b. All design and manufacturer's rated data. c. Suction and condensing temperatures, and pressures. d. Temperatures of entering and leaving air. e. Voltage and ampere input of motors under full load (one for each phase leg). f. Total, sensible, and latent capacity in BTUH. C. Heating Coils 1. Furnish typewritten data tabulating the following: a. Manufacturer and model number. b. All design and manufacturer's rated data. • • c. Actual operating current and voltage for all legs. 6349-79520 15990- 10 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • d. Coil location and identification. e. Dry bult inlet and outlet coil temperatures. f. Air flow in cfm. g. Capacity in BTUH. D. Existing Systems When existing systems are modified by changes of capacity or addition or deletion of components the entire existing system shall be rebalanced using the procedures defined herein. 2. Rebalancing of air systems will not include coils except where specifically noted. 3. Capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings or if not shown, capacities shown on existing system drawings, if available, shall be used. 3.04 STANDBY EQUIPMENT A. Where systems are provided with standby equipment, the system shall be balanced for operation in standby as well as normal operation. •. 3.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE � A. At the time of final inspection, the balancing agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer, specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified test-and-balance report. B. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Engineer. C. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as the original test and balance. D. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, shall not normally exceed 1 S percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except where special air systems require a complete recheck for safety reasons. E. If the specific rechecks are more than 5 percent deviation from the report or specified flows, all of the systems, that require specific recheck, shall be rebalanced. If 5 percent or 5 of the random checks, which ever is less, exceeds a 10 percent deviation from the specified flows, the report shall be rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, a new certified test-and-balance report submitted, and a new inspection test made, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST 6349-79520 15990- 11 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite • season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 15990- 12 October 2012 � �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Rights Reserved SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and make operational, electrical and process instrumentation systems at the City of Clearwater, RO WTP Plant No.l as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials specified in other Sections of the Division 16 Specifications and shown on the Drawings. C. The work shall include furnishing and installing the following: Conduit, wire and field connections for all motors, motor controllers, control devices, control panels and electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of these specifications. 2. Conduit, wiring and terminations for all field-mounted instruments furnished under other Divisions of these specifications, including process instrumentation primary elements, • transmitters, local indicators and control panels. Lightning and surge protection equipment wiring at process instrumentation transmitters. Install vendor furnished cables specified under other Divisions of these specifications. A complete raceway system for the Data Highway Cables and specialty cable systems. lnstall the Data Highway Cables and other specialty cable systems furnished under Division 13 in accordance with the system manufacturers' installation instructions. Review the raceway layout, prior to installation, with the computer system supplier and the cable manufacturer to ensure raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished. Where redundant cables are furnished, install cables in separate raceways. 4. Conduit, wiring and terminations for variable frequency drives, harmonic filters, transformers and power factor correction capacitors furnished under other Divisions of these specifications. 5. Power wiring for all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications, including power wiring for 120V unit heater motors, thermostats, fan motors, dampers and other HVAC inline unit wiring shown on the Drawings_ 6. Furnish and install precast manholes, precast handholes and light pole bases. 7. Furnish and install manhole and handhole frames and covers. • 8. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no extra cost. 6349-79520 16000-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 9. Modifications to existing control systems including installation of auxiliary motor starter • contacts, relays, switches, etc, as required to provide the control functions or inputs as shown on the Drawings. Obtain the existing equipment shop drawings from the Owner before attempting to make any modifications to the existing equipment wiring. Verify all existing wiring and connections for correctness. If record drawings are not available, trace all circuits in the field and develop the wiring diagrams necessary for completion of the work. Document all changes made to the wiring diagrams and return a marked-up set of Record Drawings to the Owner after the work is complete. 10. Coordinate the sequence of demolition with the sequence of construction to maintain plant operation in each area. Remove and demolish equipment and materials in such a sequence that the existing and proposed plant will function properly with no disruption of treatment. 11. Modifications to existing motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards and motor controllers incIuding installation of circuit breakers, etc, or disconnection of circuits as required to provide the power supplies to new and existing equipment to maintain the plant in operation. D. Each bidder or their authorized representatives shall, before preparing their proposal, visit all areas of the existing site, buildings and structures in which work under this Division is to be performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this bidder shall be considered evidence that their representative has visited the site, buildings and structures and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed • and that he/she takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his/her work. E. Provide all electrical demolition work associated with the removal of equipment from the existing facilities, including disconnecting and removing all electrical wiring and conduit to equipment being removed under other sections. Survey the existing electrical systems with representatives from other trades prior to performing any demolition work. Identify all conduit and equipment to be removed with tags or paint. F. Buildings or structures scheduled for complete demolition shall be made safe from electrical shock hazard prior to demolition. Disconnect all electrical power, communications, alarm and signaling systems. Remove only specific electrical equipment noted for removal and turn over to the Owner. All other miscellaneous electrical materials, equipment, etc, will be demolished and removed from the site as specified in Division 2. G. Provide all electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the existing and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and providing new wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment. H. All power interruptions to electrical equipment shall be at the Owner's convenience with 72 hours (minimum) notice. Each interruption shall have prior approval. I. The Contractor shall maintain the existing plant in operation at all times. Temporary power connections as required shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. All temporary wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Any temporary equipment • feeders (480V) shall be installed in conduit. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer 6349-79520 16000-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • details, methods, materials etc. prior to making temporary connections. Furnish and install all equipment and materials including control equipment, motor starters, branch and feeder circuit breakers, panelboards, transformers, etc., for temporary power. Field verify all existing underground electrical conduit, concrete duct banks, manhole, pull boxes, etc. and mechanical piping. The Contractor shall include in his bid all costs associated with relocation or removal of underground equipment as required for construction of the new facilities. K. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish electrical and instrumentation conduit layout shop drawings for yard electrical, within and under all roads, buildings and structures to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing work. Layouts shall include but not be limited to equipment, pull boxes, manholes, conduit routing, dimensioning, methods and locations of supports, reinforcing, encasement, materials, conduit sizing, equipment access, potential conflicts, building and yard lighting, and all other pertinent technical specifications for all electrical and instrumentation conduits and equipment to be furnished. All layouts shall be drawn to scale on 24" x 36" sheets. Refer to the SUBMITTALS paragraph within this specification for additional requirements. L. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of work and making any minor correction changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality; substandard work will be rejected. • M. A single manufacturer shall provide switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, disconnect switches, unit substations, panel boards, etc. This manufacturer shall also provide the power system study as specified herein. N. Contractor shall provide their own temporary power for miscellaneous power (drills, pumps, etc.). No facility circuits shall be used unless approved in writing by the Engineer. Any temporary added shall be removed at job completion. O. Complete coordination with other contractors. Contractor shall coordinate with all other contractors' equipment submittals and obtain all relevant submittals. P. Mount control panels, transmitters, process instruments, operator stations, etc. furnished under other Divisions of these specifcations. Q. Concrete electrical duct encasement, including but not limited to excavation, concrete, conduit, reinforcement, backfilling, grading and seeding is included in Division 16. All work shall be done in accordance with Divisions 2 and 3 of these specifications. R. Excavation, bedding material, forms, concrete and backfill far underground raceways; forms and concrete for electrical equipment furnished herein is included in Division 16. All work shall be done in accordance with Divisions 2 and 3 of these specifications. S. The Contractor shall include in the base bid the following miscellaneous material and Iabor allowances. Assume all exposed conduit to at elevations up to 20 feet and include all • necessary fittings, pullboxes, supports, etc. Assume all buried conduit to include all miscellaneous hardware, fitting, waming tape, trenching, backfill, and compaction for a complete installation_ Unused allowance value in dollars shall be returned to the Owner as a 6349-79520 16000-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved credit change order at the end of the project. 1. 500 feet of 4#12 AWG in 3/4 inch Aluminum conduit. 2. 500 feet of 2#14 AWG in 3/4 inch Aluminum conduit. 3. 500 feet of 2/C #16 AWG shielded cable in 3/4 inch Aluminum conduit 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel or sand bedding for underground electrical work is specified in Division 2. B. Cast in place concrete work, including concrete encasements for electrical duct banks, equipment pads, light pole bases and reinforcing steel, is specified in Division 3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings for equipment, materials and other items furnished under Division 16. B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment: 1. Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Hangers 2. Wires and Cables 3. Miscellaneous Equipment (as specified in Section 16191) 4. Panelboards 5. Motor Control Center Modifications 6. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 7. Switches, Receptacles and Covers 8. Precast Manholes and Handholes, Frames and Covers 9. Grounding Hardware and Connections C. Submittals shall be required for the following items: 1. Qualifications of Electrical Contractor Superintendent 2. Concealed and buried conduit layouts 3. Preliminary Short Circuit Study 4. Final Power System Study 6349-79520 16000� October 2012 . • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 5. Test reports 6. Manufacturer's service reports D. The manufacturers name and product designation or catalog numbers shall be submitted for the following material utilized: Testing Equipment Ground System Resistance Test Equipment E. Check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to the Specifications and the Drawings. This statement shall also list all exceptions to the Specifications and the Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned. F. The Engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with the Specifications and the Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and the Drawings. G. All dimensions sha11 be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. • H. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED - CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED". In addition to manufacturer's equipment shop drawings, submit electrical installation working drawings containing the following: Concealed and buried conduit layouts, shown on floor plans drawn at not less than 1/4-in = 1-ft-0-in scale. The layouts shall include locations of process equipment, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, control panels and equipment, motors, switches, motor starters, large junction or pull boxes, instruments and any other electrical devices connected to concealed or buried conduits. 2. Plans shall be drawn on high quality paper, size 36-in by 24-in and shall be presented in a neat, professional manner. Concrete floors and/or walls containing concealed conduits shall not be poured until conduit layouts are approved. J. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in accordance with Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this • installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, parts lists, etc, to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 6349-79520 16000-5 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved r� � J 2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum: a. A comprehensive index. b. A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop drawings. c. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and pertinent data. d. A table listing of the "as left" settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip set- points. e. System schematic drawings "As-Built", illustrating all components, piping and electric connections of the systems supplied under this Section. f. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. g. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. h. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the systems schematic drawings and instructions. i. Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts. • 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the latest edition of National Electrical Code (NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 7. Instrument Society of America (ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Intemational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 6349-79520 16000-6 October 2012 r � L � � �� • �O 20l Z CDM Smith All Rif�h?; Reserved 1.OS 1.06 11. lnstitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, lnc., and shall bear the appropriate UL listing mark or classification marking. Equipment, materials, etc. utilized not bearing a UL certification shall be field or factory UL certified prior to equipment acceptance and use. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method which represents the most stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity. B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work not dimensioned shall be as directed by the Engineer and work not particularly shown, identifed, sized, or located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified. C. Detailed Drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale Drawings take precedence over smaller scale Drawings, Change Order Drawings shall govern over Contract Drawings and Contract Drawings shall govern over Shop Drawings. D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. lf there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times. ENCLOSURE TYPES A. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, electrical enclosures shall have the following ratings: 1. NEMA 1 for dry, non-process indoor locations. 2. NEMA 12 for "DUST" locations. 3. NEMA 4X for outdoor locations, rooms below grade (including basements and buried vaults), "DAMP" and "WET" and "PROCESS" locations. 6349-79520 16000-7 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.07 1: 4. NEMA 4X for "CORROSIVE" locations. 5. NEMA 7(and listed for use in the area classifications shown) far "Ciass 1 Division 1 Group D", "Class I Division 2 Group D" and "Class II Division 1" hazardous locations shown on the Drawings. CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections. TESTS AND SETTINGS A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective work and equipment. Refer to the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements. B. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. C. In addition to the specific testing requirements listed in the individual Sections, the following minimum tests and settings shall be performed. Submit test reports upon completion of testing in accordance with Section 01300. 4. 5 Mechanical inspection, testing and settings of circuit breakers, disconnect switches, motor starters, overload relays, control circuits and equipment for proper operation. Check the full load current draw of each motor. Where power factor correction capacitors are provided the capacitor shall be in the circuit at the time of the measurement. Check ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the Engineer of the same, including MCC cubicle location and driven load designation, motor service factor, horsepower, and Code letter. If incorrect thermal overloads are installed replace same with the correct size overload. Check power and control power fuse ratings. Replace fuses if they are found to be of the incorrect size. Check settings of the motor circuit protectors. Adjust settings to lowest setting that will allow the motor to be started when under load conditions. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper lubrication. 6. Check rotation of motors prior to testing the driven load. Disconnect the driven equipment if damage coutd occur due to wrong rotation. lf the rotation is incorrect for the driven equipment correct motor connections at the motor ternunal box. 7. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by control schematic 6349-79520 16000-8 October 2012 � • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved and wiring diagrams_ 8. lnspect each piece of equipment in areas designated as HAZARDOUS to ensure that equipment of proper rating is installed. 9. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, panels and enclosures by producing a 1, 2, 3 clockwise rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to "A", "B" and "C" phases. 10. Verify correct wire termination positions across tie circuits, transfer switches, or other devices that normally have two sources of three-phase power present by performing a hot phase test. That is, in addition to verifying clockwise rotation, a voltage reading across both incoming circuits should measure 0 volts when phase "A" of one side is compared to phase "A" of the other side. 11. Check all wire and cable terminations. Verify to the Engineer connections meet the equipments torque requirements. 12. Field set all transformer taps as required to obtain the proper secondary voltage. 13. Infra-red hot spot inspection shall be made of all electrical equipment including but not limited to switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, switches, power and control panels, etc. This shall be done under representative load conditions before the equipment is used by the Owner and again 3 months before expiration of the 1-year warranty period. D. Testing sball be scheduled and coordinated in writing with the Engineer at least 2 weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment. Provide certified calibration sheets including dates for all equipment to be used for testing with notice of scheduled testing. Calibration sheets shall also indicate that the units have been calibrated within six months of the testing date. The Contractor shall have qualified personnel present during the testing. 1.09 POWER SYSTEM STUDY A. General: The major electrical equipment manufacturer (i.e. switchgear and motor control centers) shall provide a computerized Power System Study for the electrical power distribution and motor control equipment. The study shall verify adequacy of all of the existing equipment as well as new additions being implemented under these Specifications. The study shall also include the utility company's protective devices, the emergency generators, the main switchboard, all feeders from the main switchboard, all distribution and associated MCC's. Graphic indication of coordination shall be furnished in the form of a cIearly labeled and identified composite drawing showing time-current curves of system protective devices. Time-current curves of each device shall also be furnished. 3. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying with the • Power Company in writing all information needed to conduct this study. Provide this correspondence and information including contacts and phone numbers with the study submittal. 6349-79520 16000-9 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 4. The Contractor shall set all rotective devices and rela s based on this coordination • P Y study to provide coordinated, selective protection for all equipment supplied or affected by the installation under this Contract. 5. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall provide data necessary to perform the study. This includes feeder cable sizes, approximate feeder length, motor data, switchgear data, existing protective relay settings and any other information relevant to the study. 6. A summary of the short circuit analysis shall be provided to the Contractor at the time shop drawings for all of the new equipment is submitted for approval. This preliminary short circuit submittal shall be required in order to approve the eyuipment submittal. 7. The manufacturer shall be made aware that there is no available up-to-date single line diagram for the existing facility. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall provide and/or update the existing single line diagram as required in order to perform the coordination and short-circuit study. 8. The Contractor shall provide and install equipment specific arc flash warning labels per the are flash study performed herein. B. Scope: 1. The power system study consists of four major parts. The first part is the preliminary short circuit study. The preliminary short circuit study shall verify new [and existing] • eyuipment is being applied with design ratings. Shop drawings for new equipment will not be reviewed until the preliminary short circuit study is approved by the Engineer. 2. The second and third parts of the power system study include the final shori circuit and protective device coordination study. New equipment will not be energized until this study is approved by the Engineer and devices are set in the field in accordance with the study. 3. The fourth and fnal part of the power system study is the arc flash study. The arc flash study labels will be added after the equipment is energized and all changes, upgrades or modifications have been made, to ensure field labeling will be accurate. 4. The short circuit study shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard C37.010 and C37.13, shalt be performed to check the adeyuacy, and to verify the correct application of circuit protective devices and other system components specified. The study shall address the case when the system is being powered from the normal source as welI as from the on-site generating facilities. Minimum as well as maximum possible fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study. 5. Fault contribution of all motors shall be considered. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required data of equipment. All back-up calculations shali become part of the final report. The Calculations shall be in sufficient detail to allow easy review. C. Contents: The study shall include representation of the power company's systems, the base • 6349-79520 16000-10 October 2012 • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All [Zigl�ts Reserved quantities selected, impedance source-data, calculation methods and tabulations, one-line and impedance diagrams, conclusions and recommendations. Short circuit momentary duties, shall be calculated on the basis of an assumed bolted three-phase short circuit at each medium voltage bus, low voltage switchboard bus, switchboards, motor control centers, distribution panelboards, pertinent branch circuit panelboards, and other significant locations through the systems. The short-circuit tabulations shall include significant X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, KVA, and symmetrical fault current. 2. A protective device time current coordination study shall be included with coordination plots of key and/or limiting devices, tabulated data, rating, and/or settings selected. The study shall present an engineering balance between the competing objectives of protection and continuity of service for the system specified, taking into account the basic factors of sensitivity, selectivity and speed. 3. Separate plots shall be provided for each mode of "normal" and "stand-by" operation. Maximum fault values shall be shown in each case. Both power sources shown in one plot will not be accepted. 4. Existing protective device settings shall be reviewed to ensure selectivity under the new conditions. Recommended changes shall be indicated in the report. The Contractor shall be made aware of required changes immediately. 5. Transformer damage curves in accordance with ANSI C57.109. 6. Feeder cable damage curves. 7. Required settings for breakers and relays shall be maximized to provide the most effective protection possible whether the system is fed from the normal or emergency source. 8. Tabulations indicating recommended set points for all protective devices shall be provided. This shall include the normal as well as the emergency source. 9. An executive summary outlining the distribution system, the information received from the utility company, assumptions made to complete the study, statement of the adequacy of the distribution equipment to safely clear or close on any fault, and identification of any problem areas with recommendations for resolving the problem. 10. Generator short circuit decrement curves and thermal limit curves shall be included. I 1. Tabulation of arc flash information. D. Motor Current-Time Characteristic Curves: A complete independent set of current-time characteristic curves for all medium voltage motor drives indicating coordination between the protective relays and the thermal characteristics of the motor shall be provided. • 2. The Contractor shall obtain from the motor supplier, the necessary information to perform the study. Certified curves for "safe time versus current at 100 percent voltage" and "accelerating time versus current at 100 percent voltage" shall become part of the 6349-79520 16000-11 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved final report. E. Motor Starting Study: A motor starting study for all large electric drives (100 horsepower and above) to determine voltage dip or power inrush limitations at selected locations due to starting of motors shall be provided. This applies to both the normal and the emergency mode. F. General Information for Time-Current Curves Presentations: 1. The coordination plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagrams, legends, associated power company's relay or system characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters for power, and substation transformers, and complete operating bands for low-voltage circuit breaker trip devices. 2. The coordination plots shall defne the types of protective devices selected, together with the proposed coil taps, time-dial settings and pick-up settings required. 3. The short-time region shall indicate the medium voltage relay instantaneous elements, the magnetizing in-rush, and ANSl withstand transformer parameters, the low-voltage circuit breaker instantaneous trip devices, fuse manufacturing to tolerance bands, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. • 4. Each primary protective device required for a delta-to-wye connected transformer shall be selected so that the characteristic or operating band is within the transformer • parameters; which, where feasible, shall include a parameter equivalent to 58 percent of the ANSI withstand point to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults. 5. Low-voltage power circuit breakers shall be separated from each other and the associated primary protective device, where feasible, by a 16 percent cunent margin for coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults. 6. Protective relays shall be separated, where feasible, by a 0.3 second time margin when the maximum three-phase fault flows, to assure proper selectivity. G. Generator(s) Protective Devices: The study shall address all of the new and existing protective devices provided for generator protection. 2. Protective relays requiring settings shall include, but not necessarily limited to: a. Differential b. Overcurrent with voltage restraint c. Ground d. Undervoltage e. Reverse power 6349-79520 16000-12 October 2012 � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • f. Unbalanced loading and open phase g. Loss of excitation Contractor shall obtain all necessary new [and existing] generator information to perform this study. H. Arc Flash Study: The study shall utilize the fault current values calculated in the short circuit study and the clearing time of the upstream protective device in the coordination study to calculate the incident energy at each fault location. Study shall be in accordance with lEEE Standard 1584 and NFPA 70E. Study shall calculate the incident energy and flash protection boundary at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards) where work could be performed on energized parts. Include any 208 volt or 240 volt equipment that is fed from transformers greater than 125 kVA. 4. lncident energy calculations shall include maximum and minimum fault contribution scenarios, since protective device clearing times can vary greatly depending upon the fault current. • 5. Tabulations shall be provided showing each fault location, the arcing fault magnitude, protective device clearing time, duration of the arc, arc flash boundary, working distance, incident energy and hazard risk category. I. The power system study shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2" x 11" size report and submitted in accordance with Section 01300. The completed short circuit and coordination study shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before any of the equipment is shipped. All protective devices shall be adjusted, tested, and calibrated in the field, prior to energizing the equipment, per the settings listed in the study. This work shall be performed by the manufacturer as described in this section and prior to final acceptance by the Owner. All protective devices, existing and new shall be calibrated and tested as recommended by and under the supervision of the distribution gear manufacturer's representative as specifed in this section. K. The coordination study shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the state in which the equipment is to be installed. L. Arc Flash Warning Labels: Provide a machine printed 3.5-inch x 5-inch thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each location identified in the arc flash study. • 2. Labels shall include the following machine printed information (hand lettering is not acceptable): equipment name, flash hazard boundary, incident energy, boundaries for shock hazard, limited approach, restricted approach and prohibited approach, PPE 6349-79520 16000-13 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved (personal protective equipment) category and date. One label shall be required at each applicable low voltage switchgear, switchboard, motor control center or panelboard. 1.10 INTERPRETATlON OF DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment. B. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation. Any adjustments required in the field shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner and coordinated and approved by the Engineer. • F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be deternvned by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant • to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting and other electrical systems shown. Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the approved equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of an alternate item, arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be done by the Contractor at his/her own expense_ Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work, either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign. I. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by '/2-inch spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment. J. All floor mounted electrical equipment shall be placed on 4-inch thick (3/4-inch, 45 degree chamfer at all exposed edges) concrete pads, provide reinforcement, anchors, etc. K. The Contractor shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space and all such offsets, fittings, etc, • required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor without 6349-79520 16000-14 October 2012 � • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1.11 1.12 1.13 additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the Engineer is to decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. L. Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways and conductors shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system. Homeruns, as shown on the Drawings, are to assist the Contractor in identifying raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all fnished spaces and may be installed exposed or concealed in all process spaces. Raceways installed exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes hoists, monorails, equipment hatches, doors, windows, etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, above suspended ceilings, or in partitions as required. PHASE BALANCING A. The Drawings do not attempt to balance the electrical loads across the phases. Circuits on motor control centers and panelboards shall be field connected to result in eventy balanced loads across all phases. B. Field balancing of circuits shall not alter the conductor color coding requirements as specified in Section 16120. SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. lnvestigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final Iocation. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure. B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. RECORD DRAWINGS A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings, hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". B. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. One-line Diagram(s). 2. Equipment elevations (front views). 3. Raceways and pullboxes. 4. Conductor sizes and conduit fills. • 5- 6. 6349-79520 Panel Schedule(s). Control Wiring Diagram(s). 16000-15 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 7. Lighting Fixture Schedule(s). 8. Lighting fixture, receptacle and switch outlet locations. 9. Underground raceway and duct bank routing. 10. Plan view, sizes and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers, substations, motor control centers and panelboards. C. Submit a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers, including the following information: Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers. 2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers. D. In addition to the schedule, provide point-to-point connection diagrams showing the same information submitted in the schedule of control wiring raceways including all designations and wire numbers. • E. Submit the record drawings, schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers and the point-to-point connection diagrams to the Engineer. The schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers and the point-to-point connection diagrams shall be computer generated (i.e. no hand-written or drawn schedules, drawings, or diagrams will be accepted). • 1.14 EQUIPMENT 1NTERCONNECTIONS A. Review shop drawings of equipment fumished under other Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagams or tables with the Record Drawings. B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections. 1.15 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically identified on the Drawings to be re-used. B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be UL listed. C. Warrant all equipment furnished under Division 16 in accordance with Section 01740. Refer to individual equipment sections for additional wananty items. L16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc) furnished under Division 16 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, transformers, switchboards, switchgear, junction or • terminal boxes, transfer switches, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the 6349-79520 16000-16 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • Drawings. B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in with 3/16-in high white letters on a black background. C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA l enclosures. Nameplates shall be bonded to all other enclosure types using an epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two sided foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. Where the equipment size does not have space for mounting a nameplate, the nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the adjacent mounting surface. Cemented nameplates shall not be drilled. D. All voltages (e.g. 4160 volts, 480 volts, etc.) within pull boxes, junction boxes etc. shall be identified on the front exterior cover. Signs shall be red background with white engraved lettering, lettering shall be a minimum of 1" high. E. All receptacles, wall switches, lighting fxtures, photo cells, emergency lights, exit lights, etc. shall be identified with the panel and circuit to which it is connected. Identification shall be with machine generated labels with '/o" high letters. 1.17 DEMOLITION A. Remove electrical work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except those portions indicated to remain or be reused. • B. Remove unused exposed conduit and wiring back to point of concealment including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Remove unused wiring in concealed conduits back to source (or nearest point of usage). C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide stainless steel blank covers for abandoned outlets which are not removed. D. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, control stations, distribution equipment, etc. E. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories. F. Disconnect electrical circuits in the way of demolition work and re-establish circuits to remaining outlets, fixtures, equipment, etc. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal. G. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. H. New lighting shall be in place or safe lighting levels maintained for plant operation during the construction period. • I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 6349-79520 16000-17 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Where electrical systems pass through the demolition areas to serve other portions of the • premises, they shall remain or be suitably relocated and the system restored to normal operation. K. Coordinate outages in systems with the Owner. Where duration of proposed outage cannot be allowed by the Owner, provide temporary connections as required to maintain service. L. Removal and relocation of existing conduit, wire and equipment have not been detailed on the Drawings. Survey the affected areas before submitting bid proposal. M. Trace out existing wiring that is to be relocated, or removed and perform the relocation or removal work as required for a complete operating and safe system. N. Continuous service is reyuired on all circuits and outlets affected by these changes, except where the Owner will permit an outage for a specific time. Obtain Owner's consent before removing any circuit from continuous service. O. Remove exposed conduits, wireways, outlet boxes, pull boxes and hangers made obsolete by the alterations, unless specifcally designated to remain. Patch surfaces and provide stainless steel blank covers for abandoned outlets which are removed. P. All equipment, materials, controls, motor starters, branch and feeder breakers, panelboards, transformers, wiring, raceways, etc, furnished and installed to temporarily keep circuits energized shall be removed when the permanent installation is fully operational. Q. Electrical Removal All existing electrical equipment and fixtures to be removed shall be removed with such care as may be required to prevent unnecessary damage, to keep existing systems in operation and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. Conduits and wires shall be abandoned or removed where shown. All wires in abandoned conduits shall be removed, salvaged and stored. Abandoned conduits concealed in floor or ceiling slabs or in walls, shall be cut flush with the slab or wall at the point of entrance. The conduits shall be suitably plugged and the area repaired in a flush, smooth and approved manner. Exposed conduits and their supports shall be disassembled and removed from the site. Repair all areas of work to prevent rust spots on exposed surfaces. 3. Wall switches, receptacles, and other miscellaneous electrical equipment, shall be removed and disposed of off the site as required. Care shall be taken in removing all equipment so as to minimize damage to architectural and structural members. Any damage incurred shall be repaired. 1.18 DISPOSITION OF REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT • A. in general, it is intended that material and equipment indicated to be removed and disposed of by the Contractor shall, upon removal, become the Contractor`s property and shall be disposed of off the site by the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. Any fees or charges incurred for disposal of such equipment or materials shall be paid by the Contractor. A receipt showing acceptable disposal of any legally regulated materials or equipment shall be given to • the Owner. 6349-79520 16000-18 October 2012 � C� • O� 2012 CDM Smitl� All Rights Reserved 1.19 1.20 B. Ballasts in each existing lighting fixture shall be assumed to contain PCB's unless specifically marked with a label indicating "No PCBs". Remove ballasts from each lighting fixture and pack them in accordance with EPA PCB regulations. Ship ballasts in approved containers to an EPA approved recycling facility and pay all shipping, packaging and recycle costs. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep all employees and/or subcontractors aware of the danger inherent in warking in dangerous proximity to the existing power lines. The minimum recommended precautionary measures are as follows: 1. Make sure that all persons responsible for operating cranes, draglines and other mobile equipment have a copy of, and are familiar with the State Department of Comrnerce Regulations for Use of Cranes, Draglines and Similar Equipment Near Power Lines, as well as the U.S. Department of Labor OSHA Regulations, before commencing operation of said equipment. 2. Make sure that all cranes, draglines and other mobile equipment have attached to them the black and yellow Department of Commerce warning signs required by the said Regulations of State Department of Commerce. 3. Warn all employees on the ground, new and old employees alike, of the danger of holding on to or touching a cable or other piece of equipment or machinery that is located or working close to any overhead power line. 4. If, during the course of construction, it becomes necessary for the contractor, or subcontractor, and their employees, to operate cranes, draglines, or their mobile equipment, in dangerous proximity of any overhead power lines, or in such a manner that such equipment might come close to any overhead power lines, the Contractor shall give the Power Company or overhead power line owner prior notice of such proposed operation. QUALIFICATION A. The Electrical Contractor shall have regularly engaged in the installation of inedium voltage systems for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Provide a field superintendent who has had a minimum of ten (10) years previous successful experience on medium voltage projects of comparable size and complexity. Superintendent shall be present at all times that work under this Division is being installed or affected. A resume of the Superintendent's experience shall be submitted to the Engineer before starting work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED} PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS 6349-79520 16000-19 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.02 3.03 A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. B. Exact locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours, the Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for this deviation must be submitted in writing. No additional compensation for such change will be allowed. D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots as specified in Section 16110. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner and be in compliance with modifications and repair to concrete as specified in Section 01045. Sawcut concrete and masonry prior to breaking out sections. B. Core drill holes in existing concrete floors and walls as required. C. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching. D. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns or any other structural members. E. F Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit. Patching to be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed. G. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better. H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed. I. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises. J. When existing conduits are cut at the floor line or wall line, they shall be filled with grout of suitable patching material. INSTALLATION A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Division or without approval by the Engineer shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. B. Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If an apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost. If any apparatus has been 6349-79520 16000-20 October 2012 • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All E:ights Reserved 3.04 3.05 subject to possible injury by water, it shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner, the damaged unit(s) or systems shall remain on site and returned to the manufacturer after the replacement unit(s) or systems have been delivered to the site. Under no circumstances will electrical equipment damaged by water be rehabilitated or repaired, new equipment shall be supplied and all cost associated with replacement shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Engineer's discretion. D. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted per the field painting requirements Section 09902, at no additional cost to the Owner. MANUFACTURERS SERVICE A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up of the following eyuipment: Variable Frequency Drives 1 day 1 trip minimum B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be used for manufacturers warranty repairs. C. The manufacturers of the above listed equipment shall provide experienced Field Service Engineer to accomplish the following tasks: The equipment shall be visually inspected upon completion of installation and prior to energization to assure that wiring is correct, interconnection complete and the installation is in compliance with the manufacturer's criteria. Documentation shall be reviewed to assure that all Drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, parts list and other data required to check out and sustain equipment operation is available on-site. Documentation shall be red-lined to reflect any changes or modifications made during the installation so that the "as-built" equipment confguration will be correctly defined. Spare parts shall be inventoried to assure correct type and quantity. 2. The Field Service Engineers shail provide engineering support during the energization and check-out of each major equipment assembly. They shall perform any calibration or adjustment required for the equipment to meet the manufacturer's performance specifications_ Upon satisfactory completion of equipment test, they shall provide engineering support of system tests to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's test specifications. 4. A final report shall be written and submitted to the Contractor within fourteen days from completion of final system testing. The report shall document the inspection and test activity, define any open problems and recommend remedial action. The reports after review by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer_ TRAINING • A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment specified under Division 16. 6349-79520 16000-21 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Variable Frequency Drives 1 day 1 trips minimum B. The cost of training programs to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. C. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. D. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance including trouble-shooting of each system. E. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. The training shall be conducted with record "as-built" drawings sufficient for a class of eight personnel. F. Within 120 days of contract award to the Contractor, submit an overview of the proposed training plan. This overview shall include, for each course proposed: 1. An overview of the training plan. 2. Course title and objectives. 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees. 5. Course Content - A topical outline. 6. Course Duration. 7. Course Location - Training center or jobsite. 8. Course Format - Lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. 9. Schedule of training courses including dates, duration and locations of each class. ] 0. Resumes of the instructars who will actually implement the plan. G. The Engineer will review the training plan submittal with the Owner. 3.06 POWER SYSTEM STUDY A. Provide a complete system Power System Study including preliminary short circuit, final short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash study as specified herein. • C� B. Provide and install arc flash warning labels at equipment identified with the arc flash study. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 16000-22 October 2012 • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved PARTI GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES, F1TTINGS AND SUPPORTS SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 16600 for additional requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers with cut-sheets of all materials specified. lndicate in the submittal, the areas where specific materials are used. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid Aluminum Conduit 1. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be 6063 alloy and shall be as manufactured by New Jersey Aluminum Corp.; Reynolds Aluminum International Services lnc.; Alumax Extrusions, Inc; VAW of America, Inc. or equal. 2. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 344. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing 1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel as manufactured by the Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.; Triangle PWC Inc.; Wheatland Tube Co.; Bridgeport or equal. 2. Electrical metallic tubing shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 358. C. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 1. PVC conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride schedule 80 as manufactured by Carlon; An Indian Head Co.; Cantex; Queen City Plastics or equal. 2. PVC conduit used in underground concrete encased duct banks shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride Type DB as manufactured by Carlon; An Indian Head Co.; Cantex; Queen City Plastics or equal. 6349-79520 16110-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3. PVC conduit shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 352. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit, Couplings and Fittings 1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be Sealtite, Type UA, manufactured by the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co. or equal. 2. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be of the 3-piece screw-in type malleable iron as manufactured by the O.Z. Gedney Co. or equal. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 350. E. Flexible Metallic Tubing Flexible metallic tubing shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 360. 2. Flexible metallic tubing shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel strips shaped into interlocking convolutions firmly joined to one another assuring a complete lock similar to Tristeel as manufactured by Triangle - PWC, Inc. or equal. 3. Flexible metallic tubing shall be used only indoors for connection to lighting fixtures in NEMA 1 administration and office areas. • 4. Furnish and install insulated bushings at terminations for conductor protection. F. Flexible Couplings Flexible couplings shall be type ECGJH as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. or equal. G. Boxes and Fittings Pressed steel switch and outlet boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized with hot-dipped galvanized tile rings as manufactured by the Raco Manufacturing Co.; Adalet Co.; O.Z. Manufacturing Co. or equal. NEMA 1 and NEMA 12, junction boxes, pull boxes etc., shall be sheet steel unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Boxes shall be galvanized and have continuously welded seams. Welds shall be gound smooth and galvanized. Box bodies shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies and covers shall not be less than 14 gauge metal. Covers shall be gasketed and fastened with stainless steel screws. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets (refer to Section 16191 for additional requirements). Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffinan Engineering Co.; Lee Products Co.; ASCO Electrical Products Co., lnc., or equal. All boxes shall be shop primed and painted by the box manufacturer. • 6349-79520 16110-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3. NEMA 4X stainless steel, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be Type 316 stainless steel with Type 316 stainless steel hardware and gasketed covers. Boxes shall have continuously welded seams and welds shall be gound smooth. Box bodies shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies and covers shall not be less than 14 gauge metal. Covers shall be gasketed and fastened with stainless steel screws. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets (refer to Section 1619] for additional requirements.} Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.; Lee Products Co.; ASCO Electrical Products Co., lnc., or equal. 4. Cast aluminum boxes and fittings shall be copper free aluminum with cast aluminum covers and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Killark Electric Co..; Crouse- Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; or equal. 5. Cast aluminum device boxes shall be Type FD. All cast aluminum boxes and fittings shall be copper-free aluminum with cast aluminum covers and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Killark Electric Co.; Crouse-Hinds Co.; L. E. Mason Co. or equal. 6. Cast aluminum fittings (C's, T's, LB's, etc.) shall be of the mogul design (with rollers) as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co. 7. Multi-Outlet Assembly • a. Multi-Outlet Assembly shall only be used where specifically indicated on the drawings. The assembly enclosures shall consist of two piece, all steel or anodized aluminum raceways which shall allow for field installation of wiring and standard receptacles. • b. Multi outlet assemblies shall be UL Listed as a Multi-outlet assembly. c. Raceway bases and removable covers shall be .040-in steel, minimum of 2-1/8-in high by 1-5/8-in deep. Entrance fittings shall be sized for 3/4-in conduit. d. Raceways shall include all fittings, couplings, etc, for the complete installation of a finished system. e. Device covers shall be the 1702 Series by Walker, similar by Isoduct; Wiremold or equal. f. The multi-outlet assembly shall be the 1700 Series by Walker, similar by Isoduct; Wiremold or equal. 8. Floor boxes shall be of the adjustable single gang, concrete tight type for installation in concrete fill, Walker 800 Series, similar by Hubbell; Thomas & Betts Co. or equal. 9. Conduit hubs shall be of the grounding type as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc. or equal. 6349-79520 16110-3 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 10. Conduit wall seals for new concrete walls below grade shaIl be O.Z./Gedney Co., Type . WSK; Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co., Type WDP or equal. 11. Conduit wall seals for cored holes shall be Type CSML as manufactured by the O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal. 12. Conduit wall and floor seals for sleeved openings shalI be Type CSMI as manufactured by the O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal. 13. Combination expansion-deflection fittings embedded in concrete shall be Type XD as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; O.Z./Gedney Co.; Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. or equal. 14. Combination expansion-deflection fittings installed exposed shall be Type XJ as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co.; O.Z. Gedney Co.; Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. or equal. 15. Explosion proof fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; O.Z.lGedney Co. or equal. 16. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O.Z./Gedney, Type CSB or equal. 17. Elbows and couplings shall be aluminum. 18. Electrical metallic tubing fittings shall be of the steel, raintight, concrete-tight, insulated • throat (connectors), compression type as manufactured by the Appleton Electric Co.; Crouse-Hinds Co. or equal. H. Conduit Mounting Equipment In dry indoor non-process areas, hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, channel, fasteners, anchors, nuts, washers, etc., shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. 316 Stainless steel channel with 316 stainless steel hardware (hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, fasteners, anchors, nuts, washers, etc.) shall be used in process areas, as shown on the drawings, in areas designated "WET", "DAMP" and "CORROSIVE" on the Drawings and in outdoor locations. All channel and hardware shall be resistant to the chemicals present in the area in which it is used. Expansion anchors (minimum 3/8" diameter) shall be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock lndustries, Minneapolis, MI; Wej-it by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, CO; or Kwik-Bolt II as manufactured by the Hilti Fastening Systems, Inc, Tulsa, OK. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1-in behind the steel reinforcement. Apply anti-seize compound to all nuts and bolts. Supports installed without the approved compound shall be dismantled and correctly installed, at no cost to the Owner. I. Wall and Floor Slab Opening Seals • 6349-79520 16110-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Itr�hts Reserved • I. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp.; Pro Set Systems; Neer Mfg. Co.; Specified Technologies, Inc. or equal. Cold Galvanizing Compound Cold galvanizing compound shall be 95% zinc rich paint as manufactured by ZRC Products Company, a Division of Norfolk Corp. or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, or specified, all wiring shall be in rigid aluminum conduit. B. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be used at all locations (underground and within structures) as raceways for shielded process instrumentation wiring, shielded control wiring, data highway wiring and UO wiring. C. Schedule 80 PVC conduit shall be used where shown on the Drawings and in chemical rooms, chlorinator rooms and chlorine storage areas or areas designated "CORROSIVE" on the Drawings. • D. Rigid aluminum conduit or Schedule 80 PVC shall be used underground where concrete encasement is not called for or as specified in Paragraph 3.O1B above. Where schedule 80 PVC is used all elbows shall be rigid aluminum. E. PVC conduit shall be used for concrete encased underground duct banks except as specified in Paragraph 3.O1B above and except as specified in Section 16600. F. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings may be used only in NEMA 1 administration and office areas. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings shall not be embedded in concrete, installed outdoors, in process areas, shops, maintenance areas, electrical rooms, etc. G. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 3.02 BOX APPLICATIONS A. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, all boxes shall be metal. B. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and condulet fittings shall be cast aluminum. C. Concealed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes shall be pressed steel. Welded seamed boxes will not be permitted. D. Ternunal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the • location in which they are installed, as specified in Section 16000. 6349-79520 16110-5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.03 3.04 FITTINGS APPLICATIONS A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be used where conduits cross structure expansion joints. Refer to Structural Drawings for expansion joint locations. Provide bonding j umpers around fittings. : C Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls or at other locations shown on the Drawings. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at other locations shown on the Drawings. INSTALLATION A. No conduit smaller than 3/4 inch electrical trade size shall be used, nor shall any have more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as required or directed. B. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete in all details; in the case of concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed; in the case of exposed work, until the conduit system has been completed in every detail. C. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture during construction. D. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of 8-ft or less, as required to obtain rigid construction. E. Single conduits shall be supported by means of aluminum one-hole pipe clamps in combination with aluminum one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on trapeze type hangers with steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall be not less than 3/8-in diameter. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc, shall be supported by spacers to provide a minimum of 1/2-in clearance between wall and equipment. F. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps. Where attached to concrete surfaces, concrete expansion anchors shall be provided. G. All conduits on exposed work, within partitions and above suspended ceilings, shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. All conduit shall be run perfectly straight and true. H I. Conduit terminating in pressed steel boxes shall have double locknuts (aluminum) and insulated grounding bushings. Conduit terminating in gasketed enclosures shall be terminated with grounding type conduit hubs. 6349-79520 16110-6 October 2012 • • • • • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in sheet steel boxes shall have insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type lugs. K. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings unless otherwise specified herein. L. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for all motor terminations, the primary and secondary of transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. M. Flexible couplings shall be used in hazardous locations for all motor terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. N. Aluminum fittings and boxes shall be used with aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not be imbedded in concrete containing chlorides, unwashed beach sand, sea water, or coral bearing aggregates. Aluminum conduit shall be isolated from other metals with heat shrink tubing (Raychem or equal) or plastic-coated hangers. Strap wrenches shall be used for tightening aluminum conduit. Pipe wrenches, channel locks, chain wrenches, pliers, etc. shall not be used. O. All threads on aluminum conduit and fittings shall be cleaned and coated with "No-Oxide" compound before installing. P. Aluminum conduit installed in concrete or below grade shall be completely covered with two (2) coats of bitumastic paint or with heat shrink tubing (Raychem or equal). Q. Where conduits pass through openings in walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be sealed against the passage of flame and smoke. R. PVC conduit to non-metallic and metallic box connections shall be made with sealing rings, with a stainless steel retainer as manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co. S. Conduit ends exposed to the weather shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings. T. Expansion fittings shall be used on exposed runs of PVC conduit where required for thermal expansion. Installation and number of fittings shall be as provided per the NEC and approved by the PVC conduit manufacturer. U. All conduit entering or leaving a motor control center, switchboard or other multiple compartment enclosure shall be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wireway or other manufacturer designated area, directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. V. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 7. W. Spare conduits and conduit stubouts for future construction shall be provided with threaded P�C end caps at each end. • X. No unbroken run shall exceed 300 feet in length. This length shall be reduced by 75 feet for 6349-79520 16110-7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved each 90 degree elbow. Y. Aluminum conduit entering manholes and below grade pull boxes shall be terminated with grounding type bushings and connected to a 3/4" x] 0' rod with a#6 bare copper wire. Z. Underground circuits shall be installed directly to the respective motor control centers, lighting panels, etc., except stainless steel pull boxes shall be wall mounted on structures to eliminate excessive bends. With prior written approval, below grade pull boxes may be used. Splices shall not be made in above or below grade pull boxes unless otherwise indicated on the plans and approved in writing by the Engineer. AA. All conduits shall have a 4-inch concrete housekeeping pad at all slab and grade penetrations. The housekeeping pad shall have 45 degree, 3/4-inch chamfer at all exposed edges. BB. All risers from underground, concrete pads, floors, etc. shall be provided with heat shrink tubing (Raychem Co. or equal) from a point 1 foot-0-inch below bottom of slab or grade to a point not less than 6 inches above grade or surface of slab. CC. Existing conduits are to be reused only where specifically noted on the drawings. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits which will be reused and through all new conduits 2-in in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors. • DD. 3/16-in polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or designated for future equipment. EE. Where no size is indicated for junction boxes, pull boxes or terminal cabinets, they shall be • sized in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 314. FF. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings. They shall be routed to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction. GG. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a 3-piece cast aluminum union shall be used. HH. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air plenums, etc, shall be sealed with "Duxseal" as manufactured by Manville or seal ftting to prevent the accumulation of condensation. lI. All field cut ends of hot dipped galvanized mounting channel shall be cleaned and painted with cold galvanizing compound before installation. JJ. All underground control and instrumentation conduits shall be separated from power conduits by a minimum of 12 inches unless specifically noted otherwise. Crossing of control and instrumentation conduits with power conduits shall be kept to a minimum and where they must cross they shall cross at 90 degree angles. END OF SECTION \ J 6349-79520 16110-8 October 2012 u • • OO 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, install and test all wire, cable and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Install data highway, fiber optic, coaxial and UO cables furnished under Division 13. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, samples of proposed wire. Each sample shall have the size, type of insulation and voltage stenciled on the jacket. B. Approved samples will be sent to the project location for comparison by the Resident Engineer with the wire actually installed. C. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Carefully handle all conductars to avoid kinks and damage to insulation. 1.04 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant the cable against defects for a period of 20 years from the date of installation and shall remove and replace defective cables at his expense during this warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn copper. B. All conductors shall be stranded, except that lighting and receptacle wiring may be solid. C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall not be used. D. Wire shall have 600V insulation except where indicated otherwise. E. All wire of a given type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.02 POWER AND CONTROL WIRE 6349-79250 16120-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. Wire for lighting, receptacles, and other circuits not exceeding 150 volts to ground shall be NEC type THWN-2/THHN. Below grade and underground the wire shall be type XHHW-2. B. Wire for circuits over I50 volts to ground shall be NEC type XHHW-2 for sizes No. 4/0 AWG and smaller, and shall be NEC type RHW-2 for sizes Z50 kcmil and larger. C. Wire for control circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum NEC type XHHW-2 stranded. D. Equipment grounding conductors shall be the same NEC type as the phase conductors described previously, green and sized per NEC Table 250.122. E. Types THWN-2/THHN, XHHW-2 and RHW-2 wire shall be as manufactured by Southwire Co., Pirelli Cable Corp., Okonite Co., or equal. F. Bare copper ground wire shall be stranded, soft drawn annealed copper wire. Wire shall be as manufactured by Southwire Co., Pirelli Cable Corp., Okonite Co., or equal. G. Ground grid conductors shall be uninsulated unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. H. Multi-conductor control cable shall be stranded, No. 14 AWG, 600V, cross-linked polyethylene insulated w/PVC jacket. Type "XLP" as manufactured by the Southwire Co., American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. I. Multi-conductor power cable shall be stranded, 600V, cross-linked polyethylene insulated with PVC jacket, Type TC (XLP) with ground as manufactured by Southwire Co., Rockbestos Co., American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. 2.03 1NSTRUMENTATION WIRE A. Process instrumentation wire shall be twisted pair, 600V, cross linked polyethylene insu}ated, aluminum tape shielded, polyvinyl chloride jacketed type "XLP" as manufactured by the Rockbestos Co., or equal. B. Cable for 4-20 mA instrumentation, potentiometer, RTD and similar analog circuits shall be multi-conductor twisted and shielded. 1. Single pair cable: a. Conductors: 2 No. 16 AWG stranded and twisted b. Insulation: XLP c. Shield: 100 percent tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with UL and manufacturers identifcation 2. Three conductor (triad) cable: 6349-79250 a. Conductors: 3 No. 16 AWG stranded and twisted 16120-2 October 2012 C J • � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • b. Insulation: XLP Shield: 100 percent tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with UL and manufacturers identification Multiple pair cables (where shown on the Drawings): a. Conductar: Multiple 2 No. 16 AWG stranded and twisted b. Insulation: XLP c. Shield: Individual pairs and overall shielded with 100 percent tape and drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with UL manufacturers identification 2.04 COMMUNICATION CABLE A. Ethernet cable shall be designed for use with a high-speed (100 Mbps/Gbps) Ethernet communications network. The twisted pair cable shall have nominal impedance of 100 ohms at 1 Mhz and a maximum attenuation of 10 dB per 1000 feet at 1 Mhz. The twisted pair cable shall be plenum rated and shall have a minimum of four 24 AWG solid copper conductor pairs. All RJ-45 terminations on the twisted pair cable shall be done as specified by the manufacrizrer. • Terminations shall provide strain relief on the cable jacket. Strain relief on the wire and/or wire insulation shall not be acceptable. Cable and connections shall meet or exceed Category 5 ratings and upon completion of the network installation, the system shall be tested to Category 5 standards. Category Se cable shall be as manufactured by Belden, or equal. B. Profibus PA cable shall be 300V, 1 pair 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper, 100% foil shield, color blue and orange, 100 ohms at 31.25 kHz, PVC jacket, Belden Type 3076F or equal. C. Profibus DP cable shall be 300V, 1 pair 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper, 100% foil shield, color red and green, 150 ohms, PVC jacket, Belden Type 3079E or equal. D. DeviceNet cable shall be Class 1(600V), with 2 pairs; 16 and 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, 100% individually foil shielded, plus a 65% overall tinned copper braid, sunlighdoil-resistant PVC jacket. Power pair (16 AWG) color blue and white. Data pair (18 AWG) color red and black. ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) Cable V, Belden Type 7896A or equal. E. Telephone cable shall be No. 22 AWG, 4-pairs, solid copper PVC insulation and PVC jacket. UL rated Type CMR as manufactured by American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. 2.05 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES A. Termination lugs shall be tin plated copper, long barrel compression type (hydraulically pressed) for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger. Use one hole lug for sizes No. S AWG to No. 4/0 AWG. Use two hole lug for sizes 250 kcmil and larger. • 6349-79250 16120-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved B. Termination lugs for No. 10 AWG and smaller wire shall be locking spade type with insulated • sleeve. Lugs shall be as manufactured by the Thomas and Betts Co., or equal. C. Connectors (wirenuts) for pigtail splicing all wires and cables No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solderless pressure type. Connectors used at all exterior, wet or corrosive locations shall be pre-filled with silicone based sealant. Connectors shall be as manufactured by Ideal Industries, or equal. D. Termination connectors for control conductors shall be of the expanded vinyl insulated locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by Ideal Industries; 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equaL E. Termination connectors for instrumentation cables shall be of the expanded vinyl insulated locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equal. F. All splices below grade shall be made waterproof using "Scotch-Cast", or equal. G. Splices in feeder circuit conductors shall be made with compression connectors. H. Splices in branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be made with split bolt connectors. 2.06 MOTOR CONNECTIONS A. Motor connections shall be ring type mechanical compression terminations installed on the • branch circuit wires and the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and spring washer. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, long barrel tin plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) type connections (Burndy Co., or equal) shall be installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads. All connections shall be insulated with heavy duty heat shrinkable material (Raychem Corp. or equal). 2.07 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Wire and cable markers shall be type written, heat shrinkable type as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co_, Thomas & Betts Co., 3M Co., or equal. B. Wire and cables with diameters exceeding the capacity of the heat shrinkable markers shall be marked with pre-printed, self-adhesive vinyl tapes as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. 2.08 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with UL approved expanding material which equals or exceeds the fire rating of the wall or floor construction such as "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp. or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION 6349-79250 16120-4 October 2012 � �_J OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • A. Uniquely identify all wires, cables and each conductor of multi-conductor cables (except lighting and receptacle wiring) at each end and in all manholes, hand holes and pull boxes with wire and cable markers. B. Use lubrications to facilitate wire pulling. Pulling compound shall be nontoxic, nonflammable, noncombustible and noncorrosive. The material shall be UL listed and compatible with the cable insulation and jacket. C. All wire and cable shall be continuous and without splices between points of connection to equipment terminals, except a splice will be permitted by the Engineer if the length required between the points of connection exceeds the greatest standard shipping length available from the manufacturer specifed or approved by the Engineer as the manufacturer of the particular item or wire and cable. D. Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed in all power and control raceways. E. Seal openings in slabs and walls through which wires and cables pass. F. Steel fish tapes and/or steel pulling cables shall not be used in PVC conduit runs or in raceways that terminate into energized enclosures. G. Pull cable from direction that requires the least tension. Feed cable into raceway with zero tension and without cable crossover at raceway entrance. Use a feed-in tube and sheave designed for cable installation. Use sheaves with radii that exceed the cable manufacturer's • recommended minimum bending radius. Use a dynamometer and constant velocity power pulling. Velocity should not be less than I S-ft./min or more than 50-ft/min. Do not exceed the cable manufacturer's maximum recommended tension. • H. If cable cannot be terminated immediately after installation, install heat shrinkable end caps. I. Fireproof exposed cables in manholes, vaults, pullboxes, switchgear and other areas not protected by conduit where medium voltage cables are present. Use fire-proofng tape and glass tape in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fire-proofing tape shall be with one half-lapped layer of Scotch Brand 77 Electric Arc and Fireproofing Tape by 3M Corp. or equal. Tape shaIl be secured with a two-layer band of Scotch Brand 69 Glass Electrical Tape by 3M Corp. or equal over the last wrap. Uniquely identify all cable at supply and receiving ends and in all manholes, handholes or pullboxes. Use embossed brass tags and tywrap fasteners. K. Hydraulically or manually operated cable benders shall not be used unless approved in writing by the Engineer. L. To protect wires prior to installation of devices, coil slack wires at outlets, inside the outlet boxes and seal the outlet opening with cardboard or ftber plug to prevent entrance of concrete, plaster or paint_ M. When solid conductors are to be connected directly to wiring devices without the use of lugs, the wires shall be formed into a loop to fit around the terminal screw. Under no circumstance 6349-79250 16120-5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 3.02 3.03 3.04 shall the wire be wrapped completely around the screw with one conductor over-lapping the other. iNSTRUMENTATION AND COMMUNICATION CABLE INSTALLATION A. Irtstrumentation cables shall be installed in raceways as specified. All circuits shall be installed as twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required. B. Install shielded instrumentation wire from terminal to terminal with no splicing at any intermediate point. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial, data highway, UO, fiber optic and communications cables shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels. C. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junctions, and all circuits shall be identified at such junctions. D. Ground shielding on instrumentation wire at one end only as recommended by the instrument manufacturer and isolated at all other locations. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter-connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Where individual circuit shielding is required, each shield circuit shall be provided with its own terminal block. E. Install shielded instrumentation wire in conduit and pull boxes that contain only shielded instrumentation wire. Instrumentation cables shall be separated from all other (i.e. power, control, etc.) cables in manholes. F. All shielded cable terminations at each end shall be provided with heat shrinkable tubing placed over the exposed shield and conductors. The tubing shall extend 1-in minimum over the jacket end and extend'/z-in minimum from the jacket end over the exposed conductors. TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, no splices may be made in the cables without prior written approval of the Engineer. Where splicing is approved, then splicing material shall be approved by the Engineer and cable manufacturer. Splicing materials for a11600 volt splices shall be made with long barrel tin plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) connectors and insulated with heavy wall heat shrinkable tubing. The conductivity of all completed connections shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor. The insulation resistance of all completed connections of insutated conductors shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor. B. Terminations and splices shall be made in accessible outlets, splice boxes or junction boxes usmg appropriate connectors. C. Termination lugs shall only contain one wire each, unless specifically allowed by the lug manufacturer. WIltE COLOR CODE 6349-79250 16120-6 October 2012 • • • • • O 2012 CDM Smith All }tishts Reserved 3.05 A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, manholes and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination. B. The following coding shall be used: Svstem 240/120 Volts Single-Phase, 3 Wire 208Y/] 20, Volts 3 Phase, 4 Wire 240/120 Volts 3 Phase, 4 Wire delta, center tap ground on phase coil A-C 480Y/277 Volts 3 Phase, 4 Wire Control (Individual Conductors) Wire Color Neutral White Line 1 Black Line 2 Red Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C White Black Red Blue Neutral White Phase A Black Phase B (High) Orange Phase C Blue Neutral Gray Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow AC Red DC Blue C. Neutral or ground wires that terminate in a panelboard and require color tape shall have the color tape extend at least 6-in from the termination point. FIELD TESTiNG A. Test all 600V wire insulation with a megohm meter after installation and prior to termination. Make tests at not less than 1000 volts DC. Submit a written test report of the results to the Engineer. Notify Engineer in writing 48 hours prior to testing. B. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standard ATS) unless otherwise modified by this Section. Minimum wire insulation resistance shall not be less than 250 Megohms. C. All service conductors shall be tested as in paragraph A above with the Engineer present. • 6349-79250 16120-7 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved END OF SECTION • • • 6349-79250 16120-8 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � SECTION 16150 MOTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All motors shall be furnished as called for in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be in conformance with the requirements of this section. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Routine tests shall be performed on representative motors, and shall include the information described on NEMA MG 1-12.54 "Report of Test Form for Routine Tests on Induction Motors". Efficiency shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Publication No. 112, Method B. Power factor shall be measured on representative motors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal of motor data for acceptance shall include complete nameplate data and test • characteristics in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1-12.54 "Report of Test Form for Routine Tests on Induction Motors" and, in addition, the following for motors typical of the units furnished: 1. Efficiency at 'h, 3/4 and full load 2. Power factor at '/z, 3/a and full load 3. Motor outline, dimensions and weight 4. Descriptive bulletins, including full description of insulation system 5. Bearing design data 6. Special features (i.e_, space heaters, temperature detectors, etc.) 7. Power factor correction capacitor rating and type. B. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01300, certifed dimension prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks of the date they receive the order. • C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall be 6349-79250 16150 - 1 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved guaranteed against defects of workmanship, materials and proper installation for a • period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. All such eyuipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes, shall be replaced in the machines by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. D. Provide eyuipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.O1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors '/z through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower and above shall be rated 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz, and motors below '/z horsepower shall be rated 115/230 volt, 1 � phase, 60 Hertz A.C. B. All motors used with variable freyuency drives shall be rated for inverter duty and shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1-2003, Section IV, Part 31. C. All motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA standards. Motors shall be of the type and quality described by this Section and other Divisions of the Specifications, and/or as shown on the Drawings, fully capable of performing in accordance with Manufacturer's nameplate rating, and free from defective material and workmanship. 2.02 RATINGS A. All motors shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity and over the operational range. Unless otherwise noted, motors driving pumps, blowers, etc. shall not be overloaded at any head or discharge condition. The motor shall not be required to deliver more than its rated nameplate horsepower, at the 1.0 service factor, under any condition of inechanical or hydraulic loading (i.e. although a 1.15 service factor is required, it may not be used under any condition). B. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service throughout its 6349-79250 16150 - 2 October 2012 • �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • acceleration range at a voltage 10 percent below nameplate rating. Where shown on the Electrical Drawings to be operated on a reduced voltage starter, the motor shall develop ample torque under the conditions imposed by the reduced voltage starting method. C. All motors shall be continuous time rated suitable for operation in a 40 degrees C ambient unless noted otherwise. D. Speciiic motor data such as Hp, rpm, etc., is specified under the detailed specification for the eyuipment with which the motor is supplied. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. The motor manufacturer's nameplates shall be engraved or embossed on stainless steel and fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all of the items of information enumerated in NEMA Standard MGl-10.38 orMGl-20.60, as applicable. 2.04 CONDENSATION HEATERS A. Condensation heaters, where specified herein or under the detailed mechanical specifications shall be of the cartridge or flexible wrap around type installed within the • motor enclosure adjacent to core iron. Heaters shall be rated for 120 Volt, single phase with wattage as required. The heater wattage and voltage shall be embossed on the motor nameplate. 2.05 WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTORS A. Winding temperature detectors, unless specified otherwise herein shall be a factory installed, embedded, bi-metallic switch type with leads terminating in the main conduit box. This device shall protect the motor against damage from overheating caused by single phasing, overload, high ambient temperature, abnormal voltage, locked rotor, frequent starts or ventilation failure. The switch shall have normally open contacts. Not less than three detectors shall be furnished with each motor. B. All motors operating with variable frequency drives shall be eyuipped with winding temperature detectors. 2.06 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS A. The operating power factor of the motors shall range from 93 to 95 percent at full load and 95 to 98 percent when partially loaded. The capacitor cunent shall not exceed the motor no-load magnetizing current. • B. Capacitors shall be oil insulated or dry type (600 volt capacitors shall be of the dry 6349-79250 16150 - 3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved type) with three high interrupting capacity current limiting integral fuse protection, blown fuse indicators, and discharge resistor and shall be hermetically sealed in steel enclosures. The insulating medium shall be nonflammable and meet the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Standards. Covers shall be gasketed, bolt-on type. Capacitors shall be UL listed and NEMA rated and tested. Oil insulated type shall be non-PCB dielectric, biodegradable and low toxicity. C. Units shall be designed to provide power factor correction in applications subject to the effects of harmonics as reyuired for each installation. Where required, units shall consist of power factor correction capacitors as specified above and equipped with series inductors. The units shall be tuned to just below the Sth harmonic freyuency on systems with predominately 3 Phase loads. Inductors shall have low flux density and distributed gaps, copper windings, brazed connections, winding varnish impregnated and baked, Class 220 degrees C insulation with 80 degrees C rise. 2.07 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS A. Motors 50 horsepower and larger shall have a 120-volt space heater for moisture control. B. Unless specifcally noted in other Sections of these Specifications, all motors shall have minimum efficiencies as listed below: Horsepower 1-2 3-5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40-50 60-100 Over 100 NEMA Nominal Efficienc �,�% 84.0 88.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 92.0 92.2 92.4 94.0 94.5 95.0 C. All motors 100 horsepower and larger shall be furnished with power factor correction capacitors located in the motor starter enclosure. The motor manufacturer shall provide suitable capacitors to the motor control center manufacturer unless otherwise noted. Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided only for the high-speed winding on a 2-speed motor. Power factor correction capacitors shalt not be required for motors operating on variable freyuency drives. 6349-79250 16150 - 4 October 2012 • • • u � �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2.08 CONSTRUCTION A. General: All drip-proof and weather protected Type I and Type II motors shall have epoxy encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with an upgraded insulation by additional dips and bakes to increase moisture resistance and shall not be encapsulated. Motors for outdoor service shall have vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) epoxy insulation for moisture resistance. Two speed motors shall be of the two winding type. 2. Squirrel-cage rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations adeyuately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall be cast aluminum or bar-type construction with brazed end rings. All motors shall be of the premium efficiency and high power factor type. All motors shall be the corrosion resistant type conforming to motors designated as "Corro-Duty" by U.S. Motors or equal. 4. Vertical motors shall be hollow or solid shaft as required by the equipment furnished under other Sections of these Specifications. 5. Totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) motors shall include the same ratings and accessories as specified for TEFC motors. Explosion-proof motors shall be UL listed and FM approved for Class 1, Division 1 hazardous areas. B. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motors: 1. Motors shall be of the squirrel-cage induction type. Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal thrust and high thrust types shall be furnished as called for on the Drawings and as specified in other Sections of these specifications. Motors shall be of the type and yuality described by these Specifications, and/or as shown on the schedule on the Drawings, fully capable of performing in accordance with Manufacturer's nameplate rating, and free from defective material and workmanship. 2. Motors shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), low starting current (not to exceed 650 percent full load current), and low slip. 4. • 5. 6349-79250 Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled con- struction with a 1.15 service factor at the Class B Temperature-Rise. The output shaft shall be suitable for direct connection or belt drive as required. Motors shall have a Class F non-hygroscopic insulation system but shall be 16150 - 5 October 2012 OO 20 ] 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved limited to Class B Temperature-Rise, at 1.15 service factor. 6. All motars shall have a final coating of chemical resistant corrosion and fungus protective epoxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over red primer over all interior and exterior surfaces. Stator bore and rotor of all motors shall be epoxy coated. 7. All fittings, bolts, nuts, and screws shall be plated to resist corrosion. Bolts and nuts shall have hex heads. 8. All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibiter for easy disassembly. 9. Conduit box shall be split from top to bottom and shall be capable of being rotated to four 90 degree positions. Synthetic rubber-like gaskets shall be provided between the frame and the conduit box and sealed with a non-wicking, non- hygroscopic insulating material. A frame mounted pad with drilled and tapped hole, not less than 1/4-inch diameter, shall be provided inside the conduit box for motor frame grounding. All motor conduit boxes shall be provided with the correct number of conduit openings sized as indicated on the drawings. Boxes shall be suitably sized for conductor bending and terminations. 10. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain hole and epoxy coated motor windings to protect against moisture. 11. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "O" type bolts shall be supplied on all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures shall have stainless steel screens. Motors shall be protected for corrosion, fungus and insects. 12. Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by U.S. Motors, ABBBaldor/Reliance or Emerson/GE. 13. Fractional Horsepower: a. Fractional horsepower motors shall be rigid, welded-steel, designed to maintain accurate alignment of motor components and provide adequate protection. End shields shall be cast iron or heavy fabricated steel. Windings shall be of varnish-insulated wire with slot insulation of polyester film, baked-on bonding treatment to make the stator winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture, electrical stresses and other hazards. b. Motor shaft shall be made from high-grade, cold-rolled shaft steel with drive- shaft extensions carefully machined to standard NEMA dimensions for the particular drive connection. c. For light to moderate loading, bearings shall be yuiet all-angle sleeve type with large oil reservoir that prevents leakage and permits motor operation in 6349-79250 16150 - 6 October 2012 • • • LJ • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved any position. d. For heavy loading, bearings shall be carefully selected precision ball bearings with extra yuality, long-life grease, and large reservoir providing 10 years normal operation without re-lubrication. 14. Integral Horsepower: Motor frames and end shields shall be cast iron or heavy fabricated steel of such design and proportions as to hold all motor components rigidly in proper position and provide adeyuate protection for the type of enclosure employed. b. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations. c. The shaft shall be made of high-grade machine steel or steel forging of size and design adequate to withstand the load stresses normally encountered in motors of the particular rating. Bearing journals shall be ground and polished. d. Rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations adequately fastened together, and to the shaft. Rotor squirrel-cage windings may be cast- aluminum or bar-type construction with brazed end rings. e. Motors shall be equipped with vacuum-degassed anti-friction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity. f. Bearings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary upthrust of 30 percent downthrust. All bearings shall have a minimum BlO life rating of 5 years in accordance with AFBMA life and thrust values. g. Vertical hollow-shaft motors will have non-reverse ratchets to prevent backspin. Non-reverse ratchets shall be suitable for duty with variable frequency drives. C. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors: 6349-79250 Single phase motors shall be split-phase and capacitor-start induction types rated for continuous horsepower at the rpm indicated on the drawings or as required by the specifications. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase, 16150 - 7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 2. 3. 4. open drip-proof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as indicated on the drawings or as required by the specifications, with temperature rise in accordance with NEMA Standards for Class B insulation. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for severe-duty. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a corrosion protective plating. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for polyphase fractional horsepower motors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system by means of a short section 18-inch minimum of liquid tight conduit unless otherwise indicated. For all motor connections of No. 4 AWG or larger wire size, the Contractor shall install a grounding conductor in the conduit and terminate at main conduit box and at the motor control center or variable frequency drive with approved ground lugs and clamps. B. Low Voltage: For wire sizes #8 AWG and larger, long barrel tin-plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) type connections (Burndy Co., or equal) shall be installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads. Bolted connections shall utilize products which are rated for vibration applications (bolt, nut and spring washer). All connections shall be insulated with heavy duty heat shrinkable material (Raychem Corp. or equal). 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS A. The following tests shall be performed on all motors after installation but before putting motors into service. The Contractor shall rnegger (1000 volts DC) each motor winding before energiz- ing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low, shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. The following table gives minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various temperatures and for various voltages with readings being taken after one (1) minute of inegger test run. Windin� Temperature F C 37 3.9 6349-79250 De rees Volta�e 115 V. 230 V. 460V. 60 108 210 16150 - 8 October 2012 � • r� �J C� • • OO 2012 CDM Smith Ali Ft,ghts Reserved 50 68 86 l04 122 140 l0 20 30 45 50 60 32 13 5.6 2.4 1 0.50 60 26 11 4.5 2 0.85 120 50 21 8.8 3.7 1.6 2. The Contractor shall check all motors for correct clearances and alignment and for correct lubrication, and shali lubricate if required in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections if necessary. The correction for wrong rotational direction shall be made at the motor. 3. All tests shall meet the requirements of, but not be limited to, IEEE 43, 85 and 112. Efficiency tests for IEEE 112 shall include Method B. 4. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a typed list of all motors 1 HP and larger listing the no load motor current and voltage and the full load current and voltage. Any phase current imbalance greater than 10% shall be reported to the Engineer. B. The following tests shall apply to the medium voltage motors: 1. All motors shall be given the standard short commercial test prior to shipment. This shall consist of no load current, check current balance, winding resistance, air gap measurement, high potential tests, and bearing inspection. Six (6) copies of the certified short commercial test shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment. C. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standard ATS-2007). 6349-79250 END OF SECTION 16150 - 9 October 2012 � • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Kights Reserved SECTION 16191 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous equipment as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. This Section provides the requirements for miscellaneous equipment typically employed in a facility, however, not all components specified in this Section are necessarily utilized on this project. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, detailed catalog information or drawings with sufficient detail to determine compliance with the specifications including describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified. REFERENCESTANDARDS A. Equipment enclosures shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed, as specified in Section 16000. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Disconnect Switches 1. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle unless otherwise noted. Enclosure type shall be as noted on the drawings. All current carrying parts shall be copper. 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 4. Lugs shall be copper. 5. All exterior hardware shall be stainIess steel. 6. Switches shall be as manufactured by Cutler Haminer, Square D Company or General Electric Company. B. Fused Disconnect Switches 6349-79520 16191-1 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. Fused disconnect switches shall be NEMA 4X heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle unless otherwise noted. All current carrying parts shall be copper. 2. Fuses shall be rejection type, 600 Volts, 200,000 A.I.C., dual element, time delay, Bussman Fusetron, Class RK-5 or equal. 3. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 4. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 5. Lugs shall be copper. 6. All exterior hardware shall be stainless steel. 7. Switches shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, Square D Company or General Electric Company. C. Manual Motor Starters 1. Manual starters shall be furnished and installed for alt typed of single-phase motors. Manual starters shall be non-reversing, reversing or two speed type as required. NEMA • sizes shall be as required for the actual horsepower of the motor furnished. Manual starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Built-in control stations shall be furnished as required or as shown on the Drawings. 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 4. Manual motor starters shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, Square D Company or General Electric Company. D. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 Pole, single or 3 Phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings. 2. Two speed starters shall be for single or two winding motors as required by the actual motor furnished or as shown on the Drawings. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil, and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as required or as shown on the Drawings_ A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the Drawings. • 6349-79520 16191-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • Overload relays shall be non-adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required. Transformer secondaries shall be equipped with time-delay fuses. 6. Built-in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished as specified herein where shown on the Drawings. 7. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. NEMA Type 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 9. Magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, Square D Company or General Electric Company. E. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be a combination motor circuit protector and contactor, 2 or 3 Pole, single or 3 Phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings. Motor circuit protectors shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip only. They shall be specifically designed for use with magnetic motor starters. Motar circuit protectors shall be current limiting type, with � additional current limiters if required. Combination motor starters shall be fully rated for 65,000 Amps RMS syinmetrical. 2. Two speed starters shall be for single or two winding motors as required by the actual motor furnished or as shown on the Drawings. 3. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil, and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as required or as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the Drawings. 4. Overload relays shall be non-adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. 5. Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required. Transformer secondaries shall be equipped with time-delay fuses. 6. Built-in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished as specified herein where shown on the Drawings. 7. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 8. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, Square D Company or General Electric Company. F. Control Stations and Indicators • 6349-79520 16191-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Control stations shall be heavy-duty type, with fult size (30.Smm) NEMA 4X or 7 operators, indicators, etc.. 2. Indicators shall be full voltage and push-to-test type. Indicators located indoors shall be LED type and indicators located outdoors shall be incandescent lamp type. 3. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel. 4. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 5. Control stations shall be Square D Company Class 9001, similar by Cutler Hammer or General Electric Company. G. General Purpose Dry Type Transformers 1. Transformers shall be dry type, two-winding with kVA and voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings. 2. Four full capacity taps shall be furnished, two 2-1/2 percent above and four 2-1/2 percent below rated primary voltage. 3. Maximum temperature rise shall be 80 degrees C. Windings shall be copper. 4. Transformers shall be built in accordance with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST-20. 5. Transformers shall be provided in NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as required by Section 16000. Where a NEMA 4X and/or stainless steel enclosure is required, the transformer shall be of the TENV type. 6. Transformers shall be furnished with hot dipped galvanized mounting hardware. Where a NEMA 4X and/or stainless steel enclosure is required, the hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Transformers shall be manufactured by the Square D Company or equal. H. Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 1 � 3 4 SPDs shall be UL 1449, 3rd Edition listed. Each protection device shall have a capacitive filtering system connected in each Line to Neutral (L-�N)(Wye) mode or Line to Line (L�L)(Delta) mode to provide EMURFI noise attenuation. Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (L�N)(Wye), Line to Ground (L—>G)(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (L�L)(Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N-�G)(Wye) protection. SPD shall contain a technology that utilizes multiple thermally protected metal oxide varistors (MOV) per mode. 6349-79520 16191-4 October 2012 • • r � �_J �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • All primary transient paths shall utilize copper wire, aluminum bus bar and lugs of equivalent capacity to provide equal impedance interconnection between phases. Noplug-in module or components shall be used in surge carrying paths. Service Entrance and MCC SPDs shall be: a. SPD shall be a multi-stage parallel protector. Refer to one-line diagram and panelboard schedule to confirm voltages. SPD's minimum surge current capacity shall be 400 kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 200 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). b. SPD shall be modular design with field replaceable modules per phase. Each protection module shall have a visual indicator that signifies that the protection circuitry is powered. The unit shall not be taken off line to verify integrity of system. Redundant status indicators shall be mounted on the front of the door that monitors the system protection circuitry. c. SPD shall be labeled as minimum Type 2. Every component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal thermal protection. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do not meet the intent of this specification. d. SPD shall provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts, digital surge • counter and audible alarm with alarm disable switch. Equipment shall utilize a NEMA 12 enclosure. e. SPD shall be provided with an integral disconnect switch. f. SPDs shall be as manufactured by LEA International Inc. — PV Series, Current Technology - SL2 Series, Liebert — SI Series or approved equal. 7. Panelboard SPDs shall be: a. SPD shall be a multi-stage non-parallel protector. Please see one-line diagram and panelboard schedule to confirm voltages. SPD's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200 kA per phase (L-N plus L-) and 100 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). b. SPD shall be non-modular design. SPD shalt provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts and audible alarm. SPD shall utilize a NEMA 1 enclosure or better. c. SPDs shall be as manufactured by LEA International Inc — SP Series, Current Technology — CGP Series, Liebert ACV-III Series, or approved equaL I. Wireway 1. NEMA 1 wireway shall be gasketed painted steel with stainless steel screw covers. • 2. NEMA 4X wireway shall be Type 316 stainless steel with gasketed clamped covers. 6349-79520 16191-5 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3. NEMA 1 wireway shall be Square-Duct as manufactured by the Square D Co.; NEMA 4X shall be Bulletin F-22 as manufactured by the Hoffinan Engineering Co. or equal. J. Control Relays Control relays shall be heavy duty machine tool type, with 10 Amp, 300 Volt convertible contacts. Number of contacts and coil voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. General use relays shall be Square D Company, Class 8501 Type X, similar by; Cutler-Hammer, Allen-Bradley Company or General Electric Company. Latching relays shall be Square D Company, Class 8501 Type X, similar by; Cutler-Hammer, Allen-Bradley Company or General Electric Company. 2. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic, 600 Volt, 20 Amp contacts, with calibrated knob operated adjustment and numerical time dial. On delay and off delay types and timing ranges shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required for proper operation of the actual equipment furnished. Relays shall be Agastat Model 7012 or 7022 or equal. K. Polyethylene Warning Tape Warning tape shall be 5 mil red polyethylene film, 6-in minimum width. Tape shall be capable of being detected or located by either conductive ar inductive location techniques. 2. Warning tape shall be Mutual Industries Part No. 17774 or equal. • L. Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be 600 Volt, channel mounted, with tubular screw and pressure plate. 2. Terminal blocks shall be Bulletin 1492-CA1 as manufactured by the Allen-Bradley Co. or equal. M. JIC Boxes for GF Receptacles JIC boxes shall be 6-inches x 6-inches x 4-inches aluminum continuous hinge clamp cover boxes, Hoffman Catalog Number A-606 CHAL with Type L23 stainless steel fast operating JIC clamp, or equal. 2. Install 1-1/2-inch bushings in bottom of box for cord and plug to pass through. N. Corrosion Inhibitors 1. All equipment enclosures, terminal boxes, etc, located in a NEMA 4X rated area (where shown on the Drawings) that contains electrical or electronic equipment or terminal strips shall be furnished with an internally mounted, chemically treated corrosion inhibitor pad. 2. The corrosion inhibitor pads shali be as manufactured by Hoffinan Engineering Co.; 3M or equal. • 6349-79520 16191-6 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • O. Equipment Mounting Stands Equipment mounting stands shall be custom fabricated from 1/4-in Type 316 stainless steel plate and 3-in Type 316 stainless steel channel, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. All hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. P. Terminal Cabinets: 1. Interiors shall be so designed that control relays and terminal blocks can be replaced or added without disturbing adjacent units. Each cabinet shall be furnished with a minimum of 50 spare terminals. 2. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with control relays, terminal blocks, insulating barriers, etc. All 120 volt AC and DC terminal blocks shall be isolated from each other by insulating barriers or separate enclosures. 3. All wiring within the cabinets shall be grouped together in harnesses and secured to the structure. 4. All shielded cables shall terminate in separate cabinets. A third terminal shall be provided • for each twisted shielded pair and the shield for each connected thereto, unless otherwise noted on manufacturer's shop drawings. 5. Terminal blocks shall be tubular screw type with pressure plates and shall be rated 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be Allen Bradley Catalog Number 1492-CA1 or equal. 6. Boxes shall be made from 14 gauge galvanized steel and shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum of 4 inches of wiring space on all sides and between adjacent terminal blocks. A minimum 2-inch spare shall be provided between control relays. A minimum of four mounting studs shall be provided on each cabinet. Cabinets shall be furnished without knockouts. Holes for raceways shall be drilled on the job. 7. A single or double hinged door shall cover the front of each terminal cabinet. Doors shall have a neoprene gasket, vault type handle, three point catch and lock. Two keys shall be supplied for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. A terminal block schedule shall be provided with each terminal point numbered and identified (typewritten) as to function. 8. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the cabinets shall be properly cleaned and finished with ANSI 61 grey over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating conforming to ANSI A55.1. The fnish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will adhere. 9. Cabinets in wet, damp, corrosive and all outdoor locations shall be NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel. I0. Cabinets shall be Hoffinan Engineering Company with latch kit hardware or be an equal • product. 6349-79520 16191-7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM A. The Manufacturer shall provide a complete and fully functional control system to manually or automatically operate the control system as specified herein and in other applicable sections of these specifications. All Manufacturers recommended safety devices shall be furnished to protect operators. All control devices, unless specified otherwise, shall be mounted in the Control Panel. B. Control Pane] Construction The control panel shall consist of a main circuit breaker, a motor circuit protector (MCP) and magnetic starter for each motor, and a 120-volt control power transformer (fused on primary and secondary). All control components shall be mounted in one common enclosure. Control switches shall provide means to operate each motor manually or automatically. Unless specifcally noted otherwise, the electrical control equipment shall be mounted within a NEMA 4X enclosure, constructed of not less than 14 gauge Type 316 stainless steel. Latches shall be quarter turn quick release type and all hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Where NEMA 3R or l2 enclosures are specifically required, the door shall be provided with a pad-lockable vault type 3-point latch. The enclosure shall be equipped with a door and shall incorporate a removable back panel on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to enclosure with collar studs. Door(s) shall • be interlocked with main circuit breaker and provided with pad-locking provision. 3. All motor branch circuit breakers, motor starters and control relays shall be of highest industrial quality, securely fastened to the removable back panels with screws and lock washers. Back panels shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping screws shall not be used to mount any component. 4. A thermal-magnetic air circuit breaker, Type FH as manufactured by the Square D Company, or equal, shall be furnished for the main breaker. All circuit breakers shall be sealed by the manufacturer after calibration to prevent tampering. Each circuit breaker shall be adequately sized to meet the equipment operating conditions. Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip only, "Mag-Gard" as manufactured by the Square D or equal. An open frame, across-the-line, NEMA-rated magnetic motor/starter, Class 8536 as manufactured by the Square D Company, or equal, shall be furnished for each motor. All motor starters shall be provided with motor circuit protectors and equipped to provide under-voltage release and overload protection on all three phases. Motor starter contacts shall be easily replaceable without removing the motor starter from its mounted position. Overloads shall be of the melting alloy or bi-metallic type, adjustable overloads are not acceptable, Class 10 quick trip overloads shall be provided for all submersible motors. Overload reset push-buttons shall be located on the exterior of the door. Normally open and normally closed auxiliary motor overload contacts wired to terminal blocks shall be provided for each motor starter within the control panel � 6349-79520 16191-8 October 2012 • • � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Ri;;hts Reserved 6. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by Divisions 13, 16 and as shown on the Drawings. 7. All operating control and instruments shall be securely mounted on the exterior door. All controls and instruments shall be clearly labeled to indicate function. All exterior mounted equipment shall be NEMA 4X. 8. Mode selector switches shall be Hand-Off-Auto type to permit override of automatic control and manual actuation of shutdown. Switches shall be NEMA 4X (800H) as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, or equal, providing three (3) switch positions, each of which shall be clearly labeled according to function. 9. Indicator lamps shall be LED (indoors) or Incandescent (outdoors) full voltage type and mounted in NEMA 4X (800H) modules, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley. Lamp modules shall be equipped to operate at 120 volt input. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the control compartment door without removing lamp module from its mounted position. Indicators shall be provided for individual motor run and an indicator for each failure condition. 10. A six (6) digit, non-reset elapsed time meter shalI be connected to each motor starter to indicate the total running time of each motor in "hours" and "tenth of hours". The elapsed time meters shall be Series T50 as manufactured by the ENM Company or equal. 11. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided. Silence and reset pushbuttons shall also be furnished. A common failure reset pushbutton shall be provided to reset the alarm conditions (reset shall occur only if fault condition has been cleared). The alarm horn shall be weatherproof rated with gasket (Federal Signal Corporation, Cat. #350 or equal). The alarm beacon shall be NEMA 4X rated, red lense and solid state flasher (Ingam Products Inc. LRX-40). 12. The control panel shall operate on a power supply of 480 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz unless otherwise noted. 13. The control diagrams and overload tables shall be laminated to the inside of the door except where door space is limited the laminated documents shall be in the print storage pocket. 14. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. Pocket shall be of sufficient size as required to hold all prints necessary to service the equipment. A set of reduced drawings shall be provided for each panel, fixed to fit in the storage pocket. I 5. A duplex GFCI utility receptacle (circuit breaker protected) providing 120 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase current shall be mounted on the side of the enclosure. 16. The control panel shall include an adjustable time delay relay to prevent any two motors from starting simultaneously. All timing relays shall be solid state, with pin (octal) and bases, relays shall be T-series as manufactured by Diversified Electronics Inc. or equal. 6349-79520 16191-9 October 2012 c0 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 17. Alternators shall be provided to sequence motors, alternatars shall be 008-120-13SP or 009-120-23AP as manufactured by Sta-con, or equaL 18. A phase monitor shall be provided for the control panel, monitors shall be model SUA- 440-ASA as manufactured by Diversified Electronics Inc., or equal. 19. All exterior mounted equipment shall be rated NEMA 4X. Hinged NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel viewing windows will be permitted where such equipment is not available with a NEMA 4X rating. 20. The control panel shall be provided with lighfiing and surge protection. Protection devices shall be mounted within the control panel enclosure. Lead lengths shall not be longer than 12 inches from the main circuit breaker. Protection shall be rated for peak current 80kA per phase, non-modular design. Advanced Protection Technologies series TE/XF or equal. Exact model number per voltage and phase power system used. 21. All control panel wiring shall be numbered at both ends with type-written heat shrinkable wire markers. 22. Wiring shall be stranded copper, minimum size #14 AWG (except for shielded instrumentation cable), with 600 volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. 23. The control panel shall be provided with nameplates identifying each component, selector • switches, pilot lights, etc.. Nameplates shall be permanently affixed using an epoxy process (inner door nameplates shall be fastened with stainless steel screws). Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, engraved white letters with a black background. 24. All control panels shall be provided with a master nameplate located on the exterior door. 25. Where applicable provide a nameplate which reads as follows "CAUTION - THIS PANEL CONTAINS A VOLTAGE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE." Letters shall be black on a high visibility yellow background. 26. Corrosion Inhibitor Emitter: Inclusion of an industrial corrosion inhibitor emitter that shall protect internal components of control panel from corrosion for up to one year. One spare emitter shall be provided for each control panel. 27. All control relays shall be have 10 amp rated contacts (minimum), 11 pin with mounting base , 3PDT (minimum), with LED indicators to show relay status, relays shall be manufactured by Potter Brumfield or equal. 28_ Terminal blocks shall be 600 volt heavy duty rated, tubular clamp type. Terminal strips shall be Allen Bradley catalog #1492-CA-1 ar equal. Each terminal shall be individually labeled. 29. The completed control panel assembly shall be U.L. certified. The minimum overall short-circuit withstand rating of the control panel and devices shali be 65,000 Amperes RMS symmetricaI at 480 volts. • 6349-79520 16191-10 October 2012 �� • • �O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rir�hts Reserved 30. Intrinsically safe relays shall be solid state type with 5 amp output contacts, suitable for use on 120 volt, 60 hertz power supply and shall be Factory Mutual approved for devices in Class 1, Division 1 hazardous atmospheres. Intrinsically safe relays shall be Gems Solid State Safe-Pak as manufactured by Gems Sensors, Division of Transamerica Delaval, Inc. or equal. 31. All electronic control equipment (i.e. controllers, isolators, signal boosters, transmitters, PLC's, etc) shall be as specified in Division 13. 32. A copper ground bar with sufficient terminals for all field and panel ground connections shall be provided. 33. All signal wiring entering and exiting the control panel shall be provided with surge protection. Surge protection shall be as specified in Division 13. 34. An 8-inch (minimum) clear space within the enclosure shall be provided horizontally along the entire top and bottom of the control panel. A 4-inch (minimum) clear space within the enclosure shall be provided vertically along the entire sides of the control panel. No devices, terminals, etc. shall be installed within this space, the space shall be provided for field conduit and wiring access only. 35. Incoming phase conductor terminals shall be clearly identified. All wiring within the control panel shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. The following coding shall be used. System Incoming line voltage Less than line voltage (individual conductors) C. Spare Parts Wire Phase conductors Ground Neutral (As Required) AC DC Foreign Color Black Green White Red Blue Yellow 1. The following number of spare parts shall be furnished for each control panel. 6349-79520 a. b. c. 1 Indicator light assembly 2 control relays for each rype furnished 5 fuses far each type/size furnished d. 1 set thermal overloads for each size furnished 16191-11 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved �� e. 1 selector switch for each type furnished f. 1 starter coil for each size furnished PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Stands 1. Field mounted disconnects, pushbutton control stations, etc, shall be mounted on Type 316 stainless steel stands as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Where clearance requirements for stands may not be maintained, the Engineer may direct equipment to be wall-mounted adjacent to the motor or device, but in no case shall the distance from the motor or device to the control station exceed 3-ft. B. Miscellaneous Equipment 1. Perform tests and adjust as required per Section 16000. 2. Provide and install identification as required per Section 16000. 3. All wiring shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. 4. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust • or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner or clean lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16191-12 October 2012 r� L_� �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • SECTION 16370 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART] GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to manufacture, assemble, shop-test, and install variable frequency drives with integral isolation/phase shift transformers, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. All variable frequency drives shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer as specified in Division 1 l. B. These specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details that will vary in accordance with the requirements of the equipment furnished. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation and field testing, of all materials, equipment and appurtenances far the variable frequency drives herein specified. C. The Contractor shall furnish only one manufacturer of variable frequency drives as specified herein. • D. The work shall include the services of factory representatives of the variable frequency drive manufacturers to inspect the final installation, to perform field acceptance tests on the installed equipment and to instruct the regular operating personnel in the care, operation and maintenance of equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete for equipment pad is specified in Division 3. B. Pumps are specified in Division I 1. C. Motors are specified in Section 16150. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications shall be submitted. Submittals shall include at least the following: Copy of this specification confirming compliance with each paragraph. 2. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. Details to also include front elevations with designation of devices and equipment on door(s) and internal to the enclosure. Internal layout of components including dimensions and space requirements. Standard preprinted • 6349-79520 16370-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this contract will not be acceptable. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 4. Data on the characteristics and performance of the variable frequency drives. Data shall include certification that the variable frequency drives are warranted for use with the motors specified in Division 11 and Section 16150. Data shall include: a. Efficiencies and power factor b. Continuous and fault ratings of drive and disconnecting means. Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure. 5. Complete drawings shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture and shall consist of job specific master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics including coordination with other electrical control devices operating in conjunction with the variable frequency drive, and suitable outline drawings with sufficient details for locating conduit stub-ups and field wiring. Due to the complexity of the system, it is imperative the above drawings be clear and carefully prepared to facilitate interconnections with other equipment. Standard preprinted sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this contract will not be acceptable. 6. The total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item. • 7. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment. 8. Harmonic analysis. 9. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. 10. Field test and inspection reports. 11. Operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The variable frequency drives specified hereinafter will be furnished as a complete system as specified in Division 11. The Contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturer of the Division 11 equipment to ensure the installation compatibility of the equipment. B. The variable frequency drives will operate motors as specified in Division 11 and Section 16150. The drives fumished herein under shall be totally compatible with the Motors to be supplied. 6349-79520 I6370-2 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. The variable frequency drives will communicate via Ethernet TCP/IP communications and provide full functionality with Allen Bradley PLCs. D. Additional controls shall be provided as required by Divisions l 1 and l3 and as shown on the drawings. 1.05 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and spare parts must be properly protected against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. Each box ar package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. E. Electrical equipment shall at all times during manufacture, testing, delivery and construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. • Temporary connections shall be provided to operate space heaters and temporary lights required for heat shall be provided to control moisture. If any apparatus has been damaged prior to acceptance the Owner, such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such special tests as directed by the Engineer, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, or shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 1.06 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. One (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided. B. The manufacturer shall furnish a complete list of recommended spare parts necessary for the first five (5) years of operation. C. The following spare parts shall be furnished for each VFD: Three (3) of each type power and control fuse. 2. Six (6) of each type lamp. 3. Two (2) spare lamp lenses of each color and type. 4. Boards • 6349-79520 16370-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 5. Cooling fans D. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of the package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS / MANUFACTURERS A. Variable speed drives shall be of sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated capacity when the driven equipment is operating as specified. B. The manufacturer of this eyuipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. C. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused and shall be the standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. D. The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network (United States), engineering service facilities within 250 miles of the project site to provide start-up service, emergency service, calls, repair work, service contracts, and maintenance and training • of customer personnel. When requested by the Engineer, documentation shall be provided showing compliance, capabilities and references for this requirement. E. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. F. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. G. Approved manufacturer (no substitution is permitted): Yaskawa 1.08 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, eyuipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. B. A factory trained representative of the manufaeturer who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the specified equipment shall provide all the instruction and training as specified herein. This shall be done in conjunction with and coordinated with the O&M instructions to be provided for the equipment, motors and control panels. 6349-79520 16370-4 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • C. The cost of training programs to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the System being supplied. D. The manufacturer shall provide classroom training detailed manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project as per Section 01730. E. The manufacturer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, such materials shall be delivered to Owner. F. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the VFD and maintenance of the system. G. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. H. On-site Training: On-site (field) training shall be conducted at the Owner's site and shall provide detailed hands-on instruction to Owner's personnel covering: system debugging, program modification, trouble-shooting, maintenance procedures, calibration procedures, and system operation. The training shall run at times chosen by the Owner. The training shall be conducted for the time period as specified in Section 16000. . I. The Owner may videotape the training for future training by the Owner. 1.09 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted by the Contractor and the equipment manufacturers for a period of one (1) year Owner acceptance in accordance with Section 01740. B. 'The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. 1.10 HARMONICS STUDY A. Provide an electrical system harmonics study for the electrical distribution system including utility and generator sources. The goal of the study shall be to determine requirements for the variable frequency drives as required to comply with the harmonic distortion levels. B. The harmonics study shall verify compliance with the harmonics and line notching requirements specified herein, with information on the filter system (if necessary) required to • 6349-79520 16370-5 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • achieve the specified levels. The study shall be based on and contain, as a minimum, the following: 1. Minimum utility system short circuit kVA (confirm in writing with utility); with all VFDs operating simultaneously, operating over a 60 to 100 percent speed range. The location point of common coupling shall be the secondary of the utility transformers. Z. Explanation of inethod used to perform the study. 3. Explanation of study results with specific recommendations on filters andlor other measures that will be implemented to meet the specified limits. 4. All calculations and/or computer printouts used to arrive at the recommendations. Individual drive voltage and current harmonic content up to the fiftieth harmonic, and the combined total of all the drive harmonic contents reflected in the system source supply voltage and current as a percent of the 60 hz fundamental under actual load conditions from 0- 60 hz at 10 Hz increments. C. The harmonic distortion on the total installed distribution system for voltage and current distortion levels and line notching shall meet the requirements of IEEE 519-1992. Capacitor-Inductor filter traps that require tuning to the power system are not acceptable. The Variable frequency drive manufacturer shall provide for the design, furnishing and installation of the filtering and appurtenances required to meet the requirements as specified herein. Any • costs associated with provision of and installation, space, wiring, conduit, etc. for fltering equipment shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The manufacturer shall be responsible to provide all data necessary to perform the study. This includes feeder cable sizes, approximate feeder length motor data, switchgear data, utility data, generatar data, existing field data (if required) and any other information relevant to the study. E. The report shall be provided prior to or with the variable frequency drive shop drawings for approval. Submittals for the variable frequency drives submitted prior to or without the study will be considered incomplete and returned to the Contractor unreviewed. F. The variable frequency drive manufacturer is responsible to provide an up-to-date single line diagram with referenced data within the submittal for this study. G. The study shall also address methods the manufacturer is providing to address the problems associated with "dv/dt" and "reflected waves" based on the installation (wiring, conduit, lengths, etc.) as required by the contract documents. The equipment to address any problems shall be included and provided at no additional cost to the Owner. PARTZ PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 6349-79520 16370-6 October 2012 • O 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�hts Reserved • A. The Contractor shall furnish and supervise installation of variable frequency drives as described in this specification and as detailed on the applicable Drawings. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the erection, installation, and start up of the equipment covered by this specification. C. The variable frequency drive shall be comply with the latest applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and the National Electrical Code. D. Variable frequency drives shall operate as specified on existing or new standby generators or normal power sources. E. Variable frequency drives shall be 6 pulse (or greater) for less than 100 HP. If greater than 6 pulse is provided for less than 100 HP, the variable frequency drives shall utilize a phase shift transformer and cancellation technique. Variable frequency drives shall utilize a phase shift transformer and 18 pulse (or greater) cancellation technique for 100 HP and larger. F. VFD Service Conditions 1. Elevation up to 3,300 feet. 2. Ambient temperature up to 40 degrees Celsius. • 3. Relative humidity less than 95 percent, non-condensing. 4. Input voltage variation minus 10 percent to plus 10 percent, maximum 2 percent imbalance. 5. Input frequency variation plus or minus 5 percent. G. VFD Ratings 1. The rated input power shall be 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 2. VFD input shall be rated for 65 kA short circuit. 3. The rated output power shall be 480 Volts, 3 phase, 00 to 60 Hz. 4. Output speed regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent, without encode or tachometer feedback. 5. The power unit rating basis shall be 100% rated current continuous. H. VFD Performance 1. The VFD shall be capable of 110% overcurrent for 1 minute, every 10 minutes for variable torque loads (centrifugal fans, pumps, etc.). 1"he VFD shall be capable of 150% • 6349-79520 16370-7 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • overcurrent for 1 minute, every 10 minutes for constant torque loads (extruders, mixers, reciprocating compressors and pumps, conveyars, etc.). 2. The minimum VFD system efficiency shall be 96% at 100% speed and 100% torque and exceed 90% at 50% speed and load. Variable frequency drive efficiency shall be defined as drive output power at the motor output terminals divided by the input power at the line side of the main circuit breaker. The variable frequency drives shall maintain the line side displacement power factor no less than 0.95 regardless of speed and load. 4. Motor Compatibility: a. The VFD shall be capable of operating a motor with variable torque type loads with a minimum speed range of 0-60 Hz. b. The VFD shall be capable of providing breakaway toryue for the pump. c. VFD system shall provide an output waveform that will allow utilization of standard motors, without need of any special insulation or derating. Motor life expectancy should not be compromised in any way by operation with the VFD system. The system must comply with all elements of the Output Harmonics section of this specification. The VFD must provide motor overload protection in any operating condition. • d. VFD output waveform shall be suitable far operating a standard squirrei cage induction motor without derating or requiring additional service factor. VFD shall inherently protect motar from high voltage dv/dt stress, independent of cable length to motor. The VFD system shall be designed to produce no standing waves or overvoltage conditions based on a maximum cable length of 1,000 feet. Provide an output filter integrat to the VFD if required to meet this requirement. 5. The drive shall be capable of riding through a power outage of up to 5 cycle duration, without causing the drive to shutdown. 6. When the power is restared after a complete power outage, the VFD shall be capable of catching the motor while it is still spinning and restoring it to proper operating speed. The variable frequency drives shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the variable frequency drives shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor in the preset method of starting. 7. The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable AC voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the normal system 30-] 00% speed range. The VFD must be capable of sustained operation at 1/ 10 speed to facilitate checkout and maintenance of the driven eyuipment. As a commissioning and troubleshooting feature, the VFD power circuit shall be capable of operating without a motor connected to the VFD output. 6349-79520 16370-8 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rigl�ts Reserved • 8. Auto-Restart Capability. The VFD system must be capabte of automatically restarting in the event of a momentary loss of power, or a clearing of a drive trip. The VFD system shall provide the user with the choice of automatically restarting or not. The user shall be able to selectively apply this feature to some but not all conditions as appropriate for the specific application. Motor Sound Level. All VFDs must be selected for operation at carrier frequencies at or above 8 kHz without de-rating to provide quiet motor operation. Audible motor noise, while operating under VFD control, shall be limited to 3 dB(A) above the amount of noise generated across the line measured at one meter from the motor. Should the motor generate more audible noise than specified, the VFD manufacturer shall, at no charge, provide sound shielding for the motor such that the installation meets the above performance specification. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. The variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be rated at 480 VAC input with features and options as specified. B. The variable frequency drives shall be rated for the HP, full load current and rpm of the motor. The variable frequency drives shall be designed to provide microprocessor-based continuous speed adjustment of three-phase motors. The variable frequency output voltage shall provide • constant volts-per-Hertz excitation for the motor up to 60 Hertz. The variable frequency drives shall be optimized for an adjustable or selectable carrier frequency to reduce motor noise. The carrier frequency shall be field adjustable and adjusted by the manufacturer's field engineer during start up. C. The variable frequency drives shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. Variable frequency drives utilizing a third power section are not acceptable. Adjustable Voltage and Current Source variable frequency drives are not acceptable. Transistors shall be used in the inverter section. GTOs and SCRs are not acceptable. D. The variable frequency drives shall be current regulated. Variable frequency drives permitting instantaneous overcurrent trips other than an output short circuit are not acceptable. E. Variable frequency drive enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12 freestanding floor-mounted, (100 HP and larger) force ventilated (with replaceable air filters) construction requiring front access only. Variable frequency drives up to 75 HP may be wall mounted type meeting all enclosure rating requirements, etc. specified herein. Variable frequency drives requiring rear access for any maintenance are not acceptable. The cooling air required to dissipate heat generated by the power electronics shall be isolated from all drive electronics. Variable frequency drives using liquid-cooled assemblies in conjunction with associated pumps, piping, and separate remote mounted exchangers are not acceptable. The inverters and converters shall have complete unobstructed front accessibility with easily removable assemblies. The complete enclosure shall maintain a constant height, width and depth. The height for all floor-mounted enclosures shall be 90" high. The enclosures shall include the integral isolation/phase shift transformer. • 6349-79520 16370-9 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved C J F. All variable frequency drive programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front door of the variable frequency drive. Parameters shall include: 1. Programmable maximum and minimum frequency. 2. Programmable acceleration and deceleration times. 3. Selectable carrier frequencies, V/Hz, and critical frequency avoidance lockout. 4. Adjustable electronic overload and torque limits. 5. Multiple attempt restart following utility outage or fault condition. 6. Jog, thread, and preset speeds. 7. Keypad lockout and factory default overrides. 8. Adjustable slip compensation (+!- 5%). G. The variable frequency drives shall be additionally equipped with a digital operator station mounted on the enclosure front door. Control operator devices and indication lights shall include: • 1. Local digital speed control. 2. Hand-Off-Remote control selector switch. 3. LED status lights for each HOR position. 4. Momentary start/stop push buttons utilized with the HOR in "Hand". 5. Local-Remote speed control selector switch. 6. LED status lights for each Local-Remote position. 7. LED status lights for run, fault, alarm, up-to-speed, power on, and drive ready status. 8. Additional controls as required by Division 11 and 13 and as shown on the drawings. Pump Failure will require pump fail timer (as required). Provide for terminations of remote mounted operator control devices and field devices. H. The variable frequency drives shall have the following system interfaces: 1. Inputs: 6349-79520 16370-10 October 2012 • � � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved a. Two (2) isolated process control speed reference interfaces to receive and isolate 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc signals. b. Dedicated terminal blocks for interface with remote operatar and field devices. c. 120 Vac control to allow variable frequency drives to interface with remote contacts and with two or three-wire control. d. Additional inputs as required by Division 11 or 13 and as shown on the drawings. 2. Outputs: a. Two (2) analog output signals 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc for external metering. b. Run relay with an isolated set of form C contacts. c. Dry contact output (N.O.) to indicate protective function trip. d. Dry contact output (N.O.) to indicate common alarm. e. Additional outputs as required by Division 11 or 13 and as shown on the drawings. System Communication a. Where shown on the drawings, control functions to and from the VFD from the SCADA system shall be hardwired using discrete and analog wiring. Analog 4-20 mA signals shall be provided for input speed control and output speed reference. These shall be optically isolated 4-20 mA DC signals that can be sent to a remote location. b. Digital communication to SCADA. Where required, provide a port for interconnection to the SCADA system. Communication protocol shall be Ethernet TCP/IP and shall be fully functional with Allen Bradley PLCs. All necessary cables, connectors, software, hardware, etc. shall be provided as required to interface with the SCADA system. c. Local communication. Provide an RS-232/RS-485 or USB port, door mounted, to provide for direct serial communication with a laptop computer for setup or downloading of VFD parameters, fault diagnostics, or data logs. d. VFD's shall be provided with interfacing hardware, software, etc. as required for control and monitoring from the plant computer system. The manufacturer shall be responsible for complete coordination and compatibility with the plant computer system specified under Division 13 and the VFD's. Proof of coordination with Division 13 shall be included with the VFD subrnittals. J. Monitoring and Displays: • 6349-79520 16370-11 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 1. The variable frequency drives shall have a 21-character vacuum fluorescent display indicating monitored functions as described in the following paragraph. 2. The following parameters shall be monitored: a. Input current (3 phases) b. Input voltage (3 phases) c. Output current (3 phases) d. Output voltage (3 phases) e. Output frequency f. Kilowatts g. Drive temperature h. Time i. Date j. Motor rpm • k. Eight (8) most recent trips/faults K. Protection Functions: 1. The variable frequency drives shall have the following protective features (with indication for a. through i.): a. Speed compensated electronic motor overload current. b. Undervoltage. c. Overfrequency. d. Overtemperature. e. Ground Fault. f. DC bus protection. g. Inrush current limit (adjustable 50 to 150%). h. Input and output phase loss. 6349-79520 16370-12 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � i. Emergency stop pushbutton (Red mushroom head and maintained). j. Current limiting fuses shall be provided on the input side of the VFDs to protect against fault currents up to 200,000 A sym. k. The output side of the VFDs shall be equipped with a current limiting reactor to reduce the dv/dt. 1. Phase insensitive to input power. m. Surge protection from input AC line transients at line side of main circuit breaker. n. Electrical isolation between the power, control and logic circuits. o. Drive to be capable of withstanding output terminal line short or open circuits without component failure. L. Additional Features shall be provided as follows: 1. The variable frequency drives shall be equipped with a flange mounted molded case input circuit breaker (65,000 AIC minimum). The breaker shall be interlocked with the enclosure doors to prevent access to the variable frequency drive unless the breaker is in • the open position and to prevent moving the breaker to the ON position while the unit door is open. The circuit breaker shall have provisions for padlocking in the open position. Provide mechanical interlocks on doors of auxiliary sections of multi-bay or multi-cubical cabinets. Handle height shall not exceed NEC requirements when VFD is located on 4- inch high housekeeping pad. Fused space heaters with thermostat to minimize condensation potential upon drive shutdown. The variable frequency drives shall be variable torque design. Provide constant torque design as required by Division 11. 4. Variable frequency drives shall be capable of unidirectional operation. 5. Variable frequency drives shall have 115 VAC control power for operator devices. 6. Control relays shall be machine tool type, heavy duty type, industrial grade, 600 volt, 10 amp rating, Square D, Class 8501, Type X, Allen Bradley 700 series or equal. 7. A copper ground bus. 8. Separate door-mounted non-resettable elapsed time meter (0-99999.9 hour) in addition to those specified through the door display. • 6349-7952Q 16370-13 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 9. Power unit fan loss protection by automatically switching to a 100% spare cooling fan. Cooling fans shall be on when the variable frequency drive is operating and off when drive is off (fans shall run for a period of time after the variable frequency drive shuts down to dissipate heat and controlled by a thermal switch). If spare cooling fan is not available, provide cooling fan as spare part. 10. All bus and exposed copper shall be tin plated. 11. All floor mounted enclosures shall have complete 18" (minimum) clear space in bottom of the cubical for line, motor and field cable terminations. All wall mounted enclosures shall have complete 12" (minimum) clear space in bottom of the enclosure for line, motor and field cable terminations. 12. A switchable fluorescent light within each floor mounted section of the enclosure. 13. Barriers on terminals that remain energized with the power disconnect OFF. 14. All circuit boards shall be conformal coated to help protect them from hydrogen sulfide gases. M. Identification All wiring shall be numbered at each end with typed sleeve type labels at each termination. Labels shall correspond to the wiring diagrams. Wiring less than 6 inches • may be numbered at only one end. 2. Provide warning signs on terminals that are energized with the power disconnect OFF. Provide 2-inch by 5-inch, nominal, engraved three-layer laminated plastic master nameplates on each VFD fastened with stainless steet screws or rivets. Nameplates shall be black letters with white background core, 3/8-inch high lettering and shall indicate equipment designation as shown on the Drawings. 4. Provide legend plates or 1-inch by 3-inch engraved nameplates with 1/4-inch lettering for identification of pilot devices and meters. 5. Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a. "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT" on all enclosure doors. b. "WARNING - HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK - DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE OPENING OR WORKING ON THIS UNIT". N. The isolation/phase shift transformers shall be provided as follows: Transformers shall be dry type, self ventilated, with insulation for 100 degrees C average temperature rise above 30 degrees C ambient at full continuous operation and shall be 6349-79520 16370-14 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � suitable for site ambient and altitude. Each shall be equipped with 120 volt single phase space heater(s) for moisture control. 2. Transformer windings shall be copper and exposed copper and bussing shall be tin plated. 3. Impedance shall be selected by the drive system designer. 4. Transformer shall be designed for Inverter duty service with three phase, twelve-pulse or greater static power converter connected to the secondary windings. The increased eddy and stray losses due to harmonic currents shall be minimized and shall be included in the specified temperature rise. 5. A high temperature alarm and indication shall be provided. 6. Standards: The transformer shall meet the general requirements of ANSI C57. ] 2.00 plus the applicable requirements of ANSI C57.18 (since it is for rectifier service). Tests shall be per ANSI C57.12.90. Additional dry type transformer construction requirements: a. Noise Level: The maximum sound level shall not be excessive and shall conform to NEMA Standard TR27-5.09. b. Nameplates: Nameplates, warnings, connection diagrams, etc., shall be in accordance with ANSI C57.12.00. • c. Factory Tests: The routine tests listed in ANSI C5712.00 shall be conducted on all transformers. d. Outline Drawings: To include weight, center of gravity, losses at rated load, DC resistance at 25 degrees C. and nameplate data. 7. Transformer shall be integral to VFD enclosure. 2.03 SHOP TESTING A. All printed circuit boards shall be tested individually prior to assembly to minimize any impact faulty boards may have on delivery schedules and system reliability. Each board shall be heat run tested for a minimum of 16 hours at 50 degrees C, or per manufacturer's standard test procedure to minimize infant mortality failures. Boards that exhibit drift during the heat run test shall be replaced with boards that have completed the heat run without drift. B. Power assemblies shall be visually inspected and then HIPOT tested. Complete diagnostics and logic shall be tested. The complete power conversion circuit shall be thoroughly tested at 100% load for a minimum of one hour and then tested for one minute at momentary overload rating, to weed out any potential problems in advance of final system testing. C. All electronic components, i.e. power transistors, diodes, insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT), and micro chips shall be functionally tested to insure reliability. • 6349-79520 16370-15 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved D. The manufacturer shall test the variable frequency drive with a motor load (full rated) prior to shipment for 4 hours. E. The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall provide the actual test data and certification that the tests have been completed prior to shipment to the Engineer for approval. F. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two weeks prior to all factory tests. The Engineer shall have the option to inspect all tests at the factory. G. The manufacturer shall test the variable frequency drive with a motor load (full rated) prior to shipment for 4 hours. All printed circuit boards shall be tested at 50 degrees C for 40 hours. The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall provide the actual test data and certification that the tests have been completed prior to shipment to the Engineer for approval. 2.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING A. Prior to shop painting, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, dry, and free from all mill/scale, rust, grease, dirt, and other foreign matter. B. Variable frequency drive enclosures shall be shop painted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 CONTRACTOR FIELDiNG TESTING A. Make the following minimum test and checks before the Manufacturer's representative is called in for start-up and adjustment. 1. Verify that all connections are completed in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Verify supply voltage and phase sequence are correct. 3. Check mechanical and electrical interlocks for proper operation. 4. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance. 5. Where VFD is installed indoors, verify room air conditioning system is in operation. • • B. The Manufacturer's service technician shalt perform start-up and adjustment of the VFD system. 6349-79520 16370-16 October 2012 • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 3.03 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two weeks prior to all field tests. The Engineer shall have the option to witness all tests in the field. B. Field Tests: Field tests of the drive shall be made by the manufacturer who will furnish all equipment and record all data. The Contractor shall be present during testing. 2. Field tests are the basis of demonstrating equipment proficiency and correct operation. If the drive performance does not meet the Specifications, corrective measures shall be taken or the drive shall be removed and replaced with a drive which satisfies the conditions specified. A seven (7) day 24 hour (actual operation) operating period as specified herein of the drive will be required before acceptance. The Contractor shall provide for seven (7) day 24 hour (minimum) on-site supervision of the field acceptance tests. If a drive fails to perform and must be replaced, the rejected drive shall not be removed until the replacement drive has been delivered to the site. If corrective measures are to be taken, such measures shall be done on-site at such times as convenient to the Owner. The Owner shall be allowed to use any drive supplied immediately following installation and testing whether or not the equipment meets the conditions specified. • 4. Factory representatives of the manufacturer who are competent and experienced and who have complete knowledge in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided to inspect and supervise the installation of the equipment and supervise the initial test run. The first visit will be for checking and inspecting the equipment during installation. The second visit will be to operate and supervise the initial field test. If problems are encountered in operation of the equipment additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. These services are in addition to the services required for training. 5. Training will not be permitted until all equipment is fully operational. In the event that the equipment becomes inoperable under warranty provisions, additional training will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner as follows: Inoperable Period Additional Training 0-2 weeks None 2-6 weeks 2 days More than 6 weeks 5 days 6. All training shall be coordinated and conducted concunently with training to be supplied by the equipment and motor manufacturers. 7. Functional Test: Prior to plant start-up, all equipment described herein shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance by means of a functional test. Submit test procedure for review and approval by the Engineer. • 6349-79520 16370-17 October 2012 OO 201 Z CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 8. Vibration Test: Vibration analyses shaIl be performed on the equipment when operating the variable freyuency drive through its entire speed range. Where loads and drives are separated by intermediate flexible shafting, vibration shall be measured both at the top motor bearing and at two points on the equipment bearing, 90 degrees apart. Performance Testing: Demonstrate system performance by operating the system for a seven (7) day continuous period while varying the application load, as the input conditions allow, to verify system performance. Record all data necessary to document the successful performance of the system. Provide all instruments, equipment, and labor required to accomplish this test. If a unit fails the performance test, the supplier will be allowed to readjust and retest the system. If the unit fails the second test, the unit will be rejected and the Contractor shall furnish a unit that will perform as specified. 10. Check each alarm and detection device for proper operation. 1 I. The drive manufacturer shall provide all necessary personnel and equipment necessary to properly start-up and pass all tests at no additional cost to Owner. 12. A copy of all tests and checks performed in the field complete with meter readings and recordings, where applicable, shall be submitted to the Engineer. 3.04 CLEANING • A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner or clean lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16370-18 October 2012 • u • • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all panelboards as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All panelboard wiring shall include wiring numbers and terminal point numbers cross referenced to shop drawing and subsequent record drawing submittals. SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data, for the following as a minimum: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions and weight. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 2. Bus arrangement drawings. 3. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for circuit breakers, etc. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. 4. Instruction and renewal parts books. 5. Test and inspection reports. 6. Complete bill of materials list. 7. The equipment drawings, summary tables, and bill of materials list shall be computer generated (i.e. no hand-drawn drawings, sketches, lists will be accepted). REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with the Underwriter Laboratories (UL) "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled where procedures exist. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA Standard for Panelboards and the National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. MANUFACTURERS A. 120/240 Volt, single phase, 3 Wire and 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire panelboards shall be 6349-79520 16470-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved Type NQ as manufactured by Square D; Type Pow-R-Line by Cutler Hammer; Type AQ by General Electric. B. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire panelboards shall be; Type NF as manufactured by Square D; Type Pow-R-Line by Cutter Hammer; Type AE by General Electric. C. 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 3 Wire panelboards shall be; I-Line series as manufactured by Square D; Type Pow-R-Line by Cutler Hammer; Type Spectra by General Electric. D. NEMA 3R and 4X panelboards shall be as specified herein, provided in 316 stainless steel enclosures as manufactured by the Hoffman or equal and completely assembled by the panelboard manufacturer. E. Refer to additional reyuirements for manufacturers in Section 16000. Alternate suppliers must be submitted for approval to the Engineer in writing four weeks prior to the original bid date with supporting documentation to confirm all aspects of the specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2A1 GENERAL A. Rating Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage. 2. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be fully rated for the specified circuit breaker fault current interrupting capacity. Series connected short circuit ratings will not be acceptable. 2.02 MATERIALS (NEMA 1) A. Interiors All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti-turn solderless type and all shall be suitable for copper wire of the sizes indicated. 2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. 3. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer. 4. A nameplate shall be provided listing manufacturer's name, panel type and rating. B. Buses Bus bars for the mains shall be of tin-plated copper. Full size tin plated copper neutral bars 6349-79520 16470-2 October 2012 • • • • • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing sha11 be braced throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be tin plated copper. Each panel shall be provided with a ground bus bar, with removable link/jumper between neutral and ground bus. The ground bus shall be sized to the maximum number of circuit breakers that can be installed in the panelboard. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted into them. 4. Tin plated copper equipment ground bars shall be furnished. C. Boxes 1. Recessed or flush mounted boxes shall be made from galvanized code gauge steel having multiple knockouts, unless otherwise noted. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 4-in on all sides. 2. Surface mounted boxes and trims shall have an internal and external finish as specified in Paragraph 2.02.D.4 below. 3. At least four studs for mounting the panelboard interior shall be furnished. 4. All conduit entrances shall be field punched. D. Trim Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims. 2. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48-in in height shall have a vault handle and 3-point catch, complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. Furnish two keys for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished on each door. All trims shall be door-in-door type construction. 3. The trims shall be fabricated from code gauge sheet steel. 4. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard shall be properly cleaned and finished with ANSI Z55.1, No. 49 or 61 light gray paint over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will adhere. 5. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4-in all around. Surface mounted panel trims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be fastened with quarter turn clamps. 6349-79520 16470-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • 2.03 MATERIALS (NEMA 3R and 4X) A. Interiors and Buses l. Interiors and buses shall be as hereinbefore specified for NEMA 1 construction. B. Boxes and Covers 1. Boxes, covers and hardware shall be made from Type 316 stainless steel with natural finish_ 2. Boxes and covers shall have continuous welded seams and shall be hinged (piano type) together and gasketed. 3. Conduit openings shall be tapped. 2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as shown on the Drawings. B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-in type. C. Each circuit breaker used in 120/208 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of • not less than 22,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. D. Each circuit breaker used in 120/240 Volt and 120/208 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. E. Each circuit breaker used in 277/480 Volt and 480 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 65,000 Amps, RMS syirunetrical. F. GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) shall be provided for circuits as required and where indicated the Drawings. GFCI units shall be 1 Pole, 120 Volt, molded case, bolt-on breakers, incorporating a solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. The unit shall be UL listed Class A Group I device (5 milliamp sensitivity, 25 millisecond trip time) and an interrupting capacity of 10,000 Amps, RMS. G. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount boxes for surface mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2-in air space between the box and the wall. B. Connect panelboard branch circuit loads so that the load is distributed as equally as possible • 6349-79520 16470-4 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • between the phase busses. Record normal base load phase voltages and currents for each phase and the total neutral current and submit to the Engineer for review. C. Install markers on the front cover of all panelboards which identify the voltage rating. Markers shall be made of self sticking B-500 vinyl cloth printed with black characters on an Alert Orange background, 2-1/4-in high by 9-in wide, Style A as manufactured by W.H. Brady Co. or equal. D. Install a 1-in by 3-in nominal laminated plastic nameplate with 1/2-in white letters on a black background on each panelboard. Nameplate lettering shall be as shown on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be stainless steel screw mounted. E. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, top of cabinets shall be mounted 6 feet-0-inch above the floor, properly aligned and adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. F. All wiring in panelboards shall be neatly formed, grouped, and identified to provide a neat and orderly appearance. A typewritten directory card identifying all circuits shall be placed in the card holder inside the front cover. G. All panelboards shall be protected from physical damage, water damage, moisture, corrosion, dirt and dust during construction. Any panelboard judged to be unacceptable by the Engineer shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. • H. Standard factory testing shall be performed for the equipment furnished under this section and these tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. Certified copies of these tests shall be provided to the Engineer upon request. • I. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standard ATS-2007) unless otherwise modified by this Section. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner or clean lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16470-5 October 2012 i � OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved SECTION ] 6481 480 VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MODIFICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 A B 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK Furnish, install and test the motor control center modifications shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Motor control center additions shall be sized to include all equipment, spares and spaces shown on the Drawings and shall be connected to existing Square D Model 6 motor control centers. C. Motor control center modifications to the existing motar control centers shall utilize Square D equipment to maintain UL listing. RELATED WORK A. Concrete for equipment pad is included in Division 3. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data, for the following as a minimum: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, shipping splits and metering layouts. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 2. Conduit entrance drawings. 3. Bus arrangement drawings. 4. Unit summary tables showing detailed equipment description and nameplate data for each compartment. 5. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary and compartment wiring diagrams for metering, relay, power and control circuits in accordance with the NEMA wiring class specified. Elementary drawings shall show interwiring and interlocking between units and to remotely mounted devices. Show all feld devices, switches, lights, wire, terminal numbers, etc. and indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. • 7. Instruction and renewal parts books. 6349-79520 16481-1 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 8. Itemized list of spare parts furnished specifically for this project, including quantities, description and part numbers. 9. Test and inspection reports. 10. Complete bill of materials list. 11. The equipment drawings, summary tables, elementary drawings/diagrams, spare parts list and bill of materials list shall be computer generated (i.e. no hand-drawn drawings, sketches, lists will be accepted). 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Motor control centers shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest editions and revisions of NEMA Standard ICS-2 and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard No. UL-845. Equipment shall conform to ANSI C 193 test standards and the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The motor control centers shall be the product of a manufacturer who shall also be the manufacturer of all the circuit breakers, fused switches and motor starters included in the motor control center and who has produced the same type of equipment for a period of at least 15 consecutive years. • B. Motor control centers shall be designed, assembled and tested by the manufacturer of the motor control equipment included in the control center assembly. C. All units and sections shall be UL labeled. Motor control centers containing service entrance equipment shall be UL labeled "Suitable For Use As Service Equipment." 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with Division 01 and Section 16000. B. The manuals shall be bound and shall also include: 1. A list of "as left" settings for all motor circuit protectors and circuit breakers. 2. A table listing cubicle number, load description, installed overload heater size and motor horsepower, Amps, service factor and starting code letter. 1.08 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts in the quantities specified: 1. One dozen each size of cover bolts, cage nuts and door fasteners. • 6349-79520 16481-2 October 2012 • u �O 20] 2 CDM Smith All Rigllts Reserved 2. One can of aerosol touch-up paint. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RATING A. Service: 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, 60 Hz. B. The overall short-circuit withstand and interrupt rating of the equipment and devices shall be not less than 42,000 Amps, RMS syimnetrical at 480 Volts unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Main and feeder circuit protective devices shall be fully rated for the specified short circuit duty. Systems employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. C. The continuous current rating of the main horizontal bus shall be as shown on the Drawings. Vertical busses shall be sized for the structure load and shall have a minimum rating of 300 Amps. Bus bracing shall equal or exceed the specified equipment short circuit rating. D. Motor control centers, including devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Enclosure Enclosure type shall be NEMA Type 12 unless otherwise noted on the drawings. B. Structure Motor control centers shall consist of a series of inetal enclosed, free-standing, dead front vertical sections bolted together to form double wall construction between sections. Individual vertical sections shall be nominally 90-in high, 20-in wide and 20-in deep unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections extending the full width of each shipping split. Top of each section shall have removable plates with lifting angle. Make provisions for field installation of additionat sections to each end and provide full depth cover plates (rodent barriers) at each end of the motor control center channel sills. 2. Provide continuous top and bottom horizontal wireways extending the full width of the line-up, isolated from the harizontal bus. Provide a 4-in wide, full height, vertical wireway in each section, equipped with a hinged door and cable supports. Vertical wireway shall be isolated from the bus and device compartments. Wireways openings shall have rolled edges or protective grommets. 3. Provide individual, flange formed, pan type door with concealed hinges and quarter turn • latches for each device compartment and future space. Doors shall be removable. Door 6349-79520 16481-3 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith Al] Rights Reserved removal shall not be required to withdraw starter units or feeder tap devices. 4. Motor control centers shall be designed for against-the-wall or back-to-back mounting. All wiring, bus joints and other mechanical parts requiring tightening or other maintenance shall be accessible from the front or top. C. Unit Compartments Provide individual compartments for each removable combination starter and feeder tap device unit. Each vertical section shall accommodate a maximum of six compartments. Steel barriers shall isolate the top, bottom and sides of each compartment from adjacent units and wireways. Removable units shall connect to the vertical bus in each section with tin plated, self aligning, pressure type copper plug connectors. Size 5 and larger starter units may be wired directly to the bus. Removable units shall be aligned in the structure on guide rails ar shelves and secured with a cam latch mechanism or racking screw. 2. Provide individual, isolated compartments for all fixed mounted devices including circuit breakers, cable lugs, metering, relaying and control devices. Main and bus tie circuit breakers shall be wired directly to the main horizontal bus. All bus connections shall be fully rated. Provide the following features: a. Provision to padlock removable units in a partially withdrawn TEST position, with the bus stabs disengaged. b. Provision to padlock unit disconnect handles in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. c. Mechanical interlock with bypass to prevent opening unit door with disconnect in the ON position, or moving disconnect to the ON position while the unit door is open. d. Mechanical split-type terminal blocks for disconnecting external control wiring. Auxiliary contact on unit disconnect to isolate control power when fed from an external source. f. Disconnect operating handles and control devices mounted on the removable units. g. All compartments shall have laminated wiring diagrams fastened to the inside of each compartment door. Compartments containing motor starters shall have laminated wiring diagrams and heater tables fastened to the inside of the compartment door. Compartments containing panelboards shall have circuit directories consisting of two ply laminated plastic, with black face and white core fastened to the inside of the compartment door. D. Bus Systems Main horizontal bus: Tin plated copper, bolted joints, accessible from the front of the structure, fully rated throughout the lineup. 6349-79520 16481-4 October 2012 �� U • • . • • OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved E. F_ 2. Vertical section bus: Tin plated copper, full height, totally insulated and isolated by glass polyester barriers with shutters to cover stab openings when units are withdrawn. Provide fishtape barriers to isolate bottom wireways from lower ends of vertical bus. 3. Vertical buses used for a tie circuit breaker or tie feeder lugs shaIi be rated for a continuous capacity equivalent to the main horizontal bus rating. 4. Horizontal ground bus: Provide a 1/4-inch by 2-inch (minimum) tin plated copper uninsulated ground bus in each section equipped with lugs for termination of feeder and branch circuit ground conductors. Connect to ground bus in adjacent sections with splice plates. 5. The buses shall be sized for a maximum current density of 1200 Amps per square inch. Wiring Wiring: Stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class II-S, Type B. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Identification: All wiring shall be numbered with rype written heat shrinkable type wire markers at each termination point, color coding per NEMA Standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow. Signage Each motor control center shall be furnished with a sign marked "DANGER - 480 VOLTS - KEEP OUT". Letters shall not be less than 1-in high, 1/4-in stroke. Signs shall be laminated plastic, engraved white letters with a red background. 2. Compartments with voltages from sources outside of the compartment shall have a sign mounted inside the compartment door marked "CAUTION - THIS iJNIT CONTAINS A VOLTAGE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE". Letters shall be black on a high visibility yellow background. 3. Provide a 2-in by 6-in nominal engraved master nameplate, of two ply laminated plastic, black face, 3/8-in high by 1/8-in stroke white letters, screw fastened to the top wireway of each lineup with stainless steel screws. Include MCC designation and service ratings. 4. Provide 1-in by 3-in nominal engraved unit nameplates of two ply laminated plastic, black face, 3/8-in high by 1/16-in stroke white letters, screw fastened to each door with stainless steel screws. Equipment names shall be as shown on the drawings. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. General 6349-79520 The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the motor driven equipment. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, 16481-5 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment actually supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturers heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. B. Circuit Breakers Circuit breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip type, 600 Volt, 2 or 3 Pole as required, labeled in accordance with UL 489. Provide integral current limiting fuses as required to meet the specified equipment short circuit rating. Provide independently adjustable magnetic trips on 225A frame breakers and larger. C. Combination Starter Units Combination starters shall include a motor circuit protector (MCP) in series with a motor controller and an overload protective device. The MCP shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1000 percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. MCP's shall be labeled in accordance with UL489. Motor starters: 3 Pole, 600 Volt, electrically operated, of the types shown on the Drawings. Provide NEMA sizes as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings. Minimum size shall be NEMA Size 1. Fractional size starters are not acceptable. IEC rated starters shall not be acceptable. Starters shall have 120 Volt encapsulated operating coils; individual control power transformers with primary and secondary fuses and silver cadmium oxide renewable line contacts. Multi-speed and reversing starters shall include two motor rated contactors mechanically and electrically interlocked so that only one device may be energized at any time. 4. Reduced voltage starters: Auto-transformer type with closed circuit transition. Auto-transformers shall be dry type with 50, 65 and 80 percent voltage taps and over-temperature protection. Timing relays shall be pneumatic, adjustable. Relay settings shall be approximately 75 percent of relay range. 5. Wye-delta starters shall be closed circuit transition for use with 6 or 12 lead motors. Contactors: Electrically held, I20 VAC coil operator, suitable for tungsten, ballast, or resistive non-motor loads, with over current protection, control transformer and contact ratings and poles as shown on the Drawings. 7. Motor overload protection: Standard, 3 Pole, thermal bi-metallic or melting alloy type, with push-to-test feature. Electronic or adjustable overload relays will not be acceptable. Overload relays for submersible pump motors shall be ambient compensated, quick trip, Class 10. Overload relays shall be manually reset from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated pushbutton. Provide auxiliary alarm contacts where shown on the Drawings. 8. Auxiliary contacts: Form C, NEMA A600 rating, as required by the control schemes on the Drawings. Provide 1-normally open and 1-normally closed spare contacts on each starter. Additional auxiliary contacts shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings or as required by the control schematic and this Section. 6349-79520 16481-6 October 2012 . C� • O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � 9. Control power transformers: Two winding type, 120 VAC secondary, fused on primary and secondary, secondary grounded. Provide extra capacity as required or where shown on the Drawings. D. Instrumentation and Metering 1. Instrumentation transformers: Indoor, 600 Volt, butyl-rubber molded, metering class designed in accordance with ANSI and NEMA standards. Window type current transformers, with burden capacity as low as 50 VA, may be used where such capacity is sufficient. Current transformer accuracy ratings shall be at least equal to NEMA standard requirements for the particular application. 2. Instrument transducers: Inputs matched to the corresponding metering circuit, 4-20 mADC output, 0.5 percent accuracy, as manufactured by Rochester Instrument Systems or equal. 3. Elapsed time hour meters: Five digit, non-reset type, with 120 Volt synchronous motor. 4. Indicating meters: 4-in square, 250 degree scale, 1 percent accuracy switchboard type. Meter types as shown on the Drawings. 5. Instrument control switches: 600 Volt switchboard type, rated 20 Amps continuous, with black molded phenolic escutcheon plates, white characters, General Electric, Type SB-1 or equal. . 6. Watt-hour meters: Three element, polyphase, drawout type with built-in testing facilities, 15 minute demand attachment, potential indicator lamps, General Electric Type DS, ar Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse Type D4B. • E. Relays and Timers Control relays and timers: Heavy duty machine tool type, with 10 Amps, 600 Volt convertible contacts, General Electric Co., CR120 Series; Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse, Type M-600; Square D, Type X or equal. Provide pneumatic timing or latching attachments as required by the control schemes shown on the Drawings. 2. Panel mounted timers: Provide as noted on the drawings, flush mounted, plug-in type, Eagle Signal, Bulletin 125 Cycle-Flex or equal, with ranges as shown on the Drawings. F. Protective Relays 3 Phase voltage relays: Solid state, Westinghouse Type SVM3 or equal, with the following features: Undervoltage protection, 10 to 20 percent, adjustable. b. Phase Unbalance, 5 to 10 percent, adjustable. c. Phase loss/reversal protection. 6349-79520 16481-7 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved d. Restart timer, 0 to 5 minutes, adjustable. e. LED trip indicators. f. Automatic or manual reset. g. Isolated NO and NC output contacts for alarm and trip. 2. Single phase current sensing relays: Solid state, Allen Brad}ey Bulletin 809S or equal, with the following features: a. Independently adjustable trip setting and differential. b. Adjustable trip time delay. c. Restart timer. d. LED trip indicator. e. Automatic reset. f. Isolated NEMA B600 output contact g. 5 Amp window type current transformer for input. G. Pilot Devices 1. Control operators: Heavy duty, full size, oiltight, with NEMA A600 contact rating. Types and quantities as shown on the Drawings. 2. Indicator lights: Full size, oiltight, low voltage, LED type, with push-to-test feature. Colors and quantities as shown on the Drawings. H. Miscellaneous Units 1. Bus connected surge protection: 600 Volt, 3 Phase lighting protection shall be Advanced Protection Technologies, XTE/5000 HP Series, or equal. 2. Power factor correction capacitors: Installed by the motor control center manufacturer and furnished by the motor manufacturer. 3. General purpose transformers: Open, dry-type, with primary and secondary overcurrent protection in accordance with the NEC, size and voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 16191 for additional requirements. � • 4. Lighting and Distribution Panelboards: Factory wired to transformer, bolt-on branch circuit breakers, size and voltage rating as shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 16470 for additional requirements. 2.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS • 6349-79520 16481-8 October 2012 u � �� • O 20l 2 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved A. All non-current carrying metal parts of the control center assembly shall be cleaned of all weld spatter and other foreign material and given a heat cured, phosphatized chemical pre-treatment to inhibit rust. B. Unpainted non-current carrying parts shall receive a protective zinc plating to prevent corrosion. C. Indoor equipment shall be finish painted with one coat of manufacturers standard electrocoated, heat cured enamel. Color shall be ANSI-49 or 61 light grey. 2.05 SHOP TESTING A. Perform manufacturers standard production testing and inspection in accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards. If requested by the Engineer, the manufacturer shall submit certified copies of the test results and reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Motor control center floor sills shall be bolted directly to the finished floor or equipment pad. Structure shall be leveled and plumb. Anchor bolts shall be '/z-inch (minimum). Provide hardware and shims for installation. B. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. C. In general, all conduit entering or leaving a motor control center shall be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wireway directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated, or shall enter the motor control center from the top. Conduits shall not enter the motor control center from the side unless approved in writing by the Engineer. D. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the motar control centers as detailed on the Drawings with the exception of motor control centers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. E. Where motor control centers are to be installed on existing floor slabs, concrete anchor bolts sized and installed per the requirements of this Section shall be used. F. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. G. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs and shipping braces. Touch-up damaged paint finishes. H_ Make wiring interconnections between shipping splits. I. Install bus splice plates and torque connections. J. No operator devices shall be located over 6 ft. 6 in. above the operating floor. Circuit breaker operating handles Iocated more than 6 ft. 6 in. above the operating floor shall have operating 6349-79520 16481-9 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved arm extensions. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Make the following minimum tests and checks before the manufacturer's representative is called in for testing and adjustment. 1. Megger incoming line terminals and buses, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger voltage. 2. Remove current transformer shunts after completing secondary circuit. Check polarity and continuity of inetering and relaying circuits. 3. Check mechanical interlocks for proper operation. 4. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance. 5. Adjust unit compartment doors. 6. Check control circuit interlocking and continuity with starters in the TEST position. Provide external source of control power for this test. 7. Adjust motor circuit protectors and voltage trip devices to their correct settings. 8. Install overload heaters for actual motor nameplate currents. B. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the Engineer immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, Engineer, Owner and the equipment manufacturers factory service technician. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer prior to placing the equipment back into service. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. The motor control center manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained service technician for start-up and training of the Owner's personnel. The first trip shall be coordinated with the equipment start-up. The second trip shall include any necessary follow-up or punch list work and shall also include instructions to the Owner or to his/her designated personnel. The manufacturer's service technician shall demonstrate and test all operational features of the installed equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner. Submit a certified copy of the field inspection to the Engineer. No equipment shall be energized without the written approval of the Engineer. B. The motor control center manufacturer's factory service technician shall make the following inspection, tests and adjustments: Calibrate and test main and feeder circuit breaker trip devices and protective relays per the approved Coordination Study specified in Section 16000. • rl�I u 2. Inspect the installation for compliance with the manufacturers recommended installation • 6349-79520 16481-10 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • practices and report all deviations to the En ineer. g • r� �_J 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the control center. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16481-11 October2012 n 20l 2 CDM Smith All Ri�{�ts Reserved � SECTION 16502 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PAKT1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete lighming protection system for all new buildings and structures at the City of Clearwater's Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1. The system shall be UL Master Labeled and shall be designed and installed in compliance with provisions of UL 96A and NFPA 780. B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a licensed lightning protective systems engineering company to design and install the lightning protection system and prepare detailed installation drawings and material specifications. These drawings and specifications shall be submitted for review in accordance with Section 01300. C. The lightning protection system shall be checked by a UL field inspector upon completion of the installation. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the correctness of the installation and shall make any and all corrections and additions deemed necessary by the UL inspector. The Contractor shall pay for all costs of the UL inspection and any subsequent re- inspections as required. • D. The lightning protection system for the buildings shall consist of conductors, air terminals and accessories which shall be grounded to the building structural steel or ground grid at regular intervals. The contractor may submit alternate methods of lightning protection with his proposal, provided the alternate provides equal or greater lightning protection than specified. E. The lightning protection system contractor shall coordinate his work with the electrical contractor. F. Each bidder or his authorized representatives shall, before preparing his proposal, visit all area of the existing buildings and structures in which work under this section is to be performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this bidder shall be considered evidence that he or his representative has visited the buildings and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and that he takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 16660 for Grounding Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Owner for review the facility lightning protection system. The submittal data shall contain the following minimum information. • 6349-79520 16502-1 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 1. Plan view of site showing buildings and structures, locations of air terminals, and • associated zone of protection for each air terminal; show all equipment on roofs which require protection. 2. Schematic diagram of lightning protection system showing air terminals, conductors, and other connectors or fittings required for the complete system. Provide details showing bonding reyuirements to structural steel, water piping, etc. 3. Locations of connection points of lightning protection system to facility grounding system. 4. Bill-of-materials 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 96 — Standard for Lightning Protection Components 2. UL 96A — Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 780 — Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid • opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall comply in weight, size, and composition with the requirements of UL and NFPA. B. Grounding materials and methods shall be equal to those specifed under Section 16660. C. The following is a brief description of the various items of material. 1. Air Terminals a. Buildings 75 feet and less in height shall use Class I air terminals. Aluminum air terminals shall be solid aluminum, '/2" minimum diameter. Copper air terminals shall be nickel plated solid copper, 3/8" minimum diameter. Length 18". b. Buildings over 75 feet tall shalt use Class II air terminals. Aluminum air terminals shall be solid aluminum, 5/8" minimum diameter. Copper air terminals shall be nickel plated solid copper, 'h" minimum diameter. Length 18". \ J 6349-79520 16502-2 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . c. Air terminal type shall be copper unless the following applies. Copper lightning protection materials shall not be installed on aluminum roofing, siding or other aluminum surfaces. d. Air terminal base supports shall be specifically designed for the surface where used. All air terminal bases shall be cast bronze with stainless steel bolt pressure cable connectors. Air terminal bases for flat roof areas shall be of the adhesive type. 2. Conductors a. Buildings 75 feet and less in height shall use Class I conductors. Main conductors shall be either aluminum 14 AWG, 28 strand (weighing 105 Ibs. per 1,000 feet) or tinned copper 17 AWG, 32 strand (weighing 220 Ibs. per 1,000 feet). b. Buildings over 75 feet tall shall use Class II conductors. Main conductors shall be either aluminum 13 AWG, 37 strand (weighing 2001bs_ per 1,000 feet) or tinned copper 14 AWG, 28 strand (weighing 380 lbs. per 1,000 feet). c. Conductor type shall be copper unless the following applies. Copper lightning protection materials shall not be installed on aluminum roofing, siding or other aluminum surfaces. Aluminum lightning protection materials shall not be embedded in concrete, masonry, or on or below copper surfaces. 3. Fasteners • a. Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non-corrosive metal and have ample strength to support conductors. 4. Cable Connectors a. All cable connectors shall be per NFPA standards, cast bronze with screw pressure type stainless steel bolts and nuts. For buried and non-accessible connections, exothermic weld process shall be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be installed by a UL listed lightning protection contractor. The lighming protection system shall be installed per approved shop drawings and UL and NFPA recommended practices. B. The lightning protection system engineering company shall provide jobsite assistance and supervision of the installation as required, and shall be present during the UL inspection. C. Lightning Protection System shall be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner. D. All mounting and penetration of roof surface shall be coordinated with roofing contractor to assure maximum roofing guarantee. All through-roof penetration flashings shall be furnished, • 6349-79520 16502-3 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved sealed and guaranteed by a licensed roofing contractor. E. Excavate and backfill as required. Finish grade and restore to original condition. F. All metal bodies within 6 feet of the conductor shall be bonded to the system with approved fittings and conductors. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved bimetallic connections. G. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of project contract drawings. When the project is complete, furnish a complete set of reproducible "As-built" drawings for the Project Record Documents per Section 01720. H. Air Terminals: Air terminals shall be spaced so as not to exceed 20 feet apart around the outside perimeter of the roof or ridge and not over 50 feet apart through the center of flat roof areas. 2. Air terminals shall not project more than 24 inches nor less than 10 inches above the protected object. Conductor Routing: • 1. All main conductors shall maintain a downward or horizontal course, free from "U" or "V" pockets. 2. Conductors shall not form an angle of less than 90 degrees nor less than an 8-inch radius • bend. 3. Metal roofing and siding, eave downspouts or other metal parts subject to displacement will not be permitted as substituted parts of the lightning conductor system. 4. Fasteners shall be spaced not more than 3 feet horizontally or vertically and shall be the same material as the conductor. 5. Bimetallic fittings shall be used for all connections between dissimilar metals. Down Conductors: Down conductors shall follow the most direct patch possible between roof conductors and ground terminals. 2. All buildings, with a ground perimeter less than 250 feet shall have a minimum of two down conductors installed at the diagonally opposed corners of the building. 3. Any building with a ground perimeter in excess of 250 feet shall have down conductors installed so that the distance between the conductors does not exceed 100 feet. • 6349-79520 16502-4 October 2012 OO 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved . 4. Within the building, the down conductors shall be placed in Schedule 80 PVC conduit in the wall. Care shall be taken not to damage the conductors. Connections through roof shall be made with through-roof connectors. 5. Splices will not be permitted on conductors embedded in concrete. 6. Down conductors shall be installed concealed. When conductors cannot be concealed they shall be substantially guarded to prevent mechanical injury or displacement. The guards shall protect the conductor from grade level to a height of at least 6 feet. All conduit used for physical protection of down conductors shall be Schedule 80 PVC. K. Roof Conductors: Roof conductors shall interconnect and provide a two-way path from all air terminals. 2. Roof conductors shall bond together all air terminals and shall be installed exposed except that where connections are made to equipment located under roof. 3. Conductors on perimeters of flat roofs shall form closed loops. 4. Dead end air terminals shall not be permitted. 5. All interconnecting cables from air terminals to roof conductors or metal roof decks shall be similar to roof conductor. • L. Pitch Pockets: • Contractor shall subcontract all pitch pocket work to a qualified roofing contractor. M. Grounding System: 1. Ground rods shall be provided at each down conductor and they shall be installed a minimum of 3 feet away from the foundation walIs. 2. The ground rods shall be in addition to the ground rods provided for the system grounding grid. 3. Connectors used to connect ground rods to the down conductors shall make contact with the ground rods for a distance of 1-1/2" measured parallel to the ground rod. In addition, ground terminals shall be interconnected with the grounding grid, and all grounding mediums. This shall include electric and telephone service grounds and underground metallic piping systems. 4. Bonding of down conductors to the system grounding grid and splicing of conductors in concealed work shall be made by an exothermic weld process. 5. Where conductors are bonded to structural steel or metal roof decks, a bolted-on bonding plate shall be used. All other bonding of the lightning protection system shall be made with pressure clamps. 6349-79520 16502-5 October 2012 O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved 6. Contractor shall notify design Engineer prior to concealment for Engineer's inspection. � 7. Copper components installed on concrete should be avoided if possible to avoid staining of the concrete. 3.02 TESTING A. General: 1. The Lighming Protection System shall be tested for continuity of all conductors and air terminals. 2. Maximum resistance of system shall not exceed five (5) ohms unless otherwise specified or scheduled. 3. Contractor shall submit written test results to the Engineer. B. Indicators: 1. Stamped metal tags shal} be attached to, or adjacent to, each down conductor indicating in feet the exact vertical depth in the ground of each ground terminal. a. Down Ieads connected to water pipes shall also be indicated. b. Tags shall be of a corrosion resistant metal and shall be placed at a height of 5 feet • above finish grade. END OF SECTION • 6349-79520 16502-6 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith � All Kights Reserved SECTION 16600 UNDERGROUNDSYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes and handholes as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. This work includes all underground raceways which are direct buried or concrete encased. 1 A2 RELATED WORK A. All concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 3, but the responsibility of furnishing and installing the material shall be that of this Section. B. All trenching, excavation and backfilling, including gravel and sand bedding and surface restoration shall be as specified in Division 2, but the responsibility of furnishing and installing the material shall be that of this Section. C. Conduit, fittings, installation, etc. shall be as specified in Section 16110. . D. Ground rods and other grounding materials and methods shall be as specified in Section 16660. E. Precast electrical concrete manholes and handholes shall be furnished under Division 16 and shall be in compliance with precast concrete structures as specified in Section 02605. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Manholes and handholes 2. Plastic duct spacers 3. Manhole and handhole frames and covers PART2 PRODUCTS Z.O1 MATERIALS A. Cable racks, supports, pulling-in irons, manhole steps and hardware shall be hot dipped galvanized steel as manufactured by Line Materials Co. or equal. B. Precast concrete manholes and handholes shall be heavy duty type, designed for a Class H20 • wheel load. Precast manholes and handholes shall be as manufactured by Brooks Products Co., or equal. 6349-79520 16600-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved � C. Manhole frames and covers shall be cast iron heavy duty type for class H-20 wheel loading, and shall be as manufactured by Neenah, or equal. Manhole covers shall be marked "ELECTRIC". D. Handhole covers and frames shall be hot dipped galvanized and designed for a Class H-20 wheel load. Handhole covers and hatches shall have Type 316 stainless steel security bolts. Handhole covers shall be marked "ELECTRIC". E. Bell ends and plastic duct spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon or eyual. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall drain toward the manholes ar handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3-in per 100-ft. B. Reinforce raceway banks as shown on the Drawings. C. Lay raceway lines in trenches on a clean backfill bedding not less than 6 inches thick and well graded and compacted. D. Use plastic spacers located not more than 4-ft apart to hold raceways in place. Spacers shall . provide not less than 2-in clearance between raceways. E. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 30-in unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. F. Make raceway entrances to buildings and vaults with rigid aluminum conduit not less than 10-ft long. Conduits which are not concrete encased for runs below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction shall be rigid aluminum conduit. Conduits which are concrete encased for runs below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction shall be encased under the slab to their respective equipment. G. Raceway terminations at manholes shall be with end bells for PVC conduit and insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type lugs for metal conduit. H. For bends in 2 inch and larger raceways, long radius elbows, sweeps and offsets shall be used. I. All 2 inch and larger raceways shall have a mandrel drawn through followed by a swab to clean out any obstructions which may cause cable abrasions. The mandrel shall be 12 inches in length and the diameter 1/2 inch less than the inside diameter of the raceway. AlI 1-1/2 inch and smaller raceways shall be swabbed clean before installing cables. Plug spare raceways and seal them watertight at all buildings and structures. K. Raceways in use shall be sealed watertight at all buildings and structures. • 6349-79520 16600-2 October 2012 �O 20l 2 CDM Smith � All Rights Reserved L. Install pulling-in irons opposite all raceway entrances to manholes. M. Cables shall be trained in manholes and supported on racks and hooks at intervals not greater than 3 feet-0 inches and supports shall be installed on each side of all splices. Furnish inserts on all manhole walls for mounting future racks as well as racks required for present installation. Branch circuit conductors shall not be run in manholes. N. All joints shall be made so as to prevent the passage of concrete inside the conduit to form obstructions or cause cable abrasions. O. Manhole covers in streets shall finish flush with finished paving and in other areas shall finish 3 inches above crown of adjacent roadway. Floor elevations of manholes shall be so set that the center line of the lowest conduit entering will be not less than 1-foot above the floor and center line of the highest conduit entering will be not less than 1 foot below the roof slab. P. Concrete monuments shall be provided at each stubbed conduit location. Monuments shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be installed in the same manner outlined for manhole covers. Q. A#6 bare copper wire (stranded) shall be installed in each 4-inch PVC conduit containing control cable unless otherwise noted. R. A 3/4-inch by 10-foot copperclad ground rod shall be driven in the bottom of each manhole. • All bond wires, galvanized conduits and metal cable racks shall be bonded to the ground rod. • S. Polyethylene warning tape shall be provided for all underground raceways, duct banks etc. Tape shall be placed along the raceways entire length and shall be installed 18" above the raceways on compacted backfill material. T. Spare and empty conduits shall have a pull wire (3/16 inch polypropylene) installed. U. As-built drawings shall be furnished showing each conduit terminations, elevations, locations, manholes, handholes, etc. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16600-3 October 2012 C� 2012 CDM Smith All Ri�l�ts Reserved � SECTION 16660 GROUNDING SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL I.O1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Atl raceways, conduits and ducts shall contain equipment grounding conductars sized in accordance with the NEC. Minimum sizes shall be No. l2 AWG. ] .02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data, for the following: Manufacturer's name and catalog data for gound rods, materials and exothermic welding methods and materials. • PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERlALS A. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 16110. B. Wire shall be as specified under Section 16120. C. Ground rods shall be 3/4-in diameter by 10-ft copper clad steel and constructed in accordance with UL 467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 0.25 mm (10 mil). Ground rods shall be Copperweld or equal. D. Grounding conduit hubs shall be malleable iron type, manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co.; Catalog No. 3940 (3/4-in conduit size), similar to Burndy; O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the conduit. E. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze saddle type, manufactured by Thomas & Betts Co. Cat. No. 2(1/2-in, 3/4-in, or 1-in size), similar by Burndy; O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the pipe. F. Buried �-ounding connections shall be by Cadweld process, or equal exothermic welding system_ G. Ground Enhancement Material (GEM) shall be a low-resistance, non-corrosive, carbon dust based material that improves grounding effectiveness. GEM shall contain cement, which • hardens when set to provide a permanent, maintenance-free, low-resistant grounding system 6349-79520 16660-1 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved that never leaches or washes away. GEM shall be suitable for installation in trenches or • backfilling around ground rods. GEM shall have a resistivity of no more than 20 ohm-cm. GEM shall be ERICO Part No. GEM25A or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The service entrance equipment ground bus shall be grounded to a 3/o-inch cold water pipe and to the ground as indicated on the Drawings. Run grounding electrode conductors in Schedule 80 PVC conduits and seal conduits watertight. Do not allow water pipe connections to be painted. If the connections are painted, disassemble them and re-make them with new fittings. B. Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. C. Bond all steel building columns in new structures together with ground wire in rigid conduit and connect to the distribution equipment ground bus, as shown on the Drawings. D. Ground wire connections to structural steel columns shall be made by exothermic welding. E. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connect to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with NEC Table 250.122, except that a minimum No. 12 AWG shall be used. � F. Ground bus m all motor control centers and unit substations shall be connected to the service entrance equipment ground bus with a No. 1/0 conductor or as noted on the Drawings. G. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a minimum conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250 or as shown on the drawings. H. Grounding electrodes shall be installed vertically and not allowed to be deformed or driven at an angle. Where driving is diffcult or where rock is encountered, Contractor shall use purpose-designed drilling equipment, install the rod into the drilled hole and backfill around rod using ground enhancement material (GEM) mixed with water to form a slurry in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. I. Install gound grids as shown on the Drawings. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduits systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. K. Seal exposed connections between different metals with No-Oxide Paint Grade A or equal. L. Lay all underground grounding conductors slack and, where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe, or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard_ Make connections as specified herein. • 6349-79520 16660-2 October 2012 �O 2012 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved • M. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, in particular between the conduit system and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, jumper wires shall be installed. N. All grounding type receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet boxes with a No. 12 XHHW green conductor connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and fastened to the outlet box by means of a grounding screw. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. lnspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent test instrument to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Notify the Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduling any testing. Provide certified calibration sheets including dates for all equipment to be used for testing with notice of scheduled testing. Calibration sheets shall also indicate that the units have been calibrated within six months of the testing date. C. All test equipment shall be provided under this Section and approved by the Engineer. • D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. u E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Dry season resistance of the system at each testing location shall not exceed five ohms. If such resistance cannot be obtained with the system, provide additional grounding, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 6349-79520 16660-3 October 2012 � SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CJ u • � � Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND ...... SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ..........................................................................1 CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 7 PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 8 AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 9 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT .............................................................................................10 PROPOSAL................................................................................................................................. 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SAEET ................................................................. 14 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ............................................................................................................. 15 SectionV_2012.doc Page i 7/26/2012 Nielson, Wojtowicz, Neu & Associates ': • A Member of Nielson & Company, Ina i�1i�Is�n�::s� Coiiipariy; lric: To: Kevin/Cathy cknoke@nielsonbonds.com RE: BOND REQUEST FORM DATE: � �' � �Z /;�G / �' CONTRACTOR/PRINCIPLE: Brandes Design-Build, Inc. PHONE: 727-445-754�4 - FAX: 727-445-7534 REQUEST FOR: ❑ Surety Qualification Letter ❑ Bid Bond ❑ Performance Bond l�Performance & Payment Bond** 0 Other �**INCLUDE COMPLETE COPY OF CON'TRACT ��R PURCHASR ORDER SPECIFIED BOND FORM; Yes / 0No if yes attached a copy: NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER OF OBLIGEE: (Name ojOwner, S(Ya`�te or Munlcipa! or Prime Cantr ) '�✓ i �y t� �� , �..�.n-w � t'�,� l �U �� :� � ��--��. ��l'�� I � � : $�'P/CONTRACT No.: C� �'� U C�' u-� ��1_ ;,�r�A_ � �- 3 "> �1 � �l FkOJECT TITLE and DESCRIPTION O�(JOB: + � —'' 1� �'.�.5�-�-�-- (� S�v�'L c:i�-�/� 1 � �i,��._%�_ � R ! �( �"� 7(�/��.? � � — C` L' ! �"��' c� � � . ��✓ �(`)l. � d �', —` LOCATION OF JOB ust be included on all Public Jobs): '�� DATE OF CONfRACT: DATE OF BID: 6�/ l�3 ��a l�"� ! BID BOND PERCENTAGE: � L`'l �• Estimated Bid Amount: $ � y�"0�0 �5�,i. CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ 0 � L � �� '� �� . �l� CONSTRUCTION: ❑Completion time: ❑Maintenance period: 1 `�� iquidated damages: $ �, � %� � — � NUMBER OF ORIGINALS REQUESTED: a DATE REQUIRED 1 t,� f�� 1 i:Z= QLTESTED BY � � G= �e'a � .�. CIAL INSTRUCTIONS SEND BOND TO: BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC. 2151 NE COACHMAN ROAD CLEARWATEFi, FL 33765 � FRONT PAGE OF PUBLIC PAYMENT BOND Florida Statute 255.05 Attached to and part of BOND NO. 60684575 In Compliance with Florida Statutes Chapter 255.05 (1)(a), Public Work. All other Bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any number(s) that may be pre- printed thereon. CONTRACTOR: Brandes Design Build, Inc. 2151 NE Coachman Road Clearwater FL 33765 727-445-7544 SURETI': Westfield Insurance Company 1 Pazk Circle • Westfield Center, OH 44251 330-887-0980 AGENT: Nielson, Wojtowicz & Associates, Inc. 1126 Central Avenue, Suite 200 St. Petersburg, FL 33705 (727) 209-1803 OBLIGEE: City of Clearwater 100 South Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 727-562-4570 PROJECT: Reverse Osmosis Plant #1 - Plant Ezpansion 09-0018-UT; 1657 Palmetto, Clearwater, FL 33765 � � BOND NUMBER: �Q 6 8 4 5 7 5 CONTRAG'� B4ND STAT� OF FLORIDA COUNTYOF Pinellas KNOW ALL MEN BY TI�SE PRESENTS: That we BRANDES DFSIGl�-BUILD. ING as Contractor anci WFSTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is 1 PARK CII2CLE. �VESTFIFLD CENTER� UH 44251 HEREINAF'TER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firrnly bound icrto the Ciiy of Clearwater, Florida (herein,af�er called the "Owner") in the penal sum oF EiGAT NIILLION ONE �iU�1DRED TWENTY-ONE THOIISAND SEVEN H;;JNDRED THIRTY-NIrTE DOLLARS AND SIXTY NINE CENTS fS8.121.T39.691 for the payment of which we bind oursetves, aur heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for th�e faithfal performance af a certain written contract, dated the day of , 20_ , entered into irPtween the Conhactor and the City of Clearvvater for. REVERSE OSMOSLS PLANT #1— PLAIVT EXPANSION 09-041&UT - a copy of wtuch said contract is incorporated herein by refercnce and is made a part hereof as if fully • copied herein. NUW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF TffiS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, t��at if the Contractor shall in alI respects comply with tl�e tenns a�d conditions of said cantract, including the one-qear guarantee of material and labor, and lris obiigations theteunder, including the contract documentc (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Forrn af Proposal, Form of Contxact, Form af Surety Bond, instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Pians and Spocifiications ti�erein referred to aad made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specific�tions as therein pinvided for, aad s�all indemnify and save hazrntess th�e said Owner against and from all c�sts, e�enses, damages, iaJurY or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringemeats on the pert of the said Contractor agents or empfoyees, in the execution or pe�formance of said contract, including errors in thc plans furaished by the Contraator, aad further, if such "Contrador" or "Contractors" sha11 promptty make paymeats to all persons supplying him, th�m or it, labor, material, and supplies usai directiy or in,directly by said Cantrador, Contractors, Sub-Cor�actor, ar Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligarion shaU be void, oth,ervvise, the Co�tractor aad Snrety joimly and sev�rally agree to pay to the Owner any difference betweea the sum to which the said Contractor would be eatifled on the compietion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obligai to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, 8t any damages, direct or indic�ect, or conse�uential, which said 4wner may susta.in on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, kcep and execute all the pmvisions of said contract THE PROVISIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF SECTION 255.05 FLORIDA STATUTES, • INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION IN SECTIONS 255.05(2) AND 255.05(10), ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY REFERENCE. cONTRACT I�OR SiGNATt)RE.docx Pagc t of t4 7126/20i2 s, • • CONTRACT B4�iD (2} �►nd t�e said Contractor and Suret}� hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, ad�iinistxatvrs; and assigr�s,- jointly and severally, that tl�ey r�i!( amply t�nd fully protect tl�e said Owner against, and will pay any and ali amounts, datuages= casts and judgrnents whieh niay be recovered :��ainst or which the 4wner may be callc.� upon to pa�� to any persan or cozparatian by reason of any damages azzsing from the performance of said j��or�; or of the repair o�• maintenanca thereaf. or the manner of dving the same or the ne�lect of the said Contractar or his agerYts or serr�aats or the improper performance Qf the said v�rark by tb;e Contractor or his ag�nts or servants, or the infi7ngements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any nrtaterial furnish.ed or v�ork do�ie; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby furtlier bind themselves, #heir successors, heirs, executors, admiaistrators, and assigns; jointiy and severafly, to repay the ov��ner any sum wt�ich the Owner may be compelled ta pay because of any lien ior labor material furnisiced far the work, em�raced by said Contract. �.nd the said 3urety, for the value received, he�eby stipuiates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteratian or addition co the terms of the contract ar to the s��or� to be performed thereunder ar the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obli�atians an this boiid, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration �r addition to the terms ofthe contract or to the wark ar to tiie specifications. / �' �,,�'��a,.�;�,,h . E_ ,.�� .P � . • r '. ' ; � r. .`�� c��a � : ��'8 '. CAA.� vi' �`. ,� �� . v F� IN TEST MUNY WHER�OF, w�itness tt►e hands and seals of the parties a�y o�e ec�b 20 la , ATTEST: ��ln. WITNESS: GNED: n/a cON'TRAC"1' i'OR SIGidAT[;RE.docx 1� P�ge 2 af id � We�ield Insurance ,�omplany SURETY • � � B :- = -IN-FAC'I` Ke in Wojtowicz FL Licensed Resident Agent,...�•'�` ?:'24:2012 .r ' , ' General Power + of Attorney • CERTIFIED COPY POWER NO, 0994782 00 Westfield Insurance C:o. Westfieid National Insurance C:o. Ohio Farmers Insurance C:o. Westfield Center, C)hio Know Al! Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and C)HIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a"COmpany` and collectively as "Companies," duly organizad and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohlo, do by these prasents make, constitute and appo(nt KEVIN WOJTOWICZ, OLENN ARVpNITIS, JENNIFER STEPHENS, JOHN R. NEU, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of ST. PETERSBURG and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-In-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its r�.ame, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and dellver any and ali bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contraclts of suretyship- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE G A TE , OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. and to bind any of the Companles thereby as fully and to the same extent as If such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corpc>rate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by Its Secretary, hereby ratify(ng and conflrming ail that the sald Attorney(s)-fn-Fact may �io in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authorlty of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each oF the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONA� INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "8e tt Resolved, that the President, any Senlor Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive :shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more sultable persons as Attorney(s)-fn-Fact to fepresent and ac:t for and on hehalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney-In-Fact. may be given full powar and authorlty for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge� and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements ot Indemnity and other conditlonal or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's Ilability theraundar, and any such Instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as If signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate 5ecretary." 'Be it Further Reso/ved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter afflxed ta any power of attornay or any certificate ralating thereto by facsimlle, and any power of attorney or cartiflcate bearing facsimile signatures or facslimlle seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which ft is attached' �Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). !n Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NA710NAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURpNCE COMPANY have caused thesa presents to be signed by their Senfor Executive and thair corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 07th de3y of OCTOBER A.D., 2006 . _ Corporate ��YA�(�" Seals �►��,,.• .,,C Affixed `v; �sa. '� �� ,��•�._ .�. . State of Ohio "'"'"' County of Medina ss.: �..��.��nNAC jN •• a� ,, � ; �0. , ; �, : SEAL ;��. ,,',,��'�i�en� * n��.�� 4 ;;1849,;� � � ..:_°_..•�� 4 WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY � � . By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Nafronal Surety Leader arrd Senior Executive On this 07th day of OCTOBER A.D., 2008 , bafore me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medtna, Ohio; that he Is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFI'ELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed tha above instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said Instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so afl7xed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his nama thereto by I(ke order. Notarial ��N�NININ Seal aaaal A L�"''� '� � Afflxed O P\``�j��/ � 4 • 2j �t�! %'cr •' • William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public State of Ohio i N � O My Commission Ooes Not Explre (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) County of Medina ss.: {+, q �� ..rf OF �.,. I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certlfy that the.above and foragoing Is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still In full force and effact; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of D(rectors, set out fn tha Power of Attorney are in full force and affact. !n Wltness Whereof, I hava heraunto set my hand and afflxed the seals of sald Companles at Westfleld Center, Ohlo, thls dey of • v r � : � � ��,�.�� ro ;� ��. ,� �� :, �.....� � . BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) SEAL , ,.' ..* � ►; isaa ;; +' ._�_. '• /,� /� t r � : � sa�� Frank A. Carrino, Secretary • CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this 3 I day of �Q Ct,�,vi�l�� , 20 �� by and betwee.:n the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", an�d BRANDES DESIGN-BUII.D. INC.. of the City of CLEARWATER County of PINELLAS an.d State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreemen�s on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of tt��e sums of money as herein after set forth to be�id by the City and to the Contractor, shatl and will �t their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for tt�e following: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT #1— PLANT EXPANSION 09-001&UT IN THE AMOUNT OF: EIGHT MILLION ONE HUNDRED TWENTY-0NE THOUSAN:� SEVEN HUNDRED THIRTY-1�iINE DOLLARS AND SIXTY-r1INE CENTS ($8,121,739.69) In accordanee with such proposal and technieal supplemental speeifieations and such other speci�l • provisions and drawings, if any, which will be subcnitted by the City, together with arry adverti9ement, instrucdons to bidders, gencral conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereko attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of thi'.s contra�ct, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the cantractor and its successars and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of ttie City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as cont�ined herein within the time specificd for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all rcmedies provided on its beh�lf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform �in �ecordance with the �ovisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREHY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY H�:E BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTMTIF:S ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTIiERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION �F THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGRE�;S TO HOLD THE CITY P'REE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIM5 FO:Et DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR TH:E CONTRAGTOR OR THE CONTRACTUR'S 3UB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, 3ERVAN'I"S OR EMPLOYEES RE4ULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONE�:D , CONTRACTOR, SUH-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. eONfRALT FOR SIGNATURE.doac Page 3 of 14 7/26/2Bi12 . CONTRACT �2) In addition b� the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not t�� discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of rr�cce, sex, religion, color, ar narional origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the followin�;: emplayment, upgrading, d�notion, or transfer; recruitment a recruitment advertising; lay-off c►r termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, includin�� apprenticeship. The Contcactor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employe�s ar�pplicants for employment, notices to be provided by tl� contracting officer setting forth th�. provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor fiuther agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, includin�; contracts or agneements with labor unions andlor worker's representatives, except sub-contractors far standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed betwcen the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, arnl in th�� event thaS the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulatsci herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may b�� due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 �er dav for each day that the work to be ptrtformed by th�� • Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of S1.0�.00 oe�r dA� shall only and solely represent dama�es which the City has sustain�cd by reason of the failure of th�� Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being fiuther agreed that this sum is not �� be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidateci d�mages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform a11 work within the time period as �ecified in this contract. • It is further mutually agc+eed bctwcen the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is att�ched hereto for the faithful performance of the terms anci conditio� as contair�ed herein by the Contr�ctor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety ar sureties upon such perfoanance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases t�� be adeq�te in amount to cover tt� perfonnance of the wo�ic the Contractor shall, at his or its ov�ni eacpense, within ten (10) days after r�ceipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an addition�l bond or bonds in such t�rm and amount� and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to th�� City. If such an event occura, no furthcr payment shall be cnade to the Contractor under the terms anci provisions of this contcac;t until such new or addi6onal security bond guaranteeing the faithfal perfarm�nce of the wnrk under the tenns hereof shall be campleted and fiunished to the City in a forr�i satisfactory to it cONTRACT FOR SIGNATURE.dcex P�e 4 of 14 7/26/201:2 • CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals anc� have executed this Ag�eement, in duplicate, the day and year first above writien. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA � � By: • .�.1� Wil iam B. Horne, II City Manager countersigned: - �� C�i � �'S By: � t� �1 • George N. Cretekos, Mayor � (Contractor must indicate whcth rporatian, Partncrship, Company or Individ . (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign �e Principal's name, his own name, and his tide; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affid�vit, ahow his autl�rity to bind the Corporation). ��(�`OIF 1NEA/� r• �r li ' ` _ � �s � C Attest: � �;�, t� ��q !:� �O ��c�c��: C%� �A11'fc� Rosemarie Call Camilo Soto Assistant City Attomey ,�,: .t ( T • . - lJ.' n,'�� i `� -,' .,��. i••4,' �V 4 ,� 1s� r . C': �a"�rs „ '� ' . .. . �.. ° f. p 7 F.'� ,:, . ,� - �c, cONTRACT FOR SIGNAT'URE.docac Psge S of 14 7/26/201.2 -��'�1 BRAND02 OP ID: L3 '`+`°RO� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE °"'�'M""°�""' 12I1�D/12 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO WGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDEER. THIS ERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGA7IVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES ELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATiVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement A statsment on this ce�tiflcate doea not confer Hghts to the certiflcate holder in Ueu of such endorsement/s1_ PRODUCER Brown 8� Brown of FloNda, lnc. P. O. Box 173086 Tampa, FL 33672 Jack Suber INSURED Brandes Design Build, Inc. dba Southem Industrial Electric 2151 NE Coachman Rd Clearwater, FL 33765 813-226-13a 813-226-131 Bituminous u�su�RS:B�idgefleld Employers Ins. n�sur�e c: Travelers Prop Cas of Amer a�surs�re o : INSURER E : Na�c �e 10701 25y74 COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDffION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. �"� rrre oF �suwwce POUCY NUMBER �j � � � EXP �� GENERAL LUIBRRY EACH OCCURRENCE S i�OOO,OO A X COMMERCIALGENERALLIABILITY CLP3567170 �3/i3/i2 OSh3H3 pREMISES Eaoceunence E ��0,0� CUUMS-MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (My one peroan) S S�OO PERSONALBADVINJURY S i3OOO�OO GENERALAGGREGATE S ��OOO,OO GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S Z,OOO�OO �u�' PRO- �� Emp Ben. a 1,000,00 AUTOMOBILE WIBILR1f COM NED SINGLE LIMI Ea scddeM 1,��,0� A X ANY AUTO Cl�$567i %i 03/13H 2 03h S/13 BODILY INJURY (Per peroon) S ALLOWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per acddent) S H�RED AUTOS q�p �ED PROPERTY DAMAGE s Peracdderri a X �M��u � X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE S S,OOO�OO /� EXCESSLIAB CLAIMS-MADE CUP2592455 03/i$/i2 03H3/13 AGGREGATE S 5,�� oeo X RETENTION 7 0 000 a WORKERS COMPENSATION WC STATU- OTH- AND EMPLOYERS' LIABIIJTY Y/ N T R ANY PROPRIEfOR/PARTNERIEXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT E OFFICERIMEMBER IXCLUDED9 � N � A (Mandrtory In NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S H yea, dasuibe �der - DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S C Bidrs Risk QT6609280A712 03/13H2 O3H3H3 Max Limit 6,000,00 A CLPS567170 03/12N 2 03N 3/13 Ded see n DESCRIPTION pF OPERATIOPIS I LOCATIONg / VEHICLES (Atfach ACORD 101, Additloral Remula SeMduM, It mora spau Is requlrod) Kevin Klaus GC062773 and Tommy Nix EC0001992/Reverse Osmosis Plant #1-Plant Expansion CITYCLE City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED ElEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE TNEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORI2ED REPRESENTATNE i� 01988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights res+�rved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and Iogo are registered marks of ACORD Policy Number: 0830-31655 Date Entered: '4` °R°' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/d)M'YY) THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORAAATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFiCATE HOLDER. THIS I CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE PC)LICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHqRIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PROOUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLOER. IMPORTANT: If the cerUflcate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, sulbject to the terma and conditions of the policy, certain pollcies may require an endorsement A sMtement on thfa certiflcate does not confer Hghtx to the certiflcate holder in Ifeu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER WorkComp Partners 702 Tillman Place Plant City, FL 33566 INSURER A : iNSUr�o gr��s �Siqn-Build, Inc. c: 2151 N.E. Coachman Road Clearaater, FL 33765 (B13)747-7490 Inaurartce 747-7495 � COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHIC�H THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUEO OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO AlL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. L7R TYPE OFtNSURANCE POLICY NUMBER M uMIDD�M'�W MM� � LIMITS GENERAL LIABILI7Y EACH OCCURRENCE _ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES xwrranae S CUIMSMADE � OCCUR MED EXP (My one peraon) S PERSONAL3ADVIWURY S GENERALAGGREGATE S GEN'L AGGREGATE UMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS- COMP/OP AGG S POL�CY PR4 �� s - AUTOMOB�E LU4BILITY C BIN D N LE LI IT E..aa s ANYAUTO BODILY�WURY(Paperwn) S ALLOWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS p�7'pg BODILY INJURY (Per aoddeM) E HIRED AUTO$ A�OS E� PPoROr PE�DAMAGE _ . S u�� R EACH OCCURRENCE S EXCEBS W18 CLA�MSMADE AGGREGATE S DED RETENTION i s WORKERS COMPENSAiION WC STATU- OTH- ANDEMIPLOYERS'LIABWTY Y!N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNEWEXECUTNE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S S OOO O�OO A OFFICERIMEMBEREXCLUDEO? � N�A 0830-31655 03/13/2012 03/13/2013 (Mandatory M NH) E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPtAVEE S 1 Ifyes� d�auiW uWer DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS bNow E.L. qSEASE- POUCY LIMIT S 1 OOO OO DESCRIPTbN OF OPERqT10N81 LOCATIONS / VEHICIES (Att�eh ACORD 101, Addidoml Fbm�Au SeMdul�, H mon sp�p b �qWrW) ference: Reverse Osmosis Plant �1 - Plant Expansion vin Klaus GC062771 ommy Nix EC0001992 CERTIFICATE HOLDER ceurc� � wT�nu City of C1earNatar 100 3outh Myrtla Street Clearrratar, FL ACORD 25 (2010/05) SNOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEEFORE THE EXRRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE OELIVEREiD IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTA7IVE - • - -- .. . "rilQ,,.�p..�.(,l:S�-tl�lS-lk��tQ� � 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All righffi re�terved. The ACORD name and logo are registared marks of ACORD Produoetlusinp Fortns Boss Pow soflware.www.FormaBoas.com�mpreseivePudishinp 800-208-1977 EMERGENCY CALL LIST �O: Engineering - Tara Kivett Police Communications - Raymond Lowell Niski Traffic - Cory Martens Fire Department - Bobbie Eigenmann & James Keller; Utilities Dispatch/Gas — Gordon Jerrell, James Keri, Jacqueline Lewis Assistant Director Public Utilities - Nan Bennett; Public Utilities/Water - Terry LaBelle Public Utilities/Wastewater - Jerry Wells Engineering Construction Inspector FROM: Engineering/Construction PROJECT: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT #1 PLANT EXPANSION 09-0018-UT LOCATION: 1657 PALMETTO STREET, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA T'he following Contractor has been awarded the above project by the City Commission action dated: December 6. 2012 PROJECT IS TO BEGIN: • n U CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS: NAME: BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC. ADDRESS: 2151 N. E. COACHMAN ROAD CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33765 PHONE NO.: 727-445-7544 FAX NO. 727-445-7534 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY - PLEASE NOTIFY: (Please List 3) NAME: Pat 'I�ooley TITLE: Project Manager/Superintendent PHONE NO.: 727 , 243 . 68 6 8 NAME: gryan Barelos PHONENO.: 72�.639.3284 rTE1ME; Kevin Klaus PHONE NO.: 813 . 2 7 7. 615 2 TITLE: TITLE: Project Manager/Vice PresideYlt President/Owner EMERGENCY TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE PERSON � NAME: Pat Zboley PHONE NO.: 727. 243. 6 8 6 8 NOTE: IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE TRAFFIC ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT & THE CLEARWATER POLICE DEPARTMENT WHEN WORK COMMENCES AND WHEN STREETS ARE TO BE CLOSED TO TRAFFIC. TO: City of Clearwater ATTN: Engineering/Construction P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 The following personnel are authorized by me to sign submittals for REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT #1 PLANT EXPANSION 09-0018-UT NAMES• Pat Tooley • Bryan Barelos COMPANY NAME: gy; �� Kevin Klaus DATE�� ember 1 0, 201 2 TITLE: n U President • CONTRACTOR'S AF�IDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORP�RATI(3N FnRM) STATE UF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINEGLAS On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized 1:0 administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly swor�l, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) 4f BRANDES DESIGN-B[JILD, ING, a Fiorida Corporation, with its principal place of busine��s tocated at �151 N.E. GOACHMAN ROAD. CLEARWATER. FLORIDA 337b5 (herein, t��e "Contr�ctor"}, T'hat the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day r.�f . 20_ with the C1TY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a munieipal corpc�ration, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT #1— PLANT EXPANSION 09-QOl&UT Tt�t said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discliarged all sub-contractors, • laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nat�e nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encurnbrance in connection with said wo�ic against the described property. • That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statut�s, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Ccx�tract) in full satisf�ion and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released trom any claim which might arise out of said Cont�act. The word "liens" as used in this at�idavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation r.>f the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 7I3, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me This day of , 20 � NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: AFFIANT PRESIDENT eON'I`RACT FUR SlG?�1Al�tiRE.do�:x PaZte G �f fa 7/2Gi2U l2 • • � �-. .�- PROI'OSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified chrck is submitted) ICiVOWN ALL MF:N BY THESE PRESEIVTS: That �ve, the undcrsignecl, Brar.des Des�an-Build, Inc. asPrincipal,and iJest�ield Ins;:�ance ompar�y as Surety, wha's address is I Fark Circle r7est ie�a en er, �2�1 , are held and firmly baund unto the City ofClrarwater, Florida, in the sum oP ten �e�cen* o� �"� amou�t b� ; Datlars ($1G � of bic� �y��ng a minirnum of 10°fo of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby juintly and severally nind ourselves, our heirs, executQrs. administrators, successors and assigns. The eondition ofthe abuve obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of B� andes Des ign- Bui�d, �nc. as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Co�^pany as Surety,forworkspeciftedas: C9-�018-UT• Reverse Osr�csi$ P�_ant I�o.l rla:�t Ext�ar:s i on alt as stipulat�d in said Propc�sal, by doing all work incidenwl theretv, in accorctanee with the plans and specitications pmvided herefor� a!I within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the seid bidder shAll within ten tlays aftec notice of said award enter into a contract, in �vriting, and furnish the rcquired Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full !'orce and virtue yy law and the full amount of this Proposal Bonc! will be paid to thc Ciry as ytipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 9 day of Nover.;ner __ . 20 12 . (Priacipa( must indicate whether corporation, partnership. company or individual) The person signing shall, in his own handwTiting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the corporation. � Section V_2012.�ioc Page 8 of 18 Cor�oration 3randes Desiqn-Bu Principal , t3y: inc. Wes �f� e ? ^om�±any ure nevin �i�'oj t�wicz Attorney-�n-fact 7126/20t2 •General Power of Attorney • POWER N0. 0994T84 00 Westfield Insurance C:o. West#ield National Insurance �:o. CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farmers Insurance C:o. Westfieid Center, C�hio Knoev Atl Men by These Pre�sMs, That WESTFiELd fNSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIEID NATIOMAL isJSURANCE COUPANY and ��H10 FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporatiors, herefnafter referred to indivlduatly as a`Company' and oollectively as `Compan�es," duty O►gsrtizetl attd a�tfstinp under the laws ot t�e Stete ot Ohio, end having tts principa! otftce In West�eld Centar, MeWna CtiurRy, Ohlo, do by these presents maka, constitute ana appoint KEViN WO�TE1WtCZ, OLENN ARVAI�NTI8, JENNtFER STEPHENS, JOHN R. NEU, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of 37. PETER38URa and State ot FL its true and �aw/ui Attorney(s)dn-Fact, with fuil power and authorlty he►eby c�nferred in it� r�ime, place and s�ead, to execute, scknawledge and daliva� any snd all bands, r�cogrdzancss, ta�d�rWdrty�, or pUar inabrrt»nts or coe�trncls of str�tY�W--------•------------------••--.........._.....---•--...._.. , �1__MI AT THIS VOWER OF ATTORNEY CANNQT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE BUARANTEE, Md1tTGA0E DEFIdENCY, MORTqyAOE i�a�, oa s�NK c�POS�Taer eo��s. euyd to bind any of the CompaMes thef'eby as fuliy 8nd to tt� sama exient as ff sUCh bonds were signod by the President, sealed with the cwpc�rata seai ot fhe appricable Company arM duly attested by its Secratary, heretry ratifying and confirmirg aB that the saRd Attorney(sy-irt-Fact may �7o in the premis�. S�p appointment la mada under and by authority W the toHowing resoiution ad�tad by the 8osrd ot Directors of each aN the WESTFlELD lNSURANCE COMPANY,INE3TFIELD NATIONAL IN3URANCE COMPANY a�d OHIO �ARMER5 INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be ft Resoived, that tna President, eny Seniof Ex�utive, sny 3ecretary or any Fldelity & Surety Operat;ons Executive or c�her Exec�lve e•hsli be and is hereby vosled with fuii poMrer and authortty to appoiM any one or more suttabie persor� aa Attorney(s}-imFact to tepr�ant and a�1: tor antl on �hait ot the Cotnp�ny su�od to the toHawing proWs3ons: Tpe Auorney-in-Fact. may be yiv� tuft povrer and euthority }cr and In the name of and on behaif pf the Canpany, to exocute, scknawtadgd end deNver, any tnd all bor�ds, reCpgnfzences, contracts, a�reemeMs o� IndPmnity and other conditionai or oblipstory undertakings and �y an:t ail noricxa arid clocuments canceling tx terminatinp the Company's �labiliry ihareunder, antl any such tnstruments so enecukeQ by any ;;uch Attorney-In-FeL4 shail be as binding upon thcs Company as If signed by the Prasicfent and sealed and attested by tttie Cwporate Secretary." '8e lt futtAer fiesolvetl, th� the stgnature of any such designated person anC the sea� of the Compar�y heretotoro or hereafter affl�d ta eny pawer ot 8ttol�nay or any c�q1(cat� �elaEing thereto by /aCStmii0. and eny power af attorney oY certiflcate bearlr� hcslmlie sigrtatutes ar Tacslmile seel Shali be v�Itd and bindin8 t�on the Company vrith respect to any 6ond or undertakirag to whfch it is s�ttaChed." (Eech adopted at a me�oting heid on February 8, 2000j. tn Wltneas Wheraol, WE57FIELD iNSURANCE CCIMPANY, WESTFIELO NATlONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHfO FARMER3 INSURAi�iCE COM�ANY have causad these presents to be signed by theY► S�nlor Exacutiv� and thetr corporate sesis to De hereto sttixed this 07p1 tlay of OCT08ER A. D., �006 . Co rponie ��, Seals �� ..,�;+r an�xea ' .. w � ��+.�'� � � � �ar. � st3te ot Ohio County oi t�ied(na ss.: SEAL � ►�, 1648. ; • ''•. � _. • WESTFIELD ►NSURANCE COIu1PANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY � � • ByRi ha� l.. KMnaird Jr. N�troRa! Suret Leader a � Senfor Fx@cutive Rd On tMs 97th ctay or oCTOeER A.D., �, befora me parswraily cema Richard �. Kinnalyd, Jr. to me Known, wAo, Ceinfl by me clWy swarn, dld depoae and say, Mat he reaides in M�dlrq, Ohio; that ha fe S�nior Exocutive of WESTFlELD IM3URANCE GOIuiPANY, WFSTFfE:LD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY anq OHIO FARA�tERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the Compsnies deacribed in snd which executed the all�RVe InstrumenC that he knAws khe sa�is of said Companles; that the seals atttxed to sald Instrument are sucn corpcxate seals; that tney ware sa atd,.�d by orcbr of ths Boards ot [Nreotors of aaid Comp�nies; and that he signeci Ms name tfsefato by like ortler. notarial Ah �d o PA .�i.�` � r � • � �� '�� t ' • YWliism J. Kaholin, A rney at Law, Notary Publlc StaW ot 4hio �� `p My Commtsslon poes Not Explro (Sec. 147.03 Oh�o Ravised Cpde) County of AAedina ss.: ,�. ,?t of � 1, F�ank A. C��Fno, Secretpfy ot WESTFlELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NAFIONAL INSURANC@ COMPANY �[td OHfO �ARM�:RS INSt1RANCE COMPANY, do haretry dertiy thst tha ebove and taegdnp is a trr� and correct copy of e Power ot Atlo►nsy, exectrted by g�Iq `Co� ��,�w'hd � Ii in fuli torce and e}Pect: antl furthermore, the resoiutlons or the Boards of Oirodars, set out fn the Power ot Attomey sre in WlUtess WAersoi I havn hereunto set my harW anQ NR�d the seals of said Comparne� at Weatfldd Centar, Ohlo, this g daN o1 OVember :,,� 2 O 1 � . ,�.� �� • ��y �� 7�i. � J ePOrACZ (wmbim�<q (48-OZ) N'I^N�� I�ly� I �'�::.'. �N.M��r . � •y��. �•~� �ti S�e,�. �.On�' �: � 1� 'f � ��•��~.�f� � h • ..� .. �.,•,`',• N f •��N�lN1N�� I�MMM"" �I� � � .%�7r/.�j Fnmk A. Csrrino, Secrotary � • �' �%� � 14.'� �r AFFIDAVIT (To be filted in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF PINELLAS ) Nancy Cale pe�ng duly sworn, deposzs and says that he/she is Secretaryof Brandes Design-Build, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principa) office at: 2151 NE Coachman Road, Clearwater Pinellas Florida Street & ?vumber City County State Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Brandes Design-Build, Inc. . (Name of Carporation) A�ant further says that Kevin Klaus �S President (Oi�iicer's Name) ("I'itle) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the F'roposai for City of Clearwater for said corporation hy virtue of ___ By-Laws (state whether a provision of by laws or a Kesolution of the Iioard of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). �� Afi� nt Swam to before me this l 3 day of �l8 � Cn� bC r' , 20 / a'I� . � SectionY_2012.doc Page 9 of 18 r JCIM�IrGn a. ��v.v� � MY COMMISStON 4� EE03!s895 Title or rank, and Serial No., ifany 7/26/2012 • � NON-COLLU;SION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS ) Kevin M. Klaus President being, first duly swom, deposes and says that he is o� Brandes Design-Build, Inc. the party making the foregoing Aroposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise at�i(iated in a business way with any other bidde!r• on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreecl, directly o�r indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain frorr� bidding, and has not in any manner, directiv or irnfirectly, sou�ht by agreement or eollirsion, o�� communicaEion or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, ar t� fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Cleanvater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the propos�� contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that sueh biddec has not directiy or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents theceof, or divulged information or dat3� relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereoC Sworn ta and subscribed beFare me this ��= day of N o d:. r,• � e., 20 ��1�_. /",,� �� c.� #-� � �._._,...... __. Natary Pt�lic I ��; µ� :�..«,,`— ��auc,w crx� � i = ^SAMif a'QI� r C + � �•'?�'.�'..: �}tj�F�F� �c��il �y� ,n • R � ��87:1aU/ 1'., e�C1 i � p� � 9 i�x , y,atu ��lh�u: Undenvn�rs . SectionV 2Ql2.doc Page t0of 18 7126R012 r� U PROPOSAL (1 } TO THE C1TY OF CLEARwATER, FLORIDA, for REVERSE OSMOSIS PLA'�T No. 1— PLANT EXPAhS10N PROJECT #: 09-0018-tiT and doing such other work incidentai thereto, ail in accordance with the contract documents, marked REVERSE OSMO5IS PLAh'T No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-0018-CT Every bidder must take notice of the fact that e��en though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding cantrac� without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are avaitable Eo cover the cast of the wark t� be done, or tvithout the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and al[ the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. • The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also deciares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are narned in this Proposal, that he has carefuily examined the Advertise�nent, Instructions to Bidders, Cantract Specifications, Pians, Supplemental Specifications,, General Conditions, Sgecial Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if'the I'roposaf he accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contrdct; I�ereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do al! the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions nnd according to the cequirements of the City of Clearwater, �=lorida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following price5 to wir. � SeaionV 2012.doc Page I t of 18 7/26/2012 • PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shal� fail to execute a satisfactory coRtract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may. at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the concrac[, and thereupon this Propc�� shall be nuii and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shatl be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwa2er, Florida, and the full amuunt c�f said check shall b� retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the Full amount of such band shali be paid to the City as siipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the lmnd or eertified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be retumed to the undersigned as specifted herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bid eond Bank, fo� the sum of 10$ ($ } (b�ing a minimum of 10% of Contractrn's tota! bid amoant). The full names and residences of aU persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If carporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the . names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but alscr the n�me of any �rson with whom bidder has any type of agr�eement whereby such persc>n's improvernents, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, ag�nt, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contraet to the bidder). • NAMES: ADDRESSES: Kevin M. Klaus, 1658 Canopy Oaks Blvd. Palm Harbor, FL B. Cole, 221 Edgewood Avenue, Clearwater, FL 33755 Signature ofBidder: (The bidder must indicate whethe orporation, tRership, ��►�r�p��'' r Section V_2012.dac Pa�e 12 of 18 7J2612012 � � . PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriiing, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his tit4e. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authg�iy, to bind tfie corporation. pri��pa�; K�+bir�M. Klau I� Titie: president iness.�ddrs�s of Bidder: 2 � 51 NE Coachman Road City and State: Clearwater, FL Zip Code 33765 Datedat `+,�c�.,��.e�.. ��.d� ,this r � dayof ��'�`ri ��`�" ,A.D.,20t'�:. Scction V 2012.�c Page 13 of 1 S 7,�z�r2ot a • • • CITY OF CLEARWATER �lDDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPAYSION PROJECT #: 09•0018-IJT Acknuwiedgment is hereby made of the fo(lowing addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. sea�onv_zo � z.aoe Addendurn No. � Date: � �� Z 1201 2 Addendum No. 2 Date: �� 9% 2 4 � 2 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum l�Io. Date: t4 oi' 18 Brandes De�� Build, Inc (Name , der) ,,,.,. �tawre ot Utticer) Kevin K�aus ident (Title of Officer) 11/13/2012 (Date) 7�z6no�2 \J BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLA:�iT No. 1- PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT #: 09-001$-U'I' CONTRACTOR: Brarydes Desiyn-Euilci, Inc. HIDDER'S BASE BID GRAz'VD TOTAL $ i�,, �% �� .`� 5(.1= '� � i`j��) t.% � a r., ,► -� ]. t , 11 �woras� B[DDER'S ADDITIVE ALTER'VATE BID GRAND TOTAL $� O �� i t�:�, Y v (Numbers) BIDDER'S ADDITIVE ALTERNATE CRAND TOTAL c~ a � N�t�� ,r�-�1 (Words} .�-R- ords) • THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENI1�iG BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TASULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LLTMP SUM PRiCE BID. IF THERE IS At�1 ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LLJMP SUM PRICE SHALL CUVERAi. u AWARD UF THE CUNTRACT WILL BE BASED ON THE LOWEST TOTAL BASE BID A1�ZOUNT. ONCE THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER IS SELECTED, THE OWNER, AT HIS SULE DISCRETION MAY ADD ANY OF THE .�DDITIVE ALTERNATE BID ITEMS TO THE BASE BID. THE TOTAL PR03ECT COST WILL BE REVISED ACCORDINGLY SHOULD ADDITIVE ALTERNATE BID ITEMS BE SELECTED B1' THE OWNER Addendum �0 2-D►afl_1107t2.c3ocx Page 16 of 18 11�{17f��2 C� • • �.00 RAW WATER BOOST PUMPS LS 1 5 a� o .� 4 a e� Gx a 401 Raw Water Boost Pum and Motor ODP EA 1 �-1 C cc.:: � � Gv � r�' � 4 01A Raw Water Boost Pump and Motor Sale Tax Savin EA 1 y,.� G '� '-! �; v 4�: 4_02 Raw Water Boost Pum VFD ODP EA 1 1;� 5�: 1�,� �� L� 4.02A Raw Water Boost Pump VFD Sale TEx Savin EA 1 i;�;:r t4 ;j'v {; � 5.00 . ADSORPTIC?N SYSTEM LS 1 �1 � �� ?' j�:;;��c. :: �; 5�� Adsorption Treatment System Equipmer�t f oDP LS �` � ' 1 f� J V �t\J �,� iJ iJ V 4 . 4 l.` 5.01A p�Q��on Treatment System Equipment Saie Tax Savin LS 1 �{��}.� , y J� C�-J �.�� s�� BAGKYVASH DECANT and POLYMER SYSTEM LS i �;t oc� �� a'� �� Backwash R de Pum s ODP EA 2 19 'ld ii �`� '� S�: .�� 6.01A 8ackwash RecyGe Pumps Sala Tax sav�n EA 2 i� 3� 6 �l �{ t;,'� . 3 6.02 Backwash Residual Pum s ODP EA 2 I)� 5� o ;� � c c c 13 � 6.02A Backwash Residuai Pumps Sale Tax 2 Savin EA �` C �, Gu !(,;, o u t� o 6.03 p�ant Tanks O�P EA 2 �� v I� � �,� ��: <�% � 6.03A pecani Tanks Sate Tax Savi EA 2 `" 4l . fsi% �`� `i �.�� 6.04 Residuals Holdin Tank ODP EA 1 �� ,� � �;� c � c 6.E14A Residuals Hold+n Tank Sale Tax Savin EA � ( iO ��+ � t. �14 - G u 6.65 Po1 er s tem ODP EA 1 . g �,� c� �1 �.� C 6A5A pa� er S tem Sa#e Ta�c Savi EA 1 ,�y ,;.� , z, ;2 6.06 New ConVo} Panel CP 120 ODP EA 1 a a,, c p L cc, c�, 6.�A New Control Panel (CP)120 Saie Tax savi EA 1 �� t;4 l;� � o. c� cF �.00 CARTRIDGE FILTRATlON �S �; t f c � ��' e;� v c U �� Cartrid e Filter Vessel ODP EA � �' - ��. '� ; i� � 4 1% �- 7.01A Cartri F+iter Vessei Sa�e Tax Savin �A � �` �� 5 b. U� e.00 MEMBRANE FEED PUMPING LS i f�4 �.� ��; �� $ p� Membrane Feed Pum s ODP EA 3 ,� � y K� ! " '' �; U 8.01A Membrane Feed Pum s Saie Tax Savin EA 3 �� G,� ��', �� 8.02 VFDs oDP EA 2 � y y�, � I S �:3�C t% '= 8.02A vFDs Saie Tax Savin EA 2 ��j �� q��j ,� �, 9.00 REVERSE OSMOSIS SKIDS LS 1 �, C C �� c Lc �, v o 9.01 RO Membranes (ODP) EA 420 y� � ��Q , o c� 9.01A RO Membranes Sale Tax Saving EA 420 �,� ,� L � a�p , p-n Addendum No 2-DraR_110712.docx Page 16 of 18 1110712012 • a � ��•� CONCEN'fRATE RUMP LS i STATION �S,G�c �, 5, ecc,v� 10A1 Concentrate Pum s ODP EA 3 - 'YSG�t ��o 10.01A Concentrate Pum s Sale Tax Savin EA 3 ! '�_ 'i ,t�c: 10.02 pump Cont�oi Panei and VFDs (LCP 120) ODP EA 1 �� p c t� �� G£��: , G t� 10A2A pump Control Panel and VFDs (LCP 120) Sa1e Tax Savin EA 1 �}$ j�, Cf.r `'� `5 y�.�' G �� TRANSFER (BLEN�ED WATER) PUMPING LS i �.5 c�-> "�.S vc�,t�c• 11 pi Transfer (Blended Water Pumping) (ODP) EA 1 {�if�. f b� '71`'i.b0 11 01A Transfer (8lended Water Pumping) Sale EA 1 Tax Saving �t��F�� it��,�s� 12�0Q RO and ADMIN BUILOING lMPROVEMENTS �S 1 �� p� � �� c�a . cr o 12.p1 Main CP-1 i0 New Controi Pane! ODP EA 1 � jj �s0 ��'j „p�,� � t2.OtA Main CP-110 New Control Panel Sate Tax Savin EA 1 ��." p� S51 !i ��% �' 13.00 BACKWI�SM HOLDING TANK ts 1 �,,� zx> �- �� ; G D o o� 14.00 MATERIALS TE8TING ALLOWANCE LS i $35,Q00 $35 OQQ 15.00 EXCAYATION BELOW NORMAL GRADE AND BEDDING ROCK REFlLL CY 500 35. D� I`i � D� .�� s.00 M�AL BUILDING ANALYSIS ALLOWANCE LS 1 $10,000 510,000 SUBTOTAL (BfD IT'EMS 1.00-1d.00) r% 1��9 �5��.�� .00 OWNER'S CONTINGENCY 5% LS 1 :3�t39'7fi.7�`f �`�`G`� g%� `d� TOTAL BASE BID (GRAND TOTAL) (81D ITEMS 1.00-17.00): �� -5�.�� • • • ADDRIVE ALTERNATES A.1.00 RO 8 HSP BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS ADDITIVE AITERNATE NO. 1 lS 1 F-� �. 8 r;, C'v o r5 Subtotal Additive Alternate NO. 1 ��;�;� � c A.2.00 MEMBRANE CLEANING ADDITlVE AI.TBRNATE NO. 2 LS 1 ��'c• t� " A.2.01 Cattri Filter Vessei ODP EA 1 �� Lc.> C t- A:2.01 A CaRri e Fiiter Vessei Sale Ta�c Savin EA 1 ( 4[, �� t; � A.2.02 Ciea�ing Sysiem Hariz End Sudion Centriiu at Pu ODP EA 1 ��5 G�G . t� C A.2.02A Cieaning System Horiz End 3udion Cen ' Pum Sale Tax Savin EA 1 �.'� •.5 D.� � A.2.03 VFD ODp EA 1 j,j G O D, U� A.2.03A VFD Sale Tax Ssvi EA 1 .� �7 , t� � Subtatsl Additiw Aitarnate N0.3 �� y��, �; � A.3.00 � SYSTEM MEDIA EXCHANGE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE Nf?. 3 LS 1 3�� ` ��' �� ' A.3.01 As S tem Media E�cchan e ooP EA � 3� �'� � G� �' � A.3.01A As System Media Exchange Sale Tax �q 1 Savin E � / � � °�' � Subto�M Addtt�ve AlEernat! N�. 3 �. � ia l`� �. G� A.4.o0 DUAL MEDIA FILTER REPLACEMENT ADDITIVE AITERNATE NO. 4 LS i G> :� L d G� �� a A.4.01 Dua� Media Facer R iscement oDQ EA 1 �( .S G v0. f� � A.4.01A pual Media Fitter Replacement Sale Tax � g • EA 1 �? �t�,Ot� Subtotal Additive Alternate NO. 4 �(�, ��, G G A.5.00 BL.END WATER PUMPS ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 LS 1 S�+� �, L° � A.5.01 Blend Water Pum s ODP EA 4 I G�9�i 8� �� j l �.� A.5.OtA Blend Water Pum s Sale Tax Savin EA 4 1��L 'I `� � L� tr Subtotal Additive Aiternate NO. 5 c.� �J�� , y TOTAL ADQITiYE ALTERNATE BID ((iRAND T07AL) (BID ITEMS A.1.00-A.5.01A): '7 p�j t G:�. ,`� iv Section 11l - Generai Conditions • SCRUTI�YIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED A,'YD SUBhIITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILL'RE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIREfl� MAY DEEM YDUR S(1BMITTAL NONRESPUrVSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principai, subsidiary, affiliate, ar owner is aware of the requirements of sectian 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Campanies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engagin,� in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, �rinripal, subsidiary, afliliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Com�anies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, develaping, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, rniiitary equipment, ar any other apparatus of business or comrnerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (c�r Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principa}, • subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (S) catendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scr nized Companies with Activities in the Irar► Petrateum Sector List, or engages in . �ne operations in Cuba and Syria. � � /'" Aut r'� . ignature in M. Kiaus Printed Namc Pt�esident Titte Brande� Design-Build, Inc. Name of Entity/Corpor�xtio» • Sectionlii_2012.doc Page 4i of49 71l I/2012 C � � . � Section UI - General Condiuons STATE OF � � �x.� ..1 a� COVNTY OF i��r,�i'.s` ,�� The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 1� day of �� a ��g,� �- , ZO 1 �, by �zy y;_�, k � �, �,. � _ (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the �� r r� (titte) of i��r�aM4��, �')�t. � r..�,;s. E��1�� (name of corporation/entity), personaily known to me as described herein I�n o��% , or produced a k, t� pw n1 (type of identification) as identification, nnd who did/did not take . _ __._____---- an oath. ;;�" `�; wa�icv co� �� .� �av r.aa�+��s�, x co �,�- '9;�. r EXPIAE�: SeptBttsbe; 2t.2G?3 -�! `' 9anaee rnn,1�1 p�c�n; !trwerrr;tsTs NOTAR Y SEAL ABOVE Sectionlil_2b12.doc r � � .G , i �,� , � �--��_ � ��--, Notary Pubtic � 1VC.,�14.j ��p � � Printed i�iame My Commission Expires: � �� 3 G! � Page 49 of 44 7fl irz�t2 • Section tIl - Generai Conditions SCRL.iTINI2ED COMPANIES AND BL'SliVESS OPERATION5 WITN CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFIC'ATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SC'B�IITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, tNAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITT,9L NONRESPO.NSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, cornpany, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287_135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum �nergy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to pariicipate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies vuith Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purpases specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba nr Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, mainEaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, rea{ property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and • 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, indiyidual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Cleanvater in writing, no later than five {5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed Qn the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Sc r�ized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, ar engages in tne operations in Cuha �nd Syria. / • Aut ignatur � in M. KGaus Printed Name President Title Brandes Uesign—Build, Inc. Name of Entity/Corporatlon Sectionlll_2012.doc Page 48 of 49 7/l 1;2012 • Section Iit — General Conditions STATE OF �� ,,. � �� U • , COI;NTY OF C t�, �.i..>_ � ; The foregoing instrument was acknowiedged before me c�n this i� day of /�� c ti t,., � �_ , 201 �, by �, �, 4,„ k 1 � t,. ; (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the �'r e 5 ; �l. �: � (title) of ,>r•u r�,� -, ;'� F ;,� �;- ! ::.� � : � � _Z+;; (name of carporation�entity), personally known to me as described herein 1S n�� ti, or produced a k �� L w a! (type of identification) as identification, and who didldid not take _ an oath. jjt"� "�. NANCyCO � - - � �.�"`. �;a 3 FAY COhtl:�+IS�O�J it GD 591�;i'r �i+ EiC�IRES:Sepemt�ir2!.20:3 :±; �'x � HondeC Tt�o tvofary P�.{��:c :fnderwraers NOTARYSEAL ABOVE Sertionlil 2012.doc t 1 � �J } '' 7 i4 ��-^t,x.- �-'�-�.-- Notary Public �� i�.�>c. � � L c: t r Printed Name My Commission Exp[res: �1 ,� t 1,� t� 3 Page 49 of 49 7; ll /2012 • CER'�1FtCATE tJF LiABfLtTY IlVSU�iANCE I oer;a,`�;z'�""' T!�! CEllTIFICATE 1� IiSVEO Aa A ARATTER OF INFQlIMATtON ONL!' ANO CQNiLIts NO RIOi1TS UPOR+ TME CERTtFtCATE NOtDER 'TH� CEilTIiiCATE OQE� I�lOT AFftR#AATtYELY �f NERiATlVEIY AN{ENd, EXTEMD OR ALTER TME COVEMGE AFFORdED 6Y TNE PO�lIG1E$ iiELQW. 7Hi= C�liT�1CATE CF q�!lU1tANGE OOES kdT CONaTlTUTE A COMTRACT BETWEEM TME 1�3ttING tiVSURER(l1j, AUTHCIIl�D RElNtE�ENTATNE Olt'RODUCER, Ali1D THF CER?�ICATE MOL�ER. IM : N IM aftt ho1Nr is at ADDRW�IAL tWSUREO� tM �IS1iry(i�s) mcat b� �nde►Md. N 8tlSROGAT101Y FS WANEQ. �u�jM:ct to fhe lams snd oon�it{ens sf th� poSky, pMln poltai�i n�y nqufn +n endo►ssm�nt A slab�nt an Mh ceRifttab do�t not eonMr ri� as Ih� CiKI�{6t1f hOW! Ht IMY Ot SYCh M .�eaouea Steven T. Solomon � WO�itCornp Partners "i01E . (8i 3 747•748Q ' ` . (819 7�f7«749; 702 TtLLMAN PL PLAI�iT CITY, FL 33566-7169 � us►o�or�eoveN►a wKs �wsu�o Brandes Design-B�td, tnc. 2 t 51 N. E. CcacFtman Rd. Clearvvater, Ft 33765 TH15 IS 10 E�itTlfY TWtT THE POIICIES OF MSURANCE USTED BEIOW WWE BEEN f53UW Tp TME lTiSURW NiMAED ABONE FOR T11E PO{.ICY Y81qOp �ICATEO. NOIYMITF4STlY�DING ANY RECUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OP ANY CONfRACT OR OTHER OOCUMIENT WITH IiE5PEC1 TO WFMCN fHIS CE�1TFfiCl1TE �AAY BE lSSUED OR INAY PERTAMI, TME INStlRANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIffS DESCRIlED 11ERENV IS SUBJECT TO IALI Tt� THIilAB, EXCIIJSIOMS AND CONDITION3 OF SUCH POLICIES. 41MiITS SHOWN MAV HAYE BEEN REDUCED EY P/UO Cl.AIAAS. __ _ �_ __ . _ _.__ _� _._ . �,otx�Ers "� i�iier €�v -- . _ — � TIRE OF N1itIRMICE . . .. , f�LlR. MMD POI.lC�' Mf1M�ER �_- 11NAiDG1V1'PYl : �NDD/In'Y1'1� �s .'�_ �Rl1l �IR/ILRI' f/1CM CCCf�ICE � 1 co�atw a�na ►wilm . � cwMS.+uoe ❑ occuR �wur ��a v� rn ,:_ :�:r�..�-rr.i I AtV1� A[iT0 I ��, Alt OIYNEO SCFEDUIED ' AIJf� /ILIT� �a�n � ruri��D uw�u cw , �� i � u� c�wnws�uoE o � , Mrw�sca�wE�►now Q830-31655 ; rwo �.ora�r tryaRr �� YfM � I aisio��.t o�r �� r �� Y 03! 13/2012 I 03/13/2013 ��z�a�� o�wu �d►rF i ■OOIL1' M41tN11� �.OM�on) ' t 8001LYINANtY�YraaddwMj, f � � s s � oc�NCE______,_-=_s �►cc�o�� 13 E.l DL� - VOiJCY IWIT 1.OdM�.000 � .UU��.000 1.Od)_000 OEiC1�iEf11 OI 0/iMT10Nf J�OCRTIOMf I Y�NCIEf (Alad� AC01� 4�1, A�/IfMrl RMwM� f�M�i. ll �w qw Y w�wq item 3. A.: Worto�r� Comper�sation Msuramce applie� to ths Wo�lcers Comp�naalbn Law oi the siatea list� hare: Fbrida BID PURPOSE ONLY � �IOtiID ANY Of TNE A/QYE DEiCI1MED /OLICIEi �E CAMGt11ED �EA1111B TME EXii1N1T101M a►TE TMBIE6f. NOTIGE WR.L f! 9EiJV�11� M/ ACCOItDAN�E �YRI� TNE /CI.IC�'rRCYIilONf. CBfpl Sipe....... � � �'y� BRAMID02 Oi� !D: I i'�„°RO� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSUR�ANCE �`;,°ro;,'z ' THMS CERTIFICATE iS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY /lN0 CONFERS NQ W(3HTS UPON THE CER71i1CATE NOLDEN.• TWS CERTiFICATE OOEB NOT AFFIRMATIYELY OR NEOATlNELY AMEND, EXTEND OR AITER THE COYERACsE AFFOROED BY TF4E POI;,lCtES BEIOW. THIS CERT1flCATE OF iNSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTiTUTE A CONTRACT 8EIWEEN THE ISStHNG INSURER{8� AUTHCJItIZED ��NTAIINE OR PROCUC�R, ANO THE CERTIFlCATE HOtDER fYPORTANT: N tM earNfi�r Rold�� is an AQOITIONAL INSURED� tA� pdicy(Hs} �nust b� �ndonad N SUBROOATION la WMfED, suli�kl to �� i^� �� P��7►� aKN� poNcNs a�ay nquin an �ndorsan�ni A stabrt►ent on Mis c�Wlc�ls do�s nd coMar �hb to �i t�eMlks� hold�rin Nw �tweh �Mors�m • "'�"+�� a� �-sz6-� s s� a s�w„ or R�d., r��. . P. O. Qox 1 T�i B i 3-22i-1 �i ��. f i,� �� TamPa� FL 3N72 - ---- .'-- �+� Brand� D�sf�n Bui�, Inc. dbs Saulh�rn IndustHal Ei�ctrlc 2151 NE Cosclyntsn Rd Clqrw�t�r� Fl 33766 Cas of 10'�Oi1 THtB IS TO CERTIfY THAT THE POlIC1E3 OF IN8URM1C6 LISTE� BELOW WIVE BEEM iS5UE0 TO THE INSURED NAMEO A60VE FOR TME POLICl/ P!E:RK lNDICA7E0. NOTVVITFISTANdMlG AMf REWNREI�NT, TERM pFt CQWpIT1pN pF ANV CONTRJICT OR OTHER DOGUMENT W(TH f�SPECT TO VN�1lCH TH CERTIFICATE MAY BE iS3UE0 � MAY PERTNN, THE INSURAHICE AFFORDEO BY THE POLICIES DESCRtBED HfREtN 13 SU6JECl' TO All THE TE'sRM EXClUS10NS AND CONDITIpNS OF SUCH ppLIC1ES. i.NA[TS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEk REDUCED RY PA1D CVJAAS. __ -- -- _ _---- -_ trPC oF pnsuwwcf � i �� i j ' EACN oCCURREWCE f 4:,000 A: X��ncu�tcc�t�►w_u�ewry CLP�bf7fTD 03f1�/12 � �3/1317� �� ---� t--+--t 1 � � E...m.rwl � s 140 �._ _; CW MS-A�t4pE � OCCUR I I � MED EXP (A�r on� p�nere) i � A A r�rK �o�� uwar R POLICI' �� AUT01A0911E UAl1{M X� M�Y AU70 � ALL OYVNED 1— � AllTOT+ �! FuRED AtJT� ~ �111�.L111W �xaa w� iwo i i � PERc �. a . �� [!:,;��i.1 vrM j ❑ NfA a�soru� a �ov iwuRr I s ( �Emp Ben. � �' = tx �(Eaaw.�j__ _..._ S __ __�! 03H 3H 2( ONt 3111 �lY INJURY (Wr penonr ' 3 � � BOOIIV IMJ(JRY {PN �oot7rrt) f �� _.� _, ._ ___._.___ .__.,.. C?�r kdd�Ml S �._ � �_.. S E�cr+occ��,+c� s 5,� �_-------_ __..__.___----.. a�/1,I1Z i O3/13/13 � AC�f3REGATE ! �{�_5�� _ � �____ I : �' ' E1_EACHACLlQEM ' f . .__�_ s. �. as�sE -� p,tPtov�; � r E L 015EASE - POI�IC'f LINIT i c �swrst�.ic I �TBSOSSaa►»� _ ; o��is os��s��s �aX�,n A � LPS6i7170 ' 03H2112 ' 03/13M3 ;Oed OEit�110110R OrlIY1110Mt ! LOCA110N: f VEMICIES (MYtA ACWID 1�1� MtllfonM M�w1w �� M�n q�N h ipults/j @IOPURP „ Bld Pu►vOSfi ONLY •N i1l0U�D ANY Or TFIE AlONE OElCRloED ►CClGti it CAMCEtIiQ �61�011E TME E7U�/lATION OATE TNEREOF. NOTICE WfLL �E DEt111[ItBn IN ACCCI�IIffCE WITl11ME ►OIICY r1101A{IOM�. � � �� m 1lii-20t0 ACOR ACORD Zi (2010l9i) The ACOItO nam� and lopo a» t�isbnd marks of ACORO /lil N.hls erstrV�d. INSTRUCTIONS FOR • ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 09-0018-UT 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1— Plant Expansion project. 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. 3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work. 4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to: Ciry of Clearwater Attention: Ed Burke, Construction Project Coordinator Phone: 727-462-6126 Fax: 727-462-6989 P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: • Andrea Beane, Senior Accountant Phone: 727-562-4950 ext. 7206 Fax: 727-562-4951 E-Mail: Andrea.Beane@myclearwater.com L_J ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 09-0018-UT � In reference to contract # dated between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as foliows: 1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "D". 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement. • CITY OF CLEARWATER: CONTRACTOR: Date: City Manager/Owner ATTEST: City Clerk (City's Corporate Seal) APPROVED AS TO FORM: Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney Date: Contractor ATTEST: Secretary � ATTACHMENT "A" � FROM: CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER) TO: (CONTRACTOR) OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1- PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CONTRACT # 09-001&UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as welf as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site • prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmfess the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-F�rnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Contractor shatl maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into • Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing ali warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or � subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the supp(iers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. • 12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner- Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor. �� ATTACHMENT "B" • FROM (CONTRACTOR) T� (SUBCONTRACTOR) OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CONTRACT # 09-0018-UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other appiicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to • their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect al! shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract. 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. lf the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into • Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subcontractor. • 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Fumished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's � direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. • ATTACHMENT "C" • From: (CONTRACTOR) To: (SUBCONTRACTOR) Project: REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1— PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CONTRACT # 09-0078-UT This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. 2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. 3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier For: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Cleanivater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same • to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. • ATTACHMENT "D" • PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS • • General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. 2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number. 3. Project Managerwill then request requisition approval from the Finance Director. 4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). 6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: 7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order: a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering/City Manager e. Purchasing/for processing only f. Finance/for processing only PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO • REQUISITION and RECEIVING/INVOICING CITY OF CLEARWATER REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT No. 1- PLANT EXPANSION PROJECT CONTRACT # 09-0018-UT Contractor: CEI: Addendum to Aareement for Construction: See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement. Process procedures for tax savings: 2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor. 3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s): 4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition. 5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sendinq to the Purchasina Manaqer, the schedule will be forwarded to the Owner's Representative, • CEI and Contractor's representative forapproval. We will need the e-mail address for the Contracior's & CEI's contact person(s) for this process. 6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O). Process procedures for request to requisition forms: 1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) 2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. 3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions. 4. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%. 5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. 6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. 7. City staff will complete the charge code line. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of • system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge code. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachment should include estimated quantities and tvpes of materials. Cost information is oqtional. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available: :� E'] c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the appropriate charge codes. The requesting o�cial will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's authorized procurer(s): The o�cial approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: NOTE: Anv materials ordered bv the contractor that are not included on the Citv's issued purchase order or anv amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the Citv issued purchase order MUST be separatelv ordered pursuant to a purchase order directiv between the supplier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separatelv from the materials supplied pursuant to the Citv issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Request to Requisition to increase the amount of the ODP purchase order for that supplier. Process procedures for receivinq and invoicinq: 2. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verify the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of . 3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached, must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions: a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not in excess of that amount. b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier. c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or approvals as all other invoices to be paid. 4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invoices. 5. After approval the Contractor will forward the originaf invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's Owner Representative: City of Clearwater Construction Division 410 N. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33755 6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing. 7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice. 8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition • • r� �J and at the approvai of the Contractor. 9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the • appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O. Closinq of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. C� u � � � ' �� • � U �' ��'"�,.��` ; � Engineering Department • General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City/State/Zip: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City/State/Zip: Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER will complete Phone No: Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Qu811t1t $, etC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOt81 Date: Requesting Official Title and Organization - Contractor Approving O�cial Title and Organization — C.E.I. Services Date: Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&t. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. • Page 1 of 2 9/27/2010 LL ..�.. '.v : � � � s�' ��I�� ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER (Continuation page) Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: Units Detailed Description Price Per Llne # QUatltlt $, etC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOtal Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwate�'s Records Management Program. Page 2 Of 2 • • u • • Appendix A APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT 7/31/2012 • • • FINAL REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION CLEARWATER RO PLANT #1 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Driggers Er�gineering Services Incorporated • _ ., _ - -- --. ._._ .---..., October 12, 2011 Camp, Dresser & McKee, Inc. 1715 N. Westshore Blvd. Suite 875 Tampa, Florida 33607 Attention: Ms. Jennifer L. Grissom, P.E. RE: Final Report of the Geotechnical Investigation Cleanvater Reverse Osmosis Plant #1 Clearwater, Florida Our File: DES 116718 Dear 3enrufer: Pursuant to your authoriza.tion, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. has • completed a supplemental geotechnical investigation for the additions to the proposed Water Treatment Facility. Results of our field and labora.torystudies are included in this report together with owrgeotechnical design and construction recommendations. Results of our studies atong the pIanned pipelineroute are contained in a separate report. � Ithas been our pleasure to be of service to you and we trust, if youhave anyquestions conceming our report, you will not hesitate to contact this office at your convenience. NTK-REP11167 ] Sa-rev Copies submitted: (4) Sa[asota Phone: 941.371.3949 Fax: 941,371.8962 sarofficeC�driggers-eng:com Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVI�q��INC. �,� �q�PS T. �p�g°�s � ��2��G/Gt ' � ��'`� ��,�G�NSF '4�C� ��si I : � • Na.45529 �'.fi% � cholas T. Korecki, P.E. ,, Z.' ; Senior Geotechnical Engine�ay * : �� /*' 1 � ' �` � � FL Registration No. �5529 '� ,o•, STATE OF . •.�¢ � � �` ��i ��' '�E OR��• �� e`'�c�s•�-,...•�G�� O��p ti/Q�A�-�'� a '� ��t'��ee�m°" Clearwater Tampa 12220 49th Street North • Clearwater, Flenda 33762 Rhone: 813.948.6027 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.409� Fax: 813.948.7645 ciwofflce�cfriggers-eng.com Ypaoffice@driggers�eng.cam i TABLE OF CONTENTS Paee PROJECT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . .1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROGRAM STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FLAT PLATE DILATOMETER TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 LABORATORY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS CLEARWELL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 • NEW GROLTND STORAGE TANIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5 LIGHTLY LOADED MAT FOTINDATIONS . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 5 BUILDING ADDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 BURIED STRUCTUItES (OPEN CUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 BURIED STRUCTURES (WET METHODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SLAB ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • g STRUCTURE SUBGRADE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 9 APPENDIX Driggers Engineering Services incorporated • i 1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION It is our understanding that the proj ect wili involve construcrion of a clear well storage tank, a new ground storage tank to replace the existing tank, arelocated boosterpump, arelocated backwash holding tank, a potential lifr station, additions to the existing building and an expansion ofthe e�sting stormwater pond. Details of each structuxe, as provided to us, are summarized as follows. 1. Clearwell Storage Tank "Ell" shaped, 500,000 gallon capacity, wall height of 18 feet, supported on a mat foundation at about2 feet bellow existing grade, but possible partial burial at about 6 feet below existing grade. Contact Pressure about2 ksf. 2. Ground Storage Tank A new circular 5.5 million gallan ground storage tank will be construeted to replace the existing'S.0 million gallon tank. The new tank wil] be located atthe site of the existing tank and have a smaller footprint (160 feet vs.l$0 feet). Soil-contaet pressure • will increase by about 700 psf. • 3. Booster Pump Supported on a mat foundation with a maximtun: contact pressure of less than 1.0 ksf. 4. Sackwash Holding Tank SuppoRed at grade with a contact pressure about 1.0 ksf. 5. Building Addition Masonry Building with a slab on grade. Maximum wall and column Ioads presumed to be on the order of 0.5'kip per faat and 1 SO kips, respeetively. b. Wet Well Lif� Station Wet well about I5 feet below grade. 7. Retention PondExpansion Bottom depth to match existing pond at about 2 to 3 feet below existing grade. Existing pond has underdraiins. Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 2 • GEOT�CHNICAL STUDIES STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SPT)BORINGS - E'rght (8) Standard Penetration Test (SPT} borings (PB-1 through PB-B) were requested and were.advanced to the requested nominal depths of 20 to 75 feet beneath present grades. The borings were positioned in the field by our geatecfinician utilizing the site plan provided to us withreference to the existing structures. The approximate locations are illustrated on the attached Plate I. Logs of the borings are presented in the report attachrnents indicating visual and estimated Unified Soi1 Classification versus depth. The Standard Penetration Test (SP1� nnethod of sampling was utilized in our studie� to secure core samples forvisual classification and to develop Standard Penetr�ation resistance datareflective ofthe strength and bearing capability ofthe soils penetrated. A brief description ofthe SPT method of sampling is also appended for your review. The upper 8feet ofeach boringwas advanced with hand auger equipment as aprecaution against enco�uitering buried utiliiy lines. A Geo-Durham hand conepenetrometer was utilized in advance of the • hand auger to provide a measure of the relative density or consistency of the soils penetrated. The appended hand auger logs depiet visual descriptions and estimated Unified Soil Classification corresponding to the indicated soil straturn as well as a�raphical depiction of the hand cone penetration resistances. FLAT PLATE DILATOMETER TESTING - To complement the SPT borings and allow a better characterization of the compressibitity characteristics of theloose sands and very soft to sof[ clays evidenced byborings PB-5 and PB-6, two (2) Flat Plate Dilatometer soundings were performed adjacent to the previously conducted SPT borings. Gra.phical depictions of the SPT blow cotmts and Dilatometer modulus values with depth are also included in the report appendix. LABORATORY TESTING - A limited Iaboratory testing progrann was also undertaken to aid in characterizing,the engineering properties of the subsurf�ce sails. 0ur laboratory tests primarily included grainsize analyses, organic content tesf.s and Atterberg limits determinations. The resulis ofour laboratory tests are included in the report attachments. • Driggers Engineering Services Incorporeted • GENERA.LIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The exploratory borings have identified an upper unit of fine sands with variable silt, clay and organic fines typically comprising the SP and SP-SIvi Unified classifications. Standard penetration resistances suggest that the sands aregeneral ly in a loose to medium dense state of relative densiry, with some dense sands evidenced below about 8 feet in boring P$- l,below about 18 feet in borings PB-2, PB-3 and PB-6 and beIow about 2$ feet in boring PB-8. Note that some of tke sands exhibited an increase in organic fines. Visual examination of the rec�vered samples and results of laboratory testing suggest that the organic cantent is generally low. The sands between about 14 and 1$ feet at boring location PB-3 had a slightly elevated organic cantent of 7.3 percent, by weight. However, these sands e�.ibited a medium den�e reIative density. Accordingly, these sands would not be expected to exhibit increased compressibiliiy. Below the sandy soils, clays were encountered ta the completian depths ofthe borings. The clays • were typically firm to stiff, with hard variably cemented clays evidenced beiow about 42.5 feet at boring location PB-7. However, soft to very soft clays were penetrated at around33 to 38 feet atboring location PB-5 and below about 33 feet in borings PB-6 and PB=8. Groundwater was encountered at depths ranging from 5.1 to b. $ feet below existing gades in the borings. The differences are likely due principal ly to vari ations in surface grades. We would anticipate that normal seasonal high groundwater levels may occur at about 2.5 feet below present grades. GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION AND FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Our geotechnical studies have identified subsurface conditions which are considered suitable for support of the planned structures. Spec�c recommendationsfor the various structures are presente�i in the folIowing sections_ CLEARWELL STRUCTUR� - For the clearwell structure, a soil contact,pressure ofabc�ut 2,000 pounds per square foot has been estimated. Results of tlie more sophisticated in-situ Flat Plate Dilatometer testing indica.te highersoi}modulus values in the loose sands tl�an the SPTblow counts wouId suggest. Dilatometer testing within the clayey soils suggest some compressibility. However, stresses within the clays from the anticipated applied loading are anticipated to result in orily modest settlemeni. Therefore, results Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 • of our studies indicate subsurface conditions which are suitable for support ofthe planned structure near or slightly belaw present grade, provided modest settlements can be toIerated. Settlement belowthe center ofthe structure is estimated to not exceed 1.25 inches for an embedmentof2.0 feet and I.S inches for an embedment of 6 feet. The'slight increase in estimated settlement for the greater embedment results from the base of the foundation being closer to the soft clay unit. Settlements around the perimeter are estimated at halfofthe above �alues. Subgrade modulus values of 11 pci and 9pci are recommendedfor design of a mat foundation at depths of 2A feet and 6.0 feet, respectively It is also important to recognize the source of the potential settlements. Most of the expected settlement is due to compression of upper principally sandy soils and, therefore, these settlements should occur virtually coincident with stress application during initial tank filling. The remainder of the settlements resulting from compression of the deeper clayey soils would be more time dependent. Nevertheless, we would;expect that the rnajority of the total settlementswould occur within aperiod of 30 to 64 days following tank filling. Even though the above noted movernents can probably be tolerated without structural distress, we would certainly suggest giving consideration to piping connections to allow for some modest rotation. In • this regard, onemay wish fo eonsider incorporation of appropriate couplings that can a11ow far nr�odest joint rotation. Performance Observations - The prediction of totaJ and dii�erential settlements is based upon analysis and judgement utilizing available geotechnical information. We would certainly recommend estabIishing elevation points throughout the structure to permit observations of settlements during initial tank filling and following completion of filling for as 1Qng as practical. We recommend allowing for at least 30 days of monitaring prior to draining ofthe tank. In this way, one can conveniently detect any localized areas where settlements may be projected to exceed predicted levels so:that remedial measures, if needed, can be effected. Specifically, elevation readi.ngs should be obtained to an accuraey of at least t0.002 feeton a daily basis during tank f lling and perhaps weekly thereafter until settlement has virtually ceased. Some adjustment in the observation frequen�y may be warranted pending the resuIts of early stage; ob�ervations. It is very important that these seitlement observations be referencecl to a relatively fixed benchmark. A good candidate for a fixed benchmark would be the presence of any deep weIl casing or something that may be firmly embedded or gronted into the underlying limestone • Driggers Engineerirtg Services incorporated • 5 formation away from the tank structure area that would be very unlikeIy to sustain any movement during the observation period. If no such benchmark is available, there would be merit in drilling and instatling a casing into the underlying rock toserve as a fixed benchmark far future reference. GROUND STORAGE TAN'K - We anticipate that the new tank would be CROM tank constructed within the faotprint ofthe existing tank following its demofition. Since the existingtankhas been inplace for many years, the increase in soil contact pressure is estimated at about 700 psf. Therefore, maximum totat settlement on the order of 1.0 inch would be anticipated at the tank center. From previous experience, we would anticipate that the predicted settl ements would be within the range that can be tolerated considering CROM-type tank construction which is contemplated on this project. It is also important to recognize the source ofthe potential settlements. About one-third ofthe expected settlement is dueto compression ofprincipaIly sandy soils and, therefore, these settlements should occur virtually caincident with stress appli cation during initial tank filling. The remainder of the settlements resulting form compression ofthe clayey soils would be more time dependent. Nevertheless, we would • expect that the maj ority of the total settlements would occur within a period of 30 to 60 days following tank filling. � Even though the above notecl movements can probably be tolerated without structural distress, we would eertainly suggest giving consideration to piping conr►ections to allow for some modest rotation. In this regard, one may wish to consider incorporarion ofappropriate couplings that can allow for modest joint rotation. Site;preparation will require removal ofthe existing tank; foundations and piping, followed by vibratory compaction of the subgrade soils and any fill which may beplaced to develop the foundation grade. Recommendations for fill placement and compactian are presented in a subsequent section of this report. LIGHTLY LOADED 1VIAT FOUNDATIONS (Booster Pump Station and Baclr��ash HoldinE Tunk - The mat foundations for the lightly loaded BoosterPump Station and Backwash Holding Tank may also be supported on compacted subg�ade. For the slab supported structures, we wauld suggest consideration of a ma�cimum peak allowable soil bearing pressure ofup to 1,S 00 pounds per square foot and a subgrade modulus of 20 pounds per cubic inch for a mat foundation design. Settlements were Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • estimated an the order of 0.5 inch for the foundations based upon the presumed loads and average contact pressures nofexceeding about 1,000 psf. Since the principal source of'the settlementwill be compression of fine sands below the depth of the compacted backfill, m�st of the compression related settlernent is expected to occur with the first application of the structurat dead loads. Post construction settlements are anticipated to be less than half ofthe above value. BUILDING ADDITION - With proper subgrade preparation as discussed subsequently, shallow foundations forthe building additions may be designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of up to 2,500 pounds per square foot. Provided proper subgrade preparation is enacted, foundations designed based upon this allowable:soil bearing pressure should experience maximum total settlements on the order of 3/4 inch, with differential settlemeMts on the order of O.S inch. Since the principal:source of the settlementis compression of shallow depth l�ose fine sands, most of the settlement should occw with the first applicatifln of the structural dead and live loads. While these settIements are not considered excessive, it would be prudent to consider the use of liberai steelxeinforcement in the f�undations and within grout-filled masonu-ycells. Such stiffening ofthe structures should help minimi�e cosmeric cracking due to minor settlement. • BEL4W GRADE WET WELL PUMP STATION �OPEN CUT) - It is contemplated thatthis below grade structure will probably be constructed within either asloped excavation or a properly designed and constructed sheeted excavation. It must be recognized that vibratory installation and extraction of sheeting and associated disturbance can result in unexpected settlement. The contractor should, therefore, consider ways and means of construction to minimize vibrations following setting the structures to line and grade. The contractor should be mindful of any potential effects of his ways and meanson any adjacent existing piping or facilities that are to remain functional or vyhich may have been previously constructed. The ' contractor should coordinate with the project civil design engineer and the County relative to identifying any : critieal structures or piping that could impact his means of construction. Whiile no boring was requested far this sh-ucture, resutts of the borings conducted on the site suggest that the bottom of the stnicture at I S feet below grade may be within medium dense sands. In g�neral, soils representing the SP to SP-SM and SM Unified Soil Classification excavated for construction eould�tentialIy be stoekpiled and re-utilized as backfili followzngconstruction. However, these soils will require carefia} moisture content confrol to permit replacement and compaction to project specification requirernents. We recornmend adj usting moistiu-e content to with f2% of optimum moist�u-e as defined by the Modified Proctflr moisture density relationship ofASTM D-1557. It is impartant to recognize that the • Driggers Engineering Services incorporated '' • `:• i 7 silty to clayey sands containing appreciable silt and clay or soils with organic finesmay be dif�icult to rapidly adjustmoisture contents for efficient replacement and compaction. These types of soils are also very weather sensitive since they must generaliy be mechanically aerated in order to reduce.moisture contents. Regardless, alE bac�ll soils should be compacted in accordance with project specification requirements. Whiie it may be advantageous to place compacted gra�el within the lowerportion af the backfill around the structure, particularly in wet conditions, excessive gravel thicknesses should be avoided. If employed, the gravel working platform should consist of a hard durable aggregate such as hard limestane ar granite free of significant fines content that could result in a reduction in the drainage characteristics of the blanket_ It is further suggested that the gravel working platform have a grading no coarser than an FDOT#57. Settlement ofthe overlying backfill is likelywhere the soil fines eventuallymigrate into the voids within the gravel. Accordingly, if an initial lift of gravel is'used, we recommend placing a�eotextile between the gravel and backfill soils to help minimize soil migration. Post-constniction stresses that are produced by buried stt-uctures are generally minimal due to the fact that the contact pressure from the weight of the structure and contents is generally less than the overburden soil pressure prior to construction. However, during intermediate stages of construction, vertical stresses can occur during the dewatering and backfill placement that are not insignificant. Nevertheless, we wouid anticipate that settlements would be Iess than 1 inch with pmper eonstruction and with soils existing below the anticipated structure depths of about l 0 to 15 feet. The contractor must exercise appropriate ways and means to maintain pIumbness afthe structures during all backfill construcUon activities and to rnonitor elevations on the top ofthe structure during and after backfill to confirm that settlement is complete prior to making finaI piping connections. In general, we would anticipate that settlements would occur very rapidly follawing placementof the backfill and completion of constnzction. Appropriate dewatering is a critical aspectof construction of thewet weIl so as to ailow proper preparation c�f the subgrade and appropriatebackfilling and compaction of surrounding soils. Improper implementation of dewatering can result in de-stabilization of the subgrade soils whieh can cause enhanced total and differential settlement, lt is recommended that the dewatering system consist of a properly designed weIlpoint systerri: Due to the sUatified nature of the soils and the required depth of dewatering, we would sCronglyrecommend that the contractor retain the services of a qualified dewatering consultant to appropriately desig� and monitor performance of the dewatering systern. As a minirnum, the wellpoints should be fully slotted and encased in properly designed filter media for m�re effective dewatering. We recommend installing at least one { I) piez_ometer observation well to perm'rt checking the effectiveness of the dewateringsystem priorto initiation �fexcavation activities. The dewatering system should be installed Driggers Engineering 5ervices Incorporsted . so as to maintain groundwater ]evels to no less than 1.S:feet below the planned bottom of structure elevation to accommodate the recommended undercutting io place 18 inches of gravel at the excavation battom, as discussed above. ALTERNA:TE BELOW GRAI)E CONSTRUCTION METHODS - Alternative concepts for design and const�uction of the wet well would involve utilizang a wet caissor� method or drilled shaft construction technology to consixuct the shaft in awethole envirorunent. Thewet caisson methodessentially involves a subaqueous excavati on from within the interior of the precast wetwell that affords the opportunity for sinking the wet well sequentially as the excavation progresses to the required elevation. This concept requires the incorporation of a tremie seal or tremie plug at the bottom of the excavation that not only provides pump station support but also affords needed uplift resistance and water-proofing during the subsequent dewatering of the interior of the wet well, With the drilled shaft rnethodology, the drilled shaft contractar could install the required thickness of a steel casing to the required depth utilizing drilled caisson : drilling technology. Such technology would includeutilization of a mineral slurry drilJing mud to advance the casing to the required penetration without the need for dewatering. U�on advancing the casing to the requixed penetration, the drilled shaft contractor would further advance the borehole within the interior to the depth required to constnict a tremie seal for uplift resistance and to accommodate dewaterin� of the • interior af the casing for pump station cor�struction. In summary, there are various techniques whi ch could be considered`for wetwell construction and there may be others depending upon the ingenuity of tl�e contractoz. Regardless, depending upon construction phasing, special considerationmust be given to minunization of groundwaterlowering and vibrarions below any adj acent facilities supported at grade that could be detrimental to the existing facilities. lf such methods are considered, we would be pleased to review the contractor's excavation and construction plan. .. CONV�NTIONALSLAB=ON-GIZADECONSTRUCTION - UJithpropersubgadepreparation, conventional floor slabs may be supported on the compacted backfill soils. Subgradepreparation must include a program of vibratory compaction to develop a uniform density of no:less than 95%0 ofthe Modified Proctor maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557. Care must be exercised to maintain a smooth, compacted surface prior to concrete placement. Une�en surfaces orruts can prodtace abrupt clianges in the c�ncrete thickness that induces stress concentrations within the concrete resulting in cracking. Also, all utility trenches should be properly backfilled and compacted to provide consistent bearing charactexistics. • Driggers Engineering Services tncorporated u . '• 0 STRUCTURE SUBGRADE PREPARATIOlV - FolIowing clearing ofthe existing surface vegetation, the surFace should be compacted to a minimum density of at least 95% of the Modified Proctor value per ASTMI?-1557. Backfillandfillsoilsplacedtodeve}oppadgca.ciessh�uidconsistofinorganic,granu]ar soils comprising the SP to SP-SM Unified classifications. The excavated soils appear to be suitable for this purpose. The backfill should be placed and compacted in nomina112 inch lifts to the above minimum density standard. Appropriate moisture control to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content is recommended in order to ensure both stability and density within the compacted fill. Guideline specifications with respect to the general requirements for subgrade and fill compaction as well as recommendations for quality assurance inspection and testing services are included in the report attachments. Driggers Engineering 5ervices lncorporated ';� '!,• � ArPEZVnTx RECt3MMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION;DESIGN PLATE I- BORING LOCATION FLAN STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS LOGS OF HAND AUGER FORTION OF SPT BORINGS RESULTS OF DILATOMETER SOUNDINGS SUMMARY OF LABORATORY 'TEST RESULTS GRAINSIZE ANALYSES METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATiON DESIGN • Driggers Engineering Services I�corporated � RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FOUNDATION DESIGN SUBGRADE PREPARATION Each structure area and for a distance of at least 10 feet beyond the outside perimeter should be stripped of all surface vegetation, pavements, near-surface organic soils, root concentrations, existing structures and other objectionable material. The exact depth of undercutting should be determined by a representative of the soil engineer in the field. Groundwater levels should be controlled to at least 2 feet below the maximum excavation depth. The stripped, undercut surface should be uniformly compacted using a vibratory roller having a maximum dnun widthof 36 inches. Subgrade compaction should consist of aminimum often (l0} overlapping coverages in a cris-cross pattem throughout the entire structure area, plus the minunum 5 foot margin. Excessive vibration should be avoided in proximity ta existing structures. 3. A qualified engineer ortechnician shotild bepresent during initial compaction operations to check proper compactorperformance and compaction procedures. The compaction should be performed • at a speed equivalent ta that of a slow walking pace. Density tests should be used to control subgrade compaction. At least one (1) density test should be performed for every 2,500 ft.2 at the s�arface of compaction and at a depth of 12 inches. No fewer than two (2) compaction tests shouId be conducted at each level. The excavated footing areas shall be compacted with a hand-guided vibratory compactor having a minimum plate widtti of 24 inches or the footing width whichever is less. No fewer than ten (] 0) coverages shall be effected. Compaction tests shall be conducted to check that a density ofnot less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density has been maintained. F1LL OR BACKI�ILL PLACEMENT Fill or backfill required to develop proposed grade should be inorganic, clean to slightly silty fine sand, free ofunsuitable debris_ Soils with a Unified Scil Classification of SP to SP-SM would certainly be considered suitable_ • • 2. The fill should be placed in lift thicknesses not exceeding 9 inches with each lift campacted to a density of no less than 95% ofthe Modified Proctor maximum dry density. Moist�are content within the fill soil shouid be contralled to within f2%ofoptimum as established inASTM D-1 557 to help ensure development of both density and stabiIity during compaction operations. No fewer than six (6) to eight (8) coverages should be made on each lift using the above specified heavy, vibratory roller. 3. Density tests should also be used to control fill placement. At least one (1} density test should be performed for each 2,500 ft.2 per fill lift. No fewer than two (2) tests should be performed per lift. 4. Careful inspection and compaction tests should also be performed to confurn required uniformity of compaction prior to slab-on-grade construction. FOUNDATION DESIGN 1. Shallow foundations for buiidings may be designed based upon dead plus live plus wind load requirements. An allowable soil bearing pressure of2,504 pounds per square foot is suggested • in sizing of foundations. 2_ We recommend a footing embedment ofno less than 16 inches below finished grade, but excessive embedment shouId be avoided to take advantage of the surfcial compaction_ 3. Slab-on-grade construction may be utilized. To maintain slab support, excavation for utilities and foundations should be backfilled and compacted in lifts with a sma11 compactor. Before backfill is placed, all water and loose debris should be removed from the excavations. 4. A bearing wall footing width ofno less than 16 inches and calumn width of no less than 3 feet is aiso recommended. � • • • PLATE I- BORING LOCATION YLAN Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated � � J • 0 x cn Z D O � A D °zv m� OZ C i O D Z � � O F' Z �� D � -N-I ZO � Z � \ 0 �n $ s � m �z o � m -a 0 R.D.B. / N.T.K. �� CM FILE NANE: N:\AQTYAN\PUTEt\f17N—Clry—RO—{_pg_��\yps_RJ P�ANT—YpP.DNC DRAWN BY: R.P.B. DA7L' S/:a/i! SHEET TiTLE _ PROJECT N0. � BORiNG LOCATION PLAN PREPARED BY PRO.�CT NAME • � °' CLEARWATER RO PLANT #1 DRIGGERS'�CORPORAtTED CLEARWATER, FLORIDA DES 116718 SHEET N0. PLATE I '� • STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS . Driggers Engineering Services lncorporated • . • ur-si��r�� C�vu��v��t-tiNC� SERVICES INCQRPDRATE=D Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-1 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1 Clearwater, Florida Location 5ee Plate I Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To — Depth 21.5' Date 5/23l11 Water 6.8' 7ime Date 5l23/11 �-- vy Z w � STANDARD �'" O W � a� PENETRATION TEST _ � SOlL DESCRIPTION �n z a �� W a BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. W y Q O a� SAMPLER-140 L6. � � m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 2Q 40 60 80 0 4�� r� Dark gray Fine SAND with grass roots (SP) tt . Li ht ra Fine SAND SP Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Tan Fine SAND SP 5 f•�:y��!: Brown weakly cemented, s(ightly silty Fine SAND � ��:�. ��r.�;;; (SP-SM) Ct M �; Dark brown Fine SAND SP �'�' Dark ra sli htl sil Fine SAND SP-SM tr� sr- 13/14/17 c�� r-� Dense to very dense very dark brown G`�� slightly silty Fine SAND 10 :�a± z�a:t with finely divided organic materia! (SP-SM� 21/25/33 C��'kF: C t� 9 :C CU7�C w � w �� 25/28/25 c�= i�• cni:c �� 1'G. 15 ��?•� �u..� :��; �: 31/20/19 :�,". D:�.. r�rt: cr� i.r Dense dark brown to brown Fine SAND with trace of finely divided organic material (SP) - 20 }: ` : ;: 10/14/19 25 30 Remarks Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INC�RPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-2 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1 Clearwater, Fiorida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To Depth 26.3' Date 5/23111 Water 5.1' Time Date 5/23/11 Z w � STANDARD u�. � W � a� PENETRATION TEST = m 0. SOIL DESCRIPTlON � W� BLOWS/FT. oN 2" �.�. a �� O a� SAMPLER-140 LB. p � N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: � tO 10 20 40 60 8d 0 '-�� 2" As halt Pavement rti�:i: Brown slightly silty Fine SAND with trace of rock fra ments SP-SM Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) Dark brown Fine SAND SP � Brown Fine SAND (SP} Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Laose brown Fine SAND (SP) 2/5/5 10 Medium dense to loose 315/7 gray to dark gray Fine SAP1D (SP) 2/4/5 ;��;: Medium dense very dark gray cemented Fine SAND 15 s` � with finely divided organic material (SP) 6/10/8 t�=s ��ti. : ,,.k..: Dense to very dense - very dark brown to dark brown Fine SAIVD (SP)� za 10/17/21 25 30/41/50� ` 0.3' Penetration 30 Remarks Casing Length � • • • CJ • � DRIGGERS ENGINEERlNG SERVICES INC(�RPDRATE�D Project No. DES 116718 BORlNG NO. PB-3 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1 Cfearwater Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Compietion Depth To — Depth 26.5' Date 5/23/'! 1 Water 5.5' Time Date 5l23111 � ,� cn z a � STANDARD O W � PENETRATION TEST = m-� SOIL DESCRIPTION u� � z a �� 3� a BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. Q N�¢ O a� � SAMPLER-140 LB, �� m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 EIO p�� : : 4" As halt Pavement Brown slightly siity Fine SAND with trace of rock fra ments SP-SM Dark brown Fine SAIVD (SP} Li ht ra Fine SAND SP 5 Brown Fine SAND SP Light brown Fine SAND (SP) -rr'•' Loose brown Fine SAND (SP} 2/415 10 �oose gray Fine SAND (SP) 2/2/4 1/3/4 Medium dense very dark brown organic, 15 silry Fine SAND (SM/Pt) 51617 Dense to very dense dark brown Fine SAND (SP} 20 9/15l21 25 25/46/50" ' 0.5' Penetration 30 Remarks Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SEF�VtC.;�S rivc..,ur�r—jur—�ti i�u Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-4 Project Clearwater RO Plant#1, Ciearwater, Florida Location See Plate l Foreman M.J. Compietion Depth To Depth 36.5' Date 5/23/11 Water 5.9' Time Date 5/23/11 Z w � STANDARD � � J SOIL DESCRIPTtON y cr z PENETRATION TEST = m� �� W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. � � � O a � SAMPLER-140 LB. o � c4i� m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: N CO 10 20 40 60 80 0 Dark brown and gray Fine SAND (SP) Light brown Fine SAND {SP) Very light brown Fine SAND (SP) 5 Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 4/6/7 10 Medium dense brown Fine SAND (SP) 3/5/7 3/5l10 ,;,�.=�r Medium dense to dense very dark brown cemented, 15 �� slightly organic, slightly silty Fine SAND 7/11/13 —___ s��i (SP-SM) - �cc�� a-xK � X:C C�3� �W'!: G!+l,�:� lr�1i: ZO CA ?. R��y 10l16l15 t� i� aha: r• ea}» aa�:t c,�s. .��;�.� G�i: 25 !�� '°_-� 14/21 /26 �n� - d�i�11:�f :.r..�t :t� �t - Medium dense very dark brown Fine SAND �:%�� with finely divided organic material (SP) 30 "'�.� === 8l10/10 c� r• f::: ; Firm light brown sandy CLAY (CH) Rema rks Casing Length • � U � • • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES lNC�RPDRATE:D Project No. DES 1?6718 BORING NO. PB-4 Project Ciearwater RO Plant #1, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To Depth 36.5' Date 5l23/11 Water 5.9' Time Date 5/23/11 �. J N z a� STANDARD u- PENETRATfON TEST � � S O I L D E S C R I P T I O N cn � Z a�� 3 J a BLOWS/FT. ON Z" O.D. � O a � SAMPLER-140 LB. o �� m Q p HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: N� 10 20 40 60 $0 35 . Firm light brown sandy CLAY (CH) 1/2/4 40 45 50 55 60 65 Remarks Casing Length � DRIGGERS ENGINEERfNG SERVICES INCORPDRATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-5 Project Ciearwater RO Piant #1, Cfearwater Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Compietion Depth To Depth 41.5' Date 5/20/11 Water 5.2' Time Date 5/20/11 � y z a N STANDARD � -� � 0 PENETRATION TEST = m a SOtL D E S C R I P T I O N � w W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. a �� O a 0. SAMPLER-140 LB. O y N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: � tD 10 20 40 60 80 Brown Fine SAND SP Light gray Fine SAND (SP) Very light gray Fine SAND (SP} 5 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) Light brown to tan Fine SANQ (SP) Loose brown Fine SAND (SP) 2/3/4 10 '. - 2/2/5 ii;,:; Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND 3/5/6 =�:�' with finely divided organic material (SP} ;Y;:r Medium dense dark brown cemented Fine SAND 15 ¢ 3� with finely divided organic material (SP} 8�12fT2 i•?:•Y :��= .. w... Medium dense to dense brown Fine SAND (SP) 20 : 14/14/14 25 14/20/24 "_ Medium dense very dark browri Fine SAND ��= with finely divided organic material (SP} 30 '"'k� = 9/14/10 �v`►4 S: C:. Very soft to very stiff brown (1) Remarks WH = Weiqht of Hammer � (1) and liqht brown to light brown sandy CLAY (CH)_ Casing Length � • • • � • DRiGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATE=D Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-5 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Clearvvater, Florida Location See Plate f Foreman M.J. Completion � DePth To Depth 4i.5' Date 5/20/11 Water 5.2' Time Date 5/20/11 F,., z w � STANDARD u- -� w 0 a' � PENETRATION TEST = m a SOIL DESCRIPTI�N N�� BLOWSlFT. ON 2" O.D. a~. �� O d a SAMPLER-140 LB. o � N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 �BO 35 ' Very soft to very stiff brown and light brown to fight brown sandy CLAY (CH) WH/WH! WH 40 5/8/12 45 50 55 60 65 Remarks WN = Weiqht of Hammer _ Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERiNG SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-6 Praject C4earwater RO Plant#1, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To Depth 46.5' Date 5/23/11 Water 5.3' Time Date 5/23/11 Z w � STANDARD � —' w o a� PENETRATION TEST i m a SOIL DESCRIPTION �� B�OWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. W � Q O a� SAMPLER-140 LB. p N�n m a p HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: N� 10 20 40 60 80 � � Li ht ra Fine SAND with roots SP Very light gray Fine SAND (SP} 5 `.f� j:,��. Dark brown siightly silty Fine SAND (SP-SM) Loose to medium dense brown Fine SAND (SP} 2!4/3 10 4/6/7 Medium dense gray Fine SAND (SP) 6/6/5 ;M;��: Medium dense very dark brown slightly silty 15 c�s c Fine SAND with finely divided organic material �orL (SP-SM) 8/11/14 �c� � � ��9:c: �Ai•: Dense gray to brown Fine SAND (SP) 20 12/20/21 25 15/22/23 Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND with trace �= of finely divided organic material (SP) 30 �x ::::':.: 5/7/7 •:::ik Very soft brown sandy CLAY (CH) Remarks WR = Weight of Rod Casing Length � � r� �_J • u • DRIGGERS ENG[NEERlNG SERVICES INCORPORATE=D Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-6 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Clearwater, Florida Location See Plate i Fureman M_J. � Completion Depth To Depth 46.5' Date 5123/11 Water 5.3' Time Date 5l23/11 � � Z Q � STANDARD � � � SOIL DESCRIPTION �� Z PENETRATION TEST = m a w u.r BLOWStFT. ON 2" O.D. ~ �� p a a SAMPLER-140 LB. o N y m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 �30 35 Very soft brown sandy CLAY (CH) WR/WR/1 Very loose dark gray clayey Fine SAND with finefy divided organic material (SC) Very soft brown sandy CLAY (CH) 40 � WRlWR! WR 45 2f1/1 50 55 60 65 Remarks WR = Weight of Rod _ Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERfNG SERV{CES INC�RPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-7 Project Ciearwater RO P(ant #1, Clearwater, Florida Location See Ptate I Foreman M.B. Completion Depth To Depth 76.5' Date 5/20J11 Water 5.3' Time Date 5120/11 Z w � STANDARD � -� w 0°' y PENETRATlON TEST � � a SOIL DESCRlPTION �� a BLOWSlFT. ON 2" o.D. a y. � O a SAMPLER-140 LB. v N N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: N� 10 20 40 60 80 � °�`-�� Light brown Fine SAND �=�� with trace of rock fra ments SP Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) 5 Brown Fine SAND (SP) Loose dark brown Fine SANQ (SP) 5!4/5 10 ''� ��: Loose dark brown Fine SAND t}.::: 3/3/4 -�:^r' with finely divided organic material (SP) - - Loose dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 2�4�6 ��= Medium dense dark brown weakly cemented 15 C:«;� Fine SAND with finely divided organic material s�.y �SP� 7/10/17 i :1�.{� i :t.^ Medium dense brown to brown and light gray Fine SAND (SP) 2Q 4/6/8 25 7f10l13 =- - Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND r� �: with finely divided organic material (SP) 30 '�' ;;,,'--. 9/10/11 .:;::; Firm to stiff brown sandy CLAY (CH) Remarks WH = Weight of tiammer Casing Length 41.0' • � • � • • �� DRIGGERS ■ ENGINEERING SERVlCES INCC}RPORATE�D Project No. DES 116718 BORING N�. PB-7 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Clearwater Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.B. Completion Depth Ta — Depth 76.5' Date 5/20/11 Water 5.3' Time Date 5/20/11 F- y Z w� STANDARD � m � S O t L D E S C R I P T I O N �� Z PENETRATlON TEST o- W w BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.Q. w �¢ O a� S A M P L E R-' t40 LB. � y m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 Ft0 35 . Firm to stiff brown sandy CLAY (CH) WH/1!4 _ 40 3/5!7 Hard light gray to light brown sandy CLAY (CL) 45 10/20121 ( 50 13/2Q/40 Hard green cemented CLAY (CL) 55 16/25l29 .' sa�• 10117l25 .�. � 65 50* " 0.5' Penetration Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 41.Q' �! - DRIGGERS ENGINEERlNG SERVICES iNCORPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-7 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Ciearwater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.B. Compietion Depth To Depth 76.5' Date 5/2Q/11 Water 5.3' Time Date 5/2Q/11 z w � STANDARD u~. —► � 0 a� PENETRATION TEST F � a SOIL DESCRIPTION N w� BLOWS/FT. oN 2" o.�. n. � O a a' SAMPLER-140 LB. o � N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: y tO 10 20 40 60 80 Hard green cemented CLAY (CL) 70 28141/31 .� Very stiff light brown sandy CLAY (CH) 75 12/13/11 80 85 90 95 100 Remarks WH = Weiqht of Hammer Casing Length 41.0' � LJ • • • CJ • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATE=D Project No. DES 116718 BORING N0. PB-8 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Clean+vater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To — Depth 46.5' Date 5/20/11 Water 5.7' Time Date 5/20/11 � J N Z a� STANDARD O W � PENETRATION TEST = m� S O l L D E S C R I P T I O N v� � z F a w W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. W � Q O a� SAMPLER-140 LB. � � m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 8�0 '� � Li ht brown Fine SAND with rock fra ments SP Li ht ra Fine SAND SP Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) 5 � Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 5!5/6 10 : V`:; Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND 5l8/13 ` � �,-�: f�a :� with finely divided organic material (SP} � �� 7/11112 :� h•- :�: Loose brown Fine SAND (SP) 15 4/4/5 Medium dense to dense brown and dark brown to dark brown Fine SAND (SP} 20 : 7/10/14 25 : 14l17/24 Densa brown Fine SAND (SP) 30 - 10/15/17 Very loose brown clayey Fine SAND (SC} Remarks WN = Weight of Hammer WR = Weiqht of Rod Casing Length 21.0' DRIGGERS ENGINEERlNG SERVICES INCORPC�RATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-8 Project Clearwater RO Plant #1 Clearwater, Florida Location See Piate i Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To Depth 46.5' Date 5120/11 Water 5.7' Time Date 5/20/11 Z w � STANDARQ � -� W � n' � PENETRATION TEST � -� SOIL DESCRtPTION cn � Z i m a w W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. a �� O a a SAMPLER-140 LB. o N N m Q O HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: �� 10 20 40 60 80 35 Very foose brown clayey Fine SAND (SC) WR/WH/ WH Very soft to very stiff brown sandy CLAY {CH) 40 � WH/WH/ WH 45 5/8/14 50 55 6Q 65 Remarks WF! = Weiqht of Hammer WR = Weight of Rod Casing Length 21.0' • � �_� • � . LOGS OF HANn AUGER PORTION OF SPT BORINGS • Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERlNG SEF-�vic;�5 iNl.;ut—tt-�ur—tH i C:U �IAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Cieanvater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser & McKee fnc. Ciearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro'ect No.: DES 146718 6.8' 5/23I11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.J.lK.A. 5l23/11 8.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Ptate 1 PB-1 .� HAND CONE TfP ELEV. DEPTFt m RESISTANCE (TSF) (Fn DESCRIPTiON (FT) g y 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Dark gray Fine SAND with grass roots � {::�,:' �SP) � r^� , _ �. � r : vU } Light gray Fine SAND (SP) + Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Z .. . fi + + Tan Fine SAND (SP) 4 Brown weakly cemented, ;�:�:�; � • + slightly silEy Fine SAND (SP-SM) f:t:E1i � a:i�S i � 't7;1'l. � .1:i:1 i . 6 :I ;I:�F, 1 �:i: � �1. i•1.► } 1 } :`�.� • Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) + Dark gray slightly silty Fine SAND �� "• � + t:r.t1: (SP-SM} 8 ; :,:; F ; LE6END: 10 •} Denotes Pertetration Resistance frt excess of 50 TSF 12 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INC�RPORATED - HAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Clearwater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser 8� M Kee Inc. Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro'ect No.: DES 116718 5.1' S/23/11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.J./K.A. 5/23/11 g, � LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: 5ee Pla e I pg_Z � HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF} (F� (p7) � N 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 2" As halt Pavement � Brown slightly silty Fine SAND �:� !�� with trace of rock fragments (SP-SM} r:': �� adri}+ + Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) + 2 • . } + Dark brown Fine SAND SP t Brown Fine SAND (SP) 4 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 6 8 LE6END: �} Denotes Penetration Resistance 10 in excess of 50 TSf 12 14 �� • • • DRIGGERS � • �� ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATE:D HAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUND3NG LOG PROJECT: Ct.{ENT: Cfearwater RO Ptant #i Cam Dresser & McKe Inc. Clearwater, Florida WATER TABIE: DATE: Pro'ect No.: DES 116718 5.5' 5/23J11 TECHNICtAN• DATE: COMPLETtON DEPTH: M.J./K.A. 5/23/11 8.�' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Plate t Pg-3 .� HAND CONE TtP ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) �F� (F� � N 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 '�0 4" As halt Pavement Brown slightly silty Fine SAND .b•�= `• -" with trace of rock fra ments SP-SM ��' ��° 9 i ) a=�: t � } 1'i� h . • Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) + 2 } . t + Light gray Fine SAND (SP) 4 Brawn Fine SAND SP -- Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 6 $ - . LE6END: 10 " •� Denotes Penetration Resistance in excess of 50 TSF 12 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERiNG SERVICES INCORPORATED. HAND AUGER BORWG/HAND CONE SOUNDWG LOG PRQJECT: CLIENT: Clearwater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser & McKee Inc. Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: ' DATE: Pro'ect No.: DES 116718 5.9' 5/23/11 TECNNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.J./K.A. 5/23/11 8.0' lOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Ptate I PB-4 � HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DEPTH � RESISTANCE (TSF) �Fj) DESCRIPTIOW (FT) � � 0 10 20 30 40 5p 60 70 Dark brown and gray Fine SAND (SP} d • } ' + . } Light brown Fine SAND (SP) 2 . } Very light brown Fine SANQ (SP) 4 � . � 6 � - + Dark brown Fine SAIVD (SP) . } 8 lE6ENDC l0 - •} Denotes Penetration Resistance fn excess of 50 TSF 12 14 C� • • DRIGGERS � • � ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATE=D HAND AUGER BORiNGlHAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Clearvvater RO Piant #1 Cam Dresser & McKee lnc. Clearwaler, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro' ct No.: DES 1167t8 5.2' 5/20/11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETtON DEPTH: M.J./M. B. 5J20/11 8.Q' LOCATION: TEST Nt1MBER: See Plate I PB-5 .� HAND CONE TIP ELEV, DESCRIPTION DEPTH m REStSTANCE (TSF) (FT) (FTj � y 0 10 2D 30 40 50 60 70 Brown Fine SAND (SP) � Light gray Fine SAND (SP) � } Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 t + 4 . { + Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 6 .. + Light brown to tan Fine SAND (SP) . } .. + 8 LEGEND: 10 •fi Denotes Penetration Resistance ?n excess of 50 TSF 12 14 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCDRPORATED • HAND AIJGER BORING/HAND COAIE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CUENT: Clearwater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser & McKee Inc. Ciearvvater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro"ect No.: DES 116718 5.3' S/23/11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.J./K.A. 5/23l11 LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: ee Plate 1 P - � HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DEPTH � RESISTANCE (TSF) �F.� DESCRIPTION (F� } � 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Light gray Fine SAND with roots (SP) � ,,r F� � Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) t 2 4 Dark brown slightly silty Fine 5AND '� :i. �: � (SP-SM) ; :,: F',: aa:ir- hi•1{• 7:I:L'�J Brown Fine SAND (SP) 6 t 8 - LEGEND: •} Denotes Penetratfon Resistance �O in excess of 50 TSF 12 ?4 • C J . • • � ■ ,■- - � - - � ENGINEERfNG SERVICES INCORPORATE;D HAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: C�earwater RO P{ant #1 Cam Dress r 8 McKee Inc. Clearvvater, Fbrida WATER TABLE: DATE: Pro'ect No.: DES 116718 .3' 5 0l11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.B./M.J. 5/20/11 8.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See Plate ! pg-7 � HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIPiION DEPTH m RESISTANCE (TSF) lFT) iFn � y 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 7'0 Light brown and brown Fine SAND �,: �:v with rock fragments (SP} =�: ; Q: ;q.�t : :o :9�: P. 'h Very light gray Fine SAND (SP) � 2 � .. � } + 4 6 Brown Fine SAND (SP} + f �- 8 -- LE6END: 10 •t Denotes Penetration Resistance in excess of 56 TSF 12 , 14 � DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES I(�ICORPORATED • HAND AUGER BORING/HAND CONE SOUNDING LOG PROJECT: CLlENT: Cleanvater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser & McKee Inc. Ciearwater, Fiorida VYATER TABLE: DATE: Pro'ed No.: DES 116718 5.7' S/20/11 TECHNICIAN: DATE: COMPLETION DEPTH: M.J./M. B. 5/20f1 t 8.0' LOCATION: TEST NUMBER: See PI te I PB-8 .� HAND CONE TIP ELEV. DESCRIP7iON DEPTH m RESISTANCE {TSF} (FT) (FTl g N 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Light brown Fine SAND : o°�. with rock fragments (SP) :� � :. + Light gray Fine SAND (SP) } } Very iight gray Fine SAND (SP) 2 t t t 4 6 Light brown Fine SAND (SP} 8 tEGEND: 10 �-h Denotes Penetration Resistance tn excess of 50 TSF 12 14 • • ' � • RESULTS OF DILATOMETER SOUNDINGS Driggers Engineering Services incorporated • � • . . � . .. 1 1 1 1 �f 1 •1 / :1 � �� ■ � � � I ■'� � �� ii:n�u��n� �mu�� md� � i�� in � � � � � ■�n�► . ��u�� p �� ■ ,� � � � � � . �� v � , �� ., �p 45 50 Note: SP = Fine SAND CH = Sandy CLAY 45 50 PLATE If PB-5 depth N (desi) 0 9 11 t3 t6 21 26 31 36 41 7 7 11 24 28 44 24 0 20 depth DMT-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2� 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 1463 t329 941 1146 1214 1468 1729 61 51 123 206 1A5 101 t34 140 451 340 141 262 • • • • • � SPT Blow Count�BPF Dilatometer Modulus�TSF 0 t0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 1 10 100 1000 10000 � ; j ' i ��— � �lii•.; ! �!!;!" � ';fi i' ' � I t ��j___.—� . _ 1 i i i f�. ii - I ri! t� i i � � i � _.i___ � 1 �(�!�. � li�ll I , `I 'I �!"i � � , . k � � . . � � �. -�� . �.It�� ! . ° . I � i I - I -r ; 5 i �` i 5 "'i f. i: � l i'} ti . 1 i l �l�Li �;{i;; � c�i; � I . . :��[ i - t Iti � ��. � � 1 i f � � � �� .��.! � � t�� 1 ' � � i � � � �.�r �i��<<i � I�iIM'� � i j i i I i �if.�t i��hl ;i i "� 10 � 10 , ,. � i , t;i �i�� ; i i � � �i,l�i � ��i I I I �,i i j; i i' ' ' lii�i!� I ��! � i.� 1� i��;�: ` � � � I i � ,�i� , F[' !I '� i �{:';�:".' � � i i � �i i � � II�' i ! i��;:� 15 4 � �� t5 � i;i,�i i I�'�' I,I I�;;�`.�; ; I � � � I � , I � . : ! ; r :� i � I ! `�'.� �- -! � i j � �":E� � � �"`!EI �' ' �' f�: : � � � �:;'�� ' � i� ', ' �'`'�' SP Zo , , : � { � i:i�i: � � � �� f !I � � ; �. � � 2o i. ��.�� r � ; j, ��, r I i ; L ; � � � � ��. (! lii:.{ 1; � Q ' ` i I I �.� �i � I� i;��4� � !, i d f ` ' � 0 , � � ;! i�.-- �—�r � i �i ;Ii � � i E' I I- �--, �iltf�i 25 j� (. 25 �� I �., „ �� I,. - � 1 � f 1 � � � ('�.ik j j 11�•iI __ - ' ; i ' _'_ ." ' � i�.�. � t,�� ; � � --- 30 � � � � � : � 30 � i � ; I : � • �:�' � , f�� 4 � i � 1 . � �it � �'t�l�� - . . i j . � �..�, :'i CH 35 35 4' I.i; � . . � � �i !: SC • � ; • �.:' ��I � --- - � : ; , I,:' CH 40 , � ; 40 F • ;:i� : � �;�,i�; ,: : , � � � � t� i �i�i�� ' ' . . . i � ----� � i' f i �; t � 45 . 45 � i � i• � i � � {, - i ��i � t f � • -- - i . ,� I � ' 50 �isl 50 ' ' Note: SP = Fine SAND CH = Sandy CLAY SC = Clayey Fine SAND PLATE IIf PB-6 depth N (desi) 0 9 11 13 16 21 26 31 36 41 46 7 13 11 25 41 45 14 1 0 2 depth DMT-1 7 1590 8 136t 9 1043 f0 1108 11 1196 12 1801 13 1759 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 92 34 30 35 15 36 35 37 55 38 44 39 34 40 32 41 55 42 27 43 76 44 180 45 662 46 44 47 52 48 1031 � • �1 I u • • SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS � �J Driggers Engineering Services incorporated • • • SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS nTTERBERC t30RING pgpTH l)ESCRIPTION �'�' � � a G r LIMITS P.P. U.C. CON. C.S. ORG. pH CI. SO q RES. NO. (ft) �� (�� ih) (PP�^) �PPm) (Qhm-cm) LL PI, SL PB-I 8.0-D.5 Very dark brown slishtly silty Fine SAND t 3.0 with finely divided organic material PB-3 I5,0-16.5 Vcry dark brown organi0. silty Fina SAND . 7.3 PR-4 21.4-26.5 Very dark t:own cemented, • q.q stightly organic, slightly siiry Pinc SAND pB.S 3p.q.31.3 Vcry dark brown �ine SAND • i,g with finely divided organic material PB-6 8.0•9.5 Drown Pine SAND • I'4i-6 20.0-21.5 Grfly Fino SANf) . PB•6 40.0•41.5 firown sandy CLAY 48.4 3R 19 •� 51.3 ' PB-7 45.0•4fi.5 I.ight grey sandy CLAY 43.0 59 24 +• 48,5 PA-R 35.p-34.3 Brown clayey Fine SAND 36.7 39 20 •• 35.8 W % _ +'a(p�fl = :,g = �L = 'L = iL = ',P. (ts� _ �r II Wattr Cpntent Dry Densiry Specific GrTvity Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Shrinkage Limit Pocket Penetrometer � i�,-�„rs.�an r�..,�.�«��., .....,..�.....�� ...,. � r. -......... Con. G.S. (+I) ORG. (%) CL (ppm) 504 (ppm) RES. (ohm-cm) . = Consolidation Test = Grainsize Analysis (Hydrometer) = Organic Content = Total Chloride _ 'Total Sulfate = Lab Resistivity �° See Test Curves = o,.� .,r �� , r�„ ^nn c•., . .......... . .......::6 ..... ..,.., ....,... CLiEl�1T: PROJECT: FILE Camp, Dresser & McKee, lnc. Clearnater RO Piant �{ 1, Clearwater, Florida DES 1 t 6718 � • r� �_J GRAINSIZE ANALYSES Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • � • ia 9 8 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SE1iVICES, INC. � 0 !O ' ,�1,,...�'��,,...-1,",.■-��' ",.■._",,,.■._ '. "�".■. t1�,,..._I,,,,...,_"",.■._„1,,.■-� . .'t,,,..��"",.■-_"„■..., 't ,.■-_�',,,.■._ ,' �,,.■. ,"".■.-"",.�.�"��,.■._"1,,..._ , . ��,,.■.�"",.■._"",.■..-",".■- 1�",..._ ' , "1,■.._'1�,,.■._�1�'■..�.-"",.■.�1",,.■.� . � � „"■.■-_�t"■.■.��1,,,....-�,1,.■■�t1,,,.■._ • �'1��.■._'�",�-_'t,".��'�",.■._�",,..._ , 1 ", , . ■ . _' �' , , . ■ - _ I � � 1, ... ■ -' „, ■ . ■. _ „' , , . ■ . _ , �1„�■.�'1' ,.■.�,��- ■'�",•■-�"�•■._ :. , „�„■■._''1,,.■-_' „ ■ ",�.-_'1",�■._ , , 11 ��Ii11��1�� ■ A ��IIN� �� .11��1111��111�� ■ 1��1111�� .. . . � - • �i ' �m�� . -- � ��r � �� - , , �, �. � � �� _. �....�.. , �a s � � � 3 6 � � 5 � C}� 1' 4 � 3� 2 0 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 0 io to w t � w; r a 5o x a U C 60 �' v Y a 70 � 90 Q 1� I I I 1 1 I I I I 1 I f� I� I I I I I I I I I � i! i i I � i i i i i i t � i � � i � too �pp 5p IO 5 1 0.5 0.1 0.05 D.OI 0.005 0.001 Groin Size in Millimeterz GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse Medium Fine lumber (kO�h Natural � L P L p � Classification Mastu►e CLIENT: Camp, Dresser 8� McKee, Inc. PB-3 15.0' - 16.5' ery ar rown organ c, silty Fine SAND PRO�ECT: Clearwater RO P1ant #1, Clearwater, Flortda FILE: DES 116718 • i • • ia �c � �c � 3 « � c � � C � � � 3( X 1( C Grein Sixe in Mdiimeterz GRAVEL SAND S�I.T or CLAY Coarse Medium Fine �umber Q�p}� N�tursl � � P� p � Classification Mdsture CLIENT: Camp, Oresser & McKee, Inc. p6-4 25.0' - 26,5' Very dark brown cemented, s19 htl or anic, sli htl silt PROJECT: Clearwater RO P1ant N1. Fine 5AN0 Clearwater, Florida FIIE: DES 116718 • DRIGGERS ENCINEERING SERVICES, INC. � 0 0 0 t 0 o� S o � a J C A � a 0 q � JO • u < i w 3e � c ' i� Cu yV , a � 7 { DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 0 �o Fs7 � � so � �, 0 50 '�' a U C � yV 4 70 eo 90 t00 1 • Grsin Size in Millirr�ters RAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse Medium Fine iumber Oepfh �O""'� L L. P. L P. 1. Classificatio� Masturc CL.IENT: Camp, Dresser & McKee, Inc. PB-5 30.0' - 31.5' ery ar brown F9ne AND with finel dlvided or anlc materiat PROJECT: Clearwater RO Piant #1, Clearwater� Florida FIt,E: DES 116718 • . • • • • ORIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, ONC. � -- „ IIYIII�i�i�i�Yiill�l�r��i�i':�l�iil�I�IIIYI��lill��r� . . III��IIIi��llt=�■��1111��■��1111�� IIII��IIII��r1111u\��1111�■��1111��■�� 1111� ��111��1111��1��1111�■��IIII�■�� 1111�� 111 ��1111��1111��1111�� , i��s�� w��■�� ■�� ■��i�� i�■��■i�� , ��■��i�=�� i�� r��i= ��■i�� iiii�■ii�i��■��_��i�� ■�i��■�� i��■ i��■��=��i��■■� 111��1111��1111��► IIN ��1111�■�� ■��■�r�� ►�� . ��n��i��■r�■■i�u��■��i��a�� in��■■��i��i■��■�� , , . � . _ � � s , , , , .. � � �, , , i i i i . � ■ , _, . ■ ... _ , , , , _..... � n�� ■■� �� n� ■� � ��■��■�� ■i�iu��■ �� . iiiiiiii�iiiiiiiiiiiuiiii e�i�� .. Gram Sue �n Mnumeters GRAVEL SAND SILT or CI.AY Coarse Medium Fine �umbn Depih Natunl � � P � P. � Classifitation Moisture CLIENT: Camp, Dresser & McKee, Inc. PB-6 8.0' -9.5' Brown Fine SAND PROJECT: Clearwater RO Plant ql, Clearwater, Flor9da FIIE: DES 116718 0 ►o � m � .0 3 0 �x a � �� a ,o � � �� ia 9 e � i d ; E � LS c � � yV � 0. 3 2 1 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. 0 10 20 �o � d �0 � a c �x � Y � V a �o � 90 pllllll I 1 I 111��1 I I 1 ��l�� :�� t ��Il�t �� 1 II00 lpp SO 30 S l 0.5 0.] 0.05 0.01 O.00S O.Op1 Grain Size in Miitimeters GRAVEL SAND SILT or CLAY Coarse Medium Fine �umber De th Nstunl L � P. L P. I. Cbssificatbn P Masture CLIENT: Camp, Dresser & McKee, Inc. PB-6 20.0' -21.5' Gray Fine SAND PROJECT: Clearwater RO P1ant #1, Clearwater, florida FILE: DES 116718 • • • • . • METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering 5ervices lncorporated � A ST NDARD PENETR.ATION TEST AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-15861 In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viscous drilling fluid is circulated throvgh the drill rods and bit to stabiIize the borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out of the borehole. IJpon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split-barrel sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes calIed, is attached to an N-size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A l40 pound hammer, attached to the drill sh-ing at the ground surface, is then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successive}y raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using a rope and "cathead" assembly. 'The number of blows is recorded for each 6 inch interval of penetration or until virtual ref»sa1 is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the finat 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value of the particular material at the sample depth. . After penetration, the rods and sampler are retracted to the ground surface where the core sample is removed, sea]ed in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for veri�cation of field classification and storage. SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually cIassified as to texture, cotor and consistency. The Unified Soil Ciassification was assigned to each soil stratum per ASTM D-2487. Soi] ctassifications are presented descriptively and symbolicaliy for ease of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradual. Consistency of the soi} as to relative density or undrained sheaz strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration resistance values of "N" values and industry-accepted standards. "N" values, or blowcounts, are presented in both tabular and gXaphical form on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphicai plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity in soi3 consistency or linear variation between sample intervals. 7'he borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring tocations and sampie intervals only. Variations in subsurface conditions may o�cur between boring locations. Groundwaterdepshs shown represent Nrater depths at the dates and time shown only. The absence of water table information dces not necessarily imply that groundwater was notencountered. • Rev.912011 _ __ May 7, 2012 CDM Smith 1715 N. Westshore Blvd. Suite 875 Tampa, Florida 33607 Attention: Mr. Nick Charnas, P.E. RE: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation Pond Expansion Borings Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant #1 Clearwater, Florida Our File: DES 116718 � Dear Nick: � uant t • Purs o your authorizat�on, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. has completed the geotechnical investigation at the requested locations for the planned pond expansion at the stabjeet site. Presented herein are the resulis of our field studies together with a discussion of subsurface soil and groundwater conditions encountered. PROJECT INFORMATION We understand that it is planned to expand the storrnwater pond along the west side of the site. The pond will have a bottom elevation at E1.+66.0 ft, which is about 2 to 3 feet beneath present grade. The pond will also include an underdrain. GEOTEC13NlCAL INVESTIGATION PROGRAM SOIL BORINGS - Two (2} borings (PB-1 and PB-2) were requested and advan'ced ta the req�ested depths of l Q feet beneath present grade. The borings were positioned in the field by our geotechnician utiiizing the plan provided and with reference to existing site features. Locations of the borings are illustrated on the attached Piate I. • Saresota Clearwater • Tampa Phone: 941.371.3949 P.O. Bax 17839 • Clearwater, Fioi�da 33762 Phone: 727.571.1313 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.4090 Fax: '72"'.572.4090 saroffice � driggers-eng.com clwoHice � driggers-eng.com tpaoNice �driAgers-eng.com � � i � i � � I � � 2 The borings were manually advanced with hand auger equipment. Logs of the test borings are presented in the report attachments. Ground surface elevations on the logs were estimated from topographic inforrnation on the site plan provided to us. The logs contain visual soil descriptians, estimated Unified and AASHTO Soil Classifications corresponding to each sample interval, and the measured groundwater levels in the borings. GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS SOIL CONDITIONS - The test borings have identified an upper unit of fine sands with some shell and gravel which represents fill placed to develop current grades. The fill and underlying native soils which are also fine sands, contain some ta minimal silt, clay and organic fines content. These soils generally comprise the SP to SP-SM Unified and AASHTO A-3 Soil Classifications. These sandy soils were penetrated to the boring cornpletion depths at l0 feet below grade. GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS - Gr�undwater was measured at depths of 7.2 and 6.3 feet below grade at boring locations PB-1 and PB-2, respectively. The borings were conducted in rnid April, during the typical dry time of the year. Based upon the measured groundwater levels, the soil profile and the previous site filling, we would estimate that normal wet season groundwater levels may generally occur at 4 and 3 feet below present grades at boring locations PB-1 and PB-2, respectively, or at approximate elevation E1.+65.0 ft. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR UNDERDRAIN CONSTRUCTION For the pond underdrains, we would suggest a detail similar to an F'DOT Type V underdrain, with the exception that we recommend a woven filter fabric. A woven fabric is Iess likely to clog as compared witl� a non-woven fabric. The pipe within the coarse aggregate should not be fabric wrapped. The filter sand shauld have a Uniformity Coefficient (D�/D,o) of l.5 or greater; an Effective Size (D,o} between 0.2 and 0.55 mm.; and a minimum permeability of 5.42 ft. per hour. Driggers Engineering Servic�s Incorporated 0 C 3 DR]GGERS ENGINEERING SERVICE, INC. appreciates the opportunity to serve you. Should you have any 9uestions concerning our findings, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned at your convenience. NTK-REP11167I 8-Pond Copies submitted: (6) � Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. %T/��, .�.a..�,.,,,a , • PS � _ p�, T' K��'�� ichalas T. Korecki, P.E. � C��.'��-�G�NSF �'�� .�• Senior Geotechnical Engineer S�; No. 45528 �'.. FL Registration No. 45529 � * � � ��Z : * ; �� o : STATE OF � � � . � ,��.c�'• ��OR10P:••��`tr I��A�eS�ONA; ENG`_: Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated • r� L_J I ' i � � � �y; , - >::;2.:, v - �± a. Jj�" - t r c<r..�.✓i - ,� s+r.�vnn,rj i�i�e'm�t . Y; 'i� � '.c :f'�, � ��} nri� . . . . . :n�.i.iu:, il . -._...__- _' .. . ' . , . . . . ....:�... ,��' �'•.�... _'- ._ 11 ; = � ...-, x:an v+is. o>.rxr n �� ~~---_.�_....._ 'j' � .�.� ��a L rinCfn.q,T" .1-- •• /'y,�µ.y . ."'__�' ri� �1 �n1Y'1 � �,`.,`,, �'� � aN� . r..»' . .- f JR/iJ n.MC x/3']J'!/1 A�� i •I. ItJ/2il + ,�. • rYJyl NNW, �S:JhN::1) ,t I.:ff1J IY% �t' . ��i /ill.� �YJe'. S '�-LJ�S�(f1vRJ!' '�;�r4 • I „,` ' p� :/l <.��rn:q ` . . �'Z i� '.0 � a_ �.' ♦h � y .. _l j ;: �. v:sw, K. u` a"- e,• � � �S� no I a� 'el .z.�. �� ! un r v, e. ,r�r . vr.. � _ ..__ �ia,r a•r•v:rr w:.�ue a 1 ��"'i `u:wy;•' -+ � . N �E:.u:. , �u +r. i � -aa�r• : . . .. . I y4 �3'il�lr. 14'e.'.fiT W�3TJ� L 1Y.10�!)Y�LI f ; �_ .,..._ _' y _---��+ - WW i'IKI M/ii �. � � � i�'lf iil��i �flf r4/��M]0' r.5: L`YI]lY�l � . 14 e'.e.�x � :;�u' ' :' � ' M117P� I � . .` � r ier..uL'faUrr' ' - _ _- ' -� _"r r_ .. _ _ ' _ - _0. rerr • � � urairG \ iw I<i« � i�at.aY(�i'��.c/ � 4�� ,'_..•_ -;' �,._� ...-�` :�; 1: �..�n. '•__ • ..Y_ ��:'._ �.._ :� __ _'_. '" j�t, �:" , � . +aY..'!NI �� `� It!u.Y: . � �f '� ii i)".a:.-'I» -f � �� ... - �-:�.;�.. /� v J^�, a'° !!x . "' : . 1 ��u'4`° „� '' � � � �../�� i �� _� �--�'`novx'pIJ,-�'�� _ i �.� r• wn ' � � t � i�.. � N ( . b � �y,� . �•"-�'.., ,,�'•�__�_9_... � •�. "__" ,u)• / fl 1 s � t� • w� _4'�� "• li.^sd.s ��? �� f 4 � � . � � � �dh1ill � e •�. _.+_� r i.� _ li _: .. . . w�nt4 K . � � . _ )":�iV i � CA u1h: : _... � .� ,. ; �.r.,, u � � �� _ _ i� , 1, � / � . -- � : � r�, z i : t , , � �rt a'm � � ,w, nu i � �. . . . � .• "ir�c�nr, f,� y" 1 / � � •:r,le. "' t� `� �•.. t �� .� ; � �..:,., , -- - _.. �- -�- � � ` - �- --- ; �, �.�. �„�ua =. ,� _ __�„ n« �: L f � -, ,a,.� ,�.. � : �� i � �.,.. t ` , �: - - ' a "�+� �;;� � . `�s � { . `;: . ; �, -� }� t. � _ ` ��. �,...� _�`"'-�.. _ .� •.m-.�..�r�, Y + r � '�j ,..:.. 1 L!r' �ar �ar, , nr..w� �-,, y '` .. 5 t r • � : i !:, t . s-e..e�n'ri „ i %.:. ro:.- �+c ,.,,� .+«c'+c` • „ ..,, r� __ .,_. � ti-..___ '�v l 'ie'� j f ( 1 .,; A1 �(�_.... �, � '-�., r ,�f' ' �e 1 ! i :' � XryF. M� �t ) (,'lusw/s�Yali tin; r�u.it:�i � � �w:rwaC.fi � atrr�� Ju':�Wi�i✓l.;S rwmtiwm � •y� •'s......,, .n.'_' I �d� 9 ��.'. t'i .� }� � �� ,f � �� s sin7A i f.t R xi.s9T11 , i �ku i: ..w� n-6Art.• a �y ^"� Jl..fii.>!' C ��' i •�: dG•JMCf� IbtYYJlf. �•�. � 'H � ..�t� � 1: k'�$� "':�, 4.j� T1 � . �� S • �i'RI� illJG'Al� , !a1 �� wtl: IGG1f:Ul , � � 1 �'I �f. .J. � � � i ' � ..: y r� ;;. ��y �, . . er;�i , � 3;� .4-pM'ii?YaT�e �� H �'��Jry =y.'__ 1 r�l�n��iFi / �a..'^.; ".. 'S�`� y j I , r" i ' (� 1. � .l -iQiM' �^, •,b'.� {�G�W� 1.� _ H � _ .... �-��...�.. . .... . :{ h`n!� . � �Sy V � S �� !-5.;��Y1)?K .FA !1 ,,�I F 1 � :i �� , . �,::;a �. : . . �A, ,_._..._._. , �-�� ..�-� ;- i "� i� t � • � ., :} � sasre7rsx�i � r+ �s•.K�rur �� u� � ' r.e.«n . .. ..r-W.. � J �c.u. � �` t�l � 1 �i �1 �r . ' ' � r�rura`✓ -y�"" - ... �a•� .�assrrri•aR.•i i ._ �� ,�_�•,1 � ^ �a�. �r� �cfi ti. � a J �l��1 . ,�'-�-�3�.a.�._� �' 's I � � A� � 1 � ^� . I , � \ � °;'�3r_ I ' -- -� � ,�:�r - � _ ,�7��=,;=-: _ _ ; y. �' a � „Ma�, ;� _ /y I � � i' 1,�s.=_:�.__ � �.,_i.,.a_._.__� � ,_��.: -Y':cFa:c_•r�-T� � s h I. . �'-�•� �� ✓ �---- � . .� ; a � I I '{� . i, �y '/'/��/' /^�, I / k' ] f \ � >UALN! fOil I:Jk Y tlEL1f /NC-'�y . �/.L - / • i ,� j� : ,{. -��" �/1 �I �_. � O' . '}. j� , :�� 'i10 "' , . _'� / j \i i.:Xrt M1 \� � �'� I •1 1 � 1 ' �i ' �� C �� K `�Mf �� , � �iY.l(CW._IR/ 1�ji�f�f'^-e� n 7 � 11/CL9E � � /� �f; ..� �. MP/!.o `�......�.,, ,.�`::;,` \ . Ir'RM tlC2l:v1J I h �I w � �7 � , � 1 i C� 3� n 411l1 NII JNl1 .., ij �/ �i vu vs�� rr,�r(s" �j �1t an �T�� ,� ,� rw ryM ; N II.MAYtl �( y �/ �'4t 9AJ1'Y / Iiil!'N _� p a�hYJrt�tris . ��' � . ( - �� ^ �M d)I'fiSM�) : � -:. _ . .� . � i � . . "�.�f�l✓1'� , ' IG/.V3! /� /fa�'aYU' Nif �:Ylfl�1 � ,\ ��' iYX.S•d. J � �� JI � � N i 1 - I. . r / ' / �irc 7 1 J"' '� � :c � . t, r-mx'trs r�Y .t 4 N i7I- (• ? � �L {7 .u., j � xanv � � �..-. ��a �+ t `' I , � �t y -. c�� •{ •��fnuso"ri . _ . . .. j�' '" �� ,�..x �.. / ..t_ ��.t �,n• l � nea.: E� - ( � , _ g �1 , ..mm : � r.�ia .�., ��.:- ' E� _. 1 �• � tr' , p � � F' ��: ' -_ yurc..��c •s �i �r r c/' �� " NF�i.i.¢r' � ,r,\ r j `; .'� rp:�u.w% � xa^vu �m.a.�:.:..:: � �. \ / ��j � :[ ' � ` .., ,irn � r / Y r l_, f� �: % Y�..x �. �. A I � 1 � I .v� L ..�+^� � J ' � � � fIlANA�.vfnlyi ,,,,,,jjj CC��' �{y _ �(y ±•.. , t �,, t`�� ',{ , : � � L�_.. _.�_ _ , - , ,��r � � - I• �1. , - . u^«� �� ax Snr.__' ^�'` 1rrwu �.rraRr �� t .rrr�{ I .'� � }iix ¢� .n�mea /`� ' ,� i 4� � i' •.i" a• •`j � i(� --1 •wan .r rrrr. raa.:r. n�cmc . � "(�..� '� ti '� � � � - �� n.✓ �.r.,n.. �,� �� ''� ��• +i ?3 6� `•i •lr�cr_ � c'r'� :,si �I ..' 2� a�i �- l � • ' .rr ir�a " . , y �cr' e/, t iu';>•a 1 I-��J i. ,� .. ,,,t', ' .'�• -0s , {i' � �, � - , �... �„ .,�„«, � t _ Y.,�. � � ' �.,,, � . }� { �`J:S 1 �rqs!q � � I �vn.v:... � • � !19 ^..! iBfl 1Wy � ��,NJ�, f.r �ff '\ ,\\4 .9TSF'<ilflrs'! 11 �� : � M4/M�/NRl _:�� r.:.�.� �' :� . �^ . `= � • �v1 . � � 1• wR n . � ��-rr �a.ra�n I .+N V/-4.OUOr�-1 C d� 1 T� 1 u!'�X tlILlkG Y�i+XYI M 1 ° 1: �" ��y'.Y�.v � � ~'•...�.�,y..�y � .1 �� T �';� �r� , ��L,�.» ia.5/' 1! . W.S il�� i`itl / I � i - H!V %��IGL51 I _ � OA1H w t.We /L�KJ n } : � 7 . � �:lx .G'�al4M�' l � Y i 11 !I•.iR)f't � . �i-....__�/.: A' ... srr � r SMMN i . � H• 1Fi��,`R IW%TM�i � 1 � '. � e" rl� q� fl�SYi•1Ci� � 1 � � �Nw �. �� " :.. + I��1� . x.;.r c.�r ! ._. . \ I ; L�:_ .�_,__ �b � t i�� .,,,t.,n � t::.„ f"- - �._._._. , I �!i i � •� 1 !vitlIIl ..�..`�`i , " _ �iO�A- N { rI . j �S j d te�r •1.�.._t y :�i� .; rx / i-�. ! i {:�> � 1� .(� �i � d�>. � ..\ +,�.. ��,- -�+k _....---��•�-�`-I '\ �"O � ♦ � j; I i ,, 3 ; rnr ' .l • -' - �1�., ' �.` `i� �'• . r t e�reme � � d� I � , j' " - � i 1 � � � �ii i� ` � R � ' � ,( \ e.� , � �}� ^ � � rAwa�� .. _=��rcarn � ..�.�• •' ��{.l � e M �f•�,c�. s'.r,.� �� # �aI `� �.� � � ;, i � cmo:T::u:.r.,+ y �j 1'�.iFP �;i � �rnnr . ' , i i[7 xb � z�. �1� �.T ¢�wavN � r� /l �-_i' '� ' _.. .- -�... � _ � : ; , ;.+wn �� ar.x• Mr, i � � ' ' �� " GrH .vei � ........_ _ i . . . � •i._ si I , i I �' f � r�cc�:•, �i �`�� t i �f.r� '\� .,.. _....._ .__...._..__. .. , � ♦ �iA � � j!1 T.lI' M� � � ! �AVl� � . . t � • dfr 1 �' I'1,�. f�wfM,C t �5 /_ ![ 41]]' � • -r... _ ��-_ \f •�.��....�.�_�._. _._"" ' � �� I �• �� _ � � i �i RON� 0.Y 18�1 1 • �� \\. � � I�' �. � `,� 41 �� ,�I M IM SXMN �� : � l� 'r e%':i]lil� � ' � � � �� , � j . � � y., I f,� n � �� r...n Mi-.xct-li ° � � I �y, � �..�.,n� ... � , �wn �. . � ) l �'i .°•" } .v�,ri,.: � � !iu ::. ��g- '�-'Yr- a+) �i i"S •. � �� : :; ) �`� S � �.'`''. � � f xr.ar �l: y •j . • �� . w, \ 4`... I'• qw`K. t � I /` 1 ?I J k�w '? I a•-.. , rY�qm*:' "I '! t :," \ ' �' `� �� .r � .�ce�ce �r�xi�'�4�� ,��xtx f� § nrr+n '!`� ' s u•.a.r'i ��::•, �-• y. I �F'+ .-' �y'! I' . y� .. _. .. .' �.terr»*r. ��• � ��, k ia'rr.r neervt ! fi�1 �� / / � � 1wr.r ° 1 j : ;; I t:k« :•�•.,. �'' ,,., ��✓' i ;'\ Y -i,y .,t. .�.,r,. _ ,. 1 .wwra...x v.:,...,� �1c�rc�`'aR � l �1 �..�' � � c'I �� I)'SI:Y' r 4- rmmarn:u `( („_. � i i i I .. .4 ' ` ' ... . _ .. . _ a k - � � -o �l . ___t- 1 �� -1.' ; -•=: A` ' _ . . ,.,. , ' 9-...-.� ,__�._ � uoexn�� rn� �I -4.�""" - iNl3�'R3�Ml' ��11 ( a' �t � VtC.r R _ Y� '\ /r. iP.MC:: � ` i.r�vrr �. .' ' � /"... � l ' =m� % ` '� i tt.n •ra, r. a � .. �/ . a / �x S '' .� . �rg+' j � pHrtr rmuaa (ru � I• ntw.urc� . ..; � � �' � - � �. �� '� � s � „� .�.� ..,,, � L i � � �4 � � ,,v . - , .x r- n �wr �.rum+ rs: � � � - rar�wcll� �. '0.�•;1_�'aw:i cwreu �/+� � i � ; � ^� - � „ , ti�:�� v.�,.��., " . `� � � ��►.PB _ 2 �.�.;,�_' -_--. ' :-A��, � - _-�� y ��::°�,,;�:;;:,,::��. �a,. ��-,.:,,:., E J Y�t�t� �lJGx4a !L! Cr.�� Ilr.n '� . { � M�� .' ' 4 � :•.,, �1 «y ' Y.V.W'l n wri iw •t! � E � YJV;rJ f fM IY/R�IPY I): � Y.i ,•7 YIS L n.tli.Y1' ; � 1 Y� �$ i ��:i �": � ••.. �� " I � ?�� ya .a�Mg ?� .u• f��sr� � �. re•Hnr�'' i � irrxr ;�, _ -�---,��' -"`^�+�«.a�.J �'� .. �PB'� " ' 'rr Nc°•v4. � l' R'' � � ��wr-" � • L ? : a t f �wnn •• f � . - , ----} } i , � w r ' a - yP°�: os i r_c � rr sF�� `"J:�i,y �- � ...� _.�� _ �,,,.Y.l --- n� / ee+�ei � I `i'� _. ., .._ �!.s-ns�� - � � ..- .. �� ss.v'nme. 1 � i: � . .�'r''-�J� �. _°.�." .._ a. _...� :, A� y ,'�� 1' �, �� - �-.,, -f'. �" ; x .� � �r-rr. . M ' H ��-�-�- ` ., t . s . ._. ,, . /` . - . . - ,.a ,a'� S Y • • ----- ' . �. ..�-�y �.�,.., ', . - a fo3'S� _�wo-s-_:,� � T � �..-.�:�; �� - �`�i..�c c . . . M,.......,.�,..�. �,,,,, s - - - ._ . . .. . ,. _. ^• ' �. .�o �"':- - ' or•.r�� .. .%�'�`�y` _�.. _ .. .t.�'-'.: ;�.naC"Uwv --a_�Y'-T'FF7A�7�'-� _� _ - - " "�� . � . a ¢ ' . � . [ . Y_' t' • _`�v- _-.: a.a�•s.-n..u_� . � . -'_ . _.-� . 4 . A- ��.�.0 4 Ht _ _...,.-�� i�7.G lNC=_ -- . �_..Y--''.. Y 'Z '+�i. � � t . _ �,_�-...-_. f _' /� � f �{]F ' � _ . ' ` N __ �� "r'�I Id _._ p ' +n � �.... . ...... ��y� .a..-�w.s�v:'� � 6'!� Y?yt �' O • f OYC R`. 0��__ -i t%r f .. ��mT"� t 31...�},..V� � �� ._. �_ sri..s'P.el ��i-� - - -*.---�� " sY---� �nwu''° n f � -_'- _ -�I ,' Fn '..-_'__ v A� -- � ms�n . . �...� - za � I \ � �. e� �ci;r.-J .. .am'�?�eir[v�/ �� .LV's oTl�ii I / ______'_.___..._.. "- a�_____'_ __'_ _1__"__'_____'_ - �------------- -- -�-------:. .•rr fnr ax d;i -� � iw ea ..: . c r •ra^ i' ?ar r 'cm.tt aerr ;r u . p, rnwa• eur rw+x a'x a.e. 'p a`J If1' V4Jer IAFLKni 'l+g� V+�y� •�'sGS "«^± %a� � atel 4a�Y t��.rt�e'r w.!ul�G+aa 'w� .�� .rai tl��e�.u•r pavYU-�n:�w. �nra.i.:i :rt � v.-�v ��.� �•• � �. � w.u:ay�»+t) � a-�rsr'i vv-�le7r�7v� a r�wv �n N. r: rr, uw.w� wrsa� u% ��i r' e ��,�nYrnu' n.a, r'�x) r �'�A, � w � �.ewa+7�aixi .r. xr,�..vae ,c .R. �.«.�.0 � �„ M _._�� 3� �.�k � � � .. �, � ,.�: .� , . r q'.ar.'Tea7G7 n f � .o, w ,`.: ;m ri ✓ xR i�,r a s-�i�r[ �'�G .H i!+' w? � �a� �e: , x �M.9lY�YMa'7 • g � s•xr�T+l+rnl •+c�o�ar y�'�S � 3� . :.rca ��nw +H fI. PC` !l . 4 �� F. AG II � ' YY�oY�aN'�% s�..S � ' .. . . . ......... ...... .... . . . 4]0'W"1II1rU% . .. . . . . . .. .. . . �i0'.QOj/.l:Ml) . � . . � � � pra�t6nsle' • iowaoos ot �� °n�� . 0 30 60 120 I► HAND AUGER BORING LOCATIOl� SCALE IN FEET CAD / ENG(NEEI R.D.B. / N.T.K. PREPARED BY - � � DRIGGERS ENGIfN.EE SH EET T6tl.E . B�RIN� LOCATI�N PLAN PROJECT N�ME � CLEARUti�ATEF� F��C� R(NG CLEARWATER, F n Tcn �N T #1 PRaJECT N0. DES 116718 SCALE AS �HOWN DATE 4/27/12 SHEET N0. PLATE I . • �� U DRIC�GERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INC�RPORATED HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: CLlENT: Clearwater RO Planf #9 Cam bresser & McKee Inc. Ctearvvater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE: Proect No.: DES 116718 7.2' 4/23/12 TECHNICIAN: QATE� COMPLETION DEPTH: �. R. 4l23/12 10.0' LOCA710N: TEST NUMBER: See Plate { PB'� � ELEV. ��PT� 04 REAAARKS (FT) DESCRIPTION �Fjy g � -- Dark gray Fine SAND with roots � ;��.= SurEace Elevation: +69.0+/-' ___ and finely divided o�ganic material .d, .1� SP A-3 r� �. : �'"°�- 68 Brown Fine SAND with roots -=�' �' - and limestone fra ments 5P A-3 •v ::v� -- Light brown Fine SAND 2 '• _ with trace of shelf SP A-3 Light gray Fine SAND (SP) (A-3) 66 - 4 Dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND �:= r�� Z�i.� with finely divided organic material ,;r,�;- � and trace of roots (SP-SM} (A-3} a.;:�� Trr,- 17r rt� 6 • :L• �� ark brown Fine SAND (SP} (A-3) 62 Dark brown Fine SAND with finely divided organic material �::.: (SP} (A-3} $ _ - _ = Dark brownish-gray Fine SAND . , . 6p (SPj (A-3} 10 58 12 56 14 � DRIGGERS ENGlNEERING SERVICES INC�RPQRATE HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: CLIENT: Ciearwater RO Plant #1 Cam Dresser & M1AcKee Inc. Clearwater, Florida WATER TABLE: DATE� LOCATION: ELEV. (�) .. DESCRIPTIOPI Dark brown Fine SAND {SP) (A-3) Grayish-brawn Fine SANQ with trace of sheil (SP) (A-3) Light gray Fine SAND {SP} (A-3} Dark brown slightly silty Fine SAND 64 with�finefy divided organic material and trace of roots SP-SM A-3 Dark browrt Fine SAND (SP) (A-3) Brown Fine SAND (SP) (A-3} 62 .� 58 56 54 Dark brown Fine SAND (SP) (A-3} TEST NUMBER: J DEPTN m �FT� � r � 0 :o : : : v: 2 .. 3�t �r,_ 4 � �L• �`'� 6 • 8 � 10 12 14 DEPTH: REMARKS Surface Efevation: +68.0+/-' • C� • REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL TNVEST7GAT'IQN 3MG GROUND ST'ORAGE TANKS CLEARWATER Rb PLANT #1 CLEARWATER, FLd12iDA I3rigc,��rs �rit,�ineer�irt� S�rvic�:s frtaest*�Csratseci • • � R i G G E R S E Ri G i tV E E R 1 N G S E R V 1 C E S ! N C[i R P 0 R A T E C3 Geotect�nicat Engineering & Gonstruction Materiais Testing CDM Smith 171 S North Westshore B1vd. Suite 875 Tampa, Florada 33607 Attention: Ms. Gina Casl�on, P.E. RE: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation �MG +Graund Storage Tanks Clearrvater R+D Plant #1 Clearwater, Florida �ur File: DES 1167i8 I7ear Cyina: Sep#ember 19, 2012 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, 1NC, has completed the auth4rized geot�.achnical investigative serviees at th� subject project. Presented herein are the results of our field and laboratory studies together with geotechnical recommendations for your consideration. It certainly has been a pleasure providing our service for you and we #rust, if you have any questions concerning our evaluation and recommendations, you will not hesitate to gi�e us a call. FJDlcmc F1D-ItEI'\1 l 671 S Cvpies submitted: (3j Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERiNG SERVICES, INC. --_._ �,�,,o��:�� Ja" riggers, P.E. y,��,�� C�3d�t��,��,� Pre . ' ent a� .,P�. -,��tV��' ._��i FL Registration No. 16989 �'� :� �g�,. �t698� 1',/ r_r i # , + f��.��,^"" ; * � i � � ' ''r ,�• ��°��E U� . ��`,;; a � ,. e�►�Q,�.' '�.�'-�t��C�p.. �'��tr,�' a � - �'a t�� ,'��'��lP+��"��-`� �� g�,�a+�`'� Sa�asota Cfearwafer 7ampa f�hone: 94i.37t.3949 P.O. 8ox 57839 •�learwater, Ftorida �3762 Phone: 727:5Ti.1?�i3 fiax:941.37i.&962 Phane:72�.571.3313•Fax:727 i72.409Q Fax:727.572.405�0 saroffice� drigger�eng.com ciwa�',ce�driggers-eng.com tpaoff'�ce �dr(ggers-eng;eacn C� TABLE OF C4NTENTS Descrip�ion Pate LNTRODUCTION ..,....... .... ....................................1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGA'T�UN PROGRAlV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Standar�l Pe»etration Test Bv�ngs . . • . . . . . . . . . . , . � , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Flat Ditatometer Sounciings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Labvra�ary T`esting , . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 G�NE12Ai�IZ�D SUI3SUR�ACE CUN�IT�ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 • GEOT��kINI�AL EVA,iUATXQN AND 1tECt3MMENDATI�NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Proposed Construction and �,oadiz�g Condi#i+�ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 GeQtechnicai �valuation and Recammendat�ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � . . . . . , . . . , S Predicted Sett�e�nen�s . . . . . . . . . t . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . 5 Subgrade and �ill P�epar�tidn . . . . . . , . . . . » . . . , . . . , . . _ . 6 PerfoXmance Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . : , . . . . . . 7 Phase TI Geatechnicaf �nves�i�ation , . � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._ . . . 7 • �3rfgg�rs �rtgir�rin� �ervices tr►�E�~pCrra�ed • INTRODUCTION improvernents to the Reverse Qsmosis Plant in Clearwater, Florida will include the addition of two (2} 12t3 foot diameter 3 mi�iion gallon storage tanks. Tlie first phase will consist of the constn��tion of a r�ew tank south af an existing storage tank, U3timately, tile existing storage tank will be demalis�ed following completion and imple�n�ntation of che I'hase I storage tank. Following der�olition, a new 3 million gailt�n storage t�nk will constructed within the limits of the previous tank. Included herein are the resu}ts af field anc� laboratory studies completed for the Phase I tank construetion together with geotechnieal recomme�dations. A�so inciuded are the results of a single #est baring canducted 1�ear the western perzmeter of Ehe proposed Phase II tank. GEi?TE�HNICAL 11VVESTIGATION PROGRAl�1 Our geotechnical investigation program consisted of a series of Standard Fenetration Test . bari�gs, Flat Dilatometer Saunding� and laboratory elassifieation and eompressibility tests. • STANDARD PENE'T'RA'FION TEST BORIN� - Flate I of the attachments identifies the respective �ositioning af a series of S#andard Penetration Test (SPT) borings thaE were performed art�ur�d the perinr�eter and interior of the Phase I tank constructian ar►t1 near the w�sterly perimeter of the �'hase �� tank canstruction. The SPT borings were perforn�ed in general aecordance with ASfiM I7»I5$�. Logs of the test borings are presented in the report attachrnents reflecting visual tQgether wi�h estimated Unifed Soil CIassification. A.lso included �n each log are tabulated and gaphical�y plotted Standard Penetration resistan�+� valt�es corresponding to eaCh sample interval. A brief d�scription of ihe Standard Penetration method af sampli�g used in our s�zdy is included in the report attachments= FLA'T DTLATOMETER SOUNDINGS - Zsolated negligihle Standard Penetration resistance zt�nes were encountered i� severai of ouF SPT borings. In order to obtain mor� definitive information� relative to #he char.acteristics ofthis zone and patential compressibility, Flat Dilatometer Sour�dings were perfarmed. The F1at Ditatom�ter Sou»dings were pe€fornaed in accordance with A.S'�'M D-6�35. The resulis of the �1at Dilatameter Soundings incl�ding the Dilatometer modulus values are plotted adjacent to the respective SPT buring and included in tf�e r�port attachments. �rigg�;rs �r�t�ie��rir►g S�ruic� t�cc>rpc�r��t�d • LABORATORY TESTING - Laboratory characterizatian tests were perforrr�ed an representative soil sampies. Our laboratory tests included grainsize analyses, Atterberg limits ar�d organic content tests as deemed appropriate. T'h� results of these classification tests are appended. One-dimensianal consolidatron tests were also performed on Sheiby t�be samples secured during the course of the �eld investigatinn. The resu�ts of'tl�e consalidation tests are included in the attachments in the form of a grapt� of void raiio versus t�te effective vertica� presstu`e. Time versus deflection pic�ts are aiso included correspond�ng to each consolidatian test iQad inerement �nd decrement. G�NERALIZED SURI+AC� CONDITIONS Plate II of the r�port ilfusirations presen#s the fest borings �n p�ofile. As seen`from Plate ��, the subsurf�ce sail prv�ls con�ists of an upper unit of predonninaritly �ine sanc�s witb l:oealiz�d tr�c�s ar��aunts of o�ganic fines that exhibiied a t�zckness typically in the range of 2$ ta 33 feet below present grade. You wili note that there is evidence of some historic filT a� suggested by #he presen�e of a upper veneer c�f fine sands with variable silt, shell and limestone fragment content. Howev�r, • tl�e fill at the locations tested, appears ta be no more than 2 to 3 feet thicl�. Standard Pe�letration resistance vatues indicate that the sandy soils vvithin the upper 10 to 15 �eet �re .generally relatively loose in consistency followed by transition inta medium dense saiids below, Below 28'to 33 feet, penetration resistance values varied significantly indicat�ng the pre�ence of very �oose tt� �edium de�se eIayey sands. Indeed, in some lacaiions, negligible pez�etr�tion resistance was recorded as a sarnpler penetrated under the weigh� of the harnmer assen�ably alone. Even though idealized tesi bc�rings encountered negligible penetration resistance zones at depth, in oux opinion these features do not relate to the presence af cavity zones or ar� inc�eased potential for sinikhole devel4pment. The factors considered iri r�aching this conclusion are the follo�ving: i. Standard Penetration samptes as vvelt as Shelby tube samples were securec� w�tt�in this unit that were nat suggestive af raveling soils and ceriainly not voids. 2. �Iat Dilatarneter Sc�undings did not reflect the presence of voids but ratl�er soils with modezate cflr�npressibility. • i�rii,�g�s �tic„�in�et~iang ��rvi�e� #r'tccrrp€�rateCY • 3. There were no iosses of cireulation of drilling fluid with any of the test borings wi#hin this or any azher zone. 4. This weak zarte occurs above-a very thick sequence af very strong cohesive soiJs af the 11�ioeene Hawthorn formation. There is no indication of any underlying st�atum into which soils cot►ld be raveling res�lting in sinkho3e activity. Indeed, this thick sequence of strong cahesive soils minimizes any potential for sinkhole ac#iviry. 5. Sail con:ditiQns it�media#ely above and be1Qw this weak zone are very strong with �a indicafian af any syste�natic weakening associated witl� sirilchole aetivity. 6. The piezornetric s�r�'ace w�ithin ihe underlyin� ]imestone forn�ation would be expected tc� occur in the range of abou# 5 to 10 feet above mean sea level or sonle 60 to 65 feet below the iand surfac�, The su�ciai water table, however, was consistently r�corded at reiativeiy s�a�Ivw d�pths generaIly within fih� upper 3 to S feet. T`�us, clearly ihere is a s�gnifiGant do�vnward hydra�alic ,�radient. The faet that • t�ere is a consistently sustained shallow groundwaYer #able suggests that �}�e underi�ing elays af #he H�r�vthom �'orm�tian are providir�g effective confinernent thereby reducing sinkhole pc�t�ntial. • 7. Tne site is loca#ed in a por#ian of Pine�las County t�at has histori�ally experienced negiigible sini�hole activiry. It is �e writer's theory that these f�atures are �etated to in�lled erosion gullies tlaa� prababty farmed atop the Har�vtharn farrnation wl�ch is geologically re�agnized as an erasional surface. W�ere erosian gullies are subsequentiy in�llad witi� sediments during periads of lxigher sea �eve� stands, �hesa sediments may not be weil consolidated due ta the aff�cts of arehing especially if tl�te ero5ional gullies are re�atively natraw. 'T'his would account for the fact that the sediments withi� these er�sia� gullies may be weakerthan overiying an� underlying sediments and are likelyto oceur with varyxr�g depths. If the writer's theo�y is correct, tlaere is a good probability tiaat new stresses from the tank construction will also ter�d io arcl� over these narraw features a�d may actually produce relati�vely tni�or settlernent. Dri�c„�rs �rigine�.rin� ��vic�:s tncrirporat�ci � Generally below 40 to 45 feet, penetratian resistance values increased sharply marking the transition into the Mioeene Hawthorn formation. The Hawthorr► forma#ion is generally comprised of rnedium dense to dense clayey santls interbedded with firm to hard and variable cemented clays with differing silt and sana content. These relatively strong soils of the Hawtharn farmation continued to tt�e tezmination depth of the borings which extended as deep as 75 feet below exis�ng grade. GroundwaYer was recorded during the course of our reeent geQtechnical investigation in the depth range of about 2.8 to 3.4 feet belflw the existin� ground surface. You will nate that these obs��'vations were ohtained during a period of extensive rainfall wk�ich was �bnorrraally high compared to average surnrr;er rainfall conditions. The groundwater level r�corded at PB-8 in May of 2411 was approxirr�ately 2.5 feet lower. We wauld jud�e tt�at the r�cer�t groundwater observations are probabiy hig�er than the normal wet seasc�n groundwater table. Of course, wEll established surface drainage sucb as exists at the plant site wiIi tend to mini�rtize norrnal seas€�nai fluctuations. . GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION Al'+1D RECUMMENDATIONS • PRt3POSED CONSTRUCTION AND LUADING �ONDITIONS - The propased Phase I and Phase i.T tanks vvill have a nozninal diameter of 120 feet and wi11 storage approxirnately 3 rni��ian ga?lons each. Accordingly, on� would anticip�te � rnax�mum water depth of abou# 35.5 feet. Including the �hickness of a nominal 6 inch slah, one would anticipate an a�erage �ontact pressure ofat�out 2300 psf: It is our untlerstanding th�t this contact pressure will exceed that o�'t�e existing tank in the Phase �I constntction by some 500 ta 7U4 psf. It is contem�lated that the tanks will be prestressed concrete af tlae +C�om-type �hich wiii incorpoxate a can�rete diaphragr�a floar �nd pe�imeter continuous footing. Aithough we have not been provided with details of proposed grades, w�e wouid anticipate only rn�nor grade changes to accommodate the proposed �nished #Ioor elevation for botb ihe �'taase I �d Phase tI t�nks. t�rigg�rs �n�'sr��:erir� ��rvic�s Fr►ccarpc�r�teci • • 5 GEOTECiiNICAL EVALUATION AI�TU RECOMMENDATI+DNS Predicte€I �ettlements - i�Ve anticipate that tank settleme�ts will occur as a xesult of compression of surficial loose sands below the depth-of-ef€ect of near-surface compaction as well as through the compression of intern�ediate relatively weak clayey sands of nearly below 3U feet. The magnitizde of expected settlement is the fianctinn of the ti�ickness and Iateral extent of the cflmpr�ssible zanes. The upper sandy soi�s generaliy appear to be more uniform and Iateraljy conti�iuous and wiil be expeeted to produce settlements of perhaps 0.8 inch, or }ess, on the tank interior. These settlemenis will occur virtuaily instantaneousiy with the applicatian of stress. The deeper ciayey sand ur�it is variable in both th�ckn�ss ar�d �ompressib�lity. Where the co�rapressible zones may be relatively narrow, t�e v�rtical stress�s from the tank and conten�s will tend to arckz aver th� feature and prod�tce mir�imal settlement as previously discussed. �owever, where these zanes are lateraliy continuous, the iull vertical increase stresses will be eapable of produGing setttemsnt. Based on the results of our investigation, we • canservatively estimate that maximum settlement of the tank interior may approach 2.G �o 4,G inches due to eonsolidation o#' these deeper weak clayey sands. Adding tl�is to the settiement of tlie upper Iaose sandy zones could result in ma�timum interior settlements in the range of 3_4 ta 5.4 inches, Settlernents at the tank perimeter would generally be expected tv be about SQ% Qf ihat of the interiar or perhaps range fxom 1.7 to 2.7 inches. From �revious experience, we wo�ttd anticipate that these predicied tatal and differential setttements are within the range that can be toierated considering the Cram-type tank canstructian contemplated on this prr�ject. Xt is also important ta recognize that bott� �e upper finc sands and �ieeper clayey sands will tend to settie very rapidiy fallowing stress ap�lic�tion, Thus, we would expect tl�at the majority of ihe tota� settlements wauld accur within a period of 30 to 60 days foltowing tan�c filling. Even t�ough tYse above noted maverz�ents are considered relatively madest and can probably be tolerated without structural distress, we would certainly suggest giving consideration to infl�ent and e£fluent piping cannectaons ta allaw far nnodes# rotation. Whe�e the abov� rnagnitudes vf expected settlements are considered intvlerabte, co�sideration could be giv�n to deep ground impravement such as Vibro-replacement stone col�rnns. V ibro-replacemeint sto.r�e �olurnns are generally installed u� a�iesign-c�ns�zuct • 1�asis by proprietary con�ractors cc�nsist�nt witl� �ece�table total arid differentia� setflemez�t. Dri$g�T� �r�gi��rir�g St�?rvic�s �ncerr�.s�rr�t�d' • 0 specified by the tank design cansultant. Pile foundations could also be considered but would probahly not be economical compared to ground irnprovement. Subgrade and Fiil Prepara#ian - Presuming that the above noted magnitudes of predic#ed settlement are considered within an acceptable range, subgrade preparation should consist af undercutting the entire tank area plus a margin of not less ihan 5 feet to a min�mum depth 3 feet or to expose ti3e native subgrade sails, whichever occurs at tl�e greates# depth. Careful inspection should be planned at that time to ensure remaval of any unsuitabie fill or underlying �iatezials. The subgrade should be unifornnly cumpacted utilizing a l�eavy vibratary roller having a minirrauln static drum weight af 5 tans. Compaction should consist of no less than ten ( l0) complete covera�es in a criss-cross �attern throughaut the entire tank area plus a margin of S feet. Cqmpaction shouid continue so as to dev�Iop a unifarrn density of not less than 95%0 of the Modified Proct4r maximum dry density p�r ASTM U-1�57. Compaction �ests s�outd ba conducted Qn a frequency afnat less tiaan one {1) test for each 2,50€� SF and far each 50 foot �f foundation perimeter. The foundation p�rimeter for t�ie tank structure shoutd be densified at tl�e bottom of fooiing clevation ar 3 foot undercut depth, whichever occurs a# #he lowest elevation. • Fi11 or backfill p�aced to establish design grade shoulct cnnsis� of clean, cohesioniess f 11 comprising the SP ta SP-SM Unified Soil Classification or the AASHTO A-3 Classification< Eact� lift shauld not exeeed 12 i�aci�es with each lift unifozmly compacted to no less than the 35°fe Iv�odi#ied Proctor nEaaximum dry density. Yt►�x attention is directed to the posszbility that sarne contr4l and manage�zent of �roundwater may be required depending upon antecedent rainfall levels at the tirne of const�vction. Graundwater ievels should be maintained no less thar� 12 inehes belflw �h� �vwest etevat�on of compaction. Moisture content should be controlled at #1�e subg�rade iev�l and throughout all fill lifts to within �2% vf the optimum moisture as established by ti�e Modified Pr�etor moisture density relationship of ASTM D-1557. It is irnport�nt fhat a re�resentative of the project geotechnicai engineer be preseant during ail earthwprk operations to check that effec�i�e campaction is being achiewed and, ide�tify �nsuitabie z�aterials �ha# wauld wamant re�noval antl replacement and to c�Zeck far compactivn i� accordarice �vith specification requirements. � U pric��r�s Engin�;er"rng ��rv'rces lrtccarpr�rateci • 7 PERFORMANCE OBSERVATIONS - The predietio� of toial and differential se#tlement is certainly not an exact science and is based upon both geotechnical analyses and judgment utilizing available geotechnical information. Accordingly, we would strongty recomrnend establishing elevation points thraughout the tank structure to permit observations af settlements during initial tank filling and following completion of flling for as long as practical, but not less than tl?�irty (3Q) days following complete filling an effart to deteet areas where settlements may be projeeted to ex�eed predieted levels so that remedial measures, if needed, can b� effected. At the approp�iate time, we wvuld be desirous of working wiEh CDM Smiit� and the contractor ta select lacations for settlement xnonitaring. Specific elevatic�n readings should be obtained to an accuracy of at least �0.002 feet on a daily basis during fiiIing and at lease twice w�ekly tl�ereafter uantil settlements have virtually ceas�d. Some adjustm�nt in observation frequency ma� be warranted pending the xesults of ear�y stage observationS. It is very important that ttl�ese settlemen� observations be r�ferenced ta a relative�y fixed • benchmazk. A goad candidate for a fixed benchmark wauld be the presence of any deep wei] caszng or something that rnay be firmly embedded ar grouted inta the underlyin� limestone forrna#ipn well away frorn the tar�k .structure that would be very unlikely to sustain any movement d�ing tne observation period. Ifno such benciarnark is avaitable, there would b� merit in drilling and installing a casing into the underlying limestone formatifln to serve as a fixed bencll�mark �or future reference. u PHASF lI G�OTECH.N�CAL INVESTIGAfiION -�ollowing cornpletion and irnplernentation of the Phase I ground storage tank, the existing ta�k structure to tl�� narth will be demolished to prepare far #he cansfruction of a seeon� 3MG ground storage tank with��n the timits af the demolished tank. �urther geotechnieai investigation will be waarranted a# that #ime to supple�nent tl�e single Standard Penetration Test haring wa� performed near western perirneter. Specifical�y, ihree (3) additional SPT borings ate recornrnenc�ed tvgether wiCh Flat Ditatometer Soundings as d.eemed appropriate. Naturai�y, it witl be impprtant to e�gedite the perform�nc� of this work so as: t� elimanaie any ct�nstruction delays. Judging frorn available geotechnical inforrnatian as w�il as the past perfr�rmance of the existing tank struucture and the proposed xnodest stress ai�creases, we would antacipate that 4ur geotechn�c�t recommendations wil� be similar ta ihat dxsct�ssed h�rein for the Phase ��nnlc construction. Fackars eons�dered in reachir�g this c��eiusio� i�clude th� foli�win�: �KM��T'S �i'��.'�i'L!'it� a5�7"ViC�'S �f1CCtf �'?[7{"c'�GEt� '3 s I. Proposed tank structure will be totally wi#hin the linvts of the previous ground storage tank which we understand has performed satisfactorily for many years. 2. The stress increases associated with the taller proposed tank structure are anly aho�t 25% higher than that c�f the origiz�al tank structure ancl, tberefore, additional settiements should be proportionately less t]�� that which would be associated with the tarilc cc��struction on a pareel that �as not been previously pre-loaded. It should be nated that the supplemental test borings can be initiated as soor� as access is available to the interior pf the existix�g taaak area. If necessary, t�e existing concreie slab ean be cored to permit advancement of the tesi boring;s. In other words, one wouId not necessarily need ta wait tu�til ali of the �lemolition activities are complete in order to i�itiate the supplernental geotecl�nical studies. LTMITATiONS • Qur Geviechnical ��vestigation vvas conducted for the purpose of investigating generalized • subsurface conditions ta assist iz� the design of the planned facitities and tQ provide general infarmation for use in eonsfruction. Our investigation may not have included development Q�all subst��'ace soils inf4rrnation that may be needed by the prospective contractor in th� developmen# c�f their construction �rocedures. The contractor is certainly encouraged to conduct such actditiona� iz�vesti�ations as they may deem necess�ry to deveXop his bid propasat. • #�r+r,�er� ��i.�'rn�erir►r� S�rv�ct�s tr��r�r�p�srate.ci • APPENDIX PLATE I- TEST L4CATION PLAN PLATE II - SOIL BORING PROFILE . STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS • DILATOMETER TEST' RESIJLTS SUNIlVIARY OF LABORATORY T�ST RESULTS CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS METHOD OF TESTiNG Driggers �rrgineer+ng SErvi�s Ir�eflrparated • CJ • PLATE I- TEST LOCATION PLAN Driggers Engineeri�tg S�rviees incorp+prated �i / �r�� : � %}' !��+ t '�/ . �' G=-- ` � � "a � � �� "' �� ;.±� .G'f." A>..Y� 3 N P: `-d i 0.� �, k . .. ^'^�� 3 .� n � Ftg t,r: �t• � � "°�c-�+� I � �v.w �u+ro� "� `' ��---•.r:y''�.', J'� �T �- i ��..�„S t� � 9?.M'�+f:.+ -" KGtlr7ilr Y'i� 1 i�I �� _ i�c., i. �. i .� � `Erc . '.fiar� s-._ �?i � 1 � 1 � � z ,.� �c':d'nv «...., ,.a sa --! .t�} � { 6 2� i � g Ia � i � ' a �[¢`' r—,.:..., s as � Y. t �� kl t'T i 3n `T �.-. �r ex:-�. -_i'C�%'...� "` � —' wLw ' ` iT�+.c, I; . � � � (� � ,� };''�i .�= f '�� ?`�p � �'"� � -��1•.-�- , t i "�� l. y s �;� : �� ri ��:' _ s 4 ;:, � � t � ' �; "$s, :r?� j>' . tiirK '•r . ;` ,�. i "� ` '€.d.� f � ` ` �� . � � � \ 1 � �. _..� ` E � .ovr..t EXI511NG � 4� � .� ; � � �� ,ss::rat g / �`�^sa 'K.i.: � WATER STDRAGE TANK l �� ` .� �..1; 3 . � �4 � . � -y ?:=: . \ '. ' `. ,: . e F . ''i:'a�'" : f i a N ��; s- �. } f ai r1' r..rn � 8-3� � ,: ,�. ,, � Y a�.-.'. i i �1 s,� �" ' , (DAAT) i � +� _- ~ §a�i N=.:�,�;` ,w�a `. . .. 1 ' ` a } —_ . � � _ �-:+-=L•.... . . ( ,� �,1��_ -G - . _.p,.-.__..__...,._ . �... ` � � ' d. �. R{. # .' Y � `�\_ y � __�...� JC: �' i Ytt7r; PROPOSED .-.�:,_ i"`�''� � B-1 DMT)�, k� _. �-- ,�:F � WA7ER STORAGE TANK t _ _ �_� �i _ - -'" ` ~ � r —� k �- -�� , , � � -- .w R�r. . t71. . . . .` I � B—Z R � tM ! " � ?� � � i` t' �� '� Xr 4 . ;�4� z � '�� a� , �• , �� ,�,. t�a :��...- '�t�i : � �� PROPOSEO -�� . —,..�,.; �; Wu�+r1 uiA• �. 1� r d- � Y._ . � ;.� ,��x.Y i 1„r, : WATER STORAGE TANK � � �� r� •r SV 2.3 3'L .'d:c �< 4,� i "PB-a� •✓". `.;xs r a- .�.�sw r;� � \ +c:W�r � ,� /._ f 1 . . .� �_ �;� (DM7} , � �'\ `-,, -:.vs i . - r � : ��- � +�r s — �_. �'�–.,. �� :,.,�... �.�_ -' `�.�,.�� .�. y. ' 7; ��a� r _ � r ^ . � �. _..._> -_ � 3 .. .��_.,� .�;�s.'� � � 4 0. . '�'!ti ct '- .-.�. � - y .�.��s. � . "'"--4q- .. . � - �+! u.+iv �.�3!r :`.- -,— _ � 8....4 � . . � ..sr � � . -r '� � �' �,*: `.{� �`��ta.+� "�,�t.rt„ d ' -;,-_.� �F3 R 1---='r'a"�—' " �"` �-1- R4 . 1 � .°�"V.' r �-...'�_ .w� ` ,j,..� . .,�,�„ .��, �i�=w'7m . 4 �, � �e_. t "� ""_- _ " ,.-- J .a .� ; s c . .r. :_.:�__-?'� '"i ,,,.,.� _ - y;�- : "`f r'�' �Ss—•' � s. x�'.....- , . �' � � .S �. �`�` . . � _.__ P a _ " -.-+ ' _ " "__"_�_ '.,_" _ ..� . ..�� " . . �_'. '.�..r' ..�, � _ � �r �"_'+ .,. / . S 1` , i :-T }''�s C �l"ie��! � s� _ J 3 c��., J - f (-v � �T:. .. !0. , • tZ �✓ �( K"4 5..:. ♦ .R. w-a+_ss J%�t.7i �K9f l:.J�"?"'• �.J. ~! .�3tS.P.� :., cA:sa+cr..•�•.4..�..= i r,.••r i+rv.e: �S;a.:,a:y � . . ._ ,�:.». " �. ::,ss f � _..�e ._?n . . ,..._ ... ,. i �N TE5T BORING/ � � L�CATION 0 20 +o Bo _TER SOUNDIN6 ft�ETRATION TEST BORING SCALE IN FEET BO�IN'G LOCATI(7N PLAN ST4RAGE TAN1tS � DES t'16718 AS SHOWN DATE 9/19%12 PLATE I • • � PLATE II - S4IL BURII�IG PRUFILE driggers Engine�ring Sec�uic�s tncorporated � � SOIL BORiI� PROFILE Clearwater R4 Pfant #1, Clearwater, Florida sirata:�Y�bots �r., Eine SAND ,r;; r R�8'I�i �:ilfv Fina RANl1 �'.._, . ..._ _. .. -- � a��:� �-ine SANU wrtnsneu � �anay�t,Rr �; . .x ;;� Stightly sitty Fine SAND � Silty GLAY r+�� Ciayey r'ine Si+i�u j i,i.t"�Y �C� dRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES; INC. eo so ao m r D 20 =� O z z � m m -a 0 -20 -40 � 5iity, Gayey rine SANv �Pho5phatic, sandy CLAY � •.'�" rine 5r"►iJu wi�n cemenied iragmenis .:x� PLATE II • • ST'ANDARI) PENETRATIO�t TEST �iQRING LOGS • C3riggers �r�c,�ineering Services )rtcrr�rpc�ra�r�i • • • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES iNC�RPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. B-1 Project Glearwater F�0 Plant #'!, Glearwaier, FEorida Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion Depth To D�pth 76_5' Date 8/24/12 Water 3.4' Time Date 8/24/12 � � � � W � STANDARD �'- 0 w O°- N PENETRATlON TEST � m a SOIL DE�CRIPTION v� W W BLOWS/FT. ON 2" o.�. a �� -� a SAMPLER 140 LB. 0 y N �� HAMMER, 30" DROP � a 0 (AUTOMATIG HAMMER) SURF. EL: +70.0+1-� (NAYD) �� 10 20 40 6a 80 �$�.5� Reddish-brown cla e Fine SAND SC ��• '12" Crushed Limestone and brown Fine SAND Loose gray Fine SAND (SP} 5 2/3/6 Loose dark brown Fine SAND with trace 4l4/5 - of finely divided organic material (SP) 10 2/2/3 212/4 Medium dense brown Fine SAIVD (SP) 15 '. 3/5/6 2U S/10114 25 :� 10193/16 Very loose io medium dense dark grayish-brown io brown clayey Fine SAND (SC) 30 514/4 F�emarks Borehole Grauted Casing Length 2b,0` � DRIGGERS ENG(NEERlNG SERVICES 1NCDRPDRATED � . r . .� • . - . ._ ! 6 � • • • ' � � ' � � 0 : 1 • � . 1 . � e � � � • a � � � � � � • !� • 0 f �� o 1 • � � 1 � ' � • � �� , • , � , , . . 1 1 1 1 ! �t .1 :1 �'° � - ., - . -. . - - . _ . . . . ��Il �' a e • . - - ` � ��_.■.,,," -� �,_.■.,"„ � _� �_...,,'t' � � � _ �. ■.,,"� � , ` �� -,_.�.,,�'■ '� � � ' ! _��.■""' �� ,.■.,"'� �� z".�,�'wD.: _�.■.,,,�� - o e - - � � a - - - - ' � == �■.,,'" . � i __��■. �' „'�' � � � __-..,,�'� � � .� �� 1111 �� . , . - - - . . • �� Iltl . � ��1i11 � � ��■��1111 �;, �,, � . . . - - ��/1�1111 � t�� ►/�1111 ,I�III�I; • ��! ��1111 ��i��i�� ■��t�� i�� i� �, ��■�� i�., �i��i�; ��■�� ,�,,,. . . .._.�,..,�, �;�i�� i1��0� ��%�■�Ilil ��/ , -- . �r ■�� . �� 11i1 �� 1111 :s ' � - s -e � a � 1 i • • � � • • DF�IGGERS ENGINEEF�ING SERVICES INCORPORAT[=D Projec! No. DES 196718 BORING N�. B-1 Project Clearwater R� Plant #1, �'le2nwater, Florid� Location See Plate I Foreman J.R. Completion De th To Depth 76.5' Date 81241'!2 Water 3.4' Time I3ate 8/24/12 ` F- �n Z w � STANDARD LL O� O a� PENETRATION TEST � m-' SOIL DESCRlPTION �n � z E,,, � a �y � BLOWSIFT. ON 2" fJ.D. � Q 0 � � SAMPLER-'i40 LB. � � N� m a O �AU OMATiG HAMMER) SURF. EL: +7p,p+l_' {nqvo} �n � 10 20 40 60 8U Very dense green siity, clayey Fine SAND 70 . (SM-SC) 10/50' " 0.3' Penetration � y� Hard green cemented, sandy CLAY (CL) .' � .:.' . ,. . 75 : ,:�� . 25/29/50; ' 0.5' Penetratio $0 - 85 90 95 700 Remarks Borehole Grouted Casing Length 20.Q' DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICE� INCORPDRATED Project No. DES 116718 BfJRING NO. B-2 . Projec# Glearwater R(U Plant #1, Clearnater Florida Location See P!a#e I Foreman J:R. Completion Depth To Depth 61.5' Date 8124/12 Water 3.3' 7ime Date 8/24112 r Z � � STANDARD u, p� p�- � PENETRATtQN TEST z m a S�IL DESCRIPTIUN u� w� BLOWS/FT. ON Z�� o.�. � � g � -� p. SAMPLER-140 LB. w �� p� t� HAMMER, 30" DR�P Q m Q 0 �AUTOMATiC HAMMER) SURF. EL: +70.0+/-' {NAYD) � m 10 20 40 60 80 Brown Fine SAND SP Brown si Fine SAND SM Light brown Fine SAND with shell and limestone fra ments SP Gra Fine SAND SP 5 Light gray Fine SAND (SP) K::: : Loose dark brown Fine SAND with trace 21314 :;::,;,` o{finely divided organic material (SP) Loose dark grayish-brown Fine SAND (SP) u�� 10 � Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND wi#h trace '•' of finely divided organic material {SP) 4!8/t4 ;:.: ••.:�" 8/11/11 :,;;; rx+, �: Loose brown slightly siity Fine SAlVD (SP-SM} 15 ir�yi� t k�9:�: ,.1,,-f: 21213 r�a<<:j� r.�i:,:�: � c � a:�: Medium dense to dense brown to dark brown Fine SAND (SPj 20 317/8 25 6I10/16 30 8/141�7 Wery loose to medium dense brown {1) Remarks Borehote Grouted {1) to greenish-br�wn ctayey Fine SiAND {SC) WR = Wei�ht of Rod Casing Length 20.0' • • • CJ • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVlCES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. B-2 p�njQc� Glearvvater RO Plant #�1, ClearNater, Florida Location See Plate I Foreman �1.R. — Comptetion Depth To — Depth 61.5' Date 8f24112 Water 3.3' Time Date 8/24/'12 t- � Z W � STAN�ARD LL O� O a� PENETRATION TEST � m a SOIL DESCRIPTION v� � W aiows�T. o� 2� a�. � � � � -i a SAMPLER-140 LB. � p �' t� � g� HAMMER, 30" DROP m a O (AUTOMATIC HAMMEftj SURF. EL; +70A+1-' (NAVD) � C° 10 20 40 60 80 3� : Very loose to medium dense brown fo greenish-brown clayey Fine SAND (SC} �� j 40 3/3/2 45 . 417/16 Hard brownish-green very sandy CLAY {CC} 50 15/22/33 Hard green silty CLAY (CL} 55 15/23l30 60 13/17/21 65 Remarks Borehole Grouted . WR = Weight of Rod Casing Length 20.0' — DRlGGERS � ENGINEERING SERVICES INC�RPDRATED Project No. DES 116718 BURING NO. B 3 Pr9��t Cleankater RO Piant #'! �'lean+�ater, �lorida Location See Pfate I Foreman J.R. Compietion Dept�h To Depth 61.5' Date 8I24/12 Water 2:8' Time Date 8f24/12 Z W � STANDARQ ti. � W p n- y PENETRATtON TEST _ � a SOi� DESCRIPTIQN �n W� BLOWStFT. ON 2° ap. � � � � —� a SAMPL€R-14U LB. Q � j � � g� HAMMER, 30° DRQP m Q � (AIJTOMATIC NAMMER? sURF. EL: +70.O+1-� iNAVD) �' � �0 20 4o aa ao 0 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Tan Fine to Medium SAND with cemented sand SP Light gray Fine SAND (SP) 5 Laose dark grayish-brown Fine SAND (SPj �f�5 "':: �= Loose to very loose dark brown Fine SAN� ::::i� with trace of finely divided organic material 414/4 70 (SP) `": �'' 2/2!3 :::;: �':=::" 1/113 :� r.►:��:i; Loose dark brown sfightly silty Fine SAND '�� F,��,; with trace of iinely divided organic material 711J�: (SP-SMj 1/2/5 ±:,:,- ��1�� r};�1 Medium dense #o dense brown Fine SAND {SP) 20 5l10/1 � 25 8/13/19 �` `' � Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND with tra�e .;:; of finely divided organic material {SP) 30 �: 8/8/4 : «i r,i? Very ta�se ta medium dense brown (1) Remarks Borehofe Gr4uted (1) to qreenish-brawn clayey Fine SAND (SG) WR = V1/ei�ht of Rod Casing Length n U • • • � � DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INC�RPORATE=D � • � s r i - - '• • - a � � - - • e � - � � - � � �'� • /. S � i � � � � � ' ! � � / � � ° • � • � � n . �1 ' • � � ( � ' � ' � u f � I i � 1 1 1 • 1 .! � 1 �� .. - . -. .- - . . �� 1 .�, - . . . . - • � ��1 11 �� ' a�� i � • ��G�.■.�� .�...�� I If . , ,� � . ��t�!■��Ilt �I � ��1 11 � � � �� 1 11 � . - - . - - . . . . - • . ��1��1 11 � ��1��1' 11 ��!!�1 11 � � � ��IIf � ��l��l li �� . . . . - . . - ��11�1 11 ��r�� i ' �� i � � ' ' ��■i��;�� i �,..� . . . - . . - . ��■�� i �,��,��, ��i�� ,o,,�� • �� i Ii� II�� . • ��Il�1 11 �IE0��1.;1 ��1�1 11 �;��i��,; ��r��t i� �,��,��t ■�■��e�� ii ., i��i,�� ■►�� i ��'!��''�� ' ��iiiii ii � ��iiiii ii � �� iiiii ii � �� :. - .- . -. _ P 0 � t S o � ur-i��cr-�c� ��vtuuv��t-�tNC� SERVICES 11\iCQRPORATED • Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. B-4 ProjP�t Glean+vater RO Plant #1, Glear�a#er, F!orida Location See Plate I Foreman J,R. Completion Depth To Depth 76.4' Date 8123/12 Water 3.3' Time Date 8/23/12 F.- � z � H STANDARD "- '� W O a- � PENETRATION TEST = m a SOIL DESCRIPTION u� w Z BL�WS/FT. oN 2° o.p. a � � � -� n�. SAMPLER-140 LB. � �� m g O HAMMER, 30" DROP <t (AUTOMATIC HAMMER) SURF. EL: +7p,p+i-� tNavn} �� 10 20 40 60 BO 0 b:.:= : Dark gray Fine SAND with roots and trace ��=° of shell and limestone fra ments SP Gray and brown Fine SAND with trace of limes#one fra ments St' Gra Fine SAND with sheli SP � Gra Fine SAND SP " Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND with trace ��=�� of finely divided organic material (SP) i�; :� �:: 4!6!9 :� Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND (SP} ��1Q 10 �:;� � r�, Dense to ve dense dark brown Fine SAND ��2 :: with trace of finely divided organic material =::::"-- (SP) �.:: ; 24/36/46 c +i Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND {SP) 15 7i10/12 Dense brown to dark brown Fine SAND {SP) 20 9/'17131 25 " 13/20/28 30 18/27J21 Medium dense #o dense brov�r► {i) Remarks Barehole Grouted (1) to greenish-hrown clayey �ne SAND (SC) Gasing L+�ng#h 20.0' • • • � � DRIGGERS ENGIRIEERING SERVICE� INCC�RPDRATE=D • e � • : � ! � : � � �• ' ' � �� • • " � - f � � • • � - � � ! � t � � � , i � . + , I ! � � • s � i � • ' �� ` � � r � • . �� o M ��s- . ,� � . � . . - 1 1 � i ' 1 1 �f .t ;f �� - . � - - . . - - . . ��//�� 11 .. -- . . . - . . . • , ��r�� i �� ■�� ■��■�� _�� ii � �� .,� �� 1 , �� , � � ��►� �� ;i� . .. -- - - -, ��1.11 �. '�i;;�i;; ��■�1 �1 .-:-. ,�� , - . ■��i It o��r uu�i • � ' • � _ .■.,, �' � i �i � - � i� � _�.■., �' a�i�a -�au�i __.■., �' �■ ■.,, �� u�i �r�� r��i ' ��s� � ' � ' ' ( •�ia�� . � ■.,' '/f _ �,• � '. __.■.,' ,�f �� i��i -;��'��'� . � • . � � __.■.,' '� ��1��'��' __.■.,' !� ;�O�jl�; .. ��1;11 � �,l��f;� ��1 11 � II��I!�� 1 111 . � .,.-- ��1 li � ��■�III�1 � � � . ' , �- - . . iii�ii► �■■ �� i�■�� ri � �� ii � , � � � �� ill �� 1►11 �T'.Z'L� ��i ■�■ :• - • - • -• � - . 1 ! DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERViCES INC�RPORATED- Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. B-4 Praject Clearwater RO Ptant #1, Clearwaie�, F(�rida Location See Piate I Foreman J.R. Gompletion De th Ta Depth 76.4' Qate 8l23l92 Water 3.3' Time Date 8/23t92 � � N Z W � STANQARD w O Q� PENETRATION TEST = m a SO1L DESCRIPTION v� � Z BLOWS/FT. ON Z" o.fl. a �� a SAMPLER-14D LB. p N y m� Q HAMMER, 30" DROP Q {AUTOMATIC HAMMER} SURF. EL: +70.0+l-' (nav�) �� 10 20 40 60 80 Hard green cemented CLAY (CL) 70 50` " 0.4' Penetration -- Very dense green cEayey Fine SAND (SC) 75 16/25l50' * 0.4' Penetration 84 85 90 95 100 Remarks Barehole Grouted Casing Length 20.0` LJ • • • � • DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATI-D Project No. DES 116718 BORING N�. PB-$ Project Clearwater RO Plant #1 Cieann�ater, Florida Location See Plate l Foreman M.J. Completion Depth To Depth 75.8' Date 5/20/11 Water 5.7' Time Date 5/24/1 � � Z w � STAAIDARD "- '' w o a� PENETRATION TEST F in a SOIL DESCRIPTION � w� sLOwSlFT. ON 2" O.D. � � O a °' SAMPLER-140 LB. o �� Q p HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: +70.0+/_` (NAdD} �� 90 20 �10 60 80 � b°' U ht brown Fine SAND with rock fra ments SP Li ht ra Fine SAND SP Very light gray Fine SAND (SP} 5 Light brown Fine SAND (SP) Medium dense dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 5I5i6 �a .�� "` Medium dense dark brown Fine SAtVD `" :`" 5/8/13 'J L L i• ��r :� with finety divided organic material (SP) ='j `'" 7/'11t12 Y�•� u.� .1 /•. �w'. Loose brown Fine SAAlD (SP) � 15 4/4/5 Medium dense to dense brown and dark brown to dark brown Fine SAND (SP) 20 7l10194 25 14/7 7l24 Dense brown Fine SAND (SP) 30 10/15/17 Very loose brown clayey Fine SAND (SC} Remarks WH = Weight af Hammer WR = Weighi of Rod Casing Length 21.0' DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED_ . ,. , � . .�. � , , . . . . . - • , ._ . . �. . � . �•� . �•� : �. • 1 �. • � � + � ��-� i • f i � � ' " . i • ! � . • 1 � i �� 1 � � � � � ' � i { 'i �� a� "�''�''',o'' 1 - .. - . . - , . �/��111 �'� � ��IIII �� ■■ 1111 � �� 1111 � �� 11 t � . � � ��II�1 � �� ,�� IIII ��\��■ � �IIII �� ,p. ,, ��IIII �_l�� - , , . . � �` ��1111 ,��, _ ��1111 � i'l��IIII ��0�� IIII ��f�i�� IIII � jl��l�� . . . . . - - - =��►\��Ilil �� ;l��jl��; ��IIII ;�I� �I�; . � . �,�� 1 ��1111 �;t��if��! �r��/�1111 ��Il �1111 ��iD�jl��, . , , - - ��%�Il�i �'D�fI�� /��III! �I� �I� -�� : ��!l��IIII �;D�iO�' ��►1��1111 ��/��1111 ��// - . - - . - ��I/��lill . , ��I��111! � • ��illl � � �� ■�� ■�■�� .� �■�� 1 .. , ��i ■�%/ ��►e��ti i i?`.Z'L� --..�„"! � i� j -. o -• e' e s � . ! � � � u • • r � �� C_�': DRIGGER� ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATE=D Project No. DES 116718 BORING NO. PB-$ Project Clearwater RO Plant #1, Glearv�ater, Ftorida Location See Plate ! Foreman M.J. � Compietion Depth To Depth 75.8' Qate 5/20/11 Water 5.7' Time Date 5/20/11 t- N Z w F STAIVDARD "" p W a a N PENETRATION TEST a�� SOIL DESCRIPTIQN � J Q B�OWS/FT. oN Z" O.a. w �" a p a� SAMPLER-140 LB. � �'� � Q p HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: +70.0+/-� (NAVD} �� 10 20 40 60 �30 Hard green cemented CLAY (CL.} 70 25/37/50" " 0.5' Penetratio 7$ 5/50' * 0.3' Penetratian $0 85 90 95 100 Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer WR = Weiqht of Rod. Gasing Length 21.0' — • • r� L J �II,ATOMETER 1'�ST RESiTLTS C3rig+g�r� Er�g'rneer'rr�g S�rvic�s lriearporated • • S1 S3 S4 S3 S4 i 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 -- 40 :.� w � 45 g. a� a 50 �5 G0 65 70 75 80 85 90 C1��Y (�F GLEAId1NAT�� R.E3. PE_�NT :� S�'T E�fov✓ Gc�ut�t�BP� C�iE�t+o��3�ter i�ladulu�-TS4= 1 G 1 Gl) 'i �Cs�� 1 i D 10�J 1��{1 Soil f'rofile �ege�id S1= FinE to Slighiky Sil#y Fine Sand S2= Silty F�ne Sand S3= Ciaye)+ Firre Sand • S4= Gi�y SPi and dilatometer Test Legend "Depth a! whicl� ihe Dilaton�eter TESi reaclied reft�sal S1 S3 S2 S4 1 t) J 1Q 15 20 25 3Q 35 .-- 40 � .,_,. � 45 s3. ar � 50 55 6fl 65 �a r5 80 85 90 ��t1 Y uf= t;LEA6�I�JATi=�t f2.�. �'l_Ak�l� �:i �PT 6lovr Cc��tr�t-C3f�f= Liitatc�rr�et�r �itrt�e�lu�-TS� iG iC�;i 1Q"l?t) i 10 3C's 1Q(1� 1QD0�.} _ _. _ � - - Soif Presfile Legend S'f = l=ir�e #o Slightly Siity Fine �ar�d �2= Silty Fine Sand S3= Glay�y Fine Sand S4= Giay * --+►—Ditatometer Test DMT-B3 --: , _.,F , f � _ — SPT ar�d i3itatomefer Test Legend 'De�ili af whieh the Dilatometer Tesi reached rEf�isai • . r� � • � S1 S3 S4 .� 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 -- 40 �.: w ..r � 45 � a� d �Q 55 60 65 70 75 8� 85 9Q CfT1' t=1f= CLEAf��ATL=R Et.Li. 4'Lta;t�T r 1 Sf�7 Blov� L`c�tt��t--EPF Q[t�:�+rtrter hFCault�s--T�F 2{} 1iJ(� 1f1�CJ 1 't0 1C�tt �c�i! Frofi[e Legend S1= Fine io 5lighily Silty Fine �and S2= Silty Fine Sand S3= Glayey �i�� Sand • S4= CEay i U(.�f} SPT and Dilato�eter Test Legend `Depth at which ihe D'+lato�n�ter Test r�achEd refus�l '"Weiqli[ of Hammer � • SiJM1VIARY UF LABORATORY T�S3` RESULTS � C}rigc�ers Engineerin� �:rvace� �nco+�pc�r�tect • • � SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS ATTERBERG ga�� DEPTH DESCRIPTION µ' °/ �' a G, WMfTS p.P. U,C. CON. G.S. ORG, pFI CI. SO 4 RES. NQ• (ft) �P�n {tsn ( % ) (ppm) (ppm) (ohm-cm) LL PL SL B•l 8:0-9.5 Dark brown Fine SAND •• p,7 with trace offinely divided organic matcrial I.9 B-1 33,0-36.5 $rawm ciayey Fine SAND 37,3 44 23 +� 37.1 $-Z 34.5 Srown clay�y Fiae SAND 30.5 91.2 2.G8 33 l7 0.75 • •' 28.7 B2 35.Qd6.5 Btown elayey Fiao SAND 32.6 35 19 �• 3 5.0 8-2 37.2 Bmwn clayeyFine SAND 32J 89.6 2.68 35 19 OJS • •• 33.0 $•2 40.0 Crreenish-6mwn clayey Fina SAITD 34.5 A3 19 0,40 •• 3 $.d 8-2 40,0-41.3 Greenish-brownclayoyFineSANb 65.2 66 27 �• 38.9 B�3 t0.4-11.5 Dark brmw Furo SAND ^ 0,7 with trace of fSnely divided organic material 2.1 B�3' t2.0-13.5 Dark brown Fine SAND �`+ 0.9 with traca of 5nely divided organia meteriel 2.1 B-3 35,0.36.5 Brown clayeyFine SAND 3d.5 49 18 •• 4QJ W �/o � �' a iP�'� ° Gg LL = PL � SL � A"11'A.SC _ r.r. �ma� — U.C'. _ Water Conient pry Density Spocifie Gravity Liquid LimiT Plastic Limit 5hrinkaga Limit C {tiR01 !LIlGLI� V I�IV LGi llnconfinu! Comptsssion Gon. G.S. (+1) ORG. (%) CI. {ppm) SO, (PPrta RES. (o6m-cm) t- rs = Consolidation Test = Grainsize Analysis (Hydrometer) = Qrganic Content = Totai Chloridt — Total Sutfate = LabResistiviry - VVY114J� VLIiv�YJ � Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve CLIENTt GAM Smith, tnc. PROJECT: Gleanvater RO Piant �!l Storage Tanks, Gleanvater, Ftorida �iL�L� WVV �iV•%�V u � U • CONSOLiDATION TEST RE�t7LTS Drag�ers Er�rg�ne�ring Serv�ces tncorporeted 0,8� �.� � � fl.7� y 0.7 o.s� • • � ; ! ; ° i , � , j I , ' j ' i � '� � � i i ; { ' i Boring' : B-2� I � i � � � � i i � ' Sample . { � i Depth � : 33- 5' ` I Materi 1: B n CI ye S�nd Speci c Gravi y ; .68 ! Initial est Ca ditio s � � __ c� _ I E ; Natur ! Wate % : 9. � � Dry U it Weig t: 1.2 cf' E li ( I I i j i I ; ; . _ , ____ __.._. ._ __ 1_;_ _._..._............ �. , _ I, � I � � �� if � ' I � '`� ? ; i ! � � ! i � � ; ; � : � ' ' I i -i— � �-- --;__ � ! � � € I � ' � � , � : j � , ; ' ; i ' , + i ; I ' i � � � � i ; l � ! I I I � � �! � ; ��. ; I i I i I i I� i i � 0.1 Stress (ksf) 10 Praject No : R/a Plant 116718 nr:-_s . n:a.. <s r�,.,.....,..a,.. lrllCl lt . Vlty VI I�ICOI WGIGI �oa 0.025 .... � V � G � 0.05 � � � 0.075 � D<'I 1 10 100 1000 10000 • • • 0 � c� oc � .o > Ce� 0.85 � 0.75 [��l 0.65 o.� � �o Project No : R/q Plant 116718 �no Stress (ks� �iieni : �iiy oi c;iearwaier 0.025 � c ::. � c � 0,05 a� � e� ... C 0.075 0.1 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 � � i CJ C� • METHOD QF TESTING i�riggers �r�t}in�;ering �ervices incoTporat� . STANDARD PENETRATION TEST WITH AUTOMATIC HAMMER AND SOIL CLASSIFICATIQN STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-1586� In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary driiling rig is used to advance the borehote to the desired test depth. A viscous dri2ling fluid is circuIaked khrough the drill rods and bit ta stabilize tt�e barehole and to assisi in rernoval of soil and rock cuttings vp and out of tbe borehole. Upon reaching the desired test depth, khe 2 inch O.D. split-barrel sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called, is attached ta an N-size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 144 pound automatic hammer, attached to the driJl string at the ground surface, is fhen used io drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using an automated lifting mechanism. The number of blows is reeorded for each 6 inch interval ofpen�tration or until virtual refusal is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are idea3ly advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance or "N" value of ihe particular material at the sample depth. • After penetration, the rads and samplerare retracted to the ground surface where the core sampie is remaued, sealed in a glass jar and transported to the taboratory for verification of fieid cIassiFcation and siorage: SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION Soil and rack samptes secured in the field sampling operation were visuatly cIassified as to texture, color and eonsistency. The Unified Soil Classification was assigned to each soilstratum perASTM D-24$7. Soil classifications are presented descriptively and symbolicaIly for ease of interpretation. The straturn ideniification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradual. Consisfency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration resistance values of"N" values and indus6y-accepted standards. "N" values, orbluwcounts, are presented in both tabular and graptaical form on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical plot of bTowcount versns depth is forillustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity in saii cvnsistency or linear variation between sampie intervais. The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring locations and sample intervals anly. Variations in subsurface conditions rnay occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths s}:own represent water depths at t%e dates and time shawn only. The absence of water Table information does not necessarily imply that groundwater was not encountered. • Rtv_ 9l2U11 � • • APPENDIX B AVAILABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents are not part of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and are available for review at CDM Smith's "i'ampa office location 1715 N. Westshore Blvd, Suite 875, Tampa, FL 33607 Tel (813) 281-2900: 1. City of Clearwater, Reservoir No. 1— Reverse Osmosis Water Plant, City Project #WF-032601, City Contract #00-0049-UT, Record Drawings, November 2003 2. City of Clearwater, Water Treatment Plant No. 1— Multi-Media Filter Improvements, City Project #06- 0051-UT, Record Drawings, June 2009 3. City of Clearwater, 1964 Water Project Phase 1 Reservoir # 1, The Gom Corporation, April 1965 4. City of Clearwater, Reservoir No. 1— Reverse Osmosis Water Plant, City Project #WF-032601, City Contract #00-0049-UT, RO Building Shop Drawing Submittal by McCarthy Engineering, November 2002 Appendix B.doc 10/2012 � • • APPENDIX C PERMITS 1. Southwest Florida Water Management District — Environmental Resource General Construction Permit — October OS, 2012 Appendix C.doc I o//2012 �T �`' � � T' � 2379 Broad Street, Brooksville, Florida 34604-6899 ,� � ��' �� ,; � : ._ " �, 1 � `� '� � � � `� � �' �� ` � � ' � `� �" " � � �� (352) 796-7211 or 1-800-423-1476 (FL only) �� ater Mana ement District ; � � SUNCOM 628-4150 TDD only 1-800-231-6103 (FL oNy) � `��, ' � Jh� On the Internet at: WaterMatters.org "�`�'"k; Mt%"'� Bartow Service Office Sarasota Service Office Tampa Service Office An Equai 170 Century Boulevard 7601 Highway 301 North 6750 FruiNille Road Opportunity Bartow, Florida 33830-7700 Sarasota, Florida 34240-9711 Tampa, Florida 33637-6759 Employer (863) 534-1448 or (941) 377-3722 or (813) 985-7481 or 1-800-492-7862 (FL only) t-800-320-3503 (FL only) 1-800-836-0797 (FL only) October 05, 2012 City of Clearwater Attn: Robert Fahey, P.E. 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Room 220 Clearwater, FL 33756 Subject: Notice of Final Agency Action for Approval ERP General Construction Project Name: City of Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion App ID/Permit No: 667364 / 44021876.004 County: PINELLAS Sec/Twp/Rge: S11fT29S/R15E Dear Permittee(s): This letter constitutes notice of Final Agency Action for approval of the permit referenced above_ Final approval is contingent upon no objection to the DistricYs action being received by the District within the time • frames described in the enclosed Notice of Rights. Approved construction plans are part of the permit, and construction must be in accordance with these plans. These drawings are available for viewing or downloading through the DistricY s Application and Permit Search Tools located at www.WaterMatters.org/permits. The District's action in this matter only becomes closed to future legal challenges from members of the public if such persons have been properly notified of the DistricYs action and no person objects to the DistricYs action within the prescribed period of time following the notification. The District does not publish notices of agency action. If you wish to limit the time within which a person who does not receive actual written notice from the District may request an administrative hearing regarding this action, you are strongly encouraged to publish, at your own expense, a notice of agency action in the legal advertisement section of a newspaper of general circulation in the county or counties where the activity will occur. Publishing notice of agency action will close the window for filing a petition for hearing. Legal requirements and instructions for publishing notice of agency action, as well as a noticing form that can be used is available from the DistricYs website at www.WaterMatters.org/permits/noticing. If you publish notice of agency action, a copy of the affidavit of publishing provided by the newspaper should be sent to the Regulation Division at the District Service Office that services this permit. • App ID/Permit No:667364 / 44021876.004 Page 2 October 05, 2012 If you have questions, please contact Richard Alt, at the Tampa Service Office, extension 2045. • Sincerely, Michelle K. Hopkins, P.E. Bureau Chief Environmental Resource Permit Bureau Regulation Division Enclosures: Approved Permit w/Conditions Attached Statement of Completion Notice of Authorization to Commence Construction Notice of Rights cc: Nick Charnas, P.E., CDM Smith • r � �_J • u • SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PERMIT NO. 44021876.004 EXPIRATION DATE: October 05, 2017 PERMIT ISSUE DATE: October 05, 2012 This permit is issued under the provisions of Chapter 373, Florida Statutes, (F.S.), and the Rules contained in Chapters 40D-4 and 40D-40, Florida Administrative Code, (F.A.C.). The permit authorizes the Permittee to proceed with the construction of a surface water management system in accordance with the information outlined herein and shown by the application, approved drawings, plans, specifications, and other documents, attached hereto and kept on file at the Southwest Florida Water Management District (District). Unless otherwise stated by permit specific condition, permit issuance constitutes certification of compliance with state water quality standards under Section 401 of the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. 1341. All construction, operation and maintenance of the surface water management system authorized by this permit shall occur in compliance with Florida Statutes and Administrative Code and the conditions of this permit. PROJECT NAME: City of Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion GRANTED TO: City of Clearwater Attn: Robert Fahey, P.E. 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Room 220 Clearwater, FL 33756 OTHER PERMITTEES: N/A ABSTRACT: This permit authorization is for the construction of a new surface water management system serving a municipal water treatment plant. The proposed project is for the removal of an existing water storage tank, the construction of two new storage tanks, the construction of an access road along with other associated infrastructure and the enlargement of an existing unpermitted pond. The pond will provide water quality treatment by effluent filtration and attenuate a post development 25-year 24-hour storm event at the 25-year 24-hour pre development peak runoff rate. The proposed project area is located within the watershed of an impaired waterbody that is verified as impaired for nutrients and mercury (Stevenson Creek (Tidal Segment) — WBID #1567); therefore, water quality certification is waived as a condition of this permit. The Engineer-of-Record has demonstrated through calculations that the DistricYs presumptive criteria will govern for this project. No wetlands or other surface waters exist within the project area. The proposed project is located on the south side of Palmetto Street between Casler Avenue and North Saturn Avenue in the city of Clearwater, Florida. OP. & MAIN. ENTITY: OTHER OP. 8� MAIN. ENTITY: COUNTY: SEC/TWP/RGE: TOTAL ACRES OWNED OR UNDER CONTROL: PROJECT SIZE: LAND USE: DATE APPLICATION FILED: AMENDED DATE: City of Clearwater N/A PINELLAS S 11(T29S/R 15E 19.51 2.60 Acres Government August 22, 2012 N/A I. Water Quantity/Quality I. Water POND No. � Area Acres @ Top of Bank � Treatment Type Pond I 0.21 � EFFLUENT FILTRATION Total: 0.21 A mixing zone is not required. A variance is not required. It. 100-Year Floodplain Compensation Com ensation Encroachment p Encroachment (Acre-Feet of fill) (Acre-Feet of Type Result" (feet) excavation 0.00 0.00 No Encroachment N/A 'Depth of change in flood stage (level) over existing receiving water stage resulting from floodplain encroachment caused by a project that claims Minimal Impact type of compensation. III. Environmental Considerations No wetlands or other surface waters exist within the project area. • r1 �' u • �ecific Conditions 1. If the ownership of the project area covered by the subject permit is divided, with someone other than the Permittee becoming the owner of part of the project area, this permit shall terminate, pursuant to Rule 40D-1.6105, F.A.C. In such situations, each land owner shall obtain a permit (which may be a modification of this permit) for the land owned by that person. This condition shall not apply to the division and sale of lots or units in residential subdivisions or condominiums. 2. Unless specified otherwise herein, two copies of all information and reports required by this permit shall be submitted to the Regulation Department at the District Service Office that services this permit . The permit number, title of report or information and event (for recurring report or information submittal) shall be identified on all information and reports submitted. 3. The Permittee shall retain the design engineer, or other professional engineer registered in Florida, to conduct on-site observations of construction and assist with the as-built certification requirements of this project. The Permittee shall inform the District in writing of the name, address and phone number of the professional engineer so employed. This information shall be submitted prior to construction. 4. Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the Permittee shall submit to the Regutation Department at the District Service Office that services this permit a written statement of completion and certification by a registered professional engineer or other appropriate individual as authorized by law, utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity form identified in Chapter 40D-1, F.A.C., and signed, dated, and sealed as-built drawings. The as-built drawings shall identify • any deviations from the approved construction drawings. 5. The District reserves the right, upon prior notice to the Permittee, to conduct on-site research to assess the pollutant removal efficiency of the surface water management system . The Permittee may be required to cooperate in this regard by allowing on-site access by District representatives, by allowing the installation and operation of testing and monitoring equipment, and by allowing other assistance measures as needed on site. 6. The operation and maintenance entity shall submit inspection reports in the form required by the District, in accordance with the following schedule. For systems utilizing effluent filtration or e�ltration or systems utilizing effluent filtration or exfiltration and retention or wet detention, the inspections shall be pertormed 18 months after operation is authorized and every 18 months thereafter. 7_ Prior to installation of the filter media, the Permittee's contractor shall submit a certified test of the media to the Permittee's Professional Engineer and the District. The test shall address the following parameters: uniformity coe�cient, effective grain size, sieve analysis, percent silts, clays and organic matter, and permeability testing (constant head). If testing indicates the actual permeability rate is less than the value specified in the permitted design, a permit modification will be required to lengthen the effluent filtration system . The Permittee shall also notify the District Service Office that services this permit, at least 48 hours prior to commencement of construction of the effluent filtration system, so that District staff may observe this construction activity. E:� � For dry bottom detention systems, the detention area(s) shall become dry within 36 hours after a rainfall event. If a detention area is regularly wet, this situation shall be deemed to be a violation of this permit. Certification of compliance with state water quality standards under Section 401 of the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. 1341 is waived. 10. If limestone bedrock is encountered during construction of the surface water management system, the District • must be notified and construction in the affected area shall cease. 11. The Permittee shall notify the District of any sinkhole development in the surface water management system within 48 hours of discovery and must submit a detailed sinkhole evaluation and repair plan for approval by the District within 30 days of discovery. 12. The District, upon prior notice to the Permittee, may conduct on-site inspections to assess the effectiveness of the erosion control barriers and other measures employed to prevent violations of state water quality standards and avoid downstream impacts. Such barriers or other measures should control discharges, erosion, and sediment transport during construction and thereafter. The District will also determine any potential environmental problems that may develop as a result of leaving or removing the barriers and other measures during construction or after construction of the project has been completed. The Permittee must provide any remedial measures that are needed. 13. This permit is issued based upon the design prepared by the Permittee's consultant. If at any time it is determined by the District that the Conditions for Issuance of Permits in Rules 40D-4.301 and 40D-4.302, F.A.C., have not been met, upon written notice by the District, the Permittee shall obtain a permit modification and perform any construction necessary thereunder to correct any deficiencies in the system design or construction to meet District rule criteria. The Permittee is advised that the correction of deficiencies may require re-construction of the surface water management system. 14. The Permitted Plan Set for this project includes the set received by the District on August 22, 2012. GENERAL CONDITIONS • 1. The general conditions attached hereto as Exhibit "A" are hereby incorporated into this permit by reference and the Permittee shall comply with them. Michelle K. Hopkins, P.E. Authorized Signature • �IBIT A GENERAL CONDITIONS: All activities shall be implemented as set forth in the plans, specifications and performance criteria as approved by this permit. Any deviation from the permitted activity and the conditions for undertaking that activity shall constitute a violation of this permit. This permit or a copy thereof, complete with all conditions, attachments, exhibits, and modifications, shall be kept at the work site of the permitted activity. The complete permit shall be available for review at the work site upon request by District staff. The permittee shall require the contractor to review the complete permit prior to commencement of the activity authorized by this permit. 3. For general permits authorizing incidental site activities, the following limiting general conditions shall also apply: a. If the decision to issue the associated individual permit is not final within 90 days of issuance of the incidental site activities permit, the site must be restored by the permittee within 90 days after notification by the District. Restoration must be completed by re-contouring the disturbed site to previous grades and slapes re-establishing and maintaining suitable vegetation and erosion control to provide stabilized hydraulic conditions. The period for completing restoration may be extended if requested by the permittee and determined by the District to be warranted due to adverse weather conditions or other good cause. In addition, the permittee shall institute stabilization measures for erosion and sediment control as soon as practicable, but in no case more than 7 days after notification by the District. b. The incidental site activities are commenced at the permittee's own risk. The Governing Board will not • consider the monetary costs associated with the incidental site activities or any potential restoration costs in making its decision to approve or deny the individual environmental resource permit application. Issuance of this permit shall not in any way be construed as commitment to issue the associated individual environmental resource permit. 4. Activities approved by this permit shall be conducted in a manner which does not cause violations of state water quality standards. The permittee shall implement best management practices for erosion and a pollution control to prevent violation of state water quality standards_ Temporary erosion control shall be implemented prior to and during construction, and permanent control measures shall be completed within 7 days of any construction activity. Turbidity barriers shall be installed and maintained at all locations where the possibility of transferring suspended solids into the receiving waterbody exists due to the permitted work. Turbidity barriers shall remain in place at all locations until construction is completed and soils are stabilized and vegetation has been established. Thereafter the permittee shall be responsible for the removal of the barriers. The permittee shall correct any erosion or shoaling that causes adverse impacts to the water resources. 5. Water quality data for the water discharged from the permittee's property or into the surtace waters of the state shall be submitted to the District as required by the permit. Analyses shall be performed according to procedures outlined in the current edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater by the American Public Health Association or Methods for Chemical Analyses of Water and Wastes by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. If water quality data are required, the permitiee shalt provide data as required on volumes of water discharged, including total volume discharged during the days of sampling and total monthly volume dis-charged from the property or into surface waters of the state. 6. District staff must be notified in advance of any proposed construction dewatering . If the dewatering activity is likely to result in offsite discharge or sediment transport into wetlands or surface waters , a written dewatering • plan must either have been submitted and approved with the permit application or submitted to the District as a permit prior to the dewatering event as a permit modification. A water use permit may be required prior to any use exceeding the thresholds in Chapter 40D-2, F.A.C. 7. Stabilization measures shall be initiated for erosion and sediment control on disturbed areas as soon as practicable in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased, but in • no case more than 7 days after the construction activity in that portion of the site has temporarily or permanently ceased. 8. Off-site discharges during construction and development shall be made only through the facilities authorized by this permit. Water discharged from the project shall be through structures having a mechanism suitable for regulating upstream stages. Stages may be subject to operating schedules satisfactory to the District. 9. The permittee shall complete construction of all aspects of the surface water management system, including wetland compensation (grading, mulching, planting), water quality treatment features, and discharge control facilities prior to beneficial occupancy or use of the development being served by this system. 10. The following shall be properly abandoned and/or removed in accordance with the applicable regulations: Any existing wells in the path of construction shall be properly plugged and abandoned by a licensed well contractor. b. Any existing septic tanks on site shall be abandoned at the beginning of construction. c. Any existing fuel storage tanks and fuel pumps shall be removed at the beginning of construction. 11. All surface water management systems shall be operated to conserve water in order to maintain environmental quality and resource protection; to increase the efficiency of transport, application and use; to decrease waste; to minimize unnatural runoff from the property and to minimize dewatering of offsite property . 12. At least 48 hours prior to commencement of activity authorized by this permit, the permittee shall submit to the District a written notification of commencement indicating the actual start date and the expected completion • date. 13. Each phase or independent portion of the permitted system must be completed in accordance with the permitted plans and permit conditions prior to the occupation of the site or operation of site infrastructure located within the area served by that portion or phase of the system. Each phase or independent portion of the system must be completed in accordance with the permitted plans and permit conditions prior to transfer of responsibility for operation and maintenance of that phase or portion of the system to a local government or other responsible entity. 14. Within 30 days after completion of construction of the permitted activity, the permittee shall submit a written statement of completion and certification by a registered professional engineer or other appropriate individual as authorized by law, utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity form identified in Chapter 40D-1, F.A.C. Additionally, if deviation from the approved drawings are discovered during the certification process the certification must be accompanied by a copy of the approved permit drawings with deviations noted. 15. This permit is valid only for the specific processes, operations and designs indicated on the approved drawings or exhibits submitted in support of the permit application. Any substantial deviation from the approved drawings, exhibits, specifications or permit conditions, including construction within the total land area but outside the approved project area(s), may constitute grounds for revocation or enforcement action by the District, unless a modification has been applied for and approved. Examples of substantial deviations include excavation of ponds, ditches or sump areas deeper than shown on the approved plans. 16. The operation phase of this permit shall not become effective until the permittee has complied with the requirements of the conditions herein, the District determines the system to be in compliance with the permitted plans, and the entity approved by the District accepts responsibility for operation and maintenance of • the system. The permit may not be transferred to the operation and maintenance entity approved by the District until the operation phase of the permit becomes effective. Following inspection and approval of the • permitted system by the District, the permittee shall request transfer of the permit to the responsible operation and maintenance entity approved by the District, if different from the permittee. Until a transfer is approved by the District, the permittee shall be liable for compliance with the terms of the permit. 17. Should any other regulatory agency require changes to the permitted system, the District shall be notified of the changes prior to implementation so that a determination can be made whether a permit modification is required. 18. This permit does not eliminate the necessity to obtain any required federal, state, local and special District authorizations including a determination of the proposed activities' compliance with the applicable comprehensive plan prior to the start of any activity approved by this permit. 19. This permit does not convey to the permittee or create in the permittee any property right, or any interest in real property, nor does it authorize any entrance upon or activities on property which is not owned or controlled by the permittee, or convey any rights or privileges other than those specified in the permit and Chapter 40D-4 or Chapter 40D-40, F.A.C. 20. The permittee shall hold and save the District harmless from any and all damages, claims, or liabilities which may arise by reason of the activities authorized by the permit or any use of the permitted system. 21. Any delineation of the extent of a wetland or other surface water submitted as part of the permit application, including plans or other supporting documentation, shall not be considered binding unless a specific condition of this permit or a formal determination under section 373.421(2), F.S., provides otherwise. 22. The permittee shall notify the District in writing within 30 days of any sale, conveyance, or other transfer of ownership or control of the permitted system or the real property at which the permitted system is located. All transfers of ownership or transfers of a permit are subject to the requirements of Rule 40D-4.351, F.A.C. The • permittee transferring the permit shall remain liable for any corrective actions that may be required as a result of any permit violations prior to such sale, conveyance or other transfer. 23. Upon reasonable notice to the permittee, District authorized staff with proper identification shall have permission to enter, inspect, sample and test the system to insure conformity with District rules, regulations and conditions of the permits. 24. If historical or archaeological artifacts are discovered at any time on the project site, the permittee shall immediately notify the District and the Florida Department of State, Division of Historical Resources. 25. The permittee shall immediately notify the District in writing of any previously submitted information that is later discovered to be inaccurate. • SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT NOTICE OF AUTHORIZATION TO COMMENCE CONSTRUCTION City of Clearwater Reverse Osmosis Plant No. 1 Expansion PROJECT NAME Government PROJECT TYPE PINELLAS COUNTY S 11 /T29S/R 15 E SEC(S)/TWP(S)/RGE(S) City of Clearwater PERMITTEE APPLICATION ID/PERMIT NO: 66�36alaa02�8�6.00a DATE ISSUED: October 05, 2012 ' T F ft'� � .;, o . �p 4y e�� `.-:: qy �'aC:FM� Michelle K. Hopkins, P.E. Issuing Authority THIS NOTICE SHOULD BE CONSPICUOUSLY DISPLAYED AT THE SITE OF THE WORK �: � • � � Notice of Riqhts ADMINISTRATIVE HEARING You or any person whose substantial interests are or may be affected by the District's action may request an administrative hearing on that action by filing a written petition in accordance with Sections 120.569 and 120.57, Florida Statutes (F.S.), Uniform Rules of Procedure Chapter 28-106, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.) and District Rule 40D-1.1010, F.A.C. Unless otherwise provided by law, a petition for administrative hearing must be filed with (received by) the District within 21 days of receipt of written notice of agency action. "Written notice" means either actual written notice, or newspaper publication of notice, that the District has taken or intends to take agency action. "Receipt of written notice" is deemed to be the fifth day after the date on which actual notice is deposited in the United States mail, if notice is mailed to you, or the date that actual notice is issued, if sent to you by electronic mail or delivered to you, or the date that notice is published in a newspaper, for those persons to whom the District does not provide actual notice. 2. Pursuant to Subsection 373.427(2)(c), F.S., for notices of agency action on a consolidated application for an environmental resource permit and use of sovereignty submerged lands concurrently reviewed by the District, a petition for administrative hearing must be filed with (received by) the District within 14 days of receipt of written notice. 3. Pursuant to Rule 62-532.430, F.A.C., for notices of intent to deny a well construction permit, a petition for administrative hearing must be filed with (received by) the District within 30 days of receipt of written notice of intent to deny. � Any person who receives written notice of an agency decision and who fails to file a written request for a hearing within 21 days of receipt or other period as required by law waives the right to request a hearing on such matters. Mediation pursuant to Section 120.573, F.S., to settle an administrative dispute regarding District action is not available prior to the filing of a petition for hearing. 6. A request or petition for administrative hearing must comply with the requirements set forth in Chapter 28.106, F.A.C. A request or petition for a hearing must: (1) explain how the substantial interests of each person requesting the hearing will be affected by the District's action or proposed action, (2) state all material facts disputed by the person requesting the hearing or state that there are no material facts in dispute, and (3) otherwise comply with Rules 28-106.201 and 28-106.301, F.A.C. Chapter 28-106, F.A.C. can be viewed at www.flrules.org or at the DistricYs website at www. WaterMatters.org/permits/rules. 7. A petition for administrative hearing is deemed filed upon receipt of the complete petition by the District Agency Clerk at the DistricYs Tampa Service O�ce during normal business hours, which are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding District holidays. Filings with the District Agency Clerk may be made by mail, hand-delivery or facsimile transfer (fax). The District does not accept petitions for administrative hearing by electronic mail. Mailed filings must be addressed to, and hand-delivered filings must be delivered to, the Agency Clerk, Southwest Florida Water Management District, 7601 US Hwy. 301, Tampa, FL 33637-6759. Faxed filings must be transmitted to the District Agency Clerk at (813) 987-6746. Any petition not received during normal business hours shall be filed as of 8:00 a.m. on the next business day. The DistricYs acceptance of faxed petitions for filing is subject to certain conditions set forth in the DistricYs Statement ofAgency Organization and Operation, available for viewing at www. WaterMatters.org/about. • JUDICIAL REVIEW Pursuant to Sections 120.60(3) and 120.68, F.S., a party who is adversely affected by final District action may • seek judicial review of the DistricYs final action. Judicial review shall be sought in the Fifth District Court of Appeal or in the appellate district where a party resides or as otherwise provided by law. 2. All proceedings shall be instituted by filing an original notice of appeal with the District Agency clerk within 30 days after the rendition of the order being appealed, and a copy of the notice of appeal, accompanied by any filing fees prescribed by law, with the clerk of the court, in accordance with Rules 9.110 and 9.190 of the Florida Rules of Appellate Procedure (Fla. R. App. P.). Pursuant to Fla. R. App. P. 9.020(h), an order is rendered when a signed written order is filed with the clerk of the lower tribunal. C J • 10 u • • City of Clearwater Attn: Robert Fahey, P.E. 100 Sauth Myrtle Avenue, Room 220 Clearwater, FL 33756 11 Nick Charnas, P.E. • CDM Smith 1715 North Westshore Boulevard, Suite 875 Tampa, FL 33607 • u 12